AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Vinayapiṭake

Vinayapiṭaka

Pācityādiyojanā

Pācityādiyojanā

Pācittiyayojanā

Pācittiyayojanā

Mahākāruṇikaṃ nāthaṃ, abhinatvā samāsato;

Having respectfully bowed to the compassionate Lord, I will briefly compose an explanation for the Pācityādi.

5. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ

5. Pācittiyakaṇḍa

1. Musāvādasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Musāvādasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

Khuddakānanti sukhumāpattipakāsakattā appakānaṃ, gaṇanato vā pacurattā bahukānaṃ. Yesaṃ sikkhāpadānanti sambandho. ‘‘Yesa’’nti padaṃ ‘‘saṅgaho’’ti pade sāmyatthachaṭṭhī. Saṅgahīyatesaṅgaho. ‘‘Navahi vaggehī’’tipadaṃ ‘‘saṅgaho, suppatiṭṭhito’’ti padadvaye karaṇaṃ.Dānīti kālavācako sattamyantanipāto idāni-pariyāyo, imasmiṃ kāleti attho.Tesanti khuddakānaṃ, ayaṃ vaṇṇanāti sambandho.Bhavatīti ettha ti-saddo ekaṃsatthe anāgatakāliko hoti ‘‘nirayaṃ nūna gacchāmi, ettha me natthi saṃsayo’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.331) viya. Kiñcāpettha hi yathā ekaṃsavācako nūnasaddo atthi, na evaṃ ‘‘bhavatī’’ti pade, atthato pana ayaṃ vaṇṇanā nūna bhavissatīti attho gahetabbo. Atha vā avassambhāviyatthe anāgatakālavācako hoti ‘‘dhuvaṃ buddho bhavāmaha’’ntiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 2.109-114) viya. Kāmañhettha yathā avassambhāviyatthavācako dhuvasaddo atthi, na evaṃ ‘‘bhavatī’’ti pade, atthato pana dhuvaṃ bhavissati ayaṃ vaṇṇanāti attho gahetabboti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Khuddakāna: Because they reveal subtle offenses, they are few; or because they are numerous in counting, they are many. The connection is to "of which sikkhāpadas." The word "yesaṃ" in "saṅgaho" is the sixth case in the sense of sameness. Saṅgahīyate - saṅgaho. The word "navahi vaggehi" is instrumental to both "saṅgaho" and "suppatiṭṭhito." Dāni: is an indeclinable adverb of time, a synonym for idāni, meaning in this time. Tesa: of the khuddakas, the connection is to "ayaṃ vaṇṇanā". Bhavati: here, the word ti is in the sense of certainty and indicates the future tense, like in "nirayaṃ nūna gacchāmi, ettha me natthi saṃsayo" (jā. 2.22.331). Although there is a word nūna to indicate certainty, as in "bhavati," the meaning should be taken as "this explanation will certainly be." Or, it indicates the inevitable future, like in "dhuvaṃ buddho bhavāmaha" (bu. vaṃ. 2.109-114). Although there is a word dhuva to indicate inevitability, as in "bhavati," the meaning should be taken as "this explanation will certainly be."

1.‘‘Tatthā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘musāvādavaggassā’’ti pade niddhāraṇasamudāyo, tesu navasu vaggesūti attho. Paṭhamasikkhāpadeti vā, tesu khuddakesu sikkhāpadesūti attho.Sakyānaṃ puttoti bhaginīhi saṃvāsakaraṇato lokamariyādaṃ chindituṃ, jātisambhedato vā rakkhituṃ sakkuṇantītisakyā. Sākavanasaṇḍe nagaraṃ māpentīti vā sakyā, pubbarājāno. Tesaṃ vaṃse bhūtattā etarahipi rājāno sakyā nāma, tesaṃ puttoti attho. ‘‘Buddhakāle’’ti padaṃ ‘‘pabbajiṃsū’’ti pade ādhāro. Sakyakulato nikkhamitvāti sambandho.‘‘Vādakkhitto’’tyādinā vādena khitto, vādamhi vāti atthaṃ dasseti.Yatra yatrāti yassaṃ yassaṃ diṭṭhiyaṃ pavattatīti sambandho.Avajānitvāti paṭissavena viyogaṃ katvā. Avasaddo hi viyogatthavācako. ‘‘Apajānitvā’’tipi pāṭho, paṭiññātaṃ apanītaṃ katvāti attho.Dosanti ayuttidosaṃ, sallakkhento hutvāti sambandho.Kathento kathentoti antasaddo mānasaddakāriyo. Kathiyamāno kathiyamānoti hi attho.Paṭijānitvāti paṭiññātaṃ katvā.Ānisaṃsanti niddosaṃ guṇaṃ. Paṭipubbo carasaddo paṭicchādanatthoti āha ‘‘paṭicarati paṭicchādetī’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ pana rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti vutte ‘‘anicca’’nti vadati. Kasmāti vutte ‘‘jānitabbato’’ti vadati. Yadi evaṃ nibbānampi jānitabbattā aniccaṃ nāma siyāti vutte attano hetumhi dosaṃ disvā ahaṃ ‘‘jānitabbato’’ti hetuṃ na vadāmi, ‘‘jātidhammato’’ti pana vadāmi. Tayā pana dussutattā evaṃ vuttanti vatvā aññenaññaṃ paṭicarati. ‘‘Kurundiya’’nti padaṃ ‘‘vutta’’nti pade ādhāro.Etassāti ‘‘rūpaṃ aniccaṃ jānitabbato’’ti vacanassa.Tatrāti kurundiyaṃ.Tassāti paṭijānanāvajānanassa. ‘‘Paṭicchādanattha’’nti padaṃ ‘‘bhāsatī’’tipade sampadānaṃ. ‘‘Mahāaṭṭhakathāya’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘vutta’’nti pade ādhāro. ‘‘Divāṭṭhānādīsū’’ti padaṃ upanetabbaṃ. Idaṃ ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāmapadese’’ti pade niddhāraṇasamudāyo.

1."Tattha": the word is a determining aggregate in the words "musāvādavaggassa," meaning among those nine sections. Or, the first sikkhāpada means among those minor sikkhāpadas. Sakyānaṃ putto: Because they are able to prevent association with sisters or to protect against breaking worldly customs or mixing of castes, they are called sakyā. Or, because they built a city in the Sākavana grove, the former kings are called Sakyā. Because they were born in that lineage, even other kings are called Sakyā, meaning their son. The phrase "Buddhakāle" is the location in the phrase "pabbajiṃsu." The connection is "having left the Sakya clan." "Vādakkhitto": shows the meaning of being thrown by debate or being in a debate. "Yatra yatra": the connection is that it occurs in whatever view. Avajānitvā: having separated from the promise. The word ava indicates separation. "Apajānitvā" is also a reading, meaning having removed the promise. Dosa: the inappropriate fault, the connection is "being attentive." Kathento kathento: the word anta is a substitute for the word māna. It means being spoken. Paṭijānitvā: having made a promise. Ānisaṃsa: a faultless quality. Āha, "paṭicarati paṭicchādeti," because the word cara after paṭi means covering. When asked, "Is form permanent or impermanent?" he says, "Impermanent." When asked why, he says, "Because it should be known." If that is so, when it is said that even nibbāna should be known, it would be impermanent; seeing the fault in his own reason, he says, "I do not say the reason is 'because it should be known,' but I say 'because it is subject to arising.'" He covers up one thing with another, saying that it was said because you are poorly learned. The phrase "Kurundiyaṃ" is the location in the phrase "vutta." Etassa: of the statement "rūpaṃ aniccaṃ jānitabbato." Tatra: in the Kurundiya. Tassa: of promising and not knowing. The phrase "paṭicchādanattha" is the recipient in the phrase "bhāsati." The phrase "Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ" is the location in the phrase "vutta." The phrase "Divāṭṭhānādīsu" should be applied. This is a determining aggregate in the phrase "asukasmiṃ nāmapadese."

3.Sammā vadati anenātisaṃvādanaṃ,ujujātikacittaṃ, na saṃvādanaṃvisaṃvādanaṃ,vañcanādhippāyavasappavattaṃ cittanti dassento āha ‘‘visaṃvādanacitta’’nti. ‘‘Vācā’’tyādinā vacati etāyātivācāti atthaṃ dasseti.ti daḷhīkaraṇajotakaṃ, tadaminā saccanti attho. ‘‘Vācāyevā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘byappatho’’ti pade tulyatthaṃ, ‘‘vuccatī’’ti pade kammaṃ. Pathasaddaparattā vācāsaddassa byādeso kato. Suddhacetanā kathitāti sambandho.Taṃsamuṭṭhitasaddasahitāti tāya cetanāya samuṭṭhitena saddena saha pavattā cetanā kathitāti yojanā.

3.That by which one speaks correctly is saṃvādanaṃ, an upright state of mind; that which is not saṃvādanaṃ is visaṃvādanaṃ, a mind that proceeds based on deceitful intention. Showing this, he says "visaṃvādanacittaṃ." Showing the meaning of vācā as "that by which one speaks," he says, "Vācātyādinā vacati etāyāti vācā." Hi: is an indicator of firmness, meaning it is true. The phrase "vācāyeva" is synonymous with "byappatho" and the object in the phrase "vuccati." Because of the proximity to the word patha, the word vācā is expressed. The connection is that it is spoken with pure intention. Taṃsamuṭṭhitasaddasahitā: the connection is that the intention arises together with the sound that arises from that intention.

Anteti ‘‘vācā’’tiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ padānaṃ avasāne.‘‘Āhā’’ti ettha vattamāna-tivacanassa akāro paccuppannakālavācakena ‘‘idānī’’ti padena yojitattā. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘attho veditabbo’’ti pade ādhāro.Etthāti ‘‘adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me’’tiādīsu. ‘‘Pāḷiya’’nti padaṃ ‘‘desanā katā’’ti pade ādhāro. Nissitaviññāṇavasena avatvā nissayapasādavasena ‘‘cakkhunā diṭṭha’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘oḷārikenevā’’ti.

Ante: at the end of the five words "vācā" etc. "Āha": here, the a of the present tense is connected with the present tense word "idāni." "Tattha": the word is the location in the phrase "attho veditabbo." Ettha: in "adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me" etc. The phrase "Pāḷiyaṃ" is the location in the phrase "desanā katā." He says, "oḷārikeneva," meaning "with the gross," because it was said "cakkhunā diṭṭha" based on the dependent sense base rather than based on the dependent consciousness base.

4.Tassāti ‘‘tīhākārehī’’tiādivacanassa. ‘‘Attho’’ti padaṃ ‘‘veditabbo’’ti pade kammaṃ.ti visesajotakaṃ, visesaṃ kathayissāmīti attho.Tatthāti catutthapārājike.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.

4.Tassa: of the saying "tīhākārehi" etc. The word "attho" is the object in the phrase "veditabbo." Hi: is an indicator of specification, meaning I will tell the specification. Tattha: in the fourth pārājika. Idha: in this sikkhāpada.

9.Ādīnampīti pisaddo sampiṇḍanattho.

9.Ādīnampī: the word pi is in the sense of collecting together.

11.Mandasaddo jaḷatthavācakoti āha ‘‘mandattā jaḷattā’’ti. Yo pana aññaṃ bhaṇatīti sambandho. ‘‘Sāmaṇerenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘vutto’’ti pade kattā. Apisaddo pucchāvācako, ‘‘passitthā’’ti padena yojetabbo, api passitthāti attho. ‘‘Adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me’’tiādivacanato aññā pūraṇakathāpi tāva atthīti dassento āha ‘‘aññā pūraṇakathā nāma hotī’’ti. Appatāya ūnassa atthassa pūraṇavasena pavattā kathāpūraṇakathā. Esā pūraṇakathā nāma kāti āha ‘‘eko’’tiādi. Esā hi gāme appakampi telaṃ vā pūvakhaṇḍaṃ vā passitvā vā labhitvā vā bahukaṃ katvā pūraṇavasena kathitattā pūraṇakathā nāma. Bahukāni telāni vā pūve vā passantopi labhantopi appakaṃ katvā ūnavasena kathitattā ūnakathāpi atthīti sakkā vattuṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana avuttattā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Bahukāya pūraṇassa atthassa ūnavasena pavattā kathāūnakathāti viggaho kātabboti. Paṭhamaṃ.

11.The word manda means dull, so he says "mandattā jaḷattā." The connection is "yo pana aññaṃ bhaṇati." The phrase "Sāmaṇerenā" is the agent in the phrase "vutto." The word api is interrogative, it should be connected with the word "passittha," meaning "did you see?" Showing that there is another completing story other than the statement "adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me" etc., he says "aññā pūraṇakathā nāma hoti." The story that proceeds in the sense of completing an incomplete meaning is pūraṇakathā. What is this completing story? He says "eko" etc. This is called a completing story because, in the village, having seen or obtained even a small amount of oil or a piece of cake, he speaks in a completing way having made it much. It is possible to say that there is also an ūnakathā, because even seeing or obtaining much oil or cake, he speaks in a deficient way having made it little. However, because it is not said in the commentaries, it should be examined and taken. The story that proceeds in the sense of deficiency of a large completing meaning is ūnakathā: the analysis should be done. The first.

2. Omasavāda sikkhāpadaṃ
2. Omasavāda sikkhāpadaṃ

12.Dutiye masadhātu vijjhanatthe pavattati ‘‘omaṭṭhaṃ ummaṭṭha’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.21) viyāti dassento āha ‘‘omasantīti ovijjhantī’’ti.

12.Showing that the second verb root masa occurs in the sense of piercing, like in "omaṭṭhaṃ ummaṭṭhaṃ" (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.21), he says "omasantīti ovijjhanti."

13.‘‘Idaṃ vatthu’’nti padaṃ ‘‘āharī’’ti pade kammaṃ. Nanditabbotinandovaṇṇabalādi, so etassatthīti nandī. Visālāni mahantāni visāṇāni etassatthītivisālo,nandī ca so visālo cetinandivisāloti vacanatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘nandivisālo nāmā’’tiādinā.Soti nandivisālo, ‘‘āhā’’ti pade kattā.Tatthevāti yuñjitaṭṭhāneyeva.Ahetukapaṭisandhikālepīti pi-saddo anuggahatthavācako, pageva dvihetuka tihetuka paṭisandhikāleti attho. ‘‘Tena cā’’ti cakārassa avuttasampiṇḍanatthattā ‘‘attano kammena cā’’ti atthaṃ sampiṇḍetīti āha ‘‘attano kammena cā’’ti.Attanoti nandivisālassa.

13.The phrase "idaṃ vatthu" is the object in the phrase "āharī." Nanditabboti nando, charm, strength, etc.; he possesses that, therefore nandī. Visālāni mahantāni visāṇāni etassatthīti visālo, wide, large horns; he has that, therefore visālo, and nandī and that visālo is nandivisālo. He shows the meaning with "nandivisālo nāmā" etc. So: that Nandivisāla, the agent in the phrase "āha." Tattheva: in that very place where he was yoked. Ahetukapaṭisandhikālepī: the word pi is in the sense of favor, meaning even before the two-hetuka or three-hetuka rebirth-linking moment. Because the ca in "tena cā" collects what was not said, it collects the meaning "attano kammena ca," so he says "attano kammena ca." Attano: of Nandivisāla.

15.Etthāti etissaṃ padabhājaniyaṃ, ‘‘āhā’’ti pade ādhāro. ‘‘Yasmā’’ti padaṃ vibhajitukāmo’’ti pade hetu. Aṭṭhuppattiyaṃyeva ‘‘hīnenāpī’’ti vatvā padabhājaniyaṃ avuttattā idaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Veṇukārajātīti vilīvakārajāti.Nesādajātīti ettha kevaṭṭajātipi saṅgahitā.

15.Ettha: in this division of words, the location in the phrase "āha." Yasmā: the word is the reason in "vibhajitukāmo." It should be seen that this was said because, although "hīnenāpī" was said only in the origin of the rule, the division of words was not said. Veṇukārajātī: potter caste. Nesādajātī: here, the fisherman caste is also included.

pukkuso. Pupphaṃ vuccati karīsaṃ, kusumaṃ vā, taṃ chaḍḍetītipupphachaḍḍako.

pukkuso. Pupphaṃ vuccati karīsaṃ, kusumaṃ vā, taṃ chaḍḍetīti pupphachaḍḍako.

koṭṭho,soyevakoṭṭhako. Yakārabhakāre ekato yojetvā ‘‘yabhā’’ti yo akkoso atthi, eso hīno nāma akkosoti yojanā.

koṭṭho, that itself is koṭṭhako. The meaning is that the abuse "yabhā," having combined the sounds of "ya" and "bha" into one, is called a low abuse.

16.Sabbapadesūti nāmādīsu sabbapadesu.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Alikanti asaccaṃ, micchāvācanti sambandho. Yopi vadatīti yojanā.

16.Sabbapadesū: in all the words, such as nouns, etc. Ettha: in this sikkhāpada. Alika: untrue, the connection is with false speech. The connection is "yo pi vadati."

26.Pariharitvāti parimukhaṃ kathanaṃ apanetvā. Davaṃ parihāsaṃ kāmetītidavakāmo,tassa bhāvodavakamyaṃ,taṃyevadavakamyatā. Anupasampannanti ettha akārassa sadisatthamaggahetvā aññatthova gahetabboti āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā bhikkhu’’ntiādi. Yadi hi sadisattho bhaveyya, sāmaṇerova anupasampanno nāma siyā saṇṭhānena ca purisabhāvena ca sadisattā, tasmā aññatthova gahetabboti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sabbasattāti etthasabbasaddo anavasesattho manusse upādāya vacanatthajānanājānanapakatikānaṃ sabbasattānampi gahitattā.

26.Pariharitvā: having removed speaking in front of someone. Davaṃ parihāsaṃ kāmetīti davakāmo, one who desires mockery; his state is davakamyaṃ, that itself is davakamyatā. With regard to "anupasampanna," one should take the meaning of the a as dissimilar, not similar, so he says "ṭhapetvā bhikkhu" etc. If the meaning were similar, then only a sāmaṇera would be called "anupasampanna" because he is similar in form and male gender; therefore, it should be seen that the meaning should be taken as dissimilar. Sabbasattā: here, because the word sabba means without remainder, it is taken as including all beings, beginning with humans, who are capable or incapable of understanding speech.

35.Atthapurekkhāro nāmāti veditabboti sambandho. Sikkhāpadamapekkhiya napuṃsakaliṅgavasena ‘‘kiriya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Āpattimapekkhiya itthiliṅgavasena ‘‘kiriyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vajjakammasaddā sikkhāpadamapekkhantāpi āpatti, mapekkhantāpi niyatanapuṃsakaliṅgattā napuṃsakāyeva, tasmā te dve āpattiṭṭhāne na vuttāti daṭṭhabbanti. Dutiyaṃ.

35.The connection is that "atthapurekkhāro" should be understood to be the name. "Kiriya" etc. was said in the neuter gender in relation to the sikkhāpada. "Kiriyā" etc. was said in the feminine gender in relation to the āpatti. Although the words vajjakamma are invariably neuter, whether in relation to the sikkhāpada or not in relation to the āpatti, therefore, it should be seen that those two were not said in the place of āpatti. The second.

3. Pesuññasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Pesuññasikkhāpadaṃ

36.Tatiye ‘‘jātabhaṇḍanāna’’nti vattabbe agyāhitotiādīsu viya visesanaparanipātavasena ‘‘bhaṇḍanajātāna’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘sañjātabhaṇḍanāna’’nti. ‘‘Pubbabhāgo’’ti vatvā tassa sarūpaṃ dasseti ‘‘iminā ca iminā cā’’tiādinā. Viruddhaṃ vadati etenātivivādo,viggāhikakathā, taṃ āpannātivivādāpannā,tesaṃ. Pisati sañcuṇṇetītipisuṇo,puggalo, tassa idantipesuññaṃ,vacananti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pesuññanti pisuṇavāca’’nti.

36.In the third, it should be said "jātabhaṇḍanāna," but he says "bhaṇḍanajātāna" in the style of agyāhito etc., with the specification falling after the thing specified, so he says "sañjātabhaṇḍanāna." Having said "pubbabhāgo," he shows its nature with "iminā ca iminā ca" etc. Viruddhaṃ vadati etenāti vivādo, quarrel, argumentative talk; those who have fallen into that are vivādāpannā, of them. Pisati sañcuṇṇetīti pisuṇo, one who crushes; a person, his nature is pesuññaṃ, tale-bearing. Showing the meaning as "pesuññanti pisuṇavāca," he says "pesuññanti pisuṇavāca."

37.Bhikkhupesuññeti bhikkhūnaṃ santikaṃ upasaṃhaṭe pesuññavacaneti chaṭṭhīsamāso.

37.Bhikkhupesuññe: tale-bearing speech brought near to the monks, a sixth-case compound.

38.‘‘Disvā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘bhaṇantassā’’ti pade pubbakālakiriyā, dassanaṃ hutvāti attho. Tatiyaṃ.

38.The word "disvā" is a prior action in the phrase "bhaṇantassa," meaning having seen. The third.

4. Padasodhammasikkhāpadaṃ
4. Padasodhammasikkhāpadaṃ

44.Catutthe paṭimukhaṃ ādarena suṇantītipatissā,na patissāappatissāti dassento āha ‘‘appatissavā’’ti.

44.In the fourth, those who listen respectfully and attentively are patissā, those who are not patissā are appatissā, so he says "appatissavā."

45.‘‘Padaso’’ti ettha so-paccayo vicchatthavācakoti āha ‘‘padaṃ pada’’nti.Tatthāti tesu catubbidhesu. Padaṃ nāma idha atthajotakaṃ vā vibhatyantaṃ vā na hoti, atha kho lokiyehi lakkhito gāthāya catutthaṃso pādova adhippetoti āha ‘‘padanti eko gāthāpādo’’ti. Anu pacchā vuttapadattā dutiyapādoanupadaṃnāma. Anu sadisaṃ byañjanaṃanubyañjananti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘anubyañjana’’ntiādinā. Byañjanasaddo pada-pariyāyo. Yaṃkiñci padaṃ anubyañjanaṃ nāma na hoti, purimapadena pana sadisaṃ pacchimapadameva anubyañjanaṃ nāma.

45."Padaso": here, he says "padaṃ padaṃ," because the affix so is in the sense of distribution. Tattha: among those four kinds. Here, the word pada is not a meaning-indicator or a word ending in an inflection, but rather the fourth part of a verse, a foot, is intended, which is marked by worldly people, so he says "padanti eko gāthāpādo." Because it is a second foot, it is named anupadaṃ because it is a pada spoken after. He shows the meaning of anubyañjana as "anu sadisaṃ byañjanaṃ". The word byañjana is a synonym for pada. Whatever pada is called anubyañjana, it is not. However, only the later pada which is similar to the prior pada is called anubyañjana.

Mattamevāti ettha evasaddo mattasaddassa avadhāraṇatthaṃ dasseti, tena pakāraṃ paṭikkhipati. ‘‘Anicca’’nti ca ‘‘aniccā’’ti ca dvinnaṃ padānaṃ satipi liṅgavisesatte anubyañjanattā āpattimokkho natthīti āha ‘‘anubyañjanagaṇanāya pācittiyā’’ti.

Mattameva: here, the word eva shows the certainty of the word matta, thereby rejecting the manner. Although there is a difference in gender between the two words "anicca" and "aniccā," there is no release from the āpatti because it is considered anubyañjana, so he says "anubyañjanagaṇanāya pācittiyā."

Brahmajālādīnīti ettha ādisaddena sāmaññaphalasuttādīni dīghasuttāni (dī. ni. 1.150 ādayo) saṅgahitāni. Casaddena oghataraṇasuttādīni saṃyuttasuttāni (saṃ. ni. 1.1) ca cittapariyādānasuttādīni aṅguttarasuttāni (a. ni. 1.2 ādayo) ca saṅgahitāni.Soti devatābhāsito veditabboti yojanā.

Brahmajālādīnī: here, with the word ādi, the long suttas such as the Sāmaññaphala Sutta etc. (dī. ni. 1.150 ff) are included. With the word ca, the Saṃyutta suttas such as the Oghataraṇa Sutta etc. (saṃ. ni. 1.1) and the Aṅguttara suttas such as the Cittapariyādāna Sutta etc. (a. ni. 1.2 ff) are included. So: should be understood as spoken by a deity.

Meṇḍakamilindapañhesūti meṇḍakapañhe ca milindapañhe ca.Yanti suttaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Ārammaṇakathā buddhikakathā daṇḍakakathā ñāṇavatthukathāti yojetabbaṃ peyyālavasena vuttattā. Imāyo pakaraṇāni nāmāti vadanti. Mahāpaccariyādīsu vatvā pariggahitoti yojanā.Yanti suttaṃ.

Meṇḍakamilindapañhesū: in the questions of Meṇḍaka and in the questions of Milinda. The connection is that "yaṃ" suttaṃ was said. Ārammaṇakathā, buddhikakathā, daṇḍakakathā, ñāṇavatthukathā should be connected because it was said in the peyyāla style. They say these are called topics. The connection is that it was said and determined in the Mahāpaccariya etc. Yaṃ: the sutta.

48.Tatrāti ‘‘ekato uddisāpento’’ti vacane.Uddisāpentīti ācariyaṃ desāpenti bahukattāramapekkhiya bahuvacanavasena vuttaṃ.Tehīti upasampannānupasampannehi.Dvepīti upasampanno ca anupasampanno ca.

48. Tatrāti, in the phrase "saying from one place." Uddisāpentīti, they cause the teacher to recite; it is said in the plural because it requires many agents. Tehīti, by the ordained and the unordained. Dvepīti, both an ordained person and an unordained person.

Upacāranti dvādasahatthūpacāraṃ.Yesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Palāyanakaganthanti parivajjetvā gacchantaṃ pakaraṇaṃ. Sāmaṇero gaṇhātīti yojanā.

Upacāranti, within the upacāra of twelve cubits. Yesanti, of the bhikkhus. Palāyanakaganthanti, the procedure of going away avoiding (the others). The meaning is that the sāmaṇera takes (it).

Opātetīti avapāteti, gaḷitāpetīti attho.Suttepīti veyyākaraṇasuttepi.Tanti yebhuyyena paguṇaganthaṃ.Parisaṅkamānanti sārajjamānaṃ. Yaṃ pana vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Kiriyasamuṭṭhānattāti imassa sikkhāpadassa kiriyasamuṭṭhānattāti. Catutthaṃ.

Opātetīti, causes to fall down, causes to drip down, this is the meaning. Suttepīti, even in a grammatical sutta. Tanti, mostly a well-recited text. Parisaṅkamānanti, doubting. The connection is "the word that was spoken." Kiriyasamuṭṭhānattāti, because this training rule arises from action. The fourth (anuddessa) is finished.

5. Sahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ
5. Sahaseyya Sikkhāpada

49.Pañcame muṭṭhā sati etesantimuṭṭhassatī. Natthi sampajānaṃ etesantiasampajānā. Bhavaṅgotiṇṇakāleti niddokkamanakāle.

49. In the fifth, muṭṭhassatī, those who are forgetful. Asampajānā, those who are without clear comprehension. Bhavaṅgotiṇṇakāleti, at the time of emerging from sleep.

50.‘‘Pakatiyā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘dentī’’ti pade visesanaṃ. Te bhikkhū dentīti sambandho. ‘‘Gāravenā’’ti padañca ‘‘sikkhākāmatāyā’’ti padañca ‘‘dentī’’ti pade hetu. Sīsassa upadhānaṃussīsaṃ,tassa karīyateussīsakaraṇaṃ, taṃyeva attho payojanaṃussīsakaraṇattho,tadatthāya.Tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ, ‘‘sikkhākāmatāyā’’ti vacaneti attho. Nidassananti seso. Atha vāsikkhākāmatāyāti paccatte bhummavacanaṃ. ‘‘Idampissa hoti sīlasmi’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.195 ādayo) viya. Idampi sikkhākāmatāya ayaṃ sikkhākāmatā sikkhākāmabhāvo hotīti yojanā. Esa nayo ‘‘tatridaṃ samantapāsādikāya samantapāsādikattasmi’’ntiādīsupi. Bhikkhū khipantīti yojanā.Tanti āyasmantaṃ rāhulaṃ.Athāti khipanato pacchā.Idanti vatthu. Sammuñcanikacavarachaḍḍanakāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenāyasmatā rāhulena pātitaṃ nu khoti yojanā. So panāyasmā gacchatīti sambandho.Aparibhogā aññesanti aññehi na paribhuñjitabbā.

50. The word "pakatiyā" is an adjective to the word "dentī". The connection is, "those bhikkhus give." And the word "gāravenā" and the word "sikkhākāmatāyā" are reasons in relation to the word "dentī." Ussīsaṃ, a pillow for the head; ussīsakaraṇaṃ, making a pillow; ussīsakaraṇattho, the purpose of making a pillow, for that purpose. Tatrāti, with reference to the previous statement, meaning "in the statement 'sikkhākāmatāyā'." "Nidassananti seso," the rest is an example. Alternatively, sikkhākāmatāyāti is an adjective used in the sense of plurality. As in "Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṃ," etc. (Dī. Ni. 1.195 ff). The connection is: "This is out of a desire for training; this desire for training, the state of desiring training, occurs." This method (should be applied) in "tatridaṃ samantapāsādikāya samantapāsādikattasmiṃ," etc. The connection is, "the bhikkhus throw." Tanti, the Venerable Rāhula. Athāti, after throwing. Idanti, the item. Said referring to sweeping up and throwing away rubbish. The connection is, "was it thrown away by the Venerable Rāhula?" The connection is, "but that venerable one goes." Aparibhogā aññesanti, it should not be used by others.

51.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Sayanaṃseyyā,kāyapasāraṇakiriyā, sayanti etthātiseyyā,mañcapīṭhādi. Tadubhayampi ekasesena vā sāmaññaniddesena vā ekato katvā ‘‘sahaseyya’’nti vuttanti dassento āha ‘‘seyyā’’tiādi.Tatthāti dvīsu seyyāsu.Tasmāti yasmā dve seyyā dassitā, tasmā. ‘‘Sabbacchannā’’tiādinā lakkhaṇaṃ vuttanti yojanā.Pākaṭavohāranti loke viditaṃ vacanaṃ.Dussakuṭiyanti dussena chāditakuṭiyaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu yathāvutte pañcavidhacchadaneyeva gayhamāne ko dosoti āha ‘‘pañcavidhacchadaneyevā’’tiādi. Yaṃ pana senāsanaṃ parikkhittanti sambandho.Pākārena vāti iṭṭhakasilādārunā vā.Aññena vāti kilañjādinā vā.Vatthenapīti pisaddo pageva iṭṭhakādināti dasseti.Yassāti senāsanasaṅkhātāya seyyāya. Uparīti vā samantatoti vā yojanā. Ekena dvārena pavisitvā sabbapāsādassa vaḷañjitabbataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ekūpacāro’’ti. Satagabbhaṃ vā catussālaṃ ekūpacāraṃ hotīti sambandho.Tanti senāsanasaṅkhātaṃ seyyaṃ.

51. ti, truly, or because. Seyyā, a bed, the act of stretching out the body; seyyā, a place where one lies down, a couch, a chair, etc. Showing that both of these are referred to as "sahaseyya" by combining them into one either by way of an ekasesa compound or by way of a general designation, he says, "seyyā," etc. Tatthāti, in those two kinds of beds. Tasmāti, because two kinds of beds have been shown, therefore. The connection is, "the definition is stated with 'sabbacchannā,' etc." Pākaṭavohāranti, a term known in the world. Dussakuṭiyanti, in a hut covered with cloth. He says, "pañcavidhacchadaneyevā" etc., asking what is wrong if only the five kinds of covering mentioned in the commentaries are accepted. The connection is, "that dwelling which is enclosed." Pākārena vāti, either by brick, stone, or wood. Aññena vāti, or by bamboo strips, etc. Vatthenapīti, the particle 'pi' shows that it is in addition to brick, etc., mentioned earlier. Yassāti, of that bed, which is designated as a dwelling. The connection is, "either above or all around." It is said "ekūpacāro" referring to the state of having to go through one entrance to circumambulate the entire building. The connection is, "a building with a hundred chambers or a four-sided hall is ekūpacāra." Tanti, that bed which is designated as a dwelling.

Tatthāti senāsanasaṅkhātāyaṃ seyyāyaṃ. Sambahulā sāmaṇerā sace honti, eko bhikkhu sace hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Sāmaṇerā’’ti idaṃ paccāsannavasena vuttaṃ, upalakkhaṇavasena vā aññehipi sahaseyyānaṃ āpattisambhavato. Teti sāmaṇerā.Sabbesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Tassāti sāmaṇerassa.Eseva nayoti eso eva nayo, na añño nayoti attho. Atha vāeseva nayoti eso iva nayo, eso etādiso nayo iva ayaṃ nayo daṭṭhabboti attho.

Tatthāti, in that bed which is designated as a dwelling. The connection is, "if there are many sāmaṇeras, if there is one bhikkhu." "Sāmaṇerā" is said in relation to what is nearby, or by way of indication, since an offense can occur for sahaseyya even with others. Teti, those sāmaṇeras. Sabbesanti, of all the bhikkhus. Tassāti, of that sāmaṇera. Eseva nayoti, this is the only way, there is no other way, this is the meaning. Alternatively, eseva nayoti, this is like the way, this way is like that way, this way should be seen, this is the meaning.

Api cāti ekaṃsena.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Catukkanti ekāvāsaekānupasampannaṃ, ekāvāsanānupasampannaṃ, nānāvāsaekānupasampannaṃ, nānāvāsanānupasampannanti catusamūhaṃ, catuparimāṇaṃ vā.Yoti bhikkhu.Hisaddo vitthārajotako, taṃ vacanaṃ vitthārayissāmīti attho, vitthāro mayā vuccateti vā.Devasikanti divase divase.Ṇikapaccayo hi vicchatthavācako. Yopi sahaseyyaṃ kappeti, tassāpi āpattīti yojetabbo.Tatrāti ‘‘tiracchānagatenāpī’’ti vacane.

Api cāti, definitely. Etthāti, in this training rule. Catukkanti, a group of four: one residence and one unordained person, one residence and many unordained persons, different residences and one unordained person, different residences and many unordained persons, or a set of four. Yoti, whichever bhikkhu. The word hi is indicative of detail; the meaning is, "I will explain that statement," or "the explanation is spoken by me." Devasikanti, day by day. The suffix ṇika expresses distribution. It should be connected that "whichever bhikkhu allows sahaseyya, there is an offense for him as well." Tatrāti, in the statement "tiracchānagatenāpī."

‘‘Apadānaṃ ahimacchā, dvipadānañca kukkuṭī;

"A gecko, a fish, two-footed ones a hen;
Four-footed ones, a cat; the item is of the pārājika here." (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.55);

Tasmāti yasmā veditabbo, tasmā.Godhāti kuṇḍo.Biḷāloti ākhubhujo.Maṅgusoti nakulo.

Tasmāti, because it should be known, therefore. Godhāti, a monitor lizard. Biḷāloti, a rat-eater, a cat. Maṅgusoti, a mongoose.

Tulāti ettha tulā nāma thambhāna, mupari dakkhiṇuttaravitthāravasena ṭhapito dāruviseso thalati thambhesu patiṭṭhātīti katvā. Tā pana heṭṭhimaparicchedato tisso, ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena pana pañcasattanavādayo. Nānūpacāre pāsādeti sambandho.

Tulāti, here, a tulā is a particular type of wood placed above the pillars in the direction of the north and south expansion, because it stands firm on the pillars. These, however, are three from the lower limit, but from the highest limit, there are five, seven, or nine, etc. The connection is, "a building not within the upacāra."

Vāḷasaṅghāṭādīsūti vāḷarūpaṃ dassetvā katesu saṅghāṭādīsu. Ādisaddena tulaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ettha casaṅghāṭonāma tulāna, mupari pubbapacchimāyāmavasena ṭhapito kaṭṭhaviseso sammā ghaṭenti ettha gopānasyādayoti katvā. Te pana tayo honti.Nibbakosabbhantareti chadanakoṭiabbhantare. Parimaṇḍalaṃ vā caturassaṃ vā senāsanaṃ hotīti sambandho.Tatrāti tasmiṃ senāsane. Aparicchinno gabbhassa upacāro etesantiaparicchinnagabbhūpacārāsabbagabbhā, te pavisantīti attho. Nipannānaṃ bhikkhūnanti yojanā.Tatrāti tasmiṃ pamukhe. Pamukhassa sabbacchannattā, sabbaparicchannattā ca āpattiṃ karotīti yojanā. Nanu pamukhe channameva atthi, no paricchannanti āha ‘‘gabbhaparikkhepo’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ.

Vāḷasaṅghāṭādīsūti, in saṅghāṭas, etc., made by showing the shape of a window. The word ādi includes the tula. And here, saṅghāṭo means a particular piece of wood placed on top of the tulas in the direction of east and west extension, because the gopānasis, etc., are well-fitted there. But these are three. Nibbakosabbhantareti, inside the edge of the roof. The connection is, "a senāsana that is circular or square." Tatrāti, in that senāsana. Aparicchinnagabbhūpacārā, those for whom the upacāra of the chamber is not defined, all the chambers, meaning they enter. The connection is "of the bhikkhus who are lying down." Tatrāti, in that pamukha. The connection is, "because the pamukha is completely covered and completely enclosed, it causes an offense." If (you say) there is only a covering in the pamukha, not an enclosure, (the answer is) he says, "gabbhaparikkhepo" etc. ti, truly.

Jagatīti pathaviyā ca mandirālindavatthussa ca nāmametaṃ. Idha pana mandirālindavatthusaṅkhātā bhūbhedā gahitā.Tatthāti andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Kasmā pāḷiyā na sametīti āha ‘‘dasahatthubbedhāpī’’tiādi.ti yasmā.Tatthāti andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Yepi mahāpāsādā hontīti yojanā.Tesupīti mahāpāsādesupi.

Jagatīti, this is a name for both the earth and the courtyard of a temple. Here, however, divisions of the ground designated as the courtyard of a temple are taken. Tatthāti, in the Andhaka commentary. He says, "dasahatthubbedhāpī" etc., asking why it does not agree with the Pali. ti, because. Tatthāti, in the Andhaka commentary. The connection is, "those great buildings that exist." Tesupīti, even in those great buildings.

‘‘sudhā’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ yena kenaci chadanamaṇḍapassāpi adhippetattā. Maṇḍaṃ vuccati sūriyarasmi, taṃ pāti rakkhati, tato vā janantimaṇḍapaṃ. Nanu ekūpacāraṃ hoti pākārassa chiddattāti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Vaḷañjanatthāya evāti evakāro yojetabbo. Tenāha ‘‘na vaḷañjanūpacchedanatthāyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘saddantaratthāpohanena saddo atthaṃ vadatī’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 1; dī. ni. ṭi. 1.1; ma. ni. ṭī. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.rupādivaggavaṇṇanā) vuttattā ‘‘na vaḷañjanūpacchedanatthāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.Kavāṭanti ettha dvārameva adhippetaṃ pariyāyena vuttattā, asati ca dvāre kavāṭassābhāvato. Saṃvaraṇavivaraṇakāle kavati saddaṃ karotītikavāṭaṃ.

"sudhā"ti, this is said by way of indication because any kind of covering maṇḍapa is intended. Maṇḍapaṃ, that which is called maṇḍa is the sun's rays; it protects that, or it is born from that. If (you say) it is ekūpacāra because the wall has a hole, (the answer is) he says, "na hī" etc. ti, truly, or because. The word eva should be connected only for the purpose of circumambulation. Therefore, he says, "na vaḷañjanūpacchedanatthāyā." Alternatively, because it is said that "a word expresses meaning by excluding the meaning of another word" (udā. aṭṭha. 1; dī. ni. ṭi. 1.1; ma. ni. ṭī. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.rupādivaggavaṇṇanā), therefore it is said "na vaḷañjanūpacchedanatthāyā." Kavāṭanti, here, only the door is intended because it is said by way of a synonym, and because there is no kavāṭa in the absence of a door. Kavāṭaṃ, it makes a sound when closing and opening.

Tatrāti ‘‘ekūpacārattā’’ti vacane.Yassāti paravādino. Anuyogo siyāti yojanā.Idhāti imasmiṃ sahaseyyasikkhāpade, vuttanti sambandho.Tatthāti pihitadvāre gabbhe.Soti paravādī. Sabbacchannattā āpatti iti vutteti yojanā. Eseva nayo ‘‘sabbaparicchannatā na hotī’’ti etthāpi.Paccāgamissatīti pati āgamissati, puna āgamissatīti attho.

Tatrāti, in the statement "ekūpacārattā." Yassāti, of the opponent. The connection is, "there might be an objection." Idhāti, in this sahaseyya sikkhāpada, the connection is "it is said." Tatthāti, in a chamber with the door closed. Soti, that opponent. The connection is, "it is said that there is an offense because it is completely covered." The same method (applies) in "sabbaparicchannatā na hotī" as well. Paccāgamissatīti, pati āgamissati, meaning "will come back again."

Byañjanamattenevāti ‘‘sabbacchannā’’tiādiakkharapadamatteneva, na atthavasena. ‘‘Evañca satī’’ti iminā abyāpitadosaṃ dasseti.Tatoti anāpattito, parihāyeyyāti sambandho.Tasmāti yasmā aniyatesu vuttaṃ, tasmā.Tatthāti aniyatesu.Idhāpīti imasmiṃ sikkhāpadepi.Yaṃ yanti senāsanaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu senāsanesu, sahaseyyāpatti hotīti sambandho.

Byañjanamattenevāti, merely by the letters and words of "sabbacchannā" etc., not by way of the meaning. Tatoti, from not being an offense, the connection is, "would decline." Tasmāti, because it is said in the aniyatas, therefore. Tatthāti, in the aniyatas. Idhāpīti, even in this sikkhāpada. Yaṃ yanti, whichever senāsana. Sabbatthāti, in all senāsanas, the connection is, "there is a sahaseyya offense."

53.Dvīsu aṭṭhakathāvādesu mahāaṭṭhakathāvādova yuttoti so pacchā vutto.

53. Of the two commentary positions, the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā position is correct, so it is said later.

Imināpīti senambamaṇḍapenāpi.Etanti jagatiyā aparikkhittataṃ.Yathāti yaṃsaddattho tatiyantanipāto, yena senambamaṇḍapenāti atthoti. Pañcamaṃ.

Imināpīti, even by the senamba maṇḍapa. Etanti, the unenclosedness of the jagati. Yathāti, the meaning of the word "yaṃ" is a nipāta in the instrumental case, meaning "by whichever senamba maṇḍapa." The fifth (anuddessa) is finished.

6. Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ
6. Second Sahaseyya Sikkhāpada

55.Chaṭṭhe āgantukā vasanti etthātiāvasatho,āvasatho ca so agārañcetiāvasathāgāranti dassento āha ‘‘āgantukānaṃ vasanāgāra’’nti. Manussānaṃ santikā vacanaṃ sutvāti vacanaseso yojetabbo.Sāṭakanti uttarasāṭakaṃ, nivatthavatthantipi vadanti.Accāgammāti tvāpaccayantapadassa sambandhaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘pavatto’’ti. Yathā omasavādasikkhāpade akkosetukāmatāya khattiyaṃ ‘‘caṇḍālo’’ti vadato alikaṃ bhaṇatopi musāvādasikkhāpadena anāpatti, omasavādasikkhāpadeneva āpatti, evamidhāpi mātugāmena saha sayato paṭhamasahaseyyasikkhāpadena anāpatti, imināva āpattīti daṭṭhabbanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

55. In the sixth, āvasatho, a place where newcomers dwell; showing that it is "āvasathāgāra," both an āvasatha and a house, he says, "āgantukānaṃ vasanāgāra," a dwelling for newcomers. The rest of the sentence should be connected as "having heard a statement from humans." Sāṭakanti, upper robe; they also call it a lower garment. Accāgammāti, to show the connection of the tvāpaccaya word, he says, "pavatto." Just as in the Omasavāda Sikkhāpada, even if someone calling a Khattiya a "caṇḍāla" with the intention of abusing him is speaking falsely, there is no offense by the Musāvāda Sikkhāpada, but only an offense by the Omasavāda Sikkhāpada, so too here, if someone lies down with a woman, there is no offense by the first Sahaseyya Sikkhāpada, but only an offense by this one, it should be seen. The sixth (anuddessa) is finished.

7. Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadaṃ
7. Dhamma Desanā Sikkhāpada

60.Sattamemahādvāreti bahi ṭhite mahādvāre. Āgamma, pavisitvā vā vasanaṭṭhānattā ovarako āvasatho nāmāti āha ‘‘ovarakadvāre’’ti.Suniggatenāti suṭṭhu bahi nikkhamitvā gatena saddena. ‘‘Aññātu’’nti padassa ‘‘na ñātu’’nti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘ājānitu’’nti. Iminā nakāravikāro aiti nipāto na hoti, āiti upasaggoti pana dasseti. ‘‘Viññunā purisenā’’ti ettakameva avatvā ‘‘purisaviggahenā’’ti vadanto manussapurisaviggahaṃ gahetvā ṭhitena yakkhena petena tiracchānagatena saddhiṃ ṭhitāya mātugāmassa desetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.Na yakkhenāti yakkhena saddhiṃ ṭhitāya mātugāmassa desetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Esa nayo ‘‘na petena, na tiracchānagatenā’’ti etthāpi.

60. In the seventh, mahādvāreti, at the large door standing outside. He says, "ovarakadvāre," because an ovaraka is called an āvasatha due to being a place of dwelling by coming to it or by entering it. Suniggatenāti, with a sound that has gone out well. Rejecting the meaning "na ñātu" of the word "Aññātu," he says, "ājānitu." With this, he shows that the change of the letter na is not the nipāta aiti, but ā is the prefix. By saying "purisaviggahenā" without saying only "viññunā purisenā," he shows that it is not proper to teach Dhamma to a woman who is standing with a yakkha, peta, or animal who has taken the form of a human male. Na yakkhenāti, it is not proper to teach Dhamma to a woman standing with a yakkha, this is the connection. The same method (applies) in "na petena, na tiracchānagatenā" as well.

66.Chappañcavācāhīti ettha ‘‘pañcā’’ti vācāsiliṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ kassaci payojanassābhāvā.Tatthāti ‘‘chappañcavācāhī’’ti pade. Eko gāthāpādo ekā vācāti vadanto cuṇṇiye vibhatyantaṃ ekaṃ padaṃ ekā vācā nāmāti dasseti, atthajotakapadaṃ vā vākyapadaṃ vā na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekaṃ padaṃ pāḷito, pañca aṭṭhakathāto’’ti iminā ‘‘dve padāni pāḷito, cattāri aṭṭhakathāto’’tiādinayopi gahetabbo. Chapadānatikkamoyeva hi pamāṇaṃ.Tasminti ettha sati vibhattivipallāse liṅgassāpi vipallāso hoti ‘‘tasmi’’nti pulliṅgena vuttattā. Sati ca vibhattivipallāse ‘‘tassā’’ti itthiliṅgabhāvena pavattā. ‘‘Mātugāmassā’’ti niyatapulliṅgāpekkhanassa asambhavato atthavasena ‘‘ekissā’’ti itthiliṅgabhāvena vuttaṃ. Iminā bhedaliṅganissito visesanavisesyopi atthīti dasseti.Tumhākanti niddhāraṇasamudāyo. ‘‘Suṇāthā’’ti avatvā ābhogopi vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādi.Paṭhamanti ca paṭhamameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na pacchā’’ti. Puṭṭho hutvā bhikkhu kathetīti yojanāti. Sattamaṃ.

66. Chappañcavācāhīti, here, "pañcā" is said inseparably from vācā because there is no purpose for someone (to say it separately). Tatthāti, in the phrase "chappañcavācāhī." By saying "one line of a verse is one vācā," he shows that in the cuṇṇi, one word ending in a vibhatti is called one vācā, a meaning-denoting word or a sentence-word should not be taken. With "ekaṃ padaṃ pāḷito, pañca aṭṭhakathāto," the method "dve padāni pāḷito, cattāri aṭṭhakathāto" etc. should also be taken. Transgressing six words is the limit. Tasminti, here, if there is a change of case ending, there is also a change of gender, because it is said in the masculine gender as "tasmi." And if there is a change of case ending, it would occur as "tassā" in the feminine gender. Because it is impossible to expect a fixed masculine gender for "mātugāmassā," it is said in the feminine gender as "ekissā" in terms of meaning. With this, he shows that there is also a specification and a specifier that are based on a difference in gender. Tumhākanti, a determining collective. He says "paṭhamaṃ" etc., meaning that even an invitation is proper without saying "suṇātha." Paṭhamanti, and only at the beginning. Therefore, it is said, "not afterwards." The connection is, "a bhikkhu speaks having been asked." The seventh (anuddessa) is finished.

8. Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadaṃ
8. Bhūtārocana Sikkhāpada

67.Aṭṭhametatthāti catutthapārājikasikkhāpade.Idhāti bhūtārocanasikkhāpade.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Payuttavācāti paccayehi yuttā vācā.Tathāti tato guṇārocanakāraṇā, ariyā sādiyiṃsūti yojanā.

67. In the eighth, tatthāti, in the fourth pārājika sikkhāpada. Idhāti, in the bhūtārocana sikkhāpada. ti, truly, or because. Payuttavācāti, speech endowed with conditions. Tathāti, therefore, because of declaring (those) virtues, the connection is, "the ariyas approved."

Sabbepīti puthujjanāriyāpi.Bhūtanti vijjamānaṃ. Kasmā sabbepi paṭijāniṃsu, nanu ariyehi attano guṇānaṃ anārocitattā na paṭijānitabbanti āha ‘‘ariyānampī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Ariyānampi abbhantare uttarimanussadhammo yasmā bhūto hoti, tasmā sabbepi ‘‘bhūtaṃ bhagavā’’ti paṭijāniṃsūti yojanā. Yasmā bhāsito viya hoti, tasmāti yojanā. Ariyā paṭijāniṃsūti sambandho.Anādīnavadassinoti dosassa adassanadhammā.Tehīti ariyehi, bhāsitoti sambandho. Yaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ uppādesunti yojanā.Aññeti puthujjanā.Sabbasaṅgāhikenevāti sabbesaṃ puthujjanāriyānaṃ saṅgahaṇe pavatteneva.Sikkhāpadavibhaṅgepīti sikkhāpadassa padabhājaniyepi.Tatthāti catutthapārājike.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.

Sabbepīti: Even the ordinary and noble beings. Bhūtaṃti: Existing. Why did all acknowledge it, since the noble ones did not acknowledge it due to not revealing their own qualities? He says, "ariyānampītiādi." Hīti: Truly, or because. Since the quality of surpassing human nature exists internally even for the noble ones, therefore all acknowledged "bhūtaṃ bhagavā," this is the connection. Because it is as if spoken, therefore is the connection. "Ariyā paṭijāniṃsūti" is the relation. Anādīnavadassino: Those who do not see faults. Tehīti: By the noble ones, "bhāsitoti" is the connection. "Yaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ uppādesunti" is the connection. Aññe: The ordinary ones. Sabbasaṅgāhikenevā: Only by that which includes all, both ordinary and noble. Sikkhāpadavibhaṅgepīti: Even in the analysis of the training rule. Tatthā: In the fourth pārājika. Idhā: In this training rule.

77.Uttarimanussadhammameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sutādiguṇanti attho.Antarā vāti parinibbānakālato aññasmiṃ kāle vā.Atikaḍḍhiyamānenāti atinippīḷiyamānena.Ummattakassātiidaṃ panāti ettha iti-saddo ādyattho. Tena ‘‘khittacittassā’’tiādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Diṭṭhisampannānanti maggapaññāya, phalapaññāya ca sampannānaṃ.Anāpattīti pācittiyāpattiyā anāpatti na vattabbā, āpattiyeva hoti, tasmā ‘‘ummattakassa anāpattī’’ti na vattabbanti adhippāyoti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

77.It refers specifically to the quality of surpassing human nature, not to qualities such as learning, this is the meaning. Antarā vā: Or at a time other than the time of final Nibbāna. Atikaḍḍhiyamānenā: By being excessively pressed. Ummattakassātiidaṃ panā: Here, the word "iti" is in the sense of beginning. Therefore, it includes "khittacittassā" etc. Diṭṭhisampannānaṃti: Those who are endowed with the wisdom of the path and the wisdom of the fruition. Anāpattīti: There is no offense of pācittiya to be stated; there is indeed an offense. Therefore, the intention is that it should not be said, "there is no offense for the insane one." The eighth.

9. Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadaṃ
9. Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadaṃ

78.Navametatrāti tassaṃ ‘‘duṭṭhullā nāmā’’tiādipāḷiyaṃ, tāsu vā pāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu.Vicāraṇāti vīmaṃsanā.Upasampannasaddeti upasampannasaddatthabhāve. Ettha hi sadde vuccamāne avinābhāvato saddena atthopi vutto, vināpi bhāvapaccayena bhāvatthassa ñātabbattā bhāvopi gahetabbo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘upasampannasaddatthabhāve’’ti. Eseva nayo ‘‘duṭṭhullasadde’’ti etthāpi. Etaṃ parimāṇaṃ yassātietaṃ,‘‘terasa saṅghādisesā’’ti vacanaṃ. Etaṃ eva vattabbaṃ, na ‘‘cattāri ca pārājikānī’’ti idanti attho.Tatthāti pāḷiyaṃ. Kassaci vimati bhaveyya, kiṃ bhaveyyāti yojanā. Āpattiṃ ārocentena akkosantassa samānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ satī’’tiādi.Pācittiyameva cāti casaddo byatirekattho, na dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti attho.ti saccaṃ.Etanti pācittiyāpajjanataṃ, ‘‘asuddho hoti…pe… omasavādassā’’ti vacanaṃ vā, vuttanti sambandho.Etthāti pāḷiyaṃ.Aṭṭhakathācariyāveti ettha evakāro aṭṭhānayogo, pamāṇanti ettha yojetabbo, kāraṇamevāti attho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na aññā vicāraṇā’’ti. Atha vāaññāti sāmyatthe paccattavacanametaṃ, na aññesaṃ vicāraṇā pamāṇanti attho. Evañhi sati evakāro ṭhānayogova.Pubbepi cāti ganthārambhakālepi ca.

78.In the ninth, tatrāti: in that passage beginning "duṭṭhullā nāmā" etc., or in those Pali commentaries. Vicāraṇā: Investigation. Upasampannasadde: In the state of the meaning of the word "upasampanna." Here, when the word is spoken, the meaning is also spoken due to inseparability from the word. Even without the suffix of state, since the meaning of the state is known, the state should also be taken. Therefore, it is said, "upasampannasaddatthabhāve." This same method applies in "duṭṭhullasadde" as well. Etaṃ parimāṇaṃ yassātietaṃ: This, the statement "thirteen saṅghādisesā." This alone should be stated, not "cattāri ca pārājikānī," this is the meaning. Tatthā: In the Pali. If there is doubt for someone, what would happen?, this is the connection. Because the one who announces the offense is similar to the one who scolds, it is said "evaṃ satītiādi." Pācittiyameva cā: And the word "ca" is in the sense of exclusion, meaning he does not incur a dukkaṭa offense. Hīti: Truly. Etaṃti: This incurring of pācittiya, or the statement "asuddho hoti…pe…omasavādassā," is the connection. Etthā: In the Pali. Aṭṭhakathācariyāve: Here, the "eva" emphasizes the Aṭṭhakathācariyas, it should be connected with "pamāṇanti," meaning it is the only reason. Therefore, it is said "na aññā vicāraṇā." Alternatively, aññā: This is a singular word in the sense of sameness, the investigation of others is not authoritative, this is the meaning. In this case, the "eva" emphasizes the meaning of position. Pubbepi cā: And even at the beginning of the text.

Etanti aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ pamāṇataṃ. Saṃvaratthāya eva, anāpajjanatthāya eva ca anuññātanti yojanā. Tenāha ‘‘na tassa’’tyādi.Tasmāti yasmā bhikkhubhāvo nāma na atthi, tasmā suvuttamevāti sambandho.

Etaṃti: This authoritativeness of the Aṭṭhakathācariyas. It is allowed only for the sake of restraint, only for the sake of non-offense, this is the connection. Therefore, he says "na tassa" etc. Tasmā: Since there is no such thing as bhikkhuhood, therefore it is well-spoken, is the connection.

80.ti bhikkhusammuti, saṅghena kātabbāti yojanā.Katthacīti kismiñci ṭhāne.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. ‘‘Vuttattā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘kātabbā’’ti pade hetu.Esāti eso bhikkhu.Hitesitāyāti hitassa esitāya, atthassa icchatāyāti attho.

80.Sā: That bhikkhu agreement, it should be done by the Saṅgha, is the connection. Katthacī: In some place. Idhā: In this training rule. The phrase "vuttattā" is the reason in the phrase "kātabbā." Esā: This bhikkhu. Hitesitāyā: For the sake of seeking benefit, meaning for the sake of desiring advantage.

82.Sesānīti ādimhi pañcasikkhāpadato sesāni upari pañca sikkhāpadāni.Assāti anupasampannassa.Ghaṭetvāti sambandhaṃ katvāti. Navamaṃ.

82.Sesānī: The remaining five training rules from the first five training rules. Assā: For one who is not fully ordained. Ghaṭetvā: Having made a connection. The ninth.

10. Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadaṃ
10. Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadaṃ

86.Dasame bhagavā dassetīti yojanā.Etthāti pathaviyaṃ.Tatthāti tesu pāsāṇādīsu.Muṭṭhippamāṇatoti khaṭakapamāṇato.ti adaḍḍhapathavī.Hatthikucchiyanti evaṃnāmake ṭhāne. Ekapacchipūraṃ pathavinti sambandho.Tesaṃyevāti appapaṃsuappamattikāpadānaṃ eva.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etanti yebhuyyenapāsāṇādipañcakaṃ.Tanti kusītaṃ.Āṇāpetvāti ettha ‘‘āṇa pesane’’ti dhātupāṭhesu vuttattā āṇadhātuyeva pesanasaṅkhātaṃ hetvatthaṃ vadati, na ṇāpepaccayo, so pana dhātvattheyeva vattati. Na hi tassa visuṃ vutto abhidheyyo atthi dhātvatthato aññassa abhidheyyassābhāvā.Tāvāti paṭhamaṃ pāḷimuttakavinicchayassa, tato vā.

86.In the tenth, the Blessed One shows, is the connection. Etthā: In the earth. Tatthā: In those stones etc. Muṭṭhippamāṇato: Than the measure of a cot leg. Sā: That loose earth. Hatthikucchiya: In a place named thus. One basketful of earth is the connection. Tesaṃyevā: Only of those small dust, small clay terms. Hīti: Truly, or because. Etaṃti: This mostly fivefold stone etc. Taṃti: That lazy one. Āṇāpetvā: Here, since it is said in the lists of roots "āṇa pesane," the root "āṇa" itself expresses the meaning of causation, which is sending, not the ṇāpe suffix, for that exists only in the meaning of the root. For it has no separately stated meaning, since there is no expressible meaning other than the root's meaning. Tāvā: First, of the free decision on the Pali, or then.

pokkharaṇī. ‘‘Sodhentehī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘ussiñcituṃ apanetu’’nti padesu bhāvakattā.Yoti ‘‘tanukaddamo’’ti padena yojetabbo. Yo tanukaddamoti hi attho.Kuṭehīti ghaṭehi.Ussiñcitunti ukkhipitvā, uddharitvā vā siñcituṃ.Tatrāti sukkhakaddame, ‘‘yo’’ti pade avayavīādhāro.Yoti sukkhakaddamo.

pokkharaṇī: The phrase "sodhentehī" is agent in the sense of action in the phrases "ussiñcituṃ apanetuṃ." Yo: Should be connected with the phrase "tanukaddamo." For it means "yo tanukaddamo". Kuṭehī: With pots. Ussiñcituṃ: To pour out by lifting up, or drawing up. Tatrā: In dry mud, "yo" is the locative in the part. Yo: The dry mud.

Taṭanti kūlaṃ.Udakasāmantāti udakassa samīpe.Omakacatumāsanti catumāsato ūnakaṃ.Ovaṭṭhanti devena ovassitaṃ hoti saceti yojanā.Patatīti taṭaṃ patati.Udakeyevāti pakatiudakeyeva.Udakassāti vassodakassa.Tatthāti pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ.Paṭhamamevāti soṇḍikhaṇanato paṭhamaṃ eva.Udake pariyādiṇṇeti udake sukkhe.Pacchāti udakapūrato pacchā.Tatthāti soṇḍiyaṃ.Udakeyevāti mūlaudakeyeva.Udakanti āgantukaudakaṃ.Allīyatīti piṭṭhipāsāṇe laggati.Tampīti sukhumarajampi.Akatapabbhāreti vaḷañjena akate pabbhāre. Upacikāhi vamīyati, gharagoḷikādayo vā satte vamatītivammiko.

Taṭaṃ: Bank. Udakasāmantā: Near the water. Omakacatumāsaṃ: Less than four months. Ovaṭṭhaṃ: It has been rained upon by a god, if, is the connection. Patatī: The bank falls. Udakeyevā: It is only natural water. Udakassā: Of the rainwater. Tatthā: On a stone surface. Paṭhamamevā: Before the digging of the channel itself. Udake pariyādiṇṇe: When the water is dried up. Pacchā: After the water is full. Tatthā: In the channel. Udakeyevā: It is only the original water. Udakaṃ: The adventitious water. Allīyatī: It sticks to the surface stone. Tampī: Even that fine dust. Akatapabbhāre: In a slope not made with a fence. One vomits out by termites, or creatures such as house lizards vomit, therefore vammiko.

gokaṇṭakonāma, tena chinno kaddamo ‘‘gokaṇṭako’’ti vuccati. Acchadanaṃ vā vinaṭṭhacchadanaṃ vā purāṇasenāsanaṃ hotīti yojanā.Tatoti purāṇasenāsanato, gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Avasesanti vinaṭṭhacchadanato. Avasesaṃ iṭṭhakaṃ gaṇhāmi iti saññāyāti yojetabbo.Tenāti iṭṭhakādinā.Yā yāti mattikā.Atintāti anallā, akilinnāti attho.

gokaṇṭako by name, mud cut with it is called "gokaṇṭako." Or an old dwelling that is uncovered or has lost its covering, is the connection. Tato: From that old dwelling, it is proper to take, is the connection. Avasesaṃ: From the destroyed covering. I take the remaining brick, this is the awareness to be connected. Tenā: With that brick etc. Yā yā: Whatever clay. Atintā: Not wet, not damp, is the meaning.

Tasminti mattikāpuñje.Sabboti sakalo mattikāpuñjo.Assāti mattikāpuñjassa. ‘‘Kappiyakārakehī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘apanāmetvā’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ. Kasmā vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘udakenā’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Tasmiṃti: In that heap of clay. Sabbo: The entire heap of clay. Assā: Of that heap of clay. The phrase "kappiyakārakehī" is the causative object in the phrase "apanāmetvā." Why is it proper? He says, "udakenā" etc. Hīti: Truly, or because.

Tatthāti mattikāpākāre.Aññampīti maṇḍapathambhato aññampi.Tena apadesenāti tena pāsāṇādipavaṭṭanalesena.

Tatthā: In the clay wall. Aññampī: Even other than the maṇḍapa pillar. Tena apadesenā: With that pretext of stone etc.

Passāvadhārāyāti muttasotāya.Kattarayaṭṭhiyāti kattaradaṇḍena. Ettha hi kattarayati aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sithilabhāvena sithilo hutvā bhavatīti katvākattarovuccati jiṇṇamanusso, tena ekantato gahetabbattā kattarena gahitā yaṭṭhi, kattarassa yaṭṭhīti vā katvā kattarayaṭṭhi vuccati kattaradaṇḍo. Dantajapaṭhamakkharena sajjhāyitabbo.Vīriyasampaggahaṇatthanti vīriyassa suṭṭhu paggaṇhanatthaṃ, vīriyassa ukkhipanatthanti attho. Keci bhikkhūti yojanā.

Passāvadhārāyā: With a stream of urine. Kattarayaṭṭhiyā: With a cripple's staff. Here, "kattarayati" because he becomes loose with the loosening of limbs, therefore kattaro means an old man. Because it must be taken from one side, a staff taken by a cripple, or the cripple's staff, therefore "kattarayaṭṭhi" means a cripple's staff. It should be recited with the first dental letter. Vīriyasampaggahaṇatthaṃti: For the sake of properly grasping energy, meaning for the sake of raising up energy. Some bhikkhus, is the connection.

87.Tatrāpīti iṭṭhakakapālādīsupi.ti saccaṃ.Tesaṃ anupādānattāti tesaṃ iṭṭhakādīnaṃ aggissa anindhanattā.ti saccaṃ, yasmāvā.Tānīti iṭṭhakādīni.Avisayattāti āpattiyā anokāsattā.Tiṇukkanti tiṇamayaṃ ukkaṃ.Tatthevāti mahāpaccariyaṃ eva. Arīyati agginipphādanatthaṃ ghaṃsīyati etthātiaraṇī,heṭṭhā nimanthanīyadāru. Saha dhanunā eti pavattatītisahito,upari nimanthanadāru. Araṇī ca sahito ca araṇīsahito, tena aggiṃ nibbattetvāti yojanā. Yathā kariyamāne na ḍayhati, tathā karohīti sambandho.

87.Tatrāpī: Even in bricks, potsherds, etc. Hīti: Truly. Tesaṃ anupādānattā: Because those bricks etc., do not fuel the fire. Hīti: Truly, or because. Tānī: Those bricks etc. Avisayattā: Because it is not an occasion for an offense. Tiṇukkaṃ: A torch made of grass. Tatthevā: Only in the Mahāpaccariya. It is rubbed for the purpose of producing fire, therefore araṇī, is the lower rubbing wood. It comes together with a bow, therefore sahito, the upper rubbing wood. Araṇī and sahito are araṇīsahito, having produced fire with that, is the connection. Do it in such a way that it is not burned while being done, is the connection.

88.Āvāṭaṃjānāti āvāṭaṃ kātuṃ, khaṇituṃ vā jānāhīti attho. ‘‘Evaṃ mahāmattikaṃ jāna, thusamattikaṃ jānā’’ti etthāpi yathālābhaṃ sampadānavācakapadaṃ ajjhāharitvā yojanā kātabbā.ti pathavī.Tenāti pavaṭṭanādināti. Dasamaṃ.

88.Āvāṭaṃjānā: Know how to make a pit, or to dig, is the meaning. Here also, in "Evaṃ mahāmattikaṃ jāna, thusamattikaṃ jānā," one should connect by supplying a word denoting the dative case as appropriate. Sā: That earth. Tenā: With that paving etc. The tenth.

Musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.

Musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.

2. Bhūtagāmavaggo

2. Bhūtagāmavaggo

1. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

89.Dutiyavaggassa paṭhametassāti devatāya.Ukkhittaṃ pharasunti uddhaṃ khittaṃ kuṭhāriṃ.Niggahetunti saṇṭhātuṃ, nivattetuṃ vā.Cakkhuvisayātīteti pasādacakkhussa gocarātikkante.Mahārājasantikāti vessavaṇamahārājassa santikā.Thanamūleyevāti thanasamīpeyeva.Himavanteti himauggiraṇe vane, himayutte vā.Tatthāti himavante, devatāsannipāte vā.Rukkhadhammoti rukkhasabhāvo. Rukkhadhammo ca nāma chedanabhedanādīsu rukkhānaṃ acetanattā kopassa akaraṇaṃ, tasmiṃ rukkhadhamme ṭhitā devatā rukkhadhamme ṭhitā nāma, chedanabhedanādīsu rukkhassa viya rukkhaṭṭhakadevatāya akopanaṃ rukkhadhamme ṭhitā nāmāti adhippāyo.Tatthāti tāsu sannipātadevatāsu.Itīti imassa alabhanassa, imasmiṃ alabhane vā, ādīnavanti sambandho.Bhagavato cāti ca-saddo ‘‘pubbacarita’’nti ettha yojetabbo. Imañca ādīnavaṃ addasa, bhagavato pubbacaritañca anussarīti vākyasampiṇḍanavasena yojanā kātabbā.Tenāti dassanānussaraṇakāraṇena.Assāti devatāya. Saṃvijjati pitā assātisapitiko,putto. (Tāvāti ativiya, paṭisañcikkhantiyāti sambandho) ‘‘mariyādaṃ bandhissatī’’ti vatvā tassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessatī’’ti. Iti paṭisañcikkhantiyā assā devatāya etadahosīti yojanā.

89.In the first of the second chapter, tassā: For that deity. Ukkhittaṃ pharasuṃ: An axe thrown upwards. Niggahetuṃ: To restrain, or to turn back. Cakkhuvisayātīte: Beyond the range of the eye of sense. Mahārājasantikā: From the presence of King Vessavaṇa. Thanamūleyevā: Just near the breast. Himavante: In the forest that emits cold, or is endowed with cold. Tatthā: In Himavanta, or in the assembly of deities. Rukkhadhammo: The nature of a tree. And the nature of a tree is the non-doing of anger due to the insentience of trees in cutting, breaking etc. The deity abiding in that nature of a tree is named abiding in the nature of a tree, meaning the non-angering of the tree deity in cutting, breaking etc., just like the tree, this is the intention. Tatthā: In those assembled deities. Itī: Of this failure to obtain, or in this failure to obtain, is the connection to ādīnavaṃ. Bhagavato cā: And the word "ca" should be connected with "pubbacarita." And she saw this danger, and she recalled the Blessed One's former conduct, this connection should be made by way of combining the sentences. Tenā: By that cause of seeing and recalling. Assā: For that deity. Saṃvijjati pitā assātisapitiko,putto. (Tāvā: Very much, it is connected to paṭisañcikkhantiyāti) After saying "mariyādaṃ bandhissati," showing its meaning, he says "sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessati." Thus, this occurred to that deity who was reflecting.

Yoti yo koci jano.Veti ekantena.Uppatitanti uppajjanavasena attano upari patitaṃ.Bhantanti bhamantaṃ dhāvantaṃ,vārayeti nivāreyya niggaṇheyyāti attho.Tanti janaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – sārathi bhantaṃ rathaṃ vāraye iva, tathā yo ve uppatitaṃ kodhaṃ vāraye, taṃ ahaṃ sārathiṃ iti brūmi. Itaro kodhanivārakato añño rājauparājādīnaṃ sārathibhūto jano rasmiggāho rajjuggāho nāmāti.

Yo: Whatever person. Ve: Certainly. Uppatitaṃ: Arisen, fallen upon oneself in the manner of arising. Bhantaṃ: Wandering, running, vāraye: Would prevent, would restrain, is the meaning. Taṃ: That person. And this is the connection here – just as a charioteer would restrain a wandering chariot, so too, whoever would restrain arisen anger, him I call a charioteer. The other, a person who is a charioteer to kings and viceroys other than the restrainer of anger, is called a rein-holder.

visaṭaṃvitthataṃsappavisaṃsappassa āsīvisassa visaṃ garaḷaṃosadhehibhesajjena, mantena ca vineti iva, tathā yo bhikkhave uppatitaṃ kodhaṃ mettāya vineti, so bhikkhuuragobhujagopurāṇaṃpure bhavaṃjiṇṇaṃpurāṇattā jiṇṇaṃ tacaṃ jahāti iva, tathāorapāraṃapārasaṅkhātaṃ pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanaṃ jahātīti yojanā kātabbā.

visaṭaṃextensivesappavisaṃthe poison of a snake, an āsīvisa, is garaḷaṃosadhehiwith medicine and with mantra, just as one would subdue, so too, monks, whoever subdues arisen anger with loving-kindness, that bhikkhu is a uragoserpentpurāṇaṃold, existing formerlyjiṇṇaṃworn out because of being old, just as one would shed an old skin, so tooorapāraṃthe five lower fetters that are reckoned as the near shore, one should make the connection that he abandons.

Tatrāti dvīsu gāthāsu. Vatthu pana vinaye ārūḷhanti yojanā.Athāti pacchā.Yassa devaputtassāti yena devaputtena.Pariggahoti paricchinditvā gahito.Soti devaputto.Tatoti upagamanato. Yadā hoti, tadāti yojanā.Mahesakkhadevatāsūti mahāparivārāsu devatāsu, mahātejāsu vā.Paṭikkamantīti apenti. Devatā yampi pañhaṃ pucchantīti yojanā.Tatthevāti attano vasanaṭṭhāneyeva.Upaṭṭhānanti upaṭṭhānatthāya, sampadānatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Atha vā upagantvā tiṭṭhati etthātiupaṭṭhānaṃ,bhagavato samīpaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ āgantvāti attho. Nanti taṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho.

Tatrā: In those two verses. However, the story is established in the Vinaya, is the connection. Athā: Then. Yassa devaputtassā: By which deva's son. Pariggaho: Grasped by cutting off. So: That deva's son. Tato: Than approaching. When it happens, then, is the connection. Mahesakkhadevatāsū: Among deities with great retinues, or with great power. Paṭikkamantī: They depart. What question do the deities ask?, is the connection. Tatthevā: In his own dwelling place itself. Upaṭṭhānaṃ: For the purpose of attendance, and this is a dative usage. Or, what one stands near by approaching is upaṭṭhānaṃ, attendance on the Blessed One, having come to that, is the meaning. Nanti taṃ, or this is the reading.

90.‘‘Bhavantī’’ti iminā virūḷhe mūle nīlabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā vaḍḍhamānake taruṇarukkhagacchādike dasseti. ‘‘Ahuvatthu’’nti iminā pana vaḍḍhitvā ṭhite mahantarukkhagacchādike dasseti. ‘‘Ahuvatthu’’nti ca hiyyattanisaṅkhātāya tthuṃ-vibhattiyā hū-dhātussa ūkārassa uvādeso hoti. Potthakesu pana ‘‘ahuvatī’’ti pāṭho dissati, so apāṭhoti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Jāyantī’’ti iminā bhū-dhātussa sattatthabhāvaṃ dasseti, ‘‘vaḍḍhantī’’ti iminā vaḍḍhanatthabhāvaṃ.Etanti ‘‘bhūtagāmo’’ti nāmaṃ. Pīyate yathākāmaṃ paribhuñjīyate, pātabbaṃ paribhuñjitabbanti vāpātabyaṃ,pāsaddo yathākāmaparibhuñjanattho. Tenāha – ‘‘chedanabhedanādīhi yathāruci paribhuñjitabbatāti attho’’ti.

90. "Bhavantī" (becoming) shows the young tree seedlings, etc., that have taken on a blue hue in the virūḷha root and are growing. "Ahuvatthu" (become) shows the larger tree seedlings, etc., that have grown and are established. And in "ahuvatthu," the ū of the hū-dhātu becomes uva by the tthu-vibhatti, which is counted as past tense. However, in the books, the reading "ahuvatī" is found, which should be regarded as a misreading. "Jāyantī" (being born) shows the bhū-dhātu's state of having essence. "Vaḍḍhantī" (growing) shows the state of having the essence of growth. Eta (this) is the name "bhūtagāmo" (plant life). It is enjoyed and consumed as desired, or it should be drunk and consumed; pātabyaṃ, the word pā has the meaning of enjoying as desired. Therefore, it is said, "Meaning, it should be enjoyed as desired by cutting, splitting, etc."

91.‘‘Idānī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘āhā’’ti pade kālasattamī.Yasminti bīje.Tanti bījaṃ.Pañca bījajātānīti ettha jātasaddassa tabbhāvatthataṃ sandhāya aṭṭhakathāsu evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tabbhāvatthassa ‘‘mūle jāyantī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā asaṃsandanataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ saṅgahakārena ‘‘na samentī’’ti. Aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ matena sati jātasaddassa tabbhāvatthabhāve ‘‘mūle jāyantī’’tiādīsu mūle mūlāni jāyantīti doso bhaveyyāti manasi katvā āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tānīti rukkhādīni.Tassāti ‘‘bhūtagāmo nāma pañca bījajātānī’’ti padassa.Etanti ‘‘bījajātānī’’ti nāmaṃ. Bījesu jātānibījajātānīti vutte ‘‘mūle jāyantī’’tiādinā sameti.Etenāti ‘‘bījato’’tiādinā saṅgahoti sambandho.

91. The word "idānī" (now) is a locative of time in the word "āha" (says). Yasmiṃ (in which) seed. Taṃ (that) seed. Pañca bījajātānī (five kinds of seeds): Here, considering the word jāta to have the meaning of "that-ness," it is said thus in the commentaries. Considering the non-alignment of the "that-ness" meaning with the phrase "mūle jāyantī" (growing in the root), the compiler said, "na samenti" (they do not agree). The teachers of the commentaries, thinking that if the word jāta has the meaning of "that-ness," there would be a fault in "mūle jāyantī," etc., that roots, roots are born, say, "na hī" (not indeed), etc. (indeed) is true, or because. Tānī (those) are trees, etc. Tassā (of that) of the phrase "bhūtagāmo nāma pañca bījajātānī" (plant life is the name for five kinds of seeds). Etaṃ (this) is the name "bījajātānī" (kinds of seeds). Bījesu jātāni bījajātānī (born from seeds) agrees with "mūle jāyantī" (growing in the root), etc. Etenā (by this) there is a connection to the compilation of "bījato" (from seed), etc.

Tesanti bījānaṃ. Rukkhādīnaṃ viruhanaṃ janetītibījaṃ. ‘‘Bījato’’tiādinā kāriyopacārena kāraṇassa dassitattā kāraṇūpacāraṃ padīpeti. Aññānipi yāni vā pana gacchavallirukkhādīniatthisaṃvijjanti, tāni gacchavallirukkhādīni jāyanti sañjāyantīti yojanā.Tānīti gacchavallirukkhādīni.Tañcamūlaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ vuttahaliddādi ca atthi, sabbampi etaṃ mūlabījaṃ nāmāti sambandho.Etthāti bījesu, khandhabījesu vā.

Tesaṃ (of those) seeds. That which generates the growth of trees, etc., is bījaṃ (seed). Since the cause is shown by way of figurative expression of action in "bījato" (from seed), etc., it illuminates the figurative treatment of cause. Aññānipi (others also) whichever plants, vines, trees, etc., atthi (exist), those plants, vines, trees, etc., jāyanti (are born), sañjāyanti (come into being), this is the construction. Tānī (those) are plants, vines, trees, etc. Tañca (and that) root, and the turmeric, etc., mentioned in the Pāḷi, all of this is called mūlabījaṃ (root-seed), this is the connection. Ettha (here) in seeds, or in stem-seeds.

92.Saññāvasenāti ‘‘bīja’’nti saññāvasena. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘veditabbo’’ti pade ādhāro. ‘‘Yathā’’tiādinā kāraṇopacārena kāriyassa vuttattā phalūpacāraṃ dasseti. Yaṃ bījaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ dukkaṭavatthūti yojanā. Yadetaṃ ādipadanti yojetabbaṃ.Tenāti ādipadena. Ravīyati bhagavatā kathīyatītirutaṃ,pāḷi, tassa anurūpaṃyathārutaṃ,pāḷianatikkantanti attho.

92. Saññāvasenā (by way of designation) by way of the designation "bīja" (seed). "Tattha" (there) is the locus in the word "veditabbo" (should be understood). From "yathā" (as), etc., since the effect is stated by way of figurative expression of the cause, it shows the figurative expression of the fruit. Yaṃ bījaṃ vuttaṃ (that seed which is spoken of), taṃ dukkaṭavatthūti yojanā (that is an occasion for a dukkata offense, this is the construction). Yadetaṃ ādipadanti yojetabbaṃ (This which is the first word should be connected). Tenā (by that) by the first word. Ravīyati bhagavatā kathīyatīti rutaṃ (that which is spoken, declared by the Blessed One) the Pāḷi, tassa anurūpaṃ yathārutaṃ (in accordance with what is spoken), meaning not exceeding the Pāḷi.

Etthāti ‘‘bīje bījasaññī’’tiādipade, imasmiṃ sikkhāpade vā. Udake ṭhāti pavattatītiudakaṭṭho,evaṃ thalaṭṭhopi.Tatthāti udakaṭṭhathalaṭṭhesu. Sāsapassa mattaṃ pamāṇaṃ assa sevālassātisāsapamattiko. Tilassa bījapamāṇaṃ assa sevālassātitilabījako. Pamāṇatthe ko. Ādisaddena saṅkhapaṇakādayo sevāle saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha tilabījapamāṇo jalasaṇṭhito nīlādivaṇṇayutto sevālotilabījaṃnāma, sapatto appakaṇḍo ukkhalipidhānādipamāṇo samūlo eko sevālavisesosaṅkhonāma, bhamarasaṇṭhāno nīlavaṇṇo eko sevālavisesopaṇakonāma. Udakaṃ sevatītisevālo. Tatthāti sevālesu.Yoti sevālo. Patiṭṭhitaṃ sevālanti sambandho.Yattha katthacīti mūle vā naḷe vā patte vā.Uddharitvāti uppāṭetvā. ‘‘Hatthehī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘viyūhitvā’’ti pade karaṇaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tassāti sevālassa.Ettāvatāti ito cito ca viyūhanamattena. Yo sevālo nikkhamati, taṃ sevālanti yojanā.Parissāvanantarenāti parissāvanachiddena. Uppalāni asmiṃ gacchetiuppalinī. Padumāni asmiṃ gacchetipaduminī,ino, itthiliṅgajotako ī.Tatthevāti udakeyeva.Tānīti vallītiṇāni.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Anantakoti sāsapamattiko sevālo. So hi natthi attato anto lāmako sevālo etassāti katvā ‘‘anantako’’ti vuccati. Attanāyeva hi sukhumo, tato sukhumo sevālo natthīti adhippāyo.Tatthāti dukkaṭavatthubhāve.Tampīti ‘‘sampuṇṇabhūtagāmaṃ na hotī’’ti vacanampi. Pisaddo mahāpaccariādiaṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vacanāpekkho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Na āgato, tasmā na sametīti yojanā.Athāti tasmiṃ anāgate.Etanti anantakasevālādiṃ. Gacchissatīti vadeyyāti sambandho.Tampīti ‘‘gacchissatī’’ti vacanampi. Pisaddo purimaṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vacanāpekkho.

Ettha (here) in the phrase "bīje bījasaññī" (perceiving seed in seed), etc., or in this training rule. Udake ṭhāti pavattatīti udakaṭṭho (standing and existing in water), likewise thalaṭṭho (standing on land) too. Sāsapassa mattaṃ pamāṇaṃ assa sevālassāti sāsapamattiko (having the measure of a mustard seed, its moss). Tilassa bījapamāṇaṃ assa sevālassāti tilabījako (having the measure of a sesame seed, its moss). The suffix 'ko' is in the sense of measure. By the word 'ādi' (etc.), it includes moss such as saṅkha and paṇaka. There, the moss, which is sesame-seed sized, situated in water, and possessing blue and other colors is called tilabījaṃ (sesame-seed); a certain kind of moss, complete with roots, leaves, small stems, and about the size of an ukkhali pot lid, is called saṅkho; a certain kind of moss, shaped like a bee and blue in color, is called paṇako. Udakaṃ sevatīti sevālo (that which frequents water is moss). Tattha (there) in the mosses. Yo (which) moss. Patiṭṭhitaṃ sevālanti sambandho (the established moss, this is the connection). Yattha katthacī (wherever) in a root or a reed or a leaf. Uddharitvā (having removed) having uprooted. "Hatthehī" (with the hands) is the instrumental case in "viyūhitvā" (having pulled apart). (indeed) is true, or because. Tassā (of that) moss. Ettāvatā (to this extent) by merely pulling it apart from here and there. Yo sevālo nikkhamati, taṃ sevālanti yojanā (that moss which comes out, that is the moss, this is the construction). Parissāvanantarenā (without a strainer). Uppalāni asmiṃ gaccheti uppalinī (lotuses are in this clump). Padumāni asmiṃ gaccheti paduminī (lotuses are in this clump), ino, the ī indicates the feminine gender. Tatthevā (just there) in the water itself. Tānī (those) are vines and grasses. (indeed) is true, or because. Anantako (endless) is mustard-seed sized moss. So hi natthi attato anto lāmako sevālo etassāti katvā "anantako"ti vuccati (because there is no inferior moss smaller than itself, therefore it is called "anantako"). Attanāyeva hi sukhumo, tato sukhumo sevālo natthīti adhippāyo (for it is subtle by its very nature, the intention is that there is no moss more subtle than that). Tattha (there) in the state of being an occasion for a dukkata offense. Tampī (even that) even the statement "sampuṇṇabhūtagāmaṃ na hotī" (it is not complete plant life). The particle pi is in consideration of the statements of the teachers of the Great Commentary, etc. (indeed) is true, or because. Na āgato, tasmā na sametīti yojanā (it has not come, therefore it does not agree, this is the construction). Athā (then) in that future. Etaṃ (this) anantaka moss, etc. Gacchissatīti vadeyyāti sambandho (he should say that it will grow, this is the connection). Tampī (even that) even the statement "gacchissati" (it will grow). The particle pi is in consideration of the statements of the earlier commentary teachers.

Abhūtagāmamūlattātādisassa bījagāmassāti ettha bījagāmo tividho hoti – yo sayaṃ bhūtagāmato hutvā aññampi bhūtagāmaṃ janeti, ambaṭṭhiādiko. Yo pana sayaṃ bhūtagāmato hutvā aññaṃ pana bhūtagāmaṃ na janeti, tālanāḷikerādikhāṇu. Yo pana sayampi bhūtagāmato ahutvā aññampi bhūtagāmaṃ na janeti. Pānīyaghaṭādīnaṃ bahi sevāloti. Bhūtagāmo pana catubbidho hoti – yo sayaṃ bījagāmato hutvā aññampi bījagāmaṃ janeti, etarahi ambarukkhādiko. Yo pana sayaṃ bījagāmato ahutvāva aññaṃ bījagāmaṃ janeti, ādikappakāle ambarukkhādiko. Yo pana sayaṃ bījagāmato hutvā aññaṃ pana bījagāmaṃ na janeti, nīlavaṇṇo phalitakadalīrukkhādiko. Yo pana sayampi bījagāmato ahutvā aññampi bījagāmaṃ na janeti, idha vutto anantakasevālādikoti. Tattha catutthaṃ bhūtagāmaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘abhūtagāmamūlakattā tādisassa bījassā’’ti. Ayaṃ pana tatiyabījagāmassa ca catutthabhūtagāmassa ca viseso – tatiyabījagāme mūlapaṇṇāni na paññāyanti, catutthabhūtagāme tāni paññāyantīti. Mūlapaṇṇānaṃ apaññāyanattā bījagāmoti vutto, tesaṃ paññāyanattā bhūtagāmoti vutto. Itarathā hi virodho bhaveyyāti. Attano vāde pācittiyabhāvato garukaṃ, mahāpaccariādīnaṃ vāde dukkaṭamattabhāvato lahukaṃ.Etanti ṭhānaṃ.

Abhūtagāmamūlattā tādisassa bījagāmassā (because of the root of non-plant-life, of such seed-group): here, the seed-group is of three kinds – that which, being itself from plant-life, generates other plant-life as well, such as mango trees, etc.; that which, being itself from plant-life, does not generate other plant-life, such as palm trees, coconut palms, stumps; and that which, not being itself from plant-life, does not generate other plant-life, such as moss outside water pots, etc. Plant-life, however, is of four kinds – that which, being itself from seed-group, generates other seed-group as well, such as mango trees, etc., at the present time; that which, not being itself from seed-group, generates other seed-group, such as mango trees, etc., at the beginning of the age; that which, being itself from seed-group, does not generate other seed-group, such as blue-colored, fruit-bearing banana trees; and that which, not being itself from seed-group, does not generate other seed-group, such as the anantaka moss mentioned here. There, with reference to the fourth plant-life, it is said, "abhūtagāmamūlakattā tādisassa bījassā" (because of the root of non-plant-life, of such a seed). This, however, is the distinction between the third seed-group and the fourth plant-life – in the third seed-group, roots and leaves are not evident, in the fourth plant-life, they are evident. Because roots and leaves are not evident, it is called seed-group; because they are evident, it is called plant-life. Otherwise, there would be a contradiction. In one's own view, it is grave because of the state of pācittiya; in the view of the Great Commentary, etc., it is light because of the state of merely dukkata. Etaṃ (this) ṭhānaṃ (case).

Tatthāti haritakhāṇūsu.Uddhaṃ vaḍḍhatīti navasākhāniggamanena chinnato upari vaḍḍhati.Soti khāṇu. Phalitāya kadaliyā khāṇu bījagāmena saṅgahitoti yojanā. Phalaṃ sañjātaṃ etissātiphalitā. Tathāti ‘‘bhūtagāmeneva saṅgahitā’’ti padāni ākaḍḍhati.Yadāti yasmiṃ kāle.Ratanappamāṇāpīti hatthappamāṇāpi.Athāti apādānattho, tato rāsikaraṇato aññanti attho. Bhūmiyaṃ nikhaṇantīti sambandho. ‘‘Mūlesu ceva paṇṇesu cā’’ti ettha casaddo samuccayatthova, na vikappatthoti āha ‘‘mūlamattesu panā’’tiādi.

Tattha (there) in the green stumps. Uddhaṃ vaḍḍhatī (it grows upwards) it grows above the cut by the emergence of new branches. So (that) stump. Phalitāya kadaliyā khāṇu bījagāmena saṅgahitoti yojanā (the stump of a fruit-bearing banana tree is included in the seed-group, this is the construction). Phalaṃ sañjātaṃ etissāti phalitā (fruit has arisen in this, therefore, fruit-bearing). Tathā (likewise) it draws in the words "bhūtagāmeneva saṅgahitā" (included in plant-life itself). Yadā (when) at what time. Ratanappamāṇāpī (even span-sized) even hand-span sized. Athā (then) is not the sense of separation, meaning other than collecting into a heap. Bhūmiyaṃ nikhaṇantīti sambandho (they bury it in the ground, this is the connection). "Mūlesu ceva paṇṇesu cā" (in roots and also in leaves), here the particle ca has only the meaning of conjunction, not of option, therefore he says, "mūlamattesu panā" (but in the mere roots), etc.

Bījānīti mūlādibījāni. Ṭhapitāni hontīti sambandho. ‘‘Uparī’’ti padena heṭṭhā mūlāni cāti atthaṃ nayena ñāpeti. Na aṅkure niggatamatteyeva, atha kho harite nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇe jāteyeva bhūtagāmasaṅgaho kātabboti āha ‘‘harite’’tiādi. Tālaṭṭhīnaṃ mūlanti sambandho.Dantasūci viyāti hatthidantasūci viya. Yathā asampuṇṇabhūtagāmo tatiyo koṭṭhāso na āgato, na evaṃ amūlakabhūtagāmo. So pana āgatoyevāti āha ‘‘amūlakabhūtagāme’’ti. Amūlikalatā viya amūlakabhūtagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti attho.

Bījānī (seeds) are root-seeds, etc. Ṭhapitāni hontīti sambandho (they are placed, this is the connection). "Uparī" (above) indicates by way of inference that the roots are also below. Na aṅkure niggatamatteyeva, atha kho harite nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇe jāteyeva bhūtagāmasaṅgaho kātabboti āha "harite" (not merely when sprouts have emerged, but rather when it has become green, when a blue-leafed color has arisen, then the inclusion in plant-life should be done), thus he says "harite" (when green), etc. Tālaṭṭhīnaṃ mūlanti sambandho (the root of palm stumps, this is the connection). Dantasūci viyā (like an ivory needle) like an ivory needle. Yathā asampuṇṇabhūtagāmo tatiyo koṭṭhāso na āgato, na evaṃ amūlakabhūtagāmo. So pana āgatoyevāti āha "amūlakabhūtagāme" (just as incomplete plant-life, the third section, has not come, so it is not with rootless plant-life. But that has indeed come), thus he says "amūlakabhūtagāme" (in rootless plant-life). Amūlikalatā viya amūlakabhūtagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti attho (the meaning is that it goes to inclusion in rootless plant-life, like a rootless creeper).

Vandākāti rukkhādanī. Sā hi sayaṃ rukkhaṃ nissāya jāyantīpi attano nissayānaṃ rukkhānaṃ adanattā bhakkhanattā vadīyati thutīyatīti ‘‘vandākā’’ti vuccati.Aññā vāti vandākāya aññā vā.Tanti vandākādiṃ.Tatoti rukkhato.Vananti khuddako gaccho.Pagumboti mahāgaccho.Daṇḍakoti rukkho daṇḍayogato.Tassāpīti amūlikalatāyapi.Ayameva vinicchayoti vandākādikassa vinicchayo viya ayaṃ vinicchayo daṭṭhabboti yojanā. ‘‘Dve tīṇi pattānī’’ti vuttattā ekapatto sañjāyantopi aggabījasaṅgahaṃ gacchatīti attho. ‘‘Anupasampannenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘littassā’’ti pade kattā.Nidāghasamayeti gimhakāle.Abbohārikoti āpattiyā aṅganti na voharitabbo. Voharituṃ na arahatīti attho.Etanti abbohārikataṃ, ‘‘sace…pe… pamajjitabbā’’ti vacanaṃ vā.

Vandākā (parasitic plant) is a tree-eater. Sā hi sayaṃ rukkhaṃ nissāya jāyantīpi attano nissayānaṃ rukkhānaṃ adanattā bhakkhanattā vadīyati thutīyatīti "vandākā"ti vuccati (for even though it arises depending on a tree itself, it is called "vandākā" because it speaks and praises by eating and consuming the trees it depends on). Aññā vā (or another) or another than vandākā. Taṃ (that) vandākā, etc. Tato (from that) from the tree. Vana (grove) is a small clump. Pagumbo (thicket) is a large clump. Daṇḍako (staff) is a tree because of its use as a staff. Tassāpī (even of that) even of the rootless creeper. Ayameva vinicchayo (this same judgment) just as the judgment for vandākā, etc., this judgment should be understood, this is the construction. "Dve tīṇi pattānī" (two or three leaves) having been said, the meaning is that even when one leaf arises, it goes to the inclusion of the tip-seed. "Anupasampannenā" (by one not fully ordained) is the subject in "littassā" (having smeared). Nidāghasamaye (in the hot season) in the summer time. Abbohāriko (unusable) should not be used as an element of an offense. Voharituṃ na arahatīti attho (meaning, it is not proper to use). Etaṃ (this) is unusability, or the statement "sace…pe… pamajjitabbā" (if…it should be overlooked).

ahicchattaṃ,taṃyevaahicchattakaṃ. Yathākathañci hi byuppatti, ruḷhiyā atthavinicchayo.Tasmāti tato vikopanato.Tatthāti ahicchattake. Heṭṭhā ‘‘udakapappaṭako’’ti vatvā idha ‘‘rukkhapappaṭikāyapī’’ti vuttattā pappaṭakasaddo dviliṅgoti daṭṭhabbo.Tanti pappaṭikaṃ. Ṭhitaṃ niyyāsanti sambandho. Evaṃ ‘‘lagga’’nti etthāpi.Hatthakukkuccenāti hatthalolena. ‘‘Chindantassāpī’’ti pade hetu.

ahicchattaṃ, (mushroom) that same is ahicchattakaṃ (little mushroom). For somehow or other, there is etymology, but the meaning is decided by convention. Tasmā (therefore) from that cutting up. Tattha (there) in the mushroom. Having said "udakapappaṭako" (water-scum) below, and having said here "rukkhapappaṭikāyapī" (also tree-scum), the word pappaṭaka should be seen as being of two genders. Taṃ (that) scum. Ṭhitaṃ niyyāsanti sambandho (the fixed sap, this is the connection). Likewise, also in "lagga" (attached) here. Hatthakukkuccenā (with hand-scrupulousness) with a hand that is unsteady. "Chindantassāpī" (even when cutting) is the reason.

Vāsatthikenāti vāsaṃ icchantena. ‘‘Ocināpetabbā’’ti pade kattā.Uppāṭentehīti uddharantehi.Tesanti sāmaṇerānaṃ. Sākhaṃ gahitanti sambandho. Ṭhapitassa siṅgīverassāti yojanā.

Vāsatthikenā (by one desiring lodging). Is the subject in "ocināpetabbā" (should cause to be plucked). Uppāṭentehī (by those uprooting). Tesaṃ (of those) of the novices. Sākhaṃ gahitanti sambandho (the branch is grasped, this is the connection). Ṭhapitassa siṅgīverassāti yojanā (of the placed ginger, this is the construction).

Chijjanakanti chijjanayuttaṃ, chijjanārahanti attho. ‘‘Caṅkamitaṭṭhānaṃ dassessāmī’’ti iminā vattasīsena caṅkamanaṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti. ‘‘Bhijjatī’’ti iminā abhijjamāne gaṇṭhipi kātabboti dasseti.Dārumakkaṭakanti makkaṭassa hatthomakkaṭoupacārena, makkaṭo viyātimakkaṭako,sadisatthe ko. Dārusaṅkhāto makkaṭakodārumakkaṭako. Taṃ ākoṭentīti sambandho.Aniyāmitattāti imanti aniyāmitattā vacanassa. Idaṃ mahāsāmaññaṃ, visesasāmaññampi vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘nāmaṃ gahetvāpī’’tiādi.Sabbanti sabbaṃ vacanaṃ.

Chijjanaka (breakable) has the quality of being breakable, meaning fit to be broken. "Caṅkamitaṭṭhānaṃ dassessāmī" (I will show the walking place) by this, he shows that walking with the head turned is fitting. "Bhijjatī" (it breaks) by this, he shows that even when it does not break, a knot should be made. Dārumakkaṭaka (wooden monkey) the hand of a monkey is makkaṭo (monkey) figuratively, like a monkey is makkaṭako (little monkey), the suffix 'ko' is in the sense of similarity. Dārusaṅkhāto makkaṭako dārumakkaṭako (a monkey known as wood is a wooden monkey). Taṃ ākoṭentīti sambandho (they strike that, this is the connection). Aniyāmitattā (because of being unrestricted) because of the unrestriction of this statement. This is a general instruction, a specific instruction is also fitting, thus he says "nāmaṃ gahetvāpī" (even having taken the name), etc. Sabbaṃ (all) all the statement.

Imaṃ mūlabhesajjaṃ jānāti imaṃ mūlabhesajjaṃ yojituṃ jānāti yojanā.Ettāvatāti ‘‘imaṃ jānā’’tiādivacanamattena.Kappiyanti samaṇavohārena, vohārassa vā yuttaṃ anurūpaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘kappiyaṃ kātabba’’nti vacane.Nibbaṭṭabījamevāti phalato nibbaṭṭetvā visuṃ kataṃ bījaṃ eva.Tatthāti sutte. Karontena bhikkhunā kātabbanti yojanā.‘‘Kappiyanti vatvāvā’’ti iminā paṭhamaṃ katvā aggisatthanakhāni uddharitvā pacchā vattuṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.Lohamayasatthassāti ayatambādilohamayassa satthassa.Tehīti manussādīnaṃ nakhehi.Tehīti assādīnaṃ khurehi.Tehīti hatthinakhehi.Yehīti nakhehi.Tatthajātakehipīti tasmiṃ satthe jātakehipi, nakhehīti sambandho.

Imaṃ mūlabhesajjaṃ jānā (he knows this root medicine) he knows how to apply this root medicine, this is the construction. Ettāvatā (to this extent) by merely the statement "imaṃ jānā" (he knows this), etc. Kappiyaṃ (allowable) fitting or appropriate to the practice of ascetics. Ettha (here) in the statement "kappiyaṃ kātabba" (it should be made allowable). Nibbaṭṭabījamevā (the seed should only be extracted) the seed should only be extracted, having taken it separately from the fruit. Tattha (there) in the sutta. Karontena bhikkhunā kātabbanti yojanā (it should be done by the bhikkhu who is doing it, this is the construction). "Kappiyanti vatvāvā" (having said "allowable") by this, he shows that it is not fitting to do it first, extract with fire, a knife, or nails, and then say it afterwards. Lohamayasatthassā (of a metal knife) of a knife made of copper or other metal. Tehī (with the) with the nails of humans, etc. Tehī (with the) with the hooves of horses, etc. Tehī (with the) with the nails of elephants. Yehī (with which) with which nails. Tatthajātakehipī (even with those born in that) even with the nails born in that knife, this is the connection.

Tatthāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyaṃ karontenā’’tiādivacanamapekkhati. ‘‘Ucchuṃ kappiyaṃ karissāmī’’ti ucchumeva vijjhati, pageva. ‘‘Dāruṃ kappiyaṃ karissāmī’’ti ucchuṃ vijjhati, ‘‘dāruṃ kappiyaṃ karissāmī’’ti dārumeva vā vijjhati, vaṭṭati ekābaddhattāti vadanti.Tanti rajjuṃ vā valliṃ vā. Sabbaṃ khaṇḍanti sambandho.Tatthāti maricapakkesu.Kaṭāhanti ekāya bhājanavikatiyā nāmametaṃ. Idha pana bījānaṃ bhājanabhāvena taṃsadisattā phalapheggupi ‘‘kaṭāha’’nti vuccati. Ekābaddhanti kaṭāhena ekato ābaddhaṃ.

Tattha (there) with reference to the previous statement. "Kappiyaṃ karontenā" (by one making allowable), etc., expects the statement. "Ucchuṃ kappiyaṃ karissāmī" (I will make the sugarcane allowable) he pierces only the sugarcane, right there. "Dāruṃ kappiyaṃ karissāmī" (I will make the wood allowable) he pierces the sugarcane, or "dāruṃ kappiyaṃ karissāmī" (I will make the wood allowable) he pierces only the wood, it is fitting because it is joined as one, they say. Taṃ (that) rope or vine. Sabbaṃ khaṇḍanti sambandho (they cut everything, this is the connection). Tattha (there) in ripe peppers. Kaṭāha (shell) this is the name for a kind of container. Here, however, because of the state of being a container for seeds, the soft pulp of the fruit is also called "kaṭāha" because of its similarity to that. Ekābaddhaṃ (joined as one) joined as one with the shell.

Tānīti tiṇāni.Tenāti rukkhapavaṭṭanādinā.Tatrāti tasmiṃ ṭhapanapātanaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Manussaviggahapārājikavaṇṇanāya’’nti padaṃ ‘‘vutta’’nti pade sāmaññādhāro. Bhikkhu ajjhotthaṭo hotīti sambandho.Opāteti āvāṭe. So hi avapatanaṭṭhānattā ‘‘opāto’’ti vuccati.Rukkhanti ajjhotthaṭarukkhaṃ.Bhūminti opātathirabhūmiṃ.Jīvitahetūti nimittatthe paccattavacanaṃ, jīvitakāraṇāti attho. ‘‘Bhikkhunā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘nikkhāmetu’’nti pade bhāvakattā, kāritakattā vā. ‘‘Ajjhotthaṭabhikkhu’’nti vā ‘‘opātabhikkhu’’nti vā kāritakammaṃ ajjhāharitabbaṃ.Tatthāti anāpattibhāve, anāpattibhāvassa vā.Etassāti suttassa. Paro pana kāruññena karotīti sambandho.Etampīti kāruññampi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

2. Aññavādakasikkhāpadaṃ

94.Dutiyeanācāranti acaritabbaṃ kāyavacīdvāravītikkamaṃ. Sabbanāmassa aniyamatthattā idha vacananti āha ‘‘aññena vacanena aññaṃ vacana’’nti.Soti bhikkhu, vadatīti sambandho.Koti ko puggalo.Kinti kiṃ āpattiṃ.Kisminti kismiṃ vatthusmiṃ.Kinti kiṃ kammaṃ.Kanti kaṃ puggalaṃ.Kinti kiṃ vacanaṃ.

Etthāti ‘‘ko āpanno’’tiādipāḷiyaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhūhī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘vutto’’ti pade kattā.Asāruppanti bhikkhūnaṃ asāruppaṃ.Esoti eso attho, vibhavoti attho.Etanti vatthu. Bhaṇanto vā hutvā aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti sambandho.Etthāti paṭicchannāsane.Sotanti sotadvāraṃ.Cakkhunti cakkhudvāraṃ.

98.Aññanti pucchitatthato aññaṃ apucchitamatthaṃ. Bhāvappadhānoyaṃ kattuniddesoti āha ‘‘aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇassetaṃ nāma’’nti.Tuṇhībhāvassāti abhāsanassa. Ātyūpasaggo luttaniddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘āropetū’’ti. Evaṃ ‘‘aropite’’ti etthapi. Tenāha ‘‘anāropite’’ti.

101.Tanti aññavādakavihesakaropanakammaṃ.Assāti bhaveyya, hoti vā.

102.Kinti kiṃ vacanaṃ.Yenāti yena byādhinā kathetuṃ na sakkoti, tādiso byādhi mukhe hotīti yojanā.Tappaccayāti tato kathitakāraṇāti. Dutiyaṃ.

3. Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadaṃ

103.Tatiyebhikkhū ujjhāpentīti ettha ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti kāritakammattā karaṇatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘tehi bhikkhūhī’’ti. Okāraviparīto ukāroti ca jhesaddo ñāṇatthoti ca dassento āha ‘‘avajānāpentī’’ti. ‘‘Taṃ āyasmanta’’nti padaṃ ‘‘avajānāpentī’’ti pade dhātukammaṃ. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ jhesaddo olokanattho ca cintanattho ca hoti, tenāha ‘‘olokāpentī’’tiādi.Etthāti ‘‘bhikkhū ujjhāpentī’’ti pade.Chandāyāti chandatthaṃ. Yesaṃ senāsanāni ca paññapeti, bhattāni ca uddisati, tesaṃ attani pematthanti attho. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘chandāyāti chandenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā liṅgavipallāsanayo vutto. Paresaṃ attano pemenāti attho.Pakkhapātenāti attano pakkhe pātāpanena.

105.Ujjhāpenti anenātiujjhāpanakaṃ. Khiyyanti anenātikhiyyanakanti dassento āha ‘‘yena vacanenā’’tiādi.

106.Upasampannaṃ saṅghena sammataṃ maṅkukattukāmoti sambandhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘upasampannaṃ saṅghena sammata’’ntiādi. Sambajjhanaṃsambandho,kātabboti yojanā. Upasampannassa saṅghena sammatassa avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo ayasaṃ kattukāmoti vibhattivipariṇāmena sambandhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vibhattivipariṇāmo kātabbo’’ti. ‘‘Vasenā’’ti padaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmo kātabbo’’ti pade visesanaṃ. Yasmā viseso natthi, tasmā katanti yojanā.Tanti ‘‘khiyyanaka’’nti padaṃ.So ca bhikkhūti ujjhāpanako ca khiyyanako ca so ca bhikkhu.Athāti tasmā ujjhāpanakakhiyyanakakarattā.Assāti bhikkhuno.Assāti bhaveyya.

Tassāti anupasampannassa santiketi sambandho.Tanti saṅghena sammataṃ upasampannaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghena asammata’’nti ettha na apalokanakammena asammataṃ, kammavācāya pana asammatanti āha ‘‘kammavācāyā’’tiādi. Dve tayo hutvā kammavācāya sammanitumasakkuṇeyyattā asammatanti ca dassento āha ‘‘yatrā’’tiādi.Yatrāti yasmiṃ vihāre. ‘‘Anupasampannaṃ saṅghena sammata’’nti ettha anupasampannassa sammutiyo dātumasakkuṇeyyattā pubbavohāravasena sammatanti vuttanti dassento āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi.Tanti anupasampannabhāve ṭhitaṃ.Byattassāti viyattassa. Saṅghena vā katoti yojanāti. Tatiyaṃ.

4. Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

108.Catutthe himameva himanto, himante niyuttohemantiko,kāloti āha ‘‘hemantakāle’’ti. Otāpentā pakkamiṃsūti sambandho. Kālasaddassa sambandhisaddattā sambandhāpekkhoti āha ‘‘yassa kassacī’’ti.Himavassenāti himena ca vassena ca.

110.‘‘Vassiko’’ti na saṅketātiavassikasaṅketā. ‘‘Aṭṭha māse’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi ‘‘avassikasaṅkete’’ti visesitattā hemantikagimhikamāsāyeva gahetabbāti āha ‘‘cattāro hemantike’’tiādi.Yatthāti yasmiṃ rukkhe. Na ūhadantīti sambandho. ‘‘Kākā vā’’ti ettha vāsaddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tenāha ‘‘aññe vā sakuntā’’ti.Tasmāti yasmā anujānāti, tasmā.Yatthāti yasmiṃ rukkhe, vissamitvā gacchantīti yojanā.Yasminti rukkhe, katvā vasantīti yojanā. Aṭṭha māse evāti sambhavato āha ‘‘yesu janapadesū’’tiādi.Tesupīti janapadesupi. Avassikasaṅkete evāti sambhavato āha ‘‘yatthā’’tiādi.Yatthāti yesu janapadesu. ‘‘Vigatavalāhakaṃ visuddhaṃ nabhaṃ hotī’’ti iminā sace avigatavalāhakaṃ avisuddhaṃ nabhaṃ hoti, nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. ‘‘Evarūpe kāle’’ti padaṃ ‘‘nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti pade ādhāro.

Abbhokāsikenāpīti abbhokāsadhutaṅgayuttenāpi. Pisaddo rukkhamūlikassa apekkhako. Vattaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi.Tassāti abbhokāsikassa. Hisaddo vitthārajotako.Tatthevāti puggalikamañcakeyeva. Saṅghikaṃ mañcanti sambandho.Vītamañcakoti vāyitamañcako.Tasminti vītamañcake. Purāṇamañcako nassantopi anagghoti āha ‘‘purāṇamañcako gahetabbo’’ti. Cammena avanahitabbotionaddho,so evaonaddhako. Gahetvā ca pana paññapetvā nipajjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Asamayeti vassikasaṅkhāte akāle.Catugguṇenāpīti catupaṭalenapi. Vaṭṭanti valāhakā āvaṭṭanti asmiṃ samayeti vaṭṭulo, so eva vaṭṭaliko, sattāhaṃ vaṭṭaliko, sattāho vā vaṭṭalikosattāhavaṭṭaliko,so ādi yesaṃ tānīti sattāhavaṭṭalikādīni. Ādisaddena sattāhato ūnādhikāni gahetabbāni.Kāyānugatikattāti kāyaṃ anugamakattā kāyasadisattāti attho.

Paṇṇakuṭīsūti paṇṇena chāditakuṭīsu.Sabhāgabhikkhūnanti attanā sabhāgabhikkhūnaṃ, santikanti sambandho. Anovassake ṭhāneti yojanā.Laggetvāti lambetvā, ayameva vā pāṭho. ‘‘Sammajjani’’nti padaṃ ‘‘gahetvā’’ti pade avuttakammaṃ, ‘‘ṭhapetabbā’’ti pade vuttakammaṃ.Dhovitvāti sammajjaniṃ suddhaṃ katvā.Uposathāgārādīsūtiādisaddena pariveṇādīni gahetabbāni.

Tatthāti sālāyaṃ.Yattha katthacīti yasmiṃ kismiñci ṭhāne.Pākatikaṭṭhāneti pakatiyā gahitaṭṭhāne.Tatra tatrevāti tesu tesu cetiyaṅgaṇādīsuyeva.Asanasālanti asanti bhakkhanti assaṃ sālāyantiasanā,asanā ca sā sālā cetiasanasālā,bhojanasālāti attho.Tatrāti tassa sammajjantassa, tasmiṃ ‘‘vattaṃ jānitabba’’nti pāṭhe vā.Majjhatoti pavittato, suddhaṭṭhānatoti attho.Pādaṭṭhānābhimukhāti sammajjantassa pādaṭṭhānaṃ abhimukhā.Vālikā haritabbāti paṃsu ca vālikā ca apanetabbā. Sammuñcanīsalākāya paraṃ pelletabbāti adhippāyo.Bahīti sammajjitabbatalato bahi.

111.Masārakotīti ettha itisaddo nāmapariyāyo, masārako nāmāti attho. Evaṃ bundikābaddhotītiādīsupi. Pāde masitvā vijjhitvā tattha aṭaniyo pavesetabbā etthātimasārako. Bundo evabundiko,pādo, tasmiṃ ābaddhā bandhitā aṭanī yassātibundikābaddho. Kuḷīrassa pādo viya pādo yassātikuḷīrapādako,yathā kuḷīro vaṅkapādo hoti, evaṃ vaṅkapādoti vuttaṃ hoti. Āhacca aṅge vijjhitvā tattha pavesito pādo yassātiāhaccapādako. Āṇinti aggakhilaṃ. Mañcati puggalaṃ dhāretītimañco. Pīṭhati visamadukkhaṃ hiṃsatītipīṭhaṃ. Paṇavoti eko tūriyaviseso, tassa saṇṭhānaṃ katvāti attho. Tañhi etarahi buddhapaṭimassa pallaṅkasaṇṭhānaṃ hoti.Tanti kocchaṃ. Karonti kirāti sambandho.Etthāti senāsanaparibhoge.ti saccaṃ.Tanti kocchaṃ mahagghaṃ hoti, mahagghattā bhaddapīṭhantipi vuccati.Yenāti yena bhikkhunā. ‘‘Thāmamajjhimassā’’ti padena pamāṇamajjhimaṃ nivatteti.

Etthāti ‘‘anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyyā’’ti pade. Thero āṇāpetīti yojanā.Āṇāpetīti ca āṇa-dhātuyā eva pesanasaṅkhātassa hetvatthassa vācakattā ṇāpesaddo svatthova.Soti daharo.Tathāti yathā therena vutto, tathā katvāti attho.Tatthāti divāṭṭhāne, mañcapīṭhe vā.Tatoti ṭhapanakālato. Paribundheti hiṃ setītipalibodho,parisaddo upasaggo, so vikāravasena aññathā jāto. So palibodho aññattha āvāsādiko, idha pana santharāpitamañcādiko.Sāyanti sāyanhe, bhummatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Thero bhaṇatīti sambandho.Tatthāti mañcapīṭhe. ‘‘Bālo hotī’’ti vatvā tassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘anuggahitavatto’’ti. Anuggahitaṃ vattaṃ yenātianuggahitavatto,thero.Tajjetīti ubbejeti.Tasminti dahare.Assāti therassa.

Āṇattikkhaṇeyevāti therassa pesanakkhaṇeyeva. Daharo vadatīti yojanā. ‘‘Thero’’ti padaṃ ‘‘vatvā gacchatī’’ti padadvaye kattā, ‘‘kāretabbo’’ti pade kammaṃ. Nanti mañcapīṭhaṃ, ‘‘paññapetvā’’tipadamapekkhiya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Nanti daharaṃ vā. ‘‘Vatvā’’ti padamapekkhiya evaṃ vuttaṃ.Tatthevāti mañcapīṭheyeva.Assāti therassa.Tatthāti divāṭṭhāne.Bhojanasālato aññattha gacchantoti bhojanasālato nikkhamitvā mañcapīṭhapaññāpanaṭṭhānato aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchanto, theroti yojanā.Tatthevāti divāṭṭhāneyeva.Yatricchatīti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ gantumicchatīti attho.Antarasannipāteti sakalaṃ ahorattaṃ asannipātetvā antare sannipāte satīti yojanā.

Tatthāti tasmiṃ ṭhāne. Āgantukā gaṇhantīti sambandho.Tatoti gaṇhanato.Tesanti āgantukānaṃ.Yehīti āvāsiko vā hotu, āgantuko vā, yehi bhikkhūhi.Teti nisinnakabhikkhū. Uddhaṃ pāḷipāṭhaṃ sāreti pavattetītiussārako. Dhammakathāyaṃ sādhūtidhammakathiko. Tasminti ussārake vā dhammakathike vā.Ahorattanti aho ca ratti ca ahorattaṃ, accantasaṃyogapadaṃ.Itarasminti paṭhamaṃ nisinnabhikkhuto aññasmiṃ bhikkhumhīti yojanā.Antoupacāraṭṭheyevāti leḍḍupātasaṅkhātassa upacārassa anto ṭhiteyeva, anādare cetaṃ bhummaṃ.Sabbatthāti āpattivāraanāpattivāresu.

112.Cimilikaṃ vātiādīsu vinicchayo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Tanti cimilikattharaṇaṃ. Uttari attharitabbantiuttarattharaṇanti dassento āha ‘‘uttarattharaṇaṃ nāmā’’tiādi.Bhūmiyanti sudhādiparikammena akatāyaṃ pakatibhūmiyaṃ.Cammakhaṇḍoti ettha cammaṃyeva ante khaṇḍattā chinnattā cammakhaṇḍoti vuccati. Nanu sīhacammādīni na kappantīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāsu hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ.Tasmāti yasmā na dissati, tasmā.Pariharaṇeyevāti attano santakanti paricchinditvā, puggalikanti vā pariggahetvā taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ haraṇeyeva. Pādo puñchīyati sodhīyati etāyātipādapuñchanīti katvā rajjupilotikāyo pādapuñchanīti vuccatīti āha ‘‘pādapuñchanī nāmā’’tiādi. Mayasaddalopaṃ katvā phalakapīṭhanti vuttanti āha ‘‘phalakapīṭhaṃ nāma phalakamayaṃ pīṭha’’nti. Phalakañca pīṭhañcaphalakapīṭhanti vā dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘atha vā’’ti.Etenāti ‘‘phalakapīṭha’’nti padena. ‘‘Saṅgahita’’nti pade karaṇaṃ, kattā vā.Bījanipattakanti caturassabījanīyeva sakuṇapattasadisattā bījanipattakaṃ, sadisatthe ko. ‘‘Ajjhokāse’’ti padaṃ ‘‘pacitvā’’ti pade ādhāro.Aggisālāyanti agginā pacanasālāyaṃ.Pabbhāreti leṇasadise pabbhāre.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.

112. The interpretation of "Cimilikaṃ vātiādīsu" should be understood thus: Ta means a cīmilikattharaṇa. Clarifying that uttari attharitabbanti, uttarattharaṇa (upper covering), he says, "Uttarattharaṇaṃ nāmā" etc. Bhūmiyaṃ means on natural ground that has not been prepared with plaster etc. Cammakhaṇḍoti: here, only the hide is called cammakhaṇḍa (piece of hide) because it is a fragment, because it is cut. If sīhacamma (lion skin) etc., are not allowable, then he says, "aṭṭhakathāsu hī" etc. means truly. Tasmā means therefore, because it is not seen. Pariharaṇeyevāti: having determined that it is one's own property, or having taken it as personal property, it should be moved from place to place. Pādo puñchīyati sodhīyati etāyāti, having made it pādapuñchanī (foot wiper), the rope or rag is called pādapuñchanī, he says, "pādapuñchanī nāmā" etc. Having omitted the word maya, it is stated as phalakapīṭhaṃ, he says, "phalakapīṭhaṃ nāma phalakamayaṃ pīṭhaṃ" (a phalakapīṭha is a seat made of planks). To show that phalakañca pīṭhañca, phalakapīṭha (plank seat), it is stated, "atha vā" (or). Etenāti: by the word "phalakapīṭha". In the phrase "saṅgahitaṃ", it is either instrumental case or nominative case. Bījanipattakaṃ: the four-cornered fan itself is bījanipattakaṃ because it resembles a bird's wing; ko is in the sense of similarity. The phrase "ajjhokāse" is the locus in the phrase "pacitvā". Aggisālāyaṃ: in the hall for cooking with fire. Pabbhāre: in a pabbhāra (cave dwelling) resembling a leṇa (cave). Yatthā: in whichever place.

Yasminti puggale. ‘‘Attano puggalikamiva hotī’’ti iminā anāpattīti dasseti.

Yasmiṃ: in whichever person. By "attano puggalikamiva hotī" (it is like one's own personal property), he shows that there is no offense.

113.Yo bhikkhu vā lajjī hoti, tathārūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ vā ti yojanā. ‘‘Lajjī hotī’’ti vatvā tassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘attano palibodhaṃ viya maññatī’’ti.Yoti āpucchako bhikkhu. ‘‘Kenaci upaddutaṃ hotī’’ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘sacepi hī’’tiādi. Hisaddo vitthārajotako. Vuḍḍhataro bhikkhu gaṇhātīti sambandho.Taṃ padesanti senāsanaṭṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ.Āpadāsūti vipattīsūti. Catutthaṃ.

113. The interpretation is: yo bhikkhu vā lajjī hoti, tathārūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ vā (whichever bhikkhu is modest, or such a bhikkhu). Saying "lajjī hotī" (is modest), showing its meaning, he says, "attano palibodhaṃ viya maññatī" (he thinks it is like an encumbrance to himself). Yo: whichever bhikkhu asks permission. Expanding on the meaning stated concisely as "kenaci upaddutaṃ hotī" (he is troubled by something), he says, "sacepi hī" etc. The word hi indicates expansion. The connection is that the more senior bhikkhu takes it. Taṃ padesaṃ: the place where the lodging has been set up. Āpadāsū: in times of difficulty. The fourth.

5. Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Second Lodging Training Rule

116.Pañcamemañcakabhisīti mañce attharitabbo mañcako, soyeva bhisīti mañcakabhisi. Evaṃ pīṭhakabhisipi. Pāvāro kojavoti dveyeva paccattharaṇanti vuttāti āha ‘‘pāvāro’’tiādi.Vuttanti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ.Dutiyātikkameti dutiyapādātikkame.Senāsanatoti sace ekaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti, tato. Atha bahūni senāsanāni honti, sabbapacchimasenāsanato. Eko leḍḍupāto senāsanassa upacāro hoti, eko parikkhepārahoti āha ‘‘dve leḍḍupātā’’ti.

116. In the fifth, mañcakabhisī: the mañcaka (cot) to be spread on the cot, that itself is bhisī (coverlet), hence mañcakabhisi. Likewise, pīṭhakabhisipi (stool-coverlet). Pāvāro (cloak) and kojavo (woolen rug) are stated to be the only two paccattharaṇa (additional spread), he says, "pāvāro" etc. Vuttaṃ: stated in the commentaries. Dutiyātikkame: in transgressing the second foot. Senāsanato: if there is one lodging, then from that. But if there are many lodgings, then from the very last lodging. One leḍḍupāta (stone's throw) is the boundary of the lodging, one is within the enclosure, he says, "dve leḍḍupātā".

Yenāti upāsakena, ‘‘kārito’’ti pade kattā.Tassāti vihārasāmikassa. Tasmimpi asati gantabbanti yojanā.Pāsāṇesūti pāsāṇaphalakesu.Sace ussahatīti sace sakkoti. Ussahantena bhikkhunā ṭhapetabbanti yojanā.Tepīti upāsakāpi, na sampaṭicchantīti sambandho.Tatthāti dārubhaṇḍādīsu.

Yenā: by whichever lay follower; the agent in the phrase "kārito" (caused to be made). Tassā: of the owner of the monastery. Even in the absence of that, it is to be gone, is the construction. Pāsāṇesū: on stone slabs. Sace ussahatī: if he is able. It should be set up by the bhikkhu who is able, is the construction. Tepī: even the lay followers; the connection is that they do not agree. Tatthā: in the wooden furniture etc.

pariveṇaṃ. ‘‘Atha kho’’ti padaṃ ‘‘veditabba’’nti pade arucilakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Āsanne’’ti iminā upacārasaddassa upaṭṭhānatthaaññaropanatthe nivatteti. Yasmā vammikarāsiyeva hoti, tasmāti yojanā. Upacinantītiupacikā,tāhi nimittabhūtāhi palujjati nassatīti attho.Senāsananti vihāraṃ.Khāyitunti khādituṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho.Tanti mañcapīṭhaṃ. Mañcapīṭhaṃ vihāre apaññapetvā vihārūpacāre paññāpanassa visesaphalaṃ dassetuṃ āha ‘‘vihārūpacāre panā’’tiādi. Vihārūpacāre paññapitanti sambandho.

pariveṇaṃ. The phrase "atha kho" is an indication of distaste in the phrase "veditabba". By "āsanne" (near), he excludes the sense of attendance by the word upacāra. Because it is just an anthill, therefore, is the construction. They heap up, hence upacikā, by those as the cause, it crumbles and perishes, is the meaning. Senāsanaṃ: the monastery. Khāyituṃ: to eat; or this itself is the reading. Taṃ: the cot or stool. To show the special fruit of assigning the cot or stool to the boundary of the monastery without announcing it in the monastery, he says, "vihārūpacāre panā" etc. It is assigned to the boundary of the monastery, is the connection.

118.‘‘Gacchantenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘gantabba’’nti pade kattā.Tathevāti yathā purimabhikkhu karoti, tatheva. Vasantena bhikkhunā paṭisāmetabbanti yojanā.Rattiṭṭhānanti rattiṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ.

118. The phrase "gacchantena" (by one who is leaving) is the agent in the phrase "gantabba" (it should be gone). Tathevā: just as the previous bhikkhu does, so too. It should be returned by the bhikkhu who is dwelling, is the construction. Rattiṭṭhānaṃ: the place for dwelling at night.

Tasminti dīghasālādike.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā, santiṭṭhantīti sambandho.Siluccayoti pabbato, tasmiṃ leṇaṃsiluccayaleṇaṃ,pabbataguhāti attho.Upacikāsaṅkāti upacikānaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti āsaṅkā.Tatoti pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā pāsāṇathambhesu vā katasenāsanādito. Āgantuko yo bhikkhu anuvattanto vasatīti sambandho.Soti āgantuko bhikkhu. Punasoti āgantuko bhikkhuyeva.Tatoti gahetvā issariyena vasanato.Ubhopīti āvāsikopi āgantukopi dve bhikkhū.Tesūti dvīsu tīsu.Pacchimassāti sabbapacchimassa.Ābhogenāti ābhogamattena mutti natthi, āpucchitabbamevāti adhippāyo.Aññatoti aññāvāsato.Aññatrāti aññasmiṃ āvāse.Tatthevāti ānītāvāseyeva.Tenāti vuḍḍhatarena, ‘‘sampaṭicchite’’ti pade kattā.Sampaṭicchiteti vuḍḍhatarena sampaṭicchitepi itarassa gantuṃ vaṭṭati āpucchitattāti vadanti.Naṭṭhaṃ vāti naṭṭhe vā senāsane sati gīvā na hotīti yojanā.Aññassāti avissāsikapuggalassa.Naṭṭhānīti naṭṭhesu mañcapīṭhesu santesu.

Tasmiṃ: in that long hall etc. : truly, or because; the connection is, they remain. Siluccayo: a mountain; a leṇa (cave) in that, siluccayaleṇaṃ, a mountain cave is the meaning. Upacikāsaṅkā: the apprehension of a place for the rising of white ants. Tato: from the lodging made on the stone surface or on the stone pillars. The incoming bhikkhu dwells following along, is the connection. So: that incoming bhikkhu. Again so: the incoming bhikkhu himself. Tato: from taking and dwelling with authority. Ubhopī: both the resident bhikkhu and the incoming bhikkhu, the two bhikkhus. Tesū: among the two or three. Pacchimassā: to the very last one. Ābhogenā: there is no release with mere indication; it must certainly be asked permission, is the intention. Aññato: from another dwelling. Aññatrā: in another dwelling. Tatthevā: in the dwelling that was brought. Tenā: by the more senior one, the agent in the phrase "sampaṭicchite" (having agreed). Sampaṭicchite: even if it is agreed upon by the more senior one, it is allowable for the other to go, because permission has been asked, some say. Naṭṭhaṃ vā: if the lodging is lost, there is no neck, is the construction. Aññassā: to a person who is not trustworthy. Naṭṭhānī: when there are lost cots and stools.

vuḍḍha…pe… kaṇhasappā,te ādayo yesaṃ tetivuḍḍha…pe… kaṇhasappādayo,tesu. Ādisaddena petādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.Assāti bhikkhuno. ‘‘Palibuddho’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘upadduto’’ti. Pañcamaṃ.

vuḍḍha…pe… kaṇhasappā, te ādayo yesaṃ teti vuḍḍha…pe… kaṇhasappādayo, tesu. By the word ādi (and others), he includes petas (departed beings) and others. Yatthā: in whichever place. Assā: of the bhikkhu. To show the meaning of the word "palibuddho" (encumbered), it is stated "upadduto" (troubled). The fifth.

6. Anupakhajjasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Not Burrowing Under Training Rule

119.Chaṭṭherūmbhitvāti nivāretvā, āvaraṇaṃ katvāti attho.Vassaggenāti vassagaṇanāya.Anupakhajjāti ettha khada hiṃsāyanti dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 15 dakārantadhātu) vuttattā khadasaddo hiṃsattho hoti. Anusamīpaṃ upagantvā khadanaṃ hiṃ sanaṃ nāma anusamīpaṃ pavisanamevāti dassento āha ‘‘anupavisitvā’’ti.

119. In the sixth, rūmbhitvā: preventing, having made a barrier, is the meaning. Vassaggenā: by the reckoning of rains. Anupakhajjā: here, because in the dhātupāṭha (grammar text) it is stated that khada hiṃsāyanti (the root khada means to injure), the word khada has the meaning of injury. Showing that anusamīpaṃ upagantvā khadanaṃ hiṃ sanaṃ nāma (burrowing near and injuring) means merely entering very close, he says, "anupavisitvā" (without entering).

120.‘‘Jāna’’nti ettha jānanākāraṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anuṭṭhāpanīyo aya’’nti.Tenevāti jānanahetunā eva.Assāti ‘‘jāna’’ntipadassa.ti vitthārajotako. Saṅgho pana detīti sambandho.Yassāti vuḍḍhādīsu aññatarassa.Etthāti vuḍḍhagilānādīsu. Gilānassapi detīti yojanā. ‘‘Gilāno’’ti padaṃ ‘‘na pīḷetabbo, anukampitabbo’’tipadadvaye vuttakammaṃ. ‘‘Kāmañcā’’ti padassa anuggahatthajotakattā panasaddo garahatthajotako.

120. In "jāna" (knows), to show the manner of knowing, it is stated "anuṭṭhāpanīyo ayaṃ" (this one is not to be evicted). Tenevā: by that very reason for knowing. Assā: of the word "jāna". : indicating expansion. But the Sangha gives, is the connection. Yassā: to whichever of the senior etc. Etthā: among the senior, sick etc. It also gives to the sick, is the construction. The word "gilāno" (sick) is the action stated in the two phrases "na pīḷetabbo, anukampitabbo" (he should not be oppressed, he should be treated with compassion). Because the word "kāmañcā" (and indeed) indicates the meaning of favor, the word pana indicates the meaning of censure.

121.Mañcapīṭhānaṃ upacāro nāmāti sambandho.Yatoti yato kutoci ṭhānato. Yāva mañcapīṭhaṃ atthi, tāva upacāro nāmāti yojanā. Tasmiṃ upacāre ṭhitassa bhikkhuno upacāreti sambandho.

121. The boundary of the cots and stools is named, is the connection. Yato: from whichever place. As long as there is a cot or stool, so long the boundary is named, is the construction. The connection is that for the bhikkhu standing in that boundary, it is a boundary.

‘‘Abhinisīdati vā abhinipajjati vā’’ti ettha vāsaddassa aniyamavikappatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘abhinisīdanamattenā’’tiādi.

In "abhinisīdati vā abhinipajjati vā" (sits down or lies down), to show the meaning of unrestricted alternative by the word , it is stated "abhinisīdanamattenā" etc.

122.Itoti vārato.Idhāti imasmiṃ pācittiyavāre. Yathā vutto, evanti sambandho.Sabbatthevāti sabbesu eva vihārapariveṇesu.Assāti visabhāgapuggalassa.Idhāpīti imasmimpi sikkhāpade.Tatthāti vissāsikapuggale.

122. Ito: from the turn. Idhā: in this pācittiya section. As stated, so it is, is the connection. Sabbatthevā: in all the monasteries and enclosures. Assā: of the dissimilar person. Idhāpī: even in this training rule. Tatthā: in the trustworthy person.

123.Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘āpadāsū’’tipadaṃ ‘‘pavisatī’’ti ajjhāhārapadena sambandhitabbanti āha ‘‘āpadāsūtiādī’’ti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

123. In the Pāḷi, the phrase "āpadāsū" (in times of difficulty) should be connected with the implied word "pavisatī" (enters), he says, "āpadāsūtiādī" etc. The sixth.

7. Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Dragging Out Training Rule

126.Sattame ye pāsādā vā yāni vā catussālānīti yojanā. Catasso bhūmiyo etesanticatubhūmakā. Evaṃ pañcabhūmakā.Koṭṭhakānīti dvārakoṭṭhakāni. ‘‘Pāsādā’’tipadamapekkhiya vuttaṃ ‘‘ye’’tipadaṃ, ‘‘catussālānī’’tipade apekkhite ‘‘yānī’’ti liṅgavipallāso hoti. Senāsanesu ekena payogena bahuke dvāre bhikkhuṃ atikkāmetīti sambandho. Nānāpayogehi nānādvāre bhikkhuṃ atikkāmentassāti yojanā. ‘‘Dvāragaṇanāyā’’tiiminā payogagaṇanāyātipi atthaṃ ñāpeti atthato pākaṭattā.Anāmasitvāti achupitvā.

126. In the seventh, ye pāsādā vā yāni vā catussālānīti (whatever are the buildings or the four-sided halls), is the construction. Catasso bhūmiyo etesanti, catubhūmakā (four stories are in these). Likewise, pañcabhūmakā (five stories). Koṭṭhakānī: gate chambers. Considering the word "pāsādā" (buildings), the word "ye" (whatever) is stated; when considering the word "catussālānī" (four-sided halls), there is a gender reversal with "yānī" (whatever). In lodgings, with one effort, the bhikkhu crosses over many doorways, is the connection. The construction is that for one who causes a bhikkhu to cross over various doorways with various efforts. By "dvāragaṇanāyā" (by counting the doorways), he also makes known the meaning of counting the efforts, because it is evident in meaning. Anāmasitvā: without touching.

Ettakānīti etapamāṇāni.Tassāti nikkaḍḍhiyamānassa bhikkhussa.Gāḷhanti daḷhaṃ.

Ettakānī: this much. Tassā: of the bhikkhu being dragged out. Gāḷhaṃ: firmly.

127.Idhāpīti imasmimpi sikkhāpade.Pisaddo purimasikkhāpadāpekkho.Sabbatthāti sabbesu sikkhāpadesu.Yatrāti yasmiṃ sikkhāpade.

127. Idhāpī: even in this training rule. The word Pi is in relation to the previous training rule. Sabbatthā: in all the training rules. Yatrā: in whichever training rule.

128.Soti bhaṇḍanakārakakalahakārako bhikkhu.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Pakkhanti attano pakkhaṃ. Nikkaḍḍhiyamānapuggalapakkhe ummattakassa nikkaḍḍhati vā nikkaḍḍhāpeti vāti sambandhitabbaṃ. Nikkaḍḍhakapuggalapakkhe ummattakassa anāpattīti sambandhitabbanti. Sattamaṃ.

128. So: that quarrelsome, bickering bhikkhu. : truly, or because. Pakkhaṃ: one's own side. In the side of the person being dragged out, it should be connected that he drags out or causes to be dragged out an insane person. In the side of the person dragging out, it should be connected that there is no offense for an insane person. The seventh.

8. Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadaṃ
8. The Attic Training Rule

129.Aṭṭhame acchannatalattā upari vehāso etissātiuparivehāsā,sā ca sā kuṭi cetiuparivehāsakuṭīti dassento āha ‘‘upariacchannatalāyā’’ti. Tassā kuṭiyā sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dvibhūmikakuṭiyā vā’’tiādi. ‘‘Mañca’’nti padaṃ ‘‘abhī’’tiupasaggena sambandhitabbanti āha ‘‘abhibhavitvā’’ti. ‘‘Nisīdatī’’ti kiriyāpadena vā yojetabboti āha ‘‘bhummatthe vā’’tiādi.Etanti ‘‘mañca’’ntipade etaṃ vacanaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Atha vāetanti ‘‘mañca’’ntipadaṃ upayogavacanavantaṃ. Ettha ca pacchimasambandhe abhītyūpasaggo padālaṅkāramatto padavibhūsanamattoti āha ‘‘abhīti idaṃ panā’’tiādi.Padasobhaṇatthanti padassa alaṅkāratthaṃ vibhūsanatthaṃ padassa phullitatthanti adhippāyo.Nipatitvāti ettha nītyūpasaggo dhātvatthānuvattakoti āha ‘‘patitvā’’ti. Atha vā nikkhantatthavācakoti āha ‘‘nikkhamitvā vā’’ti. Iminā nītyūpasaggassa dhātvatthavisesakataṃ dīpeti, nikkhanto hutvā patitvāti attho.ti yasmā.Āṇīti aggakhīlā.

129. In the eighth, because the surface is uncovered, there is open air above it, hence uparivehāsā, that which is both sā ca sā kuṭi ca, uparivehāsakuṭī (an attic), showing this, he says, "upariacchannatalāyā" (with an uncovered surface above). To show the nature of that dwelling, it is stated "dvibhūmikakuṭiyā vā" (or a two-storied dwelling) etc. The word "mañcaṃ" should be connected with the prefix "abhī", he says, "abhibhavitvā" (overcoming). Or it should be connected with the verb "nisīdatī" (sits down), he says, "bhummatthe vā" (or in the sense of ground) etc. Etaṃ: this statement in the word "mañcaṃ" is a statement of use. Or etaṃ: this word "mañcaṃ" has a statement of use. And here, in the last connection, the prefix abhī is merely an ornament of the word, merely an adornment of the word, he says, "abhīti idaṃ panā" etc. Padasobhaṇatthaṃ: for the adornment of the word, for the embellishment of the word, for the flourishing of the word, is the intention. Nipatitvā: here, the prefix follows the meaning of the root, he says, "patitvā" (having fallen). Or it expresses the meaning of exit, he says, "nikkhamitvā vā" (or having exited). By this, he indicates the distinctiveness of the meaning of the root by the prefix ; the meaning is having exited, having fallen. : because. Āṇī: pegs.

131.Yā kuṭi sīsaṃ na ghaṭṭeti, sāasīsaghaṭṭānāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Pamāṇamajjhimassā’’tiiminā thāmamajjhimaṃ nivatteti.Sabbaheṭṭhimāhīti sabbesaṃ dabbasambhārānaṃ heṭṭhā ṭhitāhi.Tulāhīti gehathambhānamupari vitthāravasena ṭhitehi kaṭṭhavisesehi. Iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena ca tulāya sarūpaṃ pākaṭaṃ. Keci pana tulāya sarūpaṃ aññathā vadanti.Etenāti ‘‘majjhimassa purisassa asīsaghaṭṭā’’tivacanena dassitā hotīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ. Yā kāci kuṭi vuccatīti yojanā.Uparīti dvibhūmikakuṭiyaṃ bhūmito upari bhūmiyaṃ.Acchannatalāti anullocatalā, avitānatalāti attho.Idha panāti imasmiṃ pana sikkhāpade.

131. The dwelling which does not strike the head, that is called asīsaghaṭṭā, is the construction. By "pamāṇamajjhimassa" (of medium height), he excludes medium strength. Sabbaheṭṭhimāhī: by the lowest of all the material requisites. Tulāhī: by the special pieces of wood standing in a broad manner above the pillars of the house. By this statement of the commentary, the nature of a tulā (beam) is evident. But some state the nature of a tulā differently. Etenā: by the statement "majjhimassa purisassa asīsaghaṭṭā" (not striking the head of a man of medium height), it is shown, is the connection. : truly. Whichever dwelling is spoken of, is the construction. Uparī: in a two-storied dwelling, on the floor above the ground floor. Acchannatalā: with an unroofed surface, a surface without a canopy is the meaning. Idha panā: but in this training rule.

133.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Yāyanti yā ayaṃ kuṭi.Tatthāti tassaṃ sīsaghaṭṭakuṭiyaṃ. Anoṇatena bhikkhunāti yojanā.Yassāti kuṭiyā.Aparibhoganti na paribhuñjitabbaṃ, na paribhuñjanārahanti attho.Patāṇīti patanassa nivāraṇā āṇi aggakhīlā. Sā hi ābandhaṃ nayati pavattetītiāṇīti vuccati.Yatthāti yasmiṃ mañcapīṭhe.Na nippatantīti nikkhanto hutvā na patanti.Āhaccapādaketi aṅge āhanitvā vijjhitvā tattha pavesitapādake.Nāgadantakādīsūti nāgassa danto viyāti nāgadantako, sadisatthe ko, so ādi yesaṃ teti nāgadantakādayo, tesu. Ādisaddena bhittikhīlādayo saṅgaṇhātīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

133. : truly, or because. Yāya: whichever this dwelling. Tatthā: in that head-striking dwelling. By the bhikkhu who is not stooping, is the construction. Yassā: of whichever dwelling. Aparibhogaṃ: it should not be used, it is not fit to be used, is the meaning. Patāṇī: pegs that prevent falling, pegs. Indeed, that leads and sets in motion the bond, hence it is called āṇī. Yatthā: in whichever cot or stool. Na nippatantī: having exited, they do not fall. Āhaccapādake: legs which have been struck and pierced and inserted there. Nāgadantakādīsū: nāgadantako (coat hook) is like an elephant's tusk, ko is in the sense of similarity, that which is the beginning of those, hence nāgadantakādayo (coat hooks and others), in those. By the word ādi (and others), he includes wall pegs and others. The eighth.

9. Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Large Monastery Training Rule

135.Navamepiṭṭhasaṅghāṭassāti dvārabāhāya. Sā hi piṭṭhe dvinnaṃ kavāṭānaṃ saṃ ekato ghāṭo ghaṭanaṃ samāgamo etassatthīti piṭṭhasaṅghāṭoti vuccati. Kurundiyaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanti yojanā.Tanti mahāaṭṭhakathāya vuttavacanaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘tadevā’’ti etthāpi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Bhagavatāpīti na mahāaṭṭhakathācariyehi eva vuttaṃ, atha kho bhagavatāpi katoti yojanā. Dvārabandhena aggaḷassa avinābhāvato ‘‘aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā’’ti vuttepi aggaḷena saha dvārabandhaṭṭhapanāyāti atthova gahetabboti āha ‘‘sakavāṭakadvārabandhaṭṭhapanāyā’’ti.Aggaḷoti kavāṭaphalako.Imamevatthanti mayā vuttaṃ imaṃ eva atthaṃ sandhāyāti sambandho.Etthāti ‘‘aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā’’tivacane.Adhippāyoti bhagavato abhisandhi.Hi-saddo vitthārajotako.Kampatīti bhusaṃ kampati.Calatīti īsaṃ calati.Tenāti tena sithilapatanahetunā. Mātikāyaṃ, padabhājanīyañca ‘‘aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā’’tipadassa sambandhābhāvato tassa sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti ‘‘aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā’’tivacane na vuttanti sambandho. Atthassa kāraṇassa uppatti atthuppatti, sāyevaaṭṭhuppattīti vuccati tthakārassa ṭṭhakāraṃ katvā. Adhikārato daṭṭhabboti yojanā.

135. In "Navame piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa," it refers to the doorjamb, because the piṭṭhasaṅghāṭa is that which has the quality of being the place where two leaves of the door meet, are joined, and come together at the back. The connection is "as stated in the Kurundi." The construction is "as stated in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā." Ta means the statement spoken in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā. The same applies to "tadeva" here as well. Hi means truly, or because. "Bhagavatāpi" means not only was it stated by the teachers of the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā, but it was also done by the Blessed One. Because the doorframe is inseparable from the bolt, even though it says "aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya" (for the placing of the bolt), the meaning should be understood as the placing of the doorframe together with the bolt, therefore he said "sakavāṭakadvārabandhaṭṭhapanāya" (for the placing of the doorframe together with its doors). Aggaḷo means the door leaf panel. "Imamevattha" (this very meaning) is connected as "referring to this very meaning stated by me." Etthā means in the statement "aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya." Adhippāyo means the intention of the Blessed One. The word hi indicates expansion. "Kampatī" means shakes violently. "Calatī" means moves slightly. "Tenā" means because of that loose falling. In the Mātikā and the Padabhājanīya, because there is no connection to the phrase "aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya," in order to show its connection, it was said "tatthā" etc. There, tatthā means in the statement "aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya," it is not stated. The arising of the meaning, the origin of the cause, is the atthuppatti, and that is what is called aṭṭhuppattī, by changing the thakāra to ṭṭhakāra. It should be seen according to the context.

Yassāti mahāvihārassa.Uparīti dvārato upari.Tīsu disāsūti ubhosu passesu, uparīti tīsu disāsu.Tatrāpīti khuddake vihārepi.ti bhitti.Aparipūraupacārāpīti samantā kavāṭapamāṇena aparipūraupacārāpi.Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedenāti ukkaṃsapamāṇena. Hatthapāsato atirekaṃ na limpitabboti adhippāyo. Tīsu disāsu eva limpitabbo na hoti, lepokāse sati adhobhāgepi limpitabboti āha ‘‘sace panassā’’tiādi.Assāti vihārassa. Ālokaṃ sandhenti pidahantīti‘‘ālokasandhī’’ti vutte vātapānakavāṭakāyevāti dassento āha ‘‘vātapānakavāṭakā vuccantī’’ti. Vātaṃ pivatītivātapānaṃ,dvāraṃ, tasmiṃ ṭhitā kavāṭakāvātapānakavāṭakā. Teti vātapānakavāṭakā paharantīti sambandho.Etthāti ālokasandhimhi.Sabbadisāsūti ubhosu passesu, heṭṭhā, uparīti catūsu disāsu. ‘‘Tasmā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘limpitabbo vā lepāpetabbo vā’’tipadadvaye hetu.Etthāti ‘‘ālokasandhiparikammāyā’’tipade.

Yassā means of the Mahāvihāra. Uparī means above the door. Tīsu disāsū means on both sides and above, in three directions. Tatrāpī means even in a small monastery. means the wall. Aparipūraupacārāpī means even if the surrounding is not fully plastered to the size of the doorframe. Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedenā means with a high measurement. The intention is that more than a hand's reach should not be plastered. He says "sace panassā" etc., meaning it should be plastered in only three directions, and not below, but if there is an opportunity for plastering, it should be plastered even below. Assā means of the monastery. "Ālokasandhī" (light openings) means those which connect and block the light. Showing that this refers to only the window shutters, he says "vātapānakavāṭakā vuccantī" (they are called window shutters). Vātapānaṃ means that which drinks the wind, a door; vātapānakavāṭakā means shutters standing in that. Te refers to the window shutters, and the connection is that they strike. Etthā means in the light opening. Sabbadisāsū means on both sides, below, and above, in four directions. The word "tasmā" (therefore) is the reason for the two phrases "limpitabbo vā lepāpetabbo vā" (it should be plastered or caused to be plastered). Etthā means in the phrase "ālokasandhiparikammāyā" (for the repair of a light opening).

Imināti setavaṇṇādinā.Sabbametanti etaṃ sabbaṃ setavaṇṇādikaṃ.

Iminā means with this white color etc. Sabbameta means all of this, the white color etc.

Yanti kiccaṃ. Kattabbaṃ kiccanti sambandho. Saddantarabyavahitopi dvattisaddo pariyāyasaddena samāso hotīti āha ‘‘chadanassa dvattipariyāya’’nti. Dve vā tayo vā pariyāyā samāhaṭātidvattipariyāyaṃ, samāhāre digu, tisadde pare dvissa akāro hoti.Parikkhepoti anukkamena parikkhepo. Apatyūpasaggassa paṭisedhavācakattā ‘‘aharite’’ti vuttaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘apaharite’’ti pade. ‘‘Harita’’nti iminā adhippetanti sambandho. Ādikappakāle aparaṇṇato pubbe pavattaṃ annaṃpubbaṇṇaṃ,aparasmiṃ pubbaṇṇato pacchā pavattaṃ annaṃaparaṇṇaṃ,nakāradvayassa ṇakāradvayaṃ katvā.Tenevāti adhippetattā eva.

Ya means the task. The connection is "the task to be done." He says "chadanassa dvattipariyāya" (two or three layers of roofing) because the word dvatti can be compounded with a synonymous word even when separated by another word. Dvattipariyāyaṃ means two or three layers gathered together, a samāhāra (collective) digu. When the word ti is placed after, the a of dvi becomes ā. Parikkhepo means surrounding in order. Because the prefix apa has the meaning of prohibition, "aharite" (where there is no green) was said. Etthā means in the word "apaharite." The connection is "with this, 'green' is meant." In the beginning of the kappa, food that occurs before noon is pubbaṇṇaṃ (morning food); in the afternoon, food that occurs after the morning food is aparaṇṇaṃ (afternoon food), having changed the two nakāras to ṇakāras. Tenevā means because of the meaning.

Vuttanti vapitaṃ, yathā ‘‘sumedhabhūto bhagavā’’tiettha bodhiṃ asampattopi bodhisatto sumedhabhūto ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuccati avassambhāviyattā, evaṃ haritaṃ asampattampi khettaṃ ‘‘harita’’nti vuccati avassambhāviyattāti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yasmimpi khette’’tiādinā.

Vutta means sown. Just as when it is said "sumedhabhūto bhagavā" (Sumedha, who would become a Buddha), even though he has not attained enlightenment, the Bodhisatta is called Sumedha, "Bhagavā" (Blessed One), because of the certainty of becoming, so too, even though it has not attained greenness, a field is called "harita" (green) because of the certainty of becoming. He shows the meaning with "yasmimpi khette" etc.

Ahariteyevāti haritavirahe eva khetteti yojanā.Tatrāpīti aharitakhettepi. ‘‘Piṭṭhivaṃsassā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘passe’’tipade sāmyatthachaṭṭhī, iminā pakatigehaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kūṭāgārakaṇṇikāyā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘upari, thūpikāyā’’tipade sāmyatthachaṭṭhī, iminā ekakūṭayutte māḷādike dasseti. Ṭhitaṃ bhikkhunti sambandho. Nisinnakaṃ yaṃkañci jananti yojanā.Tassāti ṭhitaṭṭhānassa.Antoti abbhantare,hiyasmāayaṃokāso patanokāsoti yojanā.

Ahariteyevā means truly a field devoid of greenness. Tatrāpī means even in a field devoid of greenness. The phrase "piṭṭhivaṃsassā" is the sixth case with the meaning of similarity in the word "passe" (side). With this, he shows the actual house. The phrase "kūṭāgārakaṇṇikāyā" is the sixth case with the meaning of similarity in the words "upari, thūpikāyā" (above, the pinnacle). With this, he shows a mansion etc., with a single peak. "A bhikkhu standing" is the connection. "Any person sitting" is the construction. Tassā means of the standing place. Anto means inside. Hi means because. Ayaṃ means this. The connection is that this is a place for falling.

136.Chāditaṃ nāmāti ettha chāditasaddo bhāvattho hoti, tenāha ‘‘chādana’’nti.Ujukamevāti chadanuṭṭhāpanato uddhaṃ ujukaṃ eva.Tanti chādanaṃ.Apanetvāpīti nāsetvāpi.Tasmāti yasmā labbhati, tasmā, pakkamitabbanti sambandho.Parikkhepenāti parivārena chādentassāti yojanā.Idhāpīti pariyāyachādanepi adhiṭṭhahitvāti sambandho.Tuṇhībhūtenāti tuṇhībhūto hutvā.Chadanuparīti chadanassa upari.ti saccaṃ. ‘‘Tato ce uttari’’nti ettha tato dvattipariyāyato uparīti dassento āha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vā’’tiādi.

136.Chāditaṃ nāmā means here the word chādita has the meaning of action; therefore, he says "chādanaṃ" (covering). Ujukamevā means straight up from the raising of the roof. Ta means that roofing. Apanetvāpī means even after removing. Tasmā means because it is obtainable, therefore, it should be departed from. Parikkhepenā means by surrounding, for one who is covering. Idhāpī means even in covering with layers, having determined. Tuṇhībhūtenā means having become silent. Chadanuparī means above the roofing. means truly. In "tato ce uttari" (and further than that), showing that tato means above the two or three layers, he says "tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vā" etc.

137.Karena hatthena lunitabbo, chinditabbo, lātabbo gahetabboti vākaraḷoti kate atthapakaraṇādito tiṇamuṭṭhi evāti āha ‘‘tiṇamuṭṭhiya’’nti. Navamaṃ.

137.Karaḷo means it should be reaped, cut, or taken with the hand, or the handful of grass in the case of action, etc.; therefore, he says "tiṇamuṭṭhiya" (with a handful of grass). The ninth.

10. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Sappāṇaka Sikkhāpada

140.Dasame‘‘jāna’’nti gacchantādigaṇoti āha ‘‘jānanto’’ti. Saṃ vijjati pāṇo etthātisapāṇakaṃ. Etanti udakaṃ. Sayaṃ jānantopi parena jānāpentopi jānātiyeva nāmāti āha ‘‘yathā tathā vā’’ti.Sapāṇakaṃ udakanti karaṇatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, tenāha ‘‘tena udakenā’’ti.Pubbeti pathavikhaṇanasikkhāpadādike.

140. In the tenth, "jāna" (knowing) means a group beginning with going; therefore, he says "jānanto" (knowing). Saṃ vijjati pāṇo etthāti means that in which there is life, sapāṇakaṃ (with living beings). Eta means this water. He says "yathā tathā vā" (however it may be) because even if one knows oneself or causes another to know, it is still called knowing. "Sapāṇakaṃ udaka" (water with living beings) is a statement of use in the sense of instrument; therefore, he says "tena udakenā" (with that water). Pubbe means in the sikkhāpada beginning with digging the earth.

Tatthāti ‘‘siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā’’tipade.Dhāranti sotaṃ.Mātikaṃ pamukhanti mātikaṃ abhimukhaṃ.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne. Aññato ṭhānato aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ netīti yojanā. ‘‘Sapāṇakaṃ udaka’’nti sāmaññavacanassapi visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa anupayojitabbato idha visesaudakanti sandhāyabhāsitatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādi. Idaṃ pana na vuttanti sambandho.Yanti udakaṃ ‘‘gacchatī’’tipade kattā.Yatthāti yasmiṃ udaketi. Dasamaṃ.

Tatthā means in the phrase "siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā" (he should pour or cause to be poured). Dhāra means a stream. Mātikaṃ pamukha means facing the Mātikā. Tattha tatthā means in that place, in that place. The construction is that he leads from one place to another place. Because the general statement "sapāṇakaṃ udaka" (water with living beings) stands for the particular, and because the particular should not be used for the sake of the particular, he shows that here it is spoken referring to a particular kind of water, saying "idaṃ panā" etc. The connection is "but this is not stated." Ya means the water is the subject in the phrase "gacchatī" (goes). Yatthā means in which water. The tenth.

Bhūtagāmavaggo dutiyo.

The Bhūtagāmavagga, the second.

3. Ovādavaggo

3. The Ovādavagga

1. Ovādasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Analysis of Meaning of the Ovāda Sikkhāpada

144.Bhikkhunivaggassa paṭhametesanti therānaṃ. Mahākulehi nikkhamitvā pabbajitāti yojanā. Kuladhītaro vijjamānaguṇaṃ kathayantīti sambandho. ‘‘Ñātimanussāna’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘kathayantī’’tipade sampadānaṃ.Kutoti kassa therassa santikāti attho.Tesanti therānaṃ guṇanti sambandho. ‘‘Kathetu’’ntipadamapekkhitvā ‘‘vijjamānaguṇe’’ti vattabbe avatvā ‘‘vaṭṭantī’’tipadamapekkhiya ‘‘vijjamānaguṇā’’ti vuttaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tatoti kathanakāraṇā abhihariṃsūti sambandho.Tenāti abhiharaṇahetunā.

144. In the first of the Bhikkhunivagga, tesa means of the elders. The construction is that they went forth, having left great families. The connection is that the daughters of good families speak of the existing virtues. "Ñātimanussāna" (to kinsmen) is the dative case in the phrase "kathayantī" (speaking). Kuto means from the presence of which elder? Tesa means the virtue of the elders is the connection. Without waiting for the word "Kathetu" (to speak), he said "vijjamānaguṇā" (existing virtues), waiting for the word "vaṭṭantī" (revolve), instead of saying "vijjamānaguṇe" (existing virtues). means truly, or because. Tato means because of that speaking, they brought forward, is the connection. Tenā means because of that bringing forward.

Tesanti chabbaggiyānaṃ.Tāsūti bhikkhunīsu. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyo’’tipadaṃ ‘‘upasaṅkamitvā’’tipade kammaṃ. Chabbaggiyānaṃ bhikkhunīsu upasaṅkamanaṃ lābhataṇhāya hoti, bhikkhunīnaṃ chabbaggīsu upasaṅkamanaṃ calacittatāya hotīti aññamaññūpasaṅkamantānaṃ viseso. Tiracchānabhūtā kathātiracchānakathāniratthakakathāti dassento āha ‘‘tiracchānakathantī’’ti.Saggamaggagamanepīti pisaddo mokkhagamane pana kā nāma kathāti dasseti. Rājāno ārabbha pavattā kathārājakathā. Ādisaddena corakathādayo saṅgaṇhāti.

Tesa means of the group of six. Tāsū means among those nuns. "Bhikkhuniyo" (the nuns) is the object in the phrase "upasaṅkamitvā" (approaching). The approaching of the group of six to the nuns is due to craving for gain; the approaching of the nuns to the group of six is due to fickleness of mind. This is the difference between those approaching one another. Tiracchānabhūtā kathā (talk that is base) means tiracchānakathā (base talk), which means worthless talk, showing this, he says "tiracchānakathantī" (meaning base talk). Saggamaggagamanepī means the word pi shows what need is there to speak of the path to liberation? Rājāno ārabbha pavattā kathā means rājakathā (talk about kings). With the word ādi (etc.), he includes talk about thieves, etc.

147.Te bhikkhūti chabbaggiyā bhikkhū bhaveyyunti sambandho. Adiṭṭhaṃ saccaṃ yehītiadiṭṭhasaccā,tesaṃ bhāvoadiṭṭhasaccattaṃ,tasmā adiṭṭhasaccattā bandhitvāti yojanā.Nesanti chabbaggiyānaṃ.Aññeneva upāyenāti aladdhasammutito aññeneva laddhasammutisaṅkhātena kāraṇena kattukāmoti sambandho.Paratoti parasmiṃ pacchā, uparīti attho.Karonto vāti paribāhire karonto eva hutvā āhāti yojanā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Yasmā na bhūtapubbāni, iti tasmā paribāhiraṃ karonto vāti attho.

147.Te bhikkhū means those bhikkhus, the group of six, should be. Adiṭṭhaṃ saccaṃ yehīti means adiṭṭhasaccā (those who have not seen the truth); adiṭṭhasaccattaṃ (the state of not having seen the truth) means because of that state of not having seen the truth, having tied. Nesa means of the group of six. Aññeneva upāyenā means desiring to do by a reason other than that of not having received consent, which is known as having received consent. Parato means after, later, above is the meaning. Karonto vā means even while doing exteriorly, he eats, is the connection. means truly, or because. Because they have not been before, therefore it means even while doing exteriorly.

Tatthāti ‘‘anujānāmī’’tiādivacane.Sīlavāti ettha vantusaddo pasaṃsatthe ca atisayatthe ca niccayogatthe ca hoti.Tassāti laddhasammutikassa.Tanti sīlaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaddānaṃ kammadhārayabhāvaṃ, tehi ca saṃvutasaddassa tappurisabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhovā’’tiādi. Tattha evasaddena kammadhārayabhāvaṃ, enasaddena ca tappurisabhāvaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Tatthā means in the statement beginning with "anujānāmī" (I allow). Sīlavā means here the word vantu has the meaning of praise, excess, and constant association. Tassā means of one who has received consent. Ta means that virtue. In order to show the kammadharaya state of the words Pātimokkhasaṃvara, and the tappurisa state of the word saṃvuta with those, it was said "pātimokkhovā" etc. There, it should be seen that the evasaddena shows the kammadharaya state, and the enasaddena shows the tappurisa state.

Vattatīti attabhāvaṃ pavatteti. Kāritapaccayo hi adassanaṃ gato. Iminā iriyāpathavihāra dibbavihāra brahmavihāra ariyavihāresu catūsu vihāresu attabhāvavattanaṃ iriyāpathavihāraṃ dasseti.ti saccaṃ.Etanti ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’tivacanaṃ.Vibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge.

Vattatī means he maintains the existence. The causative suffix has gone unseen. With this, among the four vihāras, the way of maintaining existence among the iriyāpathavihāra, dibbavihāra, brahmavihāra, and ariyavihāra, he shows the iriyāpathavihāra. means truly. Eta means this statement, "pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī" (he dwells restrained by the restraint of the Pātimokkha). Vibhaṅge means in the Jhānavibhaṅga.

Samāpattiyāti samāpattatthāya. ‘‘Upeto’’tiādīni satta padāni aññamaññavevacanāni. Tatthaupapannoti yutto anuyutto.Samannāgatoti samantato anu punappunaṃ āgatoti samannāgato, samaṅgībhūtoti attho. Ettha hi saṃsaddo samantatthavācako, anusaddo naupacchinnatthavācako.Tenāti tena kāraṇena.Pāletīti attabhāvaṃ bādhanato rakkhati.Yapetīti attabhāvo pavattati.Yāpetīti attabhāvaṃ pavattāpeti. Yapa yāpane. Yāpanaṃ pavattananti hi dhātupāṭhesu vuttaṃ (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 pakārantadhātu).Viharatīti ettha eko ākāratthavācako itisaddo luttaniddiṭṭho, iti vuccati, iti vuttanti vā yojanā.

Samāpattiyā means for the sake of attainment. The seven words beginning with "upeto" are synonyms for one another. There, upapanno means joined, associated. Samannāgato means one who has come together from all sides, again and again, is samannāgato; the meaning is possessing. Here, the word saṃ has the meaning of completely, the word anu has the meaning of uninterrupted. Tenā means because of that reason. Pāletī means he protects by preventing the arising of existence. Yapetī means existence continues. Yāpetī means he causes existence to continue. Yapa means maintaining. Because it is said in the lists of roots that yāpana means continuation. Viharatī means here the word iti, which has the meaning of quality, is understood by elision, or it can be construed as "is called," or "is said."

‘‘ācāragocarasampanno’’tiādi. Tattha casaddena dvandabhāvaṃ, enasaddena ca tappurisabhāvaṃ dasseti.Aṇusaddo appattho,mattasaddo pamāṇatthoti āha ‘‘appamattakesū’’ti. ‘‘Dassanasīlo’’tiiminā‘‘dassāvī’’tiettha āvīsaddassa tassīlatthabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Samādāyā’’ti ettha saṃpubbaāpubbassa dāsaddassa kammāpekkhattā tassa kammaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ taṃ sikkhāpada’’nti. Iminā ‘‘sikkhāpadesū’’ti upayogatthe bhummavacananti dasseti. Atha vāsikkhāpadesūti niddhāraṇatthe bhummavacanametaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ taṃ sikkhāpada’’nti kammaṃ pana ajjhāharitabbanti dasseti.‘‘Samādāyā’’ti ettha saṃsaddassa ca āpubbassa dāsaddassa ca yakārassa ca atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sādhukaṃ gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ.Etthāti imissaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Vitthāro pana gahetabboti yojanā.Yoti kulaputto.

‘‘ācāragocarasampanno’’ (endowed with conduct and pasture) etc. There, the casaddena shows the dvanda state, and the enasaddena shows the tappurisa state. The word aṇu has the meaning of small, the word matta has the meaning of measure; therefore, he says "appamattakesū" (in the slightest). With "dassanasīlo" (by nature a seer), he shows the quality of "dassāvī" (a seer) here as being by nature. In "samādāyā" (having undertaken), because the verb with the prefixes saṃ and ā requires an object, in order to show its object, it was said "taṃ taṃ sikkhāpada" (that particular sikkhāpada). With this, he shows that "sikkhāpadesū" (in the sikkhāpadas) is a locative plural with the meaning of usage. Or else, sikkhāpadesū means this is a plural in the sense of determination. However, "taṃ taṃ sikkhāpada" (that particular sikkhāpada) shows that the object should be supplied. In "‘‘samādāyā’’" (having undertaken), in order to show the meaning of the word saṃ, the word with the prefix ā, and the yakāra, it was said "sādhukaṃ gahetvā" (having taken well). Etthā means in this commentary. However, the full explanation should be taken. Yo means whatever clansman.

Assāti laddhasammutikassa. Yaṃ taṃ bahu sutaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ na sutamattamevāti yojanā.Mañjūsāyanti peḷāyaṃ. Sā hi sāmikassa sadhanattaṃ maññate imāyāti ‘‘mañjūsā’’ti vuccati. Mañjūsāyaṃ ratanaṃ sannicitaṃ viya sutaṃ sannicitaṃ asmiṃ puggaleti yojanā,etenāti ‘‘sannicita’’ntipadena, dassetīti sambandho.Soti laddhasammutiko bhikkhu.Sannicitaratanassevāti sannicitaratanassa iva.Tanti ‘‘ye te dhammā’’tiādivacanaṃ.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Assāti laddhasammutikassa bhikkhuno.Tatthāti ‘‘vacasā paricitā’’tiādivacane. Evamattho veditabboti yojanā.Paguṇāti ujukā. Ujuko hi ajimhattā pakaṭṭho uttamo guṇoti atthena ‘‘paguṇo’’ti vuccati.Anupekkhitāti punappunaṃ upagantvā ikkhitā, passitā dassitāti attho.Atthatoti abhidheyyatthato, aṭṭhakathātoti attho.Kāraṇatoti dhammato, pāḷitoti attho.Diṭṭhisaddassa paññāsaddavevacanattā ‘‘paññāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.Supaccakkhakatāti suṭṭhu akkhānaṃ indriyānaṃ paṭimukhaṃ katā.

Assā means of one who has received consent. Whatever much learning there is, it is not merely hearing. Mañjūsāya means in a box. Because that considers the owner to be wealthy by means of this, it is called "mañjūsā" (box). The connection is that learning is accumulated in this person just as jewels are accumulated in a box, etenā means with the word "sannicita" (accumulated), is the connection, he shows. So means that bhikkhu who has received consent. Sannicitaratanassevā means just like one with accumulated jewels. Ta means that statement beginning with "ye te dhammā" (those teachings). Etthā means in this sikkhāpada. Assā means of the bhikkhu who has received consent. Tatthā means in the statement "vacasā paricitā" (familiar by word) etc. The meaning should be understood in this way. Paguṇā means straight. Because that which is straight is a superior quality, not crooked, by the meaning of outstanding, excellent, it is called "paguṇo" (straight). Anupekkhitā means seen by going up to and looking at again and again, shown is the meaning. Atthato means from the meaning of the object, from the commentary is the meaning. Kāraṇato means from the Dhamma, from the Pāḷi is the meaning. Because the word diṭṭhi (view) is synonymous with the word paññā (wisdom), "paññāyā" (by wisdom) was said. Supaccakkhakatā means brought well to the face of the senses.

nissayamuccanako. Parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpetītiparisupaṭṭhāko. Bhikkhuniyo ovadatītibhikkhunovādako. Tatthāti tividhesu bahussutesu. Nissayamuccanakena ettakaṃ uggahetabbanti sambandho.Upasampadāyāti upasampādetvā. Pañca vassāni etassātipañcavasso. Tena uggahetabbanti yojanā.Sabbantimenāti sabbesaṃ paricchedānaṃ ante lāmake pavattena.Paguṇāti ajimhā ujukā.Vācuggatāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Yassa hi pāḷipāṭhā sajjhāyanakāle paguṇā honti, tassa vācuggatā. Yassa vā pana vācuggatā honti, tassa paguṇā. Tasmā tāni padāni aññamaññakāraṇavevacanāni.Pakkhadivasesūti juṇhapakkhakāḷapakkhapariyāpannesu divasesu.Dhammasāvanatthāyāti sampattānaṃ parisānaṃ dhammassa sāvanatthāya suṇāpanatthāyāti adhippāyo.Sāvanatthāyāti ettha yupaccayaparattā kāritapaccayo lopo hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tasmā sāvīyate suṇāpīyatesāvananti vacanattho kātabbo. Bhāṇavārā uggahetabbāti sambandho.Sampattānanti attano santikaṃ sampattānaṃ.Parikathanatthāyāti parissaṅgena āliṅganena kathanatthaṃ, appasaddasaṅkhātāya vācāya kathanatthanti attho. ‘‘Kathāmaggo’’ti vuttattā vatthukathāyeva adhippetā, na suttasaṅkhāto pāḷipāṭho. Anu pacchā, punappunaṃ vā dāyakā modanti etāyātianumodanā. Jhānaṃ vā maggo vā phalaṃ vāsamaṇadhammonāma. Tassa karaṇatthaṃ uggahetabbanti yojanā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Catūsu disāsu apaṭihatoticātuddiso,apaṭihatatthe ṇapaccayo.

nissayamuccanako: One who establishes a community is a parisaṃ upaṭṭhāko. One who exhorts the bhikkhunis is a bhikkhunovādako. Tattha: In those three kinds of learned individuals. "Nissayamuccanakena ettakaṃ uggahetabbaṃ" means it should be connected to so much learning. Upasampadāya: Having given the upasampadā. Pañcavasso: One who has five years. It should be construed as "tena uggahetabbaṃ". Sabbantimenā: At the end of all the divisions, with a trivial progression. Paguṇā: Not crooked, upright. Vācuggatā: A synonym for that itself. For one whose recitation of the Pali text is fluent during study, it is vācuggatā. Or for one whose recitation is vācuggatā, it is paguṇā. Therefore, those terms are synonyms with reciprocal causes. Pakkhadivasesu: On days included in the waxing and waning fortnights. Dhammasāvanatthāya: For the purpose of causing the assemblies that have arrived to hear the Dhamma, the intention is to cause them to listen. Sāvanatthāya: Here, it should be understood that the kārita suffix is dropped due to the yupaccaya. Therefore, the meaning of the word should be made as "sāvīyate suṇāpīyate sāvana." It should be connected as "Bhāṇavārā uggahetabbā". Sampattānaṃ: To those who have arrived in one's presence. Parikathanatthāya: For the purpose of speaking with affection, or for the purpose of speaking in a soft voice. Since "kathāmaggo" is stated, only vatthukathā is intended, not the pāḷipāṭha classified as sutta. Anumodanā: Because the donors rejoice again and again through this. Samaṇadhammo: Is the name for jhāna, or magga, or phala. It should be construed as "uggahetabbaṃ for the purpose of doing that". : Indeed, or because. Cātuddiso: Unobstructed in the four directions, the ṇapaccaya is in the sense of unobstructedness.

Abhivinayeti aññamaññaparicchinne vinayapiṭake.Dve vibhaṅgāti bhikkhuvibhaṅgo ca bhikkhunivibhaṅgo ca. Asakkontena parisupaṭṭhāpakena bhikkhunāti sambandho. Evaṃ attano atthāya uggahetabbaṃ dassetvā idāni parisāya atthāya uggahetabbaṃ dassento āha ‘‘parisāya panā’’tiādi.Abhidhammeti aññamaññaparicchinne suttantapiṭake eva, na abhidhammapiṭake.Tayo vaggāti sagāthāvaggo nidānavaggo khandhavaggoti tayo vaggā.saddo aniyamavikappattho.Ekanti ekaṃ nipātaṃ.Tato tatoti nikāyato.Samuccayaṃ katvāti rāsiṃ katvā.Na vuttanti aṭṭhakathāsu na kathitaṃ. Yassa pana natthi, so na labhatīti yojanā.Suttante cāti suttantapiṭake pana.Uggahitoti sarūpakathanena gahito, uccāritoti attho.Disāpāmokkhoti disāsu ṭhitānaṃ bhikkhuādīnaṃ pāmokkho.Yena kāmaṃ gamoti yathākāmaṃ gamo.

Abhivinaye: In the Vinaya Piṭaka that is mutually delimited. Dve vibhaṅgā: The Bhikkhu Vibhaṅga and the Bhikkhuni Vibhaṅga. It should be connected as "asakkontena parisupaṭṭhāpakena bhikkhunā". Having shown what should be learned for one's own benefit in this way, now showing what should be learned for the benefit of the community, he says "parisāya panā" etc. Abhidhamme: In the Suttanta Piṭaka that is mutually delimited, not in the Abhidhamma Piṭaka. Tayo vaggā: The three vaggas Sagāthāvagga, Nidānavagga, and Khandhavagga. The word is for optional alternatives. Ekaṃ: One nipāta. Tato tato: From the nikāyas. Samuccayaṃ katvā: Having made a pile. Na vuttaṃ: Not spoken in the commentaries. But one who does not have it does not obtain it. Suttante cā: But in the Suttanta Piṭaka. Uggahito: Grasped by stating the form, meaning recited. Disāpāmokkho: The chief of the bhikkhus etc. who are situated in the directions. Yena kāmaṃ gamo: Going as one wishes.

Catūsu nikāyesūti khuddakanikāyato aññesu dīghanikāyādīsu.Ekassāti aññatarassa ekassa.Ekanikāyenāti ekasmiṃ nikāye laddhanayena.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tatthāti catuppakaraṇassa aṭṭhakathāyaṃ.Nānatthanti nānāpayojanaṃ.Tanti vinayapiṭakaṃ.Ettāvatāti ettakapamāṇena paguṇena.Hotīti itisaddo parisamāpanattho. Iti parisamāpanaṃ veditabbanti yojanā.

Catūsu nikāyesu: In the Dīgha Nikāya and others, other than the Khuddaka Nikāya. Ekassā: Of one or another. Ekanikāyenā: By the method obtained in one Nikāya. : Indeed, or because. Tattha: In the commentary of the four treatises. Nānatthaṃ: Various purposes. Taṃ: That Vinaya Piṭaka. Ettāvatā: By this much proficiency. Hotī: The word iti is for the conclusion of the parisa. It should be construed as "iti parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ".

Aññasminti vinayapiṭakato itarasmiṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘ubhayāni kho panassā’’tiādivacane. Yathā yenākārena āgatāni, taṃ ākāraṃ dassetunti yojanā.Padapaccābhaṭṭhasaṅkaradosavirahitānīti padānaṃ paccābhaṭṭhasaṅkarabhūtehi dosehi virahitāni. Ettha capadapaccābhaṭṭhanti padānaṃ paṭinivattitvā ābhassanaṃ gaḷanaṃ, cutanti attho.Padasaṅkaranti padānaṃ vipatti, vināsoti attho.‘‘Suttaso’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi khandhakaparivārasuttaṃ eva gahetabbanti āha ‘‘khandhakaparivārato’’ti.Anubyañjanasoti ettha byañjanasaddo akkharassa ca padassa ca vācakoti āha ‘‘akkharapadapāripūriyā cā’’ti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Aññasmiṃ: In other than the Vinaya Piṭaka. Tattha: In the statement beginning "ubhayāni kho panassā" etc. It should be construed as "yathā yenākārena āgatāni, taṃ ākāraṃ dassetuṃ". Padapaccābhaṭṭhasaṅkaradosavirahitāni: Devoid of defects consisting of padapaccābhaṭṭha and saṅkara. Here, padapaccābhaṭṭha means turning back and swallowing, or dripping away, of the words. Padasaṅkara means corruption or destruction of the words. ‘‘Suttaso’’: Although stated generally, it should be taken to mean only the Khandhaka Parivāra Sutta, so he says "khandhakaparivārato". Anubyañjanaso: Here, the word byañjana refers to both a letter and a word, so he says "akkharapadapāripūriyā cā". : Indeed, or because.

Sithiladhanitādīnanti ādisaddena niggahitavimuttasambandhavavatthitadīgha rassa garu lahu saṅkhātā aṭṭha byañjanabuddhiyo saṅgaṇhāti.Yathāvidhānavacanenāti akkharacintakānaṃ yathā saṃvidahanavacanena. Vācāyeva karīyati kathīyati uccārīyativākkaraṇaṃcakārassa kakāraṃ katvā.ti tadeva yuttaṃ. Mātugāmo yasmā sarasampattirato, tasmā hīḷetīti yojanā. ‘‘Sarasampattirahita’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘vacana’’ntipade visesanabhāvena visesaṃ katvā ‘‘hīḷetī’’tipade hetubhāvena sampajjanato hetuantogadhavisesananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sabbāsanti bhikkhunīnaṃ. ‘‘Sīlācārasampattiyā’’tiiminā jāti gotta rūpa bhogādinātiatthaṃ nivatteti.Kāraṇañcāti aṭṭhakathañca.Tajjetvāti ubbejetvā.Tāsanti bhikkhunīnaṃ.Gihikāleti bhikkhunovādakassa gihikāle anajjhāpannapubbo hotīti sambandho.Hitadeva yuttaṃ. ‘‘Mātugāmo’’tipadaṃ ‘‘na karotī’’tipade suddhakattā, ‘‘uppādetī’’tipade hetukattā. Ṭhitassa bhikkhuno dhammadesanāyāpīti yojanā.Apisaddo garahattho.Visabhāgehīti viruddhehi vatthārammaṇehi.Ayuttaṭṭhāneti pabbajitānaṃ ananurūpaṭṭhāne.Chandarāganti balavataṇhaṃ.Tenāti tena hetunā.

Sithiladhanitādīnaṃ: The word ādi includes the eight kinds of consonantal qualities consisting of rigid, soft, closed, released, conjunct, disjoint, long, short, heavy, and light. Yathāvidhānavacanena: According to the customary statement of those who think about letters. Vākkaraṇaṃ: Is the making, speaking, or uttering of speech, having made the ca into ka. : That itself is fitting. Because a woman is delighted by an abundance of passion, therefore she despises, so it should be construed. The phrase "sarasampattirahita" having specified "vacana" by way of a special characteristic, it should be understood to be a cause contained within the cause of becoming conscious in the phrase "hīḷeti". Sabbāsaṃ: Of all the bhikkhunis. By "sīlācārasampattiyā", he turns back from the meaning that it is by birth, lineage, appearance, possessions, etc. Kāraṇañcā: And the commentary. Tajjetvā: Having frightened. Tāsaṃ: Of the bhikkhunis. Gihikāle: It should be connected as "bhikkhunovādakassa hotī gihikāle anajjhāpannapubbo". Hi: That itself is fitting. The phrase "mātugāmo" should be construed with "na karotī" and also with "uppādetī". It should be construed as "ṭhitassa bhikkhuno dhammadesanāyāpi". The word api is in the sense of censure. Visabhāgehī: With unsuitable material objects. Ayuttaṭṭhāne: In a place unsuitable for renunciants. Chandarāgaṃ: Strong craving. Tenā: By that reason.

‘‘Ettha cā’’tiādimhi ayaṃ pana saṅgaho –

‘‘Ettha cā’’tiādiṃhi ayaṃ pana saṅgaho –

‘‘Sīlavā bahussuto ca, svāgato ca suvācako;

‘‘Sīlavā bahussuto ca, svāgato ca suvācako;
Piyo paṭibalo cāpi, najjhāpanno ca vīsatī’’ti.

148.Vatthusminti aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ. Kakāralopaṃ katvā garudhammāti vuccantīti āha ‘‘garukehi dhammehī’’ti.Teti garudhammā.ti yasmā. ‘‘Ekato’’ti sāmaññena vuttavacanassa visesena gahetabbataṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhunīnaṃ santike’’ti.Yathāvatthukamevāti pācittiyameva. Tañhi vatthussa āpattikāraṇassa anurūpaṃ pavattattā ‘‘yathāvatthuka’’nti vuccati.

148.Vatthusmiṃ: In the case. Having elided the ka, it is said to be garudhamma, so he says "garukehi dhammehī". Te: Those garudhammas. : Because. To show that what is stated generally by "ekato" should be taken specifically, it is said "bhikkhunīnaṃ santike". Yathāvatthukamevā: Only according to the case, only a pācittiya. For that is called "yathāvatthuka" because it proceeds in accordance with the cause of the offense.

149.Pātoti pageva, paṭhamanti attho. Asammaṭṭhaṃ sammajjītabbanti sambandho. Asammajjane dosaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto āha ‘‘asammaṭṭhaṃ hī’’tiādi.ti tappākaṭīkaraṇajotako.Tanti pariveṇaṃ. Disvā bhaveyyunti sambandho.Tenāti asotukāmānaṃ viya bhavanahetunā. Pariveṇasammajjanassa ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā pānīyaparibhojanīyaupaṭṭhānassa tameva dassento āha ‘‘anto gāmato panā’’ti ādi.Tasminti pānīyaparibhojanīye.

149.Pāto: Early, in the morning. It should be connected as "Asammaṭṭhaṃ sammajjītabbaṃ". Making the fault manifest in not sweeping, he says "asammaṭṭhaṃ hī" etc. : Indicates the manifestation of that. Taṃ: That enclosure. It should be connected as "disvā bhaveyyuṃ". Tenā: By the reason of not wanting to hear, as if. Having shown the benefit of sweeping the enclosure, now showing the same for providing drinking water and food, he says "anto gāmato panā" etc. Tasmiṃ: In that drinking water and food.

Sākhābhaṅgampīti bhañjitabbasākhampi.Dutiyoti viññū puriso dutiyo. Nisīditabbaṭṭhānaṃ dassento āha ‘‘nisīditabba’’ntiādi. ‘‘Vihāramajjhe’’ti sāmaññato vatvā visesato dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dvāre’’ti. Osaranti avasaranti etthātiosaraṇaṃ,tañca taṃ ṭhānañcetiosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ,tasmiṃ.Samaggatthāti ettha saṃpubbo ca āpubbo ca gamusaddo hoti, tato hiyyattanīsaṅkhātaṃ tthavacanaṃ vā hoti, pañcamīsaṅkhātassa thavacanassa tthattaṃ vā hoti, saṃyogaparattā ā upasaggo rasso ca hoti, iti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sammā āgatatthā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘sammā’’tipadena saṃsaddassa atthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘ā’’itipadena ātyūpasaggaṃ, ‘‘gata’’itipadena gamudhātuṃ, ‘‘ttha’’itipadena hiyyattanīsaṅkhātaṃ tthavacanaṃ vā, pañcamīsaṅkhātassa thavacanassa tthattaṃ vā dasseti. Ayaṃ panetthattho – samaṃ tumhe āgatatthāti. Pañcamīsaṅkhātassa thavacanassa tthattakāle samaṃ tumhe āgā attha bhavathāti. ‘‘Āgacchantī’’tipadena‘‘vattantī’’ti ettha vatudhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘paguṇā vācuggatā’’tipadehi adhippāyaṃ dasseti.Pāḷīti garudhammapāḷi.

Sākhābhaṅgampi: Even a branch that should be broken off. Dutiyo: A wise person is the second. Showing the place where one should sit, he says "nisīditabba" etc. Having stated generally "vihāramajjhe", to show specifically, it is said "dvāre". Osaraṇaṃ: They descend, they draw near here, therefore it is osaraṇaṃ, and that place itself is osaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, in that. Samaggatthā: Here, the prefix saṃ and the prefix ā and the verb gamu are present, then there is either the ttha-vacana counted as past tense, or the tta of the tha-vacana counted as the fifth case, due to the conjunction, the ā upasagga is shortened, thus showing the meaning he says "sammā āgatatthā". There, the word "sammā" shows the meaning of the saṃsadda, the word "ā" shows the ātyūpasagga, the word "gata" shows the gamudhātu, the word "ttha" shows either the ttha-vacana counted as past tense, or the tta of the tha-vacana counted as the fifth case. But the meaning here is: "samaṃ tumhe āgatatthā". In the case of the tta of the tha-vacana counted as the fifth case, "samaṃ tumhe āgā attha bhavatha". The word ‘‘āgacchantī’’ shows the meaning of the vatudhātu in ‘‘vattantī’’, it shows the intention by the phrases "paguṇā vācuggatā". Pāḷī: The garudhamma pāḷi.

Tatthāti tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ, tesu vā abhivādanādīsu catūsu.Maggasampadānanti maggaṃ pariharitvā bhikkhussa okāsadānaṃ.Bījananti bījaniyā vidhūpanaṃ.Pānīyāpucchananti pānīyassa āpucchanaṃ. Ādisaddena paribhojanīyāpucchanādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Ettha cāti etesu catūsu abhivādanādīsu. ‘‘Anto gāme vā’’tiādīni cha padāni ‘‘kātabbamevā’’tipade ādhāro.Rājussāraṇāyāti rañño ānubhāvena janānaṃ ussāraṇāya. Mahābhikkhusaṅgho sannipatati etthātimahāsannipātaṃ,tasmiṃ mahāsannipāte ṭhāne nisinne satīti yojanā.Paccuṭṭhānanti paṭikacceva uṭṭhānaṃ.Taṃ tanti sāmīcikammaṃ.

Tattha: In that Pāḷi, or in those four consisting of greeting etc. Maggasampadānaṃ: Giving way and giving space to the bhikkhu. Bījanaṃ: Fanning with a fan. Pānīyāpucchanaṃ: Asking for water. The word ādi includes asking for food etc. Ettha cā: And in these four consisting of greeting etc. The six phrases beginning "anto gāme vā" are the basis in the phrase "kātabbameva". Rājussāraṇāyā: For the ussāraṇā of the people by the majesty of the king. Mahāsannipātaṃ: A great assembly of bhikkhus gathers here, therefore it is mahāsannipātaṃ, while sitting in that place in the great assembly. Paccuṭṭhānaṃ: Getting up immediately. Taṃ taṃ: That sāmīcikamma.

Sakkatvāti cittiṃ katvā, saṃ ādaraṃ katvāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yathā kato’’tiādi.Tiṇṇaṃ kiccānanti ‘‘sakkatvā garuṃkatvā mānetvā’’tisaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ kiccānaṃ. Anīyasaddo kammatthoti āha ‘‘na atikkamitabbo’’ti.

Sakkatvā: Having shown respect, meaning having made an effort. Therefore, he says "yathā kato" etc. Tiṇṇaṃ kiccānaṃ: Of the three duties counted as "sakkatvā garuṃkatvā mānetvā". He says that the anīyasadda is in the sense of the passive, "na atikkamitabbo".

abhikkhukoāvāso, so kittake ṭhāne abhikkhuko, yo āvāso abhikkhuko nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sace’’ti ādi. ‘‘Upassayato’’tipadaṃ ‘‘abbhantare’’tipade apādānaṃ.Etthāti abhikkhuke āvāse.ti saccaṃ.Tatoti aḍḍhayojanabbhantare ṭhitaāvāsato.Paranti aññasmiṃ āvāse, bhummatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Pacchābhattanti bhattato pacchā.Tatthāti abhikkhuke āvāse. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyo’’tipadaṃ ‘‘vadantī’’tipade kammaṃ.Vuttappamāṇeti aḍḍhayojanabbhantarasaṅkhāte vuttappamāṇe.Sākhāmaṇḍapepīti sākhāya chāditamaṇḍapepi.Pisaddena āvāse pana kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Vuttāti vasitā.Ettāvatāti ekarattaṃ vasitamattena.Etthāti sabhikkhuke āvāse. Upagacchantīhi bhikkhunīhi yācitabbāti yojanā.Pakkhassāti āsaḷhīmāsassa juṇhapakkhassa. ‘‘Terasiya’’ntipadena avayaviavayavabhāvena yojetabbaṃ.Mayanti amhe.Yatoti yena ujunā maggenāti sambandho. Tenāha ‘‘tena maggenā’’ti.Aññena maggenāti ujumaggato aññena jimhamaggena.Ayanti ayaṃ āvāso.Tatoti bhikkhūnaṃ āvāsato, bhikkhuniupassayato vā, idameva yuttataraṃ. Vakkhati hi ‘‘amhākaṃ upassayato gāvutamatte’’ti.Khemaṭṭhāneti abhayaṭṭhāne. Tañhi khīyanti bhayā etthātikhemaṃ,khemañca taṃ ṭhānañceti khemaṭṭhānanti katvā ‘‘khemaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati.Tāhi bhikkhunīhīti aḍḍhayojanamatte ṭhāne vasantīhi.Tā bhikkhuniyoti gāvutamatte ṭhāne vasantiyo.Antarāti tumhākaṃ, amhākañca nivāsanaṭṭhānassa, nivāsanaṭṭhānato vā antare vemajjhe. Bhummatthe cetaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ. Ṭhite maggeti sambandho ‘‘santikā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘āgata’’itipade apādānaṃ.Tatthāti aññāsaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ upassaye. Iti yācitabbāti yojanā.Tatoti bhikkhūnaṃ yācitabbato, paranti sambandho.

abhikkhuko: An āvāsa without bhikkhus, in how much place is it without bhikkhus, he says what kind of āvāsa is called abhikkhuko, "sace" etc. The phrase "upassayato" is apādāna in the phrase "abbhantare". Ettha: In the āvāsa without bhikkhus. : Indeed. Tato: From the āvāsa situated within half a yojana. Paraṃ: In another āvāsa, this is an upayogavacana in the locative sense. Pacchābhattaṃ: After the meal. Tattha: In the āvāsa without bhikkhus. The phrase "bhikkhuniyo" is the object in the phrase "vadantī". Vuttappamāṇe: In the stated measure counted as within half a yojana. Sākhāmaṇḍapepi: Even in a pavilion covered with branches. The word pi shows what need is there to mention an āvāsa. Vuttā: Resided. Ettāvatā: By merely residing for one night. Ettha: In the āvāsa with bhikkhus. It should be construed that it should be requested by the bhikkhunis who are approaching. Pakkhassā: Of the waxing fortnight of Āsāḷhī month. It should be connected by way of part and whole with the phrase "terasiya". Mayaṃ: We. Yato: By which straight path, so it should be connected. Therefore, he says "tena maggena". Aññena maggena: By a crooked path other than the straight path. Ayaṃ: This āvāsa. Tato: From the āvāsa of the bhikkhus, or from the bhikkhuni upassaya, this itself is more fitting. For he will say "amhākaṃ upassayato gāvutamatte". Khemaṭṭhāne: In a safe place. For fear wastes away here, therefore it is khemaṃ, and that place itself is khemaṭṭhāna, thus "khemaṭṭhāna" is said. Tāhi bhikkhunīhī: By those bhikkhunis dwelling in a place within half a yojana. Tā bhikkhuniyo: Those bhikkhunis dwelling in a place within a gāvuta. Antarā: Between your and our dwelling place, or from the dwelling place, in the middle. This is a nissakkavacana in the locative sense. It should be connected as "ṭhite maggeti", the phrase "santikā" is apādāna in the phrase "āgata". Tattha: In the upassaya of the other bhikkhunis. Thus, it should be requested. Tato: In relation to requesting the bhikkhus, paranti is connected.

Cātuddaseti āsaḷhīmāsassa juṇhapakkhassa catuddasannaṃ divasānaṃ pūraṇe divase.Idhāti imasmiṃ vihāre. ‘‘Ovāda’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘anu’’itipade kammaṃ.Anujīvantiyoti anugantvā jīvanaṃ vuttiṃ karontiyo. Vuttā bhikkhūti sambandho.Dutiyadivaseti āsaḷhīpuṇṇamiyaṃ.Athāti pakkamanānantaraṃ.Etthāti bhikkhūnaṃ pakkantattā apassane. ‘‘Ābhogaṃ katvā’’tiiminā ābhogaṃ akatvā vasituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Sabhikkhukāvāsaṃ gantabbamevāti adhippāyo.ti vassacchedāpatti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Kenaci kāraṇenāti bhikkhācārassa asampadādinā kenaci nimittena.ti saccaṃ. Bhikkhūnaṃ pakkantādikāraṇā abhikkhukāvāse vasantiyā kiṃ abhikkhukāvāseva pavāretabbanti āha ‘‘pavārentiyā panā’’tiādi.

Cātuddase: On the day of the completion of the fourteen days of the waxing fortnight of Āsāḷhī month. Idhā: In this vihāra. The phrase "ovāda" is the object in the phrase "anu". Anujīvantiyo: Those who live depending on, making a livelihood by following. It should be connected as "vuttā bhikkhū". Dutiyadivase: On the full-moon day of Āsāḷhī. Athā: Immediately after departing. Ettha: Because of the bhikkhus having departed, in the absence of seeing. By "ābhogaṃ katvā", he shows that it is not proper to dwell without making ābhoga. The intention is that one must go to an āvāsa with bhikkhus. : That is the vassacchedāpatti. : Indeed, or because. Kenaci kāraṇena: By some cause, such as the non-accomplishment of alms-seeking. : Indeed. When dwelling in an āvāsa without bhikkhus due to reasons such as the departure of the bhikkhus, does one pavāraṇā only in an āvāsa without bhikkhus, he says "pavārentiyā panā" etc.

Anvaddhamāsanti ettha anusaddo vicchatthavācako kammappavacanīyo, tena payogattā bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘addhamāse addhamāse’’ti.Paccāsīsitabbāti ettha patipubbo ca āpubbo ca sidhātu icchattheti āha ‘‘icchitabbā’’ti. Sidhātuyā dvebhāvo hoti. Āpubbo sisi icchāyantipi dhātupāṭhesu vuttaṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘uposathapucchaka’’ntivacane.Pakkhassāti yassa kassaci pakkhassa. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vuttanti sambandho. Ovādassa yācanaṃovādouttarapadalopena, soyeva attho payojanaṃovādattho,tadatthāya.Pāṭipadadivasatoti dutiyadivasato. So hi cando vuddhiñca hāniñca paṭimukhaṃ pajjati ettha, etenāti vāpāṭipadoti vuccati.Itīti evaṃ vuttanayena. Bhagavā paññapetīti yojanā.Aññassāti dhammassavanakammato aññassa.Nirantaranti abhikkhaṇaṃ, ‘‘paññapetī’’tipade bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ.ti vitthāro.Evañca satīti evaṃ bahūpakāre sati ca.Yanti yaṃ dhammaṃ.Sātthikanti sapayojanaṃ.Yathānusiṭṭhanti anusiṭṭhiyā anurūpaṃ. Sabbāyeva bhikkhuniyopīti yojanā.ti saccaṃ.

Anvaddhamāsanti: Here, the word "anu" denotes separation and is a kammappavacaniya. Because of its application, it is used in the sense of abundance, saying, "every half-month". Paccāsīsitabbāti: Here, "pati" and "ā" are prefixes, and the root "si" means to desire, thus it means "should be desired." The root "si" has dvebhāva. In the dhātupāṭha it is said, "Āpubbo sisi icchāyaṃ": the prefix "ā" with the root "si" means desire. Tatthāti: In the statement "uposatha questioner". Pakkhassāti: Of any fortnight whatsoever. But it should be connected with what is said in the Mahāpaccariya. Requesting for advice is ovādo: by elision of the latter word, that itself, the purpose is ovādattho, for that purpose. Pāṭipadadivasatoti: From the second day. Because that moon travels facing both growth and decline, therefore it is called pāṭipado. Itīti: In this manner. The Blessed One established, is the construction. Aññassāti: Other than the act of hearing the Dhamma. Nirantaranti: Constantly, "established" is a neuter noun of action. ti: Expansion. Evañca satīti: And when there is so much benefit. Yanti: Which Dhamma. Sātthikanti: Purposeful. Yathānusiṭṭhanti: According to the instruction. The construction is: all the bhikkhunis also. ti: Truly.

Ovādaṃ gacchatīti ovādaṃ yācituṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmaṃ gacchati.Na ovādo gantabboti ovādaṃ yācituṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmo na gantabbo.Ovādoti ca upayogatthe paccattavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Itarathā hi saddapayogo virujjheyya.Ovādaṃ gantunti ovādaṃ yācanatthāya bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmaṃ gantuṃ.

Ovādaṃ gacchatīti: She goes to the monastery of the Bhikkhu Sangha to request instruction. Na ovādo gantabboti: One should not go to the monastery of the Bhikkhu Sangha to request instruction. Ovādoti: and it should be seen as a singular number in the sense of usage. Otherwise, the usage of the words would contradict. Ovādaṃ gantunti: To go to the monastery of the Bhikkhu Sangha to request instruction.

Ovādūpasaṅkamananti ovādassa gahaṇatthāya upasaṅkamanaṃ.Ārāmanti bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmaṃ.Tatoti gamanato paranti sambandho.Tena bhikkhunāti ovādapaṭiggāhakena bhikkhunā.Tanti sammataṃ bhikkhuṃ.

Ovādūpasaṅkamananti: Approaching for the purpose of receiving instruction. Ārāmanti: To the monastery of the Bhikkhu Sangha. Tatoti: In relation to after the going. Tena bhikkhunāti: By that bhikkhu who is the receiver of instruction. Tanti: The bhikkhu who is agreed upon.

Ussahatīti sakkoti.Pāsādikenāti pasādaṃ āvahena pasādajanakena kāyavacīmanokammenāti attho.Sampādetūti tividhaṃ sikkhaṃ sampādetu.Ettāvatāti ettakena ‘‘pāsādikena sampādetū’’ti vacanamattena.ti phalajotako.Etanti ‘‘tāhī’’tivacanaṃ.

Ussahatīti: Is able. Pāsādikenāti: With pleasing conduct, meaning with bodily, verbal, and mental actions that generate confidence. Sampādetūti: To fulfill the threefold training. Ettāvatāti: By just this much, by the statement "sampādetū with pleasing conduct". ti: Illuminating the result. Etanti: The statement "by those".

Tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ. Vacanākāro pākaṭova.

Tatrāti: With reference to the previous statement. The form of the statement is obvious.

Ekā bhikkhunī vā bahūhi bhikkhunīupassayehi ovādatthāya pesite vacanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho ca ayyā’’tiādi.

Showing the form of the statement sent by one bhikkhuni or by many bhikkhuni residences for the sake of instruction, he says, "bhikkhuni Sangha, venerable ones," etc.

Tenāpīti ovādapaṭiggāhakenāpi ‘‘ovāda’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘paṭiggāhakenā’’ti pade kammaṃ. Puna ‘‘ovāda’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘apaṭiggahetu’’ntipade kammaṃ. Balati assāsapassāsamattena jīvati, na paññājīvitenātibālo. Gilāyati rujatītigilāno. Gamissati gantuṃ bhabbotigamiko. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – gantuṃ bhabbo yo bhikkhu gamissati gamanaṃ karissati, iti tasmā so bhikkhu gamiko nāma. Atha vā yo bhikkhu gantuṃ bhabbattā gamissati gamanaṃ karissati, iti tasmā so bhikkhu gamiko nāmāti. ‘‘Bhabbo’’ti ca hetuantogadhavisesanaṃ.

Tenāpīti: Even by the receiver of instruction, the word "ovāda" is the object in the phrase "by the receiver". Again, the word "ovāda" is the object in the phrase "apaṭiggahetu." Bālo: He lives by the measure of breaths, not by the life of wisdom. Gilāno: He is sick, ailing. Gamiko: He is able to go. Here, this is the construction: that bhikkhu who is able to go, will go, will make the going, therefore that bhikkhu is called "gamiko." Or else, that bhikkhu, because he is able to go, will go, will make the going, therefore that bhikkhu is called "gamiko." "Able" is a qualifying adjective included in the cause.

Tatthāti bālādīsu tīsu puggalesu.Dutiyapakkhadivaseti pāṭipadato dutiyapakkhadivase.Uposathaggeti uposathagehe. Tañhi uposathaṃ gaṇhanti, uposatho vā gayhati asminti‘‘uposathagga’’nti vuccati. Tasmiṃ uposathagge. ‘‘Anārocetu’’nti vacanassa ñāpakaṃ dassetvā ‘‘apaccāharitu’’nti vacanassa tameva dassento āha ‘‘aparampi vutta’’ntiādi.

Tatthāti: Among those three individuals, the fool, etc. Dutiyapakkhadivaseti: On the second day of the fortnight from the new moon. Uposathaggeti: In the uposatha hall. Because they count the uposatha there, or the uposatha is observed there, therefore it is called uposathagga. In that uposatha hall. Showing that the statement "without informing" is a sign, and showing that very thing for the statement "without withdrawing," he says, "aparampi vutta," etc.

Tatthāti ovādapaṭiggāhakesu bhikkhūsu.No cassāti no ce assa.Sabhaṃ vāti samajjaṃ vā. Sā hi saha bhāsanti ettha, santehi vā bhāti dibbatīti‘‘sabhā’’ti vuccati, taṃ sabhaṃ vā upasaṅkamissāmīti yojanā.Tatrāti tasmiṃ sabhādike. Evaṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tipadepi.

Tatthāti: Among the bhikkhus who are the receivers of instruction. No cassāti: If it is not. Sabhaṃ vāti: Or a gathering. Because they speak together there, or it shines or is radiant with the virtuous, therefore it is called sabhā, the construction is: I will approach that assembly or. Tatrāti: In that assembly, etc. The same applies to the word "tatthā."

cātuddaso,tasmiṃ pavāretvāti sambandho.Bhikkhusaṅgheti bhikkhusaṅghassa santike, samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Ajjatanāti ettha asmiṃ ahani ajja, imasaddato ahanīti atthe jjapaccayo, imasaddassa ca akāro, ajja eva ajjatanā, svattho hi tanapaccayo. Aparasmiṃ ahaniaparajja,aparasaddato ahanīti atthe jjapaccayo sattamyantoyeva.Etthāti pavāraṇe, ‘‘anujānāmī’’tiādivacane vā.ti saccaṃ.

cātuddaso, having concluded the pavāraṇā on that day, is the connection. Bhikkhusaṅgheti: In the presence of the Bhikkhu Sangha, this is a locative case in the sense of proximity. Ajjatanāti: Here, in this day, "ajja," from the word "ima," the suffix "jjapaccayo" is in the sense of "ahan," and the "a" of the word "ima" is dropped, "ajja eva ajjatanā," the suffix "tanapaccayo" is indeed in its own sense. On another day, aparajja, from the word "apara," the suffix "jjapaccayo" is in the sense of "ahan," only in the locative case. Etthāti: In the pavāraṇā, or in the statement "I allow," etc. ti: Truly.

Kolāhalanti kotūhalaṃ.Paṭhamaṃ bhikkhunī yācitabbāti saṅghena paṭhamaṃ bhikkhunī yācitabbā.

Kolāhalanti: Commotion. Paṭhamaṃ bhikkhunī yācitabbāti: First, the bhikkhuni should be asked by the Sangha.

Passanto paṭikarissatīti vajjāvajjaṃ passanto hutvā paṭikarissati.

Passanto paṭikarissatīti: Seeing what is faulty and faultless, he will remedy it.

Ubhinnanti bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ.Yathāṭhāneyevāti yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ yathāṭhānaṃ, tasmiṃ yathāṭhāneyeva.Kenaci pariyāyenāti kenaci kāraṇena. Avapubbo varasaddo pihitatthoti āha ‘‘pihito’’ti.Vacanaṃyevāti ovādavacanaṃyeva.Pathoti jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne ṭhānassa kāraṇattā patho.Dosaṃ panāti abhikkamanādīsu ādīnavaṃ pana.Añjentīti makkhenti. Bhikkhūhi pana ovadituṃ anusāsituṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.

Ubhinnanti: Of both bhikkhus and bhikkhunis. Yathāṭhāneyevāti: Whatever place is appropriate, in that very appropriate place. Kenaci pariyāyenāti: By some reason or other. The word "vara" with the prefix "ava" has a hidden meaning, thus he says, "hidden". Vacanaṃyevāti: Just the word of instruction. Pathoti: Because the place in the position of seniority is the cause, it is the path. Dosaṃ panāti: But the fault in going forth, etc. Añjentīti: Smearing. But it is fitting for the bhikkhus to instruct and advise, is the construction.

Aññanti ovādato aññaṃ.Esoti garudhammo.

Aññanti: Other than the instruction. Esoti: This is a garudhamma.

150.‘‘Adhammakamme’’ti ettha katamaṃ kammaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘adhammakammetiādīsū’’tiādi.Tatthāti adhammakammadhammakammesu.

150.Adhammakamme’’ti: Here, what kind of action is it called? He says, "adhammakammetiādīsūtiādi. Tatthāti: In unrighteous and righteous actions.

152.Uddesaṃ dento bhaṇati, anāpattīti yojanā.Osāretīti katheti.Catuparisatīti catuparisasmiṃ.Tatrāpīti tena bhikkhunīnaṃ suṇanakāraṇenāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

152.Giving the recitation, he speaks, the construction is: there is no offense. Osāretīti: He relates. Catuparisatīti: In the four assemblies. Tatrāpīti: Also because of that hearing by the bhikkhunis. The first.

2. Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadaṃ

153.Dutiyepariyāyasaddo vāratthoti āha ‘‘vārenā’’ti. Vāroti ca anukkamoyevāti āha ‘‘paṭipāṭiyāti attho’’ti. Adhikaṃ cittaṃ imassātiadhicetoti dassento āha ‘‘adhicittavato’’tiādi. Adhicittaṃ nāma idha arahattaphalacittameva, na vipassanāpādakabhūtaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittanti āha ‘‘arahattaphalacittenā’’ti. ‘‘Adhicittasikkhā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 45; dī. ni. 3.305; ma. ni. 1.497; a. ni. 6.105; mahāni. 10) hi vipassanāpādakabhūtaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ ‘‘adhicitta’’nti vuccati.Na pamajjatoti na pamajjantassa.Sātaccakiriyāyāti satatakaraṇena. Ubho loke munati jānātītimunīti ca, monaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ munanaṭṭhena jānanatthena, tamassatthītimunīti ca dassento āha ‘‘muninotī’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘yo munati…pe… munanena vā’’tiiminā paṭhamatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘monaṃ vuccati…pe… vuccatī’’tiiminā dutiyatthaṃ dasseti. Muna gatiyanti dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 15 pakārantadhātu) vuttattā ‘‘yo munatī’’ti ettha bhūvādigaṇiko munadhātuyeva, na kīyādigaṇiko mudhātūti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā muna ñāṇeti dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 17 kiyādigaṇika) vuttattā ‘‘munātī’’ti kīyādigaṇikova. Dhātvantanakāralopoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Monaṃ vuccati ñāṇa’’nti cettha ñāṇaṃ nāma arahattañāṇameva. Monassa pathomonapathoti vutte sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammāva adhippetāti āha ‘‘sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammesū’’ti. Atha vā adhisīlasikkhādayo adhippetāti āha ‘‘tīsu vā sikkhāsū’’ti.Pubbabhāgapaṭipadanti arahattañāṇassa pubbabhāge pavattaṃ sīlasamathavipassanāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipadaṃ.Pubbabhāgeti arahattañāṇassa pubbabhāge.Etthāti ‘‘adhicetaso…pe… sikkhato’’ti vacane. ‘‘Tādino’’tipadaṃ ‘‘munino’’tipadena yojetabbanti āha ‘‘tādisassa khīṇāsavamunino’’ti.Etthāti ‘‘sokā na bhavanti tādino’’ti vacane. Rāgādayo upasametītiupasantoti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgādīna’’nti. Sati assatthītisatimāti katvā mantusaddo niccayogatthoti āha ‘‘satiyā avirahitassā’’ti.

153.In the second, the word pariyāya means turn, thus he says, "vārenā". And "vāroti" itself is a sequence, thus he says, "paṭipāṭiyāti attho". Adhicetoti: Showing that it means "one with higher mind", he says, "adhicittavato". Here, adhicitta means only the citta of the fruition of Arahatship, not the eight attainments, the citta that is the basis for vipassanā, thus he says, "arahattaphalacittenā". In adhicittasikkhā, etc. (pārā. 45; dī. ni. 3.305; ma. ni. 1.497; a. ni. 6.105; mahāni. 10), the eight attainments, the citta that is the basis for vipassanā, is called adhicitta. Na pamajjatoti: For one who is not negligent. Sātaccakiriyāyāti: By constant action. Munī: He knows both worlds, and showing that it means "sage", and mona is called knowledge, because of the meaning of knowing, and it exists for him, therefore munī, he says, "muninotī". There, "yo munati…pe… munanena vā": with this he shows the first meaning, "monaṃ vuccati…pe… vuccatī": with this he shows the second meaning. Because it is said in the dhātupāṭha (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 15 pakārantadhātu) that "muna gatiyan" (muna means movement), therefore in "yo munatī," the root munadhātu is from the bhūvādigaṇa, not the kīyādigaṇa, it should be seen. Or else, because it is said in the dhātupāṭha (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 17 kiyādigaṇika) that "muna ñāṇeti" (muna means knowledge), therefore "munātī" is from the kīyādigaṇa. The dropping of the final "nakāra" of the root should be seen. Here in "monaṃ vuccati ñāṇa," ñāṇa means only the knowledge of Arahatship. The path of silence is monapatho: when it is said, it implies only the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment, thus he says, "sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammesū". Or else, it implies the adhisīlasikkhā, etc., thus he says, "tīsu vā sikkhāsū". Pubbabhāgapaṭipadanti: The practice that occurs in the preliminary part of the knowledge of Arahatship, known as morality, concentration, and insight. Pubbabhāgeti: In the preliminary part of the knowledge of Arahatship. Etthāti: In the statement "adhicetaso…pe… sikkhato". He says that the word "tādino" should be connected with the word "munino," "tādisassa khīṇāsavamunino". Etthāti: In the statement "sokā na bhavanti tādino". To show that upasanto means "he calms the passions," it is said "rāgādīna". Having made satimā mean "one who has mindfulness," he says that the word "mantu" is in the sense of constant association, "satiyā avirahitassā".

akāso,soyevaākāso. Antarena chiddena ikkhitabbotiantalikkho. Ākāso hi catubbidho ajaṭākāso, kasiṇugghāṭimākāso, paricchinnākāso, rūpaparicchedākāsoti. Tattha ajaṭākāsova idhādhippeto ‘‘antalikkhe’’ti visesitattā. Tenāha ‘‘na kasiṇugghāṭime, na pana rūpaparicchede’’ti. Paricchinnākāsopi rūpaparicchedākāsena saṅgahito. ‘‘Ma’’nti padaṃ ‘‘avamaññantī’’ti pade kammaṃ.Ettakamevāti etappamāṇaṃ ‘‘adhicetaso’’tiādisaṅkhātaṃ vacanameva, na aññaṃ buddhavacananti attho.Ayanti cūḷapanthako thero.Handāti vassaggatthe nipāto. Mama ānubhāvaṃ dassemi, tumhe passatha gaṇhathāti adhippāyo.Vuṭṭhāyāti tato catutthajjhānato vuṭṭhahitvā.Antarāpi dhāyatīti ettha pisaddassa aṭṭhānatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘antaradhāyatipī’’ti. Eseva nayo ‘‘seyyampi kappetī’’ti etthapi.Theroti cūḷapanthako thero. Idaṃ padaṃ antarantarā yuttaṭṭhānesu sambandhitvā ‘‘tañceva bhaṇatī’’tiiminā sambandhitabbaṃ.Bhātutherassāti jeṭṭhakabhātubhūtassa mahāpanthakatherassa.

akāso, that itself is ākāso. To be seen with an empty space in between, is antalikkho. Space is of four kinds: space without limitations, space caused by kasina-removal, limited space, space limited by form. Of these, only space without limitations is implied here, because it is qualified by antalikkhe. Therefore, he says, "na kasiṇugghāṭime, na pana rūpaparicchede". Limited space is also included in space limited by form. The word "ma" is the object in the phrase "avamaññantī". Ettakamevāti: Just this much, the statement consisting of "adhicetaso," etc., not any other Buddha-word, is the meaning. Ayanti: This is Cūḷapanthaka Thera. Handāti: An expletive in the sense of invitation. The intention is: I will show my power, you see and take it. Vuṭṭhāyāti: Having arisen from that fourth jhāna. Antarāpi dhāyatīti: Showing the meaning of the word "pi" here, he says, "antaradhāyatipī". The same method applies to "seyyampi kappetī" also. Theroti: Cūḷapanthaka Thera. This word, connecting with the places where it is appropriately connected in between, should be connected with "tañceva bhaṇatī". Bhātutherassāti: Of Mahāpanthaka Thera, who was his elder brother.

Padmanti gāthāyaṃ tayo pādā indavajirā, catutthapādo upendavajiro. Tasmā padmanti ettha makāre pare dukārukārassa lopaṃ katvā parakkharaṃ netvā ‘‘padma’’nti dvibhāvena likhitabbaṃ.Avītagandhanti etthati dīghuccāraṇameva yuttaṃ. Paṅke davati gacchatītipadumaṃ. Kokaṃ duggandhassa ādānaṃ nudati apanetītikokanudaṃ. Sundaro gandho imassātisugandhaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – yathā kokanudasaṅkhātaṃ sugandhaṃ pāto pageva bālātapena phullaṃ vikasitaṃ avītagandhaṃ hutvā virocamānaṃ padumaṃ siyā, tathā aṅgīrasaṃ aṅgito sarīrato niccharaṇapabhassararasaṃ hutvā virocamānabhūtaṃ antalikkhe tapantaṃ ādiccaṃ iva tedhātuke tapantaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ passāti.

Padmanti: In the verse, three lines are indavajirā, the fourth line is upendavajiro. Therefore, in padma, after dropping the vowel "u" of the dukārukāra when the consonant "ma" follows, and changing it to a hard consonant, it should be written in the form "padma" with dvibhāva. Avītagandhanti: Here, should be uttered long. Padumaṃ: It goes in the mud, therefore padumaṃ. Kokanudam: It removes the taking of foul smell. Sugandhaṃ: It has a beautiful smell. Here, this is the construction: just as a lotus flower called kokanuda, fragrant, blossomed in the early morning with the warmth of the early sun, becoming unfolded, not devoid of fragrance, would shine, so he sees the Sammāsambuddha shining in the three realms, heating in space, like the sun heating, becoming a luminous essence issuing from the body of Aṅgīrasa.

Paguṇanti vācuggataṃ.Tatoti asakkuṇeyyato.Nanti cūḷapanthakaṃ.Theroti mahāpanthako thero nikkaḍḍhāpesīti sambandho.Soti cūḷapanthako.Athāti tasmiṃ kāle. Bhagavā āhāti yojanā.Buddhacakkhunāti āsayānusayaindriyaparopariyattañāṇasaṅkhātena sabbaññubuddhānaṃ cakkhunā.Tanti cūḷapanthakaṃ.Tassāti cūḷapanthakassa.Athāti tasmiṃ ārocanakāle.Assāti cūḷapanthakassa, datvāti sambandho. Rajaṃ malaṃ harati apanetītirajoharaṇaṃ,pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ.Soti cūḷapanthako.Tassāti pilotikakhaṇḍassa, ‘‘anta’’ntipade avayavisambandho.Parisuddhampīti pisaddo aparisuddhe pilotikakhaṇḍe kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Saṃveganti santāsaṃ bhayanti attho.Athāti tasmiṃ ārambhakāle.Assāti cūḷapanthakassa. ‘‘Ta’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘mamāyanabhāva’’ntipadena sambandhaṃ katvā yojanā kātabbāti. Dutiyaṃ.

Paguṇanti: Easy to recite. Tatoti: Because of not being able to. Nanti: Cūḷapanthaka. The connection is: Mahāpanthaka Thera drove him out. Soti: Cūḷapanthaka. Athāti: At that time. The construction is: The Blessed One said. Buddhacakkhunāti: With the eye of the All-Knowing Buddhas, consisting of the knowledge of dispositions, latent tendencies, faculties, and the potential of others. Tanti: Cūḷapanthaka. Tassāti: Of Cūḷapanthaka. Athāti: At the time of that informing. Assāti: Of Cūḷapanthaka, the connection is with "datvā". Rajoharaṇaṃ: It removes the dust, impurity, a piece of cloth. Soti: Cūḷapanthaka. Tassāti: Of that piece of cloth, in the word "anta," there is a relationship of parts. Parisuddhampīti: The word "pi" shows what is there to say about an impure piece of cloth. Saṃveganti: Fear, terror is the meaning. Athāti: At that time of starting. Assāti: Of Cūḷapanthaka. "Ta" should be connected with the phrase "mamāyanabhāva," and the construction should be done. The second.

3. Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadaṃ

162.Tatiye ‘‘ovadati pācittiyassā’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi visesato attho gahetabboti āha ‘‘aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadantasseva pācittiya’’nti.Itoti imasmā sikkhāpadamhā.Yatthayatthāti yasmiṃ yasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Sabbatthatattha tatthāti yojanāti. Tatiyaṃ.

162.In the third, even though it is said generally that "ovadati pācittiyassa," the meaning should be taken specifically, thus he says, "aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadantasseva pācittiya". Itoti: From this training rule. Yatthayatthāti: In whichever training rule. Sabbatthatattha tatthāti yojanāti: Everywhere, in that very place, is the construction. The third.

Pakiṇṇakakathā
Pakiṇṇakakathā

Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Tīṇi pācittiyānīti bhikkhuno asammatattā ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ, sūriyassa atthaṅgatattā ekaṃ, bhikkhunupassayaṃ upasaṅkamitattā ekanti tīṇi pācittiyāni.Kathanti kena kāraṇena hotīti yojanā.Tatthāti bhikkhunupassayaṃ.Tassevāti sammatasseva bhikkhuno.Aññena dhammenāti garudhammehi aññena dhammena.Divā panāti sūriyuggamanato tassa anatthaṅgateyevāti.

Etthāti: In this training rule. The connection is: This miscellaneous has been said. Tīṇi pācittiyānīti: Because the bhikkhu is unappointed, one pācittiya; because the sun has set, one; because he approached a bhikkhuni residence, one; thus, three pācittiyas. Kathanti: For what reason does it occur, is the construction. Tatthāti: To the bhikkhuni residence. Tassevāti: Only of that appointed bhikkhu. Aññena dhammenāti: With a Dhamma other than the garudhammas. Divā panāti: But during the day, it is only from sunrise to sunset.

4. Āmisasikkhāpadaṃ
4. Āmisasikkhāpadaṃ

164.Catutthe bahuṃ mānaṃ kataṃ yehītibahukatā. Bahukatā hutvā na ovadantīti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘na bahukatā’’tiādi.Dhammeti sīlādidhamme.Adhippāyoti ‘‘na bahukatā’’tipadassa, chabbaggiyānaṃ vā adhippāyoti yojanā. ‘‘Kattukāmoti ādīna’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘attho’’tipade vācakasambandho.

164.In the fourth, much respect is done by whom, therefore bahukatā. Showing the meaning that they do not instruct having done much respect, he says, "na bahukatātiādi". Dhammeti: In the Dhamma of morality, etc. Adhippāyoti: The intention of the phrase "na bahukatā", or the intention of the group of six, is the construction. The phrase "kattukāmoti ādīna" is connected by way of subject to the word "attho".

Sammutinti bhikkhunovādakasammutiṃ. Pacchā sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitoti yojanāti. Catutthaṃ.

Sammutinti: The appointment of a bhikkhu as an advisor. The construction is: later he stood in the novice stage. The fourth.

5. Cīvaradānasikkhāpadaṃ
5. Cīvaradānasikkhāpadaṃ

169.Pañcamerathikāyāti racchāya. Sā hi rathassa hitattā rathikāti vuccati.Sandiṭṭhāti samodhānavasena dassīyitthāti sandiṭṭhā. Diṭṭhamattakā mittāti āha ‘‘mittā’’ti.Sesanti vuttavacanato sesaṃ vacanaṃ.Tatrāti cīvarapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpade.ti visesajotakaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ cīvaradānasikkhāpadeti. Pañcamaṃ.

169.In the fifth, rathikāya means in the street. Because it is suitable for chariots, it is called rathikā. Sandiṭṭhā means having been shown because of the gathering. He said "friend" because he is a friend only by being seen. Sesaṃ means the remaining word from the stated utterance. Tatra means in the training rule regarding the acceptance of robes. Hi is a particle indicating specificity. Idha means in this training rule regarding the giving of robes. The fifth.

6. Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadaṃ
6. Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadaṃ

175.Chaṭṭheudāyīti ettha mahāudāyī, kāḷudāyī, lāḷudāyīti tayo udāyī honti. Tesu tatiyovādhippetoti āha ‘‘lāḷudāyī’’ti. Pabhāvena ṭhāti pavattatītipaṭṭhoti kate paṭibalova labbhati. Tenāha ‘‘paṭibalo’’ti.Nipuṇoti kusalo. ‘‘Paṭibhānena katacitta’’ntiiminā‘‘paṭibhānacitta’’nti padassa majjhe padalopaṃ dasseti.Soti lāḷudāyī akāsīti sambandho.Tassāti cīvarassa. ‘‘Yathāsaṃhaṭa’’nti ettha evasaddo ajjhāharitabboti āha ‘‘yathāsaṃhaṭamevā’’ti.

175.In the sixth, regarding udāyī, there are three Udāyīs: Mahā Udāyī, Kāḷudāyī, and Lāḷudāyī. Among them, the intention is the third one, so he said, "Lāḷudāyī." Paṭṭho, because it stands and continues due to influence, is obtained as if capable. Therefore, he said, "capable." Nipuṇo means skilled. With "paṭibhānena katacittaṃ," he shows the elision of a word in the middle of the word "paṭibhānacittaṃ." So refers to the connection that Lāḷudāyī did. Tassā means of the robe. Regarding "yathāsaṃhaṭaṃ," the word "eva" should be supplied, so he said, "yathāsaṃhaṭameva."

176.Yaṃ cīvaraṃ nivāsituṃ vā pārupituṃ vā sakkā hoti, taṃ cīvaraṃ nāmāti yojanā.Evaṃ hīti evameva. ‘‘Dukkaṭa’’ntiiminā ‘‘sayaṃ sibbati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti ettha antarāpattiṃ dasseti.Ārāti sūci. Sā hi arati nissaṅgavasena gacchati pavisatīti ‘‘ārā’’ti vuccati, tassā patho gamanaṃārāpatho,tasmiṃ, ārāpathassa nīharaṇāvasānattā ‘‘nīharaṇe’’ti vuttaṃ.Satakkhattumpīti anekakkhattumpi.Āṇattoti āṇāpīyatīti āṇatto. ‘‘Āṇāpito’’ti vattabbe ṇāpesaddassa lopaṃ, ikārassa ca akāraṃ katvā, ‘‘ādatte’’ti ākhyātapade tevibhattiyā viya tapaccayassa ca dvibhāvaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sakiṃ cīvaraṃ sibbāti vutto’’ti.Atha panāti tato aññathā pana.Āṇattassāti āṇāpitassa. Sambahulānipi pācittiyāni hontīti sambandho.

176.The meaning is: whatever robe can be worn or wrapped is called a robe. Evaṃ hi means just so. With "dukkaṭaṃ," he shows the intervening offense in "sayaṃ sibbati, āpatti pācittiyassa." Ārā means needle. Because it goes and enters without attachment, it is called "ārā," its path, the going, is ārāpatho, in that, because the ārāpatha ends in extraction, "nīharaṇe" is said. Satakkhattumpī means even many times. Āṇatto means being ordered. Instead of saying "āṇāpito," by eliding the "ṇa" of the word "ṇāpesa," changing the "i" to "a," and doubling the "ta" suffix as in the tense conjugation in the verb "ādatte," thus it is said. Therefore, he said, "having been told once to sew a robe." Atha panā means but otherwise. Āṇattassā means of the one who was ordered. The connection is that even many pācittiyas occur.

Tesanti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ.Tesampīti nissitakānampi. Ñātikānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ cīvaranti sambandho. ‘‘Antevāsikehī’’tipadaṃ ‘‘sibbāpentī’’tipade kāritakammaṃ.Tatrāpīti ācariyupajjhāyehi sibbāpanepi. ‘‘Antevāsike’’tipadaṃ ‘‘vañcetvā’’tipade suddhakammaṃ, ‘‘sibbāpentī’’tipade kāritakammaṃ.Itaresanti ācariyupajjhāyānanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Tesaṃ means of the teachers and preceptors. Tesampī means even of the dependents. The connection is robes for the nuns who are relatives. The word "antevāsikehi" is the causative object in the word "sibbāpenti." Tatrāpī means even in having it sewn by the teachers and preceptors. The word "antevāsike" is the direct object in the word "vañcetvā," and the causative object in the word "sibbāpenti." Itaresaṃ means other than the teachers and preceptors. The sixth.

7. Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadaṃ
7. Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadaṃ

181.Sattame ‘‘tāsaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ pacchā gacchantīna’’nti padāni ‘‘pattacīvara’’nti pāṭhasesena yojetabbānīti āha ‘‘pacchā gacchantīnaṃ pattacīvara’’nti. Tā bhikkhuniyo pacchā gacchantiyoti vibhattivipallāsaṃ katvā ‘‘dūsesu’’ntipadena yojetabbānīti āha ‘‘tā bhikkhuniyo corā dūsayiṃsū’’ti. Atha vā vibhattivipallāsamakatvā ‘‘acchindiṃsū’’ti pade ‘‘pattacīvara’’ntipadaṃ ajjhāharitvā ‘‘dūsesu’’ntipade ‘‘sīla’’nti pāṭhaṃ ajjhāharitvā yojetabbanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

181.In the seventh, the words "tāsaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ pacchā gacchantīnaṃ" should be connected with the remaining reading "pattacīvaraṃ," so he said, "pacchā gacchantīnaṃ pattacīvaraṃ." He said, "tā bhikkhuniyo corā dūsayiṃsu," connecting those nuns who were going behind by changing the case and relating it to the word "dūsesu." Alternatively, without changing the case, by supplying the word "pattacīvaraṃ" to the word "acchindiṃsu," and supplying the reading "sīlaṃ" to the word "dūsesu," it should be understood as being connected.

182-3.Saṃpubbo, vipubbo ca dhādhātu tvāpaccayo hotīti āha ‘‘saṃvidahitvā’’ti.Kukkuṭoti tambacūḷo. So hi kukati āhāratthaṃ pāṇakādayo ādadātīti kukkuṭo.Ayanti gāmo. Adhikaraṇe ṇoti āha ‘‘sampadanti etthā’’ti.Etthāti ca etasmiṃ gāme. Uttarapadassa adhikaraṇatthattā pubbapadena chaṭṭhīsamāsoti āha ‘‘kukkuṭāna’’ntiādi. Evaṃ ṇasaddassa adhikaraṇatthaṃ, pubbapadena chaṭṭhīsamāsañca dassetvā idāni ṇasaddassa bhāvatthaṃ, pubbapadena bāhiratthasamāsañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘atha vā’’ti.Tatthāti pacchimapāṭhe.Uppatitvāti uḍḍitvā uddhaṃ ākāsaṃ laṅgitvāti attho.Etthāti pacchimapāṭhe.Dvidhāti padagamanapakkhagamanavasena dvipakārena. ‘‘Upacāro na labbhatī’’tiiminā gāmantaro na hoti, ekagāmoyeva pana hoti, tasmā āpattipi ekāyeva hotīti dasseti.Paccūseti pabhāte. So hi paṭiviruddhaṃ timiraṃ useti nāsetīti paccūsoti vuccati.Vassantassāti ravantassa. ‘‘Vacanato’’tipadaṃ ‘‘āpattiyevā’’tipade ñāpakahetu.Ratanamattantaroti kukkupamāṇena byavadhāno.

182-3.Saṃpubbo, vipubbo, and dhādhātu take the tvāpaccayo, so he said, "saṃvidahitvā." Kukkuṭo means red-crested cock. Because it makes the sound "kukati" when taking small creatures for food, it is called kukkuṭo. Ayaṃ means this village. Ṇo is in the locative case, so he said, "in sampadaṃ." Etthā means in this village. Because the latter word is in the locative case, it is a genitive compound with the former word, so he said, "of the cocks," etc. Having shown thus the locative meaning of the suffix "ṇa" and the genitive compound with the former word, now, to show the meaning of the suffix "ṇa" as a state and the bahirattha compound with the former word, "atha vā" is said. Tattha means in the latter reading. Uppatitvā means having flown, having jumped upwards into the sky. Etthā means in the latter reading. Dvidhā means in two ways, by the path of the foot and by the path of the village. By "upacāro na labbhati," he shows that it is not a different village, but it is the same village, therefore, only one offense occurs. Paccūse means at dawn. Because it destroys the opposing darkness, it is called paccūsa. Vassantassā means of the one roaring. The word "vacanato" is a marker for the word "āpattiyeva." Ratanamattantaro means a separation by the measure of a span.

Tatrāti ‘‘gāmantare gāmantare’’ti vacane.ti vitthāro.Ubhopīti bhikkhubhikkhuniyopi saṃvidahantīti sambandho.Na vadantīti aṭṭhakathācariyā na kathayanti. Catunnaṃ maggānaṃ samāgamaṭṭhānaṃcatukkaṃ,dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ, catukkato atirekānaṃ vā maggānaṃ sambaddhaṭṭhānaṃsiṅghāṭakaṃ. Tatrāpīti upacārokkamanepi.Gāmatoti attano gāmato. Yāva na okkamanti, tāvāti yojanā.Sandhāyāti ārabbha.Athāti tasmiṃ nikkhamanakāle.Dvepīti bhikkhubhikkhuniyopi gacchantīti sambandho.Tanti vacanaṃ.

Tatra means in the saying "gāmantare gāmantare." Hi is an expansion. Ubhopī connects to bhikkhus and bhikkhunis both arranging. Na vadantī means the commentators do not say. The meeting place of four paths is catukkaṃ, the meeting place of two, three, or more paths than four is siṅghāṭakaṃ. Tatrāpī means even in crossing the boundary. Gāmato means from one's own village. The meaning is until they do not cross. Sandhāyā means concerning. Athā means at that time of departing. Dvepī connects to both bhikkhus and bhikkhunis going. Taṃ means that word.

ti viseso. ‘‘Gāmantare gāmantare’’ti purimasmiṃ naye atikkame anāpatti, okkamane āpattīti ayaṃ viseso.

Hi is a distinction. In the previous method of "gāmantare gāmantare," there is no offense for transgressing, the offense is upon crossing, this is the distinction.

184.Gatapubbatthāti gatapubbā attha bhavathāti attho. Ehi gacchāmāti vā āgaccheyyāsīti vā vadatīti yojanā.Cetiyavandanatthanti thūpassa vandituṃ.

184.Gatapubbatthā means the meaning is "gata pubbā attha bhavathāti." The meaning is saying either "ehi gacchāma" or "vā āgaccheyyāsī." Cetiyavandanatthaṃ means to worship the stupa.

185.Visaṅketenāti ettha kālavisaṅketo, dvāravisaṅketo, maggavisaṅketoti tividho. Tattha kālavisaṅketeneva anāpattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘visaṅketena gacchanti, anāpattī’’ti āha. Dvāravisaṅketena vā maggavisaṅketena vā āpattimokkho natthi. Tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘purebhatta’’ntiādi.Cakkasamāruḷhāti iriyāpathacakkaṃ vā sakaṭacakkaṃ vā sammā āruḷhā.Janapadāti janakoṭṭhāsā.Pariyāyantīti pari punappunaṃ yanti ca āyanti cāti. Sattamaṃ.

185.Visaṅketena here has three kinds of non-agreement: non-agreement on time, non-agreement on the gate, and non-agreement on the path. Among these, intending to have no offense only by non-agreement on time, he said, "visaṅketena gacchanti, anāpattī." There is no release from offense by non-agreement on the gate or non-agreement on the path. Showing that meaning, he said, "purebhatta," etc. Cakkasamāruḷhā means properly mounted on the wheel of conduct or the wheel of a cart. Janapadā means districts of people. Pariyāyantī means they repeatedly go around and come back. The seventh.

8. Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadaṃ
8. Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadaṃ

188.Aṭṭhame saha aññamaññaṃ thavanaṃ abhitthavanaṃsanthavo,saṅgamoti vuttaṃ hoti. Mittabhāvena santhavomittasanthavo,lokehi assādetabbo ca so mittasanthavo cetilokassādamittasanthavo,tassa vaso pabhū, tena vā āyattotilokassādamittasanthavavaso,tena.Uddhaṃgacchatītiuddhaṃgāminīti dassento āha ‘‘uddha’’ntiādi.Uddhanti ca idha paṭisoto. Tenāha ‘‘nadiyā paṭisota’’nti. ‘‘Uddhaṃgāmini’’ntimātikāpadaṃ ‘‘ujjavanikāyā’’tipadabhājaniyā saṃsandento āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi.Yoti bhikkhu.Uddhaṃ javanatoti paṭisotaṃ gamanato.Tenāti tena hetunā.Assāti ‘‘uddhaṃgāmini’’ntipadassa. Anusotaṃ idha adho nāmāti āha ‘‘anusota’’nti.Assapītipisaddo purimāpekkho.Tatthāti ‘‘uddhaṃgāminiṃ vā adhogāminiṃ vā’’tivacane.Yanti nāvaṃ harantīti sambandho.Sampaṭipādanatthanti sammā paṭimukhaṃ pādanatthaṃ, ujupajjāpanatthanti attho.Etthāti nāvāyaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā’’tipadabhājanimapekkhitvā ‘‘upayogatthe nissakkavacana’’nti āha. ‘‘Aññatrā’’ti mātikāpade apekkhite nissakkatthe nissakkavacanampi yujjateva.

188.In the eighth, saha aññamaññaṃ thavanaṃ abhitthavanaṃ is santhavo, meaning association. Mittabhāvena santhavo is mittasanthavo, lokehi assādetabbo ca so mittasanthavo ca is lokassādamittasanthavo, tassa vaso pabhū, tena vā āyatto is lokassādamittasanthavavaso, tena. Showing that uddhaṃgacchatīti is uddhaṃgāminī, he said, "uddhaṃ," etc. Uddhaṃ here means against the current. Therefore, he said, "nadiyā paṭisotaṃ." Connecting the mātikā phrase "uddhaṃgāminī" with the bhājaniya phrase "ujjavanikāyā," he said, "yasmā panā," etc. Yo means which bhikkhu. Uddhaṃ javanato means because of going against the current. Tenā means by that reason. Assā refers to the "uddhaṃgāminī" phrase. Anusotaṃ here means downwards, so he said, "anusotaṃ." Assapī, the word pi is with reference to what precedes. Tattha means in the saying "uddhaṃgāminiṃ vā adhogāminiṃ vā." Yaṃ connects to "they carry which boat." Sampaṭipādanatthaṃ means for properly setting the foot against, meaning for placing it straight. Etthā means in the boat. Without considering the padabhājani of "ṭhapetvā," he said, "the utterance 'nissakka' is in the sense of usage." But in the mātikā phrase "aññatra," when the meaning of "nissakka" is required, the utterance "nissakka" is indeed suitable.

189.Ekaṃ tīraṃ agāmakaṃ araññaṃ hotīti yojanā. Addhayojanagaṇanāya pācittiyāni hontīti sambandho.Majjhena gamanepītipisaddo agāmakaaraññatīrapassena gamane kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Na kevalaṃ nadiyāti kevalaṃ nadiyā eva anāpatti nāti yojanā, aññesupi samuddādīsu anāpattīti adhippāyo. Yopi bhikkhu gacchatīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

189.The connection is that one bank is a non-village, a forest. The connection is that pācittiyas occur by counting half-yojanas. Majjhena gamanepī, the word pi shows that what need be said about going by the side of a non-village, forest bank? Na kevalaṃ nadiyā connects to "not only in the river is there no offense," the intention is that there is no offense in other places like the ocean. The connection is "yopi bhikkhu gacchatī." Hi means truly, or because.

191.Kālavisaṅketo, titthavisaṅketo, nāvāvisaṅketoti tividho visaṅketo. Tattha kālavisaṅketena anāpattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘visaṅketena abhiruhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññena visaṅketena āpattiyeva, tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘idhāpī’’tiādīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

191.There are three kinds of non-agreement: non-agreement on time, non-agreement on the landing place, and non-agreement on the boat. Among these, intending to have no offense only by non-agreement on time, "visaṅketena abhiruhantī" is said. There is indeed an offense by another kind of non-agreement, showing that meaning, he said, "idhāpī," etc. The eighth.

9. Paripācitasikkhāpadaṃ
9. Paripācitasikkhāpadaṃ

192.Navamemahānāgesūti mahāarahantesutiṭṭhamānesusantesu, cetake pessabhūte navake bhikkhū nimantetīti adhippāyo.Itarathāti vibhattivipallāsato vā pāṭhasesato vā aññena pakārena. Antaraṃ majjhaṃ pattā kathāantarakathāti dassento āha ‘‘avasāna’’ntiādi. Pakirīyitthātipakatā,na pakatāvippakatāti vutte kariyamānakathāvāti āha ‘‘kariyamānā hotī’’ti.Addhacchikenāti upaḍḍhacakkhunā.Tehīti therehi.

192.In the ninth, mahānāgesū means in the great arahants, tiṭṭhamānesu means while they are present, the intention is that he invites new bhikkhus, thinking they are reliable messengers. Itarathā means in another way, from changing the case or from the remaining reading. The meaning is "antarakathā" is a talk that has reached the middle, so he said, "avasāna," etc. Pakirīyitthāti is pakatā, na pakatā is vippakatā, when it is said, it means a talk being made, so he said, "kariyamānā hotī." Addhacchikenā means with half an eye. Tehī means by the elders.

194.Laddhabbanti laddhārahaṃ.Assāti ‘‘bhikkhuniparipācita’’ntipadassa. Sammā ārabhitabbotisamārambhoti dassento āha ‘‘samāraddhaṃ vuccatī’’ti.Paṭiyāditassāti paripācitassa bhattassa. Gihīnaṃ samārambhotigihisamārambho,katvatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.Tatoti tato bhattato.Aññatrāti vinā. Tamatthaṃ vivaranto āha ‘‘taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Padabhājane pana vuttanti sambandho. ‘‘Ñātakapavāritehī’’tipadaṃ ‘‘asamāraddho’’tipade kattā.Atthatoti bhikkhuniaparipācitaatthato.Tasmāti yasmā atthato samāraddhova hoti, tasmā.

194.Laddhabbaṃ means worthy of being received. Assā is of the "bhikkhuniparipācita" phrase. Sammā ārabhitabbo is samārambho, showing that, he said, "samāraddhaṃ vuccati." Paṭiyāditassā means of the prepared food. Gihīnaṃ samārambho is gihisamārambho, this is a sāmivacanaṃ in the sense of having done. Tato means from that food. Aññatrā means except. Expounding that meaning, he said, "taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ṭhapetvā." But it is said in the padabhājanaṃ, is the connection. The phrase "ñātakapavāritehi" is the agent in the word "asamāraddho." Atthato means in the sense of bhikkhuni-prepared. Tasmā means because it is indeed samāraddha in meaning, therefore.

195.Paṭiyāditanti paṭiyattaṃ. Pakatiyā paṭiyattaṃpakatipaṭiyattanti dassento āha ‘‘pakatiyā’’tiādi. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vuttanti sambandho.Tassāti tasseva bhikkhuno.Aññassāti tato aññassa bhikkhuno.

195.Paṭiyāditaṃ means paṭiyattaṃ. Pakatiyā paṭiyattaṃ is pakatipaṭiyattaṃ, showing that, he said, "pakatiyā," etc. But it is said in the Mahāpaccariyaṃ, is the connection. Tassā means of that very bhikkhu. Aññassā means to another bhikkhu other than that.

197.Bhikkhuniparipācitepītipisaddo bhikkhuniaparipācite kā nāma kathāti dassetīti. Navamaṃ.

197.Bhikkhuniparipācitepī, the word pi shows what need be said about bhikkhuni-prepared food. The ninth.

10. Rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ
10. Rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ

198.Dasamepāḷiattho cāti ettha pāḷisaddo vinicchiyasadde ca yojetabbo ‘‘pāḷivinicchayo’’ti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. ‘‘Idaṃ sikkhāpada’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘ekapariccheda’’ntipade tulyatthakattā, ‘‘paññatta’’ntipade kammaṃ.Uparīti acelakavaggeti. Dasamaṃ.

198.In the tenth, pāḷiattho cā, here the word pāḷi should be connected with the word vinicchiyasadda, "pāḷivinicchayo." Hi means truly, or because. The phrase "idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ" is the subject of the same meaning in the phrase "ekapariccheda," and the object in the word "paññatta." Uparī means the acelakavagga. The tenth.

Ovādavaggo tatiyo.

Ovādavaggo is the third.

4. Bhojanavaggo

4. Bhojanavaggo

1. Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

203.Bhojanavaggassa paṭhame āvasathe paññatto piṇḍoāvasathapiṇḍoti dassento āha ‘‘samantā’’tiādi.Parikkhittanti parivutaṃ āvasathanti sambandho. Addhaṃ pathaṃ gacchantītiaddhikā. Gilāyanti rujantītigilānā. Gabbho kucchiṭṭhasatto etāsantigabbhiniyo. Malaṃ pabbājentītipabbajitā,tesaṃ yathānurūpanti sambandho. Paññattāni mañcapīṭhāni etthātipaññattamañcapīṭho,taṃ. Anekagabbhaparicchedaṃ anekapamukhaparicchedaṃ āvasathaṃ katvāti yojanā.Tatthāti āvasathe.Tesaṃ tesanti addhikādīnaṃ. Hiyyosaddassa atītānantarāhassa ca anāgatānantarāhassa ca vācakattā idha anāgatānantarāhavācakoti āha ‘‘svepī’’ti. Kuhiṃ gatā iti vutteti yojanā.‘‘Kukkuccāyanto’’tipadassa nāmadhātuṃ dassento āha ‘‘kukkuccaṃ karonto’’ti.

203.In the first of the Bhojanavagga, showing that the piṇḍa designated in the rest house is āvasathapiṇḍo, he said, "samantā," etc. Parikkhittaṃ connects to "surrounded rest house." Addhaṃ pathaṃ gacchantīti is addhikā. Gilāyanti rujantīti is gilānā. Gabbho kucchiṭṭhasatto etāsanti is gabbhiniyo. Malaṃ pabbājentīti is pabbajitā, the connection is according to their suitability. Paññattāni mañcapīṭhāni etthāti is paññattamañcapīṭho, taṃ. Having made the rest house with many interior sections and many chief sections, is the connection. Tattha means in that rest house. Tesaṃ tesaṃ means of the travelers, etc. Because the word "hiyyo" refers to the immediate past and the remote past, and the immediate future and the remote future, here it is a word referring to the immediate future, so he said, "svepī." The connection is "kuhiṃ gatā iti vutte." Showing the denominative verb of the word "kukkuccāyanto," he said, "kukkuccaṃ karonto."

206.‘‘Addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā’’tiiminā ‘‘pakkamitu’’ntipadassa kammaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Gantu’’ntiiminā kamusaddassa padavikkhepatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Anodissā’’tipadassa tvāpaccayantabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘anuddisitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pāsaṃ ḍetītipāsaṇḍo,sattānaṃ cittesu diṭṭhipāsaṃ khipatīti attho. Atha vā taṇhāpāsaṃ, diṭṭhipāsañca ḍeti uḍḍetītipāsaṇḍo,taṃ pāsaṇḍaṃ.Yāvatattho paññatto hotīti yāvatā attho hoti, tāvatā paññatto hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Yāvadattho’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Dakāro padasandhikaro.Sakiṃ bhuñjitabbanti ekadivasaṃ sakiṃ bhuñjitabbanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabba’’nti.

206.With "addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā," he shows the object of the word "pakkamitu." With "gantuṃ," he shows the meaning of padavikkhepa of the word "kamu." To show the tvāpaccayanta nature of the word "anodissa," "anuddisitvā" is said. Pāsaṃ ḍetīti is pāsaṇḍo, meaning he throws the noose of views in the minds of beings. Alternatively, taṇhāpāsaṃ, diṭṭhipāsañca ḍeti uḍḍetīti is pāsaṇḍo, taṃ pāsaṇḍaṃ. Yāvatattho paññatto hotī connects to "yāvatā attho hoti, tāvatā paññatto hotī." "Yāvadattho" is also a reading, this is the same meaning. The "da" is a word-joining marker. Sakiṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ means it should be eaten once in one day. Therefore, he said, "ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ."

Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Ekakulena vā paññattanti sambandho. Bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati ekato hutvā paññattattāti adhippāyo. Nānākulehi paññattaṃ piṇḍanti yojanā. Bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati nānākulāni ekato ahutvā visuṃ visuṃ paññattattāti adhippāyo. Yopi piṇḍo chijjatīti sambandho.Upacchinditvāti asaddhiyādipāpacittattā upacchinditvā.

Etthā means in this training rule. The connection is "ekakulena vā paññattaṃ." It is not proper to eat because it is designated by being together, is the intention. The connection is piṇḍaṃ paññattaṃ by various families. It is proper to eat because it is designated by various families without being together, separately. The connection is "yopi piṇḍo chijjati." Upacchinditvā means having cut off because of having an evil mind of disbelief, etc.

208.Anuvasitvāti punappunaṃ vasitvā. Antarāmagge gacchantattā ‘‘gacchanto bhuñjatī’’ti idaṃ tāva yuttaṃ hotu, gataṭṭhāne pana gamitattā kathaṃ? Paccuppannasamīpopi atīto tena saṅgahitattā yuttaṃ. ‘‘Kuto nu tvaṃ bhikkhu āgacchasī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.130) viya. Taṃsamīpopi hi tādiso. Nānāṭṭhānesu nānākulānaṃ santake pakatiyā anāpattibhāvato nānāṭṭhānesu ekakulasseva santakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘anāpattī’’ti. Āraddhassa vicchedattā ‘‘puna ekadivasaṃ bhuñjituṃ labhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Odissā’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi bhikkhūyeva gahetabbāti āha ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃyevā’’ti. Paṭhamaṃ.

208. Anuvasitvā means having stayed repeatedly. Because he is going along the road, "he eats while going" might be acceptable, but how can it be when he has caused to go to a place he has already been? Even the recent past is acceptable because it is included with that. Just like in "From where do you come, bhikkhu?" (saṃ. ni. 1.130) and others. Even proximity to that is similar. "No offense" is stated with reference to a single family's property in various places, since there is naturally no offense in the property of various families in various places. "He can receive to eat again for one day" is stated because the undertaking was interrupted. Although stated generally as "for a bhikkhu," it should be taken as "for bhikkhus only," he says, "for bhikkhus only." First.

2. Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Gaṇabhojana Training Rule

209.Dutiye pahīnalābhasakkārassa hetuṃ dassento āha ‘‘so kirā’’tiādi.Soti devadatto. ‘‘Ahosī’’ti ca ‘‘pākaṭo jāto’’ti ca yojetabbo.Ajātasattunāti ajātasseyeva piturājassa sattubhāvato ajātasattunā, ‘‘mārāpetvā’’tipade kāritakammaṃ.Rājānanti bimbisārarājaṃ, ‘‘mārāpetvā’’tipade dhātukammaṃ.Abhimāreti abhinilīyitvā bhagavato māraṇatthāya pesite dhanudhare.Gūḷhapaṭicchannoti guhito hutvā paṭicchanno.Parikathāyāti pariguhanāya kathāya. ‘‘Rājānampī’’tipadaṃ ‘‘mārāpesī’’tipade dhātukammaṃ.Pavijjhīti pavaṭṭesi.Tatoti tato vuttato paraṃ uṭṭhahiṃsūti sambandho. Nagare nivasantītināgarā. Rājāti ajātasatturājā.Sāsanakaṇṭakantisāsanassa kaṇṭakasadisattā sāsanakaṇṭakaṃ.Tatoti nīharato.Upaṭṭhānampīti upaṭṭhānampi, upaṭṭhānatthāyapi vā.Aññepīti rājato aññepi.Assāti devadattassa.Kiñcikhādanīyabhojanīyaṃ ‘‘dātabba’’nti iminā yojetabbaṃ.Kiñcivā abhivādanādi ‘‘kātabba’’nti iminā sambandho. Kulesu viññāpetvā bhuñjanassa hetuṃ dassento āha ‘‘mā me’’tiādi. Posento hutvā bhuñjatīti sambandho.

209. In the second, showing the cause for the abandoned gain and honor, he says, "So, it seems," etc. So means Devadatta. "He was" should be connected with "became manifest." By Ajātasattu means by Ajātasattu, since he was the enemy of his own father the king even before he was born; "having killed" is a causative passive construction. King means King Bimbisāra; "having killed" is the object of the verb. Abhimāre means having lain in wait, archers were sent for the purpose of killing the Buddha. Gūḷhapaṭicchanno means having been hidden and concealed. Parikathāya means by way of secretive talk. The phrase "even the king" is the object of the verb "he killed." Pavijjhī means set in motion. Tato means the connection is that they arose after that which was stated. Nāgarā means those living in the city. Rājā means King Ajātasattu. Sāsanakaṇṭaka means a thorn for the Dispensation, because he is like a thorn for the Dispensation. Tato means from taking out. Upaṭṭhānampī means even support, or even for the purpose of support. Aññepī means others besides the king. Assā means of Devadatta. Kiñci edible or consumable, should be connected with "should be given." Kiñci or greeting, etc., is connected with "should be done." Showing the reason for eating after informing families, he says, "Lest," etc. The connection is that he eats while being supported.

211.Bhattaṃ anadhivāsentānaṃ kasmā cīvaraṃ parittaṃ uppajjatīti āha ‘‘bhattaṃ agaṇhantāna’’ntiādi.

211. Why do those who do not accept the meal invitation receive few robes? He says, "For those not accepting the meal," etc.

212.Cīvarakārake bhikkhū bhattena kasmā nimantentīti āha ‘‘gāme’’tiādi.

212. Why do bhikkhus who are robe-makers invite with a meal? He says, "In the village," etc.

215.Nānāverajjaketi ettha rañño idaṃrajjaṃ,visadisaṃ rajjaṃvirajjaṃ,nānappakāraṃ virajjaṃnānāvirajjaṃ. Nānāvirajjehi āgatānānāverajjakā. Majjhe vuddhi hotīti āha ‘‘nānāvidhehi aññarajjehi āgate’’ti.Aññarajjehīti rājagahato aññehi rajjehi. Rañjitabbantirañjanti vutte niggahitassa anāsanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘nānāverañjakeitipi pāṭho’’ti.

215. Nānāverajjake here, rajjaṃ means the king's kingdom, virajjaṃ means a dissimilar kingdom, nānāvirajjaṃ means a kingdom dissimilar in various ways. Nānāverajjakā means those who came from various dissimilar kingdoms. He says, "Having come from various different kingdoms," because the increase is in the middle. Aññarajjehī means from kingdoms other than Rājagaha. "Nānāverañjakeitipi pāṭho" is stated referring to the rejection of the collection of syllables, which has been colored, as rañja.

218.Gaṇabhojaneti gaṇassa bhojanaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ, gaṇabhojanassa bhojanaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ, tasmiṃ gaṇabhojane pācittiyanti attho. ‘‘Rattūparato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.10; ma. ni. 1.293) viya ekassa bhojanasaddassa lopo daṭṭhabbo. Nanu uposathe viya dve tayo gaṇo nāmāti āha ‘‘idha gaṇo nāma cattāro’’tiādi. Tena dve tayo gaṇo nāma na honti, cattāro pana ādiṃ katvā taduttari gaṇo nāmāti dasseti.Taṃ panetanti ettha etasaddo vacanālaṅkāro dvīsu sabbanāmesu pubbasseva yebhuyyena padhānattā.Pasavatīti vaḍḍhati, jāyatīti attho.Vevacanena vāti ‘‘bhattena nimantemi, bhojanena nimantemī’’ti pariyāyena vā.Bhāsantarena vāti mūlabhāsāto aññāya bhāsāya vā. Ekato nimantitā bhikkhūti sambandho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Pamāṇanti kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Cattāro’’ti liṅgavipallāsaṃ katvā ‘‘vihāre’’tipadena yojetabbaṃ.Ṭhitesuyevāti padaṃ niddhāraṇasamudāyo. Eko nimantitoti sambandho.

218. Gaṇabhojane means a meal of a group, that is a gaṇabhojana; the eating of a gaṇabhojana is a gaṇabhojana; in that gaṇabhojana, there is a pācittiya offense, is the meaning. The omission of the word bhojana in one of its meanings should be understood, just like in "rattūparato" (dī. ni. 1.10; ma. ni. 1.293) and others. But does a group mean two or three, like with the uposatha? He says, "Here, a group means four," etc. Thus, he shows that two or three do not constitute a group, but four, having made it the beginning, and more than that constitute a group. Taṃ paneta here, the word eta is an embellishment of the statement, since in two pronouns, the former is generally the primary one. Pasavatī means increases, arises, is the meaning. Vevacanena vā means alternatively by synonym, such as "I invite with a meal, I invite with food." Bhāsantarena vā means alternatively in a language other than the root language. The connection is bhikkhus invited together. means truly, or because. Pamāṇa means reason. "Four" should be connected with "in the monastery" having made a gender shift. Ṭhitesuyevā is a group of determination. The connection is one invited.

Pāṭekkanti patiekassa bhāvo pāṭekkaṃ, visunti attho. Ekato vā nānāto vā viññāpeyyunti sambandho.

Pāṭekkaṃ means the state of being individual, that is pāṭekkaṃ; separately, is the meaning. The connection is whether they inform together or separately.

phālitā,uppādentīti sambandho. Pahaṭamatte satīti yojanā. Lesena kappanti pavattaṃ cittaṃlesakappiyaṃ.

phālitā means producing, is the connection. The construction is when it has just been struck. Lesena kappanti pavattaṃ cittaṃlesakappiyaṃ.

Suttañcāti sūcipāsapavesanasuttañca. Nanu visuṃ cīvaradānasamayo viya cīvarakārasamayopi atthi, kasmā ‘‘yadā tadā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘visuṃ hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Visuṃ cīvaradānasamayo viya cīvarakārasamayo nāma yasmā natthi, tasmā ‘‘yadā tadā’’ti mayā vuttanti adhippāyo. Tasmā yo bhikkhu karoti, tena bhuñjitabbanti yojanā.Sūciveṭhanakoti sibbanatthāya dve pilotikakhaṇḍe sambandhitvā sūciyā vijjhanako.Vicāretīti pañcakhaṇḍasattakhaṇḍādivasena saṃvidahati.Chindatīti satthakena vā hatthena vā chindati.Moghasuttanti muyhanaṃ mogho, atthato gahetabbachaṭṭetabbaṭṭhāne muyhanacittaṃ, tassa chindanaṃ suttanti moghasuttaṃ.Āgantukapaṭṭanti dupaṭṭacīvare mūlapaṭṭassa upari ṭhapitapaṭṭaṃ.Paccāgatanti paṭṭacīvarādīsu labbhati.Bandhatīti mūlapaṭṭena āgantukapaṭṭaṃ. Bandhati.Anuvātanti cīvaraṃ anupariyāyitvā vīyati bandhīyatīti anuvātaṃ, taṃ chindati.Ghaṭṭetīti dve anuvātante aññamaññaṃ sambajjhati.Āropetīti cīvarassa upari āropeti.Tatthāti cīvare.Suttaṃ karotīti sūcipāsapavesanasuttaṃ vaṭṭeti.Valetīti vaṭṭitvā suttaveṭhanadaṇḍake āvaṭṭeti.Pipphalikanti satthakaṃ. Tañhi piyampi phāletīti pipphali, sāyeva pipphalikanti katvā pipphalikanti vuccati, taṃnisetinisānaṃ karotīti attho. Yo pana katheti, etaṃ ṭhapetvāti yojanā.

Suttañcā means also the needle-casting thread. But just as there is a time for giving robes separately, there is also a time for robe-making, so why is "whenever" stated? He says, "Indeed," etc. means truly, or because. Because there is no time for robe-making like there is a time for giving robes separately, therefore "whenever" was stated by me, is the intention. Therefore, the connection is that the bhikkhu who makes it should eat. Sūciveṭhanako means two small pieces of cloth connected for sewing, through which a needle is pierced. Vicāretī means arranges in terms of five sections, seven sections, etc. Chindatī means cuts with a knife or with the hand. Moghasutta means muyhanaṃ mogho, a thread of cutting that involves a confused mind in the place for taking up and discarding, whose meaning is confused. Āgantukapaṭṭa means a patch placed over the base patch on a double-layered robe. Paccāgataṃ can be obtained on patched robes, etc. Bandhatī means ties the visiting patch with the base patch. Bandhati. Anuvātaṃ means a border that goes around the robe, woven and tied; he cuts that. Ghaṭṭetī means he joins two border edges to each other. Āropetī means places on top of the robe. Tatthā means on the robe. Suttaṃ karotī means twists the needle-casting thread. Valetī means having twisted, he winds it around the thread-winding stick. Pipphalikaṃ means a small knife. Since it makes even what is dear split, therefore it is a pipphali, and that itself is called pipphalika, hence it is called pipphalika; that, he niseti means he sharpens, is the meaning. But the one who speaks should set this aside, is the connection.

Yatthāti yasmiṃ kāle. ‘‘Sannipatantī’’ti bahukattuvasena vuttaṃ. Akusalaṃ parivajjetītiparibbājako, pabbajjavesaṃ vā pariggahetvā vajati gacchati pavattatītiparibbājako. Vinā bhāvapaccayena bhāvatthassa ñātabbato paribbājakabhāvo paribbājako, taṃ samāpannoti paribbājakasamāpanno. Atha vā paribbājakesu samāpanno pariyāpannotiparibbājakasamāpanno. ‘‘Etesa’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘yena kenacī’’tipade niddhāraṇasamudāyo.

Yatthā means at which time. "Sannipatantī" is stated in the plural due to the multiplicity. Akusalaṃ parivajjetītiparibbājako, pabbajjavesaṃ vā pariggahetvā vajati gacchati pavattatītiparibbājako. Vinā bhāvapaccayena bhāvatthassa ñātabbato paribbājakabhāvo paribbājako, taṃ samāpannoti paribbājakasamāpanno. Atha vā paribbājakesu samāpanno pariyāpannotiparibbājakasamāpanno. "Etesa" is a group of determination in the word "yena kenacī."

220.Yepi bhikkhū bhuñjantīti sambandho.Tatthāti ‘‘dve tayo ekato’’tivacane. Animantito catuttho yassa catukkassātianimantitacatutthaṃ,animantitena vā catutthaṃ animantitacatutthaṃ. Eseva nayo aññesupi catutthesu.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Nimantetīti akappiyanimantanena nimanteti.Tesūti catūsu bhikkhūsu.Soti upāsako.Aññanti nāgatabhikkhuto aññaṃ, nimantitabhikkhuto vā.Taṅkhaṇappattanti tasmiṃ pucchanakathanakkhaṇe pattaṃ.ti vitthāro.Tatthāti tasmiṃ ṭhāne, gehe vā.Tehīti karaṇabhūtehi bhikkhūhi.

220. The connection is also the bhikkhus who eat. Tatthā means in the statement "two or three together." Animantito catuttho yassa catukkassātianimantitacatutthaṃ,animantitena vā catutthaṃ animantitacatutthaṃ. The same method applies to the other groups of four. Idhā means in this Dispensation. Nimantetī means he invites with an improper invitation. Tesū means among the four bhikkhus. So means the layperson. Aññaṃ means other than the bhikkhu who has come, or other than the invited bhikkhu. Taṅkhaṇappattaṃ means having arrived at that moment of questioning or speaking. means elaboration. Tatthā means in that place, or house. Tehī means by the bhikkhus who are the instrument.

Soti piṇḍapātiko.Anāgacchantampīti sayaṃ na āgacchantampi.Lacchathāti labhissatha.

So means the alms-goer. Anāgacchantampī means even one who does not come himself. Lacchathā means you will receive.

Sopīti sāmaṇeropi, na piṇḍapātikoyevāti attho.

Sopī means even the novice, not only the alms-goer, is the meaning.

Tatthāti gilānacatutthe, tesu catūsu vā. Gilāno itaresaṃ pana gaṇapūrako hotīti yojanā.

Tatthā means in the sick group of four, or among those four. The connection is that the sick one is a group-filler for the others.

Gaṇapūrakattāti samayaladdhassa gaṇapūrakattā.Catukkānīti cīvaradānacatutthaṃ cīvarakāracatutthaṃ addhānagamanacatutthaṃ nāvābhiruhanacatutthaṃ mahāsamayacatutthaṃ, samaṇabhattacatutthanti cha catukkāni. Purimehi missetvā ekādasa catukkāni veditabbāni. Eko paṇḍito bhikkhu nisinno hotīti sambandho.Tesūti tīsu bhikkhūsu, gatesu gacchatīti yojanā. Bhutvā āgantvā ṭhitesupi anāpattiyeva. Kasmā sabbesaṃ anāpatti, nanu cattāro bhikkhū ekato gaṇhantīti āha ‘‘pañcannaṃ hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Bhojanānaṃyevāti na yāgukhajjakaphalāphalādīnaṃ.Tāni cāti yehi bhojanehi visaṅketaṃ natthi, tāni ca bhojanāni.Tehīti catūhi bhikkhūhi.Tānīti yāguādīni.Itīti tasmā anāpattinti yojanā.

Gaṇapūrakattā means because of being a group-filler who has obtained the occasion. Catukkānī means the group of four for robe-giving, the group of four for robe-making, the group of four for traveling on the road, the group of four for embarking on a boat, the group of four for the great occasion, and the group of four for the samaṇa meal—these are six groups of four. Eleven groups of four should be understood by mixing with the former ones. The connection is one wise bhikkhu is seated. Tesū means among the three bhikkhus; the connection is, when they have gone, he goes. There is still no offense even when they have eaten, come back, and are present. Why is there no offense for all? Does it not mean that four bhikkhus take together? He says, "Indeed, for five," etc. means truly, or because. Bhojanānaṃyevā means not for gruel, snacks, fruits, etc. Tāni cā means and those meals for which there is no arrangement. Tehī means by the four bhikkhus. Tānī means gruel, etc. Itī means therefore, there is no offense, is the connection.

Bhattaṃ gaṇhathāti vāti vāsaddo ‘‘odanaṃ gaṇhatha, bhojanaṃ gaṇhatha, annaṃ gaṇhatha, kuraṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vacanānipi saṅgaṇhāti. Nimantanaṃ sādiyantītinemantanikā. Piṇḍapāte dhutaṅge niyuttātipiṇḍapātikā. Punadivase bhanteti vutteti yojanā.Haritvāti apanetvā.Tatoti tato vadanato paranti sambandho.Vikkhepanti vividhaṃ khepaṃ.Teti asukā ca asukā ca gāmikā. Bhanteti vutteti yojanā.Sopīti apaṇḍitamanussopi, na gāmikāyevāti attho. Kasmā na labhāmi bhanteti vutteti yojanā. Evaṃ ‘‘kathaṃ nimantesuṃ bhante’’ti etthāpi.Tatoti tasmā kāraṇā.Esāti eso gāmo.Tanti bhūmatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, tasmiṃ gāme carathāti hi attho.Kiṃ etenāti etena pucchanena kiṃ payojanaṃ.Etthāti pucchane. Mā pamajjitthāti vadatīti sambandho.Dutiyadivaseti nimantanadivasato dutiyadivase.Dhuragāmeti padhānagāme, antikagāme vā. Bhāvo nāma kiriyattā ekoyeva hoti, tasmā kattāraṃ vā kammaṃ vā sambandhaṃ vā apekkhitvā bahuvacanena na bhavitabbaṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na dubbacehi bhavitabba’’nti.Tesūti gāmikesu bhojentesūti sambandho.Asanasālāyanti bhojanasālāyaṃ. Sā hi asati bhuñjati etthāti asanā, salanti pavisanti assanti sālā, asanā ca sā sālāceti asanasālāti atthena ‘‘asanasālā’’ti vuccati.

Bhattaṃ gaṇhathāti vā means the word "or" includes the words "Take rice, take food, take nourishment, take kura." Nemantanikā means those who approve of the invitation. Piṇḍapātikā means those devoted to the dhutaṅga of alms-going. The connection is he said, "Tomorrow, Venerable Sir." Haritvā means having removed. Tato means the connection is after that saying. Vikkhepaṃ means various throwing. Te means such-and-such villagers. The connection is he said, "Venerable Sir." Sopī means even the unwise man, not only the villagers, is the meaning. The connection is he said, "Why do I not receive, Venerable Sir?" Similarly also with "How did they invite, Venerable Sir?" Tato means for that reason. Esā means this village. Taṃ this is a word of usage in the locative sense; for it means, "Wander in that village." Kiṃ etenā means what is the use of this question? Etthā means in questioning. The connection is he says, "Do not be negligent." Dutiyadivase means on the second day from the day of invitation. Dhuragāme means in the main village, or the nearby village. Since existence is an action, it is only one, therefore it should not be in the plural by expecting an agent, object, or connection; therefore it is said, "one should not be addressed in the plural." Tesū means among the villagers, while they are feeding. Asanasālāyaṃ means in the dining hall. For that is called asanā because one eats sitting there, and sālā because they enter and sit, and asanasālā in the sense of being both an asanā and a sālā.

Atha panāti tato aññathā pana. Apādānattho hi athasaddo.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne antaravīthiādīsūti attho.Paṭikaccevāti paṭhamaṃ katvā eva. Bhikkhūsu gāmato anikkhantesu pagevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Na vaṭṭatīti ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti pahiṇattā na vaṭṭati. Ye pana manussā bhojentīti sambandho.Nivattathāti vuttapadeti ‘‘nivattathā’’ti vutte kiriyāpade.Yassakassacihotīti yassa kassaci atthāya hotīti yojanā.Nivattituṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti avuttattā nivattituṃ vaṭṭati.Sambandhaṃ katvāti ‘‘nivattatha bhante’’ti bhantesaddena abyavahitaṃ katvā.Nisīdatha bhante, bhattaṃ gaṇhathāti bhantesaddena byavahitaṃ katvā vutte ‘‘nisīdathā’’tipade nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati. Atha bhantesaddena byavahitaṃ akatvā ‘‘nisīdatha, bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti sambandhaṃ katvā vutte nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati. Iccetaṃ nayaṃ atidisati ‘‘eseva nayo’’tiimināti. Dutiyaṃ.

Atha panā means then otherwise. For the word atha has the meaning of ablative. Tattha tatthā means in that particular place, in the streets, etc., is the meaning. Paṭikaccevā means having done it first itself. It is stated "pageva" when the bhikkhus have not yet left the village. Na vaṭṭatī means it is not proper, because "Take the meal" has been sent. The connection is those men are feeding. Nivattathāti vuttapade means in the verb "return." Yassakassacihotī means it is for the sake of whoever. Nivattituṃ vaṭṭatī means it is proper to return, because "Take the meal" has not been said. Sambandhaṃ katvā means having made it uninterrupted by the word "bhante" in "Return, Venerable Sir." When "Sit down, Venerable Sir, take the meal" has been said, having made it interrupted by the word "bhante," it is proper to sit down in the word "sit down." Or, when "Sit down, take the meal" has been said, having made it uninterrupted by the word "bhante," it is proper to sit down. He extends this method with "eseva nayo." Second.

3. Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Paramparabhojana Training Rule

221.Tatiye ‘‘na kho…pe… karontī’’tipāṭhassa atthasambandhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yena niyāmenā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘yena niyāmenā’’tiiminā ‘‘yathayime manussā’’ti ettha yathāsaddassa yaṃsaddatthabhāvaṃ dasseti.Tenāti tena niyāmena. Iminā yathāsaddassa niyamaniddiṭṭhabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ñāyatī’’tiiminā kiriyāpāṭhasesaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sāsanaṃ vā dānaṃ vā’’tipadehi idaṃsaddassa atthaṃ dasseti.Buddhappamukhe saṅgheti sampadānatthe cetāni bhummavacanāni, buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dānaṃ vāti attho. ‘‘Paritta’’ntiiminā orakasaddassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Lāmaka’’ntiiminā parittasaddassa parivāratthaṃ nivatteti. Kiro eva patibhāve niyuttokirapatikoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kirapatikoti etthā’’ti ādi.Soti kirapatiko. Kammaṃ kāretīti sambandho.Upacāravasenāti vohāravasena, upalakkhaṇavasena, padhānavasena vāti attho. Na kevalaṃ badarāyeva, aññepi pana bahū khādanīyabhojanīyā paṭiyattāti adhippāyo. Badarena missobadaramisso,badarasāḷavoti āha ‘‘badarasāḷavenā’’ti. Badaracuṇṇena misso madhusakkharādi‘‘badarasāḷavo’’ti vuccati.

221. In the third, showing the connection of meaning for the reading "na kho…pe… karontī," he says, "By which rule," etc. There, with "yena niyāmenā," he shows that the word yathā in "yathayime manussā" has the meaning of the word yaṃ. Tenā means by that rule. With this he shows that the word yathā is specified by rule. With "Ñāyatī" he shows the remainder of the verb reading. With the words "Sāsanaṃ vā dānaṃ vā" he shows the meaning of the word idaṃ. Buddhappamukhe saṅghe these locative plurals are in the sense of dative, meaning giving to the Saṅgha with the Buddha at its head. With "Paritta" he shows the meaning of the word oraka. With "Lāmaka" he negates the meaning of surrounding for the word paritta. Kiro eva patibhāve niyuttokirapatiko, showing the meaning, he says, "kirapatikoti etthā," etc. So means the kirapatika. The connection is he causes the work to be done. Upacāravasenā means by way of expression, by way of indication, or by way of emphasis, is the meaning. The intention is that not only jujubes, but also many other edibles and consumables have been prepared. Badarena missobadaramisso,badarasāḷavoti āha ‘‘badarasāḷavenā.’’ "badarasāḷavo" which is a mixture of jujube powder, honey, sugar, etc., is called.

222.Uddhaṃ sūro uggato asmiṃ kāletiussūroti vutte atidivākāloti āha ‘‘atidivā’’ti.

222. Uddhaṃ sūro uggato asmiṃ kāletiussūro, when it has been said, it is past midday, he says, "atidivā."

226.Ayaṃ bhattavikappanā nāma vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Pañcasu sahadhammikesūti niddhāraṇasamudāyo, itthannāmassāti sambandho. Yadi pana sammukhāpi vikappituṃ vaṭṭati, tadā attanā saha ṭhitassa bhagavato kasmā na vikappetīti āha ‘‘sā cāya’’ntiādi. Sā ayaṃ vikappanā saṅgahitāti sambandho. Kasmā bhagavato vikappetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘bhagavati hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Saṅghena katanti sambandho.

226. The meaning is: "This is called bhattavikappanā, and it is allowable." Pañcasu sahadhammikesu means a determination in a collection, meaning "belonging to such and such a person." But if it is allowable to renounce even in his presence, then why did he not renounce for the Blessed One who was present with him? He says, "But this..." This renunciation is included, is the connection. Why is it not allowable to renounce for the Blessed One? He says, "Because in the Blessed One..." Hi means truly, or because. It should be connected to "done by the Sangha."

229.‘‘Dve tayo nimantane’’tipadāni liṅgavipallāsānīti āha ‘‘dve tīṇi nimantanānī’’ti. Nimantitabbo etehītinimantanānibhojanāni bhuñjatīti sambandho. Dve tīṇi kulāni ākirantīti yojanā.Sūpabyañjananti sūpo ca byañjanañca sūpabyañjanaṃ.Anāpattiekato missitattāti adhippāyo.Mūlanimantananti paṭhamanimantanaṃ bhojanaṃ.Antoti heṭṭhā.Ekampi kabaḷanti ekampi ālopaṃ.Yathā tathā vāti yena vā tena vā ākārena.Tatthāti tasmiṃ bhojane.Rasaṃ vāti khīrato aññaṃ rasaṃ vā. Yena khīrarasena ajjhotthataṃ bhattaṃ ekarasaṃ hoti, taṃ khīraṃ vā taṃ rasaṃ vā ākirantīti yojanā. Yaṃsaddo hi uttaravākye ṭhito pubbavākye taṃsaddaṃ avagamayati. Khīrena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ bhattaṃkhīrabhattaṃ. Evaṃ rasabhattaṃ.Aññepīti khīrabhattarasabhattadāyakato aññepi.Anāpattibhattena amissitattāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Bhuñjantenā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘bhuñjitu’’ntipade bhāvakattā.Sappipāyāsepīti sappinā ca pāyāsena ca kate bhattepi.

229.He says that the words "dve tayo nimantane" are gender-inverted, as "dve tīṇi nimantanāni." Nimantanāni means foods because they are invited with these. The connection is, "He eats the foods." The meaning is, "They mix two or three families." Sūpabyañjana means soup and curry, sūpabyañjanaṃ. Anāpatti means there is no offense because they are mixed together. Mūlanimantana means the first invitation, the meal. Anto means below. Ekampi kabaḷa means even one mouthful. Yathā tathā vā means in any way or manner. Tatthā means in that meal. Rasaṃ vā means another flavor besides milk. The meaning is, they mix that milk or that flavor by which the food covered with milk flavor becomes one flavor. The word "yaṃ" in the later sentence implies the word "taṃ" in the previous sentence. Khīrabhattaṃ means food mixed with milk. Likewise, rasabhattaṃ. Aññepī means others besides the giver of milk-rice and flavored-rice. Anāpatti means there is no offense because it is not mixed with the rice. In the phrase "Bhuñjantenā," the verbal noun is in the "bhuñjitu" form. Sappipāyāsepī means even with food made with ghee and pāyāsa.

Tassāti mahāupāsakassa. Āpattīti ca vaṭṭatīti ca dvinnaṃ aṭṭhakathāvādānaṃ yuttabhāvaṃ mahāpaccarivādena dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘mahāpaccariya’’ntiādi. Dve aṭṭhakathāvādā hi sandhāyabhāsitamattameva visesā, atthato pana ekā. Mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Ekovāti kumbhiyā ekova.Paramparabhojananti parassa parassa bhojanaṃ.Nimantitamhāti ahaṃ nimantito amhi nanūti attho.Āpucchitvāpīti mahāupāsakaṃ āpucchitvāpi.

Tassā means of the great lay follower. To show the consistency of the two commentaries, that an offense occurs and that it is allowable, he said, "Mahāpaccariya," etc., with the mahāpaccarivāra. The two commentaries differ only in their intended speech, but in meaning, they are one. It should be connected to "said in the Mahāpaccariya." Ekovā means only one in the pot. Paramparabhojana means eating one after another. Nimantitamhā means "I am invited, am I not?" Āpucchitvāpī means even after asking the great lay follower.

Soti anumodako bhikkhu.Tanti bhikkhuṃ.Aññoti aññataro.Kinti kasmā.Nimantitattāti nimantitabhāvato.

So means that bhikkhu who approves. Ta means that bhikkhu. Añño means another. Ki means why? Nimantitattā means because of being invited.

Pūgepīti samādapetvā puññaṃ karontānaṃ samūhepi. ‘‘Nimantiyamāno’’tipadassa nimantanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhā’’ti.Yadaggenāti yaṃ aggena yena koṭṭhāsenāti attho. Dvīsu theravādesu mahāsumattheravādova yuttoti so pacchā vuttoti. Tatiyaṃ.

Pūgepī means even in a group who are performing meritorious deeds after entrusting. Showing the way of inviting in the phrase "Nimantiyamāno," he says, "Take the food." Yadaggenā means whichever tip, whichever section. Among the two Theravāda traditions, the Mahāsumattheravāda is indeed fitting, therefore it was said later. The third.

4. Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadaṃ
4. Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadaṃ

230.Catutthe ‘‘nakulamātāti’’ādīsu (a. ni. 1.266; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.266) nakulassa bhagavato mātānakulamātāti ca nakulañca bhagavato taṃ mātā cāti nakulamātāti ca attho sambhavati, ‘‘uttaramātāti’’ādīsu uttarāya mātāuttaramātāti atthoyeva sambhavati. Tesu ‘‘uttaramātā’’tipadasseva ‘‘kāṇamātā’’tipadassa kāṇāya mātākāṇamātāti atthoyeva sambhavatīti āha ‘‘kāṇāya mātā’’ti. Tassā dhītuyā ‘‘kāṇā’’tināmena vissutabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sā kirā’’tiādi.ti dārikā vissutā ahosīti sambandho.Assāti mahāupāsikāya.Ye yeti purisā. ‘‘Rāgena kāṇā hontī’’tiiminā kaṇanti nimilanti rāgena purisā etāyātikāṇāti atthaṃ dasseti.Tassāti kāṇāya.Āgatanti ettha bhāvatthe toti āha ‘‘āgamana’’nti.Adhippāyoti ‘‘kismiṃ viyā’’tipadassa, kāṇamātāya vā adhippāyo.Rittāti tucchā, suññāti attho. ‘‘Asmiṃ gamane’’tiiminā bāhiratthasamāsaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ariyasāvikā’’tiādinā ariyānaṃ bhikkhūhi apaṭivibhattabhogaṃ dasseti. Na kevalaṃ kiñci parikkhayaṃ agamāsi, atha kho sabbanti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ parikkhayaṃ agamāsī’’ti.Kāṇāpīti pisaddo na kevalaṃ mātāyeva maggaphalabhāginī ahosi, atha kho kāṇāpi sotāpannā ahosīti dasseti.Sopi purisoti kāṇāya patibhūto sopi puriso.Pakatiṭṭhāneyevāti jeṭṭhakapajāpatiṭṭhāneyeva.

230.In the fourth, in "nakulamātāti," etc. (A.N. 1.266; AA. 1.1.266), nakulamātā can mean "Nakula's mother," and it can also mean "Nakula and his mother." In "uttaramātāti," etc., uttaramātā only means "Uttara's mother." Among these, for the phrase "kāṇamātā" as for the phrase "uttaramātā," kāṇamātā only means "Kāṇā's mother." Showing that her daughter was famous by the name "Kāṇā," he says, "Sā kirā," etc. means that girl was famous, is the connection. Assā means of the great female lay follower. Ye ye means whichever men. With "Rāgena kāṇā hontī," he shows the meaning that men are blinded by lust through her, therefore she is kāṇā. Tassā means of Kāṇā. Āgata means "coming" here, in the sense of becoming, he says, "āgamana." Adhippāyo means the meaning of the phrase "kismiṃ viyā," or the intention of Kāṇamātā. Rittā means empty, void. With "Asmiṃ gamane," he shows the external-meaning compound. With "Ariyasāvikā," etc., he shows the undivided enjoyment of the noble ones by the bhikkhus. Not only did something not go to ruin, but everything, he says, "sabbaṃ parikkhayaṃ agamāsī." Kāṇāpī means the particle "pi" shows that not only the mother attained the path and fruition, but also Kāṇā became a sotāpanna. Sopi puriso means that man who was the guarantor of Kāṇā. Pakatiṭṭhāneyevā means in the place of the eldest female relative.

231.Imasmiṃ pana vatthusminti imasmiṃ pūvavatthusmiṃ.Etanti pātheyyavatthuṃ.Ariyasāvakattāti ariyabhūtassa sāvakassa bhāvato, ariyassa vā sammāsambuddhassa sāvakabhāvato.

231.Imasmiṃ pana vatthusmiṃ means in this cake-incident. Eta means that travel-provision incident. Ariyasāvakattā means because of being a noble disciple, or because of being a disciple of the truly enlightened Buddha.

233.Paheṇakapaṇṇākārasaddānaṃ aññamaññavevacanattā vuttaṃ ‘‘paheṇakatthāyāti paṇṇākāratthāyā’’ti.Idhāti ‘‘pūvehi vā’’tipade, sikkhāpade vā.Baddhasattūti madhusakkharādīhi missetvā baddhasattu.Thūpīkatanti thūpīkataṃ katvā.

233.Since the words paheṇaka and paṇṇākāra are synonyms for each other, it is said, "paheṇakatthāyāti paṇṇākāratthāyā." Idhā means in the phrase "pūvehi vā," or in the training rule. Baddhasattū means sattu mixed and bound with honey, sugar, etc. Thūpīkata means having made it into a heap.

dvattipattā,vāsaddatthe saṅkhyobhayabāhiratthasamāso, tisaddaparattā dvissa ca akāro hoti, dvattipattā ca te pūrā cātidvattipattapūrā,te dvattipattapūre gahetvāti yojanā. ‘‘Ācikkhitabba’’nti vuttavacanassa ācikkhanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘atra mayā’’tiādi.Tenāpīti dutiyenāpi. Paṭhamabhikkhu ekaṃ gahetvā dutiyabhikkhussa ārocanañca dutiyabhikkhu ekaṃ gahetvā tatiyabhikkhussa ārocanañca atidisanto āha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Tatthayenāti paṭhamabhikkhunā. Paṭikkamanti bhuñjītvā etthātipaṭikkamananti vutte asanasālāva gahetabbāti āha ‘‘asanasāla’’nti.Yatthāti yassaṃ asanasālāyaṃ. Mukholokanaṃ na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘attano’’tiādi.Aññatthāti paṭikkamanato aññattha.Assāti bhikkhussa.

dvattipattā, in the sense of "or," it is a numerical external-meaning compound. Because the word "ti" is later, the "a" of "dvi" also occurs. "dvattipattā ca te pūrā cāti dvattipattapūrā," means having taken those two or three bowls full. Showing the manner of announcing in the statement "Ācikkhitabba," he says, "atra mayā," etc. Tenāpī means even by the second. Extending that the first bhikkhu announces to the second bhikkhu after taking one, and the second bhikkhu announces to the third bhikkhu after taking one, he says, "yenā," etc. There, yenā means by the first bhikkhu. Since the refectory should be taken as the place where one leaves after eating, he says, "asanasāla." Yatthā means in whichever refectory. He says that looking at the face is not allowable, "attano," etc. Aññatthā means elsewhere than the refectory. Assā means of the bhikkhu.

Yathāmittanti yassa yassa mittassa.Akāmāti na kāmena. Kāraṇatthe cetaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ.

Yathāmitta means to whichever friend. Akāmā means not willingly. This is a statement of certainty in the sense of a reason.

235.Antarāmaggeti maggassa antaro antarāmaggo, sukhuccāraṇatthaṃ majjhe dīgho, tasmiṃ. Bahumpi dentānaṃ etesaṃ ñātakapavāritānaṃ bahumpi paṭiggaṇhantassāti yojanā. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana vuttanti sambandho. Aṭṭhakathānaṃ vacanaṃ pāḷiyā na sametīti. Catutthaṃ.

235.Antarāmagge means the interior of the road, antarāmaggo; the middle vowel is lengthened for ease of pronunciation, in that. The meaning is, "for these relatives who are giving even a lot, for him who is receiving even a lot." But it is connected to "said in the commentaries." The statement of the commentaries does not agree with the Pāḷi. The fourth.

5. Paṭhamapavāraṇasikkhāpadaṃ
5. Paṭhamapavāraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

236.Pañcamepavāritāti ettha vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā, paccayapavāraṇā, paṭikkhepapavāraṇā, yāvadatthapavāraṇā cāti catubbidhāsu pavāraṇāsu yāvadatthapavāraṇā ca paṭikkhepapavāraṇā cāti dve pavāraṇā adhippetāti dassento āha ‘‘brāhmaṇenā’’tiādi. Brāhmaṇena pavāritāti sambandho.Sayanti tatiyantanipāto ‘‘pavāritā’’tipadena sambandho. Casaddo aññattha yojetabbo yāvadatthapavāraṇāya ca paṭikkhepapavāraṇāya cāti. Paṭimukhaṃ attano gehaṃ visanti pavisantītipaṭivissakāti vutte āsannagehavāsikā gahetabbāti āha ‘‘sāmantagharavāsike’’ti.

236.In the fifth, pavāritā, among the four kinds of pavāraṇā: the pavāraṇā at the end of the rains-residence, the paccayapavāraṇā, the paṭikkhepapavāraṇā, and the yāvadatthapavāraṇā, showing that two pavāraṇā, the yāvadatthapavāraṇā and the paṭikkhepapavāraṇā, are intended, he says, "brāhmaṇenā," etc. It should be connected to "pavāritā by a brahmin." Saya is a third-case particle, and it is connected to the word "pavāritā." The particle "ca" should be connected elsewhere, to "the yāvadatthapavāraṇā and the paṭikkhepapavāraṇā." Those who enter their own houses facing the front are paṭivissakā. In the statement, āsannagehavāsikā should be taken, he says, "sāmantagharavāsike."

237.Uddhaṅgamo ravooravo,soyeva saddooravasaddo,kākānaṃ oravasaddokakoravasaddoti dassento āha ‘‘kākāna’’ntiādi.

237.Uddhaṅgamo ravo is oravo, that very sound is oravasaddo, kākānaṃ oravasaddo is kakoravasaddo, showing this he says ‘‘kākāna’’ntiādi.

239.Tavantupaccayassa atītatthabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādi.Tatthāti ‘‘bhuttavā’’tipade. Yasmā yena bhikkhunā ajjhoharitaṃ hoti, tasmā so ‘‘bhuttāvī’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti yojanā.Saṅkhāditvāti dantehi cuṇṇaṃ katvā.Tenāti tena hetunā.Assāti ‘‘bhuttāvī’’tipadassa. Pavāreti paṭikkhipatītipavāritobhikkhūti dassento āha ‘‘katapavāraṇo’’ti.Sopi cāti so paṭikkhepo ca hotīti sambandho.Assāti ‘‘pavārito’’tipadassa.Tatthāti ‘‘asanaṃ paññāyatī’’tiādivacane. Yasmā bhuttāvītipi saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tasmā na passāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Asanaṃ paññāyatī’’ti padabhājaniyā ‘‘bhuttāvī’’ti mātikāpadassa asaṃsandanabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘asanaṃ paññāyatīti iminā’’tiādi.Yañcāti yañca bhojanaṃ.Dirattādīti ettha ādisaddena pañcādivacanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Etanti ‘‘bhuttāvī’’tipadaṃ.

239.To show the past-tense nature of the tavantupaccaya, it is said, "tattha cā," etc. Tatthā means in "bhuttavā." Because by whichever bhikkhu it is consumed, therefore he goes to the reckoning called "bhuttāvī," is the connection. Saṅkhāditvā means having crushed with the teeth. Tenā means by that reason. Assā means of the word "bhuttāvī." Showing that "pavāreti paṭikkhipatīti pavārito bhikkhu," he says, "katapavāraṇo." Sopi cā means that rejection also occurs, is the connection. Assā means of the word "pavārito." Tatthā means in the statement "asanaṃ paññāyatī," etc. Because he also goes to the reckoning called "bhuttāvī," therefore we do not see it, is the connection. To show the non-agreement of the matrix word "bhuttāvī" with the word analysis "asanaṃ paññāyatī," it is said, "asanaṃ paññāyatīti iminā," etc. Yañcā means and whichever food. Dirattādī means here the word "ādi" includes five, etc. Eta means the word "bhuttāvī."

Abhiharatīti abhimukhaṃ harati.Tanti bhojanaṃ.Etanti pañcaṅgabhāvaṃ, ‘‘pañcahi…pe… paññāyatī’’ti vacanaṃ vā.

Abhiharatī means he brings towards. Ta means that food. Eta means the five-factored nature, or the statement "pañcahi…pe… paññāyatī."

Tatrāti ‘‘asanaṃ paññāyatī’’tiādivacane.Asnātīti kīyādigaṇattā, tassa ca ekakkharadhātuttā sakāranakārānaṃ saṃyogo daṭṭhabbo.Tanti bhojanaṃ. Undati pasavati bhuñjantānaṃ āyubalaṃ janetītiodano. Yavādayo pūtiṃ katvā katattā kucchitena masīyati āmasīyatītikumāso. Sacati samavāyo hutvā bhavatītisattu. Byañjanatthāya māretabbotimaccho. Mānīyati bhuñjantehītimaṃsaṃ. Tatthāti odanādīsu pañcasu bhojanesu. Sāro assatthi aññesaṃ dhaññānantisālī. Vahati bhuñjantānaṃ jīvitantivīhi. Yavati amissitopi missito viya bhavatītiyavo. Gudhati pariveṭhati milakkhabhojanattātigodhumo. Sobhanasīsattā kamanīyabhāvaṃ gacchatītikaṅgu. Mahantasīsattā, madhurarasanāḷattā ca varīyati patthīyati janehītivarako. Koraṃ rudhiraṃ dūsati bhuñjantānantikudrūsako. Nibbatto odano nāmāti sambandho.Tatthāti sattasu dhaññesu.Sālītīti ettha itisaddo nāmapariyāyo. Sālī nāmāti attho. Eseva nayo ‘‘vīhītī’’tiādīsupi.

Tatrā means in the statement "asanaṃ paññāyatī," etc. Asnātī is from the Kīyādi class, and because it is a single-syllable root, the combination of the "sa" and "na" should be seen. Ta means that food. Odano is because it moistens, produces, generates life-force for those who are eating. Kumāso is because after making barley etc. putrid, it is mashed with dislike. Sattu is because it exists having become a collection. Maccho is because it should be killed for the sake of flavoring. Maṃsaṃ is because it is measured by those who are eating. Tatthā means among those five foods: rice, etc. Sālī is the essence of the tree, of other grains. Vīhi is because it carries the life of those who are eating. Yavo is because even though unmixed, it becomes as if mixed. Godhumo is because it envelops, surrounds, it is food for the milakkhas. Kaṅgu is because it goes to a desirable state, having a beautiful top. Varako is because it is chosen, desired by people because of having a large top, and because of having a sweet sap. Kudrūsako is because it spoils the blood of those who are eating. It should be connected to "The cooked rice is called." Tatthā means among the seven grains. Sālītī means here the word "iti" is a synonym for name. The meaning is, it is called sālī. This same method also applies to "vīhītī," etc.

Etthāti tiṇadhaññajātīsu. Nīvāro sāliyā anulomo, varakacorako varakassa anulomo.Ambilapāyāsādīsūti ettha ādisaddena khīrabhattādayo saṅgaṇhanti.Odhīti avadhi, mariyādoti attho. So hi avahīyati cajīyati asmāti odhīti vuccati.

Etthā means among the varieties of grass grains. Nīvāro is appropriate for sāliyā, varakacorako is appropriate for varakassa. Ambilapāyāsādīsū means here the word "ādi" includes milk-rice, etc. Odhī means limit, boundary. For it is called odhī because the self is abandoned, relinquished from it.

pāyāso. Pātabbassa, asitabbassa cāti dvinnaṃ byuppattinimittānaṃ sambhavato vāpāyāsoti vuccati.Uddhanatoti cullito. Sā hi upari dhīyanti ṭhapiyanti thālyādayo etthāti uddhananti vuccati.Āvajjitvāti pariṇāmetvā.Ghanabhāvanti kathinabhāvaṃ. Etthāpi vākye ‘‘yo so’’ti padāni yojetabbāni.Pubbeti abbhuṇhakāle.Nimantaneti nimantanaṭṭhāne. Bhatte ākiritvā dentīti sambandho. Yāpanaṃ gacchati imāyātiyāgu. Kiñcāpi tanukā hoti, tathāpīti yojanā.Udakādīsūtiādisaddena kiñjikakhīrādayo saṅgayhanti. Yāgusaṅgahameva gacchati, kasmā? Udakādīnaṃ pakkuthitattāti adhippāyo.Tasmiṃ vāti sabhatte, pakkuthitaudakādike vā.Aññasmiṃ vāti pakkuthitaudakādito aññasmiṃ udakādike vā.Yatthayasmiṃ udakādike pakkhipanti, taṃ pavāraṇaṃ janetīti yojanā.

pāyāso. pāyāso is called such because of the possibility of the two etymological causes: that which should be drunk, and that which should be eaten. Uddhanato means from the hearth. For because pots, etc., are placed upon it, it is called uddhana. Āvajjitvā means having turned around. Ghanabhāva means the state of being solid. Here also, the words "yo so" should be connected in the sentence. Pubbe means in the early morning. Nimantane means in the invitation place. It should be connected to "they give after sprinkling on the rice." Because it goes to sustenance by this, it is yāgu. Although it is thin, even so is the connection. Udakādīsū here the word ādisaddena includes kiñjika, milk, etc. It only goes to the inclusion of yāgu, why? The meaning is because water, etc., are cooked-with. Tasmiṃ vā means either in that entire meal, or in water etc. that is cooked-with. Aññasmiṃ vā means or in other water etc. that is other than water etc. that is cooked-with. Yattha whichever water etc. they put it in, that generates a pavāraṇā, is the connection.

Suddharasakoti macchamaṃsakhaṇḍanhārūhi amisso suddho macchādirasako.Rasakayāgūti rasakabhūtā dravabhūtā yāgu.Ghanayāgūti kathinayāgu.Etthāti ghanayāguyaṃ.Pupphiatthāyāti pupphaṃ phullaṃ imassa khajjakassāti pupphī, pupphino attho payojanaṃ pupphiattho, tadatthāya katanti sambandho.Te taṇḍuleti te seditataṇḍule. Acuṇṇattā neva sattusaṅkhyaṃ, apakkattā na bhattasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti.Tehīti seditataṇḍulehi. Te taṇḍule pacanti, karontīti sambandho.

Suddharasako means a pure fish etc. flavor that is unmixed with pieces of fish and meat. Rasakayāgū means liquid yāgu that is flavor. Ghanayāgū means thick yāgu. Etthā means in the thick yāgu. Pupphiatthāyā means pupphi, this snack has flowers full, pupphiattho is the purpose of the flower, it should be connected to "made for that purpose." Te taṇḍule means those cooked grains of rice. Because they are unground, they do not go to the reckoning of sattu; because they are uncooked, they do not go to the reckoning of food. Tehī means by those cooked grains of rice. They cook those grains of rice, they make, is the connection.

Thuseti dhaññatace.Palāpetvāti paṭikkamāpetvā.Tanti cuṇṇaṃ gacchatīti sambandho.Kharapākabhajjitānanti kharo pāko kharapāko, kharapākena bhajjitā kharapākabhajjitā, tesaṃ. Na pavārenti asattusaṅgahattāti adhippāyo.Kuṇḍakampīti kaṇampi. Pavāreti sattusaṅgahattāti adhippāyo.Tehīti lājehi.Suddhakhajjakanti piṭṭhehi amissitaṃ suddhaṃ phalāphalādikhajjakaṃ. Yāguṃ pivantassa dentīti yojanā.Tānīti dve macchamaṃsakhaṇḍāni. Na pavāreti dvinnaṃ macchamaṃsakhaṇḍānaṃ akhāditattāti adhippāyo.Tatoti dvemacchamaṃsakhaṇḍato nīharitvā ekanti sambandho, tesu vā.Soti khādako bhikkhu.Aññanti dvīhi macchamaṃsakhaṇḍehi aññaṃ pavāraṇapahonakaṃ bhojanaṃ.

Thuse means the husk of the grain. Palāpetvā means having caused to depart. Ta means it goes to powder, is the connection. Kharapākabhajjitāna means kharo pāko kharapāko, kharapākena bhajjitā kharapākabhajjitā, of those. They do not offer because they are included in sattu, is the meaning. Kuṇḍakampī means kaṇampi. They offer because they are included in sattu, is the meaning. Tehī means with those parched grains. Suddhakhajjaka means pure snack of fruits etc. that is unmixed with flour. They give to him who is drinking the yāgu, is the connection. Tānī means those two pieces of fish and meat. They do not offer because those two pieces of fish and meat are unchewed, is the meaning. Tato means having removed one from those two pieces of fish and meat, is the connection, or among those. So means that bhikkhu who chews. Añña means other food suitable for pavāraṇā than the two pieces of fish and meat.

Avatthutāyāti pavāraṇāya avatthubhāvato. Taṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘yaṃ hī’’ti.Hisaddo vitthārajotako.Yanti maṃsaṃ.Idaṃ panāti idaṃ maṃsaṃ pana. Paṭikkhittamaṃsaṃ kappiyabhāvato apaṭikkhipitabbaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā paṭikkhittampi maṃsabhāvaṃ na jahāti. Nanu khāditamaṃsaṃ pana akappiyabhāvato paṭikkhipitabbaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā khādiyamānampi maṃsabhāvaṃ jahātīti āha ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādi. Kuladūsakakammañca vejjakammañca uttarimanussadhammārocanañca sāditarūpiyañcakula…pe… rūpiyāni,tāni ādīni yesaṃ kuhanādīnantikula…pe… rūpiyādayo,tehi.Sabbatthāti sabbesu vāresu.

Avatthutāyā ti: Because of the ungroundedness of the invitation. Expanding on that, he said, "For indeed..." Hi is a particle indicating expansion. Yaṃ means meat. Idaṃ panā ti: But this meat, because it is rejected meat and stands in a place where it should not be rejected due to its suitability, does not abandon its state of being meat even though it is rejected. But does the meat that has been eaten abandon its state of being meat even when being eaten because it is unsuitable and stands in a place where it should be rejected? He says, "Yaṃ panā tiādi (But whatever...)," i.e., conduct that corrupts families, medical practice, announcing superior human states, and accepting and storing gold and silver (kula…pe… rūpiyāni)—these and other deceptions, hence kula…pe… rūpiyādayo, by these. Sabbatthā ti: In all instances.

Evantiādi nigamananidassanaṃ.Tanti bhojanaṃ.Yathāti yenākārena. Yena ajjhohaṭaṃ hoti, so paṭikkhipati pavāretīti yojanā.Katthacīti kismiñci pattādike.Tasmiṃ ce antareti tasmiṃ khaṇe ce.Aññatrāti aññasmiṃ ṭhāne. Patte vijjamānabhojanaṃ anajjhoharitukāmo hoti yathā, evanti yojanā.ti saccaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu padesu.Tatthāti kurundīyaṃ.Ānisadassāti āgamma nisīdati etenāti ānisado, tassa pacchimantatoti sambandho.Paṇhiantatoti pasati ṭhitakāle vā gamanakāle vā bhūmiṃ phusatīti paṇhī, tassa antato. ‘‘Dāyakassā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘pasāritahattha’’nti padena ca ‘‘aṅga’’nti padena ca avayavīsambandho.Hatthapāsoti hatthassa pāso samīpo hatthapāso, hattho pasati phusati asmiṃ ṭhāneti vāhatthapāso,aḍḍhateyyahattho padeso.Tasminti hatthapāse.

Evantiādi: This is an example of concluding application. Taṃ means the food. Yathā ti: In whatever manner. The interpretation is: in whatever way it is brought near, he refuses, he invites. Katthacī ti: In some bowl or the like. Tasmiṃ ce antare ti: But in that moment. Aññatrā ti: In another place. The interpretation is: just as he does not want to consume food present in the bowl, so it is. Hī ti: Truly. Sabbatthā ti: In all regions. Tatthā ti: In the Kurundi commentary. Ānisadassā ti: The ānisada (edge of the seat), that by which one sits leaning, is its posterior limit, this is the connection. Paṇhiantato ti: The heel (paṇhī), because it touches the ground whether standing or walking, to its end. The word "dāyakassa (of the donor)" and the phrase "pasāritahattha (outstretched hand)" and the word "aṅga (part)" are related as parts to the whole. Hatthapāso ti: The pāsa (vicinity) of the hand is hatthapāso (within arm's reach), or the hand touches, contacts in this place, therefore hatthapāso, a region of one and a half hands. Tasmiṃnti: In that hatthapāsa.

Upanāmetīti samīpaṃ nāmeti.Anantaranisinnopīti hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā anantare ṭhāne nisinnopi bhikkhu vadatīti yojanā.Bhattapacchinti bhattena pakkhittaṃ pacchiṃ.Īsakanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ. Uddharitvā vā apanāmetvā vāti sambandhitabbaṃ.Dūreti navāsane.Itoti pattato. Gato dūtoti sambandho.

Upanāmetī ti: He brings near. Anantaranisinnopī ti: Even a bhikkhu sitting in an immediately adjacent place without leaving the hatthapāsa, the interpretation is that he speaks. Bhattapacchiṃ ti: A bowl filled with rice. Īsakaṃ ti: This is a neuter noun in the sense of diminution. It should be connected as either having taken it up or having removed it. Dūre ti: In a new seat. Ito ti: From the bowl. The connection is: a messenger has gone.

Parivesanāyāti parivesanatthāya, bhattagge vā.Tatrāti asmiṃ parivesane.Tanti bhattapacchiṃ.Phuṭṭhamattāvāti phusiyamattāva. Kaṭacchunā uddhaṭabhatte pana pavāraṇā hotīti yojanā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tassāti parivesakassa.Abhihaṭe paṭikkhittattāti abhihaṭassa bhattassa paṭikkhittabhāvato.

Parivesanāyā ti: For the purpose of serving, or in the refectory. Tatrā ti: In this serving. Taṃ means the rice bowl. Phuṭṭhamattāvā ti: Or just having been touched. The interpretation is: but an invitation occurs for rice scooped up with a ladle. Hī ti: Truly, or because. Tassā ti: Of the server. Abhihaṭe paṭikkhittattā ti: Because of the rejected state of the brought rice.

Tatthāti tesu kāyavācāpaṭikkhepesu.Macchikabījaninti makkhikānaṃ uttāsaniṃ bījaniṃ. Khakārassa hi chakāraṃ katvā ‘‘macchikā’’ti vuccati ‘‘sacchikatvā’’tiādīsu viya (a. ni. 3.103). Ettha hi ‘‘sakkhikatvā’’ti vattabbe khakārassa chakāro hoti.

Tatthā ti: In those bodily and verbal refusals. Macchikabījaniṃ ti: A fan for scaring away flies. Indeed, by changing the kha-sound to cha, it is called "macchikā," just as in "sacchikatvā" (a. ni. 3.103) and the like. Here, indeed, instead of saying "sakkhikatvā," the kha-sound becomes cha.

Apanetvāti pattato apanetvā.Etthāti vacane.Kathanti kenākārena hotīti yojanā.Vadantassa nāmāti ettha nāmasaddo garahattho ‘‘atthī’’tipadena yojetabbo.Atthi nāmāti attho.Itopīti pattatopi.Tatrāpīti tasmiṃ vacanepi.

Apanetvā ti: Having removed it from the bowl. Etthā ti: In this statement. Kathaṃ ti: In what way does it happen? This is the connection. Vadantassa nāmā ti: Here, the word "nāma" is in the sense of censure; it should be connected with the word "atthi (is)." Atthi nāmā ti: This is the meaning. Itopī ti: Even from the bowl. Tatrāpī ti: Even in that statement.

Samaṃsakanti maṃsena saha pavattaṃ.Rasanti dravaṃ.Tanti vacanaṃ. Paṭikkhipato hoti. Kasmā? Maccho ca raso ca macchena misso raso cāti atthassa sambhavato.Idanti vatthuṃ.Maṃsaṃ visuṃ katvāti ‘‘maṃsassa rasaṃ maṃsarasa’’nti maṃsapadatthassa padhānabhāvaṃ akatvā, rasapadatthasseva padhānabhāvaṃ katvāti attho.

Samaṃsakaṃ ti: Proceeding together with meat. Rasaṃ ti: Liquid. Taṃ means that statement. It occurs for one who refuses. Why? Because there is the possibility of the meaning: fish, and broth, and broth mixed with fish. Idaṃnti: This thing. Maṃsaṃ visuṃ katvā ti: Without making the meaning of the word "meat" the principal thing in "maṃsassa rasaṃ maṃsarasa" ("the flavor of meat is meat broth"), but making the meaning of the word "rasa" (flavor) itself the principal thing, this is the meaning.

Āpucchantanti ‘‘maṃsarasaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti āpucchantaṃ.Tanti maṃsaṃ.Karambakoti missakādhivacanametaṃ. Yañhi aññena aññena missetvā karonti, so ‘‘karambako’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – karoti samūhaṃ avayavintikaro,karīyati vā samūhena avayavinātikaro,avayavo, taṃ vakati ādadātītikarambako,samūho. ‘‘Kadambako’’tipi pāṭho, sopi yuttoyeva anumatattā paṇḍitehi. Abhidhānepi evameva atthī. Attho pana aññathā cintetabbo. Imasmiṃ vā atthe rakārassa dakāro kātabbo. Maṃsena misso, lakkhito vā karambakomaṃsakarambako. Na pavāretīti yesaṃ kesañci missakattā na pavāreti.Pavāretīti maṃsena missitattā pavāreti.

Āpucchantaṃ ti: Asking, "Should I take meat broth?" Taṃ means meat. Karambako ti: This is a designation for a mixture. For indeed, whatever they make mixing one thing with another, that is called "karambako." And this is the meaning of the word here: that which makes a group of parts is karo, or that which is made into a group by parts is karo, a part, that which takes up that is karambako, a group. "Kadambako" is also a reading; that too is appropriate because it is approved by the wise. In the dictionary too it is just like this. But the meaning should be considered otherwise. Or in this meaning the ra sound should be changed to da. Karambako (mixed), mixed with meat, or characterized by meat, is maṃsakarambako. Na pavāretī ti: Because it is a mixture of some things, he does not invite. Pavāretī ti: Because it is mixed with meat, he invites.

Nimantaneti nimantanaṭṭhāne.ti saccaṃ.Tatthāti kurundiyaṃ.Yenāti yena bhattena.Etthāti ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādivacane.Adhippāyoti aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ adhippāyo.Etthāti ‘‘yāgumissakaṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādivacane.Duddasanti dukkaraṃ dassanaṃ.Idañcāti ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’tivacanañca.Na samānetabbanti samaṃ na ānetabbaṃ, samānaṃ vā na kātabbaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Idaṃ panāti missakaṃ pana.Etthāti missake.Visuṃ katvāti rasakhīrasappīni āveṇiṃ katvā.Tanti rasādiṃ.

Nimantane ti: In a place of invitation. Hī ti: Truly. Tatthā ti: In the Kurundi commentary. Yenā ti: By whichever rice. Etthā ti: In statements like, "Take rice-gruel." Adhippāyo ti: The intention of the teachers of the commentary. Etthā ti: In statements like, "Take the mixture of rice-gruel." Duddasaṃ ti: Difficult to see. Idañcā ti: And this statement, "Take the mixture." Na samānetabbaṃ ti: Should not be brought together, or should not be made equal. Hī ti: Truly, or because. Idaṃ panā ti: But the mixture. Etthā ti: In the mixture. Visuṃ katvā ti: Having made the flavors, milk, and ghee into a row. Taṃ means that flavor, etc.

kaddamo. Undati pasavati vaḍḍhatītiudakaṃ. Undati vā kledanaṃ karotītiudakaṃ,nilīne satte gupati rakkhatītigumbo,guhati saṃvaratīti vāgumbo. Anupariyāyantenāti anukkamena parivattitvā āyantena.Tanti nāvaṃ vā setuṃ vā.Majjhanhikanti ahassa majjhaṃ majjhanhaṃ, ahasaddassa nhādeso, majjhanhaṃ eva majjhanhikaṃ. Potthakesu pana majjhantikanti pāṭho atthi, so apāṭhoyeva. Yo ṭhito pavāreti, tena ṭhiteneva bhuñjitabbanti yojanā.Ānisadanti pīṭhe phuṭṭhaānisadamaṃsaṃ.Acāletvāti acāvetvā. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Upari ca passesu ca amocetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Adinnādāne viya ṭhānācāvanaṃ na veditabbaṃ.Saṃsaritunti saṃsabbituṃ.Nanti bhikkhuṃ.

kaddamo: Mud. Undati: it spurts forth, increases, therefore udakaṃ (water). Or undati: it makes wet, therefore udakaṃ, it protects the beings hidden within, therefore gumbo (thicket), or it conceals, protects, therefore gumbo. Anupariyāyantenā ti: By moving around in sequence. Taṃ means a boat or a bridge. Majjhanhikaṃ ti: The middle of the day is majjhanhaṃ, with the substitution of nhā for the word aha, majjhanhaṃ itself is majjhanhikaṃ. But in books there is a reading majjhantikaṃ; that is indeed an incorrect reading. The interpretation is: the one standing who invites should eat standing. Ānisadaṃ ti: The ānisada (edge of the seat) touched by the seat. Acāletvā ti: Without moving. Or this is the reading. It is said: without removing from above and from the sides. The movement from the place should not be understood as in the case of taking what is not given. Saṃsarituṃ ti: To smear around. Nanti: The bhikkhu.

atirittaṃ,na atirittaṃanatirittanti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘na atiritta’’nti. ‘‘Adhika’’ntiiminā atirittasaddassa atisuññatthaṃ nivatteti. Adhi hutvā eti pavattatītiadhikaṃ. Taṃ panāti anatirittaṃ pana hotīti sambandho.Tatthāti ‘‘akappiyakata’’ntiādivacane. Vitthāro evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Tatthāti atirittaṃ kātabbesu vatthūsu. Yaṃ phalaṃ vā yaṃ kandamūlādi vā akatanti yojanā.Akappiyabhojanaṃ vāti kuladūsakakammādīhi nibbattaṃ akappiyabhojanaṃ vā atthīti sambandho.Yoti vinayadharo bhikkhu. Tena katanti yojanā. ‘‘Bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitena kata’’ntivacanato bhuttāvinā apavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitena kattabbanti siddhaṃ. Tasmā pāto addhānaṃ gacchantesu dvīsu eko pavārito, tassa itaro piṇḍāya caritvā laddhaṃ bhikkhaṃ attanā abhutvāpi ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti kātuṃ labhati eva.Yanti khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ. ‘‘Tadubhayampī’’tiiminā atirittañca atirittañcaatirittaṃ,na atirittaṃanatirittanti atthaṃ dasseti.

atirittaṃ, na atirittaṃ anatirittaṃ—explaining the meaning, he said, "na atirittaṃ (not extra)." By this "adhikaṃ (more)," he negates the exceedingly empty meaning of the word atirittaṃ. That which comes by being more, that which occurs is adhikaṃ. Taṃ panā ti: But that anatirittaṃ (not extra) happens, this is the connection. Tatthā ti: In statements like "akappiyakata (made unallowable)" and so on. The interpretation should be understood in this way, this is the connection. Tatthā ti: In things that should be made extra. Whatever fruit or whatever root crop or the like is unmade, this is the connection. Akappiyabhojanaṃ vā ti: Or there is unallowable food produced by conduct that corrupts families, etc., this is the connection. Yonti: Whichever bhikkhu is a vinaya-holder. The connection is: it is made by him. From the statement, "by one who has eaten, by one who has invited, by one who has arisen from the seat," it is established that it should be made by one who has eaten, by one who has not invited, by one who has arisen from the seat. Therefore, if of two people going on a journey in the morning one has invited, the other can, without eating himself, do "alametaṃ sabbaṃ (this is enough for everyone)." Yaṃnti: Whatever is edible and consumable. By "tadubhayampī," he indicates the meaning of atirittañca atirittañca atirittaṃ, na atirittaṃ anatirittaṃ.

Tassevāti anatirittasseva.Etthāti anatiritte, ‘‘kappiyakata’’nti ādīsu sattasu vinayakammākāresu vā.Anantareti vinayadharassa anantare āsane. Pattato nīharitvāti sambandho.Tatthevāti bhuñjanaṭṭhāneyeva.Tassāti nisinnassa.Tenāti bhattaṃ ānentena bhikkhunā bhuñjitabbanti yojanā. ‘‘Nisinnena bhikkhunā’’ti kāritakammaṃ ānetabbaṃ. Kasmā ‘‘hatthaṃ dhovitvā’’ti vuttanti pucchanto āha ‘‘kasmā’’ti.ti kāraṇaṃ. Yasmā akappiyaṃ hoti, tasmā hatthaṃ dhovitvāti mayā vuttanti adhippāyo.Tassāti bhattaṃ ānentassa.Yenāti vinayadharena. Punayenāti evameva.Yañcāti khādanīyabhojanīyañca. Yena vinayadharena paṭhamaṃ akataṃ, teneva kattabbaṃ. Yañca khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ paṭhamaṃ akataṃ, taññeva kattabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.Tatthāti paṭhamabhājane.ti saccaṃ. Paṭhamabhājanaṃ suddhaṃ dhovitvā katampi niddosameva.Tena bhikkhunāti pavāritena bhikkhunā.

Tassevā ti: Of that very anatiritta. Etthā ti: In that anatiritta, or in the seven ways of disciplinary action beginning with "kappiyakata (made allowable)." Anantare ti: In the seat immediately next to the vinaya-holder. The connection is: having taken it out from the bowl. Tatthevā ti: In the very place of eating. Tassā ti: Of the one sitting. Tenā ti: By the bhikkhu bringing the rice, it should be eaten, this is the connection. "By the bhikkhu sitting" the causative should be brought. Asking why it was said, "having washed the hands," he says, "kasmā ti." Hī ti: Reason. The intention is: Because it is unallowable, therefore I said, "having washed the hands." Tassā ti: Of the one bringing the rice. Yenā ti: By the vinaya-holder. Again yenā ti: Just so. Yañcā ti: And whatever edible and consumable. By whichever vinaya-holder it was first unmade, by him alone it should be made. It is said: Whatever edible and consumable was first unmade, that very thing should be made. Tatthā ti: In the first vessel. Hī ti: Truly. Even if the first vessel is clean, having been washed, it is faultless. Tena bhikkhunā ti: By the bhikkhu who has invited.

Kuṇḍepīti ukkhaliyampi. Sā hi kuḍati odanādiṃ dāhaṃ karotīti kuṇḍoti vuccati.Tanti atirittakataṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ.Yena panāti vinayadharena pana. Bhikkhuṃ nisīdāpentīti sambandho.Maṅgalanimantaneti maṅgalatthāya nimantanaṭṭhāne.Tatthāti maṅgalanimantane.Karontenāti karontena vinayadharena.

Kuṇḍepī ti: Even in a cooking pot. For that is called kuṇḍa because it makes the rice and the like burn. Taṃ means that edible and consumable made extra. Yena panā ti: By whichever vinaya-holder, however. The connection is: they seat the bhikkhu. Maṅgalanimantane ti: In a place of invitation for auspicious purposes. Tatthā ti: In the auspicious invitation. Karontenā ti: By the vinaya-holder who is doing.

Yaṃkiñci gilānanti upasampannaṃ vā anupasampannaṃ vā yaṃkiñci gilānaṃ. Yaṃ dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ asaṃsaṭṭhavasena vuttanti yojanā.Anāhāratthāyāti pipāsacchedanaābādhavūpasamatthāya.

Yaṃkiñci gilānaṃ ti: Whichever sick person, ordained or unordained. Whatever offense was said, it was said on the basis of non-association, this is the connection. Anāhāratthāyā ti: For the purpose of cutting off thirst and alleviating illness.

241.Sati paccayeti ettha paccayassa sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pipāsāya satī’’ti ca ‘‘ābādhe satī’’ti ca vuttaṃ.Tena tenāti sattāhakālikena ca yāvajīvikena ca.Tassāti ābādhassa. Idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘upasamanattha’’nti ettha samudhātuyā sambandhe sambandho, yupaccayena sambandhe kammanti daṭṭhabbanti. Pañcamaṃ.

241. Sati paccaye ti: Here, to show the nature of the condition (paccaya), it is said, "pipāsāya satī (when there is thirst)" and "ābādhe satī (when there is illness)." Tena tenā ti: By the seven-day allowable and by the lifetime allowable. Tassā ti: Of that illness. This word has a connection with the verbal root in "upasamanattha (for the purpose of alleviation)" in a relation of possessor to attribute, and it should be seen as the object in relation to the yu-suffix. The fifth.

6. Dutiyapavāraṇasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Second Pavāraṇā Training Rule

242.Chaṭṭhe na ācaritabbotianācāroti vutte paṇṇattivītikkamoti āha ‘‘paṇṇattivītikkama’’nti. ‘‘Karotī’’tiiminā ‘‘attānamācaratī’’tiādīsu viya carasaddo karasaddatthoti dasseti.Upanandhīti ettha upasaddo upanāhattho, nahadhātu bandhanatthoti dassento āha ‘‘upanāha’’ntiādi. Janito upanāho yenāti janitaupanāho. Iminā‘‘upanandho’’ti padassa upanahatīti upanandhoti katthutthaṃ dasseti.

242. In the sixth, "na ācaritabbo (it should not be practiced)," when "anācāro (misconduct)" is said, it is a transgression of the rule, therefore he says, "paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ (a transgression of the rule)." By "karotī (he does)," he shows that the word "cara" (conduct) in statements like "attānamācaratī (he practices on himself)" and so on has the meaning of the word "kara (do)." Upanandhī ti: Here, the prefix "upa" is in the sense of closeness, showing that the root "naha" has the meaning of "binding," he says, "upanāhaṃ (rancor)" and so on. Janito upanāho yena (by whom rancor is generated) is janitaupanāho (one by whom rancor has been generated). By this he shows that the word "upanandho" has the derivation "upanahatīti upanandho (he binds, therefore he is upanandha)."

243.Abhihaṭṭhunti ettha tuṃpaccayo tvāpaccayatthoti āha ‘‘abhiharitvā’’ti. Padabhājane pana vuttanti sambandho. Sādhāraṇameva atthanti yojanā.Assāti bhikkhussa.Tīhākārehīti sāmaṃ jānanena ca aññesamārocanena ca tassārocanena cāti tīhi kāraṇehi. Āsādīyate maṅkuṃ karīyateāsādanaṃ,taṃ apekkhoāsādanāpekkhoti dassento āha ‘‘āsādana’’ntiādi.

243. Abhihaṭṭhuṃ ti: Here, the tuṃ suffix has the meaning of the tvā suffix, therefore he says, "abhiharitvā (having brought)." But it is said in the analysis of the word, this is the connection. The meaning is only ordinary, this is the connection. Assā ti: Of the bhikkhu. Tīhākārehī ti: By three modes: by knowing oneself, by announcing to others, and by that announcement. Āsādīyate maṅkuṃ karīyate āsādanaṃ (disrespect), taṃ apekkho āsādanāpekkho (expecting disrespect), showing that, he says, "āsādanaṃ (disrespect)" and so on.

Itarassāti abhihārakato aññassa bhuttassāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Itarassā ti: Of another who has eaten, different from the one who brought it. The sixth.

7. Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Wrong-Time Meal Training Rule

247.Sattamegirimhīti pabbatamhi. So hi himavamanādivasena jalaṃ, sārabhūtāni ca bhesajjādivatthūni girati niggiratīti girīti vuccati.Aggasamajjoti uttamasamajjo. Imehi padehi aggo samajjo aggasamajjo, girimhi pavatto aggasamajjogiraggasamajjoti atthaṃ dasseti.Samajjoti ca sabhā. Sā hi samāgamaṃ ajanti gacchanti janā etthāti samajjoti vuccati. ‘‘Girissa vā’’tiādinā girissa aggo koṭigiraggo,tasmiṃ pavatto samajjogiraggasamajjoti attho dassito.Soti giraggasamajjo. Bhavissati kirāti yojanā.Bhūmibhāgeti avayaviādhāro, sannipatatīti sambandho. Naṭañca nāṭakañcanaṭanāṭakāni. ‘‘Naccaṃ gītaṃ vāditañcā’’ti idaṃ tayaṃ ‘‘nāṭaka’’nti vuccati.Tesanti naṭanāṭakānaṃ.Dassanatthanti dassanāya ca savanāya ca. Savanampi hi dassaneneva saṅgahitaṃ.Apaññattesikkhāpadeti ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadassa tāva apaññattattā.Teti sattarasavaggiyā.Tatthāti giraggasamajjaṃ.Athāti tasmiṃ kāle.Nesanti sattarasavaggiyānaṃ adaṃsūti sambandho.Vilimpetvāti vilepanehi vividhākārena limpetvā.

247. In the seventh, girimhī ti: On the mountain. For that, by way of being the Himalayas and so on, swallows water and essential medicinal substances, therefore it is called giri (mountain). Aggasamajjo ti: The best gathering. By these words, he indicates the meaning that the best gathering is aggasamajjo, the aggasamajjo that occurs on the mountain is giraggasamajjo. Samajjo ti: And samajjo is an assembly. For people go, approach to a meeting place, therefore it is called samajjo. By "girissa vā tiādinā (or of the mountain)," the aggasamajjo that occurs on the giraggo (peak of the mountain), the peak of the mountain is giraggo, is the meaning shown. So ti: That giraggasamajjo. It will happen, indeed, this is the connection. Bhūmibhāge ti: In the part of the ground, the base being the location, it gathers, this is the connection. Naṭañca nāṭakañca naṭanāṭakāni (dancing and drama). "Naccaṃ gītaṃ vāditañcā (dancing, singing, and playing music)" this triad is called nāṭaka (drama). Tesaṃ ti: Of those dancing and dramas. Dassanatthaṃ ti: For the sake of seeing and hearing. For hearing is included by seeing. Apaññattesikkhāpade ti: Because the training rule for those under twenty years had not yet been formulated. Te ti: Those seventeen companions. Tatthā ti: At the giraggasamajja. Athā ti: At that time. Nesaṃ ti: To those seventeen companions, they gave, this is the connection. Vilimpetvā ti: Having smeared with various kinds of ointments.

249.‘‘Vikāle’’ti sāmaññena vuttepi visesakālova gahetabboti āha ‘‘kālo’’tiādi.So cāti bhojanakālo ca. Majjhanhiko hotīti yojanā.Tenevāti bhojanakālassa adhippetattā eva.Assāti ‘‘vikāle’’tipadassa. ‘‘Vikālo nāma…pe… aruṇuggamanā’’ti padabhājanena aruṇuggamanato yāva majjhanhikā kālo nāmāti attho nayena dassito hoti.Tatoti ṭhitamajjhanhikato. Sūriyassa atisīghattā vegena ṭhitamajjhanhikaṃ vītivatteyyāti āha ‘‘kukkuccakena pana na kattabba’’nti.Kālatthambhoti kālassa jānanatthāya thūṇo.Kālantareti kālassa abbhantare.

249. Even when "vikāle (wrong-time)" is said in a general way, only the specific time should be taken, therefore he says, "kālo (time)" and so on. So cā ti: And that time for eating. It happens in the middle of the day, this is the connection. Tenevā ti: Precisely because the time for eating is intended. Assā ti: Of the word "vikāle (wrong-time)." By the phrase, "vikālo nāma…pe… aruṇuggamanā (wrong-time is…up to…the rising of the dawn)" the meaning is shown by the method in the analysis of the word that the time is from the rising of the dawn up to midday. Tato ti: From established midday. Because the sun is very swift, lest it quickly pass established midday, he says, "kukkuccakena pana na kattabba (but it should not be done with anxiety)." Kālatthambho ti: A pillar for knowing the time. Kālantare ti: Within the time.

Yanti khādanīyaṃ atthīti sambandho. Vanamūlādipabhedaṃ yampi khādanīyaṃ atthi, tampi āmisagatikaṃ hotīti yojanā.Seyyathidanti pucchāvācakanipātasamudāyo. Idaṃ khādanīyaṃ seyyathā katamanti attho.Idampīti idaṃ dvādasavidhampi. Pisaddena na pūvādiyevāti dasseti.

Yaṃnti: Whatever is edible, this is the connection. Whatever edible thing there is, a division of forest roots and the like, that too is considered to be meat, this is the connection. Seyyathidaṃnti: This is a collection of interrogative particles. The meaning is: How is this edible thing? Idampī ti: Even this twelvefold. By the pi-sound, he shows that it is not only like cake and so on.

Tatthāti dvādasasu khādanīyesu, ādhāre bhummaṃ. Mūlati patiṭṭhāti ettha, etenāti vāmūlaṃ. Khāditabbantikhādanīyaṃ. Mūlameva khādanīyaṃmūlakhādanīyaṃ,tasmiṃ vinicchayo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā. Mūlakamūlādīni lokasaṅketo padesatoyeva veditabbāni. Taṃ tañhi nāmaṃ ajānantānaṃ atisammūḷhakāraṇattā saha pariyāyantarena vacanatthaṃ vakkhāma. Sūpassa hitaṃsūpeyyaṃ,sūpeyyaṃ paṇṇaṃ etesantisūpeyyapaṇṇā,tesaṃ mūlānisūpeyyapaṇṇamūlāni. Āmīyati anto pavesīyatītiāmiso,ākāro antokaraṇattho, āmisassa gati viya gati etesantiāmisagatikāni. Etthāti mūlesu.Jaraḍḍhanti jarabhūtaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ.Aññampīti vajakalimūlato aññampi.

Tatthāti, among the twelve edibles, the base is the ground. Mūlaṃ: it is established or based here; or that by which it exists (mūlati patiṭṭhāti ettha, etenāti vā)mūlaṃ. That which is eaten is khādanīyaṃ. Root itself as edible is mūlakhādanīyaṃ; the judgment in regard to that should be understood thus, is the connection. Root, tuber, etc. should be understood only according to local custom. Indeed, because not knowing that name is the cause of great confusion, we will explain the meaning of the word together with another synonym. Suitable for soup is sūpeyyaṃ; leaves that are suitable for soup are sūpeyyapaṇṇā; the roots of those are sūpeyyapaṇṇamūlāni. It enters or is put inside (āmīyati anto pavesīyatīti)āmiso, the ā- is in the sense of interior; that which has the nature of relish is āmisagatikāni. Etthati, in roots. Jaraḍḍhanti, that which is old and half (rotten). Aññampīti, even other than the Vajakali root.

Khādanīyatthanti khādanīyassa, khādanīye vā vijjamānaṃ, khādanīyena vā kātabbaṃ kiccaṃ, payojanaṃ vāti khādanīyatthaṃ. ‘‘Khādanīye’’tiiminā ‘‘tattha vuttābhidhammatthā’’tiādīsu viya khādanīyatthapadassa uttarapadatthapadhānabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tattha khādanīyassa, khādanīye vā vijjamānaṃ, khādanīyena vā kātabbaṃ kiccaṃ nāma jighacchāharaṇameva. Yañhi pūvādikhādanīyaṃ khāditvā jighacchāharaṇaṃ hoti, tassa kiccaṃ kiccaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ kiccaṃ, payojanaṃ vā neva pharanti, neva nipphādenti. Eseva nayo ‘‘na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṃ pharantī’’tietthāpi.

Khādanīyatthanti, the purpose of the edible, or that which exists in the edible, or the function that should be done with the edible, or the purpose. By ‘‘Khādanīye’’, it shows the prominence of the meaning of the latter word in the compound Khādanīyattha, just as in ‘‘tattha vuttābhidhammatthā’’ etc. Here, the function that should be done with the edible, or that which exists in the edible, is simply the removal of hunger. Indeed, after eating edibles like cake etc., hunger is removed, that action is said to be the action. That action, or purpose, neither pervades nor fulfills. The same method applies to ‘‘na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṃ pharantī’’ also.

Tesanti mūlānaṃ anto, lakkhaṇanti vā sambandho. Ekasmiṃ janapade khādanīyatthabhojanīyatthesu pharamānesu aññesupi janapadesu pharantiyevāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘tesu tesu janapadesū’’ti vicchāpadaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi bahūsu janapadesu pathavīrasaāporasasampattivasena khādanīyatthabhojanīyatthaṃ pharamānampi ekasmiṃ janapade pathavīrasaāporasavipattivasena apharamānaṃ bhaveyya, vikāravasena pana tattha pavattattā taṃ janapadaṃ pamāṇaṃ na kātabbaṃ, gahetabbamevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Pakatiāhāravasenāti aññehi yāvakālika, sattāhakālikehi amissitaṃ attano pakatiyāva āhārakiccakaraṇavasena. ‘‘Manussāna’’ntiiminā aññesaṃ tiracchānādīnaṃ khādanīyatthabhojanīyatthaṃ pharamānampi na pamāṇanti dasseti.Tanti mūlaṃ.ti saccaṃ.Nāmasaññāsūti nāmasaṅkhātāsu saññāsu.

Tesanti, the inside of the roots, or the characteristic or the relation. In order to show that if the edible-purpose or the food-purpose is pervasive in one region, it is pervasive in other regions as well, the descriptive word ‘‘tesu tesu janapadesū’’ti is stated. Although in many regions, due to the abundance of earth-sap and water-sap, the edible-purpose and food-purpose may be pervasive, it may not be pervasive in one region due to the deficiency of earth-sap and water-sap; however, since it occurs there due to alteration, that region should not be taken as a standard; it should certainly be included, is what is stated. Pakatiāhāravasenati, by way of performing the function of natural food by itself, without being mixed with other yāvakālika or sattāhakālika foods. By ‘‘Manussāna’’, it shows that even if it is pervasive for other animals such as beasts, it is not a standard. Tanti, the root. ti, truly. Nāmasaññāsūti, in designations known as names.

Yathā mūle lakkhaṇaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ kandādīsupi yaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ dassitanti yojanā. Na kevalaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatānaṃ haliddādīnaṃ mūlaṃyeva yāvajīvikaṃ hoti, atha kho tacādayopīti āha ‘‘yañceta’’ntiādi. Yaṃ etaṃ aṭṭhavidhanti sambandho.

Just as the characteristic has been shown in the root, so too the characteristic that has been shown in the tuber etc., is the connection. Not only the root of turmeric etc. that have come in the Pali is allowable for life, but also the bark etc., thus he says, ‘‘yañceta’’ntiādi. Yaṃ etaṃ aṭṭhavidhanti is the connection.

kandakhādanīyeti kaṃ sukhaṃ dadātīti kando, padumādikando, sukhassa adāyakā pana kandā ruḷhīvasena kandāti vuccanti, kando eva khādanīyaṃ kandakhādanīyaṃ, tasmiṃ vinicchayo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā. Eseva nayo uparipi.Yanti kandaṃ. Iminā taṃsaddānapekkho yaṃsaddopi atthīti ñāpeti.Tatthāti kandakhādanīye. Taruṇo, sukhakhādanīyoti visesanapadāni yathāvacanaṃ uparipi yojetabbāni. Evamādayo pharaṇakakandā yāvakālikāti sambandho.

kandakhādanīyeti, that which gives happiness is kando, a tuber such as a lotus root; however, tubers that do not give happiness are called kanda by convention; kando itself as edible is kandakhādanīyaṃ, the judgment in regard to that should be understood thus, is the connection. The same method applies above as well. Yanti, the tuber. By this, he makes known that the word "yaṃ" also exists, which is expectant of the word "taṃ". Tatthāti, in the edible tuber. "Taruṇo", young; "sukha khādanīyo," easily edible; these qualifying words should be connected above as appropriate. Such pervasive tubers are yāvakālikā, is the connection.

Adhototi visaraso udakena adhūnito.Teti kandā saṅgahitāti sambandho.

Adhototi, unwashed, its essence not removed by water. Teti, those tubers, is the connection to be included.

muḷālo,udakato vā uddhaṭamatte milati nimilatītimuḷālaṃ. Evamādi pharaṇakamuḷālaṃ yāvakālikanti yojanā.Taṃ sabbampīti sabbampi taṃ muḷālaṃ saṅgahitanti sambandho.

muḷālo, because it shrinks or closes as soon as it is lifted up from the water it is muḷālaṃ. Such pervasive lotus stalk is yāvakālika, is the connection. Taṃ sabbampīti, all of that lotus stalk, is the connection to be included.

matthako. Evamādi matthako yāvakālikoti yojanā.Jaraḍḍhabundoti jarabhūtaaḍḍhasaṅkhāto pādo.

matthako. Such matthako is yāvakālika, is the connection. Jaraḍḍhabundoti, a foot that is old and counted as half.

khandho,khāyatīti vākhandho. ‘‘Antopathavīgato’’tipadaṃ ‘‘sālakalyāṇikhandho’’tipadeneva yojetabbaṃ, na aññehi. Evamādi khandho yāvakālikoti yojanā.Avasesāti tīhi daṇḍakādīhi avasesā.

khandho, because it is eaten it is khandho. The phrase "Antopathavīgato" should be connected with the phrase "sālakalyāṇikhandho" only, not with others. Such trunk is yāvakālika, is the connection. Avasesāti, those remaining from the three, daṇḍaka etc.

taco. Sarasoti ettha evakāro yojetabbo, saraso evāti attho. Tesaṃ saṅgahoti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.Etanti kasāvabhesajjaṃ, ‘‘anujānāmi …pe… bhojanīyattha’’nti vacanaṃ vā.Etthāti kasāvabhesajje.Etesampīti matthakakhandhattacānampi.

taco. Sarasoti, here the evakāra should be connected, saraso eva, is the meaning. Tesaṃ saṅgaho, is the connection. ti, truly. Etanti, astringent medicine, or the statement, ‘‘anujānāmi …pe… bhojanīyattha’’. Etthāti, in astringent medicine. Etesampīti, of the matthaka, khandha, and taca.

pattaṃ. Etesanti mūlakādīnaṃ. Evarūpāni pattāni ca ekaṃsena yāvakālikānīti yojanā. Yā loṇī ārohati, tassā loṇiyā pattaṃ yāvajīvikanti yojanā.Dīpavāsinoti tambapaṇṇidīpavāsino, jambudīpavāsino vā. Yāni vā pharantīti vuttānīti sambandho.Tesanti nimbādīnaṃ. Idaṃ padaṃ pubbaparāpekkhakaṃ, tasmā dvinnaṃ majjhe vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṇṇānaṃ anto natthīti sambandho.

pattaṃ. Etesanti, of the mūlaka etc. Such leaves are certainly yāvakālikā, is the connection. The leaf of that loṇī which climbs is allowable for life, is the connection. Dīpavāsinoti, those living on Tambapaṇṇidīpa or those living on Jambudīpa. Yāni vā pharantīti vuttāni, is the connection. Tesanti, of the nimba etc. This word is relative to what comes before and after, therefore it should be seen as stated in the middle of the two. There is no inside for the leaves, is the connection.

pupphaṃ. Evamādi pupphaṃ yāvakālikanti yojanā.Tassāti pupphassa.Assāti evameva.

pupphaṃ. Such pupphaṃ is yāvakālika, is the connection. Tassāti, of the flower. Assāti, just so.

phalaṃ. Yānīti phalāni. Pharantīti sambandho.Nesanti phalānaṃ pariyantanti sambandho. Yāni vuttāni, tāni yāvajīvikānīti yojanā.Tesampīti phalānampi pariyantanti sambandho.

phalaṃ. Yānīti, the fruits. Pharantīti, pervasive, is the connection. Nesanti, the end of the fruits, is the connection. Those which have been stated are yāvajīvikā, is the connection. Tesampīti, even of the fruits, the end, is the connection.

aṭṭhi. Evamādīni pharaṇakāni aṭṭhīni yāvakālikānīti yojanā.Tesanti aṭṭhīnaṃ.

aṭṭhi. Such pervasive bones are yāvakālikā, is the connection. Tesanti, of the bones.

piṭṭhaṃ. Evamādīni pharaṇakāni piṭṭhāni yāvakālikānīti yojanā.Adhotakanti udakena adhūnitaṃ.Tesanti piṭṭhānaṃ.

piṭṭhaṃ. Such pervasive flours are yāvakālikā, is the connection. Adhotakanti, unwashed by water. Tesanti, of the flours.

niyyāso. Sesāti ucchuniyyāsato sesā. Pāḷiyaṃ vuttaniyyāsāti sambandho.Tatthāti niyyāsakhādanīye. Saṅgahitānaṃ niyyāsānaṃ pariyantanti yojanā.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.

niyyāso. Sesāti, those remaining from sugarcane juice. Pāḷiyaṃ vuttaniyyāsāti, is the connection. Tatthāti, in extract-edibles. The end of the included extracts, is the connection. Evantiādi, is the conclusion.

Vuttamevāti heṭṭhā paṭhamapavāraṇasikkhāpade vuttamevāti. Sattamaṃ.

Vuttamevāti, it has been stated already in the first Pavāraṇā training rule below. Seventh.

8. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadaṃ
8. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadaṃ

252.Aṭṭhame abbhantare jātoabbhantaro. Mahātheroti mahantehi thiraguṇehi yutto. Iminā ‘‘belaṭṭho’’ti saññānāmassa saññināmiṃ dasseti.Padhānaghareti samathavipassanānaṃ padahanaṭṭhānagharasaṅkhāte ekasmiṃ āvāse.Sukkhakuranti ettha sosanakurattā na sukkhakuraṃ hoti, kevalaṃ pana asūpabyañjanattāti āha ‘‘asūpabyañjanaṃ odana’’nti. Sosanakurampi yuttameva. Vakkhati hi ‘‘taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ udakena temetvā’’ti. ‘‘Odana’’ntiiminā kurasaddassa odanapariyāyataṃ dasseti. Odanañhi karoti āyuvaṇṇādayoti‘‘kura’’nti vuccati.Soti belaṭṭhasīso.Tañca khoti tañca sukkhakuraṃ āharatīti sambandho.Paccayagiddhatāyāti piṇḍapātapaccaye luddhatāya. Thero bhuñjatīti sambandho. Manussānaṃ ekāhārassa sattāhamattaṭṭhitattā ‘‘sattāha’’nti vuttaṃ.Tatoti bhuñjanato paranti sambandho.Cattāripīti ettha pisaddena adhikānipi sattāhāni gahetabbāni.

252.In the eighth, one born inside is abbhantaro. Mahātheroti, one endowed with great and firm qualities. By this, he shows the designator of the name, "Belaṭṭho". Padhānaghareti, in one monastery called a place of exertion, which is the place of exertion of serenity and insight. Sukkhakuranti, here, because it dries up the kurattā, it is not sukkhakura; however, he says, ‘‘asūpabyañjanaṃ odana’’nti, only it is without soup or relish. Even sosanakurampi is fitting. For he will say, ‘‘taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ udakena temetvā’’. By ‘‘Odana’’, he shows that the word kura is a synonym for cooked rice. Indeed, because cooked rice makes age, complexion, etc., it is called ‘‘kura’’. Soti, that Belaṭṭha elder. Tañca khoti, and he brings that sukkhakura, is the connection. Paccayagiddhatāyāti, due to greed for the alms-food requisite. The elder eats, is the connection. Because a single meal lasts for a week for humans, ‘‘sattāha’’nti, it is stated. Tatoti, after he has eaten, is the connection. Cattāripīti, here, by the pi-particle, even more weeks should be included.

253.Itīti idaṃ tayaṃ. ‘‘Sannidhi kāro assā’’ti samāso visesanaparanipātavasena gahetabbo. ‘‘Sannidhikiriyanti attho’’ti iminā karīyatītikāroti kammatthaṃ dasseti.Ekarattanti antimaparicchedavasena vuttaṃ tadadhikānampi adhippetattā.Assāti ‘‘sannidhikāraka’’nti padassa.

253.Itīti, this triad. The compound ‘‘Sannidhi kāro assā’’ should be taken in accordance with the order of specifying the characteristic. By ‘‘Sannidhikiriyanti attho’’, he shows that kāro means an action, because it is done. Ekarattanti, is stated in terms of the final limit, because even more than that is intended. Assāti, of the word, "Sannidhikāraka".

Paṭiggahaṇeti paṭiggahaṇe ca gahaṇe ca. Ajjhoharitukāmatāya hi paṭiggahaṇe ca paṭiggahetvā gahaṇe cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yaṃ pattaṃ aṅguliyā ghaṃsantassa lekhā paññāyati, so patto duddhoto hoti saceti yojanā uttaravākye yaṃsaddaṃ disvā pubbavākye taṃsaddassa gamanīyattā.Gaṇṭhikapattassāti bandhanapattassa.Soti sneho. Paggharati sandissatīti sambandho.Tādiseti duddhote, gaṇṭhike vā.Tatthāti dhovitapatte āsiñcitvāti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.Abbohārikāti na voharitabbā, voharituṃ na yuttāti attho.Yanti khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ pariccajantīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tatoti apariccattakhādanīyabhojanīyato nīharitvāti sambandho.

Paṭiggahaṇeti, in receiving and in taking. Indeed, because of the desire to consume, it is stated, in receiving and after receiving, in taking. If a line appears on the bowl when one rubs the bowl with a finger, that bowl is said to be poorly washed, if so, the connection comes from seeing the word "yaṃ" in the latter sentence, and implying the word "taṃ" in the former sentence. Gaṇṭhikapattassāti, of a bowl with a handle. Soti, that grease. Paggharati sandissati, it trickles, it appears, is the connection. Tādiseti, in one that is poorly washed, or with a handle. Tatthāti, after pouring into the washed bowl, is the connection. ti, truly. Abbohārikāti, should not be used, it is not proper to use, is the meaning. Yanti, if they give up the edible and food, is the connection. ti, truly, or because. Tatoti, after taking out from the edible and food that has not been given up, is the connection.

Akappiyamaṃsesūti niddhāraṇasamudāyo.Sati paccayeti pipāsasaṅkhāte paccaye sati.Anatirittakatanti atirittena akataṃ sannidhikārakaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyanti yojanā. Ekameva pācittiyanti sambandho.Vikappadvayeti sāmisanirāmisasaṅkhāte vikappadvaye.Sabbavikappesūti vikālasannidhiakappiyamaṃsayāmakālikapaccayasaṅkhātesu sabbesu vikappesu.

Akappiyamaṃsesūti, a group singled out. Sati paccayeti, when there is a requisite called thirst. Anatirittakatanti, edible and food that is sannidhikāraka, that has not been made with excess, is the connection. There is only one pācittiya, is the connection. Vikappadvayeti, in the duality of alternatives that is with relish and without relish. Sabbavikappesūti, in all the alternatives that are vīkala, storing, not allowable meat, yāmakālika and requisite.

255.Āmisasaṃsaṭṭhanti āmisena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ.

255.Āmisasaṃsaṭṭhanti, mixed with relish, sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ.

256.Catubbidhakālikassa sarūpañca vacanatthañca dassento āha ‘‘vikālabhojanasikkhāpade’’tiādi. Tattha niddiṭṭhaṃ khādanīyabhojanīya’’ntiiminā yāvakālikassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yāva…pe… kālika’’ntiiminā vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Saddhiṃ…pe… pāna’’ntiiminā yāmakālikassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yāva…pe… kālika’’ntiiminā vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sabbiādi pañcavidhaṃ bhesajja’’ntiiminā sattāhakālikassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ…pe… kālika’’ntiiminā vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā…pe… sabbampī’’tiiminā yāvajīvikassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yāva…pe… jīvika’’ntiiminā vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Sabbavacanattho lahukamattameva, garuko panevaṃ veditabbo – yāva yattako majjhanhiko kāloyāvakālo,so assatthī, taṃ vā kālaṃ bhuñjitabbantiyāvakālikaṃ. Yāmo kāloyāmakālo,so assatthi, taṃ vā kālaṃ paribhuñjītabbantiyāmakālikaṃ. Sattāho kālosattāhakālo,so assatthi, taṃ vā kālaṃ nidahitvā paribhuñjitabbantisattāhakālikaṃ. Yāva yattako jīvoyāvajīvo,so assatthi, yāvajīvaṃ vā pariharitvā paribhuñjitabbantiyāvajīvikanti.

256.Explaining the nature and the meaning of the word for the four kinds of allowable food, he says, ‘‘vikālabhojanasikkhāpade’’tiādi. There, by ‘‘niddiṭṭhaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ’’, he shows the nature of yāvakālika. By ‘‘Yāva…pe… kālika’’, he shows the meaning of the word. By ‘‘Saddhiṃ…pe… pāna’’, he shows the nature of yāmakālika. By ‘‘Yāva…pe… kālika’’, he shows the meaning of the word. By ‘‘Sabbiādi pañcavidhaṃ bhesajja’’, he shows the nature of sattāhakālika. By ‘‘Sattāhaṃ…pe… kālika’’, he shows the meaning of the word. By ‘‘Ṭhapetvā…pe… sabbampī’’, he shows the nature of yāvajīvika. By ‘‘Yāva…pe… jīvika’’, he shows the meaning of the word. The meaning of all the words is only briefly, but the detailed meaning should be understood thus – whatever time midday is, that is yāvakālo, it is for him, or should eat at that time is yāvakālikaṃ. A watch of time is yāmakālo, it is for him, or should use for that time is yāmakālikaṃ. A week of time is sattāhakālo, it is for him, or should keep and use for that time is sattāhakālikaṃ. Whatever life is, that is yāvajīvo, it is for him, or having avoided it for life, should use is yāvajīvikanti.

Tatthāti catubbidhesu kālikesu.Satakkhattunti anekavāraṃ. Yāva kālo nātikkamati, tāva bhuñjantassāti yojanā. Ahorattaṃ bhuñjantassāti sambandhoti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Tatthāti, in those four kinds of allowable foods. Satakkhattunti, many times. As long as time does not pass, so long eating, is the connection. Eating for a day and night, is the connection. Eighth.

9. Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ
9. Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

257.Navame pakaṭṭhabhāvaṃ nītantipaṇītanti vutte paṇītasaddo uttamatthoti āha ‘‘uttamabhojanānī’’ti. Sampanno nāma na madhuraguṇo, atha kho madhuraguṇayuttaṃ bhojanamevāti āha ‘‘sampattiyutta’’nti.Kassāti karaṇatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, kenāti hi attho. ‘‘Surasa’’ntiiminā sādīyati assādīyatītisādūti vacanatthassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.

257.In the ninth, that which has been brought to a state of excellence is paṇītanti, when it is said, the word paṇīta means excellent, thus he says, ‘‘uttamabhojanānī’’. Sampanno means it is not a sweet quality, but rather food endowed with sweet qualities, thus he says, ‘‘sampattiyutta’’. Kassāti, this is a word of ownership in the sense of an instrument, for what is the meaning. By ‘‘Surasa’’, he shows the nature of the meaning of the word, ‘‘sādīyati assādīyatīti**sādū’’.

259.‘‘Yo pana…pe… bhuñjeyyā’’ti ettha vinicchayo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Suddhānīti odanena asaṃsaṭṭhāni. Odanasaṃsaṭṭhāni sabbiādīnīti sambandho.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.ti saccaṃ. ‘‘Paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhānī’’tiiminā paṇītehi sabbiādīhi saṃsaṭṭhāni bhojanānipaṇītabhojanānīti atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sattadhaññanibbattānī’’ti iminā bhojanānaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti.

259.‘‘Yo pana…pe… bhuñjeyyā’’, here the judgment in regard to that should be understood thus, is the connection. Suddhānīti, those that are unmixed with cooked rice. Odanasaṃsaṭṭhāni sabbiādīnīti, those that are mixed with cooked rice are sabbi etc., is the connection. Etthāti, in this training rule. ti, truly. By ‘‘Paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhānī’’, he shows the meaning that food mixed with excellent sabbi etc. is paṇītabhojanānī. By ‘‘Sattadhaññanibbattānī’’, he shows the nature of the food.

‘‘Sabbinā bhatta’’ntiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ vikappānaṃ majjhe tīsupi vikappesu ‘‘bhatta’’nti yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ vākyaṃ katvā viññāpane āpattiṃ dassetvā samāsaṃ katvā viññāpane taṃ dassento āha ‘‘sabbibhattaṃ dehī’’tiādi.

Among the five alternatives of ‘‘Sabbinā bhatta’’ntiādi, ‘‘bhatta’’nti should be connected in the three alternatives as well. Having made the statement thus, after showing the offense in informing, showing it in informing after making a compound, he says, ‘‘sabbibhattaṃ dehī’’tiādi.

Itoti gāvito laddhenāti sambandho.Visaṅketanti saṅketato ñāpitato vigataṃ virahitanti attho.ti saccaṃ. Iminā visaṅketassa guṇadosaṃ dasseti.

Itoti, having obtained it from the cow, is the connection. Visaṅketanti, that which is devoid or separated from having been made known from an indication, is the meaning. ti, truly. By this, he shows the merit and demerit of being without indication.

Kappiyasabbinā dehīti kappiyasabbinā saṃsaṭṭhaṃ bhattaṃ dehīti yojanā. Eseva nayo sesesupi.Yena yenāti yena yena sabbiādinā.Tasmiṃ tassāti etthāpi vicchāvasena attho daṭṭhabbo. Pāḷiyaṃ āgatasabbināma gosabbi, ajikāsabbi, mahiṃsasabbi, yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sabbi ca.Navanītaṃnāma evameva.Telaṃnāma tilatelaṃ, sāsapatelaṃ, madhukatelaṃ, eraṇḍatelaṃ, vasātelañca.Madhunāma makkhikāmadhu.Phāṇitaṃnāma ucchumhā nibbattaṃ.Macchonāma udakacaro. Pāḷianāgato maccho nāma natthi. Maṃsaṃ nāma yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ maṃsaṃ.Khīradadhīnisabbisadisāneva. Vuttaṃ yathā evaṃ ‘‘navanītabhattaṃ dehī’’tiādīsupi sūpodanaviññattidukkaṭameva hotīti yojanā.ti saccaṃ.So cāti so cattho.Tatthāti tasmiṃ atthe.Kiṃpayojanaṃ. Nattheva payojananti adhippāyo.

Kappiyasabbinā dehī means: give food mixed with kappiyasabbi. This is the construction. The same method applies to the rest as well. Yena yenā means: with whatever sabbi etc. Tasmiṃ tassā: here also, the meaning should be understood according to the distinction. In the Pali, the word sabbi refers to the sabbi of cows, goats, buffaloes, and those whose meat is permissible, their sabbi. Navanītaṃ (fresh butter) has the same meaning. Telaṃ (oil) means: sesame oil, mustard oil, madhuka oil, castor oil, and fat oil. Madhu (honey) means: honey from bees. Phāṇitaṃ (molasses) means: that which is produced from sugarcane. Maccho (fish) means: that which moves in water. There is no fish named in the Pali. Maṃsaṃ (meat) means: the meat of those whose meat is permissible. Khīradadhīni (milk and curds) are just like sabbi. As it was said, thus, even in "give food with fresh butter," etc., the dukkaṭa offense for requesting soup and rice occurs; this is the construction. means: truly. So cā means: that "ca." Tatthā means: in that meaning. Kiṃ (what) is the purpose? There is no purpose at all, is the intended meaning.

Ekarasanti ekakiccaṃ.Tatoti navapaṇītabhojanato nīharitvāti sambandho.

Ekarasanti (one flavor) means: one action. Tato means: having taken it out from the newly prepared food; this is the connection.

Sabbānīti nava pācittiyāni sandhāya vuttaṃ.

Sabbānī means: it is said referring to the nine pācittiya rules.

261.Ubhayesampīti bhikkhubhikkhunīnampi. Sabbīti cettha yo naṃ paribhuñjati, tassa balāyuvaḍḍhanatthaṃ sabbati gacchati pavattatītisabbi,ghataṃ. Tatiyakkhareneva sajjhāyitabbaṃ likhitabbañca. Kasmā? Tatiyakkharaṭṭhāneyeva sabba gatiyanti gatiatthassa sabbadhātussa dhātupāṭhesu āgatattāti. Navamaṃ.

261.Ubhayesampī means: even for both monks and nuns. Here, sabbi means ghata because it goes or proceeds to nourish and increase the strength and lifespan of the one who consumes it; therefore it is called sabbi. It should be recited and written with the third letter. Why? Because all movement (gati) is in the place of the third letter, since the root sabba, signifying movement, comes in the lists of roots. This is the ninth.

10. Dantaponasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Toothpick Training Rule

263.Dasamedantakaṭṭhanti dantaponaṃ. Tañhi danto kasīyati vilekhīyati anenāti ‘‘dantakaṭṭha’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Sabba’’nti ādinā sabbameva paṃsukūlaṃsabbapaṃsukūlaṃ,tamassatthīti‘‘sabbapaṃsukūliko’’ti atthaṃ dasseti.Soti bhikkhu paribhuñjati kirāti sambandho.Susāneti āḷahane. Tañhi chavānaṃ sayanaṭṭhānattā ‘‘susāna’’nti vuccati niruttinayena.Tatthāti susāne. Punatatthāti evameva. Ayyasarūpañca vosāṭitakasarūpañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ayyavosāṭitakānīti etthā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘ayyā…pe… pitāmahā’’tiiminā ayyasarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vo…pe… bhojanīyānī’’tiiminā vosāṭitakasarūpaṃ. Ayyasaṅkhātānaṃ pitipitāmahānaṃ atthāya, te vā uddissa chaḍḍitāni vosāṭitakasaṅkhatāni khādanīyabhojanīyāniayyavosāṭitakānīti viggaho kātabbo. Manussā ṭhapenti kirāti sambandho.Yanti khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ.Tesanti ñātakānaṃ.Piṇḍaṃ piṇḍaṃ katvāti saṅghāṭaṃ saṅghāṭaṃ katvā.Aññanti vuttakhādanīyabhojanīyato aññaṃ.Ummārepīti susānassa indakhīlepi. So hi uddhaṭo kilesamāro etthāti‘‘ummāro’’ti vuccati. Bodhisatto hi abhinikkhamanakāle puttaṃ cumbissāmīti ovarakassa indakhīle ṭhatvā passanto mātaraṃ puttassa nalāṭe hatthaṃ ṭhapetvā sayantiṃ disvā ‘‘sace me puttaṃ gaṇheyyaṃ, mātā tassa pabujjheyya, pabujjhamānāya antarāyo bhaveyyā’’ti abhinikkhamanantarāyabhayena puttadāre pariccajitvā indakhīlato nivattitvā mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhami. Tasmā bodhisattassa ṭhatvā puttadāresu apekkhāsaṅkhātassa mārassa uddhaṭaṭṭhānattā so indakhīlo nippariyāyena‘‘ummāro’’ti vuccati, aññe pana rūḷhīvasena.Thiroti thaddho.Ghanabaddhoti ghanena baddho. Kathinena maṃsena ābaddhoti attho. Vaṭhati thūlo bhavatītivaṭho,muddhajadutiyoyaṃ, so assatthītivaṭharoti dassento āha ‘‘vaṭharoti thūlo’’ti. ‘‘Sallakkhemā’’tiiminā ‘‘maññe’’ti ettha manadhātu sallakkhaṇattho, makārassekāroti dasseti.ti saccaṃ.Tesanti manussānaṃ.

263.In the tenth, dantakaṭṭhanti means: toothpick. For indeed, the teeth are scraped and cleaned with it, therefore it is called "toothpick". By "Sabbanti," it shows the meaning that all the robes collected from a dust heap are sabbapaṃsukūlaṃ (all refuse-rag robes), one who possesses that is sabbapaṃsukūliko (one who is a total refuse-rag wearer). So means: that monk uses it, is the connection. Susāne means: in a charnel ground. For indeed, it is the place where corpses lie down, therefore it is called "charnel ground" by way of definition. Tatthā means: in the charnel ground. Again, tatthā means: just so. To show the form of ancestral offerings and the form of discarded things, it is said, "ayyavosāṭitakānīti etthā" (here, ancestral and discarded things). There, by "ayyā…pe… pitāmahā" (ancestors…etc…grandfathers), it shows the form of ancestral offerings. By "vo…pe… bhojanīyānī" (discarded…etc…eatable things), it shows the form of discarded things. The compound word ayyavosāṭitakānī (ancestral and discarded things) should be construed as: eatable and consumable things discarded for the sake of ancestors, such as fathers and grandfathers, or discarded dedicating to them. "Manussā ṭhapenti kirāti sambandho" (People place them, it is said, is the connection). Yanti means: eatable and consumable things. Tesanti means: of the relatives. Piṇḍaṃ piṇḍaṃ katvā means: having made a lump, having made a lump. Añña means: other than the eatable and consumable things mentioned. Ummārepī means: even at the indakhīla (pillar) of the charnel ground. For indeed, the kilesamāra (defilement-demon) is raised up here, therefore it is called ummāro. It is said that when the Bodhisatta was about to renounce the world, as he stood at the indakhīla of the chamber, intending to kiss his son, he saw the mother with her hand on the forehead of the child, sleeping. Thinking, "If I were to take my son, his mother would awaken, and there would be an obstacle to her awakening," he renounced his children and wife, fearing an obstacle to his renunciation, turned back from the indakhīla, and went forth in the Great Renunciation. Therefore, since that indakhīla is the place from which the demon, namely, the expectation towards children and wife, was raised up from the Bodhisatta, it is called ummāro without any alternative. Others, however, use it conventionally. Thiro means: stiff. Ghanabaddho means: bound tightly. It means bound by tough flesh. That which expands, becomes thick, is called vaṭho, (tumor) the second form of the word muddhajadu, it exists; showing that it is vaṭharo (having a tumor), he said, "vaṭharo means thick". By "Sallakkhemā," it shows that in "maññe" (I think), the root mana has the meaning of noticing, and the letter ma becomes e. means: truly. Tesanti means: of the people.

264.Sammāti aviparītaṃ.Asallakkhetvāti āhārasaddassa khādanīyabhojanīyādīsu nirūḷhabhāvaṃ amaññitvā. Bhagavā pana ṭhapesīti sambandho.Yathāuppannassāti yenākārena uppannassa. Pitā puttasaṅkhāte dārake saññāpento viya bhagavā te bhikkhū saññāpentoti yojanā.

264.Sammā means: correctly, not perversely. Asallakkhetvā means: not considering the established sense of the word 'food' in eatables and consumables. "Bhagavā pana ṭhapesīti sambandho" (However, the Blessed One established, is the connection). Yathāuppannassā means: in whatever way it arose. It is said that the Blessed One instructs those monks, as a father instructs his child.

265.Etadevāti tiṇṇamākārānamaññataravasena adinnameva sandhāyāti sambandho.ti saccaṃ. Mātikāyaṃ ‘‘dinna’’nti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ natthi, atha kasmā padabhājaneyeva vuttanti āha ‘‘dinnanti ida’’ntiādi. ‘‘Dinna’’nti idaṃ uddhaṭanti sambandho.Assāti ‘‘dinna’’nti padassa. Niddese ca ‘‘kāyena…pe… dente’’ti uddhaṭanti yojanā.Evanti imehi tīhākārehi dadamāneti sambandho.Evanti imehi dvīhākārehi. Ādīyamānanti sambandho.Rathareṇumpīti rathikavīthiyaṃ uṭṭhitapaṃsumpi.Pubbeti paṭhamapavāraṇasikkhāpade. Evaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ etaṃ āhāraṃ dinnaṃ nāma vuccatīti yojanā. ‘‘Etamevā’’ti evassa sambhavato tassa phalaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na ida’’ntiādi. Nissaṭṭhaṃ na vuccatīti yojanā.

265.Etadevā means: only in one of the three ways, referring to what is not given. means: truly. In the mātikā (matrix), there is no place where "given" is mentioned, so why is it only mentioned in the word analysis? He said, "dinnanti ida" (this 'given'). "Dinna" (given), this is raised, is the connection. Assā means: of the word "given". And in the explanation, "kāyena…pe… dente" (with the body…etc…giving), it is raised, is the connection. Evanti (thus) means: giving with these three ways, is the connection. Evanti (thus) means: with these two ways. "Ādīyamānanti sambandho" (Being taken up, is the connection). Rathareṇumpī means: even the dust raised on the road. Pubbe means: in the first training rule on inviting. Thus, this food, accepted in such a way, is called given, is the construction. To show the fruit of the possible "Etamevā" (only this), it is said, "na ida" (not this) etc. What is given away is not called relinquished, is the construction.

Tatthāti ‘‘kāyenā’’tiādivacane.ti saccaṃ. Natthu karīyati imāyātinatthukaraṇī,tāya. Nāsāpuṭena paṭiggaṇhātīti sambandho.Akallakoti gilāno.ti saccaṃ. Kāyena paṭibaddhokāyapaṭibaddhokaṭacchuādīti āha ‘‘kaṭacchuādīsū’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ.Pātiyamānanti pātāpiyamānaṃ.

Tatthā means: in the statement "kāyenā" etc. means: truly. That by which mucus is made is natthukaraṇī (mucus-making tool), by that. "Nāsāpuṭena paṭiggaṇhātīti sambandho" (He receives with the nostril, is the connection). Akallako means: a sick person. means: truly. Kāyena paṭibaddho (bound to the body) is kāyapaṭibaddho (body-bound), such as a ladle etc.; he said, "kaṭacchuādīsū" (in ladles etc.). means: truly. Pātiyamānanti means: being made to fall, being made to drink.

Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. ‘‘Pañcahaṅgehī’’ti padassa vitthāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘thāmamajjhimassā’’tiādi.Tanti dātabbavatthuṃ.

Etthā means: in this training rule. Expounding the expansion of the phrase "pañcahaṅgehī" (with five factors), he said, "thāmamajjhimassā" etc. Tanti means: the object to be given.

Tatthāti ‘‘hatthapāso paññāyatī’’tivacane. Gacchantopi ṭhiteneva saṅgahito.Bhūmaṭṭhassāti bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitassa.Ākāsaṭṭhassāti ākāse ṭhitassa. ‘‘Hatthaṃ aṅga’’nti padehi avayavisambandho kātabbo.Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘bhūmaṭṭhassa ca sīsenā’’tiādinā vuttanayeneva.Pakkhīti sakuṇo. So hi pakkhayuttattā pakkhīti vuccati.Hatthīti kuñjaro. So hi soṇḍasaṅkhātahatthayuttattā hatthīti vuccati. Addhena aṭṭhamaṃ ratanamassātiaddhaṭṭhamaratano,hatthī, tassa.Tenāti hatthinā.

Tatthā means: in the statement "hatthapāso paññāyatī" (the hand's reach is evident). Even while going, it is included with the standing. Bhūmaṭṭhassā means: of one standing on the ground. Ākāsaṭṭhassā means: of one standing in the sky. In the phrases "Hatthaṃ aṅga" (hand, an element), the relation of parts should be made. Vuttanayenevā means: in the manner stated by "bhūmaṭṭhassa ca sīsenā" etc. Pakkhī means: a bird. For indeed, it is called a bird because it is endowed with wings. Hatthī means: an elephant. For indeed, it is called an elephant because it is endowed with a trunk. Addhena aṭṭhamaṃ ratanamassāti (half of eight ratana units) addhaṭṭhamaratano (half-eight-ratana), an elephant, of that. Tenā means: by the elephant.

Oṇamatīti heṭṭhā namati.Ettāvatāti ekadesasampaṭicchanamattena.Tatoti sampaṭicchanato.Ugghāṭetvāti vivaritvā.Kājenāti byābhaṅgiyā. Sā hi kacati bandhati vividhaṃ bhāraṃ asmintikācoti vuccati, cakārassa jakāre kate kājopi yuttoyeva. Tiṃsa hatthā ratanāni imassātitiṃsahattho,veṇu.Guḷakumbhoti phāṇitena pūrito ghaṭo.Paṭiggahitamevāti kumbhesu hatthapāsato bahi ṭhitesupi abhihārakassa hatthapāse ṭhitattā paṭiggahitamevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ucchuyantadoṇitoti ucchuṃ pīḷanayantassa ambaṇato.

Oṇamatī means: bends down below. Ettāvatā means: merely with partially receiving. Tato means: from receiving. Ugghāṭetvā means: having opened. Kājenā means: with transgression. For indeed, it binds and fastens various loads in this, therefore it is called kāco. Making the letter ca into ja, kājo is also correct. Tiṃsa hatthā ratanāni imassāti (thirty hattha units of ratana are in it) tiṃsahattho (thirty-hastas), a bamboo. Guḷakumbho means: a pot filled with molasses. Paṭiggahitamevā means: even though the pots are outside the hand's reach, because the carrier stands within hand's reach, it is said to be accepted. Ucchuyantadoṇito means: from the trough of the sugarcane press.

Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne. Ṭhitassa bhikkhuno hatthapāseti yojanā. Ṭhatvā phusitvā ‘‘nisinnassa bhikkhuno’’ti pāṭhasesena yojetabbaṃ. Ṭhitena vā nisinnena vā nipannena vā dāyakena diyyatīti sambandho.

Yatthā means: in which place. "Ṭhitassa bhikkhuno hatthapāseti yojanā" (The hand's reach of the standing monk, is the construction). Having stood, having touched, it should be connected with the remaining text "nisinnassa bhikkhuno" (of the sitting monk). Whether given by a standing, sitting, or lying down giver, is the connection.

Yaṃ yanti yaṃ yaṃ pattaṃ.Yattha katthacīti yesu kesucīti sambandho.Tanti taṃ vacanaṃ.

Yaṃ ya means: whichever bowl. Yattha katthacī means: in whichever places, is the connection. Ta means: that statement.

tatthajāto,aluttasamāsoyaṃ, soyevatatthajātako,tasmiṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Tatthajātake na ruhati yathā, evaṃ na ruhatiyevāti yojanā. Thāmamajjhimena purisena suṭṭhu haritabbanti saṃhāriyaṃ, taṃyevasaṃhārimaṃyakārassa makāraṃ katvā, na saṃhārimaṃasaṃhārimaṃ,tasmiṃ.Tepīti te asaṃhārimāpi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tatthajātakasaṅkhepūpagāti tatthajātake samodhānetvā khepaṃ pakkhepaṃ upagatā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Idañhi vākyantarattā punappunaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Tānīti tintiṇikādipaṇṇāni.Sandhāretunti sammā dhāretuṃ. Ṭhito dāyakoti sambandho.

tatthajāto (born there), this is an elided compound, that itself is tatthajātako (one born there), in that. means: truly, or because. Just as it does not grow in one born there, so it does not grow at all, is the construction. "Thāmamajjhimena purisena suṭṭhu haritabbanti saṃhāriyaṃ" (That which can be well carried by a man of moderate strength is saṃhāriyaṃ), that itself is saṃhārimaṃ (carryable), having made the ya into ma, na saṃhārimaṃ (not carryable) is asaṃhārimaṃ (uncarryable), in that. Tepī means: those uncarryable ones too. means: truly, or because. Tatthajātakasaṅkhepūpagā means: having condensed into tatthajātake, approaching a swift throw. means: truly, or because. Indeed, this should be seen as said repeatedly because it is a different sentence. Tānī means: tamarind leaves etc. Sandhāretunti means: to properly hold. "Ṭhito dāyakoti sambandho" (The standing giver, is the connection).

thavikā,tato.Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvāti ‘‘puñchitvā vā paṭiggahetvā vā’’ti aniyamavikappattho vāsaddo ajjhāharitabbo. Tesu tesu vatthūsu rañjati laggatītirajo,taṃ. Vinaye paññattaṃ dukkaṭaṃvinayadukkaṭaṃ. Taṃ panāti bhikkhaṃ pana.Paṭiggahetvā dethāti maṃ paṭiggahāpetvā mama dethāti adhippāyo.

thavikā (bag), from that. Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvā (having wiped or having accepted) means: the word "vā" (or) implying unrestricted option should be supplied: "puñchitvā vā paṭiggahetvā vā". Since after performing one action among wiping etc., there is no need to perform the other action, is the intended meaning. That which is attached to various objects is rajo (dust), that. Vinayadukkaṭaṃ (dukaṭa according to the Vinaya) is "vinaye paññattaṃ dukkaṭaṃ" (dukaṭa prescribed in the Vinaya). Taṃ panā means: that alms food, however. Paṭiggahetvā dethā (accept and give) means: having made me accept and give to me, is the intended meaning.

Tato tatoti tasmā tasmā ṭhānā uṭṭhāpetvāti sambandho.Tanti bhikkhaṃ.Tassāti anupasampannassa.

Tato tato means: having lifted up from that place. Ta means: the alms food. Tassā means: to the one who is not fully ordained.

So vattabboti so diyyamāno bhikkhu dāyakena bhikkhunā vattabboti yojanā.Imanti sarajapattaṃ.Tenāti diyyamānabhikkhunā.Tathākātabbanti yathā dāyakena bhikkhunā vuttaṃ, tathā kātabbanti attho.Uplavatīti upari gacchati, plu gatiyanti hi dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 ḷakārantadhātu) vuttaṃ. Ettha uiti upasaggassa atthadassanatthaṃ ‘‘uparī’’ti vuttaṃ, pakāralakārasaṃyogo daṭṭhabbo. Potthakesu pana ‘‘uppilavatī’’ti likhanti, so apāṭho.Kañjikanti bilaṅgaṃ. Tañhi kena jalena añjiyaṃ abhibyattaṃ assāti ‘‘kañjiya’’nti vuccati, tameva kañjikaṃ yakārassa kakāraṃ katvā. Taṃ pavāhetvā, apanetvāti attho.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne. Sukkhameva bhattaṃ bhajitabbaṭṭhena sevitabbaṭṭhenātisukkhabhattaṃ,tasmiṃ.Puratoti bhikkhussa purato, pubbe vā.Phusitānīti bindūni. Tāni hi sambādhaṭṭhānesupi phusantīti phusitānīti vuccanti.

So vattabbo means: that monk who is giving should be told by the giver, is the construction. Imanti means: this dusty bowl. Tenā means: by the giving monk. Tathā kātabba means: what should be done is that which was said by the giving monk; that is the meaning. Uplavatī means: goes upwards, for in the lists of roots (in Saddanītidhātumālā 16 ḷakārantadhātu) it is said that plu means 'to go'. Here, to show the meaning of the prefix u, "uparī" (above) is said, the combination of the letters pa and la should be seen. However, in the books, they write "uppilavatī", that is incorrect. Kañjikanti means: bilaṅga. For indeed, because it is manifested with some water, it is called "kañjiya", that same kañjika, having made the letter ya into ka. It means having washed it off, having removed it. Yatthā means: in which place. What should be served is only dry food, in the sense of enjoying or consuming, is sukkhabhattaṃ (dry food), in that. Purato means: in front of the monk, or before. Phusitānī means: drops. For indeed, they touch even in crowded places, therefore they are called phusitānī.

Uḷuṅkoti kosiyasakuṇanāmo dīghadaṇḍako eko bhājanaviseso, tena.Thevāti phusitāni. Tāni hi sambādhaṭṭhānesupi phusitattā thavīyanti pasaṃsīyantīti ‘‘thevā’’ti vuccanti.Carukenāti carīyati bhakkhīyatīti caru, habyapāko, taṃ karoti anenāti carukaṃ, thālyādikaṃ khuddakabhājanaṃ, tena ākiriyamāneti sambandho. Kāḷavaṇṇakāmehi mānīyatītimasi. Khādatītichārokhakārassa chakāraṃ, dakārassa ca rakāraṃ katvā, khāraraso, so imissatthītichārikā. Uppatitvāti uddhaṃ gantvā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Uḷuṅko means: the name of a kosiya bird; a kind of vessel with a long handle, by that. Thevā means: drops. For indeed, because they are touching even in crowded places, they are praised, therefore they are called "thevā". Carukenā means: that which is moved and eaten is caru, a cooked offering, what makes that is carukaṃ, a small vessel such as a pot, with that, being covered, is the connection. What is esteemed by those who desire a black color is masi (soot). What eats is chāro (ashes), having made cha for kha, and ra for da, it is alkaline in taste, that exists in this, so chārikā (alkaline), Uppatitvā (having flown up). means: truly, or because.

Phāletvāti chinditvā. Dentānaṃ anupasampannānanti sambandho.Pāyāsassāti pāyāsena.Tathāpīti tena mukhavaṭṭiyā gahaṇākārenapi.

Phāletvā means: having cut. "Dentānaṃ anupasampannānanti sambandho" (To the givers, to those not fully ordained, is the connection). Pāyāsassā means: with rice-gruel. Tathāpī means: even by that way of taking with the mouth rim.

Ābhogaṃ katvāti ‘‘paṭiggahessāmī’’ti manasikāraṃ katvā.Soti niddaṃ okkanto bhikkhu.Vaṭṭatiyevāti ābhogassa katattā vaṭṭatiyeva.Anādaranti anādarena, karaṇatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, anādaraṃ hutvāti vā yojetabbaṃ.Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Kāyena paṭibaddhokāyapaṭibaddho,tena paṭibaddhokāyapaṭibaddhapaṭibaddho, tena.Vacanamattamevāti ‘‘paṭibaddhapaṭibaddha’’nti ekaṃ atirekaṃ paṭibaddhavacanamattameva nānaṃ, atthato pana kāyapaṭibaddhamevāti adhippāyo.Yampīti yampi vatthu.Tatrāti tasmiṃ vaṭṭane.Tanti anujānanaṃ.

Ābhogaṃ katvā means: having made the intention "I will receive". So means: that monk, overcome by sleep. Vaṭṭatiyevā means: it is permissible indeed, because the intention has been made. Anādaranti (disregard) means: with disregard, this instrumental case is in the sense of cause, or it should be connected as "anādaraṃ hutvā" (having been disregardful). Kecī means: some, the residents of Abhayagiri. Kāyena paṭibaddho (bound to the body) is kāyapaṭibaddho (body-bound), by what is bound to that is kāyapaṭibaddhapaṭibaddho (bound to the body-bound), by that. Vacanamattamevā means: only the word "paṭibaddhapaṭibaddha" (bound to the body-bound) is one extra repetition of "paṭibaddha" (bound), but in meaning it is only body-bound, is the intended meaning. Yampī means: whichever object. Tatrā means: in that being permissible. Ta means: that permission.

neyyatthaṃ. Etthāti sutte, suttassa vā.Yanti vatthu patatīti sambandho.Parigaḷitvāti bhassitvā.Suddhāyāti nirajāya.Sāmanti sayaṃ.Puñchitvā vātiādīsu tayo vāsaddā aniyamavikappatthā. Puñchitādīsu hi ekasmiṃ kicce kate itarakiccaṃ kātabbaṃ natthīti adhippāyo.Tenāti tena bhikkhunā, ‘‘āharāpetumpī’’tipade kāritakammaṃ. ‘‘Kasmā na vaṭṭatī’’ti pucchā.ti vitthāro. Vadantena bhagavatāti sambandho.Etthāti suttavacanesu. ‘‘Pariccattaṃ taṃ bhikkhave dāyakehī’’ti vacanenāti yojanā.Adhippāyoti nītattho adhippāyo, nippariyāyena itattho ñātattho adhippāyoti vuttaṃ hoti.

neyyatthaṃ (requiring interpretation). Etthā means: in the sutta, or of the sutta. Yanti means: the object falls, is the connection. Parigaḷitvā means: having dribbled. Suddhāyā means: which is pure. Sāmanti (oneself) means: by oneself. In "Puñchitvā vā" (having wiped or) etc., the three words "vā" (or) are for unrestricted option. For after performing one action among wiping etc., there is no need to perform the other action, is the intended meaning. Tenā means: by that monk, in the phrase "āharāpetumpī" (even to have brought), it is a causative passive construction. "Kasmā na vaṭṭatī" (Why is it not permissible) is the question. means: expansion. "Vadantena bhagavatāti sambandho" (By the Blessed One saying, is the connection). Etthā means: in the words of the sutta. "Pariccattaṃ taṃ bhikkhave dāyakehī" (That is relinquished by the givers, monks), with that statement, is the connection. Adhippāyo means: the meaning requiring interpretation, it means the meaning which is certain, the meaning which is understood, is said as adhippāyo.

Tanti paribhuñjanaṃ anuññātanti sambandho.Dutiyadivasepītipisaddo sampiṇḍanattho, aparadivasepīti attho.Adhippāyoti neyyattho adhippāyo netvā iyyattho ñātattho adhippāyoti vuttaṃ hoti.

Tanti, the connection is that using it is allowed. Dutiyadivasepīti: the word pi is in the sense of gathering together, meaning also on another day. Adhippāyoti: the meaning that needs interpretation; it has been said that adhippāyo means a meaning that needs to be led, that needs to be understood.

ti vitthāro.Dantāti dasanā. Te hi daṃsīyanti bhakkhīyanti etehīti ‘‘dantā’’ti vuccanti. Satthaṃyevasatthakaṃkhuddakaṭṭhena, tena paṭiggahitena satthakena.Etanti malaṃ.Tanti lohagandhamattaṃ.Pariharantīti paṭiggahetvā haranti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Taṃ satthakaṃ paribhogatthāya yasmā na pariharanti, tasmā eseva nayoti attho. Uggahitapaccayā, sannidhipaccayā vā doso natthīti vuttaṃ hoti.Tatthāti tesu takkakhīresu.Nīlikāti nīlavaṇṇā snehā.Āmakatakkādīsūti apakkesu takkakhīresu.

ti, expansion. Dantāti, teeth. For they bite and eat with these, therefore they are called "dantā". Satthakaṃ means only a knife, with a small handle; with that received knife. Etanti, this impurity. Tanti, just the smell of iron. Pariharantīti, they take it away after receiving it. ti, truly, or because. Because they do not take away that knife for the purpose of use, therefore this is the way. It has been said that there is no offense due to the cause of taking it up or the cause of storing it. Tatthāti, in those sour milk curds. Nīlikāti, blue-colored oil. Āmakatakkādīsūti, in unripe sour milk curds, etc.

Kiliṭṭhaudakanti samalaṃ udakaṃ.Tassāti sāmaṇerassa. Pattagataṃ odananti sambandho.Assāti sāmaṇerassa.Uggahitakoti avagahitako. ‘‘Uññāto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.112) viya ukāro okāraviparīto hoti, apaṭiggahetvā gahitattā duggahitakoti vuttaṃ hoti.

Kiliṭṭhaudakanti, dirty water. The connection is that the gruel in the bowl is for Tassāti, that novice. Assāti, for the novice. Uggahitakoti, what has been taken up. Like in "Uññāto," etc. (Saṃ. Ni. 1.112), the u becomes changed into o; because it has been taken up without being received, it is said to be duggahitako.

Etenāti odanena.Paṭiggahitameva hotihatthato amuttattāti adhippāyo.

Etenāti, with this rice gruel. Paṭiggahitameva hoti: the meaning is that it is received, as it has not been released from the hand.

Puna paṭiggahetabbaṃsāpekkhe satīti adhippāyo.Ettoti ito pattato. Sāmaṇero pakkhipatīti sambandho.Tatoti pattato.Kecīti abhayagirivāsino.Tanti ‘‘puna paṭiggahetabba’’nti vadantānaṃ kesañci ācariyānaṃ vacanaṃ veditabbanti sambandho.Yanti pūvabhattādi.

Puna paṭiggahetabbaṃ: the meaning is that it should be received again, if there is dependence. Ettoti, from this, from the bowl. The connection is that the novice puts it in. Tatoti, from the bowl. Kecīti, some who dwell in Abhayagiri. Tanti, it should be understood that the statement "it should be received again" is the word of some teachers. Yanti, any cake or meal, etc.

Attanoti sāmaṇerassa vā.Sāmaṇerāti āmantanaṃ.Tassāti sāmaṇerassa.Bhājaneti yāgupacanakabhājane.Yāgukuṭanti yāguyā pūritaṃ kuṭaṃ.Tanti yāgukuṭaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhunā paṭiggaṇhāpetu’’nti kāritakammaṃ upanetabbaṃ. Gīvaṃ ṭhapetvā āvajjetīti sambandho.Āvajjetīti pariṇāmeti.

Attano vāti, or of the novice himself. Sāmaṇerāti, an address. Tassāti, for that novice. Bhājaneti, in a vessel for cooking rice gruel. Yāgukuṭanti, a pot filled with rice gruel. Tanti, that rice gruel pot. The action done should be brought to "let it be received by a bhikkhu." The connection is that, keeping the neck, he turns it. Āvajjetīti, he turns it around.

Paṭiggahaṇūpagaṃ bhāranti thāmamajjhimena purisena saṃhārimaṃ bhāraṃ. Balavatā sāmaṇerenāti sambandho.Telaghaṭaṃ vāti telena pakkhittaṃ ghaṭaṃ vā.Laggentīti lambenti. Ayameva vā pāṭho.

Paṭiggahaṇūpagaṃ bhāranti, a load that can be carried by a man of medium strength. The connection is that it is by a strong novice. Telaghaṭaṃ vāti, or a pot filled with oil. Laggentīti, they hang it. Or this itself is the reading.

nāgadantako,sadisatthe ko. Aṅkīyate lakkhīyate anenātiaṅkuso,gajamatthakamhi vijjhanakaṇḍako. Aṅkuso viyātiaṅkusako,tasmiṃ aṅkusake vā laggitā hontīti sambandho.Gaṇhatoti gaṇhantassa. Mañcassa heṭṭhāheṭṭhāmañco,tasmiṃ.Tanti telathālakaṃ.

nāgadantako, in the meaning of similar. Aṅkuso, a goad is that by which it is marked or characterized, a small piece for piercing the head of an elephant. Aṅkusako, like a goad, or they are hung on that goad. Gaṇhatoti, for one who is taking it. Heṭṭhāmañco, the lower part of the bed, in that. Tanti, that oil pot.

nisseṇī,tassā majjhaṃnisseṇimajjhaṃ,tasmiṃ. Kaṇṇe uṭṭhitaṃkaṇṇikaṃ,kaṇṇamalaṃ, kaṇṇikaṃ viya kaṇṇikaṃ, yathā hi kaṇṇamalaṃ kaṇṇato uṭṭhahitvā sayaṃ pavattati, evaṃ telādito uṭṭhahitvā sayaṃ pavattatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Ghanacuṇṇanti kathinacuṇṇaṃ.Taṃsamuṭṭhānameva nāmāti tato telādito samuṭṭhānameva nāma hotīti attho.Etanti kaṇṇikādi. Idaṃ padaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ.

nisseṇī, ladder; nisseṇimajjhaṃ, the middle of the ladder, in that. Kaṇṇikaṃ, what arises in the ear, earwax; kaṇṇikaṃ viya kaṇṇikaṃ, like earwax; just as earwax, having arisen from the ear, flows away by itself, so too, having arisen from the oil, etc., it flows away by itself, it is said. Ghanacuṇṇanti, solid powder. Taṃsamuṭṭhānameva nāmāti, the meaning is that it is called just arising from that oil, etc. Etanti, this, earwax, etc. This word depends on what comes before and after.

Yottenāti rajjunā. Añño detīti sambandho.

Yottenāti, with a rope. The connection is that another gives it.

vati,taṃ.Ucchūti rasālo. So hi usati visaṃ dāhetīti ucchūti vuccati, taṃ.Timbarusakanti tindukaṃ. Tañhi temeti bhuñjantaṃ puggalaṃ addeti rasenātitimbo,rusati khudditaṃ nāsetītirusako,timbo ca so rusako cāti ‘‘timbarusako’’ti vuccati, taṃ.Vatidaṇḍakesūti vatiyā atthāya nikkhaṇitesu daṇḍakesu.Mayaṃ panāti saṅgahakārācariyabhūtā buddhaghosanāmakā mayaṃ pana, attānaṃ sandhāya bahuvacanavasena vuttaṃ.Na puthulo pākāroti aḍḍhateyyahatthapāsānatikkamaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Hatthasatampīti ratanasatampi.

vati, that. Ucchūti, sugarcane. For it burns away the poison, therefore it is called sugarcane, that. Timbarusakanti, Tinduka fruit. For it moistens and makes the person who eats it wet with juice, therefore it is timbo, it destroys the hunger, therefore it is rusako, and because it is both timbo and rusako, it is called "timbarusako", that. Vatidaṇḍakesūti, in the small sticks dug for the sake of the fence. Mayaṃ panāti, but we, who are the teachers and compilers named Buddhaghosa, have said in the manner of the plural with reference to ourselves. Na puthulo pākāroti, it has been said with reference to exceeding one and a half hatthas of stone. Hatthasatampīti, even a hundred ratanas.

Soti sāmaṇero. Bhikkhussa detīti yojanā.Aparoti sāmaṇero.

Soti, that novice. The arrangement is that he gives to the bhikkhu. Aparoti, another novice.

phalinī,inapaccayo itthiliṅgajotako ī, taṃ sākhanti yojanā. Phalinisākhanti samāsatopi pāṭho atthi.Macchikavāraṇatthanti madhuphāṇitādīhi makkhanaṭṭhāne nilīyantīti makkhikā, tāyevamacchikākhakārassa chakāraṃ katvā, tāsaṃ nivāraṇāya.Mūlapaṭiggahamevāti mūle paṭiggahaṇameva, paṭhamapaṭiggahamevāti vuttaṃ hoti.

phalinī, the suffix in indicates the feminine gender, that branch. There is also a reading in compound as phalinisākha. Macchikavāraṇatthanti, for the purpose of preventing flies, because they hide in the place of smearing with honey, molasses, etc., therefore they are flies, making the kha into cha, for the prevention of them. Mūlapaṭiggahamevāti, receiving at the root itself, it has been said that it is the very first receiving.

Arittenāti kenipātena. Tañhi arati nāvā gacchati anenātiarittaṃ,tena.Tanti paṭiggahaṇārahaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ.Anupasampannenāti kāritakammaṃ.Tasmimpīti cāṭikuṇḍakepi.Tanti anupasampannaṃ.

Arittenāti, with a paddle. For with that, a boat goes easily, therefore it is arittaṃ, with that. Tanti, goods that are fit to be received. Anupasampannenāti, by one who is not fully ordained: the action done. Tasmimpīti, even in the pot. Tanti, not fully ordained.

Pātheyyataṇḍuleti pathassa hite taṇḍule.Tesanti sāmaṇerānaṃ.Itarehīti bhikkhūhi gahitataṇḍulehi. Sabbehi bhikkhūhi bhuttanti sambandho.Etthāti bhikkhūhi gahitehi sāmaṇerassa taṇḍulehi yāgupacane na dissatīti sambandho.Kāraṇanti parivattetvā bhuttassa ca aparivattetvā bhuttassa ca kāraṇaṃ.

Pātheyyataṇḍuleti, rice that is beneficial for the journey. Tesanti, for those novices. Itarehīti, with the rice taken by the bhikkhus. The connection is that it is eaten by all the bhikkhus. Etthāti, in the rice taken by the bhikkhus, it is not seen in the cooking of gruel for the novice. Kāraṇanti, the reason for eating after exchanging and the reason for eating without exchanging.

Puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthimūle paṭiggahitattāti adhippāyo.

Puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi: the meaning is that there is no need to receive again, because it has been received at the root.

Assāti sāmaṇerassa.Tatoti aggijālanato.

Assāti, for the novice. Tatoti, from the kindling of the fire.

Tatte udaketi udake tāpe.Tatoti taṇḍulapakkhipanato.

Tatte udaketi, in hot water. Tatoti, from putting in the rice.

Pidhānanti ukkhalipidhānaṃ.Tassevāti hatthakukkuccakassa bhikkhuno eva.Dabbiṃ vāti kaṭacchuṃ vā. So hi darīyati viloḷīyati imāyāti dabbīti vuccati.

Pidhānanti, the lid of the pot. Tassevāti, of that bhikkhu with a greedy gesture himself. Dabbiṃ vāti, or a ladle. For it stirs and mixes with this, therefore it is called dabbī.

Tatrāti tasmiṃ ṭhapane.Tassevāti lolabhikkhusseva.Tatoti pattato. Punatatoti sākhādito.Tatthāti phalarukkhe.

Tatrāti, in that placing. Tassevāti, of that greedy bhikkhu himself. Tatoti, from the bowl. Again, tatoti, from the branch, etc. Tatthāti, on the fruit tree.

Vitakkaṃ sodhetunti ‘‘mayhampi dassatī’’ti vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ.Tatoti ambaphalādito.

Vitakkaṃ sodhetunti, to purify the thought, thinking "he will give to me too". Tatoti, from the mango fruit, etc.

tatoti mātāpitūnamatthāya gahitatelādito.Teti mātāpitaro.Tatoyevāti tehiyeva taṇḍulehi sampādetvāti sambandho.

tatoti, from the oil, etc., taken for the sake of the mother and father. Teti, those mother and father. Tatoyevāti, the connection is that they should prepare it with that rice itself.

Etthāti tāpitaudake. Amuñcanteneva hatthenāti yojanā. Aṅganti vināsaṃ gacchantītiaṅgārā. Darīyanti phalīyantītidārūni.

Etthāti, in that heated water. The arrangement is that he does not release it with his hand. Aṅgārā means what goes to destruction. Dārūni means they are split and divided.

Vutto sāmaṇeroti yojanā.

It has been said about the novice.

guḷo,guḷati visato jīvitaṃ rakkhatīti vāguḷo,taṃ bhājento bhikkhūti sambandho.Tassāti lolasāmaṇerassa.

guḷo, jaggery, or guḷo, jaggery protects life from poison, the bhikkhu sharing that. Tassāti, for that greedy novice.

mukhaṃ. Kaṃ vuccati sīsaṃ, taṃ tiṭṭhati etthātikaṇṭho.

mukhaṃ. Kaṃ means the head, the throat is where it stands.

Bhattuggāroti uddhaṃ girati niggiratīti uggāro, bhattameva uggāro bhattuggāro, uggārabhattanti attho.Dantantareti dantavivare.

Bhattuggāroti, uggāro means what is belched up, swallowed upwards; bhattameva uggāro bhattuggāro, meaning belched-up food. Dantantareti, in the gap between the teeth.

Upakaṭṭhe kāleti āsanne majjhanhike kāle.Kakkhāretvāti sañcitvā. Tassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dve tayo kheḷapiṇḍe pātetvā’’ti. Phaḷusaṅkhātaṃ siṅgaṃ visāṇaṃ asmiṃ atthītisiṅgī,soyeva kaṭukabhayehi viramitabbattāsiṅgīveroti vuccati. Aṅkīyati rukkho navaṃ uggatoti lakkhīyati etehītiaṅkurā,samaṃ loṇena udakaṃ, samaṃ vā udakena loṇaṃ asmintisamuddo,tassa udakaṃ avayavīavayavabhāvenātisamuddodakaṃ,tena apaṭiggahitenāti sambandho. Phāṇati guḷato thaddhabhāvaṃ gacchatītiphāṇitaṃ. Karena hatthena gahitabbātikarakā,vassopalaṃ, karena gaṇhitumarahāti attho.Katakaṭṭhināti katakanāmakassa ekassa rukkhavisesassa aṭṭhinā.Tanti udakaṃ.Kapitthoti ekassa ambilaphalassa rukkhavisesassa nāmaṃ.

Upakaṭṭhe kāleti, at a time near midday. Kakkhāretvāti, collecting it. To show its meaning, it has been said, "having spat out two or three balls of phlegm." Siṅgī, is that in which there is horn, called phaḷusaṅkhātaṃ; that itself, because it should be avoided with bitter fears, is called siṅgīvero. Aṅkurā, sprouts, are that by which the tree is marked or characterized as newly grown, rising up. samuddo, is that in which there is equal salt and water, or equal water and salt; samuddodakaṃ, its water is due to the relationship of part and whole; the connection is that it is unreceived. Phāṇitaṃ, molasses, is what becomes solid from jaggery. Karakā, hailstones, are to be taken with the hand, meaning it is fit to be taken with the hand. Katakaṭṭhināti, with the seed of a certain kind of tree called kataka. Tanti, that water. Kapitthoti, is the name of a certain kind of sour fruit tree.

Bahalanti āvilaṃ.Sanditvāti visanditvā.Kakudhasobbhādayoti kakudharukkhasamīpe ṭhitā sobbhādayo.Rukkhatoti kakudharukkhato.Parittanti appakaṃ.

Bahalanti, turbid. Sanditvāti, dissolving. Kakudhasobbhādayoti, sobbhādayo standing near the kakudha tree. Rukkhatoti, from the kakudha tree. Parittanti, a little.

Tanti vāsamattaṃ udakaṃ.Tatthevāti ṭhapitapupphavāsitapānīyeyeva. Ṭhapitaṃ dantakaṭṭhanti sambandho. Ajānantassa bhikkhussāti yojanā. Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Tanti, just that amount of water. Tatthevāti, in the flower-scented water that was placed there. The connection is that the toothpick was placed there. The connection is that it is for the bhikkhu who does not know. This is a word of ownership in disregard. ti, truly, or because.

Yaṃ panāti mahābhūtaṃ pana.Aṅgalagganti aṅgesu laggaṃ, mahābhūtanti sambandho.Etthāti sede.Sujhāpitanti aṅgārasadisaṃ katvā suṭṭhu jhāpitaṃ.

Yaṃ panāti, but that which is a great element. Aṅgalagganti, clinging to the limbs, is a great element. Etthāti, in sweat. Sujhāpitanti, having made it similar to charcoal, it is well burnt.

Cattārīti pathavī chārikā gūthaṃ muttanti cattāri.Mahāvikaṭānīti mahantāni sappadaṭṭhakkhaṇasaṅkhāte vikārakāle kattabbāni osadhāni.Etthāti ‘‘asati kappiyakārake’’ti vacane.Kālodissaṃ nāmāti byādhodissa, puggalodissa, kālodissa, samayodissa, desodissa, vasodissa, bhesajjodissasaṅkhātesu sattasu odissesu kālodissaṃ nāmāti attho. Dasamaṃ.

Cattārīti, the four are earth, ashes, excrement, urine. Mahāvikaṭānīti, great medicines to be done at the time of change, counted as a snake bite. Etthāti, in the statement "when there is no allowable agent". Kālodissaṃ nāmāti, the meaning is that among the seven kinds of specification called specification for disease, specification for person, specification for time, specification for occasion, specification for place, specification for dwelling, specification for medicine, it is called specification for time. Tenth.

Bhojanavaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Chapter on Food.

5. Acelakavaggo

5. The Acelaka Chapter

1. Acelakasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Word-by-Word Meaning of the Acelaka Training Rule

269.Acelakavaggassa paṭhame parivisati etthātiparivesananti dassento āha ‘‘parivesanaṭṭhāna’’nti. Paribbājakapabbajasaddā samānāti āha ‘‘paribbājakasamāpannoti pabbajjaṃ samāpanno’’ti. Titthena samaṃ pūratīti samatitthīkaṃ, nadīādīsu udakaṃ, samatitthikaṃ viyātisamatitthikaṃ,pattabhājanesu yāgubhattaṃ.Tesanti mātāpitūnaṃ dentassāti sambandho. ‘‘Dāpetī’’ti ettha dādhātuyā sampadānassa suvijānitattā taṃ adassetvā kāritakammameva dassento āha ‘‘anupasampannenā’’ti.

269.In the first of the Acelaka section, showing that parivesananti means where he serves, he says "parivesanaṭṭhāna." The words paribbājaka and pabbaja are the same, he says "paribbājakasamāpannoti pabbajjaṃ samāpanno." Samatitthikaṃ, means filling equally with a tittha, the water in rivers, etc., like something level with the bank. Tesanti, the connection is that he is giving to the mother and father. In "dāpetī," because the dative case of giving is well understood by the root , showing only the action done, he says "anupasampannenā."

273.‘‘Santike’’tiiminā‘‘upanikkhipitvā’’ti ettha upasaddassa samīpatthaṃ dasseti.Tesanti titthiyānaṃ.Tatthāti bhājane.Itoti pattato.Idhāti mayhaṃ bhājane.Nanti khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ.Tassāti titthiyassāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

273.With this "santike," he shows that the word upa in "upanikkhipitvā" is in the sense of nearness. Tesanti, for those sectarians. Tatthāti, in the vessel. Itoti, from the bowl. Idhāti, in my vessel. Nanti, not staple and non-staple food. Tassāti, for that sectarian. First.

2. Uyyojanasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Training Rule on Sending Away

274.Dutiye paṭikkamanaasanasālasaddānaṃ pariyāyattā vuttaṃ ‘‘asanasālāyapī’’ti. Bhattassa vissajjanaṃbhattavissaggoti kate bhattakiccanti āha‘‘bhattakicca’’nti. Sambhūdhātussa papubbaapadhātvatthattā vuttaṃ ‘‘na pāpuṇī’’ti.

274.In the second, because the words paṭikkamana and asanasālā are synonymous, it is said "asanasālāyapī." Bhattavissaggo, means the giving up of the meal; saying that the business of the meal has been done, he says "bhattakicca". Because the root sambhū has the same meaning as pāpu and apa-dhātu, it is said "na pāpuṇī".

276.Vuttāvasesanti vuttehi mātugāmena saddhiṃ hasitukāmatādīhi avasesaṃ.Tasminti uyyojitabhikkhumhi.Atthatoti vijahantavijahitabhikkhūnaṃ avinābhāvasaṅkhātaatthato.Itarenāti uyyojakabhikkhunā.Tatthāti ‘‘dassanūpacāraṃ vā savanūpacāraṃ vā’’tivacane.Etthāti niddhāraṇasamudāyo, dassanūpacārasavanūpacāresūti attho. ‘‘Tathātiiminā dvādasahatthapamāṇaṃ atidisati.Tehīti kuṭṭādīhi.Tassāti dassanūpacārātikkamassa. ‘‘Vuttapakāramanācāra’’nti iminā ‘‘na añño koci paccayo’’ti ettha aññasaddassa apādānaṃ dasseti, ‘‘kāraṇa’’ntiiminā paccayasaddassatthaṃ.

276.Vuttāvasesanti, remaining with what has been said, such as wishing to laugh with women. Tasminti, in the bhikkhu who has been sent away. Atthatoti, from the point of view of meaning, counted as the non-separation of the leaving and not-leaving bhikkhus. Itarenāti, by the bhikkhu who sent him away. Tatthāti, in the statement "showing honor or hearing honor". Etthāti, this is a determination from a collection, the meaning is in showing honor and hearing honor. With "tathāti," he extends the measure of twelve hatthas. Tehīti, by the wall, etc. Tassāti, of exceeding the honor of sight. With "vuttapakāramanācāra," he shows the ablative case of the word añña in "na añño koci paccayo," and with "kāraṇa," the meaning of the word paccaya.

277.Kalisaddassa pāpaparājayasaṅkhātesu dvīsu atthesu pāpasaṅkhāto kodhoti āha ‘‘kalīti kodho’’ti. ‘‘Āṇa’’ntiiminā sāsanasaddassatthaṃ dasseti. Vuttañhi ‘‘āṇā ca sāsanaṃ ñeyya’’nti. Kodhavasena vadatīti sambandho. Dassetvā vadatīti yojanā. Imassa ṭhānaṃ nisajjaṃ ālokitaṃ vilokitaṃ passatha bhoti yojanā.Imināpīti amanāpavacanaṃ vacanenāpīti. Dutiyaṃ.

277.In the two meanings of the word kali, counted as evil and defeat, he says that the evil one is anger, saying "kalīti kodho". With "āṇa," he shows the meaning of the word sāsana. For it has been said, "āṇā ca sāsanaṃ ñeyya." The connection is that he speaks because of anger. The arrangement is that he speaks after showing. He says, "This is the place, the seat, seen, looked at, see, sirs." Imināpīti, even with a word that is not pleasing by the utterance of a word. Second.

3. Sabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Training Rule on Eating Together

279.Tatiye ‘‘sayaniyaghare’’ti vattabbe yakāralopaṃ katvā ‘‘sayanighare’’ti vuttanti āha‘‘sayanighare’’ti.Yatoti ettha tosaddo paṭhamādīsu atthesu dissati. ‘‘Yatonidāna’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 275) paṭhamatthe. ‘‘Antarāye asesato’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā 7) dutiyatthe. ‘‘Aniccato’’tiādīsu (paṭṭhā. 1.1.409) tatiyatthe. ‘‘Mātito pitito’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.311) pañcamyatthe. ‘‘Yaṃ parato dānapaccayā’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.585) chaṭṭhyatthe. ‘‘Purato pacchato’’tiādīsu (pāci. 576) sattamyatthe. ‘‘Padamato’’tiādīsu kāraṇatthe dissati. Idhāpi kāraṇattheyevāti āha ‘‘yasmā’’ti. Yasmā kāraṇā ayyassa bhikkhā dinnā, tasmā gacchatha bhante tumheti attho.Yanti bhikkhaṃ.Voti tumhehi.Adhippāyoti purisassa ajjhāsayo. ‘‘Pariyuṭṭhito’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi atthapakaraṇādito rāgapariyuṭṭhitovādhippetoti āha‘‘rāgapariyuṭṭhito’’ti, rāgena paribhavitvā uṭṭhitoti attho.

279. In the third, it is said that "sayanighare" is stated by dropping the yakāra, when "sayaniyaghare" should be said, hence "sayanighare." Yato here, the word "to" is seen in the senses of first, etc. In "Yatonidāna," etc. (su. ni. 275), it is in the sense of 'first'. In "Antarāye asesato," etc. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā 7), it is in the sense of 'second'. In "Aniccato," etc. (paṭṭhā. 1.1.409), it is in the sense of 'third'. In "Mātito pitito," etc. (dī. ni. 1.311), it is in the sense of 'fifth'. In "Yaṃ parato dānapaccayā," etc. (jā. 2.22.585), it is in the sense of 'sixth'. In "Purato pacchato," etc. (pāci. 576), it is in the sense of 'seventh'. In "Padamato," etc., it is seen in the sense of cause. Here also, it is in the sense of cause, thus he says, "Yasmā". Because alms were given to the venerable one, therefore, go, monks, you, is the meaning. Yaṃ means alms. Vo means by you. Adhippāyo means the inclination of a person. Although "Pariyuṭṭhito" is generally stated, from the context of the meaning, it should be understood as being overcome by passion, thus he says "rāgapariyuṭṭhito", meaning overcome and arisen by passion.

280.Sabhojananti ettha sakāro sahasaddakāriyo ca akārukārānaṃ asarūpattā akārato ukārassa lopo ca tīsu padesu pacchimānaṃ dvinnaṃ padānaṃ tulyatthanissitasamāso ca pubbapadena saha bhedanissitabāhiratthasamāso ca hoti, iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saha ubhohi janehī’’ti. Atha vā bhuñjitabbantibhojanaṃ,saṃ vijjati bhojanaṃ asmiṃ kuletisabhojananti dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ.Tenevāti teneva aññamaññaṃ bhuñjitabbattā.Assāti ‘‘sabhojane’’tipadassa.Ghareti ettha pubbo sayanisaddo lopoti āha ‘‘sayanighare’’ti. Iminā ‘‘datto’’tiādīsu viya pubbapadalopasamāsaṃ dasseti.Piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassāti ettha piṭṭhasaṅghāṭo nāma na aññassa yassa kassaci, atha kho sayanigharagabbhassevāti āha ‘‘tassa sayanigharagabbhassā’’ti.Yathā vā tathā vāti yena vā te na vā ākārena.Katassāti piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ āropetvā vā anāropetvā vā katassāti. Tatiyaṃ.

280. In Sabhojana, here, the sa is similar to saha, and due to the dissimilarity of a and u, there is elision of u from a, and in the three places, the last two words have the same meaning, resulting in a compound, and with the first word, there is a bahirattha compound based on difference, thus showing this meaning, he says, "saha ubhohi janehi". Or, bhojanaṃ means that which should be eaten, bhojanaṃ, sabhojanaṃ means in which the family exists, thus showing this, he says, "atha vā" etc. means truly. Tenevā means because it should be eaten mutually by that very thing. Assā means of the word "sabhojane". In Ghare, here, the previous word sayani is elided, thus he says "sayanighare". By this, he shows the elision compound of the previous word, like in "datto" etc. In Piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa, here, piṭṭhasaṅghāṭo is not of someone else, anyone, but of the sleeping chamber, thus he says "tassa sayanigharagabbhassa". Yathā vā tathā vā means in whatever way or not. Katassā means having done it by raising or not raising the back support. The third.

284.Catutthapañcamesu yathā ca sabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ, evameva tānipīti yojanāti. Catutthapañcamāni.

284. In the fourth and fifth, just as the Sabhojana Sikkhāpada arises from the first Pārājika, so too do these, is the connection. The fourth and fifth.

6. Cārittasikkhāpadaṃ
6. Cārittasikkhāpadaṃ

294.Chaṭṭhe kasmā tehi ‘‘dethāvuso bhatta’’nti vuttaṃ, nanu bhikkhūnaṃ evaṃ vattuṃ na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘ettha taṃ kirā’’tiādi.Tasmāti yasmā abhihaṭaṃ ahosi, tasmā.

294. In the sixth, why was it said by them, "dethāvuso bhatta", surely it is not proper for monks to say so, thus he says "ettha taṃ kirā" etc. Tasmā means because it was brought, therefore.

295.Idaṃ pana vacanaṃ āhāti sambandho.Pasādaññathattanti pasādassa aññenākārena bhāvo.Nanti khādanīyaṃ. ‘‘Gahetvā āgamaṃsū’’tiiminā ‘‘ussāriyitthā’’ti ettha ukārassa uggahatthatañca saradhātussa gatyatthatañca ajjataniñuṃvibhattiyā tthattañca dasseti, uggahetvā sāriṃsu agamaṃsūti attho.

295. But this statement is made, is the connection. Pasādaññathatta means the state of the offering being in a different manner. Na means eatable. "Gahetvā āgamaṃsū", by this, it shows that in "ussāriyitthā", the ukāra is for emphasis, and the saradhātu has the meaning of going, and the ajjatani ñuṃvibhatti has the sense of ttha, meaning having lifted up, they went to sāri and came.

298.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne. Ṭhitassa bhikkhuno cittaṃ uppannanti yojanā.Tatoti cittuppannato.Yanti bhikkhuṃ.Pakativacanenāti uccāsaddamakatvā pavattena sabhāvavacanena.Antovihāreti vacanassa atisambādhattā ayuttabhāvaṃ maññamāno āha ‘‘api ca antoupacārasīmāyā’’ti.

298. Yatthā means in which place. The thought arose in the monk who was standing, is the connection. Tato means from the arising of thought. Yaṃ means the monk. Pakativacanenā means by the natural speech, without making a loud noise. Thinking that the word Antovihāre is unsuitable because it is too crowded, he says "api ca antoupacārasīmāya".

302.Gāmassa antare ārāmo tiṭṭhatītiantarārāmovihāro, taṃ gacchatīti dassento āha ‘‘antogāme’’tiādīti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

302. The monastery stands in the middle of the village, so it is antarārāmo vihāro, showing that he goes there, he says "antogāme" etc. Sixth.

7. Mahānāmasikkhāpadaṃ
7. Mahānāmasikkhāpadaṃ

303.Sattame ‘‘bhagavato’’tipadaṃ ‘‘cūḷapituputto’’tipade sambandho, ‘‘mahallakataro’’tipade apādānaṃ.Cūḷapituputtoti suddhodano, sakkodano, sukkodano, dhotodano, amitodanoti pañca janā bhātaro, amitā, pālitāti dve bhaginiyo. Tesu bhagavā ca nando ca jeṭṭhabhātubhūtassa suddhodanassa puttā, ānando kaniṭṭhabhātubhūtassa amitodanassa putto, mahānāmo ca anuruddho ca tatiyassa sukkodanassa puttā. Sakkodanadhotodanānaṃ puttā apākaṭā. Tissatthero amitāya nāma bhaginiyā putto, pālitāya puttadhītarā apākaṭā. Tasmā cūḷapituno sukkodanassa putto cūḷapituputtoti attho daṭṭhabbo.Dvīsu phalesūti heṭṭhimesu dvīsu phalesu.Ussannasaddo bahupariyāyoti āha ‘‘bahū’’ti.Vajatoti goṭṭhato. Tañhi gāvo gocaraṭṭhānato paṭikkamitvā nivāsatthāya vajanti gacchanti asminti vajoti vuccati.

303. In the seventh, the word "bhagavato" is related to the word "cūḷapituputto", and from the word "mahallakataro", it is an ablative. Cūḷapituputto means Suddhodana, Sakkodana, Sukkodana, Dhotodana, and Amitodana, these five people were brothers, and Amitā and Pālitā were two sisters. Among them, the Blessed One and Nanda were sons of the eldest brother Suddhodana, Ānanda was the son of the youngest brother Amitodana, and Mahānāma and Anuruddha were sons of the third Sukkodana. The sons of Sakkodana and Dhotodana are not well-known. Tissatthera was the son of the sister named Amitā, and the sons and daughters of Pālitā are not well-known. Therefore, Cūḷapituputto should be understood to mean the son of Sukkodana. Dvīsu phalesū means in the two lower fruits. The word Ussanna has many synonyms, thus he says "bahūti". Vajato means from the cattle pen. For cows go to the place of pasture and then return to the place of dwelling, therefore it is called vajoti.

306.Tasmiṃ samayeti tasmiṃ pavāraṇasamaye. ‘‘Ettakehī’’tipadassa nāmavasena vā parimāṇavasena vā duvidhassa atthassa adhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘nāmavasena parimāṇavasenā’’ti. Tesu nāmaṃ sandhāya etaṃ nāmaṃ etesaṃ bhesajjānantiettakānīti vacanattho kātabbo, parimāṇaṃ sandhāya etaṃ parimāṇaṃ etesantiettakānīti vacanattho kātabbo. ‘‘Aññaṃ bhesajja’’nti ettha aññasaddassa apādānaṃ nāmaṃ vā parimāṇaṃ vā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘sabbinā pavārito’’tiādi.

306. Tasmiṃ samaye means at that Pavāraṇā time. Because the word "Ettakehī" implies two kinds of meanings, according to name or according to quantity, it is said "nāmavasena parimāṇavasenā". Among them, regarding the name, it should be done as "etaṃ nāmaṃ etesaṃ bhesajjānanti ettakānīti vacanattho kātabbo", this is the name of these medicines, regarding the quantity, it should be done as "etaṃ parimāṇaṃ etesanti ettakānīti vacanattho kātabbo", this is the quantity of these. In "Aññaṃ bhesajja", the ablative of the word aññaṃ could be a name or a quantity, thus he says "sabbinā pavārito" etc.

310.Yeti dāyakā, pavāritā hontīti sambandhoti. Sattamaṃ.

310. Ye means the donors, they are being invited, is the connection. Seventh.

8. Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadaṃ
8. Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadaṃ

311.Aṭṭhame ‘‘abhimukha’’ntiiminā abhisaddassatthaṃ dasseti.‘‘Uyyāto’’tipadassa uṭṭhahitvā yātoti dassento āha ‘‘nagarato niggato’’ti. ‘‘Katauyyoga’’nti iminā uṭṭhahitvā yuñjati gacchatītiuyyuttāti dasseti. Dhātūna, manekatthattā vuttaṃ ‘‘gāmato nikkhanta’’nti.

311. In the eighth, "abhimukha", by this, it shows the meaning of the prefix abhi. Showing that "Uyyāto" means having risen up and gone, he says, "nagarato niggato". By "Katauyyoga", it shows that uyyuttā means having risen up, he goes. Because the roots have many meanings, it is said "gāmato nikkhanta".

314.Dvādasa purisā imassa hatthinotidvādasapuriso,āvudho hatthesu etesantiāvudhahatthā. Ninnanti ninnaṭṭhānaṃ,passatobhikkhunoti sambandhoti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

314. Dvādasa purisā imassa hatthinoti dvādasapuriso, āvudho hatthesu etesanti āvudhahatthā. Ninna means a low place, passato bhikkhunoti is the connection. Eighth.

9. Senāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ
9. Senāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ

319.Navame ‘‘tiṭṭhatu vā’’tiādinā vasanākāraṃ dasseti. Vāsaddo ‘‘caṅkamatu vā’’tiatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Kiñci iriyāpathanti catūsu iriyāpathesu kiñci iriyāpathaṃ. Yathā ruddhamāne sañcāro chijjati, evaṃ ruddhā saṃvutā hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Ruddho’’ti iminā‘‘palibuddho’’ti ettha paripubbassa budhidhātussa adhippāyatthaṃ dassetīti. Navamaṃ.

319. In the ninth, "tiṭṭhatu vā" etc. shows the manner of dwelling. The vā word combines the meaning "caṅkamatu vā". Kiñci iriyāpatha means any one of the four postures. Just as movement is cut off when obstructed, so too, being obstructed, it is restrained, is the connection. By "Ruddho", it shows the implied meaning of the root budhi with the prefix pari in "palibuddho". Ninth.

10. Uyyodhikasikkhāpadaṃ
10. Uyyodhikasikkhāpadaṃ

322.Dasameyujjhantīti saṃpaharanti. ‘‘Balassa aggaṃ etthā’’tiiminā bhinnādhikaraṇabāhiratthasamāsaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Jānantī’’tipadaṃ atthasampuṇṇatthāya pakkhittaṃ.Agganti koṭṭhāsaṃ. Balaṃ gaṇīyati etthātibalagganti vacanatthopi yujjati. Tenāha ‘‘balagaṇanaṭṭhāna’’nti. Idañhi vacanaṃ ambasecanagarusinanayena vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Balagaṇanaṭṭhāna’’nti vadantena aṭṭhakathācariyena ‘‘balassa aggaṃ jānanti etthāti balagga’’nti vacanatthassa piṇḍattho ca ñāpīyati, ‘‘balaṃ gaṇīyati etthātibalagga’’nti vacanattho ca dassīyati. Viyūhīyate sampiṇḍīyatebyūho,senāya byūhosenābyūhoti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘senāya viyūha’’ntiādinā. Aṇati bheravasaddaṃ karotītiaṇīkaṃ,muddhajaṇakāro, hatthīyeva aṇīkaṃhatthāṇīkaṃ. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Yo hatthī pubbe vutto, tena hatthināti yojanāti. Dasamaṃ.

322. In the tenth, yujjhantī means they are striking. By "Balassa aggaṃ etthā", it shows a bahirattha compound with different subjects. The word "Jānantī" is inserted for the sake of completeness of meaning. Agga means part. It is also appropriate to say that balaṃ gaṇīyati etthāti balagga, a place where strength is counted. Therefore, he says "balagaṇanaṭṭhāna". For this statement is made in the manner of Ambasekanagarusina. How? By saying "balagaṇanaṭṭhāna", the Aṭṭhakathācariya reveals the condensed meaning of "balassa aggaṃ jānanti etthāti balagga", and he shows that the meaning "balaṃ gaṇīyati etthāti balagga" is also given. Viyūhīyate sampiṇḍīyate byūho, showing that senāya byūho senābyūho means the array of the army, by "senāya viyūha" etc. Aṇati bheravasaddaṃ karotīti aṇīkaṃ, the foremost cause, the elephant itself is the aṇīkaṃ hatthāṇīkaṃ. The same method applies to the rest. The elephant by which it was previously stated, therefore by the elephant, is the connection. Tenth.

Acelakavaggo pañcamo.

Acelakavaggo pañcamo.

6. Surāpānavaggo

6. Surāpānavaggo

1. Surāpānasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Surāpānasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

326.Surāpānavaggassa paṭhame bhaddā vati etthātibhaddavatikāti ca, bhaddā vati bhaddavati, sā ettha atthītibhaddavatikāti ca atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘so’’tiādi.Soti gāmo labhīti sambandho. Pathaṃ gacchantītipathāvinoti kate addhikāyevāti āha ‘‘addhikā’’ti. Addhaṃ gacchantītiaddhikā. ‘‘Pathikā’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.‘‘Tejasā teja’’ntipadāni sambandhāpekkhāni ca honti, padānaṃ samānattā sambandho ca samānoti maññituṃ sakkuṇeyyā ca honti, tasmā tesaṃ sambandhañca tassa asamānatañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘attano tejasā nāgassa teja’’nti. ‘‘Ānubhāvenā’’tiiminā pana tejasaddassa atthaṃ dasseti. Kapotassa pādokapotoupacārena, tassa esokāpoto,vaṇṇo. Kāpoto viya vaṇṇo assātikāpotikāti dassento āha ‘‘kapotapādasamavaṇṇarattobhāsā’’ti.Pasannasaddassa pasādasaddhādayo nivattetuṃ ‘‘surāmaṇḍassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ.Pañcābhiññassa satoti pañcābhiññassa samānassa sāgatassāti yojanā.

326. In the first of Surāpānavagga, showing that bhaddā vati etthāti bhaddavatikā and bhaddā vati bhaddavati, sā ettha atthīti bhaddavatikā, he says "so" etc. So means the village is obtained, is the connection. Pathaṃ gacchantīti pathāvino, they are merely travellers, thus he says "addhikā". Addhaṃ gacchantīti addhikā. "Pathikā" is also a reading, this is the same meaning. The words "Tejasā teja" are dependent on relationship, and because the words are similar, the relationship can be assumed to be similar, therefore, to show the relationship and its dissimilarity, it is said "attano tejasā nāgassa teja". By "Ānubhāvena", he shows the meaning of the word teja. Kapotassa pādo kapoto by convention, this is kāpoto, the color. Showing that kāpoto viya vaṇṇo assāti kāpotikā, he says "kapotapādasamavaṇṇarattobhāsā". To remove the offerings and faith etc. of the word Pasanna, it is said "surāmaṇḍassetaṃ adhivacana". Pañcābhiññassa sato means of Sāgata, who is equal to the five superknowledges, is the connection.

328.‘‘Madhukapupphādīnaṃ rasena kato’’tiiminā pupphānaṃ rasena kato āsavopupphāsavoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Esa nayo ‘‘phalāsavo’’tiādīsupi. Surāmerayānaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘surā nāmā’’tiādi.Piṭṭhakiṇṇapakkhittāti piṭṭhena ca kiṇṇena ca pakkhittā katā vāruṇīti sambandho.Kiṇṇāti ca surāya bījaṃ. Tañhi kiranti nānāsambhārāni missībhavanti etthāti kiṇṇāti vuccati. Tassāyeva maṇḍeti yojanā. Suranāmakena ekena vanacarakena katātisurā. Madaṃ janetītimerayaṃ.

328. By saying "Madhukapupphādīnaṃ rasena kato", it shows the meaning of the word pupphāsavo as pupphānaṃ rasena kato āsavo pupphāsavo. The same method applies to "phalāsavo" etc. To show the difference between surā and meraya, it is said "surā nāmā" etc. Piṭṭhakiṇṇapakkhittā means vāruṇī made by mixing piṭṭha and kiṇṇa, is the connection. Kiṇṇā means the seed of liquor. For it is called kiṇṇa because various ingredients are mixed together in it. It is the sediment of that same. Because it was made by a forestdweller named Surā, it is surā. That which causes intoxication is merayaṃ.

329.Loṇasovīrakanti evaṃnāmakaṃ pānaṃ.Suttantipi evameva.Tasminti sūpasaṃpāke. Telaṃ pana pacantīti sambandho. Natthi tikhiṇaṃ majjaṃ etthāti atikhiṇamajjaṃ, atikhiṇamajje tasmiṃyeva teleti attho.Yaṃ panāti telaṃ pana. Tikhiṇaṃ majjaṃ imassa telassātitikhiṇamajjaṃ. Yatthāti tele.Ariṭṭhoti evaṃnāmakaṃ bhesajjaṃ.Tanti ariṭṭhaṃ, ‘‘sandhāyā’’tipade avuttakammaṃ.Etanti ‘‘amajjaṃ ariṭṭha’’ntivacanaṃ, ‘‘vutta’’ntipade vuttakammanti. Paṭhamaṃ.

329. Loṇasovīraka is a drink of that name. Sutta is also just like that. Tasmi means in that soup preparation. But they are cooking oil, is the connection. Natthi tikhiṇaṃ majjaṃ etthāti atikhiṇamajjaṃ, the meaning is oil in that very atikhiṇamajje. Yaṃ panā means the oil, however. Tikhiṇaṃ majjaṃ imassa telassāti tikhiṇamajjaṃ. Yatthā means in the oil. Ariṭṭho is a medicine of that name. Ta means ariṭṭha, an unstated object in the word "sandhāyā". Eta means the statement "amajjaṃ ariṭṭha", a stated object in the word "vutta". First.

2. Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadaṃ

330.Dutiye aṅgulīhi patujjanaṃ aṅgulipatodo, soyevaaṅgulipatodakoti dassento āha ‘‘aṅgulīhī’’tiādi.Uttantoti avatapanto. Avatapantoti ca atthato kilamantoyevāti āha ‘‘kilamanto’’ti. Kilamanto hutvāti yojanā. Assāsagahaṇena passāsopi gahetabboti āha ‘‘assāsapassāsasañcāro’’ti.Tampīti bhikkhunimpīti. Dutiyaṃ.

330. In the second, aṅgulīhi patujjanaṃ aṅgulipatodo, soyeva aṅgulipatodako, thus showing this, he says "aṅgulīhī" etc. Uttanto means scaring. Scaring also means tiring, thus he says "kilamanto". Having become tired, is the connection. By taking inhalation, exhalation should also be taken, thus he says "assāsapassāsasañcāro". Tampī means even for the nun. Second.

3. Hasadhammasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Hasadhammasikkhāpadaṃ

335.Tatiye pakārena karīyati ṭhapīyatītipakataṃpaññattanti dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādi.Yanti sikkhāpadaṃ.

335. In the third, that which is done by way of preparation is pakataṃ paññattanti, thus showing this, he says "yaṃ bhagavatā" etc. Yaṃ means the training rule.

336.Hasasaṅkhāto dhammo sabhāvohasadhammoti vutte atthato kīḷikāyevāti āha ‘‘kīḷikā vuccatī’’ti.

336. Hasasaṅkhāto dhammo sabhāvo hasadhammo, when said, in meaning, it is merely a game, thus he says "kīḷikā vuccatīti".

337.Gopphakānanti caraṇagaṇṭhikānaṃ. Te hi pāde pādaṃ ṭhapanakāle aññamaññūpari ṭhapanato gopīyantīti gopphā, te eva gopphakāti vuccanti. Pādassa hi upari pādaṃ ṭhapanakāle ekassa upari eko na ṭhapetabbo. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘pāde pādaṃ accādhāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.196; ma. ni. 1.423; a. ni. 3.16). Oṭṭhajo dutiyo.Orohantassabhikkhunoti sambandho.

337. Gopphakāna means of the ankle joints. For when placing one foot on another, they are covered, therefore they are called gopphā, those very ones are called gopphaka. When placing a foot on top of another, one should not be placed on top of the other. Therefore, the Blessed One said, "pāde pādaṃ accādhāyā" (dī. ni. 2.196; ma. ni. 1.423; a. ni. 3.16). Oṭṭhajo dutiyo. Orohantassa bhikkhunoti is the connection.

338.Phiyārittādīhīti ādisaddena laṅkārādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Keci vadantīti sambandho.Patanuppatanavāresūti patanavāra uppatanavāresu.Tatthāti tassaṃ khittakathalāyaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Ṭhapetvā kīḷantassāti sambandho.Likhituṃ vaṭṭatikīḷādhippāyassa virahitattāti adhippāyo. Kīḷādhippāyena atthajotakaṃ akkharaṃ likhantassāpi āpattiyevāti vadanti.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpadeti. Tatiyaṃ.

338. Phiyārittādīhī means by the word ādi, he includes decorations etc. Keci vadantīti is the connection. Patanuppatanavāresū means in the times of falling and rising. Tatthā means in that throwing of a ball. means truly, or because. Thapetvā kīḷantassāti is the connection. Likhituṃ vaṭṭati means the intention of playing is absent, is the meaning. Even for one who writes a letter indicating meaning with the intention of playing, it is an offense, so they say. Etthā means in this training rule. Third.

4. Anādariyasikkhāpadaṃ
4. Anādariyasikkhāpadaṃ

342.Catutthedhammonāma tantiyevāti āha ‘‘tantī’’ti.Paveṇīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ vā na sikkhitukāmo’’ti ettha taṃsaddassa atthamāvikātuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yena paññattenā’’ti. Vinaye apaññattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘apaññattenā’’ti āha ‘‘sutte vā abhidhamme vā āgatenā’’ti.

342. In the fourth, dhammo means the string, thus he says "tantīti". Paveṇī is a synonym for that same. In "Taṃ vā na sikkhitukāmo", to reveal the meaning of the word taṃ, it is said "yena paññattenā". Regarding that which is not prescribed in the Vinaya, he says "apaññattenā", thus he says "sutte vā abhidhamme vā āgatenā".

344.Paveṇiyāti upāliādikāya ācariyaparamparasaṅkhātāya tantiyā. Kurundiyaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Taṃ sabbanti kurundivādamahāpaccarivādasaṅkhātaṃ sabbaṃ taṃ vacanaṃ.Paveṇiyā āgateti paveṇiyā āgatasaṅkhāte mahāaṭṭhakathāvādeti. Catutthaṃ.

344. Paveṇiyā means in the tradition, in the lineage of teachers beginning with Upāli, in the continuous line. "Kurundiyaṃ vuttan" (it is said in the Kurundi) is the connection. "Mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttan" (it is said in the Mahāpaccari) is the connection. Taṃ sabbaṃ means all that statement, all of it that is reckoned as the Kurundi school and the Mahāpaccari school. Paveṇiyā āgateti means in the Great Commentary (Mahāaṭṭhakathā) considered to have come down through tradition. The fourth.

345.Pañcamemanussaviggaheti manussaviggahapārājiketi. Pañcamaṃ.

345. In the fifth, manussaviggaheti means the Pārājika concerning human form. The fifth.

6. Jotisikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Jotisikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Fire)

350.Chaṭṭhe janapadassa nāmattā bahuvacanavasena ‘‘bhaggesū’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Susumārasaṇṭhāno pabbatasaṅkhāto giri etthātisusumāragiri,etassa vā māpitakāle susumāro girati saddaṃ niggirati etthātisusumāragirīti atthamanapekkhitvā vuttaṃ ‘‘nagarassa nāma’’nti.Taṃ panāti vanaṃ pana. ‘‘Migāna’’ntiādinā migānaṃ abhayo dīyati etthātimigadāyoti atthaṃ dasseti.

350. In the sixth, because of the name of the country, in the Pali it is said in the plural as "Bhaggesū." Susumāragiri, a mountain reckoned as having the shape of a crocodile, is said to be susumāragiri because a crocodile (susumāro) exists there. Or, when it was built, because a crocodile swallowed or emitted a sound (girati saddaṃ niggirati) there, it is called susumāragirī. Without regard to the meaning, it is said "nagarassa nāma" (it is the name of the city). Taṃ pana means that forest. "Migāna" and so on indicate the meaning: migadāyo because safety (abhayo) is given to animals (migānaṃ) there.

352.‘‘Jotike’’tipadassa jotissa aggissa karaṇaṃjotikanti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘jotikaraṇe’’ti.

352. To show that the word "jotike" means jotika, the making of fire or light, it is said "jotikaraṇe" (in the making of fire).

354.‘‘Samādahitukāmatāyā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘araṇisaṇṭhāpanato’’tipade hetu.Jālāti sikhā. Sā hi jalati dibbatīti jālāti vuccati.

354. The phrase "samādahitukāmatāyā" (with the desire to kindle) is the reason for the phrase "araṇisaṇṭhāpanato" (from setting up fire-sticks). Jālā means flame (sikhā). For that is called flame (jālā) because it blazes (jalati) or shines (dibatī).

Patilātaṃ ukkhipatīti ettha ‘‘patitālāta’’nti vattabbe takāralopaṃ katvā sandhivasena patilātanti vuttanti āha ‘‘alātaṃ patitaṃ ukkhipatī’’ti.Alātanti ummukkaṃ. Tañhi ādittaṃ hutvā atiuṇhattā na lātabbaṃ na gaṇhitabbanti alātanti vuccati.Avijjhātanti jhāyanato ḍayhanato avigataṃ alātanti sambandho. Jhāyanaṃ ḍayhanaṃ jhātaṃ, vigataṃ jhātaṃ imassālātassātivijjhātaṃ.

Patilātaṃ ukkhipatīti (picks up a fallen torch): Here, it should have been said "patitālāta," but having made an elision of the "ta" and through the combination of letters, it is said patilātanti. He says, "alātaṃ patitaṃ ukkhipatī" (picks up a fallen torch). Alāta means a torch (ummukkaṃ). For because it has been lit and is very hot, it cannot be touched or grasped (na lātabbaṃ na gaṇhitabbaṃ), therefore it is called alāta. Avijjhāta means alāta that is not extinguished by burning (jhāyanato ḍayhanato avigataṃ alātaṃ). Burning (jhāyanaṃ), scorching (ḍayhanaṃ) is burnt (jhātaṃ); that alāta from which burning has disappeared is vijjhātaṃ.

356.Padīpādīnīti padīpajotikādīni.Tatthāti tāsu duṭṭhavāḷamigaamanussasaṅkhātāsu āpadāsu nimittabhūtāsu. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacananti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

356. Padīpādīnīti means lamps, firelights and so on. Tatthāti means in those dangers, reckoned as wicked wild beasts or humans, which are the cause. This is a locative plural used in the sense of cause. The sixth.

7. Nahānasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Nahānasikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Bathing)

366.Sattame pāraṃ gacchanto na kevalaṃ saudakāya nadiyā eva nhāyituṃ vaṭṭati, sukkhāya nadiyāpi vaṭṭatīti dassento āha ‘‘sukkhāyā’’tiādi.Ukkiritvāti viyūhitvā. Āvāṭāyeva khuddakaṭṭhenaāvāṭakā,tesūti. Sattamaṃ.

366. In the seventh, showing that one is allowed to bathe not only in a river with water when going across, but also in a dry river, he says "sukkhāyā" (in a dry one) and so on. Ukkiritvā means having scattered. Āvāṭakā, small pieces of wood like little wells, in those. The seventh.

8. Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ
8. The Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Discoloration)

368.Aṭṭhame alabhītilabhoti vacanatthe apaccayaṃ katvā ṇapaccayassa svatthabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘labhoyeva lābho’’ti. Apaccayamakatvā pakatiyā ṇapaccayopi yuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saddantaropi atthantarābhāvā samāso hotīti āha ‘‘navacīvaralābhenāti vattabbe’’ti.Anunāsikalopanti ‘‘nava’’nti ettha niggahītassa vināsaṃ. Niggahītañhi nāsaṃ anugatattā‘‘anunāsika’’nti vuccati, tassa adassana, makatvāti attho.Majjhe ṭhitapadadvayeti ‘‘nava’’nti ca ‘‘cīvaralābhenā’’ti ca dvinnaṃ padānamantare ‘‘ṭhite panā’’ti ca ‘‘bhikkhunā’’ti ca padadvaye. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Nipātoti nipātamattaṃ. Alabhītilabhoti vacanatthassa abhidheyyatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhikkhunā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘bhikkhunā’’tiādi. Padabhājane pana vuttanti sambandho.Yanti yaṃ cīvaraṃ. ‘‘Cīvara’’nti ettha cīvarasarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ nivāsetuṃ vā’’tiādi.Cammakāranīlanti cammakārānaṃ tiphale pakkhittassa ayagūthassa nīlaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Dubbaṇṇo karīyati anenātidubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ,kappabindunti āha ‘‘kappabinduṃ sandhāyā’’ti. Ādiyantena bhikkhunā ādātabbanti sambandho.Koṇesūti antesu. Vāsaddo aniyamavikappattho.Akkhimaṇḍalamattaṃ vāti akkhimaṇḍalassa pamāṇaṃ vā kappabindūti sambandho.Paṭṭe vāti anuvātapaṭṭe vā.Gaṇṭhiyaṃ vāti gaṇṭhikapaṭṭe vā.Pāḷikappoti dve vā tisso vā tato adhikā vā binduāvalī katvā kato kappo.Kaṇṇikakappoti kaṇṇikaṃ viya bindugocchakaṃ katvā kato kappo. Ādisaddena agghiyakappādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Sabbatthāti sabbāsu aṭṭhakathāsu. Ekopi bindu vaṭṭoyeva vaṭṭatīti āha‘‘ekaṃ vaṭṭabindu’’nti.

368. In the eighth, "alabhīti" (without gain): to show that the suffix "a" in the sense of the word labho (gain) and the intrinsic nature of the suffix "ṇa" are possible, it is said "labhoyeva lābho" (gain is indeed gain). It should be seen that even without the suffix "a," the suffix "ṇa" is also appropriate by its very nature. He says, "It should have been said navacīvaralābhena (with the gain of a new robe)" because a compound occurs even when the meanings are the same despite the difference in words. Anunāsikalopanti means the disappearance of the niggahīta in "nava." For the niggahīta is called "anunāsika" because it follows destruction; the meaning is the absence of that, the not doing. Majjhe ṭhitapadadvayeti means between the two words "nava" and "cīvaralābhena," the two words "ṭhite pana" and "bhikkhunā" are located. This is a locative plural used in specification. Nipātoti means merely an indeclinable. To show that the meaning of the word "labho" in "alabhīti" is the expressed meaning, it is said "bhikkhunā" (by a bhikkhu). "Padabhājane pana vuttan" (but it is said in the word analysis) is the connection. Yanti means whatever robe. Here, showing the nature of the robe, he says "yaṃ nivāsetuṃ vā" (whatever is for wearing) and so on. Cammakāranīlanti means the blue of iron filings put in triphalā by leather workers. "Mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttan" (it is said in the Mahāpaccari) is the connection. That by which discoloration (dubbaṇṇo) is done is dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ; he says, "kappabinduṃ sandhāya" (referring to the marking spot), which is a kappabindu. It should be understood that it should be taken by the bhikkhu at the beginning and end. Koṇesūti means at the edges. The "vā" word is for unrestricted option. Akkhimaṇḍalamattaṃ vāti means or an area the size of the eye-socket is a kappabindu. Paṭṭe vāti means or on a hem strip (anuvātapaṭṭe). Gaṇṭhiyaṃ vāti means or on a knotted strip (gaṇṭhikapaṭṭe). Pāḷikappoti means a marking spot made by making a row of two or three or more dots. Kaṇṇikakappoti means a marking spot made by making a bunch of dots like a tassel (kaṇṇikaṃ). The word "ādi" includes the agghiyakappa and so on. Sabbatthāti means in all the commentaries. He says "ekaṃ vaṭṭabindu" because even one round dot is appropriate.

371.Aggaḷādīnīti ādisaddena anuvātaparibhaṇḍe saṅgaṇhātīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

371. Aggaḷādīnīti means the word "ādi" includes the robe-border (anuvātaparibhaṇḍe). The eighth.

9. Vikappanasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Vikappanasikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Disjoining)

374.Navametassāti ettha tasaddassa visayo cīvarasāmikoyevāti āha ‘‘cīvarasāmikassā’’ti. Dutiyassa tasaddassa visayo vinayadharoyevāti āha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. ‘‘Avissāsanto’’tipadassa kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘avissāsenā’’ti.Tenāti vinayadharenāti. Navamaṃ.

374. In the ninth, tassāti: here, the scope of the word "tassa" is only the owner of the robe, he says "cīvarasāmikassā" (to the owner of the robe). The scope of the second "tassa" is only the Vinaya-holder, he says "yenā" (by whom) and so on. To show that the phrase "avissāsanto" (not trusting) is an adverb, it is said "avissāsena" (without trust). Tenāti means by the Vinaya-holder. The ninth.

10. Cīvarāpanidhānasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Cīvarāpanidhānasikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Hiding Robes)

377.Dasame ‘‘apanetvā’’tiiminā apaityūpasaggassa atthaṃ dasseti.Nidhentīti nigūhitvā ṭhapenti.Hasādhippāyoti hasaṃ, hasanatthāya vā adhippāyo. Parikkhārassa sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pattatthavikādi’’nti. Pattassa pāḷiyamāgatattā pattassa thavikāti atthoyeva gahetabbo, na patto ca thavikā cāti. ‘‘Samaṇena nāmā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘bhavitu’’ntipade bhāvakattāti. Dasamaṃ.

377. In the tenth, with "apanetvā" (having removed), he shows the meaning of the prefix "apa." Nidhentīti means they hide, they conceal. Hasādhippāyoti means intending to laugh or for the purpose of laughing. To show the nature of the equipment, it is said "pattatthavikādi" (bowl, bag, etc.). Because the word for bowl (patta) has come in the Pali, only the meaning "bag for the bowl" (pattassa thavikā) should be taken, not "bowl and bag." The phrase "Samaṇena nāmā" (it is called by the ascetic) is the agent in the phrase "bhavitu" (to be). The tenth.

Surāpānavaggo chaṭṭho.

The sixth Surāpānavagga is complete.

7. Sappāṇakavaggo

7. The Sappāṇakavagga (Section on Living Beings)

1. Sañciccapāṇasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Sañciccapāṇasikkhāpada-atthayojanā (Explanation of the Training Rule on Deliberate Killing of a Living Being)

382.Sappāṇakavaggassa paṭhame usuṃ asati khipati anenātiissāsoti kate dhanuyeva mukhyato issāso nāma, dhanuggahā- cariyo pana upacārena. Usuṃ asati khipatītiissāsoti kate dhanuggahācariyo issāso nāma, idha pana upacārattho vā kattuttho vā gahetabboti āha ‘‘dhanuggahācariyo hotī’’ti. Pabbajitakāle issāsassa ayuttattā vuttaṃ ‘‘gihikāle’’ti.Voropitāti ettha vi ava pubbassa ruhadhātussa adhippāyatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘viyojitā’’ti.

382. In the first of the Sappāṇakavagga, that by which an arrow (usuṃ) is shot or cast is issāso, the bow itself is primarily called issāso, but the archery teacher (dhanuggahā- cariyo) is so called by convention. Or the archery teacher is called issāso because an arrow is shot or cast by him. Here, however, the conventional meaning or the agent meaning should be taken, he says "dhanuggahācariyo hotī" (it is an archery teacher). Because archery is inappropriate at the time of ordination, it is said "gihikāle" (in his householder days). Voropitāti: here, to show the meaning of the root ruh with the prefixes vi and ava, it is said "viyojitā" (separated).

Etanti ‘‘jīvitā voropitā’’tivacanaṃ. Kasmā vohāramattameva hoti, nanu yato kutoci yasmiṃ kismiṃci viyojite dve vatthūni viya visuṃ tiṭṭhanti pāṇato jīvite viyojite pāṇajīvitāpīti āha ‘‘na hetthā’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ. Etthāti ‘‘jīvitā voropitā’’tivacane dassetunti sambandho. Kiñci jīvitaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Ayaṃ panettha atthasambandho – sīsālaṅkāre sīsato viyojite sīsaṃ alaṅkārato visuṃ tiṭṭhati yathā, evaṃ jīvite pāṇato viyojite jīvitaṃ pāṇato visuṃ na tiṭṭhati nāmāti.Aññadatthūti ekaṃsena. ‘‘Pāṇa’’nti sāmaññato vuttopi manussapāṇassa pārājikaṭṭhāne gahitattā idha pārisesañāyena tiracchānapāṇova gahetabboti āha ‘‘tiracchānagatoyeva pāṇo’’ti.Tanti pāṇaṃ. Mahante pana pāṇeti sambandho.

Etanti means the statement "jīvitā voropitā" (deprived of life). Why is it merely a usage? Surely, when two things are separated from whatever source or from whatever thing, they stand apart like two objects, but when life is separated from a living being, the living being and life do not stand apart, he says "na hetthā" (not here) and so on. ti means truly. Etthāti (here) is connected to the statement "jīvitā voropitā" (deprived of life). The construction is "kiñci jīvitaṃ nāmāti" (what is called life?). Here, this is the connection of meaning: just as when an ornament is separated from the head in a head ornament, the head stands apart from the ornament, so when life is separated from a living being, life does not stand apart from the living being. Aññadatthūti means certainly. Though "pāṇa" (living being) is said in general, because in the case of a Pārājika, it is taken as a human being, here by the rule of residue, only an animal should be taken, he says "tiracchānagatoyeva pāṇo" (only an animal is a living being). Tanti means that living being. "Mahante pana pāṇeti sambandho" (but it is connected to a large living being).

385.Sodhento apanetīti yojanā.Maṅguloti manussarattapo eko kimiviseso. So hi rattapivanatthāya maṅgati ito cito ca imaṃ cimañca ṭhānaṃ gacchatīti ‘‘maṅgulo’’ti vuccati. Padakkharānañhi aviparitatthaṃ, sotūnañca sajjhāyopadesalabhanatthaṃ katthaci ṭhāne vacanattho vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassa bījameva khuddakaṭṭhenamaṅgulabījakaṃ,tasmiṃ.Tanti maṅgulabījakaṃ. Bhindanto hutvāti yojanāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

385. "Sodhento apanetīti yojanā" (the construction is: clearing away, he removes). Maṅguloti means a certain kind of worm that drinks human blood. For it is called "maṅgulo" because it moves (maṅgati) from here and there, going to this place and that place to drink blood. It should be seen that the meaning of the words is stated somewhere for the sake of those who hear, for the sake of learning the teachings, and for the sake of receiving guidance, without reversing the syllables. The seed of that, even a small piece of wood, is maṅgulabījakaṃ (worm seed), in that. Tanti means that worm seed. "Bhindanto hutvāti yojanāti" (the construction is: having split). The first.

2. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Water with Living Beings)

387.Dutiye saha pāṇehītisappāṇakaṃudakanti dassento āha ‘‘ye pāṇakā’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ. Pattapūrampi udakanti sambandho.Tādisenāti sappāṇakena. Dhovatopi pācittiyanti yojanā.Udakasoṇḍinti silāmayaṃ udakasoṇḍiṃ.Pokkharaṇinti silāmayaṃ pokkharaṇiṃ. Uṭṭhāpayatopi pācittiyanti sambandho.Tatoti soṇḍipokkharaṇīhi.Udakassāti udakena, pūre ghaṭe āsiñcitvāti sambandho.Tatthāti udake.Udaketi udakasaṇṭhānakapadese āsiñcitaudake.Patissatīti soṇḍipokkharaṇīhi gahitaudakaṃ patissatīti. Dutiyaṃ.

387. In the second, showing that sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ (water with living beings) means saha pāṇehīti (with living beings), he says "ye pāṇakā" (whatever living beings) and so on. ti means truly. "Pattapūrampi udakanti sambandho" (even a bowlful is connected to water). Tādisenāti means with such sappāṇaka (containing living beings). "Dhovatopi pācittiyanti yojanā" (the construction is: even rinsing, there is a pācittiya). Udakasoṇḍinti means a stone water trough. Pokkharaṇinti means a stone pond. "Uṭṭhāpayatopi pācittiyanti sambandho" (the construction is: even raising it up, there is a pācittiya). Tatoti means from the trough and pond. Udakassāti means with water, having poured with full pots. Tatthāti means in the water. Udaketi means in the place consisting of water, in the water that has been poured. Patissatīti means the water taken from the trough and pond recedes. The second.

3. Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Inciting)

392.Tatiye ‘‘uccālentī’’tiiminā ukkoṭentīti ettha upubbassa kuṭadhātussa uccālanatthaṃ dasseti dhātūna, manekatthattā. Yaṃ yaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃyathāpatiṭṭhitaṃ,tassa bhāvoyathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvo,tena.

392. In the third, with "uccālentī" (raising), he shows the meaning of raising in ukkoṭentīti (inciting) for the root kuṭ with the prefix upu, because roots have many meanings. Yathāpatiṭṭhitaṃ, whatever is established, yathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvo, the state of being established, by that.

393.Yo dhammoti yo samathadhammo.Dhammenāti ettha enasaddena ‘‘yathādhamma’’nti ettha aṃitikāriyassa kāriṃ dasseti. Iminā ‘‘yathādhamma’’nti padassa ‘‘nihatādhikaraṇa’’nti ettha nihatasaddena sambandhitabbabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Satthārā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘vuttaṃ’’ itipade kattā. Natthi hataṃ hananaṃ imassātinihatanti vutte atthato vūpasamanamevāti āha ‘‘vūpasamita’’nti.

393. Yo dhammoti means whatever samatha-dhamma (practice of tranquility). Dhammenāti: here, with the "ena" suffix, he shows the agent of "yathādhamma" (in accordance with the Dhamma) in the act of doing. With this, he shows that the word "yathādhamma" (in accordance with the Dhamma) should be connected to the word "nihata" (suppressed) in "nihatādhikaraṇa" (a case that has been suppressed). The word "Satthārā" (by the Teacher) is the agent in the word "vuttaṃ" (said). When it is said that there is no striking or killing (hataṃ hananaṃ) of that which is nihata (suppressed), the meaning is only pacification (vūpasamana), he says "vūpasamita" (pacified).

395.Yaṃ vā taṃ vā kammaṃ dhammakammaṃ nāma na hoti, atha kho adhikaraṇavūpasamakammameva dhammakammaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘yena kammenā’’tiādi.Ayampīti ayampi bhikkhu.Sesapadānipīti ‘‘dhammakamme vematiko’’tiādīni sesapadānipi.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Vitthāro pana vuttoti sambandho.Tatthevāti parivāre eva.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade, vibhaṅge vāti. Tatiyaṃ.

395. That action, whatever it may be, is not called a dhamma-action, but only an action for pacifying a case is called a dhamma-action, showing this, he says "yena kammenā" (by whatever action) and so on. Ayampīti means even this bhikkhu. Sesapadānipīti means the remaining words, "dhammakamme vematiko" (doubtful about the dhamma-action) and so on. Etthāti means in this training rule. "Vitthāro pana vuttoti sambandho" (but the explanation is said) is the connection. Tatthevāti means in the Parivāra itself. Idhāti means in this training rule, or in the Vibhaṅga. The third.

4. Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Slander)

399.Catuttheatthuddhāravasena dassitāniduṭṭhullasaddatthabhāvena sadisattāti adhippāyo.‘‘Dhura’’nti ettha lakkhaṇavantattā bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘dhure’’ti. Dhure nikkhittamatte satīti yojanā.

399. In the fourth, atthuddhāravasena dassitāni means the intention is that they are similar in being the meaning of slanderous words. ‘‘Dhura’’nti: here, because of possessing characteristics, it is a word used in the sense of abundance, he says "dhure" (abundantly). "Dhure nikkhittamatte satīti yojanā" (the construction is: when it has merely been placed on the shoulder).

Evaṃdhuraṃ nikkhipitvāti ‘‘aññassa nārocessāmī’’ti evaṃ dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā.Aññassāti vatthu, puggalato aññassa dutiyassa.Sopīti dutiyopi.Aññassāti tatiyassa. Yāva koṭi na chijjati, tāva āpajjatiyevāti yojanā.Tassevāti āpattiṃ āpannapuggalassa.Vatthupuggaloyevāti āpattiṃ āpannapuggaloyeva.Ayanti paṭhamabhikkhu.Aññassāti dutiyassa.Soti dutiyo ārocetīti sambandho.Yenāti paṭhamabhikkhunā.Assāti dutiyassa.Tassevāti paṭhamabhikkhusseva. Vatthupuggalaṃ upanidhāya ‘‘tatiyena puggalena dutiyassā’’ti vuttaṃ.

Evaṃ dhuraṃ nikkhipitvāti means having placed the burden thus, "aññassa nārocessāmī" (I will not report to another). Aññassāti means to another, to a second person different from the object or person. Sopīti means even that second person. Aññassāti means to a third person. "Yāva koṭi na chijjati, tāva āpajjatiyevāti yojanā" (the construction is: as long as the limit is not broken, there is only an offense). Tassevāti means to the person who has incurred the offense. Vatthupuggaloyevāti means only the person who has incurred the offense. Ayanti means the first bhikkhu. Aññassāti means to the second person. Soti means that second person reports. Yenāti means by the first bhikkhu. Assāti means to the second person. Tassevāti means only to the first bhikkhu. Having placed the object or person, it is said "tatiyena puggalena dutiyassā" (by the third person to the second person).

400.Pañcāpattikkhandheti thullaccayādike pañca āpattikkhandhe.Ajjhācāro nāmāti adhibhavitvā vītikkamitvā ācaritabbattā ajjhācāro nāmāti. Catutthaṃ.

400. Pañcāpattikkhandheti means in the five aggregates of offenses, such as thullaccaya. Ajjhācāro nāmāti means it is called ajjhācāro because it is to be practiced having overcome and transgressed. The fourth.

5. Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadaṃ (Training Rule on Those Under Twenty)

402.Pañcameaṅguliyoti karasākhāyo. Tā hi aṅganti hatthato pañcadhā bhijjitvā uggacchantīti aṅguliyoti vuccanti. Likhantassa upālissāti sambandho.Tenāti bahucintetabbakāraṇena.Assāti upālissa.Uroti hadayaṃ. Tañhi usati cittatāpo dahati etthāti uroti vuccati.Rūpasuttanti heraññikānaṃ rūpasuttaṃ, yathā hatthācariyānaṃ hatthisuttanti.Akkhīnīti cakkhūni. Tāni hi akkhanti visayesu byāpībhavanti, rūpaṃ vā passati imehīti akkhīnīti vuccanti. Makasena sūcimukhānaṃ gahitattā ḍaṃsena piṅgalamakkhikāyova gahetabbāti āha‘‘ḍaṃsāti piṅgalamakkhikāyo’’ti. Piṅgalamakkhikāyo hi ḍaṃsanaṭṭhena khādanaṭṭhenaḍaṃsāti vuccanti. Dukkaro khamo etāsantidukkhāti dassento āha ‘‘dukkhamāna’’nti. Vedanānanti sambandho. Asātassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘amadhurāna’’nti. Iminā amadhurattā na sāditabbātiasātāti atthaṃ dasseti. Pāṇasaddajīvitasaddānaṃ pariyāyabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘jīvitaharāna’’nti. Pāṇaṃ haranti apanentītipāṇaharā,tāsaṃ vedanānanti sambandho.

402. In the fifth, aṅguliyoti means finger-branches (karasākhāyo). For they are called fingers (aṅguliyo) because they break off (aṅganti) in five ways from the hand and grow upwards (ugacchanti). "Likhantassa upālissāti sambandho" (the connection is: to Upāli who is writing). Tenāti means because of the many things to be considered. Assāti means to Upāli. Uroti means the heart. For it is called the chest (uro) because it burns (usati) or scorches (dahati) with mental heat there. Rūpasuttanti means the manual for goldsmiths, just as the manual for elephant trainers is the hatthisutta. Akkhīnīti means eyes. For they are called eyes (akkhīnī) because they pervade (akkhanti) objects or see (passati) form with these. Because the mouth of needles is grasped with the makasa, it should be grasped with the ḍaṃsa, like the piṅgalamakkhikā, he says ‘‘ḍaṃsāti piṅgalamakkhikāyo’’ti (ḍaṃsa means piṅgalamakkhikā). For piṅgalamakkhikā are called ḍaṃsā because of the act of biting or the act of chewing. Showing that they are difficult to endure (dukkaro khamo etāsanti)dukkhāti (painful), he says "dukkhamāna" (experiencing pain). "Vedanānanti sambandho" (it is connected to sensations). To show the cause of tastelessness, it is said "amadhurāna" (of things that are not sweet). With this, he shows the meaning that asātā (tasteless) means that they are not to be tasted because they are not sweet. To show that the words pāṇa (life) and jīvita (life) are synonyms, it is said "jīvitaharāna" (destructive of life). Those that take away or remove life (pāṇaṃ haranti apanentīti)pāṇaharā, to the sensations of those is the connection.

404.Vijāyanakālato paṭṭhāya paripuṇṇavīsativasso na gahetabbo, gabbhagahaṇakālato pana paṭṭhāyāti dassento āha ‘‘paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Gabbhe sayitakālena saddhiṃ vīsatimaṃ vassaṃ paripuṇṇamassātigabbhavīsopuggalo.ti saccaṃ.Yathāhāti yenākārena saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tenākārena bhagavā āhāti yojanā. Atha vā yathā kiṃ vacanaṃ bhagavā āhāti yojanā.

404. Showing that one should not be accepted from the time of conception until the full twenty years, but from the time of taking the womb, he says, "From the moment of conception." A person whose twentieth year is complete, including the time spent in the womb, is a gabbhavīsa person. Hi means truly. Yathāhā means in whatever manner the calculation goes, in that manner the Blessed One spoke. Or, it can be construed as: in what way did the Blessed One speak?

Amhīti asmi. Nusaddo parivitakkatthe nipāto.Yanti yādisaṃ paṭhamaṃ cittanti sambandho. Iminā paṭisandhicittaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ viññāṇa’’nti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Tanti paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ.Assāti sattassa.Sāva jātīti sā eva paṭisandhi, gabbho nāma hotīti sambandho.

Amhī means asmi (I am). The word nu is a particle in the sense of deliberation. Yanti is related to the kind of first consciousness. With this, he indicates the rebirth consciousness. "Paṭhamaṃ viññāṇa" is a synonym of that. Tanti, that first thought, the first consciousness. Assāti of the being. Sāva jātīti that very rebirth is called a womb.

Tatthāti pāḷiyaṃ, vinicchayo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Yoti puggalo.Mahāpavāraṇāyāti assayujapuṇṇamiyaṃ. Sā hi pūjitapavāraṇattā mahāpavāraṇāti vuccati.Tatoti pavāraṇāya jātakālato.Tanti mahāpavāraṇaṃ.Pāṭipade cāti ettha casaddo aniyamavikappattho, pavāraṇadivasapāṭipadadivasesu aññatarasmiṃ divase upasampādetabboti attho.Hāyanavaḍḍhananti kucchimhi vasitamāsesu adhikesu hāyanañca ūnesu vaḍḍhunañca veditabbaṃ.

Tatthāti in the Pali, the decision should be understood thus. Yoti the person. Mahāpavāraṇāyāti on the full-moon day of Assayuja. Because it is a revered Pavāraṇā, it is called Mahāpavāraṇā. Tatoti from the time of birth from the Pavāraṇā. Tanti the Mahāpavāraṇā. Pāṭipade cāti here, the word ca is in the sense of an indefinite alternative; meaning, he should be conferred the Upasampadā on either the Pavāraṇā day or the first day after. Hāyanavaḍḍhananti, decrease in months of excess and increase in months of deficiency spent in the womb should be understood.

Ekūnavīsativassanti anantare vuttaṃ ekūnavīsativassaṃ.Nikkhamanīyoti sāvaṇamāso. So hi antovīthito bāhiravīthiṃ nikkhamati sūriyo asminti ‘‘nikkhamanīyo’’ti vuccati.Pāṭipadadivaseti pacchimikāya vassūpagamanadivase.Taṃupasampādanaṃ.Kasmāti pucchā. Ettha ṭhatvā parihārovuccatemayāti yojanā.Vīsatiyā vassesūti upasampannapuggalassa vīsatiyā vassesu. Tiṃsarattidivassa ekamāsattā ‘‘cattāro māsā parihāyantī’’ti vuttaṃ.Ukkaḍḍhantīti ekassa adhikamāsassa nāsanatthāya vassaṃ upari kaḍḍhanti.Tatoti chamāsato apanetvāti sambandho.Etthāti ‘‘ekūnavīsativassa’’ntiādivacane.Pana-saddo hisaddattho, saccanti attho.Yoti puggalo.Tasmāti yasmā gabbhamāsānampi gaṇanūpagattā gahetvā upasampādenti, tasmā cha māse vasitvāti sambandho. Aṭṭha māse vasitvā jātopi na jīvatītisuttantaaṭṭhakathāsu(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.24-25; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.205) vuttaṃ.

Ekūnavīsativassanti, the nineteen-year-old mentioned immediately before. Nikkhamanīyoti, the month of Sāvaṇa. Because the sun rises from the eastern horizon and exits into the western horizon in this month, it is called "Nikkhamanīyo." Pāṭipadadivaseti, on the last day of entering the rains. Taṃ means that Upasampadā. Kasmāti is a question. Standing here, the explanation is vuccate by us. Vīsatiyā vassesūti, in the twenty years of the Upasampanna person. Because thirty day-nights are one month, it is said, "four months are deficient." Ukkaḍḍhantīti, they pull the year upwards to negate an extra month. Tatoti, subtracting from six months is the connection. Etthāti, in the statement beginning with "ekūnavīsativassa." The word Pana is in the sense of hi, meaning truly. Yoti, the person. Tasmāti, since even months in the womb are taken into account for calculation and conferring the Upasampadā, therefore, after residing for six months is the connection. It is stated in the suttantaaṭṭhakathāsu (D.A. 2.24-25; M.A. 3.205) that even if one is born after residing for eight months, they do not live.

406.Dasavassaccayenāti upasampadato dasavassātikkamena.Upasampādetīti upajjhāyo vā kammavācācariyo vā hutvā upasampādeti.Tanti upajjhācariyabhūtaṃ anupasampannapuggalaṃ. Kammavācācariyo hutvā upasampādento taṃ muñcitvā sace aññopi kammavācācariyo atthi, sūpasampanno. Sova sace kammavācaṃ sāveti, nupasampanno. Ñatvā pana puna anupasampādente saggantarāyopi maggantarāyopi hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbanti. Pañcamaṃ.

406. Dasavassaccayenāti after the passing of ten years from the Upasampadā. Upasampādetīti, either as preceptor or as the teacher reciting the Kammavācā, he confers the Upasampadā. Tanti, that not-yet-ordained person who has become the preceptor or teacher. If, while conferring the Upasampadā as the Kammavācā teacher, he excludes that one, and if there is another Kammavācā teacher who is well-ordained, it is Upasampanna. If he himself recites the Kammavācā, it is not Upasampanna. But, having known, if he ordains him again, there is indeed an obstacle to heaven and an obstacle to the path, it should be seen. Fifth.

6. Theyyasatthasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Theyyasatthasikkhāpadaṃ

407.Chaṭṭhe ‘‘paṭiyāloka’’nti ettha ālokasaddena sūriyo vutto upacārena. Sūriyo hi puratthimadisato uggantvā pacchimadisaṃ gato, tasmā sūriyasaṅkhātassa ālokassa paṭimukhaṃ‘‘paṭiyāloka’’nti vutte pacchimadisāyeva gahetabbāti āha ‘‘pacchimaṃ disanti attho’’ti.Kammikāti kamme yuttā payuttā.

407. In the sixth, regarding "paṭiyāloka," here the sun is referred to with the word āloka metaphorically. Since the sun rises from the eastern direction and goes to the western direction, when "paṭiyāloka," meaning facing the light known as the sun, is said, it should be taken as the western direction itself, he says, "the meaning is the western direction." Kammikāti, engaged in work, employed.

409.Rājānanti ettha rañño santakaṃ ‘‘rājā’’ti vuccati upacārena, atha vā rañño eso ‘‘rājā’’ti katvā rañño santakaṃ ‘‘rājā’’ti vuccati.Theyyanti thenetvā ‘‘sakkacca’’ntiādīsu (pāci. 606) viya niggahītāgamo hoti. Rājānaṃ, rañño santakaṃ vā theyyaṃ thenetvā gacchantīti attho. Iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘rājānaṃ vā thenetvā’’tiādi.

409. Rājānanti, here, what belongs to the king is called "rājā" metaphorically, or having made what belongs to the king as "rājā," what belongs to the king is called "rājā." Theyyanti, like in "sakkacca," etc. (pāci. 606), there is an augment of niggahīta. It means having stolen the king, or what belongs to the king, they go. Thus, showing this meaning, he says, "having stolen the king," etc.

411.Catūsu visaṅketesu dvīhi anāpatti, dvīhi āpattiyevāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

411. Among the four uncertainties, there is no offense in two, and there is indeed an offense in two. Sixth.

7. Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadaṃ
7. Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadaṃ

412.Sattame‘‘padhūpento’’ti ettha papubba dhūpadhātu paribhāsanatthe vattatīti āha ‘‘paribhāsanto’’ti. Tvaṃ samaṇopi mātugāmena saddhiṃ gacchasi, tuyheveso doso, netassa purisassāti attānaṃyeva paribhāsantoti attho. ‘‘Nikkhāmesī’’tiiminā‘‘nippātesī’’tiettha nipubba patadhātu gatyatthoti dassetīti. Sattamaṃ.

412. In the seventh, ‘‘padhūpento’’ti, here the verb dhūpa with the prefix pa exists in the sense of dispraising, he says ‘‘paribhāsanto’’ti (dispraising). The meaning is that you are a samaṇa who goes together with a woman; this fault is yours, not of that man, thus he dispraises himself only. With ‘‘nikkhāmesī’’ti, he shows that here, in ‘‘nippātesī’’ti, the verb pat with the prefix ni is in the sense of going. Seventh.

8. Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ
8. Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

417.Aṭṭhamegandheti gijjhe. Te hi gidhanti kuṇapaṃ abhikaṅkhantīti ‘‘gandhā’’ti vuccanti.Gaddhetipi pāṭho, sopi yujjati yathā ‘‘yuganandho, yuganaddho’’ti ca ‘‘paṭibandho paṭibaddho’’ti ca.Bādhayiṃsūti haniṃsu.Assāti ariṭṭhassa.

417. In the eighth, gandheti means vultures. Because they crave corpses, they are called "gandhā". Gaddhetipi is also a reading, that too is fitting, like "yuganandho, yuganaddho" and "paṭibandho paṭibaddho". Bādhayiṃsūti means they harmed. Assāti of Ariṭṭha.

Teti antarāyikā.Tatthāti pañcavidhesu antarāyikesu. ‘‘Tathā’’tipadena ‘‘kammantarāyikaṃ nāmā’’ti padaṃ atidisati.Taṃ panāti bhikkhunidūsakakammaṃ pana.Mokkhassevāti magganibbānasseva. Maggo hi kilesehi muccatīti atthenamokkhonāma. Jhānampettha saṅgahitaṃ nīvaraṇehi vimuccanattā. Nibbānaṃ vimuccīti atthenamokkhonāma. Phalampettha saṅgahitaṃ vimuccitattā.Niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammāti niyatabhāvaṃ pattā, niyatavasena vā pavattā micchādiṭṭhisaṅkhātā dhammā. Te pana natthikaahetuka akiriyavasena tividhā. Paṇḍakādigahaṇassa nidassanamattattā ‘paṭisandhidhammā’’tipadena ahetukadvihetukapaṭisandhidhammā gahetabbā sabbesampi vipākantarāyikabhāvato. Tepi mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karonti, na saggassa.Te panāti ariyūpavādā pana. Tāvadeva upavādantarāyikā nāmāti yojanā.Tāpīti sañcicca āpannā āpattiyopi. Pārājikāpattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhubhāvaṃ vā paṭijānātī’’ti. Saṅghādisesāpattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘na vuṭṭhāti vā’’ti. Lahukāpattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘na deseti vā’’ti.

Teti the obstructive things. Tatthāti, among the five kinds of obstructive things. With the term "tathā," he extends the term "kammantarāyikaṃ nāmā." Taṃ panāti, but that act of corrupting a bhikkhuni. Mokkhassevāti, just of the path and Nibbāna. The path is called mokkho in the sense that it liberates from the defilements. Jhāna is also included here because of liberating from the hindrances. Nibbāna is called mokkho in the sense that it is liberated. The fruition is also included here because of being liberated. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammāti, states that have attained a fixed state, or states that occur in a fixed manner, called wrong views. But they are threefold as nihilistic, without cause, and inactive. Because the taking of the likes of paṇḍaka is the origin, with the term 'paṭisandhidhammā", one should take rebirth states of without cause and with two causes because all of them are obstructive to resultant. Those too cause obstruction to liberation only, not to heaven. Te panāti, but the reviling of the Noble Ones. They are called obstructive to reviling only, that much. Tāpīti, even the offenses that are intentionally committed. Referring to the Pārājikā offense, it is said, "or claims to be a bhikkhu." Referring to the Saṅghādisesa offense, it is said, "or does not emerge." Referring to a minor offense, it is said, "or does not confess."

Tatrāti pañcavidhesu antarāyikesu.Ayaṃ bhikkhūti ariṭṭho gandhabādhipubbo bhikkhu.Sesantarāyiketi āṇāvītikkamantarāyikato sese catubbidhe antarāyike.Ime āgārikāti agāre vasanasīlā ime manussā. Bhikkhūpi passanti phusanti paribhuñjantīti sambandho. Kasmā na vaṭṭanti, vaṭṭantiyevāti adhippāyo.Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti upādiṇṇakarasena anupādiṇṇakarasaṃ, anupādiṇṇakarasena vā upādiṇṇakarasaṃ samānetvā. Yoniso paccavekkhaṇassa abhāvato saṃvijjati chandarāgo etthātisacchandarāgo,soyeva paribhogosacchandarāgaparibhogo,taṃ.Ekaṃ katvāti samānaṃ katvā. Ghaṭento viya pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppādetvāti yojanā.Kiṃsaddo garahattho, kasmā bhagavatā paṭhamapārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, na paññāpetabbanti attho. Mahāsamuddaṃ bandhanto yathā akattabbaṃ karoti, tathā paṭhamapārājikaṃ paññapento bhagavā apaññattaṃ paññapetīti adhippāyo.Etthāti paṭhamapārājike.Āsanti bhabbāsaṃ.Āṇācakketi āṇāsaṅkhāte cakke.

Tatrāti, among the five kinds of obstructive things. Ayaṃ bhikkhūti, this Ariṭṭha, the bhikkhu who is a plague of vultures. Sesantarāyiketi, in the remaining four kinds of obstructive things apart from the obstructive thing of transgression of the command. Ime āgārikāti, these people whose habit is to live in a house. The connection is that bhikkhus also see, touch, and consume. Why do they not observe; the intention is that they indeed observe. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti, mixing taste that is clung to with taste that is not clung to, or taste that is not clung to with taste that is clung to. Because of the absence of wise reflection, craving and lust are found here, therefore sacchandarāgo, that very consumption is sacchandarāgaparibhogo, that. Ekaṃ katvāti, having made it the same. The connection is that he produces an evil wrong view as if constructing something. Kiṃ is a word in the sense of reproach; the meaning is why did the Blessed One enact the first Pārājika, why did he not enact it. Just as one who binds the great ocean does what should not be done, similarly, the implication is that the Blessed One, enacting the first Pārājika, enacts what was not enacted. Etthāti, in the first Pārājika. Āsanti, hope for the capable. Āṇācakketi, in the wheel called the command.

aṭṭhikaṃkucchitatthena, kucchitatthe hi ko. Aṭṭhikameva khalo nīcaṭṭhena lāmakaṭṭhenātiaṭṭhikaṅkhaloniggahītāgamaṃ katvā. Tena upamā sadisātiaṭṭhikaṅkhalūpamā. ‘‘Aṭṭhī’’ti ca ‘‘kaṅkhala’’nti ca padaṃ gahetvā vaṇṇenti ācariyā (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.417; vi. vi. ṭī. pācittiya 2.417; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.42; ma. ni. ṭī. 3.42).Aṅgārakāsūpamāti aṅgārarāsisadisā, aṅgārehi vā paripuṇṇā āvāṭasadisā.Asisūnūpamāti etthaasīti khaggo. So hi asate khipate anenāti ‘‘asī’’ti vuccati.Sūnāti adhikoṭṭanaṃ. Tañhi sunati sañcuṇṇabhāvaṃ gacchati etthāti ‘‘sūnā’’ti vuccati. Asinā sūnātiasisūnā,tāya upamā sadisātiasisūnūpamā. Sattisūlūpamāti sattiyā ca sūlena ca sadisā.Etthāti imissaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ.Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃalagaddūpamasutte (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.234 ādayo) gahetabbo. Evaṃsaddakhosaddānamantare viyasaddassa byādesabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ viya kho’’ti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

aṭṭhikaṃ because of the despicable meaning, for the despicable meaning is ko. Aṭṭhikaṃ is itself khalo in the sense of lowliness, in the sense of inferiority, therefore aṭṭhikaṅkhalo having made an augment of niggahīta. Because of that, the simile is similar, therefore aṭṭhikaṅkhalūpamā. The teachers describe it taking the terms "aṭṭhī" and "kaṅkhala" (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.417; vi. vi. ṭī. pācittiya 2.417; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.42; ma. ni. ṭī. 3.42). Aṅgārakāsūpamāti, similar to a heap of embers, or similar to a pit full of embers. Asisūnūpamāti, here asīti means sword. Because it is thrown or cast, it is called asī. Sūnāti means an abattoir. Because one grinds and turns into powder here, it is called sūnā. Asinā sūnāti asisūnā, similar to that is asisūnūpamā. Sattisūlūpamāti, similar to a spear and a stake. Etthāti, in this commentary. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ one should take the Alagaddūpama Sutta (M.A. 1.234 onwards). To show the stating character of the word viya between the words evaṃ and kho, it is said, "evaṃ viya kho". Eighth.

9. Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadaṃ
9. Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadaṃ

424.Navame anudhammassa sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anulomavattaṃ disvā katā osāraṇā’’ti. Iminā anulomavattaṃ disvā kato osāraṇasaṅkhāto dhammoanudhammoti dasseti.Osāraṇāti pavesanā.Tenevāti ukkhittakassa akaṭānudhammattā eva.Assāti ‘‘akaṭānudhammenā’’ti padassa.

424. In the ninth, to show the nature of anudhammo it is said ‘‘anulomavattaṃ disvā katā osāraṇā’’ti (the expulsion done having seen an act that is in accordance). By this, he shows that the Dhamma that is the expulsion done having seen an act that is in accordance is anudhammo. Osāraṇāti means admitting. Tenevāti, just because of not having done the Anudhamma of the expelled one. Assāti, of the term "akaṭānudhammenā".

Dadato vā gaṇhato vāti vāsaddo aniyamavikappatthoti. Navamaṃ.

Dadato vā gaṇhato vāti, the word is in the sense of indefinite alternative. Ninth.

10. Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadaṃ
10. Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadaṃ

428.Dasame ariṭṭhassa uppannaṃ viya etassāpi uppannanti yojanā.Ummajjantassāti manasikarontassa. Saṃvāsassa nāsanāsaṃvāsanāsanā. Liṅgassa nāsanāliṅganāsanā. Daṇḍakammena nāsanādaṇḍakammanāsanā. Tatthāti tividhāsu nāsanāsu.Dūsako…pe… nāsethāti ettha ayaṃ nāsanā liṅganāsanā nāmāti yojanā.Ayanti daṇḍakammanāsanā.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade, ‘‘nāsetū’’ti pade vā.Tatthāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ, ‘‘evañca pana bhikkhave’’ti ādivacaneti attho.Pireti āmantanapadaṃ parasaddena samānatthanti āha ‘‘parā’’ti. ‘‘Amhākaṃ anajjhattikabhūta’’iti vā ‘‘amhākaṃ paccanīkabhūta’’ iti vā attho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Amāmaka’’itipadena ‘‘para’’itipadassa adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti. Amhe namamāyaka, amhehi vā namamāyitabba iti attho. ‘‘Amhāmaka’’itipi hakārayutto pāṭho. Amhehi āmakaiti attho.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.Teti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, tanti attho. Tava rūpasadde vāti sambandho.Na passāmāti na passāma, na suṇāma.

428. In the tenth, the connection is that what arose for Ariṭṭha, arose for this one too. Ummajjantassāti means for the one giving attention. Saṃvāsassa nāsanā saṃvāsanāsanā means destruction of cohabitation. Liṅgassa nāsanā liṅganāsanā means destruction of the sign. Daṇḍakammena nāsanā daṇḍakammanāsanā means destruction by Daṇḍakamma. Tatthāti, among the three kinds of destruction. Dūsako…pe… nāsethāti, here, this destruction is called destruction of the sign. Ayanti, this is destruction by Daṇḍakamma. Idhāti, in this training rule, or in the term "nāsetū". Tatthāti, in relation to the previous statement, the meaning is in the statement beginning with "evañca pana bhikkhave". Pireti, a word of address that is similar in meaning to the word para, he says, "parā" (other). The meaning should be seen as "not belonging to us" or "being hostile to us." With the term "Amāmaka", he shows the intended meaning of the term "para". The meaning is: we do not have ownership, or it should not be owned by us. "Amhāmaka" is also a reading with the letter ha. The meaning is: we are not intimate. Yatthāti, in whatever place. Teti, the plural form is in the sense of use, the meaning is tanti. The connection is with your word of appearance. Na passāmāti, we do not see, we do not hear.

429.Tenāti sāmaṇerena. ‘‘Kārāpeyyā’’ti pade kāritakammanti. Dasamaṃ.

429. Tenāti, by the novice. In the term "Kārāpeyyā," the action caused. Tenth.

Sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.

Sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.

8. Sahadhammikavaggo

8. Sahadhammikavaggo

1. Sahadhammikasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Sahadhammikasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

434.Sahadhammikavaggassa paṭhameyanti yaṃ paññattaṃ. ‘‘Sikkhamānenā’’ti ettha mānapaccayassa anāgatatthabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhitukāmenā’’ti. ‘‘Sikkhamānenā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘bhikkhunā’’tipade eva na kevalaṃ kārakavisesanaṃ hoti, atha kho ‘‘aññātabba’’ntiādipadesupi kiriyāvisesanaṃ hotīti dassento āha ‘‘hutvā’’ti.Padatthatoti padato ca atthato ca, padānaṃ atthato vāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

434. In the first of the Sahadhammika section, yanti, what was enacted. In "Sikkhamānenā", to show the future meaning of the māna suffix, it is said, "by one who wishes to train." Showing that the term "Sikkhamānenā" is not only a special adjective of the term "bhikkhunā," but indeed a special adjective of the action even in terms like "aññātabba," he says, "having become." Padatthatoti, from the words and from the meaning, or from the meaning of the words. First.

2. Vilekhanasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Vilekhanasikkhāpadaṃ

438.Dutiye vinaye paṭisaṃyuttā kathāvinayakathāti dassento āha ‘‘vinayakathā nāmā’’tiādi.Tanti vinayakathaṃ. Padabhājanena vaṇṇanā vinayassa vaṇṇo nāmāti yojanā.Tanti vinayassa vaṇṇaṃ. Pariyāpuṇanaṃpariyatti,vinayassa pariyattivinayapariyatti,vinayapariyattisaṅkhātaṃ mūlamassa vaṇṇassātivinayapariyattimūlako,taṃ. Vinayadharo labhatīti sambandho.ti vitthāro. Te sabbe bhagavā bhāsatīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.

438. In the second, showing that a talk connected with the Vinaya is vinayakathā, he says, "vinayakathā nāmā," etc. Tanti, that Vinaya talk. The meaning is that the description with the division of words is called the beauty of the Vinaya. Tanti, that beauty of the Vinaya. Pariyāpuṇanaṃ pariyatti, vinayassa pariyatti vinayapariyatti, the root of that beauty, which is called Vinaya-pariyatti, is vinayapariyattimūlako, that. The connection is that the Vinayadhara obtains it. ti, detail. All those the Blessed One speaks. ti, truly.

Assāti vinayadharassa.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Alajjitātiādīsu karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Alajjitāyāti hi attho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kathaṃ alajjitāyā’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ. ‘‘Sañciccā’’ti padaṃ tīsu vākyesu yojetabbaṃ. Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, sañcicca āpattiṃ parigūhati, sañcicca agatigamanañca gacchatīti attho.Mandoti bālo.Momūhoti atisammūḷho.Virādhetīti virajjhāpeti.Kukkucce uppanneti ‘‘kappati nu kho, no’’ti vinayakukkucce uppanne.Ayaṃ panāti ayaṃ puggalo pana vītikkamatiyevāti sambandho. Acchamaṃsena sūkaramaṃsassa vaṇṇasaṇṭhānena sadisattā, dīpimaṃsena ca migamaṃsassa sadisattā vuttaṃ ‘‘acchamaṃsaṃ sūkaramaṃsa’’ntiādi.

Assāti of the Vinaya-holder. Idhati in this Dispensation. In Alajjitāti, etc., the singular number is used in the sense of instrument. For it means, indeed, for the sake of shamelessness. Therefore, it was said, "How is it for the sake of shamelessness?" etc. ti truly. The word "Sañcicca" (deliberately) should be connected to the three clauses. The meaning is: deliberately commits an offence, deliberately conceals an offence, and deliberately goes to partiality. Mandoti foolish. Momūhoti very deluded. Virādhetīti causes to offend. Kukkucce uppanneti when doubt arises, thinking, "Is it allowable, or not?". Ayaṃ panāti the connection is: but this person transgresses indeed. Because of the similarity in color and shape between bear meat and pork, and between leopard meat and deer meat, it was said, "Bear meat is pork," etc.

Āpattiṃca satisammosāyāti ettha casaddo avuttavākyasampiṇḍanattho, kattabbañca na hi karotīti attho.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.

Āpattiṃca satisammosāyāti here, the word "ca" combines statements not previously mentioned, meaning: and does not do what should be done. Evantiādi is the conclusion.

Soti vinayadharo.ti vitthāro.Parūpavādanti paresaṃ upavādaṃ.Suddhanteti suddhassa koṭṭhāse.Tatoti patiṭṭhānato paranti sambandho.Assāti vinayadharassa.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.Assāti vinayadharassa.Kukkuccapakatānanti kukkuccena abhibhūtānaṃ.Soti vinayadharo.Tehīti kukkuccapakatehi. Saṅghamajjhe kathentassa avinayadharassāti yojanā.Tanti bhayaṃ sārajjaṃ.

Soti the Vinaya-holder. ti elaboration. Parūpavādanti criticism of others. Suddhanteti in the pure section. Tatoti the connection is: beyond the basis. Assāti of the Vinaya-holder. Evantiādi is the conclusion. Assāti of the Vinaya-holder. Kukkuccapakatānanti of those overcome by doubt. Soti the Vinaya-holder. Tehīti by those overcome by doubt. The construction is: of the non-Vinaya-holder speaking in the midst of the Sangha. Tanti fear, hesitation.

paccatthīkā,ṇyasaddo bahulaṃ kattābhidhāyako, attano paccatthikāattapaccatthikā. Tatthāti duvidhesu paccatthikesu.Imeti mettiyabhummajakavaḍḍhalicchavino. Aññepi ye vā pana bhikkhūti sambandho. Ariṭṭhabhikkhu ca kaṇṭakasāmaṇero ca vesālikavajjiputtakā caariṭṭha…pe… vajjīputtakā. Te ca sāsanapaccatthikā nāmāti sambandho. Parūpahāro ca aññāṇo ca kaṅkhāparavitaraṇo caparū…pe… vitaraṇā. Te ādayo yesaṃ vādānantiparū…pe… vitaraṇādayo. Te eva vādā etesantiparū…pe… vitaraṇādivādā. Te ca sāsanapaccatthikā nāmāti sambandho. Abuddhasāsanaṃ buddhasāsananti vatvā katapaggahā mahāsaṅghikādayo ca sāsanapaccatthikā nāmāti yojanā.Kaṅkhāparavitaraṇādīti ettha ādisaddena kathāvatthupakaraṇe āgatā vādā saṅgayhanti.Mahāsaṅghikādayoti ettha ādisaddena dīpavaṃse āgatā gaṇā saṅgayhanti. Ādimhi ‘‘viparītadassanā’’ti padaṃ sabbapadehi yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Sahadhammenā’’ti padassatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saha kāraṇenā’’ti.Yathāti yenākārena niggayhamāneti sambandho.

paccatthīkā, the suffix "-ṇya" often denotes the agent, one's own adversaries are attapaccatthikā. Tatthāti among the two kinds of adversaries. Imeti the Mettiya-Bhummajaka-Vaḍḍhalicchavis. The connection is: and any other monks whatsoever. Ariṭṭha…pe… vajjīputtakā are Ariṭṭha-bhikkhu, and Kaṇṭaka-sāmaṇera, and the Vesālika-Vajjiputtakas. The connection is: they are called adversaries of the Dispensation. parūpahāro (scorn), and aññāṇo (ignorance), and kaṅkhāparavitaraṇo (dispelling doubt in others), parū…pe… vitaraṇā are the beginnings of whose doctrines, parū…pe… vitaraṇādayo (scorn, etc.). Those very doctrines are theirs, parū…pe… vitaraṇādivādā. The connection is: they are called adversaries of the Dispensation. The connection is: the Mahāsaṅghikas and others, who, having made an assertion, saying the non-Buddha's Dispensation is the Buddha's Dispensation, are called adversaries of the Dispensation. In Kaṅkhāparavitaraṇādīti, the doctrines that come in the Kathāvatthu-pakaraṇa are included by the word "ādi". In Mahāsaṅghikādayoti, the groups that come in the Dīpavaṃsa are included by the word "ādi". At the beginning, the phrase "viparītadassanā" should be connected with all the terms. To show the meaning of the phrase "Sahadhammenā", it was said, "saha kāraṇenā". Yathāti the connection is: in whatever way he is being refuted.

Tatthāti tividhesu saddhammesu. Mahāvattāni santi, ayaṃ sabboti yojanā. Cattāri phalāni cāti liṅgavipallāsena yojetabbaṃ. Ettha cakārena abhiññāpaṭisambhidā saṅgahitā tāsampi adhigamasāsanabhāvato.

Tatthāti among the three kinds of true Dhammas. The connection is: the great practices exist, this is all. And the four fruits should be connected by way of gender-inversion (liṅgavipallāsena). Here, by the particle "ca", the supernormal knowledges (abhiññā) and analytical knowledges (paṭisambhidā) are included, because of their nature of being the teaching of attainment.

Tatthāti tividhesu saddhammesu.Keci therāti dhammakathikā keci therā. ‘‘Yo kho’’ti kaṇṭhajadutiyakkharena paṭhitabbo. Potthakesu pana ‘‘yo vo’’ti vakārena pāṭho atthi, so ayutto. Kasmā? ‘‘So vo’’ti parato vuttattā, ekasmiṃ vākye dvinnaṃ samānasutisaddānaṃ ayuttattā ca.Keci therāti paṃsukūlikā keci therā āhaṃsūti sambandho.Itare pana therāti dhammakathikatherehi ca paṃsukūlikatherehi ca aññe therā.Teti pañca bhikkhū karissantīti sambandho. Jambudīpassa paccante tiṭṭhatītipaccantimo,tasmiṃ. Jambudīpassa majjhe vemajjhe tiṭṭhatītimajjhimo. Atha vā majjhānaṃ suddhānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ nivāsomajjhimo,tasmiṃ. Vīsati vaggā imassātivīsativaggo,soyeva gaṇovīsativaggagaṇo,taṃ.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.

Tatthāti among the three kinds of true Dhammas. Keci therāti some elders who are Dhamma-speakers. "Yo kho" should be read with the second guttural "kha". But in the books there is a reading with "va" as "yo vo", that is incorrect. Why? Because "so vo" is said further on, and because it is incorrect to have two words with similar sounds in one sentence. Keci therāti the connection is: some elders who are dust-heap-rag-wearers (paṃsukūlikā) said. Itare pana therāti other elders than the Dhamma-speaking elders and the dust-heap-rag-wearing elders. Teti the connection is: five monks will do. One who stands at the border of Jambudīpa is paccantimo, in that. One who stands in the middle, in the very middle of Jambudīpa is majjhimo. Or else, the abode of those in the middle, the pure ones, the Buddhas, etc., is majjhimo, in that. This has twenty groups, so it is vīsativaggo, that very group is vīsativaggagaṇo, that. Evantiādi is the conclusion.

Tassādheyyoti tassāyatto, tassa santakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pavāraṇā ādheyyā, saṅghakammaṃ ādheyyaṃ, pabbajjā ādheyyā, upasampadā ādheyyāti yojanā.

Tassādheyyoti dependent on him, it is said that it belongs to him. The connection is: Pavāraṇā is dependent, Sanghakamma is dependent, Pabbajjā is dependent, Upasampadā is dependent.

Tassāti vinayadharassa.Tāsanti navapavāraṇānaṃ.

Tassāti of the Vinaya-holder. Tāsanti of the nine pavāraṇās.

Yānipi imāni cattāri saṅghakammānīti yojetabbaṃ. Ettha ca tāni vinayadharāyattānevāti pāṭhaseso ajjhāharitabbo.

The connection is: these four Sanghakamma should be connected. Here, that they are dependent on the Vinaya-holder should be supplied as the remainder of the reading.

ti saccaṃ.Aññoti vinayadharato paro.So evāti vinayadharo eva. ‘‘Upajjha’’nti dhātukammaṃ, ‘‘sāmaṇerenā’’ti kāritakammaṃ upanetabbaṃ.Ettha cāti uposathādīsu ca. Nissayadānañca sāmaṇerūpaṭṭhānañca visuṃ katvā dvādasānisaṃse labhatītipi sakkā vattuṃ.

ti truly. Aññoti other than the Vinaya-holder. So evāti the Vinaya-holder himself. "Upajjha" is the direct object, "sāmaṇerenā" is the causative object to be brought near. Ettha cāti and here, in Uposatha, etc. It is also possible to say that he obtains the twelve benefits by separately performing giving dependence and attending on the novice.

Visuṃ visuṃ katvāti ‘‘pañcāti ca…pe… ekādasā’’ti ca koṭṭhāsaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā, satta koṭṭhāse katvā bhāsatīti adhippāyo.Thometīti sammukhā thometi.Pasaṃsatīti parammukhā pasaṃsati. ‘‘Uggahetabba’’ntipadassatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyāpuṇitabba’’nti. Addhani dīghe sādhūtiaddhaniyaṃaddhakkhamaṃ addhayogyanti attho sādhuatthe niyapaccayo (moggallāne 4.33.73).

Visuṃ visuṃ katvāti making each section separately, such as "five, etc. ... eleven", meaning he speaks having made seven sections. Thometīti praises to his face. Pasaṃsatīti praises behind his back. To show the meaning of the phrase "Uggahetabba", it was said "pariyāpuṇitabba". Addhani dīghe sādhūti addhaniyaṃ, meaning suitable for a long journey, fit for a journey, proper for a journey; the suffix "niya" is in the sense of "sādhu" (good) (Moggallāna 4.33.73).

Therā ca navā ca majjhimā ca bahū te bhikkhū pariyāpuṇantīti yojanā.

The connection is: Those many monks, elders, new ones, and middling ones, learn thoroughly.

439.‘‘Uddissamāne’’ti padassa kammarūpattaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘uddisiyamāne’’ti.So panāti pātimokkho pana. Yasmā uddissamāno nāma hoti, tasmāti yojanā.Uddisante vāti uddisiyamāne vā.Uddisāpente vāti uddisāpiyamāne vā. Antasaddo hi mānasaddakāriyo.Yoti bhikkhu.Nanti taṃ pātimokkhaṃ. Casaddo khuddānukhuddakapadassa dvannavākyaṃ dasseti, pubbapade kakāralopo daṭṭhabbo.Tesanti khuddānukhuddākānaṃ.ti saccaṃ.Etānīti khuddānukhuddakāni.Yeti bhikkhū. ‘‘Yāva uppajjatiyeva, tāva saṃvattanti iti vuttaṃ hotīti yojanā imassa nayassa pāṭhasesehi yojetabbattā. Garukabhāvaṃ sallakkhento lahukabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi.Ativiyāti ati i eva. Ikāro hi sandhivasena adassanaṃ gato. Viyasaddo evakāratthavācako ‘‘varamhākaṃ bhusāmivā’’ti ettha (jā. 1.3.108) ivasaddo viya, ati hutvā evāti attho daṭṭhabbo.‘‘Upasampannassā’’ti ettha samīpe sāmivacananti (rupasiddhiyaṃ 316 sutte) āha ‘‘upasampannassa santike’’ti.Tassāti upasampannassa.Tasminti vinaye.Vivaṇṇetīti na kevalaṃ tasseva vivaṇṇamattameva, atha kho nindatiyevāti āha ‘‘nindatī’’ti.Garahatīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Atha vānindatīti upasampannassa sammukhā nindati.Garahatīti parammukhā garahatīti. Dutiyaṃ.

439.To show that the word "Uddissamāne" is in the passive voice, it was said, "uddisiyamāne". So panāti but that Pātimokkha. The connection is: since it is called "being recited". Uddisante vāti or while reciting. Uddisāpente vāti or while causing to be recited. The word "anta" indeed causes the sense of "māna". Yoti bhikkhu (monk). Nanti that Pātimokkha. The word "ca" shows that the phrase "khuddānukhuddaka" has two meanings; the loss of the "ka" at the beginning should be seen. Tesanti of the minor and insignificant. ti truly. Etānīti the minor and insignificant. Yeti bhikkhus (monks). "Yāva uppajjatiyeva, tāva saṃvattanti iti vuttaṃ hotī"ti, the connection is that this statement should be connected with the remainder of this method. Considering the seriousness, showing the lightness, he says "atha vā" etc. Ativiyāti ati i eva. The "i" has gone unseen due to sandhi. The word "viya" expresses the sense of "eva" (indeed), like the word "iva" in "varamhākaṃ bhusāmivā" (Jā. 1.3.108), "ati" having become "eva" (indeed), the meaning should be seen. ‘‘Upasampannassā’’ti here, "samīpe sāmivacananti" (in the Rūpasiddhi, sūtra 316), he says "upasampannassa santike". Tassāti of the fully ordained. Tasminti in that Vinaya. Vivaṇṇetīti not only describes its faults alone, but indeed criticizes, so he says "nindatī". Garahatīti a synonym of that very word. Or else, nindatīti criticizes the fully ordained to his face. Garahatīti criticizes behind his back. The second.

3. Mohanasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Training Rule on Confusing

444.Tatiye anusaddo paṭipāṭiatthaṃ antokatvā vicchatthavācakoti āha ‘‘anupaṭipāṭiyā addhamāse addhamāse’’ti.Soti pātimokkho. Uposathe uposathe uddisitabbantianuposathikaṃ. Etthāpi hi anusaddo vicchatthavācako.Soti pātimokkho. Uddisiyamāno nāma hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Tasmiṃ anācāre’’ti padena ‘‘tatthā’’ti padassatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yaṃ āpatti’’nti padena yaṃsaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.Yathādhammoti ettha dhammasaddena dhammo ca vinayo ca adhippetoti āha ‘‘dhammo ca vinayo cā’’ti.Yathāti yenākārena.Sādhusaddo sundarattho,kasaddo padapūraṇoti āha ‘‘suṭṭhū’’ti. Aṭṭhinti ca ‘‘katvā’’ti ca dve padāni daṭṭhabbāni. ‘‘Aṭṭhikatvā’’ti vā ekaṃ padaṃ. Tattha pubbanaye attho yassatthītiaṭṭhitthakārassa ṭṭhakāraṃ katvā, taṃ aṭṭhiṃ.Katvāti tvāpaccayantauttarapadena samāso na hoti.Aṭṭhikabhāvanti ettha ikasaddena ‘‘aṭṭhī’’ti ettha īpaccayaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bhāva’’ntipadena bhāvapaccayena vinā bhāvatthassa ñāpetabbataṃ dasseti. Attho panevaṃ daṭṭhabbo – aṭṭhibhāvaṃ katvāti. Pacchimanaye attho yassatthītiaṭṭhikopurimanayeneva tthakārassa ṭṭhakāraṃ katvā. Atthayitabbo icchitabboti vāaṭṭhiko,aṭṭhikaiti nāmasaddato tvāpaccayo kātabbo. ‘‘Aṭṭhikatvā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ kiriyāvisesanaṃ. Kiriyāvisesane vattamāne karadhātu vā bhūdhātu vā yojetabbāti dassebhuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘katvā hutvā’’ti. Taṃ sabbaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aṭṭhikatvāti aṭṭhikabhāvaṃ katvā, aṭṭhiko hutvā’’ti. Tatiyaṃ.

444.In the third, the word "anu" having brought the sense of sequence inside, is a word expressing distribution, so he says "anupaṭipāṭiyā addhamāse addhamāse". Soti the Pātimokkha. Uposathe uposathe uddisitabbanti anuposathikaṃ. Here also, the word "anu" expresses distribution. Soti the Pātimokkha. The connection is: it is called "being recited". By the phrase "Tasmiṃ anācāre", he shows the meaning of the phrase "tatthā". By the phrase "Yaṃ āpatti", he shows the scope of the word "yaṃ". Yathādhammoti here, by the word "dhamma", both Dhamma and Vinaya are intended, so he says "dhammo ca vinayo cā". Yathāti in whatever way. The word Sādhu has the sense of beautiful, the word ka is for filling the sentence, so he says "suṭṭhū". The two words "aṭṭhiṃ" and "katvā" should be seen. Or else "aṭṭhikatvā" is one word. There, in the first method, one who has meaning is aṭṭhi, having made the "th" into "ṭṭh", that aṭṭhiṃ. Katvāti there is no compound with a tva-participle as the last word. In Aṭṭhikabhāvanti, by the suffix "ika", he shows the suffix "ī" in "aṭṭhī". By the word "Bhāva", he shows that the sense of "bhāva" should be understood without the suffix "bhāva". But the meaning should be seen thus: katvā aṭṭhibhāvaṃ. In the later method, one who has meaning is aṭṭhiko, having made the "th" into "ṭṭh" as in the first method. Or else, something that should be sought, should be desired is aṭṭhiko, the suffix "tvā" should be made from the name-word "aṭṭhika". "Aṭṭhikatvā" this word is an adverb. When expressing an adverb, either the verb "karu" or the verb "bhū" should be connected, so to show that, it was said "katvā hutvā". Showing all that, he says "aṭṭhikatvāti aṭṭhikabhāvaṃ katvā, aṭṭhiko hutvā". The third.

4. Pahārasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Training Rule on Striking

449.Catutthe kasmā chabbaggiyā sattarasavaggiyānaṃ pahāraṃ denti, nanu akāraṇena pahāraṃ dentīti āha ‘‘āvuso’’tiādi. Iminā yathā vadanti, tathā akatattā pahāraṃ dentīti dasseti.

449.In the fourth, why do the Group-of-Six monks strike the Group-of-Seventeen monks; surely they strike without reason, so he says "āvuso" etc. By this, he shows that they strike because they do not act as they speak.

451.Sacepīti ettha pisaddena sace amarati, kā nāma kathā, pācittiyamevāti dasseti.Pahārenāti pahārahetunā.Yathāti yenākārena.Ayanti bhikkhu.Na virocatīti na sobhati.

451.Sacepīti here, by the particle "pi", he shows: if he dies, what is there to say, it is only a pācittiya. Pahārenāti due to striking. Yathāti in whatever way. Ayanti bhikkhu (monk). Na virocatīti does not shine.

452.‘‘Anupasampannassā’’ti ettha akārassa aññatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘gahaṭṭhassa vā’’tiādi.Pabbajitassa vāti paribbājakassa vā sāmaṇerassa vā.

452.In "Anupasampannassā", to show that the "a" means something else, it was said, "gahaṭṭhassa vā" etc. Pabbajitassa vāti or of a wanderer or a novice.

453.‘‘Kenacī’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘manussena vā’’tiādi.Tatoti viheṭhanato, iminā mokkhassa apādānaṃ dasseti, ‘‘attano’’ti iminā sambandhaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Patthayamāno’’ti iminā ‘‘adhippāyo’’ti padassatthaṃ dasseti.Muggarena vāti catuhatthadaṇḍassa addhena daṇḍena vā.Soti corādikoti. Catutthaṃ.

453.To show the meaning of the word "Kenacī", it was said, "manussena vā" etc. Tatoti from that harassment, by this he shows the ablative of the liberation, by "attano" he shows the relationship. By "Patthayamāno", he shows the meaning of the word "adhippāyo". Muggarena vāti or with half of a four-cubit stick, or with a stick. Soti a thief, etc. The fourth.

5. Talasattikasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Training Rule on Using a Palm as a Weapon

454.Pañcametalanti hatthatalaṃ. Tañhi talati yaṃkiñci gahitavatthu patiṭṭhāti etthāti ‘‘tala’’nti vuccati.Sattīti kunto. So hi sakati vijjhituṃ samatthetīti ‘‘sattī’’ti vuccati. Talameva sattisadisattātalasattikaṃ,sadisatthe ko, taṃ talasattikaṃ upacārena gahetvā ‘‘kāyampī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāyato aññaṃ vatthumpi talasattikasaṅkhātena kāyena gahetvā uggirattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyapaṭibaddhampī’’ti.‘‘Pahārasamuccitā’’ti ettha saṃpubbo ca upubbo ca cisaddo paguṇanasaṅkhāte paricite vattatīti āha ‘‘pahāraparicitā’’ti. Pahārena saṃ punappunaṃ uccitā paricitāti attho. Imamevatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbepi…pe… attho’’ti. Aññampi sajjhāyananayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pahārassa ubbigā’’ti.Tassāti tassa pāṭhassa.Pahārassāti pahārato. Nissakkatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhītā’’ti iminā ‘‘ubbigā’’ti ettha upubba vijadhātussatthaṃ dasseti.

454.In the fifth, talanti the palm of the hand. For indeed it is called "tala" because whatever object is held rests on it. Sattīti a lance. For indeed it is called "sattī" because it is capable of piercing. Since the palm itself is like a lance, talasattikaṃ, "ka" is in the sense of similarity, having taken that talasattikaṃ figuratively, it was said "kāyampī". Having taken even an object other than the body with the body known as talasattikaṃ and spat it out, it was said "kāyapaṭibaddhampī". In ‘‘Pahārasamuccitā’’, since the word "ci" with the prefixes "saṃ" and "upa" occurs in the sense of familiarity, it was said "pahāraparicitā". The meaning is: repeatedly familiarized with striking. With that very meaning in mind, it was said "pubbepi…pe… attho". To show another method of recitation, it was said "pahārassa ubbigā". Tassāti of that reading. Pahārassāti from striking. This is a possessive genitive in the sense of separation. By Bhītā, he shows the meaning of the verb-root "vij" with the prefix "upa" in "ubbigā".

457-8.Viraddhoti paṇṇako hutvā.Pubbeti purimasikkhāpade.Vuttesu vatthūsūti ‘‘coraṃ vā paccatthīkaṃ vā’’tiādinā vuttesu vatthūsūti. Pañcamaṃ.

457-8.Viraddhoti having become a eunuch. Pubbeti in the previous training rule. Vuttesu vatthūsūti in the objects that were mentioned by "coraṃ vā paccatthīkaṃ vā" etc. The fifth.

6. Amūlakasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Training Rule on Baseless Accusations

459.Chaṭṭheteti chabbaggiyā. Codenti kirāti sambandho.Ākiṇṇadosattāti tesaṃ ākulaādīnavattā.Evanti codiyamāne.Attaparittāṇanti attano parisamantato tāṇaṃ rakkhanaṃ karontā codentīti yojanāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

459.In the sixth, teti the Group-of-Six. The connection is: they accuse. Ākiṇṇadosattāti because of their state of being crowded with faults. Evanti while being accused. Attaparittāṇanti the connection is: they accuse while making protection around themselves.

7. Sañciccasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Training Rule on Deliberately Arousing Doubt

464.Sattame upapubbadahadhātussa sakammikattā kāritantogadhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘uppādentī’’ti.‘‘Anupasampannassā’’ti ettha akārassa sadisatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sāmaṇerassā’’ti. Sāmaṇeropi hi upasampannena sadiso hoti saṇṭhānena ca purisabhāvena ca. Sāmaṇerassa kukkuccaṃ upadahatīti sambandho. Nisinnaṃ maññe, nipannaṃ maññe, bhuttaṃ maññe, pītaṃ maññe, kataṃ maññeti yojanā.Nisinnanti nisīditaṃ.Nipannanti nipajjitanti. Sattamaṃ.

464.In the seventh, since the verb-root "dah" with the prefix "upa" is transitive, to show its causative aspect, it was said, "uppādentī". In ‘‘Anupasampannassā’’, to show the similar meaning of the "a", it was said "sāmaṇerassā". For indeed, a novice is similar to a fully ordained one in shape and in being a male. The connection is: he causes doubt to arise in a novice. The connection is: I think he is sitting, I think he is lying down, I think he has eaten, I think he has drunk, I think he has done. Nisinnanti having sat down. Nipannanti having lain down. The seventh.

8. Upassutisikkhāpadaṃ
8. The Training Rule on Eavesdropping

471.Aṭṭhame ‘‘adhikaraṇajātāna’’nti ettha adhikaraṇassa pakaraṇato vivādādhikaraṇabhāvañca visesanaparapadabhāvañca dassento āha ‘‘uppannavivādādhikaraṇāna’’nti. Tattha uppannasaddena jātasaddassatthaṃ dasseti. Vivādasaddena adhikaraṇassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Suyyatītisutivacanaṃ, sutiyā samīpaṃupassutiṭhānanti atthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sutisamīpa’’nti. ‘‘Samīpa’’nti iminā upasaddassatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yatthā’’tiādinā ‘‘upassutī’’ti ettha upasaddassa padhānattā tassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.Mantentanti ettha upayogavacanassa bhummatthe adhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘mantayamāne’’ti.

471. In the eighth, regarding "adhikaraṇajātāna," explaining that the adhikaraṇa is a matter of dispute due to the context and its nature as a specific descriptive term, he says, "uppannavivādādhikaraṇāna." Here, the word uppanna shows the meaning of the word jāta. The word vivāda shows the nature of the adhikaraṇa. To show the meaning that suti means a saying that is heard, and upassuti is a place near the hearing, it is said, "sutisamīpa." With "samīpa," he shows the meaning of the prefix upa. With "yatthā," etc., because upa in "upassuti" is primary, he shows its nature. Yatthā means in which place. Regarding mantenta, because the instrumental case is intended in the sense of abundance, it is said, "mantayamāne."

473.‘‘Vūpasamissāmī’’ti ettha idhātuyā gatyatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘vūpasamaṃ gamissāmī’’ti.Akārakabhāvanti niddosabhāvaṃ. Sotukāmatāya gamanavasena siyā kiriyanti yojanā. Paratopi eseva nayoti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

473. Regarding "vūpasamissāmī," to show the meaning of going for the root i, it is said, "vūpasamaṃ gamissāmī." Akārakabhāva means a state of innocence. The connection is that it could be an action due to going out of a desire to hear. The same method applies further on. The eighth.

9. Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Training Rule on Rejecting an Act (Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadaṃ)

474.Navamemayanti chabbaggiyanāmakā amhe.Katattāti kammānaṃ katattā.Dhammoti bhūto sabhāvo.Etesūti catūsu saṅghakammesūti. Navamaṃ.

474. In the ninth, maya means we, the group of six monks. Katattā means because of having done the deeds. Dhammo means the true nature. Etesū means in these four Saṅgha acts. The ninth.

10. Chandaṃ adatvāgamanasikkhāpadaṃ

481.Dasame codeti parassa dosaṃ āropetīticodako. Tena ca codakena codetabbo dosaṃ āropetabboticudito,soyevacuditako,tena ca.‘‘Anuvijjakoti ca vinayadharo. So hi codakacuditakānaṃ mataṃ anuminetvā vidati jānātīti anuvijjako.Ettāvatāpīti ettakenapi pamāṇenāti. Dasamaṃ.

481. In the tenth, one who accuses, imputes a fault to another, is a codako. And the one who should be accused by that accuser, the one to whom the fault should be imputed, is cudito, and he himself is cuditako, by him. Anuvijjako is a vinayadhara. For he, having inferred the opinion of the accuser and the accused, knows, understands, therefore (he is) an anuvijjako. Ettāvatāpī means even by this much extent. The tenth.

11. Dubbalasikkhāpadaṃ
11. The Training Rule on the Weak (Dubbalasikkhāpadaṃ)

484.Ekādasame ‘‘alajjītā’’tiādīsu (pari. 295) viya yakāralopena niddesoti āha ‘‘yathāmittatāyā’’ti. ‘‘Yo yo’’ti iminā yathāsaddassa vicchatthaṃ dasseti. Yathāvuḍḍhantiādīsu (cūḷava. 311 ādayo) viya yo yo mitto‘‘yathāmitta’’nti vacanattho kātabbo.Sabbapadesūti ‘‘yathāsandiṭṭhatā’’tiādīsu sabbesu padesūti. Ekādasamaṃ.

484. In the eleventh, he says, "yathāmittatāyā" because, as in "alajjītā," etc. (pāri. 295), there is an elision of the yakāra. With "yo yo," he shows the diverse meaning of the word yathā. The meaning of the statement "yathāmitta" should be made (understood) as yo yo mitto, as in "yathāvuḍḍha," etc. (cūḷava. 311, etc.). Sabbapadesū means in all the places in "yathāsandiṭṭhatā," etc. The eleventh.

12. Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadaṃ
12. The Training Rule on Alteration (Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadaṃ)

489.Dvādasameyanti padatthavinicchayatthasaṅkhātaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ.Tatthāti tiṃsakakaṇḍe.Idhāti dvenavutikaṇḍe, sikkhāpade vā.Puggalassāti parapuggalassāti. Dvādasamaṃ.

489. In the twelfth, yaṃ means which statement, which is reckoned as the determination of the meaning of the word. Tatthā means in the thirtieth section. Idhā means in the ninety-second section, or in the training rule. Puggalassā means of another person. The twelfth.

Sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The Eighth Chapter, The Chapter on Co-religionists.

9. Ratanavaggo

9. The Ratanavagga

1. Antepurasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Explanation of the Meaning of the Training Rule on Entering the Inner Apartments

494.Rājavaggassa paṭhameparittakoti guṇena khuddako. Pāsādavarasaddassa uparisaddena sambandhitabbabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pāsādavarassa upari gato’’ti. Iminā pāsādavarassa upariuparipāsādavaraṃ,taṃ gato upagatotiuparipāsādavaragatoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Ayyānanti bhikkhūnaṃ. ‘‘Kāraṇā’’ti iminā ‘‘vāhasā’’ti padassatthaṃ dasseti.Tehīti ayyehi.

494. In the first of the chapter on kings, parittako means small in virtue. To show that the word pāsādavara should be connected with the word upari, it is said, "pāsādavarassa upari gato." With this, he shows the meaning that uparipāsādavara means upari pāsādavarassa, taṃ gato upagatoti uparipāsādavaragato. Ayyāna means of the bhikkhus. With "kāraṇā," he shows the meaning of the word "vāhasā." Tehī means by the ayyas.

497.Antaranti khaṇaṃ, okāsaṃ vā vivaraṃ vā.Ghātetunti hanituṃ. Icchatīti iminā patthadhātuyā yācanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Rājantepuraṃ hatthisammadda’’ntiādīsu vacanattho evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Hatthisammaddanti hatthisambādhaṭṭhānaṃ. Assehi sammaddo etthātiassasammaddo. Rathehi sammaddo etthātirathasammaddoti vacanatthaṃ atidisanto āha ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti. ‘‘Sammatta’’nti paṭhamakkharena pāṭhassa sambādhassa avācakattā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ na gahetabba’’nti.Tatthāti pāṭhe. ‘‘Hatthīnaṃ sammadda’’nti iminā uttarapadassa sammaddanaṃsammaddanti bhāvatthaṃ dasseti, purimapadena chaṭṭhīsamāsañca. Purimapāṭhe pana uttarapadassa adhikaraṇatthañca pubbapadena tatiyāsamāsañca dasseti. Bāhiratthasamāsotipi vuccati. Pacchimapāṭhe ‘‘hatthisammadda’’ntiādipadassa liṅgavipallāsañca ‘‘atthī’’ti pāṭhasesena yojetabbatañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘hatthisammaddo atthī’’ti.Rajitabbānīti rajanīyāni, rajituṃ arahānīti attho. Iminā sambandhakāle purimapāṭhe rañño antepureti vibhattivipallāso kātabboti. Pacchimapāṭhe pana mukhyatova yujjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiṃ antepure’’ti.

497. Antara means a moment, an opportunity, or an opening. Ghātetu means to kill. With icchatī, he shows the meaning of requesting for the root pattha. The connection is that the meaning of the statement in "rājantepuraṃ hatthisammadda," etc., should be understood thus. Hatthisammadda means a place crowded with elephants. Assasammaddo means a crowding of horses in this place. Rathasammaddo means a crowding of chariots in this place, extending the meaning, he says, "eseva nayo." Because "sammata" with the first letter being sa does not express crowding, it is said, "taṃ na gahetabba." Tatthā means in that reading. With "hatthīnaṃ sammadda," he shows that the latter word sammadda is in the sense of the action of crowding, and the former word is a genitive compound. But in the former reading, it shows that the latter word is in the sense of location and the former word is a tatīyā compound. It is also called a bahirattha compound. In the latter reading, to show the change of gender of the word "hatthisammadda," etc., and that it should be connected with the remaining part "atthī," it is said, "hatthisammaddo atthī." Rajitabbānī means things that should be dyed, things worthy of being dyed. The meaning is that, when connecting, in the former reading, the case endings should be changed to rañño antepureti. But in the latter reading, it mainly fits. Therefore, it is said, "tasmiṃ antepure."

498.Avasittassāti khattiyābhisekena abhisittassa.Itoti sayanigharato. Iminā pañcamībāhirasamāsaṃ dasseti. Rañño ratijananaṭṭhenaratanaṃvuccati mahesī.Mahesīti ca sābhisekā devī. Nipubba gamudhātussa nipubbakamudhātuyā pariyāyabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘niggatanti nikkhanta’’nti. Paṭhamaṃ.

498. Avasittassā means of one who has been consecrated with the consecration of a khattiya. Ito means from the sleeping chamber. With this, he shows a pañcamībahira compound. Ratanaṃ means the chief queen, because she is the cause of the king's delight. And mahesī means the consecrated queen. To show that ni prefixed to the root gamu is synonymous with ni prefixed to the root kamu, it is said, "niggatanti nikkhanta." The first.

2. Ratanasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Jewel Training Rule (Ratanasikkhāpadaṃ)

502.Dutiyepamussitvāti sativippavāsena pamussitvā.Puṇṇapattanti tuṭṭhidāyaṃ. Tañhi manorathapuṇṇena pattabbabhāgattā ‘‘puṇṇapatta’’nti vuccati. Tassa sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘satato pañca kahāpaṇā’’ti. Idha pana kahāpaṇānaṃ pañcasatattā pañcavīsakahāpaṇā adhippetā.Ābharaṇasaddassa alaṅkārasaddena pariyāyabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘alaṅkāra’’nti. ‘‘Mahālataṃ nāmā’’ti iminā na yo vā so vā alaṅkāro, atha kho visesālaṅkāroti dasseti. Mahantāni mālākammalatākammāni etthātimahālatā. Latāgahaṇena hi mālāpi gahitā. Navahi koṭīhi agghaṃ imassātinavakoṭiagghanakaṃ,navakoṭisaṅkhātaṃ agghaṃ arahatīti vānavakoṭiagghanakaṃ.

502. In the second, pamussitvā means having forgotten due to the loss of mindfulness. Puṇṇapatta means giving satisfaction. For it is called "puṇṇapatta" because it is obtained as a share that fulfills the desires. To show its nature, it is said, "satato pañca kahāpaṇā." Here, however, because the kahāpaṇas are five hundred, twenty-five kahāpaṇas are intended. To show that the word ābharaṇa is synonymous with the word alaṅkāra, it is said, "alaṅkāra." With "mahālataṃ nāmā," he shows that it is not just any ornament, but a special ornament. Mahālatā means in which there are great works of garlands and creeper works. By the mention of latā, garlands are also included. Navakoṭiagghanakaṃ means its value is nine koṭis, or it is worthy of a value reckoned as nine koṭis. Or navakoṭiagghanakaṃ.

504.Ante samīpe vasanasīlattā paricāriko‘‘antevāsī’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘paricāriko’’ti.

504. Because a servant resides near, (she) is called "antevāsī," therefore he says, "paricāriko."

506.Dve leḍḍupātāti thāmamajjhimassa purisassa dve leḍḍupātā. Saṅgha…pe… navakammānaṃ atthāya uggaṇhantassa vā uggaṇhāpentassa vā dukkaṭanti yojanā.Avasesanti jātarūparajatato avasesaṃ.Mātukaṇṇapiḷandhanatālapaṇṇampīti mātuyā kaṇṇe piḷandhitatālapaṇṇampi, paṭisāmentassāti sambandho.

506. Dve leḍḍupātā means two pellet throws of a man of medium strength. The connection is that there is a dukkata for one who is collecting or having (someone else) collect for the sake of the Saṅgha...pe... new construction. Avasesa means the remainder from gold and silver. Mātukaṇṇapiḷandhanatālapaṇṇampī means even a palm leaf worn in the mother's ear, the connection is to (one) returning it.

Idanti bhaṇḍaṃ.Palibodhonāmāti attano palibodho nāma.Chandenapīti vaḍḍhakīādīnaṃ chandahetunāpi.Bhayenapīti rājavallabhānaṃ bhayahetunāpi.Balakkārenāti karaṇaṃ kāro, balena kāro balakkāro, tena, balakkāro hutvā pātetvāti attho.

Idaṃ means this item. Palibodho nāmā means his own encumbrance is called. Chandenapī means even because of the desire of carpenters, etc. Bhayenapī means even because of the fear of those favored by the king. Balakkārenā means karaṇaṃ is kāro, balena kāro is balakkāro, by that, the meaning is having been a compulsion, having caused to fall.

Tatthāti mahārāme.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne, saṅkā uppajjatīti sambandho.Mahājanasañcaraṇaṭṭhānesūti bahūnaṃ janānaṃ sañcaraṇasaṅkhātesu ṭhānesu. Nagahetabbassa hetuṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘palibodho na hotī’’ti. Yasmā palibodho na hoti, tasmā na gahetabbanti adhippāyo.Ekoti eko bhikkhu passatīti sambandho.Okkammāti okkamitvā.

Tatthā means in that great grove. Yatthā means in which place, the connection is that doubt arises. Mahājanasañcaraṇaṭṭhānesū means in places described as frequented by many people. To show the reason for not taking what is not to be taken, it is said, "palibodho na hotī." The meaning is that since there is no encumbrance, therefore it should not be taken. Eko means one bhikkhu sees, is the connection. Okkammā means having stepped aside.

Rūpasaddo bhaṇḍapariyāyoti āha ‘‘bhaṇḍa’’nti. Bhaṇḍaṃ rūpaṃ nāmāti yojanā.Bhaṇḍikanti bhaṇḍena niyuttaṃ puṭakaṃ.Gaṇetvāti gaṇanaṃ katvā.Nimittantīti ettha itisaddo nāmapariyāyo. Lañchanādi nimittaṃ nāmāti hi yojanā. Lañchanādīti ādisaddena nīlapilotikādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Lākhāyāti jatunā.

The word rūpa is a synonym for item, therefore he says, "bhaṇḍa." The connection is bhaṇḍaṃ rūpaṃ nāmāti. Bhaṇḍika means a small box designated for items. Gaṇetvā means having counted. Nimittantī means here, the word iti is a synonym for name. For the connection is that a mark, etc., is called a nimitta. Lañchanādīti includes blue rags, etc., with the word ādi. Lākhāyā means with lac.

Thāvaranti jaṅgamā aññaṃ thāvaraṃ.Addhunoti kālassa.Samādapetvāti aññe samādapetvā. Uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyāna yācanā’’ti (jā. 1.7.59) vuttanayena yācitvāti attho.

Thāvara means a fixed thing other than a moving thing. Addhuno means of time. Samādapetvā means having persuaded others. The meaning is having requested, in the manner stated, "Uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyāna yācanā" (jā. 1.7.59).

507.Ratanasammatanti manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhoganti. Dutiyaṃ.

507. Ratanasammata means for the use and enjoyment of humans. The second.

3. Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Training Rule on Entering a Village at the Wrong Time (Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadaṃ)

508.Tatiye ‘‘tiracchānabhūtaṃ katha’’nti iminā‘‘tiracchānakatha’’nti padassa tulyanissitasamāsaṃ dasseti.Rājapaṭisaṃyuttanti rājūhi paṭisaṃyuttaṃ.

508. In the third, with "tiracchānabhūtaṃ katha," he shows a tulyanissita compound for the word "tiracchānakatha." Rājapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ means connected with kings.

512.Sambahulā bhikkhūti sambandho.Tasmiṃ gāmeti tasmiṃ paṭhamapavisanagāme.Taṃ kammanti taṃ icchitakammaṃ.Antarāti gāmavihārānamantare. Bhummatthe cetaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ.

512. The connection is that many bhikkhus. Tasmiṃ gāme means in that first village entered. Taṃ kammaṃ means that desired act. Antarā means between the village and the monastery. This is a statement without a case ending, in the sense of abundance.

Kulaghare vāti ñātikulaupaṭṭhākakulaghare vā.Telabhikkhāya vāti telayācanatthāya vā.Passeti attano passe samīpeti vuttaṃ hoti.Tenāti gāmamajjhamaggena.Anokkammāti anokkamitvā, apakkamitvāti atthoti. Tatiyaṃ.

Kulaghare vā means in the house of a relative or a supporting family. Telabhikkhāya vā means or for the purpose of requesting oil. Passe means near his own side, this is said. Tenā means by that middle of the village path. Anokkammā means without stepping aside, without departing, is the meaning. The third.

4. Sūcigharasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Needle Case Training Rule (Sūcigharasikkhāpadaṃ)

517.Catutthe kakārassa padapūraṇabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ‘‘bhedanameva bhedanaka’’nti. Assatthiatthe apaccayoti āha ‘‘taṃ assa atthī’’ti.Assāti pācittiyassa. Paṭhamaṃ sūcigharaṃ bhinditvā pacchā pācittiyaṃ desetabbanti attho.Araṇidhanuketi araṇiyā dhanuke.Vedhaketi kāyabandhanavedhaketi. Catutthaṃ.

517. In the fourth, to show that the kakāra fills the word, it is said "bhedanameva bhedanaka." He says that the affix is in the sense of having that thing: "taṃ assa atthī." Assā means of that pācittiya. The meaning is that first, having broken the needle case, then the pācittiya should be confessed. Araṇidhanuke means a fire-stick case. Vedhake means a belt fastener. The fourth.

5. Mañcasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Couch Training Rule (Mañcasikkhāpadaṃ)

522.Pañcame chedanameva chedanakaṃ, tamassatthītichedanakanti atthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vuttanayamevā’’ti.

522. In the fifth, intending the meaning that chedanameva chedanakaṃ, tamassatthīti chedanaka, it is said, "vuttanayameva."

Nikhaṇitvāti pamāṇātirekaṃ nikhaṇitvā.Uttānaṃ vā katvāti heṭṭhupari parivattanaṃ vā katvā.Ṭhapetvāti lambaṇavasena ṭhapetvāti. Pañcamaṃ.

Nikhaṇitvā means having dug (the legs) beyond the (proper) measure. Uttānaṃ vā katvā means or having turned (it) upside down. Ṭhapetvā means having placed (it) in a suspended manner. The fifth.

6. Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Cotton-Filled Training Rule (Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadaṃ)

526.Chaṭṭheetthāti mañcapīṭhe. Avanahitabbantionaddhaṃ,tūlena onaddhaṃtūlonaddhanti atthopi yujjati.Tūlaṃ pakkhipitvāti mañcapīṭhe cimilikaṃ pattharitvā tassupari tūlaṃ pakkhipitvāti atthoti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

526. In the sixth, etthā means on the couch or chair. Avanahitabbanti onaddhaṃ, tūlena onaddhaṃ tūlonaddhanti, this meaning also fits. Tūlaṃ pakkhipitvā means having spread a cimilika on the couch or chair, having put cotton on top of that, is the meaning. The sixth.

7. Nisīdanasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Sitting Cloth Training Rule (Nisīdanasikkhāpadaṃ)

531.Sattamekatthāti kismiṃ khandhake, kismiṃ vatthusmiṃ vā.ti saccaṃ.Tatthāti cīvarakkhandhake, paṇītabhojanavatthusmiṃ vā. ‘‘Yathā nāmā’’ti iminā ‘‘seyyathāpī’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘purāṇo cammakāro’’ti iminā ‘‘purāṇāsikoṭṭho’’ti padassa. Cammakāro hi asinā cammaṃ kuṭati chindatīti‘‘asikoṭṭho’’ti vuccati. Vatthuppannakālamupanidhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘purāṇo’’ti. Tamevūpamaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto āha‘‘yathā hī’’ti.ti tappākaṭīkaraṇaṃ, taṃ pākaṭaṃ karissāmīti hi attho. Cammakāro kaḍḍhatīti sambandho.Vitthatanti visālaṃ.Sopīti udāyīpi. Taṃ nisīdanaṃ kaḍḍhatīti yojanā.Tenāti kaḍḍhanahetunā.Tanti udāyiṃ.Santhatasadisanti santhatena sadisaṃ.Ekasmiṃ anteti ekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse, phāletvāti sambandhoti. Sattamaṃ.

531. In the seventh, katthā means in which section, or in which object. means truly. Tatthā means in the robe section, or in the delicious food object. With "yathā nāmā," he shows the meaning of the word "seyyathāpī," and with "purāṇo cammakāro," the meaning of the word "purāṇāsikoṭṭho." For a leather worker cuts or chops leather with a knife, therefore he is called "asikoṭṭho." "Purāṇo" is said depending on the time of the object's origin. Making that same simile clear, he says "yathā hī." means making that clear, the meaning is indeed that I will make that clear. The connection is that the leather worker pulls. Vitthata means wide. Sopī means Udāyī also. The connection is that he pulls that sitting cloth. Tenā means by the reason of pulling. Taṃ means Udāyī. Santhatasadisa means similar to a spread. Ekasmiṃ ante means in one part, the connection is having split. The seventh.

8. Kaṇḍupaṭicchādisikkhāpadaṃ
8. The Scabies Covering Training Rule (Kaṇḍupaṭicchādisikkhāpadaṃ)

537.Aṭṭhame‘‘katthā’’tiādīni vuttanayāneva.

537. In the eighth, "katthā," etc., (have) the same meaning as stated before.

539.‘‘Yassā’’ti padassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuno’’ti. ‘‘Nābhiyā heṭṭhā’’ti iminā nābhiyā adhoadhonābhīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ uparī’’ti iminā jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ ubbhaubbhajāṇumaṇḍalanti. Ubbhasaddo hi uparipariyāyo sattamyantanipāto. Kaṇḍukhajjusaddānaṃ vevacanattā vuttaṃ‘‘kaṇḍūti khajjū’’ti. Kaṇḍati bhedanaṃ karotītikaṇḍu. Khajjati byadhanaṃ karotītikhajju. Kesuci potthakesu ‘‘kacchū’’ti pāṭho atthi, so ayutto.

539. To show the scope of the word "yassā," it is said "bhikkhuno." With "nābhiyā heṭṭhā," he shows the meaning that nābhiyā adho adhonābhī, and with "jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ uparī," jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ ubbha ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala. For the word ubbha is a synonym for upari, an indeclinable ending in the locative case. Because the words kaṇḍu and khajju are synonymous, it is said "kaṇḍūti khajjū." Kaṇḍu means itches, makes a breaking. Khajju means it scratches, makes a piercing. In some books, there is a reading "kacchū," that is not right.

lohitatuṇḍikā. Piḷayati vibādhayatītipiḷakā. Ā bhuso asuciṃ savati paggharāpetītiassāvoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘asucipaggharaṇa’’nti. Arisañca bhagandarā ca madhumeho ca. Ādisaddena dunnāmakādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha ari viya īsati abhibhavatītiarisaṃ. Bhagaṃ vuccati vaccamaggaṃ, taṃ darati phāletītibhagandarā,gūthasamīpe jāto vaṇaviseso. Madhu viya muttādiṃ mihati secatītimadhumeho,so ābādho muttameho sukkameho rattamehoti anekavidho.Thullasaddo mahantapariyāyoti āha ‘‘mahā’’ti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

lohitatuṇḍikā. Piḷayati vibādhayatīti piḷakā. Ā bhuso asuciṃ savati paggharāpetīti assāvo, showing the meaning, he says, "asucipaggharaṇa." Arisañca bhagandarā ca madhumeho ca. The word ādi includes dunnāmaka, etc. There, arisaṃ means it slightly overcomes, like hemorrhoids. Bhagandarā means bhaga is called the urinary passage, it splits that, therefore bhagandarā, a special type of boil that arises near feces. Madhumeho means it secretes urine, etc., like honey, that disease is of many kinds: muttameha, sukkameha, rattameha. The word thulla is a synonym for large, therefore he says, "mahā." The eighth.

9. Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Rain Cloth Training Rule (Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadaṃ)

542.Navame vasse vassakāle adhiṭṭhātabbātivassikā,vassikā ca sā sāṭikā cetivassikasāṭikāti. Navamaṃ.

542.In the ninth year, it should be determined during the rainy season; therefore, it is called vassikā. And that vassikā is a cloth, hence vassikasāṭikā. Ninth.

10. Nandattherasikkhāpadaṃ
10. Nandatthera Training Rule

547.Dasame ‘‘catūhi aṅgulehī’’ti iminā caturo aṅgulācaturaṅgulāti asamāhāradiguṃ dasseti.Ūnakappamāṇoti bhagavato lāmakapamāṇo. Imināomakasaddassa lāmakatthaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbanti. Dasamaṃ.

547.In the tenth, "catūhi aṅgulehī": with this, it shows that four finger-breadths are caturaṅgulā, a non-compound digu. Ūnakappamāṇo means the Blessed One's small measurement. It should be understood that with this, it shows the meaning of smallness in the word omaka. Tenth.

Ratanavaggo navamo.

Ratanavagga, the ninth.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the explanation of the Khuddaka, in the Samantapāsādikā, the commentary on the Vinaya.

Khuddakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

The Yojanā of the Khuddakavaṇṇanā is complete.

6. Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ

6. Pāṭidesanīya Section

1. Paṭhamapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Meaning and Connection of the First Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

Khuddakānaṃ anantarā pāṭidesanīyā ye dhammā saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitā, idāni tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ayaṃ vaṇṇanā bhavatīti yojanā.

Immediately after the Khuddaka, this is the explanation of the pāṭidesanīya rules established by the compilers of the Saṅgīti; now, may this explanation of those rules occur, this is the connection.

552.Paṭhamapāṭidesanīye tāva attho evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Paṭiāgamanakāleti piṇḍāya caraṇaṭṭhānato pakkamitvā, paṭinivattitvā vā āgamanakāle.Sabbevāti ettha niggahītalopavasena sandhi hotīti āha ‘‘sabbamevā’’ti. ‘‘Kampamānā’’ti iminā papubbavidhadhātuyā kampanatthaṃ dasseti.Apehīti ettha apapubbaidhātu gatyatthoti āha ‘‘apagacchā’’ti.

552.In the first pāṭidesanīya, the meaning should be understood thus, this is the connection. Paṭiāgamanakāle means at the time of returning after departing from the place of going for alms. Sabbevā: here, he says "sabbamevā" because of the sandhi due to the elision of the niggahīta. With "Kampamānā", it shows the meaning of trembling of the root papubbavidha. Apehī: here, he says "apagacchā" because the root apapubbaidha means going.

553.Paṭidesetabbākāraṃ dasseti anenātipaṭidesetabbākāradassanaṃ. Dvinnaṃ saddānaṃ pariyāyabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘rathikāti racchā’’ti. Rathassa hitārathikā. Ṇyapaccaye kate‘‘racchā’’ti (moggallāne 4.72 sutte) vuccati. Racchantarena anibbiddhā racchābyūhonāmāti āha ‘‘anibbijjhitvā’’tiādi. Byūheti sampiṇḍeti jane aññattha gantumapadānavasenātibyūho. Siṅghāṭakaṃ nāma maggasandhīti āha ‘‘maggasamodhānaṭṭhāna’’nti. Siṅghati maggasamodhānaṃ karoti etthātisiṅghāṭakaṃ. Etesūti rathikādīsu.Eseva nayoti dukkaṭapāṭidesanīye atidisati.ti saccaṃ. ‘‘Vacanato’’ti padaṃ ‘‘veditabbo’’ti pade ñāpakahetu. Dadamānāya bhikkhuniyā vasenāti yojanā.Etthāti sikkhāpade.Tasmāti yasmā apamāṇaṃ, tasmā.

553.That by which the manner of confessing is shown is paṭidesetabbākāradassanaṃ. To show the synonymous nature of the two words, it is said, "rathikā means racchā." Rathikā means beneficial for a chariot. When the Ṇya suffix is added, it is called "racchā" (Moggallāna 4.72 sutta). A racchā not obstructed by another racchā is called byūho, this he says, "without obstructing," etc. Byūho means crowding people together, obstructing the way for them to go elsewhere. Siṅghāṭakaṃ means the junction of roads, this he says, "maggasamodhānaṭṭhānaṃ." Siṅghāṭakaṃ because it joins the paths: siṅghati maggasamodhānaṃ karoti etthāti. Etesū means in rathikā, etc. Eseva nayo he extends to the dukkata pāṭidesanīya. means truly. The word "vacanato" is a marker in the word "veditabbo". The connection is in relation to the bhikkhunī who is giving. Etthā means in this training rule. Tasmā means because it is immeasurable, therefore.

Idanti vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Sambhinne ekarase kālikattayeti yojanā.

Idanti, the word "idaṃ" is connected to what has been said. The connection is: in what is mixed, of one taste, in the three times.

556.‘‘Dāpetī’’ti hetutthakiriyāya kāritakattukāritakammāni dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘aññātikāya aññena kenacī’’ti.Aññenāti attanā aññena. ‘‘Tāya eva vā bhikkhuniyā aññena vā kenacī’’ti padāni ‘‘paṭiggahāpetvā’’tipade kāritakammānīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

556."Dāpetī": to show the causative agent and causative object in the causative verb, it is said, "by a non-relative, by someone else." Aññenā means by someone other than oneself. The words "Tāya eva vā bhikkhuniyā aññena vā kenacī" are causative objects in the word "paṭiggahāpetvā". First.

2. Dutiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Second Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

558.Dutiyepurimasikkhāpadena āpattiantaragharattāti adhippāyo.Iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti bhaveyyavosāsamānattāti adhippāyo. Dentiyā pana neva iminā, na purimena āpatti aññassa bhattattāti adhippāyoti. Dutiyaṃ.

558.In the second, the offense by the previous training rule is because of being inside a house, this is the idea. The offense by this training rule would be because of having requested for oneself, this is the idea. But if she gives, there is no offense by this or the previous one because the food belongs to someone else, this is the idea. Second.

3. Tatiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Third Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

562.Tatiye‘‘ubhato’’ti ettha karaṇatthe toti āha ‘‘dvīhī’’ti. ‘‘Ubhatopasanna’’nti byāsopi samāsopi yuttoyeva, samāse topaccayassa alopo hoti. ‘‘Ubhato’’tipadassa sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘upāsakenapi upāsikāyapī’’ti. Kasmā ubhato pasannaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ kirā’’tiādi. Yasmā tasmiṃ kule…pe… sotāpannāyeva honti kira, tasmā ‘‘ubhatopasanna’’nti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sacepī’’ti etthapisaddena asītikoṭidhanato adhikampi sampiṇḍeti. Hāyanassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti‘‘yasmā’’tiādinā.

562.In the third, "ubhato": here, the to is in the sense of instrument, this he says, "by two". "Ubhatopasanna" is correct both as a compound and as an expanded form; in the compound, the to suffix is elided. To show the form of the word "Ubhato", it is said, "by a male lay follower and by a female lay follower." Why is it pleasing to both? He says, "tasmiṃ kirā," etc. Because in that family…pe… they are only Stream-enterers, therefore, "ubhatopasanna" is said. "Sacepī": here, with the word pi, he also combines more than eighty crores of wealth. He shows the reason for the decline "yasmā" etc.

569.‘‘Gharato nīharitvā’’ti ettha‘‘nīharitvā’’ti padassa kammaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘āsanasālaṃ vā vihāraṃ vā’’ti. ‘‘Ānetvā’’tiiminā nīpubbaharadhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti.Dvāreti attano gehadvāreti. Tatiyaṃ.

569."Gharato nīharitvā": here, to show the object of the word "nīharitvā," it is said, "āsanasālaṃ vā vihāraṃ vā". With "Ānetvā", he shows the meaning of the root nīpubbahara. Dvāre means at the door of one's own house. Third.

4. Catutthapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadaṃ
4. Fourth Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

570.Catuttheavaruddhasaddo pariruddhasaddassa pariyāyoti āha‘‘pariruddhāhontī’’ti. Āraññakassa senāsanassa parisamantato ruddhā āvutā hontīti attho.

570.In the fourth, the word avaruddha is a synonym for the word pariruddha, this he says, "pariruddhā hontī". It means they are obstructed, covered all around the forest dwelling.

573.‘‘Pañcanna’’nti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanabhāvañca ‘‘yaṃkiñcī’’ti niddhāraṇīyena sambandhitabbabhāvañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcasu sahadhammikesu yaṃ kiñcī’’ti. ‘‘Pesetvā khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ āharissāmī’’tiiminā paṭisaṃviditākāradassanaṃ. ‘‘Ārāma’’nti sāmaññato vuttepi āraññakasenāsanassa ārāmo eva adhippetoti āha ‘‘āraññakasenāsanārāmañcā’’ti.Tassāti āraññakasenāsanārāmassa.‘‘Kasmā’’ti pucchāya ‘‘paṭimocanattha’’nti visajjanāya sametuṃ sampadānatthe nissakkavacanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Kimatthanti hi attho.Paṭimocanatthanti tadatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Paṭimocanasaṅkhātāya atthāyāti hi attho. Atthasaddo ca payojanavācako. Payojanāyāti hi attho. Atha vā ‘‘paṭimocanattha’’nti visajjanāyaṃ. ‘‘Kasmā’’ti pucchāya sametuṃ nissakkatthe paccattavacanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Paṭimocanasaṅkhātā atthāti hi attho. Atthasaddo ca kāraṇavācako. Kāraṇāti hi attho. Evañhi pucchāvisajjanānaṃ pubbāparasamasaṅkhāto vicayo hāro paripuṇṇo hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Amhākanti khādanīyabhojanīyapaṭiharantānaṃ amhākaṃ.Amheti corasaṅkhāte amhe.

573.To show that "pañcannaṃ" is a locative of determination and that "yaṃ kiñcī" should be connected with what is to be determined, it is said, "pañcasu sahadhammikesu yaṃ kiñcī". "Pesetvā khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ āharissāmī": with this, it is a showing of the manner of planning. Although "ārāma" is stated in general, only the ārāma of the forest dwelling is intended, this he says, "āraññakasenāsanārāmañcā". Tassā means of that forest dwelling ārāma. To reconcile the question "Kasmā" with the answer "paṭimocanattha", a word without the possessive suffix should be used in the sense of the dative. Because what is the purpose? Paṭimocanattha is a singular word in that sense. Because it means for the purpose of what is called paṭimocana. And the word attha means purpose. Because it means for the purpose. Or, in the answer "paṭimocanattha". To reconcile the question "Kasmā", a singular word in the sense of the possessive should be used. Because it means the purpose called paṭimocana. And the word attha means cause. Because it means cause. In this way, the discernment, the flavor that constitutes the harmony of question and answer, should be seen as complete. Amhāka means of us who are bringing the food and edibles. Amhe means us who are called thieves.

‘‘Tassā’’ti padassatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘etissā yāguyā’’ti.Aññānipīti paṭisaṃviditakulato aññānipi kulāni.Tenāti paṭisaṃviditakulena. Kurundivāde yāguyā paṭisaṃviditaṃ katvā yāguṃ aggahetvā pūvādīni āharanti, vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.

To show the meaning of the word "Tassā", it is said, "etissā yāguyā". Aññānipī means even other families than the planned one. Tenā means by the planned family. In the Kurundivāda, having planned for rice-gruel, if they bring cakes etc. without taking the rice-gruel, it is allowable, this is the idea.

575.Ekassāti bhikkhussa.Tassāti paṭisaṃviditabhikkhussa, catunnaṃ vā pañcannaṃ vā bhikkhūnaṃ atthāyāti yojanā.Aññesampīti catupañcabhikkhuto aññesampi.Adhikamevāti paribhuttato atirekameva.Yaṃ panāti khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ pana, yampi khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ vanato āharitvā dentīti yojanā.‘‘Tatthajātaka’’nti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ārāme’’ti. Aññena dinnanti sambandho.Nanti mūlakhādanīyādiṃ.Paṭisaṃviditanti paṭikacceva suṭṭhu jānāpitanti atthoti. Catutthaṃ.

575.Ekassā means for one bhikkhu. Tassā means for the planned bhikkhu, or for the sake of four or five bhikkhus, this is the connection. Aññesampī means even for others than the four or five bhikkhus. Adhikamevā means even more than what has been consumed. Yaṃ panā means whatever edibles or food, whatever edibles or food they bring from the forest and give, this is the connection. "Tatthajātaka": here, to show the scope of the word tassa, it is said, "ārāme". The connection is: dinnanti is given by another. Na means not a root edible etc. Paṭisaṃvidita means well informed beforehand, this is the meaning. Fourth.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the Yojanā

Pāṭidesanīyavaṇṇanāya

in the commentary on the Pāṭidesanīya,

Yojanā samattā.

in the Samantapāsādikā, the commentary on the Vinaya.

7. Sekhiyakaṇḍaṃ

7. Sekhiya Section

1. Parimaṇḍalavagga-atthayojanā
1. Meaning and Connection of the Parimaṇḍala Vagga

Sikkhitasikkhenatīsu sikkhāsu catūhi maggehi sikkhitasikkhenatādināaṭṭhahi lokadhammehi akampiyaṭṭhena tādinā, iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu vā avikāraṭṭhena tādinā bhagavatāyānisikkhāpadāni ‘‘sekhiyānī’’ti bhāsitāni,dāni tesampisikkhāpadānaṃ ayampi vaṇṇanākkamo bhavatīti yojanā.

Sikkhitasikkhena: by the Blessed One who has trained himself in the training, who has trained himself with the three trainings, with the four paths, tādinā: by the Blessed One who is such, who is unshaken by the eight worldly conditions, or who is unchanging in what is desirable and undesirable, yāni sikkhāpadāni: whatever training rules have been spoken as "sekhiyānī," dāni tesampi: now, may this order of explanation of even those training rules occur, this is the connection.

576.Tatthāti sekhiyasikkhāpadesu, attho evaṃ veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Samantato’’tiiminā parityūpasaggassatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Nābhimaṇḍalaṃ jāṇumaṇḍala’’nti ettha uddhaṃsaddo ca adhosaddo ca ajjhāharitabboti āha ‘‘uddha’’ntiādi.Aṭṭhaṅgulamattanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, nivāsetabbanti sambandho.Tatoti aṭṭhaṅgulamattato. Yathā paṭicchannaṃ hoti, evaṃ nivāsentassāti yojanā.Tatridaṃ pamāṇanti tassa nivāsanassa idaṃ pamāṇaṃ.Tādisassāti dīghato muṭṭhipañcakassa tiriyaṃ aḍḍhateyyahatthassa nivāsanassa. Jāṇumaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādanatthaṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Tatthāti cīvaresu.Na tiṭṭhatīti viraḷattā na tiṭṭhati.Tiṭṭhatīti ghanattā tiṭṭhati.

576.Tatthā means in those sekhiya training rules, the meaning should be understood thus, this is the connection. With "Samantato", it shows the meaning of the prefix parityu. With "Nābhimaṇḍalaṃ jāṇumaṇḍala", it is said, "uddhaṃ" etc., because the words uddhaṃ and adho should be supplied. Aṭṭhaṅgulamatta is a neuter abstract noun, it should be worn, this is the connection. Tato means from that eight-finger-breadth. It should be worn in such a way that it is covered, this is the connection. Tatridaṃ pamāṇa means this is the measure of that wearing. Tādisassā means of the lower robe that is five fists long and one and a half hatthas wide. It is allowable for the purpose of covering the knee-circle, this is the connection. Tatthā means in those robes. Na tiṭṭhatī means it does not stay because it is sparse. Tiṭṭhatī means it stays because it is dense.

Nivāsentassa cātiettha casaddo avadhāraṇattho, nivāsentassevāti attho. Kevalaṃ evaṃ nivāsentasseva dukkaṭaṃ na hoti, atha kho tathā nivāsentassāpi dukkaṭamevāti yojanā. Ye pana nivāsanadosāti sambandho.Aññeti purato ca pacchato ca olambetvā nivasanato aññe.Te sabbeti sabbe te nivāsanadosā.Etthāti imasmiṃ vibhaṅge.Tatthevāti khandhakeyeva.

Nivāsentassa cā: here, the word ca is in the sense of emphasis, it means only for the one who is wearing it. It is not only for the one who is wearing it in this way that there is a dukkata, but indeed, there is a dukkata even for the one who is wearing it in that way, this is the connection. Ye pana nivāsanadosā: whatever, moreover, are the faults of wearing, this is the connection. Aññe means other than wearing the robe by letting it hang down in front and in back. Te sabbe means all those faults of wearing. Etthā means in this Vibhaṅga. Tatthevā means in the Khandhaka itself.

Ajānantassāti ettha ajānanaṃ duvidhaṃ nivāsanavattassa ajānanaṃ, ārūḷhorūḷhabhāvassa ajānananti. Tattha ārūḷhorūḷhabhāvassa ajānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ajānantassā’’ti dassento āha ‘‘ajānantassāti etthā’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ.Tassāti nivāsanavattassa.Assāti bhikkhuno.Taṃ panāti āpattito amokkhanaṃ pana.Tasmāti yasmā yujjati, tasmā.Yoti bhikkhu. Kurundiyaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Sukkhā jaṅghā imassātisukkhajaṅgho. Mahantaṃ piṇḍikamaṃsaṃ imassātimahāpiṇḍikamaṃso. Tassāti bhikkhussa.

Ajānantassā: here, not knowing is of two kinds: not knowing the proper way of wearing the lower robe, and not knowing the state of being fully covering. There, with reference to not knowing the state of being fully covering, showing that "ajānantassā" is said, he says, "ajānantassāti etthā" etc. means truly. Tassā means of the one who is wearing the lower robe. Assā means of the bhikkhu. Taṃ panā means that lack of release from the offense. Tasmā means because it is fitting, therefore. Yo means whatever bhikkhu. It is connected to what is said in the Kurundiya. Sukkhā jaṅghā imassāti: sukkhajaṅgho. Mahantaṃ piṇḍikamaṃsaṃ imassāti: mahāpiṇḍikamaṃso. Tassā means of the bhikkhu.

Vaṇoti aru. Tañhi vaṇati gattavicuṇṇanaṃ karotīti vaṇoti vuccati.Vāḷamigā vā corā vāti ettha vāsaddo avuttasampiṇḍanattho, tena aññāpi udakacikkhallādayo āpadā saṅgayhanti.

Vaṇo means a sore. Because it wounds, causes disfigurement of the body, therefore, it is called vaṇa. Vāḷamigā vā corā vā: here, the word is in the sense of combining what has not been said, therefore, other dangers such as water and mud are included.

577.Idhāti imasmiṃ vibhaṅge, sikkhāpade vā.Ubho kaṇṇeti purato ca pacchato ca niggate dve kaṇṇe.Avisesenāti ‘‘antaraghare’’ti ca ‘‘ārāme’’ti ca visesaṃ akatvā sāmaññena.Vihārepīti saṅghasannipātabuddhupaṭṭhānatherupaṭṭhānādikālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

577.Idhā means in this Vibhaṅga, or in the training rule. Ubho kaṇṇe means the two corners that are brought out in front and in back. Avisesenā means generally, without making a distinction between "antaraghare" and "ārāme". Vihārepī means it is said with reference to the time of Saṅgha gatherings, attending upon the Buddha, attending upon the elders, etc.

578.Kāyekadese kāyasaddo vattatīti āha ‘‘jāṇumpi urampī’’ti. ‘‘Na sīsaṃ pārutenā’’tiiminā ‘‘suppaṭicchannenā’’tipadassa atibyāpitadosaṃ paṭikkhipati.Gaṇṭhikanti pāso. So hi gantheti bandhatīti vā, gantheti bandhati etthāti vā katvā ganthikoti vuccati. Nthakārassa vāṇṭhakāre kategaṇṭhiko,taṃ gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā.Ubho kaṇṇeti cīvarassa dve koṇe.Galavāṭakatoti etthagaloti kaṇṭho. So hi khajjabhojjaleyyapeyyasaṅkhātaṃ catubbidhaṃ asanaṃ galati panno hutvā kucchiyaṃ patati itoti galoti vuccati. Āvāṭoyeva khuddakaṭṭhenaāvāṭako,khuddakatthe ko. Gale ṭhito āvāṭako galavāṭako. Akārato hi ākārassa lopo ‘‘papa’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.1.2) viya. Ettha hi paāpanti padacchedo, akārato ākārassa ca lopo. Pavaddhaṃ āpaṃ papaṃ, mahantaṃ udakanti attho. Sīsaṃ vivaritvāti sambandho.

578.The word kāya exists in a part of the body, this he says, "jāṇumpi urampī". With "Na sīsaṃ pārutenā", he rejects the fault of overextension of the word "suppaṭicchannenā". Gaṇṭhika means a loop. Because it ties, binds, or because having made it, it ties, binds in this way, therefore, it is called ganthika. When the nthakāra is changed to vāṇṭhakāra, it is gaṇṭhiko, having untied that gaṇṭhika. Ubho kaṇṇe means the two corners of the robe. Galavāṭakato: here, galo means the throat. Because the four kinds of food—what is chewed, eaten, licked, and drunk—flow, having become entered, fall into the stomach from here, therefore, it is called galo. Āvāṭo itself, with the diminutive suffix, is āvāṭako, ko in the diminutive sense. Galo ṭhito āvāṭako galavāṭako. Because there is elision of the ākāra from the akāra, like in "papa" etc. (jā. 1.1.2). Here, paāpanti is the word division, and there is elision of the ākāra from the akāra. Pavaddhaṃ āpaṃ papaṃ, meaning great water. The connection is: sīsaṃ vivaritvā.

579.Vāsaṃ upagatoti vā vāsena upagatoti vā atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha‘‘vāsatthāya upagatassā’’ti.

579.Rejecting the meaning either "gone to a dwelling" or "gone with a dwelling", he says, "vāsatthāya upagatassā".

580.Hatthapāde akīḷanto susaṃvuto nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā akīḷāpento’’ti.

580.Showing that one who is not playing with the hands and feet is well-restrained, he says, "hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā akīḷāpento".

582.Okkhittacakkhūti ettha osaddo heṭṭhāpariyāyoti āha ‘‘heṭṭhā khittacakkhū’’ti. ‘‘Hutvā’’tiiminā kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.Yugayuttakoti yuge yuttako. Damiyitthātidanto. Ābhuso jānāti kāraṇākāraṇantiājāneyyo. Ettakanti catuhatthapamāṇaṃ. Yo gacchati, assa bhikkhuno dukkaṭā āpatti hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Parissayabhāva’’nti ca ‘‘parissayābhāva’’nti ca dve pāṭhā yujjantiyeva.

582.Okkhittacakkhū: here, the o is a synonym for "downwards", this he says, "heṭṭhā khittacakkhū". With "Hutvā", he shows the state of being a verbal adjective. Yugayuttako means yuttako in a yoke. Damiyitthāti: danto. Ābhuso jānāti kāraṇākāraṇanti: ājāneyyo. Ettaka means a measure of four hatthas. A dukkata offense occurs for whatever bhikkhu goes. Both readings, "parissayabhāva" and "parissayābhāva", are suitable.

584.Itthambhūtalakkhaṇeti imaṃ pakāraṃ itthaṃ cīvarukkhipanaṃ, bhavati gacchatīti bhūto, bhikkhu. Lakkhīyati anenāti lakkhaṇaṃ, cīvaraṃ. Itthaṃ bhūto itthambhūto, tassa lakkhaṇaṃ itthambhūtalakkhaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ. Karaṇavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbanti yojanā. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇaṃ nāma kiriyāvisesanassa sabhāvoti āha ‘‘ekato vā…pe… hutvāti attho’’ti.Antoindakhīlatoti gāmassa antoindakhīlatoti. Paṭhamo vaggo.

584.Itthambhūtalakkhaṇe: this kind of throwing of the robe, bhūto means becoming, the bhikkhu. That by which it is marked is lakkhaṇa, the robe. Itthaṃ bhūto itthambhūto, tassa lakkhaṇaṃ itthambhūtalakkhaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ. It should be seen as an instrumental expression, this is the connection. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇaṃ means the nature of the verbal adjective, this he says, "ekato vā…pe… hutvāti attho". Antoindakhīlato means antoindakhīlato of the village. First vagga.

2. Ujjagghikavagga-atthayojanā
2. Meaning and Connection of the Ujjagghika Vagga

586.Uccāsaddaṃ katvā jagghanaṃ hasanaṃujjaggho,soyevaujjagghikā,tāya. Iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mahāhasitaṃ hasanto’’ti.Etthāti ‘‘ujjagghikāyā’’tipade.

586. Making a loud noise, giggling, and laughing is ujjaggho, that same is ujjagghikā, by that. Showing this meaning, he said, "laughing a great laugh." Here, in the term "ujjagghikāya".

588.Kittāvatāti kittakena pamāṇena, evaṃ nisinnesu theresūti sambandho, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Vavatthapetīti idañcīdañca kathetīti vavatthapeti.Ettāvatāti ettakena pamāṇena.

588.How much? means by how much measure; thus, it is connected with "among the elders seated." This is a locative absolute used in determination. Clarifies: means he clarifies by saying this and that. This much: means by this much measure.

590.Niccalaṃ katvā kāyassa ujuṭṭhapanaṃ kāyapaggaho nāmāti āha ‘‘niccalaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Eseva nayo bāhupaggahasīsapaggahesupīti. Dutiyo vaggo.

590.Making the body motionless is called kāyapaggaho, straightening of the body, thus he said, "making motionless," etc. This same method applies to bāhupaggaha and sīsapaggaha also. Second Chapter.

3. Khambhakatavagga-atthayojanā
3. Atthayojanā of the Khambhakatavagga

596.Khambho kato yenātikhambhakato. Khambhoti ca paṭibaddho. Kattha paṭibaddhoti āha ‘‘kaṭiyaṃ hatthaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Sasīsaṃ avaguṇṭhayati pariveṭhatītioguṇṭhitoti āha ‘‘sasīsaṃ pāruto’’ti.

596. One by whom a prop is made is khambhakato. Khambho also means leaning on. Where does one lean on? He says, "placing the hand on the waist." Sasīsaṃ avaguṇṭhayati pariveṭhatītioguṇṭhitoti means he says "covered head and all".

600.Uddhaṃ ekā koṭi imissā gamanāyātiukkuṭikāti dassento āha ‘‘ukkuṭikā vuccatī’’tiādi.Etthāti ‘‘ukkuṭikāyā’’tipade.

600. One end is upwards for this going, thus, showing ukkuṭikā he says, "ukkuṭikā is called," etc. Here, in the word "ukkuṭikāya".

601.Hatthapallatthīkadussapallatthīkesu dvīsu dussapallatthike āyogapallatthīkāpi saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti āha ‘‘āyogapallatthikāpi dussapallatthikā evā’’ti.

601. Among the pallatthikās of hand, cloth, in the two cloth pallatthikās, the āyogapallatthīkā is also included, thus he said, "the āyogapallatthīkā is also just a cloth pallatthīkā."

602.Satiyā upaṭṭhānaṃ sakkaccanti āha ‘‘satiṃupaṭṭhapetvā’’ti.

602. Establishing mindfulness respectfully, he said, "having established mindfulness."

603.Piṇḍapātaṃdentepīti piṇḍapātaṃ patte pakkhipantepi. Patte saññā pattasaññā, sā assatthītipattasaññī. ‘‘Katvā’’ tiiminā kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.

603.Even while giving almsfood: means even while placing almsfood in the bowl. Patte saññā pattasaññā, sā assatthītipattasaññī. Showing the state of being a special activity with "having done."

604.Samasūpakaṃ piṇḍapātanti ettha sūpapiṇḍapātānaṃ samaupaḍḍhabhāvaṃ āsaṅkā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘samasūpako nāmā’’tiādi.Yatthāti piṇḍapāte. Bhattassa catutthabhāgapamāṇo sūpo hoti, so piṇḍapāto samasūpako nāmāti yojanā. Oloṇī ca sākasūpeyyañca maccharaso ca maṃsaraso cāti dvando. Tatthaoloṇīti ekā byañjanavikati.Sākasūpeyyanti sūpassa hitaṃsūpeyyaṃ,sākameva sūpeyyaṃ sākasūpeyyaṃ. Iminā sabbāpi sākasūpeyyabyañjanavikati gahitā.Maccharasamaṃsarasādīnīti ettha ādisaddena avasesā sabbāpi byañjanavikati saṅgahitā. Taṃ sabbaṃ rasānaṃ rasorasarasoti katvā ‘‘rasaraso’’ti vuccati.

604.Samasūpakaṃ piṇḍapātanti Here, an assumption might arise that the soup and almsfood are in equal or half portions, so he says, "samasūpako nāmā," etc. Where, in the almsfood. The soup is a quarter of the amount of the cooked rice; that almsfood is called samasūpako. Oloṇī ca sākasūpeyyañca maccharaso ca maṃsaraso cāti dvando. There oloṇī means one kind of relish. Sākasūpeyyanti Beneficial to soup is sūpeyyaṃ, vegetable itself is sūpeyyaṃ, sākasūpeyyaṃ. With this, all kinds of vegetable relish are included. Maccharasamaṃsarasādīnīti Here, with the word ādi, all the remaining kinds of relish are included. All that taste of tastes is rasaraso thus it is called "rasaraso."

605.Samapuṇṇaṃ samabharitanti vevacanameva. Thūpaṃ katothūpīkatoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘thūpīkato nāmā’’tiādi.

605. Samapuṇṇaṃ samabharitanti is just a synonym. Showing the meaning of thūpaṃ katothūpīkatoti he said, "thūpīkato nāmā," etc.

Tatthāti ‘‘thūpīkata’’ntiādivacane.Tesanti abhayattheratipiṭakacūḷanāgattherānaṃ. Iti pucchiṃsu, tesañca therānaṃ vādaṃ ārocesunti yojanā.Theroti cūḷasumanatthero.Etassāti tipiṭakacūḷanāgattherassa.Sattakkhattunti satta vāre.Kutoti kassācariyassa santikā.Tasmāti yasmā yāvakālikena paricchinno, tasmā. Āmisajātikaṃ yāgubhattaṃ vā phalāphalaṃ vāti yojanā.Tañca khoti tañca samatitthikaṃ.Itarena panāti nādhiṭṭhānupagena pattena pana. Yaṃ pūvaucchukhaṇḍaphalāphalādi heṭṭhā orohati, taṃ pūvaucchukhaṇḍaphalāphalādīti yojanā.Pūvavaṭaṃsakoti etthavaṭaṃsakoti uttaṃso. So hi uddhaṃ tasīyate alaṅkarīyateti vaṭaṃsoti vuccati ukārassa vakāraṃ, takārassa ca ṭakāraṃ katvā, soyeva vaṭaṃsako, muddhani pilandhito eko alaṅkāraviseso. Pūvameva taṃsadisattā pūvavaṭaṃsako, taṃ. Pupphavaṭaṃsako ca takkolakaṭukaphalādivaṭaṃsako cāti dvando, te.

There, in the statement "thūpīkata," etc. Of them: of Abhayatthera, Tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthera. Thus they asked, and the opinion of those elders was announced, thus the connection. Elder: Cūḷasumanatthera. Of this one: of Tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthera. Seven times: seven times. From where: from the presence of which teacher. Therefore: because it is limited by a fixed duration, therefore. Āmisajātikaṃ yāgubhattaṃ vā phalāphalaṃ vāti yojanā. And that: and that which is of equal size. But by the other: but by the bowl not undertaken. That which descends below, such as cake, sugarcane pieces, fruit and unripe fruit, that is cake, sugarcane pieces, fruit and unripe fruit, thus the connection. Pūvavaṭaṃsako: Here, vaṭaṃsako means an ornament. Because it is raised upwards and adorned, it is called vaṭaṃso, by changing the u to va, and the ta to ṭa, that itself is vaṭaṃsako, a special ornament worn on the head. Cake itself, because of its similarity to that, is pūvavaṭaṃsako, that. Pupphavaṭaṃsako ca takkolakaṭukaphalādivaṭaṃsako cāti dvando, te.

Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Nanu sabbathūpīkatesu paṭiggahaṇassa akappiyattā paribhuñjanampi na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘sabbattha panā’’tiādi. Tatthasabbatthāti sabbesu thūpīkatesūti. Tatiyo vaggo.

Here: in this training rule. If, since acceptance is not allowable in all thūpīkata, consumption is not fitting either, thus he says, "but everywhere," etc. There, everywhere: in all thūpīkata. Third Chapter.

4. Sakkaccavagga-atthayojanā
4. Atthayojanā of the Sakkaccavagga

608.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne.Odhinti avadhiṃ mariyādaṃ.

608.There, there: in that, that place. Odhi: means a limit, a boundary.

610.Thūpakatoti thūpameva thūpakaṃ, tato thūpakatoti dassento āha ‘‘matthakato’’ti.

610.Thūpakato: showing that thūpa is just thūpaka, therefore thūpakato, he said, "matthakato."

611.Māghātasamayādīsūti ‘‘pāṇe mā ghātethā’’ti rājāno bheriṃ carāpenti etthāti māghāto, soyeva samayo māghātasamayo. Ādisaddena aññaṃ paṭicchannakāraṇaṃ gahetabbaṃ.

611.Māghātasamayādīsū: "Do not kill living beings" the kings proclaim with drums, here is the māghāto, that same time is the māghātasamayo. With the word ādi, another hidden reason should be taken.

615.Tesanti mayūraṇḍakukkuṭaṇḍānanti. Catuttho vaggo.

615.Of them: of peacock eggs, chicken eggs. Fourth Chapter.

5. Kabaḷavagga-atthayojanā
5. Atthayojanā of the Kabaḷavagga

617.‘‘Mukhadvāra’’nti kammassa ‘‘anāhaṭe’’ti ca ‘‘vivarissāmī’’ti ca dvīsu kiriyāsu sambandhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anāharite mukhadvāra’’nti.

617.Mouth-door: to show the state of being connected to the two actions "unbrought" and "I will open" of the action, it was said, "mouth-door unbrought."

618.Sakalaṃ hatthanti pañcaṅguliṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

618.Whole hand: was said in reference to the five fingers.

619.Sakabaḷenāti ettha kabaḷasaddena vacanassa aparipuṇṇakāraṇaṃ sabbampi gahetabbaṃ.

619.Sakabaḷenā: Here, with the word kabaḷa, all that causes incompleteness of speech should be taken.

620.Piṇḍukkhepakantiādīsu vicchatthe kapaccayoti āha ‘‘piṇḍaṃ ukkhipitvā ukkhipitvā’’ti. Tvāsaddena kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.

620. In Piṇḍukkhepaka, etc., the kapaccaya is in the sense of separation, thus he said, "having thrown up the lump, having thrown up." With the suffix tvā, he shows the state of being a special action.

624.‘‘Avakiritvā’’ti imināsitthāvakārakanti ettha avapubbo kiradhātuyeva, na karadhātūti dasseti.

624.With "having scattered," here, in sitthāvakāraka, he shows that it is indeed the kiradhātu with the prefix ava, not the karadhātu.

626.‘‘Capucapū’’ti evaṃ saddanti ‘‘capucapū’’ti evaṃ anukaraṇaravanti. Pañcamo vaggo.

626."Capucapū" thus sound: means "capucapū" thus an imitative sound. Fifth Chapter.

6. Surusuruvagga-atthayojanā
6. Atthayojanā of the Surusuruvagga

627.‘‘Surusurū’’ti evaṃ saddanti ‘‘surusurū’’ti evaṃ anukaraṇaravaṃ. Davanaṃ kīḷananti iminā vacanatthena parihāsodavonāmāti āha ‘‘davoti parihāsavacana’’nti.Tanti so davo. Liṅgavipallāso hesa.Na kātabbaṃna kātabboti sambandho.Silakabuddhoti silāya kato, silena niyutto vā buddho.Apaṭibuddhoti apaṭividdho buddho, parihāsavacanametaṃ.Godhammoti gunnaṃ dhammo.Ajadhammoti ajānaṃ dhammo.Migasaṅghoti migānaṃ saṅgho.Pasusaṅghoti pasūnaṃ saṅgho.

627."Surusurū" thus sound: means "surusurū" thus an imitative sound. With the statement Davanaṃ kīḷananti, he says that parihāso is called davo: "davo is a humorous word." That: that davo. This is a gender displacement. Na kātabbaṃna kātabboti connection. Silakabuddho: made of stone, or appointed by stone, buddha. Apaṭibuddho: buddha unpenetrated, this is a humorous expression. Godhammo: the nature of cows. Ajadhammo: the nature of goats. Migasaṅgho: a group of deer. Pasusaṅgho: a group of animals.

628.‘‘Bhuñjantenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘nillehitu’’nti pade bhāvakattā.

628.The word "Bhuñjantenā" is the instrumental cause in the word "nillehitu."

631.Evaṃnāmaketi ‘‘kokanuda’’nti evaṃ nāmaṃ assa pāsādassātievaṃnāmako,pāsādo, tasmiṃ. ‘‘Padumasaṇṭhāno’’ti iminā pāsādassa sadisūpacārena ‘‘kokanudo’’ti nāmalabhanaṃ dasseti.Tenāti padumasaṇṭhānattā.Assāti pāsādassa.Puggalikampīti parapuggalasantakaṃ gahetabbaṃ ‘‘attano santakampī’’ti attapuggalasantakassa visuṃ gayhamānattā.Saṅkhampīti pānīyasaṅkhampi.Sarāvampīti pānīyasarāvampi.Thālakampīti pānīyathālakampi.

631.Evaṃnāmake: a palace whose name is thus, called "kokanuda," evaṃnāmako, pāsādo, tasmiṃ. With "Padumasaṇṭhāno," he shows that the name "kokanudo" was obtained through similarity with a lotus. By that: because of having the shape of a lotus. Of the: of the palace. Puggalikampī: should be taken as belonging to another person, since "attano santakampī" is taken separately as belonging to oneself. Saṅkhampī: even a water conch. Sarāvampī: even a water bowl. Thālakampī: even a water plate.

632.‘‘Uddharitvā’’ti sāmaññato vuttavacanassa kammāpādānāni dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sitthāni udakato’’ti.Bhinditvāti cuṇṇavicuṇṇāni katvā.Bahīti antaragharato bahi.

632.To show the object and the ablative case of the statement spoken in general, it was said, "sitthāni udakato." Having broken: having made into powder and small pieces. Bahī: outside from the inner house.

634.Setacchattantietthasetasaddo paṇḍarapariyāyoti āha ‘‘paṇḍaracchatta’’nti.Vatthapaliguṇṭhitanti vatthehi samantato veṭhitaṃ. Setaṃ chattaṃsetacchattaṃ. Kiḷañjehi kataṃ chattaṃkiḷañjacchattaṃ. Paṇṇehi kataṃ chattaṃpaṇṇacchattaṃ. Maṇḍalena baddhaṃmaṇḍalabaddhaṃ. Salākāhi baddhaṃsalākabaddhaṃ. Tānīti tīṇi chattāni.ti saccaṃ. Yampi ekapaṇṇacchattanti yojanā.Etesūti tīsu chattesu.Assāti yassa kassaci gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā.Soti yo koci gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā.Chattapādukāya vāti chattadaṇḍanikkhepanāya pādukāya vā.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.

634.Setacchattanti Here, the word seta is a synonym for paṇḍara, thus he says, "paṇḍaracchatta." Vatthapaliguṇṭhitanti covered all around with cloths. Setaṃ chattaṃsetacchattaṃ. Kiḷañjehi kataṃ chattaṃkiḷañjacchattaṃ. Paṇṇehi kataṃ chattaṃpaṇṇacchattaṃ. Maṇḍalena baddhaṃmaṇḍalabaddhaṃ. Salākāhi baddhaṃsalākabaddhaṃ. Tānīti these three umbrellas. Indeed: truly. Even a single leaf umbrella, thus the connection. Among these: among the three umbrellas. Of this one: of whomever, a householder or a renunciant. He: whoever, a householder or a renunciant. Chattapādukāya vā: or for the shoe for placing the umbrella handle. Here: in this training rule.

635.Majjhimassāti pamāṇamajjhimassa. ‘‘Catuhatthappamāṇo’’tiiminā catuhatthato ūnātireko daṇḍo na daṇḍo nāmāti dasseti. Daṇḍo pāṇimhi assāti vacanatthaṃ atidisanto āha ‘‘vuttanayenevā’’ti.

635.Majjhimassā: of medium measure. With "Catuhatthappamāṇo," he shows that a staff that is less than or more than four cubits is not called a staff. Extending the meaning of the statement, a staff is in the hand, he said, "in the manner said before."

636.‘‘Satthapāṇimhī’’ti ettha asi eva adhippetoti āha ‘‘asi’’nti.Asinti khaggaṃ.

636."Satthapāṇimhī"ti Here, a sword alone is intended, thus he said, "asi." Asi: means a sword.

637.‘‘Āvudhaṃ nāma cāpo kodaṇḍo’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttavacanaṃ upalakkhaṇamevāti dassento āha ‘‘āvudhapāṇissāti etthā’’tiādi. Sabbāpi dhanuvikati āvudhanti veditabbāti yojanā. Yathā asiṃ sannahitvā ṭhito satthapāṇīti saṅkhyaṃ na gacchati, evaṃ dhanuṃ kaṇṭhe paṭimukko āvudhapāṇīti āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi, iminā āvudho pāṇinā gahitoyeva āvudhapāṇi nāmāti dassetīti. Chaṭṭho vaggo.

637.Showing that the statement "Āvudhaṃ nāma cāpo kodaṇḍo" in the text is merely illustrative, he says, "āvudhapāṇissāti etthā," etc. All kinds of bows should be understood as āvudha, thus the connection. Just as one standing with a sword drawn is not counted as satthapāṇī, so one with a bow fastened to the neck is āvudhapāṇī, thus he says, "sace panā," etc., with this he shows that one who has taken up a weapon in the hand is called āvudhapāṇi. Sixth Chapter.

7. Pādukavagga-atthayojanā
7. Atthayojanā of the Pādukavagga

638.Aṅgulantaranti pādaṅgulavivaraṃ.Pādukanti upāhanaviseso. So hi pajjate imāyāti pādukāti vuccati, sā bahupaṭalā cammamayā vā hoti kaṭṭhamayā vā.Paṭimuñcitvāti pādukaṃ paṭimuñcītvā.

638.Aṅgulantara: the space between the toes. Pāduka: a kind of shoe. That is called pāduka because one travels with it, it is made of many layers of leather or wood. Having fastened: having fastened the shoe.

640.Dvīhi janehi gahitoti sambandho.Vaṃsenāti veṇunā, yāne nisinnoti sambandho.Visaṅkharitvāti vipattiṃ karitvā.Dvepīti dhammakathikadhammapaṭiggāhakasaṅkhātā ubhopi janā.Vaṭṭatīti desetuṃ vaṭṭati.

640.The connection is: held by two people. Vaṃsenā: with bamboo, the connection is: seated in a vehicle. Visaṅkharitvā: having caused destruction. Dvepī: both people, counted as the dhamma speaker and dhamma receiver. Vaṭṭatī: it is fitting to teach.

641.Sayanagatassāti sayanaṃ gatassa, sayane nipannassāti attho. Nipannassa desetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.

641.Sayanagatassā: of one who has gone to a bed, meaning one lying down in bed. The connection is: it is not fitting to teach one lying down.

642.Tīsu pallatthikāsu yāya kāyaci pallatthikāya nisinnassa dhammaṃ desetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti dassento āha ‘‘pallatthikāyā’’tiādi.

642.Showing that it is not fitting to teach the Dhamma to one seated in whichever of the three pallatthikās, he says, "pallatthikāyā," etc.

643.Yathā veṭhiyamāne kesanto na dissati, evaṃ veṭhitasīsassāti yojanā.

643.Just as when the hair is being wrapped, the end is not seen, so is one with a wrapped head, thus the connection.

647.Chapakasaddassa ca caṇḍālasaddassa ca vevacanattā vuttaṃ ‘‘caṇḍālassā’’ti. Caṇḍālo hi saṃ sunakhaṃ pacatītichapakoti vuccati sakārassa chakāraṃ katvā. Chapakassa esāchapakī,caṇḍālabhariyā.Yatrāti ettha trapaccayo paccatte hotīti āha ‘‘yo hi nāmā’’ti. Yo rājā ucce āsane nisīditvā mantaṃ pariyāpuṇissati nāma, ayaṃ rājā yāva ativiya adhammikoti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Sabbamida’’nti ayaṃ saddo liṅgavipallāsoti āha ‘‘sabbo aya’’nti. ‘‘Loko’’ti iminā idhasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti. Carimasaddo antimapariyāyo.Antimoti ca lāmako.Lāmakoti ca nāma idha vipattīti āha ‘‘saṅkara’’nti.Saṅkaranti vipattiṃ. ‘‘Nimmariyādo’’ti iminā ‘‘saṅkaraṃ gato’’ti padānaṃ adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti. Carimaṃ gataṃcarimagataṃ,sabbo ayaṃ loko carimagatoti attho. Idha ca jātake (jā. 1.4.33) ca kesuci potthakesu ‘‘camarikata’’nti pāṭho atthi, so ayuttoyeva.Tatthevāti ambarukkhamūleyeva.Tesanti rājabrāhmaṇānaṃ.

647.Since the word chapaka and the word caṇḍāla are synonyms, it was said, "caṇḍālassā." A caṇḍāla is called chapako because he cooks dogs, by changing the sa to cha. Chapakassa esāchapakī,caṇḍālabhariyā. Where: Here, the suffix tra occurs in the sense of being manifest, thus he says, "yo hi nāmā." It has been said that a king who sits on a high seat and recites a mantra is extremely unrighteous. "Sabbamida": this word is a gender displacement, thus he says, "sabbo aya." With "Loko," he shows the scope of this word. Carimasaddo is a synonym for antima. Antimo and lāmako. Lāmako and nāma here mean corruption, thus he says, "saṅkara." Saṅkara: means corruption. With "Nimmariyādo," he shows the implied meaning of the words "saṅkaraṃ gato." Carimaṃ gataṃcarimagataṃ,sabbo ayaṃ loko carimagatoti meaning. Here, and in the Jātaka (Jā. 1.4.33) in some books there is a reading "camarikata," but that is indeed unfitting. Tatthevā: at the foot of the mango tree itself. Of them: of the royal brahmins.

Tatthāti tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ.Pāḷiyāti attano ācārapakāsakaganthasaṅkhātāya pāḷiyā.Na passareti ettha resaddo antissa kāriyoti āha ‘‘na passantī’’ti.Yo cāyanti yo ca ayaṃ.Ayaṃsaddo padālaṅkāramatto, brāhmaṇoti attho.Adhīyatīti ajjhāyati, sikkhatīti attho.

There, in the third verse. Pāḷiyā: by the Pāḷi consisting of the text that reveals one's own conduct. Na passare: Here, the re sound is used for the antissa, thus he says, "na passantī." Yo cāya: and who is this. Ayaṃsaddo is just an ornamental word, meaning brahmin. Adhīyatī: is studied, means learns.

Tatoti bodhisattena vuttagāthāto paranti sambandho.Tassāti gāthāya.Bhoti bodhisattaṃ āmanteti. ‘‘Bhutto’’ti padassa kammavācakabhāvamāvikātuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘mayā’’ti.Assāti odanassa. Iminā suci parisuddhaṃ maṃsaṃsucimaṃsaṃ,tena upasecanamassātisucimaṃsūpasecanoti bāhiratthasamāsaṃ dasseti.Dhammeti ācāradhamme.Baddho hutvāti thaddho hutvā, ayameva vā pāṭho.Vaṇṇasaddassa saṇṭhānādike aññe atthe paṭikkhipituṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pasattho’’ti.Thomitoti tasseva vevacanaṃ.

Tato: the connection is: after the verse spoken by the Bodhisatta. Tassā: of the verse. Bho: he addresses the Bodhisatta. To make clear the passive voice of the word "Bhutto," it was said, "mayā." Assā: of the rice. With this, suci parisuddhaṃ maṃsaṃsucimaṃsaṃ,tena upasecanamassātisucimaṃsūpasecanoti shows the external-meaning compound. Dhamme: in the conduct dhamma. Baddho hutvā: having become stubborn, or this itself is the reading. To reject other meanings of the Vaṇṇa word, such as shape, it was said, "pasattho." Thomito: is a synonym for that itself.

Athāti anantare.Nanti brāhmaṇaṃ.Tassāti gāthādvayassa.Brāhmaṇāti purohitaṃ ālapati.Sampatīti sandīṭṭhike. ‘‘Yā vutti vinipātena, adhammacaraṇena vā’’ti padānaṃ sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘nippajjatī’’ti.

Athā: immediately after. Na: brahmin. Tassā: of the two verses. Brāhmaṇā: he addresses the chaplain. Sampatī: in this life. To show the connection of the words "Yā vutti vinipātena, adhammacaraṇena vā," it was said, "nippajjatī."

Mahābrahmeti ettha brahmasaddo brāhmaṇavācakoti āha ‘‘mahābrāhmaṇā’’ti.Aññepīti rājabrāhmaṇehi aparepi. ‘‘Pacantī’’ti vutte avinābhāvato ‘‘bhuñjantī’’ti atthopi gahetabboti āha ‘‘pacanti ceva bhuñjanti cā’’ti. ‘‘Na kevala’’ntiādināaññepīti ettha pisaddassa sampiṇḍanatthaṃ dasseti, tvaṃ ācarissasīti sambandho. Punatvanti taṃ, upayogatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, ‘‘mā bhidā’’tiiminā sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pāsāṇo’’tiimināasmasaddo pāsāṇapariyāyoti dasseti.Tenāti bhindanahetunā.

Mahābrahme ti: Here, he says that the word brahma signifies a Brahmin, "Mahābrāhmaṇā ti". Aññepi ti: Others too, different from the royal Brahmins. When "pacantī" (cooking) is stated, because of inseparability, the meaning "bhuñjantī" (eating) should also be taken, thus he says, "pacanti ceva bhuñjanti cā ti" (they cook and they eat). With "Na kevala" etc., he shows the meaning of combining with the word pi in aññepī ti, the connection is "tvaṃ ācarissasi" (you will practice). Again, tvaṃ (you) means that, this is a singular pronoun used in the sense of utility, it should be connected with "mā bhidā" (do not break). With "pāsāṇo ti", he shows that the word asma is a synonym for stone. Tenā ti: Because of the cause of breaking.

648.Attano kaṅkhāṭhānassa pucchanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘na kathetabba’’nti.

648. "Na kathetabbaṃ" (should not be spoken) is said in reference to asking about the place of one's doubt.

649.Samadhurenāti samaṃ dhurena, samaṃ mukhenāti attho.

649.Samadhurenā ti: Equal with the yoke, equal with the mouth, is the meaning.

652.Yaṃ mūlaṃ vā yā sākhā vā gacchatīti yojanā.Khandheti rukkhassa khandhe.Nikkhamatīti uccārapassāvo nikkhamati.Tiṇaṇḍupakanti tiṇena kataṃ, tiṇamayaṃ vā aṇḍupakaṃ.Etthāti uccārapassāvakheḷesu.

652.The construction is: yaṃ mūlaṃ vā yā sākhā vā gacchatīti (whatever root or branch goes). Khandhe ti: On the trunk of the tree. Nikkhamati ti: Urine and feces exit. Tiṇaṇḍupakaṃ ti: A dipper made of grass, or a grass dipper. Etthā ti: In feces, urine, and saliva.

653.Adhippetaudakaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paribhogaudakamevā’’ti. Sattamo vaggo.

653.To show the intended water, it is said, "paribhogaudakameva" (it is only water for use). The seventh chapter.

Etthāti sekhiyesu.Sūpabyañjanapaṭicchādaneti sūpabyañjane odanena paṭicchādeti. Samattā sekhiyā.

Etthā ti: In the Sekhiyas. Sūpabyañjanapaṭicchādane ti: Covering the soup and curry with rice. The Sekhiyas are complete.

8. Sattādhikaraṇasamatha-atthayojanā
8. Sattādhikaraṇasamatha-atthayojanā

655.Saṅkhyaṃ paricchijjatītisaṅkhyāparicchedo. Tesanti catubbidhānamadhikaraṇānaṃ.Tassāti tesaṃ khandhakaparivārānaṃ.Tatthevāti tesu eva khandhakaparivāresu.Sabbatthāti sabbesu sikkhāpadesūti.

655.Saṅkhyāparicchedo: Saṅkhyaṃ paricchijjatīti (number is delimited). Tesaṃ ti: Of the four kinds of Adhikaraṇas. Tassā ti: Of those Khandhaka and Parivāra. Tattheva ti: In those Khandhaka and Parivāra themselves. Sabbattha ti: In all the Sikkhāpadas.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the explanation of the Vinaya, the Samantapāsādikā,

Bhikkhuvibhaṅgavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

The Connecting (Yojanā) of the Bhikkhuvibhaṅga is complete.

Jādilañchitanāmena nekānaṃ vācito mayā.

By me, Jādilañchita by name, it has been recited to many.

Sādhuṃ mahāvibhaṅgassa, samatto yojanānayoti.

May the way of connecting (yojanānaya) of the Great Vibhaṅga be successful!

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgo

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga

1. Pārājikakaṇḍaatthayojanā

1. Pārājikakaṇḍaatthayojanā

Evaṃ bhikkhuvibhaṅgassa, katvāna yojanānayaṃ;

Having made the way of connection (yojanānaya) of the Bhikkhuvibhaṅga;
I shall make the way of connection (yojanānaya) of the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga.

Yoti vibhaṅgo.Vibhaṅgassāti vibhaṅgo assa.Assāti hoti.Tassāti bhikkhunīnaṃ vibhaṅgassa.Yatoti yasmā. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – bhikkhūnaṃ vibhaṅgassa anantaraṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ yo vibhaṅgo saṅgahito assa, tassa bhikkhunīnaṃ vibhaṅgassa saṃvaṇṇanākkamo patto yato, tato tassa bhikkhunīnaṃ vibhaṅgassa apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ kātuṃ tāva pārājike ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā hotīti. Apubbānaṃ padānaṃ vaṇṇanāapubbapadavaṇṇanā,taṃ.

Yo ti: Which Vibhaṅga. Vibhaṅgassā ti: Vibhaṅga is his. Assā ti: It is. Tassā ti: Of the Bhikkhunī's Vibhaṅga. Yato ti: Because. Here is the connection in this case - after the Vibhaṅga of the Bhikkhus, whichever Vibhaṅga of the Bhikkhunīs is compiled, since the order of the commentary of that Bhikkhunī's Vibhaṅga is reached, therefore, to make the explanation of the unprecedented words of that Bhikkhunī's Vibhaṅga, this commentary occurs on the Pārājika. Apubbapadavaṇṇanā: Explanation of unprecedented words, that.

1. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ
1. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ

656.‘‘Tena…pe… sāḷho’’ti ettha ‘‘etthā’’ti pāṭhaseso yojetabbo. Dabbaguṇakiriyājātināmasaṅkhātesu pañcasu saddesu sāḷhasaddassa nāmasaddabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sāḷhoti tassa nāma’’nti.Migāramātuyāti visākhāya. Sā hi migāraseṭṭhinā mātuṭṭhāne ṭhapitattā migāramātā nāma. Navakammaṃ adhiṭṭhātītinavakammikanti dassento āha ‘‘navakammādhiṭṭhāyika’’nti. ‘‘Paṇḍiccena samannāgatā’’tiiminā paṇḍā vuccati paññā, sā sañjātā imissātipaṇḍitāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Veyyattikenāti visesena añjati pākaṭaṃ gacchatītiviyatto,puggalo, tassa idaṃ veyyattikaṃ, ñāṇaṃ, tena. ‘‘Paṇḍā’’ti vuttapaññāya ‘‘medhā’’ti vuttapaññāya visesabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pāḷigahaṇe’’tiādi. ‘‘Medhā’’ti hi vuttapaññā ‘‘paṇḍā’’ti vuttapaññāya viseso hoti satisahāyattā.Tatrupāyāyāti aluttasamāso ‘‘tatramajjhattatā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. aṭṭha. yevāpanakavaṇṇanā) viya. ‘‘Kammesū’’ti iminā tasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.Kattabbakammupaparikkhāyāti kattabbakammesu vicāraṇāya. Casaddena ‘‘katākata’’nti padassa dvandavākyaṃ dasseti.Parivesanaṭṭhāneti paribhuñjituṃ visanti pavisanti etthāti parivesanaṃ, tameva ṭhānaṃ parivesanaṭṭhānaṃ, tasmiṃ.Nikūṭeti ettha kūṭasaṅkhātasikharavirahite okāseti dassento āha ‘‘koṇasadisaṃ katvā dassite gambhīre’’ti. Vityūpasaggo vikāravācako, sarasaddo saddavācakoti āha ‘‘vippakārasaddo’’ti. Carati anenāticaraṇaṃpādo, tasmiṃ uṭṭhito gilāno etissāticaraṇagilānāti dassento āha ‘‘pādarogena samannāgatā’’ti.

656.In "Tena…pe… sāḷho ti", the remaining text "etthā ti" should be connected. To show that the word sāḷha is a noun among the five words, namely substance, quality, action, class, and name, it is said, "sāḷho ti tassa nāma" (sāḷha is its name). Migāramātuyā ti: Of Visākhā. Since she was placed in the position of mother by Migāra the merchant, (therefore) she was named Migāramātā. Indicating that she oversees new construction, he says, "navakammādhiṭṭhāyika" (supervisor of new construction). With "Paṇḍiccena samannāgatā ti", he shows the meaning of the word paṇḍitā, that paṇḍā means wisdom; it has arisen in her, therefore (she is called) paṇḍitā. Veyyattikenā ti: Viyatto means one who goes distinctly, manifestly; this is the veyyattika (distinctiveness), the knowledge, of that person, by that. To show the difference between the wisdom mentioned as "paṇḍā" and the wisdom mentioned as "medhā", it is said, "pāḷigahaṇe ti" etc. For the wisdom mentioned as "medhā" is a distinction from the wisdom mentioned as "paṇḍā," due to being accompanied by mindfulness. Tatrupāyāyā ti: Unelided compound, like in "tatramajjhattatā tiādīsu" (dha. sa. aṭṭha. yevāpanakavaṇṇanā). With "Kammesū ti", he shows the scope of the word tassa. Kattabbakammupaparikkhāyā ti: For investigation into tasks to be done. With the word ca, he shows the Dvandva phrase of the words "katākata ti". Parivesanaṭṭhāne ti: Parivesanaṃ is where they enter to eat, that very place is parivesanaṭṭhānaṃ, in that. Nikūṭe ti: Here, showing that it is devoid of a peak called kūṭa, he says, "koṇasadisaṃ katvā dassite gambhīre ti" (in the deep place shown having made it similar to a corner). The prefix vi is a term denoting change, and the word sara is a word denoting sound, thus he says, "vippakārasaddo ti" (a word of transformation). Caraṇaṃ means foot, one who is ill and has arisen in that is caraṇagilānā, thus he says, "pādarogena samannāgatā ti" (one who is afflicted with a disease of the feet).

657.‘‘Tintā’’ti imināavassutasaddo idha kilinnatthe eva vattati, na aññattheti dasseti.Assāti ‘‘avassutā’’tipadassa. Padabhājane vuttanti sambandho.Tatthāti padabhājane. Vatthaṃ raṅgajātena rattaṃ viya, tathā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena suṭṭhu rattāti yojanā. ‘‘Apekkhāya samannāgatā’’ti iminā apekkhā etissamatthītiapekkhavatīti atthaṃ dasseti. Paṭibaddhaṃ cittaṃ imissantipaṭibaddhacittāti dassento āha ‘‘paṭibandhitvā ṭhapitacittā viyā’’ti.Dutiyapadavibhaṅgepīti ‘‘avassuto’’ti dutiyapadabhājanepi. Puggalasaddassa sattasāmaññavācakattā purisasaddena viseseti.Adhoubbhaiti nipātānaṃ chaṭṭhiyā samasitabbabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘akkhakānaṃ adho’’tiādi. Nanu yathā idha ‘‘akkhakānaṃ adho’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ padabhājanepi vattabbaṃ, kasmā na vuttanti āha ‘‘padabhājane’’tiādi.Padapaṭipāṭiyāti ‘‘adho’’ti ca ‘‘akkhaka’’nti ca padānaṃ anukkamena.Etthāti adhakkhakaubbhajāṇumaṇḍalesu.Sādhāraṇapārājikehīti bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ sādhāraṇehi pārājikehi.Nāmamattanti nāmameva.

657.With "Tintā ti", he shows that the word avassuta here refers only to the meaning of being wet, not to any other meaning. Assā ti: Of the word "avassutā ti". The connection is that it is said in the word analysis. Tattha ti: In the word analysis. Just as cloth is reddened by dye, so too, it is well reddened by the passion of bodily contact, is the construction. With "Apekkhāya samannāgatā ti", he shows the meaning that apekkhavatī means one who has longing. Showing that paṭibaddhacittā means one whose mind is attached, he says, "paṭibandhitvā ṭhapitacittā viyā ti" (as if having bound and fixed the mind). Dutiyapadavibhaṅgepi ti: Even in the second word analysis of "avassuto ti." Since the word puggala generally refers to a being, he specifies it with the word purisa. Adhoubbhaiti, to show that indeclinables should be compounded with the sixth case, it is said, "akkhakānaṃ adho ti" etc. Now, just as here it is said "akkhakānaṃ adho ti", so too, it should be said in the word analysis, why was it not said? He says, "padabhājane ti" etc. Padapaṭipāṭiyā ti: By the sequence of the words "adho ti" and "akkhaka ti". Etthā ti: In adhakkhaka, ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala. Sādhāraṇapārājikehī ti: By the Pārājikas common to monks and nuns. Nāmamatta ti: Merely a name.

659.Evanti imāya pāḷiyā vibhajitvāti sambandho.Tatthāti ‘‘ubhatoavassute’’tiādivacane. ‘‘Ubhatoavassute’’ti pāṭho mūlapāṭhoyeva, nāññoti dassentena visesamakatvā ‘‘ubhatoavassuteti ubhato avassute’’ti vuttaṃ.Ubhatoti ettha ubhasarūpañca tosaddassa chaṭṭhyatthe pavattiñca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuniyā ceva purisassa cā’’ti. Tattha bhikkhunīpurisasaddehi ubhasarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yā’’ti ca ‘‘sa’’iti ca dvīhi saddehi topaccayassa chaṭṭhyatthaṃ, ubhinnaṃ avassutabhāve satīti attho. Bhāvapaccayena vinā bhāvattho ñātabboti āha ‘‘avassutabhāve’’ti.Yathāparicchinnenāti ‘‘adhakkhakaṃ, ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala’’nti yena yena paricchinnena.Attanoti bhikkhuniyā.Tassa vāti purisassa vā.Idhāpīti kāyapaṭibaddhena kāyāmasanepi.

659.Evaṃ ti: The connection with this passage is "vibhajitvā" (having divided). Tattha ti: In the statement beginning with "ubhatoavassute ti". By stating "ubhato avassuteti ubhato avassute" without making a distinction, the meaning is that "Ubhatoavassute ti" is the root text itself, not another. Ubhato ti: Here, to show both the nature of ubha and the application of the suffix to in the sense of the sixth case, it is said "bhikkhuniyā ceva purisassa cā ti" (of the nun and of the man). There, with the words bhikkhunī and purisa, he shows the nature of ubha. And by the two words "yā ti" and "sa ti", (it indicates) the sense of the sixth case of the suffix to, meaning when there is the state of being wet of both. It should be understood that the sense of state is known without the suffix denoting state, thus he says, "avassutabhāve ti" (in the state of being wet). Yathāparicchinnenā ti: By whatever is delimited, namely "adhakkhakaṃ, ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ ti". Attano ti: Of the nun. Tassa vā ti: Or of the man. Idhāpī ti: Even here, in bodily contact with attachment to the body.

Tatrāti tesu bhikkhubhikkhunīsu.Na kāretabbo‘‘kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyeyyā’’ti avuttattāti adhippāyo.Acopayamānāpīti acālayamānāpi,pisaddo sambhāvanattho, tena copayamānā pagevāti dasseti.Evaṃ pana satīti citteneva adhivāsayamānāya sati pana.Kiriyasamuṭṭhānatāti imassa sikkhāpadassa kiriyasamuṭṭhānabhāvo.Tabbahulanayenāti ‘‘vanacarako (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.201; 3.133), saṅgāmāvacaro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.108) viya tassaṃ kiriyāyaṃ bahulato samuṭṭhānanayena.ti kiriyasamuṭṭhānatā.

Tatrā ti: Among those monks and nuns. Na kāretabbo (should not be done), the implication is that "kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyeyyā" (should approve of bodily contact) is not stated. Acopayamānāpī ti: Even without causing movement, the word pi implies possibility, therefore it shows that causing movement is even more so. Evaṃ pana satī ti: But when merely consenting with the mind. Kiriyasamuṭṭhānatā ti: The nature of arising from action of this Sikkhāpada. Tabbahulanayenā ti: In the way of arising frequently from that action, like in "vanacarako (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.201; 3.133), saṅgāmāvacaro tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.108)". Sā ti: That arising from action.

660.Etthāti ubbhakkhakaadhojāṇumaṇḍalesu.

660.Etthā ti: In ubbhakkhaka adhojāṇumaṇḍala.

662.‘‘Ekato avassute’’ti etthāpi topaccayo chaṭṭhyatthe hoti. Sāmaññavacanassāpi visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa anupayojitabbato āha ‘‘bhikkhuniyā evā’’ti.Tatrāti ‘‘ekato avassute’’tiādivacane.‘‘Tathevā’’tiiminā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutoti atthaṃ atidisati.Catūsūti methunarāga kāyasaṃsaggarāgagehasitapema suddhacittasaṅkhātesu catūsu.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.

662.‘‘Ekato avassute’’ ti: Here too, the suffix to is in the sense of the sixth case. Since the general statement also abides in the particular, and since the particular should not be used to specify the particular, he says, "bhikkhuniyā eva ti" (only of the nun). Tatrā ti: In the statement beginning with "ekato avassute ti". ‘‘Tathevā’’ ti: With this, he extends the meaning that it is wet with the passion of bodily contact. Catūsū ti: Among the four, namely sexual passion, passion of bodily contact, passion of the house, and pure-heartedness. Yatthā ti: In whatever place.

663.Ayaṃ puriso iti vā itthī iti vā ajānantiyā vāti yojanāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

663.The construction is: vā knowing this is a man or this is a woman. The first.

2. Dutiyapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Dutiyapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ

664.Dutiyekacci no sāti etthanosaddo nusaddatthoti āha ‘‘kacci nu sā’’ti.Parivāravipattīti parijanassa vināsanaṃ.‘‘Akittī’’ti ettha sammukhā nindaṃ gahetvā‘‘ayaso’’tiiminā parammukhā nindā gahetabbāti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘parammukhagarahā vā’’ti.

664.In the second, kacci no sā ti: Here, he says that the word no has the meaning of the word nu, "kacci nu sā ti". Parivāravipattī ti: Destruction of the retinue. ‘‘Akittī’’ ti: Here, having taken blame to one's face, with ‘‘ayaso’’ ti, it should be taken that blame behind one's back is being considered, thus he says, "parammukhagarahā vā ti" (or blame behind one's back).

666.‘‘Yā pārājikaṃ āpannā’’tiiminā ‘‘sā vā’’ti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.Catunnanti niddhāraṇatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, catūsūti attho.Pacchāti sabbapārājikānaṃ pacchā.Imasmiṃ okāseti paṭhamatatiyapārājikānamantare ṭhāne.Ṭhapitanti saṅgītikārehi nikkhittaṃ.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Tatrāti duṭṭhullasikkhāpadeti. Dutiyaṃ.

666.With "Yā pārājikaṃ āpannā ti", he shows the scope of the word ta in "sā vā ti". Catunnaṃ ti: This is a possessive plural used in the sense of determination, meaning among four. Pacchā ti: After all the Pārājikas. Imasmiṃ okāse ti: In the place between the first, third Pārājikas. Ṭhapitaṃ ti: Placed by the compilers. Etthā ti: In this Sikkhāpada. Tatrā ti: In the Duṭṭhulla Sikkhāpada. The second.

3. Tatiyapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Tatiyapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ

669.Tatiyeassāti ‘‘dhammena vinayenā’’ti padassa. Padabhājanaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Ñattisampadā ceva anusāvanasampadā ca satthusāsanaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘ñatti…pe… sampadāya cā’’ti.Satthusāsanenāti ca satthu āṇāya.Kammanti ukkhepanīyakammaṃ.Tatthāti saṅghe. ‘‘Vacanaṃ nādiyatī’’tiādīsu viyasaṅghaṃ vā nādiyatīti ettha nādiyanaṃ nāma nānuvattanamevāti āha ‘‘nānuvattatī’’ti.Tatthāti saṅghādīsu.Ayaṃ tāva saṃvāsoti saha bhikkhū vasanti etthātisaṃvāsoti atthena ayaṃ ekakammādi saṃvāso nāma. ‘‘Saha ayanabhāvenā’’tiiminā saha ayanti pavattantītisahāyāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Teti bhikkhū.Yehi cāti bhikkhūhi ca.Tassāti ukkhittakassa.Tenāti ukkhittakena.Attanoti ukkhittakassāti. Tatiyaṃ.

669.In the third, assā ti: Of the phrase "dhammena vinayenā ti". The connection is that the word analysis is stated. Showing that the accomplishment of the motion and the accomplishment of the announcement is called the Teacher's Dispensation, he says, "ñatti…pe… sampadāya cā ti" (and with the accomplishment of the motion, etc.). Satthusāsanenā ti: And by the Teacher's Order. Kammaṃ ti: Ukhhepanīyakamma. Tatrā ti: In the Saṅgha. Just as in "Vacanaṃ nādiyatī tiādīsu", here too in saṅghaṃ vā nādiyatī ti, nādiyana means nothing but non-compliance, thus he says, "nānuvattatī ti" (does not comply). Tatrā ti: In the Saṅgha etc. Ayaṃ tāva saṃvāso ti: With the meaning that, monks dwell together in this, this is called saṃvāso, this is the Saṃvāsa of single action etc. With "Saha ayanabhāvenā ti", he shows the word meaning that sahāyā means those who go along together. Te ti: Those monks. Yehi cā ti: And by which monks. Tassā ti: Of the one who has been suspended. Tenā ti: By the one who has been suspended. Attano ti: Of the one who has been suspended. The third.

4. Catutthapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ
4. Catutthapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ

675.Catutthe methunarāgena avassutā nādhippetā, kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutāvādhippetāti āha ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutā’’ti. ‘‘Purisapuggalassā’’tipadaṃ na hatthasaddena sambandhitabbaṃ, gahaṇasaddeneva sambandhitabbanti dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ purisapuggalenā’’tiādi.Tanti gahaṇaṃ, ‘‘hatthaggahaṇa’’nti vuttavacanaṃ upalakkhaṇamattamevāti āha ‘‘aññampī’’tiādi. Tattha‘‘aññampī’’ti hatthagahaṇato itarampi.Apārājikakkhetteti ubbhakkhake adhojāṇumaṇḍale.Assāti ‘‘hatthaggahaṇa’’ntipadassa.Etthāti ‘‘asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāyā’’tipade.Kāyasaṃsaggoti kāyasaṃsaggo eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na methunadhammo’’ti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etthāti kāyasaṃsaggagahaṇe.Sādhakanti ñāpakaṃ.

675.In the fourth, avassutā (wet) with sexual passion is not intended, avassutā with passion of bodily contact is intended, thus he says, "kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutā ti" (wet with passion of bodily contact). The phrase "Purisapuggalassā ti" should not be connected with the word hattha, it should be connected only with the word gahaṇa, thus he says, "yaṃ purisapuggalenā tiādi" (whatever by a male individual). Taṃ ti: That grasping, the statement "hatthaggahaṇa ti" is merely indicative, thus he says, "aññampī tiādi" (even something else). There, ‘‘aññampī’’ ti: Even something other than hand-grasping. Apārājikakkhette ti: In ubbhakkhaka, adhojāṇumaṇḍala. Assā ti: Of the word "hatthaggahaṇa ti". Etthā ti: In the phrase "asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāyā ti" (for the purpose of indulging in wrong conduct). Kāyasaṃsaggo ti: Bodily contact itself. Therefore it is said, "na methunadhammo ti" (it is not sexual intercourse). Hī ti: Truly, or because. Etthā ti: In the grasping of bodily contact. Sādhakaṃ ti: Indicative.

Tissitthiyoti bhummatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Tīsu itthīsūti hi attho, tisso itthiyo upagantvāti vā yojetabbo. Eseva nayo paratopi. Yaṃ methunaṃ atthi, taṃ na seveti yojanā.Na seveti ca na sevati. Tikārassa hi ekāro.Tayo puriseti tīsu purisesu, te vā upagantvā.Tayo ca anariyapaṇḍaketi tīsu anariyasaṅkhātesu ubhatobyañjanakesu ca paṇḍakesu ca, te vā upagantvāti yojanā.Na cācare methunaṃ byañjanasminti attano nimittasmiṃ methunaṃ na ca ācarati. Idaṃ anulomapārājikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Chejjaṃ siyā methunadhammapaccayāti methunadhammakāraṇā chejjaṃ siyā, pārājikaṃ bhaveyyāti attho.Kusalehīti pañhāvisajjane chekehi, chekakāmehi vā. Ayaṃ pañho aṭṭhavatthukaṃ sandhāya vutto.

Tissitthiyo ti: This is a locative singular used in the sense of utility. For it means in three women, or it should be connected as "having approached three women." This same method applies further on too. The construction is, "yaṃ methunaṃ atthi, taṃ na seveti" (whatever sexual intercourse there is, that he should not practice). Na seve ti ca na sevati: And he does not practice. For the ikaar is ekaar. Tayo purise ti: In three men, or having approached them. Tayo ca anariyapaṇḍake ti: In three eunuchs called ignoble, and in eunuchs with both sets of organs, or having approached them. Na cācare methunaṃ byañjanasmiṃ ti: And he does not engage in sexual intercourse in his own organ. This is said in reference to Anuloma Pārājika. Chejjaṃ siyā methunadhammapaccayā ti: Because of sexual intercourse, it would be severing, it would be Pārājika, is the meaning. Kusalehī ti: By those skilled in questions and answers, or by those desiring skill. This question is said in reference to the eight topics.

‘‘sedamocanagāthā’’ti vuttā.Virujjhatīti ‘‘na methunadhammo’’ti vacanena ‘‘chejjaṃ siyā methunadhammapaccayā’’ti vacanaṃ virujjhati, na sametīti attho. Iti ce vadeyya, na virujjhati. Kasmā? Methunadhammassa pubbabhāgattāti yojanā. Iminā methunadhammassa pubbabhāgabhūto kāyasaṃsaggova upacārena tattha methunadhammasaddena vutto, na dvayaṃdvayasamāpattīti dīpeti.Hisaddo vitthārajotako. Parivāreyeva vuttānīti sambandho.Vaṇṇāvaṇṇoti sukkavisaṭṭhi.Dhanamanuppādānanti sañcarittaṃ.‘‘Iminā pariyāyenā’’ti iminā lesena samīpūpacārenāti attho.Etenupāyenāti ‘‘hatthaggahaṇaṃ sādiyeyyā’’tipade vuttaupāyena.Sabbapadesūti sabbesu ‘‘saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ sādiyeyyā’’tiādīsu padesu.Api cāti ekaṃsena, visesaṃ vakkhāmīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Evaṃnāmakaṃ ṭhāna’’nti iminā ‘‘itthaṃnāmaṃ imassa ṭhānassā’’ti vacanatthaṃ dīpeti.

"Sedamocanagāthā" means it is called the sedamocanagāthā. Virujjhatī means by the statement "not sexual intercourse ( methunadhamma)," the statement "there would be an offense due to sexual intercourse" is contradicted; it does not agree, is the meaning. If one were to say this, it is not contradicted. Why? Because sexual intercourse is a preliminary act. With this, it indicates that only physical contact, which is a preliminary act to sexual intercourse, is referred to there by way of designation (upacāra) using the term methunadhamma, not the dual-dual attainment (dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti). The word Hi shows expansion. "Only in the Parivāra" is the connection. Vaṇṇāvaṇṇo means emission of semen. Dhanamanuppādāna means circulating. "Iminā pariyāyenā" means by this pretext, by close proximity. "Etenupāyenā" means by the means stated in the phrase "might approve of taking the hand." "Sabbapadesū" means in all the passages beginning with "might approve of taking the edge of the robe." Api cā means certainly, the intention is "I will speak a distinction." By "Evaṃnāmakaṃ ṭhāna," it indicates the meaning of the statement "the name of this place is such and such."

676.Ekantarikāya vāti ettha vāsaddena dvantarikādīnipi saṅgayhanti.Yena tenāti yena vā tena vā. Dviticatuppañcachavatthūni peyyālavasena vā vāsaddena vā gahetabbāni.Api cāti kiñca bhiyyo, vattabbavisesaṃ vakkhāmīti adhippāyo.Etthāti ‘‘āpattiyo desetvā’’ti vacane.ti saccaṃ.Vuttanti parivāre vuttaṃ.Tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ. Desitā āpatti gaṇanūpikāti yojanā.Ekaṃvatthuṃ āpannābhikkhunīti yojanā.Dhuranikkhepaṃ katvāti ‘‘imañca vatthuṃ, aññampi ca vatthuṃ nāpajjissāmī’’ti dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā. Yā pana saussāhāva desetīti yojanāti. Catutthaṃ.

676.Ekantarikāya vā here, with the word "vā," two intervals, etc., are included. Yena tenā means by whatever or by that. Two, three, four, or five objects should be taken by way of elipsis (peyyāla) or with the word "vā." Api cā means moreover, the intention is "I will speak a distinction that should be said." Etthā means in the statement "having confessed the offenses." means truly. Vutta means stated in the Parivāra. Tatrā means with reference to the previous statement. The offense confessed is suitable for counting, is the connection. Ekaṃ a bhikkhuni who has committed an offense of one object, is the connection. Dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā means having laid down the burden, thinking "I will not commit this object, nor any other object." But she confesses with enthusiasm, is the connection. Fourth.

Sādhāraṇāti bhikkhunīhi sādhāraṇā.Etthāti ‘‘uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo’’tiādivacane.

Sādhāraṇā means common to the bhikkhunis. Etthā means in the statement beginning with "The ayyas have been instructed."

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the explanation of the Pārājika chapter in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga,

Bhikkhunivibhaṅge pārājikakaṇḍavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

in the Samantapāsādikā, the commentary on the Vinaya.

2. Saṅghādisesakaṇḍaṃ

2. Saṅghādisesakaṇḍaṃ

1. Paṭhamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Paṭhamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

Pārājikānantarassāti pārājikānaṃ anantare ṭhapitassa, saṅgītassa vā, saṅghādisesakaṇḍassāti sambandho.Ayaṃīdisāanuttānatthavaṇṇanāanuttānānaṃ padānaṃ atthassa vaṇṇanādāniimasmiṃkāle bhavissatīti yojanā.

Pārājikānantarassā means of the Saṅghādisesakaṇḍa, which is placed, or recited, immediately after the Pārājikas. Ayaṃ such anuttānatthavaṇṇanā an explanation of the meaning of the unelucidated words dāni now will occur.

678.Paṭhame udakaṃ vasitaṃ acchādanaṃ anena katantiudositoti vacanatthena bhaṇḍasālā udositaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘udositanti bhaṇḍasālā’’ti. Ettha hiudasaddo udakapariyāyo. Saṃyogo na yuttoyeva.Bhaṇḍasālāti yānādīnaṃ bhaṇḍānaṃ ṭhapanasālā.Accāvadathāti ettha atītyūpasaggo atikkamanattho, ātyūpasaggo dhātvatthānuvattakoti āha ‘‘atikkamitvā vadathā’’ti.

678.In the first, showing that udosito is the name of the storehouse (bhaṇḍasālā) by the meaning of the statement udosito water has resided, a covering has been made by this, he says "Udositaṃ means storehouse." Here, the word uda is a synonym for water. Association is not suitable. Bhaṇḍasālā means a hall for keeping goods such as vehicles. Accāvadathā here, the prefix ati means transgression, the prefix ā is in accordance with the meaning of the verb root, therefore he says "having transgressed, you speak."

679.Ussayavasena vadanaṃussayavādo,soyevaussayavādikāti dassento āha ‘‘ussayavādikā’’tiādi. ‘‘Mānussayavasena kodhussayavasenā’’ti iminā ussayabhedaṃ dasseti.ti ussayavādikā.Atthatoti sarūpato.Etthāti padabhājane. Aḍḍanaṃ abhiyuñjanaṃaḍḍoti katvā dvinnaṃ janānaṃ aḍḍo vohārikānaṃ vinicchayakāraṇaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘aḍḍoti vohārikavinicchayo vuccatī’’ti, muddhajatatiyakkharoyeva.Yanti aḍḍaṃ.Yatthāti yasmiṃ kismiṃci ṭhāne. Dvinnaṃ aḍḍakārakānaṃ vohāraṃ jānantītivohārikā,akkhadassā, tesaṃ.Dvīsu janesūti aḍḍakārakesu janesu dvīsu.Yo kocīti aḍḍakārako vā añño vā yo koci.

679.Speaking by way of instigation is ussayavādo, that same is ussayavādikā, showing this, he says "ussayavādikā," etc. With "Mānussayavasena kodhussayavasenā," he shows the distinction of instigation. that instigating one. Atthato means in essence. Etthā means in the word analysis. "Aḍḍanaṃ abhiyuñjanaṃaḍḍoti" having made one who oppresses an oppressor, an oppressor of two people is a cause of judgment for the litigants, therefore it is said "aḍḍo is called a litigant judgment," the third letter is only cerebral. Yanti the oppressor. Yatthā means in whatever place. Those who know the dispute of the two oppressors are vohārikā, lawyers, of those. Dvīsu janesū means in the two people who are oppressors. Yo kocī means whoever, whether an oppressor or someone else.

Etthāti ‘‘ekassa ārocetī’’tiādivacane.Yattha katthacīti yaṃkiñci ṭhānaṃ āgatepīti sambandho.Athāti pacchā.ti bhikkhunī.Soti upāsako.

Etthā means in the statement beginning with "he tells one." Yattha katthacī means even if he has come to any place, is the connection. Athā means afterwards. that bhikkhuni. So that lay follower.

Tatthāti kappiyakārakaitaresu. Vohārikehi kateti sambandho.Gatigatanti cirakālapattaṃ.Sutapubbanti pubbe sutaṃ.Athāti sutapubbattā eva.Teti vohārikā, dentīti sambandho.

Tatthā means among those who do what is allowable and the others. The connection is "made by the litigants." Gatigata means having reached a long time ago. Sutapubba means previously heard. Athā means just because it was previously heard. Te means the litigants, the connection is "they give."

Paṭhamanti samanubhāsanato pubbaṃ.Āpattīti āpajjanaṃ.Etassāti saṅghādisesassa.Ayaṃ hīti ayaṃ eva, vakkhamāno evāti attho.Etthāti padabhājane.Saha vatthujjhācārāti vatthujjhācārena saha, vākyameva, na samāso.Vatthujjhācārāti karaṇatthe nissakkavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saha vatthujjhācārenā’’ti.Bhikkhuninti āpattimāpannaṃ bhikkhuniṃ.Saṅghatoti bhikkhunisaṅghamhā. Anīyasaddo hetukattābhidhāyakoti āha ‘‘nissāretīti nissāraṇīyo’’ti. Bhikkhunisaṅghato nissarati, nissāriyati vā anenātinissāraṇīyoti karaṇatthopi yuttoyeva.Tatthāti padabhājane.Yanti saṅghādisesaṃ.Soti saṅghādiseso. Padabhājanassa attho kāraṇopacārena daṭṭhabbo.ti saccaṃ.Kenacīti puggalena, na nissārīyatīti sambandho. Tena dhammena karaṇabhūtena, hetubhūtena vā.Soti dhammo.

Paṭhama means before the formal accusation. Āpattī means committing an offense. Etassā means of this Saṅghādisesa. Ayaṃ hī means this indeed, the one that will be spoken indeed. Etthā means in the word analysis. Saha vatthujjhācārā means together with the subject and the offense, it is just a sentence, not a compound. Vatthujjhācārā the instrumental case should be seen in the sense of instrumentality. Therefore it is said "saha vatthujjhācārena." Bhikkhuni means the bhikkhuni who has committed the offense. Saṅghato means from the bhikkhuni Sangha. He says "nissāretīti nissāraṇīyo" because the word anīya is expressive of expelling. Nissāraṇīyo because she goes out from the Bhikkhuni Sangha, or she is expelled by this, is also suitable in the sense of instrumentality. Tatthā means in the word analysis. Yanti the Saṅghādisesa. So the Saṅghādisesa. The meaning of the word analysis should be seen by way of causal designation. means truly. Kenacī means by someone, the connection is "is not expelled." By that Dhamma, which is the instrument, or the cause. So means that Dhamma.

Sayanti sāmaṃ.Tatoti gamanato, paranti sambandho. Bhikkhuniyā vā kataṃ ārocetūti yojanā.

Sayanti oneself. Tato means from going, beyond is the connection. Or it should be announced by the bhikkhuni.

Dhammikanti dhammena sabhāvena yuttaṃ.Yathāti yenākārena.Tanti ākāraṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘anodissa ācikkhatī’’ti vacane.

Dhammika means endowed with the Dhamma, with the nature. Yathā means in whatever way. Tanti that way. Tatthā means in the statement "he tells without directing."

Dhuttādayoti ādisaddena corādayo saṅgaṇhāti.ti ācikkhanā.Tanti ācikkhanaṃ.Tesanti gāmadārakādīnaṃ.Daṇḍanti dhanadaṇḍaṃ.Gīvā hotīti iṇaṃ hoti. Adhippāye satipīti yojanā.Tassāti anācāraṃ carantassa.

Dhuttādayo means with the word ādi, thieves etc. are included. that telling. Tanti that telling. Tesanti of the village boys etc. Daṇḍanti fine of money. Gīvā hotīti becomes a debt. Even if there is intention. Tassā means of one who behaves improperly.

Kevalaṃ hīti kevalameva.Tanti rakkhaṃ.Kāraketi anācārassa kārake.Tesa+?Nti kārakānaṃ.

Kevalaṃ hīti only indeed. Tanti that protection. Kāraketi to the doer of the misbehavior. Tesa+?Nti of the doers.

Tesanti harantānaṃ. ‘‘Anatthakāmatāyā’’ti iminā bhayādinā vutte natthi dosoti dasseti.ti laddhadosajotako.Attano vacanakaraṃ…pe… vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti attano vacanaṃ ādiyissatīti vutte vacanaṃ anādiyitvā daṇḍe gahitepi natthi doso daṇḍagahaṇassa paṭikkhittattā.Dāsadāsīvāpiādīnanti ādisaddena khettādayo saṅgayhanti.

Tesanti of those who take away. With "Anatthakāmatāyā," he shows that there is no offense if it is said out of fear, etc. means showing the acquired offense. Attano vacanakaraṃ…pe… vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti even if a fine is taken after saying that he will take his word, there is no offense, because the taking of the fine has been rejected. Dāsadāsīvāpiādīnanti with the word ādi, fields etc. are included.

Vuttanayenevāti atītaṃ ārabbha ācikkhane vuttanayena eva. ‘‘Āyatiṃ akaraṇatthāyā’’ti iminā anāgataṃ ārabbha odissa ācikkhanaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kena evaṃ kata’’nti pucchāya atīte katapubbaṃ pucchati.Sāpīti pisaddo vuttasampiṇḍanattho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Vuttanayenevā means just as was said in regard to telling about the past. With "Āyatiṃ akaraṇatthāyā," he shows telling by directing with regard to the future. In the question "Kena evaṃ kata," he asks about what was done in the past. Sāpī means the word pi is for combining what has been said. means truly, or because.

Daṇḍentīti vadhadaṇḍena ca dhanadaṇḍena ca āṇaṃ karonti.

Daṇḍentī means they impose a command with capital punishment and with a fine of money.

Yo cāyanti yo ca ayaṃ. Bhikkhunīnaṃ yo ayaṃ nayo vutto, eseva nayo bhikkhūnampi nayoti yojanā. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti vuttavacanameva vitthārento āha ‘‘bhikkhunopi hī’’tiādi. ‘‘Tathā’’tiiminā ‘‘odissā’’tipadaṃ atidisati.Te cāti te ca vohārikā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Yo cāyanti which also this. The way which was said for the bhikkhunis, this same way is also the way for the bhikkhus. Expanding on the statement "Eseva nayo," he says "bhikkhunopi hī," etc. With "Tathā," he extends the word "odissā." Te cā means those litigants. means truly, or because. First.

2. Dutiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Dutiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ

682.Dutiye varitabbaṃ icchitabbantivaraṃ,tameva bhaṇḍantivarabhaṇḍanti dassento āha ‘‘mahagghabhaṇḍa’’nti. ‘‘Muttā’’tiādinā tassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.

682.In the second, varaṃ, must be prevented, desired, that same is bhaṇḍa, therefore varabhaṇḍa, showing this, he says "mahagghabhaṇḍa." With "Muttā," etc., he shows its nature.

683.Āpubbo lokasaddo abhimukhaṃ lokanattho hoti, upubbo uddhaṃ lokanattho, opubbo adho lokanattho, vipubbo ito cito ca vītiharaṇalokanattho, apapubbo āpucchanattho. Idha pana apapubbattā āpucchanatthoti āha ‘‘anāpucchitvā’’ti. Mallagaṇa bhaṭiputta gaṇādikantiādīsumallagaṇonāma nārāyanabhattiko gaṇo.Bhaṭiputtagaṇonāma kumārabhattiko gaṇo. Ādisaddena aññampi gāmanigame anusāsituṃ samatthaṃ gaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Atha vāmallagaṇoti mallarājūnaṃ gaṇo. Te hi gaṇaṃ katvā kusinārāyaṃ rajjaṃ anusāsanti, te sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mallagaṇo’’ti.Bhaṭiputtagaṇoti licchavigaṇo pariyāyantarena vutto. Licchavirājūnañhi pubbarājāno bhaṭināmakassa jaṭilassa puttā honti, tesaṃ vaṃse pavattā etarahi licchavirājānopi bhaṭiputtāti vuccanti. Jaṭilo pana bārāṇasirañño putte nadisotena vuyhamāne nadito uddharitvā attano assame puttaṃ katvā bharaṇattā posanattābhaṭīti vuccati, tassa puttattā licchavigaṇobhaṭiputtoti vuccati. Tepi gaṇaṃ katvā vesāliyaṃ rajjaṃ anusāsanti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘bhaṭiputtagaṇo’’ti.Dhammagaṇonāma sāsanadhammabhattiko gaṇo.Gandhikaseṇīti gandhakārānaṃ samajātikānaṃ sippikānaṃ gaṇo.Dussikaseṇīti dussakārānaṃ samajātikānaṃ pesakārānaṃ gaṇo. Ādisaddena tacchakaseṇirajakaseṇiādayo saṅgayhanti.Yattha yatthāti yasmiṃ yasmiṃ ṭhāne.ti saccaṃ.Te evāti gaṇādayo eva. Punateti gaṇādayo.Idanti ‘‘gaṇaṃ vā’’tiādivacanaṃ.Etthāti rājādīsu. Saṅghāpucchanameva padhānakāraṇanti āha ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho āpucchitabbovā’’ti.Kappagatikanti kappaṃ gacchatīti kappagatā, sā eva kappagatikā, taṃ.

683.The word loka preceded by ā means facing, loka meaning. Preceded by upa means upwards, loka meaning. Preceded by o means downwards, loka meaning. Preceded by vi means hither and thither, vītiharaṇa meaning of loka. Preceded by apa means asking. Here, however, because it is preceded by apa, it is in the sense of asking, therefore he says "anāpucchitvā." Among mallagaṇa bhaṭiputta gaṇādikantiādi, mallagaṇo is a group devoted to Nārāyana. Bhaṭiputtagaṇo is a group devoted to Kumāra. With the word ādi, he includes another group capable of instructing the villages and towns. Or else mallagaṇo is a group of Malla kings. Having made a group, they instruct the kingdom in Kusinārā, referring to them it is said "mallagaṇo." Bhaṭiputtagaṇo is the Licchavi group stated in another way. For the former kings of the Licchavi kings were sons of a jaṭila named Bhaṭi, the Licchavi kings who are descended in their lineage are now also called Bhaṭiputta. However, because the jaṭila raised the sons of the king of Bārāṇasī, who were being carried away by the river current, as his sons in his hermitage, by maintaining and nourishing them, he is called bhaṭī, because the Licchavi group are his sons, it is called bhaṭiputto. Having made a group, they also instruct the kingdom in Vesālī, referring to that it is said "bhaṭiputtagaṇo." Dhammagaṇo is a group devoted to the Dhamma of the Teaching. Gandhikaseṇī is a group of perfumers who are of the same social class as the artisans. Dussikaseṇī is a group of weavers of the same social class as the tailors. With the word ādi, he includes groups of carpenters, groups of dyers, etc. Yattha yatthā means in whatever place. means truly. Te evā means just the groups, etc. Again te means the groups, etc. Idanti means the statement beginning with "gaṇaṃ vā." Etthā means among the kings, etc. Sangha's permission is the main cause, therefore he says "bhikkhunisaṅgho āpucchitabbovā." Kappagatika means that which goes through the aeon is kappagatā, that same is kappagatikā, that.

Nissitakaparisāyāti antevāsikaparisāya.Vuṭṭhāpentiyāti upasampādentiyāti. Dutiyaṃ.

Nissitakaparisāyā means in the community of pupils. Vuṭṭhāpentiyā means ordaining. Second.

3. Tatiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Tatiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ

692.Tatiye dutiyena pādena atikkantamatteti sambandho. Parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ nāma gharūpacārato paṭhamaleḍḍupāto. Saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento āha‘‘api cetthā’’tiādi.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade.Upacāre vāti aparikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhāne vā.Tatoti gāmantarato, khaṇḍapākārena vā vatichiddena vā pavisitunti sambandho.

692.In the third, the connection is "just the extent transgressed by the second line." Parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ means the first clod-fall from the vicinity of the house. Showing in detail the meaning stated concisely, he says "api cetthā," etc. Etthā means in this sikkhāpada. Upacāre vā means or in the place suitable for surrounding an uncircumscribed village. Tato means from another village, the connection is "she enters through a gap in the wall or a hole in the fence."

sambaddhavatikā,dve gāmā.Vihāranti bhikkhunivihāraṃ.Tato pana gāmatoti tato itaragāmato pana, nikkhantāya bhikkhuniyā ṭhātabbanti sambandho.Ussāraṇā vāti manussānaṃ ussāraṇā vā.

sambaddhavatikā, two villages. Vihāra means the bhikkhuni monastery. Tato pana gāmato means but from that other village, the connection is "it must be stayed by the bhikkhuni who has left." Ussāraṇā vā means the moving of people or.

Janāti gāmabhojakā janā.Ekaṃ gāmanti yaṃkiñci icchitaṃ ekaṃ gāmaṃ.Tatoti gāmato. ‘‘Kasmā’’ti imāya pucchāya ‘‘viharato ekaṃ gāmaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vacanassa kāraṇaṃ pucchati. ‘‘Vihārassa catugāmasādhāraṇattā’’tiiminā visajjanena taṃ pucchaṃ visajjeti.

Janā means the villagers who are village headmen. Ekaṃ gāma means any desired one village. Tato means from the village. With the question "Kasmā," he asks the reason for the statement "it is allowable to go from the monastery to one village." With the answer "because the monastery is common to four villages," he answers that question.

Yatthāti yassaṃ nadiyaṃ. Uttarantiyā ekadvaṅgulamattampi antaravāsako temiyati, sā nadī nāmāti yojanā. Yathā nivasiyamānāya timaṇḍalapaṭicchādanaṃ hoti, evaṃ nivatthāyāti yojanā. Bhikkhuniyā uttarantiyā antaravāsakoti sambandho.Yattha katthacīti yasmiṃ kismiṃci ṭhāne. ‘‘Setunā gacchati, anāpattī’’tiiminā padasā uttarantiyā eva āpattīti dasseti.Uttaraṇakāleti nadito uttaraṇakāle.Ākāsagamananti iddhiyā gamanaṃ. Ādisaddena hatthipiṭṭhiādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Akkamantiyāti atikkamantiyā.Etthāti dvīsu tīsu bhikkhunīsu.Orimatīramevāti apāratīrameva.Tameva tīranti orimatīrameva.Paccuttaratīti paṭinivattitvā uttarati.

Yatthā means in which river. If even one or two fingerbreadths of the undergarment gets wet while crossing, that is called a river. The connection is "just as there is covering of the three circles when it is being worn, so when it is worn." The connection is "if the bhikkhuni crosses, there is an undergarment." Yattha katthacī means in whatever place. With "Setunā gacchati, anāpattī," he shows that the offense is only when crossing by foot. Uttaraṇakāle means at the time of crossing the river. Ākāsagamana means going by psychic power. With the word ādi, he includes riding on elephants' backs, etc. Akkamantiyā means while stepping over. Etthā means among two or three bhikkhunis. Orimatīramevā means just the near shore. Tameva tīra means just the near shore. Paccuttaratī means turns back and crosses.

Assāti bhikkhuniyā ajānantiyā eva cāti sambandho, anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.Atha panāti athasaddo yadipariyāyo, kiriyāpadena yojetabbo. Atha acchati, atha na otaratīti attho.Acchatīti vasati.ti saccaṃ.Idhāti ‘‘ekā vā rattiṃ vippavaseyyā’’tipade.

Assā even if the bhikkhuni does not know, is the connection, and this is a word of ownership showing disregard. Atha panā means the word atha is a synonym for "if," it should be connected with the verb. Atha she stays, atha she does not descend, is the meaning. Acchatī means dwells. means truly. Idhā means in the passage "ekā vā rattiṃ vippavaseyyā."

Evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇamevāti evaṃ abhidhammapariyāyena vuttalakkhaṇameva.Taṃ panetanti taṃ pana araññaṃ.Tenevāti āpannahetunā eva.Aṭṭhakathāyanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Bhikkhunīsu pavisantīsūti sambandho, niddhāraṇatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Etthāti dassanūpacārasavanūpacāresu. Yattha okāse ṭhitaṃ dutiyikā passati, so okāsodassanūpacāro nāmāti yojanā.Sāṇipākārantarikāpīti sāṇipākārena byavahikāpi. Yattha okāse ṭhitā…pe… saddaṃ suṇāti, so okāsosavanūpacāronāmāti yojanā.Maggamūḷhasaddenāti magge mūḷhānaṃ saddena.Dhammassavanārocanasaddenāti dhammassavanatthāya ārocanānaṃ saddena. Maggamūḷhasaddena saddāyantiyā saddaṃ suṇāti viya ca dhammassavanārocanasaddena saddāyantiyā saddaṃ suṇāti viya ca ‘‘ayye’’ti saddāyantiyā saddaṃ suṇātīti yojanā.Saddāyantiyāti saddaṃ karontiyā. Nāmadhātu hesā.Evarūpeti ‘‘maggamūḷhasaddena viyā’’tiādinā vutte evarūpe.

Evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇameva means the characteristic that has been described in this way, according to the Abhidhamma method. Taṃ panetaṃ means that forest. Teneva means for the very reason it was requested. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ means in the Great Commentary (Mahā-aṭṭhakathā). The connection is with "pavisantīsu bhikkhunīsu" (while the nuns were entering), and this is a locative absolute used in the sense of specifying. Ettha means in the vicinity of sight and the vicinity of sound. The meaning of "yattha okāse ṭhitaṃ dutiyikā passati, so okāso dassanūpacāro nāmāti yojanā" is: the place where the second nun stands and sees is called the vicinity of sight. Sāṇipākārantarikāpī means even with a screen (sāṇipākāra) as an interposition. The meaning of "yattha okāse ṭhitā…pe… saddaṃ suṇāti, so okāso savanūpacāro nāmāti yojanā" is: the place where she stands and hears the sound is called the vicinity of sound. Maggamūḷhasaddenā means by the sound of those lost on the path. Dhammassavanārocanasaddenā means by the sound of announcing the hearing of the Dhamma. The meaning of "Maggamūḷhasaddena saddāyantiyā saddaṃ suṇāti viya ca dhammassavanārocanasaddena saddāyantiyā saddaṃ suṇāti viya ca ‘‘ayye’’ti saddāyantiyā saddaṃ suṇātīti yojanā" is: she hears the sound of someone making a noise as if by the sound of those lost on the path, and she hears the sound of someone making a noise as if by the sound of announcing the hearing of the Dhamma, and she hears the sound of someone making a noise as if saying "Ayye" (Venerable Sister). Saddāyantiyā means while making a sound. This is a nominal stem. Evarūpe means in such a way as was said, beginning with "maggamūḷhasaddena viyā".

Titthāyatanaṃ saṅkantā vāti titthīnaṃ vāsaṭṭhānaṃ saṅkantā vā. Iminā‘‘pakkhasaṅkantā’’ti ettha pakkhasaddassa paṭipakkhavācakattā tena sāsanapaṭipakkhā titthiyā eva gahetabbāti dasseti.Titthiyāhi sāsanassa paṭipakkhā hontīti. Tatiyaṃ.

Titthāyatanaṃ saṅkantā vā means having gone to a dwelling place of sectarians. With this, it shows that in ‘‘pakkhasaṅkantā’’, because the word "pakkha" signifies opposition, only sectarians, who are opponents of the Teaching (sāsana), should be taken. Because Titthiyā (sectarians) are opponents of the Teaching. The third is finished.

4. Catutthasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Fourth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

694.Catutthe pādassa ṭhapanakaṃ pīṭhaṃpādapīṭhaṃ. Pādassa ṭhapanakā kathalikāpādakathalikāti dassento āha ‘‘pādapīṭhaṃ nāmā’’tiādi.Anaññāyāti ettha yakāro tvāpaccayassa kāriyoti āha ‘‘ajānitvā’’ti.Netthāravatteti ukkhepanīyakammato nittharaṇakāraṇe vatte. ‘‘Vattamāna’’ntiiminā ‘‘vattanti’’nti ettha antapaccayaṃ nayena dassetīti. Catutthaṃ.

694.Pādapīṭhaṃ is a seat for placing the foot. Pādakathalikā is a small mat for placing the foot, thus he says, "pādapīṭhaṃ nāmā" etc. Regarding Anaññāyā, the "ya" is a modification of the "tvā" suffix, thus he says, "ajānitvā" (without knowing). Netthāravatte means in a state of being a cause for deliverance from an act requiring expulsion (ukkhepanīyakamma). By "Vattamāna," he shows that the "anta" suffix is used in "vattanti" according to the method. The fourth is finished.

5. Pañcamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Fifth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

701.Pañcame‘‘ekato avassute’’ti ettha heṭṭhā vuttanayena ‘‘ekato’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi bhikkhuniyā eva gahetabbabhāvañca topaccayassa chaṭṭhutthe pavattabhāvañca avassubhapade bhāvatthañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuniyā avassutabhāvo daṭṭhabbo’’ti.Etanti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā avassutabhāvo’’ti vacanaṃ.Tanti avacanaṃ.Pāḷiyāti imāya sikkhāpadapāḷiyāti. Pañcamaṃ.

701.In the fifth, regarding ‘‘ekato avassute’’, even though "ekato" is stated generally according to the method stated below, to show that only a nun should be taken, that the "ta" suffix functions in the sense of the sixth case, and that "avassubha" has the sense of state (bhāvattha), it is said, "bhikkhuniyā avassutabhāvo daṭṭhabbo" (the state of a nun being leaked on should be seen). Etaṃ means the statement "bhikkhuniyā avassutabhāvo". Taṃ means the non-statement. Pāḷiyā means by this training rule's text (sikkhāpadapāḷi). The fifth is finished.

6. Chaṭṭhasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Sixth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

705.Chaṭṭheyato tvanti ettha kāraṇatthe topaccayoti āha‘‘yasmā’’ti.Kassā hontīti uyyojikāuyyojitāsu kassā bhikkhuniyā hontīti yojanā.Nadetīti uyyojikā uyyojitāya na deti.Na paṭiggaṇhātīti uyyojitā uyyojikāya hatthato na paṭiggaṇhāti.Paṭiggaho tena na vijjatīti teneva kāraṇena uyyojikāya hatthato uyyojitāya paṭiggaho na vijjati.Āpajjati garukaṃ, na lahukanti evaṃ santepi uyyojikā garukameva saṅghādisesāpattiṃ āpajjati, na lahukaṃ.Tañcāti taṃ āpajjanañca.Paribhogapaccayāti uyyojikāya paribhogasaṅkhātā kāraṇāti ayaṃ gāthāyattho.

705.In the sixth, regarding yato tvaṃ, the "ta" suffix is used in the sense of cause, thus he says ‘‘yasmā’’ (because). Kassā hontī means to which nun among the instigator and the instigated do they belong? Na deti means the instigator does not give to the instigated. Na paṭiggaṇhātī means the instigated does not receive from the hand of the instigator. Paṭiggaho tena na vijjatī means for that very reason, acceptance by the instigated from the hand of the instigator does not exist. Āpajjati garukaṃ, na lahukaṃ means even so, the instigator incurs only a grave (garuka) Saṅghādisesa offense, not a light (lahuka) one. Tañcā means and that incurring. Paribhogapaccayā means the causes are called using by the instigator, this is the meaning of the verse.

Itarissā panāti uyyojitāya pana bhikkhuniyā.Paṭhamasikkhāpadeti pañcamasikkhāpade. Pañcamasikkhāpadañhi iminā sikkhāpadena yugaḷabhāvena sadisattā imaṃ upādāya paṭhamanti vuttanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Itarissā panā means but for the instigated nun. Paṭhamasikkhāpade means in the fifth training rule. Indeed, because the fifth training rule is similar in that it is paired with this training rule, it is said to be first in relation to this. The sixth is finished.

7. Sattamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Seventh Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

709.Sattameyāvatatiyakapadatthoti ‘‘yāvatatiyaka’’nti uccāritassa padassa attho veditabboti sambandhoti. Sattamaṃ.

709.In the seventh, yāvatatiyakapadattho means the meaning of the word "yāvatatiyaka" that is uttered should be understood, this is the connection. The seventh is finished.

8. Aṭṭhamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
8. The Eighth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

715.Aṭṭhamekismiṃcideva adhikaraṇeti niddhāraṇīyassa niddhāraṇasamudāyena avinābhāvato āha ‘‘catunna’’nti. Kasmā pana niddhāraṇasamudāyaniddhāraṇīyabhāvena vuttaṃ, nanu padabhājane cattāripi adhikaraṇāni vuttānīti āha ‘‘padabhājane panā’’tiādīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

715.In the eighth, kismiṃcideva adhikaraṇe means because what is to be specified is inseparable from the collection from which it is specified, he says "catunnaṃ" (of the four). But why is it stated in terms of what is to be specified and the collection from which it is specified, since indeed the four kinds of legal questions (adhikaraṇa) are stated in the word analysis (padabhājana)? He says, "padabhājane panā" etc. The eighth is finished.

9. Navamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Ninth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

723.Navamesaṃsaṭṭhasaddo missapariyāyoti āha ‘‘missībhūtā’’ti. ‘‘Ananulomenā’’tiiminā‘‘ananulomikenā’’ti ettha ikasaddo svatthoti dasseti. Koṭṭanañca pacanañca gandhapisanañca mālāganthanañca. Ādisaddena aññepi ananulomike kāyike saṅgaṇhāti. Sāsanāharaṇañca paṭisāsanaharaṇañca sañcarittañca. Ādisaddena aññepi ananulomike vācasike saṅgaṇhāti.Etāsanti bhikkhunīnaṃ.Silokoti yasoti. Navamaṃ.

723.In the ninth, the word saṃsaṭṭha is a synonym for mixing, thus he says "missībhūtā" (mixed together). By ‘‘ananulomenā’’, he shows that the "ika" in ‘‘ananulomikenā’’ is in the sense of "sva" (one's own). Koṭṭana (pounding), pacana (cooking), gandhapisana (grinding perfumes), and mālāganthana (making garlands). By the "ādi" (etc.), he includes other unsuitable bodily acts. Sāsanāharaṇa (bringing messages), paṭisāsanaharaṇa (bringing counter-messages), and sañcaritta (acting as a go-between). By the "ādi," he includes other unsuitable verbal acts. Etāsaṃ means of these nuns. Siloko means reputation (yaso). The ninth is finished.

10. Dasamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Tenth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

727.Dasameevācārāti ettha niggahitalopavasena sandhīti āha ‘‘evaṃācārā’’ti. ‘‘Yādiso’’tiādinā evaṃsaddassa nidassanādīsu (abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ 1186 gāthāyaṃ) ekādasasu atthesu upamatthaṃ dasseti.Sabbatthāti ‘‘evaṃsaddā evaṃsilokā’’ti sabbesu padesu.Uññāyāti ettha okāraviparīto ukāroti āha ‘‘avaññāyā’’ti. ‘‘Nīcaṃ katvā jānanāyā’’ti iminā avasaddo nīcattho, ñādhātu avabodhanatthoti dasseti. ‘‘Paribhavaññāyā’’ti vattabbe uttarapadalopavasena‘‘paribhavenā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘paribhavitvā jānanenā’’ti.Akkhantiyāti ettha sahanakhantiyevādhippetā, neva anulomakhanti, na diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantīti dassento āha ‘‘asahanatāyā’’ti.Vebhassiyāti ettha visesena bhāseti obhāsetīti vibhāso ānubhāvo, vibhāso imassa saṅghassa atthīti vibhasso saṅgho, bahvatthe ca atisayatthe ca sapaccayo hoti. Kasmā? Mantupaccayatthattā ‘‘lomaso’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.14.57) viya, bahuānubhāvo atisayaānubhāvo saṅghoti vuttaṃ hoti, saṃyogaparattā ākārassa rasso. Vibhassassa bhāvo vebhassiyaṃ, bahuānubhāvo atisayaānubhāvoyeva. Iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘balavabhassabhāvenā’’ti. Tattha balavaiti padena mantuatthe pavattassa sappaccayassa bahvatthañca atisayatthañca dasseti, bhāvaiti padena ṇiyapaccayassa bhāvatthaṃ, enaiti padena nissakkavacanassa karaṇatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tamevatthamāvikaronto āha ‘‘attano balavappakāsanenā’’ti. Tatthaattanoti attasaṅkhātassa saṅghassa.Balavappakāsanenāti bahuānubhāvappakāsanena, atisayaānubhāvappakāsanena vā. Balavappakāsanaṃ nāma atthato paresaṃ samutrāsanamevāti āha ‘‘samutrāsanenāti attho’’ti.Dubbalabhāvenāti ettha bhāvaitipadena ṇyapaccayassa bhāvatthaṃ, enaitipadena nissakkavacanassa karaṇatthaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sabbatthāti ‘‘uññāyā’’tiādīsu sabbesu padesu. Casaddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘evaṃ samuccayattho daṭṭhabbo’’ti.Viviccathāti ettha vītyūpasaggo vināsaddattho, vicadhātu sattatthoti āha ‘‘vinā hothā’’ti. Dasamaṃ.

727.In the tenth, regarding evācārā, there is a sandhi due to the elision of the niggahīta, thus he says "evaṃācārā". By "Yādiso" etc., he shows that the word "evaṃ" indicates similarity among the eleven meanings (in Abhidhānappadīpikā, verse 1186). Sabbattha means in all places such as "evaṃsaddā evaṃsilokā". Regarding Uññāyā, the "u" is a reverse of the "o," thus he says "avaññāyā" (disrespect). By "Nīcaṃ katvā jānanāyā," he shows that the "ava" means "low," and the root "ñā" means "to know." It is said ‘‘paribhavanenā’’ (with disdain) by eliding the latter word when it should be "paribhavaññāyā," thus he says "paribhavitvā jānanena" (by knowing with disdain). Regarding Akkhantiyā, what is intended is only the forbearance that is connected with patience (khanti), not the conforming patience, nor the patience of insight based on views (diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti), thus showing this he says "asahanatāyā" (by intolerance). Regarding Vebhassiyā, "visesena bhāseti obhāsetīti vibhāso ānubhāvo" (because it shines and illuminates specially, vibhāsa means influence), "vibhāso imassa saṅghassa atthīti vibhasso saṅgho" (because this Saṅgha has influence, it is called vibhassa), and the suffix "sa" is used in the sense of abundance and excess. Why? Because it has the meaning of the "mantu" suffix, as in "lomaso" etc. (Jā. 1.14.57), what is said is that the Saṅgha is of great influence and excessive influence, and the short "a" is due to combination. Vibhassassa bhāvo vebhassiyaṃ (the state of being vibhassa is vebhassiya), it is only great influence and excessive influence. Thus, showing this meaning, he says "balavabhassabhāvena" (by the state of great shining). There, by the word "balavatā," he shows the abundance and excess meaning of the "sa" suffix, which occurs in the sense of the "mantu," by the word "bhāva," the state meaning of the "ṇiya" suffix, and by the word "ena," he shows the fact that the instrumental case occurs with the word "nissaṅka" (without hesitation). Revealing that same meaning, he says "attano balavappakāsanena" (by the manifestation of the Saṅgha's own strength). There, attano means of the Saṅgha, which is referred to as "atta" (self). Balavappakāsanena means by the manifestation of great influence, or by the manifestation of excessive influence. The manifestation of strength is, in effect, the frightening of others, thus he says "samutrāsanenāti attho" (the meaning is by frightening). Regarding Dubbalabhāvenā, it should be seen that by the word "bhāva," he shows the state meaning of the "ṇya" suffix, and by the word "ena," the fact that the instrumental case occurs with the word "nissaṅka." Sabbattha means in all places such as "uññāyā" etc. The "ca" is understood as omitted, thus he says "evaṃ samuccayattho daṭṭhabbo" (evaṃ should be understood in the sense of collection). Regarding Viviccathā, the prefix "vi" means "vinā" (without), and the root "vic" means "to be separate," thus he says "vinā hotha" (be without). The tenth is finished.

Etthāti ‘‘uddiṭṭhā kho’’tiādipāṭhe.Taṃ panāti pakkhamānattaṃ panāti.

Ettha means in this passage beginning with "uddiṭṭhā kho" (indeed, it has been pointed out). Taṃ panā means but that act of going over to the side.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the seventeenth section, the commentary on the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga, in the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya commentary.

Bhikkhunivibhaṅge

Bhikkhunivibhaṅga

Sattarasakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

The application of the seventeenth section is complete.

3. Nissaggiyakaṇḍaṃ

3. Nissaggiya Section

1. Paṭhamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Meaning-Application of the First Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

dāniimasmiṃ kāle ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanākkamo bhavatīti yojanā.

dāni (now) the sequence of this commentary occurs at this time, this is the connection.

733.Paṭhameāmattikāpaṇanti ettha āmattasaddo bhājanapariyāyoti āha ‘‘bhājanānī’’ti. Bhājanāni hi amanti paribhuñjitabbabhāvaṃ gacchantīti‘‘amattānī’’ti vuccanti. Amattāni vikkiṇantīti‘‘āmattikā’’ti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha‘‘tānī’’tiādi.Tesanti āmattikānaṃ.Taṃ vāti āmattikāpaṇaṃ vā.

733.In the first, regarding āmattikāpaṇa, the word "āmatta" is a synonym for vessel, thus he says "bhājanāni" (vessels). Indeed, vessels go to the state of being used, thus they are called ‘‘amattāni’’. Explaining the meaning of "amattāni vikkiṇantīti ‘‘āmattikā’’" (because they sell amatta, they are called amattika), he says ‘‘tāni’’ (those) etc. Tesaṃ means of the amattika. Taṃ vā means or that amattika shop.

734.‘‘Sannidhi’’nti iminā saṃnipubbo cisaddo ucinanatthoti dasseti.Hisaddo visesajotako.Tatthāti mahāvibhaṅge.Idhāti bhikkhunivibhaṅge.

734.By "Sannidhi," he shows that the root "ci," preceded by "saṃni," is in the sense of accumulating. The word Hi indicates a distinction. Tattha means in the Mahāvibhaṅga. Idha means in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga.

Idampīti idaṃ sikkhāpadampi. Pisaddo mahāvibhaṅgasikkhāpadaṃ apekkhatīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Idampī means this training rule too. The word "pi" is in relation to the training rule in the Mahāvibhaṅga. The first is finished.

2. Dutiyanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Second Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

738.Dutiye ahatacoḷānampi sedamalādikilinne virūpattā ‘‘jiṇṇacoḷā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Api ayyāhī’’tiiminā ‘‘apa ayyāhī’’tipadavibhāgaṃ nivatteti.

738.In the second, even new cloths are said to be "jiṇṇacoḷā" (worn-out cloths) because they are unsightly due to sweat, dirt, etc. By "Api ayyāhī," he reverses the word division "apa ayyāhī."

740.Sabbampi etaṃ cīvaranti yojanā.Evaṃ paṭiladdhanti evaṃ nissajjitvā laddhaṃ.Yathādāneyevāti yathā dāyakehi dinnaṃ, tasmiṃ dāneyeva upanetabbaṃ, akālacīvareyeva pakkhipitabbanti atthoti. Dutiyaṃ.

740.Sabbampi etaṃ cīvaranti yojanā (all of this is a robe, this is the connection). Evaṃ paṭiladdhaṃ means obtained after forfeiting in this way. Yathādāneyevā means just as it was given by donors, it should be applied to that very gift, it should be put among robes received out of season, this is the meaning. The second is finished.

3. Tatiyanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Third Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

743.Tatiyehandasaddo vavassaggatthe nipātoti āha ‘‘handāti gaṇhā’’ti. Bahūni nissaggiyānīti sambandho.Saṃharitvāti visuṃ visuṃ saṅgharitvāti. Tatiyaṃ.

743.In the third, the word handa is a particle in the sense of eagerness, thus he says "handāti gaṇhā" (handa means take). Bahūni nissaggiyānīti sambandho (there are many things to be forfeited, this is the connection). Saṃharitvā means having collected separately. The third is finished.

4. Catutthanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Fourth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

748.Catutthe kiṇāti anenātikayanti vacanatthena mūlaṃ kayaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘mūlenā’’ti.ti thullanandā, āha kirāti sambandho. Ñādhātuyā avabodhanatthato aññampiñādhātuyā yācanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yācitvā vā’’ti.

748.In the fourth, that by which one buys is called kaya, thus the root is called kaya, thus he says "mūlena" (with a price). means Thullanandā, this is the connection, he says. Showing that other than the root "ñā" in the sense of knowing, the root ñā is in the sense of requesting, he says "yācitvā vā" (or having requested).

752.Yanti sabbitelādi.Taññevāti sabbitelādimeva.Yamakanti sabbiṃ saha telena yugaḷaṃ katvā.Vejjenāti bhisakkena. So hi āyubbedasaṅkhātaṃ vijjaṃ jānātītivejjoti ca rogañca tassa nidānañca bhesajjañca vidati jānātītipivejjoti ca vuccati.Tatoti vejjena vuttakāraṇā.Kahāpaṇassāti kahāpaṇena, ābhatanti sambandhoti. Catutthaṃ.

752.Yaṃ means any oil etc. Taññevā means just that oil etc. Yamakaṃ means having made a pair with oil together. Vejjenā means by a doctor. Indeed, because he knows the science called Ayurveda, he is called vejjo (doctor), and also because he knows the disease, its cause, and the remedy, he is called vejjo. Tato means because of what was said by the doctor. Kahāpaṇassā means by a kahāpaṇa, the connection is with "ābhatanti" (he should bring). The fourth is finished.

5. Pañcamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Fifth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

753.Pañcameti sikkhamānā.Ayanti sikkhamānā.Addhāti ekaṃsena.‘‘Cetāpetvā’’ti ettha citisaddo jānanatthoti āha ‘‘jānāpetvā’’ti. Pañcamaṃ.

753.In the fifth, means the trainee (sikkhamānā). Ayaṃ means this trainee. Addhā means certainly. Regarding ‘‘Cetāpetvā’’, the root "citi" is in the sense of knowing, thus he says "jānāpetvā" (having informed). The fifth is finished.

6. Chaṭṭhanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Sixth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

758.Chaṭṭhe chandaṃ uppādetvā gahitaṃchandakanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘chandaka’’ntiādi.Dhammakiccanti puññakaraṇīyaṃ.Dhammasaddo hettha puññavācako.Yanti vatthuṃ.Paresanti attanā aññesaṃ.‘‘Eta’’nti ‘‘chandaka’’nti etaṃ nāmaṃ. ‘‘Aññassatthāya dinnenā’’tiiminā aññassa atthoaññadattho,dakāro padasandhikaro, tadatthāya dinnoaññadatthikoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Aññaṃ uddisitvā dinnenā’’tiiminā aññaṃ uddisitvā dinnaṃaññuddisikanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Saṅghassa pariccattenā’’ti iminā saṅghassa pariccattosaṅghikoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

758.In the sixth, explaining the meaning of "chandam uppādetvā gahitaṃ chandakaṃ" (having generated desire, it is taken as a chandaka), he says "chandakaṃ" etc. Dhammakiccaṃ means an act of merit. Dhamma means merit in this context. Yaṃ means the thing. Paresaṃ means to others than oneself. ‘‘Etaṃ’’ means this name "chandaka". By "Aññassatthāya dinnenā," the meaning of "aññassa attho aññadattho" (the benefit of another is aññadattho), the "da" is a connector of words, "tadatthāya dinno aññadatthiko" (given for that benefit is aññadatthiko), is shown. By "Aññaṃ uddisitvā dinnenā," the meaning of "aññaṃ uddisitvā dinnaṃ aññuddisikaṃ" (having designated another, it is given as aññuddisika) is shown. By "Saṅghassa pariccattenā," the meaning of "saṅghassa pariccatto saṅghiko" (given up to the Sangha is saṅghiko) is shown.

762.Yadatthāyāti yesaṃ cīvarādīnaṃ atthāya. Yasaddena samāsabhāvato pubbe niggahitāgamo hoti.Tanti cīvarādikaṃ.Tumhehīti dāyake sandhāya vuttaṃ.Upaddavesūti dubbhikkhādiupasaggesu.Yaṃ vā taṃ vāti cīvaraṃ vā aññe vā piṇḍapātādiketi yaṃ vā taṃ vāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

762.Yadatthāyā means for the purpose of which robes etc. Because of the compound nature of the "ya" word, the augment of the previous consonant occurs. Taṃ means that robe etc. Tumhehī is said referring to the donors. Upaddavesū means in disasters such as famine. Yaṃ vā taṃ vā means whether it is a robe or other alms etc., yaṃ vā taṃ vāti. The sixth is finished.

7. Sattamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Seventh Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

764.Sattamesaññācikenāti ettha saṃsaddassa sayamatthe pavattibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ yācitakenā’’ti.Etadevāti ‘‘saññācikenā’’ti padameva.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpadeti. Sattamaṃ.

764.In the seventh, regarding saññācikenā, to show that the word "saṃ" has the meaning of "self," it is said "sayaṃ yācitakenā" (having requested oneself). Etadevā means just this word "saññācikenā". Ettha means in this training rule. The seventh is finished.

8. Aṭṭhamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
8. The Eighth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

769.Aṭṭhamegaṇassāti bhikkhunigaṇassa. Iminā‘‘mahājanikenā’’ti ettha bhikkhunigaṇova mahājanoti adhippetoti dīpetīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

769.In the eighth, gaṇassā means of the nun's group. By this, it is indicated that in ‘‘mahājanikenā’’, the nun's group is understood as the great assembly (mahājana). The eighth is finished.

9. Navamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Ninth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

774.Navameitoti imasmā aṭṭhamasikkhāpadato.Adhikataranti atirekataranti. Navamaṃ.

774.In the ninth, ito means from this eighth training rule. Adhikataraṃ means more excessive. The ninth is finished.

10. Dasamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Tenth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule

778.Dasame ‘‘vinassatī’’tiiminā‘‘undriyatī’’ti ettha udidhātuyā nassanatthaṃ dasseti dhātūnamanekatthattā.Paripatatīti parigalitvā patati. Iminā nassanākāraṃ dasseti.Ettakamevāti etaṃ parimāṇaṃ dvipadamevāti. Dasamaṃ.

778.In the tenth, "vinassati" means "undriyati"; here, the verb root 'udi' indicates the meaning of destruction because verb roots have multiple meanings. Paripatati means it falls away by dripping. This shows the manner of destruction. Ettakameva means only this much, only a two-footed one. The tenth.

11. Ekādasamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
11. The Eleventh Nissaggiya Pācittiya Sikkhāpada

784.Ekādasamegarupāvuraṇaṃnāma sītakāle pāvuraṇavatthanti dassento āha ‘‘sītakāle pāvuraṇa’’nti. Sītakāle hi manussā thūlapāvuraṇaṃ pārupanti. ‘‘Catukkaṃsaparama’’nti etthakaṃsasaddo bhuñjanapatte ca suvaṇṇādilohavisese ca catukahāpaṇe cāti tīsu atthesu dissati, idha pana catukahāpaṇe vattatīti dassento āha ‘‘kaṃso nāma catukkahāpaṇiko hotī’’ti. Catukkaṃsasaṅkhātaṃ paramaṃ imassāticatukkaṃsaparamaṃ,soḷasakahāpaṇagghanakaṃ pāvuraṇanti atthoti. Ekādasamaṃ.

784.In the eleventh, garupāvuṇaṇaṃ means a covering cloth in the cold season, showing this, he says "pāvuṇaṇa in the cold season." Indeed, in the cold season, people wear thick cloaks. In "catukkaṃsaparamaṃ" the word kaṃsa is seen in three meanings: a plate for eating, a special kind of metal like gold, and four kahāpaṇas (coins); but here, it refers to four kahāpaṇas, showing this, he says "kaṃsa means four kahāpaṇas." Catukkaṃsaparamaṃ means that its highest value is reckoned as four kaṃsas, meaning a covering cloth worth sixteen kahāpaṇas. The eleventh.

12. Dvādasamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadaṃ
12. The Twelfth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Sikkhāpada

789.Dvādasamelahupāvuraṇaṃnāma uṇhakāle pāvuraṇavatthanti dassento āha ‘‘uṇhakāle pāvuraṇa’’nti. Uṇhakāle hi manussā sukhumapāvuraṇaṃ pārupantīti. Dvādasamaṃ.

789.In the twelfth, lahupāvuṇaṇaṃ means a covering cloth in the hot season, showing this, he says "pāvuṇaṇa in the hot season." Indeed, in the hot season, people wear thin cloaks. The twelfth.

Aññadatthikānīti aññadatthikapadena vuttāni sikkhāpadāni.Itīti evaṃ.Ekatopaññattānīti ekasseva paññattāni,ubhatopaññattānīti ubhayesaṃ paññattāni.Etthāti ‘‘uddiṭṭhā kho’’tiādivacaneti.

Aññadatthikāni means the training rules stated by the term aññadatthika. Itī means thus. Ekatopaññattāni means enacted for one (group). Ubhatopaññattāni means enacted for both (groups). Etthā means in the statement beginning with "uddiṭṭhā kho."

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the Tiṃsakavaṇṇanā, the commentary on the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga in the Samantapāsādikā Vinaya commentary.

Bhikkhunivibhaṅge

Bhikkhunivibhaṅge

Tiṃsakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Tiṃsakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

4. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ

4. Pācittiya Kaṇḍa

1. Lasuṇavaggo

1. Lasuṇa Vagga

1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Meaning-Explanation of the First Sikkhāpada

Tiṃsakānantaraṃtiṃsakānaṃ anantare kālechasaṭṭhisatasaṅgahāchauttarasaṭṭhiadhikasatehi sikkhāpadehi saṅgahitā ye dhammā saṅgītikārehi saṅgītā,dāniimasmiṃ kāle tesampi dhammānaṃ ayaṃ vaṇṇanā hotīti yojanā.

Tiṃsakānantaraṃ means in the time immediately after the thirty (rules). Chasaṭṭhisatasaṅgahā means the teachings compiled by the reciters, collected with one hundred and sixty-six training rules. Dāni means now, in this time, this commentary is for those teachings as well. This is the explanation.

793.Tatthāti tesu chasaṭṭhisatasaṅgahesu sikkhāpadesu, paṭhamasikkhāpadeti sambandho. ‘‘Dve tayo’’ti ettha vāsaddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘dve vā tayo vā’’ti.Phoṭalaketi kande, miñje vā.Etanti ‘‘gaṇḍike’’ti etaṃ nāmaṃ. ‘‘Pamāṇa’’ntiimināmattasaddo pamāṇatthova, na appattho, nāpi avadhāraṇatthoti dasseti.Lasuṇanti setavaṇṇamūlaṃ mahākandaṃ. Mahākando hi byañjanasampākādīsu āmagandhānaṃ abhibhavanattā lasīyati kantīyatītilasuṇanti vuccati.

793.Tatthā means among those one hundred and sixty-six training rules; it relates to the first training rule. In "dve tayo," the word 'vā' is understood as omitted, so he says "dve vā tayo vā". Phoṭalake means in the bulb or kernel. Etaṃ means this name "gaṇḍike." By "pamāṇaṃ," he shows that the word matta is in the sense of 'measure' only, not in the sense of 'small' nor in the sense of 'determination'. Lasuṇaṃ means a large bulb with a white root. Indeed, a large bulb is called lasuṇa because it is cut off or sliced (lasīyati kantīyati) due to overpowering raw smells in curries and cooked dishes.

Suvaṇṇahaṃsayoninti suvaṇṇamayena pattena yuttaṃ haṃsayoniṃ.Jātissaroti jātiṃ bhavaṃ sarati jānātīti jātissaro.Athāti jātissarassa nipphannattā. Nipphannattho hi athasaddo.Pubbasinehenāti pubbe manussabhave bhāvitena sinehena.Tāsanti pajāpatiyā ca tissannaṃ dhītarānañca.Taṃ panāti pattaṃ pana.

Suvaṇṇahaṃsayoni means a goose-shaped vessel fitted with a golden plate. Jātissaro means one who remembers (sarati) or knows (jānāti) the past birth (jātiṃ bhavaṃ); he is a jātissaro. Athā means because of the arising of the one with memory of past lives. Indeed, the word 'atha' has the meaning of arising. Pubbasinehenā means with affection cultivated in a previous human existence. Tāsaṃ means of Pajāpati and the three daughters. Taṃ panā means that plate.

795.Magadhesūti magadharaṭṭhe ṭhitesu janapadesu.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Idhāti ‘‘lasuṇaṃ khādeyyā’’tipade.Tampīti māgadhakampi.Gaṇḍikalasuṇamevāti gaṇḍo phoṭo etassatthīti gaṇḍikaṃ. Gaṇḍasaddo hi phoṭapariyāyo, bahutthe ikapaccayo. Bahugaṇḍikalasuṇanti hi vuttaṃ hoti. Gaṇḍasaddo hi phoṭe ca kapole cāti dvīsu atthesu vattati, idha pana phoṭe vattatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Potthakesu pana oṭṭhajena catutthakkharena pāṭho atthi, so vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbo. Bahūsu hi pubbapotthakesu kaṇṭhajo tatiyakkharo ca oṭṭhajo catutthakkharo cāti dve akkharā aññamaññaṃ parivattitvā tiṭṭhanti.Na ekadvitimiñjakanti ekamiñjo palaṇḍuko na hoti, dvimiñjo bhañjanako na hoti, timiñjo haritako na hotīti attho. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttanti sambandho.Saṅkhāditvāti dantehi cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ katvā.

795.Magadhesū means in the districts situated in the Magadha country. means truly or because. Idhā means in the phrase "lasuṇaṃ khādeyyā". Tampī means even that from Magadha. Gaṇḍikalasuṇameva means gaṇḍikaṃ, that which has a bump or swelling (gaṇḍo phoṭo etassatthīti gaṇḍikaṃ). Indeed, the word gaṇḍa is a synonym for phoṭa, and the suffix 'ika' is used in the sense of having many. It means having many bulbs (bahugaṇḍikalasuṇanti). Indeed, the word gaṇḍa occurs in two senses: bulb and cheek; but here, it should be understood in the sense of bulb. However, in the books, there is a reading with the fourth letter articulated with the lips (oṭṭhajena catutthakkharena), that should be taken after careful consideration (vīmaṃsitvā několnaṃ). Indeed, in many old books, the two letters, the third articulated from the throat (kaṇṭhajo tatiyakkharo) and the fourth articulated with the lips (oṭṭhajo catutthakkharo), are interchanged and remain. Na ekadvitimiñjakaṃ means it is not a single-kernelled (ekamiñjo) palaṇḍuko, it is not a two-kernelled (dvimiñjo) bhañjanako, it is not a three-kernelled (timiñjo) haritako. This is the meaning. However, it is connected to what is stated in the Kurundi. Saṅkhāditvā means having crushed and crumbled with the teeth.

797.Palaṇḍukoti sukandako eko lasuṇaviseso.Bhañjanakādīni lokasaṅketopadesato daṭṭhabbāni.ti saccaṃ.Tassāti cāpalasuṇassa.Sabhāvenevāti sūpasampākādiṃ vinā attano sabhāvato eva.Tanti māgadhakaṃ, pakkhipitunti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.Yattha katthacīti yesu kesucīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

797.Palaṇḍuko means a type of garlic with a single bulb. Bhañjanakā and the others should be understood according to local convention. means truly. Tassā means of the wild garlic. Sabhāveneva means by its own nature, without soup, cooking, etc. Taṃ means that from Magadha; it is connected to pakkhipituṃ. means truly. Yattha katthacī means in any place whatsoever. The first.

2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Second Sikkhāpada

799.Dutiye saṃdassanaṃ bādhati nisedheti asmiṃ ṭhānetisambādhanti vacanatthena paṭicchannokāso sambādho nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘paṭicchannokāse’’ti.Ubho upakacchakāti dve bāhumūlā. Te hi upari yaṃkiñci vatthuṃ kacati bandhati etthātiupakacchakāti vuccanti.Muttakaraṇanti passāvamaggo. So hi muttaṃ karoti anenāti muttakaraṇanti vuccati. Lomo kattīyati chindīyati imāyātikattari,tāya vā, suṭṭhu daḷhaṃ lomaṃ ḍaṃsatītisaṇḍāso,soyevasaṇḍāsako,tena vā, khurati lomaṃ chindatītikhuro,tena vā saṃharāpentiyāti sambandho.Saṃharāpentiyāti apanentiyāti. Dutiyaṃ.

799.In the second, sambādha means a concealed place, showing this by the statement that "saṃdassanaṃ bādhati nisedheti asmiṃ ṭhāneti" in the place where showing is obstructed and prohibited, is called sambādha. Ubho upakacchakā means the two armpits. Indeed, they are called upakacchakā because one ties or fastens (kacati bandhati) something or other above them. Muttakaraṇaṃ means the urinary passage. Indeed, it is called muttakaraṇaṃ because it makes urine (muttaṃ karoti anena). Kattari, by which hair is cut or trimmed; or saṇḍāso, which firmly grasps the hair; that same is saṇḍāsako; or khuro, which shaves or cuts the hair— by these she has (the hair) removed (saṃharāpentiyāti sambandho). Saṃharāpentiyā means having it taken away. The second.

3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Third Sikkhāpada

803.Tatiyemuttakaraṇatalaghātaneti muttakaraṇassa talaṃ hananaṃ paharaṇaṃ muttakaraṇatalaghātanaṃ, tasmiṃ muttakaraṇatalaghātane nimittabhūte.Tāva mahantanti ativiya mahantaṃ.Kesarenāpīti kiñjakkhenāpi. So hi ke jale sarati pavattatīti kesaroti vuccati.

803.In the third, muttakaraṇatalaghātane means striking or hitting the surface of the urinary passage is muttakaraṇatalaghātanaṃ; with that muttakaraṇatalaghātanaṃ as the cause. Tāva mahantaṃ means exceedingly large. Kesarenāpī means even with the filament (kiñjakkhena). Indeed, it is called kesara because it flows (sarati pavattatīti) in ke, the water.

805.Gaṇḍaṃ vāti pīḷakaṃ vā.Vaṇaṃ vāti aruṃ vāti. Tatiyaṃ.

805.Gaṇḍaṃ vā means a boil or a pimple. Vaṇaṃ vā means a sore or ulcer. The third.

4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Fourth Sikkhāpada

806.Catutthe rañño orodhārājorodhā,purāṇe rājorodhāpurāṇarājorodhāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘purāṇe’’tiādi. ‘‘Gihibhāve’’ti iminā purāṇeti ettha ṇapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Cirāciranti nipātapaṭirūpakaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cirena cirenā’’ti. ‘‘Sakkothā’’ti iminā kathaṃ tumhe rāgacittaṃ paṭihanitvā attānaṃdhārethadhāretuṃ sakkothāti atthaṃ dasseti.Anārocitepīti bhūtato anārocitepi.

806.In the fourth, rājorodhā means the king's harem; purāṇe rājorodhā means the former king's harem; showing the meaning of the statement, he says "purāṇe" and so on. By "gihibhāve," he shows the form of the suffix ṇa in purāṇeti. Cirāciraṃ is an indeclinable-like word (nipātapaṭirūpakaṃ). Therefore, it is said "cirena cirenā". By "sakkothā," he shows the meaning of how you are able to restrain your mind of lust and dhāretha—to maintain yourselves. Anārocitepī means even without previously informing.

807.Jatunāti lākhāya.Paṭṭhadaṇḍaketi paṭubhāvena ṭhāti pavattatītipaṭṭho,soyeva daṇḍopaṭṭhadaṇḍo,tassa pavesanaṃ paṭṭhadaṇḍakaṃ, tasmiṃ nimittabhūte.Etanti ‘‘jatumaṭṭhake’’ti etaṃ vacananti. Catutthaṃ.

807.Jatunā means with lac. Paṭṭhadaṇḍake means that which stands or continues prominently is paṭṭho, that same stick is paṭṭhadaṇḍo; the insertion of that is paṭṭhadaṇḍakaṃ; with that as the cause. Etaṃ means this statement "jatumaṭṭhake." The fourth.

5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Fifth Sikkhāpada

810.Pañcame‘‘atigambhīra’’ntipadaṃ kiriyāvisesananti āha ‘‘atianto pavesetvā’’ti. ‘‘Udakena dhovanaṃ kurumānā’’ti iminā‘‘udakasuddhika’’ntipadassa udakena suddhiyā karaṇanti atthaṃ dasseti.

810.In the fifth, the phrase "atigambhīra" is an adjective of the action, so he says "having deeply inserted." By "udakena dhovanaṃ kurumānā," he shows the meaning of the phrase "udakasuddhika" as doing purification with water.

812.Dvaṅgulapabbaparamanti ettha dve aṅgulāni ca dve pabbāni ca dvaṅgulapabbaṃ, uttarapade pubbapadalopo. Dvaṅgulapabbaṃ paramaṃ pamāṇaṃ etassa udakasuddhikassāti dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ. Vitthārato dvaṅgulaparamaṃ, gambhīrato dvipabbaparamanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘vitthārato’’tiādi. Aṅgulaṃ pavesentiyāti sambandho.ti saccaṃ. ‘‘Catunnaṃ vā’’ti idaṃ ukkaṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ, tiṇṇampi pabbaṃ na vaṭṭati, catunnaṃ pana pagevāti atthoti. Pañcamaṃ.

812.Dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ means two aṅgulas and two joints (pabbāni) are dvaṅgulapabbaṃ; there is the elision of the preceding word in the compound. Dvaṅgulapabbaṃ paramaṃ pamāṇaṃ etassa udakasuddhikassāti dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ means the highest measure of this udakasuddhikaṃ is two aṅgulas and two joints. It means it is two aṅgulas wide and two joints deep. Therefore, he says "vitthārato" and so on. It is connected to aṅgulaṃ pavesentiyāti. means truly. "Catunnaṃ vā" is said from the perspective of the highest measure; even three joints are not allowable, but four are certainly out of the question. This is the meaning. The fifth.

6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Sixth Sikkhāpada

815.Chaṭṭhe bhattassa vissajjanaṃbhattavissaggoti vutte bhattakiccanti dassento āha ‘‘bhattakicca’’nti. Pānīyasaddena pānīyathālakaṃ gahetabbaṃ, vidhūpanasaddena bījanī gahetabbā,upasaddo samīpatthoti sabbaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekena hatthenā’’tiādi.‘‘Accāvadatī’’tipadassa atikkamitvā vadanākāraṃ dasseti ‘‘pubbepī’’tiādinā.

815.In the sixth, bhattavissaggo is the distribution of food; when bhattavissaggo is said, it indicates a meal duty, so he says "bhattakicca." The water bowl should be taken with the word "pānīya," the fan should be taken with the word "vidhūpana"; the word upa has the meaning of proximity, showing all this, he says "ekena hatthenā" and so on. The phrase "accāvadatī" shows the manner of speaking transgressively, by "pubbepī" and so on.

817.‘‘Suddhaudakaṃ vā hotū’’tiādinā ‘‘pānīyenā’’ti vacanaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ nāmāti dasseti.Dadhimatthūti dadhimaṇḍaṃ dadhino sāro, dadhimhi pasannodakanti vuttaṃ hoti.Rasoti maccharaso maṃsaraso. ‘‘Antamaso cīvarakaṇṇopī’’ti iminā ‘‘vidhūpanenā’’ti vacanaṃ nidassanaṃ nāmāti dasseti.

817.By "suddhaudakaṃ vā hotū" and so on, he shows that the word "pānīyena" is merely indicative. Dadhimatthū means the cream of curds, the essence of curds, the clear water in the curds. Raso means fish broth or meat broth. By "antamaso cīvarakaṇṇopī," he shows that the word "vidhūpanena" is merely illustrative.

819.Detīti sayaṃ deti.Dāpetīti aññena dāpeti.Ubhayampīti pānīyavidhūpanadvayampīti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

819.Detī means she gives herself. Dāpetī means she has (someone) else give. Ubhayampī means both water and fan. The sixth.

7. Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Seventh Sikkhāpada

822.Sattame ‘‘payogadukkaṭaṃ nāmā’’ti iminā heṭṭhā vuttesu aṭṭhasu dukkaṭesu pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ dasseti. Na kevalaṃ pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ ettakameva, atha kho aññampi bahu hotīti dassento āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.Saṅghaṭṭanesupīti viloḷanesupi.Dantehi saṅkhādatīti dantehi cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ karoti.Etthāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade, aññāya bhikkhuniyā kārāpetvāti sambandho. ‘‘Aññāyā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘viññāpetvā’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ.Mātarampīti ettha pisaddo aññaṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjantiyā pagevāti dasseti.Tāya vāti viññāpitabhikkhuniyā vā.Tanti āmakadhaññaṃ.Tanti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttavacanaṃ.Pubbāparaviruddhanti pubbāparato viruddhaṃ. ‘‘Aññāya…pe… dukkaṭamevā’’ti pubbavacane dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ, puna ‘‘aññāya…pe… dukkaṭa’’nti ca pacchimavacane pācittiyañca dukkaṭañca vuttaṃ, tasmā pubbāparaviruddhanti vuttaṃ hoti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

822.In the seventh, by "payogadukkaṭaṃ nāmā," he shows the dukkaṭa offense of prior effort among the eight dukkaṭa offenses stated below. Not only is the dukkaṭa of prior effort just this much, but there is much else too, so showing this, he says "tasmā" and so on. Saṅghaṭṭanesupī means even in stirrings. Dantehi saṅkhādatī means she crushes and crumbles with her teeth. Etthā means in this training rule, it is connected to having (it) done by another bhikkhuni (aññāya bhikkhuniyā kārāpetvā). The word "aññāyā" is the causative object in the phrase "viññāpetvā." Mātarampī here the word 'pi' shows that it is even more so for one who eats after informing another. Tāya vā means or by the bhikkhuni who was informed. Taṃ means that raw grain. Taṃ means the statement mentioned in the Mahāpaccariya. Pubbāparaviruddhaṃ means contradictory from beginning to end. In the earlier statement "aññāya…pe… dukkaṭameva," only dukkaṭa was stated, but again in the later statement "aññāya…pe… dukkaṭa," pācittiya and dukkaṭa are stated, therefore it is said to be contradictory from beginning to end. means truly or because.

823.Labbhamānaṃ āmakadhaññanti sambandho.Aññaṃ vā yaṃkiñcīti muggamāsādīhi vā lābukumbhaṇḍādīhi vā aññaṃ yaṃkiñci tilādiṃ vāti. Sattamaṃ.

823.It is connected to labbhamānaṃ āmakadhaññanti. Aññaṃ vā yaṃkiñcī means anything else such as green grams, black grams, gourds, pumpkins, or sesame seeds. The seventh.

8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ
8. The Eighth Sikkhāpada

824.Aṭṭhamenibbiṭṭharājabhaṭoti ettha uttarapadassa chaṭṭhīsamāsañca pubbapadena bāhiratthasamāsañca dassento āha ‘‘nibbiṭṭho’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘rañño bhatī’’ti iminā rañño bhaṭorājabhaṭoti chaṭṭhīsamāsaṃ dasseti, ‘‘etenā’’ti iminā bāhiratthasamāsaṃ.Nibbiṭṭhoti niviṭṭho patiṭṭhāpitoti attho.Keṇīti rañño dātabbassa āyassetamadhivacanaṃ.Etenāti brāhmaṇena.Tatoti ṭhānantarato. Bhaṭasaṅkhātāya keṇiyā pathattā kāraṇattā ṭhānantaraṃbhaṭapathanti āha ‘‘taṃyeva ṭhānantara’’nti.

824.In the eighth, nibbiṭṭharājabhaṭo shows both the sixth-case compound of the latter word and the bahuvrīhi compound with the preceding word, so he says "nibbiṭṭho" and so on. There, by "rañño bhatī," he shows the sixth-case compound rājabhaṭo. Nibbiṭṭho means appointed or established. Keṇī is another word for the tax to be given to the king. Etenā means by the Brahmin. Tato means from the subsequent place. Because the bhaṭa's tax is distinct and is the cause of the subsequent place, he says "taṃyeva ṭhānantaraṃ" because the bhaṭapatha is a subsequent place.

826.Cattāripi vatthūnīti uccārādīni.Pāṭekkanti paṭivisuṃ ekekameva.Uccāraṃ vātiādīsu vāsaddena dantakaṭṭhādayopi gahetabbāti āha ‘‘dantakaṭṭha…pe… pācittiyamevā’’ti.Sabbatthāti sabbesu uccārādīsūti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

826.Cattāripi vatthūnī means the four things: feces, etc. Pāṭekkaṃ means individually, one by one. In "uccāraṃ vā," the words dantakaṭṭha etc., should be taken with the word 'vā', so he says "dantakaṭṭha…pe… pācittiyameva". Sabbattha means in all: feces etc. The eighth.

9. Navamasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Ninth Sikkhāpada

830.Navameropimaharitaṭṭhāneti ropimaṭṭhāne ca haritaṭṭhāne ca. Ropiyati asminti ropiyaṃ, taṃyevaropimaṃyakārassa makāraṃ katvā.Etānīti uccārādīni.Sabbesanti bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ.Yattha panāti yasmiṃ khetteti. Navamaṃ.

830.In the ninth, ropimaharitaṭṭhāne means in a planted place and in a green place. Ropiyati asminti ropiyaṃ, taṃyeva ropimaṃ, having changed the yakāra to makāra. Etānī means feces etc. Sabbesaṃ means for all: bhikkhus and bhikkhunis. Yattha panā means in whichever field. The ninth.

10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Tenth Sikkhāpada

835.Dasamesoṇḍā vāti surāsoṇḍā vā.Moroti mayūro.Suvoti suko.Makkaṭoti vānaro. Ādisaddena sappādayo saṅgaṇhāti, makkaṭādayopi naccantūti sambandho.Asaṃyatabhikkhūnanti vācasikakamme asaṃyatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ, dhammabhāṇakagītaṃ vā hotūti yojanā. Tantiyā guṇena baddhātantibaddhā. ‘‘Bhi’’ntisaṅkhāto rāsaddo etissātibheri. Kuṭena katā bherikuṭabheri,tāya vāditaṃkuṭabherivāditaṃ,taṃ vā.Udakabherīti udakena pakkhittā bheri, tāya vāditampi hotūti sambandho.

835. In the tenth, soṇḍā vā means surāsoṇḍā vā (distilled spirits). Moro means peacock. Suvo means parrot. Makkaṭo means monkey. The word "ādi" (etc.) includes snakes and other creatures. The connection is that monkeys and others should also dance. Asaṃyatabhikkhūnaṃ means for monks who are unrestrained in verbal actions; the interpretation is: let there be singing of the Dhamma. Tantibaddhā means bound by a string. Bheri is a drum named "Bhi". Kuṭabheri is a drum made with a frame; kuṭabherivāditaṃ is playing that drum, or it can be that itself. Udakabherī means a drum placed in water; the connection is that playing that should also occur.

836.Tesaṃyevāti yesaṃ naccaṃ passati, tesaṃyeva. Yadi pana naccagītavādite visuṃ visuṃ passati suṇāti, pāṭekkā āpattiyoti dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Aññatoti aññato desato, passatīti sambandho. ‘‘Oloketvā’’ti pade apekkhite upayogatthe topaccayo hoti. Aññaṃ oloketvāti hi attho. Aññato vādente passatīti yojanā. Bhikkhunī na labhatīti sambandho. Aññe vattumpīti sambandho.Upahāranti pūjaṃ.Upaṭṭhānanti pāricariyaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu sayaṃ naccādīsu.

836. Tesaṃyeva means only for those whose dancing is watched. But if dancing, singing, and instrumental music are watched or listened to separately, the Āpatti (Offense) is separate for each, as indicated by saying, "sace panā" (but if). Aññato means from another place; the connection is, watches. The particle "Oloketvā" (having looked at) has a use-oriented suffix when अपेक्षा (apekkhita) is required, because the meaning is having looked at another. The interpretation is, one watches someone playing from another place. Bhikkhunī (female monastic) is not allowed, this is the connection. Others should also be told, this is the connection. Upahāra means offering. Upaṭṭhāna means attendance. Sabbatthā means in all dancing etc. oneself.

837.Antarārāme vāti ārāmassa antare vā.Bahiārāme vāti ārāmassa bahi vā.Aññena vāti salākabhattādīhi aññena vā.Tādisenāti yādiso corādiupaddavo, tādisenāti. Dasamaṃ.

837. Antarārāme vā means inside the monastery. Bahiārāme vā means outside the monastery. Aññena vā means other than alms from tickets etc. Tādisenā means like such a disturbance from thieves etc., like that. The tenth.

Lasuṇavaggo paṭhamo.

Lasuṇavaggo paṭhamo.

2. Andhakāravaggo

2. Andhakāravaggo

1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

839.Andhakāravaggassa paṭhameappadīpeti upalakkhaṇavasena vuttattā aññepi ālokā gahetabbāti dassento āha ‘‘padīpacandasūriyaaggīsū’’tiādi.Assāti ‘‘appadīpe’’tipadassa.

839. In the first of Andhakāravagga, appadīpe (without a lamp) is stated by way of example, therefore, showing that other lights should also be included, it is said, "padīpacandasūriyaaggīsū" (lamp, moon, sun, fire). Assā means of the word "appadīpe".

841.Narahoassādāpekkhā hutvā ca rassādato aññavihitāva hutvā cāti yojanā. Iminā ‘‘santiṭṭhati vā sallapati vā’’ti pade kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.Dānena vānimittabhūtena,pūjāya vānimittabhūtāya mantetīti yojanāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

841. The connection is that it exists having both the expectation of taste and the seeking of taste, and having been otherwise arranged than taste. With this, it shows the state of being a special action of the words "santiṭṭhati vā sallapati vā" (stays or converses). The interpretation is, it advises with dānena vā (giving) as the cause or with pūjāya vā (offering) as the cause. The first.

2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ

842.Dutiye idameva padaṃ nānanti sambandhoti. Dutiyaṃ.

842. In the second, the connection is that this same word is not different. The second.

3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ

846.Tatiye ‘‘idamevā’’ti padaṃ anuvattetabbaṃ.Tādisamevāti paṭhamasadisamevāti atthoti. Tatiyaṃ.

846. In the third, the word "idamevā" (this same) should be repeated. Tādisamevā means the meaning is just like the first. The third.

4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ

850.Catutthe kaṇṇassa samīpaṃnikaṇṇaṃ,tamevanikaṇṇikanti vutte kaṇṇamūlanti āha ‘‘kaṇṇamūlaṃ vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Kaṇṇamūle’’ti iminā ‘‘nikaṇṇika’’nti ettha bhummatthe upayogavacananti dasseti.Āharaṇatthāyāti āharāpanatthāyāti. Catutthaṃ.

850. In the fourth, nikaṇṇaṃ means near the ear, nikaṇṇika means that itself; when said, it says "kaṇṇamūlaṃ vuccatī" (it is called the base of the ear), it says the root of the ear. With this "Kaṇṇamūle" (at the root of the ear), it shows that in "nikaṇṇika" there is a use of the suffix in the sense of abundance. Āharaṇatthāyā means for the purpose of bringing near. The fourth.

5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ

854.Pañcametesanti gharasāmikānaṃ.Gharampīti na kevalaṃ āsanameva, gharampi sodhemāti attho.Tatoti parivitakkanato, paranti sambandho.

854. In the fifth, tesaṃ means of the householders. Gharampī means not only the seat, but also let me sweep the house, this is the meaning. Tato means from that consideration, paranti sambandho (paranti sambandho - no translation available).

858.Corā vā uṭṭhitā hontīti yojanāti. Pañcamaṃ.

858. The connection is that thieves might arise. The fifth.

6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

860.Chaṭṭheabhinisīdeyyāti ettha abhisaddo upasaggamattovāti dassento āha ‘‘nisīdeyyā’’ti. Eseva nayoabhinipajjeyyāti etthāpi. Dve āpattiyoti sambandhoti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

860. In the sixth, showing that in abhinisīdeyyā (should sit down), the word "abhi" (abhi) is merely a prefix, it says "nisīdeyyā" (should sit down). This same method applies to abhinipajjeyyā (should lie down) as well. The connection is that there are two offenses. The sixth.

7. Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ
7. Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ

864.Sattamesabbanti sakalaṃ vattabbavacananti. Sattamaṃ.

864. In the seventh, sabbaṃ means the entire word of command. The seventh.

8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ

869.Aṭṭhame anuttānavacanaṃ natthīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

869. In the eighth, there is no word that is not obvious. The eighth.

9. Navamasikkhāpadaṃ
9. Navamasikkhāpadaṃ

875.Navameabhisapeyyāti ettha sapadhātussa akkosanatthaṃ antokatvā karadhātuyā atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sapathaṃ kareyyā’’ti.Niraye nibbattāmhīti ahaṃ niraye nibbattā amhīti yojanā.Niraye nibbattatūti esā bhikkhunī niraye nibbattatūti yojanā.Īdisā hotūti mama sadisā hotūti attho.Kāṇāti ekakkhikāṇā, dvakkhikāṇā vā.Kuṇīti hatthapādādivaṅkā.

875. In the ninth, in abhisapeyyā (should curse), including the meaning of scolding in the root "sap," showing the meaning by the root "kar," it says "sapathaṃ kareyyā" (should make an oath). Niraye nibbattāmhī (may I be reborn in hell) means, I am one who is reborn in hell. Niraye nibbattatū (may she be reborn in hell) means, may this bhikkhunī be reborn in hell. Īdisā hotū (may she be like this) means, may she be like me. Kāṇā means one-eyed or two-eyed blind. Kuṇī means crooked in hands, feet, etc.

878.Edisāti virūpādijātikā.Viramassūti viramāhi.Addhāti dhuvanti. Navamaṃ.

878. Edisā means of deformed birth etc. Viramassū means cease. Addhā means certainly. The ninth.

10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ
10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ

879.Dasame anuttānaṭṭhānaṃ natthīti. Dasamaṃ.

879. In the tenth, there is no place for a meaning that is not obvious. The tenth.

Andhakāravaggo dutiyo.

Andhakāravaggo dutiyo.

3. Naggavaggo

3. Naggavaggo

1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

883.Naggavaggassa paṭhamebrahmacariyena ciṇṇenāti ciṇṇena brahmacariyena kiṃ nu kho nāmāti attho. ‘‘Brahmacariyassa caraṇenā’’ti iminā ciṇṇasaddassa caraṇaṃciṇṇanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Na aññaṃ cīvara’’nti iminā evatthaṃ dasseti, aññatthāpohanaṃ vāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

883. In the first of Naggavagga, brahmacariyena ciṇṇenā (by practicing the brahma-life) means, what indeed is named by the practiced Brahma-life. With this "Brahmacariyassa caraṇena" (by the practice of the Brahma-life), it shows that the meaning of the word "ciṇṇa" is "caraṇaṃ ciṇṇaṃ" (practice is practice). With this "Na aññaṃ cīvaraṃ" (no other robe), it shows the meaning of "eva" (indeed), or it is the rejection of otherness. The first.

2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ

887.Dutiye anuttānaṭṭhānaṃ natthīti. Dutiyaṃ.

887. In the second, there is no place for a meaning that is not obvious. The second.

3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ

893.Tatiyeanantarāyikinīti ettha natthi antarāyo etissāti anantarāyā, sā eva anantarāyikinīti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘anantarāyā’’ti. Tatiyaṃ.

893. In the third, in anantarāyikinī (without obstruction), showing the meaning of the word, "anantarāyā, sā eva anantarāyikinīti" (without obstruction, that itself is without obstruction), it says "anantarāyā" (without obstruction). The third.

4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ

898.Catutthepañcāhanti samāhāradigu, ṇikapaccayo svattho.Saṅghāṭicārotiettha kenaṭṭhena saṅghāṭi nāma, cārasaddo kimatthoti āha ‘‘paribhogavasena vā’’tiādi. Tatthasaṅghaṭitaṭṭhenāti saṃharitaṭṭhena. Iminā ‘‘kenaṭṭhena saṅghāṭi nāmā’’ti pucchaṃ visajjeti. ‘‘Parivattana’’nti iminā ‘‘cārasaddo kimattho’’ti codanaṃ pariharati.Pañcasūti ticīvaraṃ udakasāṭikā saṃkaccikāti pañcasūti. Catutthaṃ.

898. In the fourth, pañcāhaṃ (five days) is a samāhāradigu (aggregate numeral) with the suffix "ṇika" in its own meaning. Regarding saṅghāṭicāro (going with a saṅghāṭi), it asks, "what is the meaning of the word saṅghāṭi, and what is the meaning of the word cāra?" and answers, "paribhogavasena vā" (by way of use). There, saṅghaṭitaṭṭhenā (by the meaning of assembling) means by the meaning of gathering together. With this, it answers the question, "what is the meaning of the word saṅghāṭi?". "Parivattana" (turning around) parries the accusation, "what is the meaning of the word cāra?". Pañcasū means the three robes, the bathing cloth, and the waistband, these five. The fourth.

5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ

903.Pañcame ‘‘cīvarasaṅkamanīya’’ntiettha saṅkametabbaṃ paṭidātabbantisaṅkamanīyanti kamudhātussa paṭidānatthañca anīyasaddassa kammatthañca, ‘cīvarañca taṃ saṅkamanīyañce’ticīvarasaṅkamanīyanti visesanaparapadabhāvañca dassento āha ‘‘saṅkametabbaṃ cīvara’’nti. Tattha ‘‘saṅkametabbaṃ cīvara’’nti iminā kammatthañca visesanaparapadabhāvañca dasseti. ‘‘Paṭidātabbacīvara’’nti iminā kamudhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti adhippāyavasenāti. Pañcamaṃ.

903. In the fifth, in "cīvarasaṅkamanīya" (a robe to be transferred), showing that saṅkamanīya (to be transferred) means "saṅkametabbaṃ paṭidātabbaṃ" (to be transferred, to be returned), with the meaning of returning for the root "kamu," and the meaning of object for the suffix "anīya," and that "cīvarañca taṃ saṅkamanīyañce" (and that robe is to be transferred) has the state of being a special preceding word, it says "saṅkametabbaṃ cīvara" (a robe to be transferred). There, with "saṅkametabbaṃ cīvara," it shows the object and the state of being a special preceding word. With "paṭidātabbacīvara" (a robe to be returned), it shows the meaning of the root "kamu" according to intention. The fifth.

6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

909.Chaṭṭhe ‘‘aññaṃ parikkhāra’’ntiettha parikkhārassa sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yaṃkiñcī’’tiādi. Yaṃkiñci aññataranti sambandho.Kittakaṃagghanakanti kiṃ pamāṇena agghena arahaṃ cīvaraṃ.Dātukāmatthāti tumhe dātukāmā bhavathāti attho.Katipāhenāti katipayāni ahāni katipāhaṃ, yakāralopo.Katipayasaddohi dvitivācako rūḷhīsaddo, tena katipāhena.Samagghanti appagghaṃ.Saṃsaddo hi appatthavācakoti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

909. In the sixth, in "aññaṃ parikkhāraṃ" (another requisite), showing the nature of a requisite, it says "yaṃkiñcī" (whatever) etc. The connection is, whatever, any. Kittakaṃagghanakaṃ (how much is it worth) means, how much is the robe worthy of an offering. Dātukāmatthā (desiring to give) means, you wish to give. Katipāhena (in a few days) means, a few days, katipāhaṃ, with the elision of the "ya". The word katipaya (few) is a word established in the dual number; therefore, with katipāhena. Samagghaṃ (cheap) means of little worth. The word saṃ (saṃ) indicates little. The sixth.

7. Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ
7. Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ

911.Sattame‘‘vipakkamiṃsū’’ti ettha vividhaṃ ṭhānaṃ pakkamiṃsūti dassento āha ‘‘tattha tattha agamaṃsū’’ti. Amhākampi āgamananti sambandho.

911. In the seventh, showing that in ‘‘vipakkamiṃsū’’ (they departed), they departed to various places, it says "tattha tattha agamaṃsū" (they went here and there). The connection is, may there be coming for us as well.

915.Katipāhena uppajjissatīti katipāhena cīvaraṃ uppajjissati.Tatoti tasmiṃ cīvaruppajjanakāleti. Sattamaṃ.

915. Katipāhena uppajjissatī (it will arise in a few days) means, in a few days a robe will arise. Tato (then) means, at that time of the arising of the robe. The seventh.

8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ

916.Aṭṭhame ye nāṭakaṃ nāṭenti, tenaṭānāmāti yojanā. Iminā naṭakaṃ nāṭentītinaṭāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ye naccanti, te nāṭakā nāmāti yojanā. Iminā sayaṃ naṭantītināṭakāti vacanatthaṃ dīpeti.Vaṃsavarattādīsūti etthavaṃsonāma veṇu.Varattānāma naddhikā. Ādisaddena rajjuādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Ye laṅghanakammaṃ karonti, telaṅghakānāmāti yojanā.Māyākārāti ettha māyā nāma mayanāmakena asurena sure calayituṃ katattā mayassa esāti māyā, taṃ karotīti māyākāro, mayanāmako asuroyeva. Aññe pana rūḷhīvasena ‘‘māyākārā’’ti vuccanti. Sokena jhāyanaṃ ḍayhanaṃsokajjhāyaṃ,surānaṃ sokajjhāyaṃ karotītisokajjhāyiko,mayanāmako asuroyeva. Aññe pana rūḷhīvasena ‘‘sokajjhāyikā’’ti vuccanti. Iti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sokajjhāyikā nāma māyākārā’’ti.Kumbhathuṇikā nāmāti ettha vissaṭṭhattā thavīyatītithuṇo,saddo. Kumbhassa thuṇokumbhathuṇo. Tena kīḷantītikumbhathuṇikā,iti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘ghaṭakena kīḷanakā’’ti iminā.Bimbisakanti caturassaambaṇatāḷanaṃ, taṃ vādentītibimbisakavādakāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

916. In the eighth, those who perform plays are called naṭā (actors), this is the connection. With this, it shows that the meaning of naṭā is "naṭakaṃ nāṭentīti" (they perform plays). Those who dance are called nāṭakā (dancers), this is the connection. With this, it clarifies that the meaning of nāṭakā is "sayaṃ naṭantīti" (they themselves dance). In vaṃsavarattādīsū (bamboo, ropes, etc.), vaṃso (vaṃso) means bamboo. Varattā (Varattā) means leather straps. The word "ādi" (etc.) includes ropes and the like. Those who perform jumping actions are called laṅghakā (jumpers), this is the connection. Regarding māyākārā (magicians), māyā (māyā) is named after Maya, an Asura (demon), because it was made to agitate the gods; therefore, it belongs to Maya, and one who does that is a māyākāra (magician), just the Asura named Maya. However, others are called "māyākārā" (magicians) by convention. Sokena jhāyanaṃ ḍayhanaṃ sokajjhāyaṃ (Sokena jhāyanaṃ ḍayhanaṃ sokajjhāyaṃ - no translation available), one who makes the sokajjhāyaṃ (sokajjhāyaṃ - no translation available) of the gods is sokajjhāyiko (sokajjhāyiko - no translation available), just the Asura named Maya. However, others are called "sokajjhāyikā" (sokajjhāyikā - no translation available) by convention. Thus, to show this meaning, it is said, "sokajjhāyikā nāma māyākārā" (sokajjhāyikā means magicians). Regarding kumbhathuṇikā nāmā (kumbhathuṇikā nāmā - no translation available), because it is thrown around, it is supported, thuṇo (thuṇo - no translation available) is the sound. Kumbhassa thuṇo kumbhathuṇo (Kumbhassa thuṇo kumbhathuṇo - no translation available). They play with that, therefore kumbhathuṇikā (kumbhathuṇikā - no translation available); thus, it shows this meaning with "ghaṭakena kīḷanakā" (ghaṭakena kīḷanakā - no translation available). Bimbisaka (Bimbisaka) is playing a four-sided drum; those who play that are bimbisakavādakā (bimbisakavādakā - no translation available). The eighth.

9. Navamasikkhāpadaṃ
9. Navamasikkhāpadaṃ

921.Navametesanti ye ‘‘na mayaṃ ayye sakkomā’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ.Dassatīti acchādessatīti. Navamaṃ.

921. In the ninth, tesaṃ (to them) means to those who say, "na mayaṃ ayye sakkomā" (we are not able, venerable). Dassatī (will give) means will clothe. The ninth.

10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ
10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ

927.Dasameyassāti kathinassa.Ubbhāramūlakoti uddhāramūlako.Saddhāparipālanatthanti kathinuddhāraṃ yācantassa saddhāya paripālanatthanti. Dasamaṃ.

927. In the tenth, yassā (whose) means of the Kathina. Ubbhāramūlako (based on removal) means based on removal. Saddhāparipālanatthaṃ (for the sake of maintaining faith) means for the sake of maintaining the faith of one who requests the removal of the Kathina. The tenth.

Naggavaggo tatiyo.

Naggavaggo tatiyo.

4. Tuvaṭṭavaggo

4. Tuvaṭṭavaggo

1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā

933.Tuvaṭṭavaggassa paṭhame ‘‘tuvaṭṭa nipajjāya’’nti dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 ṭakārantadhātu) vuttattā ‘‘tuvaṭṭeyyunti nipajjeyyu’’nti vuttanti. Paṭhamaṃ.

933. In the first of Tuvaṭṭavagga, because it is said "tuvaṭṭa nipajjāya" (tuvaṭṭa nipajjāya - no translation available) in the dhātupāṭha (grammar text), therefore it says "tuvaṭṭeyyuṃti nipajjeyyuṃ" (tuvaṭṭeyyuṃti nipajjeyyuṃ - no translation available). The first.

2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ

937.Dutiyeekattharaṇapāvuraṇantiettha uttarapadānaṃ dvandabhāvaṃ, pubbapadena ca bāhiratthasamāsabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘eka’’ntiādi. Tattha ceva, casaddehi dvandabhāvaṃ dīpeti, ‘‘etāsa’’ntiiminā bāhiratthasamāsabhāvaṃ.Etanti ‘‘ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā’’ti etaṃ nāmanti. Dutiyaṃ.

937. In the second, to show the dual state of the later words in ekattharaṇapāvuraṇaṃ (single-layer covering), and the state of bahirattha-compound with the earlier word, it says "eka" (one) etc. There, the state of being dual is indicated by the words "ceva" (and), "ca" (and); with "etāsaṃ" (of these), the state of being a bahirattha-compound. Etaṃ (this) means this name, "ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā" (single-layer covering). The second.

3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ

941.Tatiyeuḷārakulāti jātiseṭṭhakulā, issariyabhogādīhi vā vipulakulā.Guṇehīti sīlādiguṇehi. ‘‘Uḷārāti sambhāvitā’’ti iminā itilopatulyādhikaraṇasamāsaṃ dasseti.

941. In the third, uḷārakulā (noble families) means families that are the best by birth, or families that are abundant with power, wealth, etc. Guṇehī (by virtues) means by virtues such as morality etc. With "Uḷārāti sambhāvitā" (noble, that is, esteemed), it shows the appositional compound with the elision of "iti".

‘‘apakatā’’ti ettha karadhātu sabbadhātvatthavācīpi idha apapubbattā visesato abhibhavanatthe vattatīti dasseti.Etāsanti bhikkhunīnaṃ. ‘‘Saññāpayamānā’’ti iminā saññāpanaṃsaññattīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Hetūdāharaṇādīhīti ettha ādisaddena upamādayo saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Vividhehi nayehi ñāpanā’’ti iminā vividhehi ñāpanaṃviññattīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

‘‘apakatā’’ (unfavorable) showing that here, the root "kar" (do) speaks in the meaning of all roots, especially because of the prefix "apa" (apa), it occurs in the meaning of overpowering. Etāsaṃ (of these) means of the bhikkhunīs. With "Saññāpayamānā" (making known), it shows that the meaning of the word "saññāpanaṃ" (making known) is saññattī (intimation). Hetūdāharaṇādīhī (by reasons, examples, etc.), here the word "ādi" (etc.) includes similes and the like. With "Vividhehi nayehi ñāpanā" (knowing by various methods), it shows that the meaning of the word "vividhehi ñāpanaṃ" (knowing by various methods) is viññattī (intimation).

943.Caṅkamane padavāragaṇanāya āpattiyā na kāretabboti āha ‘‘nivattanagaṇanāyā’’ti.Padādigaṇanāyāti padaanupadādigaṇanāyāti. Tatiyaṃ.

943. It says, "nivattanagaṇanāyā" (by the counting of return), because an offense should not be made by the counting of steps in walking meditation. Padādigaṇanāyā (by the counting of steps etc.) means by the counting of steps and following steps etc. The third.

4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ

949.Catutthe anuttānaṭṭhānaṃ natthīti. Catutthaṃ.

949. In the fourth, there is no place for a meaning that is not obvious. The fourth.

5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ

952.Pañcame āṇattā bhikkhunīti yojanā. Idañca paccāsannavasena vuttaṃ yaṃkiñcipi āṇāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyattāti. Pañcamaṃ.

952. In the fifth, the connection is that she is a bhikkhunī (female monastic) who is ordered. And this is said in terms of proximity, that she is able to order whatever. The fifth.

6-9. Chaṭṭhādisikkhāpadaṃ
6-9. Chaṭṭhādisikkhāpadaṃ

955.Chaṭṭha-sattama-aṭṭhama-navamesu anuttānavacanaṃ natthīti. Chaṭṭha sattama aṭṭhama navamāni.

955. In the sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth, there is no word that is not obvious. The sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth.

10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ
10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ

973.Dasameahundarikāti tasmiṃ kāle, dese vā sambādhassa nāmametanti āha ‘‘ahundarikāti sambādhā’’ti.

973. In the tenth, ahundarikā (ahundarikā - no translation available) means, at that time or in that place, this is the name of a narrow place; it says, "ahundarikāti sambādhā" (ahundarikāti sambādhā - no translation available).

975.Yathā ‘‘uttarichappañcavācāhī’’ti (pāci. 62-65) ettha pañcasaddo na koci attho, vācāsiliṭṭhatthaṃ lokavohāravasena vutto, na evamidha, idha pana attho atthi, pañca yojanāni gacchantiyāpi anāpattiyevāti āha ‘‘pavāretvā…pe… anāpattī’’ti.Paccāgacchatīti paṭinivattetvā āgacchatīti. Dasamaṃ.

975. Just as in "more than five utterances" (pāci. 62-65), the word "five" has no specific meaning but is used in common parlance to clarify the utterance, it is not so here. Here, however, there is meaning, even if she goes five yojanas, there is no offense, so he says, "Having invited…pe… no offense." Paccāgacchatī: Returning, coming back. Tenth.

Tuvaṭṭavaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Chapter, Tuvaṭṭavagga.

5. Cittāgāravaggo

5. Cittāgāravagga

1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Meaning of the First Training Rule

978.Cittāgāravaggassa paṭhame rañño kīḷanaṭṭhānaṃ agāraṃrājāgāranti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘rañño kīḷanaghara’’nti. Cittaṃ agāraṃcittāgāraṃ. Ārāmanti nagarato nātidūraārāmoti āha ‘‘upavana’’nti.Uyyānanti sampannapupphaphalatāya uddhaṃ ulloketvā manussā yanti gacchanti etthāti uyyānaṃ.Pokkharaṇinti pokkharaṃ padumaṃ netīti pokkharaṇī.Pañcapīti rājāgārādīni pañcapi.Sabbatthāti dassanatthāya gamane ca gantvā passane cāti sabbesu.

978. In the first of Cittāgāravagga, showing the meaning of the word rājāgāraṃ, a royal place of amusement, he says, "A king's amusement house." Cittāgāraṃ: An adorned house. Ārāma: An ārāma not too far from the city, he says, "A park." Uyyāna: Because of the abundance of flowers and fruits, people look upwards and go there, therefore uyyāna. Pokkharaṇi: Because it carries (neti) pokkhara (lotuses), it is a pokkharaṇī. Pañcapī: All five, namely, rājāgāra, etc. Sabbatthā: In all, that is, in going to see and in going and seeing.

981.‘‘Ajjhārāme’’tiādinā ārāme ṭhitāya ārāmato bahi kate rājāgārādike passantiyāpi anāpattīti dasseti.Tānīti rājāgārādīnīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

981. With "Ajjhārāme," he shows that there is no offense even for one staying in the ārāma and looking at the rājāgāra, etc., located outside the ārāma. Tānī: The rājāgāra, etc. First.

2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Second Training Rule

982.Dutiye anuttānaṭṭhānaṃ natthīti. Dutiyaṃ.

982. In the second, there is no place that is not self-explanatory. Second.

3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Third Training Rule

988.Tatiyeyattakanti yattakaṃ suttanti sambandho.Añchitanti kaḍḍhitaṃ.Tasminti tattake sutteti sambandho.Takkamhīti etthatakkoti eko ayomayo suttakantanassa upakaraṇaviseso. So hi takīyati suttaṃ bandhīyati ettha, etenāti vā takkoti vuccati, tasmiṃ.Kantanatoti kantīyate kappāsādibhāvassa chindīyate kantanaṃ, tato.

988. In the third, yattaka: The connection is "as much thread." Añchita: Pulled. Tasmiṃ: The connection is "in that much thread." Takkamhī: Here, takko is a particular instrument made of iron for spinning thread. It is called takko because thread is measured or tied with it, or by it. Kantanato: From the spinning; kantana means cutting off the state of cotton, etc.

989.Dasikasuttādinti etthadasāti vatthassāvayavo. So hi diyyati avakhaṇḍīyatīti dasāti vuccati, tassaṃ dasāyaṃ pavattaṃdasikaṃ,tameva suttaṃdasikasuttaṃ. Ādisaddena vakkhamānaṃ dukkantitasuttādiṃ saṅgaṇhātīti. Tatiyaṃ.

989. Dasikasuttādi: Here, dasā is a part of cloth. It is called dasā because it is seen or torn off. Dasikaṃ is that which is prevalent in that dasā; that very thread is dasikasuttaṃ. By the word ādi, he includes the dukkantitasutta, etc., which will be mentioned later. Third.

4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Fourth Training Rule

992.Catuttheādiṃ katvāti dhovanādīni ādiṃ katvā.Khādanīyādīsūti pūvakhādanīyādīsu.Rūpagaṇanāyāti pūvādīnaṃ saṇṭhānagaṇanāya.

992. In the fourth, ādiṃ katvā: Having made the beginning with washing, etc. Khādanīyādīsū: In pūva (cakes), khādanīya (eatable), etc. Rūpagaṇanāyā: For counting the shapes of pūva, etc.

993.Yāgupānetta yāgusaṅkhāte pāne.Tesanti manussānaṃ.Veyyāvaccakaraṭṭhāne ṭhapetvāti mātāpitaro attano veyyāvaccakaraṭṭhāne ṭhapetvāti. Catutthaṃ.

993. Yāgupāne: In the drink called yāgu. Tesaṃ: Of those people. Veyyāvaccakaraṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā: Having placed the parents in the position of doing service to oneself. Fourth.

5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Fifth Training Rule

996.Pañcamevinicchinantīti adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchinantī bhikkhunīti yojanāti. Pañcamaṃ.

996. In the fifth, vinicchinantī: The meaning is that the bhikkhuni decides a case. Fifth.

6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Sixth Training Rule

999.Chaṭṭhe anuttānavacanaṃ natthīti.

999. In the sixth, there is no word that is not self-explanatory.

7. Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Seventh Training Rule

1007.Sattame ‘‘puna pariyāye’’ti etthapariyāyasaddo vāravevacanoti āha ‘‘puna vāre’’ti.Mahagghacīvaranti mahagghaṃ āvasathacīvaranti. Sattamaṃ.

1007. In the seventh, in "puna pariyāye," the word pariyāya means turn, so he says, "again, in turn." Mahagghacīvara: A very valuable residence-cloth. Seventh.

8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ
8. The Eighth Training Rule

1008.Aṭṭhameanissajjitvāti ettha brahmadeyyena na anissajjanaṃ, atha kho tāvakālikamevāti dassento āha ‘‘rakkhanatthāyā’’tiādi.

1008. In the eighth, anissajjitvā: Here, there is no giving up of what is given as brahmadeyya, but it is only temporary, so he says, "for the purpose of guarding," etc.

1012.Paṭijaggikanti rakkhaṇakaṃ.Vacībhedanti ‘‘paṭijaggāhī’’ti vacībhedaṃ.Raṭṭheti vijite. Tañhi raṭhanti gāmanigamādayo tiṭṭhanti etthātiraṭṭhanti vuccatīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

1012. Paṭijaggika: A guardian. Vacībheda: A difference in speech, namely, "paṭijaggāhī." Raṭṭhe: In the territory. Indeed, that in which villages, towns, etc., stand is called raṭṭha. Eighth.

9. Navamasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Ninth Training Rule

1015.Navame sippasaddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo ‘‘hatthisippañca assasippañca rathasippañca dhanusippañca tharusippañcā’’ti. Tatthatharusippanti asikīḷanasippaṃ. Mantasaddopi paccekaṃ yojetabbo ‘‘āthabbaṇamanto ca khīlanamanto ca vasīkaraṇamanto ca sosāpanamanto cā’’ti. Tatthaāthabbaṇamantoti āthabbaṇavedena vihito parūpaghātakaro manto.Khīlanamantoti sāradārukhīlaṃ mantena jappitvā pathaviyaṃ nikhaṇitvā dhāraṇamanto.Vasīkaraṇamantoti mantena jappitvā parassa ummattabhāvamāpannakaraṇo manto.Sosāpanamantoti parassa maṃsalohitādisosāpanamanto.Agadapayogoti bhusavisassa payojanaṃ. Ādisaddena aññepi parūpaghātakaraṇe sippe saṅgaṇhāti.Yakkhaparittanti yakkhehi samantato tāṇaṃ.Nāgamaṇḍalanti sappānaṃ pavesananivāraṇatthaṃ maṇḍalabandhamanto. Ādisaddena visapaṭihananamantādayo saṅgaṇhātīti. Navamaṃ.

1015. In the ninth, the word sippa (craft) should be connected to each individually: "elephant craft, horse craft, chariot craft, archery craft, sword craft." There, tharusippa means the craft of playing with swords. The word manta (incantation) should also be connected to each individually: "āthabbaṇa manta, khīlana manta, vasīkaraṇa manta, sosāpana manta." There, āthabbaṇamanto is a mantra prescribed by the Athabbana Veda, which causes harm to others. Khīlanamanto is a mantra for fixing a sārada wooden stake into the ground after muttering the mantra. Vasīkaraṇamanto is a mantra for making another person become mad after muttering the mantra. Sosāpanamanto is a mantra for drying up the flesh, blood, etc., of another. Agadapayogo is the application of strong poison. By the word ādi, he includes other crafts that cause harm to others. Yakkhaparitta is protection all around from yakkhas. Nāgamaṇḍala is a mantra for binding a maṇḍala to prevent the entry of snakes. By the word ādi, he includes mantras for counteracting poison, etc. Ninth.

10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Tenth Training Rule

1018.Dasame anuttānavacanaṃ natthīti. Dasamaṃ.

1018. In the tenth, there is no word that is not self-explanatory. Tenth.

Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.

The Fifth Chapter, Cittāgāravagga.

6. Ārāmavaggo

6. Ārāmavagga

1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Meaning of the First Training Rule

1025.Ārāmavaggassa paṭhameupacāranti aparikkhittassa ārāmassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ upacāraṃ.

1025. In the first of Ārāmavagga, upacāra means the place suitable for enclosing an ārāma that has not been enclosed.

1027.‘‘Sīsānulokikā’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi bhikkhunīnameva sīsanti āha ‘‘bhikkhunīna’’nti.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāneti. Paṭhamaṃ.

1027. Even though it is generally stated as "Sīsānulokikā," he says, "of bhikkhunis" because the head belongs specifically to bhikkhunis. Yatthā: In which place. First.

2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Second Training Rule

1028.Dutiyeabbhantaroti abbhantare pariyāpanno, jāto vā. ‘‘Saṅkāmesī’’ti imināsaṃharīti ettha haradhātuyā saṅkamanatthaṃ dasseti.Nhāpitāti kappakā. Te hi nahāpenti socāpentīti nhāpitāti vuccanti.Tanti kāsāvanivāsananti. Dutiyaṃ.

1028. In the second, abbhantaro means included inside or born inside. With "Saṅkāmesī," he shows the meaning of moving (saṅkamana) of the root hara in saṃharī. Nhāpitā: Barbers. They are called nhāpita because they bathe and purify. Taṃ: That kāṣāya robe. Second.

3-4. Tatiya-catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
3-4. The Third and Fourth Training Rules

1036.Tatiyacatutthesu anuttānaṭṭhānaṃ natthīti. Tatiyacatutthāni.

1036. In the third and fourth, there is no place that is not self-explanatory. Third and fourth.

5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Fifth Training Rule

1043.Pañcame ‘‘kule maccharo’’ti ettha maccharanaṃmaccharoti vacanattho kātabbo. ‘‘Taṃ kulaṃ assaddhaṃ appasanna’’nti kulassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti yojanā. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyo dussīlā pāpadhammā’’ti bhikkhunīnaṃ avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti yojanā.

1043. In the fifth, in "kule maccharo," the meaning of the word maccharo should be made as "stingy." The connection is that one speaks disparagingly of the family, saying, "That family is faithless, unappeased." The connection is that one speaks disparagingly of the bhikkhunis, saying, "The bhikkhunis are immoral, of evil conduct."

1045.‘‘Santaṃyeva ādīnava’’nti sambandhiyā sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘kulassa vā bhikkhunīnaṃ vā’’ti iminā dvīsu aññatarameva na sambandho hoti, atha kho dvayampīti dassetīti. Pañcamaṃ.

1045. "Santaṃyeva ādīnava" is said to show the connection to the related entity. With "kulassa vā bhikkhunīnaṃ vā," he shows that the connection is not only to one of the two, but to both. Fifth.

6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Sixth Training Rule

1048.Chaṭṭheovādāyāti ettha na yo vā so vā ovādo hoti, atha kho garudhammoyevāti āha ‘‘garudhammatthāyā’’ti. Saha vasati ettha, etenāti vāsaṃvāsoti vacanatthena uposathapavāraṇā saṃvāso nāmāti āha ‘‘uposathapavāraṇāpucchanatthāyā’’ti. ‘‘Pucchanatthāyā’’ti iminā‘‘saṃvāsāyā’’ti ettha uttarapadalopabhāvaṃ dasseti.Etthāti bhikkhunivibhaṅge, sikkhāpade vā pāḷiyaṃ vāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

1048. In the sixth, ovādāyā; here, it is not just any advice, but only for the sake of the Garudhamma, so he says, "for the sake of the Garudhamma." Saṃvāso means dwelling together, or by which one dwells together, so he says, "for the purpose of asking about Uposatha and Pavāraṇā," by the meaning of the word. With "Pucchanatthāyā," he shows the dropping of the first word (uttarapadalopa) in "saṃvāsāyā". Etthā: In the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga, or in the Pāḷi of the training rule. Sixth.

7-9. Sattama-aṭṭhama-navamasikkhāpadaṃ
7-9. The Seventh, Eighth, and Ninth Training Rules

1053.Sattamaṭṭhamanavamesu anuttānavacanaṃ natthi. Kevalaṃ pana ‘‘imissāpī’’ti padaṃ viseso, imissāpi pāḷiyāti atthoti. Sattamaṭṭhamanavamāni.

1053. In the seventh, eighth, and ninth, there is no word that is not self-explanatory. However, the word "imissāpi" is special, meaning "even of this Pāḷi." Seventh, eighth, and ninth.

10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Tenth Training Rule

1062.Dasame dve kāyā uparimakāyo heṭṭhimakāyoti. Tattha kaṭito uddhaṃ uparimakāyo, heṭṭhā heṭṭhimakāyo. Tattha ‘‘pasākhe’’ti idaṃ heṭṭhimakāyassa nāmanti āha ‘‘adhokāye’’ti.ti saccaṃ.Tatoti adhokāyato. Iminā pañcamībāhiratthasamāsaṃ dasseti. Rukkhassa sākhā pabhijjitvā gatā viya ubho ūrū pabhijjitvā gatāti yojanā.

1062. In the tenth, there are two bodies: the upper body and the lower body. There, the upper body is above the waist, and the lower is below. There, he says, "adhokāye," because "pasākhe" is a name for the lower body. Hī: Indeed. Tato: From the lower body. With this, he shows a bahiratthasamāsa of the fifth case. The meaning is: like the branches of a tree having split and gone away, both thighs have split and gone away.

1065.Phālehīti etthaitisaddo ādyattho. Tena ‘‘dhovā’’tiādīni cattāri padāni saṅgaṇhāti.Āṇattidukkaṭānīti heṭṭhā vuttesu aṭṭhasu dukkaṭesu vinayadukkaṭameva.Sesesūti bhindanato sesesu phālanādīsūti. Dasamaṃ.

1065. Phālehī: Here, the word iti has the meaning of "beginning with." Therefore, he includes the four words "dhovā," etc. Āṇattidukkaṭānī: Among the eight dukkata offenses mentioned below, only the Vinaya dukkata. Sesesū: In the remaining ones, that is, in splitting, etc., apart from breaking. Tenth.

Ārāmavaggo chaṭṭho.

The Sixth Chapter, Ārāmavagga.

7. Gabbhinivaggo

7. Gabbhinivagga

1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Meaning of the First Training Rule

1069.Gabbhinivaggassa paṭhame kucchiṃ paviṭṭho satto etissā atthītikucchipaviṭṭhasattā. ‘‘Kucchi’’ntipi pāṭho. Imināgabbhinīti ettha gabbhasaddo kucchiṭṭhasattavācakoti dasseti. Gabbhasaddo (abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ 944 gāthāyaṃ) hi kucchiṭṭhasatte ca kucchimhi ca ovarake ca vattatīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

1069. In the first of Gabbhinivagga, kucchipaviṭṭhasattā: she has a being entered into the womb. There is also a reading "kucchi." With this, he shows that in gabbhinī, the word gabbha denotes a being in the womb. Indeed, the word gabbha (in the Abhidhānappadīpikā, verse 944) applies to a being in the womb, to the womb itself, and to the ovaraka. First.

2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Second Training Rule

1073.Dutiye thaññaṃ pivatītipāyanto,dārako, so etissā atthītipāyantīti dassento āha ‘‘thaññaṃ pāyamāni’’nti. Dutiyaṃ.

1073. In the second, pāyanto: the child drinking milk; she has that child, therefore pāyantī, thus he says "thaññaṃ pāyamāni." Second.

3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Third Training Rule

1077.Tatiyenittharissatīti vaṭṭadukkhato nittharissati.

1077. In the third, nittharissatī: She will be released from the cycle of suffering (vaṭṭadukkhato).

1079.Pāṇātipātā veramaṇinti ettha pāṇātipātā viramati imāyātiveramaṇīti atthena sikkhāpadaṃ veramaṇi nāmāti āha ‘‘pāṇātipātā veramaṇisikkhāpada’’nti. Yaṃ taṃ sikkhāpadanti sambandho.Sabbatthāti ‘‘adinnādānā veramaṇi’’ntiādīsu sabbesu vākyesu. Pabbajitāya sāmaṇeriyāti sambandho.Etāsūti chasu sikkhāsūti. Tatiyaṃ.

1079. Pāṇātipātā veramaṇi: Here, with the meaning that the training rule is called veramaṇi because one abstains from killing living beings by means of it (pāṇātipātā viramati imāyāti veramaṇī), he says, "the training rule of abstaining from killing living beings (pāṇātipātā veramaṇisikkhāpada)." Yaṃ taṃ sikkhāpadanti, the connection is "that training rule." Sabbatthā: In all sentences such as "abstaining from taking what is not given." The connection is "to a sāmaṇeri who has gone forth." Etāsū: In these six trainings. Third.

4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Fourth Training Rule

1084.Catutthe ‘‘vuṭṭhānasammutī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘hotī’’ti pade kattā, ‘‘dātabbāyevā’’ti pade kammanti. Catutthaṃ.

1084. In the fourth, the phrase "vuṭṭhānasammutī" is the subject in the phrase "hotī" and the object in the phrase "dātabbāyevā." Fourth.

5-9. Pañcamādisikkhāpadaṃ
5-9. The Fifth Training Rule, etc.

1095.Pañcamādīsu navamapariyosānesu sikkhāpadesu anuttānaṭṭhānaṃ natthīti. Pañcamachaṭṭhasattamaṭṭhamanavamāni.

1095. In the training rules from the fifth to the ninth, there is no place that is not self-explanatory. Fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth.

10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Tenth Training Rule

1116.Dasamevūpakāseyyāti ettha kāsadhātuyā gatyatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gaccheyyā’’ti. Dasamaṃ.

1116. In the tenth, vūpakāseyyā: Here, showing the meaning of going (gatyattha) of the root kāsa, he says "gaccheyyā." Tenth.

Gabbhinivaggo sattamo.

The Seventh Chapter, Gabbhinivagga.

8. Kumāribhūtavaggo

8. Kumāribhūtavagga

1-2-3. Paṭhama-dutiya-tatiyasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1-2-3. Meaning of the First, Second, and Third Training Rules

1119.Kumāribhūtavaggassa paṭhamadutiyatatiyesu yā pana tā mahāsikkhamānāti sambandho.Sabbapaṭhamā dve mahāsikkhamānāti gabbhinivagge sabbāsaṃ sikkhamānānaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttā dve mahāsikkhamānā.Tā panāti mahāsikkhamānā pana.Sikkhamānāicceva vattabbāti sammutikammesu sāmaññato vattabbā. ‘‘Gihigatā’’ti vā ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’ti vā na vattabbā, vadanti ce, sammutikammaṃ kuppatīti adhippāyo.Gihigatāyāti ettha gihigatā nāma purisantaragatā vuccati. Sā hi yasmā purisasaṅkhātena gihinā gamiyittha, ajjhācāravasena, gihiṃ vā gamittha, tasmā gihigatāti vuccati. Ayaṃ sikkhamānāti sambandho.Kumāribhūtānāma sāmaṇerā vuccati. Sā hi yasmā agihigatattā kumārī hutvā bhūtā, kumāribhāvaṃ vā bhūtā gatā, tasmā kumāribhūtāti vuccati.Tissopīti gihigatā kumāribhūtā mahāsikkhamānāti tissopi.Sikkhamānāti sikkhaṃ mānetīti sikkhamānāti. Paṭhama dutiya tatiyāni.

1119. In the first, second, and third of Kumāribhūtavagga, the connection is "yā pana tā mahāsikkhamānā." Sabbapaṭhamā dve mahāsikkhamānā: The first two mahāsikkhamānās mentioned at the beginning of all the sikkhamānās in the Gabbhinivagga. Tā panā: But those mahāsikkhamānās. Sikkhamānāicceva vattabbā: Should be referred to generally in the acts of consent (sammutikamma). The intention is that one should not say "Gihigatā" or "Kumāribhūtā"; if they say so, the act of consent will be spoiled. Gihigatāyā: Here, gihigatā means one who has gone to another man. Indeed, she is called gihigatā because she has been sexually approached by a householder, who is counted as a man, or because she has gone to a householder. This refers to a sikkhamānā. Kumāribhūtā: Means a sāmaṇerī. Indeed, she is called kumāribhūtā because she has become one who is a virgin due to not having gone to a householder, or she has gone to the state of being a virgin. Tissopī: All three, namely, gihigatā, kumāribhūtā, and mahāsikkhamānā. Sikkhamānā: One who trains in the training (sikkhaṃ mānetīti sikkhamānāti). First, second, and third.

4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Fourth Training Rule

1136.Catutthe anuttānavacanaṃ natthīti. Catutthaṃ.

1136. In the fourth, there is no word that is not self-explanatory. Fourth.

5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Fifth Training Rule

Pañcame ettha sikkhāpade ‘‘saṅghena paricchinditabbā’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tassāti yojanāti. Pañcamaṃ.

In the fifth, here, in this training rule, the connection is "to that which is said, 'should be excluded by the Saṅgha.'" Fifth.

6-7-8. Chaṭṭha-sattama-aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ
6-7-8. The Sixth, Seventh, and Eighth Training Rules

Chaṭṭhasattamaṭṭhamesu anuttānaṭṭhānaṃ natthīti. Chaṭṭhasattamaṭṭhamāni.

In the sixth, seventh, and eighth, there is no place that is not self-explanatory. Sixth, seventh, and eighth.

9. Navamasikkhāpadaṃ
9. The Ninth Training Rule

1158.Navameantoti abbhantare. Iminā ātyūpasaggassatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Soka’’ntiādinā anto vāseti pavesetītiāvāsā. Sokaṃ āvāsāsokāvāsāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Gharaṃ gharasāmikā āvisanti viya, evaṃ ayampi sokaṃ āvisatīti yojanā.Itīti evaṃ.Yanti sokaṃ.Svāssāti so assā.Soti soko.Assāti sikkhamānāya.Āvāsoti āvāsokāso. ‘‘Edisā aya’’nti iminā ‘‘ajānantī’’ti ettha ajānanākāraṃ dassetīti. Navamaṃ.

1158.In the ninth, anto means inside. With this, he shows the meaning of the ati- prefix. With ‘‘Soka’’ etc., āvāsā means she dwells or enters inside. Sokāvāsā shows the word meaning that she dwells in sorrow. Just as householders enter a house, so too she enters sorrow, this is the connection. Itī means thus. Yaṃ means sorrow. Svāssā means so assā. So means sorrow. Assā means the woman in training. Āvāso means dwelling, opportunity. With ‘‘Edisā ayaṃ’’, he shows the form of non-knowing in ‘‘ajānantī’’ here. The ninth.

10. Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ
10. The Tenth Training Rule

1162.Dasameanāpucchāti ettha tvāpaccayo lopoti āha ‘‘anāpucchitvā’’ti.Dvikkhattunti dve vāre.Sakinti ekavāraṃ.

1162.In the tenth, regarding anāpucchā, he says, ‘‘without asking,’’ because the tvā suffix is dropped. Dvikkhattuṃ means two times. Sakiṃ means one time.

1163.Apubbaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ imassātiapubbasamuṭṭhānasīsaṃ. Dvīsupi ṭhānesūti vācāto ca kāyavācāto cāti dvīsu ṭhānesupi.Ananujānāpetvāti mātāpitūhi ca sāmikena ca na anujānāpetvāti. Dasamaṃ.

1163.Apubbasamuṭṭhānasīsaṃ means that this has a head of unprecedented arising. Dvīsupi ṭhānesū means in both places, from speech and from body and speech. Ananujānāpetvā means not having obtained permission from the mother and father and the husband. The tenth.

11. Ekādasamasikkhāpadaṃ
11. The Eleventh Training Rule

1167.Ekādasametatthāti ‘‘pārivāsiyachandadānenā’’ti vacane.Aññatrāti aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ.

1167.In the eleventh, tatra is in the statement ‘‘by means of giving pārivāsika consent.’’ Aññatra means another place.

Ekaṃ ajjhesantīti ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ dhammakathanatthāya niyyojenti.Aññaṃ panāti uposathikato aññaṃ pana.

Ekaṃ ajjhesantī means they appoint one bhikkhu for the purpose of teaching the Dhamma. Aññaṃ panā means another one besides the one observing uposatha.

Tatrāti tesu bhikkhūsu. Subhāsubhaṃ nakkhattaṃ paṭhatītinakkhattapāṭhako. Dāruṇanti kakkhaḷaṃ.Teti bhikkhū.Tassāti nakkhattapāṭhakassa bhikkhussa. ‘‘Nakkhattaṃ paṭimānentaṃ, attho bālaṃ upaccagā’’tijātakapāḷi (jā. 1.1.49). Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – nakkhattaṃ paṭimānentaṃ bālaṃ attho hitaṃ upaccagā upasamīpe atikkamitvā agāti. Ekādasamaṃ.

Tatra means among those bhikkhus. Nakkhattapāṭhako means one who recites auspicious and inauspicious constellations. Dāruṇaṃ means harsh. Te means the bhikkhus. Tassā means of that bhikkhu who recites constellations. There is the Jātaka passage (Jā. 1.1.49), ‘‘While valuing the constellation, benefit went beyond the fool.’’ The connection here is this: while valuing the constellation, benefit, that is, welfare, went beyond, that is, passed by, approaching the fool. The eleventh.

12. Dvādasamasikkhāpadaṃ
12. The Twelfth Training Rule

1170.Dvādasamenappahotīti bhikkhuniyo nivāsāpetuṃ na sakkotīti. Dvādasamaṃ.

1170.In the twelfth, nappahoti means she is not able to settle bhikkhunis. The twelfth.

13. Terasamasikkhāpadaṃ
13. The Thirteenth Training Rule

1175.Terasameekaṃ vassanti ettha vassasaddo saṃvaccharapariyāyo, upayogavacanañca bhummatthe hotīti āha ‘‘ekasmiṃ saṃvacchare’’ti. Terasamaṃ.

1175.In the thirteenth, regarding ekaṃ vassaṃ, the word vassa is a synonym for year, and it occurs in the sense of usage and in the sense of abundance, so he says, ‘‘in one year.’’ The thirteenth.

Kumāribhūtavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The Kumāribhūtavagga, the eighth, is finished.

9. Chattupāhanavaggo

9. The Chattupāhanavagga

1. Paṭhamasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
1. Explanation of the Meaning of the First Training Rule

1181.Chattavaggassa paṭhamekaddamādīnīti cikkhallādīni. Ādisaddena udakādīni saṅgaṇhāti.Gacchādīnīti khuddapādapādīni. Ādisaddena aññānipi chattaṃ dhāretuṃ asakkuṇeyyāni sambādhaṭṭhānāni saṅgaṇhātīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

1181.In the first of the Chattavagga, kaddamādīnī means mud etc. With the ādi (etc.) he includes water etc. Gacchādīnī means small trees etc. With the ādi (etc.), he includes other cramped places where it is not possible to hold an umbrella. The first.

2. Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ
2. The Second Training Rule

1184.Dutiyeyānenāti yanti icchitaṭṭhānaṃ sukhena gacchanti anenātiyānanti. Dutiyaṃ.

1184.In the second, yānena means by a vehicle, because one goes to the desired place comfortably by means of it. The second.

3. Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ
3. The Third Training Rule

1191.Tatiye ‘‘vippakiriyiṃsū’’ti kiriyāpadassa kattunā avinābhāvato kattāraṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘maṇayo’’ti.Maṇayoti ca ratanānīti. Tatiyaṃ.

1191.In the third, ‘‘they would scatter’’ – because the agent is inseparable from the verb, ‘‘jewels’’ is stated to show the agent. Maṇayo means jewels. The third.

4. Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ
4. The Fourth Training Rule

1194.Catutthesīsūpagādīsūti ādisaddena gīvūpagādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Yaṃ yanti alaṅkāranti. Catutthaṃ.

1194.In the fourth, sīsūpagādīsu – with the ādi (etc.), he includes those that reach the neck etc. Yaṃ yaṃ means adornment. The fourth.

5. Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ
5. The Fifth Training Rule

1199.Pañcamegandhena cāti gandheti attano vatthuṃ sūceti pakāsetīti gandho.Vaṇṇakena cāti vilepanena ca. Tañhi vaṇṇayati chavisobhaṃ pakāsetīti vaṇṇakanti vuccati. Casaddena samāhāradvandavākyaṃ dīpetīti. Pañcamaṃ.

1199.In the fifth, gandhena cagandha means it indicates and reveals its own object. Vaṇṇakena ca means and with ointment. For it is called vaṇṇaka because it beautifies and reveals the complexion's beauty. He indicates the compound sentence with the ca. The fifth.

6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ
6. The Sixth Training Rule

1202.Chaṭṭhe anuttānavacanaṃ natthīti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

1202.In the sixth, there is no statement requiring further explanation. The sixth.

7. Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ
7. The Seventh Training Rule

1208.Sattameummaddaneti uppīḷitvā maddane.Saṃbāhanepīti punappunaṃ bāhanepīti. Sattamaṃ.

1208.In the seventh, ummaddane means squeezing and rubbing. Saṃbāhanepī means and even repeatedly pressing. The seventh.

8-10. Aṭṭhamādisikkhāpadaṃ
8-10. Training Rules Eight to Ten

1210.Aṭṭhamādīsu tīsu anuttānavacanaṃ natthīti. Aṭṭhamanavamadasamāni.

1210.In the three, beginning with the eighth, there is no statement requiring further explanation. The eighth, ninth, and tenth.

11. Ekādasamasikkhāpadaṃ
11. The Eleventh Training Rule

1214.Ekādasameabhimukhamevāti abhimukhe eva. Mukhassa hi abhiabhimukhanti vacanattho kātabbo, sattamiyā aṃkāro. Imināpuratoti ettha topaccayo bhummatthe hotīti dasseti.Upacāranti dvādasahatthūpacāranti. Ekādasamaṃ.

1214.In the eleventh, abhimukhameva means directly in front. For the word meaning of abhi is abhimukha to the face; the aṃ is in the seventh case. With this, he shows that the to suffix in purato is in the sense of abundance. Upacāra means the upacāra of twelve hatthas. The eleventh.

12. Dvādasamasikkhāpadaṃ
12. The Twelfth Training Rule

1219.Dvādasame ‘‘anokāsakata’’ntipadassa ayuttasamāsabhāvañca visesanaparapadabāhirasamāsabhāvañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘akataokāsa’’nti. Okāso na kato yenātianokāsakato,bhikkhu, taṃ. ‘‘Aniyametvā’’ti iminā ‘‘anodissā’’ti padassa tvāpaccayantabhāvaṃ dassetīti. Dvādasamaṃ.

1219.In the twelfth, to show the inappropriate compound nature and the external compound nature of the adjective preceding the word in the expression ‘‘anokāsakata,’’ ‘‘akataokāsa’’ is stated. Anokāsakato means one by whom permission was not given. By ‘‘Aniyametvā,’’ he shows the state of being an infinitive with the tvā suffix of the word ‘‘anodissā’’. The twelfth.

13. Terasamasikkhāpadaṃ
13. The Thirteenth Training Rule

1226.Terasameupacārepīti aparikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte upacārepi.

1226.In the thirteenth, upacārepī means even in the upacāra, which is reckoned as a place fit for enclosure of a village that is not enclosed.

1227.‘‘Acchinnacīvarikāyā’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi visesoyevādhippetoti āha ‘‘saṅkaccikacīvaramevā’’ti. Samantato purisānaṃ dassanaṃ kantīyati chindīyati etthātisaṅkacci,adhakkhakaubbhanābhiṭṭhānaṃ, saṅkacce nivasitabbantisaṃkaccikaṃ,tameva cīvarantisaṅkaccikacīvaranti. Terasamaṃ.

1227.Although it is stated generally as ‘‘acchinnacīvarikāya,’’ only the specific is intended, so he says ‘‘saṅkaccikacīvarameva’’. Saṅkacci means where the sight of men is cut off all around, the place of the lower back, the navel, and the seat. Saṃkaccikaṃ means suitable for staying in privacy, that very robe is saṅkaccikacīvaraṃ. The thirteenth.

Chattupāhanavaggo navamo.

The Chattupāhanavagga, the ninth, is finished.

Tatoti tehi aṭṭhāsītisatasikkhāpadehi, apanetvāti sambandho.

Tato is connected with having removed, meaning from those one hundred eighty-eight training rules.

Tatrāti tesu khuddakesu.Etthāti dasasu sikkhāpadesūti.

Tatra means in those minor ones. Ettha means in these ten training rules.

Bhikkhunivibhaṅge khuddakavaṇṇanāya

The explanation of the minor matters in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga

Yojanā samattā.

is finished.

5. Pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpada-atthayojanā
5. Explanation of the Meaning of the Pāṭidesanīya Training Rules

Khuddakānaṃ anantarā pāṭidesanīyā nāma aṭṭha ye dhammā saṅkhepeneva saṅgahaṃ ārūḷhā saṅgītikārehi, tesaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ pāṭidesanīyanāmakānaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhepeneva esā vaṇṇanā pavattateti yojanā.

Immediately after the minor matters, there are eight pāṭidesanīya rules, which have been compiled by the compilers in brief, this explanation proceeds in brief regarding those eight rules called pāṭidesanīya, this is the connection.

1228.ni sabbitelādīnīti sambandho.ti vitthāro.Etthāti aṭṭhasu pāṭidesanīyesu.Pāḷivinimuttakesūti pāḷito vinimuttakesu.Sabbesūti akhilesu sabbitelādīsūti.

1228.The connection is, yāni is related to all kinds of oil etc. means expansion. Ettha means in the eight pāṭidesanīyas. Pāḷivinimuttakesū means in those freed from the Pāḷi. Sabbesū means in all the complete kinds of oil etc.

Bhikkhunivibhaṅge pāṭidesanīyavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

The explanation of the Pāṭidesanīya matters in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga is finished.

Panāti pakkhantarajotako. Ye dhammā uddiṭṭhāti sambandho.Tesanti pāṭidesanīyānaṃ. Punatesanti sekhiyaadhikaraṇasamathadhammānaṃ.

Panā indicates another aspect. The connection is, those rules that have been declared. Tesaṃ means of the pāṭidesanīyas. Again, tesaṃ means of the sekhiya and adhikaraṇasamatha rules.

Tanti atthavinicchayaṃ, vidūvadantīti sambandho. Yakāro padasandhikaro. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – tesaṃ pāṭidesanīyānaṃ anantarā ye ca sekhiyā pañcasattati ye ca dhammā, casaddo luttaniddiṭṭho,adhikaraṇavhayāadhikaraṇasamathanāmakā satta ye ca dhammā bhagavatā uddiṭṭhā, tesaṃ sekhiyaadhikaraṇasamathadhammānaṃ yo atthavinicchayo vibhaṅge mayā vutto, tādisameva taṃ atthavinicchayaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vibhaṅgepi vidū vadanti yasmā, tasmā tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sekhiyaadhikaraṇasamathadhammānaṃ yā atthavaṇṇanā tattha mahāvibhaṅge visuṃ mayā na vuttā. Imā atthavaṇṇanāidhāpi bhikkhunīnaṃ vibhaṅgepi, pisaddo luttaniddiṭṭho, mayā na vuttāyevāti. Nakāro dvīsu kiriyāsu yojetabbo.

The connection is, taṃ means that ascertainment of meaning; the learned vadantī speak. The ya is a connector of words. The connection here is this: immediately after those pāṭidesanīyas, and those seventy-five sekhiya rules, and the ca is understood but not stated, and the seven rules called adhikaraṇavhayā, that is, adhikaraṇasamatha, that have been declared by the Buddha, the ascertainment of meaning that has been stated by me in the Vibhaṅga, since the learned speak of that very ascertainment of meaning in the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga as well, therefore the explanation of the meaning of those sekhiya and adhikaraṇasamatha rules has not been stated separately by me there in the Mahāvibhaṅga. These explanations of meaning idhā here too, in the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga, the pi is understood but not stated, have not been stated by me. The na should be connected to both verbs.

‘‘Sabbāsavapahaṃ maggaṃ, puññakammena ciminā;

‘‘Having generated in their own continuum the path that destroys all influxes by this meritorious action,
may beings see liberation.’’

iminā puññakammena cavibhaṅgavaṇṇanāya katena iminā puññakammena ca aññena puññakammena ca. Casaddo hi avuttasampiṇḍanattho.Sattāsabbe sattāsabbāsavapahaṃsabbesaṃ āsavānaṃ vighātakaṃmaggaṃarahattamaggaṃsasantāneattano niyakajjhatteuppādetvājanetvānibbutiṃkhandhaparinibbānaṃ ñāṇālocanena passantūti.

iminā puññakammena ca – by this meritorious action and by another meritorious action, done by this meritorious action of explaining the Vibhaṅga. The ca is indeed for combining what has not been said. Sattā all beings, sabbāsavapahaṃ destructive of all influxes, maggaṃ the path of arahantship, sasantāne in their own individual continuum, uppādetvā having generated, nibbutiṃ the khandha-final liberation, may they see with the eye of knowledge.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus, in the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya commentary,

Bhikkhunivibhaṅgavaṇṇanāya

the explanation of the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga

Yojanā samattā.

is finished.

Jādilañchitanāmena, nekānaṃ vācito mayā;

By me, named Jādilañchita, the method of explaining the Vibhaṅga for Bhikkhunis has been completed.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Homage to the Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One

Mahāvaggayojanā

Mahāvaggayojanā

1. Mahākhandhakaṃ

1. The Mahākhandhaka

1. Bodhikathā
1. The Story of the Awakening

Evūbhatovibhaṅgassa, katvāna yojanānayaṃ;

Having done the method of explanation for both Vibhaṅgas,
I will do the method of explanation for the Mahāvaggakhandhaka.

Ubhinnanti ubhayesaṃ.Pātimokkhānanti pātimokkhavibhaṅgānaṃ. Pātimokkhagahaṇena hettha tesaṃ vibhaṅgopi gahito abhedena vā uttarapadalopavasena vā.Khandhakanti paññattisamūhaṃ. Khandhasaddo hettha paññattivācako. Vinayapaññattiyo vuccanti ‘‘khandho’’ti. Tesaṃ samūhokhandhako. Athavākhandhoti rāsi. Khandhasaddo hi rāsatthavācako. Vinayapaññattirāsi vuccati ‘‘khandho’’ti. Kakāro pakāsakavācako. Khandhānaṃ vinayapaññattirāsīnaṃ ko pakāsakotikhandhako,taṃ khandhakaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhānaṃ saṅgītisamanantaraṃkhandhakovidākhandhakesu kusalā mahātherā yaṃ khandhakaṃ saṅgāyiṃsu, tassa khandhakassa dāni saṃvaṇṇanākkamo yasmā sampatto, tasmā tassa khandhakassa ayaṃ anuttānatthavaṇṇanā hotīti.

Ubhinnaṃ means of both. Pātimokkhānaṃ means of the Pātimokkha Vibhaṅgas. By the mention of Pātimokkha, its Vibhaṅga is also included here, either due to non-difference or due to the dropping of the latter word. Khandhaka means a collection of rules. The word khandha here means a rule. The Vinaya rules are called ‘‘khandha’’. Their collection is khandhako. Or else, khandho means a heap. The word khandha indeed means a heap. The heap of Vinaya rules is called ‘‘khandha.’’ The ka is a word indicating manifestation. Khandhako means what is the manifestation of the khandhas, the heaps of Vinaya rules; that khandhaka. The connection here is this: immediately after the recitation of both Pātimokkhas, since the turn for the commentary of that khandhaka that was recited by the khandhakovidā, the Great Elders skilled in the khandhakas, has now arrived, therefore this is an explanation of the meaning not requiring further explanation of that khandhaka.

Yesanti padānaṃ.Teti te atthe.Bhaveti bhaveyya, bhavituṃ sakkuṇeyyāti attho.Tesanti atthānaṃ.Kinti kiṃ payojanaṃ.Teti atthe, ñātunti sambandho. Athavāteti atthā, avaṇṇitāti sambandho.Tesaṃyevāti atthānameva. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – padabhājanīye yesaṃ padānaṃ ye atthā bhagavatā pakāsitā, tesaṃ padānanti pāṭhaseso, te atthe puna vadeyyāma ce, kadā pariyosānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāya pariniṭṭhānaṃ bhave, na bhaveyyāti adhippāyo. Ye ceva atthā uttānā, tesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāya kiṃ payojanaṃ, na payojananti adhippāyo.Adhippāyānusandhīhica adhippāyena ca anusandhinā ca byañjanena ca ye pana atthā anuttānā, te atthe, atthā vā avaṇṇitā yasmā ñātuṃ na sakkā, tasmā tesaṃyeva atthānaṃ ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayo hotīti. Itisaddo parisamāpanattho.

Yesaṃ means of the words. Te means those meanings. Bhave means may it be, it may be possible, is the meaning. Tesaṃ means of the meanings. Kiṃ means what is the use. Te means those meanings, is connected with should be known. Or else, te means those meanings, is connected with unsaid. Tesaṃyevā means of those very meanings. The connection here is this: if we were to state again those meanings that have been explained by the Buddha of those words in the word analysis, the remainder of the reading is, of those words, when would the conclusion, the completion of the commentary be? It would not be, is the idea. And what is the use of commenting on those meanings that are clear? There is no use, is the idea. Since those meanings that are not clear by Adhippāyānusandhīhi, by intention and by connection and by indication, or the meanings have not been stated, cannot be known, therefore this method of explanation is only for those meanings. The word iti is for the completion of the assembly.

1.‘‘Tena…pe… verañjāya’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 1) karaṇavacane visesakāraṇamatthi viya,‘‘tena…pe… paṭhamābhisambuddho’’ti ettha kiñcāpi natthīti yojanā. Asadisopamāyaṃ.Kiñcāpisaddo garahatthajotako,pana-saddo sambhāvanatthajotako. ‘‘Karaṇavacanenevā’’ti ettha evakārena upayogavacanaṃ vā bhummavacanaṃ vā nivāreti.Abhilāpoti abhimukhaṃ atthaṃ lapatīti abhilāpo, saddo.Āditoti verañjakaṇḍato.Etanti ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā uruvelāya’’ntiādivacanaṃ. ‘‘Aññesupī’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ito paresū’’ti.

1.In ‘‘Tena…pe… verañjāya’’nti etc. (pārā. 1), it is as if there is a special reason in the instrumental case, and the connection is, although there is none here in ‘‘tena…pe… paṭhamābhisambuddho’’. In an incomparable simile. The word kiñcāpi indicates censure, the word pana indicates probability. In ‘‘Karaṇavacaneneva,’’ the eva excludes the locative case or the case of abundance. Abhilāpo means it expresses the meaning directly, speech. Ādito means from the Verañja section. Etaṃ means the statement ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā uruvelāya’’nti etc. After saying ‘‘Aññesupī,’’ to show that very meaning, ‘‘ito paresū’’ is stated.

Etassāti ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā uruvelāya’’ntiādivacanassa. Nidānadassanaṃ payojanaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Tamevatthaṃ vibhāvetumāha‘‘yā hī’’tiādi. Yā pabbajjā ceva yā upasampadā ca bhagavato anuññātāti yojanā. Yāni ca anuññātānīti sambandho.Tānīti pabbajjādīni.Abhisambodhinti arahattamaggañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇañca sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ arahattamaggañāṇañca.Bodhimahāmaṇḍeti mahantānaṃ maggañāṇasabbaññutaññāṇānaṃ pasannaṭṭhāne bodhirukkhamūleti attho.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.

Etassā means of the statement ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā uruvelāya’’nti etc. The showing of the origin is called the purpose. To explain that very meaning, he says ‘‘yā hī’’ etc. The connection is, the going forth and the full ordination that were permitted by the Buddha. The connection is, and those that were permitted. Tānī means the going forth etc. Abhisambodhiṃ means the foundation of the path-knowledge of arahantship and the knowledge of omniscience and the foundation of the knowledge of omniscience and the path-knowledge of arahantship. Bodhimahāmaṇḍe means at the foot of the Bodhi tree, in the pleasant place of the great path-knowledge and knowledge of omniscience. Evaṃ etc. is the conclusion.

Tatthāti yaṃ ‘‘tena samayena uruvelāya’’ntiādivacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha.Uruvelāyanti ettha urusaddo mahantapariyāyoti āha ‘‘mahāvelāya’’nti. ‘‘Vālikarāsimhī’’ti iminā velāsaddassa rāsatthaṃ dasseti, kālasīmādayo nivatteti. Yadi pana ‘‘urū’’ti vālikāya nāmaṃ, ‘‘velā’’ti mariyādāya, evañhi sati nanu uruyā velāti attho daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘velātikkamanahetu āhaṭā uru uruvelā’’ti. Iminā velāya atikkamovelāuttarapadalopavasena, velāya āhaṭā uruuruvelāpadavipariyāyavasenāti dasseti.Etthāti ‘‘uruvelāya’’ntipade. Tamevatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘atīte kirā’’tiādi. Anuppanne buddhe pabbajitvāti sambandho.Tāpasapabbajjanti isipabbajjaṃ, na samaṇapabbajjaṃ.Katikavattanti karaṇaṃ kataṃ, katena pavattaṃ katikaṃ, tameva vattaṃ katikavattaṃ. Akaṃsu kirāti sambandho.Yoti yo koci.Aññoti attanā aparo. So ākiratūti sambandho.Pattapuṭenāti paṇṇena katena puṭena.Tatoti katikavattakaraṇato.Tatthāti tasmiṃ padese.Tatoti mahāvālikarāsijananato, paranti sambandho. Nanti taṃ padesaṃ.Tanti mahāvālikarāsiṃ.

Tatthāti: Here, "tena samayena uruvelāya," etc., as has been said, that is what is meant by "tatra." Uruvelāyanti: Here, the word "uru" is a synonym for "great," thus he says, "mahāvelāya." "Vālikarāsimhī" indicates that the word "velā" means "heap," thus eliminating meanings like time limit, etc. But if "uru" is the name for sand, and "velā" is for boundary, in this case, shouldn't the meaning be seen as "uru's boundary?" He answers, "velātikkamanahetu āhaṭā uru uruvelā" This shows that the elision of the latter part of the compound, velā, through the excess of velā; and the bringing of uru by velā is uruvelā by way of word reversal. Etthāti: In the word "uruvelāya." Explaining that same meaning, he says, "atīte kirā," etc. "Anuppanne buddhe pabbajitvā" should be connected. Tāpasapabbajjanti: Ascetic ordination, not monastic ordination. Katikavattanti: An agreement (karaṇaṃ) made, an observance (vattaṃ) established by agreement (katikena pavattaṃ), that very agreement is the observance (katikavattaṃ). "Akaṃsu kirāti" should be connected. Yoti: Whoever. Aññoti: Other than oneself. "So ākiratūti" should be connected. Pattapuṭenāti: With a bowl (puṭena) made of leaves (paṇṇena katena). Tatoti: From the making of the agreement (katikavattakaraṇato). Tatthāti: In that place. Tatoti: From the generation of the great sand heap; paranti is connected. Nanti: That place. Tanti: The great sand heap.

bodhīti vacanatthena catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ bodhi nāmāti dasseti.Etthāti bodhimhi, bodhiyaṃ vā. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Rukkhopīti pisaddena na maggañāṇamevāti dasseti.Mūleti āsanne.Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti anunāsikalopavasena sandhīti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho’’ti. ‘‘Hutvā’’ti iminā ‘‘paṭhama’’ntipadassa bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ dasseti.Sabbapaṭhamaṃyevāti sabbesaṃ janānaṃ paṭhamameva abhisambuddho hutvāti sambandho. Eko eva pallaṅkoekapallaṅkoti avadhāraṇasamāsaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekeneva pallaṅkenā’’ti. ‘‘Sakiṃ…pe… ābhujitenā’’ti iminā avadhāraṇaphalaṃ dasseti.Pallaṅkoti ca ūrubaddhāsanaṃ.Vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedīti ettha tadaṅgādīsu (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.104) pañcasu vimuttīsu paṭippassaddhisaṅkhātā phalasamāpatti evādhippetāti āha ‘‘phalasamāpattisukha’’nti.Phalasamāpattīti arahattaphalasamāpatti. Sā hi viruddhehi upakkilesehi muccitaṭṭhenavimuttīti vuccati, tāya sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃvimuttisukhaṃ,catutthajjhānikaṃ arahattaphalasamāpattisukhaṃ. Athavā tāya jātaṃ sukhaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ, sakalakilesadukkhūpasamasukhaṃ. ‘‘Paṭisaṃvedayamāno’’tiiminā ‘‘paṭisaṃvedī’’ti ettha ṇīpaccayassa kattutthaṃ dasseti. Punappunaṃ suṭṭhu vadati anubhavatītipaṭisaṃvedī. Paṭisaṃvedī hutvā nisīdīti sambandho.

bodhīti: By way of the meaning of the word, knowledge in the four paths is called bodhi. Etthāti: In bodhi, or at the bodhi. This is a locative case used to indicate proximity. Rukkhopīti: The "pi" shows that it is not only the knowledge of the path. Mūleti: Near the root. Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti: He says "paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho" because of the elision of the nasal consonant. "Hutvā" indicates that the word "paṭhama" is a neuter noun of becoming. Sabbapaṭhamaṃyevāti: Having become enlightened (abhisambuddho hutvā) first of all (paṭhamaṃ eva) for all people (sabbesaṃ janānaṃ). "Eko eva pallaṅko" is ekapallaṅko, indicating a determinative compound, he says, "ekeneva pallaṅkenā." "Sakiṃ…pe… ābhujitenā" shows the result of determination. Pallaṅkoti: And the posture of seated cross-legged with the thighs bound. Vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedīti: Here, among the five kinds of liberation such as tadaṅga, etc., what is intended is the bliss of fruition attainment (phalasamāpatti), which is synonymous with tranquility (paṭippassaddhi), thus he says, "phalasamāpattisukha." Phalasamāpattīti: The fruition attainment of arahantship. For that is called vimuttī because of the meaning of being freed from opposing defilements (viruddhehi upakkilesehi muccitaṭṭhena), the bliss associated with that is vimuttisukhaṃ, the bliss of the fourth jhāna's fruition attainment of arahantship. Or, the bliss born from that is vimuttisukhaṃ, the bliss of the subsiding of all defilement-suffering. "Paṭisaṃvedayamāno" indicates that the suffix "ṇī" in "paṭisaṃvedī" has the sense of an agent. He repeatedly and thoroughly speaks of, experiences, therefore paṭisaṃvedī. Having experienced, he sits down, is the connection.

Paccayākāranti avijjādipaccayānaṃ uppādākāraṃ. Kasmā paccayākāro paṭiccasamuppādo nāmāti āha ‘‘paccayākāro hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. ‘‘Aññamañña’’ntiiminā ‘‘paṭiccā’’tipadassa kammaṃ dasseti, ‘‘sahite’’tiiminā saṃsaddassatthaṃ. ‘‘Dhamme’’tiiminā tassa sarūpaṃ.Etthāti imissaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘anulomapaṭiloma’’ntipade, anulomapaṭilomesu vā. Sveva paccayākāro vuccatīti yojanā. ‘‘Attanā kattabbakiccakaraṇato’’tiiminā anulomasaddassa sabhāvatthaṃ dasseti.Svevāti paccayākāro eva.Taṃ kiccanti attanā kattabbaṃ taṃ kiccaṃ.Tassa akaraṇatoti attanā kattabbakiccassa akaraṇato. Iminā paṭilomasaddassa sabhāvatthaṃ dasseti.Purimanayenevāti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā purimanayeneva.ti athavā.Pavattiyāti saṃsārapavattiyā.Anulomoti anukūlo, anurūpo vā.Itaroti ‘‘avijjāyatvevā’’tiādinā vutto paccayākāro.Tassāti pavattiyā.Paṭilomoti paṭiviruddho,etthāti ‘‘anulomapaṭiloma’’ntipade.Attho daṭṭhabboti ettha attho evāti sambhavato tassa phalaṃ vā ‘‘saddantaratthāpohanena saddo atthaṃ vadatī’’ti vacanato (udā. aṭṭha. 1; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.1; ma. ni. ṭī. 1.mulapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.oghatarayasuttavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.rupādivaggavaṇṇanā) saddantaratthāpohanaṃ vā dassento āha ‘‘ādito panā’’tiādi.Yāvasaddo avadhivacano. Yāva antaṃ pāpetvāti sambandho.Itoti imehi vuttehi dvīhi atthehi.‘‘Manasākāsī’’ti ettha ikāralopavasena sandhīti āha ‘‘manasi akāsī’’ti.Tatthāti ‘‘manasākāsī’’tipade.Yathāti yenākārena.Idanti imaṃ ākāraṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādipāṭhe avayavattho evaṃ veditabboti yojanā. Samāsamajjhe tasaddena pubbapadasseva liṅgavacanāni gahetabbānīti āha ‘‘avijjā ca sā paccayo cā’’ti. Vākye pana tasaddena parapadasseva liṅgavacanāni gahetabbāni. ‘‘Avijjāpaccayā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘sambhavantī’’tipadena sambandhitabbanti āha ‘‘tasmā avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantī’’ti.Sabbapadesūti ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’ntiādīsu sabbesu padesu.

Paccayākāranti: The manner of arising of the conditions beginning with ignorance. Why is the paccayākāra called paṭiccasamuppāda? He says, "paccayākāro hī," etc. ti: Truly, or because. "Aññamañña" indicates the object of the word "paṭicca," "sahite" indicates the meaning of being together. "Dhamme" indicates its nature. Etthāti: In this Vinaya commentary. Tatthāti: In the words "anulomapaṭiloma," or in the forward and reverse orders. That very paccayākāra is spoken of, is the construction. "Attanā kattabbakiccakaraṇato" indicates the intrinsic meaning of the word "anuloma." Svevāti: The paccayākāra itself. Taṃ kiccanti: That task to be done by oneself. Tassa akaraṇatoti: From the not doing of the task to be done by oneself. This indicates the intrinsic meaning of the word "paṭiloma." Purimanayenevāti: In the former manner, beginning with "avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā," etc. ti: Or. Pavattiyāti: Of the round of existence. Anulomoti: Favorable, or suitable. Itaroti: The paccayākāra stated beginning with "avijjāyatvevā." Tassāti: Of that round of existence. Paṭilomoti: Opposed. Etthāti: In the words "anulomapaṭiloma." Attho daṭṭhabboti: Here, since the meaning is just that, or possibly its result, or "the word indicates the meaning by excluding other words," either the exclusion of other word meanings is shown, beginning with "ādito panā," etc. Yāva: The word is limitative. Having brought it up to the end, is the connection. Itoti: From these two meanings stated. ‘‘Manasākāsī’’ti: Here, he says "manasi akāsī" because of the elision of the "i." Tatthāti: In the words "manasākāsī." Yathāti: In whatever way. Idanti: This manner. Tatthāti: In the passage "avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā," etc., the meaning of the individual parts should be understood in this way, is the construction. In a compound, the gender and number of the preceding word should be taken with the "ta," thus he says, "avijjā ca sā paccayo cā." But in a sentence, the gender and number of the subsequent word should be taken with the "ta." He says, "tasmā avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantī" because the phrase "avijjāpaccayā" should be connected with the word "sambhavantī." Sabbapadesūti: In all the passages beginning with "saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa," etc.

Yathā panāti yenākārena pana.Idanti imaṃ ākāraṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘avijjāya…pe… nirodho’’tiādivākye.Avijjāyatvevāti ettha ‘‘bhaddiyotvevā’’tiādīsu viya ‘‘bhaddiyo iti evā’’ti padacchedo kattabbo, na evaṃ ‘‘avijjāya iti evā’’ti, atha kho ‘‘avijjāya tu evā’’ti kātabboti āha ‘‘avijjāya tu evā’’ti. ‘‘Pa atimokkhaṃ atipamokkha’’ntiādīsu (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) viya upasaggabyattayena vuttaṃ, evamidha nipātabyattayena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha evasaddena sattajīvādayo nivatteti. Tusaddo pakkhantaratthajotako. Anulomapakkhato paṭilomasaṅkhātaṃ pakkhantaraṃ manasākāsīti attho. Asesavirāganirodhasaddo ayuttasamāso, uttarapadena ca tatiyāsamāsoti āha ‘‘virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā’’ti. Tattha asesasaddaṃ virāgasaddena sambandhamakatvā nirodhasaddena sambandhaṃ katvā atthassa gahaṇaṃayuttasamāsonāma. ‘‘Maggenā’’tiiminā virāgasaddassatthaṃ dasseti. Maggo hi virajjanaṭṭhenavirāgoti vuccati.Saṅkhāranirodhoti ettha maggena nirodhattā anuppādanirodho hotīti āha ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hotī’’ti.Anuppādanirodhoti ca anuppādena nirodho samucchedavasena niruddhattā.Evanti yathā avijjāyatveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, evaṃ tathāti attho.Tatthāti ‘‘evametassā’’tiādivacane. Kevalasaddo sakalapariyāyoti āha ‘‘sakalassā’’ti, anavasesassāti attho. Athavā sattajīvādīhi amissitattā amissatthoti āha ‘‘suddhassa vā’’ti. ‘‘Sattavirahitassā’’ti iminā suddhabhāvaṃ dasseti.Dukkhakkhandhassāti ettha khandhasaddo rāsatthavācakoti āha ‘‘dukkharāsissā’’ti.

Yathā panāti: In whatever manner. Idanti: This manner. Tatthāti: In the sentence "avijjāya…pe… nirodho," etc. Avijjāyatvevāti: Here, as in "bhaddiyotvevā," etc., the word division should be made as "bhaddiyo iti evā," not as "avijjāya iti evā," but rather it should be done as "avijjāya tu evā," thus he says, "avijjāya tu evā." It should be seen that it is stated with the distinctness of a particle, as in "pa atimokkhaṃ atipamokkha," etc.; so here it is stated with the distinctness of a particle. There, the word "eva" eliminates the eternal soul, etc. The word "tu" indicates an alternative. The meaning is that he turned his mind to the alternative called the reverse order from the forward order. Asesavirāganirodhasaddo: a faulty compound, and a third-case compound with the latter word; thus he says, "virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā." There, the taking of the meaning by relating the word "asesa" to the word "nirodha," without relating it to the word "virāga," is called a faulty compound. "Maggenā" indicates the meaning of the word "virāga." For the path is called virāgo in the sense of detachment (virajjanaṭṭhena). Saṅkhāranirodhoti: Here, because of cessation by the path, there is cessation of non-arising; thus he says, "saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hotī." Anuppādanirodhoti: And cessation by non-arising, because of being stopped by way of cutting off. Evanti: Just as with the complete fading away and cessation of ignorance, there is cessation of formations, so it is in that way. Tatthāti: In the sentence "evametassā," etc. The word "kevala" is a synonym for "entire," thus he says, "sakalassā," meaning without remainder. Or, because it is unmixed with the eternal soul, etc., it is unmixed in meaning; thus he says, "suddhassa vā." "Sattavirahitassā" indicates the state of purity. Dukkhakkhandhassāti: Here, the word "khandha" is expressive of a heap, thus he says, "dukkharāsissā."

Etamatthaṃviditvāti ettha etasaddassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yvāya’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘avijjādivasena…pe… nirodho hotī’’ti yvāyaṃ attho vuttoti yojanā. Samudayo ca hotīti sambandho.Viditavelāyanti pākaṭavelāyaṃ pasiddhakāleti attho.Imaṃ udānanti ettha imasaddo vuccamānāpekkho. Tasmiṃ atthe vidite satīti yojanā.Pajānanatāyāti pakārena jānanabhāvassa.Somanassayuttañāṇasamuṭṭhānanti somanassena ekuppādādivasena yuttena ñāṇena samuṭṭhānaṃ, yuttaṃ vā ñāṇasaṅkhātaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ udānanti sambandho. Tatthaudānanti kenaṭṭhena udānaṃ? Udānaṭṭhena, modanaṭṭhena, kīḷanaṭṭhena cāti attho. Kimidaṃ udānaṃ nāma? Pītivegasamuṭṭhāpito udāhāro. Yathā (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) hi yaṃ telādiminitabbavatthu mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti visanditvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘avaseko’’ti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘ogho’’ti vuccati. Evamevaṃ yaṃ pītivegasamuṭṭhāpitaṃ vitakkavipphāraṃ hadayaṃ sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti, so adhiko hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā vacīdvārena nikkhamanto paṭiggāhakanirapekkho udāhāraviseso ‘‘udāna’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Attamanavācaṃ nicchāresī’’ti iminā udadhātussa udāhāratthaṃ dasseti.

Etamatthaṃ viditvāti: Here, to show the range of the word "eta," it is said, "yvāya," etc. There, the meaning is: whatever meaning has been stated, beginning with "avijjādivasena…pe… nirodho hotī." "Samudayo ca hotīti" is connected. Viditavelāyanti: At the time of evident knowledge, at the well-known time is the meaning. Imaṃ udānanti: Here, the word "ima" looks forward to what is about to be said. When that meaning is known, is the construction. Pajānanatāyāti: Of the state of knowing in a distinctive way. Somanassayuttañāṇasamuṭṭhānanti: Arising together with knowledge associated with gladness in a single arising, or what is connected is the arising consisting of knowledge; udāna is the connection. There, udānanti: In what sense is it udāna? In the sense of exclamation (udānaṭṭhena), in the sense of joy (modanaṭṭhena), and in the sense of play (kīḷanaṭṭhena) is the meaning. What is this called udāna? An utterance brought about by the force of joy. For example, just as (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) something that cannot take a measure to measure oil, etc., disperses and goes away, that is called "avaseko." And the water that cannot hold a pond, overflows and goes away, that is called "ogho." Just so, that expansion of thought brought about by the force of joy, which the heart cannot contain, becoming excessive and not staying inside, comes out through the door of speech, is a particular utterance independent of a receiver, called "udāna." "Attamanavācaṃ nicchāresī" indicates the meaning of utterance (udāhāratthaṃ) of the root "uda."

Tassāti udānassa attho evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Yadāti ettha dāpaccayassa atthavākyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yasmiṃ kāle’’ti.Haveti ‘‘byatta’’nti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Byattaṃ pākaṭanti hi attho.Pātubhavantīti ettha pātunipātassa atthassa ‘‘have’’ti nipātena vuttattā bhūdhātusseva atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘uppajjantī’’ti.Anuloma paṭiloma paccayākāra paṭivedhasādhakāti anulomato ca paṭilomato ca paccayākārassa paṭivijjhanassa sādhakā.Bodhipakkhiyadhammāti bodhiyā maggañāṇassa pakkhe bhavā sattatiṃsa dhammā. Athavā pātunipātena saha ‘‘bhavantī’’tipadassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pakāsantī’’ti. Imasmiṃ naye havesaddo ekaṃsatthavācako.Haveekaṃsenāti hi attho.Abhisamayavasenāti maggañāṇavasena. Maggañāṇañhi yasmā abhimukhaṃ cattāri saccāni samecca ayati jānāti, tasmāabhisamayoti vuccati.

Tassāti: The meaning of that udāna should be understood in this way, is the construction. Yadāti: Here, showing the meaning of the suffix "dā," he says, "yasmiṃ kāle." Haveti: A particle in this meaning of "byatta." For "byattaṃ pākaṭanti" is the meaning. Pātubhavantīti: Here, since the meaning of the particle "pātu" has been stated by the particle "have," showing only the meaning of the root "bhū," he says, "uppajjantī." Anuloma paṭiloma paccayākāra paṭivedhasādhakāti: Conductive to the penetration of the paccayākāra in both the forward and reverse orders. Bodhipakkhiyadhammāti: The thirty-seven qualities on the side of enlightenment, the knowledge of the path. Or, showing the meaning of the word "bhavantī" together with the particle "pātu," he says, "pakāsantī." In this way, the word "have" is expressive of certainty. Have ekaṃsenāti: For certain is the meaning. Abhisamayavasenāti: By way of the knowledge of the path. For since the knowledge of the path approaches, understands, and goes to the four truths face to face, therefore it is called abhisamayo.

ātāpoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Na vīriyasāmaññaṃ hoti, atha kho sammappadhānavīriyamevāti āha ‘‘sammappadhānavīriyavato’’ti. Imināātāpīti ettha īpaccayassa vantuatthaṃ dasseti.Ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena cāti kasiṇādiārammaṇaṃ upagantvā nijjhānasabhāvena aṭṭhasamāpattisaṅkhātena jhānena ca.Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena cāti aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ upagantvā nijjhānasabhāvena vipassanāmaggaphalasaṅkhātena jhānena ca. ‘‘Bāhitapāpassā’’ti iminā bāhito aṇo pāpo anenātibrāhmaṇoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Aṇasaddo hi pāpapariyāyo. ‘‘Khīṇāsavassā’’ti iminā tassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Athassāti atha assa, tasmiṃ kāle brāhmaṇassāti attho. Yā etā kaṅkhā vuttāti sambandho. ‘‘Ko nu kho…pe… avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.12) nayena ca tathā ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho…pe… avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.35) nayena ca paccayākāre vuttāti yojanā.No kallo pañhoti ayutto pañho, duppañho esoti attho.Tathāti evaṃ, tato aññathā vā. Yā ca soḷasa kaṅkhā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) āgatāti sambandho. Apaṭividdhattā kaṅkhāti yojanā.Soḷasa kaṅkhāti atītavisayā pañca, anāgatavisayā pañca, paccuppannavisayā chāti soḷasavidhā kaṅkhā.Vapayantīti vi apayanti, ikāralopenāyaṃ sandhi. Vityūpasaggo dhātvatthānuvattako, apayanti – saddo apagamanatthoti āha ‘‘apagacchantī’’ti. ‘‘Nirujjhantī’’tiiminā apagamanatthameva pariyāyantarena dīpeti. ‘‘Kasmā’’ti iminā ‘‘yato pajānāti sahetudhamma’’nti vākyassa pubbavākyakāraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti.Sahetudhammanti ettha saha avijjādihetunāti sahetu, saṅkhārādiko paccayuppannadhammo. Sahetu ca so dhammo cāti sahetudhammoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘avijjādikenā’’tiādi. ‘‘Paṭivijjhatī’’ti iminā pajānā tīti ettha ñādhātuyā avabodhanatthaṃ dasseti, māraṇatosanādike atthe nivatteti.Itīti tasmā, vapayantīti yojanā.

ātāpoti: Showing the meaning of the word. It is not merely energy, but rather only right effort, thus he says, "sammappadhānavīriyavato." This indicates the sense of possessing of the suffix "ī" in ātāpī. Ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena cāti: And by way of the nature of contemplating (nijjhānasabhāvena) having approached (upagantvā) an object (ārammaṇaṃ) such as a kasiṇa, and by jhāna consisting of the eight attainments (aṭṭhasamāpattisaṅkhātena). Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena cāti: And by way of the nature of contemplating (nijjhānasabhāvena) having approached (upagantvā) a characteristic (lakkhaṇaṃ) such as impermanence, and by jhāna consisting of insight, path and fruition (vipassanāmaggaphalasaṅkhātena). "Bāhitapāpassā" indicates the etymology of brāhmaṇo as "one by whom the defilements (pāpo) have been warded off" (bāhito aṇo pāpo anena). For the word aṇa is a synonym for evil. "Khīṇāsavassā" indicates his nature. Athassāti: Then to him, at that time, to the brahmin is the meaning. "Yā etā kaṅkhā vuttā" is the connection. And the connection is that it is stated in the paccayākāra in the way beginning with "ko nu kho…pe… avocā," etc., and in the way beginning with "katamaṃ nu kho…pe… avocā," etc. No kallo pañhoti: An unsuitable question, this is a bad question is the meaning. Tathāti: Thus, or otherwise. "Yā ca soḷasa kaṅkhā āgatā" is the connection. Because of non-penetration, it is doubt is the construction. Soḷasa kaṅkhāti: The sixteen kinds of doubt are five concerning the past, five concerning the future, and six concerning the present. Vapayantīti: vi apayanti, this is a sandhi with the elision of the "i." The prefix "vi" follows the meaning of the root, apayanti—the word is in the sense of departure, thus he says, "apagacchantī." "Nirujjhantī" illuminates that very meaning of departure with another synonym. Kasmāti: Because of what, does the sentence "yato pajānāti sahetudhamma" show the previous sentence as a cause? Sahetudhammanti: Here, with a cause beginning with ignorance, it is sahetu; a quality born of conditions beginning with formations. Showing the etymology as "that which has a cause and that which is a quality is sahetudhamma," he says, "avijjādikenā," etc. "Paṭivijjhatī" shows the meaning of understanding of the root "ñā" in "pajānāti," eliminating the meanings of killing, pleasing, etc. Itīti: Therefore, vapayantīti is the construction.

2.Paccayakkhayassāti paccayānaṃ khayaṭṭhānassa asaṅkhatassāti yojanā.Tatrāti dutiyaudāne. Khīyanti paccayā etthātikhayaṃ,nibbānanti āha ‘‘paccayānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbāna’’nti. ‘‘Aññāsī’’ti imināavedīti ettha vidadhātuyā ñāṇatthaṃ dasseti, anubhavanalābhādike nivatteti. Tasmā vapayantīti sambandho.Vuttappakārāti paṭhamaudāne vuttasadisā.Dhammāti bodhipakkhiyadhammā, catuariyasaccadhammā vā.

2.Paccayakkhayassāti: Of the cessation of conditions, of the unconditioned state is the construction. Tatrāti: In the second utterance. "Khīyanti paccayā etthāti" is khayaṃ, nibbāna, thus he says, "paccayānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbāna." Aññāsīti: "Avedī" indicates the meaning of knowledge of the root "vida," eliminating the meanings of experiencing, obtaining, etc. Therefore, vapayantīti is the connection. Vuttappakārāti: Similar to what was said in the first utterance. Dhammāti: Qualities on the side of enlightenment, or qualities of the four noble truths.

3.Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti sambandho. Yena maggena viditoti yojanā.Tatrāti tatiyaudāne. So brāhmaṇo tiṭṭhatīti sambandho. Tehi uppannehi bodhipakkhiyadhammehi vā yassa ariyamaggassa catusaccadhammā pātubhūtā, tena ariyamaggena vā vidhūpayanti yojanā.Vuttappakāranti suttanipāte vuttappakāraṃ.Mārasenanti kāmādikaṃ dasavidhaṃ mārasenaṃ. ‘‘Vidhamento’’tiimināvidhūpayanti ettha dhūpadhātuyā vidhamanatthaṃ dasseti, limpanatthādayo nivatteti. ‘‘Viddhaṃ sento’’tiimināvidhamentoti ettha dhamudhātuyā dhaṃsanatthaṃ dasseti, saddatthādayo nivatteti.‘‘Sūriyovaobhāsaya’’ntipadassa ‘‘sūriyo ivā’’ti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi.Sūriyoti ādicco. So hi yasmā paṭhamakappikānaṃ sūraṃ janeti, tasmā sūriyoti vuccati.Abbhuggatoti abhimukhaṃ uddhaṃ ākāsaṃ gato, abbhaṃ vā ākāsaṃ uggato.Abbhasaddo hi ākāsapariyāyo. Ākāso hi yasmā ābhuso bhāti dippati, tasmā‘‘abbha’’nti vuccati. Ayaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – yathā sūriyo obhāsayanto tiṭṭhati, evaṃ brāhmaṇo saccāni paṭivijjhanto. Yathā sūriyo andhakāraṃ vidhamento tiṭṭhati, evaṃ brāhmaṇo mārasenampi vidhūpayantoti.

3. The connection is: "imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi". The construction is: "yena maggena viditoti". There, in the third udāna. The connection is: "so brāhmaṇo tiṭṭhati". They dispel (the darkness) with those arisen bodhipakkhiya-dhamma, or with that Ariya Path by which the Four Noble Truths have become manifest; this is the construction. Vuttappakāra means the manner described in the Sutta Nipāta. Mārasena means the ten kinds of Māra's army, beginning with sensual desire. By saying ‘‘vidhamento’’, here in vidhūpaya, he shows that the root dhūpa means "to dispel," and he excludes meanings such as "to smear." By saying ‘‘viddhaṃ sento’’, here in vidhamento, he shows that the root dhamu means "to destroy," and he excludes meanings such as "sound." Explaining that the meaning of the phrase ‘‘sūriyova obhāsaya’’ is "like the sun," he says, "just as," etc. Sūriyo means the sun. Indeed, since it generates courage (sūra) for those of the first cosmic epoch, therefore it is called sūriya. Abbhuggato means gone upwards, facing upwards into the sky, or risen up into the sky (abbha). The word Abbha is a synonym for ākāsa (sky). Indeed, since the ākāsa shines brilliantly (bhāti, dippati) with light (ābhuso), therefore it is called ‘‘abbha’’. Here, this is the connection of similes: Just as the sun stands illuminating, so does the brahmin stand penetrating the truths. Just as the sun stands dispelling darkness, so does the brahmin dispel the army of Māra.

Etthāti etesu tīsu udānesu. Paṭhamaṃ udānaṃ uppannanti sambandho. Imissā khandhakapāḷiyā udānapāḷiṃ saṃsandanto āha ‘‘udāne panā’’tiādi. Udāne pana vuttanti sambandho.Tanti udāne vuttavacanaṃ, vuttanti sambandho.Accayenāti atikkamena, tamevatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘tadā hī’’tiādi.Tadāti ‘‘sve āsanā vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti rattiṃ uppāditamanasikārakāle. Bhagavā manasākāsīti sambandho. Purimā dve udānagāthā ānubhāvadīpikā hontīti yojanā.Tassāti paccayākārapajānanapaccayakkhayādhigamassa.Ekekamevāti anulomapaṭilomesu ekekameva.Paṭhamayāmañcāti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ, nirantaraṃ paṭhamayāmakālanti attho.Idha panāti imasmiṃ khandhake pana. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādi. Tattha bhagavā udānesīti sambandho.Visākhapuṇṇamāyāti visākhāya yuttāya puṇṇamāya. ‘‘Aruṇo uggamissatī’’ti vattabbasamayeti sambandho.Sabbaññutanti sabbaññubhāvaṃ, anāvaraṇañāṇanti attho.Tatoti aruṇuggamanato.Taṃ divasanti bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tasmiṃ divaseti hi attho. Accantasaṃyoge vā, taṃ divasaṃ kālanti hi attho.Evaṃ manasi katvāti yathā taṃ divasaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasākāsi, evaṃ manasi katvāti attho.Itīti evaṃ. ‘‘Bodhirukkhamūle…pe… nisīdī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ taṃ sattāhanti yojanā.Tatthevāti bodhirukkhamūleyeva.

Here, in these three udānas. The connection is: the first udāna arose. Connecting this Khandhaka Pāḷi with the Udāna Pāḷi, he says, "but in the Udāna," etc. The connection is: "ta" – the statement made in the Udāna – is stated. Accayena means by exceeding, explaining the same meaning, he says, "then," etc. Tadā means at the time of generating mindfulness the night before, thinking, "tomorrow I will rise from my seat." The connection is: the Blessed One made in mind. The two previous Udāna verses are revealers of the effect, this is the construction. Tassā, of the gaining of the cessation of the cause through knowing the condition. Ekekamevā, only one in the forward and reverse order. Paṭhamayāmañcā the locative case in the sense of continuous connection, meaning continuously throughout the first watch of the night. Idha panā, but in this Khandhaka. Expanding on the same meaning, he says, "the Blessed One," etc. There, the connection is: the Blessed One uttered an udāna. Visākhapuṇṇamāyā, on the full moon connected with Visākhā. The connection is: the time when it could be said, "the dawn will rise." Sabbaññuta, all-knowingness, meaning unobstructed knowledge. Tato, from the rising of the dawn. Taṃ divasa, the locative case in the sense of the ground, for indeed the meaning is, "on that day." Or in continuous connection, for indeed the meaning is, "for that whole day." Evaṃ manasi katvā, having made in mind just as he made in mind the forward and reverse order for that day, this is the meaning. Itī, thus. The connection is: "at the foot of the Bodhi tree…pe… sat down," that which was said thus. Tatthevā, at the foot of the Bodhi tree itself.

2. Ajapālakathā
2. The Story of the Ajapāla Tree

4.Na bhagavāti ettha nakāro ‘‘upasaṅkamī’’ti padena yojetabbo, na upasaṅkhamīti hi attho.Tamhā samādhimhāti tato arahattaphalasamāpattisamādhito. Anantarameva anupasaṅkamanaṃ upamāya āvikaronto āha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Iccevaṃ vuttaṃ na hotīti yojanā.Idanti idaṃ atthajātaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘bhutvā sayatī’’ti vākye.Evanti upameyyajotako.Idhāpīti imissaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’tiādipāḷiyampi.Idanti ayamattho dīpito hotīti yojanā.Etthāti ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’tiādipāṭhe.

4. Na bhagavā, here, the negative particle na should be connected with the word ‘‘upasaṅkamī’’, for indeed the meaning is "did not approach." Tamhā samādhimhā, from that samādhi of the attainment of the fruition of Arahatship. Revealing the non-approaching immediately after by means of an simile, he says, "just as," etc. The construction is: it is not said in this way. Ida, this collection of meanings. Etthā, in the statement "having eaten, he sleeps." Eva, indicative of a simile. Idhāpī, also in this Pāḷi beginning with "atha kho bhagavā". Ida, this meaning is revealed, this is the construction. Etthā, in the text beginning with "atha kho bhagavā."

Aparānipīti pallaṅkasattāhato aññānipi.Tatrāti ‘‘aparānipī’’tiādivacane. Bhagavati nisinne satīti yojanā.Kirasaddo vitthārajotako.Kiṃ nu khoti parivitakkanatthe nipāto.Ekaccānanti appesakkhānaṃ ekaccānaṃ.Tāsanti devatānaṃ.Balādhigamaṭṭhānanti balena tejasā adhigamaṭṭhānaṃ.Animisehīti ummisehi.Sattāhanti kammatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, accantasaṃyoge vā. Evañhi sati ‘‘kāla’’nti kammaṃ veditabbaṃ.Taṃ ṭhānanti animisehi akkhīhi olokiyamānaṭṭhānaṃ.Athāti animisasattāhassa anantare.Ratanacaṅkameti ratanamaye caṅkame.Taṃ ṭhānanti caṅkamaṭṭhānaṃ.Tatoti caṅkamasattāhato.Ratanagharanti ratanamayaṃ gehaṃ.Tatthāti ratanaghare abhidhammapiṭakaṃ vicinantoti sambandho.Etthāti ratanaghare, abhidhammapiṭake vā, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Taṃ ṭhānanti abhidhammapiṭakavicinanaṭṭhānaṃ.

Aparānipī, other (days) also spent in sitting cross-legged. Tatrā, in the statement beginning with "aparānipī." The connection is: while the Blessed One was sitting. The word Kira is indicative of expansion. Kiṃ nu kho, a particle in the sense of pondering. Ekaccāna, of certain ones of little ability. Tāsa, of those devatās. Balādhigamaṭṭhāna, the place of attaining power and glory. Animisehī, with unblinking (eyes). Sattāha, the locative case here is in the sense of the object, or in continuous connection. Indeed, in this case, kāla should be understood as the object. Taṃ ṭhāna, the place being looked at with unblinking eyes. Athā, immediately after the week of unblinking eyes. Ratanacaṅkame, on a jeweled promenade. Taṃ ṭhāna, the promenade place. Tato, after the week of the promenade. Ratanaghara, a jeweled house. Tatthā, in the jeweled house, he surveyed the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, this is the connection. Etthā, in the jeweled house, or in the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, this locative case is for specification. Taṃ ṭhāna, the place of surveying the Abhidhamma Piṭaka.

Evantiādi pubbavacanassa nigamavasena pacchimavacanassa anusandhinidassanaṃ.Tenāti ajapālānaṃ nisīdanakāraṇena.Assāti nigrodhassa. ‘‘Ajapālanigrodhotveva nāma’’nti iminā upacāravasena nāmalabhanaṃ dasseti. Ajapā brāhmaṇā lanti nivāsaṃ gaṇhanti etthātiajapālo,uṇhakāle vā antopaviṭṭhe aje attano chāyāya pāletītiajapālo,ajapālo ca so nigrodho cetiajapālanigrodhoti vacanatthānipi pakaraṇantaresu (udā. aṭṭha. 4) dassitāni.Tatrāpīti ajapālanigrodhepi.Bodhitoti bodhirukkhato.Etthāti ajapālanigrodhe. Bhagavati nisinneti yojanā.Tatthāti ‘‘atha kho aññataro’’tiādivacane.Soti brāhmaṇo.Diṭṭhamaṅgaliko nāmāti diṭṭhasutamutasaṅkhātesu tīsu maṅgalikesu diṭṭhamaṅgaliko nāma kirāti attho. ‘‘Mānavasena…pe… vuccatī’’ti iminā ‘‘huṃhu’’nti karotītihuṃhuṅko,huṃhuṅko jāti sabhāvo imassātihuṃhuṅkajātikoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

Evaṃ, etc., is a showing of the connection of the later statement as a conclusion of the earlier statement. Tenā, by the cause of sitting down of the goatherds. Assā, of the banyan tree. By "Ajapālanigrodhotveva nāma," he shows the obtaining of the name by way of designation. Ajapā brāhmaṇā lanti nivāsaṃ gaṇhanti etthāti ajapālo, or in the hot season, it protects (pāleti) the goats (aje) with its shade when they have entered inside, therefore ajapālo, and ajapālo ca so nigrodho ceti ajapālanigrodho, these explanations of the word are shown in other contexts (Udā. Aṭṭha. 4). Tatrāpī, even at the Ajapāla banyan tree. Bodhito, from the Bodhi tree. Etthā, at the Ajapāla banyan tree. The connection is: while the Blessed One was sitting. Tatthā, in the statement beginning with "atha kho aññataro." So, that brahmin. Diṭṭhamaṅgaliko nāmā, it seems, he was named Diṭṭhamaṅgalika among the three kinds of auspicious signs (maṅgalika) that are seen, heard, and thought. By "Mānavasena…pe… vuccatī," he shows the explanation of the word: he makes the sound "huṃhu," therefore huṃhuṅko, and huṃhuṅkajātiko means one whose innate nature is to make the "huṃhu" sound.

Tenāti brāhmaṇena.Sikhāppattanti aggappattaṃ.Tassāti udānassa.Yoti puggalo, paṭijānātīti sambandho. ‘‘Na diṭṭhamaṅgalikatāyā’’ti iminā avadhāraṇaphalaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bāhitapāpadhammattā’’ti iminā bāhito pāpo dhammo anenātibāhitapāpadhammoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Huṃhuṅkārapahānenā’’ti iminā natthi huṃhuṅkāro imassātinihuṃhuṅkoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Rāgādikasāvābhāvenāti iminā natthi rāgādikasāvo imassātinikkasāvoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bhāvanānuyogayuttacittatāyā’’ti iminā yataṃ anuyuttaṃ attaṃ cittaṃ imassātiyatattoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ettha hi yatasaddo vīriyavācako, yatadhātuyā nipphanno, attasaddo cittapariyāyo. Yatasaddassa yamudhātuyā ca nipphannabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlasaṃvarena vā’’tiādi. ‘‘Saññatacittatāyā’’ti iminā yamati saṃyamatītiyataṃ,yataṃ attaṃ cittaṃ imassātiyatattoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Saccāni vidanti jānantītivedānīti vacanatthena maggañāṇāni vedāni nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātehi vedehī’’ti. ‘‘Catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātāna’’nti vibhattipariṇāmaṃ katvā ‘‘vedāna’’ntipadena yojetabbo.Antanti nibbānaṃ. Tañhi yasmā saṅkhārānaṃ avasāne jātaṃ, tasmā antanti vuccati. Punaantanti arahattaphalaṃ. Tañhi yasmā maggassa pariyosāne pavattaṃ, tasmā antanti vuccati. ‘‘Maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā’’ti iminā vusitaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ brahmacariyaṃ anenātivusitabrahmacariyoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Dhammena brahmavādaṃ vadeyyāti vuttavacanassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘brāhmaṇo ahanti etaṃ vādaṃ dhammena vadeyyā’’ti.Dhammenāti bhūtena sabhāvena.Loketi ettha sattalokovādhippetoti āha ‘‘sakale lokasannivāse’’ti.

Tenā, by that brahmin. Sikhāppatta, having attained the summit. Tassā, of that udāna. Yo, the person, the connection is: acknowledges. By "Na diṭṭhamaṅgalikatāyā," he shows the result of specification. By "Bāhitapāpadhammattā," he shows the explanation of the word: bāhitapāpadhammo means one by whom evil is warded off. By "Huṃhuṅkārapahānenā," he shows the explanation of the word: nihuṃhuṅko means one who is without the "huṃhu" sound. Rāgādikasāvābhāvenā, he shows the explanation of the word: nikkasāvo means one who is without the defilements (sāva) of lust, etc. By "Bhāvanānuyogayuttacittatāyā," he shows the explanation of the word: yatatto means one whose self, whose mind, is restrained and devoted. Here, the word yata is indicative of effort, derived from the root yat, and the word atta is a synonym for mind. To show that the word yata is also derived from the root yama, it is said, "by moral restraint," etc. By "Saññatacittatāyā," he shows the explanation of the word: yataṃ means one who restrains and controls, and yatatto means one whose self, whose mind, is restrained. Vedānī means those who know and understand the truths, and showing that the paths of knowledge are called vedā, he says, "by the Vedas consisting of the four paths of knowledge." After transforming the inflection, "Catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātāna" should be connected with the word "vedāna." Anta, Nibbāna. Indeed, since it arises at the end of conditioned things, therefore it is called anta. Again, anta, the fruit of Arahatship. Indeed, since it occurs at the end of the path, therefore it is called anta. By "Maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā," he shows the explanation of the word: vusitabrahmacariyo means one by whom the holy life consisting of the path has been lived. Explaining the meaning of the statement "Dhammena brahmavādaṃ vadeyya," he says, "he would declare the statement 'I am a brahmin' in accordance with the Dhamma." Dhammenā, by the true nature. Loke, here, he says that the world of beings is intended, "in the entire aggregation of the world."

3. Mucalindakathā
3. The Story of Mucalinda

5.Akālameghoti ettha vappādikālassa abhāvā na akālo hoti, atha kho vassakāle asampattattā akāloti āha ‘‘asampatte vassakāle’’ti. ‘‘Uppannamegho’’ti iminā akāle uppanno meghoakālameghoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Gimhānaṃ pacchime māseti jeṭṭhamūlamāse.Tasminti meghe.Sītavātaduddinīti ettha sītena vātena dūsitaṃ dinaṃ imissā vaṭṭalikāyāti sītavātaduddinīti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sā ca panā’’tiādi. Sā ca pana sattāhavaṭṭalikā sītavātaduddinī nāma ahosīti sambandho. ‘‘Samīpe pokkharaṇiyā nibbatto’’ti iminā mucalindassa samīpe nibbattomucalindoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Mucalindoti ca niculo. So nīpoti ca piyakoti ca vuccati. Nāgassa bhogo ekopi sattābhujattā ‘‘bhogehī’’ti bahuvacanavasena vuttaṃ.Tasminti nāgarāje ṭhite satīti yojanā.Tassāti nāgarājassa.Tasmāti yasmā bhaṇḍāgāragabbhapamāṇaṃ ahosi, tasmā. Ṭhānassa kāraṇaṃ paridīpeti anenātiṭhānakāraṇaparidīpanaṃ‘‘mā bhagavantaṃ sīta’’ntiādivacanaṃ.Soti nāgarājā.ti saccaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bādhayitthā’’ti kiriyāpadaṃ ajjhāharitabbanti āha ‘‘mā sītaṃ bhagavantaṃ bādhayitthā’’ti.Tatthāti ‘‘mā bhagavantaṃ sīta’’ntiādivacane. Sattāhavaṭṭalikāya satīti sambandho.Tampīti uṇhampi.Nanti bhagavantaṃ.Tassāti nāgarājassa.Ubbiddhanti uddhaṃ chiddaṃ. Viddhachiddasaddā hi pariyāyā. Ākāsaṃ meghapaṭalapaṭicchannaṃ āsannaṃ viya hoti, meghapaṭalavigame dūraṃ viya upaṭṭhāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘meghavigamena dūrībhūta’’nti.Vigatavalāhakanti ettha vigatasaddo apagatatthavācako, valāhakasaddo meghapariyāyoti āha ‘‘apagatamegha’’nti. Indanīlamaṇi viya dibbatītidevoti vacanatthena ākāso devo nāmāti āha ‘‘devanti ākāsa’’nti.Attano rūpanti attano nāgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Imināsakavaṇṇanti ettha sakasaddo attavācako, vaṇṇasaddo saṇṭhānavevacanoti dasseti.

5. Akālamegho, here, since it is not the time for sowing, there is no non-time; rather, since it has not arrived at the rainy season, it is a non-time, so he says, "when the rainy season had not arrived." By "Uppannamegho," he shows the explanation of the word: akālamegho means a cloud arisen out of season. Gimhānaṃ pacchime māse, in the last month of summer, in the months of Jeṭṭha and Mūla. Tasmi, in that cloud. Sītavātaduddinī, here, showing that sītavātaduddinī means a day spoiled by cold wind for this week, he says, "and that," etc. The connection is: and that week was named sītavātaduddinī. By "Samīpe pokkharaṇiyā nibbatto," he shows the explanation of the word: mucalindo means one who was born near Mucalinda. Mucalindo also means nicula tree. It is also called nīpa and piyaka. Although the hood of the nāga is single, it is said in the plural as ‘‘bhogehī’’ due to having seven coils. Tasmi, while that nāga king was standing, this is the connection. Tassā, of that nāga king. Tasmā, since it was the size of a treasure-chamber, therefore. Ṭhānakāraṇaparidīpanaṃ, showing the reason for the place, is the statement ‘‘mā bhagavantaṃ sīta’’, etc. So, that nāga king. , truly. He says that in the Pāḷi, it is necessary to supply the verb ‘‘bādhayitthā’’, "may the cold not trouble the Blessed One." Tatthā, in the statement "mā bhagavantaṃ sīta", etc. The connection is: while the week was passing. Tampī, even heat. Na, (did not trouble) the Blessed One. Tassā, of that nāga king. Ubbiddha, an upward hole. The words viddha and chidda are synonyms. The sky seems near when covered by a layer of clouds, and it appears distant when the layer of clouds is gone, therefore it is said, "having become distant by the removal of the clouds." Vigatavalāhaka, here, the word vigata is expressive of removal, and the word valāhaka is a synonym for cloud, so he says, "with the clouds removed." The sky is called devo, meaning shining like an Indanīla jewel, so he says, "devanti ākāsa." Attano rūpa, one’s own form, one’s own nāga shape. By this, he shows that here in sakavaṇṇa, the word saka is expressive of self, and the word vaṇṇa is a synonym for shape.

Sukho vivekoti ettha tadaṅga vikkhambhana samuccheda paṭippassaddhinissaraṇavivekasaṅkhātesu pañcasu vivekesu nibbānasaṅkhāto nissaraṇaviveko ca kāyacittaupadhivivekasaṅkhātesu tīsu vivekesu nibbānasaṅkhāto upadhiviveko ca gahetabboti āha ‘‘nibbānasaṅkhāto upadhiviveko’’ti. ‘‘Catumaggañāṇasantosenā’’ti iminātuṭṭhassāti ettha piṇḍapātasantosādike nivatteti.Sutadhammassāti ettha sutasaddo vissutapariyāyoti āha ‘‘pakāsitadhammassā’’ti, pākaṭasaccadhammassāti attho.Passatoti ettha maṃsacakkhussa karaṇabhāvena āsaṅkā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘ñāṇacakkhunā’’ti. ‘‘Akuppanabhāvo’’ti imināabyāpajjanti ettha byāpādasaddassa dosavācakabhāvo ca ṇyapaccayassa bhāvattho ca dassito.Etenāti ‘‘abyāpajja’’ntipadena.Mettāpubbabhāgoti abyāpajjassa pubbabhāge mettāya uppannabhāvo.Pāṇabhūtesu saṃyamoti ettha pāṇabhūtasaddā vevacanabhāvena sattesu eva vattantīti āha ‘‘sattesu cā’’ti.Karuṇāpubbabhāgoti saṃyamassa pubbabhāge karuṇāya uppannabhāvo.ti yā virāgatā. Anāgāmimaggassa kāmarāgassa anavasesapahānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘etena anāgāmimaggo kathito’’ti. Yāthāvamānassa arahattamaggena niruddhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘asmi…pe… kathita’’nti.Itoti arahattato.

Sukho viveko, here, among the five kinds of solitude—solitude due to temporary suppression, solitude due to overcoming, solitude due to tranquility, and solitude due to liberation—solitude due to liberation, which is synonymous with Nibbāna, should be taken; and among the three kinds of solitude—solitude of body, solitude of mind, and solitude from the substrata of existence—solitude from the substrata of existence, which is synonymous with Nibbāna, should be taken, so he says, "solitude from the substrata of existence, which is synonymous with Nibbāna." By "Catumaggañāṇasantosenā," he excludes contentment with only alms food, etc., here in tuṭṭhassā. Sutadhammassā, here, the word suta is a synonym for well-known, so he says, "of the Dhamma that is made known," meaning of the well-known true Dhamma. Passato, here, there might be a concern because of the fleshy eye being the instrument, so he says, "by the eye of wisdom." By "Akuppanabhāvo," here in abyāpajja, the fact that the word byāpāda is expressive of aversion and that the suffix ṇya has the sense of state are shown. Etenā, by the word ‘‘abyāpajja’’. Mettāpubbabhāgo, the state of having arisen from loving-kindness in the prior part of non-ill-will. Pāṇabhūtesu saṃyamo, here, since the words pāṇabhūta operate as synonyms only for beings, he says, "and in beings." Karuṇāpubbabhāgo, the state of having arisen from compassion in the prior part of restraint. , that detachment. Since the Anāgāmi Path involves the complete abandoning of sensual lust, it is said, "by this, the Anāgāmi Path is spoken of." Since pride is stopped by the Arahatship Path, it is said, "asmi…pe… spoken of." Ito, from Arahatship.

4. Rājāyatanakathā
4. The Story of Rājāyatana

6.Pācīnakoṇeti puratthimaasse, pubbadakkhiṇadisābhāgeti attho.Rājāyatanarukkhanti khīrikārukkhaṃ.Tena kho pana samayenāti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ pucchitvā dassento āha ‘‘katarena samayenā’’ti. Nisinnassa bhagavatoti yojanā. Devarājasaddassa aññe pajāpatiādayo devarājāno nivattetuṃ ‘‘sakko’’ti vuttaṃ.Tanti harītakaṃ. Paribhuttamattasseva bhagavatoti sambandho. Nisinne bhagavati.

6. Pācīnakoṇe, in the eastern corner, meaning in the southeast direction. Rājāyatanarukkha, the khīrikā tree. Tena kho pana samayenā, here, asking about the range of the word ta, and showing it, he says, "by which time?" The connection is: of the Blessed One sitting. To exclude other deva kings such as Pajāpati and others indicated by the word devarāja, it is said, "Sakka." Ta, that myrobalan. The connection is: of the Blessed One who had just partaken. While the Blessed One was sitting.

Ukkalajanapadatoti ukkalanāmakā janapadamhā. Yasmiṃ dese bhagavā viharati, taṃ desanti yojanā.Etthāti ‘‘taṃ desaṃ addhānamaggappaṭipannā’’tipade.Tesanti vāṇijānaṃ. Ñātisālohitasaddānaṃ aññamaññavevacanattā ‘‘ñātī’’ti vutte sālohitasaddassa attho siddhoti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ñātibhūtapubbā devatā’’ti.ti devatā.Nesanti vāṇijānaṃ.Tatoti apavattanakāraṇā.Teti vāṇijā.Idanti apavattanaṃ.Balinti upahāraṃ.Tesanti vāṇijānaṃ. ‘‘Sabbimadhuphāṇitādīhi yojetvā’’ti padaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ, tasmā majjhe vuttaṃ.Patimānethāti ettha māna pūjāyaṃ pemaneti dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 nakārantadhātu) vuttattā pūjanapemanaṃ nāma atthato upaṭṭhahananti āha ‘‘upaṭṭhahathā’’ti.Taṃ voti ettha taṃsaddo patimānanavisayo, vosaddo tīsu vosaddesu tumhasaddassa kāriyo vosaddo, so ca catutthyatthoti āha ‘‘taṃ patimānaṃ tumhāka’’nti.Vokāro hi tividho tumhasaddassa kāriyo, yovacanassa kāriyo, padapūraṇoti. Tattha tumhasaddassa kāriyo pañcavidho paccattaupayogakaraṇasampadānasāmivacanavasenāti. Tattha tumhasaddakāriyo sampadānavacano idhādhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘tumhāka’’nti. ‘‘Ya’’ntisaddassa visayo paṭiggahaṇatthoti āha ‘‘yaṃ paṭiggahaṇa’’nti.Assāti bhaveyya. Yo patto ahosīti yojanā.Assāti bhagavato.Soti patto. Sujātāya āgacchantiyā evāti sambandho. Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.Tenāti antaradhāyahetunā.Assāti bhagavato.Hatthesūti karaṇatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Hatthehīti hi attho.Kimhīti kena.

Ukkalajanapadato means from the country named Ukkala. The country where the Blessed One dwells is ten yojanas.Etthā means in the phrase "having set out on the road to that country." Tesa means of the merchants. Because the words ñāti and sālohita are synonyms, to show that the meaning of the word sālohita is established when "ñāti" is said, it is said, "a deity who was formerly a relative." means the deity. Nesa means of the merchants. Tato means because of the cause of the offering. Te means the merchants. Ida means the offering. Bali means a gift. Tesa means of the merchants. The phrase "having mixed with ghee, honey, molasses, etc." depends on what comes before and after, therefore it is said in the middle. Patimānethā here, because in the lists of roots, the root māna is said to mean honoring and loving (Saddanīti Dhātumālā, 18, nakārantadhātu), honoring and loving means supporting in terms of meaning, he says, "support." Taṃ vo here, the word taṃ refers to the object of honoring, the word vo among the three vos, is the vo that is the function of the word tumha, and that is in the sense of the fourth case, so he says, "that honoring is yours." The syllable vo is threefold: functional for the word tumha, functional for the plural, and a mere filler. Among these, the one functional for the word tumha is fivefold, in the senses of direct object, use, instrument, dative, and possessive. Here, the one functional for the word tumha, in the sense of dative, is intended. Therefore he says, "yours." The object of the word "yaṃ" is the sense of receiving, so he says, "that reception." Assā means might be. The connection is: which bowl there was. Assā means of the Blessed One. So means that bowl. The connection is: just as Sujātā was coming. And this is a possessive in disregard. Tenā means because of the cause of disappearing. Assā means of the Blessed One. Hatthesū here, this locative is in the sense of instrument. For it means by the hands. Kimhī means by what.

Itoti āsaḷhīmāsajuṇhapakkhapañcamito.Ettakaṃ kālanti etaṃ pamāṇaṃ ekūnapaññāsadivasakālaṃ.Jighacchāti ghasitumicchā.Pipāsāti pātumicchā.Assāti bhagavato. Cetasā-cetosaddānaṃ sambandhāpekkhattā tesaṃ sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘attano’’ti ca ‘‘bhagavato’’ti ca. Imehi sambandhisaddānamasadisattā sambandhopi asadisoti dasseti.Attanoti catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ. Samāsoyeva avayavīpadhāno hoti, vākyaṃ pana avayavapadhānoyevāti dassento āha ‘‘catūhi disāhī’’ti. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘āgantvā’’ti pāṭhaseso yojetabbo. ‘‘Silāmaye’’ti iminā silāmayamevaselāmayanti atthaṃ dasseti.Idanti ‘‘selāmaye patte’’ti vacanaṃ.Yeti muggavaṇṇasilāmaye patte.Tatoti indanīlamaṇimayapattaupanāmanato, paranti sambandho.Tesanti catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ. Cattāropi adhiṭṭhahīti sambandho.Yathāti yenākārena, adhiṭṭhiyamāneti yojanā.Ekasadisoti ekaṃsena sadiso. Adhiṭṭhite patteti sambandho.Patteti ca karaṇatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Pattena paṭiggahesīti hi attho.Paccaggheti ettha ekāro smiṃvacanassa kāriyoti āha ‘‘paccagghasmi’’nti. Paṭi agghanti padavibhāgaṃ katvā paṭisaddo pāṭekkattho, ‘‘aggha’’nti sāmaññato vuttepi mahagghatthoti dassento āha ‘‘pāṭekkaṃ mahagghasmi’’nti. Iminā cattāro ekato hutvā na mahagghā honti, pāṭekkaṃ pana mahagghā hontīti dasseti. Atha vā saupasaggopaccagghasaddoabhinavapariyāyoti āha ‘‘abhinave’’ti.Abhinavoti ca aciratanavatthussa nāmaṃ. Aciratanavatthu aciratanattā abbhuṇhaṃ viya hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘abbhuṇhe’’ti. ‘‘Taṅkhaṇe nibbattasmi’’nti iminā tamevatthaṃ vibhāveti.Dvevācikātipadassa samāsavasena ca taddhitavasena ca nipphannabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dve vācā’’tiādi.Pattāti ettha eko itisaddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Iti tasmā dvevācikāiti atthoti yojanā.Teti vāṇijā.Athāti tasmiṃ kāle.Teti kese.Tesanti vāṇijānaṃ.Pariharathāti attano abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti paṭiggahetvā, paricchinditvā vā harathāti attho.Teti vāṇijā.Amatenevāti amatena iva, abhisittā ivāti yojanā.

Ito means from the fifth day of the waxing fortnight of the month of Āsāḷhī. Ettakaṃ kāla means this amount, a period of forty-nine days. Jighacchā means wanting to eat. Pipāsā means wanting to drink. Assā means of the Blessed One. Because the words cetasā and ceto are related, to show their relationship, it is said "of himself" and "of the Blessed One." Because these related words are dissimilar, he shows that the relationship is also dissimilar. Attano means of the four Great Kings. A compound is indeed a word that prioritizes the constituents, but a sentence prioritizes the individual words, showing this, he says, "by the four directions." In the Pali, the remaining word "having come" should be connected. With "silāmaye," he shows that silāmaya itself means selāmaya. Ida means the statement "in the bowl made of stone." Ye means in the bowl made of Mung bean-colored stone. Tato means from the presentation of the bowl made of Indranila gem, para is a connection. Tesa means of the four Great Kings. The connection is: even the four determined. Yathā means in what way, the connection is: while being determined. Ekasadiso means similar in one aspect. The connection is: in the determined bowl. Patte here, this locative is in the sense of instrument. For it means he accepted with the bowl. Paccagghe here, the e sound is functional for the smiṃ ending, so he says, "in paccaggha." Having divided the word into paṭi and aggha, even if "aggha" is said generally, showing that it means highly valuable, he says, "individually highly valuable." By this, he shows that the four together are not highly valuable, but individually they are highly valuable. Or, paccagghasaddo with a prefix is a synonym for fresh, so he says, "in the fresh." Abhinavo is the name for a recently-made thing. A recently-made thing is as if it were raised up because it is recent, therefore it is said ‘‘abbhuṇhe’’. With "taṅkhaṇe nibbattasmi," he clarifies that very meaning. Showing the state of the word "dvevācikā" as being formed both by way of compound and by way of taddhita, he says, "two words," etc. Pattā here, one iti word is understood as omitted. Therefore, the meaning is "dvevācikā iti," that is the connection. Te means the merchants. Athā means at that time. Te means the hairs. Tesa means of the merchants. Pariharathā means having accepted in the sense of one's own greeting, standing up, and place, or having cut off and taken away, that is the meaning. Te means the merchants. Amatenevā means as if with nectar, as if anointed, that is the connection.

5. Brahmayācanakathā
5. The Story of the Brahma's Request

7.Bhagavā upasaṅkamīti sambandho.Tasminti ajapālanigrodhe.Āciṇṇasamāciṇṇoti ācarito sammācarito, na ekassa buddhassa āciṇṇo, atha kho sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo, atiāciṇṇo niccāciṇṇoti attho. Saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘jānanti hī’’tiādi.Dhammadesananti bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ, dhammadesanatthāya vā bhagavantaṃ, bhagavantaṃ vā dhammadesanaṃ.Tatoti yācanakāraṇā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Lokasannivāso brahmagaruko yasmā, iti tasmā uppādessantīti yojanā.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.

7.The Blessed One approached, is the connection. Tasmi means in that banyan tree of the goat-herds. Āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo means practiced, well-practiced, not practiced by one Buddha, but practiced and well-practiced by all Buddhas, extremely practiced, constantly practiced, that is the meaning. Expanding on the meaning said concisely, he says, "for they know," etc. Dhammadesana means the Blessed One's teaching of the Dhamma, or the Blessed One for the sake of teaching the Dhamma, or the teaching of the Dhamma by the Blessed One. Tato means because of the reason for the request. means truly, or because. Because the world-assembly has great respect for Brahma, therefore they will produce, that is the connection. Itī, etc., is the conclusion.

Tatthāti parivitakkanākārapāṭhe. ‘‘Pañcakāmaguṇesu allīya’’ntīti iminā allīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena lagganti etthātiālayāpañca kāmaguṇāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Allīyantīti lagganti. ‘‘Pañca kāmaguṇe allīyantī’’tipi pāṭho, evaṃ sati allīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena seviyantītiālayāpañca kāmaguṇāti vacanattho kātabbo.Allīyantīti sevanti.Teti pañca kāmaguṇā.‘‘Yadida’’ntipadassa yaṃ idanti padavibhāgaṃ katvā ‘‘ya’’nti ca ‘‘ida’’nti ca sabbanāmapadanti āsaṅkā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘yadidanti nipāto’’ti. Iminā tīsu liṅgesu dvīsu ca vacanesu vināsaṃ, vikāraṃ vā visadisaṃ vā naayanattā nagamanattā abyayaṃ nāmāti dasseti, attho pana sabbanāmatthoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Tassāti ‘‘yadida’’ntinipātassa, atthoti sambandho.Ṭhānanti ‘‘ṭhānaṃ’’itipadaṃ.Paṭiccasamuppādanti ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādo’’itipadaṃ. Atthopi yuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Imesanti saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayuppannānaṃ.Paccayāti avijjādikāraṇā. ‘‘Idappaccayā evā’’ti imināidappaccayatāti ettha tāpaccayassa svatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘devatā’’tiādīsu (khu. pā. aṭṭha. evamiccādipāṭhavaṇṇanā) viya.

Tatthā means in the section on the way of thinking. With "allīya in the five strands of sense pleasure," he shows that ālayā pañca kāmaguṇāti, the word meaning is that they cling in the sense of delighting and attaching. Allīyantī means cling. There is also the reading "pañca kāmaguṇe allīyantī," in this case, ālayā pañca kāmaguṇāti, the word meaning should be made that they attend in the sense of delighting and serving. Allīyantī means attend. Te means the five strands of sense pleasure. Because it might be suspected that in the phrase ‘‘Yadida’’, having divided the words into yaṃ and ida, both "yaṃ" and "ida" are pronoun words, he says, "yadida is an indeclinable." By this, he shows that because it does not go to destruction, change, or dissimilarity in the three genders and two numbers, it is called an immutable, but the meaning should be seen as the meaning of a pronoun. Tassā means of the indeclinable "yadida," the connection is: meaning. Ṭhāna means the word "ṭhānaṃ." Paṭiccasamuppāda means the word "paṭiccasamuppādo." The meaning should be seen as also fitting. Imesa means of the conditioned things, such as the aggregates. Paccayā means because of causes such as ignorance. With "idappaccayā eva," he shows that in idappaccayatā, the tā suffix reveals its own meaning, like in "devatā," etc. (Khu. Pā. Aṭṭha. Evamiccādipāṭhavaṇṇanā).

So mamassa kilamathoti ettha taṃsaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāmā’’ti, iminā ‘‘deseyyaṃ, na ājāneyyu’’nti dvinnameva kiriyāpadānaṃ tasaddassa visayabhāvaṃ dasseti, na ekassa kiriyāpadassa.Soti desanāsaṅkhāto kāyavacīpayogo, iminā vākyavisaye tasaddo uttarapadasseva liṅgavacanāni gaṇhātīti dasseti, samāsamajjhe pana tasaddo pubbapadasseva liṅgavacanāni gaṇhāti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjā ca sā paccayo cā’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. paṭhamabodhisuttavaṇṇanā) ca ‘‘abhidhammo ca so piṭakañcā’’ti ca (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) ādi.Kilamathoti kāyakilamanahetu. Kilamati anenāti kilamatho.Assāti bhaveyya.ti kāyavacīpayogasaṅkhātā desanā.Vihesāti kāyavihiṃsāhetu. Vihiṃsati imāyāti vihesā. Cittena pana buddhānaṃ kilamatho vā vihesā vā natthi arahattamaggena samucchinnattā. ‘‘Paṭibhaṃsū’’ti ettha paṭīti kammappavacanīyayogattā ‘‘bhagavanta’’nti ettha sāmyatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘bhagavato’’ti.‘‘Anu acchariyā’’ti iminā ‘‘na acchariyā’’ti padavibhāgaṃ nivatteti, punappunaṃ acchariyāti attho.Paṭibhaṃsūti ettha paṭisaddo paṭibhānattho, bhādhātu khāyanatthoti āha ‘‘paṭibhānasaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa gocarā ahesu’’nti. ‘‘Gocarā ahesu’’nti iminā khāyanaṃ nāma atthato gocarabhāvena bhavananti dasseti.

In So mamassa kilamatho, showing the object of the word taṃ, he says, "that teaching to those who do not know," by this, he shows that the object of the word taṃ is the two action words "deseyyaṃ, na ājāneyyu," not one action word. So means the bodily and verbal exertion called teaching, by this he shows that in the case of a sentence, the word ta takes on the gender and number of the latter word, but in the middle of a compound, the word ta takes on the gender and number of the former word. Therefore it is said, "avijjā ca sā paccayo cā" (Udā. Aṭṭha. Paṭhamabodhisuttavaṇṇanā) and "abhidhammo ca so piṭakañcā" (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 1.Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā; Dha. Sa. Aṭṭha. Nidānakathā), etc. Kilamatho means the cause of bodily fatigue. One becomes fatigued by this, therefore kilamatho. Assā means might be. means the teaching called bodily and verbal exertion. Vihesā means the cause of bodily harm. One is harmed by this, therefore vihesā. But for the Buddhas, there is no fatigue or harm in their minds, because it is eradicated by the path of Arahatship. In "paṭibhaṃsū," because paṭi is joined with an accusative preposition, he says that in "bhagavanta," it is a statement of use in the sense of sameness, "to the Blessed One." ‘‘Anu acchariyā’’ by this, he prevents dividing the word into "na acchariyā," the meaning is repeatedly amazing. Paṭibhaṃsū here, the word paṭi is in the sense of manifestation, the root bhā is in the sense of appearing, so he says, "they were the object of knowledge called manifestation." With "gocarā ahesu," he shows that appearing is named existing in the sense of being an object.

Meti mama, mayā vā, adhigataṃ dhammaṃ pakāsitunti sambandho. Ariyamaggasotassa paṭipaṭisotanti vutte nibbānamevāti āha ‘‘paṭisotaṃ vuccati nibbāna’’nti.Nibbānagāminti ariyamaggaṃ. Ariyamaggo hi yasmā nibbānaṃ gamayati, tasmā nibbānagāmīti vuccati.Tamokhandhenāti ettha tamasaddo avijjāpariyāyo, khandhasaddo rāsatthoti āha ‘‘avijjārāsinā’’ti. ‘‘Ajjhotthaṭā’’ti imināāvuṭāti ettha vudhātu āvaraṇatthoti dasseti.Appossukkatāyāti ettha apatyūpasaggo abhāvattho, tāpaccayo bhāvatthoti āha ‘‘nirussukkabhāvenā’’ti.

Me means my, or by me, the connection is: to reveal the Dhamma attained. When paṭisota is said, opposite to the stream of the Noble Path, it is Nibbāna itself, so he says, "paṭisota means Nibbāna." Nibbānagāmi means the Noble Path. Because the Noble Path leads to Nibbāna, therefore it is called nibbānagāmī. Tamokhandhenā here, the word tama is a synonym for ignorance, the word khandha is in the sense of a mass, so he says, "by a mass of ignorance." With "ajjhotthaṭā," he shows that in āvuṭā, the root vudhā means covering. Appossukkatāyā here, the prefix apa is in the sense of absence, the tā suffix is in the sense of being, so he says, "by a state of non-eagerness."

8.Loketi sattaloke.Mahābrahmeti mahābrahmāno.Apparajakkhajātikāti ettha appaṃ rajaṃ akkhimhi etesanti apparajakkhā, apparajakkhā jāti sabhāvo etesantiapparajakkhajātikāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘paññāmaye’’tiādi. ‘‘Paññāmaye’’ti iminā maṃsamayeti atthaṃ nivatteti.Etesanti sattānaṃ.Dhammassāti tupaccayayoge chaṭṭhīkammaṃ. Āpubbo ñādhātu paṭivijjhanatthoti āha ‘‘paṭivijjhitāro’’ti.

8.Loke means in the world of beings. Mahābrahme means O Great Brahma. Apparajakkhajātikā here, appaṃ rajaṃ akkhimhi etesanti apparajakkhā, apparajakkhā jāti sabhāvo etesanti, showing the word meaning of apparajakkhajātikā, he says, "those with little dust," etc. With "paññāmaye," he prevents the meaning of "made of flesh." Etesa means of these beings. Dhammassā is the object in the sixth case in the usage of the tup suffix. The prefix ā with the root ñā means to penetrate, so he says, "penetrator."

samalā,pūraṇakassapādikā cha satthāro, tehi. ‘‘Rāgādīhī’’ti iminā malasarūpaṃ dasseti.Avāpuretanti ettha avapubbo ca āpubbo ca puradhātu vivaraṇatthoti āha ‘‘vivara eta’’nti. Vakārassa pakāraṃ katvā ‘‘apāpureta’’ntipi pāṭho. Amatasaddassa salilādayo nivattetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānassā’’ti. Ime sattā suṇantūti sambandho.Vimalenāti ettha visaddo abhāvatthoti āha ‘‘abhāvato’’ti. Iminā natthi malaṃ etassātivimaloti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sammāsambuddhenā’’ti iminā aññapadatthasarūpaṃ dasseti. Anukkamena maggena bujjhitabbantianubuddhanti vutte catusaccadhammo gahetabboti āha ‘‘catusaccadhamma’’nti.

samalā, Pūraṇa Kassapa and the other six teachers, by them. With "rāgādīhī," he shows the nature of impurity. Avāpureta here, the prefix ava and the prefix ā with the root pura means to open, so he says, "open." There is also the reading "apāpureta" having made the letter va into the letter pa. To prevent meanings such as water for the word amata, it is said "of Nibbāna." The connection is: let these beings hear. Vimalenā here, the prefix vi is in the sense of absence, so he says, "from the absence." By this, he shows that natthi malaṃ etassāti vimalo is the word meaning. With "Sammāsambuddhenā," he shows the nature of the meaning of another word. Because one awakens sequentially by the path, when anubuddha is said, the Four Noble Truths should be taken, so he says, "the Four Noble Truths."

seloti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇenā’’ti iminā samantacakkhusarūpaṃ dasseti. Bhagavā tvampīti yojanā. Dhammasaddo paññāpariyāyoti āha ‘‘dhammamayaṃ paññāmaya’’nti. Apeto soko imassātiapetasoko,bhagavā. Sokaṃ avataratītisokāvatiṇṇā,janatā. Sokāvatiṇṇañca jātijarābhibhūtañcāti casaddo yojetabbo. Iminā casaddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti dasseti.

shows the word meaning of selo. With "Sabbaññutaññāṇenā," he shows the nature of the all-seeing eye. The connection is: O Blessed One, even you. The word Dhamma is a synonym for wisdom, so he says, "Dhamma-like, wisdom-like." Apeto soko imassāti apetasoko, the Blessed One. Sokaṃ avataratīti sokāvatiṇṇā, the populace. And the word ca should be connected with sokāvatiṇṇañca jātijarābhibhūtañca. By this, he shows that the word ca is understood as omitted.

vīroti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Saddasatthesu ālapanapadesu viggaho na kātabboti idaṃ ālapanāvatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, idha pana tesamatthadassanatthāya viggaho vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Devaputta…pe… vijitattā’’ti iminā vijito mārehi saṃgāmo anenātivijitasaṅgāmoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ettha ca khandhamāro maccumārena saṅgahito dvinnaṃ mārānaṃ ekato vijitattā. ‘‘Sattavāho’’ti paṭhamakkharena ca ‘‘satthavāho’’ti dutiyakkharena ca yutto. Tattha satthavāho viyāti‘‘satthavāho’’ti upacārena vutte dutiyakkharena yutto, satte vahahītisattavāhoti mukhyato vutte paṭhamakkharena yutto. Idha pana paṭhamakkharena yuttoti āha ‘‘satte vahatīti sattavāho’’ti. Natthi iṇaṃ imassātiaṇaṇobhagavā.

shows the word meaning of vīro. In texts on grammar, analysis should not be done in places of address, this is said referring to the state of addressing, but here the analysis is said for the purpose of showing their meaning, it should be seen. With "Devaputta…pe… vijitattā," he shows that vijito mārehi saṃgāmo anenāti vijitasaṅgāmo is the word meaning. And here the aggregate Māra is included by death Māra, because of conquering the two Māras together. Sattavāho is connected with the first syllable and satthavāho with the second syllable. There, when ‘‘satthavāho’’ is said metaphorically as like a merchant, it is connected with the second syllable, when sattavāho is said directly as carrying beings, it is connected with the first syllable. But here, it is connected with the first syllable, so he says, "satte vahatīti sattavāho." Natthi iṇaṃ imassāti aṇaṇo the Blessed One.

9.Buddhacakkhunāti ettha cakkhu duvidhaṃ maṃsacakkhuñāṇacakkhuvasena. Tatthāpi maṃsacakkhu duvidhaṃ pasādacakkhusasambhāracakkhuvasena. Tattha pasādarūpaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma, bhamukaṭṭhiparicchinno maṃsapiṇḍo sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Ñāṇacakkhu pana pañcavidhaṃ (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.3) dibbadhammapaññābuddhasamantacakkhuvasena. Tattha dibbacakkhuabhiññāñāṇaṃ dibbacakkhu nāma, heṭṭhimamaggattayaṃ dhammacakkhu nāma, arahattamaggañāṇaṃ paññācakkhu nāma, indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca āsayānusayañāṇañca buddhacakkhu nāma, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ samantacakkhu nāma. Idha pana ‘‘buddhacakkhunā’’ti vuttattā yathāvuttadveñāṇāniyevāti āha ‘‘indriya…pe… ñāṇena cā’’ti.ti saccaṃ.Yesanti sattānaṃ.Saddhādīnīti ādisaddena vīriyasatisamādhipaññindriyāni saṅgaṇhāti.Tikkhānīti tikhiṇāni.Mudūnīti sukhumatarāni.Ākārāti kāraṇā. Imāni tīṇi dukāni bāhiratthasamāsavasena vuttāni. Sukhena viññāpetabbātisuviññāpayā,tathāduviññāpayāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ye kathitakāraṇa’’ntiādi. Paraloko ca vajjañcaparalokavajjāni,tāni bhayato passantītiparalokavajjabhayadassāvinoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ye’’tiādi. Imāni dve dukāni kitavasena vuttāni, idha pacchimaduke ‘‘na appekacce paralokavajjabhayadassāvino’’ti dutiyapadaṃ na vuttaṃ, paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.111) pana yugaḷavasena vuttaṃ. Uppalāni ettha santītiuppalinīti vacanatthena gaccho vā latā vā pokkharaṇī vā vanaṃ vā ‘‘uppalinī’’ti vuccati, idha pana ‘‘vana’’nti āha ‘‘uppalavane’’ti. Nimuggāneva hutvāti sambandho.Posayantīti vaḍḍhanti, iminā antonimuggāneva hutvā posayantītiantonimuggaposīnīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Udakena sama’’nti iminā udakena samaṃsamodakaṃ,samodakaṃ hutvā ṭhitānīti atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Atikkamitvā’’ti imināaccuggammātipadassa atiuggantvāti atthaṃ dasseti.

9. Buddhacakkhunā (with the Buddha-eye): Here, cakkhu (eye) is of two kinds: maṃsacakkhu (flesh eye) and ñāṇacakkhu (wisdom eye). Of these, maṃsacakkhu is again of two kinds: pasādacakkhu (sensitive eye) and sasambhāracakkhu (eye with its physical base). Here, pasādarūpa (sensitive matter) is called pasādacakkhu, while the mass of flesh enclosed by the eyebrow bone is called sasambhāracakkhu. Ñāṇacakkhu, however, is fivefold (Paṭi. Ma. Aṭṭha. 1.1.3): dibbacakkhu (divine eye), dhammacakkhu (Dhamma eye), paññācakkhu (wisdom eye), buddhacakkhu (Buddha eye), and samantacakkhu (eye of omniscience). Here, dibbacakkhu refers to the abhiññā-ñāṇa (knowledge of higher powers), dhammacakkhu refers to the three lower path knowledges, paññācakkhu refers to the knowledge of the Arahatship path, buddhacakkhu refers to the knowledge of the faculties of others and the knowledge of their underlying tendencies, and samantacakkhu refers to the knowledge of omniscience. But here, since it is stated "buddhacakkhunā," it refers only to the two kinds of knowledge mentioned above, as he says, "the faculty…etc.…and by knowledge." Hi (indeed): is the truth. Yesaṃ (whose): of beings. Saddhādīni (faith, etc.): The word "ādi" (etc.) includes the faculties of energy, mindfulness, concentration, and wisdom. Tikkhāni (sharp): are keen. Mudūni (soft): are more subtle. Ākārā (reasons): are causes. These three pairs are stated in terms of external meanings in brief. Suviññāpayā (easy to instruct): easy to make understand, similarly, duviññāpayā (difficult to instruct), showing the meaning of the word, he says, "those who have reasons stated," etc. Paraloko ca vajjañca (the next world and faults) are paralokavajjāni (faults in the next world), those who see these as fearful are paralokavajjabhayadassāvino (those who see the fear of faults in the next world), showing the meaning of the word, he says, "those," etc. These two pairs are stated in terms of their qualities; here, in the last pair, the second phrase "na appekacce paralokavajjabhayadassāvino" (not some see the fear of faults in the next world) is not stated, but in the Paṭisambhidāmagga (Paṭi. Ma. 1.111), it is stated as a pair. Uppalāni ettha santīti (lotuses exist here) by the meaning of the word uppalinī (lotus pond): a cluster, a creeper, a pond, or a forest is called "uppalinī"; here, however, it means "forest," as he says, "in the lotus forest." Nimuggāneva hutvāti (having been submerged) is the connection. Posayantī (nourishing): they grow; by this, he shows the meaning of the word antonimuggaposīnī (nourishing while being submerged within): nourishing while being submerged inside. "Udakena samaṃ" (equal to water) by this, he shows the meaning of the word samodakaṃ (with water), the meaning is: they stand having become with water. "Atikkamitvā" (having surpassed) by this, he shows the meaning of the word accuggammā (having gone beyond), the meaning is: having risen beyond.

pārutā,na pārutāapārutā. Apārutā nāma atthato vivaraṇāti āha ‘‘vivaṭā’’tisoti ariyamaggo.ti saccaṃ.Pacchimapadadvayeti gāthāya uttamapadadvaye.Ayamevatthoti ayaṃ vakkhamāno evaṃ attho daṭṭhabboti yojanā.ti vitthāro.Na bhāsinti ettha uttamapurisattā ‘‘aha’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Devamanujesu’’ti vattabbe ekasesavasena‘‘manujesū’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘devamanussesū’’ti.

Pārutā (covered), na pārutā (not covered) apārutā (uncovered). Apārutā means, in effect, an opening, as he says, "open." So (that): is the Ariya Path. Hi (indeed): is the truth. Pacchimapadadvaye (in the last two lines): in the two ultimate lines of the verse. Ayamevattho (this itself is the meaning): this meaning about to be stated should be seen like this, is the connection. Hi (indeed): is the expansion. Na bhāsi (did not speak): here, because it is in the first person, it is stated "ahaṃ" (I). Instead of saying "devamanujesu" (among gods and humans), it is said "manujesu" (among humans) by way of ekasesavasena (leaving only one), as he says, "devamanussesu" (among gods and humans).

6. Pañcavaggiyakathā
6. The Account of the Group of Five

10.Ṭhānuppattiyāti kāraṇena uppattiyā. Nikkileso jāti sabhāvo imassātinikkilesajātiko. ‘‘Ñāṇa’’nti avisesena vuttepi atthato anāvaraṇañāṇamevāti āha ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti.Itoti ‘‘dhammaṃ desessāmī’’ti parivitakkadivasato, heṭṭhāti sambandho. Devatā pana āḷārassa kālaṅkaraṇameva jānāti, na ākiñcaññāyatane nibbattabhāvaṃ. Bhagavā pana sabbaṃ jānāti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ākiñcaññāyatane nibbatto’’ti. ‘‘Parihīnattā’’ti imināmahājāniyoti ettha hādhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti.Assāti āḷārassa. Mahatī jāniassāti ‘‘mahājāniko’’ti vattabbe kakārassa yakāraṃ katvā‘‘mahājāniyo’’ti vuttaṃ.Akkhaṇeti brahmacariyavāsāya anokāse, ākiñcaññāyataneti attho.Hiyyoti anantarātītāhe.Sopīti udako rāmaputtopi. Pisaddo āḷārāpekkho. Tattha āḷāro kālāmo yāvaākiñcaññāyatanajhānalābhī hoti, tasmā ākiñcaññāyatane nibbatto. Udako rāmaputto yāvanevasaññānāsaññāyatanajhānalābhī hoti, tasmā nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nibbattoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.‘‘Bahukārā’’ti ca ‘‘bahūpakārā’’ti ca pāṭhassa dvidhā yuttabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bahukārāti bahūpakārā’’ti. Pesitattabhāvaṃ manti yojanā. Imināpahitattanti ettha attasaddo kāyavācakoti dasseti.

10. Ṭhānuppattiyā (by the arising of the reason): by the arising of the cause. Nikkileso jāti sabhāvo imassa (whose nature is without defilements) is nikkilesajātiko (of undefiled nature). Even though "ñāṇa" (knowledge) is stated without distinction, in effect, it is only anāvaraṇañāṇa (unobstructed knowledge), as he says, "sabbaññutaññāṇa" (knowledge of omniscience). Ito (from this): from the day of thinking "I will teach the Dhamma," is the connection. The devatā (deity), however, only knows about Āḷāra's death, not about his being reborn in the plane of nothingness. The Blessed One, however, knows everything; therefore, it is said, "nibbatto in the plane of nothingness." "Parihīnattā" (because of decline) by this, he shows the meaning of the root hā in mahājāniyo (of great loss). Assā (of him): of Āḷāra. Mahatī jāni assā (great loss is his) instead of saying "mahājāniko" (of great loss), by changing the letter ka to ya, it is said "mahājāniyo." Akkhaṇe (in an inopportune time): in a time not suitable for the practice of Brahmacariya, meaning in the plane of nothingness. Hiyyo (yesterday): the immediately preceding day. Sopi (he also): Udaka Rāmaputta also. The particle pi is in relation to Āḷāra. Here, Āḷāra Kālāma attained jhāna up to the plane of nothingness; therefore, he was reborn in the plane of nothingness. Udaka Rāmaputta attained jhāna up to the plane of neither-perception-nor-non-perception; therefore, it should be seen that he was reborn in the plane of neither-perception-nor-non-perception. To show that the readings "bahukārā" (of great help) and "bahūpakārā" (of great assistance) are both suitable, it is said, "bahukārā means bahūpakārā." Pesitattabhāvaṃ manti yojanā (one should connect to the state of being sent). By this, he shows that in pahitatta (having sent forth), the word "atta" refers to the body.

11.Antarāsaddena yuttattā ‘‘gayaṃ, bodhi’’nti ettha sāmyatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘gayāya ca bodhimaṇḍassa cā’’ti.

11. Because it is connected with the word "antara" (between), he says, "for Gaya and the Bodhi-maṇḍa" in "gayaṃ, bodhi", it is a usage in the sense of sameness.

sabbasaddo anavasesattho, sesā sāvasesatthāti dassento āha ‘‘sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhamma’’ntiādi. Vacanattho suviññeyyova. Arahattaphalassāpi taṇhākkhayattā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhākkhaye nibbāne’’ti.Sayaṃsaddo attapariyāyo,abhiññāyasaddo tu tvāpaccayantoti āha ‘‘attanāva jānitvā’’ti. ‘‘Sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhamma’’nti iminā ñādhātuyā kammaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ayaṃ me ācariyo’’ti uddisanākāradassanaṃ.

Sabba (all): the word has the meaning of without remainder, showing that the remaining words have the meaning of with remainder, he says, "sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ" (all three-planes-of-existence Dhamma), etc. The meaning of the word is very easy to understand. Because even Arahatship-phala is the destruction of craving, it is said, "taṇhākkhaye nibbāne" (in Nibbāna, the destruction of craving). Sayaṃ (oneself): the word is a synonym for atta (self), the word abhiññāya (having known) is an ending with tvā-paccaya (gerund), he says, "attanāva jānitvā" (having known by oneself). "Sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ" (all four-planes-of-existence Dhamma) by this, he shows the object of the root ñā. "Ayaṃ me ācariyo" (this is my teacher) is a showing of the manner of pointing out.

Paṭipuggaloti etthapaṭisaddo paṭibhāgatthoti āha ‘‘paṭibhāgapuggalo’’ti. Sadisapuggalo nāma natthīti attho.Sītibhūtoti sīti hutvā bhūto, sītibhāvaṃ vā patto.

Paṭipuggalo (counterpart): here, paṭi (counter) the word is in the sense of paṭibhāga (similar), he says, "paṭibhāgapuggalo" (a similar person). The meaning is that there is no similar person. Sītibhūto (become cooled): become cooled and bhūto (become), or reached the state of coolness.

Kāsīnanti bahuvacanavasena vuttattā janapadānaṃ nāmaṃ. Janapadasamūhassa raṭṭhanāmattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāsiraṭṭhe’’ti. ‘‘Nagara’’nti imināpurasaddo nagarapariyāyoti dasseti.Paṭilābhāyāti paṭilābhāpanatthāya. ‘‘Bheri’’nti iminādundubhisaddo bherivācakoti dasseti. Bheri hi ‘‘duṃdu’’ntisaddena ubhi pūraṇametthātidundubhīti vuccati. Dakārarakārānaṃ saṃyogaṃ katvā dundrubhītipi pāṭho atthi, so apāṭhoyeva. ‘‘Paharissāmī’’ti ettha pahārasaddenaāhaññinti ettha āpubbahanadhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti, ssāmisaddena ajjataniiṃvibhattiyā anāgatakāle pavattabhāvaṃ, itisaddena gamanākāravācakassa itisaddassa lopabhāvaṃ dasseti.

Kāsīnaṃ (of the Kāsī people): because it is stated in the plural, it is the name of the countries. Because the group of countries is the name of the kingdom, it is said, "kāsiraṭṭhe" (in the Kāsī kingdom). "Nagara" (city) by this, he shows that pura (city) the word is a synonym for nagara. Paṭilābhāyā (for gain): for the sake of causing to gain. "Bheri" (drum) by this, he shows that dundubhi (kettle drum) the word denotes bheri. Because in bheri, there is filling up from both sides with the sound "duṃdu," therefore it is called dundubhī. There is also a reading dundrubhī by combining the letters da and ra, but that is an incorrect reading. In "paharissāmi" (I will strike), with the word pahāra (strike), he shows the meaning of the root dhā with the prefix ā in āhaññi (struck), with the particle ssāmi he shows the occurrence in the future tense of the ajjataniiṃ vibhatti (present tense inflection), with the word iti he shows the absence of the word iti which expresses the manner of going.

Anantajinoti anantasaṅkhātassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa padaṭṭhānabhūtena arahattamaggañāṇena sabbakilesārīnaṃ jitavā, etena phalūpacārena anantajinabhāvaṃ dasseti.Huveyya pāvusoti ettha ‘‘huveyya api āvuso’’ti padavibhāgaṃ katvā hudhātu sattatthavācako, apisaddo evaṃnāmavācakoti dassento āha āvuso ‘‘evaṃ nāma bhaveyyā’’ti. Vakārassa pakāraṃ katvā‘‘hupeyyā’’ti pāṭhopi yujjatiyeva.

Anantajino (the endless conqueror): he has conquered all the enemies of defilements with the knowledge of the Arahatship-path, which is the foundation for the endless number of omniscient knowledges; by this usage of the fruit, he shows the state of being an endless conqueror. Huveyya pāvuso (may it be, friend): here, by dividing the words as "huveyya api āvuso," showing that the root hu expresses existence, the particle api expresses suchness, he says, "āvuso evaṃ nāma bhaveyya" (friend, may it be so). By changing the letter va to pa, the reading "hupeyyā" is also fitting.

12.‘‘Atthāya paṭipanno’’ti iminā bāhullassa atthāya paṭipannobāhullikoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Padhānatoti dukkaracariyāya padahanato. ‘‘Bhaṭṭho’’ti imināvibbhantoti ettha vipubbabhamudhātuyā anavaṭṭhānattho nāma atthato bhaṭṭhoti dasseti.Sotanti ettha sotasaddassa sotaviññāṇādivācakattā ‘‘sotindriya’’nti vuttaṃ.Iriyāyāti ettha iriyanaṃ caraṇaṃ iriyāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dukkaracariyāyā’’ti.Abhijānātha noti etthanosaddo nusaddatthoti āha ‘‘abhijānātha nū’’ti.Vākyanti vācakaṃ.Saññāpetuntipadassa saññāpanākāraṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ buddho’’ti.

12. "Atthāya paṭipanno" (undertaken for the sake of benefit) by this, he shows the meaning of the word bāhulliko (devoted to the many): undertaken for the sake of the many. Padhānato (from striving): from striving in the difficult practices. "Bhaṭṭho" (fallen) by this, he shows that in vibbhanto (gone astray), the meaning of the root bhramu with the prefix vi is instability, which in effect means fallen. Sotaṃ (ear): here, because the word sota can denote ear-consciousness, etc., it is said "sotindriya" (ear sense). Iriyāyā (of the deportment): here, showing that iriyanaṃ caraṇaṃ iriyā (moving, walking, is deportment) is the meaning of the word, he says, "dukkaracariyāyā" (of the difficult practices). Abhijānātha no (do you recognize us): here, no the word has the meaning of the particle nu, he says, "abhijānātha nū" (do you recognize?). Vākyaṃ (statement): is a word. To show the manner of informing in the word saññāpetuṃ (to inform), it is said, "ahaṃ buddho" (I am Buddha).

13.Itoti ‘‘cakkhukaraṇī’’tiādito.Padatthatoti padato ca atthato ca, padānaṃ atthato vā.Itoti yathāvuttato.ti saccaṃ.Suttantakathanti suttantavasena vuttavacanaṃ.

13. Ito (from this): from "cakkhukaraṇī" (eye-opener), etc. Padatthato (from the words and the meaning): from the words and also from the meaning, or from the meaning of the words. Ito (from this): from what was said. Hi (indeed): is the truth. Suttantakathaṃ (discourse according to the Suttanta): a statement made in accordance with the Suttanta.

18.Devatākoṭīhīti brahmasaṅkhātāhi devatākoṭīhi. Patiṭṭhitassa tassa āyasmatoti sambandho. Sāva ehibhikkhuupasampadāti yojanā.

18. Devatākoṭīhī (by crores of deities): by crores of deities counted as Brahmās. Patiṭṭhitassa tassa āyasmatoti sambandho (the Elder being established) is the connection. Sāva ehibhikkhuupasampadāti yojanā (that itself is the ehibhikkhu ordination) is the connection.

19.Dutiyadivase dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti sambandho. ‘‘Dutiyadivase’’tiādi pāṭipadadivasaṃ upanidhāya vuttaṃ.Pakkhassāti āsaḷhīmāsakāḷapakkhassa. Sabbeva te bhikkhūti yojanā.Anattasuttenāti anattalakkhaṇasuttantena (mahāva. 20; saṃ. ni. 3.59).

19. Dutiyadivase dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti sambandho (on the second day, the Dhamma-eye arose) is the connection. "Dutiyadivase" (on the second day), etc., is stated with reference to the day of the new moon. Pakkhassā (of the fortnight): of the dark fortnight of Āsāḷhī month. Sabbeva te bhikkhūti yojanā (all those monks) is the connection. Anattasuttenā (by the Anattasutta): by the Anattalakkhaṇasuttanta (Mahāva. 20; Saṃ. Ni. 3.59).

Pañcamiyā pakkhassāti pakkhassa pañcamiyā.Lokasminti sattaloke.‘‘Manussaarahantoti iminā devaarahanto bahūti dasseti.

Pañcamiyā pakkhassā (on the fifth day of the fortnight): on the fifth day of the fortnight. Lokasmiṃ (in the world): in the world of beings. "Manussaarahanto" (human arahants) by this, he shows that there are many devaarahantos (divine arahants).

7. Pabbajjākathā
7. The Account of the Going Forth

31.Porāṇānuporāṇānanti purāṇe ca anupurāṇe ca bhavānaṃ.Ekasaṭṭhīti eko ca saṭṭhi ca, ekena vā adhikā saṭṭhi ekasaṭṭhi.

31. Porāṇānuporāṇānaṃ (ancient and successively ancient): of those who are ancient and successively ancient. Ekasaṭṭhī (sixty-one): one and sixty, or sixty added with one is sixty-one.

Tatrāti tesu ekasaṭṭhimanussaarahantesu.Pubbayogoti pubbe kato upāyo, pubbūpanissayoti attho.Vaggabandhenāti samūhaṃ katvā bandhena.Teti pañcapaññāsa janā.Jhāpessāmāti ḍayhissāma.Nīhariṃsūti gāmato nīhariṃsu.Tesūti pañcapaññāsajanesu. Pañca jane ṭhapetvāti sambandho.Sesāti pañcahi janehi avasesā.Soti yaso dārako.Tepīti cattāropi janā.Tatthāti sarīre.Te sabbepīti yasassa mātāpitubhariyāhi saddhiṃ sabbepi te sahāyakā.Tenāti pubbayogena.

Tatrā (there): among those sixty-one human arahants. Pubbayogo (former connection): the effort done in the past, meaning a former support. Vaggabandhena (by a group bond): having made a group with a bond. Te (those): those fifty-five people. Jhāpessāmā (we will cremate): we will burn. Nīhariṃsū (they brought out): they brought out from the village. Tesū (among them): among those fifty-five people. Pañca jane ṭhapetvāti sambandho (having kept five people) is the connection. Sesā (remaining): those remaining by the five people. So (he): that Yasa, the son. Tepī (they also): those four people also. Tatthā (there): in the body. Te sabbepī (all those): all those companions together with Yasa's parents and wife. Tenā (by that): by the former connection.

Āmantesīti kathesi.

Āmantesī (addressed): spoke.

32.Dibbesu visayesu bhavādibbālobhapāsāti dassento āha ‘‘dibbā nāmā’’tiādi.Lobhapāsāti lobhasaṅkhātā bandhanā.Asavanatāti ettha karaṇatthe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘asavanatāyā’’ti.Parihāyantīti ettha kena parihāyantīti āha ‘‘visesādhigamato’’ti.Visesādhigamatoti maggaphalasaṅkhātassa visesassa adhigamato.

32. Dibbesu visayesu bhavā (arising in divine pleasures) dibbā (divine): showing the snare of craving, he says, "dibbā nāmā" (divine is), etc. Lobhapāsā (snare of craving): the bond counted as craving. Asavanatā (to the state of not hearing): here, it is a singular number in the sense of the instrument, he says, "asavanatāya" (for the state of not hearing). Parihāyantī (decline): here, he says, "visesādhigamato" (from the attainment of the special), by what do they decline? Visesādhigamato (from the attainment of the special): from the attainment of the special, counted as the Path and the Fruit.

33.Antaṃ lāmakaṃ karotītiantakoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘lāmakā’’ti. ‘‘Hīnasattā’’ti iminā antakassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Āmantanapadametaṃ.Tanti rāgapāsaṃ.ti saccaṃ.Soti māro pāpimā. Antalikkhe carantānaṃ pañcābhiññānampi bandhanattā antalikkhe carati pavattatītiantalikkhacaroti vacanatthena rāgapāso ‘‘antalikkhacaro’’ti mārena pāpimatā vutto.

33. Antaṃ lāmakaṃ karotīti (because it makes the end wretched) antako (the end-maker): showing the meaning of the word, he says, "lāmakā" (wretched). "Hīnasattā" (base beings) by this, he shows the nature of the end-maker. Āmantanapadametaṃ (this is a word of address). Taṃ (that): the snare of craving. (indeed): is the truth. So (he): that Māra, the Evil One. Antalikkhe carantānaṃ pañcābhiññānampi bandhanattā (because even the five higher powers of those who wander in the sky are a bond), because it wanders and occurs in the sky, therefore, by the meaning of the word antalikkhacaro (sky-goer), the snare of craving is said by Māra, the Evil One, to be "antalikkhacaro."

34.Nānājanapadatoti ekissāpi disāya nānājanapadato. ‘‘Anujānāmi…pe… pabbājethā’’tiādimhi vinicchayo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā. Pabbājentena bhikkhunā pabbājetabboti sambandho. Ye paṭikkhittā puggalāti yojanā.Paratoti parasmiṃ. ‘‘Na bhikkhave…pe… pabbājetabbo’’ti pāḷiṃ (mahāva. 89) ādiṃ katvāti yojanā.Teti paṭikkhittapuggale.Sopi cāti sopi ca puggalo. Anuññātoyeva pabbājetabboti sambandho.Tassa cāti puggalassa ca, atha vā tesañca mātāpitūnaṃ. Vacanavipallāso hesa. Anujānanalakkhaṇaṃ vaṇṇayissāmāti sambandho.

34. Nānājanapadato (from various countries): from various countries even in one direction. "Anujānāmi…pe…pabbājethā" (I allow…etc.…you should ordain), the decision in this should be understood like this, is the connection. Pabbājentena bhikkhunā pabbājetabbo (by the monk who ordains, one should be ordained) is the connection. Ye paṭikkhittā puggalā (those persons who are rejected) is the connection. Parato (after): after another. "Na bhikkhave…pe…pabbājetabbo" (monks, should not be ordained) having made the Pāḷi (Mahāva. 89) the beginning, is the connection. Te (those): those rejected persons. Sopi cā (that also): that person also. Anuññātoyeva pabbājetabbo sambandho (having been allowed, one should be ordained) is the connection. Tassa cā (of that): of that person, or of those parents. This is a reversal of words. Anujānanalakkhaṇaṃ vaṇṇayissāmāti sambandho (I will describe the characteristic of allowing) is the connection.

Evanti iminā vuttanayena. Casaddo vākyasampiṇḍanattho. Sace acchinnakeso hoti ca, sace ekasīmāya aññepi bhikkhū atthi cāti attho.Aññepīti attanā aparepi.Bhaṇḍūti muṇḍo, soyeva kammaṃbhaṇḍukammaṃ. Tassāti bhaṇḍukammassa.Okāsoti pabbajjāya khaṇo. ‘‘Okāsaṃ na labhatī’’ti vatvā tassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sace’’tiādi.

Evaṃ (thus): in this manner that was said. The particle ca is for combining sentences. Sace acchinnakeso hoti ca, sace ekasīmāya aññepi bhikkhū atthi cāti attho (if he has uncut hair, and if there are other monks within the same boundary), this is the meaning. Aññepī (others also): others besides himself. Bhaṇḍū (shaven-headed): shaved, that itself is the action, bhaṇḍukammaṃ (shaving action). Tassā (of that): of that shaving action. Okāso (opportunity): a time for ordination. To show the reason for saying "okāsaṃ na labhati" (he does not get an opportunity), it is said "sace" (if), etc.

Avuttopīti ettha pisaddo vutto pana kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Upajjhāyaṃ uddissa pabbājetīti ettha pabbajjā catubbidhā tāpasapabbajjā paribbājakapabbajjā sāmaṇerapabbajjā upasampadapabbajjāti. Tattha kesamassuharaṇaṃtāpasapabbajjānāma vakkalādigahaṇato paṭhamameva vajitabbattā.Isipabbajjātipi tassāyeva nāmaṃ. Kesamassuharaṇamevaparibbājakapabbajjānāma kāsāyādigahaṇato paṭhamameva vajitabbattā. Kesamassuharaṇañca kāsāyacchādanañcasāmaṇerapabbajjānāma saraṇagahaṇato paṭhamameva vajitabbattā.Upasampadapabbajjātividhā ehibhikkhuupasampadapabbajjā saraṇagahaṇūpasampadapabbajjā ñatticatutthavācikūpasampadapabbajjāti. Tatthaehibhikkhūpasampadapabbajjāyaṃkesamassuharaṇādi sabbaṃ ekatova sampajjati ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti bhagavato vacanena abhinipphannattā.Saraṇagahaṇūpasampadapabbajjāsāmaṇerapabbajjasadisāyeva. Kesamassuharaṇañca kāsāyacchādanañca saraṇagahaṇañcañatticatutthavācikūpasampadapabbajjānāma kammavācāgahaṇato paṭhamameva vajitabbattā. Tattha sāmaṇerapabbajjaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘upajjhāyaṃ uddissa pabbājetī’’ti.Upajjhāyaṃ uddissāti upajjhāyassa veyyāvaccakaraṭṭhānaniyamaṃ katvā. Pabbajjākamme attano issariyamakatvāti attho. Daharena bhikkhunā kesacchedanaṃ kāsāyacchādanaṃ saraṇadānanti tīṇi kiccāni kātabbāniyeva. Keci ‘‘saraṇāni pana sayaṃ dātabbānī’’ti pāṭhaṃ idhānetvā daharena bhikkhunā saraṇāni na dātabbānīti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ daharassa bhikkhuttā, bhikkhūnaṃ pabbājetuṃ labhanattā ca. Upajjhāyo ce kesacchedanañca kāsāyacchādanañca akatvā pabbajjatthaṃ saraṇāniyeva deti, na ruhati pabbajjā pabbajjāya akattabbattā. Kammavācaṃ sāvetvā upasampādeti, ruhati upasampadā apattacīvarānaṃ upasampadasiddhito, kammavipattiyā abhāvato ca.Khaṇḍasīmanti upacārasīmaṭṭhaṃ baddhasīmaṃ.Pabbājetvāti kesacchedanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘kāsāyāni acchādetvā’’ti kāsāyacchādanassa visuṃ vuttattā. Sāmaṇerassa saraṇadānassa aruhattā ‘‘saraṇāni pana sayaṃ dātabbānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Purisaṃ pabbājetunti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.Āṇattiyāti bhikkhūnaṃ āṇattiyā.Yena kenacīti gahaṭṭhapabbajitesu yena kenaci.

Avuttopīti: Here, the word pi indicates, "What is the name of a statement that has been made?" Upajjhāyaṃ uddissa pabbājetīti: Here, pabbajjā (going forth) is fourfold: tāpasapabbajjā (ascetic going forth), paribbājakapabbajjā (wanderer going forth), sāmaṇerapabbajjā (novice going forth), and upasampadapabbajjā (full ordination). Among these, the cutting of hair and beard is called tāpasapabbajjā, because it must be done away with even before taking bark garments, etc. Isipabbajjāti is also a name for that. The mere cutting of hair and beard is called paribbājakapabbajjā, because it must be done away with even before taking the ochre robe, etc. The cutting of hair and beard and the wearing of the ochre robe is called sāmaṇerapabbajjā, because it must be done away with even before taking the refuges. Upasampadapabbajjā is threefold: ehibhikkhuupasampadapabbajjā (ordination by invitation), saraṇagahaṇūpasampadapabbajjā (ordination by taking refuge), and ñatticatutthavācikūpasampadapabbajjā (ordination by motion and four announcements). Among these, in ehibhikkhūpasampadapabbajjā, all things, such as cutting hair and beard, are accomplished together, because they are completed by the word of the Buddha, "Come, O bhikkhu." Saraṇagahaṇūpasampadapabbajjā is just like sāmaṇerapabbajjā. Cutting of hair and beard, wearing of the ochre robe, and taking the refuges is called ñatticatutthavācikūpasampadapabbajjā, because it must be done away with even before taking the formal act. Here, referring to sāmaṇerapabbajjā, it is said, "pabbājeti addressing the upajjhāya." Upajjhāyaṃ uddissā: Having made the regulation that one will do the duties for the upajjhāya. The meaning is not making one's own authority in the act of going forth. A young bhikkhu must certainly do three things: cutting the hair, wearing the ochre robe, and giving the refuges. Some, inserting the reading "saraṇāni pana sayaṃ dātabbānī" here, say that a young bhikkhu should not give the refuges, but that should not be taken, because he is a bhikkhu, and bhikkhus are able to give the going forth. If the upajjhāya, without cutting the hair and without wearing the ochre robe, gives only the refuges for the purpose of going forth, the going forth does not arise, because it is not to be done in the going forth. Having announced the Kammavācā, he ordains; the ordination arises because of the accomplishment of ordination with robes and bowl, and because of the absence of defect in the act. Khaṇḍasīmanti: A limited boundary, a boundary that has been fixed. Pabbājetvā: Said referring to the cutting of hair, "kāsāyāni acchādetvā" because the wearing of the ochre robe has been said separately. "saraṇāni pana sayaṃ dātabbānī" was said because the giving of refuge to a novice is not proper. Purisaṃ pabbājetunti sambandho: The connection is, "he should ordain the man." Hīti: Truly. Āṇattiyā: By the command of the bhikkhus. Yena kenacī: By anyone among the lay people and those gone forth.

Sahetukoti maggaphalānaṃ upanissayehi saha pavatto.Yasassīti parivārayasena ca kittiyasena ca samannāgato.Okāsaṃ katvāpīti okāsaṃ katvā eva.Sayamevāti na añño āṇāpetabbo.Ettoyevāti dassanaṭṭhānatoyeva.Assāti pabbajjāpekkhassa.Khajju vāti kaṇḍuvanaṃ vā. ‘‘Kacchu vā’’tipi pāṭho, pāmaṃ vāti attho.Piḷakā vāti phoṭā vā.Ettakenāti etapamāṇena ghaṃsitvā nhāpanamattena.Anivattidhammāti gihibhāvaṃ anivattanasabhāvā.Kataññūti katassūpakārassa jānanasīlā.Katavedinoti kataññūpakārassa vedaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto.

Sahetuko: Occurring together with the support conditions of the path and its fruit. Yasassī: Endowed with a following and with fame. Okāsaṃ katvāpī: Having made opportunity. Sayamevā: Not another should be ordered. Ettoyevā: From the place of seeing itself. Assā: Of the one seeking going forth. Khajju vā: Or a scabies wound. "Kacchu vā" is also a reading, meaning mange. Piḷakā vā: Or blisters. Ettakenā: With this much, by merely rubbing and bathing. Anivattidhammā: Of a nature not to return to the householder life. Kataññū: Of a nature to know the help that has been done. Katavedino: Making known the help that has been done.

Aniyyānikakathāti yāvadatthaṃ supitvā yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjītvā cittakeḷiṃ karonto anukkaṇṭhito viharāhītiādikā kathā. Nakathetabbaṃ dassetvā kathetabbaṃ dassento āha ‘‘athakhvassā’’ti.Assāti pabbajjāpekkhassa. Ācikkhanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘ācikkhantena cā’’tiādi.Vaṇṇa…pe… vasenāti vaṇṇo ca saṇṭhānañca gandho ca āsayo ca okāso ca, tesaṃ vasena, ācikkhitabbanti sambandho.ti phalajotako, ācikkhanassa phalaṃ vakkhāmīti attho.Soti pabbajjāpekkho.Pubbeti pubbabhave, pabbajanato pubbe vā. Kaṇṭakavedhāpekkho paripakkagaṇḍo viya ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti yojanā.Assāti pabbajjāpekkhassa.Indāsanīti sakkassa vajirāvudho. So hi indena asīyati khipīyatīti indāsanīti vuccati. Indāsani pabbate cuṇṇayamānā viya sabbe kilese cuṇṇayamānaṃyevāti yojanā.Khuraggeyevāti khurassa koṭiyameva. Khurakammapariyosāneyevāti attho.ti saccaṃ.Tasmāti yasmā pattā, tasmā.Assāti pabbajjāpekkhassa.

Aniyyānikakathā: Talk such as, "Having slept as much as you want, having eaten as much as you want, live without longing, making playful gestures." Showing what should not be spoken, showing what should be spoken, he says, "athakhvassā." Assā: Of the one seeking going forth. Showing the manner of telling, he says, "ācikkhantena cā" etc. Vaṇṇa…pe… vasenā: By means of color, shape, smell, dwelling, and space; the connection is, "should be told." : An indicator of the fruit; the meaning is, "I will speak the fruit of telling." So: The one seeking going forth. Pubbe: In a previous existence, or before going forth. The explanation is that knowledge arises like a ripe boil awaiting the lancet. Assā: Of the one seeking going forth. Indāsanī: Sakka's thunderbolt. For it is called indāsanī because it is thrown by Indra. The explanation is that one crushes all the defilements just as the thunderbolt crushes a mountain into powder. Khuraggeyevā: Just on the tip of the razor. The meaning is, "just at the end of the razor's work." : Truly. Tasmā: Therefore, because he has obtained. Assā: Of the one seeking going forth.

Gihigandhanti gehe ṭhitassa janassa gandhaṃ.Athāpīti yadipi acchādetīti sambandho.Assāti pabbajjāpekkhassa.Ācariyo vāti saraṇadānācariyo vā kammavācācariyo vā ovādācariyo vā.Taṃyeva vāti pabbajjāpekkhameva vā.Tena bhikkhunāvāti ācariyupajjhāyabhikkhunā eva.

Gihigandhaṃ: The smell of a person staying in a house. Athāpī: Even if he covers, the connection is. Assā: Of the one seeking going forth. Ācariyo vā: Or the ācariya who gives the refuges, or the kammavācācariya, or the ovādācariya. Taṃyeva vā: Or just the one seeking going forth. Tena bhikkhunāvā: By the bhikkhu who is the ācariya or upajjhāya.

Anāṇattiyāti ācariyupajjhāyehi anāṇattiyā. Iminā ācariyupajjhāyehi anāṇattena yena kenaci nivāsanādīni na kātabbānīti dasseti.Bhikkhunāti ācariyupajjhāyabhikkhunā.Tassevāti pabbajjāpekkhasseva.Upajjhāyamūlaketi upajjhāyamūlake nivāsanapārupane.Ayanti vinicchayo.

Anāṇattiyā: Without the command of the ācariya or upajjhāya. By this, he shows that the robes, etc., should not be done by just anyone without the command of the ācariya or upajjhāya. Bhikkhunā: By the bhikkhu who is the ācariya or upajjhāya. Tassevā: Of just the one seeking going forth. Upajjhāyamūlake: Robing and clothing based on the upajjhāya. Ayaṃ: This is the judgment.

Tatthāti pabbajjūpasampadaṭṭhāne.Tesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Athāti vandāpanato pacchā, vandāpanassa anantarā vā. ‘‘Evaṃ vadehī’’ti pāḷinayanidassanamukhena ‘‘yamahaṃ vadāmi, taṃ vadehī’’ti aṭṭhakathānayaṃ nidasseti.Athāti tadanantaraṃ.Assāti pabbajjāpekkhassa, dātabbānīti sambandho.Ekapadampīti tīsu vākyapadesu ekaṃ vākyapadampi, navasu vā vibhatyantapadesu ekapadampi.Ekakkharampīti catuvīsatakkharesu ekakkharampi.

Tatthā: In the place of going forth and ordination. Tesaṃ: Of the bhikkhus. Athā: After the paying of respect, or immediately after the paying of respect. By the example of the Pāḷi style "Evaṃ vadehī," he shows the Aṭṭhakathā style "yamahaṃ vadāmi, taṃ vadehī." Athā: Thereafter. Assā: Of the one seeking going forth, the connection is "should be given." Ekapadampī: Even one word in the three sentence-words, even one word in the nine inflectional endings. Ekakkharampī: Even one letter in the twenty-four letters.

Ekatosuddhiyāti ekasseva kammavācācariyassa ṭhānakaraṇasampattiyā sujjhanena.Ubhato suddhiyāvāti ubhayesaṃ saraṇadānācariyasāmaṇerānaṃ sujjhanena eva.Ṭhānakaraṇasampadanti uraādiṭṭhānānañca saṃvutādikaraṇānañca sampadaṃ.Vattunti ṭhānakaraṇasampadaṃ vattuṃ. Nasakkotīti vattuṃ na sakkotīti yojanā.

Ekato suddhiyā: By the purification through the accomplishment of place and performance of a single kammavācācariya. Ubhato suddhiyāvā: Just by the purification of both the saraṇadānācariya and the novice. Ṭhānakaraṇasampadaṃ: The accomplishment of places such as the chest, and performances such as being restrained. Vattuṃ: To speak the accomplishment of place and performance. Na sakkotī: The connection is "he is not able to speak."

Imānīti saraṇāni. Casaddo upanyāso, panasaddo padālaṅkāro.Ekasambandhānīti ekato sambandhāni. Anunāsikantaṃ katvā dānakāle ‘‘buddhaṃ’’iti ‘‘saraṇaṃ’’iti padānañca ‘‘saraṇaṃ’’iti ‘‘gacchāmi’’iti padānañca antarā vicchedamakatvā ekasambandhameva katvā dātabbānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā tiṇṇaṃ padānamantarā byavadhānassa kassaci akkharassa abhāvato.Vicchinditvāti vicchedaṃ katvā. Makārantaṃ katvā dānakāle tiṇṇaṃ padānamantarā ekasambandhamakatvā vicchinditvā eva katvā dātabbānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Tiṇṇaṃ padānamantarā byavadhānassa nissarassa makārassa atthibhāvato. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Tanti vacanaṃ, ‘‘natthī’’tipade kattā, ‘‘na vutta’’ntipade kammaṃ.Tathāti ‘‘ahaṃ bhante buddharakkhito’’tiādinā ākārena, avadantassa saraṇaṃ na kuppati, bukāradakārādīnaṃ byañjanānaṃ ṭhānakaraṇasampadaṃ hāpentasseva saraṇaṃ kuppatīti adhippāyo.

Imānī: These refuges. The word ca is an introduction, the word pana is an ornament of the sentence. Ekasambandhānī: Connected together. Having made it nasalized, at the time of giving, it is said that the words "buddhaṃ" and "saraṇaṃ," and the words "saraṇaṃ" and "gacchāmi," should be given by making only one connection without making a break in between. Why? Because of the absence of any letter intervening between the three words. Vicchinditvā: Having made a break. Having made it end in ma, at the time of giving, it is said that the three words should be given by making them broken off, without making one connection between the three words. Why? Because of the existence of the nasal consonant ma intervening between the three words. The connection is that it was said in the Andhaka Aṭṭhakathā. Taṃ: That statement; in the phrase "natthī," it is the agent; in the phrase "na vutta," it is the object. Tathā: In that manner, such as "ahaṃ bhante buddharakkhito," the refuge is not broken if he speaks; the idea is that the refuge is broken only if he diminishes the accomplishment of place and performance of consonants such as bu, ka, ra, etc.

Tatthāti tāsu pabbajjāupasampadāsu.Paratoti parasmiṃ.ti upasampadā. Pabbajjā pana anuññātā evāti sambandho.Paratopīti pisaddo pubbāpekkho.ti pabbajjā.Ettāvatāti ettakena kesacchedanakāsāyacchādanasaraṇadānena.ti phalajotako.

Tatthā: Among those going forth and ordinations. Parato: After. : That ordination. But the going forth is indeed permitted, the connection is. Paratopī: The word pi is relative to what precedes. : That going forth. Ettāvatā: With this much, with the cutting of hair, wearing of the ochre robe, and giving of the refuges. : An indicator of the fruit.

Esāti eso sāmaṇeroti attho. ‘‘Gatimā’’ti vatvā tassatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘paṇḍitajātiko’’ti.Athāti evaṃ sati.Assāti sāmaṇerassa.Tasmiṃyeva ṭhāneti sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva. Yathā bhagavatā uddiṭṭhāni, tathā uddisitabbānīti yojanā.Etanti ‘‘anujānāmi…pe… jātarūpa rajatapaṭiggahaṇā veramaṇī’’ti vacanaṃ.

Esā: This is the novice, is the meaning. Saying "Gatimā," showing its meaning, he says "paṇḍitajātiko." Athā: In such a case. Assā: Of the novice. Tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne: In the same place where he is standing in the state of being a novice. The explanation is that they should be taught as they were taught by the Blessed One. Etaṃ: This statement, "anujānāmi…pe… jātarūpa rajatapaṭiggahaṇā veramaṇī."

Tanti andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttavacanaṃ.Yathāpāḷiyāvāti evasaddo sanniṭṭhānattho, tena yathāpāḷiyāva uddisitabbāni. Yathāpāḷiṃ visajjetvā aññathā eva uddisitabbānīti vādaṃ nivāreti. Yathāpāḷiṃ visajjetvā aññathā ‘‘pāṇātipātā veramaṇiṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti uddisantopi niddosoyeva.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tānīti sikkhāpadāni.Yāvāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ na jānāti, na kusalo hotīti sambandho.Santikāvacaroyevāti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ samīpe avacārova.Assāti sāmaṇerassa.Kappiyākappiyanti dasasikkhāpadavinimuttaṃ kappiyaṃ parāmāsādiñca akappiyaṃ aparāmāsādiñca.Tenāpīti sāmaṇerenāpi.Nāsanaṅgānīti liṅganāsanaaṅgāni.Sādhukaṃ sikkhitabbanti sādhukaṃ asikkhantassa liṅganāsanañca daṇḍakammanāsanañca hotīti adhippāyo.

Taṃ: That statement said in the Andhaka Aṭṭhakathā. Yathāpāḷiyāvā: The word eva is definitive; therefore, they should be taught just as in the Pāḷi. He refutes the view that they should be taught differently, explaining the Pāḷi. Even if one teaches differently, explaining the Pāḷi as "pāṇātipātā veramaṇiṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyāmī," he is without fault. : Truly, or because. Tānī: Those precepts. Yāvā: As long as he does not know, he is not skilled, the connection is. Santikāvacaroyevā: Just being in the presence of the ācariya and upajjhāya. Assā: Of the novice. Kappiyākappiyaṃ: What is allowable and unallowable, free from the ten precepts, such as allowable touching, and unallowable not-touching. Tenāpī: Even by the novice. Nāsanaṅgānī: The destroying characteristics. Sādhukaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ: He should learn well, the idea is that if he does not learn well, there is destruction of gender and destruction of punishment.

10. Dutiyamārakathā
10. Dutiyamārakathā

35.Mayhantipadassa ‘‘anuppattā sacchikatā’’tipadesu chaṭṭhīkattubhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mayā khoti attho’’ti. ‘‘Atha vā’’tiādinā ‘‘mayha’’ntipadassa ‘‘yoniso manasikārā, yoniso sammappadhānā’’tipadesu sambandhabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yoniso manasikārā, yoniso sammappadhānā’’ti ettha kāraṇatthe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘tena hetunā’’ti. ‘‘Punā’’tiādinā ‘‘mayha’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘yoniso manasikārā, yoniso sammappadhānā’’tipadesu sāmyatthe sāmibhāvena yojetvā puna ‘‘anuppattā, sacchikatā’’ti padesu kattutthe sāmibhāvena vibhattivipallāso kātabboti dasseti.

35. Showing the agent-relation in the sixth case in the phrases "anuppattā sacchikatā" for the word "mayhaṃ," he says, "mayā khoti attho." Beginning with "Atha vā," he shows the relation-property in the phrases "yoniso manasikārā, yoniso sammappadhānā" for the word "mayhaṃ." Here, in "yoniso manasikārā, yoniso sammappadhānā," he says that it is a statement of possibility in the sense of cause, "tena hetunā." Beginning with "Punā," he shows that the word "mayhaṃ" should be connected with the phrases "yoniso manasikārā, yoniso sammappadhānā" in the sense of sameness, with a sense of possession; and then in the phrases "anuppattā, sacchikatā," a change of inflection should be made with a sense of agency and a sense of possession.

11. Bhaddavaggiyakathā
11. Bhaddavaggiyakathā

36.Bhaddaṃ rūpañca cittañca etesamatthītibhaddakā. Vaggabandhanaṃvaggouttarapadalopena, vaggena carantītivaggiyā. Bhaddakā ca te vaggiyā cātibhaddavaggiyākakāralopenāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhaddavaggiyā’’tiādi. ‘‘Vokāro nipātamatto’’ti iminā tumhasaddassa ca yovacanassa ca kāriyabhāvaṃ nivatteti.ti saccaṃ.Teti bhaddavaggiyā.Idanti pañcasīlarakkhanaṃ.Pubbakammanti pubbe upacitaṃ kusalakammaṃ.

36. Bhaddakā: Those who have good form and mind. Vaggo: A group, by elision of the latter term, vaggiyā: Those who go with a group. Bhaddavaggiyā: Those who are good and those who go with a group, by elision of the consonant ka, showing the meaning, he says, "bhaddavaggiyā" etc. With "Vokāro nipātamatto," he prevents the agent-function of the word "tumha" and the plural number. : Truly. Te: Those bhaddavaggiyā. Idaṃ: This practice of the five precepts. Pubbakammaṃ: Meritorious action accumulated in the past.

12. Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathā
12. Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathā

38.Pariyādiyeyyanti ettha dādhātussa parīti ca āti ca upasaggavasena abhibhavanatthoti āha ‘‘abhibhaveyya’’nti.

38. Pariyādiyeyyaṃ: Here, for the root , with the prefixes pari and āti, there is the meaning of overpowering; therefore, he says, "abhibhaveyyaṃ."

39.Pacchāpakkhittāti saṅgītito paraṃ potthakārūḷhehi ṭhapitāti attho.

39. Pacchā pakkhittā: Placed by those who maintain the texts after the recitation, is the meaning.

44.‘‘Evaṃ vadanto viya oṇato’’ti iminā ‘‘āharahattho’’tipadassa taddhitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Vitthiṇṇamukhattā mandaṃ hīnaṃ atimukhametāsanti vacanatthena aggikapālāmandāmukhiyoti vuccantīti āha ‘‘aggibhājanāni vuccantī’’ti.

44. With "Evaṃ vadanto viya oṇato," he shows the derived nature of the word "āharahattho." Because the mouths are wide open, the fire bowls are called mandāmukhiyo, meaning low and inferior, by the statement of the meaning "atimukhametāsaṃ," he says, "aggibhājanāni vuccantī."

51.Yasmā yo nāgadamanakālo ciraṃ patati pavattati, tasmā socirapatikoti vuccati, tasmā cirapatikā paṭṭhāya abhippasannāti yojanā. Iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘cirakālato paṭṭhāyā’’ti.

51. Because the time of taming the nāga persists for a long time, therefore it is called cirapatiko, therefore, beginning from cirapatika, he was greatly pleased, is the connection. Showing this meaning, he says, "cirakālato paṭṭhāya."

52.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘jaṭāmissa’’ntiādipadesu.Khārikājanti ettha kamaṇḍaluādikā tāpasaparikkhārā khārīti vuccanti, khārisaṅkhātena bhārena pūrito kājo khārikājoti atthaṃ ekadesena dassento āha ‘‘khāribhāro’’ti.

52. Sabbatthā: In all the phrases "jaṭāmissa" etc. Khārikājaṃ: Here, ascetic requisites such as water pots are called khārī, showing the meaning in part that kāja is filled with a weight equal to khārī, he says "khāribhāro."

13. Bimbisārasamāgamakathā
13. Bimbisārasamāgamakathā

55.Laṭṭhisaddo taruṇarukkhavācako ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikāya’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.2), idhāpi taruṇatālarukkho laṭṭhi nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘tāluyyāne’’ti.Vaṭarukkheti nigrodharukkhe. Ettha ‘‘vaṭa’’iti iminā vaṭarukkho bahumūlattā suṭṭhuṃ patiṭṭhātīti atthenasuppatiṭṭhonāmāti dasseti. ‘‘Rukkhe’’iti iminācetiyasaddo cetiyarukkhe vattatīti dasseti, devālayañca thūpañca nivatteti.Tassāti vaṭarukkhassa.Etanti ‘‘suppatiṭṭhe cetiye’’ti etaṃ nāmaṃ. Lokavohāravasena dasasahassasaṅkhāte saṅkhyāvisese nīharitvā yujjitabbantiniyutanti vacanatthena dasasahassaṃ niyutaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘ekaniyutaṃ dasasahassānī’’ti.‘‘Nahuta’’ntipi pāṭho, so ayutto nahutasaṅkhātena saṅkhyāvisesena missībhāvena pasaṅgattā.Tesanti dvādasaniyutānaṃ brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ.

55. The word Laṭṭhi denotes a young tree, as in "ambalaṭṭhikāya" (dī. ni. 1.2); here too, the word laṭṭhi is the name of a young palm tree, showing this, he says "tāluyyāne." Vaṭarukkhe: In the banyan tree. Here, with "vaṭa," he shows that the banyan tree is named suppatiṭṭho because it is well-established with many roots. With "Rukkhe," he shows that the word cetiya refers to a cetiyarukkha, eliminating shrines and stupas. Tassā: Of that banyan tree. Etaṃ: This name "suppatiṭṭhe cetiye." Excluding the conventional number of ten thousand from common usage, niyutaṃ shows that ten thousand is called niyuta, showing this with the statement "dasasahassaṃ niyutaṃ nāmāti," he says, "ekaniyutaṃ dasasahassānī." "Nahuta" is also a reading, but that is not proper because of the connection with the number nahuta. Tesaṃ: Of those twelve niyuta of brahmin householders.

kisakāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Kakāro hettha attavācako. ‘‘Ovādako’’ti imināovadānoti ettha yupaccayo kattutthoti dasseti. Gāthābandhattā akārassa dīgho. ‘‘Atha vā’’tiādinā kisako hutvā aññe ovadānokisakovadānoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Idanti idaṃ atthajātaṃ, ayamattho vā. Tvaṃ pahāsīti sambandho.Tanti tuvaṃ.Itivuttaṃ hotīti yojanā.

kisakā shows the meaning of the word. Here, the syllable "ka" refers to oneself. "Ovādako (admonisher)" shows that in ovadāno, the yupa suffix is in the sense of the agent (kattu). Due to the meter of the verse, the short "a" becomes long. "Atha vā (or)" etc. shows the meaning of kisakovadāno as "becoming a kisaka and admonishing others." Ida means this collection of meanings, or this meaning. "Tvaṃ pahāsīti sambandho (you abandoned)" is the connection. Ta means "you." Iti means that this is what was said, is the construction.

Kāmitthiyoti ekāralopavasena sandhīti āha ‘‘kāme itthiyo cā’’ti.Upacīsūti ettha kāmakhandhakilesaabhisaṅkhārasaṅkhātesu catūsu upadhīsu khandhupadhi adhippetoti āha ‘‘khandhupadhīsū’’ti.

Kāmitthiyo means sandhi (euphonic combination) by dropping a vowel, as stated "kāme itthiyo ca (desires and women)." Upacīsū here means that among the four upadhi, namely, kāma (sensual desire), khandha (aggregate), kilesa (defilement), and abhisaṅkhāra (volitional formations), khandhupadhi (the upadhi of aggregates) is intended, as stated "khandhupadhīsū (in the upadhi of aggregates)."

Kocarahīti etthakosaddo ‘‘ko te balaṃ mahārājā’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.1880) viya kvasaddatthoti āha ‘‘kvacarahī’’ti. Nipātoyevesa.

Here, in kocarahī, the word ko is in the sense of "where," like in "ko te balaṃ mahārājā (what is your strength, great king)?" (jā. 2.22.1880), as stated "kvacarahī (where indeed)." This is just a particle (nipāta).

Padasaddassa caraṇapadādayo nivattetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānapada’’nti. ‘‘Santasabhāvatāyā’’tiādinā santo sabhāvo imassa padassātisantaṃ. Natthi upadhayo etthātianupadhikaṃ. Natthi kiñcanametthātiakiñcanaṃ. Tīsu bhavesu na sañjatītiasattaṃ. Aññathā na bhavatītianaññathābhāvi. Aññena kenaci na netabbantianaññaneyyanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tenāti ‘‘santa’’ntiādipadena.Meti mama, manoti sambandho.Etthadevamanussaloke me mano rato nāmāti kiṃ vakkhāmi.Itiimamatthaṃ dassetīti yojanā.

To exclude caraṇa (conduct), padā (footsteps) etc. of the word Pada, it is stated "nibbānapada (the state of Nibbāna)." "Santasabhāvatāyā (because of its peaceful nature)" etc. shows that santaṃ means "peaceful is the nature of this pada (state)." Anupadhikaṃ means "there are no upadhi (substrata) here." Akiñcanaṃ means "there is nothing here." Asattaṃ means "it is not attached in the three existences." Anaññathābhāvi means "it does not become otherwise." Anaññaneyya means "it cannot be led by anything else," showing the meanings of the words. Tenā means by the words "santaṃ (peaceful)" etc. Me means "mine," is the connection with mano (mind). Ettha "what shall I say that my mind is pleased in this world of gods and humans?" Iti shows this meaning, is the construction.

56.Tañcāti sāvakabhāvañca.

56. Tañcā means that state of being a disciple.

57.Assāsakāti ettha āpubbo sāsadhātu āpubba sisadhātunā sadiso, ‘‘me’’ti chaṭṭhīyogattā ṇvupaccayo ca bhāvatthoti āha ‘‘āsisanā’’ti. ‘‘Patthanā’’ti iminā āpubbasisadhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti.Assāti bimbisārarañño.Tatthāti ratanattaye.Nicchayagamanamevāti ‘‘saraṇa’’itinicchayena jānanameva gato.Attasanniyyātananti attano attānaṃ ratanattaye sanniyyātanaṃ. Iminā attasanniyyātana, paṇipāta, tapparāyana, sissabhāvūpagamanasaṅkhātesu catūsu saraṇagamanesu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.250; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.56; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 1.saraṇagamanagamakavibhāvanā) attasanniyyātanasaraṇagamanaṃ dīpeti.Ayanti bimbisāro rājā.Tanti niyatasaraṇataṃ.Paṇipātagamanañcāti etthapaṇīti karo. Yathā hi pādapadasaddā dīgharassavasena hutvā caraṇaṃ vadanti, evaṃ pāṇipaṇisaddā karaṃ vadanti. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paṇīti karo’’ti. Patanaṃpāto,paṇino pātopaṇipāto. Atthato añjalipaṇamananti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa gamanañca gacchantoti attho. Iminā paṇipātasaraṇagamanaṃ dīpeti. Casaddo ‘‘pākaṭa’’nti etthāpi yojetabbo. Pākaṭañca karontoti hi attho.

57. Here, in assāsakā, the root sās with the prefix ā is similar to the root sis with the prefix ā, and because of the connection with the sixth case ("me"), the suffix ṇvu is in the sense of the state (bhāva), as stated "āsisanā (wishing)." "Patthanā (wishing)" shows the meaning of the root sis with the prefix ā. Assā means to King Bimbisāra. Tatthā means in the Triple Gem. Nicchayagamanamevā means that one has gone only to the knowing itself, with certainty, with the determination "saraṇa (refuge)." Attasanniyyātana means offering oneself, one's own self, to the Triple Gem. This signifies attasanniyyātana (offering oneself), and reveals attasanniyyātanasaraṇagamana (going for refuge by offering oneself) among the four saraṇagamanas (ways of going for refuge), namely, paṇipāta (obeisance), tapparāyana (considering that as the highest), and upagamasissabhāva (accepting the state of discipleship) (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.250; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.56; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 1.saraṇagamanagamakavibhāvanā). Aya means this King Bimbisāra. Ta means that fixed refuge. Paṇipātagamanañcā here, paṇī means hand. Just as the words pāda (foot) and pada (word) become long or short and mean caraṇa (conduct), so the words pāṇi and paṇi mean kara (hand). Therefore, it is said "paṇīti karo (paṇi means hand)." Patanaṃ (falling) is pāto, paṇino pāto (the falling of the hand) is paṇipāto (obeisance). In meaning, it is said to be añjalipaṇamanaṃ (saluting with joined hands). And gamanañca (going) means gacchantoti (going). This reveals paṇipātasaraṇagamana (going for refuge by obeisance). The word ca (and) should also be connected to "pākaṭa (evident)." For it means "karonto hi (because he makes it evident)."

58.Siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇoti ettha siṅgīsaṅkhāto nikkho siṅgīnikkho, tena samāno vaṇṇo etassāti siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘siṅgīsuvaṇṇanikkhena samānavaṇṇo’’ti. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇa’’itipadena nikkhasaddassa suvaṇṇatthaṃ dasseti, pañcasuvaṇṇādayo atthe nivatteti. ‘‘Samāna’’itipadena savaṇṇoti ettha sakāro samānasaddasseva kāriyoti dasseti.Sabbesūti akhilesu cakkhādiindriyesu.Dantoti damito. Indriyasaṃvaroti vuttaṃ hoti. Tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto āha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi.

58. Here, in siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇo, siṅgīnikkho means nikkho (a gold coin) called siṅgī, its color is like that, therefore it is called siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇo. Explaining the meaning of the word, it says "siṅgīsuvaṇṇanikkhena samānavaṇṇo (of a color similar to a gold coin called siṅgī)." Here, the word "suvaṇṇa (gold)" shows that the word nikkha means gold, excluding other meanings such as pañcasuvaṇṇādayo (five kinds of gold) etc. The word "samāna (similar)" shows that in savaṇṇoti (same color), the syllable "sa" is only the function of the word "samāna (similar)." Sabbesū means in all the sense organs such as eyes, etc., without any residue. Danto means tamed. It is said to be indriyasaṃvara (restraint of the senses). Making that meaning clear, it says "bhagavato hī (because to the Blessed One)" etc.

59.Oṇīto pattato pāṇi yenātioṇītapattapāṇīti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pattato cā’’tiādi. ‘‘Apanītapāṇi’’nti iminā oṇītasaddo apanītattho, pāṇisaddena ca sambandhitabboti dasseti. ‘‘Sallakkhetvā’’ti iminā ‘‘bhagavanta’’nti imaṃ kammaṃ ‘‘sallakkhetvā’’ti pāṭhasesena yojetabbanti dasseti.Ekamantanti ettha antasaddo samīpadesattho, koṭidesattho vā hoti, upayogavacanañca bhummatthe hotīti dassento āha ‘‘ekasmiṃ padese’’ti. Atthikapayoge karaṇassa sambhavato āha ‘‘buddhābhivādanagamanena vā dhammassavanagamanena vā’’ti.Appākiṇṇanti ettha appasaddo paṭisedhatthoti āha ‘‘anākiṇṇa’’nti. ‘‘Abbokiṇṇa’’ntipi pāṭho.Appanigghosanti ettha ‘‘appasadda’’ntipadena vacanasaddassa gahitattā iminā pārisesanayena nagaranigghosasaddoyeva gahetabboti āha ‘‘nagaranigghosasaddena appanigghosa’’nti. Tīsu pāṭhesu paṭhamena pāṭhena janassa vātojanavāto,tena virahitaṃvijanavātanti vikappaṃ dasseti. Dutiyena janassa vādojanavādo,tena virahitaṃvijanavādanti vikappaṃ dasseti. Tatiyena janassa pāto sañcaraṇaṃjanapāto,tena virahitaṃvijanapātanti vikappaṃ dasseti. Rahassaṃ karīyati etthātirāhasseyyakaṃ. Manussānaṃ rāhasseyyakaṃmanussarāhasseyyakanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘manussāna’’ntiādinā.

59. Oṇīto pattato pāṇi yena (one from whom the hand has been withdrawn from the bowl) means oṇītapattapāṇī, explaining the meaning of the word, it says "pattato cā (and from the bowl)" etc. By "apanītapāṇi (withdrawn hand)," it shows that the word oṇīta means apanīta (withdrawn), and that it should be connected with the word pāṇi (hand). By "sallakkhetvā (considering)," it shows that this object "bhagavanta (the Blessed One)" should be connected with the remaining text "sallakkhetvā (considering)." Ekamanta here, the word anta means a nearby place, or a peripheral place, and it shows that the expression "upayoga (usefulness)" is in the sense of abundance, as stated "ekasmiṃ padese (in one place)." Because of the possibility of the instrumental case in the use of necessity, it says "buddhābhivādanagamanena vā dhammassavanagamanena vā (either by going to pay homage to the Buddha or by going to listen to the Dhamma)." Here, in appākiṇṇa, the word appa is in the sense of negation, as stated "anākiṇṇa (not crowded)." "Abbokiṇṇa (not scattered)" is also a reading. In appanigghosa, because the word vacana (speech) is taken by the word "appasadda (little sound)," it shows that by this method of elimination (pārisesanaya), only nagaranigghosasadda (the sound of city noise) should be taken, as stated "nagaranigghosasaddena appanigghosa (with little sound of city noise)." Among the three readings, the first reading means that janassa vāto (the wind of people) is janavāto, tena virahitaṃ (devoid of that) is vijanavāta (windless), showing the alternatives. The second means that janassa vādo (the talk of people) is janavādo, tena virahitaṃ (devoid of that) is vijanavāda (speechless), showing the alternatives. The third means that janassa pāto sañcaraṇaṃ (the falling or movement of people) is janapāto, tena virahitaṃ (devoid of that) is vijanapāta (deserted), showing the alternatives. Rahassaṃ karīyati etthāti (secrecy is made here) is rāhasseyyakaṃ. Manussānaṃ rāhasseyyakaṃ (the secrecy of humans) is manussarāhasseyyakaṃ, showing the meaning of the word, as stated "manussāna (of humans)" etc.

14. Sāriputtamoggallāna pabbajjākathā
14. The Story of Sāriputta and Moggallāna's Ordination

60.‘‘Teti sāriputtamoggallānā. Agamaṃsu kirāti yojanā.Tatrāti giraggasamajje.Athāti parivitakkanānantaraṃ.Tassāti sañcayassa.Pāranti paratīraṃ.Etthāti tumhākaṃ vāde.Idanti ayaṃ vādo ettakoyevāti attho.Yoti yo koci. Tvañca ahañcaamhe,tesu. Nāmatumhasaṅkhātesu hi tīsu saddesu ekasesena kattabbesu pacchimasseva ekaseso kātabbo.Tenāti katikakaraṇahetunā.

60. Te means Sāriputta and Moggallāna. "Agamaṃsu kirāti yojanā (it is said they went)" is the connection. Tatrā means in the Giragga festival. Athā means after the reflection. Tassā means of Sañcaya. Pāra means the far shore. Etthā means in your teaching. Ida means this teaching is only so much, is the meaning. Yo means whoever. Tvañca ahañca (you and I) is amhe, in them. Among the three words nāma, tumha, and saṅkhāta, when one has to perform ekasesa (the rule of one remaining), one should perform ekasesa of the last one. Tenā means by the reason of making an agreement.

Atthīkehīti amatena atthikehi.Upaññātaṃ magganti amatassa maggo upagantvā ñāto. Ñāto ceva upagato cāti saha upasaggena padaṃ parivattitvā atthaṃ kathento upasaggattho ca dhātuttho ca visuṃyeva hotīti ñāpeti. Atthikehi amhehi upaññātaṃ nibbānaṃ maggaṃ magganto anubandheyyanti vā dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Maggaphalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇehi upagantvā ñātabbantiupaññātaṃnibbānaṃ.Maggadhāthuyāanvesanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pariyesanto’’ti.

Atthīkehī means by those who desire the Deathless. Upaññātaṃ magga means the path to the Deathless has been known by approaching it. Explaining the meaning by converting the word with a prefix and the prefix and root meaning separately, it makes it known that the meaning of the prefix and the meaning of the root are distinct. Or, showing that we, the desirers, should follow the path of Nibbāna, which is known by approaching it, it says "atha vā (or)" etc. Upaññātaṃ means Nibbāna, which should be known by approaching it with maggaphalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇehi (the knowledge of reviewing the path, fruition). Maggadhāthuyā shows the meaning of searching, as stated "pariyesanto (searching)."

Kamaṇḍalutoti kuṇḍikato. Attano ca paresañca akathanena antare vivaraṃ paṭisandahatītipaṭisandhāro,taṃ.Etthāti ‘‘na tyāhaṃ sakkomī’’tipade. Adhippāyo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Ettakanti ettakaṃ pañhaṃ.Imassāti paribbājakassa.Avisayabhāvanti attano avisayabhāvaṃ.

Kamaṇḍaluto means from the water pot. The paṭisandhāro means that which heals the inner gap by not speaking of oneself and others, that one. Etthā means in the phrase "na tyāhaṃ sakkomī (I am not able)." The intention should be understood thus. Ettaka means this much question. Imassā means of this wanderer. Avisayabhāva means one's own state of being out of range.

hetuppabhavāti vacanatthena pañcakkhandhā hetuppabhavā nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘hetuppabhavā nāma pañcakkhandhā’’ti.Tenāti ‘‘ye dhammā hetuppabhavā’’ti padena.Assāti sāriputtaparibbājakassa. ‘‘Tesaṃ hetu nāma samudayasacca’’nti iminā hinoti etasmā phalantihetūti vacanatthena samudayasaccaṃ hetu nāmāti dasseti.Tañcāti samudayasaccañca.Tesanti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhinnampi saccāna’’nti. Apavattivasena nirujjhati etthātinirodho. Tañcāti nirodhañca.Tenāti ‘‘tesañca yo nirodho’’tipadena.Assāti sāriputtaparibbājakassa.Etthāti imissaṃ gāthāyaṃ, catūsu saccesu vā.Nayatoti nānantarikanayato, avinābhāvanayato vā, nettidesanāhāranayato vā. Tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto āha ‘‘nirodhe hī’’tiādi. Ekadesasarūpekasesanayena vā maggasaccaṃ gahetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Nirodho ca nirodhūpāyo canirodhoti ekadesasarūpekaseso kātabbo.Tesañcāti ettha avuttasampiṇḍanatthena casaddena maggasaccaṃ gahetabbantipi vadanti. Ayaṃ nayo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na vutto.Tamevatthanti catusaccasaṅkhātaṃ tamevatthaṃ.Paṭipādentoti nigamento.

hetuppabhavā means that the five aggregates are called hetuppabhavā (originating from a cause), showing the meaning of the word, it says "hetuppabhavā nāma pañcakkhandhā (the five aggregates are called originating from a cause)." Tenā means by the words "ye dhammā hetuppabhavā (those things that originate from a cause)." Assā means of Sāriputta the wanderer. "Tesaṃ hetu nāma samudayasacca (their cause is called the truth of origin)" shows that the truth of origin is called cause, with the meaning that it results from this, therefore it is hetū. Tañcā means that truth of origin. Tesa here, to show the scope of the word "ta," it is said "ubhinnampi saccāna (of both truths)." Apavattivasena nirujjhati etthāti (it ceases by way of cessation) is nirodho (cessation). Tañcā means that cessation. Tenā means by the phrase "tesañca yo nirodho (and their cessation)." Assā means of Sāriputta the wanderer. Etthā means in this verse, or in the four truths. Nayato means from the continuous way, or from the inseparable way, or from the way of the guiding principle of leading. Making that meaning clear, it says "nirodhe hī (because in cessation)" etc. Or, showing that the truth of the path should be taken by the method of ekadesasarūpekasesanaya (the rule of one remaining where only one part is similar), it says "atha vā (or)" etc. Nirodho ca nirodhūpāyo ca (cessation and the means to cessation) is nirodho (cessation), ekadesasarūpekaseso kātabbo (one should do ekadesasarūpekasesa). Tesañcā here, some say that by the word ca (and), with the implication of what is unsaid, one should take the truth of the path. This method is not mentioned in the commentary. Tamevattha means that same meaning consisting of the four truths. Paṭipādento means concluding.

yadīti padassatthaṃ vaṇṇeti. ‘‘Ettakamevā’’ti iminātāvadevāti padassatthaṃ vaṇṇeti. ‘‘Ito uttari natthī’’ti iminā evakārassa phalaṃ dasseti.Itoti sotāpattiphalato.‘‘Idaṃ…pe… pattabba’’nti iminā ‘‘ettakamevā’’ti padassa atthasarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Eso eva dhammo’’ti iminā ‘‘eseva dhammo’’tipadassa atthaṃ vaṇṇeti.Paccabyatthāti patiavapubbo idhātu paṭividdhatthoti āha ‘‘paṭividdhatthā’’ti.Tumhehīti assajittheraṃ sandhāyāha. Iminā ‘‘paccabyatthā’’ti ettha hiyyattanīparassapadamajjhimapurisabahuvacanatthavibhattiṃ dīpeti.Kappanahutehīti kappānaṃ nahutehi, koṭipakoṭisatasahassānaṃ satehi nahutehīti attho.Abbhatītanti abhiatītaṃ. Amhehi adiṭṭhameva hutvā atikkamāpitanti attho.

It explains the meaning of the word yadī (if). By "ettakamevā (only this much)," it explains the meaning of the word tāvadevā (only so much). By "ito uttari natthī (there is nothing more than this)," it shows the result of the eva-kāra (the particle "eva," only). Ito means from the fruition of Stream-entry. ‘‘Idaṃ…pe… pattabba’’ shows the nature of the meaning of the word "ettakamevā (only this much)." By "eso eva dhammo (this is the only teaching)," it explains the meaning of the phrase "eseva dhammo (this is the only teaching)." Paccabyatthā means the root idhātu (to see) with the prefixes pati and ava is in the sense of paṭividdhatthoti (thoroughly known), as stated "paṭividdhatthā (thoroughly known)." Tumhehī refers to Assaji Thera. This shows that in "paccabyatthā," the vibhatti (inflection) is in the sense of past tense, parasassapada (active voice), second person, plural. Kappanahutehī means by nahutas (group of ten million) of kappas, by hundreds of koṭipakoṭisatasahassānaṃ (billions of trillions). Abbhatīta means abhiatītaṃ (passed over). It means having passed over by becoming unseen by us.

62.Ārammaṇabhūtassa nibbānassa gambhīrattā ārammaṇikabhūtaṃ ñāṇampi gambhīramevādhippetanti āha ‘‘gambhīrassa ca ñāṇassā’’ti. Yathā hi saṇhavatthassa sibbanatthāya saṇhasūci adhippetāti. Upadhīnaṃ sammā khayaṭṭhena nibbānaṃupadhisaṅkhayaṃnāmāti āha ‘‘upadhisaṅkhayeti nibbāne’’ti.Tadārammaṇāyāti taṃnibbānārammaṇāya.Vimuttiyāti phalavimuttiyā.Sāvakapāramīñāṇeti aggasāvakapāramīñāṇe.Tesūti sāriputtamoggallānesu. Aḍḍhamāsena arahatte patiṭṭhitoti sambandho.

62. Because of the depth of Nibbāna, which is the object, it says that the knowledge that is the object is also considered deep, as stated "gambhīrassa ca ñāṇassā (and of deep knowledge)." Just as a fine needle is suitable for sewing fine cloth. Nibbāna is called upadhisaṅkhayaṃ (the cessation of substrata) because of the meaning of the complete destruction of the substrata, as stated "upadhisaṅkhayeti nibbāne (upadhisaṅkhaya means in Nibbāna)." Tadārammaṇāyā means that which has that Nibbāna as its object. Vimuttiyā means by the fruition of liberation. Sāvakapāramīñāṇe means the knowledge of the perfection of the chief disciple. Tesū means in Sāriputta and Moggallāna. "Aḍḍhamāsena arahatte patiṭṭhitoti sambandho (they were established in Arahantship in half a month)" is the connection.

Atīteti kappasatasahassādhike asaṅkhyeyyamatthake.Tassāti buddhassa santike aggasāvakabhāvaṃ patthesīti yojanā.Assameti munīnaṃ ṭhāne. Tañhi ā kodhaṃ, ā bhuso vā rāgādayo samenti etthātiassamoti vuccati, tasmiṃ. Patthayitvā ca pesesīti sambandho.Tatthāti nīluppalamaṇḍape.Tesūti tāpasaseṭṭhīsu.

Atīte means in the past, at the head of countless hundreds of thousands of kappas. Tassā means he wished to become the chief disciple in the presence of that Buddha, is the connection. Assame means in the place of ascetics. For that is called assamo because rāgādayo (lust, etc.) subside in it. Having wished and sent it, is the connection. Tatthā means in the blue lotus pavilion. Tesū means in those chief ascetics.

63.Yesanti kulānaṃ. ‘‘Vidhavabhāvāyā’’ti iminā vidhavāya bhāvovedhabyanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Vidhavāti ca patisuññā. Sā hi dhavena vigatāti ‘‘vidhavā’’ti ca, vigato dhavo imissāti ‘‘vidhavā’’ti ca vuccati.Ubhayenāpīti puttapabbajjapatipabbajjasaṅkhātena duvidhenapi.

63. Yesa means of which families. By "Vidhavabhāvāyā," it shows the meaning of the word vedhabya as "the state of a widow." Vidhavā means devoid of a husband. For she is called "vidhavā (widow)" because she is separated from her husband, and she is called "vidhavā (widow)" because the husband is separated from her. Ubhayenāpī means by both kinds, the two kinds of ordaining and making a son go forth.

Sañcayānīti ettha nissayūpacārena nissaye nissitūpacāro hotīti āha ‘‘sañcayassa antevāsikānī’’ti. Atha vā ṇapaccayo tassedamatthe hotīti āha ‘‘sañcayassa antevāsikānī’’ti.‘‘Magadhāna’’nti bahuvacanavasena vuttattā janapadassa nāmanti āha ‘‘magadhānaṃ janapadassā’’ti.Giribbajanti ettha vajo viyātivajo,giri. Vajasadiso giri etthāti giribbajaṃ padaheṭṭhupariyavasena, nagaraṃ. ‘‘Mahāvīriyavanto’’ti iminā mahanto vīro etesaṃ tathāgatānantimahāvīrāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Dhammena nayamānānaṃ kā usūyā vijānatanti ettha kaccāyananayena (kaccāyane 277 sutte) usūyapayoge sampadānaṃ hotīti āsaṅkā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ, upayogatthe vā’’ti.Vijānantānanti vijānantesu tathāgatesu, vijānante vā.

Sañcayānī here, it says "sañcayassa antevāsikānī (of Sañcaya, the residents)" because the dependent is treated with the treatment of the depended. Or, it says "sañcayassa antevāsikānī (of Sañcaya, the residents)" because the suffix ṇa is in the sense of "belonging to that." ‘‘Magadhāna’’ is said in the plural, therefore it says that it is the name of the country, as stated "magadhānaṃ janapadassā (of the country of Magadha)." Giribbaja here, vajo viyāti (like a place) is vajo, giri (mountain). Giribbajaṃ means "a mountain is like a place here," a city by way of upper and lower portions of land. By "Mahāvīriyavanto," it shows the meaning of the word mahāvīrā as "great heroes are these Tathāgatas." In Dhammena nayamānānaṃ kā usūyā vijānata, there might be an expectation that, according to Kaccāyana's grammar (kaccāyane 277 sutte), the dative case would be the case of usūya (envy), therefore, it says "bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ, upayogatthe vā (the locative case is in the sense of the possessive, or in the sense of use)." Vijānantāna means in the Tathāgatas who know, or in the one who knows.

15. Upajjhāyavattakathā
15. The Discourse on the Duties of the Preceptor

64.Anupajjhāyakāti ettha vajjāvajjaṃ upagantvā jhāyatītiupajjhāyo,so natthi etesantianupajjhāyakāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vajjāvajja’’ntiādi. ‘‘Piṇḍāya caraṇakapatta’’nti iminā piṇḍāya uddissa, uṭṭhahitvā vā tiṭṭhati anenātiuttiṭṭho,soyeva pattouttiṭṭhapattoti atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Uttiṭṭhe na pamajjeyyā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 168) pana piṇḍāya caraṇaṃ ‘‘uttiṭṭha’’nti vuccati. Tasmā tattha piṇḍāya uddissa, uṭṭhahitvā vā tiṭṭhanaṃuttiṭṭhanti vacanattho kātabbo. ‘‘Piṇḍāya caraṇapatta’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘tasmiñhi manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino’’tipadaṃ laṅghitvā ‘‘tasmā uttiṭṭhapattanti vutta’’ntipadena yojetabbaṃ, tasmā piṇḍāya caraṇakapattattā uttiṭṭhapattanti vuttanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmiṃ manussā kiṃsaññinoti āha ‘‘tasmiñhi manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino’’ti. Tasmiñhi tasmiṃ eva uttiṭṭhapatte pabbajitānaṃ paribhogabhāvena manussehi avasajjitabbattā, avachaḍḍetabbattā vā manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino hontīti yojanā. Pabbajitānaṃ piṇḍāya caraṇakapattattā uttiṭṭhapattanti vuttaṃ, manussānaṃ pana avasajjitapattattā ucchiṭṭhapattanti vuttanti adhippāyo. Uttiṭṭha pattantipadaṃ vākyameva, na samāsotipi dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. ‘‘Uṭṭhahitvā’’ti iminā uttiṭṭhāti ettha tvālopoti dasseti. ‘‘Gahetu’’nti iminā pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti.Gehasitapemavasenāti gehe nissitapemavasena, mettāpubbaṅgamapemavasenāti attho. Sagāravā hutvā sappatissā hutvā viharantāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti. ‘‘Sabhāgajīvikā’’ti imināsabhāgavuttikāti ettha vuttisaddo jīvikatthoyeva, na vivaraṇādyatthoti dasseti. Upajjhāyabhāvaṃ sampaṭicchati etehītiupajjhāyabhāvasampaṭicchanāni,tāniyeva vevacanāniupajjhāyabhāvasampaṭicchanavevacanāni. Tikkhattunti ukkaṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ, sakimpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Padassa vasena viññāpetīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.Etthāti upajjhāyagahaṇaṭṭhāne. Yadidaṃ vācāya vā sāvanaṃ, yadidaṃ kāyena vā atthaviññāpanaṃ atthi, idameva sāvanaatthaviññāpanameva upajjhāyagahaṇanti yojanā.Sādhūti sampaṭicchananti upajjhāyena pañcasu padesu yasmiṃ kismiṃci vutte saddhivihārikassa ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchanaṃ.Tanti kesañci vacanaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etthāti upajjhāyagahaṇe. ‘‘Na sampaṭicchanaṃ aṅga’’nti iminā āyācanadānāniyeva aṅgāni nāmāti dasseti. Saddhivihārikenāpi ñātunti sambandho.Iminā padenāti ‘‘sādhū’’ti iminā padena.

64. Anupajjhāyakā: Here, showing the meaning of anupajjhāyakā as "they do not have an upajjhāyo, because the upajjhāyo is one who goes to examine what is right and wrong (vajjāvajjaṃ upagantvā jhāyatīti upajjhāyo, so natthi etesanti anupajjhāyakā)," he says, "examining what is right and wrong" and so on. With "a bowl for going for alms (piṇḍāya caraṇakapatta)," he shows the meaning of uttiṭṭha, as "that by which one stands up or is erected for alms (piṇḍāya uddissa, uṭṭhahitvā vā tiṭṭhati anenāti uttiṭṭho)," and that same bowl is the uttiṭṭhapatto. However, in passages such as "One should not be negligent in rising (uttiṭṭhe na pamajjeyyā)" (Dhp. 168), "uttiṭṭha" is said to be going for alms. Therefore, there the meaning of uttiṭṭha should be made as "standing up or being erected for alms." This statement, "a bowl for going for alms," should be connected to the statement "therefore it is called an uttiṭṭhapatta" skipping the phrase "for in it people have the perception of leavings (tasmiñhi manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino)." Therefore, it is said that it is called an uttiṭṭhapatta because it is a bowl for going for alms. What perception do people have in it? He says, "for in it people have the perception of leavings (tasmiñhi manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino)." Here, the meaning is that in that very uttiṭṭhapatta, because it is to be discarded or abandoned by people due to being used by renunciants, people have the perception of leavings. The intention is that it is called an uttiṭṭhapatta because it is a bowl for renunciants to go for alms, but it is called an ucchiṭṭhapatta because it is a bowl to be discarded by people. Showing that the phrase "uttiṭṭha patta" is just a sentence, not a compound, he says, "or else (atha vā)" and so on. With "having stood up (uṭṭhahitvā)," he shows that there is the elision of tvā in uttiṭṭha. With "to take (gahetuṃ)," he shows the remainder of the reading. Gehasitapemavasenā: meaning, by means of affection based on the household, by means of affection with loving-kindness as its precursor. Showing the meaning that they live respectfully and conscientiously, he says, "having attended (upaṭṭhapetvā)." With sabhāgajīvikā, he shows that in sabhāgavuttikā, the word vutti has only the meaning of livelihood, not the meaning of explanation or the like. Those things by which one accepts the state of being an upajjhāyo are upajjhāyabhāvasampaṭicchanāni, and those very things are synonyms, upajjhāyabhāvasampaṭicchanavevacanāni. Tikkhattuṃ: is said in terms of the highest degree, but it is certainly valid even once. The connection is that one makes it known in terms of the word. : is true. Ettha: in the place of taking an upajjhāyo. The connection is that, that which is making known by speech, or that which is making known the meaning by body, this very making known of the meaning is the taking of an upajjhāyo. Sādhūti sampaṭicchanaṃ: is the acceptance of "sādhu" by the saddhivihārika when the upajjhāyo has spoken in any of the five instances. Taṃ: is the word of some. : is true, or because. Ettha: in taking an upajjhāyo. With "acceptance is not a factor (na sampaṭicchanaṃ aṅga)," he shows that only requesting and giving are the factors. The connection is that it should also be known by the saddhivihārika. Iminā padenā: by this word "sādhu".

Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanāti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ vuttaṃ sammā vattitabba’’nti. Iminā kiriyāvisayabhāvameva dīpeti, na dabbavisayabhāvaṃ.Ayanti vuccamānā.Assāti saddhivihārikassa.Dhotapādapariharaṇatthāyāti dhotassa pādassa paṃsumakkhanādīnaṃ pariharaṇatthāya.ti upāhanāyo.Kālassevāti paccūsakālatoyeva, nissakkatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.Tatoti tehi tīhi dantakaṭṭhehi, vibhattaapādānametaṃ. Tesu vā tīsu dantakaṭṭhesu.Yanti yaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ.Athāti tasmiṃ gahaṇe.

Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanā: Here, to show the scope of that ta word, it is said, "that which is said, should be properly followed." By this, he indicates only the state of being the object of action, not the state of being the object of a thing. Ayaṃ: is the one being said. Assā: of the saddhivihārika. Dhotapādapariharaṇatthāyā: for the avoidance of dirt and such on the washed feet. : those slippers. Kālassevā: only at dawn, and this is a word of similarity in the sense of certainty. Tato: from those three tooth sticks, this is an ablative of separation. Or, among those three tooth sticks. Yaṃ: whichever tooth stick. Athā: in that taking.

Tatoti sītuṇhodakehi, sītuṇhodakesu vā.Vaḷañjetīti paribhuñjati.Udakanti mukhadhovanodakaṃ. ‘‘Vaccakuṭito’’ti iminā passāvakuṭīpi gahetabbā.Evanti sammajjiyamāne.Asuññanti janasaddato atucchaṃ.Āsananti therassa āsanaṃ.Tasminti āsane. Nisinnassa therassa vattaṃ kātabbanti sambandho. Uklāpo asmiṃ dese atthītiuklāpoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kenaci kacavarena saṃkiṇṇo’’ti. Ettha ca saṅkāro ucchiṭṭho kalāpo samūhouklāpoti vacanatthena uklāpoti vuccati. Kacīyati bandhīyati asmiṃ desetikaco,so varīyati icchīyati anenātikacavaroti vacanatthena kacavaroti vuccati.Hatthenapīti ettha pisaddo pilotikenapītiādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.

Tato: with hot and cold water, or in hot and cold water. Vaḷañjetī: uses. Udakaṃ: water for washing the face. With "from the toilet (vaccakuṭito)," the lavatory should also be included. Evaṃ: while sweeping. Asuññaṃ: not empty of people. Āsanaṃ: the seat of the thera. Tasmiṃ: on that seat. The connection is that the duties for the seated thera should be done. Showing the meaning of uklāpo as "there is debris in this place (uklāpo asmiṃ dese atthīti)," he says, "mixed with some trash." Here, saṅkāro is called debris, and kalāpo, a collection of leavings is called uklāpo. That place in which something is fastened and bound is kaco, and that which is desired by it is called kacavaro. Hatthenaapī: Here, the pi particle includes "even with a fan" and so on.

Ekato katvāti ekato samānapaṭalaṃ katvā. Kasmā saṅghāṭīti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ hī’’tiādi. ‘‘Saṅghaṭitattā’’ti iminā saṃharitabbātisaṅghāṭīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Nivattitvā olokentaṃ upajjhāyaṃ saṃpāpuṇātīti yojanā. Ekena vā padavītihārenāti sambandho. Pattoyeva uṇhabhārikesu pariyāpannotipattapariyāpanno,patte pariyāpanno yāguādikopattapariyāpannotipi yujjatiyeva.Bhikkhācāreti bhikkhācāraṭṭhāne. Yāguyā vā laddhāyāti sambandho.Tassāti upajjhāyassa.So pattoti uṇhādīsu pariyāpanno so patto.Aññatra vāti ārāmādīsu vā.Tassāti upajjhāyassa. Vacane aniṭṭhiteti sambandho.Ito paṭṭhāyāti ‘‘na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassā’’ti ettha vuttanakārato paṭṭhāya. Iminā heṭṭhā vuttesu ‘‘nātidūre gantabba’’ntiādīsu nakārapaṭisiddhesu āpatti natthīti dasseti.Yattha katthacīti ‘‘na ca uṇhe cīvaraṃ nidahitabba’’ntiādīsu yesu kesuci.Ayanti dukkaṭāpatti.ti saccaṃ.Āpattisāmantāti ettha āpattiyā sāmantā āpattisāmantāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘āpattiyā āsanna’’nti. ‘‘Āsanna’’nti imināsāmantāsaddassa āsannavevacanatañca upayogatthe nissakkavacanatañca dasseti. Īdisaṃ vacanaṃ bhante vattuṃ vaṭṭati nāmāti yojanā.

Ekato katvā: having made it one layer. Why the saṅghāṭī? He says, "because everything (sabbaṃ hī)" and so on. With "because of being assembled (saṅghaṭitattā)," he shows the meaning of saṅghāṭī as "it should be gathered up (saṃharitabbāti saṅghāṭī)." The connection is that it reaches the upajjhāya as he turns back to look. The connection is that by one round of the alms-route. Only the bowl is included among the warming provisions, therefore pattapariyāpanno, or it is also fitting that pattapariyāpanno is that gruel and such that are included in the bowl. Bhikkhācāre: at the place of the alms-round. The connection is that or having obtained gruel. Tassā: of the upajjhāyo. So patto: that bowl included among the warm things and so on. Aññatra vā: or in the monastery and such. Tassā: of the upajjhāyo. The connection is that when the speech is unfinished. Ito paṭṭhāya: starting from the na particle said here in "one should not interrupt the upajjhāyo while he is speaking (na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassa)." By this, he shows that there is no offense in the nakāra prohibitions said below, such as "one should not go too far (nātidūre gantabba)" and so on. Yattha katthacī: in whichever ones of "one should not place the robe in a hot place (na ca uṇhe cīvaraṃ nidahitabba)" and so on. Ayaṃ: this dukkaṭa offense. : is true. Āpattisāmantā: Here, showing the meaning of āpattisāmantā as "close to the offense is āpattisāmantā," he says, "near to the offense (āpattiyā āsannaṃ)." With "near (āsannaṃ)," he shows that sāmantā is a synonym for near, and that it is a word of certainty in the sense of use. The connection is, "Bhante, is it proper to say such a word?"

Gāmatopaṭhamataranti gāmato upajjhāyassa paṭhamataraṃ.Tenevāti upajjhāyeneva. Nivattantena saddhivihārikenāti sambandho. ‘‘Tinta’’nti vatvā tamevatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sedaggahita’’nti. Iminā sedena sīdatītisinnanti atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Atirekaṃ katvā’’ti imināussāretvātipadassa adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti, uddhaṃ uddhaṃ sāretvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pacchimavākyassa pubbavākyakāraṇabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘kiṃ kāraṇā’’ti. Majjhe bhaṅgassa dosaṃ āvikaronto āha ‘‘samaṃ katvā’’tiādi.Tatoti samaṃ katvā saṃharaṇato, niccaṃ bhijjamānanti sambandho. Majjhe bhaṅgato vā, dubbalanti sambandho.Etanti ‘‘caturaṅgulaṃ kaṇṇaṃ ussāretvā’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ.Yathāti yenākārena saṃhariyamāneti sambandho. Cīvarabhogassa oro antoobhogoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kāyabandhana’’ntiādi.

Gāmato paṭhamataraṃ: earlier than the upajjhāyo from the village. Tenevā: by the upajjhāyo himself. The connection is that by the saddhivihārika as he turns back. Having said "wet (tinta)," to show that very meaning, it is said, "seized by sweat (sedaggahitaṃ)." By this, he shows the meaning of sinna as "it seeps with sweat (sedena sīdatīti sinnaṃ)." With "having made it excessive (atirekaṃ katvā)," he shows the intended meaning of the word ussāretvā, which means having raised it higher and higher. To show the state of being the cause of the latter sentence for the former sentence, it is said, "what is the reason (kiṃ kāraṇā)?" Revealing the fault of breakage in the middle, he says, "having made it even (samaṃ katvā)" and so on. Tato: from having made it even, from gathering it up, the connection is that it is always breaking. Or, from breakage in the middle, the connection is that it is weak. Etaṃ: this statement, "having raised the corner by four fingers (caturaṅgulaṃ kaṇṇaṃ ussāretvā)." The connection is that in what way is it being gathered up? Showing the meaning of obhogo as "the inner boundary of the robe (cīvarabhogassa oro anto)," he says, "body-binding" and so on.

Yoti upajjhāyo. ‘‘Gāmeyevā’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘antaraghare vā paṭikkamane vā’’ti.Paṭikkamane vāti bhojanasālāyaṃ vā.Tassāti upajjhāyassa. Laddhā bhikkhā yenātiladdhabhikkho,tassa vā. Piṇḍapāto hotīti yojanā.Tassāti upajjhāyassa. Piṇḍapāto na hotīti sambandho.Attanā laddhopīti pisaddo upajjhāyena laddhopīti atthaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Āhariyatūti ettha tuvibhatti pucchāyaṃ hoti, āhariyatu kinti attho.Kāloti bhojanakālo. Bhuñjitthātibhutto,tasmiṃ satīti sambandho.Upakaṭṭhoti majjhanhikassa āsanno.

Yo: whichever upajjhāyo. Having said "in the village itself (gāmeyevā)," to show that very meaning, it is said, "in the inner house or on the way back (antaraghare vā paṭikkamane vā)." Paṭikkamane vā: or in the dining hall. Tassā: of the upajjhāyo. The connection is that alms are obtained by whom? laddhabhikkho, or of him. Tassā: of the upajjhāyo. The connection is that alms are not obtained. Attanā laddhopī: the pi particle combines the meaning that even if obtained by the upajjhāyo. Āhariyatū: here, the tu ending is in the sense of a question, meaning, "should it be brought?" Kālo: mealtime. The connection is that when there is one who has eaten bhutto. Upakaṭṭho: near to midday.

Anantarahitāyāti ettha antaradhāyatītiantarahito,taṭṭikacammakhaṇḍādi, natthi antarahito etasmiṃ pattabhūmīnamantaretianantarahitoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘anatthatāyā’’ti. Kāḷavaṇṇakatā vā sudhābaddhā vā nirajamattikā hotīti yojanā.Tanti pattaṃ.Dhotavālikāyapīti suddhavālikāyapi.Tatthāti paṃsurajasakkharādīsu. Punatatthāti paṇṇādhārakesu. Idaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Abhimukhenāti attano abhimukhena.Saṇikanti sinnaṃ.Ante panāti cīvarassa koṭiyaṃ pana. Nikkhipantassa saddhivihārikassa cīvarassa bhogoti yojanā.

Anantarahitāyā: Here, showing the meaning of anantarahito as "that which is intervened, disappears (antaradhāyatīti antarahito)," such as a mat or a piece of leather, "there is no intervening thing in this between the ground and the bowl (natthi antarahito etasmiṃ pattabhūmīnamantareti anantarahito)," he says, "unobstructed." The connection is that it should be black clay or cemented or clean clay. Taṃ: that bowl. Dhotavālikāyapī: even with clean sand. Tattha: among dirt, dust, gravel and such. Again, tattha: in leaf-holders. The connection is that this statement is said. Abhimukhenā: facing oneself. Saṇikaṃ: wet. Ante panā: but in the edge of the robe. The connection is that the use of the robe is for the saddhivihārika who is placing it down.

Cuṇṇaṃsannetabbanti ettha cuṇṇasamodhānena netabbanti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘piṇḍi kātabbā’’ti. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ niddhūme ṭhāne’’ti imināekamantanti ettha ekasmiṃ ante ṭhāneti atthaṃ dasseti.Jantāghareti aggisālāyaṃ. Sā hi jalati dibbati aggi etthātijantā,janeti sarīrasedametthāti vājantā,sā eva gharaṃ jantāgharanti vuccati, tasmiṃ. Paripūjāvasena karīyatītiparikammanti atthena aṅgāradānādikaṃ parikammaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘parikammaṃ nāmā’’tiādi.

Cuṇṇaṃ sannetabbaṃ: Here, showing the meaning of "it should be led with the compounding of powder (cuṇṇasamodhānena netabbaṃ)," he says, "a ball should be made (piṇḍi kātabbā)." With "in a smokeless place (ekasmiṃ niddhūme ṭhāne)," he shows the meaning of ekamanta as "in a secluded place (ekasmiṃ ante ṭhāneti)." Jantāghare: in the fire-hall. For that is called jantāghara, since fire burns and shines there (sā hi jalati dibbati aggi etthāti jantā), or because it generates bodily sweat there (janeti sarīrasedametthāti vā jantā), that very thing is called gharaṃ jantāghara, in that. Showing that giving embers and so on is called parikamma in the sense that it is done in terms of complete service, he says, "parikamma means" and so on.

ti saccaṃ. Agilānena saṭṭhivassena saddhivihārikenāpi kātabbanti yojanā.Anādarenāti vattakaraṇassa anādarena.Nakārapaṭisaṃyuttesūti paṭisedhavācakena nakārena paṭisaṃyuttesu.Padesūti ‘‘na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassa antarantarā kathā opātetabbā’’tiādīsu vākyesu.Bhūmiyanti upalakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ bhittiyampi apaṭighaṃsitabbattā. ‘‘Piṭhasaṅghāṭañcā’’ti iminākavāṭapīḷanti ettha pīṭhasaddena piṭhasaṅghāṭaṃ vuccati uttarapadalopavasena vā ekadesavohāravasena vāti dasseti. ‘‘Acchupantenā’’ti iminā appaṭighaṃsantenāti ettha ghaṃsadhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti. Sammā tāyati attānañca parañca anenātisantānaṃ,tamevasantānakanti atthena kīṭakulāvakamakkaṭakasuttādi santānakaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘santānaka’’ntiādi.Ullokatoti vitānato. Tañhi uddhaṃ lucīyate bandhīyateti ullokanti vuccati, cakārassa kakāramakatvā ‘‘ulloca’’ntipi vuccati. Tosaddena ākārassa smāvacanassa kāriyabhāvaṃ dasseti.Apaharitabbanti apanetabbaṃ.‘‘Avaharitabba’’ntipi pāṭho, heṭṭhā haritabbaṃ pātetabbanti attho.

: is true. The connection is that it should be done even by a saddhivihārika who is sixty years old and not sick. Anādarenā: without respect for doing the duty. Nakārapaṭisaṃyuttesū: in those connected with the nakāra of prohibitive meaning. Padesū: in sentences such as "one should not interrupt the upajjhāyo while he is speaking (na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassa antarantarā kathā opātetabbā)" and so on. Bhūmiyaṃ: is said by way of indication, because it should not be rubbed against even the wall. With "a bench and a frame (piṭhasaṅghāṭañca)," he shows that in kavāṭapīḷa, the word pīṭha means a bench-frame, or by way of elision of the latter word, or by way of usage of a part. With "without rubbing (acchupantena)," he shows the meaning of the ghaṃsa root in appaṭighaṃsantena. That which protects oneself and others well is santānaṃ, and showing that very santānaka means a nest of insects, spiderwebs, threads, and so on, he says, "santānaka" and so on. Ullokato: from the awning. For that is called an ulloka because it is tied and bound upwards, and it is also called "ulloca" because the ca becomes a ka. He shows the state of being the effect of the tosadda on the ākāra of the particle of similarity. Apaharitabbaṃ: should be removed. Avaharitabbaṃ is also a reading, meaning it should be lowered and dropped below.

Ālokasandhibhāgāti ettha bhāgasaddassa dvandato parattā pubbapadesupi paccekaṃ yojetabboti āha ‘‘ālokasandhibhāgā ca kaṇṇabhāgā cā’’ti. Tassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘antarabāhirā’’tiādi. ‘‘Vātapānakavāṭakānī’’ti iminā ālokasandhisaddassa vātapānakavāṭakapariyāyabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Koṇā’’ti iminā kaṇṇasaddassa koṇavevacanabhāvaṃ dasseti.

Ālokasandhibhāgā: Here, he says, "light-gap sections and corner sections (ālokasandhibhāgā ca kaṇṇabhāgā cā)," because the word bhāga is after the dvanda, it should be connected individually even to the prior terms. Showing its meaning, he says, "inner and outer" and so on. With "window shutters (vātapānakavāṭakānī)," he shows that the word ālokasandhi is a synonym for window shutters. With "corners (koṇā)," he shows that the word kaṇṇa is a synonym for corner.

Etadatthamevāti yathāpaññattaṃ paññapetabbassa atthāya eva. Sace paññattaṃ ahosi, evaṃ satīti yojanā.Idanti bhittiṃ mocetvā paññāpanaṃ. Kaṭesu kiḷañjesu sārattā uttamattākaṭasārakoti vuccati.Nivattetvāti saṃharitvā.Puratthimāti ettha yakāralopena niddesoti āha ‘‘puratthimāyā’’ti.

Etadatthamevā: only for the sake of that purpose of prescribing what should be prescribed. The connection is that if it were prescribed, then if that were the case. Idaṃ: this prescribing after removing the wall. Kaṭasārako is said to be "the best because of the essence in the mats and matting (kaṭesu kiḷañjesu sārattā uttamattā kaṭasārako)." Nivattetvā: having gathered it up. Puratthimā: Here, he says, "puratthimāyā," because it is an indication with the elision of the ya.

Vūpakāsetabboti ettha kasadhātu gatyatthoti āha ‘‘aññattha netabbo’’ti. Upajjhāyaṃ gahetvā aññattha gantabboti attho.Aññatthāti aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ.Vivecetabbanti ettha diṭṭhigatato upajjhāyaṃ vivecetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘vissajjāpetabba’’nti. ‘‘Añño vattabbo’’ti vatvā tassa ākāraṃ dasseti ‘‘thera’’ntiādinā. So so bhikkhu yācitabboti sambandho.Aññena dāpetabboti attanā aññena bhikkhunā upajjhāyassa parivāso dāpetabboti attho.Kinti nu khoti kena eva upāyena dadeyya nukhoti attho. Itisaddo hi avadhāraṇattho. Aṭṭhakathāyapi imameva nayaṃ dasseti ‘‘kena nu kho upāyenā’’ti iminā.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘kinti nu kho paṭikasseyyā’’tiādivākyesu. Sattasu kammesu tividhassa ukkhepanīyakammassa garukattā vuttaṃ ‘‘ukkhepanīyaṃ akatvā’’ti. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tena hī’’tiādi.

Vūpakāsetabbo: Here, he says, "should be taken elsewhere (aññattha netabbo)," because the kasa root is in the sense of going. The meaning is that one should take the upajjhāyo and go elsewhere. Aññattha: to another place. Vivecetabbaṃ: Here, showing that one should separate the upajjhāyo from the wrong view, he says, "should be dismissed (vissajjāpetabbaṃ)." Having said "another should be requested (añño vattabbo)," he shows its manner with "thera" and so on. The connection is that that bhikkhu should be asked. Aññena dāpetabbo: the meaning is that one should have the parivāsa given to the upajjhāyo by oneself and another bhikkhu. Kinti nu kho: meaning, "how then could one give it (kena eva upāyena dadeyya nukhoti)?" For the iti word is for emphasis. The Commentary also shows this very method with "how then (kena nu kho upāyena)." Sabbattha: in all the sentences "how then should he deal with it (kinti nu kho paṭikasseyyā)" and so on. Because the ukkhepanīya kamma of three types is weighty among the seven kammas, it is said, "without doing the ukkhepanīya (ukkhepanīyaṃ akatvā)." Expanding on that very meaning, he says, "therefore (tena hī)" and so on.

Sace karontiyevāti bhikkhū sace kammaṃ karontiyeva. Punasace karontiyevāti bhikkhū sace ukkhepanīyakammaṃ karontiyeva.Athāti tasmiṃ kamme kate.Itīti evaṃ yācanena. Nanti taṃ upajjhāyaṃ.

Sace karontiyevā: if the bhikkhus are indeed doing the kamma. Again, sace karontiyevā: if the bhikkhus are indeed doing the ukkhepanīya kamma. Athā: when that kamma has been done. Itī: thus, by requesting. Not that upajjhāyo.

Samparivattakanti ettha ‘‘piṇḍukkhepaka’’ntiādīsu (pāci. 620) viya samparivattakantipadaṃ kiriyāvisesanaṃ, kapaccayo ca vicchatthoti āha ‘‘samparivattetvā samparivattetvā’’ti.Yadīti yāva. Yadisaddo hi yāvapariyāyo, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na tāva pakkamitabba’’nti. Yāva appamattakampi rajanaṃ galati, na tāva pakkamitabbanti yojanā.Visabhāgapuggalenāti visabhāgena puggalena karaṇabhūtena.Na upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchā gāmo pavisitabboti ettha na aññeneva karaṇīyena pavisitabbo. Piṇḍāya pana pavisitabboti āsaṅkā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘piṇḍāya vā’’tiādi. ‘‘Anāpucchitvā’’ti imināanāpucchāti ettha ākāro tvāpaccayassa kāriyoti dasseti.Bhikkhācāranti bhikkhāya caraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, upajjhāyena gantabbanti yojanā.Pariveṇanti upajjhāyassa pariveṇaṃ.Passatīti upajjhāyaṃ passati.

Samparivattakanti here, just as in "piṇḍukkhepaka," etc. (pāci. 620), the word samparivattakanti is an adverb, and the affix ka is for emphasis, thus he said, "having exchanged, having exchanged." Yadīti up to. The word yadi is a synonym for yāva, therefore it is said, "one should not depart yet." As long as even a small amount of impurity flows, one should not depart yet, is the construction. Visabhāgapuggalenāti by a person who is the means and of a different status. Na upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchā gāmo pavisitabboti here, one should not enter by any other means. But if there is doubt that one should enter for alms, he said, "piṇḍāya vā," etc. By "anāpucchitvā," he shows that in anāpucchāti here, the ākāra is to be done to the tvā affix. Bhikkhācāranti the place for wandering for alms, to be gone to by the preceptor, is the construction. Pariveṇanti the preceptor’s enclosure. Passatīti he sees the preceptor.

Dassanatthāya vāti asubhadassanatthāya vā. Imināpi vāsatthāya eva na gantabbanti āsaṅkaṃ nivatteti.Kammanti pakkamanassa kāraṇaṃ kammaṃ. Ananujānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvatatiya’’nti.Tanti upajjhāyaṃ.Assāti saddhivihārikassa.‘‘Na sampajjatī’’ti iminā sace sampajjati, na pakkamitabbāti dasseti.Kevalanti vinā uddesādisampajjanehi. Evarūpe upajjhāye nivārentepīti yojanā. ‘‘Gelaññato’’ti iminā vuṭṭhānasaddassa avadhiapekkhataṃ dasseti.Assāti upajjhāyassa.Aññoti attanā añño.Tassāti aññassa bhikkhussa.

Dassanatthāya vāti or for the purpose of seeing something repulsive. By this, he dispels the doubt that one should not go just for residence. Kammanti the action that is the cause of departure. Referring to non-permission, he said, "yāvatatiya"nti. Tanti to the preceptor. Assāti of the saddhivihārika. ‘‘Na sampajjatī’’ti by this, he shows that if it succeeds, one should not depart. Kevalanti without the success of instruction, etc. Even with a preceptor of such kind preventing it, is the construction. By "gelaññato," he shows that the word "vuṭṭhāna" is dependent on a limit. Assāti of the preceptor. Aññoti another than oneself. Tassāti of that other bhikkhu.

16. Saddhivihārikavattakathā
16. Explanation of the Duties Regarding a Co-Resident

67.Sammāvattanāyaṃ vinicchayo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Uddesādīhīti ādisaddena paripucchādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Saṅgahasaddassa saṅkhepagahaṇesupi vuttito ‘‘anuggaho’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā sammukhāsaṅgahoca parammukhāanuggahoca kātabbo. Āmisena vā saṅgaho, dhammena vā anuggaho. Diṭṭhadhammikatthāya vā saṅgaho, samparāyikatthāya vā anuggaho. Lokiyatthāya vā saṅgaho, lokuttaratthāya vā anuggaho kātabbo.Tatthāti yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘uddesena paripucchāya ovādena anusāsanīyā’’ti. Tattha uddisanaṃuddesoti vacanatthena pāḷivācanā uddeso nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘uddesoti pāḷivācanā’’ti. ‘‘Pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanā’’ti iminā punappunaṃ, samantato vā pāḷiyā atthassa pucchanaṃparipucchāti atthaṃ dasseti.Vatthusminti cārittavārittavatthusmiṃ.Idanti cārittaṃ. Punaidanti vārittaṃ. ‘‘Vacana’’nti iminā ovadanaṃovādoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ ‘‘idaṃ karohi, idaṃ mā karitthā’’ti vacanaṃanusāsanīnāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Punappunaṃ vacana’’nti imināanusāsanīti ettha anusaddassa naupacchinnatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sace upajjhāyassa patto hotī’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi na pakatipatto hoti, atha kho atirittapatto hotīti āha ‘‘atirekapatto’’ti.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘sace upajjhāyassa cīvaraṃ hotī’’tiādīsu padesu.Aññopīti pattacīvarehi aññopi.Samaṇaparikkhāroti chattupāhanādi samaṇaparikkhāro.Idhāti saddhivihārikavatte.Nayenāti ñāyena.Uppajjamānaupāyapariyesananti uppajjamānassa, uppajjamānatthāya vā upāyassa pariyesanaṃ.Itoti ‘‘kinti nu kho saddhivihārikassa parikkhāro uppajjiyethā’’ti pāḷito.Cīvaraṃ rajantenāti ettha rajantena upajjhāyenāti attho na daṭṭhabbo, saddhivihārikenāti attho evāti dassento āha ‘‘upajjhāyato upāyaṃ sutvā rajantenā’’ti.Upajjhāyato upāyanti upajjhāyato laddhaṃ upāyaṃ.

67.This judgment on proper conduct should be understood thus, is the construction. Uddesādīhīti by the ādi word, he includes questioning, etc. Because of the usage of the word saṅgaha even in concise collections, "anuggaho"ti is said. Or, saṅgaho should be done in his presence, and anuggaho behind his back. Or, saṅgaho by material things, and anuggaho by Dhamma. Or, saṅgaho for immediate benefit, and anuggaho for future benefit. Or, saṅgaho should be done for worldly benefit, and anuggaho for transcendental benefit. Tatthāti that which was said, "should instruct with recitation, questioning, advice." There, the reciting is uddeso, showing that the recitation of the Pāḷi is called instruction by the meaning of the word, he says, "uddesoti pāḷivācanā"ti. By "pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanā," he shows the meaning that the repeated or comprehensive questioning of the meaning of the Pāḷi is paripucchā. Vatthusminti in the matter of allowable and unallowable things. Idanti allowable. Again idanti unallowable. By "vacana," he shows the meaning of the word that the advising is ovādo. In a matter that has occurred, the saying "do this, don't do this" is called anusāsanī, is the construction. By "punappunaṃ vacana," he shows the meaning of naupacchinna of the word anu in anusāsanī. Although said generally, "sace upajjhāyassa patto hotī," it is not an ordinary bowl, but he says, "atirekapatto"ti, that it is an extra bowl. Sabbatthāti in all places, "sace upajjhāyassa cīvaraṃ hotī," etc. Aññopīti another besides bowl and robe. Samaṇaparikkhāroti the requisites of a recluse, such as an umbrella and sandals. Idhāti in the section on duties regarding a co-resident. Nayenāti by method. Uppajjamānaupāyapariyesananti the search for a means that is arising, or for the sake of something that is arising. Itoti from the Pāḷi, "kinti nu kho saddhivihārikassa parikkhāro uppajjiyetha." Cīvaraṃ rajantenāti here, the meaning should not be seen as "by the preceptor who is dyeing," the meaning is only "by the saddhivihārikena," thus showing, he says, "upajjhāyato upāyaṃ sutvā rajantenā"ti. Upajjhāyato upāyanti the means obtained from the preceptor.

Nasammāvattanādikathā
Discussion of Improper Behavior

68.Upajjhāyavattanti upajjhāyamhi vattitabbaṃ vattaṃ.Soti saddhivihāriko.Dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti assa, so vā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti yojanā.Paṇāmetabboti ettha papubba namudhātu atthapakaraṇādivasena idha apasādanatthoti āha ‘‘apasādetabbo’’ti.Adhimattanti adhikappamāṇaṃ.Gehasitapemanti mettāsinehaṃ.Vuttapaṭipakkhanayenāti kaṇhapakkhe vuttena paṭipakkhena nayena.Alaṃ paṇāmetunti ettha alaṃsaddassa arahatthapaṭikkhittesu dvīsu atthesu arahatthoti āha ‘‘yutto paṇāmetu’’nti.

68.Upajjhāyavattanti the duties to be practiced towards the preceptor. Soti the saddhivihārika. Dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti he incurs, or he incurs a dukkata, is the construction. Paṇāmetabboti here, the prefix pa before the verb namudhātu means aversion due to context, etc., thus he says, "apasādetabbo"ti, that it should be made to disappear. Adhimattanti excessive. Gehasitapemanti affection of love dwelling in the home. Vuttapaṭipakkhanayenāti by the method opposite to that stated in the dark side. Alaṃ paṇāmetunti here, of the two meanings of the word alaṃ, araha and paṭikkhitta, he says "yutto paṇāmetu"nti, that alaṃsadda means araha.

Sātisāro hotīti ettha pakatibhāvaṃ atikkamitvā saraṇaṃ pavattanaṃatisāro,doso. Saṃvijjati so etassātisātisāroti dassento āha ‘‘sadoso hotī’’ti. Tassatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘āpattiṃ āpajjatī’’ti.Āpattinti dukkaṭāpattiṃ.Tanti vattaṃ.

Sātisāro hotīti here, exceeding the natural state, the directing of memory is atisāro, fault. Existing, that is his, therefore sātisāro, showing that, he says, "sadoso hotī"ti, he is faulty. To show its meaning, it is said, "āpattiṃ āpajjatī"ti, he incurs an offense. Āpattinti a dukkata offense. Tanti that duty.

Tesanti saddhivihārikānaṃ.Vattanti bahukānaṃ saddhivihārikānaṃ vattaṃ.Sādiyanaṃ vā…pe… bālo hotīti ettha bālassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sādiyanaṃ vā asādiyanaṃ vā na jānātī’’ti. Sādiyanassa vā asādiyanassa vā ajānanattā bālo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ajānanassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bālo hotī’’ti. Bālattā sādiyanaṃ vā asādiyanaṃ vā na jānātīti vuttaṃ hoti.Tesūti bahukesu saddhivihārikesu.Tassāti vattasampannabhikkhussa.Tesanti itaresaṃ saddhivihārikānaṃ.

Tesanti of the saddhivihārikas. Vattanti the duties of many saddhivihārikas. Sādiyanaṃ vā…pe… bālo hotīti here, to show the cause of foolishness, he says, "sādiyanaṃ vā asādiyanaṃ vā na jānātī"ti, he does not know what is to be approved or disapproved. Because of not knowing what is to be approved or disapproved, he is said to be a fool. To show the cause of not knowing, it is said, "bālo hotī"ti, he is a fool. Because of being a fool, he does not know what is to be approved or disapproved, is said. Tesūti among the many saddhivihārikas. Tassāti of the bhikkhu who is accomplished in duties. Tesanti of the other saddhivihārikas.

Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthukathā
The Story of Rādha the Brahmin

69.Kiñcāpi āyasmā sāriputto jānātīti yojanā. Iminā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ajānanto pucchī’’ti āsaṅkaṃ nivāreti. Bhagavā anuññātukāmo hotīti sambandho.Panasaddo garahattho, tathā jānantopīti attho.Lahukanti hetuantogadhavisesanaṃ. Lahukattā paṭikkhipitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Assāti bhagavato, ajjhāsayanti sambandho. ‘‘Ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā’’tivacanassa yuttiṃ dassento āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ.Ayañcāti sāriputtatthero ca.Aggoti koṭiukkaṃso.Seṭṭhoti pavaro uttamo.

69.Although the venerable Sāriputta knows, is the construction. By this, he dispels the doubt, "does he ask without knowing?" Bhagavā wishes to permit, is the connection. The word pana is in the sense of censure, meaning even though knowing so. Lahukanti is a specification included within the reason. Because of the lightness, it is said having rejected. Assāti of the Blessed One, is the connection to intention. Showing the reasoning of the statement "ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā," he says, "buddhānaṃ hī"tiādi. ti truly. Ayañcāti and also Sāriputta Thera. Aggoti the highest peak. Seṭṭhoti the excellent, the best.

byattonāmāti yojanā.Tasminti vinayapiṭakaṃ vācuggatabhikkhumhi.Yassāti bhikkhuno.Suggahitanti sāṭṭhakathāya suṭṭhu gahitaṃ.Ayampīti pisaddo purimabhikkhuṃ apekkhati.Imasmiṃ attheti imasmiṃ vatthumhi, imasmiṃ visayeti attho. Byatirekānvayavasenapaṭibalaṃdassento āha ‘‘yo panā’’tiādi. Yo pana na sakkotīti sambandho. Kasmāti āha ‘‘kāsasosasemhādinā vā’’tiādi. Tattha kāso ca soso ca semho ca, te ādayo yassa gelaññassātikāsasosasemhādi,ādisaddena eḷamūgādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Oṭṭho ca danto ca jivhā ca, tā ādayo yesaṃ tāluādīnantioṭṭhadantajivhādayo,tesaṃ.Padabyañjanehīti padaakkharehi.Byañjanasaddo hettha akkharavācako.Hāpetīti galattā hāpeti.Aññathā vā vattabbanti aññena sithilādinā ākārena vā vattabbaṃ.Aññathā vadatīti aññena dhanitādiākārena vadati.Tabbiparītoti tassa apaṭibalassa viparīto bhikkhūti sambandho.Tatoti jānāpetabbato.Yanti yaṃ ākāraṃ dhātukammametaṃ,saṅghoti kāritakammametaṃ. Idha kāritakammaṃ kito vadati.

byattonāmāti is called skilled, is the construction. Tasminti in the bhikkhu who has mastered the Vinaya Piṭaka. Yassāti of which bhikkhu. Suggahitanti well grasped with its commentary. Ayampīti the word pi refers back to the previous bhikkhu. Imasmiṃ attheti in this matter, in this subject, is the meaning. Showing paṭibalaṃ by way of distinction and agreement, he says, "yo panā"tiādi. Whoever is not able, is the connection. Why? He says, "kāsasosasemhādinā vā"tiādi. There, kāso (cough), soso (dryness) and semho (phlegm), these are the beginnings of which illness, therefore kāsasosasemhādi, by the ādi word, he includes eḷamūgādayo (dumbness and stammering), etc. Oṭṭho (lips), danto (teeth) and jivhā (tongue), these are the beginnings of the palate, etc., therefore oṭṭhadantajivhādayo, of them. Padabyañjanehīti by the word syllables. The word byañjana here signifies syllable. Hāpetīti he causes to decrease by swallowing. Aññathā vā vattabbanti or it should be said in another way, in a loose manner. Aññathā vadatīti he speaks in another way, in a loud manner. Tabbiparītoti the bhikkhu who is the opposite of that incapable one, is the connection. Tatoti than being made to understand. Yanti which manner, this is the objective case, saṅghoti this is the causative objective case. Here, the causative objective case means "says."

71.Upasampannasamanantarāti ettha upasampannassa samanantarāti atthaṃ nivārento āha ‘‘upasampanno hutvāva samanantarā’’ti. Evasaddena cirakālaṃ nivatteti.Ullumpatūti ettha upubbalupadhātuyā upasaggavasena vā atthātisayavasena vā dhātūnamanekatthattā idha upubbadharadhātuyā atthe vattatīti dassento āha‘‘uddharatū’’ti. Uṭṭhāpetvā, ukkhipitvā vā dharatūti attho. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘akusalā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā’’ti iminā sahāvadhinā utyūpasaggassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kusale patiṭṭhāpetū’’ti iminā sahādhārena dharadhātussa atthaṃ dasseti. Utyūpasaggassa ukkhipanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sāmaṇerabhāvā vā uddharitvā’’ti. ‘‘Paṭiccā’’ti imināupādāyāti ettha samīpe ādiyitvāti saddatthamagahetvā saṅketatthavasena pākaṭattā tassa saṅketatthaṃ dasseti, adhippāyatthaṃ dassetīti attho.

71.Upasampannasamanantarāti here, preventing the meaning "immediately after ordination," he says, "upasampanno hutvāva samanantarā"ti. By the word eva, he prevents a long time. Ullumpatūti here, of the verb lupadhātuyā with the prefix upa, because of the excess of meaning due to the prefix or because of the many meanings of verbs, here, it exists in the sense of haradhātuyā with the prefix upa, thus showing, he says ‘‘uddharatū’’ti. Let him hold (it), having lifted up or raised. Showing that very meaning, he says, "akusalā"tiādi. There, by "akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā," he shows the meaning of the prefix ut along with the limit. By "kusale patiṭṭhāpetū," he shows the meaning of dharadhātussa along with the base. Showing the meaning of the prefix ut as lifting up, he says, "sāmaṇerabhāvā vā uddharitvā"ti, or having lifted up from the state of a novice. By "paṭiccā," here in upādāyāti without taking the meaning of the word as "taking near," because it is clear in the sense of convention, he shows that conventional meaning, meaning he shows the intended meaning.

73.Adhiṭṭhitāti ettha adhi niccavasena ṭhāti pavattatīti adhiṭṭhitāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘niccappavattinī’’ti. Kasmā cattāro paccayā nissayāti vuttāti āha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. ‘‘Cattāro’’tiādinā cattāro paccaye nissāya attabhāvo seti pavattatītinissāyāti avuttakammatthaṃ dasseti.

73.Adhiṭṭhitāti here, showing the etymological meaning that it stands or continues constantly, therefore it is established, he says, "niccappavattinī"ti, constantly continuing. Why are the four conditions said to be dependence? He says, "yasmā"tiādi. By "cattāro," etc., relying on the four conditions, the self exists, continues, therefore nissāyā, he shows the unstated objective case.

18. Ācariyavattakathā
18. Explanation of the Duties Regarding a Teacher

75.Kintāyanti ettha ekāralopavasena sandhi hotīti āha ‘‘kiṃte aya’’nti. ‘‘Ovaditabboti’’imināovadiyoti ettha ṇyapaccayassa kammatthaṃ dasseti.‘‘Tadatthāyā’’ti iminā ‘‘yadidaṃ gaṇabandhika’’nti uttaravākye yaṃsaddaṃ disvā pubbavākye taṃsaddaṃ ñāpeti, tassa bāhullassa atthāyāti attho.

75.Kintāyanti here, there is a euphonic combination by way of the elision of one vowel, thus he says, "kiṃte aya"nti. By "ovaditabboti," he shows the objective case of the ṇya affix here in ovadiyoti, he should be advised. ‘‘Tadatthāyā’’ti by this, seeing the word "yaṃ" in the subsequent sentence "yadidaṃ gaṇabandhika," he indicates the word "taṃ" in the previous sentence, the meaning is "for the sake of that abundance."

76.Soti pasūro paribbājako.Tenāti udāyittherena.Sahadhammikanti saha dhammena kāraṇena. Byatto tāva pubbe vuttalakkhaṇo hotu, paṭibalo pana kathaṃ ñātabboti āha ‘‘yo panā’’tiādi. Yo pana sakkotīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.Etanti paṭibalattaṃ, ‘‘pañcahi…pe… vinetu’’ntivacanaṃ vā.

76.Soti the former wanderer. Tenāti by Udāyī Thera. Sahadhammikanti together with Dhamma as a cause. Let him be skilled with the characteristics previously stated, but how should it be known if he is capable? He says, "yo panā"tiādi. Whoever is able, is the connection. ti truly. Etanti this capability, or the statement "pañcahi…pe… vinetu."

77.Titthiyapakkhasaṅkantesūti titthiyasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanassa paṭipakkhaṃ saṅkamantesu.Ācārasamācārasikkhāpanakanti ativiya caritabbaṃ ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ sikkhāpanakaṃ. Iminā ācāraṃ sikkhāpetītiācariyoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Nāmamattamevāti ‘‘ācariyo’’ti vā ‘‘antevāsiko’’ti vā nāmamattameva.Nānanti upajjhāyato vā saddhivihārikato vā nānaṃ.

77.Titthiyapakkhasaṅkantesūti when those counted as sectarians turn against the dispensation. Ācārasamācārasikkhāpanakanti teaching highly proper conduct, the ābhisamācārikasīla. By this, he shows the etymological meaning that he teaches conduct, therefore he is ācariyo. Nāmamattamevāti just the name, "ācariyo" or "antevāsiko." Nānanti different from the preceptor or from the co-resident.

20. Paṇāmanākhamāpanākathā
20. Forcing Out and Asking Forgiveness

80.Yaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Nissayantevāsikena kātabbanti yojanā.Pabbajjāupasampadādhammantevāsikehīti pabbajjantevāsikena ca upasampadantevāsikena ca dhammantevāsikena ca.Etesanti pabbajjāupasampadādhammantevāsikānaṃ.Etesūti etesu tīsu antevāsikesu.Ācariyassāti pabbajjantevāsiko pabbajjācariyassa, upasampadantevāsiko upasampadācariyassāti attho.Samīpeti nissayācariyassa ca dhammācariyassa ca āsanne.Tasmāti yasmā antevāsikena ācariyamhi sammā vattitabbaṃ, tasmā.Ācariyenāpīti nissayapabbajjā upasampadā dhammācariyenāpi. Ovādācariyo tesu saṅgahaṃ gacchati.Tesūti catūsu antevāsikesu.

80.The characteristics that have been stated, is the connection. Should be done by one under dependence, is the construction. Pabbajjāupasampadādhammantevāsikehīti by the co-resident who has received ordination, and by the co-resident who has learned Dhamma. Etesanti of these co-residents who have received ordination and who have learned Dhamma. Etesūti among these three co-residents. Ācariyassāti the co-resident who has received ordination is of the ordination teacher, the co-resident who has received higher ordination is of the higher ordination teacher, is the meaning. Samīpeti near the teacher of dependence and the teacher of Dhamma. Tasmāti because the co-resident should behave properly towards the teacher, therefore. Ācariyenāpīti by the teacher of dependence, ordination, higher ordination, and Dhamma. The advising teacher is included among them. Tesūti among the four co-residents.

22. Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathā
22. Reversal of Dependence
Āṇattivinicchayo
Decision on Command

83.‘‘Nissayapaṭipassaddhīsū’’ti samūhādhāro. ‘‘Upajjhāyo pakkanto vātiādīsū’’ti avayavādhāro. ‘‘Vippavasitukāmo’’ti iminā nirālayabhāvaṃ dasseti.Evaṃ gateti evaṃ upajjhāye gateti yojanā.Aññadāpīti aññasmimpi kāle. Upajjhāyena pavāsitakāleti attho.Ekasambhogaparibhogoti attanā vā upajjhāyena vā eko paccayasambhogo ca dhammaparibhogo ca.Ekadivasampīti pisaddo garahattho, dvihādikaṃ pana pagevāti attho.Parihāro natthīti āpattiparihāro natthi, āpattiyā pariharaṇaṃ apanayanaṃ natthīti adhippāyo.Lajjī pesaloti lajjī hutvā piyasīlo bhikkhūti sambandho.Tadahevāti tasmiṃ upajjhāyassa pakkantaahani eva.Tathāti yathā ‘‘upajjhāyo lahuṃ āgamissatī’’ti pucchati, tathā ‘‘ahaṃ lahuṃ āgamissāmī’’ti vuttanti attho.Sace vadatīti sace ācariyo vadatīti yojanā.Assāti bhikkhussa.Sabhāgatanti lajjipesalabhāvaṃ.

83.“Nissayapaṭipassaddhīsū”ti is a group base. “Upajjhāyo pakkanto vātiādīsū”ti is a part base. “Vippavasitukāmo”ti by this, he shows the state of being without reliance. Evaṃ gateti when the preceptor has gone thus, is the construction. Aññadāpīti at another time too. Meaning when the preceptor has gone away. Ekasambhogaparibhogoti one shared enjoyment of requisites and enjoyment of Dhamma by oneself or by the preceptor. Ekadivasampīti the word pi is in the sense of censure, but if it is two or more days, it is even worse. Parihāro natthīti there is no avoidance of offense, the meaning is that there is no avoidance or removal of offense. Lajjī pesaloti a bhikkhu who is modest and kind, is the connection. Tadahevāti on that very day that the preceptor departed. Tathāti just as he asks "upajjhāyo lahuṃ āgamissatī," so also it was said "ahaṃ lahuṃ āgamissāmī," is the meaning. Sace vadatīti if the teacher says, is the construction. Assāti of the bhikkhu. Sabhāgatanti the state of being modest and kind.

Yāva āgamanāti upajjhāyassa yāva āgamanā.Nanti upajjhāyaṃ. ‘‘Vāsentiyevā’’tipade kāritakammaṃ.Tatthāti upajjhāyassa gataṭṭhāne.Tenāti upajjhāyena.Pavattīti pavattanaṃ. Nadīpūrena vā upaddutoti sambandho. Nadīpūrattā udakosakkanaṃ āgameti, corādīnaṃ upaddutattā sahāye pariyesati.Soti upajjhāyo.

Yāva āgamanāti until the preceptor arrives. Nanti the preceptor. In the words "vāsentiyevā," it is the causative objective case. Tatthāti in the place where the preceptor has gone. Tenāti by the preceptor. Pavattīti continuation. He is troubled by the flood of the river, is the connection. Because of the flood of the river, he expects the rising of the water, because of being troubled by thieves, etc., he seeks a companion. Soti the preceptor.

āṇattīti vacanatthena nissayapaṇāmanā āṇattīti vuccatīti dasseti.Nissayapaṇāmanāti nissayassa upajjhācariyassa paṇāmanā. Tasmā paṇāmito hotīti sambandho. ‘‘Āpucchītiādinā’’ti ettha ādisaddena ‘‘mā maṃ susānagamanaṃ āpucchī’’tiādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Tenāti saddhivihārikena.Khamāpetabboti titikkhāpetabbo.

Āṇattīti: The word "āṇattī" indicates that making oneself compliant is called āṇatti, thus it shows. Nissayapaṇāmanā: Making oneself compliant to the mentor or teacher. Therefore, the connection is that one becomes compliant. "Āpucchītiādinā": Here, the word "ādi" includes examples like "mā maṃ susānagamanaṃ āpucchī". Tenā: By the saddhivihārika. Khamāpetabbo: Should be caused to forgive.

Tāvāti mahātherehi, mahātherānaṃ vā paṭhamaṃ.Aññatthāti upajjhāyassa vihārato aññaṃ vihāraṃ.Appevāti api eva nāma khameyyāti yojanā.Tatrevāti aññattheva.Dubbhikkhādidosenāti ettha ādisaddena ñātiviyogādidoso gahetabbo.Taṃyevāti attanā vasitaṃ tameva ṭhānaṃ.Aññassāti upajjhāyato aññassa bhikkhussāti sambandho. Iminā upajjhāyena pariccattattā upajjhāyasamodhāne nissayapaṭippassaddhi natthīti dīpeti.

Tāvā: First by the elder monks, or to the elder monks. Aññatthā: To a monastery other than the preceptor's monastery. Appevā: Perhaps he might forgive. Tatrevā: In that other place. Dubbhikkhādidosenā: Here, the word "ādi" should include faults such as separation from relatives. Taṃyevā: That same place where he lived himself. Aññassā: To a bhikkhu other than the preceptor. With this, it indicates that because he is abandoned by the preceptor, there is no relinquishment of dependence in the reconciliation of the preceptor.

Samodhānavinicchayo
Samodhānavinicchayo

Āpucchitvāti =00 antevāsikaṃ āpucchitvā.Tatrāpīti ācariyantevāsikesupi.Kadāti kasmiṃ kāle.Sāyanhe vā rattiṃvāti ajja sāyanhe vā rattiṃ vā.Taṃkhaṇeyevāti tasmiṃ sampaṭicchanakkhaṇeyeva.

Āpucchitvā: Having asked the resident disciple. Tatrāpī: Even among the teacher and resident disciples. Kadā: At what time? Sāyanhe vā rattiṃvā: Today in the evening or at night. Taṃkhaṇeyevā: At the very moment of receiving.

So cāti antevāsiko ca.Tatoti gāmato.Sugatoti suṭṭhu gato, nissayo paṭippassambhatīti adhippāyo.Athāpīti puna ca paraṃ. Āpucchitvā pakkamane vinicchayaṃ dassetvā āpucchitvā pakkamane taṃ dassento āha ‘‘ācariyaṃ anāpucchā’’tiādi.Upacārasīmātikkameti upacārasīmāya atikkame sati, atikkamanahetu vāti yojanā. Ettha caupacārasīmānāma parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepoyeva, aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ.

So cā: And that resident disciple. Tato: From the village. Sugato: Well gone, the intention is that the dependence is relinquished. Athāpī: Furthermore. Having shown the judgment on departing after asking, he says "ācariyaṃ anāpucchā" etc., showing that on departing without asking. Upacārasīmātikkame: When the boundary of attendance is crossed, or because of the cause of crossing. And here, upacārasīmā means the boundary of the enclosed monastery itself, or for the unenclosed, the place suitable for enclosure.

Sāyanhe vā rattibhāge vāti ajja sāyanhe vā rattibhāge vā.Sveti suve.

Sāyanhe vā rattibhāge vā: Today in the evening or in the night. Sve: Tomorrow.

Bahisīmanti upacārasīmato bahi.Tatoti bahisīmato.Dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānanti antevāsikato dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ.Atikkamitvāti upacārasīmato bahi antevāsikasaddhivihārikānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānato atikkamitvā.

Bahisīma: Outside the boundary of attendance. Tato: From outside the boundary. Dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātāna: Within two throw's of a clod from the resident disciple. Atikkamitvā: Having gone beyond the dwelling place of the resident disciples and co-residents outside the boundary of attendance.

Muccitukāmoti antevāsikamhā muccitukāmo eva.Paṇāmetīti kāyavācāhi paṇāmeti.Sālayoti ācariye sāpekkho. ‘‘Nirālayo’’ti vatvā tassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na dānī’’tiādi.Evampīti dhure nikkhittepi. Ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepe sati, dhuranikkhepahetu vā paṭippassambhatīti yojanā. Paṇāmitena paṭipajjitabbanti sambandho.

Muccitukāmo: Wishing to be released from the resident disciple. Paṇāmetī: He makes himself compliant with body and speech. Sālayo: Dependent on the teacher. Saying "Nirālayo," to show its meaning, it is said "na dānī" etc. Evampī: Even when the burden is cast off. When the burden is cast off by both, or because of the cause of casting off the burden, it is relinquished. It is connected with "paṇāmitena paṭipajjitabbanti".

Ācariyanti nissayācariyaṃ. Cetiyaṃ vā vandantaṃ upajjhāyanti sambandho, maggappaṭipannaṃ vā upajjhāyanti yojanā.Dūrattāti dūrabhāvato.Uparipāsādeti pāsādassa upari.Tanti upajjhāyaṃ. Nisinnaṃ upajjhāyanti sambandho.

Ācariyaṃ: The dependence-teacher. The connection is that he bows to a cetiya or the preceptor. Or the connection is that it is the preceptor who is on the path. Dūrattā: Because of the distance. Uparipāsāde: Above the palace. Taṃ: That preceptor. The connection is that it is the seated preceptor.

Savanavasena samodhāne vinicchayo evaṃ veditabboti yojanā. Upajjhāyassa saddanti sambandho.

The judgment on reconciliation should be understood in this way in terms of hearing. The connection is to the preceptor's sound.

23. Upasampādetabbapañcakakathā
23. Upasampādetabbapañcakakathā

84.Idāni =01 yaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Saṅkhepatoti aṅgāni anuddharitvā samāsato.Tatthāti yaṃ ‘‘pañcahi bhikkhave aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā’’tiādimāha, tattha.Aguṇaṅgehīti guṇavirahitehi aṅgehi.Soti bhikkhu.Na upasampādetabbanti ettha kammavācācariyena hutvā na upasampādetabbanti āsaṅkā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘upajjhāyena hutvā na upasampādetabba’’nti.Etthāti etesu pañcakesu.Ādīsūti ettha pubbo nidassanattho itisaddo lopo hoti. Itiādīsūti hi attho.Ayuttavasenāti ananurūpavasena.Yoti bhikkhu.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Pare ca samādapetunti sambandho.Tatthāti sīlakkhandhādike.Pariharatīti parisaṃ parissayato harati apaneti.Tassāti bhikkhuno. ‘‘Sīlādīhī’’tipadaṃ ‘‘parihāyatiyevā’’tipade apādānaṃ, ‘‘na vaḍḍhatī’’tipade karaṇaṃ.Tasmātiādi laddhaguṇaṃ.Tenāti bhikkhunā. Kasmā āpattiaṅgavasena na vuttanti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi.ti yasmā.Tassevāti khīṇāsavasseva.Na vadeyyāti khīṇāsavānaṃ anabhiratiyā anuppannattā na vadeyya. Yadi na khīṇāsavasseva upajjhāyācariyabhāvo anuññāto, atha kasmā khīṇāsavapañcako vuttoti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Yasmā na parihāyatīti sambandho.

84. Now, the connection is that the characteristic that was stated. Saṅkhepato: Briefly, without extracting the parts. Tatthā: There, in what he said beginning with "pañcahi bhikkhave aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā". Aguṇaṅgehī: With parts devoid of qualities. So: That bhikkhu. Na upasampādetabba: Here, lest there be a concern that it should not be conferred by being a kammavācā teacher, he says "upajjhāyena hutvā na upasampādetabba". Etthā: In these five sets. Ādīsū: Here, the first is for illustration; the word "iti" is elided. The meaning is "iti-ādīsu". Ayuttavasenā: In an inappropriate manner. Yo: That bhikkhu. Hī: Truly, or because. The connection is that others also bring to agreement. Tatthā: In the aggregate of moral virtue, etc. Pariharatī: Protects or removes the assembly from danger. Tassā: Of that bhikkhu. The phrase "sīlādīhī" is an ablative in the phrase "parihāyatiyevā" and an instrumental in the phrase "na vaḍḍhatī". Tasmā etc. the acquired qualities. Tenā: By that bhikkhu. He says "na hī" etc., why it was not stated in terms of offenses. Hī: Because. Tassevā: Of the one who is of extinguished outflows alone. Na vadeyyā: Because non-delight and non-arising for those of extinguished outflows, he should not speak. If the state of preceptor or teacher is not permitted for one who is of extinguished outflows alone, then why was the fivefold of those with extinguished outflows stated? He says, "yasmā panā" etc. The connection is "yasmā na parihāyati".

Antaggāhikāyāti sassatucchedasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ lāmakaṃ gaṇhāti, gaṇhāpetīti vā antaggāhikā, tāya.Diṭṭhiyāti micchādiṭṭhiyā.Yattakaṃ sutanti bhikkhunovādakasikkhāpade (pāci. aṭṭha. 145-147) vuttaṃ yattakaṃ sutaṃ.Tenāti sutena ऋ. Yaṃ āpattādi tena jānitabbanti yojanā.

Antaggāhikāyā: Antaggāhikā is that which grasps or causes to grasp at an extreme, a low thing, reckoned as eternalism or annihilationism, by that. Diṭṭhiyā: By wrong view. Yattakaṃ sutaṃ: The extent of what is heard stated in the monks' admonition training rule (pāci. aṭṭha. 145-147). Tenā: By that which is heard. It should be known by that offense etc.

Āpattiṃna jānātīti ettha āpattiṃ āpannoti na jānātīti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘idaṃ nāmā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘āpanno’’ti iminā ‘‘āpatti’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘āpanno’’tipāṭhasesena yojetabbanti dasseti.

Āpattiṃ na jānātī: Here, showing the meaning that he does not know that he has committed an offense, he says "idaṃ nāmā" etc. There, with "āpanno," he shows that the word "āpatti" should be connected with the remainder of the reading "āpanno."

Ābhisamācārikāyāti ettha ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannasīlato abhivisesena sammā caritabbantiābhisamācāraṃ,khandhakapariyāpannaṃ vattapaṭipattisīlaṃ, taṃ ārabbha paññattāābhisamācārikā,khandhakapariyāpannā sikkhā, tāya.Ādibrahmacāriyakāyāti ettha maggasaṅkhātassa brahmacariyassa ādi mariyādo ādibrahmacariyo, tasmiṃ pavattā ādibrahmacariyakā =02, ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannā sikkhā, tāya.Sekkhapaṇṇattiyanti sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sikkhā, sā eva bhagavatā paññattattā sekkhapaṇṇatti. Atha vā sikkhanaṃ sikkhā, tāya sikkhanatthāya bhagavatā paññapīyatīti sekkhapaṇṇatti ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannasikkhāyeva, tassaṃ.Abhidhammeti ettha suttantapāḷito abhi atireko, abhivisiṭṭho vā dhammo abhidhammoti vutte nāmarūpaparicchedakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakanti āha ‘‘nāmarūpaparicchede’’ti.Abhivinayeti ettha abhibhavitvā kāyavācaṃ vinetīti abhivinayo, abhibhavitvā kāyavācaṃ vineti ettha, etenāti vā abhivinayoti vutte vinayapiṭakanti āha ‘‘sakale vinayapiṭake’’ti.Sabbatthāti sabbesu padesu, sabbesaṃ vā padānaṃ. Attho daṭṭhabboti yojanā. ‘‘Kāraṇenā’’ti ettha kāraṇasaddena‘‘dhammato’’ti ettha dhammasaddassa sabhāvatthādayo nivāretvā kāraṇatthataṃ dīpeti, enasaddena topaccayassa visesanatthaṃ.Itīti evaṃ yathāvuttanayenāti attho.Catuttheti catutthapañcake. Catutthapañcakato tīṇi padāni, pañcamapañcakato dve padāni gahetvā pañcakaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘cattāro pañcakā’’ti. Aṭṭhasu pañcakesūti sambandho.

Ābhisamācārikāyā: Here, abhivisesena sammā caritabbantiābhisamācāraṃ,khandhakapariyāpannaṃ vattapaṭipattisīlaṃ is proper conduct especially well from virtue included in both Vibhaṅgas, ābhisamācārikā,khandhakapariyāpannā sikkhā is the training prescribed regarding that, the virtue of practice of duties included in the Khandhakas, by that. Ādibrahmacāriyakāyā: Here, ādibrahmacariyo is the beginning limit of the brahmacariya reckoned as the path; ādibrahmacariyakā is that which prevails in that, the training included in both Vibhaṅgas =02, by that. Sekkhapaṇṇattiya: Sikkha is training in the sense of what should be trained in; that itself is sekkhapaṇṇatti because it is prescribed by the Blessed One. Or sikkha is training; sekkhapaṇṇatti is what is prescribed by the Blessed One for the sake of that training, by that, in that sikkha included in both Vibhaṅgas. Abhidhamme: Here, saying that abhidhamma is the Dhamma that is abhi, exceeding or especially distinguished, from the Suttanta-pāḷi, he says "nāmarūpaparicchede," meaning the Abhidhamma Piṭaka that distinguishes name and form. Abhivinaye: Here, saying that abhivinaya is that which overcomes and trains body and speech, or it overcomes and trains body and speech, or by this is abhivinaya, he says "sakale vinayapiṭake," meaning the Vinaya Piṭaka. Sabbatthā: In all places, or of all words. The meaning should be seen. In "Kāraṇenā," with the word "kāraṇa," he indicates the causal meaning, preventing the meanings such as the nature of the word Dhamma in "dhammato", with the suffix "ena," the special meaning of the suffix "to". Itī: Thus, in the manner stated. Catutthe: In the fourth set of five. Taking three terms from the fourth set of five and two terms from the fifth set of five, making it a set of five, it is said "cattāro pañcakā". The connection is in the eight sets of five.

Iti soḷasapañcakavinicchaye yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation in the sixteen-fold determination of sets of five.

24. Upasampādetabbachakkakathā
24. Upasampādetabbachakkakathā

85.Tanti ūnadasavassapadaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu chakkesu.Tatthāti chakkesu. ‘‘Pātimokkhāni vitthārenā’’ti vuttattā vibhaṅgavasena gahetabbānīti āha ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgavasena vuttānī’’ti. Mātikāvibhaṅgavasena suṭṭhu vibhajitabbānītisuvibhattāni,vācuggatavasena sundarā pavatti etesantisuppavattīni,suttato anubyañjanato suṭṭhu vinicchitabbānītisuvinicchitabbānīti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mātikāvibhaṅgavasenā’’tiādi.

85. Taṃ: That term "less than ten years old". Sabbatthā: In all sets of six. Tatthā: In the sets of six. Because it is said "Pātimokkhāni vitthārena," he says "ubhatovibhaṅgavasena vuttāni," meaning they should be taken in terms of the Vibhaṅga. Suvibhattāni are well distinguished in terms of the Mātikā Vibhaṅga, suppavattīni are of beautiful occurrence in terms of recitation, suvinicchitabbāni are well determined from the suttas and minor characteristics; showing the meaning, he says "mātikāvibhaṅgavasenā" etc.

25. Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathā
25. Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathā

86.Yo panāti yo pana aññatitthiyapubbo.Aññopīti pasūrato aparopi.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Tasminti aññatitthiyapubbe.Tatthāti ‘‘yo so bhikkhave aññopī’’tiādivacane.Ayanti parivāso.Naggaparibbājakassevāti vatvā tassa bhedaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ājīvakassa vā acelakassa vā’’ti. Tatthaājīvakoupari ekameva vatthaṃ upakacchake pavesetvā paridahati, heṭṭhā naggo.Acelakopana sabbena sabbaṃ naggoyeva.Sopīti =03 naggaparibbājakopi.Vālakambalādīnanti vālena kataṃ kambalaṃ, ādisaddena kesakambalādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Assāti paribbājakassa.Aññassāti naggaparibbājakato aparassa.Paṇḍaraṅgādikassāti paṇḍaraṃ setavatthaṃ aṅge sarīre etassatthītipaṇḍaraṅgo,ādisaddena nīlaṅgādayo saṅgaṇhāti.

86. Yo panā: Whoever was formerly of another sect. Aññopī: Another also, other than a new-born. Idhā: In this Dispensation. Tasmiṃ: In that formerly of another sect. Tatthā: There, in the statement beginning with "yo so bhikkhave aññopī". Ayaṃ: This is the probation. Naggaparibbājakassevā: Saying this, to show its distinction, it is said "ājīvakassa vā acelakassa vā". There, ājīvako puts only one garment above, inserting it in the armpit, and is naked below. Acelako, however, is completely naked. Sopī: Even that naked wanderer =03. Vālakambalādīnaṃ: A blanket made of hair; with the word "ādi," he includes hair-blankets, etc. Assā: Of the wanderer. Aññassā: Of another than the naked wanderer. Paṇḍaraṅgādikassā: Paṇḍaraṅgo is one who has a white garment on the body; with the word "ādi," he includes those with blue garments, etc.

Evanti iminā kesamassuoropanādinā. Pabbājentehi bhikkhūhīti sambandho.Tasminti aññatitthiyapubbe, nisinneyevāti yojanā. Anādare cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Tassāti aññatitthiyapubbassa.Nayimeti na ime, bhikkhūti sambandho.Tanti aññatitthiyapubbaṃ.

Evaṃ: In this way, with the shaving of hair and beard, etc. The connection is to the bhikkhus who ordain. Tasmiṃ: In that formerly of another sect, while still sitting. This is a locative absolute of disregard. Tassā: Of that formerly of another sect. Nayime: Not these; the connection is to the bhikkhus. Taṃ: That formerly of another sect.

87.‘‘Evaṃ kho…pe… anārādhako’’ti ayaṃ kathā mātikāti yojanā.Assāti aññatitthiyapubbassa.Tassevāti tassāyeva mātikāya.Tatthāti vibhaṅge.Atikālenāti ettha bhattakiccaṃ katvā vattakaraṇavelāyeva atikālo nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘vattakaraṇavelāyamevā’’ti. Iminā bhummatthe karaṇavacanantipi dasseti.Tatthevāti kulagharesuyeva.Aññadatthūti ekaṃsena, ‘‘karonto’’ti iminā pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti. Evampi karonto aññatitthiyapubboti yojanā. ‘‘Sampādako’’ti imināanārādhakoti ettha ārādhasaddassa sādhanatthaṃ dasseti, tosanatthādayo nivatteti.

87. "Evaṃ kho…pe… anārādhako": This story is the matrix. Assā: Of the one formerly of another sect. Tassevā: Of that same matrix. Tatthā: In the Vibhaṅga. Atikālenā: Here, showing that the time-beyond is the time for doing duties immediately after having done the meal duty, he says "vattakaraṇavelāyamevā". With this, he also shows that it is a locative in the sense of ground. Tatthevā: In those same families. Aññadatthū: Certainly, with "karonto," he indicates the remainder of the reading. Even doing this, he is one formerly of another sect. With "Sampādako," here, he shows the meaning of "sādhanatthaṃ" in the word ārādha in "anārādhako", he prevents tosanattha etc.

vesiyā,sobhaṇarūpasaṅkhātaṃ vesaṃ dhāretīti vāvesiyā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sulabhajjhācārā’’tiādi. Āmisoyeva kiñjakkho appamattakaṭṭhenātiāmisakiñjakkho,visesanaparapado. Atha vā āmiso ca tato añño kiñjakkho caāmisakiñjakkhaṃ,tassa sampadānaṃāmisakiñjakkhasampadānaṃ. Kiñjakkhasaddo kesarasseva mukhyato vācako, appamattakassa pana rūḷhīvasena.Vidhavāti ettha dhavasaddo patinoyeva vācako, na rukkhavisesassāti dassento āha ‘‘matapatikā vā’’tiādi. Imehi padehi matavasena vā pavutthavasena vā vigato dhavo etāsaṃ, dhavena vā vigatātividhavāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.ti vidhavā. Yobbanapattattā vā yobbanātītattā vā thullā mahantā kumārikātithullakumārikāti dassento āha ‘‘yobbanapattā’’tiādi.Paṇḍakāti ettha āsittapaṇḍakādīsu pañcasu paṇḍakesu napuṃsakapaṇḍakovādhippetoti āha ‘‘napuṃsakā’’ti.Samānapabbajjāti bhikkhūhi samānapabbajjā.Tatoti vissāsato.

vesiyā, or vesiyā is one who wears a guise reckoned as beautiful form. Therefore, it is said "sulabhajjhācārā" etc. Āmisakiñjakkho, is one whose livelihood is alms, whose essence is trifling. It is a special dependent compound. Or āmisakiñjakkhaṃ, alms and another trifling thing from that, āmisakiñjakkhasampadānaṃ, is the giving of that. The word Kiñjakkha primarily denotes filaments, but conventionally, it is of a trifling thing. Vidhavā: Here, showing that the word dhava denotes only husband and not a specific tree, he says "matapatikā vā" etc. With these terms, he shows the meaning of the word vidhavā as "one whose husband is gone due to death or absence, or gone by the husband". Tā: Those widows. Thullakumārikā is a fat, large maiden who is in the prime of youth or past the prime of youth, showing that, he says "yobbanapattā" etc. Paṇḍakā: Here, among the five types of eunuchs such as āsittapaṇḍaka, he intends the napuṃsaka eunuch, he says "napuṃsakā". Samānapabbajjā: Of those ordained together with the bhikkhus. Tato: From confidence.

Tatthāti vesiyādīsu.Tāsanti vesiyānaṃ.Soti aññatitthiyapubbo.Sabbatthāti sabbesu =04 vidhavādīsu. Gantabbataṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Tathāti yathā gantabbattaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā.

Tatthā: In those prostitutes, etc. Tāsaṃ: Of those prostitutes. So: That formerly of another sect. Sabbatthā: In all widows, etc. =04 Showing that it is to be gone to, he says "sace panā" etc. Tathā: As it is said that it is to be gone to, so.

Uccāvacānīti ettha uddhaṃ cayati vaḍḍhatītiuccaṃ,cayato avagato viyogotiavacaṃ. Uccañca avacañcauccāvacānīti vacanatthena mahantakhuddakatthoti āha ‘‘mahantakhuddakānī’’ti. ‘‘Kammānī’’ti iminā ‘‘karaṇīyānī’’tipadassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Taṃdassanena ca kattabbānītikaraṇīyānīti vacanattho kātabbo.Tatthāti mahantakhuddakesu kammesu.Tattha na dakkhoti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tesu tesu navakammesū’’ti. ‘‘Uṭṭhānavīriyasampanno’’ti iminā natthi alaso kosajjaṃ etassātianalasoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tatrāti ettha trapaccayo sattamyatthe vicchājotakoti āha ‘‘tesu tesū’’ti. ‘‘Ṭhānuppattikāya vīmaṃsāyā’’ti vuttavacanassatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘idameva’’ntiādi. ‘‘Tasmiṃyeva khaṇe uppannapaññāyā’’ti iminā ‘‘ṭhānuppattikāyā’’ti etthaṭhānasaddo taṅkhaṇatthoti dasseti.Alaṃ kātunti etthaalaṃsaddo bhūsanavāraṇapariyattasaṅkhātesu tīsu atthesu pariyattatthoti āha ‘‘kātuṃ samattho’’ti.

Uccāvacānī: Here, uddhaṃ cayati vaḍḍhatīti is uccaṃ, cayaṃto avagato viyogoti is avacaṃ. Uccañca avacañca uccāvacānī with this word meaning, saying that it means large and small, he says "mahantakhuddakānī". With "Kammānī," he shows the form of the word "karaṇīyānī". And with that showing, the meaning of the word karaṇīyānī should be done as "kattabbānī". Tatthā: In those large and small tasks. Tattha na dakkho: Here, to show the scope of the word "tassa," it is said "tesu tesu navakammesū". With "Uṭṭhānavīriyasampanno," he shows the meaning of the word analaso as "one who has no idleness or sloth". Tatrā: Here, the suffix "tra" is in the sense of the seventh case, it shines forth, he says "tesu tesū". Showing the meaning of the statement "Ṭhānuppattikāya vīmaṃsāyā," he says "idameva" etc. With "Tasmiṃyeva khaṇe uppannapaññāyā," here, he shows that the word ṭhāna in "ṭhānuppattikāyā" means that moment. Alaṃ kātuṃ: Here, the word alaṃ is in the sense of sufficiency among the meanings of embellishment, prevention, and sufficiency, he says "kātuṃ samattho".

Tibbacchandoti tikhiṇachando. ‘‘Balavacchando’’ti iminā adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti.Lokiyasamādhibhāvanāyāti lokiyāya aṭṭhasamāpattisaṅkhātāya samādhibhāvanāya.

Tibbacchando: Sharp desire. With "Balavacchando," he shows the meaning of intention. Lokiyasamādhibhāvanāyā: By the development of mundane concentration reckoned as the eight attainments.

Idhāgatoti imasmiṃ sāsane āgato.Titthāyatanasāmikassāti taranti uplavanti sattā ummujjanimujjaṃ karonti etthātititthaṃ,dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Tameva āyatanaṃ diṭṭhigatikānantititthāyatanaṃ. Atha vā titthametesamatthītititthino,tesamāyatanaṃ titthāyatanaṃ, tassa sāmiko titthāyatanasāmiko, tassa.Tassa diṭṭhiyāti etthadiṭṭhisaddo laddhipariyāyoti āha ‘‘tassa santakāya laddhiyā’’ti. Kasmā sā laddhi ‘‘khantī’’ti ca ‘‘rucī’’ti ca ‘‘ādāyo’’ti ca vuccatīti āha ‘‘idānī’’tiādi. Sāyeva laddhi khamati ceva ruccati ca gahitā cāti yojanā.Tassa titthakarassāti katvatthe sāmivacanaṃ.Tassāti titthāyatanasāmikassa.Bhaññamānāyāti bhaṇiyamānāya.Anabhiraddhoti ettha anabhirādhito aparitositacittoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aparipuṇṇasaṅkappo, no paggahitacitto’’ti.Yadidanti yaṃ idaṃ ‘‘anattamanatta’’nti vā ‘‘attamanatta’’nti vā sambandho. Iminā ‘‘ida’’ntipadassa aniyamaṃ dasseti.Imeti bhikkhū. Yañca anattamanattanti yojanā.Tassevāti aññatitthiyapubbassa eva anattamanattanti sambandho.Idanti dve attamanattāni, dve anattamanattānīti catubbidhaṃ idaṃ dhammajātaṃ.Saṅghāṭanīyanti saṅghaṭitabbaṃ, sannicayaṃ kātabbanti attho. ‘‘Anārādhake’’tiādināanārādhanīyasminti =05 ettha na ārādheti vattaṃ anena kammenātianārādhanīyanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Idanti catubbidhaṃ.Liṅganti kāraṇaṃ.Lakkhaṇanti cihanaṃ.Itoti aṭṭhaṅgato nīhaṭenāti sambandho.Vuttavipallāsenāti kaṇhapakkhe vuttaviparītena.

Idhāgato means come into this Dispensation. Titthāyatanasāmikassā means beings cross over, float, do diving and resurfacing in this, therefore it is a tittha, the sixty-two views. That itself is the āyatana for those who move according to views, therefore it is titthāyatana. Or else, these have a tittha, therefore they are titthinos, their āyatana is titthāyatana, the owner of that is titthāyatanasāmiko, of that. Tassa diṭṭhiyā here, the word diṭṭhi is a synonym for doctrine, therefore he said, "to his own doctrine." Why is that doctrine called "khantī" (acceptance), "rucī" (liking), and "ādāyo" (adoption)? He said, "now," etc. That very doctrine is both acceptable and pleasing and is adopted, this is the connection. Tassa titthakarassā the possessive case in the sense of making. Tassā of the titthāyatanasāmika. Bhaññamānāyā being spoken. Anabhiraddho here, showing the meaning as one whose mind is not delighted, not satisfied, he said, "with an unfulfilled intention, his mind not inclined." Yadida which is this, the connection is either "anattamanatta" or "attamanatta." By this, he shows the indefiniteness of the word "ida." Ime these monks. And that which is anattamanatta, this is the connection. Tassevā of the former belonging to another sect, the connection is only anattamanatta. Ida these two attamanattas, these two anattamanattas, this fourfold dhamma category. Saṅghāṭanīya to be assembled, meaning to be brought together. By "Anārādhake," etc., in anārādhanīyasmi here, he shows the word meaning that one does not please the precepts by this action, therefore it is anārādhanīya. Ida fourfold. Liṅga cause. Lakkhaṇa sign. Ito the connection is, brought out from the eight factors. Vuttavipallāsenā opposite to what was said on the dark side.

ārādhakasaddassa tosanatthaṃ dasseti. Heṭṭhā pana ‘‘sampādako’’ti vuttattā sādhanatthaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

The word ārādhaka shows the meaning of pleasing. But below, since it was said "sampādako," it should be seen as showing the meaning of accomplishing.

Upasampadamāḷakepīti upasampādaṭṭhāne ekakūṭayutte anekakoṇe patissayavisesepi. So hi ekakūṭaṃ katvā anekehi koṇehi malīyati vibhūsīyatītimāḷoti vuccati. ‘‘Cattāro māse parivasitabba’’ntivacanaṃ asadisūpamāya pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādimāha.ti saccaṃ.Assāti aññatitthiyapubbassa. Parivasanto aññatitthiyapubboti sambandho.Antarāti catumāsassa abbhantare.Kuppanasabhāvoti nassanasabhāvo.Pariggaṇhātīti paricchinditvā gaṇhāti.Nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetīti ‘‘idaṃ nāmaṃ, idaṃ rūpa’’nti vavatthapeti.Lakkhaṇanti namanaruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ vā. Sotāpattimaggassa diṭṭhivicikicchāpahānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘samūhatāni…pe… salla’’nti.Abbuḷhanti āvahiyitthāti abbuḷhaṃ, uddhaṃ vahiyitthāti attho. Ātyūpasaggo hi uddhaṅgamattho.Taṃdivasamevāti tasmiṃ sotāpattimaggassa paṭilabhanadivaseyeva. Bhummatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Tadahevāti tasmiṃ sotāpannabhavanaahani eva.

Upasampadamāḷakepī even in a special pavilion for ordination, with one peak and many corners. For that is called māḷo because it is made with one peak and adorned with many corners. Making clear the statement, "to be on probation for four months" by an incomparable simile, he said, "just as," etc. truly. Assā of the former belonging to another sect. The connection is, while on probation, formerly belonging to another sect. Antarā within four months. Kuppanasabhāvo the nature of being destroyed. Pariggaṇhātī he grasps by distinguishing. Nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetī he determines "this is name, this is form." Lakkhaṇa the characteristic of bending and changing, or the characteristic of impermanence, etc. Referring to the abandoning of doubt and uncertainty by the path of stream-entry, it was said, "removed...pe...dart." Abbuḷha having pulled out, meaning having carried upwards. For the prefix ātyu has the meaning of upwards. Taṃdivasamevā on that very day of attaining the path of stream-entry. This locative case has the meaning of the instrumental. Tadahevā on that very day of becoming a stream-enterer.

Tassāti aññatitthiyapubbassa. Pāḷiyaṃ pattassa anāgatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘pattampi tathevā’’ti. Yathā upajjhāyamūlakaṃ cīvaraṃ pariyesitabbaṃ, pattampi tathevāti attho.Idanti pattacīvaraṃ.Imassāti aññatitthiyapubbassa.Aññeti upajjhāyato apare.Tehipīti aññehipi.Vilomāti paṭilomā.Āyattanti adhīnaṃ.Āyattajīvikattāti aññatitthiyapubbassa upajjhāyena āyattajīvikattā.Tassāti upajjhāyassa.Vacanakaroti vacanaṃ karo. Vākyepi samāsepi vacanasaddassa ‘‘tassā’’ti padameva apekkhattā ‘‘vacanakaro’’ti samāso hoti. Eseva nayo ‘‘upajjhāyena āyattajīvakattā’’ti etthāpi.Tenāti vacanakarahetunā.

Tassā of the former belonging to another sect. Since the bowl is not yet received in the Pali, it was said, "the bowl also is just so." The meaning is, just as the robe dependent on the preceptor should be sought, so too the bowl. Ida the bowl and robe. Imassā of the former belonging to another sect. Aññe others than the preceptor. Tehipī even by the others. Vilomā contrary. Āyatta dependent. Āyattajīvikattā because of the former belonging to another sect being dependent for livelihood on the preceptor. Tassā of the preceptor. Vacanakaro one who does the word. Even in a sentence or a compound, since the word "vacana" itself is dependent on the word "tassā," therefore the compound "vacanakaro" is formed. The same method applies to "upajjhāyena āyattajīvakattā" here as well. Tenā because of being one who does the word.

Aggiparicaraṇakāti =06 aggipūjakā. Iminā aggiṃ paricarantītiaggikāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tāpasāti jaṭādharā. Te hi yasmā jaṭā ca tapo ca etesamatthi, tasmā ‘‘jaṭilā’’ti ca ‘‘tāpasā’’ti ca vuccanti.Eteti jaṭilakā. ‘‘Kiriyaṃ na paṭibāhantī’’ti vuttavacanassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘atthi kammaṃ, atthi kammavipāko’’ti.Etadeva pabbajjanti etaṃ eva tāpasapabbajjaṃ.Etesanti jaṭilānaṃ.Sāsaneti buddhassa sāsane.Tesanti ñātīnaṃ, imaṃ parihāranti sambandho.Teti ñātayo.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Ñātiseṭṭhassāti ñātiyeva seṭṭho, ñātīnaṃ vāti ñātiseṭṭho, tassa, buddhassāti sambandho.

Aggiparicaraṇakā fire-worshippers. By this, he shows the word meaning that they serve the fire, therefore they are aggikā. Tāpasā ascetics with matted hair. For since they have both matted hair and asceticism, therefore they are called both "jaṭilā" and "tāpasā." Ete these ascetics with matted hair. Explaining the meaning of the statement "they do not reject action," he said, "there is action, there is result of action." Etadeva pabbajja this very ascetic's going forth. Etesa of the ascetics with matted hair. Sāsane in the Buddha's Dispensation. Tesa of the relatives, the connection is, they maintain this. Te the relatives. truly, or because. Ñātiseṭṭhassā one who is the best of relatives, or the best of relatives, of that, the connection is, of the Buddha.

26. Pañcābādhavatthukathā
26. The Story of the Five Diseases

88.Magadhesūti ettha bahuvacanapadena vuttattā janapadassa nāmanti āha ‘‘magadhanāmake janapade’’ti.Amanussānañcāti manussehi aññasattānañca. Ussannasaddo ca ussadasaddo ca vuḍḍhippattapariyāyoti āha ‘‘ussannā vuḍḍhippattā’’ti. ‘‘Phātippattā’’ti iminā tamevatthaṃ dasseti.Tehīti kuṭṭhādīhi pañcahi ābādhehi.

88.Magadhesū here, because it is stated by the plural word, he said that it is the name of a country, "in the country named Magadha." Amanussānañcā and of beings other than humans. The word ussanna and the word ussada are synonyms for having attained growth, therefore he said, "ussannā having attained growth." By "Phātippattā" he shows the same meaning. Tehī by those five diseases, leprosy, etc.

Tatthāti kuṭṭhādīsu pañcasu ābādhesu. Ābādhikaṃ ābhuso bādhati pīḷetītiābādho,aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ kuṭati chindatītikuṭṭhaṃ. ‘‘Rattakuṭṭhaṃ vā’’tiādīsu vāsaddena setakuṭṭhādīnipi saṅgaṇhāti.Kīṭibha daddu khajju ādippabhedampīti kīṭibho ca daddu ca khajju ca kīṭibhadaddukhajjuyo, tā ādayo yesaṃ kuṭṭhānanti kīṭibhadaddukhajjuādayo, tesaṃ pabhedo kīṭibhadaddu khajjuādippabhedo, tampi. Tatthakīṭibhoti kīṭa ibhoti padavibhāgo kātabbo. Tatthakīṭoti kimi. Iminā kīṭakulāvakaṃ ‘‘kīṭo’’ti gahetabbaṃ, kīṭo viyātikīṭo,kuṭṭhaviseso.Ibhoti gajo. Iminā gajassa sabalaṃ ‘‘ibho’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Ibho viyātiibho,kuṭṭhaviseso. Kīṭoyeva ibhokīṭibho,kuṭṭhābādhaviseso, yaṃ loke‘‘kuṭṭābādha viseso’’iti voharanti.Daddūti kacchu. Sā hi sarīraṃ daṃsati vidaṃsati, hiṃsatīti vādadduti vuccati. Ekassa dakārassa rakāraṃ katvā ‘‘daddu’’tipi pāṭho. Yaṃ loke‘‘pve:’’iti voharanti.Khajjūti kaṇḍuvanaṃ. Tañhi sarīraṃ khajjati byathati khadati, hiṃsatīti vā khajjūti vuccati. Yaṃ loke‘‘khajja’’iti voharanti. ‘‘Kacchū’’tipi pāṭho, so apāṭho daddusaddena tassa gahitattā.Tanti kuṭṭhaṃ.Pakatipaṭicchannaṭṭhāneti pakatiyā paṭicchannaṭṭhāne, yathānivatthapārutaṭṭhāneti attho. Iminā visesato paṭicchannaṃ nivatteti. Avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ sace hotīti yojanā.Pakativaṇṇeti =07 pakatichaviyaṃ. Yathā avaṇā chavi hoti, tathāti attho. Idaṃ vaṇavatthuṃ sandhāya na vuttaṃ.

Tatthā among those five diseases, leprosy, etc. Ābādhikaṃ ābhuso bādhati pīḷetītiābādho,a disease is that which distresses, afflicts. Aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ kuṭati chindatītikuṭṭhaṃ, leprosy is that which cuts off the limbs and parts of the body. In "Rattakuṭṭhaṃ vā," etc., by the word "vā" it includes white leprosy, etc. Kīṭibha daddu khajju ādippabhedampī also the varieties beginning with kīṭibha, daddu, and khajju; kīṭibha ca daddu ca khajju ca kīṭibhadaddukhajjuyo, those are the beginnings of the leprosies, therefore kīṭibhadaddukhajjuādayo, their variety is kīṭibhadaddukhajjuādippabhedo, that too. There, kīṭibho the word division should be made as kīṭa ibhoti. There, kīṭo means worm. By this, a nest of worms should be taken as "kīṭo," like a worm, therefore it is kīṭo, a special kind of leprosy. Ibho means elephant. By this, the mottled skin of an elephant should be taken as "ibho." Like an elephant, therefore it is ibho, a special kind of leprosy. Kīṭoyeva ibhokīṭibho,a special disease of leprosy, which in the world they call "a special disease of leprosy." Daddū means scabies. For that bites, stings, or harms the body, therefore it is called daddu. By changing one dakāra to rakāra, there is also the reading "daddu." Which in the world they call "pve:" Khajjū means itching. For that scratches, pains, or harms the body, therefore it is called khajjū. Which in the world they call "khajja." There is also the reading "kacchū," that is an incorrect reading because it is already included by the word daddu. Ta that leprosy. Pakatipaṭicchannaṭṭhāne in a place covered by nature, meaning in a place covered by clothing, etc. By this, it prevents especially covering. If it remains in a non-growing state, this is the connection. Pakativaṇṇe in its natural color. Meaning as the skin is without blemish, so it is. This was not said referring to the color substance.

Medagaṇḍoti medo asmiṃ atthītimedo,gaṇḍati phoṭo bhavatītigaṇḍo,medoyeva gaṇḍo medagaṇḍo. Yaṃ loke ‘‘medagaṇḍoiti voharanti.Kolaṭṭhīti kolaṃ vuccati badaraphalaṃ, tassa aṭṭhi kolaṭṭhi. Avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhite satīti yojanā.Sañchavinti saṃvijjamānachaviṃ, sañjātachaviṃ vā.Uṇṇigaṇḍāti uddhaṃ namantīti uṇṇiyo, tāyeva gaṇḍā uṇṇigaṇḍā. Ye loke ‘‘uṇṇigaṇḍā’’ iti voharanti.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sarīrapadese.Khīrapīḷakāti khīraṃ ettha atthīti khīrā, tā eva pīḷakā khīrapīḷakā. Yā loke ‘‘khīrapīḷakā’’ iti ca iti ca voharanti.Tāsūti pīḷakāsu. Khīrapīḷakā nāma gaṇḍā hontīti sambandho.Kharapīḷakāti kharasabhāvā pīḷakā. Kharasabhāvattā tena sattā maraṇampi gacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṃ. Yā loke iti ‘‘khīrapīḷakā’’ voharanti. Padumakaṇṇikā nāma gaṇḍā hontīti sambandho. Padumassa kaṇṇikā viyapadumakaṇṇikā. Yā loke‘‘padumakaṇṇikā’’iti voharanti. Sāsapabījakā nāma gaṇḍāti sambandho. Sāsapassa bījaṃ pamāṇametāsantisāsapabījakā. Yā loke ‘‘sāsapabījakā’’ iti voharanti.Tā sabbāti sabbā tā pīḷakā, gaṇḍajātiyo vā.Tāsūti pīḷakāsu, gaṇḍajātīsu vā.

Medagaṇḍo medo is in this, therefore it is medo, it swells and becomes a blister, therefore it is gaṇḍo, medo itself is gaṇḍo, medagaṇḍo. Which in the world they call "medagaṇḍo." Kolaṭṭhī kola means jujube fruit, its seed is kolaṭṭhi. The connection is, when it remains in a non-growing state. Sañchavi existing skin, or newly formed skin. Uṇṇigaṇḍā they bend upwards, therefore they are uṇṇiyo, those themselves are gaṇḍā, uṇṇigaṇḍā. Which in the world they call "uṇṇigaṇḍā." Tattha tatthā in that, in that part of the body. Khīrapīḷakā khīra is in this, therefore they are khīrā, those themselves are pīḷakā, khīrapīḷakā. Which in the world they call "khīrapīḷakā." Tāsū in those pīḷakās. The connection is, khīrapīḷakā are blisters. Kharapīḷakā pīḷakā with a rough nature. Because of the rough nature, beings even go to death, even death is suffering. Which in the world they call "khīrapīḷakā." Padumakaṇṇikā are blisters, this is the connection. Like the pericarp of a lotus, padumakaṇṇikā. Which in the world they call "padumakaṇṇikā." Sāsapabījakā are blisters, this is the connection. The size of a mustard seed, those are sāsapabījakā. Which in the world they call "sāsapabījakā." Tā sabbā all those pīḷakā, or blister types. Tāsū in those pīḷakā, or blister types.

Padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇantipadumaṃnāma rattaṃ,puṇḍarīkaṃnāma setaṃ, tesaṃ pupphapattassa vaṇṇaṃ viya vaṇṇametassāti padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇaṃ, saṅkhakuṭṭhaṃ. Yaṃ loke ‘‘padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇaṃ, saṅkhakuṭṭhaṃ’’ iti voharanti.Yenāti kuṭṭhena. Gunnaṃ sarīraṃ sabalaṃ viya manussānaṃ sarīraṃ sabalaṃ hotīti yojanā.Tasminti kilāse.Sosabyādhīti khayarogo. So hi yasmā maṃsalohitādīni sosāpeti, tasmāsosoti vuccati. Yaṃ loke ‘‘sāṃsa’’ iti ca ‘‘sosabyādhi’’ iti ca voharanti.Tasminti sosabyādhimhi.Apamāroti apasmāro. So hi sārato apagatattā ‘‘apamāro’’ti vuccati sakārassa makāraṃ katvā. Yaṃ loke ‘‘apamāra’’ iti ca‘‘arū?’’Iti ca voharanti.Tatthāti dvīsu ummādesu. Ādhāre cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Duttikiccho hotīti sambandho.

Padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇa padumaṃ is red, puṇḍarīkaṃ is white, like the color of their flower petals, therefore padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇaṃ, white leprosy. Which in the world they call "padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇaṃ, white leprosy." Yenā by which leprosy. The connection is, just as the body of animals is mottled, so too the body of humans is mottled. Tasmi in that kilāsa. Sosabyādhī consumption. For since that wastes away the flesh, blood, etc., therefore it is called soso. Which in the world they call "sāṃsa" and "sosabyādhi." Tasmi in that consumption. Apamāro epilepsy. For since it is departed from essence, therefore it is called apamāro, by changing the sakāra to makāra. Which in the world they call "apamāra" and "arū?" Tatthā in those two insanities. This locative case is in the sense of the instrumental. The connection is, he becomes difficult to treat.

27. Rājabhaṭavatthukathā
27. The Story of the King’s Servant

90.Uccinathāti ettha cidhātuyā vaḍḍhanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vaḍḍhethā’’ti.Sotāpannattāti bimbisārarañño =08 sotāpannabhāvato.Ghātethāti jīvitā voropetha.Hanathāti paharatha.Tatoti upajjhāyato. Ācariyo seṭṭhoti sambandho.Tatoti ācariyato.Idanti vacanaṃ, āgatanti sambandho. Āhaṃsu vohārikā mahāmattā musāvādenāti yojanā.Amaccoti sabbarājakiccesu amā saha raññā bhavatīti amacco.Amāsaddo sahatthe nipāto. ‘‘Amā’’ti nipātato bhavatthe accapaccayo (moggallāne 4.23 sutte).Mahāmattoti mahanto mattā issariyā etassāti mahāmatto.Mattāsaddo hettha issariyavācako.Sevakoti rājānaṃ sevati bhajatīti sevako.Bhattavetanabhaṭoti bhattavetanānamatthāya bhaṭo.Tassāti rājabhaṭassa.Puttanattabhātukādayotiādisaddena bhāgineyyādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Yo panāti rājabhaṭo pana.Niyyātetīti appeti.Taṃ ṭhānanti taṃ rājabhaṭaṭṭhānaṃ.Yena vāti kammakārena vā.Yaṃkammakāraṇāti yassa kammassa kāraṇā.Yo vāti rājabhaṭo vā.Pabbajassūti pabbājehi.

90.Uccinathā here, showing the meaning of increasing by the root ci, he said, "increase." Sotāpannattā because King Bimbisāra =08 was a stream-enterer. Ghātethā kill. Hanathā strike. Tato from the preceptor. The connection is, the teacher is the best. Tato from the teacher. Ida this word, the connection is, has come. The legal experts, the great ministers, spoke falsely, this is the connection. Amacco because he is together with the king in all the king's affairs, therefore amacco. The word amā is an indeclinable in the sense of together. "Amā" is the nipāta, and the accapaccayo is in the sense of becoming (according to Moggallāna’s sutta 4.23). Mahāmatto one who has great power, therefore mahāmatto. The word mattā here is used in the sense of power. Sevako one who serves the king, therefore sevako. Bhattavetanabhaṭo a servant for the sake of food and wages. Tassā of the king’s servant. Puttanattabhātukādayo the word ādi includes nephews, etc. Yo panā whichever king's servant. Niyyātetī gives. Taṃ ṭhāna that position of king’s servant. Yena vā by whichever worker. Yaṃkammakāraṇā because of whose work. Yo vā whichever king’s servant. Pabbajassū ordain.

28. Coravatthukathā
28. The Story of the Thief

91.Diṭṭhapubboti aṅgulimālo pubbe diṭṭho.Ayanti coro.Soti aṅgulimālo. Aññesaṃ santikā vacanaṃ suṇantīti yojanā.Teti manussā.Ubbijjantipīti kāyena ubbijjantipi.Uttasantipīti cittena uttasantipi. Aṅgulimālo bhikkhūhi na pabbājito, nanu bhagavatā pana sayaṃ pabbājito, atha kasmā ‘‘na bhikkhave’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘bhagavā sayaṃ dhammassāmī’’ti.Dhammassāmīti ca dhammassa issaro, dhammena vā devamanussānaṃ issaro, adhipatīti attho. Bhikkhūnaṃ akaraṇatthāya bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadanti yojanā.Tatthāti ‘‘na bhikkhave’’tiādivacane. ‘‘Dhajaṃ bandhitvā’’tiādinā dhajassa bandhanaṃ dhajabandho, dhajabandho viyātidhajabandho,dhajabandho hutvā caratītidhajabandhoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tasmāti yasmā dhajabandho, tasmā.Yoti coro.Panthaduhanaṃ vāti panthe duhanaṃ vā.Paññāyati cāti ettha casaddo vākyasampiṇḍanattho. Na kevalañhi vicaratiyeva, atha kho paññāyati cāti attho.Idanti corakammaṃ.Rajjanti rājabhāvaṃ.Soti rājaputto.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tasminti rājaputte.Pubbeti pubbakāle.Tanti coraṃ.Evanti iminākārena, jānanti ceti yojanā.Adissamānāti attānaṃ apaññāyamānā. Idaṃ sandhicchedādicore sandhāya vuttaṃ, na ambalabujādicore.Pacchāpīti theyyakaraṇato pacchāpi.Tepīti corepi.

91. Diṭṭhapubbo means Aṅgulimāla, who was seen before. Ayaṃ means a thief. So means Aṅgulimāla. It should be construed as "hearing the words from others." Te means people. Ubbijjantipī means they also flee with their bodies. Uttasantipī means they also tremble in their minds. Aṅgulimāla was not ordained by the monks; however, was he not ordained by the Blessed One himself? Then, why was it said, "Not, monks"? He said, "The Blessed One is the master of the Dhamma." Dhammassāmī means the lord of the Dhamma, or the lord and master of gods and humans through the Dhamma. For the monks not to do it, it is a rule for the monks. Tattha means in the statement beginning with "Not, monks." He shows the meaning of the word dhajabandho with "Having tied a flag," etc., like the tying of a flag is dhajabandho; one who behaves like dhajabandho is dhajabandho. Tasmā means because he is a dhajabandho. Yo means the thief. Panthaduhanaṃ vā means stealing on the road. Paññāyati cā Here, the word ca combines the sentences. It means not only does he wander, but he also appears. Idaṃ means the act of thievery. Rajjaṃ means kingship. So means the king's son. means truly, or because. Tasmiṃ means in that king's son. Pubbe means in the past. Taṃ means that thief. Evaṃ means in this way; it should be construed as "they also know." Adissamānā means not making themselves visible. This is said referring to thieves who break into houses, not to thieves like Ambalabuja. Pacchāpī means even after stealing. Tepī means even the thieves.

92.Bhayenāti bhayato.Ete panāti bhikkhū pana.Laddhābhayattāti rājato laddho abhayo imehīti laddhābhayā, tesaṃ bhāvo laddhābhayattaṃ, tasmā.Kārabhedakoti etthakārasaddo rukkhavisese =09 ca sakkāre ca bandhanālaye ca pavattati, idha pana bandhanālayeti dassento āha ‘‘kāraṃ vuccati bandhanāgāra’’nti. Bandhanāgārañhi karonti taṃ pavesite jane hiṃsanti etthāti ‘‘kārā’’ti vuccati.Idhāti ‘‘kārabhedako’’tipade. Dīpabandhanaṃ vā hotūti yojanā. Imehi padehi na kevalaṃ bandhanāgāraṃyeva kārā nāma hoti, atha kho andubandhanādīnipi kārāyeva nāmāti dasseti.Yoti coro.Etesūti bandhanesu.Muñcitvā vāti rajjubandhanaṃ nibbeṭhetvā vā. Imehi padehi na kevalaṃ kārāya bhindanato eva kārabhedako nāma hoti, atha kho chindanamuñcanavivaraṇehipi kārabhedakoyeva nāmāti dasseti.Dīpantaranti bandhanadīpato antaraṃ aññaṃ dīpanti attho. Cakkavāḷabandhanaṃ bhinditvā cakkavāḷantaraṃ gato aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na vutto.Soti nacorako.Gāmanigamapaṭṭanādīnīti etthapaṭṭananti nāvāpaṭṭanaṃ, sakaṭapaṭṭanañca.Keṇiyāti rañño dātabbaāyena.Tanti keṇiṃ.Nidhānanti nikkhaṇitvā ṭhapitaṃ dhanaṃ.Upasaṃharitvāti rājādīnaṃ santikaṃ haritvā.Tanti kasikammādīhi sampādetvā jīvantaṃ.Tatthevāti bandhāpitaṭṭhāneyeva.

92. Bhayenā means from fear. Ete panā means these monks. Laddhābhayattā means having received safety from the king, their state of having received safety, therefore. Kārabhedako Here, the word kāra applies to a specific tree, respect, and a prison. Here, showing that it means a prison, he says, "Kāraṃ means a prison." A prison is called "kārā" because they harm people who are brought into it. Idhā means in the word "kārabhedako." Even if it is to bind an island. These words show that not only is a prison called kārā, but even things like binding with ropes are called kārā. Yo means the thief. Etesū means in these prisons. Muñcitvā vā means having untied the rope binding. These words show that not only is one called kārabhedako from breaking a prison, but also from cutting, untying, or opening (a prison). Dīpantaraṃ means an island other than the prison island. It is not mentioned in the commentary that he broke the Cakkavāḷa bond and went to another Cakkavāḷa. So means that thief. Gāmanigamapaṭṭanādīnī Here, paṭṭanaṃ means a port for ships and carts. Keṇiyā means revenue to be given to the king. Taṃ means that revenue. Nidhānaṃ means wealth that has been dug up and stored. Upasaṃharitvā means having brought it to the presence of the king, etc. Taṃ means one who lives by producing (wealth) through agriculture, etc. Tatthevā means in that very place where he was bound.

93.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne. Yo koci palātoti sambandho. Nanti yaṃ kiñci janaṃ, likhāpetīti yojanā.Paṇṇe vāti kuse vā.Assāti janassa.Daṇḍanti dhanadaṇḍaṃ.Likhitakoti likhitabboti likhito, soyeva likhitako.

93. Yatthā means in which place. The connection is that anyone who flees. Nanti (means) any person whom they cause to be written (down). Paṇṇe vā means on a leaf or a kusa grass. Assā means of the person. Daṇḍaṃ means a fine of money. Likhitako means one who is to be written down is likhito; that same one is likhitako.

94.Yo pana kasāhi haññatīti sambandho. Iminā aññehi kasāhi haññatītikasāhatoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ayameva te daṇḍo hotū’’ti iminā kataṃ daṇḍakammaṃ imassātikatadaṇḍakammoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Allavaṇoti tintavaṇo.Ghātetvāti hanitvā paharitvāti attho.Gaṇḍigaṇḍiyoti phoṭaphoṭā.Sannisinnāsūti gaṇḍīsu pakatisarīrena samaṃ nisinnāsu.

94. The connection is that one who is struck with whips. With this, he shows the meaning of the word kasāhato as "struck with whips by others." With "Let this be your punishment," he shows the meaning of the word katadaṇḍakammo as "one for whom a punishment has been done." Allavaṇo means one whose skin is stained. Ghātetvā means having killed, having struck. Gaṇḍigaṇḍiyo means with blisters. Sannisinnāsū means with the blisters settled level with the natural skin.

95.Katadaṇḍakammabhāvo tāva purimanayeneva veditabbo hotu, kathaṃ pana lakkhaṇāhatabhāvo veditabboti āha ‘‘yassa panā’’tiādi. Tatthatattenāti tāpena.Lakkhaṇanti saññāṇaṃ.Soti jano.Bhujissoti bhujo etassatthīti bhujisso (ma. ni. ṭī. 2.426). Parehi apālito ca anajjhoharāpito ca hutvā sayameva attānaṃ pālanena ca bhojanaṃ ajjhoharaṇena ca samannāgatoti vuttaṃ hoti.Assāti lakkhaṇāhatassa.Vaṇāti arūni. Tāni hi yasmā vaṇanti gattāni vicuṇṇāni karonti, tasmā vaṇāti vuccanti.Rūḷhāti taruṇamaṃsena ruhā. Timaṇḍalavatthassa lakkhaṇāhatassa janassāti sambandho.

95. The state of having received punishment should be understood in the same way as before, but how should the state of being branded be understood? He says, "Yassa panā" etc. There, tattenā means with heat. Lakkhaṇaṃ means a mark. So means that person. Bhujisso means one who has strength (bhuja) is bhujisso (Ma. Ni. Ṭī. 2.426). It is said that he is endowed with self-sustenance and nourishment, being neither cared for nor caused to consume by others, but by himself through self-care and consumption of food. Assā means of the one who is branded. Vaṇā means sores. Indeed, because they make the bodies broken, they are called sores. Rūḷhā means grown with fresh flesh. (This is) in relation to a person branded for a three-piece cloth.

33. Iṇāyikavatthukathā
33. The Story About the Debtor

96.Iṇāyikonāmāti etthaiṇanti uddhāro. So hi yasmā eti vuddhiṃ gacchati, tasmā iṇanti vuccati. Taṃ gaṇhāti, dhāretīti vā iṇāyiko.Yaṃ vāti janaṃ vā āṭhapetvāti sambandho.Āṭhapetvāti ca pesanatthāya dhanasāmikassa santike ṭhapetvāti attho.Ākāro hi pesanatthavācako.Sopīti pisaddo purimajane apekkhati. ‘‘Dhāretī’’ti iminā āyikapaccayo dhāraṇatthe hotīti dasseti.Aññeti mātāpitūhi aññe.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Teti aññe ñātakā, taṃ āṭhapetuṃ yasmā na issarā, tasmā na iṇāyikoti yojanā.Itaranti naiṇāyikato aññaṃ.Assāti janassa.Nanti taṃ janaṃ.Tesūti ñātisālohitādīsu.Tathārūpassāti attano ñātisālohitassāti attho. Ārocetabbākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘sahetuko’’tiādi. Tatthasahetukoti bhabbo.Soti upaṭṭhāko.Paṭipajjatīti paṭidadāti.Etanti kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ.Ajānitvāti iṇāyikabhāvamajānitvā.Passantenāti iṇāyikaṃ passantena. ‘‘Apassantassa gīvā na hotī’’ti iminā passitvā adassentassa gīvā hotīti dasseti.

96. Iṇāyiko nāmā Here, iṇaṃ means a loan. Indeed, because it increases, it is called iṇaṃ. One who takes or holds that is an iṇāyiko. Yaṃ vā means one who, having assigned a person. Āṭhapetvā means having placed (him) near the owner of the money for the purpose of dispatching him. The prefix ā is indicative of the meaning of dispatch. Sopī The word pi is in relation to the previous person. With "Dhāretī," he shows that the suffix āyika has the meaning of holding. Aññe means others than the parents. means truly, or because. Te means those other relatives; because they are not able to assign him, therefore, they are not iṇāyiko. Itaraṃ means other than the non-iṇāyika. Assā means of the person. Na means that person. Tesū means among the relatives, blood relatives, etc. Tathārūpassā means of his relative or blood relative. Showing the way to inform, he says "sahetuko," etc. There, sahetuko means capable. So means the attendant. Paṭipajjatī means he repays. Etaṃ means suitable goods. Ajānitvā means without knowing the state of being an iṇāyika. Passantenā means by one who sees the iṇāyika. With "One who does not show (him) does not incur guilt," he shows that one who sees (him) but does not point (him) out incurs guilt.

Pucchiyamānopīti ‘‘kiṃ tvaṃ iṇāyikosī’’ti pucchiyamānopi.Tanti iṇāyikaṃ.Tatthāti aññasmiṃ dese.Tanti iṇasāmikaṃ.Soti iṇasāmiko.Ayanti iṇāyiko.Ayanti vacanā.Tatthāti iṇāyikassa pabbājane.Sāmīcīti anudhammatā.

Pucchiyamānopī means even when asked, "Are you an iṇāyiko?" Taṃ means that iṇāyika. Tatthā means in another country. Taṃ means the owner of the debt. So means the owner of the debt. Ayaṃ means this iṇāyiko. Ayaṃ means the statement. Tatthā means in the ordination of the iṇāyika. Sāmīcī means conformity to the Dhamma.

Nanti iṇāyikaṃ.Soti iṇasāmiko.Assāti therassa. Gīvā na hotīti sambandho.Acchatūti āsatu upavesatūti attho.Soti iṇāyiko.Īdisoti sahetuko vattasampannoti attho.Atiārādhakoti vattācārena therassa atitosako.

Na means the iṇāyika. So means the owner of the debt. Assā means of the Elder. The connection is that he does not incur guilt. Acchatū means let him sit, let him stay. So means that iṇāyiko. Īdiso means one who is capable and accomplished in duties. Atiārādhako means one who greatly pleases the Elder with his conduct and behavior.

34. Dāsavatthukathā
34. The Story About Slaves

97.Dāsāti ceṭakā. Te hi sāmikehi dukkhe vā duṭṭhakamme vā asīyanti khipīyantīti dāsāti vuccanti.Tatthāti catūsu dāsesu. ‘‘Gharadāsiyā putto’’ti iminā antogehe gharadāsiyā kucchimhi jātoantojātoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Dhanaṃ datvā kītodhanakkītoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dhanakkīto nāmā’’tiādi. Dhanena kīto dhanakkītoti vacanatthopi yuttoyeva.Dāsacārittanti desakālavasena dāsānaṃ cārittaṃ.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ dese, kāle vā.

97. Dāsā means servants. Indeed, because they are subservient or cast off in suffering or wrongdoing by their masters, they are called slaves. Tatthā means among the four types of slaves. With "The son of a female slave in the house," he shows the meaning of the word antojāto as "born in the womb of a female slave in the inner house." Showing the meaning of the word dhanakkīto as "bought with wealth," he says, "Dhanakkīto nāmā," etc. It is also fitting that the meaning of dhanakkīto is "bought with wealth." Dāsacārittaṃ means the conduct of slaves according to the country and time. Tattha tatthā means in that particular country or time.

Karamarānīto nāmāti etthakaramaroti vandi. So hi sattūnaṃ karena hatthena maritabbattā karamaroti vuccati. Karamarabhāvena ānīto karamarānīto. Tiroraṭṭhā āharantīti sambandho.Upalāpetvāti palobhetvā vā.Tatoti kasmāci gāmato. Manussā evamānussakāni. Itthipurisānaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvena sāmaññabhāvato napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Pisaddena na kevalaṃ dhanāniyeva āharanti, atha kho mānussakānipīti sampiṇḍeti.Tatthāti mānussakesu. Evarūpo karamarānīto dāso na pabbājetabboti yojanā.Sabbasādhāraṇenāti bandhanāgārasodhanakāle sabbesaṃ sādhāraṇena.

Karamarānīto nāmā Here, karamaro means a captive. Indeed, because he should be killed by the hand (kara) of enemies, he is called karamaro. Karamarānīto means brought in as a karamaro. The connection is that they bring (them) from a foreign country. Having enticed or lured. Tato means from some village. Human beings are mānussakāni. It is said in the neuter gender due to the commonness of the state of women and men. With the word pi, he combines that they bring not only wealth but also human beings. Tatthā means among human beings. A slave of this kind, who is brought in as a karamaro, should not be ordained. Sabbasādhāraṇenā means with what is common to all during the cleaning of the prison.

Dāsabyanti dāsassa bhāvo dāsabyaṃ, taṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dāsabhāva’’nti. ‘‘Sayamevā’’ti imināsāmaṃsaddo sayamatthe nipātoti dasseti.Bhujissitthiyoti rañño bhujissitthiyo.Vaṇṇadāsīhīti nagarasobhinīhi. Tā hi vaṇṇasampannadāsibhāvato vaṇṇadāsīti vuccanti.Tāsanti bhujissitthīnaṃ.Paṇṇanti dāsipaṇṇaṃ.Bhaṭiputtakagaṇādīnanti ādisaddena mallaputtagaṇādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Iminā bahusāmikadāsaṃ dasseti.Tehīti bhaṭiputtakagaṇādīhi.Adinnā na pabbājetabbāti bahūsu sāmikesu ekenapi adinnā na pabbājetabbā.Tepīti ārāmikadāsepi. Imasmiṃ ārāmikadāsapabbājane aṭṭhakathāvādaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mahāpaccariya’’ntiādi. ‘‘Takka’’nti padaṃ ‘‘āsittaka’’iti pade kammaṃ. ‘‘Sīse’’ti padaṃ ‘‘āsittaka’’iti pade ādhāro. Kesuci janapadesu desacārittavasena sīse takkassa āsiñcanaṃ dāsānaṃ bhujissakaraṇanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ārāmikaṃ demā’’ti vacanaṃ dāsānaṃ bhujissavacananti vuttaṃ hoti.Yena kenaci vohārenāti ‘‘ārāmikaṃ demā’’ti vā ‘‘ārāmikadāsaṃ demā’’ti vā ‘‘kappiyakārakaṃ demā’’ti vā yena kenaci vohārena. Dvīsu aṭṭhakathāvādesu kurundivādassa pacchā vuttattā soyeva pamāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Duggatamanussāti dukkhaṃ gatamanussā.Eteti duggatamanusse.Taṃ pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti mātāpitūnaṃ dāsabhāvaṃ upagatakāle jātaṃ puttaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atha pana mātāpitaro dāsabhāvaṃ upagatā, na putto, taṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bhikkhussā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘ñātakā vā upaṭṭhākā vā’’tipadesu sāmisambandho, ‘‘dentī’’ti pade sampadānaṃ.Assāti bhikkhussa.Imanti dāsaṃ.Abhiramissatīti bhikkhubhāve abhiramissati.Vibbhamissatīti vinivattetvā gihibhāvaṃ bhamissati. Iti vatvā dentīti sambandho.Nissāmikadāsoti pariggāhakasāmikavirahito dāso. Nissāmikassa dāsassa rājā sāmī, tasmā raññā apariggahite attanāva attānaṃ bhujissaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Pariggahite rājānaṃ kārāpetuṃ vaṭṭati.Ajānantoti attano dāsabhāvamajānanto.

Dāsabyaṃ means the state of being a slave, that. Therefore, it is said, "the state of being a slave." With "Sayameva," he shows that the word sāmaṃ is a particle in the sense of "oneself." Bhujissitthiyo means free women of the king. Vaṇṇadāsīhī means by the city's beautiful women. Indeed, because of their state as slaves endowed with beauty (vaṇṇa), they are called vaṇṇadāsī. Tāsaṃ means of the free women. Paṇṇaṃ means the price of a slave. Bhaṭiputtakagaṇādīnaṃ With the ādi (and so on), he includes groups of wrestlers' sons and so on. With this, he shows a slave with multiple owners. Tehī means by the groups of wrestlers' sons and so on. Adinnā na pabbājetabbā means that he should not be ordained without being given (permission) by even one of the many owners. Tepī means even the monastery slaves. Showing the commentary tradition regarding the ordination of these monastery slaves, he says "mahāpaccariya," etc. The word "takka" is the object in the phrase "āsittaka". The word "sīse" is the location in the phrase "āsittaka". In some countries, the custom of pouring takka on the head is the making of slaves free. The statement "We give (him) to the monastery" is said to be the freeing of the slaves. Yena kenaci vohārenā means by any expression, whether "We give (him) to the monastery," or "We give (him) as a monastery slave," or "We give (him) as a provider of allowable things." Between the two commentary traditions, the Kurundi tradition is to be regarded as the standard because it is mentioned later. Duggatamanussā means people who have gone to suffering. Ete means these destitute people. Taṃ pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭatī is said in reference to a son born when the parents have entered into slavery. But if the parents have entered into slavery, not the son, it is fitting to ordain him. The phrase "Bhikkhussa" is related to the possessive in the phrases "relatives or attendants," and is the recipient in the phrase "dentī". Assā means of the monk. Imaṃ means this slave. Abhiramissatī means he will delight in the monastic life. Vibbhamissatī means having turned back, he will wander in the lay life. The connection is that they give (him) saying this. Nissāmikadāso means a slave without a master who takes care of him. The king is the master of a masterless slave; therefore, if he is not taken care of by the king, he should make himself free by himself. If he is taken care of, it is fitting to cause the king to do (it). Ajānanto means not knowing his state of being a slave.

Anurādhapurāti anurādhanagarato nikkhamitvāti sambandho.Soti putto.Idhāti rohaṇe. Mātaraṃ pucchitvāti sambandho.Āgammāti āgantvā.Aticchathāti atikkamitvā icchatha, idha kiñci deyyadhammaṃ natthi, idaṃ atikkamitvā aññattha ṭhātumicchathāti vuttaṃ hoti.Teti gharasāmikā. Catūhi paccayehi paṭijaggantā vasāpesunti yojanā.

Anurādhapurā The connection is that he went out of the city of Anurādha. So means the son. Idhā means in Rohana. The connection is that he asked his mother. Āgammā means having come. Aticchathā means having gone beyond, you desire; it means, "There is no offering here; having gone beyond this, you desire to stay elsewhere." Te means those householders. The connection is that they cause (him) to stay, attending (to him) with four requisites.

35. Kammārabhaṇḍuvatthuādikathā
35. The Story Beginning with the Blacksmith's Tool

98.Tulādhāramuṇḍakoti mānabhaṇḍadhāro muṇḍako. Iminākammārabhaṇḍūti ettha kammārasaddo tulādhārapariyāyo, bhaṇḍusaddo muṇḍakapariyāyoti dasseti. Tulādhāro hi alaṅkāravikatikaraṇatthāya kammaṃ arati jānātītikammāroti vuccati. Muṇḍako bhaṇḍīyati ‘‘muṇḍo’’ti paribhāsīyatītibhaṇḍūti vuccati. ‘‘Suvaṇṇakāraputto’’ti iminā tassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Apaloketunti ettha apapubbo lokasaddo āpucchanatthoti āha ‘‘āpucchitu’’nti. ‘‘Bhaṇḍukammatthāyā’’ti iminābhaṇḍukammāyāti ettha tadatthe catutthīti dasseti.Tatrāti ‘‘saṅghaṃ apaloketu’’ntiādivacane.Sīmāpariyāpanneti vihārasīmāya vā upacārasīmāya vā pariyāpanne.Tatthāti bhikkhūnaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānaṃ.Ettha cāti āpucchane ca.Vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyevāti pañcasu vākyesu yaṃkiñci vākyaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Pisaddena ‘‘imassa muṇḍakammaṃ āpucchāmī’’ti vākyampi saṅgaṇhāti.

98. Tulādhāramuṇḍako means a bald man who carries a measuring tool. With this, he shows that in kammārabhaṇḍū, the word kammāra is a synonym for a measuring tool, and the word bhaṇḍu is a synonym for muṇḍaka. Indeed, the measuring tool is called kammāro because it knows how to do (arati) the work for making and selling ornaments. The bald man is called bhaṇḍū because he is ridiculed and mocked as "muṇḍo". With "the goldsmith's son," he shows his nature. Apaloketuṃ Here, he says that the word loka with the prefix apa means asking permission: "to ask permission." With "Bhaṇḍukammatthāyā," he shows that in bhaṇḍukammāyā, the fourth case is in the sense of "for that." Tatrā means in the statement beginning with "Saṅghaṃ apaloketuṃ." Sīmāpariyāpanne means within the boundary of the monastery or within the boundary of the vicinity. Tatthā means at the place where the monks gather. Ettha cā means and in this asking of permission. Vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyevā means it is indeed fitting to say any sentence among the five sentences. With the word pi, he includes the sentence "I ask permission for the work of this bald man."

Tesanti vīsatiādīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ. ‘‘Daharabhikkhū vā sāmaṇere vā’’ti idaṃ āsannavasena vuttaṃ. Gihimpi pesetvā āpucchāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? ‘‘Pabbajjāpekkhaṃ vinā vā’’ti vuttattā.

Tesaṃ means of those twenty or so monks. "Young monks or novices" is said in relation to proximity. It is fitting to send even a lay person to ask permission. Why? Because it is said, "Or without one who seeks ordination."

Pabbājentassa anāpattiyeva, supabbajitoti āha ‘‘pabbājentassāpi anāpattī’’ti.

There is no offense for the one who ordains, he is well ordained, he says "pabbājentassāpi anāpattī".

Khaṇḍasīmāyanti vihārasīmāya vā upacārasīmāya vā abbhantare ṭhitāyaṃ khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ.Yo panāti pabbajjāpekkho pana.Vibbhantako vāti navavibbhantako vā. Pabbajitānaṃ dvaṅgulakeso vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘dvaṅgulakeso vā’’ti. Dvīhi aṅgulīhi atiritto keso imassātidvaṅgulātirittakeso. Ekasikhāmattadharopi hotīti yojanā.

Khaṇḍasīmāyanti: within a khaṇḍasīmā, whether it be a vihārasīmā or an upacārasīmā. Yo panāti: but whoever is seeking ordination. Vibbhantako vāti: or newly deranged. He said, "dvaṅgulakeso vā," because for those who have already ordained, hair that is two fingerbreadths long is suitable. Dvaṅgulātirittakeso: hair that exceeds two fingerbreadths. The construction implies that even one who only maintains a single topknot is acceptable.

100.Mārabyādhināti māraṇābādho. So hi sattānaṃ māraṇaṭṭhena, vividhassa ca dukkhassa ādahaṭṭhena mārabyādhīti vuccati. Imināahivātakarogenāti ettha ahivisasadisena vātena pavatto rogo ahivātakarogoti vuccatīti dasseti. Tamatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘yatra hī’’tiādi. Tatthayatrāti yasmiṃ kule. So rogo tasmiṃ kule dvipade catuppade paṭhamaṃ gaṇhāti, pacchā gehasāmike gaṇhātītidhammapadaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.sāmāvatīvatthu) vuttaṃ.Tathāti yathā añño bhittiṃ vā chadanaṃ vā bhinditvā palāyitvā tirogāmādigato vā hutvā muccati, tathā. Ettha ca kule pitāputtā mucciṃsūti attho.

100.Mārabyādhināti: a deadly disease. Indeed, because it is the means of killing beings and the cause of various sufferings, it is called mārabyādhi. With "iminā ahivātakarogenāti," he shows that a disease caused by a wind similar to snake venom is called ahivātakaroga. Expanding on that meaning, he says, "yatrātiādi." There, yatrāti: in which family. In that family, the disease first afflicts the bipeds or quadrupeds, then the householder, as it is stated in the Dhammapada Aṭṭhakathā (Dha. Pa. Aṭṭha. 1. Sāmāvatīvatthu). Tathāti: just as another escapes by breaking through a wall or roof and going to another village, etc. Here, the meaning is that the father and son escaped from the family.

Kākuḍḍepakanti ettha kāke uḍḍāpetīti kākuḍḍepako, kāke vā uḍḍāpetvā bhattaṃ bhuñjituṃ sakkotīti kākuḍḍepakoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yo vāmahatthenā’’tiādi. Tatthauḍḍāpetvāti uddhaṃ ākāsaṃ gamanāpetvā.Tanti kākuḍḍepakaṃ.

Kākuḍḍepakanti: here, kākuḍḍepako means one who scares away crows; he shows the derivation, kākuḍḍepako, as one who is able to eat food after scaring away crows, by saying, "yo vāmahatthenā"tiādi. There, uḍḍāpetvāti: having caused to go upwards into the sky. Tanti: that kākuḍḍepaka.

102.Ittarasaddo appamattakavācako anipphannapāṭipadikoti āha ‘‘appamattako’’ti. ‘‘Katipāhamevā’’ti iminā tassa atthaṃ dasseti.

102. The word Ittara is indicative of a small amount, an underived nominal stem, so he says, "appamattako"ti. With "Katipāhamevā"ti, he shows its meaning.

40. Nissayamuccanakakathā
40. Nissayamuccanakakathā

103.Ogaṇenāti ettha otyūpasaggo lāmakatthavācakoti āha ‘‘parihīnagaṇenā’’ti. Attano vuḍḍhatarasseva bhikkhussa santike nissayo gahetabboti āha ‘‘sacāyaṃ vuḍḍhatara’’ntiādi. Tatthaayanti abyatto bhikkhu.Upasampadāyāti upasampādetvā.Āyasmatoti āyasmantaṃ, upayogatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Āyasmato vā ovādanti yojanā.Sabbatthāti sabbesu.Āpucchanesūti disāpakkamanādiatthāya āpucchanesu.Etthāti imasmiṃ nissayavasanaṭṭhāne.Tanti tattakaṃ sutaṃ.Tassāti sutassa.

103.Ogaṇenāti: here, the prefix "o" in "ogaṇena" indicates inferiority, so he says, "parihīnagaṇenā"ti. One should take nissaya only with a bhikkhu who is older than oneself, so he says, "sacāyaṃ vuḍḍhatara"ntiādi. There, ayanti: this unskillful bhikkhu. Upasampadāyāti: having given the higher ordination. Āyasmatoti: to the venerable one; this is a possessive case in the sense of use. Or, it can be construed as "Āyasmato vā ovādaṃ." Sabbatthāti: in all. Āpucchanesūti: in instances of asking leave for the purpose of departing to another direction, etc. Etthāti: in this place where one dwells in dependence. Tanti: that much that has been heard. Tassāti: of that which has been heard.

41. Rāhulavatthukathā
41. Rāhulavatthukathā

105.Kapilavatthūti etthakapiloti kaḷāravaṇṇo isi vuccati, so vasati etthāti kapilavatthu, assamo. Tasmiṃ ṭhāne māpitattā nagarampi kapilavatthūti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.267; su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.362) vuccati.Ayanti vakkhamānakathā.Suddhodanamahārājāti etthasuddhodanoti tassa rañño nāmaṃ. Atha vā suddhaṃ odanaṃ imassāti suddhodano, soyeva mahārājā suddhodanamahārājā. Viharati kirāti sambandho.Soti suddhodanamahārājā.Rājagahanti rājagahanagaraṃ.Sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto. Āyācāmīti hi attho.Meti mama, puttanti sambandho, anādare vā sāmivacanaṃ.Soti amacco.Sādhūti sampaṭicchanatthe nipāto. Evanti hi attho.Athāti tasmiṃ nisīdanakāle.Assāti purisasahassaparivārassa amaccassa.Tatoti yācanakāraṇā.Nanti purisasahassaparivāraṃ amaccaṃ.Tatthevāti rājagaheyeva.Tepīti aṭṭha dūtāpi.Teti nava dūtā.

105.Kapilavatthūti: here, kapiloti refers to a sage of a dark hue; that place where he dwells is Kapilavatthu, his hermitage. Because the city was built in that place, it is also called Kapilavatthu (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.267; Su. Ni. Aṭṭha. 2.362). Ayanti: the following story. Suddhodanamahārājāti: here, suddhodanoti is the name of that king. Alternatively, Suddhodano means one who has pure rice; that very great king is Suddhodanamahārājā. The connection is that he was staying. Soti: Suddhodanamahārājā. Rājagahanti: the city of Rājagaha. Sādhūti: an indeclinable used in the sense of entreaty. Indeed, the meaning is "I entreat." Meti: mine; it is connected to "puttaṃ," or it is a possessive case used without regard. Soti: the minister. Sādhūti: an indeclinable used in the sense of acceptance. Indeed, the meaning is "Yes." Athāti: at that time of sitting down. Assāti: of the minister with a retinue of a thousand men. Tatoti: because of the request. Nanti: the minister with a retinue of a thousand men. Tatthevāti: in Rājagaha itself. Tepīti: those eight messengers also. Teti: the nine messengers.

Athāti tato pacchā.Ekadivasajātakanti ekasmiṃ divase jātakaṃ.Soti kāḷudāyīamacco.Pabbajitvāpīti pisaddena ‘‘apabbajitvāpī’’ti atthaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Tathevāti yathā nava dūtā saparivārā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, tathevāti attho.Soti kāḷudāyī.Sambhatesūti sambharitesu gahetvā niṭṭhāpitesūti attho.Vissaṭṭhakammesūti vissaṭṭhā kammantā etesanti vissaṭṭhakammantā, tesu.Supupphitesūti sundarapupphasañjātesu.Paṭipajjanakkhameti paṭipajjanatthāya khame yogye. Gamanavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇesīti sambandho.Saṭṭhimattāhīti (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. nidānakathā 2) saṭṭhipamāṇāhi.Etanti etaṃ saṃvaṇṇassa kāraṇaṃ kinti pucchi. Cārikaṃ pakkamituṃ kāloti yojanā.Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Bhagavā pakkāmīti sambandho.Parivutoti parisamantato vuto āvuto nivuto hutvāti sambandho.Aturitacārikanti ajavanacārikaṃ.

Athāti: after that. Ekadivasajātakanti: the jātaka that occurred on one day. Soti: the minister Kāḷudāyī. Pabbajitvāpīti: the "pi" combines the meaning "apabbajitvāpī" (even without ordaining). Tathevāti: just as the nine messengers with their retinues attained arahantship, just so. Soti: Kāḷudāyī. Sambhatesūti: in those that had been gathered and completed. Vissaṭṭhakammesūti: those whose work was finished; vissaṭṭhakammantā, in those. Supupphitesūti: in those beautifully filled with flowers. Paṭipajjanakkhameti: suitable and fit for proceeding. The connection is that he described the beauty of the journey. Saṭṭhimattāhīti: (Bu. Vaṃ. Aṭṭha. Nidānakathā 2) with approximately sixty. Etanti: he asked, "What is the reason for this description?" The construction is "It is time to set out on tour." Tena hīti: an indeclinable used in the sense of urging. The connection is "The Blessed One will depart." Parivutoti: surrounded on all sides; the connection is "having become encircled, enclosed, and encompassed." Aturitacārikanti: a journey without haste.

Evanti iminā nayena. Bhagavati pakkante ca satīti yojanā.Nikkhantadivasatoti phagguṇapuṇṇamiyā pāṭipadadivasato.Uttamabhojanarasassāti uttamabhojanarasena.Dassathāti dadeyyātha.Tenevāti saddhāya uppādanakāraṇeneva.Nanti kāḷudāyiṃ. Bhagavā ṭhapesīti sambandho.Etadagganti eso aggo.Yadidanti yo ayaṃ.Etadaggeti etadaggaṭṭhāne.

Evanti: in this manner. The construction is "when the Blessed One had set out." Nikkhantadivasatoti: from the day of departure, the first day of the waxing fortnight of Phagguṇa. Uttamabhojanarasassāti: with the taste of excellent food. Dassathāti: you should give. Tenevāti: by that very cause of the arising of faith. Nanti: Kāḷudāyiṃ. The connection is "The Blessed One established." Etadagganti: this is the foremost. Yadidanti: that which is this. Etadaggeti: in the foremost position.

Ñātiseṭṭhanti ñātīnaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, ñātiyeva vā seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavantanti yojanā.Nigrodhasakkassāti nigrodhanāmakassa sakkassa.Tatthāti nigrodhasakkassa ārāme.Paccuggamananti paṭimukhaṃ uṭṭhahitvā gamanaṃ.Tatoti pahiṇato, paranti sambandho. Rājakumāre ca rājakumārikāyo ca pahiṇiṃsūti yojanā.Tesanti rājakumārarājakumārikānaṃ.Tatrāti nigrodhārāme. Māno jāti sabhāvo etesantimānajātikā,mānena, māno vā thaddho etesantimānathaddhā. Teti sākiyā, āhaṃsūti sambandho.

Ñātiseṭṭhanti: the best of relatives, or the relative who is the best; the connection is "bhagavantaṃ" (to the Blessed One). Nigrodhasakkassāti: of the grove named Nigrodha. Tatthāti: in the Nigrodha grove. Paccuggamananti: going out to meet face to face. Tatoti: having sent, the connection is "paranti" (beyond). The construction is "they sent princes and princesses." Tesanti: of those princes and princesses. Tatrāti: in the Nigrodha grove. Māno jāti sabhāvo etesanti mānajātikā: those whose nature is pride by birth; or mānathaddhā: those who are stiff with pride. Teti: those Sakyans; the connection is "āhaṃsu" (they said).

Tesūti sākiyesu.Neti ñātayo.Vuṭṭhāyāti catutthajjhānato vuṭṭhahitvā.Tesanti ñātīnaṃ.Kaṇḍambarukkhamūleti kaṇḍanāmakena uyyānapālena ropimassa ambarukkhassa āsanne.Rājāti suddhodanamahārājā.Voti tumhākaṃ, pādeti sambandho.Ayanti vandanā.Jambucchāyāyāti jamburukkhassa chāyāya. Iti āhāti yojanā.

Tesūti: in those Sakyans. Neti: relatives. Vuṭṭhāyāti: having arisen from the fourth jhāna. Tesanti: of the relatives. Kaṇḍambarukkhamūleti: near the mango tree planted by the gardener named Kaṇḍa. Rājāti: King Suddhodana. Voti: your; the connection is "pādaṃ" (feet). Ayanti: this salutation. Jambucchāyāyāti: in the shade of the jambu tree. The construction is "Iti āha" (thus he said).

Sikhāppattoti aggappatto, koṭippattoti attho.Tatoti nisīdanato, paranti sambandho.Pokkharavassanti padumavane vuṭṭhavassasadisaṃ.Tambavaṇṇanti lohitavaṇṇaṃ.Tanti apatanaṃ bhagavā kathesīti sambandho.

Sikhāppattoti: having attained the peak, having attained the summit. Tatoti: from sitting down, the connection is "paranti" (beyond). Pokkharavassanti: like a rain falling in a lotus pond. Tambavaṇṇanti: red in color. Tanti: the connection is "bhagavā kathesīti" (the Blessed One spoke about that not falling down).

Dutiyadivaseti kapilavatthuṃ pattadivasato dutiye divase.Indakhīleti nagarassa ummāre.Kathanti kenākārena cariṃsu nu khoti yojanā. Agamaṃsu kiṃ cariṃsu kinti yojanā.Sapadānacāranti gharapaṭipāṭikhaṇḍanavirahitena saha pavattaṃ cāraṃ.Tatoti āvajjanato, paranti sambandho.Ayameva vaṃsoti pubbabuddhānaṃ ayameva vaṃso.Ayaṃ paveṇīti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Anusikkhantāti anu paṭibhāgaṃ sikkhantā.Niviṭṭhagehatoti nivāsanatthāya visitagehato.Ayyoti adhipo sāmīti attho.Siddhatthakumāroti sabbalokassa siddho attho asmiṃ atthītisiddhattho,soyeva kumāro siddhatthakumāro.Sīhapañjaranti vātapānaṃ. Tañhi sīharūpaṃ dassetvā katapañjarattā sīhapañjaranti vuccati.Dassanabyāvaṭoti dassane, dassanatthāya vā byāvaṭo. Rāhulamātāpi devī ārocesīti sambandho.Kapālahatthoti kapālo hatthesu assa bhagavatoti kapālahattho, hutvāti sambandho.Nānāvirāgasamujjalāyāti nānāṭhānesu virāgāya samujjalāya. Virocamānaṃ bhagavantanti sambandho.

Dutiyadivaseti: on the second day from the day he arrived in Kapilavatthu. Indakhīleti: at the city's threshold. Kathanti: he wondered, "In what manner did they go on alms round?" He wondered, "Did they arrive, how did they go on alms round?" Sapadānacāranti: an alms round that proceeded without breaking the sequence of houses. Tatoti: from reflecting, the connection is "paranti" (beyond). Ayameva vaṃsoti: this very lineage of former Buddhas. Ayaṃ paveṇīti: a synonym for that same lineage. Anusikkhantāti: learning in accordance with (tradition). Niviṭṭhagehatoti: from a house that had been entered for dwelling. Ayyoti: the lord, the master. Siddhatthakumāroti: that in whom the meaning for the entire world is accomplished is Siddhattho; that very prince is Siddhatthakumāro. Sīhapañjaranti: a window. Indeed, because it is a window made to show the form of a lion, it is called sīhapañjara. Dassanabyāvaṭoti: intent on seeing, or intent for the sake of seeing. The connection is "Rāhulamātāpi devī ārocesīti" (Queen Rāhulamātā also informed). Kapālahatthoti: the Blessed One, who has a bowl in his hand, is kapālahattho; having become. Nānāvirāgasamujjalāyāti: brilliantly shining in various places for detachment. The connection is "Virocamānaṃ bhagavantanti" (the Blessed One, who was shining).

Uṇhīsatoti siroveṭhanato. Tañhi uparisīse nahati bandhati, nahīyati bandhīyatīti vāuṇhīsoti vuccati.Narasīhagāthāhi nāmāti narasīhagāthānāmakāhi. Tā hi yasmā naroyeva sabbasattānaṃ sīho seṭṭho, narānaṃ, naresu vā sīho seṭṭhotinarasīho,tassa pakāsakā gāthā honti, tasmā narasīhagāthāti vuccanti.Raññoti sassurarañño, mātularañño vā.Saṃviggahadayoti calanacitto.Saṇṭhāpayamānoti suṭṭhu ṭhāpayamāno.Turitaturitanti turitato turitaṃ, atisīghanti attho.Kiṃ bhanteti kiṃ kāraṇā bhante.Ahuvatthāti hiyyattanīmajjhimapurisasaṅkhātāya tthavibhattiyā hūdhātussa ūkārassa uvādeso hoti, tasmā tumhe evaṃsaññino ahuvatthāti yojanā.Vaṃsacārittametanti etaṃ piṇḍāya caraṇaṃ vaṃsato paveṇito cārittaṃ.Tattha cāti mahāsammatakhattiyavaṃse ca.Ayanti mahāsammatakhattiyavaṃso.Antaravīthiyanti vīthiyā majjhe. Ṭhitova āhāti sambandho.

Uṇhīsatoti: from the head-covering. Indeed, that which binds or fastens on the upper head is called uṇhīso. Narasīhagāthāhi nāmāti: by the verses named Narasīhagāthā. Indeed, since a human alone is the lion, the best of all beings, the lion among humans, or the best among humans, is narasīho, the verses that reveal him are called Narasīhagāthā. Raññoti: of the father-in-law king, or maternal uncle king. Saṃviggahadayoti: with a trembling mind. Saṇṭhāpayamānoti: well establishing. Turitaturitanti: quickly, very swiftly. Kiṃ bhanteti: for what reason, Bhante? Ahuvatthāti: in the past tense, middle person plural form, the ū sound of the hū root is replaced by uvādeśa; therefore, "tumhe evaṃsaññino ahuvattha" (you have become those who think thus) is the construction. Vaṃsacārittametanti: this going for alms is a custom from the lineage. Tattha cāti: and in that Mahāsammata line of Khattiyas. Ayanti: this Mahāsammata line of Khattiyas. Antaravīthiyanti: in the middle of the street. The connection is "Ṭhitova āha" (standing, he said).

Uttiṭṭheti uddissa, uṭṭhahitvā vā piṇḍāya tiṭṭhane.Dhammaṃ sucaritanti suṭṭhu caritabbaṃ bhikkhācariyasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ.Careti careyya.Dhammacārīti bhikkhācariyasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ caraṇasīlo samaṇo.Sukhaṃ setīti upalakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ. Sesairiyāpathāpi lakkhaṇahāravasena gahetabbā samānakiccattā. Asmiñca loke paramhi ca loketi yojanā.

Uttiṭṭheti: intending, or having risen, for standing for alms. Dhammaṃ sucaritanti: the Dhamma that should be well practiced, called the going for alms. Careti: one should conduct oneself. Dhammacārīti: a samana whose habit is to conduct himself in the Dhamma called the going for alms. Sukhaṃ setīti: this is stated by way of implication. The remaining postures should also be taken in the manner of characteristic implication, because their function is the same. The construction is "Asmiñca loke paramhi ca loketi" (in this world and in the next world).

Na taṃ duccaritaṃ careti vesiyādigocarasaṅkhātaṃ duṭṭhu caritabbaṃ taṃ dhammaṃ na careyya.

Na taṃ duccaritaṃ careti: one should not practice that Dhamma that should be poorly practiced, which is called association with prostitutes, etc.

Dhammapālajātakaṃ sutvāti puna aparasmiṃ divase (jā. aṭṭha. 4.98 ādayo; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.nandattheravatthu) dhammapālajātakaṃ (jā. aṭṭha. 4.mahādhammapālajātakavaṇṇanā) sutvā.Maraṇasamayeti maraṇāsannakāle, maraṇasamayasamīpe vā, samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.

Dhammapālajātakaṃ sutvāti: again, on another day, having heard the Dhammapālajātaka (Jā. Aṭṭha. 4.98 ff.; Dha. Pa. Aṭṭha. 1. Nandattheravatthu). Maraṇasamayeti: at the time nearing death, or near the time of death; this is a locative case in the sense of proximity.

Sabbaṃ itthāgāranti sabbo orodho. So hi itthīnaṃ agārantiitthāgāranti vuccati. Iminā vacanatthena agārameva mukhyato labbhati, rājitthiyo pana upacārenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sā panāti rāhulamātā pana.Parijanenāti parivārena.Nanti ayyaputtaṃ. ‘‘Rājāna’’ntipadaṃ ‘‘gāhāpetvā’’tipade kāritakammaṃ, ‘‘patta’’ntipadaṃ tattheva dhātukammaṃ.Rājadhītāyāti suppabuddharañño dhītāya.ti rājadhītā.Gopphakesūti caraṇagaṇṭhīsu bhagavantaṃ gahetvāti yojanā. Atha vā bhagavato gopphake gahetvāti yojanā. Evañhi sati upayogatthe bhummavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Sabbaṃ itthāgāranti: the entire harem. Indeed, because it is the house of women, it is called itthāgāra. By this statement, it should be understood that mainly the house is obtained, but the royal women are obtained by way of association. Sā panāti: but Rāhulamātā. Parijanenāti: with the retinue. Nanti: the son. The word "Rājānaṃ" is the causative object in the word "gāhāpetvā," and the word "pattaṃ" is the object of the root in the same word. Rājadhītāyāti: of the daughter of King Suppabuddha. ti: the king's daughter. Gopphakesūti: having taken hold of the Blessed One at the ankles. Or, it can be construed as "having taken hold of the Blessed One's ankles." In this case, it should be understood as a locative case in the sense of use.

Anacchariyanti na acchariyaṃ, accharaṃ paharituṃ na yogyanti attho. Rājadhītā yaṃ attānaṃ rakkhi, idaṃ anacchariyanti yojanā.

Anacchariyanti: not astonishing; that which is not fit to strike with astonishment. The construction is "it is not astonishing that the king's daughter protected herself."

Taṃdivasamevāti tasmiṃ dutiyadivaseyeva.Kesavisajjananti rājacūḷāmaṇibandhanatthaṃ kumārakāle bandhitasikhāveṇisaṅkhātassa kesassa visajjanaṃ, mocananti attho.Paṭṭabandhoti asuko nāma rājāti nalāṭe suvaṇṇamayassa paṭṭassa bandhanaṃ.Gharamaṅgalanti abhinavagharaṃ pavesanamaṅgalaṃ.Āvāhamaṅgalanti āvāhe pavattaṃ maṅgalaṃ.Chattamaṅgalanti rājachattussāpanakāle pavattaṃ maṅgalaṃ.Maṅgalaṃ vatvāti maṅgalasaṃyuttaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathetvā.Janapadakalyāṇīti janapadamhi kalyāṇasamannāgatā.Tuvaṭṭaṃ khoti khippameva.Sopīti nandarājakumāropi.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.Dutiyadivaseti kapilavatthupattadivasato dutiye divase. Dhammapadaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.nandattheravatthu; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.nandattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘tatiyadivase nandaṃ pabbājesī’’ti vuttaṃ.

Taṃdivasamevāti: on that very second day. Kesavisajjananti: the letting go of the hair, which is the braid-like topknot that was bound in boyhood for the purpose of binding the royal diadem. Paṭṭabandhoti: the binding of a golden plate on the forehead, (declaring) "so-and-so is the king." Gharamaṅgalanti: the auspicious ceremony of entering a new house. Āvāhamaṅgalanti: the auspicious ceremony that occurs at a wedding. Chattamaṅgalanti: the auspicious ceremony that occurs at the time of raising the royal umbrella. Maṅgalaṃ vatvāti: having spoken a Dhamma talk connected with auspiciousness. Janapadakalyāṇīti: one endowed with beauty in the countryside. Tuvaṭṭaṃ khoti: very quickly. Sopīti: Prince Nanda also. Itītiādi: is the conclusion. Dutiyadivaseti: on the second day from the day of arriving in Kapilavatthu. However, in the Dhammapada Aṭṭhakathā (Dha. Pa. Aṭṭha. 1. Nandattheravatthu; Theragā. Aṭṭha. 1. Nandattheragāthāvaṇṇanā), it is stated that "on the third day, he ordained Nanda."

Sattame divaseti kapilavatthupattadivasatoyeva sattame divase. Etaṃ samaṇaṃ passāti yojanā.Brahmarūpavaṇṇanti brahmuno rūpasaṅkhāto vaṇṇo viya vaṇṇo imassāti brahmarūpavaṇṇo, taṃ.Ayanti ayaṃ samaṇo.Tyassāti te assa.Teti nidhayo.Assāti samaṇassa.Nanti samaṇaṃ.Yācāti yācāhi. Ayaṃ dvikammikadhātu.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Putto pitusantakassa sāmiko, iti tasmā me dehīti yojanā. Anurūpaṃ vacananti sambandho. Bhagavantaṃ anubandhīti bhagavato piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhi.

Sattame divaseti: on the seventh day from the day of arriving in Kapilavatthu itself. The construction is "passāti" (see this samana). Brahmarūpavaṇṇanti: that whose color is like the color called the form of Brahmā is brahmarūpavaṇṇo, that. Ayanti: this samana. Tyassāti: those belong to him. Teti: those treasures. Assāti: of the samana. Nanti: the samana. Yācāti: ask. This is a ditransitive verb. ti: truly, or because. The construction is "because a son is the owner of what belongs to his father, therefore, give (them) to me." The connection is "Anurūpaṃ vacananti" (appropriate speech). He followed the Blessed One from behind.

Na visahatīti na samattheti. Ayaṃ kumāro pitusantakaṃ yaṃ dhanaṃ icchati, tanti yojanā.Vaṭṭānugatanti vaṭṭadukkhaṃ anugataṃ.Savighātakanti vighātakehi pañcahi verehi sahitaṃ.Assāti kumārassa.Nanti kumāraṃ.Ayanti kumāro.Dāyajjanti dāyasaṅkhātaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dhanaṃ ādadātītidāyādo,putto, tassa idantidāyajjaṃ,mātāpitūnaṃ dhanaṃ.

Na visahatīti: he is not capable. The intention is: whatever wealth this young man desires that belongs to his father. Vaṭṭānugatanti: following the cycle of suffering. Savighātakanti: together with the five dangers that cause harm. Assāti: to the young man. Nanti: the young man. Ayanti: this young man. Dāyajjanti: that which is called inheritance, the wealth of the parents is taken, therefore he is called dāyādo, a son; belonging to him is dāyajjaṃ, the wealth of the parents.

Tatoti pabbajjāupasampadato. Upasampadaṃ paṭikkhipitvāti sambandho.Vimatīti vividhā icchā.Imañcapanatthanti imameva vimatisaṅkhātamatthaṃ. Dhammasenāpati āhāti sambandho. Bhagavato taṃ ajjhāsayanti yojanā.

Tatoti: from ordination and higher ordination. The connection is: having rejected higher ordination. Vimatīti: various desires. Imañca panatthanti: this very matter called doubt. The connection is: the General of the Dhamma says. The meaning is: the Blessed One's inclination.

Ovādācariyoti nivāsanapārupanādīsu sekhiyavattesu, ābhisamācārikesu ca ovādako ācariyo. Atha kasmā ‘‘āyasmā sāriputto rāhulakumāraṃ pabbājesī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi.Tatthāti tassaṃ pabbajjāupasampadāyaṃ.Na ācariyoti pabbajjācariyo ca ovādācariyo ca na issaro.

Ovādācariyoti: the preceptor who advises on the training rules regarding robes and so on, and on the Ābhisamācārika duties. Then, why was it said, "The venerable Sāriputta ordained Rāhula Kumāra?" He says, "Yasmā panā" etc. Tatthāti: in that ordination and higher ordination. Na ācariyoti: he is not the master of the ordination preceptor or the advising preceptor.

Uppannasaṃvegena hadayenāti ettha itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ. Uppannasaṃvego hadayo hutvāti hi yojanā.Sabbanti sabbaṃ vacanaṃ.

Uppannasaṃvegena hadayenāti: here, the instrumental case is used to indicate a specific characteristic. The meaning is: having a heart with arisen Saṃvega. Sabbanti: all the words.

Tatthāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ.Avisesenāti ‘‘dhana’’nti vā ‘‘añña’’nti vā ‘‘sāvajja’’nti vā ‘‘anavajja’’nti vā visesamakatvā sāmaññena.Na ca buddhānanti ettha casaddena na kevalaṃ apaṭirūpameva, atha kho buddhānañca na āciṇṇanti atthaṃ dasseti.Yanti yaṃ varaṃ.Tathā nandeti ettha tathāsaddassa upameyyatthajotakabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yatheva kirā’’tiādi. Yatheva bodhisattaṃ byākariṃsu, evaṃ nandampi rāhulampi byākariṃsu kirāti yojanā. Pāḷiyaṃ pana yathā bhagavati me bhante pabbajite anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ ahosi, tathā nande pabbajite anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ ahosi, tathā rāhule pabbajite adhimattaṃ dukkhaṃ ahosīti yojanā.Nemittakāti subhāsubhanimittaṃ kathentīti nemittakā.Puttassāti jeṭṭhaputtassa siddhatthakumārassa.Pabbajjāyāti pabbajjāhetu pabbajjākāraṇā, pabbajjānimittaṃ vā.Tatoti bhagavato pabbajjato.Tampīti nandampi.Itīti īdisaṃ. Bhagavato pabbajjāya mahantaṃ icchāvighātasadisanti attho.Tampīti rāhulampi.Tenāti pabbajjāhetunā.Assāti rañño. Uppajjīti sambandho.Itoti sokuppattito varayācanato vā.

Tatthāti: in relation to the previous statement. Avisesenāti: without making a distinction whether it is "wealth," or "other," or "blameworthy," or "blameless," generally. Na ca buddhānanti: here, with the particle "ca," it shows the meaning that it is not only unsuitable, but also not practiced by the Buddhas. Yanti: whatever boon. Tathā nandeti: here, showing that the word "tathā" indicates comparison, he says, "Yatheva kirā" etc. The meaning is: just as they predicted about the Bodhisatta, so they predicted about Nanda and Rāhula, it is said. In the Pali, however, the meaning is: "Just as when I, venerable sir, ordained the Blessed One, there was not a little suffering; so when Nanda was ordained, there was not a little suffering; so when Rāhula was ordained, there was excessive suffering." Nemittakāti: those who tell good and bad omens are called soothsayers. Puttassāti: of the eldest son, Siddhattha Kumāra. Pabbajjāyāti: because of the renunciation, due to the cause of renunciation, or as a sign of renunciation. Tatoti: from the Blessed One's renunciation. Tampīti: even Nanda. Itīti: such. The meaning is: similar to a great frustration of desire of the Blessed One's renunciation. Tampīti: even Rāhula. Tenāti: because of the renunciation. Assāti: to the king. The connection is: arose. Itoti: from the arising of sorrow or from the request for a boon.

Soti rājā.Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma. Ahampi nāma yo yādiso buddhamāmako dhammamāmako saṅghamāmako samāno, so tādiso ahampi na sakkomīti yojanā.Aññeti mayā apare.Dukkhanti ñātiviyogadukkhaṃ.Niyyānikakāraṇanti manussānaṃ garahaupavādaakkosato niyyānikaṃ kāraṇaṃ.

Soti: the king. Yatra hi nāmāti: whoever indeed. The meaning is: I too, being such a follower of the Buddha, follower of the Dhamma, follower of the Saṅgha, am not able. Aññeti: others than me. Dukkhanti: the suffering of separation from relatives. Niyyānikakāraṇanti: a cause for escape from the criticism, reproach, and abuse of humans.

Tatthāti ‘‘ananuññāto’’tiādivacane. Janetītijananī,mātā. Janetītijanako,pitā. Iminā posāvanikamātāpitaro nivatteti. Mātā vā matā hotīti yojanā.So eva vāti putto eva vā.Anuññātomhīti vadatīti saccena vā alikena vā ‘‘anuññātomhī’’ti vadati. Mātā vā sayaṃ pabbajitāti yojanā.Pitassāti pitā assa.Assāti puttassa.Vippavutthoti mātuyā kenaci kāraṇena pavāso.

Tatthāti: in the statement beginning with "ananuññāto." Janetīti: jananī, mother. Janetīti: janako, father. With this, he excludes the nurturing parents. The meaning is: or the mother is dead. So eva vāti: or the son himself. Anuññātomhīti vadatīti: he says, "I am permitted," either truthfully or falsely. The meaning is: or the mother herself has gone forth. Pitassāti: the father of him. Assāti: of the son. Vippavutthoti: the mother is away for some reason.

Cūḷamātādīnantiādisaddena mahāmātādīni saṅgaṇhāti.Posanakāti vaḍḍhanakā.Tesupīti posanakamātāpitaresupi.

Cūḷamātādīnanti: with the word "ādi," he includes Mahāmātā etc. Posanakāti: nurturing. Tesupīti: even in those nurturing parents.

Jīvassevāti tassa jīvassa eva, pabbājentassa vā bhikkhussa, na desantaragamanādīnamatthāyāti attho.Tesanti mātāpitūnaṃ.

Jīvassevāti: only for the sake of that life, or for the sake of the monk who ordains him, not for the purpose of going to another country, etc., is the meaning. Tesanti: of the parents.

Mahākantāroti kena udakena taritabbotikantāro,nirudakakantārova mukhyato labbhati, vāḷakantāro corakantāro amanussakantāro dubbhikkhakantāro marukantāroti ime pañca kantārā rūḷhīvasena. Mahanto kantāromahākantāro.

Mahākantāroti: that which must be crossed with water is kantāro, mainly a waterless desert is obtained, but also a windy desert, a robber-infested desert, a desert inhabited by non-humans, a famine-stricken desert, and a sandy desert are the five deserts in common usage. A great desert is mahākantāro.

Yāvataketi ettha yāvasaddo pamāṇatthoti āha ‘‘yattake’’ti.

Yāvataketi: here, the word "yāva" means "extent," so he says, "yattake" (however much).

42. Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathā
42. The Account of the Grounds for Expulsion, Punishment, and Suspension

106.Nāsanavatthūti liṅganāsanāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ, kāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pacchimānaṃ pañcannanti yojanā.Daṇḍakammavatthūti daṇḍakammassa kāraṇaṃ.

106.Nāsanavatthūti: the basis for expulsion, the reason for depriving of the signs [of a monk], it is said. The connection is: of the last five. Daṇḍakammavatthūti: the cause for punishment.

107.Appatissāti ettha bhikkhūnaṃ vacanassa paṭimukhaṃ ādarena asavanaṃ bhikkhū jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne na ṭhapenti nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘bhikkhū jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne’’tiādi. ‘‘Samānajīvikā’’ti imināasabhāgavuttikāti etthasabhāgasaddo samānasaddapariyāyo,vuttisaddo jīvikapariyāyoti dasseti.Parisakkatīti ettha sakka gatiyantidhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 ḷakārantadhātu) vuttattā paripubbo sakkasaddo gatyatthoti āha ‘‘parakkamatī’’ti.Kintīti kimeva.Itisaddo hettha evasaddattho, kena eva upāyenāti hi attho.Akkosati cevāti jātiādīhi akkosati ceva.Bhedetīti bhedāpeti.Āvaraṇaṃ kātunti ettha āvaraṇasaddo nivāraṇasaddavevacanoti āha ‘‘nivāraṇaṃ kātu’’nti.Yatthāti yasmiṃ pariveṇe, senāsane vā.Vassaggenāti vassagaṇanāya.(Tassāti pariveṇasenāsanassa.Upacāreti āsanne).Mukhadvārikanti mukhasaṅkhātena dvārena ajjhoharitabbaṃ. ‘‘Vadatopī’’ti iminā vacīpayogena dukkaṭāpattiṃ dasseti, ‘‘nikkhipatopī’’ti iminā kāyapayogena.Anācārassāti daṇḍakamme anācārassa.Ettake nāma daṇḍakammeti ettake nāma udakāharāpanādisaṅkhāte daṇḍakamme.Idanti yāgubhattādiṃ.Lacchasīti labhissasi. ‘‘Ettake nāma daṇḍakamme’’ti vuttavacanassa yuttiṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavatā hī’’tiādi.Daṇḍakammanti daṇḍenti damenti etenātidaṇḍo,soyeva kattabbattā kammanti daṇḍakammaṃ āvaraṇādi.Aparādhānurūpanti vītikkamassa aparādhassa anurūpaṃ.Tampīti udakadāruvālikādiāharāpaṇampi.Tañca khoti tañca karaṇaṃ.Oramissatīti kāyena oramissati.Viramissatīti vācāya viramissati.Uṇhapāsāṇe vātiādīsu vāsaddena aññānipi attatāpanaparitāpanādīni kammāni saṅgaṇhāti.

107.Appatissāti: here, showing that monks do not respectfully listen to the word of the monks, and do not place them in the position of elders, he says, "bhikkhū jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne" etc. With "Samānajīvikā," he shows that in asabhāgavuttikā, the word sabhāga is a synonym for the word samāna (equal), and the word vutti is a synonym for livelihood. Parisakkatīti: here, because the word sakka is mentioned in the lists of roots that mean motion (Saddanītidhātumālā, ḷakārantadhātu 16), the word sakka preceded by pari is gatyattha (meaning motion), so he says, "parakkamatī" (he strives). Kintīti: kimeva (how indeed). The word iti here has the meaning of the word eva (indeed), the meaning is: by what means indeed? Akkosati cevāti: he also insults with regards to birth etc. Bhedetīti: he causes to be divided. Āvaraṇaṃ kātunti: here, the word āvaraṇa is synonymous with the word nivāraṇa, so he says, "nivāraṇaṃ kātu" (to make a barrier). Yatthāti: in whatever monastery or dwelling. Vassaggenāti: by the counting of years. (Tassāti: of the monastery or dwelling. Upacāreti: in the vicinity). Mukhadvārikanti: that which must be ingested through the door called the mouth. With "vadatopī," he shows a dukkata offense due to verbal effort; with "nikkhipatopī," he shows one due to physical effort. Anācārassāti: of misconduct in punishment. Ettake nāma daṇḍakammeti: in so much punishment, namely the act of making one carry water, etc. Idanti: this rice gruel, etc. Lacchasīti: you will obtain. Showing the reason for the statement "ettake nāma daṇḍakamme," he says, "bhagavatā hī" etc. Daṇḍakammanti: that by which they punish and tame is daṇḍo, that very thing is an action that must be done, therefore kammanti daṇḍakammaṃ, punishment is the barrier etc. Aparādhānurūpanti: appropriate to the transgression, to the offense. Tampīti: even making one carry water, wood, sand, etc. Tañca khoti: and that doing. Oramissatīti: he will interfere with his body. Viramissatīti: he will desist with his speech. Uṇhapāsāṇe vāti: with "vā" in "or on hot stones," etc., he includes other actions as well, such as self-tormenting and self-mortifying.

43. Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthuādikathā
43. The Account Beginning with the Ground for Prevention without Asking Permission

108.Upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchāti ettha upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchitvā. Sabbathā kiṃ na kātabbanti āha ‘‘tumhāka’’ntiādi.Daṇḍakammamassāti daṇḍakammaṃ assa.Assāti sāmaṇerassa. Saddhiṃ upajjhāyena viharantītisaddhivihārikā. Nissayācariyādīnaṃ ante samīpe vasantītiantevāsikā,upasampannāyeva.

108.Upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchāti: here, without asking the preceptor. What should not be done in every way? He says, "tumhāka" etc. Daṇḍakammamassāti: punishment is for him. Assāti: for the novice. Saddhiṃ upajjhāyena viharantīti: saddhivihārikā (one who lives with the preceptor). Nissayācariyādīnaṃ ante samīpe vasantīti: antevāsikā, only for those who are fully ordained.

Apalāḷentīti ettha laḷa upasevāyanti dhātupāṭhesu vuttattā (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 ḷakārantadhātu) there laḷato upasevato apagamentīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Idha pana adhippāyatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tumhāka’’ntiādi.Apalāḷetabbāti aññaṃ laḷato upasevato apagametabbā. Parisabhūte sāmaṇerūpasampanneti yojanā.Ādīnavanti dussīlaṃ nissāya vasanassa dosaṃ. Nhāyituṃ āgatena tayā gūthamakkhanaṃ kataṃ viya dussīlaṃ nissāya viharantena dussīlaṃ katanti yojanā. ‘‘Dussīla’’nti padaṃ purimapacchimapadāpekkhaṃ, tasmā dvinnaṃ padānaṃ majjhe vuttaṃ. Tattha purimapadāpekkhakāle vuttakammaṃ, pacchimapadāpekkhakāle avuttakammaṃ.Soti sāmaṇerūpasampanno.Upajjhāyaṃ vāti sāmaṇeraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Nissayaṃ vāti upasampannaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

Apalāḷentīti: here, because it is mentioned in the lists of roots that "laḷa" means "to serve" (Saddanītidhātumālā, ḷakārantadhātu 18), the meaning is: to drive away from the elder who serves laḷa. Here, however, showing the intended meaning, he says, "tumhāka" etc. Apalāḷetabbāti: others should be driven away from serving laḷa. The connection is: the novice and the fully ordained monk present in the assembly. Ādīnavanti: the fault of living depending on an immoral person. It is like one who smears dung on oneself after coming to bathe, so the meaning is: one who lives depending on an immoral person is doing an immoral act. The word "dussīla" is relative to the preceding and following words, therefore it is mentioned in the middle of the two words. There, the action mentioned is relative to the preceding word, and the action not mentioned is relative to the following word. Soti: the novice or fully ordained monk. Upajjhāyaṃ vāti: this is said in reference to the novice. Nissayaṃ vāti: this is said in reference to the fully ordained monk.

Tīsunāsanāsūti saṃvāsaliṅgadaṇḍakammanāsanasaṅkhātāsu tīsu nāsanāsu.Yoti sāmaṇero.Nānāāpattiyoti pārājikathullaccaya pācittiyāpattiyo.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Kunthakipillikampīti ettha pāṇakhādakehi sattehi kuthiyati hiṃsiyatīti kuntho, kuṃ pathaviṃ vā dhāretītikundho.

Tīsu nāsanāsūti: in the three expulsions, namely association, sign, and punishment expulsions. Yoti: whatever novice. Nānāāpattiyoti: pārājika, thullaccaya, and pācittiya offenses. ti: it is true, or because. Kunthakipillikampīti: here, that which is harmed and injured by creatures that eat pus is kuntho, or that which holds the earth is kundho (abscess).

kipillikaṃmikārassa lopaṃ katvā. Pillikasaddo hi potakapariyāyo. Kimīnaṃ, kimīsu vā pillikaṃkipillikaṃ. Nāsetabbataṃyevāti liṅgena nāsetabbabhāvameva.Tāvadevāti tasmiṃ māraṇabhindanakkhaṇeyeva.Assāti sāmaṇerassa.Senāsanaggāho ca paṭippassambhatīti vassacchedo hotīti adhippāyo.Ākiṇṇadosovāti liṅganāsanadosena ca daṇḍakammanāsanadosena ca ākuladosova.Virajjhitvāti virādhetvā. Yathānivatthapārutasseva sāmaṇerassāti sambandho.Tasmāti saraṇagamanaupasampadakammavācānaṃ sadisattā. Bhikkhunā samādinnaṃ viya imināpi samādinnāneva hontīti yojanā.Evanti evamijjhane, samādinne vā.Daḷhīkaraṇatthanti sikkhāpadānaṃ daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ.Patiṭṭhāpanatthanti sāmaṇerassa patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ.Lacchatīti labhissati. Saṅghena dātabboti sambandho.Apaloketvāti saṅghaṃ āpucchitvā. Iminā chinnavassakaṃ dasseti.

kipillikaṃ: after dropping the "mi" of kipillika. The word pillika is synonymous with "young." Pillika in worms, or among worms, is kipillikaṃ. Nāsetabbataṃyevāti: only the state of being expelled by the signs [of a monk]. Tāvadevāti: at that very moment of killing and destroying. Assāti: for the novice. Senāsanaggāho ca paṭippassambhatīti: the meaning is: the cutting off of residence occurs. Ākiṇṇadosovāti: as if filled with the faults of sign expulsion and punishment expulsion. Virajjhitvāti: having offended. The connection is: just like for a novice who is clothed as before. Tasmāti: because of the similarity of the refuges and the words of ordination. Because of this, it is as if only what was undertaken by a monk is undertaken by him as well, is the meaning. Evanti: in this way, or undertaken. Daḷhīkaraṇatthanti: for the strengthening of the training rules. Patiṭṭhāpanatthanti: for the establishment of the novice. Lacchatīti: he will obtain. The connection is: it should be given by the Saṅgha. Apaloketvāti: having asked the Saṅgha. With this, he shows the cutting off of residence.

Vippaṭipattiyāti vikārena paṭipajjanato.Bhaṇiteti bhaṇane.Jānitvāti jānitvā eva. Evakāro hettha ajjhāharitabbo, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na ajānitvā’’ti. Yāni pañca sikkhāpadānīti yojanā.Assāti sāmaṇerassa.Ṭhapanatthāyāti sikkhāpadānaṃ ṭhapanatthāya.Ayanti pārājiko.Visesoti bhikkhūnaṃ pācittiyato viseso.

Vippaṭipattiyāti: because of practicing wrongly. Bhaṇiteti: in speaking. Jānitvāti: having known. The word "eva" should be supplied here, therefore it is said, "na ajānitvā" (without knowing). The connection is: whatever are the five training rules. Assāti: for the novice. Ṭhapanatthāyāti: for the establishment of the training rules. Ayanti: this pārājika. Visesoti: the distinction from the pācittiya of the monks.

Paṭipakkhavasenāti ‘‘anarahaṃ asammāsambuddho’’tiādinā ca ‘‘dvākkhāto’’tiādinā ca ‘‘duppaṭippanno’’tiādinā ca paṭiviruddhavasena garahanto sāmaṇero nivāretabboti sambandho.Kaṇḍakanāsanāyāti kaṇḍakanāmakassa sāmaṇerassa daṇḍakammanāsanāya.Taṃ laddhinti avaṇṇabhāsanadiṭṭhiṃ.Accayanti atikkamaṃ, dosaṃ vā.Desāpetabboti ‘‘accayo maṃ bhante accagamā’’tiādinā desāpetabbā.Taṃ yuttanti ‘‘liṅganāsanāya nāsetabbo’’ti taṃ vacanaṃ patirūpaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Idhāti khandhake, ‘‘sāmaṇeraṃ nāsetu’’ntivacane vā.

Paṭipakkhavasenāti: by way of the opposition, because he is criticizing by saying, "he is unworthy, not a fully enlightened one" etc., and "it is poorly proclaimed" etc., and "he practices poorly" etc., the novice should be prevented, is the connection. Kaṇḍakanāsanāyāti: for the punishment expulsion of the novice named Kaṇḍaka. Taṃ laddhinti: that wrong view. Accayanti: transgression, or fault. Desāpetabboti: he should be made to confess, "Accayo maṃ bhante accagamā" etc. Taṃ yuttanti: that statement, "he should be expelled by sign expulsion," is appropriate. ti: it is true, or because. Idhāti: in the Khandhaka, or in the statement, "let him expel the novice."

Etthāti dasasu nāsanaṅgesu.‘‘Kāma’’ntipadena punaruttiniratthakadosāropanena garahaṃ dasseti.‘‘Panā’’tipadena tesaṃ dosānaṃ pahānena sambhāvanaṃ dasseti. Abrahmacāriṃ sāmaṇeranti sambandho.Upasampādetuṃ vaṭṭatīti upasampādanaṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhunidūsako sāmaṇeroti sambandho.Pabbajjampīti etthapisaddassa garahatthabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pageva upasampada’’nti.Etamatthanti etādisamatthaṃ.

Etthāti: in the ten factors of expulsion. With the word ‘‘kāma’’, he shows criticism by laying blame with repetition and meaningless faults. With the word ‘‘panā’’, he shows the possibility of abandoning those faults. The connection is: a novice who is not celibate. Upasampādetuṃ vaṭṭatīti: ordination is allowable. The connection is: a novice who defiles a nun. Pabbajjampīti: here, to show the meaning of the particle pi as censure, it is said, "pageva upasampada" (what to say of ordination). Etamatthanti: such a matter.

47. Paṇḍakavatthukathā
47. The Account of the Paṇḍaka

109.Daharataruṇasaddānaṃ vevacanattā vuttaṃ‘‘dahare…pe… taruṇe’’ti.Moḷigallasaddo thūlasarīravācako anipphannapāṭipadikoti āha ‘‘moḷigalleti thūlasarīre’’ti.Hatthibhaṇḍeti ettha hatthisaṅkhātaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ etesanti hatthibhaṇḍāti vutte hatthigopakāti āha ‘‘hatthigopake’’ti. Abhidhāne (abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ 367 gāthāyaṃ) pana ‘‘hatthimeṇḍo’’ti pāṭho atthi.

109.Because the words daharataruṇa are synonymous, it is said, ‘‘dahare…pe… taruṇe’’. The word Moḷigalla refers to a fat body, it is an uninflected noun, so he says, "moḷigalleti thūlasarīre" (moḷigalla means in a fat body). Hatthibhaṇḍeti: here, when it is said that those who have elephants as possessions are hatthibhaṇḍa, it means elephant keepers, so he says, "hatthigopake" (elephant keepers). In the Abhidhāna (Abhidhānappadīpikā, verse 367), however, there is a reading "hatthimeṇḍo."

Paṇḍakoti paḍati vikalabhāvaṃ gacchatīti paṇḍako. Saṃkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena dassento āha‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthayassāti paṇḍakassa.Asucināti sambhavena.Āsittassāti āsiñcitabbassa. Iminā asucinā mukhe āsiñcitabbotiāsittoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Ayanti paṇḍako.Ajjhācāranti methunajjhācāraṃ. ‘‘Usūyāya uppannāyā’’tiiminā usūyatītiusūyoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Upakkamenāti vāyāmena.Bījānīti aṇḍāni. Iminā upakkamena etasmā bījāni apanītānītiopakkamikoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Pakkhe pavatto paṇḍakopakkhapaṇḍako,pakkhe pariḷāhavūpasamo paṇḍakopakkhapaṇḍakoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekacco panā’’tiādi. Tattha pubbavacanatthepakkheti kālapakkheti attho daṭṭhabbo. Pacchimavacanatthepakkheti juṇhapakkheti attho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Akusalavipākānubhāvenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘paṇḍako hotī’’tipadeyeva sambandhitabbaṃ.Assāti paṇḍakassa.Napuṃsakapaṇḍakoti puriso viya sātisayaṃ paccāmitte na puṃsaketi abhimaddanaṃ kātuṃ na sakkotītinapuṃsako. Na pumā na itthītinapuṃsakoti katvā napumanaitthisaddassa niruttinayena napuṃsakakaraṇampi vadanti. Napuṃsakoyeva paṇḍako napuṃsakapaṇḍako.Tesūti pañcasu paṇḍakesu.Tesupīti opakkamikādīsu tīsupi. ‘‘Yasmiṃ pakkhe’’ti iminā pakkhe pakkhe paṇḍakabhāvaṃ nivatteti.Assāti paṇḍakassa.Etthāti pañcasu paṇḍakesu.Sopīti paṇḍakopi.Itoti paṇḍakavārato.‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā liṅganāsanameva atidisati.

48. Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthukathā

110.Pārijaññapattassāti parihāyatīti parijāni, issariyabhogādi, tassa bhāvo pārijaññaṃ, issariyabhogādikkhayo, taṃ pattoti pārijaññapatto, tassa.‘‘Pārijuññapattassā’’tipi ukārena saha pāṭho atthi.Khīṇakolaññoti ettha kule jātā kolaññā, ṇyapaccayo, nakārāgamo. Khīṇā kolaññā assāti khīṇakolaññoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mātipakkhapitipakkhato’’tiādi. Tatthamātipakkhapitipakkhatoti mātuyā pakkho mātipakkho, pituno pakkho pitipakkho, mātipakkho ca pitipakkho ca mātipakkhapitipakkhā.Phātiṃ kātunti ettha phā-dhātu vaḍḍhanatthoti āha ‘‘vaḍḍhetu’’nti. ‘‘Pucchiyamāno’’ti imināanuyuñjiyamānoti ettha anutyūpasaggavasena yujasaddo pucchanatthoti dasseti.

Theyyasaṃvāsakoti thenanaṃ theyyaṃ nakārassa yakāraṃ katvā, theyyāya saṃvāsako imassāti theyyasaṃvāsako. Ettha ca na kevalaṃ vassagaṇanādikoyeva saṃvāso nāma hoti, atha kho theyyāya liṅgagahaṇampi saṃvāsoyeva nāma. Tasmā tassa tividhabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tayo’’tiādi. Tattha liṅgaṃ thenetītiliṅgathenako,eseva nayo itaresupi. Tamatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthayoti theyyasaṃvāsako.Liṅgamattassevāti ettha mattasaddena saṃvāsādayo nivatteti.

Videsanti attano desato viyogaṃ desaṃ. Visaddo hettha viyogatthavācako. Atha vā vi dūraṃ desaṃ. Visaddo hettha dūratthavācako.Musāti abhūtatthe dutiyantanipāto, abhūtaṃ vacananti attho.Paṭibāhatīti aññe nivāreti.Saṃvāsathenako nāmāti ettha ko saṃvāso nāma, nanu ekakammādikoti āha ‘‘bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko’’tiādi.Bhikkhuvassagaṇanādikoti ādisaddena yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanasādiyanaṃ āsanapaṭibāhanaṃ uposathapavāraṇādīsu sandissananti imāni saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Kiriyabhedo’’ti iminā saṃ ekato vasiyati anenātisaṃvāsoti vacanatthena kiriyabhedo saṃvāso nāmāti dasseti.Imasmiṃ attheti imasmiṃ vatthumhi, imasmiṃ ṭhāneti attho. Iminā pārājikādiṭṭhāne pana ekakammādiko saṃvāso nāmāti dasseti.

ubhayathenakoti ettha ubhayasarūpaṃ dasseti.

Etthāti theyyasaṃvāsakaṭṭhāne.Rāja…pe… bhayehi vāti ettha bhayasaddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Rājabhayena ca dubbhikkhabhayena ca kantārabhayena ca rogabhayena ca veribhayena cāti hi attho.Cīvaragahaṇatthanti cīvarāharaṇatthaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho.saddo hetvatthaṃ vā sampadānatthaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti. Ayaṃ gāthā vibhattiyā uppaṭipāṭittā bhaggarītisaṅkhātā alaṅkāradosā na muttā.Liṅganti samaṇaliṅgaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.

Nādhivāsetīti na sampaṭicchati.Yāvāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ, ayaṃ panettha yojanā – idha yo rāja…pe… bhayena vā cīvaragahaṇatthaṃ vā liṅgaṃ ādiyati, so suddhamānaso hutvā yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, tāva eso ‘‘theyyasaṃvāsako nāmā’’ti na vuccatīti.

Tatrāti tāsu gāthāsu.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Evanti liṅge gahiyamāne.Tasminti jane.Anosaritvāvāti anokkamitvāva.Liṅgaṃ apanetvāti sayaṃ gahitaṃ samaṇaliṅgaṃ vināsetvā.Pabbajitālayanti pabbajitachāyaṃ.Pubbeti saṃvāsathenake.

Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattānīti sabbāni pāsaṇḍaṃ uddissa dinnāni bhattāni.

sattavāho. Viramitabbantiveraṃ,taṃ pavattetītiveriko. Kāyena pariharitabbānītikāyaparihāriyāni. Tanti tuvaṃ.Hīnāyāvattabhāvanti hīnāya gihibhāvāya āvattabhāvaṃ.

Uppabbajitvāti pabbajaviyogaṃ katvā.Tamatthanti uppabbajitasaṅkhātamatthaṃ.Assāti mahāsāmaṇerassa.

Mahanto vāti etthasaddo garahattho. Pageva daharoti dasseti. Abyatto hotīti yojanā.Soti sāmaṇero.

Vacchagorakkhādīnīti etthavacchoti taruṇagoṇo. So hi mātusantike vasatītivaccho. Mātuyā viyogakāle vā vassatīti vacchoti vuccati. Iminā dammagavajaraggavāpi sāmaññato gahitā.Govuccati khettabhūmi. Vaccho ca go cavacchagavā,tesaṃ rakkhanaṃ vacchagorakkho, so ādi yesaṃ kasikammādīnanti vacchagorakkhādīni. ‘‘Sūpasampanno’’ti iminā gahaṭṭhampi sace upasampādeti, sūpasampannoti dasseti.Anupasampannakāleyevāti sāmaṇerakāleyeva.Vinayavinicchayeti vinaye vuttassa theyyasaṃvāsakassa vinicchaye.Theyyasaṃvāsako hotiliṅgassa apanītattā.

Theyyasaṃvāsako na hotisaliṅge ṭhitattā.Ayampi theyyasaṃvāsako na hotikāsāye saussāhattā.Theyyasaṃvāsako hotikāsāye dhurassa nikkhittattā.

Theyyasaṃvāsako na hotisaliṅge ṭhitattā.Neva theyyasaṃvāsako hotikāsāye saussāhattā.Methunasevanādīhītiādisaddena pāṇātipātādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Theyyasaṃvāsako hotikāsāye dhurassa nikkhittattā.Ovaṭṭikanti adhovaṭṭena karaṇaṃ.Rakkhati tāvāti tāva rakkhati vīmaṃsanena nivāsitattā.Liṅganti samaṇaliṅgaṃ.Theyyasaṃvāsako hotigihiliṅgassa sampaṭicchitattā.

Vīmaṃsati vā sampaṭicchati vā rakkhatiyevaodātavatthassa antokāsāyabhāvato. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyāpi eseva nayo’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘sāpī’’tiādi.

Pāḷiyampīti pantiyampi. Seno maṃsapesiṃ gahetvā gacchati viya bhattapiṇḍe pattaṃ upanāmetvā gahetvā gacchati.Theyyasaṃvāsako na hotivassānaṃ agaṇanattā.

48. Titthiyapakkantakakathā

110.Pakkamatītipakkanto,‘‘paviṭṭho’’ti iminā kamudhātuyā padavikkhepatthaṃ dasseti, icchākantiatthe nivatteti.Soti titthiyapakkantako.Tatrāti titthiyapakkantake. Upasampanno bhikkhu gacchatīti sambandho.Tesanti titthiyānaṃ. ‘‘Titthiyo bhavissāmī’’ti pubbeva laddhigahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘liṅge ādinnamatte’’ti.Kusacīrādīnīti etthakusovuccati salākā.Cīroti panti, āvalīti attho. Kuse rajjunā āvunitvā kato cīrokusacīro,so ādi yesaṃ tānīti kusacīrādīni. Ādisaddena phalakacīrādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Kusatiṇehi kato cīrokusacīrotipi vadanti.Naggoti acelako.Ājīvakoti acelakavatamādāya jīvatīti ājīvako.Tesanti ājīvakānaṃ. Ovadito hutvāti sambandho.

Kinti kiṃ vataṃ.Luñcāpetīti apanayāpeti.Morapiñchādīnīti etthapiñchaṃvuccati pakkho. So hi piñchati ākāse gacchati anenāti piñchanti vuccati. Pichi gatiyanti dhātupāṭho. Morassa piñchaṃ morapiñchaṃ, taṃ ādi yesaṃ tānīti morapiñchādīni. Ādisaddena ulūkapiñchādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Yāva na sampaṭicchatīti yāva laddhiṃ na sampaṭicchati.Nanti vīmaṃsamānaṃ bhikkhuṃ.Laddhīti titthiyaladdhi.Rakkhatīti titthiyapakkantakato rakkhati. Laddhiyā abhāvena titthiyapakkantako na hotīti adhippāyo.Acchiddacīvaroti ettha ākāro kodhattho, aḍḍattho vā hoti, chiddasaddo dūsanattho hoti. Tasmā ākodhena aḍḍena vā chiddo dūsitotiacchiddoti attho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Acchinno’’tipi pāṭho. Acchiddaṃ cīvarametassāti acchiddacīvaro.Titthāyatananti titthīnaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ, titthiyānaṃ upassayanti attho.

49. Tiracchānagatavatthu

111.Devasampattisadisaṃ issariyasampattiṃ anubhavantopi so nāgo kasmā nāgayoniyā aṭṭīyatīti āha‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi.

Kiñcāpisaddo hettha sambhāvanājotako, panasaddo garahatthajotako.Kusalavipākenāti ahetukakusalavipākena.Tassāti nāgassa.Sajātiyāti samānajātiyā nāgiyā.Udakasañcārimaṇḍūkabhakkhanti udake sañcaraṇasīlaṃ maṇḍūkasaṅkhātaṃ bhakkhaṃ pātubhavatīti yojanā.Soti nāgo.Aṭṭīyatīti aramaṇaṃ pīḷiyati.Harāyatīti ettha haredhātu lajjanatthoti āha ‘‘lajjatī’’ti. Ekāranto dhātu bhūvādigaṇiko (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 rakārantadhātu).Jigucchatīti ettha gupadhātuyā kammaṃ dassento āha ‘‘attabhāva’’nti. ‘‘Tassa bhikkhuno’’tipadassa ‘‘nikkhante’’tipadena yojitabbattā bhummatthe sāmivacananti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ bhikkhusmi’’nti. Atha vātassa bhikkhunoti sāmiyogattā ‘‘nikkhante’’ti ettha bhāvatthe mānapaccayoti āha ‘‘nikkhamane’’ti. Iminā nikkhanteti ettha na antapaccayo, mānapaccayasseva antabhāvaṃ katvā vuttoti dasseti.Vissaṭṭhoti sativissajjito.Tasminti bhikkhumhi.Kapimiddhavasenevāti kapino middhavasena eva. Atha vā kapimiddhavasena niddāyanto iva niddāyantoti yojanā.Paṭinipajjīti puna nipajji.Vissaramakāsīti ettha visaddo virūpatthajotako, sarasaddo saddavācakoti dassento āha ‘‘virūpaṃ mahāsaddamakāsī’’ti.

tumhe khotthāti ettha ‘‘tumhe kho atthā’’ti padavibhāgaṃ katvā okārato parassa akārassa lopaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Akārassālopa’’ntipi pāṭho. Evañhi sati akārassa alopaṃ katvāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Iminā ‘‘tumhe kho atthā’’ti padacchedaṃ katvā akāre pare okārassa vakāraṃ katvā tumhe khvatthā’’ti pāṭho dassito. Kasmā imasmiṃ dhammavinaye avirūḷhidhammāti āha ‘‘jhāna…pe… abhabbattā’’ti. ‘‘Bhavathā’’ti imināatthāti ettha asadhātu sattatthavācako thavibhattīti dasseti.Sajātiyāti ettha samānā jāti etissāti sajātīti vutte nāgī evāti āha ‘‘nāgiyā evā’’ti.Manussitthiādīti ettha ādisaddena tiracchānagatitthīpetitthīdevitthiyo saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Dveme bhikkhave paccayā’’ti desanā sāvasesadesanāti dassento āha ‘‘ettha cā’’ti.Etthāti tiracchānagatavatthumhi.Abhiṇhanti abhikkhaṇaṃ punappunanti attho.

Tiracchānagatoti ettha kiṃ apāyapariyāpanno duggatiahetukapaṭisandhikovādhippetoti āha ‘‘nāgo vā hotū’’tiādi.

Tiracchānagato ti: Here, does it mean one who is included in the apāya, whose rebirth is due to an unwholesome cause? He says, "Whether he is a nāga," etc.

50. Mātughātakādivatthukathā
50. Stories about Matricide, etc.

112.Nikkhantinti ettha ‘‘imassa pāpakammassā’’ti chaṭṭhīyogattā bhāvatthe tipaccayoti āha ‘‘nikkhamana’’nti.Apavāhananti apāyapaṭisandhivahanato apagamanaṃ.Yenāti manussabhūtena yena jīvitā voropitāti sambandho.Manussitthibhūtāti manussitthī hutvā bhūtā, manussitthībhāvaṃ vā bhūtā pattā. Iminā tiracchānagatitthiādayo nivatteti. ‘‘Janikā’’ti iminā posāvanikamātādayo nivatteti.Sayampīti ettha pisaddo na kevalaṃ mātāyeva, atha kho puttenāpīti dasseti.Satāti santena. Manussajātikeneva satā manussajātiko eva hutvā voropitāti yojanā. Anantare bhave phalaṃ nibbattetītiānantariyaṃ,mātughātakakammaṃ, tena jātisāmaññampi ajanikaṃ ghātento ca janikampi jātibhedaṃ ghātento ca na anantariko hoti, tassa pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca na vāritāti dassento āha ‘‘yena panā’’tiādi. Tattha poseti vaddhetīti posāpaniyā, sā evaposāvanikāpakārassa vakāraṃ, yakārassa ca kakāraṃ katvā, posāvanikā ca sā mātā cetiposāvanikamātā. Assāti puttassa. Idaṃ padaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ. Tattha pubbapade bhāvasambandho, pacchimapade sāmisambandho. Sabbathā eseva nayo hotīti āha ‘‘sacepī’’tiādi.Vesiyāti upalakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ. Yāya kāyaci itthiyā puttassāpi gahetabbattā. ‘‘Ayaṃ me pitā’’ti ajānanameva hi pamāṇaṃ.Anenāti iminā puttena. ‘‘Pitughātakotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’ti iminā mātughātakepi ‘‘ayaṃ me mātā’’ti ajānitvā ghātentopi mātughātakotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti dasseti.

112.Nikkhanti ti: Here, because of the sixth case ending implying "of this evil deed," the suffix "ti" has the sense of a verbal noun. Therefore, he says, "nikkhamana" (departure). Apavāhana ti: means departing from conveying to rebirth in the apāyas. Yena ti: The connection is that he was deprived of life by a human being. Manussitthibhūtā ti: having been a human female or having attained the state of being a human female. With this, he excludes females in the animal realm, etc. With "janikā," he excludes foster mothers, etc. Sayampī ti: Here, the "pi" particle shows that it is not only the mother, but also the son. Satā ti: by an existing being. The construction is: having been deprived of life by a human being who was a human being. Ānantariyaṃ means producing a result in the immediately subsequent existence, the act of matricide; therefore, even if there is similarity of birth, one who kills a non-mother, or one who kills a different species, is not an anantarika, and his ordination and higher ordination are not prohibited. Showing this, he says, "yena panā," etc. Among them, poseti vaddheti means foster-mother (posāpaniyā); changing the "va" in posāpaniyā to "ka" and the "ya" to "ka," she is posāvanikā, and that mother is a posāvanikamātā. Assā ti: of the son. This word depends on what comes before and after. Here, in the preceding word, there is a relation of state, and in the subsequent word, a possessive relation. He says, "sacepītiādi" (even if), since this is the method in all cases. Vesiyā ti: is said by way of example, because it should be taken as applying to the son of any woman. The criterion is simply not knowing "this is my father." Anenā ti: by this son. By saying "Pitughātakotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati" (he is reckoned as a patricide), he shows that even if the matricide does not recognize "this is my mother," he is reckoned as a matricide.

114.Saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena dassento āha ‘‘manussajātiyaṃ hī’’tiādi.Apabbajitanti gihibhūtaṃ.Pabbajjā cassāti ettha casaddena upasampadāpi vāritāti dasseti.Assāti arahantaghātakassa.Avasesanti arahantato avasesaṃ.Assāti ariyaghātakassa.Ānantariyo na hotitiracchānagatattā panassa pabbajjā vāritāti attho netabbo.Etthāti mātughātakādikammesu.Vadhāyāti tadatthe catutthīti āha ‘‘vadhatthāyā’’ti. ‘‘Māretu’’nti iminā ‘‘vadhatthāyā’’ti ettha hanadhātu hiṃsanatthoti dasseti. ‘‘Nīyantī’’ti imināonīyantīti ettha otyūpasaggo dhātvatthānuvattakoti dasseti. Yaṃ pana vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Tassa vacanassa atthoti yojanā.‘‘Sacā ca iti ayaṃ nipāto vutto’’ti iminā bhayapīḷitattā ca niruttīsu akusalattā ca davābhaṇanena ravābhaṇanena ayaṃ nipāto corehi vuttoti dasseti.‘‘Sace ca icceva vā pāṭho’’ti iminā tehi tathā vuttepi saṅgītikāle vā potthakārūḷhakāle vā yathābhūtaṃ saṅgītattā, potthakārūḷhattā ca yathābhūto pāṭho atthīti dasseti.Tatthāti tesu padesu. Niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Tassāti ‘‘sacajja maya’’nti pāṭhassa. ‘‘Sace ajja maya’’nti iminā ekāralopasandhiṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sacejja maya’’nti akāralopasandhināpi pāṭho atthi.

114.Expounding in detail the meaning stated concisely, he says, "manussajātiyaṃ hītiādi" (for in the human species...). Apabbajita ti: one who is a layperson. Pabbajjā cassā ti: Here, by the "ca" particle, he shows that higher ordination is also prohibited. Assā ti: of the arahant-slayer. Avasesa ti: the remainder apart from an arahant. Assā ti: of the ariya-slayer. Ānantariyo na hoti: because he is an animal, the meaning to be conveyed is that his ordination is prohibited. Etthā ti: in these acts of matricide, etc. Vadhāyā ti: the fourth case ending is for the purpose of that, therefore he says, "vadhatthāyā" (for the purpose of killing). By "Māretu" (to kill), he shows that in "vadhatthāyā" (for the purpose of killing), the root "hana" means violence. By "Nīyantī" (being led), he shows that in onīyantī, the prefix "o" follows the meaning of the root. Yaṃ pana vacanaṃ vuttaṃti sambandho (whatever statement was made). Tassa vacanassa atthoti yojanā (the meaning of that statement). "Sacā ca iti ayaṃ nipāto vutto" ti: (sacā ca, this particle is said) with this, because of being frightened and distressed, and because of being unskilled in language, this particle was said by the thieves with a stammering utterance. "Sace ca icceva vā pāṭho" ti: (sace ca icceva vā is also a reading) with this, even though they said it that way, at the time of the compilation or at the time of writing the book, because of the compilation being according to reality, and because the book was written according to reality, there is a reading according to reality. Tatthā ti: in those places. It is a locative case used in specification. Tassā ti: of the reading "sacajja maya". By "Sace ajja maya," he shows the elision of the initial "a". There is also a reading with the elision of the final "a" as "Sacejja maya."

115.Pakatattanti pakatiyā sīlasaṅkhāto attā sabhāvo etissāti pakatattā, taṃ. Kāyasaṃsaggena bhikkhunīnaṃ pārājikattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlavināsaṃ pāpetī’’ti. Anicchamānaṃyeva bhikkhuninti sambandho.

115.Pakatattā ti: pakatiyā means whose nature, called sīla, is her own nature, therefore pakatattā, that. Because parājika offense for the bhikkhunis results from bodily contact, it is said, "sīlavināsaṃ pāpetī" (she causes the destruction of sīla). The connection is that she is a bhikkhunī even if unwilling.

Icchamānanti odātavatthavasanaṃ icchamānaṃ. Yasmā abhikkhunī hoti, tasmā bhikkhunīdūsako na hotīti yojanā. Sīlavipannaṃ bhikkhuninti sambandho.

Icchamāna ti: wanting to wear white clothes. Because she is not a bhikkhunī, therefore she is not a bhikkhunīdūsako (one who defiles a bhikkhunī). The connection is that she is a bhikkhunī who has lost her sīla.

Uddhammanti dhammato virahitaṃ.Ubbinayanti vinayato virahitaṃ.Catunnaṃ kammānanti apalokanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ.

Uddhamma ti: devoid of Dhamma. Ubbinaya ti: devoid of Vinaya. Catunnaṃ kammāna ti: of the four acts of apalokana, etc.

Duṭṭhacittenāti ettha na yaṃkiñci duṭṭhacittaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ nāma, atha kho vadhakacittanti āha ‘‘vadhakacittenā’’ti.Sarīreti sarīrabbhantare. Tathāgatassa hi abhejjakāyattā parūpakkamena cammacchedaṃ katvā lohitassa uppādanaṃ nāma natthi. Yo pana jīvako phāsuṃ karoti viya, phāsuṃ karotīti yojanā.Lohitañcāti pūtilohitañca.

Duṭṭhacittenā ti: Here, not just any corrupt mind is called a corrupt mind, but rather it is a mind of intent to kill, therefore he says, "vadhakacittenā" (with a mind of intent to kill). Sarīre ti: inside the body. For the Tathāgata, because his body cannot be broken, there is no such thing as producing blood by making a cut in the skin through the action of another. But one who makes a splint is like Jīvaka making a splint. Lohitañcā ti: and putilohita (bad blood).

54. Ubhatobyañjanakavatthukathā
54. Story about a Hermaphrodite

116.Ubhatobyañjanakoti ettha bāhiratthasamāsaṃ dassento āha ‘‘itthinimittuppādanakammato cā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘itthi…pe… kammato cā’’ti iminā ubhayasarūpaṃ dasseti. Ubhato kammato pavattanti pāṭhaseso yojetabbo.Byañjananti nimittaṃ.Assāti janassa.Karotipi kāretipīti ettha karadhātuyā suddhakammakāritakammāni dassento āha ‘‘purisanimittenā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘vītikkama’’nti iminā suddhakammaṃ dasseti, ‘‘para’’nti iminā kāritakammaṃ dasseti.Samādapetvāti uyyojetvā. Tassa duvidhabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘duvidho’’tiādi. Tattha itthibhāvena lakkhito ubhatobyañjanakoitthiubhatobyañjanako. Esa nayo itaratthāpi.

116.Ubhatobyañjanako ti: Here, showing the bahirattha compound, he says, "itthinimittuppādanakammato cā" (and also from the act of producing the female characteristic), etc. Here, by "itthi…pe…kammato cā," he shows the dual nature. The remainder of the passage should be construed as: ubhato kammato pavattanti (arising from both actions). Byañjana ti: sign. Assā ti: of the person. Karotipi kāretipī ti: Here, showing the pure action and the causative action of the verb "karoti," he says, "purisanimittenā" (with the male characteristic), etc. Here, by "vītikkama" (transgression), he shows the pure action, and by "para" (another), he shows the causative action. Samādapetvā ti: having instigated. Showing its dual nature, he says, "duvidho" (of two kinds), etc. Among them, the hermaphrodite who is characterized by the female state is the itthiubhatobyañjanako (female hermaphrodite). This method applies to the other as well.

Tatthāti duvidhesu ubhatobyañjanakesu.Itthinimittanti itthiyā aṅgajātaṃ. Eseva nayo ‘‘purisanimitta’’nti etthāpi.Pākaṭaṃ paṭicchannanti sabhāvato pākaṭaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Punapaṭicchannaṃ pākaṭanti rāgavasena paṭicchannaṃ pākaṭaṃ.Paraṃ gaṇhāpetīti parameva gaṇhāpetīti attho.Idanti kāraṇaṃ.Etesanti dvinnaṃ ubhatobyañjanakānaṃ.Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttaṃ,kiṃ vuttanti yojanā.Tatthāti ubhatobyañjanake.Vicāraṇakkamoti vīmaṃsanānukkamo. ‘‘Tattha vicārakkamo’’tipi pāṭho. Vicāraṇakkamo dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāya veditabbo, idha pana kiṃ veditabbanti āha ‘‘idamidha veditabba’’nti. Tatthaidanti napabbajjūpasampadakāraṇaṃ.Idhāti imissaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ.

Tatthā ti: among the two kinds of hermaphrodites. Itthinimitta ti: the female organ. This same method applies to "purisanimitta" as well. Pākaṭaṃ paṭicchannaṃ ti: naturally apparent and concealed. Again, paṭicchannaṃ pākaṭaṃ ti: concealed and apparent due to passion. Paraṃ gaṇhāpetī ti: it means causing only another to take. Ida ti: this reason. Etesa ti: of these two hermaphrodites. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttaṃ, (but it is said in the Kurundi) what is said? Tatthā ti: regarding the hermaphrodite. Vicāraṇakkamo ti: the sequence of investigation. There is also a reading "Tattha vicārakkamo." The sequence of investigation should be understood from the commentary to the Dhammasaṅgaha, but what should be understood here? He says, "idamidha veditabba" (this should be understood here). Among them, ida ti: the reason for non-ordination. Idhā ti: in this Vinaya commentary.

55. Anupajjhāyakādivatthukathā
55. Story about Not Having an Preceptor, etc.

117.Tena kho pana samayenāti ettha tasaddassa aniyamaniddesabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yena samayenā’’ti.Sikkhāpadaṃ apaññattaṃ hotīti ‘‘na bhikkhave anupajjhāyako upasampādetabbo’’ti sikkhāpadaṃ apaññattaṃ hoti. ‘‘Upajjhāyavirahita’’nti imināanupajjhāyakanti ettha akārassa virahatthaṃ dasseti. Upajjhāyavirahitaṃ upasampadāpekkhanti sambandho.‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā dosaṃ dasseti.Upajjhaṃ agāhāpetvāti ‘‘upajjhāyo me bhante hohī’’ti (mahāva. 65; mahāva. aṭṭha. 64) upajjhaṃ agāhāpetvā. Upasampādentassa kārakasaṅghassāti yojanā.Kammaṃ panāti upasampadakammaṃ pana. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā upasampādentassa āpatti, kammaṃ pana na kuppatīti vacanaṃ atidisati.

117.Tena kho pana samayenā ti: Here, showing the indefinite reference of "ta," he says, "yena samayenā" (at the time when). Sikkhāpadaṃ apaññattaṃ hotī ti: The training rule, "Monks, one without a preceptor should not be given higher ordination," was not yet laid down. By "Upajjhāyavirahita" (devoid of a preceptor), he shows that in anupajjhāyaka, the "a" indicates absence. The connection is that one devoid of a preceptor desires higher ordination. Showing the fault with "Eva" (thus), etc. Upajjhaṃ agāhāpetvā ti: without having him take a preceptor, "bhante, be my preceptor" (mahāva. 65; mahāva. aṭṭha. 64). The connection is with the Saṅgha of ordainers. Kammaṃ panā ti: but the ordination act. By "Eseva nayo" (this is the method), he extends the statement that the one who ordains incurs an offense, but the act is not invalid.

56. Apattakādivatthukathā
56. Story about Offenses, etc.

118.Yo piṇḍo hatthesu labbhatīti yojanā.Tadatthāyāti tassa piṇḍassa atthāya.Seyyathāpi titthiyāti ettha seyyathāpisaddo upamattho, titthiyasaddo ājīvakanāmake titthiye hotīti dassento āha ‘‘yathāpi ājīvakanāmakā titthiyā’’ti. Tasmā ājīvakasaṅkhāte titthiye upamaṃ katvā ujjhāyantīti āha ‘‘sūpabyañjanehī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Teti ājīvakā.Kammaṃ pana na kuppatīti pattacīvaresu asantesupi kammavācāya ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti parikittitattā kammaṃ na kuppatīti adhippāyo.

118.The connection is: yo piṇḍo hatthesu labbhati (whatever almsfood is obtained in the hands). Tadatthāyā ti: for the sake of that almsfood. Seyyathāpi titthiyā ti: Here, "seyyathāpi" is a particle expressing comparison, and he shows that the word "titthiya" applies to the titthiyas called ājīvakas, therefore he says, "yathāpi ājīvakanāmakā titthiyā" (just as the titthiyas called ājīvakas). Therefore, he says, "sūpabyañjanehī" (with soup and curry), etc., making a comparison to the titthiyas known as ājīvakas. Hī ti: truly, or because. Te ti: those ājīvakas. Kammaṃ pana na kuppatī ti: but the act is not invalid, the idea is that because the formula "with bowl and robe complete" was recited in the kammavācā, even if bowl and robe are not present, the act is not invalid.

Yācitakenāti ettha yācito hutvā gahitoyācitakoti dassento āha ‘‘yācitvā gahitenā’’ti. ‘‘Īdisena hī’’tiādinā dosaṃ dasseti.Tasmāti yasmā āpatti hoti, tasmā.Tassāti upasampadāpekkhassa. Nirapekkhehi ācariyupajjhāyādīhīti yojanā.Nissajjitvāti brahmadeyyena nissajjitvā. Anadhiṭṭhānupagānaṃ pattacīvarānaṃ apattacīvarattā vuttaṃ ‘‘adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ pattacīvara’’nti.Paṇḍupalāsanti samaṇuddesabhāvāpekkhaṃ. So hi rūḷhivasena paṇḍupalāsoti vuccati. Atha vā yathā paṇḍupalāso na harito, nāpi sukkho hoti, evaṃ sopi pabbajāpekkho na gihī hoti, nāpi sāmaṇero, tasmā samaṇuddesabhāvāpekkho ‘‘paṇḍupalāso’’ti vuccati.

Yācitakenā ti: Here, showing that yācitako means "having been asked for and taken," he says, "yācitvā gahitenā" (having been asked for and taken). Showing the fault with "Īdisena hī" (with such), etc. Tasmā ti: therefore, because there is an offense. Tassā ti: of the one seeking ordination. The connection is: by teachers, preceptors, etc. who are independent. Nissajjitvā ti: having given up to the brahmadeyya. Because robes and bowls that have not been formally offered and determined are not real robes and bowls, it is said, "adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ pattacīvaraṃ" (a robe and bowl that has not been determined). Paṇḍupalāsa ti: in relation to the state of a novice. For he is commonly called a paṇḍupalāsa (yellow leaf). Or, just as a paṇḍupalāsa is neither green nor dry, so too, one desiring ordination is neither a layperson nor a sāmaṇera; therefore, in relation to the state of a novice, he is called "paṇḍupalāso."

Anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapātanti bhikkhūhi anāmasitabbaggaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ.Sāmaṇerabhāgasamakoti sāmaṇerehi laddhena bhāgena samaṃ pavatto.Assāti paṇḍupalāsassa. Sāmaṇerassa sabbaṃ paṭijagganakammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati viya, assa kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.

Anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapāta ti: almsfood that should not be touched by the monks. Sāmaṇerabhāgasamako ti: equivalent to the share received by sāmaṇeras. Assā ti: of the paṇḍupalāsa. The connection is: just as it is proper for a sāmaṇera to do all duties of attendance, so too, it is proper for him to do so.

57. Hatthacchinnādivatthukathā
57. Story about One with a Severed Hand, etc.

119.Hatthacchinnādivatthūsu hatthā chinnā yassātihatthacchinnotiādivacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yassā’’tiādi.Maṇibandheti pakoṭṭhante. So hi yasmā ettha maṇisaṅkhātaṃ alaṅkāravikatiṃ bandhati, tasmā maṇibandhoti vuccati.Kappareti kapoṇiyaṃ. Sā hi paresaṃ piṭṭhīsu kapati hiṃsati anenāti ‘‘kapparo’’ti vuccati. Yassa hatthā chinnā honti, ayaṃ hatthacchinno nāmāti yojanā. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Eko vā pādoti yojanā. Heṭṭhā ‘‘eko vā dve vā hatthā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo.Catūsu hatthapādesu dve vāti eko hattho, eko pādoti dve vā.Kaṇṇāti saddaggahā. Te hi kaṇṇati savati etehīti kaṇṇāti vuccanti.Kaṇṇābaddheti kaṇṇacchiddassa ābaddhe.Saṅghāṭetunti saṅghaṭanaṃ kātuṃ, ābandhanaṃ kātunti attho.Ajapadaketi ajapadasaṇṭhāne ṭhāne.Nāsāti ghānāni. Tāni hi nāsati abyattasaddaṃ karoti etāhīti nāsāti vuccanti.Nāsikāti nāsāyeva.Saṇṭhāpetunti suṭṭhu ṭhapetuṃ, pakatiyā ṭhapetunti attho.Nakhasesanti nakhoyeva seso chinnaṅgulitoti nakhaseso, taṃ. Agge pure uṭṭhahatītiaṅguṭṭho. ‘‘Vuttanayenevā’’ti iminā ‘‘nakhasesaṃ adassetvā’’ti vacanaṃ atidisati.Kaṇḍaranāmakāti mahāsiranāmakā. Te hi kaṃ sarīraṃ dhārentītikaṇḍarāti vuccanti dhakārassa ḍakāraṃ katvā.Yesūti kaṇḍaresu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.

119.In the stories about one with a severed hand, etc., showing the meaning of the statement "yassā tiādi" (whose), the one whose hands are cut off is hatthacchinno. Maṇibandhe ti: at the end of the wrist. For it is called maṇibandha because here one binds a decorative object called maṇi. Kappare ti: at the elbow. For it is called "kapparo" because it harms others by striking them on their backs. The connection is: the one whose hands are cut off, this one is called hatthacchinno (one with severed hands). This same method applies to the rest as well. Eko vā pādoti yojanā (one or two feet is the connection). Below, in "eko vā dve vā hatthā" (one or two hands), the same method applies. Catūsu hatthapādesu dve vā ti: one hand, one foot, or two. Kaṇṇā ti: receptors of sound. For they are called kaṇṇā because they sound (kaṇṇati) and hear through them. Kaṇṇābaddhe ti: bound in the ear hole. Saṅghāṭetu ti: to make a connection, meaning to bind. Ajapadake ti: in a place resembling a goat's foot. Nāsā ti: nostrils. For they are called nāsā because they make indistinct sounds through them. Nāsikā ti: the nose itself. Saṇṭhāpetu ti: to establish well, meaning to establish in its natural state. Nakhasesa ti: nakhoyeva seso (only the nail remains) means chinnaṅgulitoti nakhaseso (because the finger is cut off, the nail remains). The thumb projects forward. By "vuttanayenevā," he extends the statement "without showing the remaining nail." Kaṇḍaranāmakā ti: called large sinews. For they are called kaṇḍarā because they support the body, changing the "dh" to "ḍ." Yesū ti: in the sinews, a locative case used in specification.

phaṇahatthakonāmāti yojanā.Etanti phaṇahatthakaṃ. Chaḷaṅgulādayopi phaṇahatthakeyeva saṅgahetabbāti āha ‘‘yassapi cha aṅguliyo’’tiādi. Yassapi cha aṅguliyo honti, ayampi phaṇahatthako nāma upacārena.

phaṇahatthakonāmāti yojanā (he is called phaṇahatthako). Eta ti: this phaṇahatthaka. He says "yassapi cha aṅguliyo" (even one who has six fingers), etc., because six fingers, etc., should also be included as phaṇahatthaka. Even one who has six fingers is also called phaṇahatthako by convention.

Khujjoti ettha khujjo sarīro yassatthīti khujjoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘khujjasarīro’’ti. Kasmā khujjoti āha ‘‘urassa vā’’tiādi. Yassa pana vaṅkaṃ, ayampi khujjo nāmāti yojanā.Vaṅkanti ca kuṭilaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Brahmujugattoti ujuṃ gattaṃ ujugattaṃ, brahmuno ujugattaṃ viya ujugattaṃ imassa mahāpurisassāti brahmujugatto, mahāpuriso.

Khujjo ti: Here, showing the meaning of the statement khujjo sarīro yassatthīti khujjoti (one who has a hunched body is called khujjo), he says, "khujjasarīro" (one with a hunched body). Why is he called khujjo? He says, "urassa vā" (either the chest), etc. The connection is: one whose back is bent is also called khujjo. Vaṅka ti: means crooked. Hī ti: truly, or because. Brahmujugatto ti: ujuṃ gattaṃ means straight body, brahmuno ujugattaṃ viya ujugattaṃ imassa mahāpurisassāti brahmujugatto (the great man whose straight body is like the straight body of Brahmā), is a great man.

‘‘jaṅghavāmanassa hī’’tiādi.Yesanti ubhinnaṃ kāyānaṃ.Bhūtānanti amanussānaṃ pisācakapetānaṃ. Attabhāvo hoti viyāti yojanā.Parivaṭumoti parisamantato vaṭṭulasarīro.

"jaṅghavāmanassa hī" tiādi. Yesa ti: of both bodies. Bhūtāna ti: of non-human beings, pisācas and ghosts. The connection is: attabhāvo hoti viya (as if there were a self). Parivaṭumo ti: parisamantato vaṭṭulasarīro (a body that is round on all sides).

Galagaṇḍīti ettha gale gaṇḍo yassatthīti galagaṇḍīti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yassā’’tiādi.Etanti ‘‘galagaṇḍī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ.Tatthāti galagaṇḍipabbājane.Yanti vacanaṃ.

Galagaṇḍī ti: Here, showing the meaning of the statement gale gaṇḍo yassatthīti galagaṇḍīti (one who has a tumor in the throat is called galagaṇḍī), he says, "yassā tiādi" (whose), etc. Eta ti: this statement, "galagaṇḍī." Tatthā ti: regarding the ordination of one with goiter. Ya ti: this statement.

Sipadīti ettha sithilaṃ padaṃ imassāti sipadīti vutte bhārapādoyeva gahetabboti āha ‘‘bhārapādo vuccatī’’ti. Bhāraṃ pādaṃ yassātibhārapādo. Ete dve thūlapādarogīsu vattantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sañjātapiḷakoti sañjātaphoṭo.Upanāhanti bhusaṃ bandhanaṃ.Udakaāvāṭeti udakena puṇṇāyaṃ kāsuyaṃ.Udakavālikāyāti udakatintena marunā. Yathā sirā paññāyanti, evaṃ milāpetunti yojanā.Īdisanti sirāpaññāyanajaṅghatelanāḷikasabhāvaṃ.Tathāti yathā pabbajjākāle karoti, tathā katvāti attho.

Sipadī ti: Here, because sipadī (one with a loose foot) means "one who has a loose foot," it should be taken to mean one with a swollen foot, therefore he says, "bhārapādo vuccatī" (it is called bhārapāda). Bhārapādo means one whose foot is swollen. It should be understood that these two apply to those who have a disease of swollen feet. Sañjātapiḷako ti: one with boils that have arisen. Upanāha ti: tight binding. Udakaāvāṭe ti: in a puddle filled with water. Udakavālikāyā ti: with wet sand. The connection is: yathā sirā paññāyanti, evaṃ milāpetunti yojanā (to apply so that the veins are visible). Īdisa ti: such a nature of leg and ankle, where the veins are visible. Tathā ti: just as he does at the time of ordination, having done so, it means.

Pāparogīti ettha pāparogassa sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘arisa’’itiādi. Tattha ariso ca bhagandaro ca pittañca semho ca kāso ca soso cāti dvando, te ādayo yesaṃ teti arisa…pe… sosādayo. Ādisaddena heṭṭhā vutte ābādhe saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha pittasemhasaddehi taṃsamuṭṭhāno rogo gahetabbo. ‘‘Niccāturo’’ti iminā pāparogīti ettha mantutthe pavattassa īpaccayassa niccayogatthaṃ dasseti.

Here, in Pāparogī, explaining the nature of pāparoga, he says, "arisa," and so on. Therein, arisa (hemorrhoids), bhagandara (fistula), pitta (bile), semha (phlegm), kāsa (cough), and sosa (consumption) form a দ্বন্দ্ব (dvando); those whose beginnings are these are arisa…pe… sosādayo. By the word "ādi," he includes the diseases mentioned below. There, by the words pitta and semha, the disease arising from them should be understood. By "Niccāturo," he shows that the suffix 'ī' occurring in pāparogī is in the sense of constant association.

Parisadūsanoti etthaitisaddo nāmapariyāyo, parisadūsano nāmāti hi attho. Yo attano virūpatāya parisaṃ dūseti, ayaṃ parisadūsano nāmāti yojanā. Chasarīradosaṃ ādiṃ katvā parisadūsanabhāvaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘atidīgho vā’’tiādi.Atidīgho vāti ettha na kevalaṃ paresaṃ dvaṅgulādimattadīgho, atha kho diguṇādidīghovādhippetoti āha ‘‘aññesa’’ntiādi.Nābhipadesoti attano nābhipadeso. Yathā hi atidīghe paravacanena atidīghassa sarūpaṃ veditabbaṃ, tathā atirassādīsupi atirassasarūpanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Mahodaroti mahāudaro.Kappasīso vāti hatthisīso viya yugasīso vā.Kappasaddo hettha yugatthavācako.Kaṇṇikakeso vāti kaṇṇikasadisehi kesehi samannāgato. ‘‘Jātipalitehī’’ti iminā jarāvātena pahataṃ palitaṃ nivatteti.Pakatitambakesoti ettha pakatisaddena kenaci payogena tambakesaṃ nivatteti.Āvaṭṭasīsoti punappunaṃ vaṭṭatīti āvaṭṭo, kesāvaṭṭo, so etassa sīse atthīti āvaṭṭasīso.Uddhaggehīti uddhaṃ koṭīhi.Jālabaddhena viyāti jālena baddhena iva.

Here, in Parisadūsano, the word "iti" is a synonym, for the meaning is: named parisadūsano. The explanation is: he who pollutes the assembly by his ugliness is called parisadūsano. Expanding on the state of polluting the assembly, starting with the six bodily defects, he says, "atidīgho vā," and so on. In Atidīgho vā, he says, "aññesaṃ," and so on, to indicate that it is not merely longer than others by two finger-widths, but that it is considered to be double or more in length. Nābhipadeso means his own navel region. Just as the nature of atidīgha (excessively long) should be known by referring to the statement about others, so too should the nature of atirassa (excessively short) and others be understood. Mahodaro means a large belly. Kappasīso vā means a head like an elephant's head or a plowshare head. Here, the word kappa is used in the sense of yuga (plowshare). Kaṇṇikakeso vā means one who is endowed with hair resembling kaṇṇika flowers. By "Jātipalitehī," he excludes palita (gray hair) struck by the wind of old age. In Pakatitambakeso, by the word pakati (natural), he excludes tambakesa (reddish hair) caused by some treatment. Āvaṭṭasīso means one who has a kesāvaṭṭa (hair whorl) on his head that repeatedly revolves, so he is called āvaṭṭasīso. Uddhaggehī means with upward-pointing ends. Jālabaddhena viyā means as if bound by a net.

Sambaddhabhamuko vāti aññamaññasambaddhabhamuko vā.Makkaṭabhamukoti makkaṭassa bhamu viya bhamu etassāti makkaṭabhamuko.Vāsikoṇenāti tacchanīkoṭiyā.Visamacakkaloti ettha cakkākārena lāti pavattati, cakkākāraṃ vā lāti gaṇhātīticakkalo. Kekaroti valiro. So hi kucchitaṃ karotīti kekaroti vuccati.Kakkaṭassevāti kakkaṭassa iva.Mūsikakaṇṇoti ākhukaṇṇo.Jaṭukakaṇṇoti vaggulikaṇṇo.Aviddhakaṇṇoti acchiddakaṇṇo.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Soti aviddhakaṇṇo. Kaṇṇe bhagandaro etassātikaṇṇabhagandaro,soyeva kaṇṇabhagandariko. Gaṇḍo kaṇṇe etassātigaṇḍakaṇṇo. Paggharitapubbenāti paggharitapūyena. Ṭaṅkito kaṇṇo yassātiṭaṅkitakaṇṇo. Gobhattanāḷikāyāti gunnaṃ bhattapānatthaṃ katāya nāḷikāya. Biḷārakkhi viya atipiṅgalaṃ akkhi etassātiatipiṅgalakkhi. Madhuvaṇṇo viya piṅgalaṃ akkhi etassātimadhupiṅgalakkhi. Nippakhumakkhīti etthapakhumaṃvuccati akkhamhi jātaṃ lomaṃ. Tañhi akkhino pakkhadvaye jātattā pakhumanti vuccati. Natthi pakhumaṃ akkhimhi etassāti nippakhumakkhi. Assupaggharaṇaṃ akkhimhā etassātiassupaggharaṇakkhi. Pupphaṃ sañjātaṃ yassa akkhinotipupphitaṃ. Pupphitaṃ akkhi yassātipupphitakkhi. Akkhipākenāti akkhino dalapariyantesu paccanakena rogena.

Sambaddhabhamuko vā means one who has eyebrows joined together. Makkaṭabhamuko means one who has eyebrows like a monkey's eyebrows. Vāsikoṇenā means with the tip of a chisel. Here, in Visamacakkalo, cakkalo means it moves or proceeds in a circular fashion, or it takes or grasps in a circular fashion. Kekaro means a goiter. For it is called kekaro because it does something repulsive. Kakkaṭassevā means like a crab. Mūsikakaṇṇo means a rat's ear. Jaṭukakaṇṇo means a bat's ear. Aviddhakaṇṇo means an unpierced ear. means truly, or because. So means aviddhakaṇṇo. Kaṇṇabhagandaro means one who has a fistula in the ear; he himself is called kaṇṇabhagandariko. Gaṇḍakaṇṇo means one who has a boil in the ear. Paggharitapubbenā means with pus that has oozed out. Ṭaṅkitakaṇṇo means one whose ear is marked. Gobhattanāḷikāyā means with a tube made for cattle to drink food and water. Atipiṅgalakkhi means one who has eyes that are very yellow, like a biḷāra bird's eye. Madhupiṅgalakkhi means one who has eyes that are yellow like the color of honey. Here, in Nippakhumakkhī, pakhuma is said to be the hair that grows on the eye. For it is called pakhuma because it grows on the two sides of the eye. Nippakhumakkhi means one who has no pakhuma on the eye. Assupaggharaṇakkhi means one from whose eyes tears flow. Pupphitaṃ means that a growth has arisen in whose eye. Pupphitakkhi means one who has a growth in the eye. Akkhipākenā means with a disease of the eye involving suppuration at the edges of the eye.

Cipiṭanāsikoti anunnatanāsiko.Sukatuṇḍasadisāyāti suvānaṃ mukhena sadisāya.

Cipiṭanāsiko means one who has a flat nose. Sukatuṇḍasadisāyā means with a mouth resembling a pig's snout.

Paṭaṅgamaṇḍūkassevāti paṭaṅganāmakassa maṇḍūkassa mukhanimittaṃ iva mukhanimittaṃyevāti yojanā.Ukkhalimukhavaṭṭisadisehīti ukkhaliyā mukhavaṭṭinā sadisehi.Bhericammasadisehīti bheriyā mukhe nahitacammena sadisehi.Eḷamukhoti eḷāya niccapaggharitaṃ mukhametasseti eḷamukho.Uppakkamukhoti uppakkaṃ kuthikaṃ mukhametassāti uppakkamukho.Saṅkhatuṇḍakoti saṅkhassa tuṇḍena sadiso oṭṭho etassāti saṅkhatuṇḍako.

Paṭaṅgamaṇḍūkassevā means a mouth resembling the face of a frog called paṭaṅga, or it simply means like the face. Ukkhalimukhavaṭṭisadisehī means with lips resembling the rim of a cooking pot. Bhericammasadisehī means with lips resembling the leather stretched over a drum. Eḷamukho means one who has a mouth from which saliva constantly flows, like a goat's mouth. Uppakkamukho means one who has a mouth with sores. Saṅkhatuṇḍako means one who has lips like the beak of a conch shell.

Aṭṭhakadantasadisehīti aṭṭhakanāmakassa naṅgalassa dantehi sadisehi. Dante pidahitunti sambandho.Dantantareti dantavivare, dantamajjhe vā.Kalandakadanto viyāti kāḷakānaṃ danto viya.

Aṭṭhakadantasadisehī means with teeth resembling the teeth of a plow called aṭṭhaka. The connection is that he closes the teeth. Dantantare means in the spaces between the teeth, or in the middle of the teeth. Kalandakadanto viyā means like the teeth of kāḷakas (people from Kalinga).

Mahāhanukoti mahanto hanu etassāti mahāhanuko.Cipiṭahanukoti anunnatahanuko.Nimmassudāṭhikoti natthi massu ca dāṭhi ca etassāti nimmassudāṭhiko.Bhaṭṭhaaṃsakūṭoti bhaṭṭho patito aṃsakūṭo imassāti bhaṭṭhaaṃsakūṭo.Godhāgattoti godhāya gattaṃ viya gattaṃ imassāti godhāgatto.Sabbaṃpetanti sabbampi etaṃ ‘‘kacchugatto’’tiādivacanaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘kacchugatto’’tiādivacane. Vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.

Mahāhanuko means one who has a large jaw. Cipiṭahanuko means one who has a flat jaw. Nimmassudāṭhiko means one who has neither a beard nor prominent teeth. Bhaṭṭhaaṃsakūṭo means one whose shoulder blade has fallen off. Godhāgatto means one whose body is like a lizard's body. Sabbaṃpeta means all this statement beginning with "kacchugatto." Etthā means in the statement beginning with "kacchugatto," the interpretation should be understood.

Bhaṭṭhakaṭikoti bhaṭṭhā pannā kaṭi etassāti bhaṭṭhakaṭiko. Accuggatehi ānisadamaṃsehīti sambandho.Vātaṇḍikoti vātena pūrito aṇḍakoso etassāti vātaṇḍiko.Saṅghaṭṭanajāṇukoti anto natattā aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ jāṇu etassāti saṅghaṭṭanajāṇuko.Vikaṭoti tiriyagamanapādo. Upaḍḍhapiṇḍikassa atthaṃ saha bhedena dassento āha ‘‘so duvidho’’tiādi. Tattha duvidho so upaḍḍhapiṇḍiko samannāgatoti yojanā. Atha vā so upaḍḍhapiṇḍiko heṭṭhā orūḷhāhi mahantīhi jaṅghapiṇḍikāhi samannāgato vā upari ārūḷhāhi mahantīhi jaṅghapiṇḍikāhi samannāgato vāti duvidhoti yojanā.Piṭṭhikapādoti piṭṭhiyaṃ uṭṭhito pādo etassāti piṭṭhikapādo.Gaṇḍikaṅguli vāti gaṇḍena uṭṭhito aṅguli etassāti gaṇḍikaṅguli.Sabbopesāti esa sabbopi jano. Parisaṃ dūsetītiparisadūsano.

Bhaṭṭhakaṭiko means one whose hip has fallen off. The connection is with excessively raised, fleshy buttocks. Vātaṇḍiko means one whose scrotum is filled with air. Saṅghaṭṭanajāṇuko means one whose knees knock together due to being curved inward. Vikaṭo means a foot with crooked gait. Showing the meaning of upaḍḍhapiṇḍika along with the distinction, he says, "so duvidho," and so on. Therein, the connection is that so, that upaḍḍhapiṇḍika, is endowed with large calves drooping down. Or, the connection is that so, that upaḍḍhapiṇḍika, is twofold, being endowed with large calves either drooping down or rising up. Piṭṭhikapādo means one who has a foot that has risen on the back of the foot. Gaṇḍikaṅguli vā means one who has a finger raised with a boil. Sabbopesā means all these people. He pollutes the assembly, hence parisadūsano.

Pubbādīhītiādisaddena cakkhupasādassa antarāyakarāni aññānipi vatthūni gahetabbāni. Dvīhi vā akkhīhi, ekena vā akkhināti yojanā.Ubhayampīti dvinnaṃ aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ ubhayampi vacanaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘andhaṃ pabbājentī’’ti avatvā ‘‘kāṇaṃ pabbājentī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘pariyāyenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyañhi ‘‘jaccandho’’ti iminā dveakkhikāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Kuṇīti kuṇanaṃ saṃkocanaṃ kuṇaṃ, tametassatthīti kuṇī.Khañjoti khañjati gativekallabhāvena pavattatīti khañjo.Kuṇḍapādakoti etthakuṇḍoti khañjasseva nāmaṃ. Khañjo hi kuḍati gamanaṃ paṭihanatīti kuṇḍoti vuccati. Kasmā kuṇḍapādako? Kasmā piṭṭhipādamajjhena caṅkamantoti āha ‘‘majjhe saṃkuṭitapādattā’’ti. Iminā hi kuṇḍapādassa ca piṭṭhipādamajjhena caṅkamanassa ca hetuṃ dasseti. Eseva nayo anantaravākyepi.Sabbopesāti esa sabbopi jano.

By the word "Pubbādīhī," and so on, other things that cause obstruction to the eye-faculty should also be included. The connection is with two eyes or one eye. Ubhayampī means both statements of the two commentators. Because in the Pāli it is said "kāṇaṃ pabbājentī" instead of "andhaṃ pabbājentī," it is said "pariyāyena." For in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā, it is said in reference to one-eyed persons by the term "jaccandho." Kuṇī means kuṇanaṃ (bending), saṃkocanaṃ (contracting), kuṇaṃ (bent); he has that, therefore kuṇī. Khañjo means one who limps, who proceeds with impaired gait, therefore khañjo. Here, in Kuṇḍapādako, kuṇḍo is a name for the lame. For the lame is called kuṇḍa because he hinders movement. Why kuṇḍapādako? Why does he walk with the middle of the back of his foot? He says, "majjhe saṃkuṭitapādattā." By this, he shows the reason for kuṇḍapāda and for walking with the middle of the back of his foot. The same method applies in the subsequent sentence as well. Sabbopesā means all these people.

Pakkhahatoti ettha eko pakkho hato vināso etassāti pakkhahatoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘eko hattho vā’’tiādi. ‘‘Pakkhapāto’’tipi pāṭho, so apāṭhoyeva.Pakkhasaddo hi koṭṭhāsavācako, na paṅgulapariyāyo,pīṭhasabbī vuccatīti pīṭhena sabbati gacchati sīlenāti pīṭhasabbī vuccati. ‘‘Jiṇṇabhāvena dubbalo’’ti iminā jīraṇaṃ jarā, tāya dubbalojarādubbaloti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Balavā hotīti āgantukarogānamabhāvena balavā hoti, ‘‘vacībhedo nappavattatī’’ti iminā mukhamattameva gacchati pavattati, na vacībhedo ettha janetimūgoti dasseti. Yassa vacībhedo na pavattati, ayaṃ mūgo nāmāti yojanā.Mammananti khalitavacanaṃ. Yo ekameva akkharaṃ catupañcakkhattuṃ vadati, tassetamadhivacanaṃ.

Here, in Pakkhahato, showing the meaning that one side is struck, destroyed, he says, "eko hattho vā," and so on. There is also a reading "pakkhapāto," but that is an incorrect reading. For the word pakkhā means a part, not a synonym for lame. Pīṭhasabbī vuccatī means he is called pīṭhasabbī because he crawls on a seat. By "Jiṇṇabhāvena dubbalo," he shows that jīraṇaṃ means old age, therefore jarādubbalo means weak due to old age. Balavā hotī means he is strong due to the absence of adventitious diseases. By "vacībhedo nappavattatī," he shows that mūgo means he only moves or proceeds with his mouth, but does not generate speech. He in whom speech does not proceed is called mūgo. Mammananti means faltering speech. This is a term for someone who utters a single syllable four or five times.

Badhīroti sutihīno. So hi hananaṃ sotapasādassa nāsanaṃ vadho, taṃ īrati gacchatīti badhīroti vuccati. Yo sabbena sabbaṃ na suṇāti, ayaṃ badhīro nāmāti yojanā. Iminā naṭṭhapasādataṃ dasseti.Ubhayadosavasenāti upalakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ andhamūgabadhirapabbājane tidosavasenapi vuttattā.Teti hatthacchinnādayo dvattiṃsajane. Osāraṇaṃ apatto puggalo atthi, taṃ puggalaṃ saṅgho osāreti ceti yojanā.Osāretīti saṅghe paveseti.

Badhīro means one who lacks hearing. For hananaṃ means destruction, the destruction of the sense-faculty of hearing is vadho, he goes to that, therefore he is called badhīro. He who does not hear at all is called badhīro. By this, he shows the destroyed state of the sense-faculty. Ubhayadosavasenā is said by way of implication, because the expulsion of the blind, mute, and deaf is stated in terms of all three दोष (dosas). Te means those thirty-two types, beginning with those with cut-off hands. There is a person who has not yet been expelled; the Saṅgha expels that person, is the connection. Osāreti means he introduces him into the Saṅgha.

58. Alajjīnissayavatthukathā
58. The Story of the Basis for One Lacking Shame

120.‘‘Alajjīnaṃ ovāda’’nti pāṭhasesena yojite sāmyatthe sāmivacanampi yujjateva. Taṃ nayaṃ adassetvā ‘‘upayogatthe sāmivacana’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhūhi sabhāgata’’nti iminā bhikkhūhi samāno sīlādiguṇasaṅkhāto bhāgo imassātibhikkhusabhāgo,tassa bhāvobhikkhusabhāgatanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Lajjibhāva’’nti iminā bhāvapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Navaṭṭhānanti abhinavaṭṭhānaṃ. Gatena bhikkhunāti sambandho.

120. When connected with the remaining portion of the text, "Alajjīnaṃ ovāda," the genitive case is indeed appropriate for expressing similarity. Without showing that method, it is said that the genitive case is in the sense of use. By "Bhikkhūhi sabhāgata," he shows the meaning that bhikkhusabhāgo means one who has a similar portion to monks, reckoned in terms of virtues such as morality, and bhikkhusabhāgata means the state of having that portion. By "Lajjibhāva," he shows the nature of the suffix "bhāva." Navaṭṭhāna means a new dwelling. The connection is with the monk who has gone.

Theroti nissayadāyako thero.Gahetukāmoti nissayaṃ gahetukāmo.Ācāranti nissayapaṭipannassa ācāraṃ.Tadahevāti tasmiṃ gataahani eva. Ābhogassa katattā, aruṇuggamanassa ca ajānanattā vuttaṃ ‘‘anāpattī’’ti. Aruṇuggamanaṃ ajānantopi ābhogassa akatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘aruṇuggamane dukkaṭa’’nti. ‘‘Dve tīṇi divasānī’’ti padena catu pañca cha divasānipi gahetabbāni lakkhaṇahāranayena anissitena vasitabbabhāvena samānaphalattā. Tenāha ‘‘sattāhaṃ vasissāmī’’ti.Laddhaparihāroti laddho parihāro āpattiapanayanaṃ yenāti laddhaparihāro.

Thero means the elder who gives dependence. Gahetukāmo means desiring to take dependence. Ācāraṃ means the conduct of one who has undertaken dependence. Tadahevā means on that very day he went. Because the summons had been made and because he was unaware of the sunrise, it is said "anāpattī." Although he was unaware of the sunrise, it is said "aruṇuggamane dukkaṭaṃ" because the summons had not been made. By the phrase "Dve tīṇi divasānī," four, five, or six days should also be included because of the similarity in result, due to the principle of indicative generalization, as he must live without dependence. Therefore, he says, "sattāhaṃ vasissāmi." Laddhaparihāro means one who has obtained a dispensation, the removal of an offense, by whom.

59. Gamikādinissayavatthukathā
59. The Story of the Basis for Dependence on a Traveler, etc.

121.‘‘Karaṇīyanissayo’’ti iminā nissayagahaṇaṃnissayouttarapadalopavasena, so karaṇīyo imassātinissayakaraṇīyoti visesanaparanipātabhāvaṃ dasseti.Nissayaṃ alabhamānenāti ettha kiṃ nissayassa alabhanaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘attanā’’tiādi.Vutthapubbanti vasitapubbaṃ.Ekarattaṃ vasantenāpītipisaddo dvirattādike kā nāma kathāti dasseti. Vissamanto vā satthaṃ pariyesanto vā hutvāti yojanā.Nāvāya gacchantassāti nāvāya addhānamaggaṃ paṭipannassa.

121. By "Karaṇīyanissayo," he shows the state of taking dependence; nissayo is by way of the elision of the latter word, and nissayakaraṇīyo means he should do that, so it is the state of placing the adjective in the final position. In Nissayaṃ alabhamānenā, he asks, "What is the non-obtaining of dependence?" and says, "attanā," and so on. Vutthapubbaṃ means having lived before. The word pi in Ekarattaṃ vasantenāpī shows that there is no need to mention two or more nights. The connection is that he does so while resting or while seeking a caravan. Nāvāya gacchantassā means one who is traveling a long distance on a boat.

Yāciyamānenāti ettha bahukattupasaṅgattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tena gilānenā’’ti. ‘‘Mānenā’’ti iminā yācitumasakkuṇeyyatādīni nivatteti.

Here, in Yāciyamānenā, because of the possibility of many agents, it is said, "tena gilānenā." By "mānenā," he excludes such things as being unable to request.

Phāsu hotīti ettha āvāsasappāyādivasena phāsu hotīti āsaṅkā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘samathavipassanānaṃ paṭilābhavasenā’’ti.ti saccaṃ.Imaṃ parihāranti imaṃ phāsuvihāraparihāraṃ. Thāmagatāya vipassanāyāti yojanā. Samatho vā taruṇo hotīti yojanā.Etassevāti taruṇasamathavipassanikasseva bhikkhuno.Tassa nissāyāti ettha tassa ovādaṃ nissāyāti yojanā. Atha vā upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Taṃ nissayadāyakaṃ nissāyāti hi attho. Yattako kālo āsaḷhīpuṇṇamā atthi, tattakaṃ kālanti yojanā. ‘‘Āsaḷhīpuṇṇamā’’ti ettha ‘‘yāvā’’ti nipātapayogattā abhividhiavajhatthe nissakkavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.

Here, in Phāsu hotī, there might be an apprehension that it is comfortable due to suitable lodgings, etc., so he says, "samathavipassanānaṃ paṭilābhavasenā." means truly. Imaṃ parihāraṃ means this dispensation for comfortable living. The connection is with vipassanā that has attained stability. Or, the connection is that samatha is fresh. Etassevā means only for the monk who has fresh samatha and vipassanā. Here, in Tassa nissāyā, the connection is that relying on his advice. Or, the genitive case is in the sense of use. For the meaning is: relying on that giver of dependence. Yattako kālo āsaḷhīpuṇṇamā atthi, tattakaṃ kālanti yojanā. Because of the use of the particle "yāvā" in Āsaḷhīpuṇṇamā, the statement should be understood as specifying the limit without including the boundary. Yatthā means in which place.

122.Pāḷiyaṃgottenapīti etthapisaddena na kevalaṃ nāmeneva, atha kho gottenapi sāvetunti dasseti. Tasmā ‘‘āyasmato pippalissā’’ti nāmaṃ sāvetvātipi ‘‘āyasmato mahākassapassā’’ti gottaṃ sāvetvāpi anusāvetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mahākassapassā’’tiādi. Iminā ‘‘konāmo te upajjhāyo? Upajjhāyo me bhante āyasmā mahākassapo nāmā’’tiādīsu gottampi nāmeneva saṅgahitanti siddhaṃ hoti.

122. Here, in the Pāli gottenapī, the word pi shows that he should announce not only by name, but also by clan. Therefore, after announcing the name "āyasmato pippalissā," one should also announce the clan, "āyasmato mahākassapassā." Therefore, it is said, "mahākassapassā," and so on. By this, it is established that in statements such as "konāmo te upajjhāyo? Upajjhāyo me bhante āyasmā mahākassapo nāmā," the clan is also included with the name.

123.Ekānusāvaneti padassa samānādhikaraṇabāhiratthasamāsabhāvaṃ nivattento āha ‘‘ekato anusāvane’’ti. Tatthaekatoti ekakkhaṇe, ekapahārena vā. Vakkhati hi ‘‘ekakkhaṇe’’ti ca ‘‘ekapahārenevā’’ti ca. Iminā ekato anusāvanametesantiekānusāvanāti asamānādhikaraṇabāhiratthasamāsaṃ dasseti.Ekenāti ekena anusāvanācariyena.Ekassāti ekassa upasampadāpekkhassa. ‘‘Ekakkhaṇe’’ti iminā ‘‘ekato’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Upasampādetu’’nti dvinnaṃ upasampadāpekkhānaṃ upasampādetuṃ.

123. Rejecting the state of being a bahirattha-samāsa (exocentric compound) with the same case ending for the word Ekānusāvane, he says, "ekato anusāvane." There, ekato means in one moment, or with one stroke. For he will say "ekakkhaṇe" and "ekapahāreneva." By this, he shows the asamānādhikaraṇa-bahiratthasamāsa (appositional exocentric compound) in ekānusāvanā, meaning those for whom the announcement is made at one time. Ekenā means by one preceptor of the announcement. Ekassā means for one candidate for higher ordination. By "Ekakkhaṇe," he shows the meaning of the word "ekato." "Upasampādetu" means to confer higher ordination on two candidates for higher ordination.

Purimanayenevāti ‘‘ekena ekassa, aññena itarassā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayeneva.Ekatoanusāvane kātunti ‘‘ekena ekassa, aññena aññassa, itarena itarassā’’ti evaṃ tīhi ācariyehi tiṇṇaṃ upasampadāpekkhānaṃ ekakkhaṇe anusāvane kātuṃ.Tañca khoti ettha tasaddassa ‘‘anusāvane kātu’’nti padasseva atthavisayataṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anusāvanakiriya’’nti.Dve vā tayo vāti ettha vāsaddo aniyamavikappattho. Sace ekenācariyena dve anusāveti, ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito ca ayaṃ dhammarakkhito cā’’ti anusāvetabbā. Sace tayo anusāveti, ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito ca ayaṃ dhammarakkhito ca ayaṃ saṅgharakkhito cā’’ti anusāvetabbā. Yathā ekenācariyena dve vā tayo vā ekato anusāvetabbā, evaṃ dvīhi vā tīhi vā ācariyehi eko anusāvetabbotipi vadanti. Ekena upajjhāyena karaṇabhūtena, eko upajjhāyo hutvāti vā attho. ‘‘Ekapahārenevā’’ti iminā‘‘ekato’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.Dve tisso kammavācāti dvīhi ācariyehi dve, tīhi ācariyehi tisso kammavācā. Ekena upajjhāyena anusāvane eko vā dve vā tayo vā ācariyā vaṭṭanti, nānupajjhāyena anusāvane pana nānācariyā eva vaṭṭantīti dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Tissattheroti kammavācācariyabhūto tissatthero.Sumanattherassāti upajjhāyabhūtassa sumanattherassa.Idanti nānupajjhāyena ekassācariyassānusāvanaṃ.Esa paṭikkhepoti ‘‘na tveva nānupajjhāyenā’’ti eso paṭikkhepo.

Purimanayenevāti, in the same way as previously stated, "to one by one, to the other by another," and so on. Ekato anusāvane kātunti, to announce to three candidates for higher ordination simultaneously by three preceptors, saying "this is Buddharakkhito, this is Dhammarakkhito, and this is Saṅgharakkhito," with one preceptor for each. Tañca khoti, here, the word "ta" (that) is stated to show that the meaning relates to the phrase "anusāvane kātu" (to announce), thus "anusāvanakiriya" (the act of announcing). Dve vā tayo vāti, here, the word "vā" (or) implies an optional alternative. If one preceptor announces for two, they should announce, "this is Buddharakkhito and this is Dhammarakkhito." If they announce for three, they should announce, "this is Buddharakkhito, this is Dhammarakkhito, and this is Saṅgharakkhito." Just as one preceptor can announce for two or three together, some say that two or three preceptors can also announce for one. With one acting as the upajjhāya, meaning either with one being the upajjhāya or becoming the upajjhāya. ‘‘Ekapahārenevā’’ti, with this, he shows the meaning of the word ‘‘ekato’’. Dve tisso kammavācāti, two kammavācā by two preceptors, three kammavācā by three preceptors. Showing that with one upajjhāya in the announcement, one, two, or three preceptors are suitable, but in an announcement with different upajjhāyas, only different preceptors are suitable, he says, "sace panā" (but if...). Tissattheroti, Tissa Thera, who was the kammavācācariya. Sumanattherassāti, to Sumanathera, who was the upajjhāya. Idanti, this is the announcement of one preceptor by a different upajjhāya. Esa paṭikkhepoti, this is the prohibition, "na tveva nānupajjhāyenā" (but never by a different upajjhāya).

63. Upasampadāvidhikathā
63. Upasampadāvidhikathā

126.Taṃ upajjhanti taṃ upajjhāyaṃ. ‘‘Upajjhā’’ti ca ‘‘upajjhāyo’’ti ca hi atthato ekaṃ, byañjanameva nānaṃ yathā ‘‘sabhā sabhāya’’nti. Ettha upajjhāsaddo rājādigaṇo (rupasiddhi 599 sutte; saddanīti 1140 sutte), upajjhāyasaddo purisādigaṇo. Sabhāsaddo itthiliṅgo, sabhāyasaddo pulliṅgo vā napuṃsakaliṅgo vā.‘‘Vitthāyantī’’ti saddo nāmadhātūti āha ‘‘vitthaddhagattā hontī’’ti. Vitthasaddo hi dabbavācakattā nāmasaddo, vikārena thaddho gatto etesantivitthā,ddhakārassa lopaṃ katvā, tato āyapaccayo hoti.Yanti yaṃ antarāyajātaṃ.Tava sarīreti tuyhaṃ kāye. ‘‘Nibbatta’’nti iminā ‘‘jāta’’nti ettha janadhātuyā jananatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘vijjamāna’’nti iminā janīdhātuyā pātubhāvatthaṃ dasseti.Santanti saṃvijjamānaṃ.Itiādikathetabbanti yojanā.

126. Taṃ upajjhanti, to that upajjhāya. For "upajjhā" and "upajjhāyo" are the same in meaning, only the expressions differ, like "sabhā sabhāya." Here, the word "upajjhā" belongs to the rājādi group (Rupasiddhi 599; Saddanīti 1140), and the word "upajjhāyo" belongs to the purisādi group. The word "sabhā" is feminine, and the word "sabhāya" is masculine or neuter. ‘‘Vitthāyantī’’ti saddo nāmadhātūti āha ‘‘vitthaddhagattā hontī’’ti. He says that the word "vitthāyantī" is a nominal stem meaning "they become with expanded bodies." For the word "vittha" signifies substance, hence a noun; their bodies are stiffened by distortion, hence vitthā; having dropped the "ddha," then the affix "āya" is added. Yanti, whatever kind of obstruction. Tava sarīreti, in your body. Nibbattanti, with "nibbatta" he shows that in "jāta" (born), the root "jana" has the meaning of generating, and with "vijjamāna" (existing) he shows that the root "janī" has the meaning of appearing. Santanti, existing. Itiādikathetabbanti yojanā, the connection is that he should speak thus.

64. Cattāronissayādikathā
64. Cattāronissayādikathā

128.Upasampannasamanantaramevāti upasampanno hutvā samanantarameva, na kālantareti attho.Ekaporisāti ettha porisasaddo upari vitthate bhujapamāṇe ca posapamāṇe ca vattati. Purisassa pamāṇāporisā,pamāṇatthe ṇapaccayo.Chāyāti ātapābhāvo.Metabbāti pametabbā. ‘‘Vassāno’’tiādi‘‘utupamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabba’’nti ettha ācikkhaṇākāradassanaṃ. Utuno pamāṇanti atthaṃ nivārento āha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Arati punappunaṃ gacchatītiutu, pamiyati saṃvaccharo paricchijjiyati anenātipamāṇaṃ. Yattakehi divasehi aparipuṇṇoti sambandho.Yassāti divasabhāgassa. Yo utu aparipuṇṇo, tassa utunoti pāṭhaseso yojetabbo. ‘‘Utupamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ, divasabhāgo ācikkhitabbo’’ti padānaṃ aparampi atthavikappaṃ dassento āha‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Tatthaayaṃ nāma utūti ayaṃ utu vassāno nāmāti vā hemanto nāmāti vā gimho nāmāti vā.Pubbanhoti ahassa pubbo pubbanho. Tattha pacchimanayova pāsaṃsataro. Kasmā? Purimanaye utuparipuṇṇe divasabhāgācikkhaṇassa abhāvā, pacchimanaye pana paripuṇṇaṃ vā aparipuṇṇaṃ vā utupamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Upasampannadivasabhāgova ‘‘pubbanho’’ti vā ‘‘sāyanho’’ti vā ācikkhitabbo.Saṃgītīti ettha saṃ ekato katvā gāyitabbā kathetabbāti saṃgītīti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘idameva sabbaṃ ekato katvā’’tiādi. Tatthakinti kiṃ utuṃ.Idaṃ nāmāti idaṃ nāma utuṃ.Vadeyyāsīti āgantukānaṃ vuḍḍhanavakabhāvādiñāpanatthaṃ katheyyāsi.

128. Upasampannasamanantaramevāti, immediately after becoming fully ordained, meaning without any lapse of time. Ekaporisāti, here, the word "porisa" refers to both the span of an outstretched arm and the height of a man. Purisassa pamāṇā porisā, the affix "ṇa" is in the sense of measure. Chāyāti, the absence of sunlight. Metabbāti, should be measured. ‘‘Vassāno’’tiādi ‘‘utupamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabba’’, "Vassāno" etc., this shows the manner of indicating the measure of the season in ‘‘utupamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabba’’ (the season should be indicated). Preventing the interpretation of the measure of the season, he says, "ettha cā" (and here...). Arati punappunaṃ gacchatīti utu, that to which arrival is repeatedly made is "utu" (season); pamiyati saṃvaccharo paricchijjiyati anenāti pamāṇaṃ, that by which the year is measured and defined is pamāṇaṃ (measure). Yattakehi divasehi aparipuṇṇoti sambandho, the connection is with how many days it is incomplete. Yassāti, of the part of the day. Yo utu aparipuṇṇo, tassa utunoti pāṭhaseso yojetabbo, the remaining text should be connected as "that season which is incomplete." Showing another possible interpretation of the phrases "Utupamāṇaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ, divasabhāgo ācikkhitabbo," he says ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. There, ayaṃ nāma utūti, this is the season named vassāno or hemanto or gimho. Pubbanhoti, the forenoon is the earlier part of the day. There, the latter method is more praiseworthy. Why? Because in the former method, when the season is complete, there is no indication of the part of the day, but in the latter method, the complete or incomplete measure of the season should be indicated. Only the part of the day of the fully ordained, "pubbanho" or "sāyanho," should be indicated. Saṃgītīti, here, showing the etymology of "saṃgītī" as "to be sung or spoken together," he says, "idameva sabbaṃ ekato katvā" (having put all of this together). There, kinti, what season? Idaṃ nāmāti, this season by name. Vadeyyāsīti, you should speak to make known the seniority of the newcomers.

129.Dutiyanti sahāyaṃ bhikkhuṃ vā sāmaṇeraṃ vā purisaṃ vā.Akaraṇīyānīti upasampannehi akattabbāni.Paṇḍupalāsoti etthapaṇḍūti setapītamisso vaṇṇo,palāsasaddo paṇṇavācako, na haritavācako, nāpi kiṃsukadumavācakoti dassento āha ‘‘paṇḍuvaṇṇo paṇṇo’’ti.Paṇḍupalāsoti samāsopi byāsopi yuttoyeva. Samāsakāle paṇḍu yassatthīti paṇḍu, soyeva palāso paṇḍupalāsoti kātabbo. Pupphaphalādiṃ bandhatītibandhananti vacanatthena bandhanasaddo vaṇṭapariyāyoti āha ‘‘vaṇṭato’’ti.Puthusilāti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.60) ettha puthusaddo mahantapariyāyoti āha ‘‘mahāsilā’’ti.

129. Dutiyanti, a companion, whether a bhikkhu, a sāmaṇera, or a layman. Akaraṇīyānīti, things that should not be done by those fully ordained. Paṇḍupalāsoti, here, paṇḍūti, the color mixed with white and yellow; palāsasaddo paṇṇavācako, na haritavācako, nāpi kiṃsukadumavācakoti dassento āha ‘‘paṇḍuvaṇṇo paṇṇo’’ti, showing that the word "palāsa" denotes a leaf, not something green, nor does it denote a kiṃsuka tree, he says, "a leaf of a pale color." Paṇḍupalāsoti, both the compound and the expanded form are correct. In the case of the compound, it should be made as paṇḍu yassatthīti paṇḍu, soyeva palāso paṇḍupalāso, "having paleness, hence pale, that very leaf is a pale leaf." Pupphaphalādiṃ bandhatīti bandhananti, showing that the word "bandhana" is synonymous with vaṇṭa (stalk) by the etymology "that which binds flowers, fruits, etc.," he says "vaṇṭato." Puthusilāti, (Ma. Ni. Aṭṭha. 3.60) here, puthusaddo mahantapariyāyoti āha ‘‘mahāsilā’’ti, he says that the word "puthu" is synonymous with large, thus "mahāsilā" (large rock).

130.Tassāti ukkhepanīyakammārahassa bhikkhuno.Sāmaggīti saṅghasāmaggī.Tenāti ukkhepanīyakammārahena bhikkhunā.Sambhogeti āmisena ca dhammena ca sambhogahetu. Ettha sahaseyyāpi saṅgahitā āpattibhāvato.Anāpattīti anukkhittakabhāvato pācittiyāpattiyā anāpatti, alajjilakkhaṇābhāvato dukkaṭena anāpattīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

130. Tassāti, of the bhikkhu who deserves suspension (ukkhepanīyakamma). Sāmaggīti, the harmony of the Saṅgha. Tenāti, by the bhikkhu deserving suspension. Sambhogeti, for the purpose of association through material and Dhamma. Here, sharing a bed is also included because it involves an offense. Anāpattīti, because he has not been suspended, there is no offense of pācittiya; and because there is no characteristic of shamelessness, it should be understood that there is no offense of dukkaṭa either.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the commentary on the Vinaya, the Samantapāsādikā,

Dvāsattatiadhikavatthusatapaṭimaṇḍitassa mahākhandhakassa

the explanation of the Mahākhandhaka,

Atthavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

adorned with one hundred and seventy-two topics.

2. Uposathakkhandhakaṃ

2. Uposathakkhandhakaṃ

68. Sannipātānujānanādikathā
68. Sannipātānujānanādikathā

132.Uposathakkhandhake taranti otaranti etthātititthaṃ,udakatitthaṃ, titthaṃ viyātititthaṃ,laddhīti āha ‘‘titthaṃ vuccati laddhī’’ti. Laddhi hi bahūnaṃ laddhikānaṃ otaraṇaṭṭhānattā titthaṃ nāma.Aññanti sāsanikaladdhito aññaṃ.Etesanti paribbājakānaṃ.Itoti imasmā sāsanikaladdhito.Yanti yaṃ dhammajātaṃ.Tesanti aññatitthiyānaṃ paribbājakānaṃ.Te labhantīti ettha tasaddo manussavisayoti āha ‘‘te manussā’’ti.Mūgasūkarāti ettha thūlasarīrassa sūkarassa saddamattassāpi abhāvato mūgasūkaro nāmāti āha ‘‘thūlasarīrasūkarā’’ti.

132. In the Uposathakkhandhaka, taranti otaranti etthāti titthaṃ, a landing place, a water-crossing place; titthaṃ viyāti titthaṃ, a doctrine; he says, "titthaṃ vuccati laddhī" (tittha means doctrine). For a doctrine is called a tittha because it is the place of descent for many adherents of that doctrine. Aññanti, other than the doctrine of the Dispensation. Etesanti, of the wanderers. Itoti, from this doctrine of the Dispensation. Yanti, whatever kind of Dhamma. Tesanti, of those other-sectarian wanderers. Te labhantīti, here, he says that the word "ta" refers to human beings, thus "te manussā" (those human beings). Mūgasūkarāti, here, he says that because the thick-bodied pig lacks even the mere sound, it is called a mute pig, thus "thūlasarīrasūkarā" (thick-bodied pigs).

135.Assāti bhikkhuno.Soti sampajānamusāvādo.Kinti kiṃ āpatti.Dukkaṭanti padassa dukkaṭaṃ kammanti āsaṅkā bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘dukkaṭāpattī’’ti. Sā ca kho dukkaṭāpatti musāvādalakkhaṇena na hotīti yojanā. Kena hotīti āha ‘‘bhagavato pana vacanenā’’ti.Vacanenāti ca ‘‘sampajānamusāvāde kiṃ hoti? Dukkaṭaṃ hotī’’ti (mahāva. 135) vacanena.Akiriyasamuṭṭhānāti āvi kattabbāya āpattiyā akaraṇena akiriyasamuṭṭhānā.

135. Assāti, of the bhikkhu. Soti, that is a deliberate lie. Kinti, what offense? Dukkaṭanti, because there might be the thought that "dukkaṭa" means bad action, he says, "dukkaṭāpattī" (an offense of dukkaṭa). And that offense of dukkaṭa does not arise from the characteristic of lying, so the connection should be made. By what does it arise? He says, "bhagavato pana vacanenā" (but by the word of the Blessed One). Vacanenāti ca, by the word "sampajānamusāvāde kiṃ hoti? Dukkaṭaṃ hotī"ti (Mahāva. 135), "what happens in a deliberate lie? A dukkaṭa happens." Akiriyasamuṭṭhānāti, arising from non-action due to the non-confession of an offense that should be confessed.

Manujenāti manussena.Vācāti vācāya. Yakārassa hi lopo.Giranti saddaṃ.Pareti aññe puggale.Vācasikanti vācāto samuṭṭhitaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – bhikkhu kenaci āsanne ṭhitena manujena vācāya anālapanto hoti, pare dūre ṭhite puggale sandhāya giraṃ mahāsaddaṃ no ca bhaṇeyya, evampi vācasikameva āpajjeyyāti.

Manujenāti, by a human being. Vācāti, by speech. For there is the elision of the "ya." Giranti, a sound. Pareti, other individuals. Vācasikanti, arising from speech. Here, the connection is this: a bhikkhu, not speaking to a human being standing nearby with speech, but directing a loud sound at other individuals standing far away, even in this way, he would incur only a vācasika (verbal) offense.

Antarāyikoti ettha karotyatthe ṇikapaccayoti āha ‘‘antarāyakaro’’ti. ‘‘Kimatthāyā’’ti iminākissāti ettha tadatthe catutthīti dasseti, hetvatthopi yujjateva.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘dutiyassa jhānassa adhigamāyā’’tiādīsu.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.Uddesato cāti ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho’’tiādiuddesato ca.Niddesato cāti ‘‘pātimokkhanti ādimeta’’ntiādiniddesato ca.

Antarāyikoti, here, he says that the affix "ṇika" is in the sense of "one who does," thus "antarāyakaro" (one who causes obstruction). ‘‘Kimatthāyā’’ti, with "kimatthāya" he shows that "kissā" (for what) here is the dative in the sense of "for that," though the sense of cause is also fitting. Sabbatthāti, in all instances such as "dutiyassa jhānassa adhigamāyā" (for the attainment of the second jhāna), etc. Itītiādi nigamanaṃ, "itī" etc., is the conclusion. Uddesato cāti, both from the recitation, "suṇātu me bhante saṅgho" (may the Saṅgha hear me, venerable sirs), etc. Niddesato cāti, and from the exposition, "pātimokkhanti ādimeta" (this begins with the Pātimokkha), etc.

136.Devasikanti ettha ṇikapaccayo vicchatthe hotīti āha ‘‘divase divase’’ti.Tatiye ca sattame ca pakkheti ekassa utuno aṭṭhasu pakkhesu tatiye ca sattame ca pakkhe. ‘‘Vacanato’’ti padaṃ ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti pade ñāpakahetu.Tathārūpe paccayeti tathārūpe vikaticārittasaṅkhāte paccaye.Anuvattitabbanti anumatiṃ vattitabbaṃ.Vacanatopīti pisaddo pubbe ñāpakahetuṃ sampiṇḍeti.Etanti ‘‘yasmiṃ tasmiṃ cātuddase vā pannarase vā uddisituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vacanaṃ.

136. Devasikanti, here, he says that the affix "ṇika" is in the sense of distribution, thus "divase divase" (day by day). Tatiye ca sattame ca pakkheti, in the third and seventh fortnights of the eight fortnights of one season. The word "vacanato" (from the statement) is a reason indicating the phrase "vaṭṭati" (is suitable). Tathārūpe paccayeti, in such a condition consisting of abnormality or prescribed conduct. Anuvattitabbanti, approval should be expressed. Vacanatopīti, the "pi" combines the previous reason indicating. Etanti, the statement "yasmiṃ tasmiṃ cātuddase vā pannarase vā uddisituṃ vaṭṭatī" (it is suitable to recite on any fourteenth or fifteenth).

71. Sīmānujānanakathā
71. Sīmānujānanakathā

138.Nimittā kittetabbāti nimittāni kittetabbāni. Nikārassa hi ākāro.Nimittaṃ katoti eso pabbato nimittaṃ katoti yojanā. Eseva nayo paratopi. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā ‘‘puratthimāya disāya kiṃ nimittaṃ? Pāsāṇo bhante, eso pāsāṇo nimitta’’nti atthaṃ atidisati. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Kevalaṃ pana vanaudakesu ‘‘etaṃ vanaṃ, etaṃ udaka’’nti vattabbaṃ. Nadiyaṃ ‘‘esā nadī’’ti vattabbā.Ettha panāti etissaṃ uttarāyaṃ anudisāyaṃ pana.ti phalajotako.Tatthāti ‘‘nimittā kittetabbā’’ti vacane.Sīmamaṇḍalanti sīmabimbaṃ.Sambandhantenāti purimanimittena pacchimanimittaṃ sambandhantena. Iminā ekantarikādivasena nimittakittanaṃ na vaṭṭati nimittenapi nimittānaṃ sambandhābhāvatoti dasseti. Purimanimittena pacchimanimittassa sambandhe sati ajja ekaṃ nimittaṃ kittetvā sve ekaṃ nimittaṃ kittetvāti evaṃ kālantarepi nimittaṃ kittetvā sammanituṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti.

138. Nimittā kittetabbāti, the landmarks should be declared. For "ni" becomes "ā." Nimittaṃ katoti, this mountain is made a landmark, that is the connection. The same method applies further on as well. Eseva nayoti, with this he extends the meaning "puratthimāya disāya kiṃ nimittaṃ? Pāsāṇo bhante, eso pāsāṇo nimittaṃ" (what is the landmark in the eastern direction? A stone, venerable sir, this stone is the landmark). The same method applies to the remaining ones as well. Only in the case of forests and water, it should be said "etaṃ vanaṃ, etaṃ udakaṃ" (this is a forest, this is water). In a river, it should be said "esā nadī" (this is a river). Ettha panāti, but here, in this northern sub-direction. ti, indicative of the result. Tatthāti, in the statement "nimittā kittetabbā" (the landmarks should be declared). Sīmamaṇḍalanti, the boundary marker. Sambandhantenāti, by connecting the earlier landmark with the later landmark. With this, he shows that the declaration of landmarks at intervals is not suitable, because even with the landmarks, there is no connection between the landmarks. Some say that when the earlier landmark is connected with the later landmark, it is suitable to declare one landmark today and declare another landmark tomorrow, thus connecting the landmarks even after a lapse of time.

Pabbatoti ettha pabbaṃ vuccati phaḷu, taṃ etasmiṃ atthītipabbato. Vālikarāsissa suddhapaṃsupabbatapasaṅgattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vālikarāsi pana na vaṭṭatī’’ti.Itaropīti vālikarāsito aññopi tividho pabbato.Hatthippamāṇatoti aḍḍhaṭṭhamaratanahatthipamāṇato.Catūsu disāsūti vihārassa catūsu disāsu.Catūhi vā tīhi vāti ettha vāsaddena tato adhikānipi gahetabbāni. Ekena vā nimittenāti yojanā.Itoti pabbatanimittato.Tasmāti yasmā ekena nimittena na vaṭṭati, tasmā.Tanti pabbataṃ.Tasmāti ekasseva nimittassa kittitattā. Yo pabbato atthi, taṃ pabbatanti yojanā.Antoti pabbatassa anto.

Pabbatoti, here, pabbaṃ vuccati phaḷu, taṃ etasmiṃ atthīti pabbato, "pabba" means a cleft, that which has that is "pabbato" (mountain). Because of the association of a sand heap with a pure heap of sand being considered a mountain, it is said "vālikarāsi pana na vaṭṭatī" (but a heap of sand is not suitable). Itaropīti, other than a heap of sand, the other three kinds of mountains. Hatthippamāṇatoti, from the size of a cubit to eight cubits. Catūsu disāsūti, in the four directions of the monastery. Catūhi vā tīhi vāti, here, more than that should also be included with the word "vā." The connection is with one landmark. Itoti, from the mountain landmark. Tasmāti, because it is not suitable with one landmark, therefore. Tanti, that mountain. Tasmāti, because only one landmark has been declared. The connection is that whatever mountain exists, that is the mountain. Antoti, the interior of the mountain.

Tatiyabhāgaṃ vāti ettha vāsaddena paṭhamabhāgopi ekadesopi gahetabbo.Tassāti tattakassa padesassa. Tatiyabhāgādito aparaṃ sabbapabbataṃ antokatvā sammataṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace’’tiādi.

Tatiyabhāgaṃ vāti, here, the first part or a portion should also be taken with the word "vā." Tassāti, of that place. Showing that the entire mountain other than a third part etc. is included, he says "sace"tiādi.

Pāsāṇanimitteevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Pasati ghanabhāvena bandhatītipāsāṇo. Ayaguḷopi pāsāṇasaṅkhameva gacchati tena tassa sadisattā.Ayaguḷopīti ettha pisaddena tambakaṃsavaṭṭalohasuvaṇṇarajatādayopi saṅgaṇhāti.Yo kocīti silāpavāḷamaṇiādīsu yo koci. Dvattiṃsapalaguḷapiṇḍaparimāṇatā saṇṭhānato gahetabbā, na tulitvā gaṇanavasena. Khuddakataro pāsāṇoti yojanā. Yo piṭṭhipāsāṇo vā yo uṭṭhitapāsāṇo vāti yojanā kātabbā – uttaravākye tasaddassa aniyamaniddesavacanattā‘‘pāsāṇasaṅkhaṃyevā’’ti ettha evakārena ‘‘na pabbatasaṅkha’’nti atthaṃ dasseti.Mahato piṭṭhipāsāṇassāti āyāmavitthārubbedhato mahantassa piṭṭhipāsāṇassa sakkassa paṇḍukambalapiṭṭhipāsāṇassa viya.Tanti piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ.Na vaṭṭatīti kittetuṃ na vaṭṭati.ti laddhadosajotako.Tanti piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ.Sīmāyāti sīmato.Vihāropīti na kevalaṃ nimittameva, vihāropi. Piṭṭhipāsāṇo na kittetabboti sambandho.Kittetvāti ettha ‘‘piṭṭhipāsāṇa’’nti yojetabbaṃ.

Pāsāṇanimitte, such a determination should be understood regarding stone landmarks. Pasati ghanabhāvena bandhatīti pāsāṇo, that which binds with a solid nature is pāsāṇo (stone). An iron ball also goes into the category of stone because it is similar to it. Ayaguḷopīti, here, with the word "pi" (also) it includes copper, bronze, round iron, gold, silver, etc. Yo kocīti, whatever among rock, coral, gem, etc. The measure of thirty-two palas for a ball of iron should be taken by shape, not by weighing and counting. Khuddakataro pāsāṇoti yojanā, the connection is with a smaller stone. Yo piṭṭhipāsāṇo vā yo uṭṭhitapāsāṇo vāti yojanā kātabbā – uttaravākye tasaddassa aniyamaniddesavacanattā ‘‘pāsāṇasaṅkhaṃyevā’’ti ettha evakārena ‘‘na pabbatasaṅkha’’nti atthaṃ dasseti, the connection should be made as "whether it is a flat stone or a raised stone"—because the word "ta" (that) in the following sentence is an indefinite designation, with the "eva" in ‘‘pāsāṇasaṅkhaṃyevā’’ti, it shows the meaning "not a mountain." Mahato piṭṭhipāsāṇassāti, of a large flat stone in terms of length, breadth, and height, like a sakkā or paṇḍukambala flat stone. Tanti, that flat stone. Na vaṭṭatīti, it is not suitable to declare. ti, indicative of obtained fault. Tanti, that flat stone. Sīmāyāti, from the boundary. Vihāropīti, not only the landmark, but also the monastery. Piṭṭhipāsāṇo na kittetabboti sambandho, the connection is that a flat stone should not be declared. Kittetvāti, here "piṭṭhipāsāṇa" should be added.

Vananimitteevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Vaniyati mayūrakokilādīhi sattehi sambhajiyatītivanaṃ,vananti sambhajanti etthāti vāvanaṃ. Taco eva sāro etesantitacasāro,tālanāḷikerādayo. Ādisaddena veṇuādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Anto sāro etesantiantosārā,sākasālādayo. Ādisaddena khadirādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Antosāramissakānanti antosārehi rukkhehi missakānaṃ.Rukkhānaṃ vananti ettha avayavaavayavibhāvena sambandho veditabbo. Iminātiṇavanaṃ rukkhavananti ettha ‘‘tiṇānaṃ vana’’nti vā ‘‘rukkhānaṃ vana’’nti vā atthaṃ dasseti. Tiṇameva vanaṃ, rukkhoyeva vananti atthopi yujjateva. Cattāro vā pañca vā rukkhāticatupañcarukkhā,te mattaṃ pamāṇametthāticatupañcarukkhamattaṃvanaṃ,tatoti catupañcarukkhamattato.Ekadesanti vanassa ekadesaṃ.Vanamajjheti vanassa vemajjhe, vanassūparīti attho. Rukkhantaresu eva hi vihāraṃ karonti.Ekadesanti vanassa ekadesaṃ.Tatthāti vane. ‘‘Ṭhitavana’’nti padaṃ ‘‘kittetvā’’ti pade avuttakammaṃ, ‘‘na kittetabba’’nti pade vuttakammaṃ.

Vananimitte, the application should be understood in this way. Vanaṃ: because it is frequented by living beings such as peacocks and cuckoos, it is called vanaṃ; or because they gather, it is called vanaṃ. Tacasāro: those whose essence is bark alone, such as palmyra and coconut trees. The term "ādi" (and so on) includes bamboo and the like. Antosārā: those whose essence is inside, such as teak and sal trees. The term "ādi" includes acacia and the like. Antosāramissakānaṃ: mixed with trees that have inner essence. Rukkhānaṃ vanaṃ: here, the connection should be understood by way of part and whole. With this, the meaning is shown as either "a forest of grasses" or "a forest of trees" in "tiṇavanaṃ rukkhavanaṃ." The meaning that grass alone is the forest, or tree alone is the forest, is also suitable. Catupañcarukkhā: four or five trees. Catupañcarukkhamattaṃ vanaṃ: a forest is one that has that many as its measure. Tato: from that measure of four or five trees. Ekadesaṃ: a part of the forest. Vanamajjhe: in the middle of the forest, meaning above the forest. For indeed, they make a dwelling among the trees. Ekadesaṃ: a part of the forest. Tattha: in the forest. The word "ṭhitavana" is the unstated object in the phrase "kittetvā" and the stated object in the phrase "na kittetabba."

Rukkhanimitteevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Rukkhiyati phalādikāmehi saṃvariyati rakkhiyatītirukkho,mahiyaṃ ruhatīti vārukkho. Jīvamānakoti lokavohāravasena mūlaṅkurādiharitasaṅkhātajīvamānako.Pariṇāhatoti visālabhāvato.Sūcidaṇḍakapamāṇoti sūciyā lekhaniyā daṇḍabhūtaveḷupamāṇo. So veḷu kaniṭṭhaṅgulipamāṇoti daṭṭhabbo.Tatoti aṭṭhaṅgulubbedhasūcidaṇḍakapamāṇapariṇāharukkhato.Vaṃsanaḷakasarāvādīsūti vaṃso ca naḷako ca sarāvo ca vaṃsanaḷakasarāvā, te ādayo yesaṃ kapālādīnanti vaṃsanaḷakasarāvādayo, tesu.Tatoti vaṃsādito.Taṃkhaṇampīti tasmiṃ nimittakkhaṇepi.Akāraṇanti apamāṇaṃ.Etanti navamūlasākhāniggamanaṃ.Vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti sāmaññanāmenapi visesanāmenapi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Iminā pabbatādīsupi ‘‘pabbato’’ti sāmaññanāmenapi ‘‘vaṅkapabbato vepullapabbato’’ti visesanāmenapi vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti.

Rukkhanimitte, the application should be understood in this way. Rukkho: because it is harvested, protected, or guarded by those desiring fruits and the like, it is called rukkho; or because it grows on the earth, it is called rukkho. Jīvamānako: in common parlance, a living tree is one that has sprouts from the root, green shoots and the like. Pariṇāhato: because of its expanse. Sūcidaṇḍakapamāṇo: the size of a bamboo stick used as a pen. That bamboo should be seen as the size of the little finger. Tato: from a tree that is the size of a writing needle with a thickness of eight fingers. Vaṃsanaḷakasarāvādīsu: vaṃso (bamboo), naḷako (reed), and sarāvo (clay pot) are vaṃsanaḷakasarāvā; those beginning with these, such as potsherds, are vaṃsanaḷakasarāvādayo; in those. Tato: from bamboo and so on. Taṃkhaṇampī: even at that moment of indication. Akāraṇaṃ: without measure. Etaṃ: the emergence of new roots and branches. Vattuṃ vaṭṭati: it is appropriate to state it by a general name or a specific name. With this, it shows that even for mountains and the like, it is appropriate to state it by a general name like "pabbato" (mountain) or by specific names like "Vaṅkapabbato" and "Vepullapabbato."

Magganimitteevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Maggiyati pathikehi, maggamūḷhehi vā anvesiyatītimaggo. Yo yādiso jaṅghamaggo vā sakaṭamaggo vā vinivijjhitvā dve tīṇi gāmantarāni gacchati, so tādiso jaṅghamaggo vā sakaṭamaggo vā vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Ukkamitvāti pakkamitvā. Yo jaṅghamaggo otarati, so na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Avaḷañjāti aparibhogā. Gamanaṃ janetītijaṅgho. Jaṇṇugopphakānaṃ majjhapadeso. Saha atthena paṇiyadhanenātisattho,jaṅghena vicaranto satthojaṅghasattho. Sakati samattheti bhāraṃ vahituntisakaṭo,tena vicaranto satthosakaṭasattho. Jaṅghasattho ca sakaṭasattho ca jaṅghasakaṭasatthā, tehi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etanti nimittaṃ.

Magganimitte, the application should be understood in this way. Maggo: because it is sought by travelers or those lost on the path, it is called maggo. Whichever footpath or cart track goes, having cut through, between two or three villages, that kind of footpath or cart track is appropriate. Ukkamitvā: having departed. Whichever footpath descends, that is not appropriate. Avaḷañjā: without usage. Jaṅgho: that which generates movement. The middle part of the knee and ankle. Sattho: together with goods and merchandise; jaṅghasattho: a caravan traveling on foot. Sakaṭo: capable of carrying, bearing a load; sakaṭasattho: a caravan traveling by cart. Jaṅghasattho and sakaṭasattho are jaṅghasakaṭasatthā; by these. : indeed, because. Etaṃ: indication.

Koṇanti vihārakoṇaṃ. Gataṃ pana magganti yojanā.Parabhāgeti vihāraṃ parikkhipitvā gacchantehi catūhi maggehi parabhāge.Dasasu nāmesūti satipaṭṭhānaṭṭhakathādīsu āgatesu ‘‘maggo pantho patho pajjo’’tiādīsu, abhidhānādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106) ca āgatesu ‘‘maggo pantho patho addhā’’tiādīsu dasasu magganāmesu.Yena kenaci nāmenāti iminā pabbatādīsupi ‘‘pabbato giri selo addi nago acalo siluccayo sikharī bhūdharo’’tiādīsu anekesu nāmesu yena kenaci nāmena kittetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti.

Koṇaṃ: the corner of a monastery. Gataṃ pana magganti, but the road is gone. Parabhāge: on the outer side, on the outer side by the four roads going around the monastery. Dasasu nāmesu: among the ten names for road that occur in the Satipaṭṭhāna commentary and others, such as "maggo pantho patho pajjo" and in the Abhidhāna and others (D.A. 2.373; M.A. 1.106) such as "maggo pantho patho addhā." Yena kenaci nāmenā: with this, it shows that even for mountains and the like, it is appropriate to name it by any of the many names such as "pabbato giri selo addi nago acalo siluccayo sikharī bhūdharo."

Vammikanimitteevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Upacikāhi vamiyati, sarabūgharagolikādayo satte vamatīti vāvammiko. Taṃdivasajātoti tasmiṃ nimittakittitadivase jāto.Tatoti aṭṭhaṅgulubbedhagovisāṇapamāṇavammīkato.

Vammikanimitte, the application should be understood in this way. Vammiko: because it is vomited up by white ants, or because it vomits forth living beings such as house lizards and geckos, it is called vammiko. Taṃdivasajāto: born on that day the sign was designated. Tato: from a termite mound the size of a cow's horn with a thickness of eight fingers.

Nadīnimitteevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Nadati sandatīti nadī, nadanto eti gacchatīti vānadī. Yassāti nadiyā, sotanti sambandho. ‘‘Anvaddhamāsa’’ntiādinā ekapakkhe tikkhattuṃ ekamāse chakkhattuṃ vassantabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Vigatamatte satīti sambandho. ‘‘Īdise’’ti iminā ‘‘anvaddhamāsa’’ntiādiatthaṃ atidisati.Timaṇḍalanti heṭṭhā jāṇumaṇḍalaṃ, upari nābhimaṇḍalanti timaṇḍalaṃ.Yattha katthacīti titthe vā atitthe vā. Udakena temiyatīti yojanā, tintiyatīti attho. Na kevalaṃ nimitteyeva ayaṃ nadī hoti, atha kho nadīpāragamanādikepīti āha ‘‘bhikkhuniyā’’tiādi. Idaṃ ‘‘nadīpāragamanepī’’ti padeneva sambandhitabbaṃ.

Nadīnimitte, the application should be understood in this way. Nadī: because it roars and flows, it is called a nadī; or because it comes and goes roaring, it is called nadī. Yassā: of which river, the flow is the connection. By "anvaddhamāsa," it indicates the state of raining three times in one fortnight, six times in one month. Vigatamatte satīti, when it has disappeared. "Īdise" (such), with this, it extends the meaning of "anvaddhamāsa" and so on. Timaṇḍalaṃ: timaṇḍalaṃ because below is the kneecap and above is the navel. Yattha katthacī: whether at a proper bathing place or not. Udakena temiyatīti, it should be wetted with water, meaning it should be moistened. He says, "For a bhikkhuni," indicating that this river is not only for marking a boundary, but also for going across the river. This should be connected with the phrase "nadīpāragamanepī."

Yā panāti nadī pana, gatāti yojanā.Tanti nadiṃ.Vatinti pāḷiṃ.Rukkhapādeti rukkhassa mūle. Udakañca āvaraṇaṃ ajjhottharitvā pavattatiyevāti yojanā.Yathāti yenākārena. Apavattamānā hotīti sambandho.

Yā panā: but whichever river, gatāti, has gone. Taṃ: that river. Vati: the text. Rukkhapāde: at the root of the tree. Udakañca āvaraṇaṃ ajjhottharitvā pavattatiyevāti, and the water flows only after overflowing the obstruction. Yathā: in which manner. Apavattamānā hotīti, it continues to flow.

Dubbuṭṭhikāleti gimhasadise dubbuṭṭhikāle. ‘‘Nirudakabhāvenā’’ti iminā ‘‘āvaraṇabhāvenā’’ti visesanaṃ nivatteti.ti udakamātikā. Sampādentī hutvā niccaṃ pavattatīti yojanā.Nimittaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti manussehi nīhaṭattā, sayañca agamanattā na vaṭṭati.Yā panāti udakamātikā pana.Mūleti paṭhamakāle. Kālantarena nadī hotīti sambandho.Tanti udakamātikaṃ.

Dubbuṭṭhikāle: in a time of bad weather like the hot season. By "nirudakabhāvena," he excludes the qualifier "āvaraṇabhāvena." : that water source. Sampādentī hutvā niccaṃ pavattatīti, having produced it, it always flows. Nimittaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati: it is not appropriate to make a sign because it is carried by humans and does not go by itself. Yā panā: but whichever water source. Mūle: in the initial stage. Kālantarena nadī hotīti, after a time it becomes a river. Taṃ: that water source.

Udakanimitteevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Udati pasavatītiudakaṃ. Bhūmigatameva udakanti sambandho.Tañcāti bhūmigataudakañca. Āvāṭa…pe… samuddādīsu ṭhitaṃ apavattanakaudakanti yojanā.Ukkhepimanti ukkhipitvā gahitaṃ.Tanti vacanaṃ.Sūkarakhatāyapīti sūkarehi khatāya vāpiyāpi.Taṃkhaṇaññevāti tasmiṃ nimitte kittanakkhaṇeyeva. Āvāṭoyeva khuddakaṭṭhenaāvāṭakaṃ. Tanti nimittasaññākaraṇaṃ.Kātuñcāti sayaṃ kātuñca.Kārāpetuñcāti parehi kārāpetuñca. Kasmā lābhasīmāyaṃ na vaṭṭati? Lābhasīmā hi aññesaṃ pīḷanaṃ karotīti. Iti imamatthaṃ nayato dassento āha ‘‘samānasaṃvāsakasīmā’’tiādi.Etthāti samānasaṃvāsakasīmāyaṃ.

Udakanimitte, the application should be understood in this way. Udakaṃ: because it exudes and produces, it is called udakaṃ. Bhūmigatameva udakanti, water is only that which is underground. Tañcā: and that underground water. Āvāṭa…pe… samuddādīsu ṭhitaṃ apavattanakaudakanti, water that is standing and not flowing in wells…pe… oceans and the like. Ukkhepimaṃ: that which is taken by lifting. Taṃ: that statement. Sūkarakhatāyapī: even from a well dug by pigs. Taṃkhaṇaññeva: at that very moment of marking the sign. Āvāṭoyeva khuddakaṭṭhena, a small stake is an āvāṭakaṃ. Taṃ: marking that sign. Kātuñcā: and to do it oneself. Kārāpetuñcā: and to have it done by others. Why is it not appropriate in the boundary of gains? Because the boundary of gains causes harm to others. Thus, showing this meaning in a guiding way, he says "samānasaṃvāsakasīmā" and so on. Ettha: in the boundary of common dwelling.

ti sīmā. Ekena vā nimittenāti yojanā. Tiṇṇaṃ nimittānaṃ kittane nimittānaṃ ṭhitadisaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘puratthimāya disāyā’’tiādinā kittetabbaṃ. Nimittānaṃ satakittane sīmāya aṭṭhadisaṃ sallakkhetvā ekissāyapi disāya bahunimittāni kittetabbāni.Siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānāti tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ samāgamaṭṭhāne siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānā, tikoṇā nāma hotīti adhippāyo.Caturassāti samacaturassā.Siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānāti catunnaṃ maggānaṃ samodhānaṭṭhāne siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānā. Aḍḍhacandamudiṅgādisaṇṭhānā pana nimittānaṃ ṭhitasaṇṭhānena hotīti daṭṭhabbā.Tanti sīmaṃ. Bandhitukāmehi nissañcārasamaye bandhitabbāti sambandho.Baddhasīmavihārānanti baddhā sīmā etesūtibaddhasīmā,te eva vihārāti baddhasīmavihārā, tesaṃ.Disācārikabhikkhūnanti disāsu cārikabhikkhūnaṃ.Tatthāti tasmiṃ ekagāmakhette, bhikkhūnaṃ pesetabbanti sambandho.Ekajjhanti ekato.Aññānipīti sīmabandhagāmakhettato aññānipi.Mahāpadumattheropana āhāti yojanā.Tatoti tehi nānāgāmakhettehi.Āgantabbanti sāmīcidassanavasena vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘āgamanampi anāgamanampi vaṭṭatī’’ti. Ekasīmabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘antonimittagatehi āgantabba’’nti.

: that boundary. Ekena vā nimittenāti, by one sign. Tiṇṇaṃ nimittānaṃ kittane, in marking three signs, the direction in which the signs are located should be noted, and it should be designated by "puratthimāya disāyā" and so on. Nimittānaṃ satakittane, in marking a hundred signs, the eight directions of the boundary should be noted, and many signs should be marked in one direction as well. Siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānā: shaped like a crossroads at the meeting place of three roads, the meaning is that it is triangular. Caturassā: a regular square. Siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānā: shaped like a crossroads at the meeting place of four roads. However, the shapes like a half-moon and a drum should be understood as being in accordance with the shape of the existing signs. Taṃ: that boundary. It should be connected that those desiring to bind should bind at a time when there is no movement. Baddhasīmavihārānaṃ: baddhā sīmā etesūti baddhasīmā, te eva vihārāti baddhasīmavihārā, of those monasteries with established boundaries. Disācārikabhikkhūnaṃ: for monks wandering in the directions. Tattha: in that single village area, it should be connected that monks should be sent. Ekajjhaṃ: together. Aññānipī: even other than the boundary-binding village area. Mahāpadumatthero pana āhāti: Mahāpadumatthera said. Tato: from those various village areas. Āgantabbaṃ: it is said in the sense of showing respect. Therefore, he said, "Āgamanampi anāgamanampi vaṭṭati," both coming and not coming are appropriate. Because of the state of a single boundary, it is said, "antonimittagatehi āgantabbaṃ," one should come with the inner signs.

Pariyantaṃ katvāti heṭṭhimapariyantaṃ katvā.

Pariyantaṃ katvā: having made the lower boundary.

Pabbajjūpasampadādīnanti ettha bhaṇḍukammāpucchanaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 98; vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. 144) sandhāya pabbajjāgahaṇaṃ vuttaṃ.Khaṇḍasīmāti vihārapaccantaṃ khaṇḍitaṃ viya chinditaṃ viya pavattā sīmā khaṇḍasīmā.Tanti khaṇḍasīmaṃ.Vattaṃ jānitabbanti ettha vattaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘sace hī’’tiādi.Sīmanti khaṇḍasīmaṃ.Yathāti yenākārena bandhiyamāneti sambandho. Tassā pamāṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sā’’tiādi.ti khaṇḍasīmā. Abbhānakamme saddhiṃ kammārahena vīsati bhikkhū sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ekavīsati bhikkhū’’ti.Tatoti ekavīsatibhikkhuto.Gaṇhantīpīti ettha pisaddo sahassato oraṃ pana pagevāti dasseti. Sahassato adhikaṃ gaṇhantīpi vihārapaccante khaṇḍite khaṇḍasīmāyeva nāma.Tanti khaṇḍasīmaṃ.

Pabbajjūpasampadādīnaṃ: here, the taking of pabbajjā (lower ordination) is mentioned in reference to asking about the bowl and robes (Mahaavagga Aṭṭhakathā 98; Vinaya Sangaha Aṭṭhakathā 144). Khaṇḍasīmā: a boundary that is like a broken-off or cut-off boundary at the edge of a monastery is a khaṇḍasīmā. Taṃ: that khaṇḍasīmā. Vattaṃ jānitabbaṃ: explaining the practice in detail, he says, "sace hī" and so on. Sīmaṃ: the khaṇḍasīmā. Yathā: in which manner it is being bound. Showing its measure, he says, "sā" and so on. : that khaṇḍasīmā. In the act of annulment, with reference to the twenty monks who are eligible to perform the act, it is said, "ekavīsati bhikkhū," twenty-one monks. Tato: from twenty-one monks. Gaṇhantīpī: here, the "pi" particle shows that it is less than a thousand, but it is clearly more. Even if it includes more than a thousand, at the edge of the monastery where it is broken off, it is still called a khaṇḍasīmā. Taṃ: that khaṇḍasīmā.

Tatrāti khaṇḍasīmamahāsīmāsu ādhāre bhummaṃ.Athāti anantaraṃ.Evanti imāya avippavāsakammavācāya sammaniyamāne.ti phalajotako.Sīmanti samānasaṃvāsakasīmaṃ.Na sakkhissantīti paṭhamaṃ avippavāsaṃ asamūhanitvā sīmaṃ samūhanituṃ na sakkhissanti.Sīmantarikapāsāṇāti dvinnaṃ sīmānaṃ antare vemajjhe ṭhapitā pāsāṇā.Caturaṅgulapamāṇāpīti pisaddo ekaṅgulipamāṇāpi vaṭṭatīti dasseti.

Tatrā: in the khaṇḍasīmā and mahāsīmā, the underlying support. Athā: then. Evaṃ: being established by this avippavāsakammavācā (formula for non-separation). : indicative of a result. Sīmaṃ: the boundary of common dwelling. Na sakkhissantī: they will not be able to annul the boundary without first annulling the avippavāsaṃ (act of non-separation). Sīmantarikapāsāṇā: stones placed in the space between two boundaries. Caturaṅgulapamāṇāpī: the "pi" particle shows that even a measurement of one finger is appropriate.

Samantāti khaṇḍasīmāya samantā.Anupariyāyantehīti anukkamena khaṇḍasīmapariyāyantehi bhikkhūhīti sambandho.Tatoti tehi sīmantarikapāsāṇehi, dvinnaṃ sīmānaṃ nimittāni paṭhamaṃ kittetvā pacchā tāsu yaṃ icchanti, taṃ bandhitabbabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi. Yathicchitaṃ bandhituṃ vaṭṭantopi porāṇāciṇṇaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’tiādi.Ubhinnampīti dvīsu sīmāsu ṭhitānaṃ ubhinnampi kammanti sambandho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Samantā: around the khaṇḍasīmā. Anupariyāyantehī: by monks going around the khaṇḍasīmā in succession. Tato: from those sīmantarikapāsāṇehi (stones between boundaries), he shows that after first designating the signs of the two boundaries, whichever they want of those can be bound, saying "sace panā" and so on. Although it is appropriate to bind as desired, it is said "evaṃ santepī" and so on to show the ancient custom. Ubhinnampī: the act of both those standing in the two boundaries. : indeed, because.

Tatthāti piṭṭhipāsāṇādīsu pañcasu ṭhānesu.Nimittapāsāṇā yathāṭhāne na tiṭṭhantīti piṭṭhipāsāṇassupari nimittapāsāṇaṃ ṭhapitamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ pana vijjhitvā nimittapāsāṇaṃ tattha nikhaṇitvā yathā ṭhānā na cāventi, tathā ṭhapenti. Evaṃ sante yathāṭhāne tiṭṭhantiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Na sīmāti sīmāya pathavisandhārakaṃ udakaṃ pariyantaṃkatvā gatattā sīmā na jhāyati.

Tattha: in the five places, such as the back stone and so on. Nimittapāsāṇā yathāṭhāne na tiṭṭhantī: it is said with reference to merely placing the sign stone on top of the back stone. However, they drill through the back stone, insert the sign stone there, and keep it so that it does not move from its place. When that is the case, it should be understood that they remain in their place. Na sīmā: because the water that supports the earth of the boundary has gone having made the limit, the boundary does not burn.

Kuṭigehepīti ettha kuṭīti ca gehanti ca agārasseva nāmaṃ. Agārañhi sītādidukkhassa kuṭanaṭṭhena chindanaṭṭhena ca nānādabbasambhārassa gahaṇaṭṭhena ca kuṭigehanti vuccati. Kuṭi eva gehaṃ kuṭigehaṃ, tasmimpi.Bhittiṃ akittetvāti idaṃ iṭṭhakadārumayaṃ bhittiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sace silāmayā bhitti nimittūpagā bhaveyya, bhittipi kittetabbā.Anto karitvāti kuṭigehassa bhittiyā vā anto katvā.Pamukheti kuṭigehassa ālinde.Nibbodakapatanaṭṭhāneti niggalitvā udakassa patanaṭṭhāne. Evaṃ sammatāya sīmāyāti yojanā.

Kuṭigehepī: here, "kuṭi" and "geha" are both names for a house. For a house is called kuṭigeha because of cutting off suffering from cold and the like, and because of gathering various material goods. Kuṭi eva gehaṃ, kuṭigehaṃ, even in that. Bhittiṃ akittetvā: this is said with reference to a wall made of bricks and wood. If a stone wall were suitable as a sign, the wall should also be marked. Anto karitvā: having made the inside of the wall of the kuṭigeha. Pamukhe: in the porch of the kuṭigeha. Nibbodakapatanaṭṭhāne: in the place where the dripping water falls. Evaṃ sammatāya sīmāyāti, to the boundary thus agreed upon.

Antoti leṇassa, kuṭṭassa vā anto.Okāseti ekavīsatiyā bhikkhūnaṃ okāse.Evanti iminākārena sammaniyamāne.Antoti bhittiyā anto.

Anto: the interior of the cave or wall. Okāse: in the space for twenty-one monks. Evaṃ: being established in this manner. Anto: inside the wall.

Heṭṭhā na otaratīti heṭṭhā ākāsatalattā na otarati. Nanu thambhe anusāritvā otaraṇo bhaveyya, kasmā na otaratīti? Thambhānamupari ekavīsatiyā bhikkhūnaṃ okāsābhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Heṭṭhā otaraṇākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Tulānanti thambhānamupari tiriyavasena ṭhitānaṃ rukkhavisesānaṃ.Uṭṭhahitvāti bhūmito uṭṭhahitvā.Tulārukkhehīti tulāsaṅkhātehi rukkhehi. ‘‘Ekasambandho’’ti iminā na kevalaṃ tulārukkheheva ekasambandho, catūsu disāsu catunnaṃ bhittīnaṃ aññamaññampi sambandhoti dasseti.Heṭṭhāpi otaratīti bhittīnamupari ekavīsatiyā bhikkhūnaṃ okāsapahonakattā vuttaṃ.Sace thambhamatthake…pe… hotīti iminā bahūhi thambhehi katapāsādassa ekekasmiṃ thambhamatthake ekavīsatiyā bhikkhūnaṃ okāse sati heṭṭhā otaratīti dasseti.Niyyūhakādīsūti nāgadantakādīsu. Ādisaddena bhittikhilādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Bhitti cāti iṭṭhakadārumayā bhitti ca. Sace silāmayā bhitti ca thambhā ca honti, kittetabbā.Bhittilaggeti bhittīsu lagge, bhittīnaṃ vā laggaṭṭhāne.Heṭṭhāpāsādassāti heṭṭhāpāsāde ‘‘ṭhita’’iti pade sambandho. Heṭṭhāpāsādassa vā thambhānanti yojanā. Heṭṭhā sammatāya sīmāya upari ārohanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Nibbodakapatanaṭṭhāneti chadanakoṭiyaṃ.

He does not descend below: He does not descend below from the level of the open space. But if one could descend by following a pillar, why does he not descend? It should be understood that there is no space for twenty-one monks above the pillars. Showing the way of descending below, he says, "But if..." etc. Tulānaṃ: Of particular trees placed horizontally above the pillars. Uṭṭhahitvā: Having risen from the ground. Tulārukkhehi: By the trees called tulā. "Ekasambandho": By this, it shows that not only is there a single connection with the tulā trees, but also that the four walls in the four directions are connected to each other. He also descends below: This is said because there is enough space on top of the walls for twenty-one monks. Sace thambhamatthake…pe… hotī: By this, it shows that if a building is made with many pillars, and there is space for twenty-one monks on top of each pillar, he descends below. Niyyūhakādīsū: In projections like nāgadantaka. The term "ādi" includes wall pegs, etc. Bhitti cā: And a wall made of brick or wood. If there are stone walls and pillars, they should be marked. Bhittilagge: Attached to the walls, or at the places attached to the walls. Heṭṭhāpāsādassā: Of the lower building; the word "ṭhita" is connected. Or, the meaning is "of the lower building's pillars." Showing the manner of ascending above the established lower boundary, he says, "sace panā" etc. Nibbodakapatanaṭṭhāne: At the edge of the roof.

Tatthāti tasmiṃ tale. Piṭṭhipāsāṇe sīmaṃ bandhanti viya bandhantīti yojanā.Teneva paricchedenāti teneva talaparicchedena.Tālamūlapabbatepīti ettha tālamūlaṃ nāma heṭṭhā mahantaṃ hutvā anupubbena tanukaṃ hoti, tena sadise pabbatepi.Vitānasaṇṭhānoti ullocassa saṇṭhāno. Catūsu disāsu niggatasākharukkhasaṇṭhāno vā khujjarukkhasaṇṭhāno vā hoti. Yathā pabbato vitānasaṇṭhāno hoti, evaṃmudiṅgasaṇṭhānovā hoti paṇavasaṇṭhāno vāti yojanā. Tattha mudiṅgo majjhe thūlo hoti, mūle ca ante ca tanuko. Paṇavo majjhe tanuko hoti, mūle ca agge ca thūlo. Tesaṃ saṇṭhāno mudiṅgasaṇṭhāno vā paṇavasaṇṭhāno vā.Heṭṭhā vāti mudiṅgasaṇṭhānassa pabbatassa heṭṭhā vā.Majjhe vāti paṇavasaṇṭhānassa majjhe vā.Dve kūṭānīti dve sikharāni.Kūṭantaranti kūṭānaṃ majjhaṃ.Cinitvā vāti iṭṭhakasilāhi cinitvā vā.Pūretvā vāti paṃsuvālikāhi pūretvā vā.

Tatthā: In that plane. It is to be construed as marking the boundary as if they were marking it on a piṭṭhipāsāṇa (flat rock). Teneva paricchedenā: With that very plane's boundary. Tālamūlapabbatepī: Here, tālamūla is the name for something that is large at the bottom and gradually becomes thinner, even on a mountain similar to that. Vitānasaṇṭhāno: The shape of a canopy. Or, it has the shape of a sākha tree that protrudes in four directions, or the shape of a khujja tree. Just as a mountain has the shape of a canopy, so too it has the shape of a mudiṅgasaṇṭhāno or the shape of a paṇava, is the connection. Here, a mudiṅga is thick in the middle, and thin at the base and end. A paṇava is thin in the middle, and thick at the base and tip. Their shape is either the shape of a mudiṅga or the shape of a paṇava. Heṭṭhā vā: Or below a mudiṅga-shaped mountain. Majjhe vā: Or in the middle of a paṇava-shaped one. Dve kūṭānī: Two peaks. Kūṭantaraṃ: The space between the peaks. Cinitvā vā: Having built it with bricks or stones. Pūretvā vā: Having filled it with sand or earth.

Sappaphaṇasadisoti sappassa phaṇena sadiso, khujjo pabbatoti attho.Ākāsapabbhāranti bhittiyā aparikkhittaṃ ākāsasaṅkhātaṃ pabbhāraṃ.Sīmappamāṇoti saddhiṃ antosusirena sīmappamāṇo.Aggakoṭinti aggasaṅkhātaṃ koṭiṃ. Sace pana pabbatassa heṭṭhā antoleṇaṃ hotīti sambandho.Uparimassāti antoleṇassa upari ṭhitassa.Pāratoti bāhirato.Assāti pabbatassa bahīti sambandho.Oratoti antato. Leṇaṃ hotīti sambandho. Kittakaṃ mahantanti āha ‘‘sīmāparicchedamatikkamitvā ṭhita’’nti. Kittakaṃ khuddakanti āha ‘‘sabbapacchimasīmāparimāṇa’’nti.Tanti khuddakaṃ leṇaṃ.Atikhuddakanti sabbapacchimasīmāparimāṇābhāvato atikhuddakaṃ.Tatoti uparisīmato.Bahīti sīmato bahi.‘‘Yadi sīmappamāṇaṃ, sīmā hotiyevā’’ti iminā yadi na sīmappamāṇaṃ, na sīmā hotiyevāti dasseti.

Sappaphaṇasadiso: Similar to the hood of a snake, meaning a crooked mountain. Ākāsapabbhāraṃ: An open space not enclosed by a wall, considered as open space. Sīmappamāṇo: Measuring the boundary together with the inner cavity. Aggakoṭiṃ: The tip called the summit. But if there is a cave inside the mountain at the bottom, is the connection. Uparimassā: Of that which is situated above the cave. Pārato: From the outside. Assā: Is connected to the outside of the mountain. Orato: From the inside. There is a cave, is the connection. How big? He says, "sīmāparicchedamatikkamitvā ṭhitaṃ" (it stands exceeding the boundary of the boundary). How small? He says, "sabbapacchimasīmāparimāṇaṃ" (the size of the last boundary). Taṃ: That small cave. Atikhuddakaṃ: Extremely small because it lacks the size of the last boundary. Tato: From the upper boundary. Bahī: Outside the boundary. "Yadi sīmappamāṇaṃ, sīmā hotiyevā": By this, it shows that if it is not the size of a boundary, it is definitely not a boundary.

Tanti khaṇḍasīmaṃ.Pūretvāti iṭṭhakamattikādīhi pūretvā.Aṭṭaṃ bandhitvāti aṭṭālakaṃ bandhitvā.Umaṅganadīti ettha ukāro okāraviparīto, tasmā pathaviyaṃ otaritvā pavisitvā maṅgati gacchatītiumaṅgāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Umaṅgāca sā nadī cetiumaṅganadī. Tatthāti umaṅganadiyaṃ.Heṭṭhāpathavitale ṭhitoti sīmāya heṭṭhāpathavitale iddhiyā ṭhito.

Taṃ: That khaṇḍasīma. Pūretvā: Having filled it with bricks, clay, etc. Aṭṭaṃ bandhitvā: Having built a watchtower. Umaṅganadī: Here, the u is the opposite of o, therefore, the meaning of umaṅgā should be understood as "it enters and goes into the earth." Umaṅgā and that river is umaṅganadī. Tatthā: In that underground river. Heṭṭhāpathavitale ṭhito: Standing by means of psychic power below the boundary, on the surface of the earth.

Sīmāmāḷaketi khaṇḍasīmāya māḷake.Vaṭarukkhoti nigrodharukkho.Tatoti vaṭarukkhato.Niggatapārohoti pavaddhaṃva hutvā rukkho ārohati anenātipāroho,eko mūlaviseso. Niggato pāroho niggatapāroho.Mahāsīmaṃ sodhetvāti ettha sodhanaṃ nāma mahāsīmagatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ hatthapāsānayanaṃ, sīmato vā bahikaraṇaṃ.Bahiddhāti dvīhi sīmāhi bahiddhā. ‘‘Bahiṭṭhā’’tipi pāṭho. Bahi ṭhitā kātabbāti attho.Anāhaccāti mahāsīmāya pathavītalaṃ vā tatthajātarukkhādīni vā na āhanitvā.Evanti yathā khaṇḍasīmāya, evaṃ tathāti attho.Sīmāmāḷaketi khaṇḍasīmāmāḷake.

Sīmāmāḷake: In the enclosure of the khaṇḍasīma. Vaṭarukkho: A banyan tree. Tato: From that banyan tree. Niggatapāroho: That by which the tree grows and climbs, is called pāroho, a particular type of root. Niggato pāroho, niggatapāroho. Mahāsīmaṃ sodhetvā: Here, sodhanaṃ means removing the monks from within the great boundary, or excluding them from the boundary. Bahiddhā: Outside the two boundaries. "Bahiṭṭhā" is also a reading. The meaning is, it should be done standing outside. Anāhaccā: Without striking the ground level of the great boundary or the trees growing there, etc. Evaṃ: Just as in the khaṇḍasīma, so also in that case. Sīmāmāḷake: In the enclosure of the khaṇḍasīma.

Sīmāmāḷaketi dvinnaṃ sīmānaṃ aṅgaṇe.Sīmāmāḷakassāti kammassa kataṭṭhānassa sīmāmāḷakassa.Vehāsaṭṭhitasākhāyāti kammassa akataṭṭhāne sīmāmāḷake uṭṭhitāya vehāse ṭhitāya sākhāya.Tassāti bhikkhuno pādā vā nivāsanapārupanaṃ vāti sambandho.Purimanayepīti ‘‘sīmāmāḷake vaṭarukkho hotī’’tiādinā vutte purimanayepi.Tatrāti purimanaye.Ukkhipāpetvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti dvīhi sīmāhi uṭṭhitarukkhassa sākhā vā tato niggatapāroho vā dvīsu sīmāsu pathavītalaṃ vā tattha jātarukkhādīni vā āhacca ṭhitattā ukkhipāpetvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭati.Ānetabboti ettha dvikammikāya nīdhātuyā apadhānakammasseva vuttattā ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti padhānakammaṃ ajjhāharitabbaṃ.Abbhuggacchatīti abbhaṃ ākāsaṃ uggacchati.Tatrāti pabbate. Kasmā ānetabboti āha ‘‘bajjhamānāyeva hī’’tiādi. Tatthabajjhamānāyevāti kammavācāya bajjhamānāyeva. Iminā abaddhasīmā pamāṇarahitaṃ desaṃ otaratīti dasseti.Yaṃkiñcīti yaṃkiñci pabbatādi.Yattha katthacīti yasmiṃ kasmiṃci ṭhāne.Ekasambandhenāti baddhasīmāya ekasambandhena.Itīti tasmā ānetabboti yojanā.

Sīmāmāḷake: In the courtyard of the two boundaries. Sīmāmāḷakassā: Of the sīmāmāḷaka, the place where the act was done. Vehāsaṭṭhitasākhāyā: Of a branch risen in the sīmāmāḷaka where the act was not done, standing in the sky. Tassā: In relation to that, either the monk's feet or the lower and upper robes, is the connection. Purimanayepī: Also in the previous method stated by "sīmāmāḷake vaṭarukkho hotī" etc. Tatrā: In that previous method. Ukkhipāpetvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī: It is not proper to do it by lifting it up because the branch of a tree that has risen from the two boundaries, or a shoot emerging from it, stands touching the ground level in the two boundaries or the trees growing there, etc. Ānetabbo: Here, because only the secondary object of the verb "nī" with two objects is stated, the primary object "bhikkhū" should be supplied. Abbhuggacchatī: Rises up to the sky. Tatrā: On the mountain. Why should it be brought? He says, "bajjhamānāyeva hī" etc. There, bajjhamānāyevā: Being bound by the passive voice. By this, it shows that an unbound boundary descends to a place without measure. Yaṃkiñcī: Whatever mountain, etc. Yattha katthacī: In whatever place. Ekasambandhenā: With a single connection to the bound boundary. Itī: Therefore, it should be brought.

140.Tīṇi yojanānitiyojanaṃ. ‘‘Pamāṇa’’nti imināparamasaddassa atirekauttamatthe nivatteti.Etissāti sīmāya. Sammanantena bhikkhunāti sambandho. Koṇato minitaṃ koṇanti yojanā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Āpattiñcāti dukkaṭāpattiñca.

140.Tīṇi yojanāni yojanaṃ. With "pamāṇaṃ," he turns away the parama word from its meaning of excessive superiority. Etissā: Of this sīma. Is connected with the monk who sanctions. Koṇato minitaṃ koṇanti yojanā. Hī: Indeed, because of which. Āpattiñcā: And a dukkaṭa offense.

Pārayatīti ajjhottharati. ‘‘Kitakābhidheyyaliṅgā’’ti (kaccāyanasāre 45 gāthāyaṃ) vacanato abhidheyyabhūtaṃ sīmaṃ sandhāya itthiliṅgavasenapārāti vuttaṃ.Nadiyāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Nadinti hi attho. Nadiṃ ajjhottharamānaṃ sīmanti sambandho.Etthāti nadipārasīmāyaṃ.Yatthassāti ettha yattha assāti padavibhāgaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yattha nadiyā’’tiādi. ‘‘Nadiyā’’ti iminā yaṃsaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.Dhuvanāvāti ettha dhuvasaddo niccatthoti āha ‘‘niccasañcaraṇanāvā’’ti. Iminā dhuvena niccena sañcaraṇanāvādhuvanāvāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Assāti hoti, bhaveyya vā. Nāvāya pamāṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yā’’tiādi. Tatthati nāvā.Pājanapurisenāti ettha pājanaṃ nāma eko nāvāya gamanūpakaraṇaviseso. So hi pajati nāvā gacchati anenātipājananti vuccati. Jakārassa cakāraṃ katvāpācanantipi yujjateva. Tassa gāhakena purisena saddhinti attho. Sā nāvā nītāti sambandho.Uddhaṃ vā adho vāti nadiyā paṭisotaṃ vā heṭṭhāsotaṃ vā.Thenehi vāti corehi vā. Kiñcāpi haṭā, pana tathāpi avassaṃ labbhaneyyā, dhuvanāvāva hotīti yojanā.Vātena vāti mālutena vā ‘‘chinna’’iti sambandho.Vīcīhīti taraṅgehi. Taraṅgo hi vicittākārena cinoti vaḍḍhatīti vīcīti vuccati. Kiñcāpi nadīmajjhaṃ nītā, pana tathāpi avassaṃ āharitabbā, dhuvanāvāva hotīti yojanā.Ogateti otaritvā gate.Thalaṃ ussāritāti thalaṃ ukkhipitvā sāritā pāpitā nāvāpīti sambandho.Visaṅkhatapadarāti saṅkhatavirahitaphalakā vā.Dhuvanāvāva hotīti nimittakittanakāle niccasañcaraṇanāvattā dhuvanāvāva hotīti adhippāyo.Tatrāti ‘‘dhuvanāvā’’tivacane.Nimittaṃ vā sīmā vā kammavācāya gacchatīti ettha kiñcāpi na nimittaṃ kammavācāya gacchati, sīmāya pana avinābhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘kammavācāya gacchatī’’ti.Tasmāti yasmāva nāvāya āgacchantāpi bhagavatā anuññātā, tasmā.

Pārayatī: Crosses over. Because of the statement "kitakābhidheyyaliṅgā" (in Kaccāyanasāra, verse 45), pārā is stated in the feminine gender referring to the boundary which is the object. Nadiyā: The dative case with the sense of use. Because the meaning is "to the river." The boundary crossing over the river, is the connection. Etthā: In this river-bank boundary. Yatthassā: Here, showing the word division as "yattha assā," he says, "yattha nadiyā" etc. With "Nadiyā," he shows the scope of the word "yaṃ." Dhuvanāvā: Here, the word dhuva has the meaning of "permanent," so he says, "niccasañcaraṇanāvā." By this, he shows the meaning of the word dhuvanāvā as "a boat that travels permanently." Assā: It is, or it could be. Showing the measure of the boat, he says, "yā" etc. There, yā: The boat. Pājanapurisenā: Here, pājana is a particular type of equipment for boats. Because it causes the boat to go, it is called pājana. By changing the ja to ca, pācana is also correct. With a man holding that, is the meaning. That boat is brought, is the connection. Uddhaṃ vā adho vā: Either upstream or downstream. Thenehi vā: Or by thieves. Although stolen, it still must be obtainable; it is just like a dhuvanāvā, is the connection. Vātena vā: Or by the wind, "chinna" (broken) is the connection. Vīcīhī: By waves. Because a wave increases in a variegated manner, it is called vīcī. Although taken into the middle of the river, it still must be brought; it is just like a dhuvanāvā, is the connection. Ogate: Having descended and gone. Thalaṃ ussāritā: Even a boat that has been lifted up onto the shore, is the connection. Visaṅkhatapadarā: Or planks that are without joints. Dhuvanāvāva hotī: At the time of marking the signs, it is just like a dhuvanāvā because it is a boat for constant travel, is the idea. Tatrā: In the statement "dhuvanāvā." Nimittaṃ vā sīmā vā kammavācāya gacchatī: Here, although the sign does not go by the kammavācā, it is said "gacchatī kammavācāya" because of its inseparability from the boundary. Tasmā: Therefore, because even those coming in a boat are allowed by the Blessed One, therefore.

Yatthāti nadipārasīmasammananaṭṭhāne.Rukkhasaṅghāṭamayoti rukkhasamūhena kato.Padarabaddhoti phalakehi baddho.Sañcaraṇayoggoti sañcaraṇakkhamo. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘assā’’ti ṭhāne aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘atthī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘assā’’tipadassa hotīti atthoyeva daṭṭhabbo.Taṃkhaṇaññevāti tasmiṃ nimittakittakkhaṇeyeva. Rukkhaṃ chinditvā katoti sambandho.Ekapadikasetūti ekena padena gamanayoggo ekapadiko, soyeva setūti ekapadikasetu. Akappiyasetuṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Tenāti setunā. Sañcarituṃ na sakkā hotīti yojanā.

Yatthā: At the place where the river-bank boundary is being sanctioned. Rukkhasaṅghāṭamayo: Made of a collection of trees. Padarabaddho: Bound with planks. Sañcaraṇayoggo: Capable of being traversed. In the Pali, the commentary says "atthī" in place of "assā," therefore the meaning of the word "assā" should be seen as "hoti." Taṃkhaṇaññevā: At that very moment of marking the sign. A bridge made by cutting a tree, is the connection. Ekapadikasetū: A single-pathway, suitable for walking with one foot, that itself is a bridge, is an ekapadikasetu. Showing a non-allowable bridge, he says, "sace panā" etc. Tenā: By that bridge. It is not possible to walk, is the connection.

Yatthāti yasmiṃ nadipārasīmasammananaṭṭhāne.Abhimukhatittheyevāti sīmāya abhimukhatitthe eva. Dhuvanāvā vā dhuvasetu vā abhimukhatitthato īsakaṃ uddhaṃ ārohantopi adho orohantopi kappatīti dassento āha ‘‘sace’’tiādi.Īsakanti ekausabha dviusabhādivasena manaṃ appamattaṃ.Uddhaṃ vāti abhimukhatitthato upari vā.Adho vāti tato heṭṭhā vā.Gāvutamattabbhantareti gāvutapamāṇassa ṭhānassa abbhantare.

Yatthā: At whatever place that river-bank boundary is being sanctioned. Abhimukhatittheyevā: Only at the ford facing the boundary. Showing that a dhuvanāvā or a dhuvasetu is allowable even if it ascends slightly above or descends slightly below the facing ford, he says, "sace" etc. Īsakaṃ: A small amount, measured by one usabha, two usabha, etc. Uddhaṃ vā: Either above the facing ford. Adho vā: Or below that. Gāvutamattabbhantare: Within the range of a gāvuta.

Tatoti nimittato.Attānanti nimittakittanaṃ vinayadharaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Parikkhipantenāti pariyāyantena.Tassāti tattakassa paricchedassa.Sammukhaṭṭhāneti adhosote naditīre ṭhitassa nimittassa sammukhaṭṭhāne.Tatoti nimittato.Tassāti tattakassa paricchedassa. Sammukhā naditīre nimittaṃ atthīti sambandho.Saṅghaṭetabbanti sambandhitabbaṃ.Athāti nimittakittanato pacchā. ‘‘Sabbanimittānaṃ anto ṭhite bhikkhū hatthapāsagate katvā’’ti idaṃ sabbaṃ ekaṃ gāmakhettaṃ byāpetvā sammanitabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sace sakalaṃ gāmakhettaṃ abyāpetvā ekadese sammanitaṃ hoti, nimittato bahi ṭhite bhikkhūpi hatthapāsagate katvā sammanitabbā.Kammanti sīmasammutikammaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā nadi’’ntivacanassa kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘nadī pana baddhasīmasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī’’ti.

Tato: From the sign. Attānaṃ: Said in reference to the vinayadhara marking the sign. Parikkhipantenā: By one who goes around. Tassā: Of that particular boundary. Sammukhaṭṭhāne: In front of the sign standing on the riverbank downstream. Tato: From the sign. Tassā: Of that particular boundary. There is a sign in front on the riverbank, is the connection. Saṅghaṭetabbaṃ: Should be connected. Athā: After marking the sign. "Sabbanimittānaṃ anto ṭhite bhikkhū hatthapāsagate katvā" (having made the monks standing inside all the signs within arm's reach): this whole statement is said with reference to having sanctioned it encompassing an entire village area. If the entire village area is not encompassed and it is sanctioned in one part, then even the monks standing outside the signs should be made within arm's reach and then it should be sanctioned. Kammaṃ: The act of granting a sīma. Showing the reason for the statement "Ṭhapetvā nadi," he says, "nadī pana baddhasīmasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī."

Dīpako hotīti etthadīpoti antaradīpo. So hi yasmā jalamajjhe dippati, yasmā ca dvidhā āpo ettha sandati, tasmā dīpoti vuccati, soyeva khuddakaṭṭhenadīpako. Kakāro hi khuddakatthavācako.Tanti dīpakaṃ.Attanāti vinayadharena.Orimante ca pārimante cāti adhosote naditīre ṭhitassa nimittassa sammukhe orimante ca pārimante ca. Paratīre nimittaṃ kittetvāti sambandho. Kissa sammukhaṭṭhāne nimittanti āha ‘‘nadiyā orimatīre nimittassa sammukhaṭṭhāne’’ti.Tatoti nimittato. Sammukhā nimittaṃ atthīti sambandho.Pārimante ca orimante cāti paratīre uparisote ṭhitassa nimittassa sammukhe pārimante ca orimante ca.Paṭhamakittitanimittenāti orimatīre uparisote paṭhamaṃ kittitena nimittena. Ekā sīmā imassātiekasīmo,dīpako. ‘‘Tīradvayañcā’’ti padamapekkhitvā ‘‘ekasīma’’nti sambandhitabbaṃ. Vaccamanapekkhitvā ‘‘ekasīmā’’tipi niccaitthiliṅgavasena pāṭho atthi.

Dīpako hotī: Here, dīpo is an island in between. Because it shines in the middle of the water, and because water flows in two ways here, therefore it is called dīpo, that itself in a smaller sense is dīpako. Because the ka indicates smallness. Taṃ: That dīpaka. Attanā: By the vinayadhara. Orimante ca pārimante cā: In front of the sign standing on the riverbank downstream, both on this side and on the far side. Having marked a sign on the far bank, is the connection. In front of what place is the sign? He says, "nadiyā orimatīre nimittassa sammukhaṭṭhāne." Tato: From that sign. There is a sign in front, is the connection. Pārimante ca orimante cā: On the far side and on this side in front of the sign standing on the riverbank upstream. Paṭhamakittitanimittenā: By the first marked sign on this side upstream. Ekā sīmā imassāti ekasīmo, dīpako. "Tīradvayañcā" the word should be connected to "ekasīma" having taken into consideration. There is also a reading "ekasīmā" in the eternal feminine gender without considering the word to be expressed.

Uddhaṃ vā adho vāti ettha vāsaddo aniyamavikappattho.Athāti tasmiṃ adhikatare satīti yojanā.Vihārasīmaparicchedanimittassa ujukamevāti sace dīpako adho adhikataro hoti, orimatīre adhosote ṭhitassa vihārasīmaparicchedanimittassa ujukameva.Sikharanti siṅgaṃ. Tañhi sikhaṃ matthakaṃ rāti gaṇhātīti sikharanti vuccati.Tatoti dīpakassa pārimantanimittato. Paratīranimittāni kittetvāti sambandho. Ayaṃ dīpakassa vihārasīmaparicchedato adho adhikatare vinicchayo. Uddhaṃ adhikatarepi iminānusārena veditabboti so na dassito.Pabbatasaṇṭhānāti pabbatena samaṃ ṭhānaṃ etissāti pabbatasaṇṭhānā.

Uddhaṃ vā adho vā: Here, the word "vā" implies an option without restriction. Atha: The meaning is "when there is more" in that case. Vihārasīmaparicchedanimittassa ujukamevā: If the marker is further down, then the marker for defining the boundary of the monastery that is located on the lower bank is directly in line. Sikharaṃ: A peak. Because it takes or grasps the summit, the top, it is called a peak. Tato: From the landmark on the further shore from the marker. The connection is to mark out the landmarks on the further shore. This is the determination when the marker is further down from the boundary of the monastery. It should be understood similarly when it is further up, so it is not shown. Pabbatasaṇṭhānā: Having a shape similar to a mountain, therefore it is called pabbatasaṇṭhānā.

Uddhampi adhopīti pisaddo samuccayattho.Ubhopi sikharānīti uddhaṃ sikharaṃ, adho sikharanti ubhopi sikharāni.Mudiṅgasaṇṭhānāti mūle ca agge ca tanukassa majjhe thūlassa mudiṅgassa saṇṭhānā.

Uddhampi adhopī: Here, the word "pi" is used in the sense of combination. Ubhopi sikharānī: Both the upper peak and the lower peak are peaks. Mudiṅgasaṇṭhānā: Having the shape of a mudiṅga, which is thin at the base and the top, and thick in the middle.

Sabbapaṭhamena nayenāti uddhaṃ adhikanayassa, adho adhikanayassa, uddhaṃadhoadhikanayassa cāti sabbesaṃ nayānaṃ paṭhamena vihārasīmadīpakānaṃ samena nayena.Paṇavasaṇṭhānāti mūle ca agge ca thūlassa majjhetanukassa paṇavassa saṇṭhānā.

Sabbapaṭhamena nayenā: By the first method of all the methods: the method of being higher up, the method of being further down, and the method of being higher up and further down, by the same method as the boundary markers of the monastery. Paṇavasaṇṭhānā: Having the shape of a paṇava, which is thick at the base and the top, and thin in the middle.

72. Uposathāgārādikathā
72. Talk about the Uposathāgāra, etc.

141.Anupariveṇiyanti ettha anusaddassa vicchatthaṃ, pariveṇasaddassa ca liṅgavipallāsabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pariveṇe’’ti. Pariveṇasaddo hi napuṃsakaliṅgo, idha pana liṅgavipallāsaṃ katvā itthiliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saṅketaṃ akatvā’’ti imināasaṅketenāti padassa kiriyāvisesanattaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Kammavācāyā’’ti imināsamūhanitvāti padassa karaṇaṃ dasseti.

141.Anupariveṇiyaṃ: Here, in order to show that the word "anu" has the meaning of distribution and that the word "pariveṇa" has the characteristic of gender reversal, it is said "in each and every pariveṇa." The word pariveṇa is neuter gender, but here, having made a gender reversal, it is said in the feminine gender. "Without making an arrangement:" with this, it shows that the word asaṅketena is an adverb of the verb. "By the kammavācā:" with this, it shows the instrument of the word samūhanitvā.

142.Yatoti ettha topaccayassa kāraṇatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yasmā’’ti. ‘‘Hatthapāse’’ti iminā hatthapāsato bahi nisinne akatovassa uposatho hotīti dasseti.Assāti bhikkhuno.Vatthuvasenāti aṭṭhuppattivasena. Uposathassa pamukhassa abbhokāse vā māḷakādīsu vāti sambandho.Nimittupagā vā animittupagā vāti heṭṭhā aṭṭhasu nimittesu vuttā nimittupagā vā animittupagā vā pabbatādayo vā aññe vā kittetabbā.

142.Yato: Here, showing that the to suffix functions in the sense of cause, he says "because." "Within arm's reach:" with this, he shows that the uposatha is not valid for one who sits outside arm's reach and has not completed residence. Assā: Of the bhikkhu. Vatthuvasenā: According to the circumstances. The connection is that the foremost uposatha is in the open, or in a pavilion, etc. Nimittupagā vā animittupagā vā: Landmarks such as mountains, etc., that have been mentioned in the eight landmarks below, or other landmarks, should be marked out, whether they are adjacent to landmarks or not.

Paṭhamataraṃna āgacchati, dukkaṭanti uposathe ghosiyamāne paṭhamataraṃ na āgacchati, dukkaṭaṃ. Vihārassa majjhe hotīti yojanā.Etthāti porāṇake āvāse.Tatthāti porāṇake āvāse.Asambādhoti saṅghassa nisajjaṭṭhānapahonako.Tatthāti pacchā uṭṭhite āvāse.

Paṭhamataraṃ na āgacchati, dukkaṭaṃ: If he does not come promptly when the uposatha is being announced, there is a dukkaṭa. The connection is that it is in the middle of the monastery. Ettha: In this old residence. Tattha: In that old residence. Asambādho: Not crowded, sufficient for the Saṅgha to sit. Tattha: In the residence that was erected later.

Tatthāti therassa vihāre.Soti therassa vihāro.Etthāti tumhākaṃ vihāre. Sabbesaṃ okāso natthīti sambandho.Tatthāti taṃ asukaṃ nāma āvāsaṃ. ‘‘Vaṭṭatī’’ti vattabbanti yojanā.Tassāti therassa.

Tattha: In the monastery of the Thera. So: The monastery of the Thera. Ettha: In your monastery. The connection is that there is no space for everyone. Tattha: To that residence named so-and-so. The connection is "it is permissible" means "it is suitable". Tassā: Of the Thera.

74. Avippavāsasīmānujānanakathā
74. Talk on Allowing a Boundary Free from Separation

143.Andhakavindaṃ nāmāti tassa gāmassa nāmaṃ.Tanti andhakavindaṃ.Theroti mahākassapatthero.Tatoti andhakavindato. Iminā ‘‘andhakavindā’’ti ettha nissakkatthe nissakkavacananti dasseti.Uposathanti tadatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Uposathatthāyāti hi attho. Andhakavindā rājagahaṃ āgamanassa kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘rājagahaṃ hī’’tiādi. Tatthati yasmā. Andhakavindā vihāraṃ anto katvā ‘‘aṭṭhārasa mahāvihārā’’ti vuttaṃ.Nesanti aṭṭhārasannaṃ mahāvihārānaṃ.Saṅghassa sāmaggidānatthanti ettha saṅghassa sāmaggidānaṃ attano uposathakiccaṃ siddhaṃ. Tasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘uposathaṃ āgacchanto’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sippiniyaṃ nāmā’’ti iminānadiṃ tarantoti ettha nadiyā nāmaṃ dasseti.Manaṃ vūḷhoti etthamananti nipāto īsakatthoti dassento āha ‘‘īsaka’’nti. ‘‘Appamatta’’nti iminā ‘‘īsaka’’ntipadassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vūḷhabhāvo’’ti iminā bhāvapaccayena vinā bhāvattho ñātabboti dasseti.Caṇḍenāti kharena.Tatthāti nadiyaṃ.Amanasikarontoti ‘‘caṇḍasota’’nti ābhogaṃ akaronto.Na pana vūḷhoti na pana mahāvūḷho.Udakabbhāhatānīti udakena abhiāhatāni.Assāti therassa.Allānīti tintāni.

143.Andhakavindaṃ nāmā: The name of that village. Taṃ: That Andhakavinda. Thero: The Thera Mahākassapa. Tato: From Andhakavinda. With this, he shows that in "Andhakavindā," it is a locative case in the sense of separation. Uposathaṃ: A locative of purpose. Because the meaning is for the sake of the uposatha. Showing the reason for coming from Andhakavinda to Rājagaha, he says, "Because to Rājagaha," etc. There, hi means because. Having included the monastery of Andhakavinda, it is said "eighteen great monasteries." Nesaṃ: Of those eighteen great monasteries. Saṅghassa sāmaggidānatthaṃ: Here, the giving of concord to the Saṅgha is the accomplishment of his own duty of uposatha. Therefore, in the Pali, it is said "coming to the uposatha." "Sippiniyaṃ nāmā:" with this, he shows the name of the river in nadiṃ taranto. Manaṃ vūḷho: Here, showing that mana is a particle in the sense of "slightly," he says "slightly." "Appamattaṃ:" with this, he shows the meaning of the word "īsakaṃ". "Vūḷhabhāvo:" with this, he shows that the sense of a verbal noun should be understood without the bhāva suffix. Caṇḍena: Harshly. Tattha: In the river. Amanasikaronto: Not paying attention to "the fierce current." Na pana vūḷho: But not greatly carried away. Udakabbhāhatānī: Struck by the water. Assā: Of the Thera. Allānī: Wet.

144.Purimakammavācāti ‘‘sammatā sā sīmā saṅghena ticīvarena avippavāsā’’ti pure vuttā kammavācā.Ayamevāti ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’tipadaṃ pakkhipitvā anupaññattā ayameva kammavācā.Ayanti pacchimakammavācā.Hiyasmā bhikkhunisaṅgho antogāme vasati, tasmā purimāyeva vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Yadi evanti yadi bhikkhunisaṅghassa ayaṃ pacchimakammavācā vaṭṭanaṃ siyā bhaveyya, evaṃ satīti yojanā.Soti bhikkhunisaṅgho.Etāya kammavācāyāti pacchimakammavācāya.Na labheyyāti antogāme vasanattā ticīvaraparihāraṃ na labheyya. Kiṃ na labhatiyevāti āha ‘‘atthi cassa parihāro’’ti.Assāti bhikkhunisaṅghassa.Dvepi sīmāyoti samānasaṃvāsakasīmā ca avippavāsasīmā cāti dvepi sīmāyo.Tatthāti bhikkhubhikkhunīsu.Tassāti bhikkhūnaṃ sīmāya.Eseva nayoti bhikkhunīnaṃ sīmaṃ ajjhottharitvāpi antopavisitvāpi bhikkhūnaṃ sīmāya sammane eseva nayo.Eteti bhikkhubhikkhuniyo. Sāmaññattā hi pulliṅgena vuttaṃ.Ettha cāti ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’tipade ca. Saṅgaho veditabbo, kasmā? Gāmena nigamanagarānaṃ ekalakkhaṇattā.

144.Purimakammavācā: The kammavācā previously spoken, "that boundary is approved by the Saṅgha, free from separation with the three robes." Ayamevā: This same kammavācā that was re-instituted by inserting the phrase "excepting the village and the vicinity of the village." Ayaṃ: This latter kammavācā. Hi: Because the Saṅgha of bhikkhunis resides within the village, therefore the former is indeed valid. Yadi evaṃ: If this latter kammavācā is valid for the Saṅgha of bhikkhunis, if that were the case. So: That Saṅgha of bhikkhunis. Etāya kammavācāyā: By this latter kammavācā. Na labheyyā: Because of residing within the village, they would not obtain the privilege of the three robes. Is it that they would definitely not obtain it? He says, "but there is a privilege for them." Assā: For that Saṅgha of bhikkhunis. Dvepi sīmāyo: Both the boundary of common dwelling and the boundary free from separation. Tattha: Among the bhikkhus and bhikkhunis. Tassā: Of the boundary of the bhikkhus. Eseva nayo: This same method applies to approving the boundary of the bhikkhunis even after encroaching on and entering the boundary of the bhikkhus. Ete: These bhikkhus and bhikkhunis. Because of the generality, it is said in the masculine gender. Ettha cā: And here, in the phrase "excepting the village and the vicinity of the village." An inclusion should be understood, why? Because a village has the same characteristic as a market town or city.

Parikkhepokāsoti parikkhepārahokāso.Tesūti gāmagāmūpacāresu.Parihāranti cīvaravippavāsaāpattiapanayanaṃ. ‘‘Itī’’tiādi nigamanaṃ.Etthāti samānasaṃvāsakaavippavāsasīmāsu.Attano dhammatāyāti attano sabhāvena.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tassāti avippavāsasīmāya.Visunti samānasaṃvāsakasīmato pāṭekkaṃ.Tatthāti dvīsu sīmāsu.Avippavāsāyāti avippavāsasīmāya.Tanti gāmaṃ.ti avippavāsasīmā.Sammatāya sīmāyāti avippavāsasīmāya sammatāya satiyāti sambandho. Sammatato pacchāti vā yojanā.Nivisatīti nivāsatthāya visati pavisati.Sopīti gāmopi.Sīmasaṅkhyaṃyevāti avippāsasīmavohārameva. Adhiṭṭhitatecīvarikā bhikkhū parihāraṃ labhantīti adhippāyo. Yathā pacchā niviṭṭho gāmo sīmasaṅkhyaṃyeva gacchati, evanti yojanā. ‘‘Pavisissāmā’’ti gehāni katāni, ‘‘pavisissāmā’’ti ālayopi atthīti yojanā.Ālayopīti apekkhopi.Apaviṭṭhāti gehāni apaviṭṭhā.Gehameva chaḍḍetvāti gehaṃ chaḍḍetvā eva. Iminā gehe chaḍḍite sabbaṃ chaḍḍitamevāti dasseti. Paviṭṭhaṃ vā agataṃ vā ekampi kulaṃ atthi saceti yojanā. Ettha ca ‘‘ekampi kulaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ vā’’ti idaṃ navagāmaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ekampi kulaṃ agataṃ vā’’ti idaṃ porāṇakagāmaṃ sandhāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Parikkhepokāso: A place suitable for enclosure. Tesū: In those villages and vicinities of villages. Parihāraṃ: Exemption, removal of the offense of separation from the robes. The conclusion is "iti," etc. Ettha: In the boundary of common dwelling and free from separation. Attano dhammatāyā: By its own nature. Yattha: In which place. Hī: Truly, or because. Tassā: Of the boundary free from separation. Visuṃ: Separately from the boundary of common dwelling. Tattha: In those two boundaries. Avippavāsāyā: Of the boundary free from separation. Taṃ: That village. Sā: That boundary free from separation. Sammatāya sīmāyā: The connection is that it exists with the approved boundary free from separation. Or the connection is after the approval. Nivisati: Settles, enters for the purpose of dwelling. Sopī: Even that village. Sīmasaṅkhyaṃyevā: Is just the designation of a boundary free from separation. The meaning is that bhikkhus who observe the three robes receive exemption. The connection is that just as a village settled later goes by just the designation of a boundary. "We will enter" means houses have been built, "we will enter" means there is also an abode. Ālayopī: There is also an expectation. Apaviṭṭhā: The houses have not been entered. Gehameva chaḍḍetvā: Having abandoned just the house. With this, it shows that if the house is abandoned, everything is abandoned. The connection is if there is even one family that has entered or not come. And here, "even one family has entered" is said with reference to a new village. "Even one family has not come" should be understood as referring to an old village.

Tatrāti ‘‘vattaṃ jānitabba’’ntivacane.Avippavāsasīmāyanti mahāsīmāya. Sā eva hi yasmā avippavāsakammavācāya bahulapayojanā hoti, tasmā avippavāsasīmāti vuccati.Itarāyāti avippavāsasīmāya.Tatthāti tāsu dvīsu sīmāsu.Nirāsaṅkaṭṭhānesu ṭhatvāti cetiyaṅgaṇādīnaṃ khaṇḍasīmāya anokāsattā vuttaṃ. Khaṇḍasīmañhi sammanantā cetiyaṅgaṇādiṭṭhānaṃ pahāya aññasmiṃ vivittokāse vihārapaccantaṃ khaṇḍitvā sammananti.Samūhanitunti avippavāsasīmaṃ samūhanituṃ.Paṭibandhituṃ na sakkhissantevāti avippavāsaṃyeva jānitvā khaṇḍasīmāya aññātattā paṭibandhituṃ na sakkhissanteva.Sīmasambhedanti khaṇḍasīmaavippavāsasīmānaṃ sambhedaṃ.Sāsanantaradhānena vāti satthu āṇāya antaradhānena vā.Sādhukaṃ panāti nikkaṅkhaṃ pana.

Tatrā: In the statement "the practice should be known." Avippavāsasīmāya: To the great boundary. Because it is mostly used in the kammavācā for freedom from separation, therefore it is called the boundary free from separation. Itarāyā: Than the boundary free from separation. Tattha: In those two boundaries. Nirāsaṅkaṭṭhānesu ṭhatvā: Because a sectioned boundary has no space in places free from obstruction, such as the courtyard of a cetiya, it is said. Those who approve a sectioned boundary approve it by cutting off the edge of the monastery in another secluded place, having abandoned a place such as the courtyard of a cetiya. Samūhanituṃ: To abolish the boundary free from separation. Paṭibandhituṃ na sakkhissantevā: Because they know only the boundary free from separation and do not know the sectioned boundary, they will definitely not be able to obstruct it. Sīmasambhedaṃ: The overlapping of the sectioned boundary and the boundary free from separation. Sāsanantaradhānena vā: Or by the disappearance of the Teacher's command. Sādhukaṃ panā: But certainly, without doubt.

76. Gāmasīmādikathā
76. Talk about the Village Boundary, etc.

147.Uposathakammassa visuṃ gahitattā sesakammavasena samānasaṃvāsakatā gahetabbā gobalibaddanayena vā pārisesanayena vā.Tanti samānasaṃvāsaekūposathabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Aparicchinnāyā’’ti imināaṭṭhapitāyāti ettha ṭhapadhātuyā adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti.Gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vāti ettha nagaraṃ kena saṅgahitanti āha ‘‘gāmaggahaṇena cetthā’’tiādi. Tatthaetthāti ‘‘gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā’’ti pāṭhe, gāmaggahaṇenāti sambandho. Atha vāetthāti gāmanigamanagaresu, nagarampīti sambandho. Gāmādīnaṃ paricchedaṃ vitthārena dassento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti gāmanigamanagaresu.Gāmabhojakāti gāmaṃ bhuñjantīti gāmabhojakā.Balinti karaṃ. So hi taṃ nissāya gāmabhojakā balanti jīvanti anenāti balīti vuccati. Yampi ekaṃ padesaṃ paricchinditvā detīti yojanā.Gāmakhetteti rañño āṇā khipiyati etthātikhettaṃ,gāmoyeva khettaṃ gāmakhettaṃ, tasmiṃ.Ayampīti ayaṃ padesopi.Sopīti padesopi. Visuṃgāmo nāmāti yojanā. Sopi visuṃgāmo gāmasīmā hotiyevāti yojanā. Visuṃ paricchinditvā dinno gāmovisuṃgāmo. Tasmāti yasmā visuṃ gāmo hoti, tasmā.Sā cāti visuṃgāmasīmā ca.Itarāti visuṃgāmasīmato aññā pakatigāmanagaranigamasīmā cāti yojanā.

147.Because the uposatha action is taken separately, the state of having a common dwelling should be taken by way of the remaining actions, or by the method of residue, like the gobali-bound. Taṃ: That state of having a common dwelling and a single uposatha. "In an undefined area:" with this, in aṭṭhapitāyā, it shows the meaning of intention of the root ṭha. Gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā: Here, he says, "with what is a city included?" gāmaggahaṇena cetthā etc. There, etthā in the reading "gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā," the connection is with gāmaggahaṇena. Or, etthā in villages, market towns, and cities, the connection is with nagarampīti. Showing the definition of villages, etc., in detail, he says, "tatthā," etc. There, tatthā in villages, market towns, and cities. Gāmabhojakā: Those who enjoy the village are gāmabhojakā. Baliṃ: Tax. Because the gāmabhojakā live by relying on that tax, therefore it is called bali. And also, because he gives after defining a certain area. Gāmakhette: In the field of the village, khettaṃ because the king's command is thrown there, the village itself is the field, gāmakhetta, in that. Ayampī: Even this area. Sopī: Even that area. The connection is that it is called a separate village. The connection is that even that separate village is indeed a village boundary. A village given after being separately defined is a visuṃgāmo. Tasmā: Because it is a separate village, therefore. Sā cā: And that separate village boundary. Itarā: Other than the separate village boundary, the boundary of an ordinary village, city, or market town. It is connected.

Evanti ‘‘asammatāya bhikkhave’’tiādinā pāṭhena.Tanti sīmaparicchedaṃ.Aparicchinneti rājūhi aparicchinne. ‘‘Aṭavipadese’’ti iminā natthi gāmo etthātiagāmakoti vacanatthassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Vijjhāṭavisadiseti vigataṃ aggino jhāyanametthāti vijjhā, corādayo manusse ābhuso ṭavanti pīḷayanti etthātiāṭavi. Vijjhā ca sā āṭavi cetivijjhāṭavi,tāya sadise vijjhāṭavisadise. Ettha purimanaye gāmādīhi āsanno vā hotu, anāsanno vā tehi aparicchinno aṭavipadeso gahetabbo. Pacchimanaye dūro manussānaṃ anāgamanapatho āṭavipadeso gahetabboti ayametesaṃ viseso.Assāti bhikkhuno.Samantāti samantato.Ayaṃ sīmāti ayaṃ sattabbhantarasīmā.Tatthāti sattasu abbhantaresu. Samantā ṭhitassa vā nisinnassa vā abbhantare antokoṭṭhāse jātaṃ abbhantaraṃ aṭṭhavīsahatthapamāṇaṃ.

Evaṃ: In this way, with the reading "asammatāya bhikkhave," etc. Taṃ: That boundary definition. Aparicchinne: Undefined by kings. With "aṭavipadese," it shows the inherent form of the meaning of the word agāmako, "there is no village in this place." Vijjhāṭavisadise: Vijjhā, because the burning of fire is absent in this place; āṭavi, because thieves and others constantly oppress and harass people in this place. Vijjhāṭavi, which is both vijjhā and āṭavi, similar to that is vijjhāṭavisadise. Here, according to the former method, whether it is near to or far from villages, etc., an undefined forest area should be taken. According to the latter method, a forest area that is far away, a path that people do not frequent, should be taken; this is the difference between them. Assā: Of the bhikkhu. Samantā: From all around. Ayaṃ sīmā: This boundary of seven abbhantaras. Tattha: In those seven abbhantaras. An abbhantara is twenty-eight cubits in size, born in the inner compartment, inside, within the area of one who is standing or sitting all around.

Nadīsīmalakkhaṇapattāti nadīsīmalakkhaṇaṃ pattā. Iminā sīmalakkhaṇaṃ apattā nadī bandhiyamānā sīmāva hotīti dasseti. Sāvadhāraṇena ‘‘attano sabhāvenevā’’ti iminā bhikkhūnaṃ bandhanabhāvenāti atthaṃ nivatteti.Etthāti nadiyaṃ.Etthāti jātassarasamuddesu.Yena kenacīti antamaso tiracchānagatenapi yena kenaci. Khaṇitvā akatosayaṃjātoti sambandho. Idaṃ hetuantogadhavisesanaṃ. Khaṇitvā akatattāti hi attho.Sayaṃjātoti sayameva jātoti evakāro yojetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yena kenaci khaṇitvā akato’’ti.Sobbhoti saṃ ubhoti padavibhāgo kātabbo. Tattha saṃsaddo samantatthavācako, ubhasaddo pūraṇatthavācako. Tasmā samantato āgatena udakena ubhati pūrati etthātisobbhoti vacanattho kātabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samantato āgatena udakena pūrito tiṭṭhatī’’ti.

Nadīsīmalakkhaṇapattā: Having attained the characteristics of a river boundary. With this, it shows that a river that does not attain the characteristics of a boundary is still a boundary when it is designated. With the determination "attano sabhāveneva," he turns away the meaning that it is by the bhikkhus' act of designating. Ettha: In the river. Ettha: In places where natural ponds are. Yena kenacī: By whomever, even by an animal. Sayaṃjāto: Self-born, not made by digging. This is a specification included in the cause. Because it is not made by digging. Sayaṃjāto: The eva particle should be connected to "born by itself." Therefore, it is said, "not made by digging by whomever." Sobbho: The word division should be done as saṃ ubho. There, the word saṃ conveys the meaning of totality, the word ubha conveys the meaning of fullness. Therefore, the verbal meaning should be done as sobbho, "because it fills up with water that comes from all around." Therefore, it is said, "it stands filled with water that has come from all around."

Tatthāti nadīsamuddajātassaresu, ādhāre bhummaṃ.Yaṃsaddo ṭhānavisayoti āha ‘‘yaṃ ṭhāna’’nti.Majjhimassāti thāmamajjhimassa. Vakkhati hi ‘‘thāmamajjhimenā’’ti. ‘‘Samantato’’ti imināsamantāti ettha nissakkatthe nissakkavacananti dasseti. ‘‘Udakukkhepenā’’ti imināudakukkhepāti ettha karaṇatthe nissakkavacananti dasseti. Udakaṃ ukkhipitvā khipiyati etthātiudakukkhepo. ‘‘Paricchinna’’nti iminā pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti.Akkhadhuttāti etthaakkhoti pāsako. So hi akati kuṭilaṃ gacchati anenāti akkhoti vuccati, dhavanti mariyādamatikkamma kīḷādipasutaṃ gacchantītidhuttā,akkhesu dhuttā akkhadhuttā.Dāruguḷanti sāradārumayaṃ guḷaṃ. ‘‘Vālukaṃ vā’’ti iminā ‘‘udakukkhepā’’ti ettha upalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti.Yatthāti yasmiṃ padese.Ayanti padeso.Tassāti udakukkhepassa.

Tatthāti: in rivers, oceans, natural lakes; location, earth. Yaṃ-sadda: the word "yaṃ" refers to a place or subject; thus, he says, "yaṃ ṭhāna" (which place). Majjhimassā: of medium strength. For it will be said, "thāmamajjhimena" (with medium strength). With "samantato" (all around), he indicates that samantā here is a nissakka-vacana (indeclinable) in the sense of exclusion. With "udakukkhepena" (by throwing water), he indicates that udakukkhepā here is a nissakka-vacana (indeclinable) in the sense of instrument. Udakukkhepo: a throwing of water, because water is thrown up and cast. With "paricchinna" (defined), he indicates the remainder of the text. Akkhadhuttā: here, akkho means a die. It is called "akkho" because it goes crookedly (akati). Dhuttā: those who go indulging in play etc., exceeding the limit. Akkhadhuttā: those who are reckless at dice. Dāruguḷaṃ: a ball made of hard wood. With "vālukaṃ vā" (or sand), he indicates that "udakukkhepā" here is an illustration. Yatthā: in which region. Ayaṃ: this region. Tassā: of that throwing of water.

Etthāti nadīsamuddajātassaresu.Mukhadvāranti samuddādīnaṃ mukhasaṅkhātaṃ dvāraṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbāya nadiyaṃ. Theravādaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Yojanaṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti yaṃ pana vacanaṃ mahāsumattherena vuttanti yojanā.Tatrāpīti yojananadiyampi. Paṭikkhittākāraṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘bhagavatā hī’’tiādi.Nadiyā pamāṇanti nadiyā gambhīrapamāṇameva, na āyāmavitthārapamāṇanti attho. ‘‘Na yojanaṃ vā addhayojanaṃ vā’’ti vacanampi idameva sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi āyāmavitthārapamāṇaṃ na vuttaṃ, pabhavato pana yāva mukhadvārā āyāmavitthāravasena kammaṃ kātuṃ pahonakanadīyeva gahetabbāti daṭṭhabbā. Yā nadīti sambandho.Imassa suttassāti ‘‘timaṇḍala’’ntiādikassa imassa suttassa.Pabhavatoti samudāgamato.Etthāti nadiyaṃ. Sabbehi bhikkhūhi ṭhapetabboti sambandho.Tatoti ekaudakukkhepato.

Etthā: in rivers, oceans, natural lakes. Mukhadvāraṃ: the opening which is the mouth of oceans, etc. Sabbatthā: in all the rivers. Showing the Theravāda view, he says, "yaṃ panā" (but that)...etc. Yojanaṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī: the statement that was said by the Elder Mahāsumata is a yojana (measure). Tatrāpi: even in a yojana-river. Expanding on the rejected mode, he says, "bhagavatā hī" (for by the Blessed One)...etc. Nadiyā pamāṇaṃ: the measurement of the river refers only to the depth, not the length or width. The statement "na yojanaṃ vā addhayojanaṃ vā" (not a yojana or half a yojana) should be understood as referring to this. Although the measurement of length and width is not stated, it should be understood that only a river capable of performing the act in terms of length and width from its source to its mouth should be taken. Yā nadīti sambandho: The connection is "which river". Imassa suttassā: of this sutta beginning with "timaṇḍala". Pabhavato: from the source. Etthā: in the river. It should be connected with "sabbhehi bhikkhūhi ṭhapetabboti" (should be designated by all the bhikkhus). Tato: from one udakukkhepa.

samatitthikā. Udakasāṭikaṃ nivāsetvāpīti pisaddo ‘‘anivāsetvāpī’’ti dasseti. Udakasāṭikaṃ anivāsentopi vatthena avinābhāvato aññaṃ nivāsetvāti attho gahetabbo. Nāvāya ṭhatvā kariyamāne kiṃ gacchantiyāpi nāvāya kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘gacchantiyā panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Kasmā’’tiādinā kāraṇaṃ dasseti.ti yasmā.Tanti udakukkhepamattaṃ. Evaṃ sati…pe… anusāvanā hoti, tasmā gacchantiyā nāvāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādinā laddhaguṇaṃ dasseti. Na kevalaṃ nāvāyamevāti dassento āha ‘‘antonadiya’’ntiādi.

samatitthikā. Udakasāṭikaṃ nivāsetvāpi: the word "pi" (also) indicates "anivāsetvāpi" (even without wearing a bathing cloth). Even without wearing a bathing cloth, it should be understood as wearing something else since it is inseparable from cloth. If it is done standing on a boat, does it apply to a moving boat? He says, "gacchantiyā panā" (but if it is moving)...etc. He shows the reason with "kasmā" (why)...etc. : because. Taṃ: that udakukkhepa-distance. Evaṃ sati…pe… anusāvanā hoti, tasmā gacchantiyā nāvāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā: Thus…pe… there is no proclamation, therefore it is not proper to do it on a moving boat, is the connection. He shows the acquired quality with "tasmā" (therefore)...etc. Showing that it is not only on a boat, he says, "antonadiya" (inside the river)...etc.

Rukkhassāti antonadiyaṃ jātassa rukkhassa. Sākhā vā patiṭṭhitāti sambandho.Sīmaṃ vā sodhetvāti vihārasīmagāmasīmāsu ṭhitānaṃ hatthapāsānayanabahikaraṇavasena sīmaṃ vā sodhetvā. Jātarukkhassa paviṭṭhasākhāya vā pārohe vāti sambandho.Assāti bahinaditīre jātarukkhassa.Tatthāti khāṇuke.

Rukkhassā: of the tree grown inside the river. Sākhā vā patiṭṭhitāti sambandho: The connection is the branch is established. Sīmaṃ vā sodhetvā: Or having purified the boundary by means of excluding what is within arm's reach or what is external to the sīmā of a monastery or village. Jātarukkhassa paviṭṭhasākhāya vā pārohe vāti sambandho: The connection is with the branch that has entered of a grown tree, or the offshoot. Assā: of the tree grown on the bank of the outside river. Tatthā: in the stump.

Tassāti pāsāṇadīpakassa.Pubbe vuttappakāreti pubbe nadīnimittaṭṭhāne ‘‘anvaddhamāsa’’ntiādinā (mahāva. aṭṭha. 138) vuttappakāre.Soti pāsāṇadīpako. Punasoti pāsāṇadīpakoyeva.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Tassā: of that stone marker. Pubbe vuttappakāre: in the manner previously stated in the section on river-nimitta, with "anvaddhamāsa" (every half-month)...etc. (mahāva. aṭṭha. 138). So: that stone marker. Again, so: that same stone marker. : indeed, because.

Āvaraṇanti pāḷiṃ.Tanti āvaraṇaṃ. Āvaraṇena vā koṭṭhakabandhena vā hetubhūtena, pacchijjatīti sambandho. Koci āvaraṇappadeso ajjhotthariyatīti sambandho.Tatthāti āvaraṇappadese.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. ‘‘Heṭṭhāpāḷi baddhā’’ti idaṃ nadiṃ vināsetvā taḷākakaraṇākāradassanaṃ.Etthāti nadiyaṃ, taḷāke vā.Chaḍḍitamodakanti taḷākarakkhanatthaṃ ekena vārimaggena chaḍḍitaṃ udakaṃ.Deve avassanteti dubbuṭṭhikālattā vassantakālepi deve avassante.ti nadito nīhaṭamātikā.Kālantarenāti aññena kālena.Uppatitvāti gāmanigamānaṃ upari patitvā.Pavattatīti pubbe vuttapakāre vassakāle cattāro māse abbhocchinnā sandati.Vihārasīmanti vihārasambandhaṃ baddhasīmaṃ.

Āvaraṇaṃ: is the Pāḷi text. Taṃ: that barrier. Because of the barrier or the wall-like structure, there is an obstruction, is the connection. Koci āvaraṇappadeso ajjhotthariyatīti sambandho: The connection is that some part of the barrier is covered over. Tatthā: in the area of the barrier. : indeed, because. "Heṭṭhāpāḷi baddhā" (the lower embankment is built): this is showing the manner of making a lake by destroying the river. Etthā: in the river, or in the lake. Chaḍḍitamodakaṃ: water thrown out by one of the water passages for the purpose of protecting the lake. Deve avassante: when the deva does not send rain because it is a time of drought. : that soil carried away from the river. Kālantarenā: by another time. Uppatitvā: having risen over the villages and towns. Pavattatī: flows uninterrupted for four months during the rainy season in the manner previously stated. Vihārasīmaṃ: the established boundary related to the monastery.

Samuddepīti pisaddo nadimapekkhati.Tatthāti padese.Otaritvāti heṭṭhā taritvā. ‘‘Osaritvā’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.Saṇṭhahantīti udakena samaṃ tiṭṭhanti.Soti padeso.Udakantatoti udakakoṭito.Tatthāti samudde.Bādhatīti pīḷayati.Tesūti nāvāaṭṭakesu.Tanti piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ.Ūmiyoti vīciyo. Tā hi paraṃparāvasena uggantvā saviññāṇakāviññāṇake miyanti hiṃsanti, anto pakkhipantīti vā ūmiyoti vuccanti.Tatthāti piṭṭhipāsāṇe.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Udakeneva piṭṭhipāsāṇo ottharīyatīti yojanā.Soti dīpakapabbato. ‘‘Dūre’’ti vatvā tassa pamāṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘macchavadhānaṃ anāgamanapathe’’ti.Macchavadhānanti kevaṭṭānaṃ. Te hi yasmā macche hananti, tasmā macchavadhāti vuccanti. ‘‘Macchabandhāna’’ntipi pāṭho. Macche bandhantītimacchabandhāti vacanattho kātabbo.Anāgamanapatheti yattha gantvā tadaheva paccāgantvā na āgamanapathike dese. Natthi āgamanapatho etthātianāgamanapatho,deso. Tasmiṃ ‘‘agamanapathe’’tipi pāṭho, so ayutto. Kasmā? Agamanapathassa nādhippetattā. Gantvā hi puna anāgamanapathoyevādhippeto.Tesanti macchavadhānaṃ.Gamanapariyantassāti gamanakoṭiyā.Oratoti orabhāge ṭhito dīpako vā pabbato vāti yojetabbo.Tatthāti orabhāge ṭhitesu dīpakapabbatesu.Ottharitvāti pakatiudakena ottharitvā.Tatthāti ottharitvā ṭhite samudde.

Samuddepī: the word "pi" (also) anticipates the river. Tatthā: in the region. Otaritvā: having crossed underneath. "Osaritvā" is also a reading, this is the meaning. Saṇṭhahantī: they stand even with the water. So: that region. Udakantato: from the edge of the water. Tatthā: in the ocean. Bādhatī: oppresses. Tesū: in those boat-landings. Taṃ: that back-stone. Ūmiyo: waves. They are called "ūmiyo" because they rise in succession and harm or kill sentient and non-sentient things, or because they throw them inside. Tatthā: on the back-stone. : indeed, because. Udakeneva piṭṭhipāsāṇo ottharīyatīti yojanā: The connection is that the back-stone is covered by the water itself. So: that island-mountain. Saying "dūre" (far), he shows the extent of it with "macchavadhānaṃ anāgamanapathe" (at the non-returning path of the fishermen). Macchavadhānaṃ: of the fishermen. They are called "macchavadha" because they kill fish. "Macchabandhāna" is also a reading. Macche bandhantīti macchabandhāti vacanattho kātabbo: The word meaning should be made as "macchabandhā" because they catch fish. Anāgamanapathe: in a place where, having gone, one does not return the same day, in a non-returning path. Natthi āgamanapatho etthāti anāgamanapatho, deso: "Anāgamanapatho" means a place where there is no returning path. "Agamanapathe" is also a reading in that, that is not appropriate. Kasmā? Agamanapathassa nādhippetattā: Why? Because the non-returning path is not intended. Gantvā hi puna anāgamanapathoyevādhippeto: For having gone, again the non-returning path is intended. Tesaṃ: of those fishermen. Gamanapariyantassā: of the boundary of the journey. Orato: the island or mountain standing on the near side should be connected. Tatthā: in those island-mountains standing on the near side. Ottharitvā: having covered over by the natural water. Tatthā: in the sea standing covered over.

Yatthāti yasmiṃ sare.Ayanti ayaṃ saro, na jātassaro hoti. Ayaṃ saro gāmakhettasaṅkhyameva gacchatīti yojanā.Tatthāti sare.Yattha panāti yasmiṃ sare pana.Tassāti jātassarassa.Tatthāti padese. Sace gambhīraṃ udakaṃ hotīti yojanā.Tatthāti aṭṭake.Etthāti jātassare, ṭhitesu piṭṭhipāsāṇadīpakesūti yojanā.Pahonakajātassaroti saṅghakammaṃ kātuṃ pahonako jātassaro. ‘‘Sukkhatī’’ti vatvā tadeva samatthetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘nirudako’’ti.Tatthāti jātassare. Sace nirudakamattena gāmakhettaṃ gacchati. Kadā gacchatīti āha ‘‘sace panetthā’’tiādi. Tatthaetthāti jātassare.Pokkharaṇīādīnīti ettha ādisaddena udakamātikādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Yadā khaṇanti, tadāti pāṭhaseso yojetabbo. ‘‘Taṃ ṭhāna’’nti vuttepi na khaṇanaṭṭhānameva gahetabbaṃ, ‘‘etthā’’ti sāmaññato vuttattā sabboyeva jātassaro gahetabbo. Na kevalaṃ ajātassaramattaṃ hoti, atha kho gāmakhettanti āha ‘‘gāmasīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchatī’’ti.

Yatthā: in which natural lake. Ayaṃ: this natural lake is counted only as village land, is the connection. Tatthā: in the natural lake. Yattha panā: but in which natural lake. Tassā: of that natural lake. Tatthā: in the region. Sace gambhīraṃ udakaṃ hotīti yojanā: The connection is, if there is deep water. Tatthā: in the landing stage. Etthā: in the natural lake, in the back-stone markers that are standing, is the connection. Pahonakajātassaro: a natural lake capable of performing Saṅgha-kamma. Saying "sukkhatī" (it dries up), to establish that very thing, it is said "nirudako" (waterless). Tatthā: in the natural lake. Sace nirudakamattena gāmakhettaṃ gacchati: If it becomes village land merely by being waterless. Kadā gacchatīti āha ‘‘sace panetthā’’tiādi: When does it become?, he says, "sace panetthā" (but if here)...etc. Tattha etthāti jātassare: There, "etthā" means in the natural lake. Pokkharaṇīādīnī: here, with "ādi" (and so on) he includes water-channels etc. Yadā khaṇanti, tadāti pāṭhaseso yojetabbo: The remainder of the text should be connected as, "when they dig". "Taṃ ṭhāna" (that place) being said, not only the place of digging should be taken, but since it is said generally with "etthā", the whole natural lake should be taken. Na kevalaṃ ajātassaramattaṃ hoti, atha kho gāmakhettanti āha ‘‘gāmasīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchatī’’ti: It is not only just an unnatural lake, but it becomes village land, he says, "gāmasīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchati" (it goes into the reckoning of the village boundary itself).

Nanti jātassaraṃ.Pūretvāti mattikādīhi pūretvā.Pāḷinti āvaraṇaṃ.Sabbameva nanti sakalameva taṃ jātassaraṃ.Loṇīpīti pisaddena na kevalaṃ sobbhoyeva jātassarasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, atha kho loṇīpīti dasseti.Udakaṭṭhānokāseti udakassa ṭhāne okāse.

Na: not a natural lake. Pūretvā: having filled it with soil etc. Pāḷiṃ: the barrier. Sabbameva na: the entire natural lake. Loṇīpī: with "pi" (also), he shows that not only a salt marsh, but also a loṇīpi (salt well) goes into the reckoning of a natural lake. Udakaṭṭhānokāse: in a place that is a water source.

148.Sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantīti ettha ‘‘sīmāya sīma’’nti padānaṃ sambandhāpekkhattā tesaṃ sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘attano paresa’’nti. ‘‘Baddhasīma’’nti iminā ‘‘sīma’’nti sāmaññato vuttepi visesato baddhasīmāyeva gahetabbāti dasseti. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘sace hī’’tiādi.Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapāti aññamaññaṃ āsannattā saṃsaṭṭho viṭapo etesanti saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā. ‘‘Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ, mūlānipi saṃsaṭṭhāniyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Tesūti dvīsu rukkhesu.Vihārasīmā cāti porāṇakavihārasīmā ca.Anto katvāti sīmāya anto katvā. Atha pacchāti ettha ‘‘pacchā’’ti iminā athasaddassatthaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ ke akaṃsūti āha ‘‘evaṃ chabbaggiyā akaṃsū’’ti.Tenāti karaṇena.

148.Sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantī: here, because the words "sīmāya sīmaṃ" (boundary with boundary) require a relationship, to show their relationship, it is said, "attano paresaṃ" (one's own with another's). With "baddhasīma" (established boundary), he shows that even though "sīma" (boundary) is said generally, specifically only an established boundary should be taken. Expanding on that meaning, he says, "sace hī" (if indeed)...etc. Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā: because the branches are close to each other, they are intertwined; "saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā" are those whose branches are intertwined. "Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā" (intertwined branches) is just an illustration; it should be understood that the roots are also intertwined. Tesū: in those two trees. Vihārasīmā cā: and the old monastery boundary. Anto katvā: having included it within the sīmā. Atha pacchāti ettha ‘‘pacchā’’ti iminā athasaddassatthaṃ dasseti: Here, with "pacchā" (afterwards), he shows the meaning of the word "atha" (then). Evaṃ ke akaṃsūti āha ‘‘evaṃ chabbaggiyā akaṃsū’’ti: Who did this?, he says, "evaṃ chabbaggiyā akaṃsū" (the Group-of-Six did this). Tenā: by that act.

Tassāti baddhasīmāya.Padesanti bhikkhūhi kammaṃ kātuṃ pahonakaṃ ekadesaṃ. Antamaso ekassapi bhikkhuno ṭhatvā adhiṭṭhānuposathaṃ kātuṃ pahonakaṃ padesaṃ. Kammaṃ kātuṃ appahonakapadesaṃ anto karitvā bandhantāsīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantināma.Sīmāya upacāroti pacchā bandhitabbāya sīmāya upacāro.‘‘Vaḍḍhanto sīmāsaṅkaraṃ karotī’’ti iminā sace avaḍḍhanako pāsāṇo hoti, dvinnampi sīmānaṃ nimittaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti.

Tassā: of that established boundary. Padesaṃ: an area capable of performing kamma by the bhikkhus. An area capable of at least one bhikkhu standing and performing the adhiṭṭhāna-uposatha. Those who establish a boundary by including an area incapable of performing kamma are called sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindanti (violating a boundary with a boundary). Sīmāya upacāro: the preliminary act for a boundary that is to be established later. ‘‘Vaḍḍhanto sīmāsaṅkaraṃ karotī’’: with this, he shows that if the stone is not to be added to, it is proper to make it a nimitta (sign) for both boundaries.

77. Uposathabhedādikathā
77. Uposatha-Bheda (Division)-Adi (etc.)-Kathā (Account)

149.Pannarasikassa pubbakiccassa pāḷiyaṃ āgatattā cātuddasikasseva pubbakiccaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ajjuposatho cātuddaso’’ti.

149.Because the preliminary duty for the fifteenth (day) comes in the Pāḷi text, showing the preliminary duty for the fourteenth (day) only, he says, "ajjuposatho cātuddaso" (today is the fourteenth-day Uposatha).

Adhammena vagganti etthaadhammaṃnāma ekasmiṃ vihāre catunnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ suttuddesauposathamakatvā pārisuddhiuposathakaraṇañca tiṇṇaṃ pārisuddhiuposathamakatvā suttuddesakaraṇañca.Vaggaṃnāma sabbeva asannipatitvā ekassa chandapārisuddhiharaṇaṃ. Chandapārisuddhi nāma saṅghamajjhaṃyeva āgacchati, na gaṇamajjhaṃ, na puggalassa santikaṃ.Adhammena samagganti etthaadhammaṃvuttanayameva.Samaggaṃnāma sabbesaṃ sannipatanaṃ.Dhammena vagganti etthadhammaṃnāma catunnaṃ suttuddesauposathakaraṇañca tiṇṇaṃ pārisuddhiuposathakaraṇañca.Vaggaṃvuttanayameva.

Adhammena vaggaṃ: here, adhammaṃ means not performing the suttuddesa-uposatha (recitation of the Pātimokkha) by four bhikkhus in one monastery and performing the pārisuddhi-uposatha (declaration of purity), and not performing the pārisuddhi-uposatha by three bhikkhus and performing the suttuddesa. Vaggaṃ means not all assembling and taking the chanda-pārisuddhi (consent and purity) of one bhikkhu. Chanda-pārisuddhi means coming only into the middle of the Saṅgha, not into the middle of the group, not to the presence of the individual. Adhammena samaggaṃ: here, adhammaṃ is the same as stated above. Samaggaṃ means the assembly of all. Dhammena vaggaṃ: here, dhammaṃ means performing the suttuddesa-uposatha by four bhikkhus and performing the pārisuddhi-uposatha by three bhikkhus. Vaggaṃ is the same as stated above.

78. Pātimokkhuddesakathā
78. Pātimokkhuddesa-Kathā (Account)

150.Imaṃnidānanti pātimokkhassa imaṃ nidānaṃ.Sutā kho panāti ettha suyyitthātisutā,suyyassantīti vāsutā,pārājikuddesādayo. Sutā ca sutā casutāti sarūpekaseso kātabbo.Avasesanti nidānuddesādito avasesaṃ pārājikuddesādi.Sutenāti sutasaddena. ‘‘Atthe asambhavato sadde vuttavidhānaṃ hotī’’ti hi paribhāsato ‘‘sutenā’’ti ettha saddova gahetabbo.Tena nayenāti tena nidānuddesanayena.

150.Imaṃnidānaṃ: this is the introduction to the Pātimokkha. Sutā kho panā: here, sutā means that which has been heard, or that which will be heard; the pārājikuddesa etc. Sutā ca sutā ca sutāti sarūpekaseso kātabbo: "Sutā ca sutā ca sutā" (heard and heard and heard): a sarūpa-ekasesa (compound of identical forms with one remaining) should be made. Avasesaṃ: the pārājikuddesa etc. remaining from the nidānuddesa etc. Sutenā: by the word "suta" (heard). Hi paribhāsato ‘‘atthe asambhavato sadde vuttavidhānaṃ hotī’’ti: Because according to the rule, "when the meaning is not possible, the rule applies to the word," here with "sutenā", only the word should be taken. Tena nayenā: by that method of the nidānuddesa (introduction).

Aṭavimanussabhayanti aṭaviyaṃ nivasantassa manussassa bhayaṃ, vanacarakabhayanti attho.Rājantarāyotiādīsu evaṃ viseso veditabboti yojanā.Davadāhoti dāyaṃ dahatīti davadāho ākārassa rassaṃ, yakārassa ca vakāraṃ katvā.Nanti bhikkhuṃ. Ekaṃ vā bhikkhunti yojanā.Paṭhamo vā uddesoti nidānuddeso.Etthāti pañcasu uddesesu.Yasminti uddese.Sopīti uddesopi.Suteneva sāvetabboti sutapadeneva saṅghassa sāvetabboti evasaddo ‘‘na vitthārenā’’ti dasseti.

Aṭavimanussabhayaṃ: fear of a human living in a forest, meaning fear of a forest wanderer. Rājantarāyo: it should be understood that the distinction is thus in rājantarāyo (royal danger) etc. Davadāho: davadāho because it burns the forest; shortening the "ā" and changing the "ya" to "va". Na: not a bhikkhu. Ekaṃ vā bhikkhunti yojanā: The connection is "or one bhikkhu". Paṭhamo vā uddeso: the nidānuddesa (introduction). Etthā: in the five uddesas. Yasmiṃ: in which uddesa. Sopī: that uddesa also. Suteneva sāvetabbo: it should be announced to the Saṅgha by the word "suta" (heard) only; the word "eva" (only) indicates "na vitthārena" (not in detail).

Anajjhiṭṭhāti ettha upasaggavasena isudhātussa icchākantito aññamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘anāṇattā, ayācitā vā’’ti. Ettha ‘‘anāṇattā’’ti idaṃ therena anāṇattabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayācitā’’ti idaṃ sammutiladdhena navakena ayācitabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘anajjhiṭṭhā dhammaṃ bhāsantī’’ti vacane.Dhammajjhesaketi dhammakathanatthāya ajjhesatīti dhammajjhesako, tasmiṃ. Āpucchitvā vā tena saṅghattherena yācito hutvā vāti yojanā.Vārapaṭipāṭiyāti vārānukkamena.Dehīti vāti ettha iti-vā-saddo ‘‘bhaṇa’’ itipadena ca ‘‘kathehi’’ itipadena ca yojetabbo. ‘‘Bhaṇa’’ iti vā ‘‘kathehi’’iti vā ‘‘dehi’’iti vā vattabbāti yojanā.Tīhipi vidhīhīti osāraṇakathanasarabhaññasaṅkhātehi tīhi sajjanehi. Ettha ca suttassa osāriyate uccāriyateosāraṇaṃ,atthassa kathiyatekathanaṃ,suttassa ca tadatthassa ca sarena bhaṇiyatesarabhaññaṃ. Osārehīti suttaṃ uccārehi.Kathehīti atthaṃ kathehi.Sarabhaññanti suttassa ca tadatthassa ca sarena bhaṇanaṃ.Nanti saddhivihārikaṃ.Sajjhāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvāti ‘‘sajjhāyaṃ karomī’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā.Etthāti ajjhesanaṭṭhāne.

Anajjhiṭṭhā: here, showing a different meaning from desiring by the root "isu" due to the prefix, he says, "anāṇattā, ayācitā vā" (unbidden, or unasked). Here, "anāṇattā" (unbidden) is said referring to the state of not being ordered by a Thera. "Ayācitā" (unasked) is said referring to the state of not being asked by a novice who has received approval, this should be understood. Etthā: in the statement, "anajjhiṭṭhā dhammaṃ bhāsantī" (they speak the Dhamma unbidden). Dhammajjhesake: dhammajjhesako because he requests for the sake of teaching the Dhamma; in that dhammajjhesaka. Āpucchitvā vā tena saṅghattherena yācito hutvā vāti yojanā: The connection is, or having asked permission, having been requested by that Saṅgha-thera. Vārapaṭipāṭiyā: by the order of turns. Dehīti vā: here, the word iti-vā (thus-or) should be connected with the words "bhaṇa" (recite) and "kathehi" (tell). It should be connected as "one should say 'bhaṇa' thus, or 'kathehi' thus, or 'dehi' thus". Tīhipi vidhīhī: by the three recitations, osāraṇa, kathana, and sarabhañña. Here, osāraṇaṃ is reciting, uttering the sutta; kathanaṃ is telling the meaning; sarabhaññaṃ is reciting the sutta and its meaning with a tune. Osārehī: utter the sutta. Kathehī: tell the meaning. Sarabhaññaṃ: reciting the sutta and its meaning with a tune. Na: not a saddhivihārika. Sajjhāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā: having resolved, "I will recite". Etthā: in the place of invitation.

Nissitaketi saddhivihārikādayo.Soti saṅghatthero, ‘‘vattabbo’’tipade kammaṃ, ‘‘vadatī’’tiādīsu padesu kattā.Āraddhanti saṅghena āraddhaṃ.Ṭhapetvāti dhammasavanaṃ ṭhapetvā.Osāretvāti paṭhamaṃ suttaṃ osāretvā.Puna kathentenāti pacchā atthaṃ kathentena.Aṭṭhapetvāyeva vāti suttassa ca atthassa ca antarā aṭṭhatvā eva vā.Kathetabbanti atthajātaṃ kathetabbaṃ.Kathentassa…pe… nayoti paṭhamaṃ atthaṃ kathetvā puna suttañca atthañca sarena bhaṇantassa puna āgatepi eseva nayoti attho.

Nissitaketi means saddhivihārika, etc. Soti means the Saṅgha-thera; in the phrase "vattabbo," it is the object; in phrases such as "vadati," it is the subject. Āraddhanti means begun by the Saṅgha. Ṭhapetvāti means having set aside the hearing of the Dhamma. Osāretvāti means having recited the sutta initially. Puna kathentenāti means by one who explains the meaning later. Aṭṭhapetvāyeva vāti means or without pausing between the sutta and its meaning. Kathetabbanti means a collection of meanings should be spoken. Kathentassa…pe… nayoti means, the method is, having spoken the meaning first, then reciting the sutta and the meaning with intonation, even upon returning to the beginning, this is the method.

Upanisinnakathāyapīti samīpe nisinnena kathāyapi.Tenāti saṅghattherena.Vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti visesetvā vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Tenāti manussehi jānanabhikkhunā. Saṅghatthero bhaṇati, tuṇhī vā hotīti sambandho. ‘‘Pucchantī’’ti vutteti yojanā.Anumodanādīsupītiādisaddena dhammakathādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Saṅghatthero anujānātīti sambandho.Sabbatthāti sabbesu vihāraantaragharesu.

Upanisinnakathāyapīti means even by speaking when sitting nearby. Tenāti means by the Saṅgha-thera. Vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti means it is appropriate to speak specifically. Tenāti means by the knowledgeable bhikkhu among the people. The connection is, the Saṅgha-thera speaks, or remains silent. The construction is, "pucchantīti vutteti." Anumodanādīsupīti the word "ādi" includes Dhamma talks, etc. The connection is, the Saṅgha-thera approves. Sabbatthāti means in all monasteries and houses.

Sajjhāyanti sayaṃ issarena ayanaṃ uccāraṇaṃ, kenaci anajjhiṭṭho sayaṃ adhiissarena ayanaṃ uccāraṇanti attho.Theroti saddhivihāro thero.Vissamissāmīti khedavirahitaṃ gamissāmi.Āpucchitabbanti paṭhamatherampi puna āgatattherampi āpucchitabbaṃ. Ekena saṅghattherena anuññātenāti sambandho.Aññasmīnti anuññātattherato aññasmiṃ thereti sambandho.Tanti puna āgataṃ theraṃ.Attānaṃsammanitabbanti ettha paccatte upayogavacananti āha ‘‘attā sammanitabbo’’ti. Kiṃ sammatena parisaṃ anoloketvā pucchitabboti āha ‘‘pucchantena panā’’tiādi.

Sajjhāyanti means reciting or uttering by oneself independently, without being prompted by anyone, reciting or uttering by oneself independently. Theroti means the saddhivihārika is a thera. Vissamissāmīti means I will go without fatigue. Āpucchitabbanti means both the first thera and the returning thera should be asked permission. The connection is, with the permission of one Saṅgha-thera. Aññasmīnti means in a thera other than the thera who gave permission. Tanti means that returning thera. Attānaṃ sammanitabbanti, here "attā" is in the accusative case, so he says, "attā sammanitabbo". What should be considered without looking around at the assembly, he asks, "pucchantena panā" etc.

153.Meti mayhaṃ.Itoti puggalato, uppannoti sambandho.Puramhākanti padassa pure amhākanti padacchedaṃ katvā puresaddo paṭhamatthoti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ amhāka’’nti.Paṭikaccevasaddo pagevapariyāyo, ‘‘paṭhamataramevā’’ti iminā tassa atthaṃ dasseti.Bhūtamevāti vijjamānameva, tathameva vā.

153. Meti means to me. Itoti means from the individual; the connection is "uppanno." Puramhākanti, splitting the word into "pure amhāka," the word "pure" means "first," so he says, "paṭhamaṃ amhāka." Paṭikacceva is a synonym for "pageva," he shows its meaning with "paṭhamataramevā." Bhūtamevāti means existing, or just as it is.

82. Adhammakammapaṭikkosanādikathā
82. Talk on Rejecting Unlawful Acts, etc.

154.Adhammakammanti abhūtakammaṃ.Paṭikkositunti ettha kusadhātu apanayanatthoti āha ‘‘vāretu’’nti.Diṭṭhinti laddhiṃ.Tesanti catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ.Yathāti yenākārena bhaṇiyamāneti yojanā.Na suṇantīti aññe bhikkhū na suṇanti.Therādhīnanti therena adhīnaṃ ābandhanti attho.Therāyattanti therena āyattaṃ, therassa santakanti attho.Etthāti pātimokkhuddese.

154. Adhammakammanti means an untrue act. Paṭikkositunti, here the root "kusa" means to remove, so he says, "vāretu." Diṭṭhinti means a belief. Tesanti means of the four or five. Yathāti means in whatever way it is being spoken. Na suṇantīti means other bhikkhus do not listen. Therādhīnanti means dependent on the thera, it means they adhere to it. Therāyattanti means controlled by the thera, belonging to the thera. Etthāti means in the recitation of the Pātimokkha.

83. Pātimokkhuddesakaajjhesanādikathā
83. Talk on Requesting the Pātimokkha Reciter, etc.

155.Navavidhañcāti divasavasena tividhaṃ, kārakavasena tividhaṃ, kattabbākāravasena tividhañcāti navakoṭṭhāsañca, navapakārañca vā.Catubbidhanti ‘‘adhammena vagga’’ntiādikaṃ catubbidhaṃ.Duvidhanti bhikkhubhikkhunīvasena duvidhaṃ.Navavidhanti bhikkhupātimokkhe pañcavidhaṃ, bhikkhunipātimokkhe catubbidhanti navavidhaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘yo tattha bhikkhu byatto paṭibalo’’ti pāṭhe.Suvisadāti suṭṭhu byattā, suddhā vā.Ettakampīti pisaddo garahāyaṃ, adhike kā nāma kathāti dasseti.

155. Navavidhañcāti means nine divisions: threefold by day, threefold by function, and threefold by manner of performance, or nine kinds. Catubbidhanti means fourfold such as "adhammena vagga." Duvidhanti means twofold as bhikkhu and bhikkhunī. Navavidhanti means ninefold, fivefold in the bhikkhu Pātimokkha and fourfold in the bhikkhunī Pātimokkha. Etthāti means in the passage "yo tattha bhikkhu byatto paṭibalo." Suvisadāti means very clear or pure. Ettakampīti the word "pi" is for censure, it shows that further talk is unnecessary.

Sāmantā āvāsāti ettha upayogatthe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘sāmantaṃ āvāsa’’nti.Yo sakkotīti bahūsu navesu yo sakkoti.

Sāmantā āvāsāti, here the locative case is used in the sense of proximity, so he says, "sāmantaṃ āvāsa." Yo sakkotīti means whoever is able among the many new ones.

84. Pakkhagaṇanādiuggahaṇānujānanakathā
84. Talk on Counting Fortnights, etc., Taking Up, and Permitting

156.Katinaṃpūraṇīti katinaṃ tithīnaṃ pūraṇī.Ko divasoti kittako divaso.Ayyāyattanti ayyehi bhikkhūhi āyattaṃ ābaddhaṃ.Saṃharitvāti puna salākaṃ saṃharitvā. Ayaṃ pāṭho kesuci aṭṭhakathāpotthakesu natthi.Kālavatoti ettha vantupaccayo svatthoti āha ‘‘kālassevā’’ti. Evasaddo pana sambhavato yujjiyati.Pagevāti pātova.

156. Katinaṃ pūraṇīti means the completion of the Katina timing. Ko divasoti means how many days. Ayyāyattanti means dependent on or bound to the bhikkhus, the Ayyas. Saṃharitvāti means having again gathered the ballots. This reading is not found in some commentary books. Kālavatoti, here the suffix "vantu" is in the sense of "sva," so he says, "kālasseva." However, the word "eva" is fitting in terms of possibility. Pagevāti means early in the morning.

158.Sāyampīti sāyanhepi. Pisaddena aññampi saraṇakālaṃ sampiṇḍeti.

158. Sāyampīti means even in the evening. The word "pi" combines another time of remembering.

159.Āṇāpetunti ettha anāṇāpetabbabhikkhū apanetvā āṇāpetabbabhikkhū dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘kiñci kamma’’ntiādi. Sadākālameva kiñci kammaṃ karontoti yojanā.Dhammakathikādīsūtiādisaddena gaṇavācakādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Vārenāti pariyāyena.Sammuñcaninti yaṭṭhisammuñcaniṃ vā muṭṭhisammuñcaniṃ vā. Samaṃ, suṭṭhu vā muñcati sodheti imāyātisammuñcanī,tālujo paṭhamo.Tampīti sākhābhaṅgampi.

159. Āṇāpetunti, here, to show the bhikkhus who should be instructed after removing those who should not be, it is said "kiñci kammaṃ," etc. The construction is, they always do some work. Dhammakathikādīsūti, the word "ādi" includes gaṇavācaka, etc. Vārenāti means in turn. Sammuñcaninti means either a broom made of twigs or a broom made of a handful of fibers. That which binds or cleans well is called sammuñcanī, the first word is a tālaja. Tampīti means even a broken branch.

160.Vuttanayenevāti sammajjane vuttanayeneva.Puna āharitabbānīti saṅghikāvāsaṃ āsanāni puna āharitabbāni.Taṭṭikāyopīti veṇuādimayā taṭṭikāyopi.

160. Vuttanayenevāti means just as said regarding sweeping. Puna āharitabbānīti means the seats in the Saṅgha residence should be brought back again. Taṭṭikāyopīti means even a mat made of bamboo, etc.

161.Kapallikā vāti kapālesu pariyāpannā padīpakapālā vā.Tanti telādiṃ.Pariyesitabbānīti anavajjapariyesanena pariyesitabbāni.

161. Kapallikā vāti means lamp bowls arranged in potsherds. Tanti means oil, etc. Pariyesitabbānīti means they should be sought with blameless seeking.

86. Disaṃgamikādivatthukathā
86. Talk on the Subject of Those Going to a Distance, etc.

163.Saṃgahetabbotiādīnaṃ catunnaṃ kiriyāpadānaṃ visesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṃgahetabbo’’tiādi. Saṃgahasaddassa saṅkhepagahaṇesupi vattanato idha ‘‘anuggahatthe’’ti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anuggahetabbo’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tathākaraṇavasenā’’ti.Upalāpetabboti saṅghena bahussuto bhikkhu bhikkhūhi upagantvā lāpetabbo kathāpetabbo.Upaṭṭhāpetabboti saṅghena bahussuto bhikkhu bhikkhūhi upa accanena pūjanena ṭhāpetabbo. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ dukkaṭa’’nti vatvā tadeva samatthetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘idha neva therā, na daharā muccantī’’ti.Tenāti bahussutena bhikkhunā.Evampi satīti evaṃ asādiyanepi sati.Sāyaṃ pātanti sāyañca pāto ca sāyaṃpātaṃ.Upaṭṭhānanti upaṭṭhānaṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhānatthāya vā.Tenāti bahussutena bhikkhunā.Tesanti mahātherānaṃ.Assāti bahussutassa bhikkhuno.Saddhiṃcarāti attanā saddhiṃ carantīti saddhiṃcarā.Athāpīti yadipi. Eko vā vattasampanno vadatīti yojanā. Eso ca ahañcātimayaṃ. Nāmatumhaamhasaddesu hi ekasesena kattabbesu parova gahetabbo. Viharantūti vadantīti yojanā.

163. Showing the distinction of the four verbs, "saṃgahetabbo," etc., he says, "saṃgahetabbo," etc. Since the word "saṃgaha" is used in the sense of abbreviated grasping as well, to show that here it is "in the sense of favor," it is said in the Pāḷi, "anuggahetabbo." Therefore it is said, "tathākaraṇavasenā." Upalāpetabboti means a bhikkhu who is learned and well-versed should be approached by the Saṅgha and made to converse. Upaṭṭhāpetabboti means a bhikkhu who is learned and well-versed should be established by the Saṅgha with honor and reverence. Saying "sabbesaṃ dukkaṭa," to establish that very point, it is said, "idha neva therā, na daharā muccanti." Tenāti means by the learned bhikkhu. Evampi satīti means even if there is such non-acceptance. Sāyaṃ pātanti means evening and morning, sāyaṃpātaṃ. Upaṭṭhānanti means a place of service, or for the purpose of service. Tenāti means by the learned bhikkhu. Tesanti means of the Mahā-Theras. Assāti means of the learned bhikkhu. Saddhiṃcarāti means those who live together with oneself are saddhiṃcarā. Athāpīti means even if. The construction is, one who is accomplished in duties speaks. "Eso ca ahañcāti mayaṃ." In the words nāma, tumha, and amha, only the latter should be taken when ekasesa is to be done. The construction is, let them dwell, they say.

So āvāso gantabboti ettha kimatthāya gantabbo, kiṃ anudivasaṃ gantabboti āha ‘‘uposathakaraṇatthāya anvaddhamāsaṃ gantabbo’’ti.So ca khoti āvāso.Utuvasseyevāti hemantagimheyeva. Utuvasseyeva gantabboti atthassa ñātabbabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vassāne panā’’tiādi.Yanti kammaṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘vassaṃ vasantī’’tiādivacane.Soti pātimokkhuddesako bhikkhu.Aññasminti aparasmiṃ pātimokkhuddesake.Māsadvayanti sāvaṇamāsapuṇṇamito yāva assayujapuṇṇamī, tāva māsadvayaṃ vasitabbaṃ. Idaṃ purimavassaṃ upagantvā pacchimikāya pakkamanādiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sace pacchimikaṃ upagantvā anantarameva pakkamanādiṃ karoti, māsattayampi vasitabbaṃ.

So āvāso gantabboti, here, for what purpose should he go to that residence, should he go every day? He says, "uposathakaraṇatthāya anvaddhamāsaṃ gantabbo." So ca khoti means that residence. Utuvasseyevāti means only in winter and summer. Showing that it should be understood that "utuvasseyeva gantabbo," he says, "vassāne panā" etc. Yanti means the act. Tatthāti means in the statement "vassaṃ vasantī" etc. Soti means that bhikkhu who is the Pātimokkha reciter. Aññasminti means in another Pātimokkha reciter. Māsadvayanti means from the full moon of Sāvaṇa month until the full moon of Assayuja, he should dwell for two months. This is said with reference to taking up the first rains residence and then departing for the latter one. If he takes up the latter rains residence and immediately makes preparations for departure, he should dwell for three months.

87. Pārisuddhidānakathā
87. Talk on Giving Pārisuddhi

164.Yena kenaci aṅgapaccaṅgena viññāpetīti paṭivacanaṃ nicchāretumasakkonto yena kenaci aṅgapaccaṅgena viññāpeti.Ubhayathāti ubhayehi kāyavācāsaṅkhātehi ākārehi. Kāyavācāhi viññāpetīti sambandho.Sabbeti akhilā gilānā.Hatthapāseti saṅghassa hatthapāsamhi.Sace dūre hontīti sace bahū gilānā aññamaññaṃ dūre honti.Taṃ divasanti tasmiṃ saṅghaappahonakadivase.

164. Yena kenaci aṅgapaccaṅgena viññāpetīti means being unable to utter a reply, he indicates with some gesture of the body. Ubhayathāti means in both ways, by means of body and speech. The connection is, he indicates with body and speech. Sabbeti means all the sick ones without exception. Hatthapāseti means within the hand-span of the Saṅgha. Sace dūre hontīti means if many sick ones are far from each other. Taṃ divasanti means on that day when the Saṅgha is not sufficient.

Tattheva pakkamatīti ettha nissakkatthe thapaccayoti āha ‘‘tatovā’’ti, pārisuddhihāraṭṭhānato evāti attho. ‘‘Gacchatī’’ti iminā kamudhātuyā padavikkhepatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘katthacī’’ti iminā tassa kammaṃ.Sāmaṇero paṭijānātītiādīsu paṭijānanākāratthassa itisaddassa lopabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sāmaṇero aha’’nti evaṃ paṭijānātī’’tiādi.Bhūtaṃyevāti vijjamānaṃyeva.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘sikkhaṃ paccakkhātako paṭijānātī’’tiādīsu.

Tattheva pakkamatīti, here, there is the suffix "tha" in the sense of determination, so he says, "tatovā," meaning from the place of the pārisuddhi-bearer. "Gacchatīti" shows that the root "kamu" means "to move the feet," "katthacīti" means its object. Regarding "sāmaṇero paṭijānātī" etc., showing the absence of the word "iti" indicating the manner of acknowledgment, he says, "sāmaṇero ahaṃ'ti evaṃ paṭijānātī" etc. Bhūtaṃyevāti means just what is existing. Sabbatthāti means in all instances of "sikkhaṃ paccakkhātako paṭijānātī" etc.

Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘saṅghappatto vibbhamatī’’tiādīsu.Etthāti pārisuddhiharaṇe.Bahūnampīti ettha pisaddena ekena ekassāpi, bahūhi ekassāpi, bahūhi bahūnampi āhaṭā pārisuddhi āhaṭāva hotīti dasseti.Soti pārisuddhihārako bhikkhu.Yesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Tassevāti pārisuddhihārakasseva.Itarā panāti itaresaṃ pārisuddhi pana.Biḷālasaṅkhalikāti etthabiḷāloti ākhubhujo. So hi biḷāsayaṃ ākhuṃ gaṇhituṃ alati samatthetīti biḷāloti vuccati.Saṅkhalikāti etaṃ sattānaṃ bandhanūpakaraṇavisesassa nāmaṃ. Biḷālassa saṅkhalikā tena sambandhasambandhibhāvena sambandhattāti biḷālasaṅkhalikā. Idaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ yesaṃ kesañci saṅkhalikāya gahetabbattā. Tāya sadisā biḷālasaṅkhalikā pārisuddhīti attho. Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – yathā saṅkhalikāya paṭhamaṃ valayaṃ dutiyaṃyeva valayaṃ pāpuṇāti, na tatiyaṃ, evameva paṭhamaṃ dinnā pārisuddhi dutiyameva pāpuṇāti, na tatiyanti.

Sabbatthāti means in all instances of "saṅghappatto vibbhamatī" etc. Etthāti means in the bringing of pārisuddhi. Bahūnampīti, here the word "pi" shows that the pārisuddhi brought by one for one, by many for one, or by many for many, is indeed brought. Soti means that bhikkhu who is the pārisuddhi-bearer. Yesanti means of the bhikkhus. Tassevāti means of the pārisuddhi-bearer alone. Itarā panāti means however, the pārisuddhi of the others. Biḷālasaṅkhalikāti, here biḷāloti means a mouse-eater. He is called "biḷāla" because he is able to catch mice in the biḷāsa. Saṅkhalikāti is the name of a particular device for binding beings. The saṅkhalikā of the cat is related through the connection of possession, hence "biḷālasaṅkhalikā." This is merely an illustration, as it should be taken with any saṅkhalikā. The meaning is that pārisuddhi is like a cat's chain. Here, the comparison is thus: just as the first link of a chain reaches only the second link, not the third, so too, the pārisuddhi given first reaches only the second, not the third.

Āgantvāti saṅghassa hatthapāsaṃ āgantvā. Pāḷiyaṃsutto na ārocetītiādīsu hetvatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Suttena nārocetīti hi attho.Pārisuddhihārakassa anāpattīti ettha āpattīti anvayatthaṃ atthāpattito dassento āha ‘‘sace…pe… āpajjatī’’ti.Assāti bhikkhussa.Ubhinnampīti pārisuddhidāyakassa, taṃhārakassa cāti ubhinnampi.

Āgantvāti means having come within the hand-span of the Saṅgha. In the Pāḷi, sutto na ārocetī etc., the accusative case is used in the sense of cause. The meaning is that he does not announce through the sutta. Pārisuddhihārakassa anāpattīti, here, showing the connection of the word āpatti to its meaning from the implied meaning, he says, "sace…pe… āpajjatī." Assāti means of the bhikkhu. Ubhinnampīti means of both, the one giving the pārisuddhi and the one taking it.

88. Chandadānakathā
88. Talk on Giving Chanda

165.Chandadānepi vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Uposatho kato hotīti pārisuddhidāyakassa ca saṅghassa ca uposatho kato hoti.Aññanti uposathakammato aññaṃ. Yaṃ pana kammanti sambandho.Kammampīti uposathakammato aññaṃ kammampi. Ettha ca tadahuposathe attano ca saṅghassa ca sace uposathakammaṃ hoti, pārisuddhiyeva dātabbā. Atha aññaṃ kammaṃ hoti, chandoyeva dātabbo. Yadi uposathakammañca aññakammañca hoti, pārisuddhi ca chando ca dātabbo. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘tadahuposathe pārisuddhiṃ dentena chandampi dātu’’nti.Sīmāya vāti baddhasīmāya vā.Acchitunti upavesituṃ. ‘‘Āsa upavesane’’ti hi dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 sakārantadhātu) vuttaṃ.Sāmaggī vāti kāyasāmaggī vā.

165. It should be understood that the same judgment applies to giving chanda. Uposatho kato hotīti means the Uposatha is done both for the one giving pārisuddhi and for the Saṅgha. Aññanti means other than the Uposatha act. The connection is, yaṃ pana kammaṃ. Kammampīti means even an act other than the Uposatha act. Here, if there is an Uposatha act on that Uposatha day for oneself and for the Saṅgha, only pārisuddhi should be given. But if there is another act, only chanda should be given. If there is both an Uposatha act and another act, both pārisuddhi and chanda should be given. With that in mind, it is said, "tadahuposathe pārisuddhiṃ dentena chandampi dātuṃ." Sīmāya vāti means either in a bounded sīmā. Acchitunti means to sit down. It is said in the lists of roots, "Āsa upavesane." Sāmaggī vāti means either bodily harmony.

167.Saratipi uposathaṃ, napi saratīti ettha pisaddassa aniyamavikappatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ekadā sarati, ekadā na saratī’’ti. ‘‘Ekanta’’nti imināneva saratīti ettha evasaddassa sanniṭṭhānatthaṃ dasseti.Kammaṃ na kopetīti sammutiladdhopi aladdhopi ummattako kammaṃ na kopeti.

167. Saratipi uposathaṃ, napi saratīti, here to show that the word "pi" has the meaning of indefinite alternative, it is said, "ekadā sarati, ekadā na saratī." With "ekantaṃ," he shows that the word "eva" in neva saratī has the meaning of certainty. Kammaṃ na kopetīti means a madman, whether he has received sammuti or not, does not invalidate the act.

91. Saṅghuposathādikathā
91. Talk on Saṅgha Uposatha, etc.

168.‘‘Sammajjitvā’’ti padamapekkhitvāso desoti ettha ‘‘upayogatthe paccattavacana’’nti vuttaṃ.Etanti ‘‘so deso sammajjitabbo’’tiādivacanaṃ.Tenāti tena hetunā. Aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘sammajjanī…pe… vuccati’’ iti āhūti yojanā.

168. Awaiting the word "sammajjitvā," here it is said "so deso" is "the accusative case in the sense of proximity." Etanti means the statement "so deso sammajjitabbo" etc. Tenāti means for that reason. The Aṭṭhakathā teachers said "sammajjanī…pe… vuccati," that is the connection.

Sammajjanīti sammajjanakaraṇaṃ.Padīpoti padīpujjalanaṃ.Udakanti udakaṭṭhapanaṃ.Āsanenāti āsanapaññāpanena. ‘‘Itī’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ.Uposathassāti navavidhassa uposathassa pubbakaraṇanti sambandho.Etānīti cattāri kammāni.Vuccatīti kathiyati. Idaṃ ‘‘etānī’’ti kammassa ca ‘‘pubbakaraṇa’’nti ākārassa ca abhedattā āsannaṃ ākāramapekkhitvā ekavacanavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Akkhātānī’’ti idaṃ pana ‘‘imāni cattārī’’ti kammamapekkhitvā bahuvacanavasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Sammajjanīti means an instrument for sweeping. Padīpoti means lighting a lamp. Udakanti means placing water. Āsanenāti means arranging seats. "Itī" should be supplied. Uposathassāti means the preliminary activity of the ninefold Uposatha is connected. Etānīti means these four activities. Vuccatīti means is said. This is said in the singular because "etāni" is the same as the activity and the manner, and it is dependent on the nearest manner. But "akkhātāni" should be understood as said in the plural depending on the activity "imāni cattāri."

Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānanti chandakkhānañca pārisuddhikkhānañca utukkhānañca.Bhikkhugaṇanāti bhikkhū gaṇetvā akkhānaṃ.Ovādoti bhikkhunīhi yācitassa ovādassa akkhānaṃ.Etānīti etāni pañca.Pubbakaraṇato pacchāti pubbakaraṇassa karaṇato pacchā. Ettha ca ‘‘pubbakaraṇato pacchā kattabbānī’’ti idaṃ kattabbākārasseva visesanaṃ, na atthassa. Ayaṃ pana viseso – saṅghasannipātato pubbabhāge kattabbattāpubbakaraṇaṃnāma, uposathakaraṇato pubbabhāge kattabbattāpubbakiccaṃnāmāti.

Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānanti: The recounting of the chanda, the recounting of the purity, and the recounting of the season. Bhikkhugaṇanāti: Recounting after counting the bhikkhus. Ovādoti: Recounting of the exhortation requested by the bhikkhunīs. Etānīti: These five. Pubbakaraṇato pacchāti: After the performance of the preliminary duties. Here, the phrase "after the preliminary duties are to be done" is a qualification of the word "to be done," not of the meaning. However, this is the distinction: because it is to be done in the preliminary part of the Sangha assembly, it is called pubbakaraṇaṃ; because it is to be done in the preliminary part of the uposatha performance, it is called pubbakiccaṃ.

Uposathoti uposathadivaso.Yāvatikā ca bhikkhūti yattakā bhikkhū.Kammapattāti uposathakammassa pattā yuttā anurūpā. Tāvatikā bhikkhū hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā ekasīmāyaṃ ṭhitā ca hontīti yojanā.Sabhāgāpattiyoti vatthusabhāgā āpattiyo.Vajjanīyāti vajjetabbā.Puggalāti gahaṭṭhādipuggalā.Tasminti tasmiṃ uposathasīmamāḷake. Etāni cattārīti pāṭhaseso.

Uposathoti: The uposatha day. Yāvatikā ca bhikkhūti: As many bhikkhus as there are. Kammapattāti: Qualified, suitable, and appropriate for the uposatha act. The meaning is: As many bhikkhus as are standing within the same boundary without abandoning the distance of an arm's reach. Sabhāgāpattiyoti: Offenses that share the same object. Vajjanīyāti: To be avoided. Puggalāti: Individuals such as householders. Tasminti: In that uposatha boundary enclosure. The rest of the sentence is: These four.

Pannarasopīti pisaddena na kevalaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayeneva adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭati, atha kho ‘‘ajja me uposatho pannaraso’’tipīti dasseti.

Pannarasopīti: With the "pi" particle, it indicates that it is proper to determine not only in the way it comes in the Pali, but also thinking, "Today is my fifteenth uposatha."

92. Āpattipaṭikammavidhikathā
92. Account of the Method of Dealing with Offenses

169.Bhagavatā…pe… kātabboti idaṃ veditabbanti sambandho. ‘‘Yassa siyā āpattītiādivacaneneva cā’’tiādihetuttayena ‘‘na sāpattikena uposatho kātabbo’’ti yathārutaṃ apaññattampi atthato siddhamevāti dasseti. Hetuttayaṃ ‘‘veditabba’’nti padena yojetabbaṃ.Thullaccayādīsūti ādisaddena pācittiyapāṭidesanīyadukkaṭadubbhāsitāpattiyo saṅgaṇhāti.‘‘Taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti idaṃ suvuttameva hotīti sambandho.Tanti āpattiṃ.Tumhamūleti tumhaṃ santike. Niggahitalopañhi vākyameva, na samāso. ‘‘Tumha’’ iti ca ‘‘tuyha’’ iti ca navakattherānaṃ vattabbākāradassanamattameva, na icchitatthavipattidassanaṃ.Vuttampīti pisaddena na kevalaṃ pāḷinayeneva suvuttaṃ, iminā nayenapi suvuttanti dasseti. ‘‘Passasī’’ti idañca vattabbanti sambandho. Vattabbākāraṃ pana suviññeyyaṃ. ‘‘Āma passāmī’’ti idaṃ pana suvuttameva hotīti sambandho.Vuttampīti pisaddo pāḷinayaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsīti ettha pana vattabboti sambandho. Garūsu bahuvacanassa kattabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘saṃvareyyāthā’’ti. Evaṃ vuttena āpattidesakenāti sambandho.

169. "By the Blessed One… to be done," the connection should be understood like this. He shows that even though it is not explicitly stated that "one with an offense should not perform the uposatha," it is implicitly established from the three reasons beginning with "Yassa siyā āpattītiādivacaneneva cā." The three reasons should be connected with the word "veditabbaṃ." Thullaccayādīsūti: The ādi includes pācittiya, pāṭidesanīya, dukkaṭa, and dubbhāsita offenses. ‘‘Taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti: This is indeed well-stated, is the connection. Tanti: The offense. Tumhamūleti: In your presence. The elision of the niggahīta is merely a sentence, not a compound. And "Tumha" and "Tuyha" are merely showing the way to speak of new elders, not showing the failure of the intended meaning. Vuttampīti: With the "pi" particle, it shows that it is well-stated not only in the Pali way, but also in this way. "Passasī" should be said, is the connection. However, the way to speak should be well understood. "Āma passāmī" is indeed well-stated, is the connection. Vuttampīti: The "pi" particle consolidates the Pali method. Āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsīti: Here, "should be said" is the connection. Because the plural should be done for serious offenses, it is said, "saṃvareyyāthā." Thus, it is connected with "by the one who has declared the offense."

Tatrāti ‘‘yadā nibbematiko’’ti pāṭhe. Sūriye meghacchanne satīti yojanā. Tena bhikkhunā vattabbanti sambandho,vatthuṃ kittetvāti bhojanasaṅkhātaṃ vatthuṃ kittetvā.ti āpattiyo.

Tatrāti: In the reading "yadā nibbematiko." The meaning is when the sun is covered by clouds. It should be said by that bhikkhu, is the connection, vatthuṃ kittetvāti: after recounting the object, which is considered food. ti: The offenses.

Sabhāgā āpattīti ettha dvīsu vatthusabhāgaāpattisabhāgāsu vatthusabhāgāva adhippetāti dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ dvepi janā’’tiādi. Yaṃ āpattinti sambandho. Samāno bhāgo etāsantisabhāgā. Desetuṃ vaṭṭatīti āpattisabhāgāpi vatthuvisabhāgattā desetuṃ vaṭṭati.Sudesitāvāti āpattito bhikkhu vuṭṭhātiyevāti adhippāyo. Aññaṃ dukkaṭanti sambandho.Panasaddo garahatthajotako sudesitāya garahākārena pavattattā. Kiñcāpi sudesitāva, pana tathāpīti yojanā.Tanti dukkaṭaṃ.Nānāvatthukanti desanāpaṭiggahaṇavasena nānāvatthukaṃ.

Sabhāgā āpattīti: Here, showing that among the two, offenses sharing the same object and offenses sharing the same type, only offenses sharing the same object are intended, he says, "yaṃ dvepi janā," etc. "Yaṃ āpattinti" is the connection. The meaning of sabhāgā is: Having a common part. Desetuṃ vaṭṭatīti: Because offenses sharing the same type are different in object, it is appropriate to declare. Sudesitāvāti: The meaning is that the bhikkhu emerges from the offense. Another dukkaṭa offense, is the connection. The word Pana is indicative of contempt, because it occurs with a contemptuous manner for that which is well-declared. Although it is well-declared, even so, is the connection. Tanti: The dukkaṭa offense. Nānāvatthukanti: With different objects in terms of declaration and acceptance.

170.Sabhāgoyeva vattabbo, na visabhāgo.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tassāti visabhāgassa.Itoti saṅghasannipātato.

170. Only that which shares the same nature should be spoken, not that which is of a different nature. ti: Indeed, or because. Tassāti: Of that which is of a different nature. Itoti: From the Sangha assembly.

95. Anāpattipannarasakādikathā
95. Account of the Fifteenth Day Without Offenses, Etc.

172.Tena jāniṃsūti ettha jānanākāradassanatthaṃ ‘‘sīmaṃ okkantāti vā okkamantīti vā’’ti vuttaṃ.Okkantāti vāti pavisittha iti vā.Tesanti catunnaṃ vā atirekānaṃ vā bhikkhūnaṃ.Vaggā samaggasaññinoti ettha kasmā vaggā, kasmā samaggasaññinoti āha ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi. Tatthatesanti aññesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ.Sīmaṃ okkantattāti sīmaṃ pavisitattā, vaggā hutvāti sambandho. Samaggo iti saññā samaggasaññā, sā etesamatthītisamaggasaññino.

172.Tena jāniṃsūti: Here, to show the way of knowing, it is said, "sīmaṃ okkantāti vā okkamantīti vā." Okkantāti vāti: Or "entered." Tesanti: Of four or more bhikkhus. Vaggā samaggasaññinoti: Here, why are they a faction, why are they of the same mind? He says, "tesaṃ," etc. There, tesanti: Of other bhikkhus. Sīmaṃ okkantattāti: Because they have entered the boundary, having become a faction is the connection. Samaggo is the designation, samaggasaññā; those who have that are samaggasaññino.

175.Kukkuccapakatāti padassa ‘‘icchāpakato’’ti padena samānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi.Pubbabhāgeti uposathakammato pubbabhāge.Sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvāpīti kappatevāti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvāpi. ‘‘Abhibhūtā’’ti imināpakatāti ettha papubbakaradhātuyā upasaggavasena abhibhavanatthaṃ dasseti.

175. To show the synonymousness of the term Kukkuccapakatāti with the term "icchāpakato," it is said "yathā," etc. Pubbabhāgeti: In the preliminary part of the uposatha act. Sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvāpīti: Even after making the determination that it is allowable. By "Abhibhūtā," he shows that in pakatāti, the prefix "pa" of the root "kar" indicates the meaning of overpowering as an उपसर्ग (upasagga, prefix).

176.Yathā heṭṭhā vaggāvaggasaññīpannarasakādīsu dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, evamakatvā kasmā ‘‘thullaccaya’’nti āha ‘‘akusalabalavatāyā’’ti.

176. As a dukkaṭa offense was stated below in the case of those who are factional and non-factional minded on the fifteenth day, etc., why is a thullaccaya offense stated instead? He answers, "akusalabalavatāyā."

100. Sīmokkantikapeyyālakathā
100. Account of the Section on Crossing the Boundary, Etc.

177.Āvāsikenaāgantukapeyyāle sabbaṃ veditabbanti sambandho. Veditabbākāraṃ saha upamāya dassento āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Āgantukenaāvāsikapeyyāle pana ānetabbanti sambandho.Purimapeyyāleti āvāsikenaāgantukapeyyāle. Āgantukenaāgantukapeyyāle pana yojetabboti sambandho. Ettha capeyyālanti sadisanayassa ca taṃjānanañāṇassa ca pātabbaṃ rakkhanaṃpeyyaṃ,peyyaṃ, peyye vā, peyyāya vā alati samatthetīti peyyālanti vacanattho kātabbo.

177. Everything in the series of a resident bhikkhu and a visiting bhikkhu should be understood, is the connection. Showing the way to understand together with the simile, he says, "yathā," etc. In the series of a visiting bhikkhu and a resident bhikkhu, it should be brought, is the connection. Purimapeyyāleti: In the series of a resident bhikkhu and a visiting bhikkhu. In the series of a visiting bhikkhu and a visiting bhikkhu, it should be connected, is the connection. Here, the word peyyālanti should be made to have the meaning that the path of similar reasoning and the knowledge of knowing that is peyyaṃ, because it is able and competent for peyyaṃ, in peyye, or by peyyāya.

178.Āvāsikānaṃ cātuddaso hutvā kasmā āgantukānaṃ pannarasoti āha ‘‘yesa’’ntiādi. Tatthayesanti āgantukānaṃ.Tiroraṭṭhatoti āvāsikānaṃ raṭṭhassa aññaraṭṭhato.Tirojanapadatoti ekaraṭṭhepi aññajanapadato.Cātuddasikaṃ akaṃsūti saññānānattavasena cātuddasikaṃ akaṃsu.Anuvattitabbanti anumatiṃ vattitabbaṃ.Na paṭikkositabbanti ‘‘na cātuddaso’’ti vatvā na vāritabbaṃ.Na akāmāti ettha kamudhātu icchattho, karaṇatthe ca nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘na anicchāya dātabbā’’ti.

178. Why is it the fourteenth day for the resident bhikkhus and the fifteenth day for the visiting bhikkhus? He answers, "yesaṃ," etc. There, yesanti: Of the visiting bhikkhus. Tiroraṭṭhatoti: From a country other than the country of the resident bhikkhus. Tirojanapadatoti: Even in the same country, from a different district. Cātuddasikaṃ akaṃsūti: They made it the fourteenth day due to the difference in designation. Anuvattitabbanti: Consent should be spoken. Na paṭikkositabbanti: Should not be prohibited by saying "not the fourteenth day." Na akāmāti: Here, the root "kamu" means desire, and it is a statement about giving without hesitation in the sense of doing. He says, "na anicchāya dātabbā."

101. Liṅgādidassanakathā
101. Account of Showing the Characteristics, Etc.

179.‘‘Āvāsikānaṃ ākāra’’nti imināāvāsikākāranti padassa chaṭṭhīsamāsaṃ dasseti.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘āvāsikaliṅga’’ntiādīsu.Yenāti supaññattamañcapīṭhādinā, gaṇhatīti sambandho.Tesanti āvāsikānaṃ.Ācārasaṇṭhānanti ācārasaṇṭhitiṃ. So supaññattamañcapīṭhādikoākāronāmāti yojanā.Yanti supaññattamañcapīṭhādiṃ, gamayatīti sambandho.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne. Līne āvāsiketi sambandho. Taṃ supaññattamañcapīṭhādiliṅgaṃnāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Adissamāne’’ti iminā līneti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Jānāpetī’’ti imināgamayatīti padassa ñāṇatthaṃ dasseti.Yanti supaññattamañcapīṭhādiṃ.Teti āvāsikā. Taṃ supaññattamañcapīṭhādinimittaṃnāmāti yojanā.Yenāti supaññattamañcapīṭhādinā.Teti āvāsikā uddisiyanti, so supaññattamañcapīṭhādikouddesonāmāti yojanā. Imehi padehi ākiriyanti pakāsiyanti etenātiākāro,līne gamayati bodhetītiliṅgaṃ. Nimiyanti paricchijja ñāyanti etenātinimittaṃ,uddisiyanti apadisiyanti etenātiuddesoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Sabbametanti ‘‘āvāsikākāra’’ntiādi etaṃ sabbaṃ.Yathāyoganti pāḷiyaṃ yogānurūpaṃ.Tatthāti āgantukākārādīsu. ‘‘Amhākaṃ ida’’nti na ñātabbanti aññātaṃ, tadevaaññātakaṃ,nisīdanādi. ‘‘Amhākaṃ ida’’nti ajānanaṃ nāma attano asantakattā, aññesameva santakattā hotīti āha ‘‘aññesaṃ santaka’’nti.Udakanissekanti siñcanavirahitaṃ udakaṃ.Bahuvacanassāti ‘‘dhotāna’’nti ettha chaṭṭhībahuvacanassa.Ekavacananti ‘‘dhotassā’’ti ekavacanaṃ. Pacchimapāṭhe malaṃ dhunāti anenātidhotaṃ,dhotañca taṃ udakañcetidhotaudakaṃ,tameva nissekaṃ dhotaudakanissekaṃ.

179. By the phrase "Āvāsikānaṃ ākāra," he shows that the word āvāsikākāranti is a genitive compound. Sabbatthāti: In all of "āvāsikaliṅga," etc. Yenāti: By which well-arranged seat, etc., he takes, is the connection. Tesanti: Of the resident bhikkhus. Ācārasaṇṭhānanti: The arrangement of conduct. That well-arranged seat, etc., is called ākāro, is the connection. Yanti: Which well-arranged seat, etc., makes known, is the connection. Tattha tatthāti: In that particular place. Līne āvāsiketi: The resident bhikkhus are hidden, is the connection. That well-arranged seat, etc., is called liṅgaṃ, is the connection. By "Adissamāne," he shows the meaning of the word "līne." By "Jānāpetī," he shows the meaning of knowledge for the word gamayatī. Yanti: Which well-arranged seat, etc. Teti: The resident bhikkhus. That well-arranged seat, etc., is called nimittaṃ, is the connection. Yenāti: By which well-arranged seat, etc. Teti: The resident bhikkhus are designated, that well-arranged seat, etc., is called uddeso, is the connection. By these words, he shows the etymological meaning that by which they are scattered and made clear is ākāro, that which makes known and makes one understand when hidden is liṅgaṃ. That by which they are distinguished and known is nimittaṃ, that by which they are designated and indicated is uddeso. Sabbametanti: All of this, starting with "āvāsikākāra." Yathāyoganti: Appropriately in the Pali. Tatthāti: In the characteristic of a visiting bhikkhu, etc. "Amhākaṃ ida" is not to be known, therefore it is aññātakaṃ, a seat, etc. "Amhākaṃ ida" is called not knowing because it is not owned by oneself, but owned only by others, he says, "aññesaṃ santaka." Udakanissekanti: Water without pouring. Bahuvacanassāti: Of the genitive plural in "dhotāna." Ekavacananti: The singular "dhotassa." In the latter reading, that which removes dirt is dhotaṃ, and that which is both dhotaṃ and water is dhotaudakaṃ, that very nissekaṃ is dhotaudakanissekaṃ.

180.Samānasaṃvāsakadiṭṭhinti padassa itilopasamāsaṃ dassento āha ‘‘samānasaṃvāsakā eteti diṭṭhi’’nti.Eteti āvāsikā bhikkhū. ‘‘Laddhi’’nti imināna pucchantīti padassa kammaṃ dasseti.Nānāsaṃvāsakabhāvanti tesaṃ laddhinānāsaṃvāsakabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Madditu’’nti iminānābhivitarantīti ettha abhisaddassatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Abhibhavitu’’nti iminā ca tadevatthaṃ dasseti. Nānāsaṃvāsakabhāvassa maddanaṃ nāma laddhinissajjāpananti āha ‘‘taṃ diṭṭhiṃ na nissajjāpentī’’ti.

180. Showing the etymological compound meaning with the elision of the "iti" particle for the term Samānasaṃvāsakadiṭṭhinti, he says, "samānasaṃvāsakā eteti diṭṭhi." Eteti: These resident bhikkhus. By "Laddhi," he shows the object of the word na pucchantī. Nānāsaṃvāsakabhāvanti: The state of being of different association of their views. By "Madditu," he shows the meaning of the "abhi" particle in nābhivitarantī. And by "Abhibhavitu," he shows the same meaning. The crushing of the state of different association is the abandonment of views, he says, "taṃ diṭṭhiṃ na nissajjāpentī."

103. Nagantabbagantabbavārakathā
103. Account of the Section on What Should Not Be Gone To and What Should Be Gone To

181.Sabhikkhukāti padassa saṃvijjanti bhikkhū etasmimāvāseti sabhikkhukoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yasmiṃ āvāse’’tiādi.Yanti āvāsaṃ.Tadahevāti tadahuposathe eva. Iminā sace sakkoti, tadaheva gantuṃ, so gantabboti dasseti. ‘‘Akatvā’’ti iminā katvā pana gantabboti dasseti.‘‘Aññatrā’’ti nipāto ‘‘vinā’’ti nipātassa pariyāyoti āha ‘‘vinā’’ti. Attacatutthena vā attapañcamena vā saṅghena gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Ettha ca‘‘attacatutthena vā’’ti idaṃ uposathakammaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Attapañcamena vā’’ti idaṃ pavāraṇākammaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Vihāreti vihārasīmāya mahāsīmāyanti attho. Idañhi vihārasīmānaṃ abhedena vuttaṃ.Sīmāpīti khaṇḍasīmāpi.Na gantabbāti saṅghassa garukattā na gantabbā.Etthāti khaṇḍasīmādīsu.Tassāti bhikkhussa.Gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti gaṇuposathaṭṭhānato gantuṃ vaṭṭati, saṅghuposathaṭṭhānato pana na vaṭṭatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vissaṭṭhauposathā āvāsāpi aññaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Āraññakenāpīti araññe ekakena nivāsenapi.Tatthāti aññavihāre.Uposathanti saṅghuposathañca gaṇuposathañca.

181. Showing the etymological meaning of the term Sabhikkhukāti as "saṃvijjanti bhikkhū etasmimāvāseti sabhikkhuko," he says, "yasmiṃ āvāse," etc. Yanti: That monastery. Tadahevāti: On that very uposatha day. By this, he shows that if he is able, he should go on that very day; that is what should be gone to. By "Akatvā," he shows that having done it, it should be gone to. ‘‘Aññatrā’’ti: The particle "aññatra" is a synonym for the particle "vinā," he says, "vinā." It is proper to go with at least four or at least five, is the connection. Here, ‘‘attacatutthena vā’’ti is said with reference to the uposatha act. "Attapañcamena vā" should be seen as said with reference to the pavāraṇā act. Vihāreti: In the monastery boundary, the great boundary is the meaning. This is said because monastery boundaries are not different. Sīmāpīti: Even a small boundary. Na gantabbāti: Because the Sangha is venerable, it should not be gone to. Etthāti: In small boundaries, etc. Tassāti: Of that bhikkhu. Gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti: It is appropriate to go from the place of the group uposatha, but it is definitely not appropriate to go from the place of the Sangha uposatha, it should be seen. Monasteries where the uposatha has been abandoned are also appropriate to go to another place, is the connection. Āraññakenāpīti: Even by living alone in the wilderness. Tatthāti: In another monastery. Uposathanti: Both the Sangha uposatha and the group uposatha.

182.Yanti āvāsaṃ.Tatthāti taṃ āvāsaṃ. Gantuṃ sakkomi iti jāneyyāti yojanā.Tatthāti tasmiṃ āvāse. Iminā neva katoti sambandho. Neva kato bhavissati iti jāneyyāti yojanā.

182. Yanti: That monastery. Tatthāti: To that monastery. "I am able to go" should be known, is the connection. Tatthāti: In that monastery. By this, "not done" is connected. "It will not be done" should be known, is the connection.

105. Vajjanīyapuggalasandassanakathā
105. Account of Showing Individuals to Be Avoided

183.Hatthapāsūpagamanamevāti uposathasaṅghādīnaṃ hatthapāsassa upagamanameva. Idaṃ pārivāsiyapārisuddhidānaṃ nāma na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Tassāti pārivāsiyapārisuddhidānassa.Anuposatheti ettha akārassa aññatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aññasmiṃ divase’’ti. Tatthaaññasminti dvīhi uposathehi aññasmiṃ. Yā saṅghasāmaggī kariyati, tathārūpinti yojanā.Kosambakabhikkhūnanti kosambiyaṃ nivāsīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ. Sāmaggī viya yā sāmaggīti yojanā. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā’’ti imināaññatrāti nipātassa atthaṃ dasseti.Ye panāti bhikkhū pana samaggā hontīti sambandho.Uposatheyevāti uposathadivaseyeva.

183.Hatthapāsūpagamanamevāti: Only approaching within arm's reach of the uposatha Sangha, etc. This is called giving pārivāsiya and purity, it is not proper, is the connection. Tassāti: Of that giving of pārivāsiya and purity. Anuposatheti: Here, showing that the "a" means something else, he says, "aññasmiṃ divase." There, aññasminti: On a day other than the two uposatha days. The meaning is, that sort of Sangha unity which is done. Kosambakabhikkhūnanti: Of the bhikkhus residing in Kosambi. That unity which is like unity, is the connection. By "Ṭhapetvā," he shows the meaning of the particle aññatrā. Ye panāti: However, those bhikkhus are united, is the connection. Uposatheyevāti: On the uposatha day itself.

Iti uposathakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the arrangement in the Uposatha Khandhaka.

3. Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakaṃ

3. The Vassūpanāyika Khandhaka

107. Vassūpanāyikānujānanakathā
107. Account of Allowing the Accepting of the Rainy Season Residence

184.Vassūpanāyikakkhandhake ‘‘ananuññāto’’ti imināapaññattoti ettha ñādhātuyā anujānanatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘asaṃvihito’’ti iminā ñādhātuyā ṭhapanatthaṃ.Tedhāti te idha.Idhasaddo sāsanañca lokañca desañca padapūraṇañca upādāya vattati, idha pana padapūraṇeti dassento āha ‘‘idhasaddo nipātamatto’’ti. Saṃhananaṃsaṅghāto,vināsoti attho. Iti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘vināsa’’nti iminā.Sakuntakasaddo sakuṇapariyāyoti āha ‘‘sakuṇā’’ti.Sakuṇāti ca vihaṅgamā. Te hi ākāse gantuṃ sakkontīti sakuṇāti vuccanti.Saṃkasāyissantīti ettha ‘‘saṃ kase acchane’’ti dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 sakārantadhātu) vuttattā saṃpubbo kasedhātu acchanatthoti āha ‘‘vasissantī’’ti. Ekārantoyaṃ dhātu.Nibaddhavāsanti niccavāsaṃ.Vassānanāmaketi vassānautunāmake. Vassānassa catumāsattā ‘‘temāse’’ti vuttaṃ.Vassūpanāyikāti ettha nīdhātu gamanatthoti āha ‘‘vassūpagamanānī’’ti.Aparajjūti puṇṇamito aparaṃ ahanti aparajju, ahatthe jjupaccayo, atthato pāṭipadadivaso. Ayaṃ aparajjusaddo paṭhamantanipāto.Assāti āsaḷhīpuṇṇamiyā. Asamānādhikaraṇavisayo bāhiratthasamāsoyaṃ, atikkantāya satiyāti yojanā.Aparasmiṃ divaseti pāṭipadadivase.Assāti sāvaṇamāsapuṇṇamiyā.Tasmāti yasmā ca aparajjugatā, yasmā ca māsagatā, tasmā. ‘‘Anantare pāṭipadadivase’’ti iminā pāḷiyaṃ aparajjugatāya āsaḷhiyā anantare pāṭipadadivase purimikā upagantabbāti atthaṃ dasseti.Āsaḷhiyāti āsaḷhīpuṇṇamiyā. Pacchimanayepi māsagatāya āsaḷhiyā anantare pāṭipadadivase pacchimikā upagantabbāti attho daṭṭhabbo.Āsaḷhiyāti āsaḷhīpuṇṇamiyā samīpe pavattattā āsaḷhīsaṅkhātāya sāvaṇapuṇṇamiyāti attho. Pāṭipadadivaseyeva vassaṃ upagantabbanti sambandho.Sakiṃ vātiādīsu vāsaddo aniyamavikappattho.Nicchāretvāti niccāretvā, uccāretvāti attho. Aphuṭṭhakkharasaññogehi paro kvaci phuṭṭhattamāpajjati ‘‘nikkhamatī’’tiādīsu viya. Tasmā parassa cakārassa chakāraṃ katvā ‘‘nicchāretvā’’ti vuttaṃ.

184. In the Vassūpanāyikakkhandhaka, "ananuññāto" (unpermitted) here shows the meaning of permission through the root ñā, implying apaññatto (unordained). "Asaṃvihito" (unarranged) here shows the meaning of establishing through the root ñā. Tedhā (threefold) means "te" (those) "idha" (here). The word "idha" (here) occurs referring to the Dispensation (sāsana), the world (loka), the country (desa), and as a mere expletive (padapūraṇa). Here, showing that it is a mere expletive, he says, "The word "idha" is a mere particle." Saṃhananaṃ (destruction) means saṅghāto (crashing together), destruction. "Vināsa" (destruction) shows this meaning. The word Sakuntaka is a synonym for bird (sakuṇa), so he says, "sakuṇā" (birds). Sakuṇā (birds) also means vihaṅgamā (flying creatures). They are called sakuṇa because they are able to go into the sky. Saṃkasāyissantī (will dwell together) here, because in the lists of verbal roots, it is said "saṃ kase acchane" (saṃ kase means to dwell) (Saddanītidhātumālā 16 sakārantadhātu), the verbal root kase preceded by saṃ means dwelling, so he says, "vasissantī" (will dwell). This root ends in a vowel. Nibaddhavāsa (constant dwelling) means niccavāsaṃ (permanent dwelling). Vassānanāmake (named after the rains) means vassānautunāmake (named after the rainy season). Because the rains are four months, it is said "temāse" (three months). Vassūpanāyikā (entering the rains) here, the root nī means going, so he says, "vassūpagamanānī" (the act of entering the rains). Aparajjū (the other night) means the other day from the full moon, aparajju, with the suffix jjupaccayo after ahattha; in meaning, it is the first day of the lunar fortnight. This word aparajju is an indeclinable in the accusative case. Assā (of Āsāḷhī) refers to the full moon of Āsāḷhī. This is an external compound with unequal case endings, to be construed as "atikkantāya satiyā" (when the full moon is past). Aparasmiṃ divase (on the next day) means on the first day of the lunar fortnight. Assā (of Āsāḷhī) refers to the full moon of Sāvaṇa month. Tasmā (therefore) because it is past the other night, and because it is past the month, therefore. "Anantare pāṭipadadivase" (on the immediately following first day) here, in the text, it shows the meaning that the earlier one should be entered on the immediately following first day after the Āsāḷhī that is past the other night. Āsaḷhiyā (of Āsāḷhī) means of the full moon of Āsāḷhī. In the latter method as well, it should be understood that the later one should be entered on the immediately following first day after the Āsāḷhī that is past the month. Āsaḷhiyā (of Āsāḷhī) means the Sāvaṇa full moon called Āsāḷhī, because it occurs near the Āsāḷhī full moon. The connection is that one should enter the rains on the very first day of the lunar fortnight. In "sakiṃ vā" (once or), etc., the word "vā" (or) has the meaning of unrestricted choice. Nicchāretvā (having removed) means niccāretvā (having expelled), meaning uccāretvā (having pronounced). Due to the combination of indistinct letters, sometimes the following letter attains distinctness, as in "nikkhamatī" (goes out), etc. Therefore, having made the cakāra into chakāra, it is said "nicchāretvā" (having removed).

108. Vassānecārikāpaṭikkhepādikathā
108. The Talk Beginning with Rejecting Wandering During the Rains

185.Āpatti veditabbāti anapekkhagamanena upacārātikkame sāpekkhagamanena aññattha aruṇuṭṭhāpane āpatti veditabbā.Vihāragaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbāti ettha vassūpanāyikadivase vassaṃ anupagantukāmatācittena vihāraṃ atikkameyya, vihāragaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘sace hī’’tiādi.Taṃ divasanti tasmiṃ vassūpagamanadivase.Sataṃ āpattiyoti etthasatanti saṅkhyāpadhānattā ekavacananti saddasatthesu vuttaṃ.Ekā eva āpattīti attano vihārassa atikkamaneyeva ekā eva āpatti. Kenaci antarāyena anupagatenāti sambandho.

185. Āpatti veditabbā (an offense should be known): if, by going without regard, one exceeds the boundary, or by going with regard, one raises the dawn elsewhere, an offense should be known. Vihāragaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā (offenses should be known by counting monasteries): here, if on the day of entering the rains, with the intention of not entering the rains, one exceeds the boundary of a monastery, offenses should be known by counting monasteries. Expanding on that very meaning, he says, "sace hi" (if indeed), etc. Taṃ divasaṃ (that day) means on that day of entering the rains. Sataṃ āpattiyo (a hundred offenses): here, in sataṃ (hundred), because the number is primary, it is in the singular, as said in treatises on grammar. Ekā eva āpattī (only one offense): only one offense occurs in exceeding the boundary of one's own monastery. It is connected to "anupagatena kenaci antarāyena" (not entered due to some obstacle).

vassoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vassanāmaka’’nti. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ māsa’’nti iminā aññapadassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Paṭhamaṃ māsanti catūsu vassamāsesu paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ.Ukkaḍḍhitukāmoti upari kaḍḍhitukāmo.Āsaḷhīmāsameva,na sāvaṇamāsanti attho.Juṇhasaddo candapabhāyutto māsoti āha ‘‘māse’’ti. Candapabhāyutto māsoti āha ‘‘māse’’ti. Candapabhāyutto hi māso jotati dippatītijuṇhoti vuccati. Tasmā ‘‘māse’’ti sāmaññato vuttepi puṇṇamiyutto māsova gahetabbo.Kāci parihāni nāmāti kiñci sīlādīnaṃ hāyanaṃ nāma.Aññasmimpīti vassūpagamanato aññasmimpi.Dhammiketi dhammena yutte.

Showing the meaning of the word vasso (rains), he says, "vassanāmaka" (named after the rains). "Paṭhamaṃ māsa" (first month) here shows the form of the other word. Paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ (the first month) means the first month among the four months of the rains. Ukkaḍḍhitukāmo (desiring to extend) means upari kaḍḍhitukāmo (desiring to draw upwards). Āsaḷhīmāsameva (only the month of Āsāḷhī), not the month of Sāvaṇa, is the meaning. The word juṇha means a month endowed with moonlight, so he says, "māse" (in the month). A month endowed with moonlight shines and gleams, therefore it is called juṇho (bright). Therefore, even when "māse" (in the month) is said generally, only a month endowed with the full moon should be taken. Kāci parihāni nāmā (some decline): some falling away of virtue (sīla), etc., is meant. Aññasmimpī (even in another) means even in another than entering the rains. Dhammike (righteous) means yutte dhammena (endowed with virtue).

109. Sattāhakaraṇīyānujānanakathā
109. The Talk on Allowing a Week's Business

187.Sattāhakaraṇīyesu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Sattāhakaraṇīyenā’’ti padassa sattamīsamāsañca anīyasaddassa kammatthañca dassento āha ‘‘sattāhabbhantare yaṃ kattabba’’nti. Tattha ‘‘sattāhabbhantare’’ti iminā sattamīsamāsaṃ dasseti, ‘‘kattabba’’nti iminā kammatthaṃ. ‘‘Sattāhabbhantare’’ti iminā sattāhassa abbhantaraṃsattāhanti uttarapadalopaṃ dasseti.Pahite gantunti ettha pahitesaddassa kattukammāni dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuādīhi dūte’’ti. Tattha ‘‘bhikkhuādīhī’’ti iminā kattāraṃ dasseti, ‘‘dūte’’ti iminā kammaṃ.Sattāhanti ettha uttarapadalopañca bhummatthe upayogavacanañca dassento āha ‘‘antosattāheyevā’’ti.Tatthevāti tasmiṃ pahitaṭṭhāneyeva. ‘‘Na uṭṭhāpetabbo’’ti iminā ‘‘sattāheyevā’’ti ettha evasaddassa phalaṃ dasseti.

187. Thus, the judgment should be understood regarding a week's business. Showing that the phrase "sattāhakaraṇīyena" (with a week's business) is a locative compound and that the word "anīyassa" (of what should be done) is in the objective sense, he says, "sattāhabbhantare yaṃ kattabbaṃ" (that which should be done within a week). There, "sattāhabbhantare" (within a week) shows the locative compound, and "kattabbaṃ" (should be done) shows the objective sense. "Sattāhabbhantare" (within a week) here shows the elision of the final word, "sattāha" (week). Pahite gantuṃ (to go to one sent for): here, to show the agent and object of the word pahite, it is said, "bhikkhuādīhi dūte" (by monks, etc., to a messenger). There, "bhikkhuādīhi" (by monks, etc.) shows the agent, and "dūte" (to a messenger) shows the object. Sattāhaṃ (a week) here, showing the elision of the final word and the use in the sense of abundance, he says, "antosattāheyeva" (within the week itself). Tattheva (right there) means in that very place to which one was sent. "Na uṭṭhāpetabbo" (should not be made to leave) here shows the result of the word "eva" (only) in "sattāheyeva" (within the week itself).

189.Raso etasmiṃ atthītirasavatīti vutte bhattagehaṃ gahetabbanti āha ‘‘bhattagehaṃ vuccatī’’ti.Bhattagehanti bhattapacanagehaṃ.Purāyaṃ suttantoti ettha purā ayanti padacchedaṃ katvā purāsaddo yāvapariyāyoti āha ‘‘yāva ayaṃ suttanto’’ti. Napalujjatīti ettha lujadhātu vināsatthoti āha ‘‘na vinassatī’’ti.Parisaṅkhatanti parisaṅkharitabbaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu pahitesu.Imināva kappiyavacanenāti iminā eva kappiyena tivākyasaṅkhātena vacanena.Etesanti etesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vākyānaṃ.Vevacanenāti ‘‘yaññañca yajituṃ, suttañca uggaṇhituṃ, samaṇe ca dassitu’’nti pariyāyena.Sattasūti upāsaka upāsika bhikkhubhikkhunī sikkhamāna sāmaṇera sāmaṇerī saṅkhātāsu sattasu.

189. Rasavatī (rich in flavor) means, having said that rasa (flavor) exists in this, one should take it to mean the refectory, so he says, "bhattagehaṃ vuccatī" (it is called the refectory). Bhattagehaṃ (refectory) means bhattapacanagehaṃ (the house where food is cooked). Purāyaṃ suttanto (formerly this discourse) here, having split the words into purā ayaṃ, the word purā is a synonym for "yāva" (as long as), so he says, "yāva ayaṃ suttanto" (as long as this discourse). Na palujjatī (is not destroyed) here, the verbal root luj means destruction, so he says, "na vinassatī" (is not destroyed). Parisaṅkhataṃ (to be refurbished) means parisaṅkharitabbaṃ (should be refurbished). Sabbattha (everywhere) means in all places to which one has been sent for. Imināva kappiyavacanena (by this very allowable statement) means by this very allowable statement consisting of three sentences. Etesaṃ (of these) means of these three sentences. Vevacanena (by repetition) means by the synonym "yaññañca yajituṃ, suttañca uggaṇhituṃ, samaṇe ca dassituṃ" (to sacrifice a sacrifice, to learn a sutta, and to show to ascetics). Sattasu (in seven) refers to the seven designated as: upāsaka, upāsika, bhikkhu, bhikkhunī, sikkhamāna, sāmaṇera, sāmaṇerī.

110. Pañcannaṃ appahitepi anujānanakathā
110. The Talk on Allowing (Departure) Even When Not Sent For, in Five Instances

193.Pageva pahiteti iminā ‘‘apahitepi gantabba’’nti ettha pisaddassa sambhāvanatthaṃ dasseti. Pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ santikaṃ gantabbabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘bhikkhu gilāno hotī’’tiādi.Dasahīti ‘‘saṅgho kammaṃ kattukāmo hoti, kataṃ vā saṅghena kammaṃ hotī’’ti idaṃ aṅgaṃ ekaṃ katvā dasahi.Navahīti parivāsārahaṃ apanetvā navahi.Catūhīti gilānaanabhiratikukkuccadiṭṭhigatauppannasaṅkhātehi catūhi. Iti imehi chahīti yojanā.Sāmaṇerassapi chahīti ettha channaṃ sarūpaṃ vitthāretvā dassento āha ‘‘ādito’’tiādi. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.Sāmaṇeriyāsantikaṃ pañcahi gantabbanti yojanā.Paratoti parasmā, parasmiṃ vā. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Ye ñātakā vā ye aññātakā vā atthi, tesampīti yojanā.Tanti vacanaṃ.

193. Pageva pahite (indeed, even when sent for) here shows that the word "pi" (even) in "apahitepi gantabba" (one may go even when not sent for) has the meaning of probability. Distinguishing and showing the reason for the necessity of going to the presence of five co-religionists, he says, "bhikkhu gilāno hoti" (a monk is ill), etc. Dasahī (with ten) means having made this factor one, namely, "saṅgho kammaṃ kattukāmo hoti, kataṃ vā saṅghena kammaṃ hoti" (the Sangha wishes to do an act, or an act has been done by the Sangha), with ten. Navahī (with nine) means with nine, excluding one deserving of probation (parivāsa). Catūhī (with four) means with four, namely, illness, discontent, remorse, and arising of wrong views. Thus, with these six, is the connection. Sāmaṇerassapi chahī (for a novice as well, with six) here, expanding and showing the nature of the six, he says, "ādito" (from the beginning), etc. That is very easy to understand. It should be connected as "sāmaṇeriyā santikaṃ pañcahi gantabbaṃ" (one should go to the presence of a female novice with five). Parato (from another) means from another person, or in another instance. It is connected to "Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ" (it is said in the Andhaka commentary). It should be connected as "ye ñātakā vā ye aññātakā vā atthi, tesampī" (even for those who are relatives or those who are strangers). Taṃ (that) is a word.

112. Pahiteyevaanujānanakathā
112. The Talk on Allowing (Departure) Only When Sent For

199.Bhikkhugatikoti bhikkhu eva gati patiṭṭhā etassāti bhikkhugatikoti vutte bhikkhunissitako purisoti āha ‘‘bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ vasanakapuriso’’ti.Palujjatīti vinassati.Bhaṇḍaṃ chedāpitanti ettha bhaṇḍasaddo parikkhārattho eva, na mūladhanatthoti āha ‘‘dabbasambhārabhaṇḍa’’nti.Chedāpitanti curādigaṇikadhātuṃ ‘‘chindāpita’’nti rudhādigaṇikadhātuyā vaṇṇeti.Dajjāhanti ekāralopasandhīti āha ‘‘dajje aha’’nti. ‘‘Dajjeha’’ntipi pāṭho. Evañhi sati akāralopasandhi.Dajjeti dadeyyaṃ, dadāmi vā.Saṅghakaraṇīyenāti saṅghassa kātabbena kiccena. Tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yaṃkiñcī’’tiādi. Tattha yaṃkiñci kātabbanti yojanā.Cetiyachattavedikādīsūti cetiyassa chatte ca vedikāya ca. Ādisaddena sudhālimpādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Tassāti saṅghakaraṇīyassa. Nipphādanatthaṃ gantabbanti sambandho.

199. Bhikkhugatiko (having a monk as his recourse) means bhikkhū eva gati patiṭṭhā etassāti bhikkhugatikoti vutte bhikkhunissitako purisoti āha "bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ vasanakapuriso" (a man who lives together with monks). Palujjatī (is destroyed) means vinassati (perishes). Bhaṇḍaṃ chedāpitaṃ (the goods were cut off) here, the word bhaṇḍa only has the meaning of requisites, not of capital, so he says, "dabbasambhārabhaṇḍa" (goods and equipment). Chedāpitaṃ (caused to be cut off) construes the verbal root from the curādigaṇa as "chindāpitaṃ" (caused to be cut off) using a verbal root from the rudhādigaṇa. Dajjāhaṃ (I would give) is a contraction with elision of a vowel, so he says, "dajje ahaṃ" (I would give). "Dajjehaṃ" is also a reading. For in that case, it is a contraction with elision of a vowel. Dajje (I would give) means dadeyyaṃ (I should give), or dadāmi vā (I give). Saṅghakaraṇīyena (by a task of the Sangha) means saṅghassa kātabbena kiccena (by a task to be done by the Sangha). Showing that meaning, he says, "yaṃkiñcī" (whatever), etc. There, "yaṃkiñci kātabbaṃ" (whatever should be done) is the connection. Cetiyachattavedikādīsu (in the umbrella and railing of a shrine) means cetiyassa chatte ca vedikāya ca (in the umbrella and in the railing of a shrine). The word ādi (etc.) includes plastering with lime, etc. Tassā (for that) refers to a task of the Sangha. It is connected as "nipphādanatthaṃ gantabbaṃ" (one should go for the purpose of accomplishing).

Etthāti vassūpanāyikakkhandhake. ‘‘Animantitenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘gantu’’nti pade bhāvakattā.Gantunti gamituṃ, gamanaṃ vā ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti pade kattā.Paṭhamaṃyevāti dhammassavanato paṭhamameva. Sannipatitabbaṃ iti katikā katā hotīti yojanā.Bhaṇḍakanti cīvarādibhaṇḍakaṃ.Gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti sayameva gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Tatthāti taṃ vihāraṃ. ‘‘Vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā vassacchedo ca āpatti ca na hotīti dasseti.Atthāyapīti pisaddena ‘‘bhaṇḍakaṃ dhovissāmī’’ti atthaṃ apekkhati.Nanti antevāsikaṃ.Vaṭṭatīti ācariyassa āṇāya sattāhe anatikkante vaṭṭati, vassacchedo ca āpatti ca na hoti. Sattāhe atikkante vassacchedova hoti, na āpattīti adhippāyo.

Ettha (here) refers to the Vassūpanāyikakkhandhaka. "Animantitenā" (uninvited) the word functions as the agent in the sense of action in the word "gantu" (to go). Gantuṃ (to go) or gamanaṃ vā (going) is the agent in the phrase "na vaṭṭatī" (is not fitting). Paṭhamaṃyeva (at the very beginning) means at the very beginning of hearing the Dhamma. It should be connected as "sannipatitabbaṃ iti katikā katā hoti" (an agreement has been made to assemble). Bhaṇḍakaṃ (goods) refers to goods such as robes. Gantuṃ na vaṭṭatī (it is not fitting to go) means it is not fitting to go by oneself, this meaning should be understood. Therefore it is said "sace pana" (but if), etc. Tattha (there) means to that monastery. "Vaṭṭatī" (it is fitting) here shows that there is neither a break in the rains nor an offense. Atthāyapī (even for a purpose) the word "pi" (even) implies the purpose, "bhaṇḍakaṃ dhovissāmī" (I will wash the goods). Na (no) refers to a resident pupil (antevāsika). Vaṭṭatī (it is fitting) means it is fitting within seven days by the preceptor's order, and there is neither a break in the rains nor an offense. If seven days have passed, there is only a break in the rains, not an offense, is the idea.

113. Antarāye anāpattivassacchedakathā
113. The Talk on No Offense and Break in the Rains Due to Obstacles

201.Avidūreti āsanne.Tatthāti gāme.Sattāhavārenāti sattāhe ekavārena.Aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabboti vihāre aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo.Tatrevāti gāmeyeva.Mayanti bhikkhū sandhāya vuttaṃ. Punamayanti manusse sandhāya vuttaṃ.Tesaṃyevāti vassacchedabhikkhūnaṃ eva.Tanti salākabhattādiṃ.Vassaggenāti vassagaṇanāya.

201. Avidūre (not far) means āsanne (nearby). Tattha (there) means in the village. Sattāhavārenā (with a week's turn) means once in seven days. Aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo (dawn should be raised) means dawn should be raised in the monastery. Tatreva (right there) means in the village itself. Mayaṃ (we) is said referring to the monks. Again mayaṃ (we) is said referring to the people. Tesaṃyeva (for those very ones) means for those monks who have broken the rains residence. Taṃ (that) refers to food obtained by ticket, etc. Vassaggena (by the rains reckoning) means by the count of rains residences.

Vassāvāsikanti vassāvāsānaṃ dātabbaṃ cīvaraṃ.Tatthāti tasmiṃ vihāre. Yesaṃ pāpitanti sambandho.Vihāreti vuṭṭhitagāmavihāre. Upanikkhittakaṃ bhaṇḍanti sambandho.Idhāti bhikkhuno nivāsaṭṭhāne. Yaṃ cīvarādivebhaṅgiyabhaṇḍaṃ atthi, tanti yojanā.Tatthevāti vuṭṭhitagāmavihāre eva.Itoti khettavatthuādito. Kappiyakārakānaṃ hattheti sambandho.Tatruppādepīti tassa vihārassa dinnakhettavatthuādito uppāde paccayepi. ‘‘Tattheva gantvā apaloketvā bhājetabba’’nti vacanassa yuttiṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṅghikañhī’’tiādi.Antovihāre vāti antosīmāya vā.Ubhayatthāti antosīmabahisīma saṅkhātesu dvīsu ṭhānesu ṭhitaṃ vebhaṅgiyabhaṇḍanti sambandho.

Vassāvāsikaṃ (rains-residence cloth) means cīvaraṃ dātabbaṃ vassāvāsānaṃ (a robe to be given for rains-residences). Tattha (there) means in that monastery. It is connected as "Yesaṃ pāpitaṃ" (to whom it has been delivered). Vihāre (in the monastery) refers to the monastery in the village that has been abandoned. It is connected as "Upanikkhittakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ" (goods that have been deposited). Idha (here) refers to the monk's dwelling place. It is connected as "Yaṃ cīvarādivebhaṅgiyabhaṇḍaṃ atthi, taṃ" (whatever robes and other distributed goods there are). Tattheva (right there) means in the very monastery in the abandoned village. Ito (from this) refers to fields, lands, etc. It is connected as "Kappiyakārakānaṃ hatthe" (in the hands of those who make things allowable). Tatruppādepī (even from the produce there) means even from the produce and requisites from the fields, lands, etc., that have been given to that monastery. Showing the justification for the statement "Tattheva gantvā apaloketvā bhājetabbaṃ" (having gone right there, one should announce and distribute), he says, "saṅghikañhī" (for it belongs to the Sangha). Antovihāre vā (or within the monastery) means or within the boundary. Ubhayattha (in both places) it is connected as "antosīmabahisīma saṅkhātesu dvīsu ṭhānesu ṭhitaṃ vebhaṅgiyabhaṇḍaṃ" (distributed goods located in the two places, namely within the boundary and outside the boundary).

114. Saṅghabhede anāpattivassacchedakathā
114. The Talk on No Offense and Break in the Rains in Case of Schism in the Sangha

202.Bhinnoti ettha tapaccayassa atītatthe ayuttabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhinne saṅghe karaṇīyaṃ natthī’’ti.Yo panāti saṅgho pana. Idaṃ ‘‘bhijjissatī’’tipade kattā, ‘‘āsaṅkito’’tipade kammaṃ. ‘‘Bhijjissatī’’ti iminābhinnoti ettha tapaccayassa anāgatatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dasseti.Bhikkhunīhi saṅgho bhinnoti ettha kiṃ bhikkhunīhi saṅgho bhinnoti daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘na bhikkhunīhi saṅgho bhinnoti daṭṭhabbo’’ti.Etanti bhikkhunīhi abhinnabhāvaṃ.Etā panāti bhikkhuniyo pana.Tantisaṅghaṃ.Etanti ‘‘sambahulāhi bhikkhunīhi saṅgho bhinno’’ti vacanaṃ.

202. Bhinno (split) here, showing the inappropriateness of the suffix "ta" in the past tense, he says, "bhinne saṅghe karaṇīyaṃ natthi" (there is nothing to be done in a Sangha that has split). Yo pana (but that which) means the Sangha which. This is the subject in "bhijjissatī" (will split), and the object in "āsaṅkito" (suspected). Bhijjissatī (will split) here shows that the suffix "ta" in bhinno (split) is used in the future tense. Bhikkhunīhi saṅgho bhinno (the Sangha is split by the nuns) here, he says, "na bhikkhunīhi saṅgho bhinnoti daṭṭhabbo" (the Sangha should not be seen as split by the nuns), to indicate whether the Sangha is split by the nuns. Etaṃ (this) refers to the state of not being split by the nuns. Etā panā (but these) means the nuns. Taṃ (that) refers to the Sangha. Etaṃ (this) refers to the statement "sambahulāhi bhikkhunīhi saṅgho bhinno" (the Sangha is split by many nuns).

115. Vajādīsu vassūpagamanakathā
115. The Talk on Entering the Rains in Enclosures, Etc.

203.‘‘Gopālakānaṃ nivāsaṭṭhāna’’nti iminā gopālakā gāvo viya vaje nivasantīti dasseti.

203. "Gopālakānaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ" (a dwelling place for cowherds) here shows that cowherds live in an enclosure (vaja) like cows.

Upakaṭṭhasaddo āsannapariyāyoti āha ‘‘āsannāyā’’ti.Tatthāti kuṭikāyaṃ.Idhāti imissaṃ kuṭikāyaṃ. Avihārattā ‘‘idhāti’’sāmaññavasena vuttaṃ.Tikkhattunti idaṃ ukkaṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhā hi ‘‘sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā tikkhattuṃ vā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 184) vuttattā sakimpi vaṭṭatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Tampīti sālāsaṅkhepena ṭhitasakaṭampi. ‘‘Ālayo’’ti iminā ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti vacībhedo na kātabboti dasseti.Ālayoti ca satthe ‘‘idha vassaṃ vasissāmī’’ti cittassa allīyanaṃ.Maggapaṭipanneyeva sattheti anādare bhummavacanaṃ.Tatthevāti sattheyeva. Sattho atikkamatīti sambandho.Tatthāti patthitaṭṭhāne.Vippakiratīti visuṃ visuṃ gacchati. Sace agāmake ṭhāne vippakirati, purimaṃ gāmaṃ sannivattitabbaṃ. Na aññagāmaṃ gantabbaṃ.Tatoti gāmato.

The word upakaṭṭha is a synonym for proximity, so he says, "āsannāyā" (nearby). Tattha (there) means in the hut. Idha (here) means in this hut. Because it is not a monastery, it is said by way of a general statement. Tikkhattuṃ (three times) here is said by way of the highest limit. For below it is said, "sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā tikkhattuṃ vā" (once or twice or three times) (mahāva. aṭṭha. 184), therefore it should be understood that even once is allowable. Tampī (even that) refers to a cart that is standing with a covering of branches. "Ālayo" (attachment) here shows that a change of statement should not be made, such as "idha vassaṃ upemī" (I will enter the rains here). Ālayo (attachment) also means the clinging of the mind to the thought, "idha vassaṃ vasissāmī" (I will dwell here for the rains). Maggapaṭipanneyeva satthe (while the caravan is on the road) here, the locative is used in the sense of disregard. Tattheva (right there) means in the caravan itself. It is connected as "Sattho atikkamati" (the caravan moves on). Tattha (there) means in the desired place. Vippakiratī (scatters) means visuṃ visuṃ gacchati (goes separately). If it scatters in a non-village area, one should return to the previous village. One should not go to another village. Tato (from that) means from the village.

Upagantabbanti ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā upagantabbaṃ.Tatthevāti samuddeyeva.Kūlanti tīraṃ. Tañhi kulati udakaṃ āvaratītikūlanti vuccati.Ayañcāti nāvāyaṃ vassūpagamanabhikkhu.Anutīramevāti anukkamena, anusārena vā tīrameva.Aññatthāti paṭhamaladdhagāmato aññasmiṃ ṭhāne.Tatthevāti paṭhamaladdhagāmeyeva.

Upagantabbaṃ means one should approach, saying three times, "I will enter the rains-residence here." Tatthevāti means in that very community. Kūlaṃ means the bank (of a river). For it obstructs and dams up water, therefore it is called kūlaṃ. Ayañcāti refers to the bhikkhu entering rains-residence on a boat. Anutīramevāti means continuously, or according to the course of, along the bank. Aññattha means in a place other than the village first obtained. Tatthevāti means in that very village first obtained.

Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.Pavāretuñca labhatīti ettha casaddo vākyasampiṇḍanattho.Purimesu ca panāti ettha casaddo byatirekattho, panasaddo visesatthajotako.Anāpatti hotīti anāpattimattameva hoti.

Itītiādi is the conclusion. Pavāretuñca labhatīti, here the word "ca" connects the sentences. Purimesu ca panāti, here the word "ca" has the sense of distinction, and "pana" indicates a special meaning. Anāpatti hotīti means there is only no offense.

116. Vassaṃ anupagantabbaṭṭhānakathā
116. Account of Places Unsuitable for Entering the Rains-Residence

204.Rukkhasusīreyevāti rukkhassa vivare eva. Vivarañhi su saṃ irati gacchatītisusīroti vuccati.Padaracchadananti phalakehi chāditaṃ.Pavisanadvāranti pavisananikkhamanadvāraṃ. Pavisanañca nikkhamanañcapavisananti virūpekasesena kātabbaṃ.Khāṇumatthaketi khāṇuno upari.Viṭabhīti viṭaṃ aññamaññavedhanaṃ apati gacchatīti viṭapo, pakārassa bhakāraṃ, itthiliṅgajotakaīpaccayañca katvā viṭabhīti vuccati.Tatthāti aṭṭake.Yassāti bhikkhuno, natthīti sambandho.Pañcannaṃ chadanānanti tiṇapaṇṇaiṭṭhakāsilāsudhāsaṅkhātānaṃ (cūḷava. 303) pañcannaṃ chadanānaṃ. Idañca yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ padaracchadanādīnampi gahitattā.Dvārabandhananti dvārena bandhitabbaṃ.Chavakuṭikāti chavānaṃ sayanaṭṭhāne susāne katā kuṭikā chavakuṭikāti vuccati.Ṭaṅkitamañcādītiādisaddena ṭaṅkitapīṭhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Tatthāti chavakuṭiyaṃ.Aññaṃ kuṭikanti chavakuṭito aññaṃ kuṭikaṃ.Āvaraṇanti bhittiṃ.Dvāranti pavisananikkhamanadvāraṃ.Chattakuṭikā nāmesāti esā chattena katā kuṭikā nāma. Mahantena kapallena kuṭikaṃ katvāti sambandho.

204.Rukkhasusīreyevāti means just in a hollow of a tree. For a hollow goes well and pervades (su saṃ irati gacchati), therefore it is called susīro. Padaracchadanaṃ means covered with planks. Pavisanadvāraṃ means a door for entering and exiting. Pavisanañca nikkhamanañca pavisanaṃ should be done by virūpakasesa.Khāṇumatthaketi means on top of a stump. Viṭabhīti, viṭaṃ means mutual piercing does not go (apati gacchati); viṭapo, changing the pakāra to bhakāra, and adding the īpaccaya indicating the feminine gender, is called viṭabhī. Tatthā means at the platform. Yassāti means of the bhikkhu; natthīti is the connection. Pañcannaṃ chadanānaṃ means of the five kinds of coverings (tiṇa paṇṇa iṭṭhakā silā sudhā saṅkhātānaṃ). And this is said by way of majority, as coverings of planks, etc., are also included. Dvārabandhanaṃ means something to be fastened by a door. Chavakuṭikāti means a hut made in a charnel ground, a place for corpses to lie, is called a chavakuṭikā. Ṭaṅkitamañcādīti, the ādi includes a ṭaṅkitapīṭhaṃ. Tatthā means in the charnel ground hut. Aññaṃ kuṭikaṃ means a hut other than the charnel ground hut. Āvaraṇaṃ means a wall. Dvāraṃ means a door for entering and exiting. Chattakuṭikā nāmesāti means this hut made with a parasol is so called. Katvāti is connected to “having made a hut with a large potsherd.”

117. Adhammikakatikākathā
117. Account of Unjust Agreements

205.Aññāpīti ‘‘antarāvassaṃ na pabbājetabba’’nti katikāya aññāpi. Katikā hotīti sambandho.Tassāti adhammikakatikāya.Vuttanti catutthapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.226) vuttaṃ.

205.Aññāpīti means other than the agreement “one should not ordain during the intervening rains-residence." Katikā hotīti is the connection. Tassāti means of that unjust agreement. Vuttaṃ means it has been said in the description of the Fourth Pārājika (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.226).

118. Paṭissavadukkaṭāpattikathā
118. Account of the Dukkaṭa Offense for Making a Promise

207.Paṭissave āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha kiṃ vassāvāsapaṭissuteyeva dukkaṭāpatti hotīti āha ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi.Etassevāti vassāvāsasseva.Evamādināpīti pisaddo ‘‘paṭissave’’ti ettha yojetabbo. ‘‘Paṭissavepī’’ti hi attho.Tassa tassāti kammassa.Tañca khoti tañca dukkaṭaṃ visaṃvādanapaccayā hotīti yojanā.Paṭhamampīti pisaddo ‘‘pacchāpī’’ti padaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Paṭhamampi hi pācittiyaṃ, pacchāpi dukkaṭanti attho.

207.Paṭissave āpatti dukkaṭassāti, here, he says, "Not only," etc., asking whether there is only a dukkaṭa offense for the promise of a rains-residence. Etassevāti means of that rains-residence itself. Evamādināpīti, the word pi should be connected to "paṭissave." For the meaning is "even in the promise." Tassa tassāti means of that action. Tañca khoti, and that dukkaṭa arises because of deceit, this is the construction. Paṭhamampīti, the word pi combines the word "pacchāpi." The meaning is, "There is a pācittiya offense first, and a dukkaṭa offense later."

So tadaheva akaraṇīyotiādīsu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Purimikā ca na paññāyatīti ettha pure bhavā purimā, sā eva purimikā, pāṭipadatithī. Nānāsīmāya dvīsu āvāsesu vassaṃ upagacchantassa dutiye ‘‘vasissāmī’’ti paṭhamāvāsassa upacārato nikkhantamatte paṭhamasenāsanaggāhassa passambhanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘purimikā ca na paññāyatī’’ti.Aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvāti vassaṃ upagamanavihāre aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvā.Tadahevāti tasmiṃ vassūpagamanaahani eva, pakkantassāpīti sambandho.Pisaddassa garahatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ko pana vādo’’tiādi.Ālayoti cittassa allīyanaṃ.Asatiyāti satipamuṭṭhena.Vassaṃ na upetīti ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 184) vacībhedaṃ katvā vassaṃ na upeti.

So tadaheva akaraṇīyotiādīsu, it should be understood that the decision should be made thus. Purimikā ca na paññāyatīti, here, purimā means existing before, that itself is purimikā, the first lunar day. This was said with reference to the abandonment of the first lodging, when one entering the rains-residence in two dwellings in different boundaries has gone out, as soon as he has left the first dwelling, from the sphere of the first dwelling, "Purimikā ca na paññāyatī." Aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvāti means without establishing the dawn in the monastery where he entered the rains-residence. Tadahevāti means on that very day of entering the rains-residence; it is connected to pakkantassāpi. Showing the sense of contempt with the word pi, he says, "What need be said," etc. Ālayoti means attachment of the mind. Asatiyāti means through loss of mindfulness. Vassaṃ na upetīti means he does not enter the rains-residence, having broken his word, saying, "I will enter the rains-residence for these three months in this monastery" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 184).

Sattāhanti sattāhena, anāgatāyāti sambandho.Navamitoti pubbakattikamāsassa juṇhapakkhanavamito, pacchimakattikamāsassa juṇhapakkhanavamito vā.Mā vā āgacchatu, anāpattīti vassaṃvutthattā mā vā āgacchatu, anāpattīti attho.

Sattāhaṃti means within seven days; it is connected to anāgatāyāti. Navamitoti means from the ninth day of the bright fortnight of the month of Pubbakattika, or from the ninth day of the bright fortnight of the month of Pacchimakattika. Mā vā āgacchatu, anāpattīti, whether he comes or not, there is no offense, because he has spent the rains-residence, this is the meaning.

Iti vassūpanāyikakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Arrangement of the Rains-Residence Chapter.

4. Pavāraṇākkhandhakaṃ

4. The Chapter on the Invitation

120. Aphāsukavihārakathā
120. Account of Uncomfortable Monasteries

209.Pavāraṇākkhandhakeallāpoti ettha ātyūpasaggassa ādikammatthaṃ, lapadhātuyā ca kathanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘paṭhamavacana’’nti. Ādito, ādimhi vā lapanaṃ kathanaṃ, lapati anenāti vāallāposaṃyoge pare rasso. Saṃ puna lapanaṃ, lapati vā anenātisallāpo. Hatthavilaṅghakenāti ettha vipubbo laghidhātu ukkhipanatthoti āha ‘‘hatthukkhepakenā’’ti.Pasusaṃvāsanti etthapasūti sabbacatuppadā. Te hi aññamaññaṃ pasanti bādhanti, manussādīhi vā pasīyanti bādhīyantīti pasavoti vuccanti.Pasūnaṃ viya saṃvāsanti pasūnaṃ saṃvāso viya saṃvāsotipasusaṃvāso,taṃ pasusaṃvāsaṃ. Tamatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘pasavopi hī’’tiādi.Tathāti yathā na karonti, tathāti attho.Etepīti bhikkhavopi.Tasmāti yasmā akaṃsu, tasmā.Nesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu eḷakasaṃvāsasapattasaṃvāsesu.Mūgabbatanti mūgassa vataṃ viya vatanti mūgabbataṃ, suññavacanavatanti attho.Titthiyasamādānanti titthiyehi samādātabbaṃ.Vatasamādānanti samādātabbaṃ vataṃ.Aññamaññānulomatāti ettha tāsaddassa bhāvatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘anulomabhāvo’’ti. Iminā ‘‘devatā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.1; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.evamiccādipāṭhavaṇṇanā; su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.aṅgalasuttavaṇṇanā) viya tāpaccayassa svatthaṃ ‘‘janatā’’tiādīsu (pe. va. aṭṭha. 460) viya samūhatthañca nivatteti. ‘‘Aññamaññaṃ vattu’’nti vacanassa yuttiṃ dassento āha ‘‘vadantu ma’’ntiādi. Vadantaṃ bhikkhuṃ vattunti yojanā. ‘‘Āpattīhi vuṭṭhānabhāvo’’ti imināāpattivuṭṭhānatāti padassa pañcamīsamāsañca tāpaccayassa bhāvatthañca dasseti. ‘‘Vinaya’’ntiādinā purato katvā karaṇaṃpurekkhāro,tassa bhāvopurekkhāratā,vinayaṃ purekkhāratāvinayapurekkhāratāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ettha purasaddassa ekārattaṃ saddasatthesu (moggallānabyākaraṇe 5.134 sutte) vadanti. Tassa yuttiṃ dassento āha ‘‘vadantuma’’ntiādi (moggallānabyākaraṇe 5.134 sutte).

209.In the chapter on the Invitation, allāpoti, here, showing that the āti prefix has the sense of beginning, and the root lapa has the sense of speaking, he says, "the first speaking." Allāpo means speaking or telling at the beginning or in the beginning, or that by which one speaks, with rassa after the consonant in conjunction. Saṃ puna lapanaṃ, lapati vā anenāti sallāpo. Hatthavilaṅghakenati, here, with the prefix vi and the root laghi having the sense of raising, he says, "by raising the hand." Pasusaṃvāsanti, here, pasūti means all quadrupeds. For they mutually harass and injure, or they are harassed or injured by humans, etc., therefore they are called pasavo. Pasūnaṃ viya saṃvāsanti means pasūnaṃ saṃvāso viya saṃvāsoti pasusaṃvāso, that is pasusaṃvāsa. Expanding on that meaning, he says, "For even the quadrupeds," etc. Tathā means just as they do not do, thus is the meaning. Etepīti means even bhikkhus. Tasmā means because they did. Nesanti means of the bhikkhus. Sabbatthāti means in all associations with goats and associations with gamblers. Mūgabbataṃti means a vow like the vow of a mute person, a vow of silent speech, this is the meaning. Titthiyasamādānaṃ means something to be undertaken by sectarians. Vatasamādānaṃ means a vow to be undertaken. Aññamaññānulomatāti, here, showing that the word has the sense of state, he says, "the state of conformity." By this, he refutes that the tāpaccaya has its own meaning as in "devatā," etc., and the sense of a group as in "janatā," etc. Showing the justification for the statement "aññamaññaṃ vattuṃ," he says, "let them say," etc. The construction is, "Let them say to the bhikkhu who speaks." By "the state of rising from offenses," he shows that āpattivuṭṭhānatāti has the pañcamīsamāsa and that the tāpaccaya has the sense of state. Vinayaṃtiādinā, placing it in front, the doing is purekkhāro, its state is purekkhāratā, vinayapurekkhāratāti shows the meaning of the word. Here, they say that the purisa has a single ekāratta in the study of words. Showing its justification, he says, "let them say," etc.

210.Sabbasaṅgāhikāti ‘‘saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti sāmaññato vuttattā sabbesaṃ tevācikādīnaṃ saṅgāhakā.Ñattīti ñāpeti saṅghaṃ etāya vacanāyāti ñatti. Sabbasaṅgāhikabhāvaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘evañhi vutte’’tiādi.Tevācikanti tisso vācā etassāti tevācikaṃ, tīhi vācāhi kattabbanti vā tevācikaṃ. Eseva nayo sesesupi.Samānavassikanti samānaṃ vassaṃ etesanti samānavassā, tehi kattabbanti samānavassikaṃ.Aññanti dvevācikaekavācikaṃ.

210.Sabbasaṅgāhikāti means because it is said generally that "the Sangha should invite," it includes all, those with three statements, etc. Ñattīti means ñāpeti saṅghaṃ etāya vacanāyāti ñatti. Expanding on the inclusive nature, he says, "For when it is said thus," etc. Tevācikaṃti means that which has three statements, or that which should be done with three statements. The same method applies to the rest as well. Samānavassikaṃti means those who have the same rains-residence, or that which should be done by them. Aññaṃ means two statements or one statement.

211.Acchantīti ettha āsadhātuyā upavesanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘nisinnāva hontī’’ti. ‘‘Na uṭṭhahantī’’ti iminā evaphalaṃ dasseti.Tadamantarāti ettha ‘‘tadantarā’’ti vattabbe vācāsiliṭṭhavasena makārāgamaṃ katvā vuttanti āha ‘‘tadantarā’’ti. Tassa attano pavāritakālassa antarā.‘‘Yāva pavārentī’’ti padassa niyamatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tāvatakaṃ kāla’’nti.Yāvāti nipātassa payogattā ‘‘tadamantarā’’ti ettha abhividhiavadhyatthe pañcamīvibhatti hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

211.Acchantīti, here, showing that the root āsa has the sense of sitting, he says, "they remain seated." By "na uṭṭhahantī," he shows the result of eva. Tadamantarāti, here, he says "tada antarā" because it is said by way of embellishment of speech by adding the makārāgama where "tadantarā" should have been said. In between that time of his invitation. To show the restriction of the phrase "yāva pavārentī," it is said "that much time." Because of the use of the particle yāva, it should be seen that here in "tadamantarā," the ablative case is in the sense of delimitation.

121. Pavāraṇābhedakathā
121. Account of Divisions of the Invitation

212.Cātuddasikāyāti bhaṇḍanakārakehi upaddutattā paccukkaḍḍhitāya pubbakattikamāsassa kāḷapakkhacātuddasikāya. ‘‘Ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī’’ti pubbakiccaṃ kātabbanti yojanā.

212.Cātuddasikāyāti means on the fourteenth day of the dark fortnight of the month of Pubbakattika, which was drawn back due to being disturbed by quarrelsome people. "Today is the fifteenth day, invitation," the preliminary duties should be done, this is the construction.

Pavāraṇākammesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, ‘‘adhammena vaggaṃ pavāraṇākamma’’ntiādīsu sambandhitabbaṃ.Adhammena vagganti etthaadhammaṃnāma saṅgho hutvāpi saṅghapavāraṇamakatvā gaṇapavāraṇāya karaṇaṃ, gaṇo hutvāpi gaṇapavāraṇamakatvā saṅghapavāraṇāya karaṇañca. Vaggaṃ nāma ekasīmāyaṃ vasantānampi sabbesaṃ ekato asannipatanaṃ.

Pavāraṇākammesūti, the locative is in the sense of determination, it should be connected to "invitation activity divided by unrighteousness," etc. Adhammena vaggaṃti, here adhammaṃnāma means even being the Sangha, doing the invitation of a group without doing the Sangha's invitation, and even being a group, doing the Sangha's invitation without doing the invitation of a group. Vaggaṃ nāma means even for all those living in one boundary, not all assembling together.

Adhammena samagganti ettha adhammaṃ vuttanayameva.Samaggaṃnāma sabbesaṃ ekato sannipatanaṃ.

Adhammena samaggaṃti, here adhammaṃ is in the same way as said before. Samaggaṃ nāma means all assembling together.

Dhammena vagganti etthadhammaṃnāma saṅgho hutvā saṅghapavāraṇāya karaṇaṃ, gaṇo hutvā gaṇapavāraṇāya karaṇañca.Vaggaṃvuttanayameva.Dhammena samaggaṃsuviññeyyameva.Itisaddo parisamāpanattho.

Dhammena vaggaṃti, here dhammaṃ nāma means even being the Sangha, doing the Sangha's invitation, and even being a group, doing the invitation of a group. Vaggaṃ is in the same way as said before. Dhammena samaggaṃ is very easy to understand. The word Iti has the sense of completion of the assembly.

213.Evaṃ dinnāyāti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttanayeneva dinnāya.Pavāretabbanti vassaṃvutthapavāraṇāya pavāretabbaṃ.Tissoti tissanāmako. Diṭṭhena vā vadatūti sambandho.Tanti tissanāmakaṃ bhikkhuṃ. Saṅgho anukampaṃ upādāya vadatūti yojanā.Vuḍḍhataroti pavāraṇādāyako taṃhārakato vuḍḍhataro.ti laddhaguṇo.Tenāti pavāraṇāhārakena.Tassāti pavāraṇādāyakassa.

213.Evaṃ dinnāyāti means in the same way as said in the pāḷi. Pavāretabbaṃ means should be invited by the rains-residence invitation. Tissoti means named Tissa. Let the Sangha speak, considering compassion, this is the construction. Vuḍḍhataroti means older than the giver of the invitation in terms of holding to that. ti means having acquired qualities. Tenāti means by the receiver of the invitation. Tassāti means of the giver of the invitation.

Idhāpi cāti imasmiṃ pavāraṇākkhandhakepi ca. Apisaddo uposathakkhandhakaṃ apekkhati.Avasesakammatthāyāti pavāraṇākammato avasesānaṃ kammānamatthāya hotīti sambandho. Pavāraṇāya āhaṭāya satiyāti yojanā.Tassa cāti pavāraṇādāyakassa ca.Sabbesanti pavāraṇādāyakassa ca saṅghassa cāti sabbesaṃ.Aññaṃ pana kammanti pavāraṇākammato aññaṃ kammaṃ pana.Tena pana bhikkhunāti pavāraṇādāyakena bhikkhunā pana. Ettha ca tadahupavāraṇāya attano ca saṅghassa ca sace pavāraṇākammameva hoti, pavāraṇāyeva dātabbā. Atha aññameva kammaṃ hoti, chandoyeva dātabbo. Yadi pavāraṇākammañca aññakammañca hoti, pavāraṇā ca chando ca dātabbo. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘tadahu pavāraṇāya pavāraṇaṃ dentena chandampi dātu’’nti (mahāva. 213).Tenāti dānahetunā.

Idhāpi cāti, and even in this chapter on the Invitation. The word api refers to the chapter on the Observance Day. Avasesakammatthāyāti, it is connected to "it is for the purpose of the remaining activities from the invitation activity." Iti yojanā, pavāraṇāya āhaṭāya satiyāti. Tassa cāti, and of the giver of the invitation. Sabbesaṃti means of the giver of the invitation and of the Sangha. Aññaṃ pana kammaṃti means an activity other than the invitation activity. Tena pana bhikkhunāti means by that bhikkhu who is the giver of the invitation. Here, if on that day of the invitation, only the invitation activity is to be done for himself and for the Sangha, only the invitation should be given. But if there is another activity, only consent should be given. If there is the invitation activity and another activity, both the invitation and the consent should be given. With that in mind, it is said "when giving the invitation on that day of the invitation, he should also give consent" (mahāva. 213). Tenāti means because of the giving.

218.Ajja me pavāraṇāti ettha pāḷinayato aññaṃ aṭṭhakathānayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace’’tiādi.

218.Ajja me pavāraṇāti, here, showing a method in accordance with the commentaries that is different from the pāḷi, he says, "If," etc.

219.Vuttanayamevāti uposathakkhandhake (mahāva. aṭṭha. 169) vuttanayameva.

219.Vuttanayamevāti means in the same way as said in the chapter on the Observance Day (mahāva. aṭṭha. 169).

222.Puna pavāretabbanti ettha na kevalaṃ pavāraṇāyeva puna kātabbā, pubbakiccādīnipi puna kātabbānīti dassento āha ‘‘puna pubbakicca’’ntiādi.

222.Puna pavāretabbaṃti, here, showing that not only should the invitation be done again, but the preliminary duties, etc., should also be done again, he says, "again the preliminary duties," etc.

228.Eseva nayoti ‘‘ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī’’ti pubbakiccaṃ atidisati.Assāti vacanassa.Ñattinti ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho ajja pavāraṇā’’ti ñattiṃ.Pacchimehīti pacchimavassaṃ upagatehi bhikkhūhi.Uposathaggeti uposathassa gaṇhanaṭṭhāne gehe.Dve ñattiyoti pavāraṇāñatti ca uposathañatti cāti dve ñattiyo.Idañcāti idaṃ vakkhamānaṃ pana.Etthāti purimikapacchimikabhikkhūnaṃ saṃsaggaṭṭhāne.Purimikāya upagatehīti vibhattaapādānaṃ anumeyyavisayaapādānaṃ, thokatarāti sambandho, sahādiyogo vā, samasamāti sambandho.Samasamāti samena, samato vā samā samasamā, atirekasamāti attho. Kiñci ūnaṃ vā adhikaṃ vā natthīti adhippāyo.Itīti idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ.

228.Eseva nayoti means he extends the preliminary duty, "today is the fifteenth day, invitation." Assāti means of the statement. Ñattiṃti means the proclamation "bhante, may the Sangha hear me, today is the invitation." Pacchimehīti means by the bhikkhus who entered the rains-residence later. Uposathaggeti means in the house, the place for taking up the Observance Day. Dve ñattiyoti means two proclamations, the proclamation of the invitation and the proclamation of the Observance Day. Idañcāti, and this one which will be said. Etthāti means at the place of mingling of the early and late bhikkhus. Purimikāya upagatehīti means by those who have entered the rains-residence earlier; vibhattaapādānaṃ anumeyyavisayaapādānaṃ, it is connected to thokatarāti, or it is an association with sahādi, it is connected to samasamāti. Samasamāti means samā equal or from equal, samasamā, meaning more than equal. The intention is that there is nothing somewhat less or more. Itīti means this characteristic.

Soti pacchimiko bhikkhu.Itarenāti pacchimikena.Tesanti purimikānaṃ.Ekenāti purimikena.Ekassāti pacchimikassa. Punaekenāti pacchimikena. ‘‘Ekassā’’ti anuvattetabbo, purimikassāti attho. Purimavassūpagatehi adhikatarāti sambandho.Thokatarehīti pacchimavassūpagatehi thokatarehi purimavassūpagatehīti yojanā.

Soti means that later bhikkhu. Itarenāti means by the later bhikkhu. Tesaṃti means of the earlier ones. Ekenāti means by one earlier. Ekassāti means of the later one. Again, ekenāti means by one later. "Ekassā" should be supplied, meaning of the earlier one. It is connected to "more numerous than by those who entered the rains-residence earlier." Thokatarehīti, those who entered the rains-residence later, by those fewer who entered the rains-residence earlier, this is the construction.

Kattikāyāti pacchimakattikāya.Cātumāsiniyā pavāraṇāyāti catunnaṃ māsānaṃ pūraṇiyā pavāraṇāya.Pavāraṇāñattiṃ ṭhapetvāti samasamā hutvāpi pavāraṇādivasattā pavāraṇāñattiṃ ṭhapetvā.Tehīti pacchimikehi.Itarehīti purimikehi.Tesanti pacchimikānaṃ.Thokatarā vāti ekādinā thokatarā vā.Tesanti purimikānaṃ.Tehīti pacchimikehi.

Kattikāyā: means the latter Kattikā. Cātumāsiniyā pavāraṇāyā: means the Pavāraṇā completing four months. Pavāraṇāñattiṃ ṭhapetvā: even though they are in harmony, having set aside the Pavāraṇā motion due to it being the Pavāraṇā day. Tehī: by the latter ones. Itarehī: by the former ones. Tesa: of the latter ones. Thokatarā vā: or slightly less by one day, etc. Tesa: of the former ones. Tehī: by the latter ones.

233.Saṅghasāmaggiyāti ettha kīdisī saṅghasāmaggī veditabbāti āha ‘‘kosambakasāmaggīsadisāva veditabbā’’ti.Etthāti sāmaggīpavāraṇāyaṃ.Appamattaketi pattacīvarādiṃ paṭicca uppanne appamattake vivāde.Pavāraṇāyamevāti pavāraṇādivaseyeva. Kasmiṃ divase sāmaggīpavāraṇā kātabbāti āha ‘‘sāmaggīpavāraṇa’’ntiādi.Paṭhamapavāraṇanti pubbakattikapuṇṇamiṃ.Yāva kattikacātumāsinī puṇṇamāti ayaṃ avadhi anabhividhiavadhi nāma. Kasmā? Kattikacātumāsinipuṇṇamiṃ ṭhapetvā antoyeva gahetabbattā.Etthantareti etasmiṃ dvinnaṃ puṇṇaminamantare aṭṭhavīsatipamāṇe divase kātabbā.Tatoti etthantarasaṅkhātā aṭṭhavīsadivasato.

233.Saṅghasāmaggiyā: Here, what kind of Saṅgha harmony should be understood? He says, "It should be understood as similar to the Kosambaka harmony." Etthā: in this harmony Pavāraṇā. Appamattake: in a minor dispute that has arisen regarding a bowl, robe, etc. Pavāraṇāyamevā: on the day of Pavāraṇā itself. On what day should the harmony Pavāraṇā be performed? He says, "sāmaggīpavāraṇa," etc. Paṭhamapavāraṇa: the full moon of the former Kattikā. Yāva kattikacātumāsinī puṇṇamā: this limit is called a non-inclusive limit. Why? Because it must be taken only within, excluding the full moon of the Kattikā Cātumāsinī. Etthantare: it should be done within this interval, approximately twenty-eight days between the two full moons. Tato: from the twenty-eight days considered as this interval.

140. Dvevācikādipavāraṇākathā
140. The Dvevācikādi Pavāraṇā Talk

234.Ñattiṃ ṭhapentenāpītipisaddo na kevalaṃ pavārentena eva dvevācikaṃ pavāretabbaṃ, atha kho ñattiṃ ṭhapentenāpi dvevācikañattiyeva ṭhapetabbāti dasseti.Ettha cāti ‘‘samānavassikaṃ pavāretu’’nti pāṭhe ca.Samānavassikāti gaṇanavasena samānaṃ vassaṃ etesanti samānavassikā, samāne vasse upasampādentīti vā samānavassikā.Ekatoti ekasmiṃ khaṇe, ekapahārena vā.

234.Ñattiṃ ṭhapentenāpī: the word pi indicates that not only the one who is making Pavāraṇā should make a two-recitation Pavāraṇā, but also the one who is establishing the motion should establish a two-recitation motion. Ettha cā: and here in the reading "samānavassikaṃ pavāretu." Samānavassikā: those who have the same year in terms of calculation are samānavassikā, or those who were ordained in the same year are samānavassikā. Ekato: at one moment, or with one strike.

141. Pavāraṇāṭṭhapanakathā
141. The Pavāraṇā Establishment Talk

236.Sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhātītisabbasaṅgāhikaṃ. Puggalassa ṭhapanaṃpuggalikaṃ. Tatthāti dvīsu pavāraṇāṭṭhapanesu. Sabbasaṅgāhike ṭhapitā hotīti sambandho. Yāva rekāro atthi, tāvāti yojanā. Bhāsiyitthātibhāsitā. Lapiyitthātilapitā. Na pariyosiyitthātiapariyositā. Etthantareti etasmiṃ sukārarekārānaṃ antare.Ekapadepītipisaddo ekakkharepīti atthaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Ṭhapitāti ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, itthannāmo puggalo sāpattiko, tassa pavāraṇaṃ ṭhapemī’’ti ñattiyā ṭhapitā.Yyakāreti ‘‘pavāreyyā’’ti ettha yyakāre.Tatoti yyakārato. Puggalikaṭṭhapane pana aṭṭhapitā hotīti sambandho.Saṃkāratoti ‘‘saṅghaṃ bhante’’ti ettha saṃkārato.Sabbapacchimoti tīsu vāresu tatiyavāre sabbesaṃ akkharānaṃ pacchimo ṭikāro atthīti yojanā.Etthantareti etasmiṃ saṃkāraṭikārānaṃ antare.Tasmāti yasmā pariyositā hoti, tasmā. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti vuttavacanaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘etāsupi hī’’tiādi. Tatthaetāsupīti dvevācikaekavācikasamānavassikāsupi. Pisaddo tevācikamapekkhati.Ṭhapanakhettanti ṭhapanassa bhūmi.Itisaddo parisamāpanattho.

236.Sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhātīti: sabbasaṅgāhikaṃ (that which includes everything). Puggalassa ṭhapanaṃ: puggalikaṃ (pertaining to an individual). Tatthā: there, in these two Pavāraṇā establishments. The connection is: it is established in the sabbasaṅgāhika. The interpretation is: as long as the rekā is there. Bhāsiyitthāti: bhāsitā (spoken). Lapiyitthāti: lapitā (uttered). Na pariyosiyitthāti: apariyositā (not concluded). Etthantare: in this interval between su and the rekā. Ekapadepī: the word pi combines the meaning "even in one syllable." Ṭhapitā: established by the motion, "Bhante, may the Saṅgha listen to me, a person named so-and-so is sāpattika, I am establishing his Pavāraṇā." Yyakāre: in the yyakāra in "pavāreyyā." Tato: from that yyakāra. But in the individual establishment, it is not established. Saṃkārato: from the saṃkāra in "saṅghaṃ bhante." Sabbapacchimo: in the third of the three times, the very last ṭikāra of all the syllables is there. Etthantare: in this interval between the saṃkāra and the ṭikāra. Tasmā: therefore, because it is concluded. Expanding on the statement "Eseva nayo," he says, "etāsupi hī," etc. There, etāsupī: even in the two-recitation, one-recitation, and samānavassikā. The pi anticipates the three-recitation. Ṭhapanakhetta: the ground for establishment. The word iti is for concluding the section.

237.Anuyuñjiyamānoti ettha anuyuñjasaddo pucchanatthoti āha ‘‘pucchiyamāno’’ti.Paratoti parasmiṃyeva khandhaketi (mahāva. 237) attho.Alaṃ bhikkhu mā bhaṇḍanantiādīnīti ettha ādisaddena ‘‘mā kalahaṃ, mā vivāda’’ntivacanāni saṅgaṇhāti, vacanāni vatvā omadditvāti yojanā.Vacanomaddanāti vacaneneva omaddanā.ti saccaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ pavāraṇāṭṭhapanaṭṭhāne.Anuddhaṃsitaṃ paṭijānātīti ettha paṭijānanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘amūlakena pārājikena anuddhaṃsito ayaṃ mayā’’ti. ‘‘Liṅganāsanāyā’’ti iminā daṇḍakammanāsanasaṃvāsanāsanāni nivatteti.

237.Anuyuñjiyamāno: here, the word anuyuñja has the meaning of questioning, so he says, "pucchiyamāno" (being questioned). Parato: the meaning is "only in the subsequent Khandhaka" (Mahāva. 237). Alaṃ bhikkhu mā bhaṇḍanantiādīnī: here, with the word ādi, he includes the statements "mā kalahaṃ, mā vivāda" (do not quarrel, do not dispute), having said the statements, having suppressed. Vacanomaddanā: suppression by words. Hī: truly. Idhā: here, in this place of Pavāraṇā establishment. Anuddhaṃsitaṃ paṭijānātī: here, showing the way of acknowledging, he says, "I have not accused him with a baseless pārājika." By "Liṅganāsanāyā," he excludes daṇḍakamma, nāsanā, and saṃvāsa nāsanā.

238.Etanti ‘‘asukā āpattī’’ti vacanaṃ.Kalahassa mukhanti kalahassa upāyo.

238.Eta: this statement "asukā āpattī" (such and such offense). Kalahassa mukha: the means of quarrel.

143. Vatthuṭṭhapanādikathā
143. The Vatthu Establishment, etc. Talk

239.Corā agamaṃsu kirāti sambandho. Pokkharaṇito nīharitvāti sambandho.Soti bhikkhu, evamāhāti sambandho.Vutthenāti vasantena, yena kenaci katanti sambandho.Taṃ puggalanti vatthukataṃ taṃ puggalaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘vatthuṃ ṭhapetvā saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti pāṭhe. Iminā vatthunā apadisāhīti sambandho.Nanti puggalaṃ.Anuvijjitvāti anuyuñjitvā, pucchitvāti attho.

239.The connection is "corā agamaṃsu kira" (thieves came, it seems). The connection is "pokkharaṇito nīharitvā" (having taken it out of the pond). So: that bhikkhu, the connection is "evamāhāti" (said thus). Vutthenā: by one who has stayed, the connection is "yena kenaci katanti" (done by someone). Taṃ puggala: that person who is the subject matter. Etthā: here, in the reading "vatthuṃ ṭhapetvā saṅgho pavāreyyā" (having established the subject matter, may the Saṅgha make Pavāraṇā). The connection is "apadisāhīti" (he offended) with this subject matter. Na: not the person. Anuvijjitvā: without investigating, meaning without questioning.

Tassāti bhikkhussa.Tadanurūpoti tesaṃ pūjanapivanānaṃ anurūpo.Soti codako bhikkhu.Taṃ gandhanti taṃ sarīragandhaṃ. Yaṃ puggalanti yojanā.Ṭhapesīti pavāraṇāya ṭhapesi.Ayamassāti ayaṃ doso assa puggalassa.

Tassā: of that bhikkhu. Tadanurūpo: appropriate to those foods and drinks. So: that accusing bhikkhu. Taṃ gandha: that body odor. The connection is "yaṃ puggalaṃ" (which person). Ṭhapesī: he established it for Pavāraṇā. Ayamassā: this fault is of that person.

Idāneva nanti ettha ‘‘na’’nti padaṃ ‘‘puggala’’nti padena yojetabbaṃ. Naṃ puggalanti hi attho.Ubhayanti vatthuñca puggalañcāti ubhayaṃ.Kallaṃ vacanāyāti yuttaṃ kathetuṃ. Kasmā kallaṃ vacanāyāti yojanā. Pavāraṇato pubbe, pacchā cāti sambandho. Iti tasmā kallaṃ vacanāyāti yojanā.Idañhi ubhayanti vatthupuggalasaṅkhātaṃ idameva ubhayaṃ. Pavāraṇāya pubbeti yojanā.Ukkoṭentassāti cālentassa.

Idāneva na: here, the word "na" should be connected to the word "puggala." The meaning is "naṃ puggalaṃ" (not the person). Ubhaya: both the subject matter and the person. Kallaṃ vacanāyā: it is proper to speak. The connection is "Kasmā kallaṃ vacanāyāti" (why is it proper to speak?). The connection is "Pavāraṇato pubbe, pacchā cāti" (before Pavāraṇā and after). Thus, the connection is "tasmā kallaṃ vacanāyāti" (therefore, it is proper to speak). Idañhi ubhaya: indeed, this very thing, the ubhaya, is the subject matter and the person. The connection is "Pavāraṇāya pubbeti" (before Pavāraṇā). Ukkoṭentassā: of one who is shaking.

144. Bhaṇḍanakārakavatthukathā
144. The Quarrel-Maker Subject Matter Talk

240.Catutthapañcamāti chasu pakkhesu poṭṭhapādamāsassa juṇhapakkhakāḷapakkhasaṅkhātā catutthapañcamā.Tatiyoti sāvaṇamāsassa kāḷapakkho tatiyo.Tatiyacatutthapañcamā vāti etthatatiyoti sāvaṇamāsassa kāḷapakkho.Catutthoti poṭṭhapādamāsassa juṇhapakkho.Pañcamoti tasseva kāḷapakkho. ‘‘Tatiya…pe… pañcamā vā’’ti padāni ‘‘dve vā tayo vā’’ti padehi yathākkamaṃ yojetabbāni.Catutthe vā kateti catutthapakkhe vā pannarasibhāvena kate.Dve cātuddasikāti tatiyapakkhe ca cātuddasiyā saddhiṃ dve cātuddasikā.Imeti bhaṇḍanakārakā.Teti bhaṇḍanakārakā.

240.Catutthapañcamā: the fourth and fifth, counted as the waxing and waning fortnights of the month of Poṭṭhapāda among the six fortnights. Tatiyo: the third, the waning fortnight of the month of Sāvaṇa. Tatiyacatutthapañcamā vā: here, tatiyo: the waning fortnight of the month of Sāvaṇa. Catuttho: the waxing fortnight of the month of Poṭṭhapāda. Pañcamo: the waning fortnight of that same month. The words "Tatiya…pe… pañcamā vā" should be connected sequentially with the words "dve vā tayo vā." Catutthe vā kate: or when it is done on the fourth fortnight in the manner of the fifteenth day. Dve cātuddasikā: two fourteenth days together with the fourteenth day in the third fortnight. Ime: these quarrel-makers. Te: those quarrel-makers.

Asaṃvihitāti etthaakārassa virahatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṃvidahanavirahitā’’ti. Tatthasaṃvidahanavirahitāti saṃvidahanarakkhavirahitā.Āgamanajānanatthāyāti bhaṇḍanakārakānaṃ āgamanassa jānanatthāya.Kilantatthāti tumhe kilantā bhavatha. ‘‘Sammohaṃ katvā’’ti imināvikkhitvāti padassa vikkhepaṃ katvāti atthaṃ dasseti.No ce labhethāti ettha kimatthāya na labhethāti āha ‘‘bahisīmaṃ gantu’’nti. ‘‘Bhaṇḍanakārakānaṃ…pe… hontī’’ti iminā alabhanassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti.Yanti āgamaṃ juṇhaṃ.Komudiyā cātumāsiniyāti pacchimakattikapuṇṇamāyaṃ. Sā hi kumudānamatthitāya komudī, catunnaṃ vassikānaṃ māsānaṃ pūraṇattā cātumāsinīti vuccati. Tadā hi kumudāni supupphitāni honti, tasmā kumudānaṃ samūhā, kumudāni eva vākomudā,te ettha atthītikomudīti vuccati, kumudavatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Avassaṃ pavāretabbanti dhuvaṃ pavāretabbaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tanti komudiṃ cātumāsiniṃ.

Asaṃvihitā: here, showing that the a has the meaning of absence, he says "saṃvidahanavirahitā" (without arranging). There, saṃvidahanavirahitā: without arranging for protection. Āgamanajānanatthāyā: for the purpose of knowing the arrival of the quarrel-makers. Kilantatthā: may you be weary. By "Sammohaṃ katvā," he shows the meaning of the word vikkhitvā as "having caused distraction." No ce labhethā: here, he says, "For what purpose would he not obtain it?" bahisīmaṃ gantu (to go outside the boundary). By "Bhaṇḍanakārakānaṃ…pe… hontī," he shows the reason for not obtaining. Ya: that arrival, the waxing moon. Komudiyā cātumāsiniyā: on the full moon of the latter Kattikā. For it is called Komudī because of the presence of kumuda flowers, and Cātumāsinī because it completes four months of the rainy season. At that time, the kumuda flowers are in full bloom, therefore, a group of kumuda flowers, or the kumuda flowers themselves, are komudā, those are present here, so it is called komudī, which means having kumuda flowers. Avassaṃ pavāretabba: Pavāraṇā must be done. Hī: truly, or because. Ta: that Komudī Cātumāsinī.

145. Pavāraṇāsaṅgahakathā
145. The Pavāraṇā Saṅgaha Talk

241.Aññataro phāsuvihāroti ettha phāsuvihāro nāma koti āha ‘‘taruṇasamatho vā taruṇavipassanā vā’’ti. Iminā taruṇasamathavipassanā phāsuṃ viharati anenātiphāsuvihāroti dasseti.Paribāhirā bhavissāmāti ettha kasmā imamhā phāsuvihārā paribāhirā bhavissantīti āha ‘‘anibaddharattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādibhāvenā’’tiādi. Tatthaanibaddharattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādibhāvenāti anibaddhadivāṭṭhānādibhāvena hetubhūtena, asakkontāti sambandho. Ādisaddena anibaddhacaṅkamādayo saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Chandadānaṃ paṭikkhipatī’’ti iminā ‘‘sabbeheva ekajjhaṃ sannipatitabba’’nti vākyassa aññatthāpohanaṃ dasseti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Imesu tīsu chandadānaṃ na vaṭṭati, tasmā paṭikkhipatīti yojanā. Ayaṃ pavāraṇāsaṅgaho nāma na dātabboti yojanā. Taruṇasamathavipassanālābhī ekapuggalo vā hotūti yojanā. ‘‘Ekassapi dātabboyevā’’ti iminā ayaṃ pavāraṇāsaṅgaho ekassa dinnopi sabbesaṃ dinno hotīti dasseti. Pavāraṇāsaṅgahe dinne satīti yojanā.Āgantukāti saṭṭhivassāpi āgantukā.Tesanti dinnapavāraṇāsaṅgahānaṃ.Antarāpīti komudiyā cātumāsiniyā antarāpi.

241.Aññataro phāsuvihāro: here, what is meant by phāsuvihāro? He says, "taruṇasamatho vā taruṇavipassanā vā" (either fresh samatha or fresh vipassanā). By this, he shows that "phāsuṃ viharati anenāti: phāsuvihāro" (one dwells comfortably with this, therefore it is phāsuvihāro). Paribāhirā bhavissāmā: here, why will they be excluded from this phāsuvihāra? He says "anibaddharattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādibhāvenā" (due to not being bound by night dwelling, day dwelling, etc.). There, anibaddharattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādibhāvenā: due to the causal factor of not being bound by day dwelling, etc., the connection is "asakkontāti" (being unable). With the word ādi, he includes unbound walking, etc. By "Chandadānaṃ paṭikkhipatī," he shows the different meaning of the statement "sabbeheva ekajjhaṃ sannipatitabbaṃ" (all should assemble together in one place). Hī: truly, or because. In these three cases, giving consent is not appropriate, therefore he rejects it. This Pavāraṇā saṅgaha, called such, should not be given. Let there be one person who has gained fresh samatha and vipassanā. By "Ekassapi dātabboyevā," he shows that this Pavāraṇā saṅgaha, even if given to one, is given to all. When the Pavāraṇā saṅgaha is given. Āgantukā: even those of sixty years are newcomers. Tesa: of those to whom the Pavāraṇā saṅgaha is given. Antarāpī: even in between the Komudī Cātumāsinī.

Iti pavāraṇākkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Pavāraṇā Khandhaka.

5. Cammakkhandhakaṃ

5. The Leather Khandhaka

147. Soṇakoḷivisavatthukathā
147. The Soṇakoḷivīsa Subject Matter Talk

242.Cammakkhandhakeissariyādhipaccanti ettha issarassa bhāvoissariyaṃ,adhipatino bhāvoādhipaccaṃ,issariyañca ādhipaccañca, tehi samannāgataṃ issariyādhipaccanti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘issarabhāvena ca adhipatibhāvena ca samannāgata’’nti. ‘‘Rājabhāva’’nti iminārajjanti ettha rañño bhāvo rajjanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Raññā kattabbakicca’’nti iminā rañño idaṃrajjanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Koḷivīsoti gotta’’nti idaṃ aṭṭhakathāvādavasena vuttaṃ, apadāne pana tassa jātakkhaṇe pitarā koṭivīsadhanassa dinnattā ‘‘koḷivīso nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha

242.In the leather Khandhaka, issariyādhipacca: here, the state of being an issara is issariyaṃ, the state of being an adhipati is ādhipaccaṃ, issariyañca and ādhipaccañca, explaining that it is issariyādhipaccaṃ which is endowed with these, he says "issarabhāvena ca adhipatibhāvena ca samannāgata" (endowed with the state of being an issara and the state of being an adhipati). By "rājabhāva," he shows the word meaning here that the state of the king is rajjanti in rajja. By "Raññā kattabbakicca," he shows the word meaning here that this rajja belongs to the king in "rañño idaṃ: rajja." This "Koḷivīsoti gotta" is said according to the commentary tradition, but in the Apadāna, it is said that "koḷivīso nāmā" because at the time of his birth, his father gave him twenty koṭi of wealth. For it was said there,

‘‘Jātaputtassa me sutvā, pitu chando ayaṃ ahu;

"Having heard of the birth of my son, this was my father's wish;
I will give to the boy, no less than twenty koṭis."

koḷivīsoti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Añjanavaṇṇānīti añjanassa vaṇṇo viya vaṇṇo etesanti añjanavaṇṇāni. Lomāni jātāni hontīti sambandho.Soti soṇo. Ṭhapesi kirāti sambandho.Tehīti asītisahassapurisehi.Paṇṇasālanti paṇṇena chāditaṃ, tena ca parikkhittaṃ sālaṃ.Uṇṇapāvāraṇanti uṇṇamayaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ.Pādapuñchanikanti pādaṃ puñchati sodheti anenāti pādapuñchaniyaṃ, tadeva pādapuñchanikaṃ.Sabbevāti soṇena saha asītisahassapurisā eva.Tassa cāti soṇassa ca.Pubbayogoti pubbūpāyo.

koḷivīsoti (Koḷivīsa) should be seen as said. Añjanavaṇṇānī: those whose color is like the color of añjana. The connection is "Lomāni jātāni hontīti" (hairs are born). So: Soṇa. The connection is "Ṭhapesi kirāti" (he established, it seems). Tehī: by eighty thousand men. Paṇṇasāla: a hall covered with leaves, and surrounded by them. Uṇṇapāvāraṇa: an outer robe made of wool. Pādapuñchanika: that with which one wipes and cleans the feet, that itself is pādapuñchanika. Sabbevā: all eighty thousand men together with Soṇa. Tassa cā: and of that Soṇa. Pubbayogo: previous endeavor.

Asītigāmikasahassānīti ettha gāmesu vasantīti gāmikā, tesaṃ asītisahassāni asītigāmikasahassānīti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tesū’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘kulaputtāna’’nti iminā vasantyatthe pavattassa ṇikapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Asītisahassānī’’ti iminā saddantaropi asītisahassasaddānaṃ samāsabhāvaṃ dasseti.Kenacidevāti ettha ‘‘kenaci ivā’’ti padavibhāgaṃ katvā dakāro padasandhimatto, ivasaddo upamatthoti āha ‘‘kenaci karaṇīyena viyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘na panā’’tiādinā evaphalassa dassitattā ‘‘kenaci evā’’ti padacchedaṃ katvā evatthopi yujjatevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Assāti bimbisārarañño.Tassāti soṇassa. Dassanāya aññatra kiñci karaṇīyaṃ na atthīti yojanā.Rājāti bimbisāro rājā, sannipātāpesīti sambandho.Diṭṭhadhammike attheti ettha diṭṭhadhammasaddo idhalokattho, ikasaddo hitatthe pavattoti āha ‘‘idhalokahite’’ti. ‘‘Amhāka’’nti iminā‘‘so no bhagavā’’ti etthanosaddo amhasaddakāriyoti dasseti. Amhākaṃ so bhagavāti yojanā.Samparāyiketi paralokahite.

Asītigāmikasahassānī: here, showing the meaning that gāmikā are those who live in villages, and asītigāmikasahassāni are eighty thousand of them, he says "tesū" etc. There, by "kulaputtāna," he shows the form of the ṇika suffix which occurs in the sense of dwelling. By "Asītisahassānī," he shows the compound nature of the word asītigāmikasahassāni, even when there are other words in between. Kenacidevā: here, having made a word division as "kenaci ivā," he says that the ḍakāra is merely a euphonic juncture, and the iva word is in the sense of comparison, "kenaci karaṇīyena viyā" (as if with some business). Or else, since the fruit of eva has been shown by "na panā" etc., it should be seen that even the meaning of eva is fitting when making the word break as "kenaci evā." Assā: of King Bimbisāra. Tassā: of that Soṇa. There is no other business for the sake of seeing. Rājā: King Bimbisāra, the connection is "sannipātāpesīti" (he ordered an assembly). Diṭṭhadhammike atthe: here, the word diṭṭhadhamma has the meaning of this world, and the ika suffix occurs in the sense of benefit, he says "idhalokahite" (for the benefit of this world). By "Amhāka," he shows that the word no here in "so no bhagavā" is a substitute for the word amha. So bhagavā is ours. Samparāyike: for the benefit of the next world.

‘‘paṭivedemī’’ti ettha vidadhātuyā ñāṇatthaṃ dasseti.Paṭikāya nimujjitvāti ettha paṭikāsaddo aḍḍhendupāsāṇavācakoti āha ‘‘aḍḍhacandapāsāṇe’’ti. So hi paṭati aḍḍhabhāvaṃ gacchatītipaṭikāti vuccati. Paṭikāsaddoyaṃ attharaṇavisesepi vattati.Yassadānīti ettha yasaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tesaṃ hitakaraṇīyatthassā’’ti. Iminā ayaṃ yaṃsaddo na taṃsaddāpekkhoti dasseti. Atha vāyassāti yo assa. Assa tesaṃ hitakaraṇīyatthassa yo kālo atthi, taṃ kālaṃ bhagavā jānātīti yojanā.Tesanti asītigāmikasahassānaṃ.Pacchāyāyanti ettha pakāro paccantatthavācakoti āha ‘‘vihārapaccante chāyāya’’nti.Sammanāharantīti saṃ punappunaṃ manasāgataṃ abhimukhaṃ harantīti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘punappunaṃ manasikarontī’’ti. ‘‘Pasādavasenā’’ti iminā ‘‘kodhavasenā’’tiādīni paṭikkhipati. ‘‘Puna visiṭṭhatara’’nti iminābhiyyoso mattāyāti nipātassa atthaṃ dasseti.

‘‘paṭivedemī’’ti here shows that the root ‘vid’ means knowledge. Paṭikāya nimujjitvā here, the word paṭikā refers to a half-moon shaped stone, thus he said, "on a half-moon stone." Because it falls, goes to a half state, therefore it is called paṭikā. This word paṭikā also applies to a type of spread. Yassa dānī here, showing the scope of the word ‘yassa’, he says, "for the purpose of doing good to them." This shows that this word ‘yaṃ’ does not depend on the word ‘taṃ’. Or rather, yassā means whoever’s. Whoever's time there is for the purpose of doing good to them, the Blessed One knows that time, this is the connection. Tesaṃ means for the eighty thousand villagers. Pacchāyāya here, he says that the syllable ‘pa’ denotes the end, "in the shade at the edge of the monastery." Sammanāharantī means bringing to mind again and again, facing towards, showing the meaning, he says, "repeatedly thinking in the mind." With "pasādavasenā," he rejects "kodhavasenā," etc. With "puna visiṭṭhatara," he shows the meaning of the particle bhiyyoso mattāya.

Soṇassa pabbajjākathā
The Story of Soṇa's Ordination

243.‘‘Makkhito’’ti iminā phurati vipphārati byāpetītiphuṭoti vutte phuradhātuyā vipphāraṇaṃ nāma makkhitatthoti dasseti.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne. Iminā gāvo āhananti etthātigavāghātananti atthaṃ dassebhi.Tantissareti tantiyā guṇassa sare.Vādanakusaloti vādane kusalo.Kharamucchitāti kharena mucchitā. ‘‘Sarasampannā’’ti iminā saro etissamatthītisaravatī,vīṇāti dasseti.Kammaññāti ettha kammasaddato khamatthe ññapaccayoti āha ‘‘kammakkhamā’’ti.Mandamucchanāti mandena mucchanā.Same guṇeti etthasamonāma majjhimo,guṇonāma mukhyato vīṇāya jiyā, upacārato saroti āha ‘‘majjhime sare’’ti.Vīriyasamathanti ettha vīriyañca samatho cāti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘vīriyasampayuttaṃ samatha’’nti. Iminā vīriyena sampayuttaṃ samathaṃvīriyasamathanti dasseti. ‘‘Vīriyaṃ samathena yojehī’’ti iminā vīriyena samathaṃ yojehīti atthopi dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Indriyānañca samatanti ettha saddhādīni pañcindriyāneva gahetabbāni, na aññānīti dassento āha ‘‘saddhādīnaṃ indriyāna’’nti. ‘‘Samabhāva’’nti iminā tāpaccayo bhāvatthe hotīti dasseti.Tatthāti ‘‘indriyānaṃ samata’’ntipāṭhe, saddhādīsu indriyesu vā.Tattha ca nimittaṃ gaṇhāhīti ettha bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe thapaccayo hotīti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ samathe satī’’ti. Ādāse sati mukhabimbena kattubhūtena uppajjitabbaṃ iva, tasmiṃ samathe sati yena nimittena kattubhūtena uppajjitabbanti yojanā. Samathassa nimittaṃsamathanimittaṃ,indriyānaṃ samabhāvo. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Samathanimittādīni cattāri ekasesena vā sāmaññaniddesena vā ‘‘nimitta’’nti vuccati.

243.Makkhito here, showing that in saying phuṭo, which means spreading, pervading, encompassing, for the root ‘phura’, pervading is the meaning of being smeared, he shows that ‘makkhita’ means the same. Yatthā means in which place. By this he shows that gavāghātana means ‘where the cows are killed’.Tantissare means the sound of the string of the lute. Vādanakusalo means skilled in playing. Kharamucchitā means overcome by harshness. With "sarasampannā," he shows that saravatī means having a sound, a lute. Kammaññā here, he says that the suffix ñña is in the sense of fitness from the word ‘kamma’, "fit for work." Mandamucchanā means softening with gentleness. Same guṇe here, samo means middle, guṇo means primarily the string of the lute, secondarily the sound, thus he says, "in the middle tone." Vīriyasamatha here, rejecting the meaning of ‘energy and tranquility’, he says, "tranquility associated with energy." By this he shows that vīriyasamatha means tranquility associated with energy. It should be seen that the meaning of ‘join tranquility with energy’ is also shown by "vīriyaṃ samathena yojehī." Indriyānañca samata here, showing that only the five faculties beginning with faith should be taken, not others, he says, "the equilibrium of the faculties beginning with faith." With "samabhāva," he shows that the suffix ‘ta’ is in the sense of state. Tatthā means, in the reading "indriyānaṃ samata," or in those faculties beginning with faith. Tattha ca nimittaṃ gaṇhāhī here, he says that the suffix ‘tha’ is in the sense of ‘state’ characterized by ‘state’, "when that tranquility exists." Just as when there is a mirror, a reflection of the face must arise as the agent, so when there is that tranquility, by which sign must arise as the agent. The sign of tranquility is samathanimittaṃ, the equilibrium of the faculties. The same method applies to the rest as well. The four, tranquility-sign, etc., are called nimitta by either ekasesa or by general designation.

244.Aññaṃbyākareyyanti ettha aññaṃ byākaronto attānaṃ ‘‘arahā aha’’nti jānāpetīti āha ‘‘arahā aha’’nti jānāpeyya’’nti.Cha ṭhānānīti ettha ṭhānasaddo kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘cha kāraṇānī’’ti. ‘‘Paṭivijjhitvā’’tiādināadhimuttoti padassa adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti. Saddattho pana adhimuccatītiadhimuttoti daṭṭhabbo. Arahattaṃ vuccatīti sambandho.ti vitthāro.Asammohotīti ettha ākāratthavācakoitisaddo pubbapadesupi yojetvā ‘‘nekkhamaṃ iti vuccatī’’tiādinā yojanā kātabbā.

244.Aññaṃ byākareyya here, saying something different, he makes himself known as "I am an Arahant," thus he says, "he makes himself known as 'I am an Arahant'." Cha ṭhānānī here, he says that the word ‘ṭhāna’ is in the sense of cause, "six causes." With "paṭivijjhitvā," etc., he shows the intended meaning of the word adhimutto. However, the literal meaning should be seen as ‘one who is released,’ thus adhimutto. ‘Arahattaṃ vuccatīti’ is the connection. means expanse. Asammohotī here, connecting the word iti, which is expressive of manner, to the previous statements as well, the connection should be made with "nekkhamaṃ iti vuccatī," etc.

kevalaṃ saddhāmattakanti ettha mattasaddassa nivattetabbatthaṃ dasseti.Paṭivedhapaññāyāti maggapaññāya. ‘‘Asammissa’’nti iminā kevalasaddassa asammissatthaṃ dasseti.Paṭicayanti ettha paṭisaddo anupacchinnattho, cidhātu vaḍḍhanatthoti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ karaṇena vaḍḍhi’’nti, maggapaṭivedhena vītarāgattāyevāti sambandho.Tanninnamānasoyevāti tasmiṃ phalasamāpattivihāre ninnamānaso eva.

kevalaṃ saddhāmattaka here, he shows the meaning of the suffix ‘matta’ as something to be excluded. Paṭivedhapaññāyā means by the wisdom of the path. With "asammissa," he shows that the word ‘kevala’ means unmixed. Paṭicaya here, he says that the syllable ‘paṭi’ means uninterrupted, and the root ‘ci’ means to grow, "growth by repeatedly doing," the connection is, because he is free from lust by the penetration of the path. Tanninnamānasoyevā means his mind is inclined only towards that abiding in fruition attainment.

Lābhasakkārasilokanti ettha labhanaṃlābho,suṭṭhu karaṇaṃsakkāro,silokanaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃsiloko,lābho ca sakkāro ca siloko ca lābhasakkārasilokanti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘catupaccayalābhañcā’’tiādi.Tesaṃyevāti catunnaṃ paccayānameva. ‘‘Sīlañca vatañcā’’ti imināsīlabbatantipadassa dvandavākyaṃ dasseti.

Lābhasakkārasiloka here, showing that labhanaṃ is lābho, suṭṭhu karaṇaṃ is sakkāro, silokanaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ is siloko, and lābho ca sakkāro ca siloko ca lābhasakkārasilokanti means gain, honor and praise, thus he says, "the gain of the four requisites," etc. Tesaṃyevā means only of the four requisites. With "sīlañca vatañcā," he shows the dvandva sentence of the compound word sīlabbata.

Bhusasaddassa kaliṅgaratthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘balavanto’’ti ‘‘khīṇāsavassā’’ti iminānevassāti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Gahetvā’’ti imināpariyādiyantīti ettha paripubbaāpubbadādhātuyā gahaṇatthaṃ dasseti.ti saccaṃ. Kilesā karontīti sambandho.Tesanti kilesānaṃ.Āneñjappattanti ettha iñjanaṃ kampanaṃ iñjaṃ, na iñjaṃ aneñjaṃ, tameva āneñjaṃ, taṃ pattanti āneñjappattanti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘acalanappatta’’nti.Vayañcāticasaddo avuttasampiṇḍanatthoti āha ‘‘vayampi uppādampī’’ti.

Rejecting that bhusa means Kaliṅga country, he says, "strong." With "khīṇāsavassā," he shows the scope of the suffix ‘ta’ in nevassā. With "gahetvā," he shows that the root ‘āpū’ with the prefix ‘pari’ means grasping in pariyādiyantī. means truly. ‘Kilesā karontīti’ is the connection. Tesaṃ means of the defilements. Āneñjappatta here, showing that iñjanaṃ means trembling, iñjaṃ, na iñjaṃ means aneñjaṃ, that same is āneñjaṃ, one who has attained that is āneñjappattanti, thus he says, "attained to the immovable." Vayañcā means the word ca is in the sense of including what has not been said, thus he says, "decay and arising too."

Upādānakkhayassāti ettha upādānakkhayaṃ adhimuttassāti dassento āha ‘‘upayogatthe sāmivacana’’nti. ‘‘Uppādañca vayañcā’’ti imināāyatanuppādanti ettha uppādasaddena vayopi avinābhāvato gahetabboti dasseti.Sammāti nipāto ñāyatthoti āha ‘‘hetunā nayenā’’ti.Santacittassāti ettha santasaddassa khedādīsupi pavattattā idha nibbutatthe vattatīti āha ‘‘nibbutacittassā’’ti.Anunayapaṭighehīti anu punappunaṃ ārammaṇe cittaṃ netītianunayo,rāgo, ārammaṇe paṭihaññatītipaṭigho,doso, anunayo ca paṭigho ca anunayapaṭighā, tehi. Iṭṭhe anunayo, aniṭṭhe paṭigho hotīti sambandho daṭṭhabbo.

Upādānakkhayassā here, showing that it is of one who is liberated regarding the destruction of clinging, he says, "the possessive case is in the sense of use." With "uppādañca vayañcā," he shows that in āyatanuppāda, the word ‘decay’ should also be taken together with the word ‘arising’ because they are inseparable. Sammā is a particle in the sense of right, thus he says, "by reason, by method." Santacittassā here, because the word ‘santa’ occurs even in the sense of fatigue, etc., he says that here it occurs in the sense of extinguished, "of one whose mind is extinguished." Anunayapaṭighehī means anu, the mind leads again and again to the object, thus anunayo means attachment, paṭihaññatīti means repelled by the object, thus paṭigho means aversion, anunayo ca paṭigho ca means attachment and aversion, by them. Attachment is for what is liked, aversion is for what is disliked, this connection should be seen.

148. Diguṇādiupāhanapaṭikkhepakathā
148. The Rejection of Double-Layered Sandals, Etc.

245.Aññaṃ byākarontīti ettha aññasaddo sabbanāmasuddhanāmavasena duvidho. Tesu idha suddhanāmaṃ, taṃ pana bāle ca dārake ca arahatte ca pavattati, idha pana arahatteti dassento āha ‘‘arahattaṃ byākarontī’’ti.Yenāti sabhāvena.Arahāti ñāyatīti arahāiti attho ñāyati.Soti sabhāvo.Suttavaṇṇanātoyevāti aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāto eva.Na upanītoti na upari nīto.Ekacce moghapurisāti ekaccesaddo aññepariyāyo, moghasaddo tucchavevacanoti āha ‘‘aññe pana tucchapurisā’’ti. ‘‘Hasamānā viyā’’ti imināhasamānakaṃ maññeti ettha maññesaddo viyatthoti dasseti.Asantamevāti avijjamānaṃyeva.Ekapalāsikanti ettha palāsasaddo paṇṇavācako. Paṭalaṃ nāma paṇṇaṃ viya hoti, tasmā ‘‘ekapaṭala’’nti vuttaṃ.Asītisakaṭavāheti ettha asīti padaṃ sakaṭapadena sambandhaṃ katvā asītisakaṭehi vahitabbeti attho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Dve sakaṭabhārā eko vāho’’ti iminā vāhānaṃ cattālīsabhāvaṃ dasseti.Sattahatthikañca anīkanti ettha anīkassa sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘cha hatthiniyo cā’’tiādi. Sattannaṃ hatthīnaṃ samūhosattahatthikaṃ. Sattaanīkattā ekūnapaññāsahatthino honti. Tesu satta hatthino, dvācattālīsa hatthiniyo honti.Dviguṇāti ettha guṇasaddo paṭalatthoti āha ‘‘dvipaṭalā’’ti.Guṇaṅguṇūpāhanāti ettha dviguṇatiguṇānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā pārisesato guṇaṅguṇabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘catupaṭalato paṭṭhāya vuccatī’’ti.Guṇaṅguṇūpāhanāti paṭalapaṭalā upāhanā, bahupaṭalā upāhanāti attho. Ukārena saha yojetvā gakāro sajjhāyitabbo ca likhitabbo ca. Idāni potthakesu pana ukāro na dissati.

245.Aññaṃ byākarontī here, the word ‘añña’ is of two kinds: a pronoun and a pure noun. Among these, here it is a pure noun, and that occurs for a fool, a child, and an Arahant, but here it means arahantship, thus he says, "declaring arahantship." Yenā means by which nature. Arahāti ñāyatī means the meaning ‘Arahant’ is known. So means that nature. Suttavaṇṇanātoyevā means only from the commentary to the Aṅguttara Nikāya. Na upanīto means not led above. Ekacce moghapurisā means the word ekacce is another term for others, and the word mogha is a synonym for empty, thus he says, "but other empty men." With "hasamānā viyā," he shows that in hasamānakaṃ maññe, the word ‘maññe’ is in the sense of ‘viya’. Asantamevā means non-existent. Ekapalāsika here, the word ‘palāsa’ refers to a leaf. A layer is like a leaf, therefore it is said "ekapaṭala." Asītisakaṭavāhe here, making the word ‘asīti’ related to the word ‘sakaṭa’, the meaning should be seen as ‘to be carried by eighty carts’. With "dve sakaṭabhārā eko vāho," he shows that a vaha is forty loads. Sattahatthikañca anīka here, showing the nature of an anīka, he says, "six elephants," etc. A group of seven elephants is sattahatthikaṃ. Because there are seven anīkas, there are forty-nine elephants. Among these, seven are male elephants, and forty-two are female elephants. Dviguṇā here, he says that the word ‘guṇa’ is in the sense of layer, "two-layered." Guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā here, because double-layered and triple-layered are taken separately, showing the state of layers upon layers by the rule of parisesa, he says, "it is said beginning from four layers." Guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā means sandals with layers upon layers, sandals with many layers. When connecting with the u sound, the ga should be recited and written. Now, however, the u sound is not seen in books.

149. Sabbanīlikādipaṭikkhepakathā
149. The Rejection of Entirely Blue Sandals, Etc.

246.Sabbāva nīlikāti sabbāva upāhanāyo nīlikā, sabbaṭṭhānesu nīlametāsantisabbanīlikātipi kātabbo.Tattha cāti tesu nīlikādīsu ca. Ummārapupphassa vaṇṇo viya vaṇṇo etissātiummārapupphavaṇṇā. Evaṃ sesesupi.Addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇāti etthaaddoti allo.Ariṭṭhoti pheṇilarukkho vā kāko vā, tasmā addo allo ariṭṭho pheṇilarukkho, kāko vāti addāriṭṭho, tadeva addāriṭṭhako, addāriṭṭhakassa vaṇṇo viya vaṇṇo etissāti addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā.Etāsūti sabbanīlikādīsu.Puñchitvāti parimajjitvā.Appamattakenāpītipisaddo sambhāvane. Sabbanīlādike bhinne kā nāma kathāti attho.

246.Sabbāva nīlikā means all the sandals are blue, or it can also be done as sabbanīlikā meaning blue in all places. Tattha cā means and in those blue ones, etc. Ummārapupphavaṇṇā means having a color like the color of an ummāra flower. Similarly in the rest as well. Addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā here, addo means fresh. Ariṭṭho means a soapberry tree or a crow, therefore addo means fresh ariṭṭho soapberry tree, or a crow, addāriṭṭho, that same is addāriṭṭhako, addāriṭṭhakassa vaṇṇo viya vaṇṇo etissāti means addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā, having a color like the color of an addāriṭṭhaka. Etāsū means in those entirely blue ones, etc. Puñchitvā means wiping off. Appamattakenāpī here, the word pi is in the sense of possibility. What need is there to speak if even a little bit is broken from the entirely blue ones, etc.?

nīlakavaddhikāti chaṭṭhībāhiratthasamāsaṃ dasseti.Vaddhikāti ca naddhi. Sā hi upāhanatalato vaddhayatīti vaddhikāti ca upāhanatalaṃ bandhati imāyāti vaddhikāti ca vuccati.Sabbatthāti sabbesu pītakavaddhikādīsu.Etāyopīti nīlakavaddhikādikā upāhanāyopi.Taleti upāhanāya tale. ‘‘Khallakaṃ bandhitvā’’ti iminā khallakena bandhitabbātikhallakabaddhāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Yonakaupāhanāti yonakajātīnaṃ manussānaṃ upāhanā.Paliguṇṭhetvāti parisamantato veṭhetvā. ‘‘Upari…pe… jaṅgha’’nti iminā puṭabaddhato visesaṃ dasseti.Tūlapicunāti tūlasaṅkhātena picunā. ‘‘Tittirapattasadisā’’ti iminā tittirassa pattaṃ viyatittirapattikāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tittiroti ca eko sakuṇaviseso.Kaṇṇikaṭṭhāneti dvinnaṃ vaddhikānaṃ ekato samāgamaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Meṇḍa…pe… katā’’ti iminā meṇḍassa visāṇena sadisā vaddhikā etāsantimeṇḍavisāṇavaddhikāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tathevāti yathā meṇḍaajasiṅgasaṇṭhāne vaddhe yojetvā katā, tathevāti attho. ‘‘Vicchikā…pe… katā’’ti iminā vicchikāya aḷovicchikāḷo,so viya vaddhikā etāsantivicchikāḷikāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Aḷasaddo ‘‘aḷacchinno’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 119) aṅguṭṭhavācako, idha pana naṅguṭṭhavācako, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘naṅguṭṭhasaṇṭhāne’’ti.Talesūti upāhanāya talesu. ‘‘Mora…pe… sibbikā’’ti iminā morapiñchehi parisamantato, parikkhipitvā vā sibbitāmorapiñchaparisibbitāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Citrā upāhanāyoti ettha citrasaddo vicitratthoti āha ‘‘vicitrā’’ti.Etāsūti khallakabaddhādīsu.Vaḷañjetabbāti paribhuñjitabbā. Vaḷaji paribhogeti dhātupāṭho (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 15 jakārantadhātu). Tālujo tatiyo.Tesu panāti khallakādīsu pana.Satisantesūti yojanā. Sīhacammena parikkhipitabbātisīhacammaparikkhatāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pariyantesū’’tiādi.Pakkhibiḷāloti tuliyo. So hi pakkhayuttattā ca biḷālamukhasadisamukhattā ca pakkhibiḷāloti vuccati. Imināluvakacammaparikkhatāti ettha luvakasaddo pakkhibiḷālapariyāyoti dasseti. ‘‘Ulūkacammaparikkhatā’’tipi pāṭho.Etāsupīti sīhacammaparikkhatādīsupi. Yā kāci upāhanāyoti sambandho.

nīlakavaddhikā shows the sixth-case external compound. Vaddhikā also means naddhi. Because it strengthens from the sole of the sandal, it is called vaddhikā, and because it binds the sole of the sandal with this, it is called vaddhikā. Sabbatthā means in all yellow ones, etc. Etāyopī means even with this blue-vaddhikā, etc. Tale means on the sole of the sandal. With "khallakaṃ bandhitvā," he shows that khallakabaddhā means to be tied with a khallaka. Yonakaupāhanā means the sandals of people of Yona descent. Paliguṇṭhetvā means wrapping all around. With "Upari…pe… jaṅgha," he shows the distinction from puṭabaddha. Tūlapicunā means with cotton that is called picu. With "Tittirapattasadisā," he shows that tittirapattikā means like the wing of a francolin. Tittiro also means a kind of bird. Kaṇṇikaṭṭhāne means at the place where the two vaddhikās meet together. With "Meṇḍa…pe… katā," he shows that meṇḍavisāṇavaddhikā means those vaddhikās are like the horn of a ram. Tathevā means just as made by joining the vaddhi in the shape of a ram’s horn, so it is. With "Vicchikā…pe… katā," he shows that vicchikāḷikā means the stinger of a scorpion is vicchikāḷo, and those vaddhikās are like that. The word aḷa means toe in "aḷacchinno," etc. (mahāva. 119), but here it means the tail, therefore it is said "in the shape of a tail." Talesū means on the soles of the sandals. With "Mora…pe… sibbikā," he shows that morapiñchaparisibbitā means sewn all around with peacock feathers. Citrā upāhanāyo here, he says that the word ‘citra’ means variegated, "variegated." Etāsū means in those tied with a khallaka, etc. Vaḷañjetabbā means may be used. Vaḷaji paribhogeti is the root-text (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 15 jakārantadhātu). The third of the Tālus. Tesu panā means but in those khallakas, etc. Sati means when they exist. Showing that sīhacammaparikkhatā means to be surrounded by lion’s hide, he says, "in the surroundings," etc. Pakkhibiḷālo means a tuliyo. Because it has wings and because the mouth is like the mouth of a cat, it is called pakkhibiḷālo. By this he shows that in luvakacammaparikkhatā, the word luvaka is a synonym for pakkhibiḷāla. There is also a reading "Ulūkacammaparikkhatā." Etāsupī means even in those surrounded by lion’s hide, etc. Any kind of sandal, is the connection.

247.Omukkanti ettha avatyūpasaggassa viyogatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘paṭimuñcitvā apanīta’’nti. Purāṇaṃ guṇaṅguṇūpāhananti attho.

247.Omukka here, showing the meaning of separation for the prefix ava, he says, "having put on and taken off." It means old, layered sandals.

151. Ajjhārāme upāhanapaṭikkhepakathā
151. The Rejection of Sandals in the Monastery

248.‘‘Yena sippenā’’tiādinā abhi adhikaṃ jīvanti anenātiabhijīvanaṃ,kiṃtaṃ? Sippanti atthaṃ dasseti.Tassāti sippassa.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Yaṃsaddo vacanavipallāsoti āha ‘‘ye tumhe’’ti.ti saccaṃ.Yaṃnipātoti yaṃiti nipāto yadisaddassa atthe pavattatīti yojanā.Ācariyā evāti evasaddena ācariyamattabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati.ti saccaṃ.Soti avassiko.Tanti chabbassaṃ.Nissāya vacchatīti avassikassa catuvassakāle chabbassassa dasavassikattā taṃ nissāya vasati. Upajjhāyamattaṃ dassento āha ‘‘upajjhāyassā’’tiādi.Mahantatarāti attano vuḍḍhatarā. Upajjhāyassa mattaṃ pamāṇametesantiupajjhāyamattā.

248.With "Yena sippenā," etc., showing that abhi adhikṃ jīvanti anenāti abhijīvanaṃ, what is that? Sippanti means a craft, he shows the meaning. Tassā means of the craft. Idhā means in this dispensation. He says that the word ‘yaṃ’ is a transposition of words, "those of you." means truly. Yaṃnipāto means the particle ‘yaṃ’ occurs in the sense of the word yadi, is the connection. Ācariyā evā means he rejects the mere state of being a teacher with the word ‘eva’. means truly. So means an avassiko. Taṃ means a chabbassaṃ. Nissāya vacchatī means because an avassiko is six years old when four years old, he lives dependent on that. Showing the extent of a preceptor, he says, "of a preceptor," etc. Mahantatarā means older than himself. Upajjhāyassa mattaṃ pamāṇametesanti means upajjhāyamattā.

249.Pādato nikkhantena khīlasadisena maṃsena pavatto ābādhopādakhīlābādhoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pādato’’tiādi. Pādato nikkhantanti sambandho.

249.Showing that pādakhīlābādho means a disease that arises from a piece of flesh like a thorn that has come out of the foot, he says, "from the foot," etc. It connects with ‘come out from the foot’.

251.Tiṇapādukātiādīsu tiṇena katā pādukā tiṇapādukāti vacanatthādiṃ dassento āha ‘‘yena kenaci tiṇenā’’tiādi. Taṃ suviññeyyameva. ‘‘Bhūmiyaṃ suppatiṭṭhitāti’’ādinā na saṅkamitabbātiasaṅkamanīyāti atthaṃ dasseti.

251. In "Tiṇapādukā," etc., explaining the meaning of tiṇapādukā as footwear made of grass, he says, "With whatever kind of grass," etc. This is easily understood. With "Suppatiṭṭhitāti bhūmiyaṃ," etc., he shows the meaning of asaṅkamanīyā as "should not be moved," meaning that it is not to be moved.

252.Aṅgajātenevāti attano aṅgajātena eva.Aṅgajātanti gāvīnaṃ aṅgajātaṃ.Ogāhetvāti ettha otyūpasaggo daḷhatthoti āha ‘‘daḷhaṃ gahetvā’’ti.

252. Aṅgajātenevā: with one's own sexual organ. Aṅgajāta: the sexual organ of cows. Ogāhetvā: here, the prefix o indicates firmness, so he says, "having firmly grasped."

153. Yānādipaṭikkhepakathā
153. Discourse on the Rejection of Vehicles, etc.

253.Itthiyuttenāti ettha rūḷīvasena dhenupi itthī nāmāti āha ‘‘dhenuyuttenā’’ti.Purisantarenāti ettha puriso eva antaro añño etthātipurisantaraṃyānaṃ. Purisantaro nāma atthato sārathīti āha ‘‘purisasārathinā’’ti, yānenāti yojanā.Gaṅgāmahiyāyāti ettha gaṅgā ca mahī ca gaṅgāmahī, tattha kīḷikā gaṅgāmahiyāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gaṅgāmahīkīḷikāyā’’ti. Tattha hi itthipurisā yānehi udakakīḷaṃ kīḷanti.Purisayuttaṃhatthavaṭṭakanti ettha ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave purisayuttañca hatthavaṭṭakañcā’’ti dassento āha ‘‘etthā’’tiādi. Tatthapurisayuttanti purisena yujjitabbanti purisayuttaṃ yānaṃ.Hatthavaṭṭakanti hatthena vaṭṭetabbanti hatthavaṭṭakaṃ yānaṃ.Yānugghātenāti yānassa ullaṅghitvā gamanena. Hanadhātu hi gatyattho. Tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yānaṃ abhiruhantassā’’tiādi. ‘‘Tappaccayā’’ti iminā yānugghātenāti ettha hetvatthe karaṇavacananti dasseti.Pīṭhakasivikantipīṭhena saha kataṃ sivikaṃ.Paṭapoṭalikanti paṭamayaṃ poṭalikaṃ.

253. Itthiyuttenā: here, because, by convention, even a cow is called a woman, he says, "with a cow." Purisantarenā: here, puriso eva antaro añño ettha means purisantaraṃ yānaṃ, a vehicle with another man. Purisantaro in meaning is a charioteer, so he says, "with a male charioteer," connecting it with yānenā. Gaṅgāmahiyāyā: here, gaṅgā ca mahī ca gaṅgāmahī, explaining the meaning of gaṅgāmahiyā as "at the Ganges and on the earth," he says, "at the Ganges and earth playground." For there, men and women play water sports in vehicles. Purisayuttaṃ hatthavaṭṭakaṃ: here, showing that "I allow, monks, a vehicle drawn by a man and a hand-driven vehicle," he says, "here," etc. There, purisayuttaṃ means a vehicle that is drawn by a man. Hatthavaṭṭakaṃ means a vehicle that is turned by hand. Yānugghātena: by climbing and moving in a vehicle. The root hana signifies movement. Showing that meaning, he says, "of one climbing into a vehicle," etc. With "tappaccayā," he indicates that yānugghātena is used in the instrumental case in the sense of a cause. Pīṭhakasivikā: a palanquin made with a seat. Paṭapoṭalikā: a bundle made of cloth.

154. Uccāsayanamahāsayanapaṭikkhepakathā
154. Discourse on the Rejection of High and Luxurious Beds

254.Uccaṃ āsayanaṃuccāsayanaṃ. Mahantaṃ āsayanaṃmahāsayanaṃ. Āsandiādīsu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Pamāṇātikkantāsananti dīghāsanaṃ. Tañhi āgamma sadati nisīdatīti ettha, āyataṃ vā suṭṭhuṃ dadātītiāsandīti vuccati.Vāḷarūpānīti sīhabyagghādivāḷarūpāni. Pādesu vāḷarūpāni paricchinditvā aṅkīyati lakkhīyatītipallaṅko. Gonakoti gavati dīghalomehi uggacchati etthāti gonako.Kojavoti kuyaṃ bhūmiyaṃ javati gacchatīti kojavo.Tassāti gonakassa. Lomāni caturaṅgulādhikāni honti kirāti yojanā.Vānacitrauṇṇāmayattharaṇoti vānena sibbanena sañjātaṃ citrarūpametthāti vānacitraṃ, uṇṇāya nibbattouṇṇāmayo,soyeva attharaṇo uṇṇāmayattharaṇo, vānacitrañca taṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇo ceti vānacitrauṇṇāmayattharaṇo.Setattharaṇoti setatthikehi sevīyatīti soto, soyeva attharaṇo setattharaṇo. Iminā atthena paṭati setabhāvaṃ gacchatītipaṭikāti kātabbaṃ. Paṭikāsaddoyaṃ aḍḍhendupāsāṇepi pavattati.Ghanapupphakoti ghanaṃ kathinaṃ pupphametthāti ghanapupphako. Iminā ghanapupphasaṅkhātaṃ paṭalamettha atthītipaṭalikāti dasseti.Soti attharaṇo.Āmalakapaṭoti āmalakapupphaṃ dassetvā kato paṭo.Tūlikāti tūlaṃ pūretvā katā tūlikā.Vikatikāti sīhabyagghādirūpehi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15) vicittākārena karīyatīti vikatikā.Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘uddalomīti ubhatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ.Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Idha pana‘‘uddalomīti ekato uggatalomaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ,ekantalomīti ubhato uggatalomaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tasmā dve aṭṭhakathāyo aññamaññaṃ visadisā honti. Ettha dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathānayena vacanatthaṃ karissāmi. Uṭṭhitaṃ dvīhi pakkhehi, dvīsu vā dasāsaṅkhātaṃ lomametthātiuddalomī. Niggahitāgamaṃ katvā ‘‘undalomī’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Ekasmiṃ ante dasāsaṅkhātaṃ lomametthātiekantalomīti.Koseyyakaṭṭissamayanti etthakoseyyanti kosiyasuttaṃ.Kaṭṭissanti kaṭṭissanāmakaṃ vākaṃ. Iminā koseyyañca kaṭṭissañcakaṭṭissānīti virūpekasesaṃ katvā kaṭṭissehi pakataṃ attharaṇaṃ kaṭṭissanti atthaṃ dasseti.Suddhakoseyyanti ratanaaparisibbitaṃ suddhakoseyyaṃ. Iminā suddhakaṭṭissampi vaṭṭatīti dasseti.

254. Uccaṃ āsayanaṃ is uccāsayanaṃ. Mahantaṃ āsayanaṃ is mahāsayanaṃ. Such judgment should be understood for chairs, etc. Pamāṇātikkantāsana: a long seat. Because one leans on it and sits, here, or because it well gives length, it is called āsandī. Vāḷarūpānī: forms of wild animals such as lions and tigers. Pallaṅko: a couch on which the forms of wild animals are carved or marked on the legs. Gonako: a long-fleeced rug, gonako because one goes out with long fleece from it. Kojavo: a woollen blanket, kojavo because it moves on the ground. Tassā: of that long-fleeced rug. It is said that the hairs are more than four inches long. Vānacitrauṇṇāmayattharaṇo: vānena sibbanena sañjātaṃ citrarūpamettha means vānacitraṃ, woven with various designs; uṇṇāmayo, made of wool; that same covering is the woollen covering; vānacitrañca taṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇo ca means vānacitrauṇṇāmayattharaṇo. Setattharaṇo: a white blanket, setatthikehi sevīyatīti soto, that itself is the covering, setattharaṇo. With this meaning, paṭati setabhāvaṃ gacchatīti is to be done as paṭikā. This word paṭikā also applies to a half-moon-shaped stone. Ghanapupphako: a thick, solid floral rug. With this, he shows that ghanapupphasaṅkhātaṃ paṭalamettha atthīti means paṭalikā. So: that covering. Āmalakapaṭo: a cloth made displaying āmalaka flowers. Tūlikā: a mattress made by filling cotton. Vikatikā: a variegated coverlet because it is made in various forms, such as lions and tigers (D.N.A. 1.15). In the Dīghanikāya commentary, it is said, "uddalomīti ubhatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ," a woollen covering with fleece on both sides is uddalomī, a woollen covering with fleece on one side is ekantalomī. Here, however, it is said, "uddalomīti ekato uggatalomaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ, ekantalomīti ubhato uggatalomaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ," uddalomī is a woollen covering with fleece raised on one side, ekantalomī is a woollen covering with fleece raised on both sides. Therefore, the two commentaries are mutually inconsistent. Here, I will explain the meaning according to the Dīghanikāya commentary. Uddalomī: because what is raised has two sides, or because there is fleece on two sides amounting to ten. Making it niggahitāgamaṃ, there is also the reading "undalomī," this is the meaning. Ekantalomī: because there is fleece amounting to ten on one side. Koseyyakaṭṭissamayanti: here, koseyya means made of silk thread; kaṭṭissa means a woolen blanket named kaṭṭissa. By this, making koseyyañca kaṭṭissañca kaṭṭissānī by virūpekasesa, he shows that kaṭṭissehi pakataṃ attharaṇaṃ kaṭṭissanti means a covering made of kaṭṭissa. Suddhakoseyya: pure silk unadorned with jewels. By this, he shows that even pure kaṭṭissa is suitable.

kuttakanti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘soḷasanna’’ntiādi.Ajinacammehīti ajinamigacammehi, kataiti sambandho.Paveṇīti dupaṭṭatipaṭṭādīhi paraṃparavasena katattā ‘‘paveṇī’’ti vuccati. Ajinacammāni hi sukhumatarāni, tasmā dupaṭṭatipaṭṭādīni katvā paveṇivasena katāni. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ajinapaveṇī’’ti. ‘‘Kadalimigacammaṃ nāmā’’ti iminā tassa cammaṃ kadalimigaiti gahetabbaṃ uttarapadalopavasena vā upacārena vāti dasseti.Pavarasaddo uttamatthoti āha ‘‘uttamapaccattharaṇa’’nti.Tanti kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇaṃ.Sauttaracchadanti ettha sakāro sahasaddakāriyoti dassento āha ‘‘saha uttaracchadenā’’ti. ‘‘Uparī’’ti iminā uttarasaddassa seṭṭhādayo nivatteti. ‘‘Saddhi’’nti iminā sahasaddassa tulyatthaṃ nivatteti. ‘‘Seta…pe… na vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā rattavitānaṃ heṭṭhā kappiyapaccattharaṇe satipi na vaṭṭatīti dasseti. Kasmā? Rattavitānassa akappiyattā.Ubhatolohitakūpadhānanti ettha ubhasarūpaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcā’’ti. Sīso upagantvā tiṭṭhati etthātiupadhānaṃ,upa bhusaṃ vā sukhaṃ dhāretītiupadhānaṃ,bibbohanaṃ. Sace pamāṇayuttaṃ, taṃ upadhānaṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.

Kuttaka: explaining the meaning, he says, "of sixteen," etc. Ajinacammehī: with the hides of antelopes, the connection is to be made. Paveṇī: because it is made in a continuous series with double layers of cloth, etc., it is called "paveṇī." For antelope hides are very thin, therefore, having made double layers of cloth, etc., they are made in a continuous series. Therefore, it is said "ajinapaveṇī." With "kadalimigacammaṃ nāmā," it is to be understood that its hide is kadalimiga, or by metaphorical use with the omission of the latter term. Pavara means excellent, so he says, "excellent outer covering." Ta: that kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇa. Sauttaracchada: here, showing that the sa is like the word saha, he says, "with an outer covering." With "uparī," he eliminates other meanings such as seṭṭha of the word uttara. With "saddhi," he eliminates the meaning of similarity of the word saha. "Seta…pe…na vaṭṭatī": by this, he shows that even if there is a red canopy over the allowed outer covering below, it is not suitable. Why? Because a red canopy is not allowable. Ubhatolohitakūpadhāna: here, to show the two forms, it is said, "a head pillow and a foot pillow." Upadhānaṃ: that on which the head rests, or upadhānaṃ: because it very much supports happiness, a bolster. If it is of proper size, that pillow is suitable.

155. Sabbacammapaṭikkhepādikathā
155. Discourse on the Rejection of All Hides, etc.

255.Dīpipotakoti dīpipoto viyāti dīpipotako vaccho.Bhittidaṇḍakādīsūti bhittisambandhesu daṇḍakādīsu. Ādisaddena bhittithambhādayo saṅgaṇhāti.

255. Dīpipotako: a leopard cub like a leopard cub. Bhittidaṇḍakādīsū: in the pillars, etc., related to walls. With ādi, he includes wall pillars, etc.

256.Yo na sakkoti anupāhano gāmaṃ pavisituṃ, so gilāno nāmāti yojanā.

256. He who cannot enter the village without sandals is called sick.

157. Soṇakuṭikaṇṇavatthukathā
157. Story of Soṇa Kuṭikaṇṇa

257.Etenāti ‘‘kuraraghare’’ti pāṭhena.Assāti mahākaccānassa.Papātanāmaketi yasmā mahātaṭo ettha atthi, tasmā papātanāmako hoti.Etenāti ‘‘papātake pabbate’’ti pāṭhena.Assāti mahākaccānassa. Koṭiagghanakaṃ piḷandhanaṃ kaṇṇe etassatthītikuṭikaṇṇoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘koṭiagghanakaṃ panā’’tiādi. Piḷandhati anenātipiḷandhanaṃ,alaṅkāro. Dantajo catutthakkharo. ‘‘Pasādajanaka’’nti iminā pasādaṃ janetītipāsādikoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Pasādanīyanti pasāditabbaṃ, pasādituṃ arahanti attho.Atthavacananti attho vuccati anenāti atthavacanaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ idāni potthakesu ‘‘pasādanīya’’nti pāṭho natthi. ‘‘Pāsādika’’ntipadassa pubbe ‘‘dassanīya’’nti pāṭhoyeva atthi.Uttamadamathasamathantiettha damathasaddassa ñāṇatthañca indriyasaṃvaratthañca samathasaddassa samādhatthañca cittūpasamatthañca dassento āha ‘‘uttamaṃ damathañcā’’tiādi. Casaddena dvandavākyaṃ dasseti.Visūkāyikavipphanditānanti visūkāya paṭipakkhāya pavattānaṃ diṭṭhicittasaṅkhātānaṃ vividhacalanānaṃ. ‘‘Vīriyindriya’’nti imināyatindriyanti etthayatasaddo vīriyavācakoti dasseti.Nāganti ettha natthi āgu pāpametassāti nāgoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘āguvirahita’’nti kiṃ divasato paṭṭhāyāti āha ‘‘mama pabbajjādivasato paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Kaṇhā mattikā uttari etthātikaṇhuttarāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kaṇhamattikuttarā’’ti. ‘‘Uparī’’ti iminā uttarasaddassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Gunnaṃ khurehī’’ti iminā gunnaṃ khurakaṇṭakasadisattāgokaṇṭakānāmāti dasseti. Te gokaṇṭake rakkhitunti sambandho. Evaṃ kharā bhūmi hotīti yojanā.Etehīti eragūādīhi catūhi tiṇehi.Tanti eragūtiṇaṃ.Tenāti moragūtiṇena. Jantussa vaṇṇoti sambandho.Senāsanaṃ paññapesīti ettha kiṃ nāma senāsanaṃ paññapesīti āha ‘‘bhisiṃ vā kaṭasārakaṃ vā paññapesī’’ti. Paññapetvā ca pana soṇassa ārocesi. Kiṃ ārocesīti āha ‘‘āvuso’’tiādi. Satthā vasitukāmoti sambandho.

257. Etenā: with the reading "kuraraghare." Assā: of Mahākaccāna. Papātanāmake: because there is a great cliff here, therefore it is called Papāta. Etenā: with the reading "papātake pabbate." Assā: of Mahākaccāna. Koṭiagghanakaṃ piḷandhanaṃ kaṇṇe etassatthīti showing the meaning of kuṭikaṇṇo, he says, "more expensive than a crore," etc. Piḷandhanaṃ: that with which one adorns, an ornament. The fourth consonant is dental. With "pasādajanaka," he shows the meaning of pāsādiko as "pasādaṃ janetīti". Pasādanīya: should be delighted, worthy to be delighted, is the meaning. Atthavacana: meaning is spoken by this, therefore it is atthavacana. Now in the texts of the Pali, there is no reading "pasādanīya." Previously, for the word "pāsādika" there was only the reading "dassanīya." Uttamadamathasamatha: here, showing the meaning of damatha as knowledge and restraint of the senses, and the meaning of samatha as concentration and calming of the mind, he says, "excellent restraint," etc. The ca shows a compound sentence. Visūkāyikavipphanditāna: of various movements, known as views and thoughts, that occur in opposition to the absence of desire. With "vīriyindriya," he shows that in yatindriya, yata means energy. Nāga: here, showing the meaning of nāga as natthi āgu pāpametassāti nāgo, he says, "without fault." From what day onwards? He says, "from the day of my ordination." Showing the meaning of kaṇhuttarā as "black soil is superior here," he says, "kaṇhamattikuttarā." With "uparī," he shows the meaning of the word uttara. With "gunnaṃ khurehī," he shows that because the hooves of cows are like thorns, they are called gokaṇṭakā. They are protected from those thorns, is the connection. Thus the ground is rough. Etehī: with these four grasses such as eragū. Ta: that eragū grass. The colour of the insect, is the connection. Senāsanaṃ paññapesī: here, what kind of seat did he prepare? He says, "he prepared either a cushion or a mat." And having prepared it, he announced it to Soṇa. What did he announce? He says, "friend," etc. The connection is that the Teacher wishes to stay.

258.‘‘Tassa soṇassā’’ti imināpaṭibhātu tanti ettha ‘‘ta’’ntipadaṃ sāmyatthe upayogavacananti dasseti.Tanti tava.Aṭṭhakavaggikānīti aṭṭhapamāṇo, aṭṭhasamūho vā vaggo etesanti aṭṭhakavaggikāni. Kāmasuttādīni (su. ni. 772 ādayo) soḷasa suttāni.Yoti puggalo, samannāgatoti sambandho.Ariyopīti pisaddo na kevalaṃ sucisamannāgatoyeva pāpe na ramati, atha kho ariyopīti dasseti. ‘‘Paṭibhātu ta’’nti pāṭhato yāva ‘‘sucīti vutta’’nti pāṭhā kesuciyeva aṭṭhakathāpotthakesu atthi.Ayaṃ khvassāti etthaassasaddo ākhyātoti āha ‘‘bhaveyyā’’ti.Paridassesīti pañca varāni paricchinditvā dassesi. Yaṃ vacanaṃ me upajjhāyo jānāpeti, tassa vacanassa ayaṃ kālo bhaveyyāti yojanā.

258. With "tassa soṇassa," he shows that in paṭibhātu ta, the word "ta" is used in the sense of similarity. Ta: to you. Aṭṭhakavaggikānī: having eight as a measure, or a group of eight, is a vaggo for these, thus they are called aṭṭhakavaggikāni. Sixteen suttas, beginning with the Kāmasutta (Sn. 772 ff.). Yo: the person, the connection is to one who is endowed. Ariyopī: the pi shows that not only one who is endowed with purity does not delight in evil, but also one who is noble. From the reading "paṭibhātu ta" up to "sucīti vutta," these readings are only in some commentary texts. Ayaṃ khvassā: here, assa is a verb, so he says, "bhaveyyā." Paridassesī: having distinguished the five boons, he showed them. The meaning is that this would be the time for the word that my preceptor makes known to me.

259.Vinayadharapañcamenāti ettha upajjhāyapañcamenāti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘anussāvanācariyapañcamenā’’ti.Upāhanakosakoti upāhanāya pakkhipanokāso kosako. Eḷakacammaajacammesu akappiyaṃ nāma natthi. Migacamme pana kiñci vaṭṭati, na kiñci vaṭṭati. Taṃ vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘migacamme’’tiādi.Etesaṃyevāti eṇimigādīnaṃ channameva.Aññesaṃ panāti chahi migehi avasesānaṃ pana. Tesaṃ cammaṃ na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.

259. Vinayadharapañcamenā: here, rejecting the meaning as "with the preceptor as the fifth," he says, "with the teacher of the announcement as the fifth." Upāhanakosako: a case that is an opportunity to put sandals in. There is nothing impermissible in goat hides or sheep hides. But in the hides of deer, some are suitable, and some are not. Distinguishing that, he says, "migacamme," etc. Etesaṃyevā: only of these six deer, etc. Aññesaṃ panā: but of the remaining hides other than the six deer. Their hides are not suitable, is the connection.

Tesanti makkaṭādīnaṃ.

Tesa: of monkeys, etc.

Tatthāti gāthāya, makkaṭādīsu vā. ‘‘Sīhabyagghaacchataracchā’’ti iminā vāḷamigānaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti. Ettakāyeva vāḷamigāti āha ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi.Etesaṃyevāti sīhabyagghaacchataracchānameva. Na cammaṃ na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Yesanti channaṃ eṇimigādīnaṃ.Teti cha eṇimigādike.Hisaccaṃ sabbesaṃ etesaṃ vāḷamigānaṃ cammaṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Āharitvā vā na dinnanti āharitvā vā hatthe vā pādamūle vā ṭhapetvā na dinnaṃ. ‘‘Gaṇanaṃ na upetī’’ti iminā gaṇanaṃ upagacchatītigaṇanūpaganti atthaṃ dasseti.Adhiṭṭhitañcāti adhiṭṭhitaṃ pana.Yadāti yasmiṃ kāle.Tatoti kālato.

Tatthā: in the verse, or in monkeys, etc. With "sīhabyagghaacchataracchā," he shows the nature of wild animals. Are only these wild animals? He says, "na kevala," etc. Etesaṃyevā: only of these lions, tigers, bears and hyenas. Their hides are not suitable, is the connection. Yesa: of these six deer, etc. Te: those six deer, etc. Hi: truly the hides of all these wild animals are not suitable, is the connection. Āharitvā vā na dinna: having brought it, or having placed it in the hand or at the foot, it is not given. With "gaṇanaṃ na upetī," he shows the meaning of gaṇanūpaga as "gaṇanaṃ upagacchatīti". Adhiṭṭhitañcā: but what is determined. Yadā: at what time. Tato: from that time.

Iti cammakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the section on hides.

6. Bhesajjakkhandhakaṃ

6. The Section on Medicines

160. Pañcabhesajjādikathā
160. Discourse on the Five Medicines, etc.

260.Bhesajjakkhandhake saradakāle uppannosāradikoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saradakāle uppannenā’’ti. ‘‘Pittābādhenā’’ti iminā ābādhassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Pittābādhassa kāraṇaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tasmiṃ hī’’tiādi.Tenāti hetunā.Tesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Koṭṭhabbhantaragatanti koṭṭhassa abbhantaraṃ gataṃ. Antassa anto pavisanaṃ hotīti adhippāyo.Āhāratthanti āhārassa kiccaṃ, āhārena vā kattabbaṃ kiccaṃ.

260. In the Bhesajjakkhandhaka, explaining that sāradiko means "born in the autumn season," he says, "by what is born in the autumn season." With "pittābādhena," he shows the nature of the disease. Expanding on the cause of the bilious disease, he says, "tasmiṃ hī," etc. Tenā: by that reason. Tesa: of the monks. Koṭṭhabbhantaragata: gone inside the stomach. The intention is that entering inside the abdomen.

261.Nacchādentīti tāni bhesajjāni bhojanāni nacchādenti. Kasmā? Bhojanānaṃ ajīraṇattā. Iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘na jīrantī’’ti. Nacchādattā na vātarogaṃ paṭippassambhetuṃ sakkonti. Ettha ca ‘‘na jīrantī’’ti iminā nacchādanassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Na vāta…pe… sakkontī’’ti iminā tasseva phalaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Siniddhānī’’ti iminā sinihantītisenehikānīti atthaṃ dasseti.Bhattacchannakenāti ettha bhattassa acchannakaṃ nāma bhattassa arocikaṃ bhattassa ruciyā anuppādakanti āha ‘‘bhattārocakenā’’ti.

261. Nacchādentīti: They do not relish those medicines and foods. Why? Because the foods are not digested. Thus, showing this meaning, he says, "they are not digested." Because they are not relished, they are not able to alleviate vāta diseases. Here, it should be seen that with "they are not digested," he shows the reason for not relishing. With "not vāta…pe… they are able," he shows the result of that very thing. Siniddhānīti: With this, he shows the meaning that senehikāni means that they cause unctuousness. Bhattacchannakenāti: Here, bhattassa acchannakaṃ means the food is unappetizing, not producing relish for the food, as he says, "with lack of appetite for food."

262.Acchavasantiādīsu vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘paṭiggahitaṃ nippakkaṃ saṃsaṭṭha’’nti padānaṃ kiriyāvisesanaṃ katvā ‘‘paribhuñjitu’’nti padena sambandhitabbabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘kāle paṭiggahitanti ādīsū’’tiādi.Telaparibhogena paribhuñjitunti ettha kittakaṃ kālaṃ telaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbanti āha ‘‘sattāhakāla’’nti.

262. Acchavasantiādi: The interpretation should be understood in acchavasa, etc. In the Pali, to show that the words "received, raw, mixed" should be connected with the word "paribhuñjitu" by making them adverbs, it is said, "in kāle paṭiggahitanti," etc. Telaparibhogena paribhuñjitu: Here, he says "for a week" to indicate how long one should partake with oil.

161. Mūlādibhesajjakathā
161. The Story of Root Medicines, Etc.

263.Mūlabhesajjādivinicchayopīti pisaddo acchavasantiādīsu vinicchayaṃ apekkhati.Idhāti bhesajjakkhandhake.Yaṃ yanti vinicchayaṃ.Pisanasilāti pisati etthātipisanā,sāyeva silāti pisanasilā. Iminā acalaṃ hutvā nisīdatītinisadoti atthaṃ dasseti.Pisanapotakoti pisati anenāti pisano, soyeva potakoti pisanapotako, iminā nisadato potakotinisadapotakoti atthaṃ dasseti.Hiṅgujātiyoti hiṅgukulāni.

263. Mūlabhesajjādivinicchayopīti: The pi particle expects an interpretation in acchavasantiādi. Idhāti: In the section on medicines. Yaṃ yaṃti: Whatever interpretation. Pisanasilāti: Because one grinds on it, it is pisanā; that very thing is a stone, so it is pisanasilā. With this, he shows the meaning that nisado means "it sits immovably." Pisanapotakoti: Because one grinds with it, it is pisano; that very thing is a small stone, so it is pisanapotako. With this, he shows the meaning that nisadapotako means a small stone for sitting on. Hiṅgujātiyo: Types of hiṅgu.

Sāmuddanti ettha samudde santiṭṭhatīti sāmuddanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘samuddatīre’’tiādi. ‘‘Tīre’’ti iminā samuddeti ettha sattamīvibhattiyā samīpatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dasseti.Pakatiloṇanti sabhāvaloṇaṃ, na dabbasambhārehi saddhiṃ pacitanti attho. ‘‘Pabbate uṭṭhahatī’’ti iminā sindhunāmake pabbate uṭṭhahatītisindhavanti atthaṃ dasseti. Ubbito bhūmito īrati uggacchatītiubbiranti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhūmito aṅkuraṃ uṭṭhahatī’’ti. Iminā aṭṭhakathānayena oṭṭhajo tatiyakkharoyeva yujjati, potthakesu pana catutthakkharoyeva dissati. ‘‘Ubbhida’’ntipi pāṭho.Bilanti koṭṭhāso. Tasmā dabbasambhārehi bilehi saddhiṃ pacitaṃ bilanti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dabbasambhārehi saddhiṃ pacita’’nti. Abhidhāne pana (abhidhāne 461 gāthāyaṃ) ‘‘bilāla’’nti pāṭho atthi.Tanti bilaṃ.

Sāmuddanti: Here, showing the meaning of the word sāmuddanti as "it exists in the ocean," he says "on the seashore," etc. With "shore," he shows that in samudde, the locative case expresses proximity. Pakatiloṇa: Natural salt, meaning it is not cooked together with ingredients. "Pabbate uṭṭhahatīti" shows that sindhava means that it grows on a mountain called Sindhū. Showing the meaning of the word ubbira as "it sprouts and grows from the earth," he says, "a shoot sprouts from the earth." According to the commentary tradition, only the third letter with tāluja is appropriate here, but in books, only the fourth letter is seen. "Ubbhida" is also a reading. Bila: A compartment. Therefore, showing that bila means "cooked with ingredients in compartments," he says, "cooked together with ingredients." However, in the Abhidhāna (in the 461st verse of the Abhidhāna), there is a reading of "bilāla." Taṃ: That bila.

264.Assādīnaṃ kāyagandho viya kassaci kāyagandho hotīti yojanā.Tassāpīti bhikkhunopi. Pisaddena kaṇḍuvābādhabhikkhuādayopi sampiṇḍeti. Chakaṇasaddassa assādīnaṃ malepi pavattanato vuttaṃ ‘‘gomaya’’nti.Pākatikacuṇṇampīti apakkarajanacuṇṇampi.Etampīti pākatikacuṇṇampi.

264. The connection is that someone has a body odor like the odor of asses. Tassāpīti: Also of the bhikkhu. With the particle pi, he includes those with itching diseases, bhikkhus, etc. Because the word chakaṇa occurs even for the excrement of asses, it is said "cow dung." Pākatikacuṇṇampīti: Also with the powder of scraping dust. Etampīti: Also natural powder.

Tanti āmakamaṃsaṃ, na khādīti sambandho.Tanti āmakalohitaṃ vā, na pivīti sambandho.Amanussoti manussasadiso bhūto.Tanti āmakamaṃsalohitaṃ.

Taṃ: That is raw meat; the connection is that he should not eat it. Taṃ: That is raw blood; the connection is that he should not drink it. Amanusso: A being similar to a human. Taṃ: That is raw meat and blood.

265.‘‘Añjana’’nti nāmaṃ sāmaññanti āha ‘‘añjananti sabbasaṅgāhakavacanameta’’nti.Sabbasaṅgāhakavacananti sabbesaṃ añjanānaṃ saṅgāhakavacanaṃ.Etanti ‘‘añjana’’nti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Añjati cakkhuṃ makkheti anenātiañjanaṃ,añjati cakkhuṃ byattaṃ karotīti vāañjanaṃ,tālujo tatiyakkharo.Kapallanti kapalle pavattaṃ. Kapālañhi dīpasikhāya upari nikujjitvā tattha pavattaṃ masi ‘‘kapalla’’nti vuccati. Tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dīpasikhato gahitamasī’’ti.Añjanūpapisanehīti ettha añjanehi saddhiṃ upanetuṃ pisitabbanti añjanūpapisananti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘añjanena saddhiṃ ekato pisitehī’’ti. ‘‘Ekato’’ti iminā ‘‘saddhi’’nti padasseva atthaṃ dasseti.ti saccaṃ. Yaṃkiñci añjanūpapisanaṃ cuṇṇaṃ na na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Atha vā na vaṭṭati na hoti, vaṭṭatiyevāti yojanā. Imasmiṃ naye ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti ākhyātapadaṃ kiriyāntarāpekkhattā kattā hoti. Ākhyātesupi hi kattuttañca kammattañca labbhati.Candanantiādīni suviññeyyāneva.

265. ‘‘Añjana’’: He says that the name is a general term, "Añjana' is a collective term." Sabbasaṅgāhakavacanaṃ: A collective term for all añjana. Etaṃ: This word "añjana." Because it anoints and marks the eye, it is añjanaṃ; or because it makes the eye clear, it is añjanaṃ, the third letter is tāluja. Kapalla: Occurring in a potsherd. Indeed, having placed a potsherd upside down over a lamp flame, the soot that occurs there is called "kapalla." Showing that meaning, he says, "soot taken from a lamp flame." Añjanūpapisanehīti: Here, showing that the meaning of the word añjanūpapisananti is "to bring near and grind together with añjana," he says, "with those ground together with añjana." With "together," he shows the meaning of the word "saddhi." Hīti: Indeed. The connection is that any powder for applying añjana is suitable. Or it is not suitable, it is not; it is certainly suitable. In this way, in the phrase "na vaṭṭati," the predicate verb is the agent because it expects another action. For even in predicates, the agenthood and objecthood are obtained. Candanantiādi: Candana, etc., are very easy to understand.

Aṭṭhimayanti padassa atibyāpitadosaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘manussaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti.Salākaṭṭhāniyanti ettha salākā tiṭṭhanti etthāti salākaṭṭhāniyanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yatthā’’tiādi. Tatthayatthāti yasmiṃ susiradaṇḍakādike.Salākanti añjanisalākaṃ.Odahantīti ṭhapenti.Aṃsabaddhakoti aṃse baddhati anenāti aṃsabaddhako.Yamakanatthukaraṇinti natthu karīyati imāyāti natthukaraṇī, yamakā natthukaraṇī yamakanatthukaraṇī.

Rejecting the fault of over-extension of the word aṭṭhimaya, he says, "except for human bones." Salākaṭṭhāniya: Here, showing that the meaning of the word salākaṭṭhāniya is "a place where the probes stay," he says "where," etc. There, yatthā: In which hollow tube, etc. Salāka: An añjana probe. Odahantī: They place. Aṃsabaddhako: That by which one ties to the shoulder. Yamakanatthukaraṇi: A device by which natthu is done, a pair of natthu devices is yamakanatthukaraṇī.

267.Taṃ sabbaṃ telapākanti sambandho. ‘‘Ati viya khittamajjānī’’ti iminā ati viya khipīyanti pakkhipīyantīti atikhittāni, tāniyeva majjāni atikhittamajjānīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

267. The connection is that all of that is oil cooked. With "ati viya khittamajjānī," he shows the meaning of the word atikhittamajjānī as "those that are excessively thrown in and inserted are atikhittāni, those very marrows are atikhittamajjānī."

Paṇṇasedanti paṇṇehi sedaṃ.Aṅgārānanti aṅgārehi.Tatthāti tesu paṃsuvālikādīsu.Vātaharaṇapaṇṇānīti vātassa apanayanāni uddālādīni paṇṇāni.Tatthāti tesu paṇṇesu.Nānāpaṇṇabhaṅgakuthitanti nānāpaṇṇāniyeva bhañjitabbaṭṭhena nānāpaṇṇabhaṅgaṃ, tena kuthitaṃ nānāpaṇṇabhaṅgakuthitaṃ.Uṇhodakassāti uṇhodakena.Tatthāti udakakoṭṭhake.

Paṇṇaseda: Sweat from leaves. Aṅgārāna: With embers. Tatthā: In those dust, sand, etc. Vātaharaṇapaṇṇānī: Leaves such as uddāla that dispel vāta. Tatthā: In those leaves. Nānāpaṇṇabhaṅgakuthita: Varied leaves are indeed nānāpaṇṇabhaṅgaṃ in the sense of being broken, mixed with that is nānāpaṇṇabhaṅgakuthitaṃ. Uṇhodakassā: With hot water. Tatthā: In the water compartment.

Pabbe pabbeti phaḷumhi phaḷumhi.Yenāti pajjena. Taṃ pajjaṃ abhisaṅkharitunti yojanā. ‘‘Pādānaṃ sappāyabhesajja’’nti iminā pādassa hitaṃ pajjanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tilakakkenāti ettha kakkasaddassa cuṇṇavācakattā ‘‘piṭṭhehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kabaḷena pakkhipanaṃkabaḷikaṃ. Sattupiṇḍassa bhattakabaḷasadisattāsattupiṇḍanti vuttaṃ.Āṇi viyāti khīlā viya.Khārenāti loṇasakkharikamayena khārena. Vikāsaṃ rundhatītivikāsikaṃ,telarundhanapilotikaṃ.Vaṇakammanti vaṇassa, vaṇe vā kammaṃ.

Pabbe pabbe: In each joint. Yenā: With whichever bandage. The connection is that bandage is prepared. With "pādānaṃ sappāyabhesajja," he shows the meaning of the word "pajja" as "beneficial to the foot." Tilakakkenā: Here, because the word kakka means powder, it is said "with flour." Placing with a mouthful is kabaḷikaṃ. Because a mass of grain is similar to a mouthful of food, it is said sattupiṇḍaṃ. Āṇi viyā: Like a peg. Khārenā: With alkali made of salt and sugar. Because it obstructs opening, it is vikāsikaṃ, a cloth patch that obstructs oil. Vaṇakamma: Work on a wound, or in a wound.

268.Sappadaṭṭhakāleyeva kiṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjitabbanti āha ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi.Idanti mahāvikaṭaṃ, paribhuñjīkabbanti sambandho.Aññesu panāti sappadaṭṭhato aññesu pana. Sace bhūmipatto gūtho hoti, paṭiggahetabboti yojanā.

268. He says, "not only," etc., to indicate what one should take and partake oneself as soon as one is bitten by a snake. Idaṃti: This great vikaṭaṃ, one should partake, is the connection. Aññesu panā: But in others than a snake bite. The connection is that if there is excrement fallen on the ground, it should be received.

269.Vasīkaraṇapānakasamuṭṭhitarogoti kantibhāvasaṅkhātaṃ vasaṃ karoti anenāti vasīkaraṇaṃ, bhesajjaṃ, pivate pānaṃ, taṃyeva pānakaṃ, vasīkaraṇassa pānakaṃ vasīkaraṇapānakaṃ, tena samuṭṭhito rogo vasīkaraṇapānakasamuṭṭhitarogo. Imināgharadinnakābādhoti ettha gharaṇiyā dinnena vasīkaraṇapānakena samuṭṭhito ābādho gharadinnakābādhoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Sītāya āloḷetabbantisītāloḷaṃ,udakaṃ. Sītāsaddo naṅgalalekhāsaṅkhātaṃ phālapaddhatiṃ mukhyato vadati, phālapaddhatikare phāle laggamattikaṃ upacārato vadati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sītāya āloḷetabba’’nti. Aṭṭhakathāyampi tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘naṅgalenā’’tiādi.

269. Vasīkaraṇapānakasamuṭṭhitarogo: That which makes one compliant, counted as a state of charm, is vasīkaraṇaṃ, medicine; one drinks it, so it is pānaṃ, that very thing is pānakaṃ; vasīkaraṇa’s pānakaṃ is vasīkaraṇapānakaṃ; the disease that arises from that is vasīkaraṇapānakasamuṭṭhitarogo. With this, he shows that the meaning of the word gharadinnakābādho is "the illness that arises from the vasīkaraṇa pānaka given by a housewife is gharadinnakābādho." To stir with cold is sītāloḷaṃ, water. The word sītā primarily refers to the plowshare counted as a line made by a plow, and secondarily refers to the soil clinging to the plow that makes the line of the plowshare. Therefore, it is said "to be stirred with cold." Showing that meaning even in the commentary, he says "with a plow," etc.

Vipakkagahaṇikoti visesena pācāpanagahaṇiko.Muttaharītakanti ettha ‘‘mutta’’nti sāmaññato vuttepi gomuttameva gahetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘gomuttaparibhāvitaṃ harītaka’’nti. Iminā muttena paribhāvitaṃ harītakaṃ muttaharītakanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Taṇḍulakasaṭoti taṇḍuladhovanodakakasaṭo dhotasiniddho,sovamuggapacitapānīyoti yojanā. ‘‘Maṃsarasenā’’ti iminā maṃsaraso maṃsena paṭicchādetabbantipaṭicchādanīyanti vuccatīti dasseti.

Vipakkagahaṇiko: That which strongly causes digestion. Muttaharītaka: Here, showing that even though "mutta" is stated generally, only cow urine should be taken, he says, "harītakī steeped in cow urine." With this, he shows that the meaning of the word muttaharītakanti is "harītakī steeped in urine is muttaharītakanti." Taṇḍulakasaṭo: The sediment of water used to wash rice, washed and unctuous; the connection is sova, water in which lentils have been cooked. With "maṃsarasenā," he shows that maṃsaraso is said to be paṭicchādanīya because it is covered with meat.

163. Guḷādianujānanakathā
163. The Story of Permitting Jaggery, Etc.

272.ti saccaṃ.Pakkattāti muggānaṃ pakkabhāvato.Teti muggā.

272. Hīti: Indeed. Pakkattā: Because of the cooked state of the lentils. Te: Those lentils.

274.Akappiyakuṭiyanti akappiyakuṭiyā anto.Assāti bhikkhuno na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Tampīti uṇhayāgumpi. Pisaddena pageva āmisaṃ pacitunti dasseti.Uttaṇḍulabhattanti pakkataṇḍulato viyogoti uttaṇḍulo, ukāro hi viyogatthavācako, apakkataṇḍuloti attho. Uttaṇḍulamayaṃ bhattanti uttaṇḍulabhattaṃ. Sakiṃ kuthitesu khīratakkādīsu aggiṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Biḷālādīnaṃ sattānaṃ samūho rūḷhīvasenaukkapiṇḍakoti vuccatīti āha ‘‘biḷālamūsikagodhāmaṅgusā’’ti. Vighāsādabhāvena nihatamānattā kāyavācaṃ dametītidamakovighāsādoti āha ‘‘vighāsādā’’ti.

274. Akappiyakuṭiya: Inside an unallowable dwelling. Assā: It is not allowable for the bhikkhu, is the connection. Tampī: Also hot rice gruel. With the particle pi, he shows that even meat is cooked separately. Uttaṇḍulabhatta: Separated from cooked rice, so it is uttaṇḍulo; u is a word that expresses separation, meaning uncooked rice. Food made of uncooked rice is uttaṇḍulabhatta. The connection is that it is allowable to put fire to milk, buttermilk, etc., that have been heated once. He says, "biḷālamūsikagodhāmaṅgusā," to indicate that the collection of beings such as cats, mice, lizards, and mongooses is conventionally called ukkapiṇḍako. Because his pride is destroyed by eating leftovers, he tames his body and speech, so he is a damako who eats leftovers, as he says, "vighāsādā."

276.Tato nīhaṭanti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yatthā’’tiādi.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.Nīhaṭanti nīharitvā haritaṃ.

276. Tato nīhaṭa: Here, showing the range of the word ta, he says "where," etc. Yatthā: In whatever place. Nīhaṭa: Having removed and brought out.

278.Vanaṭṭhaṃ pokkharaṭṭhanti ettha vane tiṭṭhatītivanaṭṭho,pokkhare tiṭṭhatītipokkharaṭṭhoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vane cevā’’tiādi. ‘‘Paduminigacche’’ti iminā pokkharasaddo padumavācakoti dasseti. Yassa bījaṃ aṅkuraṃ na janeti, taṃ phalaṃabījaṃnāmāti yojanā.

278. Vanaṭṭhaṃ pokkharaṭṭhaṃ: Here, showing that the meaning of the word vanaṭṭho is "it stays in the forest," and the meaning of the word pokkharaṭṭho is "it stays in a lotus pond," he says "in the forest and," etc. With "paduminigacche," he shows that the word pokkhara means lotus. The connection is that the fruit whose seed does not generate a sprout is called abījaṃ.

167. Satthakammapaṭikkhepakathā
167. The Story of Rejecting Surgical Operations

279.Dukkhena rupatītiduropayoti dassento āha ‘‘dukkhena ruhatī’’ti.Satthakammaṃ vā vatthikammaṃ vāti ettha satthena kātabbaṃ kammaṃsatthakammaṃ,vatthipīḷanaṃ kātabbaṃ kammaṃvatthikammanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā paṭicchanne’’tiādi. ‘‘Sūciyā vā’’tiādinā satthakammanti ettha ‘‘sattha’’nti padaṃ upalakkhaṇamattanti dasseti. ‘‘Satthena vā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘chindanaṃ vā phālanaṃ vā’’tipadehi yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Sūciyā vā kaṇṭakena vā sattikāya vā’’tipadāni ‘‘vijjhanaṃ vā’’ti padena yojetabbāni. ‘‘Pāsāṇasakkhalikāya vā nakhena vā’’ti padāni ‘‘lekhanaṃ vā’’ti padena yojetabbāni.Etanti satthena chindanādikammaṃ.Ettha cāti satthakammavatthikammesu.Tattha panāti sambādhe pana.Tenāti khārādinā. Vaccamagge yāya bhesajjamakkhitādānavaṭṭiyā khārakammaṃ vā karonti, yāya veḷunāḷikāya telaṃ vā pavesenti, sā bhesajjamakkhitādānavaṭṭi vā sā veḷunāḷikā vā vaṭṭatiyevāti yojanā.

279. Showing that it grows with difficulty, so it is duropayo, he says "it grows with difficulty." Satthakammaṃ vā vatthikammaṃ vā: Here, showing that the meaning of the word satthakammaṃ is "the operation to be done with a knife," and the meaning of the word vatthikamma is "the operation to be done with a suppository," he says "as in a covered place," etc. With "sūciyā vā," etc., he shows that in satthakamma, the word "sattha" is merely indicative. The phrase "satthena vā" should be connected with the phrases "chindanaṃ vā phālanaṃ vā." The phrases "sūciyā vā kaṇṭakena vā sattikāya vā" should be connected with the phrase "vijjhanaṃ vā." The phrases "pāsāṇasakkhalikāya vā nakhena vā" should be connected with the phrase "lekhanaṃ vā." Etaṃ: This operation of cutting, etc., with a knife. Ettha cā: And in these surgical and suppository operations. Tattha panā: But in a constricted place. Tenā: With alkali, etc. The connection is that the suppository smeared with medicine by which they perform alkali operations on the anal passage, or that bamboo tube by which they introduce oil, that suppository smeared with medicine or that bamboo tube is certainly allowable.

280.Taṃdivasanti tasmiṃ divase. Kiñci satthanti yojanā.Imāyāti suppiyāya aññaṃ kiñci adeyyaṃ kimpi bhavissatīti yojanā.Yatra nāmāti ettha trapaccayo kāraṇatthe hotīti āha ‘‘yasmā nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Vīmaṃsī’’ti imināpaṭivekkhīti ettha paṭiavapubbo ikkhadhātu vīmaṃsanatthoti dasseti.Asukamaṃsanti asukaṃ maṃsaṃ, asukassa vā sattassa maṃsaṃ.

280. Taṃ divasaṃ: On that day. Some knife, is the connection. Imāyā: What else will there be that is ungenerous to this Suppiyā, is the connection. Yatra nāmā: Here, he says "yasmā nāmā" because the tra suffix is in the sense of cause. With "vīmaṃsī," he shows that in paṭivekkhī, the verb root ikkh preceded by paṭi and ava is in the sense of investigation. Asukamaṃsa: Such and such meat, or the meat of such and such a being.

169. Hatthimaṃsādipaṭikkhepakathā
169. The Story of Rejecting Elephant Meat, Etc.

281.Araññakokā nāmāti sasabiḷālādayo satte khādanatthāya kukati ādadātītikokoaraññe jāto kokoaraññakoko, sunakhasadisāti gāmasunakhena sadisā.Tesanti araññakokānaṃ.Yo panāti sunakho pana, uppannoti sambandho.Gāmasunakhiyāti sāmyatthe sāmivacanaṃ.Kokenāti sahādiyoge karaṇavacanaṃ. Tāni padāni ‘‘saṃyogenā’’ti padena yojetabbāni.Tassāti sunakhassa.

281. Because a kokā of the forest takes and gives creatures such as hares and cats for the purpose of eating, it is koko; a koko born in the forest is araññakoko, similar to dogs, similar to village dogs. Tesaṃ: Of those forest kokas. Yo panā: But whichever dog, is born, is the connection. Gāmasunakhiyā: The word sāmivacanaṃ is in the sense of similarity. Kokenā: The instrumental case is in the sense of association. Those words should be connected with the word "saṃyogenā." Tassā: Of that dog.

Etthāti manussamaṃsādīsu.Sajātikatāyāti samānajātikabhāvato.Anupaddavatthāyāti anupaddavatthaṃ, paṭikkhittānīti sambandho.Āpattīti manussamaṃse thullaccayena, sese dukkaṭena āpatti.Uddissa kataṃ panāti bhikkhuṃ uddissa katamaṃsaṃ pana.

Etthā: In these human meats, etc. Sajātikatāyā: Because of being of the same kind. Anupaddavatthāyā: Undisturbed cloths, is the connection that they are rejected. Āpattī: In the case of human meat, the offense is thullaccaya; in the remainder, the offense is dukkaṭa. Uddissa kataṃ panā: But meat made specifically for a bhikkhu.

170. Yāgumadhugoḷakādikathā
170. The Story of Rice Gruel, Honeycomb, Etc.

282.Ekakoti ettha ekato asahāyatthe kapaccayoti āha ‘‘natthi me dutiyo’’ti.Soti brāhmaṇo.Vayaṃ katvāti paribbayaṃ katvā, paṭiyādāpesi kirāti yojanā.Anumodanagāthāyāti anumodanapakāsakāya gāthāya. ‘‘Patthayataṃ icchata’’nti padānaṃ alamatthapayoge sampadānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘alameva dātunti iminā sambandho’’ti.Soyeva gahetabboti ‘‘dātu’’ntibhāvassa kattubhāvena so eva pāṭho gahetabboti attho.

282. Ekako here means 'alone,' in the sense of without a companion, with the suffix 'ka.' Thus, it is said, "I have no second." So means the brahmin. Vayaṃ katvā means having made expenditure, meaning he arranged to give it. Anumodanagāthāya means by the verse expressing appreciation. "Patthayataṃ icchataṃ" are words in the sense of 'enough,' thus it is said, "it is related to 'alameva dātuṃ'." Soyeva اہمیت means that this reading should be taken as the agent of the state of being a giver; so eva pāṭho is to be understood as such.

283.Yā yāgu pavāraṇaṃ janeti, sā yāgubhojjayāgunāmāti yojanā.Yanti kālaṃ. ‘‘Ādiṃ katvā’’ti imināyadaggenāti ettha aggasaddo ādyattho kiriyāvisesanatthe karaṇavacananti dasseti. ‘‘Sagganibbattakapuñña’’nti imināsaggāti ettha phalūpacāraṃ dasseti.Soti guḷo.

283. That yāgu which generates pavāraṇa, that yāgu is called bhojjayāgu. Ya means time. By "ādiṃ katvā," here, the word yadaggenā shows that the word 'agga' means 'beginning,' a specification of the action, and is in the instrumental case. By "sagganibbattakapuñña," here, saggā shows the treatment of the fruit. So means jaggery.

284.Tathārūpenāti tathāsabhāvena. Guḷassa anurūpasabhāvenāti attho.

284. Tathārūpenā means with such a nature, that is, with a nature befitting jaggery.

173. Pāṭaligāmavatthukathā
173. The Story About Pāṭaligāma

285.Yathā sabbaṃ santhataṃ hoti, evaṃ tathā sabbasantharisanthatanti yojanā.

285. Just as everything is spread out, so in that way, it is all well-spread, that is the meaning of sabbasantharisanthatanti.

286.Sunidho ca vassakāro cāti ettha cakārehi dvandavākyaṃ dasseti.Āyamukhapacchindanatthanti suṅkamukhassa pacchedanatthaṃ. ‘‘Gharavatthūnī’’ti iminā vatthusaddassa kāraṇadabbatthe paṭikkhipitvā bhūbhedatthaṃ dīpeti. Tā devatā nāmenti kirāti yojanā.Yathānurūpanti yaṃ yaṃ bhogabalānurūpaṃ.Loketi sattaloke.Saddoti kittighoso.Tenevāti tena saddassa abbhuggatahetunā eva. ‘‘Osaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ nāmā’’ti imināariyaṃ āyatananti ettha āyatanasaddo samosaraṇaṭṭhānatthoti dasseti. Yattakaṃ kayavikkayaṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti sambandho. ‘‘Vāṇijānaṃ…pe… kayavikkayaṭṭhānaṃ nāmā’’ti iminā vaṇijā patanti sannipatanti etthātivaṇippatoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vaṇijapato’’ti vattabbe jakāralopoti daṭṭhabbo. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tesa’’nti pāṭhasesassa ajjhāharitabbabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ ariyāyatanavāṇijapatāna’’nti.Tesanti ca sāmyatthe sāmivacanaṃ, niddhāraṇatthe vā vibhattaapādānatthe vā.Idanti puraṃ.Puṭabhedananti ettha puṭaṃ bhindanti etthātipuṭabhedananti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhaṇḍikabhedanaṭṭhāna’’nti. ‘‘Samuccayattho vāsaddo’’ti vuttavacanaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tatra hī’’tiādi. Tatthatatrāti pāṭaliputte, tīsu vā aggiudakamithubhedesu. ‘‘Aññamaññabhedā’’ti imināmithubhedāti ettha mithusaddassa aññamaññavevacanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Uḷumpakullasaddānaṃ atthe samānepi karaṇavisesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘uḷumpa’’ntiādi. Uḷu vuccati udakaṃ, tato pāti rakkhatītiuḷumpo. Kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tasmiṃ ulati gacchatītikullo.

286. Sunidho ca vassakāro cā—here, the particle 'ca' indicates a compound sentence. Āyamukhapacchindanatthaṃ means for the cutting off of the entrance for taxes. By "gharavatthūnī," he clarifies that the word 'vatthu' refers to land, rejecting the meaning of 'causal substance.' It means, those deities name the land. Yathānurūpaṃ means whatever is appropriate to one's power and wealth. Loke means in the world of beings. Saddo means the sound of fame. Tenevā means by that very reason, due to the rise of that sound. By "Osaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ nāmā," here, ariyaṃ āyatanaṃ indicates that the word āyatana means a place of gathering. What is called a place of buying and selling? The connection is made by "Vāṇijānaṃ…pe… kayavikkayaṭṭhānaṃ nāmā." Here, the statement "vaṇijā patanti sannipatanti etthāti vaṇippato" shows the meaning of the term. "Vaṇijapato" should be said, but the omission of the 'ja' is to be seen. In the Pali text, to show that "tesaṃ" is the remainder of the text to be supplied, it is said "tesaṃ ariyāyatanavāṇijapatānaṃ." Tesaṃ is a genitive case in the sense of possession, or in the sense of specification, or in the sense of separation. Idaṃ means this city. Puṭabhedanaṃ means here "puṭaṃ bhindanti etthāti puṭabhedanaṃ," showing the meaning of the word, he says "bhaṇḍikābhedanaṭṭhānaṃ." Expanding on the statement "samuccayattho vāsaddo," he says "tatra hī" etc. Tatra tatrā means in Pāṭaliputta, or in the three divisions of fire, water, and mutual discord. By "aññamaññabhedā," here, mithubhedā indicates that the word 'mithu' has the sense of 'mutual.' Although the meanings of the words uḷumpa and kulla are the same, he shows the difference in cause by saying "uḷumpaṃ" etc. Uḷu means water, therefore, it protects from that; hence, uḷumpo. Kaṃ means water; in that, it moves; hence, kullo.

Aṇṇavanti ettha aṇṇavo nāma kiṃ samuddassa nāmanti āha ‘‘aṇṇava’’ntiādi. ‘‘Aṇṇava’’nti etaṃ nāmaṃ udakaṭṭhānassa adhivacananti yojanā. Aṇṇo vuccati udakaṃ, taṃ etasmiṃ atthītiaṇṇavo. Sarasaddassa akārādimhi ca kaṇḍe ca pavattanato vuttaṃ ‘‘saranti idha nadī adhippetā’’ti.Idhāti imissaṃ gāthāyaṃ.Idanti atthajātaṃ.

Aṇṇavaṃ—here, what is the meaning of aṇṇavo, is it a name for the ocean? He says "aṇṇavaṃ" etc. "Aṇṇavaṃ" is a designation for a place of water. Aṇṇo means water; that exists in this, therefore, aṇṇavo. Since the word saras appears at the beginning with 'a' and in the section with 'ka,' it is said, "saranti idha nadī adhippetā." Idhā means in this verse. Idaṃ means the collection of meanings.

Yeti ariyā.Teti ariyā, tarantīti sambandho.Visajjapallalānīti ettha visajjasaddo tvāpaccayanto, pallalasaddo ninnaṭṭhānavācakoti āha ‘‘visajja…pe… ninnaṭṭhānānī’’ti. Ayaṃ pana jano kullaṃ bandhatīti yojanā. Tiṇṇā medhāvino janā iti vuttaṃ hotīti yojanā.

Ye means the noble ones. Te means the noble ones, they cross over, is the connection. Visajjapallalāni—here, the word visajja ends in the suffix 'tvā,' and the word pallala denotes a low place, as he says "visajja…pe… ninnaṭṭhānāni." But these people bind a raft. It is said that the wise people have crossed over. That is the meaning.

287.Ananubodhāti ettha kāraṇatthe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘abujjhanenā’’ti.Sandhāvitaṃ saṃsaritanti ettha tapaccayassa kammatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mayā ca tumhehi cā’’ti. Iminā kattutthe sāmivacananti dasseti. ‘‘Atha vā’’tiādinā tapaccayassa bhāvatthaṃ dasseti.Saṃsitanti ettha saradhātuyā rakāro lopoti āha ‘‘saṃsarita’’nti. ‘‘Taṇhārajjū’’ti iminā bhavato bhavaṃ netītibhavanettīti vacanatthena taṇhārajju bhavanetti nāmāti dasseti.

287. Ananubodhā—here, it is a statement without certainty in the sense of cause, as he says, "abujjhanena." Sandhāvitaṃ saṃsaritaṃ—here, with reference to the passive sense of the suffix 'ta,' it is said, "mayā ca tumhehi cā." By this, it indicates a genitive case in the sense of the agent. By "Atha vā" etc., he shows the meaning of the suffix 'ta' in the sense of state. Saṃsitaṃ—here, the 'ra' of the root 'sara' is dropped, as he says, "saṃsaritaṃ." By "Taṇhārajjū," the statement "bhavato bhavaṃ netīti bhavanettī" shows that the rope of craving is called bhavanetti.

289.Vaṇṇavatthālaṅkārāni sāmaññavasena ‘‘nīlā’’ti vuttānīti āha ‘‘nīlāti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhaka’’nti.Tatthāti ‘‘nīlā’’tiādipāṭhe.Tesanti licchavīnaṃ. Pakativaṇṇā nīlā na hontīti yojanā.Etanti ‘‘nīlā’’tiādivacanaṃ.Paṭivattesīti ettha vatudhātu upasaggavasena vā atthātisayavasena vā paharaṇatthoti āha ‘‘pahāresī’’ti. ‘‘Sajanapada’’nti imināsāhāranti ettha āhārasaddo janapadatthoti dasseti. Janapado hi yasmā nagarassa parivārabhāvena āharitabbo, imasmā ca rājapurisā baliṃ āharanti, tasmā āhāroti vutto. Sajanapadaṃ vesāliṃ dajjeyyāthāti yojanā.Aṅguliṃ phoṭesunti ettha phuṭadhātu sañcalanatthoti āha ‘‘aṅguliṃ cālesu’’nti.Itthikāyāti itthīyeva purisato khuddakaṭṭhena itthikā, tāya.

289. The colors, cloths, and ornaments are generally called "nīlā," as he says, "nīlāti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhakaṃ." Tatthā means in the reading "nīlā" etc. Tesaṃ means of the Licchavis. The natural colors are not blue, that is the meaning. Etaṃ means the statement "nīlā" etc. Paṭivattesī—here, the verb root 'vatu' has the sense of striking, either because of the prefix or because of excess of meaning, as he says, "pahāresī." By "sajanapada," here, sāhāraṃ indicates that the word 'āhāra' means 'janapada.' Since the janapada is to be brought as a retinue of the city, and from this, the royal officials bring bali, therefore it is called āhāra. One should give Vesālī along with its janapada. Aṅguliṃ phoṭesuṃ—here, the root 'phuṭa' has the sense of moving, as he says, "aṅguliṃ cālesuṃ." Itthikāyā—an itthī is smaller than a man in the sense of being small, by that itthikā.

178. Sīhasenāpativatthukathā
178. The Story About Sīha the General

290.Dhammassa ca anudhammanti ettha dhammasaddo kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘kāraṇassa anukāraṇa’’nti. ‘‘Parehī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘vutta’’iti pade kattā. ‘‘Vuttakāraṇenā’’tipadaṃ ‘‘sakāraṇo’’tipade karaṇaṃ. Koci appamattakopi tumhākaṃ vādoti yojanā. ‘‘Viññūhī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘garahitabba’’iti pade kattā. ‘‘Garahitabbakāraṇa’’nti padaṃ ‘‘na āgacchatī’’ti pade kammaṃ.Anabbhakkhātukāmāti ettha abhityūpasaggo abhibhavanattho āpubbo khādhātu pakathanatthoti āha ‘‘abhibhavitvā na ācikkhitukāmā’’ti.

290. Dhammassa ca anudhammaṃ—here, the word 'dhamma' has the sense of cause, as he says, "kāraṇassa anukāraṇaṃ." The word "Parehī" is the agent in the word "vutta." The phrase "Vuttakāraṇenā" is the instrument in the phrase "sakāraṇo." May even a small amount of your debate be present. The word "Viññūhī" is the agent in the word "garahitabba." The phrase "Garahitabbakāraṇaṃ" is the object in the word "na āgacchatī." Anabbhakkhātukāmā—here, the prefix 'abhi' has the sense of overpowering, and the root 'khā' with the prefix ā has the sense of speaking, as he says, "abhibhavitvā na ācikkhitukāmā."

293.Anuviccakāranti ettha anuviccasaddo vicadhātu tvāpaccayantoti āha ‘‘anuvicitvā’’ti. ‘‘Cintetvā’’ti iminā vicadhātuyā ñāṇatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kātabba’’nti iminā kātabbantikāranti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Paṭākanti dhajapaṭākaṃ. ‘‘Āhiṇḍeyyu’’nti imināpariyāyeyyunti ettha paripubbaāpubba yādhātuyā gatyatthaṃ dasseti. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘parihareyyu’’ntipi pāṭho.Āhiṇḍeyyunti āhiṇḍanti. Muddhajo tatiyakkharo.Opānabhūtanti ettha opāno viya bhūto opānabhūtoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘paṭiyattaudapāno viya ṭhita’’nti. ‘‘Udapāno’’ti iminā opānasaddo udapānatthoti dasseti. Udapāno hi sabbe janā osaritvā pivanti etthātiopānoti vuccati.Imesanti nigaṇṭhānaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Sampattānaṃ dānaṃ dātabbameva, tasmā mā upacchinditthāti yojanā.Uddissāti tvāpaccayantasaddo ‘‘kata’’nti uttarapadena samāsoti āha ‘‘uddisitvā kata’’nti. Eseva nayo‘‘paṭiccakamma’’nti etthāpi.

293. Anuviccakāra—here, the word anuvicca ends in the suffix 'tvā' of the root 'vic,' as he says, "anuvicitvā." By "cintetvā," he shows the sense of knowledge of the root 'vic.' By "kātabba," he shows the meaning of the word kāra as 'kātabba.' Paṭāka means a flag banner. By "Āhiṇḍeyyu," here, pariyāyeyyu indicates that the root 'yā' with the prefixes paripubba and āpubba has the sense of movement. In the Pali text, the reading "parihareyyu" is also found. Āhiṇḍeyyu means they wander around. Muddhajo is the third letter. Opānabhūtaṃ—here, showing the meaning that opānabhūta is like an opāno, he says, "paṭiyattaudapāno viya ṭhita." By "Udapāno," he shows that the word opāna means udapāna. Udapāna is called opāno because all people descend and drink there. Imesaṃ means of the Nigaṇṭhas. means truly, or because. Giving to those who have arrived is to be given, therefore, do not interrupt it. Uddissā—this word ending in the suffix 'tvā' is a compound with the following word "kata," as he says, "uddisitvā kata." This same method applies to "paṭiccakamma" as well.

294.Paṭiccakammanti etaṃ nāmaṃ nimittakammassa adhivacananti yojanā.Yoti yo koci jano. Vadhakassa pāṇaghātakammaṃ hoti viya, tassāpi hotīti yojanā.Na jīrantīti ettha jaradhātu gatyatthoti āha ‘‘na gacchantī’’ti.

294. The designation paṭiccakamma is a designation for the action of making a sign. Yo means whatever person. As there is an action of killing for a butcher, so it is for him too. Na jīrantī—here, the root 'jara' has the sense of going, as he says, "na gacchantī."

179. Kappiyabhūmianujānanakathā
179. The Talk on Approving Habitable Land

295.Bahārāmakoṭṭhaketi ettha samīpatthe bhummavacananti āha ‘‘bahārāmakoṭṭhakasamīpeti ārāmakoṭṭhakassa bahi samīpeti attho’’ti.Acchantīti vasanti.Etanti ‘‘paccantima’’nti etaṃ vacanaṃ.Dhuravihāropīti padhānavihāropi.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne.Anupageyevāti pātoyeva.Oravasaddanti uccaravasaṅkhātaṃ saddaṃ.Kapilasuttapariyosāneti suttanipāte (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.kapilasuttavaṇṇanā) saṅgahitassa kapilasuttassa pariyosāne. Pañcasatānaṃ kevaṭṭapurisānanti sambandho.

295. Bahārāmakoṭṭhake—here, the locative case is in the sense of proximity, as he says, "bahārāmakoṭṭhakasamīpe means outside the monastery near the boundary." Acchantī means they live. Etaṃ means this word "paccantima." Dhuravihāropī means even the main monastery. Tattha tatthā means in that particular place. Anupageyevā means very early in the morning. Oravasaddaṃ means the sound known as uccaravasaṅkhātaṃ. Kapilasuttapariyosāne means at the end of the Kapilasutta included in the Suttanipāta (Su. Ni. Aṭṭha. 2.Kapilasuttavaṇṇanā). It is connected to pañcasatānaṃ kevaṭṭapurisānanti.

Ussāvanantikādīsuevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Yo vihāro kariyatīti sambandho. Bhūmiyā gati viya gati etesantibhūmigatikā. Patiṭṭhāpentehi bahūhi bhikkhūhi patiṭṭhāpetabboti sambandho. Nicchārentehi bhikkhūhīti yojanā.Sayanti bhikkhu.Taṃ panāti ‘‘saṅghassa kappiyakuṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vacanaṃ pana.Avatvāpītipisaddo tathā ‘‘vatvāpī’’ti atthaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Aṭṭhakathāsūti mahāaṭṭhakathādīsu tīsu aṭṭhakathāsu.Etthāti ussāvanantikakuṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Samakālaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vacanaṃ daḷhīkaronto āha ‘‘sace hī’’tiādi.Vacaneti ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti vacane.Tasminti thambhe.Tenevāti akatabhāveneva.ti saccaṃ.Etthāti bahūsu.

Ussāvanantikādīsu—in such cases, the decision is to be understood in this way. Whatever monastery is being built is the connection. Bhūmigatikā means those whose movement is like the movement of the earth. It should be established by many monks establishing it is the connection. By the monks expelling it is the meaning. Sayaṃ means bhikkhu. Taṃ panā means the statement "saṅghassa kappiyakuṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" pana. Avatvāpī—the particle pi combines the meaning "vatvāpī." Aṭṭhakathāsū means in the three commentaries, such as the Mahāaṭṭhakathā. Etthā means in the Ussāvanantika Kuti. Reinforcing the statement "Samakālaṃ vaṭṭatī," he says, "sace hī" etc. Vacane means in the statement "kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā." Tasmiṃ means in that pillar. Tenevā means by the very fact of not having been done. means truly. Etthā means in many.

Yatoti iṭṭhakasilāmattikāpiṇḍato.Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘bahūhi samparivāretvā kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti vuttanayeneva.Iṭṭhakādayoti ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbaiṭṭhakādayo. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Tathāti yathā andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā. Thambhādīni ukkhipitvā patiṭṭhāpanañca ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti sāvanañca antaṃ pariyosānametissātiussāvanantikā.

Yato means from the brick, stone, or lump of clay. Vuttanayenevā means just as it was said, "bahūhi samparivāretvā kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā." Iṭṭhakādayo means the bricks etc. to be decided on saying "kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā." It is connected to being said in the Andhakaṭṭhakathā. Tathā means just as it is said in the Andhakaṭṭhakathā, in that way. Ussāvanantikā means that the lifting up and establishing of pillars etc. and the declaring of "kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā" is the end and conclusion.

Tāsūti dvīsu gonisādikāsu.Yatthāti kuṭiyaṃ. Neva ārāmo parikkhitto hotīti sambandho. Punayatthāti kuṭiyaṃ.Ayanti kuṭi.Ubhayatthāpīti ārāmavihāragonisādikāsu dvīsupi. Bahutaraṃ parikkhittopi parikkhittoyeva nāmāti yojanā.Etthāti upaḍḍhaparikkhittabahutaraparikkhittaārāme. Gāvo pavisitvā yathāsukhaṃ nisīdanti etthātigonisādāgosālā. Gonisādā viyātigonisādikākuṭi.

Tāsū means in the two Gonisādikās. Yatthā means in the kuti. The connection is made by neva ārāmo parikkhitto hoti. Again, yatthā means in the kuti. Ayaṃ means this kuti. Ubhayatthāpī means in both the monastery and the Vihāra Gonisādikā. Even if it is much enclosed, it is still called enclosed, that is the meaning. Etthā means in the ārāma that is half-enclosed or much enclosed. Gāvo pavisitvā yathāsukhaṃ nisīdanti etthāti gonisādāgosālā means cows enter and sit comfortably. Gonisādikākuṭi is like a Gonisāda.

Esāti kuṭi.Vuttepītipisadde, ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ demā’’ti vākyaṃ apekkhati. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Yasmā vaṭṭati, tasmāti yojanā.Tesanti sesasahadhammikadevamanussānaṃ.Tehīti sesasahadhammikadevamanussehi. Punapi vuttaṃ, kiṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘bhikkhussa…pe… hotī’’ti.Apīti tadaññesaṃ.Tanti vacanaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Saṅghassa santakameva vā bhikkhussa santakameva vāti yojanā. Iti tasmā suvuttanti sambandho. Gahapatīnaṃ santakaṃgahapatikuṭi. ‘‘Kammavācaṃ sāvetvā’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ kammavācamavatvā apalokanenapi kappiyattā. Kammavācāya vā apalokanena vā sammanitabbātisammutikuṭi. Itisaddo parisamāpanattho.

Esā means this kuti. Vuttepī means in the word pi, it expects the sentence "kappiyakuṭiṃ demā." It is connected to being said in the Andhakaṭṭhakathā. Since it is suitable, therefore, that is the meaning. Tesaṃ means of the remaining fellow Dhamma practitioners, devas, and humans. Tehī means by the remaining fellow Dhamma practitioners, devas, and humans. Again it is said, what is said? He says "bhikkhussa…pe… hotī." Apī means of others than that. Taṃ means that statement. means truly, or because. It belongs only to the Sangha or only to the Bhikkhu is the connection. Thus, therefore, it is well-said is the connection. A kuti belonging to the householders is a gahapati kuti. "Kammavācaṃ sāvetvā" is merely an indication; even without uttering the Kammavāca, it is suitable by approval. A sammutikuti is to be sanctioned by Kammavāca or by approval. The word Iti is for the completion of the section.

Tesaṃyevāti bhikkhubhikkhunīnameva. Ekarattampi ṭhapitaṃ yaṃ santakaṃ atthīti yojanā.Tanti saṅghikādi.Tatthāti akappiyabhūmiyaṃ sahaseyyapahonakagehe.Etanti antovutthaantopakkasaṅkhātaṃ yāvayāmakālikaṃ, ‘‘na kappatī’’ti byatirekassa anvayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sattāhakālikaṃ panā’’tiādi.

Tesaṃyevā means of the monks and nuns themselves. Whatever possession exists, even if kept for one night, that is the connection. Taṃ means saṅghikādi. Tatthā means in the unallowable land, in a house suitable for co-residence. Etaṃ means yāvakālika known as antovutthaantopakka. Showing the connection of the opposite of "na kappatī," he says "sattāhakālikaṃ panā" etc.

Tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ. Tatra vacaneti hi attho. Sāmaṇero detīti sambandho. Yaṃkiñci taṇḍulādikaṃ āmisanti yojanā.Mukhasannidhi nāmāti āpattiyā mukho upāyo sannidhi nāmāti attho.Tatthāti mahāpaccariyaṃ, mukhasannidhiantovutthesu vā. Bhikkhu pacitvā paribhuñjatīti sambandho.Āmisasaṃsaṭṭhanti āmisena saṃsaggaṃ.

Tatrā refers to the previous statement. For the meaning is in that statement. The novice gives is the connection. Whatever is a non-vegetarian item like rice etc. is the meaning. Mukhasannidhi nāmā means Mukho (means mouth) is the means to offense, Sannidhi is the name. Tatthā in Mahāpaccariyaṃ, or in Mukhasannidhiantovutthesu. The bhikkhu cooks and consumes is the connection. Āmisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ means contact with non-vegetarian items.

Jahitavatthukāti jahitaṃ vatthu etāsanti jahitavatthukā. Ussāvanantikā katāti sambandho.ti ussāvanantikā.Yo yoti thambho vā bhittipādo vā. Iṭṭhakādīhi katā ussāvanantikāti yojanā.Cayassāti adhiṭṭhānassa.Yehi pana iṭṭhakādīhītiādisaddena thambhasilāmattikāyo saṅgaṇhāti.Tadaññesūti tehi adhiṭṭhitaiṭṭhakādīhi aññesu.

Jahitavatthukā means those for whom the object is abandoned. Ussāvanantikā katā is the connection. Yo yo means the pillar or the base of the wall. Ussāvanantikā is made of bricks etc. Cayassā means of the determination. Yehi pana iṭṭhakādīhī—by the word ādī, it includes pillars, stones, and clay. Tadaññesū—in those other than the bricks etc. that are determined.

Pākārādiparikkhepeti upacārasīmāparicchinnassa ārāmassa pākārādinā parikkhepe kate.Pākārādīti ādisaddena vatiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Kappiyakuṭiṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti gonisādikāya abhāvena sesāsu tīsu kappiyakuṭīsu yaṃkiñci kappiyakuṭiṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne.Itarā panāti ussāvanantikagonisādikāhi aññā.Dveti ubho gahapatisammutiyo, jahitavatthukāva hontīti sambandho.Pakkhapāsakamaṇḍalanti dve pakkhe apatanatthāya pasati bandhatīti pakkhapāsako,maṇḍalanti chadanakoṭigopānasīnaṃ upari ṭhapitakaṭṭhaviseso, pakkhapāsako ca maṇḍalañca pakkhapāsakamaṇḍalaṃ.

Pākārādiparikkhepe means when an ārāma (monastery) with a defined boundary is enclosed by a wall, etc. Pākārādī includes a fence (vati) by the implication of "ādi" (etc.). Kappiyakuṭiṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī means it is allowable to obtain any kappiyakuṭi (suitable dwelling) from the remaining three, excluding the one with a gonisādika (mat), due to the absence of a gonisādika. Tattha tatthā means in that particular place. Itarā panā means other than those with ussāvanantikā (raised edges) and gonisādika. Dve connects to "ubho gahapatisammutiyo, jahitavatthukāva hontīti," meaning both approvals of the householders are indeed with relinquished objects. Pakkhapāsakamaṇḍala— pakkhapāsako means that which fastens and binds (pasati bandhati) in order to prevent (apatanatthāya) the two wings (dve pakkhe) from falling. Maṇḍala means a particular piece of wood (kaṭṭhaviseso) placed above the chadanakoṭigopānasī (roof’s edge). Pakkhapāsako ca maṇḍalañca [together] is pakkhapāsakamaṇḍalaṃ.

Yatrāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.Anupasampannassa datvāti anapekkhavissajjanena anupasampannassa datvā. Cīvaravikappanaṃ viya sāpekkhavissajjanampi vaṭṭatīti vadanti.Tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ.Soti karavīkatissatthero, passitvā pucchīti sambandho.Theroti mahāsivatthero.Lūkhadivaseti asiniddhadivase.Tatoti bravanato, paranti sambandho.Nanti mahāsivattheraṃ.Pamukheti gabbhassa pamukhe.Tanti sabbikumbhiṃ.Bahīti vihārassa bahi.Soti mahāsivatthero.

Yatrā means in which place. Anupasampannassa datvā means giving to one who is not fully ordained without expecting it back. Some say that even giving with the expectation of return is allowable, like the vikappana (formal sharing) of a robe. Tatrā refers to the prior statement. So refers to Karavīkatissa Thera; "passitvā pucchī" means having seen, he asked. Thero refers to Mahāsiva Thera. Lūkhadivase means on a day that is not smooth (asiniddha). Tato connects to "bravanato, paranti," meaning after speaking. Na refers to Mahāsiva Thera. Pamukhe means at the front of the chamber. Ta refers to the entire water pot. Bahī means outside the monastery. So refers to Mahāsiva Thera.

180. Meṇḍakagahapativatthukathā
180. The Story of Meṇḍaka the Householder

296.‘‘Bahidvāre’’ti ettha kassa bahidvāreti āha ‘‘dhaññāgārassa bahidvāre’’ti.Āḷakathālikanti ettha āḷakataṇḍulapacanakaṃ gaṇhakathāli āḷakathāli, tāya pacitaṃ bhattaṃ āḷakathālikanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘āḷakataṇḍulapacanakathālika’’nti.Byañjanabhaṇḍikanti byañjanaparikkhārikaṃ, byañjanaparivārakanti attho. Imināsūpabhiñjanakanti ettha sūpasaddo byañjanavācako, bhiñjanakasaddo bhaṇḍikapariyāyoti dasseti.Dāsakammakaraporisanti ettha dāsaporisā ca kammakaraporisā ca dāsakammakaraporisaṃ, samāhāradvando pubbapade uttaralopo, iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dāsapurise ca kammakarapurise cā’’ti. Porisasaddopi purisasaddena samāno ‘‘puriso eva poriso’’ti atthena.Dhuvabhattenāti etthadhuvasaddo niccapariyāyoti āha ‘‘niccakāla’’nti. Duyhena khīrenāti sambandho. ‘‘Meṇḍakavatthusmiṃ panā’’ti pāṭhato paṭṭhāya yāva ‘‘khaṇaññeva duyhenā’’ti pāṭhā kesuciyeva aṭṭhakathāpotthakesu atthi.Etthāti meṇḍakavatthumhi.Goraseti gavayehi nibbatte khīradadhitakkanavanītasabbisaṅkhāte rase.Pātheyyanti pathassa hitaṃ pātheyyaṃ.Ñatvāti pātheyyamicchatīti ñatvā.Bhikkhācāravattena vāti aññātakaapavāritaṭṭhānato bhikkhācāravattena vā.Yācitvāpītipisaddo pageva bhikkhācāravattenāti dasseti. Yattakena pātheyyenāti sambandho.

296. "Bahidvāre" here, to whom does "bahidvāre" refer? He says, "dhaññāgārassa bahidvāre," outside the granary. Āḷakathālika—here, āḷakathāli means a gaṇhakathāli (large pot) for cooking āḷakataṇḍula (a measure of rice); āḷakathālika means food cooked in it, showing the meaning of the word, he says, "āḷakataṇḍulapacanakathālika." Byañjanabhaṇḍika means that which equips byañjana (curry); it means that which surrounds the curry. By this, he shows that in sūpabhiñjanaka, the word sūpa indicates byañjana, and the word bhiñjanaka is a synonym for bhaṇḍika. Dāsakammakaraporisa—here, dāsaporisā (slave men) and kammakaraporisā (worker men) [together are] dāsakammakaraporisaṃ, a collective dvanda compound with the elision of the latter part of the first word; showing this meaning, he says, "dāsapurise ca kammakarapurise cā." The word porisa is synonymous with purisa, with the meaning of "puriso eva poriso" (a man is indeed a man). Dhuvabhattenā—here, the word dhuva is a synonym for nicca (constant); he says, "niccakālaṃ," [meaning] with constant time. [It is connected to] duyhena khīrena, with fresh milk. "Meṇḍakavatthusmiṃ panā," from this passage up to "khaṇaññeva duyhenā," this passage exists only in some Aṭṭhakathā books. Etthā—in this Meṇḍaka story. Gorase means in flavors derived from cows, which are milk, yogurt, buttermilk, butter, and ghee. Pātheyya means pātheyyaṃ (provisions) that are beneficial for the path. Ñatvā means knowing that he desires pātheyyaṃ. Bhikkhācāravattena vā means by means of going for alms from an unknown and unreserved place. Yācitvāpī—the pi indicates even by asking, in addition to going for alms. [Connected to] yattakena pātheyyena, with whatever amount of provisions.

182. Keṇiyajaṭilavatthukathā
182. The Story of Keṇiya the Ascetic

300.Kājehīti ettha kājassa gaṇanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pañcahi kājasatehī’’ti. Ekena kājena dvinnaṃ kuṭānaṃ gahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kuṭasahassa’’nti.Voti tumhe. Suṭṭhu pasannoti sambandho.

300. Kājehī—here, showing the calculation of kāja, he says, "pañcahi kājasatehī," with five hundred kājas. Because two huts were taken with one kāja, it is said "kuṭasahassa," a thousand huts. Vo means to you. Suṭṭhu pasanno connects, [meaning] well pleased.

Tatthāti ‘‘aṭṭha pānānī’’ti pāṭhe, aṭṭhasu pānesu vā. ‘‘Ambehi katapāna’’nti iminā majjhelopasamāsaṃ dasseti.Tatthāti āmapakkesu. Karontena kātabbanti sambandho.Ādiccapākenāti ādiccahetunā pacanena.Purebhattameva kappatīti bhikkhunā sayaṃ katattā purebhattameva kappati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anupasampannehī’’tiādi. Kataṃ ambapānanti sambandho.Sabbapānesūti jambupānādīsu sabbesu pānesu.

Tatthā—in the passage "aṭṭha pānānī," or in the eight drinks. Ambehi katapāna shows a middle-elision compound. Tatthā means in unripe or ripe mangoes. Karontena kātabbaṃ connects, [meaning] it should be done by the one doing it. Ādiccapākenā means by cooking due to the sun. Purebhattameva kappatī—because it is made by a bhikkhu himself, it is allowable only before the meal. Therefore, it is said "anupasampannehī," etc. Kataṃ ambapānaṃ connects, the mango drink is made. Sabbapānesū means in all drinks such as jambupāna.

Tesūti jambupānādīsu sattasu pānesu.Panasaddo visesatthajotako.Jambuphalehīti āmehi vā pakkehi vā jambuphalehi.Aṭṭhikehīti aṭṭhi asmimatthīti aṭṭhikaṃ phalaṃ.Jātirasenāti yathājātena rasena. Iminā madhusakkharakappurādīhi na yojetabboti dasseti.Taṃ panāti madhukapānaṃ pana.Muddikāti muddikaphalāni.Sāluketi kande.Sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ phalarasanti taṇḍuladhovanodakaṃ. ‘‘Pakkaḍākarasa’’nti iminā apakkaḍākarasaṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.ti saccaṃ, vitthāro vā.Rasoti pakkaraso. Paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitasabbiādīhi pakkānaṃ yāvajīvikānaṃ pattānaṃ rasoti yojanā. Pakkaṃ yāvajīvikapattarasanti sambandho.Yāvakālikapattānampītipisaddo pageva yāvajīvikapattānanti dasseti.Yaṃ pānanti yaṃ madhukapuppharasapānaṃ.Soti madhukapuppharaso.Tenāti madhukapupphena. Yato kālato paṭṭhāya majjaṃ na karonti, tatoti yojanā.Ucchurasonikasaṭo pacchābhattaṃ vaṭṭati sattāhakālikattā.Ime cattāro rasāti phalapattapupphaucchurasasaṅkhātā ime cattāro rasā.Aggihuttamukhāti yaññā aggihutamukhā, aggihutaseṭṭhāti attho.

Tesū—in those seven drinks such as jambupāna. The word pana denotes a distinction. Jambuphalehī means with jambu fruits, whether unripe or ripe. Aṭṭhikehī—aṭṭhikaṃ phalaṃ means a fruit that has a seed (aṭṭhi asmimatthīti aṭṭhikaṃ phalaṃ). Jātirasenā means with the natural flavor. By this, it shows that it should not be mixed with honey, sugar, camphor, etc. Taṃ panā—that madhuka drink, however. Muddikā means grapes. Sāluke means tubers. Sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ phalarasa means the water used to wash rice. Pakkaḍākarasa indicates that apakkaḍākarasa (unfermented rice-wash water) is allowable. means truly, or a detail. Raso means pakkaraso (cooked juice). [The connection is] rasoti yojanā, the juice from the cooked leaves that are allowable for life, having received and kept all kinds of ghee, etc. Pakkaṃ yāvajīvikapattarasanti connects, the cooked juice from leaves allowable for life. Yāvakālikapattānampī—the pi indicates the leaves allowable for life that were previously mentioned. Yaṃ pāna—that drink, which is the juice of the madhuka flowers. So—that juice of the madhuka flowers. Tenā—with the madhuka flower. The connection is: from which time they do not make alcohol, from that time. Ucchuraso nikasaṭo pacchābhattaṃ vaṭṭati sattāhakālikattā, sugarcane juice that is not strained is allowable after the meal because it is sattāhakālika (lasting seven days). Ime cattāro rasā—these four juices, namely, juices from fruit, leaves, flowers, and sugarcane. Aggihuttamukhā—yaññā aggihutamukhā means sacrifices headed by fire oblations, meaning the fire oblation is the best.

183. Rojamallādivatthukathā
183. The Story of Rojamalla, etc.

301.Saṅkaramakaṃsūti ettha saṅkarasaddassa yuddhatthādīsu pavattanato idha paṭiññātattheti dassento āha ‘‘katikamakaṃsū’’ti.Katikanti paṭiññātasaṅkhātaṃ katikaṃ.Uḷāraṃ khoti ettha uḷārasaddo seṭṭhavācako.Seṭṭhanti ca sundaramevāti āha ‘‘sundaraṃ kho te ida’’nti.Teti tuyhaṃ.‘‘Bahukato’’ti padassa katabahumānoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pasādabahumānenā’’ti. ‘‘Piṭṭhamayaṃkhādanīya’’nti imināpiṭṭhakhādanīyanti ettha mayasaddalopaṃ dasseti.

301. Saṅkaramakaṃsū—here, because the word saṅkara is used in the sense of battle, etc., here it indicates the agreed-upon meaning; he says, "katikamakaṃsū." Katika means that which is reckoned as agreed-upon. Uḷāraṃ kho—here, the word uḷāraṃ denotes excellence. Seṭṭha means beautiful; he says, "sundaraṃ kho te idaṃ," indeed, this is beautiful for you. Te means to you. Showing the meaning of the word "bahukato" as katabahumāno (having shown much respect), he says "pasādabahumānenā," with respect and reverence. By "piṭṭhamayaṃkhādanīya," he shows the elision of the word maya in piṭṭhakhādanīya.

303.Paṭibhāneyyakāti ettha paṭibhāne niyuttā paṭibhāneyyakāti dassento āha ‘‘paṭibhānasampannā’’ti. ‘‘Niddosasippā’’ti imināpariyodātasippāti ettha parisamantato odātaṃ sippaṃ etesanti pariyodātasippāti atthaṃ dasseti. Sippatthikehi siyati seviyatītisippaṃ,sippikānaṃ hitāya seti pavattatīti vāsippaṃ,oṭṭhajo paṭhamakkharo.Nāḷiyāvāpakenāti padassa dvandabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘nāḷiyā ceva āvāpakena cā’’ti. Iminā yakāro padasandhimattoti dasseti. ‘‘Nāḷiyā vā pasibbakenā’’tipi pāṭho, so apāṭhoyeva. Ko āvāpako nāmāti āha‘‘āvāpako nāma yatthā’’tiādi. Tatthayatthāti yasmiṃ thavike. Iminā āharitvā yathāladdhaṃ vapanti pakkhipanti etthātiāvāpakoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Vapa bījanikkhepeti dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 15 pakārantadhātu) vuttaṃ. Idha pana pakkhipaneti daṭṭhabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pakkhipantī’’ti.Pariharitumevāti pariggahetvā haritumeva.Vetananti bhatiṃ.Yoti bhikkhu.Taṃ vāti pariharitakhurabhaṇḍaṃ vā.Aññaṃ vāti aññassa santakaṃ vā.

303. Paṭibhāneyyakā—here, showing that paṭibhāneyyakā are those employed in paṭibhāna (ready wit), he says, "paṭibhānasampannā," endowed with ready wit. By "niddosasippā," he shows the meaning of pariyodātasippā here as pariyodātasippāti, those whose crafts (sippa) are completely pure (parisamantato odātaṃ). Siyati seviyatīti sippaṃ, or sippaṃ, for the benefit of craftsmen, seti pavattatīti (it lies and proceeds); the first letter is labial. Showing the dual nature of the word nāḷiyāvāpakenā, he says, "nāḷiyā ceva āvāpakena cā," with a nāḷi and with an āvāpaka. By this, he shows that the yakāra is merely a euphonic junction. There is also a reading "nāḷiyā vā pasibbakenā," but that is indeed an incorrect reading. What is an āvāpaka? He says ‘‘āvāpako nāma yatthā,’’ etc. There, yatthā means in which thavika (receptacle). By this, he shows the etymology that etthātiāvāpakoti, they bring (āharitvā) and sow (vapanti pakkhipanti) the seeds as they are found. In the lists of roots (dhātupāṭhesu), vapa bījanikkhepe is stated as "vapa is the casting of seeds" (in the Saddanītidhātumālā, 15th root with a pakāra). Here, however, it should be seen as pakkhipana (casting). Therefore, it is said "pakkhipantīti," they cast. Pariharitumevā means to take and carry away. Vetana means wages. Yo means a bhikkhu. Taṃ vā means that set of razors that were carried away. Aññaṃ vā means belonging to another.

304.Idanti dasamabhāgadānaṃ.Dasa koṭṭhāseti dasa paṭivīse.

304. Idaṃ means the tenth-part donation. Dasa koṭṭhāse means ten portions.

185. Catumahāpadesakathā
185. The Story of the Four Great References

305.Idaṃ na kappatītiādīti ‘‘idaṃ na kappatī’’tiādayo ime cattāro mahāpadeseti yojanā. Apassayaṃ katvā disiyanti etthātiapadesāokāsā, apassayaṃ katvā disiyanti etehīti vāapadesākāraṇā, ‘‘mahantā apadesāmahāpadesā. Tañcāti mahāpadesasaṅkhātaṃ tañca suttaṃ, gahetvāti yojanā.Parimaddantāti punappunaṃ maddantā, upaparikkhantāti attho.Idanti kāraṇaṃ.Tanti navamahāphalaaparaṇṇaṃ.Tānīti khuddakaphalapānāni.ti saccaṃ.

305. Idaṃ na kappatītiādī—"idaṃ na kappatī"tiādayo ime cattāro mahāpadesā means these four great references beginning with "idaṃ na kappati (this is not allowable)." Apassayaṃ katvā disiyanti etthāti apadesā okāsā, or apassayaṃ katvā disiyanti etehīti vā apadesā kāraṇā, "mahantā apadesā" means mahāpadesā. Tañcā means that sutta (discourse) reckoned as a great reference; the connection is gahetvā (having taken). Parimaddantā means repeatedly examining, meaning scrutinizing. Idaṃ means reason. Taṃ means the nine great fruits and aparanna. Tānī means small fruit drinks. means truly.

Tesanti channaṃ cīvarānaṃ.Tatthāti chasu anulomacīvaresu. ‘‘Pāṇakehi sañjātavattha’’nti iminā koseyyavatthabhāvaṃ dasseti.Dve paṭāti cīnapaṭasomārapaṭā. Dukūlaṃ sāṇassa anulomanti yojanā.

Tesaṃ means of the six robes. Tatthā means among the six allowable robes. Pāṇakehi sañjātavattha indicates that it is a silk cloth. Dve paṭā means Chinese silk and Somāra silk. Dukūlaṃ sāṇassa anulomanti connects, dukūla (fine cloth) is allowable for sāṇa (hempen cloth).

Tesaṃyevāti dvinnaṃ pattānameva.Tesaṃyevāti tiṇṇaṃ tumbānameva.Tesaṃyevāti dvinnaṃ kāyabandhanānameva.Setacchattanti setehi vatthehi kataṃ chattaṃ.Tesaṃyevāti tiṇṇaṃ chattānameva.

Tesaṃyevā means only for the two bowls. Tesaṃyevā means only for the three gourds. Tesaṃyevā means only for the two waistbands. Setacchatta means an umbrella made with white cloths. Tesaṃyevā means only for the three umbrellas.

Sambhinnarasanti saṃsaggarasaṃ. Ettha bhijjitthātibhinnoti vacanatthena bhididhātu dvidhākaraṇasaṅkhāto bhedattho hoti, dhātvatthabādhakena saṃtyūpasaggena bhididhātuyā bhedatthaṃ bādhetvā saṃsaggatthavācako hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Challimpīti tacampi.Sakalenevāti challiyā eva. Pāyāsena asaṃsaṭṭhaṃ yaṃ sabbīti yojanā.Tānīti takkolajātiphalādīni.Yaṭṭhimadhukādīsupīti madhulaṭṭhikādīsupi. ‘‘Laṭṭhimadhukādīsupī’’ti vā pāṭho, so apāṭhoyeva.Yaṃ yanti vatthu.Yathāti yenākārena, dhoviyamāne tacchiyamāneti sambandho.

Sambhinnarasa means mixed flavors. Here, with the meaning of bhijjitthāti bhinno (it is broken), the root bhidi means dividing, which is the act of separation (dvidhākaraṇasaṅkhāto bhedattho hoti); with the prefix saṃ, which obstructs the meaning of the root (dhātvatthabādhakena saṃtyūpasaggena), the root bhidi, having obstructed the meaning of separation, should be understood as expressing the meaning of mixing (saṃsaggatthavācako hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ). Challimpī means even the bark. Sakalenevā means only with the bark. Pāyāsena asaṃsaṭṭhaṃ yaṃ sabbīti connects, that which is ghee not mixed with pāyāsa (milk-rice pudding). Tānī means takkola, nutmeg, etc. Yaṭṭhimadhukādīsupī means even in licorice, etc. There is also a reading "Laṭṭhimadhukādīsupī," but that is indeed an incorrect reading. Yaṃ yaṃ means whatever thing. Yathā means in whatever manner; the connection is dhoviyamāne tacchiyamāneti, while washing, while scraping.

Sabhāvanti yāvakālaṃ kappiyasabhāvaṃ.Tasmāti yasmā upaneti, tasmā.Tenāti sattāhakālikena.Tadahupaṭiggahitanti tadaheva paṭiggahitaṃ. Dvīhapaṭiggahitena sattāhakālikenāti sambandho.

Sabhāvaṃ means the state of being allowable for as long as it lasts. Tasmā means because it approaches, therefore. Tenā means with the one lasting seven days. Tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ means received on that very day. Dvīhapaṭiggahitena sattāhakālikenāti connects, with the sattāhakālika received within two days.

Etthāti kālikasaṃsagge.Āpattiyo veditabbāti yathākkamaṃ āpattiyo veditabbā.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ bhesajjakkhandhake.

Etthā means in the mixing of kālika. Āpattiyo veditabbā means the offenses should be understood in due order. Sabbatthā means in the entire Bhesajjakkhandhaka (chapter on medicine).

Iti bhesajjakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Bhesajjakkhandhaka.

7. Kathinakkhandhakaṃ

7. The Kathinakkhandhaka

187. Kathinānujānanakathā
187. The Story of the Kathina Allowance

306.Kathinakkhandhakepāveyyakāti ettha pāvāraṭṭhe nivasantīti pāveyyakāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pāvāraṭṭhavāsino’’ti.Tatthāti pāvānāmake raṭṭhe. Eko pitā etesantiekapitukā. Te ca te bhātaro cetiekapitukabhātaro,tesaṃ.Etanti ‘‘pāveyyakā’’ti etaṃ nāmaṃ.Tesūti pāveyyakesu. ‘‘Dhutaṅgasamādānavasenā’’ti visesanassa byavacchedabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na araññavāsamattenā’’ti. Visesanañhi duvidhaṃ byavacchedaṃ, tappākaṭikaraṇañcāti.Tesanti pāveyyakānaṃ. Piṇḍapātikādibhāvepīti sambandho.Pisaddo āraññakaṃ apekkhati.Etanti ‘‘sabbe āraññakā’’tiādi etaṃ vacanaṃ.Ime panāti pāveyyakā pana.Udakasaṃgaheti ettha udakena saṃgahetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘udakena saṃgahite’’ti. ‘‘Thale ca ninne cā’’ti iminā ‘‘udakasaṃgahe’’ti padassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.

306. In the Kathinakkhandhaka, pāveyyakā—here, showing the etymology that pāveyyakā are those dwelling in the Pāvāra country, he says, "pāvāraṭṭhavāsino," dwellers in the Pāvāra country. Tatthā means in the country named Pāvā. Eko pitā etesanti means ekapitukā (having one father). Te ca te bhātaro ceti means ekapitukabhātaro (brothers having one father), of them. Etaṃ means this name "pāveyyakā". Tesū means among the pāveyyakas. To show the distinct nature of the specification "dhutaṅgasamādānavasenā," it is said, "na araññavāsamattenā," not merely by dwelling in the wilderness. Indeed, the specification is of two kinds: restrictive and descriptive. Tesaṃ means of the pāveyyakas. Piṇḍapātikādibhāvepīti connects, even in the state of being alms-goers, etc. The pi is in relation to āraññakaṃ (forest dwellers). Etaṃ means this statement "sabbe āraññakā," all are forest dwellers. Ime panā—these pāveyyakas, however. Udakasaṃgahe—here, showing that it is collected by water, he says, "udakena saṃgahite," collected by water. By "thale ca ninne cā," he shows the form of the word "udakasaṃgahe."

Udakacikkhalloti udakena loḷito cikkhallo udakacikkhallo.Okapuṇṇehīti ettha okasaddo udakavevacanoti āha ‘‘udakapuṇṇehī’’ti. Udakañhi ucayati samavāyabhāvena pavattatītiokanti vuccati.Tesanti pāveyyakānaṃ.Ghanānīti nirantarāni.Tesūti cīvaresu.Tenāti cīvarānaṃ ghanattā, udakassa ca na paggharaṇattā. Bhagavatā ‘‘avivadamānā phāsukaṃ vassaṃ vasitthā’’ti pucchiyamānāpi te bhikkhū yathāpucchitaṃ avatvā kasmā phāsukapadaṃ apanetvā ‘‘avivadamānā vassaṃ vasimhā’’ti avocunti āha ‘‘avivadamānā vassaṃ vasimhāti etthā’’tiādi.Ukkaṇṭhitatāya cāti etthacasaddo ‘‘phāsutāya abhāvenā’’ti etthāpi yojetabbo. Senāsanaphāsutāya abhāvena ca bhagavato dassanālābhena ukkaṇṭhitatāya cāti hi attho.Anamataggiyakathanti saṃyuttanikāye anamataggiyasuttantakathaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.135). Sabbeva te pāveyyakā bhikkhūti yojanā.Tanti anamataggiyakathaṃ.Tatoti dhammakathanato, paranti sambandho. Bhagavā āmantesīti sambandho.Ekaṃ cīvaranti saṅghāṭiṃ.Santaruttarenāti saha antarenāti santaraṃ, santarañca taṃ uttarañceti santaruttaraṃ, tena.Assuti bhaveyyuṃ. Abhavissaṃsūti hi attho. Sattamīvibhattikālātipattivibhattīnaṃ samānatthabhāvo saddasatthesu vuttoyeva.Casaddo upanyāsattho. Esa kathinatthāro nāmāti yojanā. Anujānitukāmo hutvāti sambandho.

Udakacikkhallo means cikkhallo (mud) agitated by water is udakacikkhallo. Okapuṇṇehī—here, the word oka is a synonym for water; he says, "udakapuṇṇehī," full of water. Indeed, water is called oka because it piles up, prevailing as a collection (ucayati samavāyabhāvena pavattatīti okanti vuccati). Tesaṃ means of the pāveyyakas. Ghanānī means continuous. Tesū means in the robes. Tenā means because of the thickness of the robes and because the water does not drip off. Why did those bhikkhus, when asked by the Blessed One, "avivadamānā phāsukaṃ vassaṃ vasitthā," live the rainy season without quarreling and comfortably, not answer as asked, but remove the word "phāsukaṃ" and say, "avivadamānā vassaṃ vasimhā," we lived the rainy season without quarreling? He says, "avivadamānā vassaṃ vasimhāti etthā," etc. Ukkaṇṭhitatāya cā—here, the word ca should also be connected to "phāsutāya abhāvenā." The meaning is, due to the lack of comfortable lodging and due to the longing from not obtaining a sight of the Blessed One. Anamataggiyakathaṃ—the discourse on the beginningless in the Saṃyutta Nikāya (Saṃ. ni. 2.135). Sabbeva te pāveyyakā bhikkhūti connects, all those pāveyyaka bhikkhus. Taṃ means that discourse on the beginningless. Tato connects to dhammakathanato, paranti, after the talk, beyond. Bhagavā āmantesīti connects, the Blessed One addressed. Ekaṃ cīvaraṃ means a saṅghāṭi (outer robe). Santaruttarenā—santaraṃ means with an inner (robe), santarañca taṃ uttarañceti santaruttaraṃ, with an inner and an outer robe, tena, with that. Assu means would be. It means Abhavissaṃsūti, would have been. The similarity in meaning between the seventh-case (sattamī) and the past conditional (kālātipattivibhattīnaṃ) has indeed been stated in books on grammar (saddasatthesu). Ca is used in the sense of introduction. Esa kathinatthāro nāmāti connects, this is called the kathina extension. Anujānitukāmo hutvāti connects, having desired to allow.

Tatthāti ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave’’tiādipāṭhe.Vokārassa nipātamatte sati kathamattho bhavissatīti āha ‘‘atthatakathinānanti attho’’ti. Atthatakathinānaṃ bhikkhūnanti sambandho. Laddhaguṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi.Hisaddo laddhaguṇajotako.Paratoti paramhi. ‘‘So tumhāka’’nti vā ‘‘so vo’’ti vā avatvā ‘‘so nesaṃ bhavissatī’’ti vuttattāvo-kāro nipātamattoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Voti sāmivacanameveta’’nti imināvotumhākanti atthaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ sati ‘‘parato so nesa’’nti ettha kathamattho bhavissatīti āha ‘‘so nesanti ettha panā’’tiādi. Ye tumhe atthatakathinā, tesaṃ tumhākanti yojanā.Kathinasaddo thiratthavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Anāmantacārādikānaṃ pañcānisaṃsānaṃ antokaraṇasamatthabhāve thiranti attho.

Tatthāti anāmantacārādīsu pañcānisaṃsesu.Anāmantacāroti ettha caraṇaṃ cāro, anāmantetvā cāro anāmantacāroti dassento āha ‘‘anāmantetvā caraṇa’’nti. ‘‘Asamādāya caraṇa’’nti imināasamādānacāroti ettha pubbapade tvāpaccayassa anādesaṃ katvā asamādānacāroti vuttanti dasseti.Yāvatatthacīvaranti ettha ākāralopena sandhīti āha ‘‘yāvatā cīvarena attho’’ti. ‘‘Yāvadatthacīvara’’ntipi pāṭho, evaṃ sati dakāro padasandhimatto. Yāvasaddo paricchedatthavācako, na abhivijhatthavācako. Atthasaddena samāso hoti.Yo ca tattha cīvaruppādoti ettha tatthasaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kathinatthārasīmāya’’nti.Tatruppādenāti tatra kathinatthārasīmāyaṃ uppādena mūlena. ‘‘Cīvaraṃ uppajjatī’’ti iminācīvaruppādoti ettha cīvarameva uppādo cīvaruppādoti visesanaparapadattaṃ dasseti.

Keti kittakā. Idaṃ ‘‘gaṇavasenā’’ti vacanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atha vāketi kinnāma vutthavassā. Idaṃ ‘‘vutthavassavasenā’’ti vacanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Satasahassampi janā labhantīti yojanā.Pisaddena tato adhikampi labhantīti dasseti.Chinnavassā vāti purimikāya upagantvā chinnavassā vā.Aññasmiṃ vihāreti kathinatthāravihārato aparasmiṃ vihāre. Sabbe chinnavassādikā bhikkhū purimikāya vassūpagatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ gaṇapūrakā hontīti yojanā.Itaresaṃyevāti purimikāya vassaṃ upagantvā paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavāritānameva.Paripuṇṇavassoti paripuṇṇo vīsativasso, acchinnavasso vā.Soti sāmaṇero.Iti etthāpīti evaṃ etesu tīsu vāresupi.

Tanti vattaṃ.Ajānantoti ajānanahetu. Hetvatthe hi antapaccayo.Tassāti kathinadāyakassa.Evanti iminā vakkhamānanayena. Aññatarapahonakaṃ vatthanti sambandho.Tassāti kathinacīvarassa. Ettakā nāma sūciyo vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Iti ācikkhitabbanti yojanā.

Pisaddo kathinadāyakaṃ apekkhati. Vattaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tantavāyagehato hī’’tiādi.Ābhatasantānenevāti ābhatasantatiyā eva.Khalimakkhitasāṭakoti ahatasāṭako. So hi khalena takkena kañjikena makkhitasāṭakattā ‘‘khalimakkhitasāṭako’’ti vuccati.Kathinatthārasāṭakanti kathinatthāratthāya dinnaṃ sāṭakaṃ.Tadahevāti tasmiṃ dinnaahani eva.Tasminti paṭhamaṃ dinne kathinatthārasāṭake.Aññāni cāti kathinasāṭakato aññāni ca. Casaddena na kathinasāṭakameva āharati, aññāni cāti dasseti.Yoti kathinadāyako.Itaroti paṭhamaṃ kathinadāyako.Yathā tathā ovaditvāti tava santakato etassa santakaṃ saṅghassa bahupakāraṃ, saṅghassa bahupakārattaṃ tayāpi icchitabbaṃ, evamicchantassa bahupuññanti yena tenākārena ovaditvā.

mahāparisothero. ‘‘Navakataro sakkoti, tassa dātabba’’nti vacanassa anekantabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘api cā’’tiādi.Api cāti ekantena.Tadatthāyāti tassa jiṇṇacīvarassa atthāya.Assāti bhikkhussa.Pelavoti viraḷo.Tenāpīti kathinatthārakenāpi.Tanti vidhiṃ.Dānakammavācāti dānakāraṇakammavācā.

Ekenāpītipisaddena pageva bahūhi panāti dasseti.Buddhappasatthanti buddhehi pasatthaṃ. Atīte kappasatasahassamatthaketi yojanā.Tassāti padumuttarassa. Kathinaṃ gaṇhi kirāti yojanā.Tanti kathinaṃ, satthā akāsīti sambandho.

Itarehi cāti anumodakehi ca.Sabbesanti atthārakaanumodakānaṃ.ti saccaṃ.Etanti sabbesaṃ atthatabhāvaṃ, ‘‘dvinnaṃ…pe… anumodakassa cā’’ti vacanaṃ vā.

Yenāti bhikkhunā.Avicāretvāvāti ‘‘kathinatthārakassa demā’’ti vā ‘‘saṅghassa demā’’ti vā avicāretvā eva.Sesacīvarānipīti kathinatthāracīvarato sesacīvarānipi. Saṅghena dātabbānīti sambandho. ‘‘Apaloketvā’’ti iminā kammavācāya kiccābhāvaṃ dasseti.Vassāvāsikaṭṭhitikāyāti vassāvāsakāle pavattāya ṭhitikāya.Garubhaṇḍanti mañcabibbohanādigarubhaṇḍaṃ.Ekasīmāyāti ekāya upacārasīmāya.

308.Yathā cāti etthayathāsaddo yaṃsaddattho. Yena vidhināti hi attho.Mahābhūmikanti mahāvisayaṃ. Catuvīsatiākāravantatāya mahāvitthārikanti vuttaṃ hoti.Tatoti anatthatalakkhaṇato.Parivārepītipisaddo na idha evāti dasseti.

Tatthāti catuvīsatiyā ākāresu.Ullikhitamattenāti ettha pamāṇassa uggahaṇatthaṃ nakhādīhi likhanaṃ ullikhitaṃ, ullikhitaṃ mattaṃ pamāṇaṃ ullikhitamattanti dassento āha ‘‘dīghato ca puthulato ca pamāṇagahaṇamattenā’’ti. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘pamāṇaṃ hī’’tiādi. Dassento hutvā ullikhatīti yojanā.Pañcakanti pañcapamāṇaṃ, pañcasamūhaṃ vā khaṇḍaṃ.saddena aññānipi terasakādīni saṅgaṇhāti.Moghasuttakāropanamattenāti moghasuttassa cīvarassūpari āropanamattena.Dīghasibbitamattenāti dīghato sibbitamattena.Muddiyapaṭṭabandhanamattenāti muddiyapaṭṭassa bandhanamattena.Dve cimilikāyoti dve pilotikāyo.Paṭhamacimilikāti kathinacimilikato aññā attano pakaticimilikā ghaṭetvā ṭhapitā hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Taṃ paṭhamacimilika’’nti pāṭhasesaṃ ajjhāharitvā kathinasāṭakassa kucchicimilikaṃ katvāti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ.Pakaticīvarassāti attano pakaticīvarassa.Pakatipaṭṭabandhacīvaranti pakatipaṭṭena bandhacīvaraṃ.Piṭṭhianuvātāropanamattenāti dīghato anuvātassa cīvarassūpari āropanamattena. Dīghānuvātañhi pārupanakāle piṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhitattā piṭṭhianuvātanti vuccati.Kucchianuvātāropanamattenāti puthulato anuvātassa cīvarassūpari āropanamattena. Puthulānuvātañhi pārupanakāle kucchiyaṃ ṭhitattā kucchianuvātanti vuccati.Āgantukapaṭṭāropanamattenāti āgantukapaṭṭassa cīvarassūpari āropanamattena.ti athavā.

Sāruppanti samaṇānucchavikaṃ.Parikathāyāti pariyāyena uppāditāya kathāya.Atiukkaṭṭhaṃ vaṭṭatīti atiukkaṭṭhaṃ eva vaṭṭati.Otiṇṇasadisamevāti otiṇṇena vatthena sadisameva kathinacīvaranti sambandho.Tatthāti duvidhesu sannidhīsu.Tadahevāti tasmiṃ dinnaahani eva.

Rattinissaggiyenāti rattiatikkantaṃ hutvā nissaggiyena.Aññenāti ticīvarato aññena.Samaṇḍalikatanti saha mahāmaṇḍalaaḍḍhamaṇḍalena kataṃ.

309.Evaṃ catuvīsatiākāraṃ anatthatalakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā idāni sattarasākāraṃ atthatalakkhaṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ahatenā’’tiādi. Tattha paribhogaṃ na hanittha na gacchitthātiahataṃ,paribhogena na hanitabbaṃ na hiṃsitabbanti vāahatanti dassento āha ‘‘aparibhuttenā’’ti. ‘‘Ahatasadisenā’’ti imināahatakappenāti etthakappasaddo sadisatthoti dasseti.Pāpaṇikenāti ettha pasārito āpaṇo pāpaṇo, tasmiṃ patitaṃ pāpaṇikanti dassento āha ‘‘āpaṇadvāre patita’’nti. ‘‘Pilotika’’nti iminā ṇikapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Vuttavipallāsenevāti vuttehi ‘‘nimittakatenā’’tiādīhi vipallāsena eva.Tatthāti parivāre.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Idhāti kathinakkhandhake. Avuccamānena tena vacanena parihāyatīti sambandho.

310.Tatthāti ‘‘kathañca bhikkhave ubbhataṃ hoti kathina’’ntiādipāṭhe. Janettiyo mātaroti yojanā. Iminā dhammena putte mānetītimātā,dhammena puttehi māniyatīti vāmātā,sā viya hontītimātikāti dasseti.Kathinubbhāranti cakathinuddhāranti ca atthato sadisaṃ.Etāti etā padajātiyo.Tāsūti aṭṭhasu mātikāsu.Assāti kathinubbhārassa.

188. Ādāyasattakakathā

311.Na paccessanti ettha patītyūpasaggassa punatthaṃ, idhātuyā ca gatyatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘na puna āgamissa’’nti. Evaṃ pakkamato chijjatīti sambandho.

Etañcāti pakkamanantikaṃ, kathinuddhārañca.Tāhanti te ahaṃ.Teti tuyhaṃ.

Aññanti attano vihārato aññaṃ.Evaṃ hotīti eso parivitakko hoti.Soti āvāsapalibodho. Ādiccabandhunā vuttoti yojanā.

Apubbaṃ acarimanti ekapahāreneva. So palibodhūpacchedo kasmā vitthārato na vuttoti āha ‘‘so panā’’tiādi.So panāti palibodhūpacchedo pana. Na vuttoti sambandho.Etthāti imasmiṃ kathinubbhāre. Kasmā ayaṃ kathinuddhāro‘‘nāsanantiko’’ti vuttoti āha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi.Tassāti bhikkhuno.

Ayaṃ panāti āsāvacchediko kathinuddhāro pana. Anekapabhedo hotīti sambandho.Tassāti bhikkhussa.Vuttoti ayaṃ āsāvacchediko kathinuddhāro vuttoti yojanā.Ettha panāti imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne.Tatthāti sīmātikkantike.

312-325.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.Sattaketi aṭṭhasu mātikāsu āsāvacchedato sese sattapamāṇe, sattasamūhe vā.Teyevāti sattake eva.Tatoti vārato.Ye yeti kathinuddhārā.Itarehīti āsāvacchedato aññehi. Ye palibodhā vuttāti sambandho. Āvāso cajīyati anenāticattanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yena cittenā’’tiādi.Tanti cittaṃ. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā āvāso vamīyati anenātivantaṃ. Āvāsato muccati anenātimuttanti vacanatthaṃ atidisati.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ kathinakkhandhake.

Iti kathinakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

8. Cīvarakkhandhakaṃ

202. Jīvakavatthukathā

326.Cīvarakkhandhake padakkhiṇasaddassa apasabyatthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘chekā kusalā’’ti.Abhisaṭāti ettha saradhātuyā gaticintāsu idha gatyattheti dassento āha ‘‘abhigatā’’ti.Abhigatāti abhimukhaṃ gantabbā. Nanu pāḷiyaṃ‘‘atthikānaṃ atthikānaṃ manussāna’’nti vuttaṃ, kasmā pana ‘‘atthikehi atthikehi manussehī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘karaṇatthe panā’’tiādi. Iminā chaṭṭhīkattā nāma tatiyākattunā samānoyevāti dasseti. Nigame vasatītinegamoti vutte kuṭumbiyagaṇo negamo nāmāti āha ‘‘kuṭumbiyagaṇo’’ti.

327.Nagare nivasantītināgarā. Datvā, vuṭṭhāpesunti sambandho.Ārāmuyyānavāhanādīti etthaādisaddena aññāni upabhogaparibhogāni saṅgaṇhāti.Gaṇikaṭṭhāneti gaṇikāya ṭhāne.Gaṇikāti ca nagarasobhinī. Sā hi atthikena janagaṇena abhigantabbātigaṇikāti vuccati.Paṭisatena cāti etthacasaddo avadhāraṇattho. Rattiṃ gamanassa paṭinidhisaṅkhātena satena evāti hi attho.Gilānanti ettha bhāvapaccayena vināpi bhāvattho ñātabboti āha ‘‘gilānabhāva’’nti. ‘‘Jānāpeyya’’nti imināpaṭivedeyyanti ettha vidadhātuyā ñāṇatthaṃ dasseti.Kattarasuppeti etthakattarasaddo jiṇṇapariyāyoti āha ‘‘jiṇṇasuppe’’ti. Supanti sunakhādayo etthātisuppaṃ,kattaraṃ suppaṃ kattarasuppaṃ.

328.Tanti jīvakaṃ. Aññe rājadārakā vadanti kirāti sambandho. Natthi mātā etassātinimmātiko. Yathā cātiādīsu yathā pesanti, tathāti yojanā.Casaddo sampiṇḍanattho. Na kevalaṃ vadantiyeva, atha kho na koci kiñci pesetīti hi attho.Aññesanti jīvakato aññesaṃ.Tassāti jīvakassa.Itīti evaṃ.Soti jīvako.Taṃ sabbanti ‘‘nimmātiko nippitiko’’ti vadanañca paṇṇākārassa apesanañcāti taṃ sabbaṃ.

328. Tanti means Jīvaka. Other royal princes say the relationship is Kirāti. Because he has no mother, he is called Nimmātiko (motherless). The explanation is, just as they send in "Yathā cātiādi," so it is. The word Ca has the meaning of combination. It means not only do they say so, but also no one sends anything. Aññesanti means to others besides Jīvaka. Tassāti means of Jīvaka. Itīti thus. Soti means Jīvaka. Taṃ sabbanti means all of that, which includes saying "nimmātiko nippitiko" (motherless, fatherless) and not sending gifts.

Yaṃnūnāti sādhu vata. Ahaṃ vajjasippaṃ sikkheyyaṃ sādhu vatāti yojanā.Tassāti jīvakassa.Etadahosīti etaṃ ahosi, parivitakko ahūti attho.Parūpaghātapaṭisaṃyuttānīti paraṃ upagantvā, upa bhusena vā hananena paṭisaṃyuttāni.Mettāpubbabhāganti sippassa pubbabhāge pavattā mettā etassāti mettāpubbabhāgaṃ. Iti ahosīti yojanā. Purimacintāya anekantabhāvato ekantabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘api cā’’tiādi.Api cāti ekantena.Ayanti jīvako.Itoti bhaddakappato.Ayanti upāsako.Catuparisantareti catuparisamajjhe.Patthataguṇanti pattharitaguṇaṃ.Ṭhānantaranti ṭhānabhedaṃ,ahampīti na ayaṃ upāsakoyeva, ahampīti attho.Bhagavāti ālapanapadametaṃ.Patthananti icchitavaraṃ.Codiyamānopīti uyyojiyamānopi.Pisaddena purimacintanamapekkhati.Esāti eso jīvako.

Yaṃnūnāti means "How good it would be!" The explanation is, "How good it would be if I were to learn surgery." Tassāti means of Jīvaka. Etadahosīti means this occurred, a reflection arose. Parūpaghātapaṭisaṃyuttānīti means associated with going against others, or with greatly harming or killing. Mettāpubbabhāganti means having loving-kindness prevailing in the initial part of the craft, hence mettāpubbabhāgaṃ. Thus, the explanation is. Showing the certainty from the uncertainty of the previous thought, he says "api cā" (but also), and so on. Api cāti means definitely. Ayanti means Jīvaka. Itoti means from Bhaddakappa. Ayanti means the lay follower. Catuparisantareti means in the midst of the four assemblies. Patthataguṇanti means qualities that are spread out. Ṭhānantaranti means a different place, ahampīti means not only this lay follower, but also I. Bhagavāti this is a term of address. Patthananti means a desired boon. Codiyamānopīti even when being urged. The word Pi anticipates the previous thought. Esāti this means this Jīvaka.

329.Disāpāmokkhoti padassa disāsu pāmokkho disāpāmokkhoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sabbadisāsū’’tiādi.Tasmiñca samayeti jīvakassa tasmiṃ cintanasamaye ca, āgamaṃsūti sambandho.Teti vāṇije, pucchīti sambandho.Kutoti nagarato.Takkasīlatoti takkasīlanagarato.Tatthāti takkasīle.Āmāti sampaṭicchanatthe nipāto, āma atthīti hi attho.Teti vāṇijā.Tathāti yathā jīvako āha, tathā akaṃsūti attho.Soti jīvako.Pitaranti abhayarājakumāraṃ.Tehīti vāṇijehi.

329. Disāpāmokkhoti. Showing the meaning of the word disāpāmokkho as "pre-eminent in all directions," he says "sabbadisāsū" and so on. Tasmiñca samayeti means at that time of Jīvaka's thought, and the connection is "āgamaṃsu" (they arrived). Teti means the merchants, and the connection is "pucchī" (he asked). Kutoti means from the city. Takkasīlatoti means from the city of Takkasilā. Tatthāti means in Takkasilā. Āmāti is a particle in the sense of acceptance, meaning "yes, it exists." Teti means the merchants. Tathāti means just as Jīvaka said, so they did. Soti means Jīvaka. Pitaranti means to Prince Abhaya. Tehīti means by the merchants.

Tanti jīvakaṃ, pucchīti sambandho.Soti jīvako. Kasmā tāta tvaṃ idhāgato asi panāti pucchīti yojanā.Tatoti pucchato.Soti jīvako. Sikkhituṃ āgato amhīti yojanā.Bahuñca gaṇhātītiādīsu so kiñci kammaṃ akatvā sippasseva sikkhitattā bahuñca gaṇhātīti āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Tattha yathā sikkhantiyeva, evaṃ tathā so na sikkhatīti yojanā.So panāti jīvako pana, karoti sikkhatīti sambandho.Ekaṃ kālanti ekasmiṃ kāle. Evaṃ sante kasmā so bahuñca gaṇhātīti āha ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’tiādi.Medhāvitāyāti khippaṃ gahaṇadhāraṇapaññatāya, bahuñca sippanti sambandho. Assa jīvakassa gahitañca sippaṃ na sammussatīti yojanā.

Tanti means Jīvaka, and the connection is "pucchī" (he asked). Soti means Jīvaka. The explanation is, "Why, dear, have you come here?" Tatoti means from the one asking. Soti means Jīvaka. The explanation is, "I have come to learn." Bahuñca gaṇhātītiādi. Because he learned the craft without doing any work, he says "bahuñca gaṇhātī" (he takes much) like this: "yathā" (as), and so on. There, just as one is learning, so he does not learn. So panāti means Jīvaka, however, the connection is "karoti sikkhati" (he does, he learns). Ekaṃ kālanti means at one time. Given this situation, why does he take so much? He says "evaṃ santepī" (even so), and so on. Medhāvitāyāti means due to the wisdom of quick grasping and retention, bahuñca sippanti is the connection. It means the craft that Jīvaka has grasped is not forgotten.

Yanti sippaṃ.Ayanti jīvako, bhavissatīti sambandho.Nanti jīvakaṃ.Yathāti yenākārena.Kammavipākanti kammavipākajaṃ rogaṃ. ‘‘Na’’nti padaṃ ‘‘sikkhāpesī’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ, ‘‘bhesajjayojana’’nti padaṃ dhātukammaṃ.Bhesajjayojananti bhesajjena rogassa yojanaṃ.So panāti jīvako pana.Imināti jīvakena na uggahitaṃ, uggahitanti sambandho.Ekena dvārenāti catūsu dvāresu ekena dvārena.Āhiṇḍantoti vicaranto.Parittaṃ pātheyyanti ettha parittasaddassa ārakkhanatthepi pavattanato idha appatthe pavattatīti dassento āha ‘‘appamattaka’’nti. Kasmā appamattakaṃ pātheyyaṃ adāsīti yojanā.Tassāti disāpāmokkhassa.Ayanti jīvako, labhissatīti sambandho.Tatoti labhanato.Khīṇe pātheyyeti pātheyye khīṇe satīti yojanā.

Yanti means the craft. Ayanti means Jīvaka, and the connection is "bhavissati" (he will become). Nanti means Jīvaka. Yathāti means in which way. Kammavipākanti means a disease born of the result of action. The word "Na" is a causative object in the phrase "sikkhāpesī" (he taught), and the phrase "bhesajjayojana" (application of medicine) is a verbal object. Bhesajjayojananti means applying medicine to the disease. So panāti means Jīvaka, however. Imināti means Jīvaka, not grasped, and the connection is "uggahitanti" (he grasped). Ekena dvārenāti means through one gate out of the four gates. Āhiṇḍantoti means wandering. Parittaṃ pātheyyanti. Showing that here the word paritta (little) occurs in the sense of small, although it can also occur in the sense of protection, he says "appamattakaṃ" (a small amount). The explanation is, "Why did he give a small amount of provisions?" Tassāti means of Disāpāmokkha. Ayanti means Jīvaka, and the connection is "labhissati" (he will receive). Tatoti means from receiving. Khīṇe pātheyyeti means when the provisions are exhausted.

203. Seṭṭhibhariyādivatthukathā
203. The Story of the Wealthy Man's Wife, and So On

330.Yā nāmāti yā nāma gharaṇī.Kimpi māyanti ettha ekāralopasandhīti āha ‘‘kimpi me aya’’nti. Iminā yakārādesasandhiṃ nivatteti, ‘‘myāya’’ntipi pāṭho, evaṃ sati ādesasandhiyeva, na lopasandhi. Ayaṃ gharaṇī me kiñci deyyadhammaṃ kimpi dassatīti yojanā.Tassa cāti sabbissa ca,katassātipi pāṭho.Rogūpasamassa cāti mama rogassa upasamassa ca, imehi padehisaṃyamassāti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Upakāra’’nti imināupajānāmīti ettha upasaddassa atthaṃ dasseti.Adhippāyoti gharaṇiyā āsayo.

330. Yā nāmāti means which woman. Kimpi māyanti. Here, there is a contraction due to the elision of a vowel, so he says "kimpi me ayaṃ" (will this one give me anything?). By this, he prevents the euphonic change of the yakāra, and there is also the reading "myāya," in which case there is only the euphonic change, not the elision. The explanation is, "Will this woman give me, Sabba, any offering, will she give anything?" Tassa cāti means of Sabba, and there is also the reading katassā. Rogūpasamassa cāti means for the pacification of my disease, and with these words, he shows the meaning of the word saṃyamassā (restraint). With "Upakāra" (help), he shows the meaning of the prefix upa in upajānāmīti (I understand). Adhippāyoti means the woman's intention.

331.‘‘Sabbālaṅkāraṃ tuyhaṃ hotū’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ rājā sabhāvato āha, udāhu kiñci cintetvāti āha ‘‘rājā’’tiādi. Tatthaimanti alaṅkāraṃ.Pamāṇayutteti kāraṇānurūpe.Nanti jīvakaṃ.Nāṭakānampīti pañcasatikānaṃ nāṭakānampi.Sopīti jīvakopi.Tesanti abhayakumāranāṭakānaṃ.Meti mayhaṃ, na patirūpanti sambandho.Ayyikānanti mātāmahīnaṃ. Katassa me upakāranti yojanā. Iminā adhikāro ca upakāro ca atthato sadisanti dasseti. Rājā pasanno datvā āhāti sambandho.

331. The question is whether the king said the statement "Sabbālaṅkāraṃ tuyhaṃ hotū" (may all the ornaments be yours) spontaneously, or after thinking something, so he says "rājā" (the king) and so on. There, imanti means this ornament. Pamāṇayutteti means appropriate to the reason. Nanti means Jīvaka. Nāṭakānampīti means even for the five hundred dramas. Sopīti means even Jīvaka. Tesanti means of Abhayakumāra's dramas. Meti means to me, it is not suitable. Ayyikānanti means to the grandmothers. "Katassa me upakāranti" is the explanation. With this, he shows that authority and help are similar in meaning. "The king, pleased, gave it and said" is the connection.

205. Rājagahaseṭṭhivatthukathā
205. The Story of the Wealthy Man of Rājagaha

332.Iriyāpathasamparivattanenāti iriyāpathassa punappunaṃ parivattanena. Tīhi sattāhehi niccalassa nipannassa assa seṭṭhissa matthaluṅganti yojanā. Appeva nipajjeyyāti yojanā.Nanti seṭṭhiṃ.Tenevāti teneva kāraṇena. Sīsaṃ chādetītisīsacchavīti vutte sīsapaṭicchādanacammanti āha ‘‘sīsacamma’’nti.Tassāti seṭṭhissa.Tīhi sattāhenāti ettha pubbapadena pacchimapadaṃ guṇitvā gahetabbanti āha ‘‘tīhi passehi ekenekena sattāhenā’’ti.

332. Iriyāpathasamparivattanenāti means by the repeated change of posture. The explanation is that the swelling on the head of the wealthy man who had been lying still for three weeks. The explanation is, "perhaps he might lie down." Nanti means the wealthy man. Tenevāti means for that very reason. When it is said "sīsaṃ chādetīti sīsacchavī" (the skin covering the head), he says "sīsacammaṃ" (head skin), meaning the skin covering the head. Tassāti means of the wealthy man. Tīhi sattāhenāti. Here, he says that the final word should be taken as multiplied by the preceding word, saying "tīhi passehi ekenekena sattāhenā" (by three fortnights, by one week each).

333.Janaṃ nīharāpetvāti janaṃ apakkamāpetvā.

333. Janaṃ nīharāpetvāti means having the people removed.

207. Pajjotarājavatthukathā
207. The Story of King Pajjota

334.Vicchikassa jātoti vicchikassa kāraṇā jāto, vicchikaṃ paṭicca jātoti attho. Sabbi ca bhesajjaṃ vicchikānaṃ paṭikūlaṃ hotīti yojanā.Paññāsayojanikāti ettha ṇikapaccayassa gantuṃ samatthatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gantuṃ samattho hotī’’ti.Assa raññoti candapajjotanāmakassa assa rañño.Hatthinīyevāti bhaddavatikā nāma hatthinīyeva.Vīsayojanasatanti vīsādhikaṃ yojanasataṃ.

334. Vicchikassa jātoti means born because of a scorpion, meaning born dependent on a scorpion. The explanation is that all medicine is contrary to scorpions. Paññāsayojanikāti. Here, showing that the suffix ṇika occurs in the sense of being capable of going, he says "gantuṃ samattho hotī" (is capable of going). Assa raññoti means of the horse of the king named Candapajjota. Hatthinīyevāti means just like a female elephant named Bhaddavatikā. Vīsayojanasatanti means one hundred and twenty yojanas.

Tassāti kulaputtassa, ārocesīti sambandho.Soti kulaputto, ‘‘āharā’’ti āṇāpesīti sambandho.Itaroti puriso.Tanti pattaṃ.Yattha yatthāti yasmiṃ yasmiṃ bhave. Tattha tattha vāhanasampanno homīti yojanā.Soti puriso. Pajjoto nāma ayaṃ rājā jātoti yojanā.

Tassāti means to the clansman, and the connection is "ārocesī" (he announced). Soti means the clansman, and the connection is "āharā" (bring), he ordered. Itaroti means the man. Tanti means the bowl. Yattha yatthāti means in whichever existence. The explanation is, "May I have conveyance in each and every existence." Soti means the man. The explanation is that this king is born named Pajjota.

Sabbiṃ pāyetvāti idaṃ upalakkhaṇamattanti dassento āha ‘‘sabbiñca pāyetvā’’tiādi. Sabbiñca pāyetvā, paricārakānaṃ āhārācāre vidhiñca ācikkhitvāti attho.Olumpetvāti lupidhātu odahanatthoti āha ‘‘odahitvā’’ti.Virecesīti uddhañca adho ca virecesi.

Sabbiṃ pāyetvāti. Showing that this is merely an indication, he says "sabbiñca pāyetvā" (having him drink all the medicine), and so on. It means having him drink all the medicine and instructing the attendants in the proper conduct for food and so on. Olumpetvāti. The root lupi is in the sense of putting inside, so he says "odahitvā" (having put inside). Virecesīti means he purged him upwards and downwards.

208. Siveyyakadussayugakathā
208. The Story of the Siveyyaka Cloth Pair

335.Sivathikanti sivā jambukā kuṇapakhādanatthāya āgantvā tiṭṭhanti etthātisivaṭṭhaṃ,tadevasivathikaṃ,iminā sivathikāyaṃ uppannaṃ siveyyakaṃ thikasaddassa lopaṃ katvāti dasseti.Tatthāti uttarakurūsu.Tanti mataṃ.Hatthisoṇḍakasakuṇāti hatthiliṅgavihaṅgamā. Te hi hatthino soṇḍo viya soṇḍo etesu atthītihatthīsoṇḍakā,te ca te sakuṇā ceti hatthisoṇḍakasakuṇāti vuccanti.Rañño āharantīti rañño atthāya, santikaṃ vā āharanti.Idanti siveyyakaṃ dussayugaṃ. Siviraṭṭhe vāyitaṃsiveyyakanti ca dassento āha ‘‘athavā’’tiādi.Tenāti kāraṇena. ‘‘Siveyyakanti…pe… vadantī’’ti porāṇā āhūti yojanā.

335. Sivathikanti. Because jackals come to the cemetery to eat corpses and stand there, it is called sivaṭṭhaṃ (cemetery), that same is sivathikaṃ (cemetery). By this, he shows that siveyyaka (cloth) is that which is produced in the sivathika (cemetery), having elided the word thika. Tatthāti means in Uttarakuru. Tanti means the dead body. Hatthisoṇḍakasakuṇāti means birds with elephant-trunk-like penises. For those that have a trunk like an elephant's trunk are called hatthīsoṇḍakā (having elephant-trunk-like penises), and they are birds, so they are called hatthisoṇḍakasakuṇāti (birds with elephant-trunk-like penises). Rañño āharantīti means they bring for the king, or they bring to his presence. Idanti means this pair of siveyyaka cloths. Showing that siveyyaka (cloth) is woven in the Sivira country, he says "athavā" (or), and so on. Tenāti means because of that. "The ancients said 'Siveyyakanti…pe…vadantī'," is the explanation.

209. Samattiṃsavirecanakathā
209. The Story of the Thirty Purgings

336.Kiṃpanāti ettha kiṃsaddo aniyamattho. Lūkho kiṃ, na lūkho kinti hi attho. ‘‘Sinehapānaṃ pana temetī’’ti ca ‘‘karotī’’ti ca sambandho.Sabbatthāti sakalakāye.Sirāti kaṇḍarā.Ayanti jīvako.Oḷārikadosaharaṇatthanti oḷārikassa dosassa apanayanatthaṃ.Pakatatteti pakatisaṅkhāte sabhāve satīti sambandho. Bhagavā bhanteti yojanā.Kutoti kassa santikā. Vaṭṭati nu khoti cintesīti yojanā.Tatoti cintanato.Soṇoti koḷivīsasoṇo, bhuñjatīti sambandho.Tatoti soṇassa santikā.Tassāti soṇassa.Soti soṇo.Therassāti moggallānattherassa. Idaṃ ‘‘patta’’ntipade sāmī, ‘‘adāsī’’ti pade sampadānaṃ. Aññaṃ piṇḍapātanti sambandho.

336. Kiṃpanāti. Here, the word kiṃ (what) is indefinite. The meaning is whether it is rough or not rough. "Sinehapānaṃ pana temetī" (but does he moisten him with oil drink), and "karotī" (he does), are both connected. Sabbatthāti means in the entire body. Sirāti means tendons. Ayanti means Jīvaka. Oḷārikadosaharaṇatthanti means for the removal of gross humors. Pakatatteti. The connection is "satīti" (being), in the state called nature. "Bhagavā bhante" (Venerable One, Blessed One) is the explanation. Kutoti means from whom. He thought, "Is it fitting or not?" Tatoti means from that thought. Soṇoti means Koḷivīsa Soṇa, and the connection is "bhuñjatī" (he eats). Tatoti means from Soṇa. Tassāti means of Soṇa. Soti means Soṇa. Therassāti means of Moggallāna Thera. Here, in the word "patta" (bowl), the meaning is the owner, and in the word "adāsī" (he gave), the meaning is the recipient. "Aññaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ" (another alms-food) is the connection.

Aññesūti dvīhi piṇḍapātehi aññesu.Icchanti ruciṃ.Soti bimbisāro rājā.Tavevāti tuyhameva.Tanti bhagavato vacanaṃ. Rājā akāsīti sambandho.Teti asītikulaputtasahassā.Etadatthamevāti soṇassa arahatte patiṭṭhāpanatthameva, na rañño anuggahatthanti adhippāyo.

Aññesūti means in others besides the two alms-foods. Icchanti means desire. Soti means King Bimbisāra. Tavevāti means yours alone. Tanti means the Blessed One's words. "The king did it" is the connection. Teti means the eighty thousand clansmen. Etadatthamevāti means for the purpose of establishing Soṇa in arahantship alone, not for the king's benefit, is the intention.

210. Varayācanakathā
210. The Story of Asking for a Boon

337.Kataṃ bhattakiccaṃ yenātikatabhattakicco,tasmiṃ satīti sambandho.Vuttanayenevāti rāhulavatthumhi (mahāva. aṭṭha. 105) vuttanayeneva.Idaṃ vatthanti idaṃ siveyyakaṃ vatthaṃ, uppannanti sambandho. ‘‘Tāvā’’ti ajjhāharitabbo.Etthantareti etasmiṃ vatthuppannakālamajjhe. Koci bhikkhūti sambandho.Tenāti paṃsukūlikahetunā.Ayanti jīvako.Gahapaticīvaranti ettha gahapatīnaṃ cīvaranti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘gahapatīhi dinnaṃ cīvara’’nti.Vatthadānānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāyāti ‘‘vatthado hoti vaṇṇado’’tiādikāya (saṃ. ni. 1.42) vatthadānassa ānisaṃsena paṭisaṃyuttāya. Vicchāvasena vutto ‘‘itarītarenā’’ti sabbanāmasaddo aniyamatthoti āha ‘‘appagghenapi mahagghenapi yena kenacī’’ti.Pāvāroti uttarāsaṅgo. So hi pārupanatthāya variyati icchiyatīti pāvāroti vuccati. ‘‘Kappāsādibhedo’’ti iminā tassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Pakatikojavamevāti pakatiyā bhikkhūnaṃ sāruppaṃ kojavameva. Soḷasanāṭakitthīnaṃ ṭhatvā naccayogyattā mahatī piṭṭhi etassātimahāpiṭṭhiyaṃ,tameva kojavaṃmahāpiṭṭhiyakojavaṃ. Tassa kira lomāni caturaṅgulādhikāni honti.

337. The explanation is: "Kataṃ bhattakiccaṃ yena ātīti katabhattakicco" (one by whom the meal duty has been done is one who has done their meal duty), in that case. Vuttanayenevāti means in the manner spoken of in the story of Rāhula (mahāva. aṭṭha. 105). Idaṃ vatthanti means this siveyyaka cloth, and the connection is "uppannaṃ" (arisen). "Tāvā" (that much) should be supplied. Etthantareti means in the midst of this time of the cloth's arising. "Koci bhikkhūti" (some monk) is the connection. Tenāti means because of being a rag-robe wearer. Ayanti means Jīvaka. Gahapaticīvaranti. Here, rejecting the meaning of "cīvara of the householders," he says "cīvara given by the householders." Vatthadānānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāyāti means connected with the benefits of giving cloth, such as "a giver of cloth is a giver of beauty" (saṃ. ni. 1.42) and so on. Stated by way of variety, the pronoun "itarītarena" (whatever) is indefinite, so he says "appagghenapi mahagghenapi yena kenacī" (with something of little or great value, with whatever). Pāvāroti means the upper robe. For that is desired for covering oneself, so it is called pāvāroti. Showing its nature with "kappāsādibhedo" (a type of cotton, etc.). Pakatikojavamevāti means only the rough cloth that is naturally suitable for monks. Because it is suitable for dancing, standing as one of the sixteen dancing women, and has a large pile, it is called mahāpiṭṭhiyaṃ, that same kojavaṃ (rough cloth) is mahāpiṭṭhiyakojavaṃ (rough cloth with a large pile). It is said that its hairs are more than four fingerbreadths long.

211. Kambalānujānanādikathā
211. The Story Beginning with the Allowing of Woolen Cloth

338.Kāsīnanti kāsīnaṃ janapadānaṃ, kāsiraṭṭhe nivāsīnaṃ janānaṃ vā.Pasenadissāti paccuṭṭhaṃ, paṭipakkhaṃ vā senaṃ jinātītipasenadijakārassa dakāraṃ katvā.Esāti eso kāsirājā. ‘‘Sahassa’’nti iminākāsisaddassa saṅketasaṅkhyaṃ dasseti.Taṃagghanakoti tena kāsinā agghanako. Kasmā aḍḍhakāsīti (therīgā. aṭṭha. 25) vuttoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādi.Ayanti kambalo.Panāti kāraṇatthajotako. Yasmāti hi attho.

338. Kāsīnanti means of the Kāsī region, or of the people living in the Kāsī country. Pasenadissāti means one who defeats a sprung-up, or opposing, army, hence Pasenadi, having changed the ja to da. Esāti means this King of Kāsī. With Sahassanti (thousand), he shows that kāsi (Kāsī) is a code number. Taṃagghanakoti means that Kāsī is the evaluation. The question is why it was said "aḍḍhakāsīti" (half a Kāsī) (therīgā. aṭṭha. 25), so he says "ayaṃ panā" (but this), and so on. Ayanti means this woolen cloth. Panāti means indicating a reason. It means because.

339.Bhañjitabbaṃ khomādīni pañca suttāni missitvā avamadditabbantibhaṅganti dassento āha ‘‘bhaṅgaṃ nāmā’’tiādi.Vākamayamevāti bhaṅganāmakena vākena nibbattameva.

339. Demonstrating that bhaṅgaṃ (broken) means "having broken and mixed the five threads of linen and so on, it should be crushed," he says "bhaṅgaṃ nāmā" (broken, namely), and so on. Vākamayamevāti means made only of vāka (bark) by the name of bhaṅga (broken).

340.Teti bhikkhū, sallakkhiṃsu kirāti sambandho.Etassāti padassa, atthanti sambandho.Na acchiṃsūti na āsiṃsu, na vasiṃsūti attho.Nākāmāti ettha kamudhātu icchattho yakāralopoti āha ‘‘na anicchāyā’’ti.Dātabboti bhāgo dātabbo.Upacāreti susānassa samīpe. ‘‘Akāmā bhāgaṃ dātu’’nti vacanassa anekantabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yadi panā’’tiādi.Idhāti imaṃ susānaṃ. ‘‘Sampattā gaṇhantū’’ti dentīti yojanā.Yenāti bhikkhunā.Sadisā okkamiṃsūti ettha sadisasaddo samapariyāyoti āha ‘‘samaṃ okkamiṃsū’’ti.Samanti bhāvanapuṃsako. Samānadisāyāti vā dassento āha ‘‘ekadisāya vā’’ti. Ettha pana yakāralopo daṭṭhabbo.Bahimevāti susānato bahi eva.Katikanti katena pavattaṃ saṅgaraṃ.

340. Teti means the monks, the connection is "sallakkhiṃsu kira" (they considered). Etassāti means of that, the connection is "atthanti" (the meaning). Na acchiṃsūti means they did not remain, they did not dwell. Nākāmāti. Here, the root kamu is in the sense of desire, with the elision of the yakāra, so he says "na anicchāyā" (not without desire). Dātabboti means a share should be given. Upacāreti means near the charnel ground. To show the indefiniteness of the statement "akāmā bhāgaṃ dātu" (unwilling to give a share), it is said "yadi panā" (if), and so on. Idhāti means this charnel ground. The explanation is, "Let them give, thinking 'let those who arrive take'." Yenāti means by which monk. Sadisā okkamiṃsūti. Here, the word sadisa (similar) is synonymous with sama (equal), so he says "samaṃ okkamiṃsū" (they approached equally). Samanti is neuter in sense of having the same direction. Or, showing that it means in the same direction, he says "ekadisāya vā" (or in the same direction). Here, the elision of the yakāra should be noted. Bahimevāti means outside the charnel ground. Katikanti means a pile made by agreement.

213. Cīvarapaṭiggāhakasammutikathā
213. The Story of the Appointment of a Cloth Receiver

342.‘‘Yo na chandāgatiṃ gacchatī’’tiādīsu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Ñātakādīnaṃ cīvaranti sambandho.Ekaccasminti jane.saddo vikappattho. Etesu tīsu aññatarena kāraṇena chandāgatiṃ gacchati nāmāti hi attho. Āgatassāpi cīvaranti sambandhopisaddo garahattho. Pageva pacchā āgatassāti hi attho.Avamaññanti uññātaṃ.Voti tumhākaṃ. Natthi kinti yojanā. Muṭṭhā sati etassātimuṭṭhassati. Āgatānampi cīvaranti sambandho.Pisaddo sambhāvanattho. Pageva paṭhamaṃ āgatānanti hi attho. Etaṃ cīvarapaṭiggāhakaṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti yojanā.Santasanto vāti khedakhedo vā.Idañcidañcāti idañca idañca cīvaraṃ.Tasmāti yasmā ca gacchati, yasmā ca jānāti, tasmā.Yoti bhikkhu. Sakkotīti sambandho. Evarūpo bhikkhu sammanitabboti yojanā.

342. The connection is to understand the interpretation like this in "Yo na chandāgatiṃ gacchatīti." The robes for relatives, etc. are related. Ekaccasmi means in one person. The word is used for alternatives. The meaning is that one goes to chandāgatiṃ because of one of these three reasons. The connection is also to the arrived robe. The word pi expresses contempt. Indeed, for one who arrived later. Avamañña means despised. Vo means your. The connection is, "Is there not?" Muṭṭhā sati etassa means "with mindfulness confused." The connection is also to the arrived robes. The word pi implies probability. Indeed, for those who arrived first. The connection is, this is called the station of receiving robes. Santasanto vā means either happiness or unhappiness. Idañcidañcā means this robe and that robe. Tasmā means because he goes, and because he knows, therefore. Yo means the bhikkhu. The connection is, he is capable. The connection is, a bhikkhu of such a nature should be appointed.

Apalokanenapīti ‘‘itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ cīvarapaṭiggāhakaṃ kātuṃ saṅghaṃ apalokemī’’ti apalokanenapi, sammanitunti sambandho.Yattha panāti yasmiṃ pana dhuravihāre.

Apalokanenapī means, "I inform the Saṅgha to appoint a bhikkhu named such and such as the robe receiver," even by formal announcement. The connection is, should be appointed. Yattha panā means in which dwelling place dependent on alms.

tatthevāti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Chaḍḍetvā’’ti imināujjhitvāti ettha udhadhātuyā vissajjanatthaṃ dasseti.Cīvarapaṭiggāhakanti padassa cīvaraṃ paṭiggaṇhātīti cīvarapaṭiggāhakoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yo’’tiādi. Tattha yo paṭiggaṇhāti, so cīvarapaṭiggāhako nāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Cīvarapaṭisāmaka’’nti iminā cīvaraṃ gahitaṭṭhānato nīharitvā bhaṇḍāgāre dahati ṭhapetīticīvaranidahakoti atthaṃ dasseti. Yo na chandātiṃ gacchatītiādīsuetthaetesu ca ito parañcāti yojanā.

tatthevā here shows the scope of the word ta. By "Chaḍḍetvā," here shows the meaning of rejection by the root udha in ujjhitvā. Showing the meaning of the word cīvarapaṭiggāhaka as "one who receives robes" by saying "yo," etc. The connection there is, whoever receives, that is called a robe receiver. By cīvarapaṭisāmaka, it shows the meaning of cīvaranidahako which means one who takes the robe from the place it was received and puts it or keeps it in the storehouse. In yo na chandātiṃ gacchatīti, ettha means in these and also beyond these.

214. Bhaṇḍāgārasammutiādikathā
214. The Talk on the Bhaṇḍāgāra Appointment, Etc.

343.Yo vihāro vā yo aḍḍhayogo vā hoti, so vihārādiko sammanitabboti yojanā. ‘‘Ārāmikasāmaṇerādīhī’’ti padaṃ vivittatthe apādānaṃ, karaṇampi yujjati. Paccantasenāsanaṃ pana na sammanitabbaṃ corādiupaddavattā.Vihāramajjheyevāti bhaṇḍāgāravihāramajjheyeva.

343. Whichever monastery or semi-monastery there is, that monastery, etc., should be appointed. The word "ārāmikasāmaṇerādīhī" is an ablative in the sense of separateness, and it is also fitting as an instrument. However, a remote lodging should not be appointed due to dangers from thieves, etc. Vihāramajjheyevā means only in the middle of the storehouse monastery.

Yassāti bhaṇḍāgārassa. Idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘chadanādīsū’’ti pade sāmī, ‘‘natthī’’ti pade sampadānaṃ.Yassa panāti bhaṇḍāgārassa pana.Yattha katthacīti yasmiṃ kasmiṃci ṭhāne.Yenāti patitahetunā. Mūsitvā khādatītimūsiko. Ādisaddena godhāmaṅgusādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Upa bhusaṃ, upaguhitvā vā cinantītiupacikā. Tanti ovassanādiṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.

Yassā means of the storehouse. This word is the owner in the word "chadanādīsū," and the recipient in the word "natthī." Yassa panā means but of the storehouse. Yattha katthacī means in whatever place. Yenā means by the cause of falling. Mūsiko means one who eats by gnawing. The word ādi includes monitor lizards, mongooses, etc. Upacikā means they pile up or gather closely. Ta means that covering, etc. means truly, or because. Eva means this is a conclusion.

Cīvarapaṭiggāhakādīhīti ādisaddena cīvaranidahakabhaṇḍāgārike saṅgaṇhāti.Tatthāti tesu. Cīvarapaṭiggāhakena na gaṇhitabbanti sambandho.Tāvāti cīvaranidahakabhaṇḍāgārikānaṃ, tehi vā paṭhamaṃ.Yaṃ yanti cīvaraṃ.Tathevāti yathā visuṃ visuṃ katvā gaṇhati, tatheva.Cīvaranidahakenāpīti pisaddo na kevalaṃ paṭiggāhakeneva, atha kho nidahakenapīti sampiṇḍeti.Tathevāti yathā nidahako ācikkhati, tatheva.Tatoti tehi cīvarehi, vibhattaapādānaṃ, tesu cīvaresu vā niddhāraṇaṃ.Tadevāti saṅghena vuttacīvarameva.

Cīvarapaṭiggāhakādīhī the word ādi includes the robe-keeper, storehouse-keeper. Tatthā means in those. The connection is, should not be taken by the robe receiver. Tāvā means for the robe-keeper and storehouse-keeper, or by them first. Yaṃ ya means whichever robe. Tathevā means just as he takes it by making them separate. Cīvaranidahakenāpī the word pi combines, not only by the receiver, but also by the keeper. Tathevā means just as the keeper announces, so it is. Tato means from those robes, the ablative is separated, or the determination is in those robes. Tadevā means only the robe that was spoken by the Saṅgha.

Itītiādi nigamanaṃ. Bhagavatā anuññātoti sambandho.Bhaṇḍāgāranti bhaṇḍassa ṭhapanokāsaṃ agāraṃ.Bhaṇḍāgārikoti bhaṇḍāgāre niyutto.Bāhullikatāyāti paccayabāhullena niyuttabhāvatthaṃ. Evaṃ sante kimatthāya anuññātoti āha ‘‘api cā’’tiādi. Anuggahāya anuññātoti sambandho.ti vitthāro. Neva jāneyyunti yojanā. Dve dve vā cīvareti sambandho.Saṅgahaṃ kātunti saṅghena saṅgahaṃ kātuṃ.

Itī means this is a conclusion. The connection is, was permitted by the Blessed One. Bhaṇḍāgāra means a storehouse, a place for keeping goods. Bhaṇḍāgāriko means one appointed in the storehouse. Bāhullikatāyā means due to the abundance of conditions, the state of being appointed. If it is thus, he says, "api cā" etc., for what purpose was it permitted? The connection is, it was permitted for support. means expansion. The connection is, they would not know. The connection is, two or two robes. Saṅgahaṃ kātu means to make a collection by the Saṅgha.

Na vuṭṭhāpetabboti ettha atthuddhāravasena aññepi avuṭṭhāpanīye dassento āha ‘‘aññepī’’tiādi.ti vitthāro.Tatthāti catūsu. Saṅgho pana detīti sambandho.Upakāratāya cāti saṅghassa upakāratāya ca. Ettha ca purimesu tīsu ekoyeva hetu, pacchime pana dve hetavoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Na vuṭṭhāpetabbo showing other ones who should not be removed in terms of lifting up the meaning here, he says, "aññepī" etc. means expansion. Tatthā means in the four. The connection is, but the Saṅgha gives. Upakāratāya cā means and for the benefit of the Saṅgha. Here, it should be seen that there is only one reason in the first three, but in the last, there are two reasons.

Sammukhībhūtenāti aññamaññassa mukhe saṃvijjamāno, sannipatito vāsammukho,sammukho hutvā bhūtosammukhībhūto. Bhūsaddayogattā akārassīkāro hoti, antoupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhito saṅgho. Tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘antoupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhitenā’’ti.Kolāhalanti bahujanehi sannipatitvā ekato kataṃ abyattasaddaṃ. Tadākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘amhāka’’ntiādi. ‘‘Cīvarabhājakesū’’tiādinā agatigamanākāraṃ dasseti, taṃ suviññeyyameva.Tulābhūtoti tulāya sadiso hutvā bhūto, tulāya sadisabhāvaṃ patto vā.Majjhattoti majjhe ṭhito attā sabhāvo etassāti majjhatto.

Sammukhībhūtenā means existing in each other's face, or assembled sammukho, having become face to face sammukhībhūto. Because of the connection with the word bhū, the akāra becomes īkāra, the Saṅgha standing in the boundary of the inner enclosure. Showing that meaning, he says, "antoupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhitenā." Kolāhala means an indistinct noise made together by many people having assembled. Showing that form, he says, "amhāka" etc. By "Cīvarabhājakesū," he shows the manner of not going to partiality, that is very easy to understand. Tulābhūto means having become like a balance, or having attained the state of being like a balance. Majjhatto means one whose self, nature, stands in the middle, is majjhatto.

Idanti cīvaraṃ.Ghananti nirantaraṃ.Tanukanti viraḷaṃ. Ettha ‘‘uccinitvā’’ti iminā vatthassa pamāṇena uccinanaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Tulayitvā’’ti iminā agghena tulanaṃ dasseti.Vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṃ katvāti vaṇṇañca avaṇṇañca khuddakañca pamāṇaṃ, mahantañca pamāṇaṃ katvāti attho. Ekaccāni cīvarāni appagghāni honti, ekaccāni mahagghānīti vuttaṃ hoti.Dasadasaagghanakanti dasahi dasahi kahāpaṇehi agghanakaṃ.Yanti cīvaraṃ,bandhitvāti navagghanakaṃ ekagghanakena, aṭṭhagghanakañca dviagghanakena bandhitvāti attho.Same paṭivīseti samapamāṇe paṭivīse ṭhapetvā, iminā ‘‘vaṇṇāvaṇṇa’’nti etthavaṇṇasaddo pamāṇatthoti dīpeti.Dasa dasa bhikkhūti idaṃ upalakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ aññenākārenāpi gaṇetuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā.Bhaṇḍikanti cīvarabhaṇḍena niyuttaṃ puṭaṃ.Kusoti salākadaṇḍo.

Ida means this robe. Ghana means continuous. Tanuka means sparse. Here, by "uccinitvā," he shows the selection by the measure of the cloth. By "tulayitvā," he shows the weighing by the price. Vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṃ katvā means having made color and lack of color, small and large measure. It is said that some robes are of little value, and some are of great value. Dasadasaagghanaka means of the price of ten by ten kahāpaṇas. Ya means which robe, bandhitvā means having tied the nine-priced with the one-priced, and having tied the eight-priced with the two-priced. Same paṭivīse means having placed them in equal rows, by this, he indicates that in "vaṇṇāvaṇṇa," the word vaṇṇa means measure. Dasa dasa bhikkhū this is said by way of example, because it can be counted in another way too. Bhaṇḍika means a bag appointed with a cloth bag. Kuso means a lottery stick.

Attissarāti attanāva attānaṃ issarā. Aññesaṃ vattapaṭipattinti sambandho.Upaḍḍhabhāgoti bhikkhūnaṃ laddhabhāgato upaḍḍho bhāgo.Ye panāti sāmaṇerā pana.Samabhāgoti bhikkhūnaṃ bhāgena samo bhāgo.Idañcāti ‘‘upaḍḍhapaṭivīsa’’nti vacanañca, kathitanti sambandho.Samakamevāti bhikkhusāmaṇerānaṃ samapamāṇameva.Tatruppādavassāvāsikanti tasmiṃ vihāre uppādena mūlena uppāditaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ.Phātikammanti vaḍḍhanakammaṃ ‘‘yattakena vinayāgatena sammuñjanibandhanādinā hatthakammena vihārassa ūnatā na hoti, tattakaṃ katvāti attho.Etanti phātikammaṃ katvā gahaṇaṃ.ti saccaṃ.Etthāti tatruppādavassāvāsikagahaṇe.Sabbesanti akhilānaṃ bhikkhusāmaṇerānaṃ.Bhaṇḍāgārikacīvarepīti bhaṇḍāgāre ṭhapite akālacīvarepi. Pisaddena tatruppādavassāvāsikamapekkhati. Sāmaṇerā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontīti sambandho.Apaharitakanti haritavirahitaṃ.Raṅgachallinti rajanacchaviṃ.Etanti ukkuṭṭhikaraṇato samabhāgadānaṃ, vuttanti sambandho.Ye cāti sāmaṇerā ca.Virajjhitvā karontīti kattabbakālesu akatvā yathicchitakkhaṇe karonti.Teti sāmaṇere.Samapaṭivīso dātabboti ‘‘karissāmā’’ti paṭiññātamattena samo paṭivīso dātabbo.

Attissarā means those who are their own masters. The connection is, the rules of conduct for others. Upaḍḍhabhāgo means half a share from the share obtained by the bhikkhus. Ye panā means but those novices. Samabhāgo means a share equal to the share of the bhikkhus. Idañcā means and this statement, "upaḍḍhapaṭivīsa," the connection is, was said. Samakamevā means exactly the same for bhikkhus and novices. Tatruppādavassāvāsika means the dwelling for the rains produced in that monastery by its own resources. Phātikamma means a repair work, meaning "having done as much as is needed so that the monastery does not become deficient by whatever Vinaya-approved binding or handiwork." Eta means taking after doing the repair work. means truly. Etthā means in taking the dwelling for the rains produced in that place. Sabbesa means of all the bhikkhus and novices. Bhaṇḍāgārikacīvarepī means even in the robe kept in the storehouse, the non-seasonal robe. By the word pi, he considers the dwelling for the rains produced in that place. The connection is, the novices shout. Apaharitaka means without green. Raṅgachalli means the color of dye. Eta means this giving of an equal share from shouting, the connection is, was said. Ye cā means and those novices. Virajjhitvā karontī means they do not do it at the times when it should be done, but they do it at the time they wish. Te means those novices. Samapaṭivīso dātabbo means an equal row should be given only by the promise "we will do."

Pahatāyāti paharitabbāya, pahanitabbāya vā.Tasmāti yasmā sandhāya vuttaṃ, tasmā.Anīhaṭesūti bhaṇḍāgārato anīharitesu.Imassa bhikkhunoti uttaritukāmassa imassa bhikkhuno.Tulāyāti mānena.

Pahatāyā means for one who should be struck, or should be beaten. Tasmā means because it was said referring to that, therefore. Anīhaṭesū means in those not brought out from the storehouse. Imassa bhikkhuno means for this bhikkhu who wants to obtain more. Tulāyā means by measurement.

Tesūti sāṭakesu, eko sāṭakoti yojanā. Sabbesu pātitesūti sambandho.Ettakenāti dvādasagghanakena.Taṃ sutvāti bhikkhūnaṃ taṃ vacanaṃ sutvā.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ saṅghagaṇasantake. Anuppadānena khipiyati pakkhipiyatītianukkhepanti dassento āha ‘‘anukkhepaṃ nāmā’’tiādi. Yattakaṃ agghanti sambandho. Tattakena agghena agghanaketi yojanā.Vikallakāti vikalassa bhāvo vikallaṃ, cīvarapuggalānaṃ apahonakabhāvo, tadeva vikallakā. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti pāṭhaseso, tesu dvīsu vikallakesūti attho.Atthīti saṃvijjanti, nipātoyaṃ. Chindantehi ca dātabbānīti sambandho.Dātabbānīti ca chinditabbāni. Dāsaddo hi avakhaṇḍanattho.Dātunti avakhaṇḍituṃ.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.Etthāti etesu vikallakesu.Tanti cīvaraṃ.Athāti tositato paraṃ.Tatthāti ekassa bhikkhuno koṭṭhāse.Sāmaṇakanti samaṇassa anurūpaṃ.Yoti bhikkhu.Tenāti parikkhārena.Idampīti aññaṃ sāmaṇakassa parikkhārassa ṭhapanampi. Pisaddena purimaṃ vatthachindanamapekkhati.

Tesū means in those cloths, one cloth is the connection. The connection is, in all those that were cast. Ettakenā means by the twelve-priced one. Taṃ sutvā means having heard that word of the bhikkhus. Sabbatthā means in everything belonging to the Saṅgha community. Showing anukkhepa as it is rejected and thrown away by not giving, he says, "anukkhepaṃ nāmā" etc. The connection is, how much the price is. The connection is, an agghanaka by that much price. Vikallakā means the state of being in disagreement is vikallaṃ, the state of not giving away of the robe-individuals, that itself is vikallakā. Tatthā is the remainder of the reading, it means in those two vikallakas. Atthī means they exist, this is a particle. The connection is, they should be given by those who are cutting. Dātabbānī means and they should be cut. The word is indeed in the sense of cutting off. Dātu means to cut off. Eva means this is a conclusion. Etthā means in these vikallakas. Ta means that robe. Athā means after the satisfaction. Tatthā means in the share of one bhikkhu. Sāmaṇaka means suitable for a samaṇa. Yo means which bhikkhu. Tenā means by that equipment. Idampī means this placing of another equipment of the sāmaṇaka too. By the word pi, he considers the previous cutting of the cloth.

Vagganti samūhaṃ. Aṭṭha vā nava vā bhikkhū hontīti yojanā.Tesanti aṭṭhannaṃ vā navannaṃ vā.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ. Ayaṃ apahonakabhāvoti yojanā. Puna cīvarasseva vikallakabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘athavā’’tiādi. Ettha purimanaye cīvarassa ca puggalassa ca vikallakaṃ hoti, pacchime cīvarassevāti ayametesaṃ viseso.

Vagga means a group. The connection is, there are eight or nine bhikkhus. Tesa means of those eight or nine. Eva means this is a conclusion. This is the state of not giving away. Again, showing the state of disagreement of only the robe, he says, "athavā" etc. Here, in the previous method, there is disagreement of the robe and the individual, in the latter, there is only of the robe, this is the difference between them.

215. Cīvararajanakathā
215. The Talk on the Approval of Dyeing Robes

344.Gihiparibhuttaṃ panāti gihinā paribhuttaṃ vatthaṃ pana, kiñci phalanti sambandho.

344. Gihiparibhuttaṃ panā means but a cloth used by a householder, the connection is, bears any fruit.

Sītudakāti sītaṃ udakaṃ. Liṅgavipallāso hi ayaṃ.Uttarāḷumpanti ettha uttara uḷumpanti padacchedaṃ katvā akārato ukārassa lopaṃ katvā, pubbasarassa ca dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘uttarāḷumpa’’nti vuccati.Uttarāḷūti uttaraudakaṃ.Uḷusaddo hi udakavācako, taṃ pāti rakkhatīti uttarāḷumpaṃ. Tassa sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vaṭṭādhāraka’’nti.Rajananti rajanachalliṃ.ti phalajotako.Rajananti rajanudakaṃ.ti vitthāro.Thevoti rajanabindu.Na visaratīti na paggharati.Rajanāḷuṅkanti etthāpi purimanayeneva padasiddhi veditabbā.Rajanauḷuṅkanti rajanasaṅkhātassa udakassa gahaṇatthāya kariyatīti rajanauḷuṅkaṃ. Daṇḍakena niyuttaṃ thālakaṃdaṇḍakathālakanti dassento āha ‘‘tameva sadaṇḍaka’’nti.Rajanakuṇḍanti rajanapakkhipanaṃ mahāghaṭaṃ.Aññatrāti aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ.Patthinnasaddo thaddhapariyāyoti āha ‘‘thaddha’’nti.Dantakāsāvānīti ettha dantasaddena tassa vaṇṇo gahetabbo, so etesamatthīti dantāni, dantāni ca tāni kāsāvāni ceti dantakāsāvāni, tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dantavaṇṇānī’’ti. Dantavaṇṇāni kāsāvāni dhārentīti sambandho.

Sītudakā means cold water. This is indeed a gender reversal. Uttarāḷumpa here, having made the word division as uttara uḷumpa, having made the elision of the ukāra from the akāra, and having made the lengthening of the previous vowel, it is called "uttarāḷumpa." Uttarāḷū means northern water. The word uḷu is indeed a water-word, uttarāḷumpaṃ means that which protects that. Showing the form of that, he says, "vaṭṭādhāraka." Rajana means dye powder. means showing the fruit. Rajana means dye water. means expansion. Thevo means a drop of dye. Na visaratī means does not flow out. Rajanāḷuṅka here too, the word formation should be understood in the same way as before. Rajanauḷuṅka means rajanauḷuṅkaṃ is made for the purpose of taking water called dye. Showing daṇḍakathālaka as a plate fixed with a stick, he says, "tameva sadaṇḍaka." Rajanakuṇḍa means a large pot for throwing in dye. Aññatrā means another place. Patthinna is a synonym for stiffness, he says, "thaddha." In dantakāsāvānī, here by the word danta, its color should be taken, they have that, therefore dantāni, and those are dantāni and kāsāvāni, showing that meaning, he says, "dantavaṇṇānī." The connection is, they wear robes of tooth color.

216. Chinnakacīvarānujānanakathā
216. The Talk on the Permission of Cutting Robes

345.Dīghamariyādabaddhanti dīghena mariyādena baddhaṃ.Catukkasaṇṭhānanti catunnaṃ maggānaṃ samodhānasaṇṭhānaṃ.Ussahasi tvanti ettha upubbo sahadhātu samatthatthoti āha ‘‘sakkosi tva’’nti. Papubbo pana abhibhavanattho hoti ‘‘pasahatī’’tiādīsu.Yo nāmāti yo ānando ājānissati nāma, so ānando paṇḍitoti yojanā. ‘‘Kusī’’ti etaṃ nāmaṃ adhivacananti yojanā.Anuvātādīnanti ādisaddena paribhaṇḍādīni saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Aḍḍhakusī’’ti etanti yojanā.

345.Dīghamariyādabaddha means bound by a long boundary. Catukkasaṇṭhāna means the shape of the confluence of four paths. Ussahasi tva here, the upa prefix of the saha root means capable, he says, "sakkosi tva." But the pa prefix means overcoming, in "pasahatī" etc. Yo nāmā means whoever ānanda will know, that ānanda is wise. The connection is, "Kusī" is a synonym. Anuvātādīna the word ādi includes paribhaṇḍa etc. The connection is, this is "aḍḍhakusī."

Gīveyyakanti ettha gīvāyaṃ suttasaṃsibbitaṃ gīveyyakanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gīvāveṭhanaṭṭhāne’’tiādi. ‘‘Āgantukapaṭṭa’’nti iminā eyyakapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Eseva nayojaṅgheyyakanti etthāpi.Etaṃ nāmanti ‘‘gīveyyakaṃ, jaṅgheyyaka’’nti etaṃ nāmaṃ.Itīti evaṃ.Etanti ‘‘anuvivaṭṭa’’ntiādi etaṃ. ‘‘Anuvivaṭṭa’’nti etaṃ nāmanti yojanā.Vivaṭṭassāti majjhimakhaṇḍakassa.Bāhantanti ettha bāhāya upari ṭhapitā antā bāhantāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bāhāyā’’tiādi.Tesanti ubhinnamantānaṃ.Etanti ‘‘bāhanta’’nti etaṃ.

Gīveyyakanti (Regarding "Gīveyyaka"): Here, to show the meaning of gīveyyaka as "a neck ornament sewn with thread around the neck," he says, "in the place of neck-wrapping," etc. With "āgantukapaṭṭa" (an adventitious cloth), he shows the nature of the eyyaka suffix. The same method applies to jaṅgheyyakanti as well. Etaṃ nāmanti (This name): "gīveyyakaṃ, jaṅgheyyakaṃ" is the name. Itīti (Thus): in this manner. Etanti (This): "anuvivaṭṭa," etc. This is the name; the construction is "anuvivaṭṭa." Vivaṭṭassāti (Of the open one): of the middle section. Bāhantanti (Regarding "Bāhanta"): Here, to show the meaning of bāhanta as "ends placed on the arm," he says, "on the arm," etc. Tesanti (Of those): of the two ends. Etanti (This): "bāhanta."

217. Ticīvarānujānanakathā
217. Account of the Allowance of the Triple Robe

346.‘‘Ukkhittabhaṇḍikabhāvaṃ āpādite’’ti imināubbhaṇḍiteti ettha ukkhittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ubbhaṇḍaṃ, ubbhaṇḍabhāvaṃ itā āpāditāti ubbhaṇḍitāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Te ubbhaṇḍite bhikkhū addasāti yojanā.Bhisisaṅkhepenāti bhisiyaṃ pakkhepena, pavesenāti attho, bhisiākārenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tatthāti dakkhiṇāgiriṃ. Gacchantā te bhikkhūti yojanā. ‘‘Aṭṭhapamāṇāsū’’ti imināantaraṭṭhakāsūti ettha kapaccayo pamāṇatthe hotīti dasseti, kesuci potthakesu pamāṇasaddo na dissati, gaḷitoti daṭṭhabbo. Rattīsūti sambandho.Bhagavantanti ettha sampadānatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘bhagavato’’ti.Sītālukāti ettha sītaṃ pakati etesanti sītāluno, teyevasītālukāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sītapakatikā’’ti. Ye kulaputtā pakatiyāva sītena kilamanti, te sītālukā nāmāti yojanā.Ekacciyanti ettha ekaccasaddo ekapariyāyoti āha ‘‘ekaṃ paṭṭa’’nti. Iminā ekoyeva ekaccoti katvā sakatthe accapaccayoti dasseti. ‘‘Paṭṭa’’nti iminā ekaccena niyuttaṃ ekacciyanti vacanatthaṃ katvā niyuttatthe pavattassa iyapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Itīti evaṃ. Bhagavā anujānātīti sambandho.Itareti saṅghāṭito itare uttarāsaṅgaantaravāsake.

346.With "Ukkhittabhaṇḍikabhāvaṃ āpādite" (having brought about the state of having the bundle thrown up), he shows the meaning of ubbhaṇḍiteti here: ukkhittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ is ubbhaṇḍaṃ, ubbhaṇḍabhāvaṃ itā āpāditāti is ubbhaṇḍitāti. The construction is "He saw those monks with ubbhaṇḍite." Bhisisaṅkhepenāti (With a raft-like arrangement): by throwing onto a raft, by placing it; this means in the manner of a raft. Tatthāti (There): at Dakkhināgiri. The construction is "Those monks going." With "Aṭṭhapamāṇāsū" (of eight measures), he shows here that in antaraṭṭhakāsūti, the ka suffix is in the sense of measure; in some books, the word pamāṇa is not seen and should be understood as a mistake. The connection is with "rattīsūti" (nights). Bhagavantanti (To the Blessed One): Here, he says "bhagavato" (to the Blessed One) because it is a dative usage. Sītālukāti (Regarding "Sītālukā"): Here, to show the meaning of sītāluno as "those for whom cold is natural," and those same ones are sītālukā, he says, "of cold nature." The construction is "Those sons of good families who are naturally afflicted by cold are called Sītālukā." Ekacciyanti (Regarding "Ekacciya"): Here, he says "ekaṃ paṭṭa" (one cloth), because the word ekacca is a synonym for eka. With this, he shows that the acca suffix is in its own sense, making it mean "only one." With "paṭṭa" (cloth), he shows the nature of the iya suffix, which occurs in the sense of appointed, having made the meaning of ekacciya as "appointed by one." Itīti (Thus): in this manner. The connection is "The Blessed One allows." Itareti (The other): other than the saṅghāṭi, the upper robe and lower robe.

218. Atirekacīvarādikathā
218. Account of Extra Robes, Etc.

348.Acchupeyyanti etthaacchivuccati nettamaṇḍalaṃ, taṃ viyāti acchi chiddo, tasmiṃ upagantabbaṃ upanetabbanti acchupeyyaṃ. ‘‘Laggāpeyya’’nti iminā adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti.Etthāti paṃsukūle.Sabbamidanti ‘‘diguṇaṃ saṅghāṭi’’ntiādikaṃ sabbaṃ idaṃ vacanaṃ.Uddharitvāti apanetvā.Saṃsibbitanti aññamaññaṃ sambandhitvā sibbitaṃ.

348.Acchupeyyanti (Regarding "Acchupeyya"): Here, acchi is said to be the eye socket; like that it is acchi, an opening; that which should be approached, brought near to that, is acchupeyyaṃ. With "laggāpeyya" (should be attached), he shows the implied meaning. Etthāti (Here): in the paṃsukūla. Sabbamidanti (All of this): all of this statement, beginning with "diguṇaṃ saṅghāṭi" (a double saṅghāṭi). Uddharitvāti (Having removed): having taken away. Saṃsibbitanti (Sewn together): sewn together by being connected to each other.

351.Sovaggikanti ettha sundarāni aggāni rūpādīni etthāti saggo, pubbapade ukārassa lopo, ukārassa uvādese ‘‘suvaggo’’ti sijjhati. Suvaggappattahetukaṃ sovaggikaṃ, dānaṃ, tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saggappattahetuka’’nti. ‘‘Apanetī’’ti iminānudadhātuyā apanayanatthaṃ dasseti.Anāmayāti ettha āmayasaddo rogapariyāyoti āha ‘‘arogā’’ti. Natthi āmayo etissāti anāmayā.

351.Sovaggikanti (Regarding "Sovaggika"): Here, sundarāni aggāni rūpādīni etthāti is saggo, the u of the first word is dropped, and with the substitution of u for u, "suvaggo" is formed. That which causes attainment of suvagga is sovaggikaṃ, dānaṃ; showing that meaning, he says, "causing attainment of heaven." With "apaneti" (removes), he shows the meaning of removing of the nuda root. Anāmayāti (Regarding "Anāmayā"): Here, he says "arogā" (free from disease) because the word āmaya is a synonym for disease. That in which there is no āmaya is anāmayā.

353.Jhānalābhinoti jhānalābhīnaṃ puthujjanānaṃ kāmacchandanīvaraṇassa vikkhambhanattā vuttaṃ.

353.Jhānalābhinoti (Regarding "Jhānalābhino"): It is said because of the overcoming of the hindrance of sensual desire for jhāna attainers who are worldlings.

356.Samodhānavasena dassiyitthātisandiṭṭho. Samodhānavasena bhajiyitthātisambhatto. Abhimukhaṃ lapitthātiālapito. Imehīti imehi dvīhi.

356.It was shown by way of synthesis; therefore sandiṭṭho (evident). It was cultivated by way of synthesis; therefore sambhatto (intimate). It was spoken face to face; therefore ālapito (addressed). Imehīti (With these): with these two.

221. Pacchimavikappanupagacīvarādikathā
221. Account of the Robe Which is Not to be Approached with a Subsequent Distribution, Etc.

359.Katapaṃsukūloti kato paṃsukūlo. Iminā‘‘paṃsukūlato’’ti padassa visesanaparapadattaṃ dasseti.Aggaḷāropanenāti aggaḷassa āropanena. ‘‘Suttenevā’’ti ettha evasaddena pilotikaṃ nivatteti.Añchitvā añchitvāti ākaḍḍhitvā ākaḍḍhitvā.Abhidhātu hi ākaḍḍhanattho. ‘‘Saṅghāṭikoṇo dīgho’’ti imināvikaṇṇoti ettha visamo kaṇṇo vikaṇṇoti katvā kaṇṇasaddassa koṇatthaṃ dasseti.Tatoti gaḷanato.Lujjantīti valiṃ gaṇhanti.Aṭṭhapadakanti padassa aṭṭhapadena sibbitaṃ aṭṭhapadakanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aṭṭhapadakacchinnena pattamukhaṃ sibbitu’’nti. Tatthaaṭṭhapadakacchinnena pattamukhaṃ sibbitunti aṭṭhapadalikhanena tattha tattha gabbhaṃ dassetvā pattamukhaṃ sibbituṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭhapadakacchannenā’’tipi pāṭho, aṭṭhaphalakākārenāti attho.

359.Katapaṃsukūloti (Regarding "Katapaṃsukūlo"): kato paṃsukūlo (having made a rag-robe). With this, he shows the being of ‘‘paṃsukūlato’’ti (from the rag-robe) as the latter word of a specifying compound. Aggaḷāropanenāti (By placing the bar): by the placing of the bar. With "suttenevā" (only with thread), he excludes the patch with the word eva. Añchitvā añchitvāti (Having pulled and pulled): having pulled and pulled. The abhi root has the meaning of pulling. With "saṅghāṭikoṇo dīgho" (the corner of the saṅghāṭi is long), he shows here that in vikaṇṇoti, visamo kaṇṇo is vikaṇṇo, having made the meaning of the word kaṇṇa as corner. Tatoti (From there): from the straining. Lujjantīti (Are being caught): they hold the crease. To show the meaning of aṭṭhapadakanti (eight-footed) as "sewn with eight padas," he says, "to sew the opening of the bowl with an eight-pada piece." There, aṭṭhapadakacchinnena pattamukhaṃ sibbitunti (to sew the opening of the bowl with an eight-pada piece): to sew the opening of the bowl after showing the inner part there and there by writing an eight-pada design. "Aṭṭhapadakacchannenā" is also a reading, meaning in the shape of eight squares.

360.‘‘Āgantukapattampi dātu’’nti imināanvādikanti padassa anupacchā āgantukabhāvena dīyatīti anvādikanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Catutthakkharenapi pāṭho, anupacchā āgantukabhāvena dhīyati ṭhapīyatītianvādhikanti kātabbo.Idaṃ panāti anvādhikaṃ pana.

360.With "āgantukapattampi dātu" (to give even an adventitious bowl), he shows the meaning of anvādikanti as "that which is given subsequently in an adventitious manner is anvādika." There is also a reading with the fourth syllable, and anvādhikanti should be made as "that which is placed or given subsequently in an adventitious manner." Idaṃ panāti (This, however): anvādhikaṃ, however.

361.Sesañātīnanti mātāpitūhi sesañātīnaṃ.Vinipātetiyevāti vinassanto nipātetiyeva.

361.Sesañātīnanti (To the remaining relatives): to the remaining relatives other than the mother and father. Vinipātetiyevāti (Should be made to fall down only when ruined): should be made to fall down only when being destroyed.

362.‘‘Vassiko’’ti saṅketīyati gaṇhīyatītivassikasaṅketanti vutte cattāro māsāti āha ‘‘cattāro māse’’ti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Āraññakassa bhikkhunoti sambandho.Tenāti āraññakena bhikkhunā.

362.When "vassikoti saṅketīyati gaṇhīyati" (the rains-resident is reckoned, counted), he says, "vassikasaṅketanti" (the reckoning of the rains-resident), indicating four months, he says, "four months." ti (Indeed): truly, or because. The connection is "of the forest-dwelling monk." Tenāti (By him): by the forest-dwelling monk.

222. Saṅghikacīvaruppādakathā
222. Account of the Arising of Saṅgha Robes

363.Aññatthāti dinnaṭṭhānato aññattha. Haṭānipi cīvarāni tuyheva santakānīti yojanā.Tesanti cīvarānaṃ.Aññoti ekakavassāvāsikato añño. Pañcamāse taṃ sabbaṃ tasseva bhikkhuno hotīti sambandho.Yanti cīvaraṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ cīvaranti sambandho.Yampīti cīvarampi.Soti bhikkhu, gaṇhātīti sambandho.Vassāvāsatthāyāti vassaṃ āvāsassa bhikkhuno atthāya.Ṭhapitaupanikkhepatoti veyyāvaccakarehi vaḍḍhiṃ payojetvā ṭhapitaupanikkhepato.Tatruppādatoti tasmiṃ vihāre uppādato nāḷikeraārāmādito.Idanti vakkhamānaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘tasseva tāni cīvarāni yāva kathinassa ubbhārāyā’’ti vacane.Yanti cīvaraṃ.Panasaddo visesatthajotako.Idanti padālaṅkāramattaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ vihāre. Abhilāpamattantipi vadanti.Anatthatakathinassāpītipisaddo pageva atthatakathinassāti dasseti.Pañcamāseti accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ.Tatoti pañcamāsato. Atītavasse vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa idaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ deti kiṃ? Udāhu anāgatavasseti yojanā.Piṭṭhisamayeti gimhānaṃ paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva assayujapuṇṇamī, tāva piṭṭhisamaye.

363.Aññatthāti (Elsewhere): elsewhere than the place given. The construction is "Even robes acquired by force are yours." Tesanti (Of those): of the robes. Aññoti (Another): another than the single-residence-rains-resident. The connection is "In the fifth month, all of that belongs to that same monk." Yanti (Which): the robe; the connection is "that is the entire robe." Yampīti (Even the robe). Soti (That): that monk; the connection is "he takes." Vassāvāsatthāyāti (For the sake of the rains-residence): for the sake of the monk's rains-residence. Ṭhapitaupanikkhepatoti (From the kept deposit): from the kept deposit after those doing service have used it for increase. Tatruppādatoti (From the arising there): from the arising in that monastery, from the coconut grove, etc. Idanti (This): that which will be spoken. Etthāti (Here): in the statement "tasseva tāni cīvarāni yāva kathinassa ubbhārāya" (those robes belong to him until the removal of the kathina). Yanti (Which): the robe. The word pana indicates distinction. Idanti (This): merely an adornment of the word. Idhāti (Here): in this monastery. Some say "merely a statement." Anatthatakathinassāpīti (Even of one who has not spread the kathina): the word pi shows that it is only after one who has spread the kathina. Pañcamāseti (In the fifth month): the dative usage is in the sense of continuous connection. Tatoti (From then): from the fifth month. "Does he give this rains-residence to the saṅgha which has resided for the rains in the past year? Or in the future year?" is the construction. Piṭṭhisamayeti (In the period of the hot season): from the first day of the hot season until the full-moon day of Assayuja, is the period of the hot season.

Vassānatoti vassānamāsato.Etthāti etesu cīvaresu. Keci bhikkhūti sambandho.Tamatthanti tassa saṅghikacīvarassa kāraṇaṃ.Tatthevāti gataṭṭhāne eva.Esāti saṅghikacīvarahārako bhikkhu.Tatrāti vihārādīsu.Nanti cīvarahārakaṃ bhikkhuṃ.

Vassānatoti (From the rains month): from the month of the rains. Etthāti (Here): in these robes. The connection is "some monks." Tamatthanti (That purpose): the reason for that saṅgha robe. Tatthevāti (In that same place): in that same place where he went. Esāti (He): that monk who takes the saṅgha robes. Tatrāti (There): in monasteries, etc. Nanti (Not): that monk who takes the robes.

Tassevāti adhiṭṭhahantasseva.

Tassevāti (To him alone): to him alone who is undertaking.

Duggahitāni hontīti saṅghikāneva hontīti adhippāyo.Mayhamevimāni cīvarānīti issaravasena gahaṇe duggahitāni.Mayhetāni pāpuṇantīti anissaravasena gahaṇe suggahitānīti viseso.

Duggahitāni hontīti (Are badly taken): the meaning is that they are only saṅgha's. Mayhamevimāni cīvarānīti (These robes are only mine): they are badly taken if they are taken with a sense of ownership. Mayhetāni pāpuṇantīti (These will come to me): they are well taken if they are taken without a sense of ownership.

Pātite kuseti ettha tapaccayassa paccuppannakālikabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekakoṭṭhāse’’tiādi.Gahitamevāti ekakoṭṭhāse pātitassa kusadaṇḍassa vasena ‘‘imassida’’nti ekakoṭṭhāse vidite sabbesaṃ viditattā gahitamevāti adhippāyo.

Pātite kuseti (When the kusa is dropped): Here, showing the present-time nature of the ta suffix, he says, "in one division," etc. Gahitamevāti (It is certainly taken): the idea is that because it is known to all that "this is for this one" on account of the kusa staff having been dropped in one division, it is certainly taken.

Itovāti sacīvarabhattatova.Visuṃ sajjiyamāneti cīvare ca bhatte ca visuṃ sajjiyamāne.

Itovāti (From the robes and food): from the robes and food. Visuṃ sajjiyamāneti (When being prepared separately): when the robes and food are being prepared separately.

Pacchinnadānattāti pacchinnadānakiriyabhāvato. Idaṃ pana vatthu uppannanti sambandho.Ime ca therāti nilavāsiādayo vinayadharapāmokkhā ime ca therā.

Pacchinnadānattāti (Because of the state of severed giving): because of the state of severed giving activity. The connection is "But this thing arose." Ime ca therāti (And these elders): these elders, such as Nilavāsi and others, who were foremost in Vinaya.

223. Upanandasakyaputtavatthukathā
223. Account of the Story of Upananda Sakyaputta

364.Etthāti upanandavatthumhi.Tassāti upanandassa.Gāmakāvāsinoti gāmake āvāsino.Ayanti upanando.Mukharoti mukhaṃ kharaṃ etassāti mukharo khakāralopo, atha vā mukhaṃ etassatthīti mukharo mantutthe pavatto rapaccayo nindatthavācako.Lahukāpattīti dukkaṭāpatti.Tassevāti gahitabhikkhusseva. Dhuranikkhepe satīti yojanā.

364.Etthāti (Here): in the story of Upananda. Tassāti (Of him): of Upananda. Gāmakāvāsinoti (Residents of the village): those who reside in the village. Ayanti (This): this Upananda. Mukharoti (Talkative): mukhaṃ kharaṃ etassāti mukharo, with the elision of the kha sound; or else, mukhaṃ etassatthīti mukharo, the ra suffix occurring in the sense of possession, is a word indicative of censure. Lahukāpattīti (A light offense): a dukkaṭa offense. Tassevāti (To him alone): to the monk who has taken it. The connection is "when the burden has been laid down."

ekādhippāyo,ekapuggalapaṭivīso, tenāha ‘‘ekapuggalapaṭivīsamevā’’ti.Yathā yathāti yena yenākārena.Yoti paṭivīso. ‘‘Tathā tathā’’ti ajjhāharitabbo.Tatthāti ‘‘idha panā’’tiādivacane. Ekekasmiṃ āvāseti sambandho. Vāsaddo aññepi dvīhadvīhādivāre saṅgaṇhāti.Yanti paṭivīsaṃ.Eko puggaloti eko niccāvāso puggalo.Evanti upaḍḍhe diyyamāne.Yattha vā panāti ettha yasaddassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ purimasmi’’nti. Purimasmiṃ āvāseti sambandho.Tatoti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bahutaraṃ vasitavihārato’’ti.Idañcāti ‘‘amutra upaḍḍho cīvarapaṭivīso dātabbo’’ti vacanañca.Ekasīmavihārehīti ekissaṃ upacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhitehi vihārehi.Nānāsīmavihāreti nānāupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhite vihāre.Senāsanaggāhoti purimaupacārasīmāyaṃ senāsanaggāho.Tatthāti passambhanavihāre.Sesanti cīvarato sesaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu vihāresu.Antosīmagatassāti antoupacārasīmāyaṃ gatassa, bhikkhunoti sambandho. Cīvaraṃ senāsanaggāhasseva pāpuṇāti, sesaṃ pana āmisabhesajjādisabbaṃ aññavihārato āgantvā antosīmagatassa pāpuṇātīti adhippāyo.

ekādhippāyo, (of one intention), eka-puggala-paṭivīso (a distribution to one individual), therefore he said, "ekapuggalapaṭivīsameva" (only a distribution to one individual). Yathā yathāti (However, however): in whatever way. Yoti (Whoever): whoever is the recipient. "Tathā tathā" (so, so) should be supplied. Tatthāti (There): in the statement beginning "idha panā" (but here). The connection is "in each dwelling." The va word includes even a distribution of two or more at a time. Yanti (Whoever): whoever is the recipient. Eko puggaloti (One individual): one individual who is a permanent resident. Evanti (Thus): when half is being given. Yattha vā panāti (Or wherever): Here, to show the scope of the ya word, it is said, "evaṃ purimasmiṃ" (thus, in the previous). The connection is "in the previous dwelling." Tatoti (From there): Here, showing the scope of the ta word, he says, "bahutaraṃ vasitavihārato" (from the monastery where he has lived more). Idañcāti (And this): and this statement, "amutra upaḍḍho cīvarapaṭivīso dātabbo" (half of the robe-distribution should be given in that other place). Ekasīmavihārehīti (By monasteries within one boundary): by monasteries situated within one upacāra boundary. Nānāsīmavihāreti (Monasteries within different boundaries): monasteries situated within different upacāra boundaries. Senāsanaggāhoti (The taking of lodging): the taking of lodging within the previous upacāra boundary. Tatthāti (There): in the Passambhana monastery. Sesanti (The remainder): the remainder of the robe. Sabbatthāti (Everywhere): in all the monasteries. Antosīmagatassāti (To one who has gone within the boundary): to the monk who has gone within the upacāra boundary. The robe comes to him who has taken the lodging; however, all the remainder, such as provisions and medicine, comes to him who has come from another monastery and gone within the boundary; this is the idea.

224. Gilānavatthukathā
224. Account of the Case of the Sick Person

365.Mañcake nipātesunti ettha mañcake nipātanaṃ nāma mañcake nipajjāpananti āha ‘‘mañcake nipajjāpesu’’nti.Muttakarīsakiliṭṭhanti muttakarīsehi kiliṭṭhaṃ.Yoti yo koci.Manti mama. Tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ovādānusāsanīkaraṇenā’’ti. Mama ovādassa ca anusāsaniyā ca karaṇenāti attho.Etthāti ‘‘yo bhikkhave maṃ upaṭṭhaheyyā’’tiādipāṭhe. Suttassa neyyatthattā agahetabbatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato cā’’tiādi.Yassāti gilānassa.Upajjhāyādayoti ettha ādisaddena ācariyasaddhivihārikaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakasamānācariyakasaṅkhāte pañca jane saṅgaṇhāti. Ekacāriko vā hotīti sambandho.Saṅghattheropītipisaddo pageva aññesanti dasseti.

365.Mañcake nipātesunti (Having laid down on a bed): Here, laying down on a bed means causing to lie down on a bed; he says, "mañcake nipajjāpesu" (having caused to lie down on a bed). Muttakarīsakiliṭṭhanti (Soiled with urine and feces): soiled with urine and feces. Yoti (Whoever): whoever it may be. Manti (Me): me. Showing that meaning, he says, "ovādānusāsanīkaraṇena" (by doing the giving of advice and instruction). The meaning is "by doing the giving of advice and instruction." Etthāti (Here): in the passage beginning "yo bhikkhave maṃ upaṭṭhaheyyā" (the one, monks, who would attend to me). Showing that because the sutta is of implied meaning, it should not be taken literally, he says, "bhagavato cā" (and of the Blessed One), etc. Yassāti (Of whom): of the sick person. Upajjhāyādayoti (Preceptors, etc.): Here, with the word ādi (etc.), he includes five persons: the teacher, the student dwelling with him, the pupil, one of the same preceptor, and one of the same teacher. The connection is "or he may be one who lives alone." Saṅghattheropīti (Even an elder of the Sangha): the word pi shows that it is after others.

366.Abhikkamantaṃ vāti ettha abhimukhaṃ kamatīti abhikkamantoti vutte vaḍḍhanatthoti āha ‘‘vaḍḍhantaṃ vā’’ti. Ābādhaṃ nāvikarotīti sambandho. Iminā antapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Idaṃ nāma bhojananti sambandho.Saṃvidhātunti ettha saṃvipubbo dhādhātu karadhātvattho, karadhātu ca sabbadhātvattho, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhesajjaṃ yojetu’’nti.Assāti gilānupaṭṭhākassa. Antarasaddassa majjhatthādayo paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘kāraṇaṃ vuccatī’’ti.

366.Abhikkamantaṃ vāti (Or approaching): Here, when it is said that abhimukhaṃ kamatīti abhikkamanto (he goes face to face, thus approaching), he says "vaḍḍhantaṃ vā" (or increasing), because it has the meaning of increasing. The connection is "He does not make the illness worse." With this, he shows the nature of the anta suffix. The connection is "This is called food." Saṃvidhātunti (To arrange): Here, the dhā root with the prefix saṃvi has the meaning of the root kara, and the root kara has the meaning of all roots; therefore it is said, "bhesajjaṃ yojetu" (to prepare medicine). Assāti (To him): to the attendant of the sick person. Rejecting the meaning of "middle," etc., of the word antara, he says, "kāraṇaṃ vuccatī" (the reason is stated).

225. Matasantakakathā
225. Account of the Property of One Who Has Died

367.Kālaṅkateti ettha karaṇaṃ katanti dassento āha ‘‘kālakiriyāyā’’ti.Apaloketvāti ‘‘itthannāmo bhante bhikkhu kālaṅkato, tassa ticīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṃ dātuṃ saṅghaṃ apalokemī’’ti apaloketvā.

367.Kālaṅkateti (Of one who has passed away): Here, showing that karaṇaṃ kataṃ (the doing has been done), he says, "kālakiriyāyā" (by death). Apaloketvāti (Having asked permission): having asked permission by saying "itthannāmo bhante bhikkhu kālaṅkato, tassa ticīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṃ dātuṃ saṅghaṃ apalokemī" (Venerable Sir, so-and-so has passed away, I ask permission from the Saṅgha to give his three robes and bowl to the attendants of the sick).

369.Gilānupaṭṭhākalābheti gilānupaṭṭhākānaṃ labhitabbe.

369.Gilānupaṭṭhākalābheti (In the gain of the attendants of the sick): should be obtained by the attendants of the sick.

Tatthāti tasmiṃ kālaṅkate. Kiṃ vadanti? ‘‘Sabbepi…pe… sāmino’’ti vadantīti yojanā. Dvīsu vādesu pacchimavādo aṭṭhakathācariyena ruccatīti vadanti.Yanti yaṃ vatthu. ‘‘Yaṃ atthi, taṃ dātabba’’nti vuttamevatthaṃ āvikaronto āha ‘‘aññasmiṃ…pe… dātabba’’nti.Tanti parikkhāraṃ.

Tatthāti (There): in that one who has passed away. "What do they say? 'Everything belongs to the…pe…owner,'" they say, is the construction. They say that the latter statement in the two statements is favored by the commentary master. Yanti (Which): whichever thing. Revealing the same meaning that was said, "Yaṃ atthi, taṃ dātabba" (whatever there is, that should be given), he says, "aññasmiṃ…pe…dātabba" (it should be given to another). Tanti (That): that equipment.

Samakoti samaṃ pamāṇametassa bhāgassāti samako.Saṃvidahanamattamevāti idañcidañca karohīti sajjanamattameva.Jeṭṭhakabhāgoti diguṇabhāgo.

Samakoti (Equal): that portion for which the measure is equal is samako. Saṃvidahanamattamevāti (Merely preparation): merely preparing, saying "do this and do that." Jeṭṭhakabhāgoti (The greater portion): the double portion.

Yo panāti bhikkhu pana.Etthāti bahūsu bhikkhūsu.Yenāti yena kenaci, dinnaṃ paṭiyāditanti sambandho.Ekadivasampīti pisaddo pageva dvīhādiketi dasseti.Sopīti pisaddo na kevalaṃ bahudivasaṃ upaṭṭhākoyeva, atha kho sopīti dasseti.Samīpanti gilānassa santikaṃ.Āgacchatīti samīpamāgacchati.

Yo panāti: bhikkhu pana. Etthāti: among many bhikkhus. Yenāti: by whomever; the connection is, "dinnaṃ paṭiyāditaṃ" (given and prepared). Ekadivasampīti: the word "pi" shows that even two or more days are easily included. Sopīti: the word "pi" shows that it is not only the one who attends for many days, but also him. Samīpanti: near the sick person. Āgacchatīti: comes near.

Paccāsīsāyāti bhāgassa paccāsīsāya. ‘‘Puna āgantvā jaggissāmī’’ti iminā ‘‘puna āgantvā na jaggissāmī’’ti gacchantassa na dātabbanti dasseti.Dhuraṃ nikkhipitvāti upaṭṭhahane dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā.

Paccāsīsāyāti: in anticipation of a share. "Puna āgantvā jaggissāmī" (I will come again and look after him): by this, it is shown that it should not be given to one who leaves thinking, "I will not come again and look after him." Dhuraṃ nikkhipitvāti: having abandoned the duty of attendance.

Tassa bhikkhunoti kālaṅkatassa tassa bhikkhuno. Sacepi sahassaṃ agghati, gilānupaṭṭhākānaṃyeva dātabbanti yojanā.Aññanti pattacīvarato aññaṃ.Teti gilānupaṭṭhākā.Avasesanti pattacīvarato avasesaṃ.Tatoti bahukamahagghato.Ticīvaraparikkhāroti tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ parivāro.Sabbañcetanti sabbameva etaṃ parikkhāraṃ.Labhatīti gilānupaṭṭhāko labhati.

Tassa bhikkhunoti: of that bhikkhu who has passed away. Even if it is worth a thousand, the interpretation is that it should be given to the sick-attendants only. Aññanti: other than bowl and robes. Teti: the sick-attendants. Avasesanti: the remainder other than the bowl and robes. Tatoti: from the large and valuable items. Ticīvaraparikkhāroti: the set of three robes. Sabbañcetanti: all of this set. Labhatīti: the sick-attendant receives.

Soti kālaṅkato.Kassacīti gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā.Tassevāti dinnagāhakasseva.Ruciyā evāti kāmā eva.Tattha tattha saṅghassevāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vihāre ṭhitassa saṅghasseva. Idaṃ vihāre ṭhapitaparikkhāre sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sace gāme vā araññe vā ṭhapitā honti, sakalova saṅgho issaro. Kasmā? Saṅghasseva dāyajjabhāvato.Bahūnampīti tīhi paṭṭhāya bahūnampi. Īdisavacanaṃ upanidhāya sāsanepi eko dve bahūti tīṇi vacanāni atthe dissanti, sadde pana dvivacanabahuvacanānaṃ visesābhāvato dvivacanaṃ natthīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Adinnamevāti attanoyeva asantakattā, aññesampi sādhāraṇattā ca adinnameva. Sace sabbe matā anumatiyā denti, sudinnameva.Tanti santakaṃ.Tesūti tesu sabbesu.

Soti: the deceased. Kassacīti: to a householder or a renunciant. Tassevāti: to the one who received the donation. Ruciyā evāti: just as he likes. Tattha tattha saṅghassevāti: to the Sangha residing in that particular monastery. This is said in reference to the requisites kept in the monastery. If they are kept in a village or in the wilderness, the entire Sangha has authority. Why? Because the Sangha is the heir. Bahūnampīti: even to many, starting from three. By implying such a statement, even in the Dispensation, the three terms—one, two, and many—are seen in meaning, but in grammar, since there is no distinction between the dual and plural, the dual is not considered. Adinnamevāti: because it is not owned by oneself, and also because it is common to others, it is indeed not given. If all the dead give their consent, it is indeed well-given. Tanti: owned. Tesūti: among all of them.

227. Kusacīrādipaṭikkhepakathā
227. Rejection of Garments Made of Kusa Grass, Etc.

371.‘‘Akkanāḷamaya’’nti iminā akkanāḷena nibbattaṃakkanāḷanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Makacimayoti ettha makacisaddenapotthakasaddassa ganthādayo atthe nivatteti. Mayasaddena purimanayeneva nibbattataddhitaṃ dasseti.Sesānīti akkanāḷapotthakehi sesāni kusacīrādīni.Tesūti kusacīrādīsu.

371.Akkanāḷamaya’’nti: by this, the meaning of the word "akkanāḷa" which is made of akkanāla reed is shown. Makacimayoti: here, by the word "makaci", the meaning of the word "potthaka" is turned to mean books, etc. By the word "maya", in the same way as before, the nibbattataddhita (derivative suffix denoting "made of") is shown. Sesānīti: the remaining items other than akkanāla and potthaka, such as garments made of kusa grass, etc. Tesūti: in those garments made of kusa grass, etc.

372.Tipaṭṭacīvarassa vāti idaṃ dvipaṭṭacīvarassa majjhe dānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Tesanti sabbanīlakādīnaṃ.Kañcukanti vāraṇaṃ. Tañhi kaciyati kāye bandhiyatīti kañcukoti vuccati.Veṭhanepīti uṇhīsepi. Tañhi yasmā yena sīse veṭhiyati, tasmā veṭhananti vuccati.Rukkhachallimayanti ettha rukkhachallisaddenatirīṭasaddassa vakkalatthaṃ dasseti. Vakkalañhi nivasanānaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ tirobhāvaṃ paṭicchannabhāvaṃ eti gacchati anenāti vā rukkhaṃ tiropaṭicchannaṃ hutvā eti pavattatīti vātirīṭanti vuccati. Abhidhāne (abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ 442 gāthāyaṃ) panatarīṭanti takāre ikāravirahito pāṭho atthi.Pādapuñjananti pādo pujiyati sodhiyati anenāti pādapuñjanaṃ, tālujo tatiyakkharo.

372.Tipaṭṭacīvarassa vāti: this is said referring to giving in the midst of a double-layered robe. Tesanti: of all the dark blue etc. Kañcukanti: a covering. For it is called kañcuka because it is constricted, tied to the body. Veṭhanepīti: even a turban. For since it is what is wrapped around the head, it is therefore called veṭhana. Rukkhachallimayanti: here, by the word rukkhachalli, the meaning of the word "tirīṭa" is shown to mean bark. For vakkala (bark) is called "tirīṭa" because it goes to the state of covering up, concealing the limbs and sub-limbs of dwellings, or because it comes and persists having concealed the tree. In the Abhidhānappadīpikā (Abhidhānappadīpikā, verse 442), however, there is a reading "tarīṭa" without the ikāra in the takāra. Pādapuñjananti: pādapuñjanaṃ because the foot is wiped and cleaned with it; tāluja (palatal) is the third letter.

374.Sante patirūpake gāhaketi ettha patirūpako nāma pakkamantassa bhikkhuno sandiṭṭhasambhatto. Iminā patirūpake gāhake asati adatvā saṅghena bhājite subhājitamevāti dasseti.Satta janāti pakkamantaummattakakhittacittavedanaṭṭā cattāro, ukkhittakā tayoti satta janā.

374.Sante patirūpake gāhaketi: here, patirūpaka means an acquaintance who is seen and familiar to the bhikkhu who is departing. By this, it is shown that if there is no suitable recipient, it is well-divided only when divided by the Sangha, not given away. Satta janāti: the four—departing, insane, of deranged mind, and suffering from pain, and the three—those who are suspended. Thus, there are seven people.

230. Saṅghe bhinne cīvaruppādakathā
230. Arising of Robes When the Sangha is Divided

376.Saṅgho bhijjatīti ettha dvikoṭṭhāsavasena bhijjanamevādhippetaṃ, na aññanti āha ‘‘dve koṭṭhāsā’’ti. Ekasmiṃ pakkhe cīvarāni dentīti yojanā. Dvipakkhaṃ sandhāya‘‘sakalassa saṅghassā’’ti vuttaṃ.Etanti cīvaraṃ.Tasseva cīvaranti tassa koṭṭhāsassa cīvarameva.Yatthāti yasmiṃ dese.Dakkhiṇodakaṃ pamāṇanti dakkhiṇodakameva pamāṇaṃ, na deyyadhammo. Tasmā dakkhiṇodakaṃ paṭiggaṇhantā, deyyadhammassa sāmino hontīti adhippāyo. Ubhohipi pakkhehīti yojanā.Parasamuddeti jambudīpe. So hi sīhaḷadīpato samuddassa pārattā parasamuddoti vuccati.Itaro pakkhoti dakkhiṇodakassa ca cīvarassa ca laddhapakkhato itaro aladdho pakkho.

376.Saṅgho bhijjatīti: here, only the division into two factions is intended, not anything else, he says "dve koṭṭhāsā." (two factions). The meaning is that robes are given in one faction. Referring to the two factions, ‘‘sakalassa saṅghassā’’ti (to the entire Sangha) is said. Etanti: this robe. Tasseva cīvaranti: it is the robe of that faction only. Yatthāti: in whatever place. Dakkhiṇodakaṃ pamāṇanti: only the dakkhiṇodaka is the standard, not the deyyadhamma. Therefore, the meaning is that those who accept the dakkhiṇodaka become the owners of the deyyadhamma. By both factions is the connection. Parasamuddeti: in Jambudīpa. For since it is across the ocean from the island of Sri Lanka, it is called parasamudda (across the ocean). Itaro pakkhoti: the other faction which has not received the dakkhiṇodaka and robe from the faction that has received it.

232. Aṭṭhacīvaramātikākathā
232. The Eight Robe-Topic Stories

379.Idāni āhāti sambandho.Puggalādhiṭṭhānanayenāti ‘‘sīmāya detī’’ti kattuvācakena kiriyāpadena dāyakapuggalasaṅkhātakattuno adhiṭṭhānavasena vuttattā puggalādhiṭṭhānena nayena.Etthāti etāsu aṭṭhasu mātikāsu. Aṭṭhamā mātikāti yojanā.Tatthāti aṭṭhasu mātikāsu.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘katikāya detī’’tiādīsu.

379.Now, there is a connection to what is being said. Puggalādhiṭṭhānanayenāti: because it is said in terms of the individual's basis, with the active voice verb "sīmāya detī" (he gives within the boundary), denoting the agent, which is the giving individual. Etthāti: in these eight topic stories. The connection is to the eighth topic story. Tatthāti: in the eight topic stories. Sabbatthāti: in all cases such as "katikāya detī" (he gives by agreement).

Sīmāya…pe… bhājetabbantiādimhi mātikāniddese pana evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Sīmāya detīti ettha pannarasa sīmā veditabbāti sambandho.

However, in the statement of the topic story beginning with Sīmāya…pe… bhājetabbanti, such a judgment should be understood. Sīmāya detīti: here, fifteen sīmā (boundaries) should be understood. The connection is with the fifteen sīmā.

Tatthāti pannarasasu sīmāsu. Upacārasīmā paricchinnā hotīti sambandho. Ettakaṃ ṭhānanti parikkhepārahaṭṭhānassa ekantena avuttattā ekantena parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ dassento āha‘‘apicā’’tiādi. Dhuvasannipātato vā khipitānanti sambandho. ‘‘Pariyante’’ti padaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ. Tasmā tīsu nissakkapadesu yojetabbaṃ.Sā panāti upacārasīmā pana. Bhikkhūsu vaḍḍhantesu āvāsopi vaḍḍhatīti manasikatvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhūsu vaḍḍhantesū’’ti. Sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnanti sambandho.Vuttamevāti sīmakathāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 138, 144) vuttameva.

Tatthāti: in those fifteen sīmā. The connection is that the upacārasīmā (approach boundary) is defined. Since the extent of the place, the area suitable for enclosure, is not stated definitively, he says ‘‘apicā’’tiādi (moreover), showing the area definitively suitable for enclosure. The connection is that it is thrown from a fixed gathering or tossed. The word "pariyante" (around) is relative to what precedes and follows. Therefore, it should be connected in the three nissakkapadesa (unobstructed places). Sā panāti: that upacārasīmā however. Having in mind that the dwelling also expands as the bhikkhus increase, he says ‘‘bhikkhūsu vaḍḍhantesū’’ti (as the bhikkhus increase). The connection is to all the bhikkhus. Vuttamevāti: it is said in the Sīmākathā (Mahāva. Aṭṭha. 138, 144).

Apica khoti ettha apisaddo pucchatthavācako. Kehi ṭhapitāti hi attho. Rājarājamahāmattā ṭhapentīti sambandho.Lābhasīmāti lābhassa mariyādo.Yanti yo lābho.Etthantareti etasmiṃ gāvutādiantare.Lābhasīmā nāmāti lābhena paricchinnā sīmā nāma.Tatthāti bahūsu janapadesu.Antaradīpā cāti mahādīpato aññadīpā ca, khuddakadīpāti adhippāyo.

Apica khoti: here, the word api has the sense of a question. For the meaning is, "By whom is it established?" The connection is that kings and great ministers establish it. Lābhasīmāti: the limit of gain. Yanti: whichever gain. Etthantareti: within this interval of a gāvuta, etc. Lābhasīmā nāmāti: a boundary defined by gain is called. Tatthāti: in many countries. Antaradīpā cāti: and islands other than the main island, meaning small islands.

Ettheva sīmāyāti khaṇḍasīmāya eva.Tesaṃyevāti khaṇḍasīmagatānaṃyeva. Evatthaphalaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aññesa’’ntiādi. Rukkhe vā pabbate vā ṭhitassa vā heṭṭhā pathavīmajjhagatassa vā bhikkhussāti yojanā. Imissā upacārasīmāya ṭhitassāti sambandho.Samānasaṃvāsasīmāyāti mahāsīmāya.Khaṇḍasīmasīmantarikāsūti khaṇḍasīmāyañca dvinnaṃ sīmānaṃ sīmantarikāyañca. Tattha dvinnaṃ gāmaṭṭhānampi pāpuṇāti. Avippavāsasīmāya dinnaṃ gāmaṭṭhānaṃ na pāpuṇāti ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’ti vuttattā.

Ettheva sīmāyāti: only in the khaṇḍasīmā (limited boundary). Tesaṃyevāti: only of those within the khaṇḍasīmā. Showing the result of emphasizing "eva," he says "aññesaṃ" (to others), etc. The connection is to a bhikkhu who is standing on a tree or a mountain, or in the middle of the earth below. The connection is that he is standing within this upacārasīmā. Samānasaṃvāsasīmāyāti: in the mahāsīmā (great boundary). Khaṇḍasīmasīmantarikāsūti: in the khaṇḍasīmā and in the sīmantarikā (intermediate space) between two sīmā. There, it extends to the dwelling place of two villages. A dwelling place given within the avippavāsasīmā (boundary of non-separation) does not extend because it is said "except for the village and the vicinity of the village."

jambudīpo. Tambo lohito pāṇi hattho etesantitambapāṇino. Vijayakumārādayo sattasatā janā. Tesaṃ nivāsotambapaṇṇi,soyeva dīpotitambapaṇṇidīpo,tasmiṃ. Sabbesaṃ bhāganti sambandho.Tatrevāti jambudīpeyeva.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.

jambudīpo. Tambo lohito pāṇi hattho etesanti tambapāṇino (copper-handed): those whose hands are red or copper-colored. Vijayakumāra and the other seven hundred people. Their residence is tambapaṇṇi (copper-colored hands). That very island is tambapaṇṇidīpo (island of tambapaṇṇi), in that. The connection is that it is a share for all. Tatrevāti: only in Jambudīpa. Evantiādi: this is the conclusion.

Tatoti kathanato, paranti sambandho.Nanti mahāsivattheraṃ.Tiyojanāpīti pisaddo tato ūnāpi hotīti dasseti.Sabbaṃpetanti sabbaṃpi etaṃ lābhagaṇhanādiṃ. Iti āhaṃsūti yojanā.

Tatoti: than the statement, the connection is to paraṃ (further). Nanti: not to Mahāsiva Thera. Tiyojanāpīti: the word "pi" shows that it can be less than that. Sabbaṃpetanti: all this also, taking of gain, etc. Iti āhaṃsūti: thus they said, is the connection.

Tatrāti ‘‘katikāya detī’’ti pāṭhe. Sannipatitehi bhikkhūhi bhājetabbanti sambandho.Tassāti vihārassa.Buddhādhivutthoti buddhena adhi issaravasena vasiyitthāti buddhādhivuttho.Ettāvatāti ettakena sāvanamattena.Nisinnovāti nisinno eva hoti, nisinno iva vā.Tasmiṃ vihārepīti tasmiṃ porāṇakādivihārepi.Evamevāti ‘‘ayaṃ porāṇako vihāro tena navavihārena saddhiṃ samānalābhaṃ kātuṃ saṅghassa ruccatī’’tiādinā evameva.Idhāti porāṇakavihāre.Tasminti navavihāre.Evanti yathā ekena vihārena saddhiṃ eko vihāro kātabbo, evaṃ tathāti attho.

Tatrāti: in the reading "katikāya detī" (he gives by agreement). The connection is that it should be divided by the assembled bhikkhus. Tassāti: of that monastery. Buddhādhivutthoti: buddhādhivuttho because it was dwelt upon by the Buddha in an authoritative manner. Ettāvatāti: by just this much recitation. Nisinnovāti: he is indeed seated, or as if seated. Tasmiṃ vihārepīti: even in that ancient monastery, etc. Evamevāti: just as it is with "ayaṃ porāṇako vihāro tena navavihārena saddhiṃ samānalābhaṃ kātuṃ saṅghassa ruccatī" (this ancient monastery is agreeable to the Sangha to have equal gain with that new monastery), etc. Idhāti: in the ancient monastery. Tasminti: in the new monastery. Evanti: just as one monastery is to be treated with one monastery, so it is there, is the meaning.

Bhikkhāpaññattiyāti ettha bhikkhā paññapiyati niccavasena ṭhapiyati etthāti bhikkhāpaññattīti dassento āha ‘‘attano pariccāgapaññāpanaṭṭhāne’’ti.Tassāti ‘‘yattha saṅghassa dhuvakārā kariyantī’’tipāṭhassa. Attho evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Yattha vāti yasmiṃ vā ṭhāne.Anenāti cīvaradāyakena. Salākabhattādīni vā nibaddhāni kāritānīti sambandho.Yena panāti cīvaradāyakena pana.Sakalopi vihāroti sakalopi saārāmo vihāro.Tatthāti cīvaradāyake.Imeti pākavattassa vattanaṭṭhānādayo vihārā. Dhuvena kariyantītidhuvakārāvihārā.Soti cīvaradāyako.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne.Sabbatthāti sabbesu bahūsu vihāresu.

Bhikkhāpaññattiyāti: here, showing that bhikkhāpaññattī means "where alms are designated and permanently established," he says "attano pariccāgapaññāpanaṭṭhāne" (in the place for designating one's own donation). Tassāti: of the reading "yattha saṅghassa dhuvakārā kariyantī" (where fixed provisions are made for the Sangha). The meaning should be understood thus. Yattha vāti: or in whatever place. Anenāti: by the robe-giver. The connection is that regular alms such as ticket-meals were made to be carried out. Yena panāti: by whichever robe-giver. Sakalopi vihāroti: the entire monastery together with its park. Tatthāti: in the robe-giver. Imeti: these monasteries where food is cooked and where monks reside, etc. Vihārās where fixed things are done are called dhuvakārā vihārā. Soti: that robe-giver. Yatthāti: in whatever place. Sabbatthāti: in all the many monasteries.

Tehīti bahutarehi bhikkhūhi.Dhuvakāresūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Ekatthāti ekasmiṃ dhuvakāre. ‘‘Sace bhikkhugaṇanāya gaṇhathāti vadatī’’ti iminā sace na vadati, bhikkhugaṇanāya bhājetvā gaṇhituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti, vihāragaṇanāya gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.Tathāti yathā ‘‘bhikkhugaṇanāya gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, tathāti attho.Etthāti bhājetabbavatthūsu.Tanti mañcapīṭhakaṃ, pucchitvā dātabbanti sambandho.Pucchitvāti dāyakaṃ pucchitvā,vadatīti dāyako vadati.Saṅghassāpīti pisaddo na dāyakassevāti dasseti.

Tehīti: by many bhikkhus. Dhuvakāresūti: the locative in the sense of determination. Ekatthāti: in one fixed provision. By "sace bhikkhugaṇanāya gaṇhathāti vadatī" (if he says, "count by the number of bhikkhus"), it is shown that if he does not say, it is not proper to take and count by dividing by the number of bhikkhus, but it is proper to count by the number of monasteries. Tathāti: just as he says "bhikkhugaṇanāya gaṇhathā" (count by the number of bhikkhus), so it is, is the meaning. Etthāti: in the things to be divided. Tanti: that couch or chair, the connection is that it should be given after asking. Pucchitvāti: after asking the giver, vadatīti: the giver says. Saṅghassāpīti: the word "pi" shows that it is not only for the giver.

Sīmaṭṭhassāti upacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhitassa.Asampattassāpīti bhājanaṭṭhānaṃ asampattassāpi.Alasajātikāti kosajjajātikā.Ṭhitikāti pabandhavasena ṭhiyateṭhiti,sāyevaṭhitikā. Atha vā ‘‘ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dātabba’’nti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379) vuttattā tiṭṭhati pabandhavasena etthātiṭhiti,sāyevaṭhitikāti vacanattho kātabbo.Ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvāti vīsativassasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvā.Tesanti therānaṃ.

Sīmaṭṭhassāti: to one who is standing in the upacārasīmā. Asampattassāpīti: even to one who has not arrived at the place of distribution. Alasajātikāti: of lazy nature. Ṭhitikāti: ṭhiti is what is established in a continuous manner, that is ṭhitikā. Or else, since it is said in the commentary "ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dātabba" (it should be given starting from the established place) (Mahāva. Aṭṭha. 379), the meaning of the word should be made as ṭhiti because it stands in a continuous manner; that is ṭhitikā. Ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvāti: having set aside the ṭhitika which is counted as twenty years. Tesanti: of the elders.

Sampattasampattānanti bhājanaṭṭhānaṃ sampattasampattānaṃ. Attano vihāradvāre vā attano antovihāreyeva vāti yojanā.Sīmāti upacārasīmā. Therāsanaṃ ārūḷhe satīti yojanā.Vassaggenāti vassagaṇanāya.

Sampattasampattānanti: to those who have arrived, who have arrived at the place of distribution. The connection is, "at the door of one's own monastery or in one's own inner monastery." Sīmāti: the upacārasīmā. The connection is that when one has ascended the elder's seat. Vassaggenāti: by the counting of years.

Pāṭekkanti paccekaṃ. Sabbāneva cīvarānīti sambandho. Dubbhāsitaduggahitānamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gatagataṭṭhāne saṅghikāneva hontī’’ti.Ekanti dasasu vatthesu ekaṃ.

Pāṭekkanti: individually. The connection is with all the robes. Showing the meaning of what is badly spoken and badly grasped, he says "gatagataṭṭhāne saṅghikāneva hontī" (they are only Saṅghika in the places they have gone). Ekanti: one out of ten cloths.

Tenāti pupphavalinā.Ekaṃ tantanti ekaṃ suttaṃ.Tatthāti tesu ṭhitikāya ṭhānāṭṭhānesu. Dvīhipi gahetabbaṃ ṭhitikāya abhāvato.

Tenāti: by the flower garland. Ekaṃ tantanti: one thread. Tatthāti: in those places of ṭhitikā, places and non-places. It should be taken by both, since there is no ṭhitikā.

Paṃsukūlikānampi vaṭṭatīti ‘‘saṅghassa demā’’ti vā ‘‘tuyhaṃ demā’’ti vā avatvā ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ dema, therānaṃ demā’’ti vuttattā paṃsukūlikānampi vaṭṭati. Bhikkhutherā nāma hi na attanāyeva honti, aññepi bahū, tasmā vaṭṭati. ‘‘Saṅghassā’’ti vutte attanā ekantena saṅghoyeva, tasmā ‘‘saṅghassā’’ti vuttepi na vaṭṭati, pageva ‘‘tuyha’’nti vutte.

Paṃsukūlikānampi vaṭṭatīti: because it is said, "dema to the bhikkhus, dema to the elders," without saying "dema to the Sangha" or "dema to you," it is fitting even for paṃsukūlikas. For bhikkhu elders are not only themselves, but there are also many others, therefore it is fitting. If it is said "to the Sangha," it is exclusively the Sangha itself, therefore even if it is said "to the Sangha," it is not fitting, what to say of when it is said "to you."

Tatoti bahuvatthato.Gahetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti paṃsukūlikānaṃ gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati.

Tatoti: than the many cloths. Gahetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti: it is not fitting for paṃsukūlikas to take.

Yanti vatthaṃ.Tatthāti parikkhāresu.Suttanti tantaṃ.

Yanti: whichever cloth. Tatthāti: in the requisites. Suttanti: thread.

Ekabaddhā cāti dvādasahatthamanatikkamitvā ekatobaddhā ca.Ye panāti bhikkhū pana.

Ekabaddhā cāti: and tied together in one place, without exceeding twelve handspans. Ye panāti: whichever bhikkhus.

Ubhatosaṅghassa detīti ettha catunnaṃ vākyānaṃ vasena vuttepi ubhatosaṅghassa detiyeva nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘ubhatosaṅghassa dammīti vuttepī’’tiādi.Ubhatosaṅghaggahaṇena gahitattāti puggalassa ubhatosaṅghaggahaṇena gahitattā. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā ekavīsatipaṭivīse katvā eko cetiyassa dātabboti nayaṃ atidisati.Pāpuṇanakoṭṭhāsonāma natthi cetiyassa ubhatosaṅghaggahaṇena agahitattā.

Ubhatosaṅghassa detīti: Although it is said in terms of four sentences here, it is still called "deti ubhatosaṅghassa," showing that he says, "Even when one says, 'I give to both Saṅghas' " etc. Ubhatosaṅghaggahaṇena gahitattā: Because the individual is included by the taking of both Saṅghas. "Eseva nayo": with this he extends the principle that one should make twenty-one portions and give one to a Cetiya. There is no pāpuṇanakoṭṭhāso (portion to be received) for a Cetiya because it is not included by the taking of both Saṅghas.

Tatthāti ubhatosaṅghapuggalacetiyesu. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Tatthā: There, in regard to the two Saṅghas, individuals and Cetiyas. The rest is very easy to understand.

Pubbeti buddhassa bhagavato dharamānakāle.Tadāti yadā buddho bhagavā dharati, tadā.Paṭimaṃ vāti paṭibimbaṃ vā. Tañhi bhagavatā paṭi sadisaṃ mānīyatīti paṭimāti vuccati.Cetiyaṃ vāti thūpaṃ vā. So hi devamanussehi cititabbaṃ, pūjetabbaṃ, iṭṭhakādīhi vā cinitabbanti cetiyanti vuccati.Tatthāti deyyadhammesu.Yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ. Yaṃ dentīti yojanā.Tatthāti tasmiṃ dāne. Aniyamavācakassa ‘‘yo’’ti sabbanāmassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pabbajito vā gahaṭṭho vā’’ti.Vattaṃ katvā paribhuñjitunti pubbakālaaparakālakiriyānaṃ vikāravasena aniyatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhuñjitvā pacchāpi vattaṃ kātu’’nti.

Pubbe: Formerly, during the lifetime of the Blessed Buddha. Tadā: Then, when the Blessed Buddha was living. Paṭimaṃ vā: Or an image. For that is regarded as similar to the Blessed One, hence it is called paṭimā (image). Cetiyaṃ vā: Or a thūpa. For that should be constructed, venerated, or built with bricks etc. by gods and humans, hence it is called Cetiya. Tatthā: In those things to be offered. Yaṃ: This is a reference to the action. The connection is "yaṃ denti" (whatever they give). Tatthā: In that giving. Showing the meaning of the pronoun "yo" which is indefinite, he says, "pabbajito vā gahaṭṭho vā" (whether ordained or a householder). Vattaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ: Because the earlier and later actions are indefinite due to change, it is said "bhuñjitvā pacchāpi vattaṃ kātuṃ" (to perform the duty after eating).

Gacchatoti anādare sāmivacanaṃ.Tanti saṅghassa āhaṭabhattaṃ.

Gacchato: Is a respectful expression of ownership. Taṃ: That food brought for the Saṅgha.

Vassaṃvutthasaṅghassāti vassaṃ vasitthāti vassaṃvuttho. Aluttakitantasamāsoyaṃ, soyeva saṅgho vassaṃvutthasaṅgho, tassa.Yāvatikasaddo yattakapariyāyoti āha ‘‘yattakā’’ti.Disāpakkantassāpīti aññaṃ disaṃ pakkantassapi, dātabbanti sambandho.Vadantīti aṭṭhakathācariyehi apare ācariyā vadanti.Etanti vacanaṃ.

Vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa: "Vassaṃ vuttho" means one who has resided during the rains. This is a karmadhāraya compound with elided case endings, that Saṅgha is the vassaṃvutthasaṅgho, to that one. The word "yāvatika" is a synonym for "yattaka," so he says "yattakā." Disāpakkantassāpi: Even to one who has departed to another direction; it is to be given, is the connection. Vadanti: The commentary-ācariyas and other ācariyas say. Etaṃ: This statement.

Sampattānanti dinnaṭṭhānaṃ sampattānaṃ.Sabbesanti yattha katthaci vutthavassānaṃ sabbesaṃ.Tatrāti vihāre.Tatrāti tasmiṃ vadane sati, tesu bhikkhūsu vā. Vassaṃ vasantītivassaṃvasantā,tesaṃ.Cīvaramāseti cīvarena lakkhite pacchimakattikamāse.

Sampattānaṃ: To those who have arrived at the place where it is given. Sabbesaṃ: To all who have resided during the rains wherever. Tatrā: In the monastery. Tatrā: When that statement is made, or among those bhikkhus. Vassaṃ vasantīti vassaṃvasantā: Those who dwell during the rains are vassaṃvasantā, to those. Cīvaramāse: In the last Kattika month, which is marked by robes.

Hemantassa pacchimo divasoti phagguṇapuṇṇamīsaṅkhāto hemantassa pacchimo divaso.Vassāvāsikanti vassaṃ āvasantānaṃ dātabbaṃ cīvaraṃ. Āropetabbākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘atītavassāvāsassā’’tiādi. Tatthaatītavassāvāsassāti atītavassaṃ, atītavasse vā āvāsassa saṅghassa.Tanti cīvaraṃ.

Hemantassa pacchimo divaso: The last day of winter, which is known as the Phagguṇa full moon. Vassāvāsikaṃ: Robes to be given to those dwelling during the rains. Showing the way to bestow it, he says, "atītavassāvāsassa" etc. There, atītavassāvāsassa: to the Saṅgha of the dwelling of the past rains, or in the past rains. Taṃ: That robe.

Ṭhapetvāti vihāre ṭhapetvā.Sampattānanti imaṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattānaṃ.Itoti cīvaradānakālato.Teti antovasse vutthabhikkhū.

Ṭhapetvā: Having placed it in the monastery. Sampattānaṃ: To those who have arrived at this place. Ito: From this time of giving robes. Te: Those bhikkhus who dwelt during the rains.

Ādissāti padassa tvāpaccayantabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ādisitvā’’ti. Ayamattho veditabboti yojanā.Tatrāti ‘‘yāguyā vā’’tiādipāṭhe.Ajjatanāya vāti ajja bhavānaṃ puññānaṃ atthāya vā.Tesanti nimantakānaṃ, paviṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnanti sambandho.Yehi nimantitehīti nimantitehi yehi bhikkhūhi. Yesaṃ vā pattanti sambandho.Tesaṃ na pāpuṇātīti sabbesaṃ tesaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kasmā? Animantitattā.Tesaṃ na pāpuṇanti,kasmā? Nimantitagehaṃ apaviṭṭhattā.Soti dāyako.

Ādissā: Showing that the word is an absolutive, he says, "ādisitvā" (having instructed). This is the meaning to be understood, is the connection. Tatrā: In the reading "yāguyā vā" etc. Ajjatanāya vā: Or for the sake of your merits today. Tesaṃ: It is connected to the inviters, the bhikkhus who have entered. Yehi nimantitehī: By which invited bhikkhus. Or it is connected to "yesaṃ patti" (whose share). Tesaṃ na pāpuṇāti: It does not reach all of them; why? Because they were not invited. Tesaṃ na pāpuṇanti: Why? Because they did not enter the house of the invitation. So: That donor.

Pubbepīti ito pubbepi.Assāti dāyakassa.Vāsetvāti vāsāpetvā.Soti dāyako.Yoti bhikkhu, vasatīti sambandho.Tānīti bhesajjāni.Idanti cīvaraṃ.

Pubbepī: Even before this. Assā: Of the donor. Vāsetvā: Having had them dwell. So: That donor. Yo: That bhikkhu; it is connected to "vasati" (dwells). Tānī: Those medicines. Idaṃ: This robe.

Uddesaṃ gahetuṃ āgato ca gahetvā gacchanto cāti ime ante avasanasīlāpi rūḷhīvasenaantevāsikānāma. Iminā nissayaṃ gahetuṃ āgato ca therassa santike nissayaṃ gahitapubbo caantevāsikonāmāti dasseti. Vattaṃ katvā uddesaparipucchādīni gahetvā vicarantānaṃ sabbesaṃ uddesantevāsikānaṃ pāpuṇātīti yojanā. Iminā saddhivihārikanissayantevāsikaupasampadantevāsikapabbajjantevāsikāpi gahetabbā tesampi nibaddhacārikabhikkhubhāvato.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ cīvarakkhandhake.

Uddesaṃ gahetuṃ āgato ca gahetvā gacchanto ca: These who are constantly at the edge, by way of convention, are called antevāsikā (resident pupils). With this he shows that one who has come to take dependence, and one who has formerly taken dependence with the Thera, is called antevāsiko. It reaches all the uddesantevāsikas who wander about having performed their duties, having taken the uddesa and paripucchā etc. With this, the saddhivihārika, nissayantevāsika, upasampadāantevāsika, and pabbajjāantevāsika should also be included, because they are regularly wandering bhikkhus. Sabbattha: In the entire robe chapter.

Iti cīvarakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the Robe Chapter.

9. Campeyyakkhandhakaṃ

9. Campeyyakkhandhakaṃ

234. Kassapagottabhikkhuvatthukathā
234. Kassapagottabhikkhuvatthukathā

380.Campeyyakkhandhakegaggarāya pokkharaṇiyāti ettha gaggarasaddassa nāmasaddabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gaggaranāmikāya itthiyā’’ti. Iminā gaggarasaddo gaggaraiti nāmaṃ pavattinimittaṃ katvā itthidabbaṃ vadatīti dasseti.Tantipaṭibaddhoti tantiyā paṭibaddho. ‘‘Ussukkampi akāsi yāguyā’’tiādīsu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Tassa bhikkhunoti kassapagottanāmakassa tassa bhikkhuno.Tatthevāti vāsabhagāmeyeva.

380.In the Campeyyakkhandhaka, gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā: Showing that the word "gaggarā" is a name, he says, "of a woman named Gaggarā." With this, he shows that the word "gaggarā" speaks of the substance of a woman, having made "Gaggarā" the occasion for the occurrence of the name. Tantipaṭibaddho: Bound by a thread. In "Ussukkampi akāsi yāguyā" etc., the judgment should be understood in this way, is the connection. Tassa bhikkhuno: Of that bhikkhu named Kassapagotta. Tattheva: In Vāsabhagāma itself.

382.Adhammena vaggakammaṃ karontītiādīnaṃ nānākaraṇanti sambandho.

382.The connection is "nānākaraṇanti" (is the differentiation) of those who perform vaggakamma with unrighteousness etc.

236. Ñattivipannakammādikathā
236. Ñattivipannakammādikathā

385.Aññatrāpi dhammāti etthadhammāti upayogatthe nissakkavacanametanti āha ‘‘aññatra dhamma’’nti. ‘‘Aññatrā’’ti nipātapayoge dutiyātatiyāpañcamīsu aññatarassa sambhavato upayogavacanampi hoti. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ayameva vā pāṭho’’ti. ‘‘Bhūtena vatthunā’’ti iminā dhammasaddassa saccatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā saddasabhāvameva sandhāya atidisati, na atthaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ettha panā’’tiādi.Satthusāsananti satthu āṇā.Satthuāṇānāma ñattianusāvanānaṃ sampadāti āha ‘‘ñattisampadā anusāvanasampadā cā’’ti. ‘‘Paṭikuṭṭhañceva katañcā’’ti imināpaṭikuṭṭhakatanti padassa dvandavākyaṃ dasseti. Paṭikusitabbantipaṭikuṭṭhaṃ,kattabbantikataṃ,kammaṃ. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ aññesū’’tiādi. Tatthayanti kammaṃ.

385.Aññatrāpi dhammā: There, dhammā is a word used in the sense of utility, so he says, "aññatra dhamma." Since, in the usage of the particle "aññatra," one of the second, third or fifth cases is possible, it is also a word used in the sense of utility. Therefore, it is said, "ayameva vā pāṭho" (or this is the reading itself). With "Bhūtena vatthunā," he shows the meaning of the word "dhamma" as truth. With "Eseva nayo," he extends it referring only to the nature of the word, not the meaning. Therefore, it is said, "ettha pana" etc. Satthusāsanaṃ: The command of the Teacher. Satthuāṇā means the perfection of the ñatti and anusāvanas, so he says, "ñattisampadā anusāvanasampadā ca." With "Paṭikuṭṭhañceva katañcā," he shows the dvandva phrase of the word paṭikuṭṭhakataṃ. What is censured is paṭikuṭṭhaṃ, what is done is kataṃ, the kamma. Showing that very meaning, he says, "yaṃ aññesu" etc. There, yaṃ means kamma.

387.Pāḷiyāti vinayapāḷiyā.Yanti kammaṃ, na kariyatīti sambandho.Etthāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ.So ca khoti so ca vitthāro, āgatoti sambandho. Kasmā ñattidutiyañatticatutthakammānameva vasena āgato, nanu ñattiapalokanakammavasenapi āgatena bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Ñattidutiyañatticatutthesu hāpanaṃ vā aññathā karaṇaṃ vā atthi viya ñattikamme natthīti yojanā. Ñattikamme ñattiṭṭhapanato aññakiccassa asambhavato hāpanaṃ vā aññathā karaṇaṃ vā natthīti adhippāyo.Tānīti ñattikammaapalokanakammāni.Sabbesampi kammānanti sabbesampi catunnaṃ kammānaṃ.Paratoti parasmiṃ parivārāvasāne (pari. aṭṭha. 482).

387.Pāḷiyā: By the Vinaya Pāḷi. Yaṃ: That kamma; it is connected to "na kariyati" (is not done). Etthā: In this commentary. So ca kho: And that expansion, it is connected to "āgato" (has come). Why has it come only in terms of ñattidutiyañatticatutthakamma, shouldn't it have come also in terms of ñattiapalokanakamma? He says, "yasmā pana" etc. It seems that in ñattidutiyañatticatuttha there is reduction or alteration, but there is not in ñattikamma, is the connection. In ñattikamma, since there is no other function than the establishing of the ñatti, there is no reduction or alteration, is the idea. Tānī: Those ñattikamma and apalokanakamma. Sabbesampi kammānaṃ: Of all four kammas. Parato: Beyond, at the end of the Parivāra (pari. aṭṭha. 482).

237. Catuvaggakaraṇādikathā
237. Catuvaggakaraṇādikathā

388.Yadidaṃ kammanti yojanā.Tesanti saṅghānaṃ.Kammappattoti ettha kammena, kammassa vā pattoti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘kammaṃ patto’’ti. ‘‘Sabbakammesu kammapatto’’ti pāḷinayena ‘‘kammesu patto’’ti atthopi yujjati. Lokavohāravasena ‘‘kammena kammassa vā patto’’ti atthopi yujjateva.

388.The connection is "Yadidaṃ kammaṃ" (whatever this kamma). Tesaṃ: Of those Saṅghas. Kammappatto: There, rejecting the meaning "patti kammena" (obtained by kamma), or "patti kammassa" (obtained by the kamma), he says, "kammaṃ patto" (has obtained the kamma). According to the Pāḷi statement "Sabbakammesu kammapatto," the meaning "patto kammesu" (obtained in the kammas) is also fitting. By way of worldly usage, the meaning "patto kammena" or "patto kammassa" is also indeed fitting.

389.Parisatoti parisakāraṇā.Tatthāti ‘‘catuvaggakaraṇañce bhikkhave’’tiādipāṭhe, catuvīsatipuggalesu vā.Kammanānāsaṃvāsakoti ukkhepanīyakammakato.Laddhinānāsaṃvāsakoti ukkhittānuvattako. ‘‘Hutvā’’ti iminā ‘‘bhikkhunīcatuttho’’tiādīsu catuvīsatiyā ṭhānesu kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Bhikkhunī catutthī etassāti bhikkhunīcatuttho, catuvaggo saṅghotiādinā vacanattho kātabbo.

389.Parisato: Because of the gathering. Tatrā: In the reading "catuvaggakaraṇañce bhikkhave" etc., or among the twenty-four individuals. Kammanānāsaṃvāsako: One who has been subjected to ukkhepanīyakamma. Laddhinānāsaṃvāsako: One who follows the one who has been suspended. With "Hutvā," he shows the state of being a special action in the twenty-four places, in "bhikkhunīcatuttho" etc. One who has a bhikkhunī as the fourth is a bhikkhunīcatuttho; the meaning of the word should be done by "catuvaggo saṅgho" etc.

393.Parivāsādītiādisaddena mūlāyakassanamānattaabbhānāni saṅgaṇhāti.Tesanti parivāsādikammānaṃ.Paratoti parasmiṃ cūḷavagge (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 75 ādayo).

393.Parivāsādī: With the word "ādī" he includes mūlāyapaṭikassanā, mānatta, and abbhāna. Tesaṃ: Of those parivāsa etc. kammas. Parato: Beyond, in the Cūḷavagga (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 75 ff.).

394.Paṭikuṭṭhakatakammassāti paṭikuṭṭhassa hutvā katassa kammassa.Pakatattassāti ettha pakatisīlasaṅkhāto attā sabhāvo etassāti pakatattoti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘avipannasīlassā’’ti. Saṅghādisesaṃ anāpajjantassāpi avipannasīlattā vuttaṃ ‘‘pārājikaṃ anajjhāpannassā’’ti. Iminā saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjantopi pakatattoyevāti dasseti. Sopi hi idha avipannasīlo nāma, aññattha pana saṅghādisesassa sīlavipattibhāvato taṃ āpajjantopi vipannasīloyeva nāma.Ānantarikassāti ettha anantarasaddassa sambandhañca ṇikapaccayassa atthañca dassento āha ‘‘attano anantaraṃ nisinnassā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘attano’’ti iminā anantarasaddassa sambandhaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Nisinnassā’’ti iminā ṇikapaccayassa atthaṃ dasseti.

394.Paṭikuṭṭhakatakammassā: Of the kamma that is censured and then done. Pakatattassā: There, showing the meaning that one whose own nature, whose natural state is pure, is a pakatatto, he says, "avipannasīlassā" (one whose morality is not corrupted). Because even one who has not committed a Saṅghādisesa has uncorrupted morality, it is said, "pārājikaṃ anajjhāpannassa" (one who has not committed a pārājika). With this, he shows that even one who has committed a Saṅghādisesa is indeed a pakatatto. For even he is called one whose morality is not corrupted here, but elsewhere, since committing a Saṅghādisesa is a corruption of morality, even one who commits that is indeed called one whose morality is corrupted. Ānantarikassā: There, showing the connection of the word "anantara" and the meaning of the suffix "ṇika," he says, "attano anantaraṃ nisinnassa" (one who is seated immediately after oneself). There, with "attano" (of oneself) he shows the connection of the word "anantara." With "nisinnassa" (of one seated) he shows the meaning of the suffix "ṇika."

239. Dvenissāraṇādikathā
239. Dvenissāraṇādikathā

395.Vatthutoti vatthukāraṇā.Tatthāti ‘‘dvemā bhikkhave’’tiādipāṭhe. ‘‘Sandhāya vutta’’nti iminā ‘‘appatto’’tiādisuttassa neyyatthabhāvaṃ dasseti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tanti pabbājanīyakammaṃ. Punatanti pabbājanīyakammameva. Esa bhikkhu appattoti sambandho. Kasmā appattoti āha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi.Āveṇikalakkhaṇenāti avinā hutvā pavattena lakkhaṇena. Attanā avinā hutvā attano santakena visuṃ bhūtena lakkhaṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi appatto, kasmā sunissāritoti āha ‘‘yasmā panassā’’tiādi.Assāti bhikkhussa, kareyyāti sambandho. Taṃ ce saṅgho tajjanīyakammādivasena nissāreti, sunissāritoti sambandho.Soti bhikkhu. Yasmā anuññātā, tasmā sunissāritoti yojanā. Kittakena aṅgena anuññātāti āha ‘‘ekenapi aṅgenā’’ti.

395.Vatthuto: Because of the subject matter. Tatrā: In the reading "dvemā bhikkhave" etc. With "Sandhāya vutta" (said with reference to), he shows the implied meaning of the sutta "appatto" etc. Hī: Truly, or because. Taṃ: That pabbājanīyakamma. Again taṃ: That very pabbājanīyakamma. Esa bhikkhu appatto (this bhikkhu is not subject), is the connection. Why is he not subject? He says, "yasmā" etc. Āveṇikalakkhaṇena: With a characteristic that proceeds without separation. It is said that a characteristic that proceeds without separation from oneself, that is distinct and belongs to oneself. If he is not subject, why is he well expelled? He says, "yasmā panassa" etc. Assā: Of the bhikkhu; it is connected to "kareyya" (would do). If the Saṅgha expels him by way of tajjanīyakamma etc., he is well expelled, is the connection. So: That bhikkhu. Because he is permitted, therefore he is well expelled, is the connection. With how many factors is he permitted? He says, "ekenapi aṅgenā" (even with one factor).

396.Osāraṇāti ettha otyūpasaggavasena saradhātu pavesanatthoti āha ‘‘pavesanā’’ti.Tatthāti ‘‘osāraṇā’’tiādipāṭhe.Osāretīti ettha abbhānādivasena pavesanaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘upasampadakammavasenā’’ti.Sahassakkhattumpītipisaddo garahattho. Ekavārādike pana kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Sātisārāti sadosā.Tathāti yathā ācariyupajjhāyā sātisārā, tathā. Seso kārakasaṅgho sātisāroti sambandho. ‘‘Hatthacchinnādayo pana dvattiṃsa suosāritā’’ti vuttattā andhamūgabadhirānaṃ apabbajitānampi upasampadā ruhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Teti hatthacchinnādayo dvattiṃsa.

396.Osāraṇā: There, because the root "sara" with the prefix "o" means entering, he says, "pavesanā" (entering). Tatrā: In the reading "osāraṇā" etc. Osāreti: There, rejecting the entering by way of abbhāna etc., he says, "upasampadakammavasena" (by way of the upasampadākamma). Sahassakkhattumpī: The word pi is in the sense of censure. He shows what is the point of speaking about once or more. Sātisārā: With faults. Tathā: Just as the ācariyas and upajjhāyas are with faults, so also. The rest of the community of workers is with faults, is the connection. Since it is said "Hatthacchinnādayo pana dvattiṃsa suosāritā" (but the thirty-two beginning with those with cut-off hands are well admitted), it should be seen that upasampadā is valid even for those who are unordained, blind, mute, or deaf. Te: Those thirty-two beginning with those with cut-off hands.

397.Abhūtavatthuvasenāti asaccavatthuvasena, asaṃvijjamānavatthuvasena vā.Tatthāti ‘‘idha pana bhikkhave’’tiādipāṭhe.Paṭinissajjitāti ettha tapaccayassa kammatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘paṭinissajjitabbā’’ti.

397.Abhūtavatthuvasenā: By way of untrue subject matter, or by way of non-existent subject matter. Tatrā: In the reading "idha pana bhikkhave" etc. Paṭinissajjitā: There, showing that the suffix "ta" occurs in the sense of the passive, he says, "paṭinissajjitabbā" (should be given back).

241. Upālipucchākathā
241. Upālipucchākathā

400.Tatthāti upālipañhesu. Tassapāpiyasikādīhi saddhiṃ ekā pucchā katāti yojanā. Bhikkhūnampi vāreti sambandho. Pisaddena ‘‘na kevalaṃ upālipañhesuyeva yojetabbāni, atha kho bhikkhūnaṃ vārepī’’ti dasseti.

400.Tatrā: In the Upāli questions. One question was made together with the Tassapāpiyasikādis. Or it is connected to "bhikkhūnampi vāreti" (he prevents even bhikkhus). With the word "pi" he shows that "they should not be connected only in the Upāli questions, but indeed also in the prevention of bhikkhus."

242. Tajjanīyakammakathā
242. Tajjanīyakammakathā

407.‘‘Idha pana bhikkhave bhikkhu bhaṇḍanakārako’’tiādi vuttanti sambandho.Tatthāti ‘‘idha pana bhikkhave’’tiādipāṭhe.Anapadānoti ettha apapubbo dāsaddo avakhaṇḍanatthoti āha ‘‘apadānaṃ vuccati paricchedo’’ti. Natthi apadānaṃ avakhaṇḍanaṃ āpattipariyanto etassāti anapadānoti vacanattho kātabbo. Sāyeva pāḷi vuttāti sambandho.Tatthāti tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ. Kiñci atthavinicchayaṃ pāḷianusārena vidituṃ na sakkā na hotīti yojanā.

407.The connection is "Idha pana bhikkhave bhikkhu bhaṇḍanakārako" etc. was said. Tatrā: In the reading "idha pana bhikkhave" etc. Anapadāno: There, showing that the word "dāsa" with the prefix "apa" means dividing off, he says, "apadānaṃ vuccati paricchedo" (apadāna means division). The meaning of the word should be done that there is no apadāna, no division, no end of offense for him, hence he is anapadāna. Sāyeva pāḷi vuttā (that very Pāḷi was said), is the connection. Tatrā: In that Pāḷi. It is not possible that one cannot know some judgment of meaning in accordance with the Pāḷi, is the connection.

Iti campeyyakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the Campeyyakkhandhaka.

10. Kosambakakkhandhakaṃ

10. Kosambakakkhandhakaṃ

271. Kosambakavivādakathā
271. Kosambakavivādakathā

451.Kosambakakkhandhake ayamanupubbikathā evaṃ veditabbāti yojanā. Vinayaṃ pāḷito ca, tadatthato ca dhāretītivinayadharo,tathā suttantaṃ dhāretītisuttantiko. Tesūti dvīsu bhikkhūsu. Suttantiko bhikkhu nikkhamīti sambandho.Ācamanaudakāvasesanti ācameti dhovati anenātiācamanaṃ,tameva udakaṃ ācamanaudakaṃ, tameva avasesaṃ ācamanaudakāvasesaṃ, avasesaācamanaudakanti attho.Taṃ bhikkhunti suttantikaṃ bhikkhuṃ.Etthāti ācamanaudakāvasesaṭṭhapane. ‘‘Sace hoti, desessāmī’’ti iminā attano subbacabhāvañca sikkhākāmatañca dasseti.Teti tayā, kathanti sambandho. Atha vā teti tuyhaṃ, natthīti sambandho. Asañcicca asatiyā katattā anāpattipakkhopi bhaveyyāti āha ‘‘natthi āpattī’’ti. Ettha pana āpattiyeva.Soti suttantiko.

451.In the Kosambakakkhandhaka, this narrative in sequence should be understood thus, is the connection. One who retains the Vinaya both in the Pāḷi and in its meaning is a vinayadharo, likewise one who retains the Suttanta is a suttantiko. Tesū: Among those two bhikkhus. The suttantiko bhikkhu went out, is the connection. Ācamanaudakāvasesaṃ: What is used to rinse, to wash, with this, is ācamanaṃ, that very water is ācamanaudakaṃ, that very remainder is ācamanaudakāvasesaṃ, the remainder of the rinsing water is the meaning. Taṃ bhikkhuṃ: That suttantika bhikkhu. Etthā: In the placing of the remainder of the rinsing water. With "Sace hoti, desessāmī," he shows his being easily admonished and his desire for training. Te: By you; it is connected to "kathanti" (how is it). Or "te" is "to you," it is connected to "natthīti" (there is not). He says, "natthi āpatti" (there is no offense), because it was done unintentionally, unknowingly, there might even be no offense. But here there is indeed an offense. So: That suttantika.

Vinayadharopīti vinayadharo pana, ārocesīti sambandho.Āpajjamānopīti pisaddo garahattho.Teti vinayadharassa nissitakā, āhaṃsūti sambandho.Tassāti suttantikassa.Teti suttantikassa nissitakā, ārocesunti sambandho.Soti suttantiko.Musāvādīti abhūtato, abhūtaṃ vā vacanaṃ vadanasīlo.Esoti vinayadharo.Teti suttantikassa nissitakā, āhaṃsūti sambandho.Tatoti kalahavaḍḍhanakāraṇā. Vinayadharo akāsīti sambandho.

453.‘‘Na tāva bhinno’’ti iminābhinnoti ettha tapaccayassa avassambhāviyatthe anāgatakālikataṃ dasseti. Tamevatthaṃ saha upamāya dassento āha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi.Tanti sassaṃ. ‘‘Bhijjissatī’’ti iminā bhijjissatītibhinnoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.So ca khoti saṅgho. Kalahavasena bhijjissatīti sambandho.Sambhamaatthavasenāti saṃvegaatthavasena. Sambhamasaddo hi tīsu atthesu vattati gārave, bhītiyaṃ, saṃvege cāti. Idha pana saṃvege vattati. Bhikkhusaṅghassa bhinne saṃvegaatthavasenāti adhippāyo. Idaṃ heṭṭhā kathitāya ‘‘bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāya’’nti gāthāya (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.15) casaddena sampiṇḍitaṃ sambhamaatthaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘bhinno bhikkhusaṅgho bhinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti pāṭhe.Āmeḍitanti ā punappunaṃ bhayādipīḷitattā meḍena ummādena itaṃ kathitaṃ āmeḍitaṃ.

454.ti vitthāro. Bhagavā vadeyyāti sambandho. Ukkhipanti apanentītiukkhepakā. Ukkhittamanuvattantītiukkhittānuvattakā. Etesanti ukkhittānuvattakānaṃ. Punaetesanti ukkhepakānaṃ.Pakkhoti sakhā.Tantimevāti pāḷimeva, byāpārameva vā.

455.Yoti bhikkhu. Cittaṃ uppādetīti sambandho.Tumheti dhammavādino sandhāya vuttaṃ.Kiṃ bhaṇathāti kiṃ vacanaṃ bhaṇatha. Iti pucchitvāti sambandho.Tesañcāti dhammavādīnañca.Itaresañcāti adhammavādīnañca.Imeti attano pakkhe ime bhikkhū.Tesanti adhammavādīnaṃ.‘‘Kammaṃ kopetī’’ti ‘‘nānāsaṃvāsakacatuttho ce bhikkhave kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ, na ca karaṇīya’’nti vacanato (mahāva. 389) kammaṃ kopeti.Itaresampīti dhammavādīnampi. Dhammavādīnaṃ pakkhe nisīditvā adhammavādīnaṃ laddhiṃ gaṇhantopi dhammavādīnaṃ nānāsaṃvāsako hotiyeva, ayaṃ nayo vuttanayassa atthato siddhoti katvā idha na vutto.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.Yoti bhikkhu, pavisati gaṇhātīti sambandho. Nisinno hutvāti yojanā.Imeti attano pakkhe ime bhikkhū.Itareti parapakkhe itare bhikkhū.Tesanti dhammavādīnaṃ.Yattha tattha vā pana pakkheti yasmiṃ kasmiṃci vā dhammavādīnaṃ pakkhe.Ime dhammavādinoti gaṇhātīti taṃtaṃpakkhagate bhikkhū yāthāvato vā ayāthāvato vā ‘‘ime dhammavādino’’ti gaṇhāti.

456.Kāyena kataṃ kammaṃkāyakammaṃ,vaciyā kataṃ kammaṃvacīkammaṃ. Tattha kāyakammaṃ upadaṃsentā bhikkhū paharantā upadaṃsenti. Vacīkammaṃ upadaṃsentā bhikkhū pharusaṃ vadantā upadaṃsenti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyena paharantā’’tiādi.Upadaṃsentīti pavattenti. ‘‘Kodhavasenā’’ti iminā pemavasenāti atthaṃ nivatteti.Adhammiyānīti adhammena kattabbāni. ‘‘Kiccānī’’ti iminā iyapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Asammodikāti ettha yakāralopoti āha ‘‘asammodikāyā’’ti. ‘‘Kathāyā’’ti iminā asammodaṃ janetīti asammodikāti katvā ṇikapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Upacāraṃ muñcitvāti ettha upacāro nāma aññamaññaṃ paharantānaṃ hatthassa pāpuṇanaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ muñcitvāti attho.Āsanantarikāyāti ettha ekaṃ āsanaṃ antaraṃ byavahitaṃ imissā nisinnakiriyāyāti āsanantarikāti dassento āha ‘‘ekekaṃ āsanaṃ antara’’nti. ‘‘Katvā’’ti iminā kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.

457-8.Ayaṃ assa bhikkhuno adhippāyo kirāti yojanā.Eteti kodhābhibhūte bhikkhū. Bhagavā pana kathesīti sambandho. ‘‘Anattho ato’’ti imināanatthatoti padassa okāralopasandhiṃ dasseti. Tesaṃ padānamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘etasmā’’tiādi. ‘‘Atha vā’’tiādinā ‘‘anatthado’’ti vattabbe ‘‘sugato’’tiādīsu viya da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvāanatthatoti vuttanti dasseti.Anatthadoti anatthaṃ dadātīti anatthado.

464.Puthusaddoti ettha puthusaddo mahantapariyāyoti āha ‘‘mahā’’ti.Assāti bhaṇḍanakārakassa janassa.Samajanoti ettha samasaddo sadisapariyāyoti āha ‘‘ekasadiso’’ti, tulyādhikaraṇasamāsoyaṃ. Bhaṇḍanakārako ayaṃ janoti yojanā.Tatthāti bhaṇḍanakārakesu janesu. Aññampi ekaṃ idaṃ kāraṇanti sambandho.Na maññitthāti koci ekopi na maññitthāti yojanā. Imināamaññarunti ettha āvibhattiyā ‘‘ru’’nti ādeso dassito.

Parimuṭṭhāti parimuṭṭhā sati etesanti parimuṭṭhāti dassento āha ‘‘parimuṭṭhasatino’’ti. Aṭṭhakkharagāthāyaṃ ‘‘pañcamaṃ laghu sabbatthā’’ti vuttattā pañcamassa rākārassa rasso hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rākārassa rassādeso kato’’ti.Kathaṃ bhāṇinoti vācaṃ bhāṇino.Mukhāyāmanti ettha āyāmasaddo vitthārapariyāyo, vitthāro ca nāma pasāraṇanti āha ‘‘pasāretu’’nti. Sampadānatthajotakena tuṃpaccayena sampadānatthe upayogavacananti dasseti.Nītāti kammavācakassa kitassa appadhānakammaṃ dassento āha ‘‘imaṃ nillajjabhāva’’nti. Dvikammakadhātubhāvato ‘‘attano’’ti padhānakammampi ajjhāharitabbaṃ.Tanti kalahaṃ. ‘‘Jāna’’nti padena ‘‘vidū’’ti padassa atthañca vākyañca dasseti. Vidanti jānantītividūti vacanattho kātabboti adhippāyo.Sādīnavotiādīnavena dosena saha pavatto.Ayanti kalaho.

Yeca taṃ upanayhantīti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘āghāta’’nti.Yeti janā. Upanayhanti upanahanti bandhanti.Sanantanoti ettha sanantanasaddo purāṇapariyāyoti āha ‘‘porāṇo’’ti.

pareti ettha parasaddassa pacchābhāgatthādayo nivāreti.Mayamettha yamāmaseti ettha etasaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṅghamajjhe’’ti. Yamudhātu upayamanattho sekāro nipātamattoti āha ‘‘upayamāmā’’ti. ‘‘Satataṃ samitaṃ maccusantikaṃ gacchāmā’’ti iminā ‘‘na jānantī’’ti padassa ākāraṃ dasseti.Tatthāti mahājanakāye ye paṇḍitāti yojanā.Evaṃ hīti evameva. Jānantā te paṇḍitā paṭipajjantīti yojanā. Medhantā hiṃsantā gacchanti pavattantītimedhagākalahā. Keci medhadhātuto ṇvupaccayaṃ vadanti, tesaṃ matena medhakāti paṭhamakkharena pāṭho bhaveyya.

Tesampīti brahmadattadīghāvukumārānampi.Saṅgatīti samāgamo.Voti tumhākaṃ. Yesaṃ tumhākaṃ neva mātāpitūnaṃ aṭṭhīni chinnāni, na pāṇā hatā, na gavassadhanāni haṭāni. Tesaṃ tumhākaṃ kasmā saṅgati na hotīti yojanā.

Sabbāni parissayānīti etthasabbānīti vuttakāraṇañca liṅgavipallāsañca dassento āha ‘‘pākaṭaparissaye ca paṭicchannaparissaye cā’’ti. ‘‘Abhibhavitvā’’ti imināabhibhuyyāti padassa tvāpaccayantabhāvaṃ dasseti.Tenāti nipakena sahāyena.

Rājāvāti ettha rājā ivāti padavibhāgaṃ katvā rājasaddassa upalakkhaṇavasena mahājanaka, arindamarājāno ca ivasaddassa opammatthajotakañca dassento āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Raṭṭhavijitasaddā aññamaññapariyāyā. Visesanavisesyānaṃ kāmācārato gamyamānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vijitaṃ raṭṭha’’nti. ‘‘Mātaṅgo araññe nāgo ivā’’ti iminā padavibhāgaṃ dasseti. Tesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mātaṅgoti hatthī vuccatī’’tiādi. ‘‘Hatthī vuccatī’’ti iminā mahanto aṅgo sarīrametassātimātaṅgoti vacanatthena hatthī mātaṅgo nāmāti dasseti. Mahantasaddassa mātādeso.Nāgasaddo urage ca hatthimhi ca nāgarukkhe ca uttame ca nāmapaññattiyañcāti pañcasu atthesu vattati, idha uttamattheti dassento āha ‘‘nāgoti mahantādhivacanameta’’nti.Mātaṅgaraññevāti ettha ivasaddassa opammatthajotakabhāvaṃ dassetvā atthayojanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. ‘‘Yathā ca pālileyyako’’ti iminā mātaṅganāgassa sarūpaṃ upalakkhaṇena dasseti.

275. Pālileyyakagamanakathā

467.Pālileyyakanti palilavanasaṇḍe vasantahatthināgaṃ. ‘‘Hatthī’’ti ca ‘‘nāgo’’ti ca dvinnaṃ saddānaṃ pariyāyabhāvena vuttattā adhikatthoti āha ‘‘mahāhatthī’’ti. Purato purato gacchantehi tehi hatthiādīhi chinnaggānīti yojanā.Obhaggobhagganti bhañjitvā adhopātitaṃ obhagganti dassento āha ‘‘bhañjitvā bhañjitvā pātita’’nti. ‘‘Uccaṭṭhānato’’ti iminā avatyūpasaggassa adhotthaṃ nayena dasseti.Etassāti hatthināgassa.Teti hatthiādayo.Tehīti hatthiādīhi. Pivantehi tehīti yojanā.Kaddamodakānīti kaddamena saṃsaṭṭhāni udakāni.

Īsādantassāti ettha īsāya sadiso danto imassāti īsādantoti dassento āha ‘‘rathaīsāsadisadantassā’’ti. ‘‘Rathaīsā’’ti iminā naṅgalaīsaṃ nivatteti.Yadekoti yaṃ eko. Yaṃsaddo kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘yasmā’’ti.Assa nāgassāti hatthināgassa.Nāgenāti buddhanāgena.

Yathābhirantanti ettha kittakaṃ kālaṃ ramatīti āha ‘‘temāsa’’nti.Ettāvatāti ettakena temāsaviharaṇena. Patthaṭā ahosīti sambandho.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ jambudīpatale.

kosambakāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

276. Aṭṭhārasavatthukathā

471.‘‘Laddhiggahaṇa’’nti iminā ādīyateādāyoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

475.Taṃ divasamevāti tasmiṃ saṅghasāmaggikaraṇadivaseyeva.

476.Na mūlā mūlaṃ gantvāti mūlato mūlaṃ na gantvāva. ‘‘Atthato apagatā’’ti iminā atthato apetāatthāpetāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Byañjanamattaṃ upetā’’ti iminā byañjanamattaṃ upetā upagatābyañjanūpetāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

477.Atthesu jātesūti ettha jātasaddo uppannapariyāyoti āha ‘‘vinayaatthesu uppannesū’’ti. Tañca padaṃ ‘‘saṅghassa kiccesū’’tiādīsu sabbapadesu yojetabbaṃ.Mahatthikoti mahanto upakārasaṅkhāto attho imassāti mahatthikoti dassanto āha ‘‘mahāupakāro’’ti.

Anānuvajjo paṭhamenāti ettha paṭhamasaddo tāvapariyāyoti dassento āha ‘‘tāvā’’ti.Sīlatoti sīlena.Upekkhitācāroti upapattito ikkhitācāro. ‘‘Apekkhitācāro’’tipi pāṭho.Upaparikkhitācāroti upaparikkhito ācāro etassāti upaparikkhitācāro.

Visayhāti ettha vipubbo sahadhātu abhibhavanattho, tvāpaccayo ca hotīti dassento āha ‘‘abhibhavitvā’’ti.Anapagatanti kāraṇato anapetaṃ. Bhaṇanto bhikkhūti sambandho. Tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yasmā hī’’tiādi.Soti bhikkhu, na hāpetīti sambandho. ‘‘Usūyāyā’’ti iminā dosāgatigamanassa gahitattā ‘‘agatigamanavasenā’’ti iminā pārisesanayena avasesaagatigamanamevādhippetaṃ.Soti bhikkhu.Chambhati cevāti thambhati ceva, thaddhaṃ karoti cevāti attho.Vedhati cāti kampati ca.Yo cāti bhikkhu pana.Īdisoti usūyāya vā agatigamanena vā bhaṇanasaṅkhāto ediso na hoti.

Kiñca bhiyyoti nipātasamudāyo, tato vuttato atirekaṃ kathetabbaṃ kiṃ panāti attho. Tassā gāthāya attho veditabboti yojanā.Yoti bhikkhu.ti saccaṃ.Kālāgatantiettha gahetabbakālañca sattamītappurisasamāsañca dassento āha ‘‘kathetabbayuttakāle āgata’’nti.Vacoti padaṃ na vacanapadhānaṃ, vacanavantapuggaloyeva padhānanti dassento āha ‘‘vadanto’’ti.

Ācerakamhi ca saketi ettha ācariyassa esoācerako,sassa attano esosakoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘attano ācariyavāde’’ti. Gāthābhāvato ācariyasaddassa ācerādeso kātabbo. ‘‘Vāde’’ti iminā idamatthe pavattassa ṇikapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Alaṃ pametunti ettha alaṃsaddo samatthattho, pamasaddotulanatthoti āha ‘‘tulayituṃ samattho’’ti.Kathetaveti ettha tavesaddo aññattha yebhuyyena bhāvavācako, idha pana kammavācakoti āha ‘‘kathetabbe’’ti.Viraddhaṭṭhānakusaloti viraddhaṭṭhāne kusalo.

Ācerakamhi ca saketi: Here, explaining the meaning "this āceraka belongs to the teacher, this saka belongs to oneself," he says, "in one's own teacher's doctrine." Because of the meter of the verse, the ādesa of ācariya should be ācera. "In doctrine (vāde)" shows the form of the ṇi suffix, which occurs in the sense of identity here. Alaṃ pametunti: Here, alaṃ means capable, and the word pama means weighing; thus, he says, "capable of weighing." Kathetaveti: Here, the suffix tave generally denotes the passive sense elsewhere, but here it denotes the objective sense; thus, he says, "to be spoken." Viraddhaṭṭhānakusaloti: Skilled in a place of opposition.

Tanti kathetabbaṃ.Ayaṃ hetthatthoti ayaṃ eva ettha gāthāyaṃ atthoti yojanā. ‘‘Gacchantī’’ti imināvajantīti ettha vajadhātuyā gatyatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Attano ācariyavāda’’nti iminā ‘‘sakaṃ ādāya’’nti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. Ācariyavādo hi ādātabbato gahetabbatoādāyanti vutto.Tadanurūpanti tassa vatthussa anurūpaṃ. Byākaramāno bhikkhūti sambandho.Aṭṭhahi dūtaṅgehīti ‘‘sotā ca hoti, sāvetā ca, uggahetā ca, dhāretā ca, viññātā ca, viññāpetā, ca kusalo ca sahitāsahitassa, no ca kalahakārako’’ti (cūḷava. 347; a. ni. 8.16) evaṃ vuttehi aṭṭhahi dūtassa aṅgehi. Kassa dūteyyakammanti āha ‘‘saṅghassā’’ti. Dūtassa etānidūteyyāni,tāniyeva kammānidūteyyakammāni,tesu.Idanti atthajākaṃ, vuttaṃ hotīti yojanā. Atha vāidanti ayamattho.Vuttaṃ hotīti vutto hoti. Pacchimanaye liṅgavipallāsoti daṭṭhabbo. Ānetvā havanti pūjentītiāhavodāyakā, tesaṃ āhūnaṃ. Ānetvā hunitabbaṃ pūjetabbantiāhuti,taṃ āhutiṃ.Saṅghassa kiccesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tassa tassa kiccassā’’ti.Karavacoti ettha ‘‘vacokaro’’ti vattabbe gāthābhāvato padavipariyāyavasena ‘‘karavaco’’ti vuttoti āha ‘‘vacanaṃ karonto’’ti. ‘‘Vacanakaraṇenā’’ti iminā ‘‘natena maññatī’’ti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.

Tanti: That which should be spoken. Ayaṃ hetthatthoti: This is the meaning in this verse. "Gacchantīti": This shows the meaning of motion of the root vaja in vajantī. "Attano ācariyavāda"nti: This shows the meaning of the phrase "sakaṃ ādāya." Indeed, the teacher's doctrine, because it is to be taken or received, is called ādāya. Tadanurūpanti: Suitable to that thing. Byākaramāno bhikkhūti sambandho: The connection is 'the bhikkhu explaining'. Aṭṭhahi dūtaṅgehīti: With the eight qualities of a messenger, which were stated as "He is a listener, a proclaimer, a learner, a memorizer, one who understands, one who makes others understand, skilled in what is beneficial and not beneficial, and not a maker of quarrels" (cūḷava. 347; a. ni. 8.16). Whose is the work of a messenger? He says, "of the Sangha." These are the dūteyyāni (duties of a messenger); those same actions are dūteyyakammāni (acts of a messenger); in those. Idanti: The collection of meanings; the meaning is stated. Alternatively, idanti: This meaning. Vuttaṃ hotīti: Is stated. In the later method, a change of gender should be seen. Ānetvā havanti pūjentīti: Because they bring and offer, they are āhavodāyakā (givers of offerings); to their offerings. Ānetvā hunitabbaṃ pūjetabbanti: Because it should be brought and offered, it is āhuti (offering); that offering. Saṅghassa kiccesūti: Locative in the sense of determination. Therefore, it is said, "for each particular duty." Karavacoti: Here, instead of saying "vacokaro" (one who makes speech), because of the meter of the verse, "karavaco" is said due to the transposition of words; thus, he says, "doing the speech." "Vacanakaraṇenā"ti: This shows the scope of the word ta in "na tena maññatī".

Tassā cāti ettha smāvacanassa ssādeso kātabbo.Yathāti yenākārena, vinayakammākārenāti attho.Yesūti yattakesu vatthūsu. Ubhaye ete vibhaṅgāti sambandho.Assāti bhikkhussa.Āpattivuṭṭhānapadassāti padasaddo kāraṇattho, bhummatthe sāmivacano ca hotīti āha ‘‘āpattivuṭṭhānakāraṇe’’ti. ‘‘Kusalo’’ti iminā cheko paṇḍito, kucchitaṃ pāpaṃ vidati jānātītikovidoti vacanatthena kovido nāmāti dasseti.

Tassā cāti: Here, the ādesa of smā should be ssā. Yathāti: In which way; that is, in the way of the Vinaya act. Yesūti: In whichever things. Ubhaye ete vibhaṅgāti sambandho: Both of these are connected to 'Vibhanga'. Assāti: Of the bhikkhu. Āpattivuṭṭhānapadassāti: Here, the word pada has the meaning of cause, and it is a possessive term in the locative sense; thus, he says, "in the cause of rising from an offense." "Kusalo"ti: This shows that he is called kovido (skilled), meaning clever and wise, because he knows and understands bad, blameworthy things, with the etymology "kucchitaṃ pāpaṃ vidati jānātīti".

osāraṇaṃ tanti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yā’’ti imināetampīti ettha etasaddassa aniyamaniddesabhāvaṃ dasseti.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ kosambakakkhandhake.

osāraṇaṃ tanti: This shows the scope of the word ta. "Yā"ti: This shows the indefinite nature of the word eta in etampī. Sabbatthāti: In the entire Kosambaka Khandhaka.

Iti kosambakakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the Yojanā of the Kosambaka Khandhaka.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the Yojanā of the Mahāvagga, in the Vinayasaṃvaṇṇanā of the Samantapāsādikā.

Mahāvaggavaṇṇanāya

Yojanā of the Mahāvagga

Yojanā samattā.

Yojanā is completed.

Jādilañchitanāmena, nekānaṃ vācito mayā;

By me, named Jādilañchita,
The way of Yojanā of the Mahāvaggakhandhaka has been completed.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Pācityādiyojanā

Pācityādiyojanā

Cūḷavaggayojanā

Cūḷavaggayojanā

Mahāvaggakhandhakassevaṃ, katvāna yojanānayaṃ;

Having done the way of Yojanā,
Of the Mahāvagga Khandhaka in this way;
Now I will do the way of Yojanā,
Of the Cūḷavagga.

1. Kammakkhandhakaṃ

1. Kammakkhandhakaṃ

1. Tajjanīyakammakathā
1. Tajjanīyakammakathā

1.Cūḷavaggassa paṭhame kammakkhandhake evamattho veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Cūḷavaggassā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘kammakkhandhake’’ti pade avayavisambandho.Tāvāti pārivāsikakkhandhakādito, pārivāsikkhandhakādīnaṃ vā paṭhamaṃ. Cevasaddo ca casaddo ca ‘‘paṇḍukalohitakā’’ti padassa asamāhāradvandavākyaṃ dīpenti. Nissayānaṃ nāmaṃ nissitesu upacāravasena tesaṃ saddhivihārikaantevāsikāpi paṇḍukalohitakanāmāyeva hontīti dassento āha ‘‘tesaṃ nissitakāpī’’tiādi. Pisaddena upacāratthaṃ sampiṇḍeti. ‘‘Suṭṭhu balava’’nti iminābalavābalavanti dvinnaṃ saddānaṃ pariyāyabhāvena vuttattā atisayatthoti dasseti. ‘‘Balavabalava’’nti vattabbe vācāsiliṭṭhavasena dīghaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ.Paṭivadathāti paṭicchannaṭṭhāne kathetha. Imināpaṭimantethāti ettha mantadhātuyā guttabhāsanatthaṃ dasseti. Atthesu karaṇabhāsanakiccesu alaṃ samatthāti alamatthā, tesaṃ visesenātialamatthatarāti dassento āha ‘‘samatthatarā’’ti.

1.In the first Kammakkhandhaka of the Cūḷavagga, this meaning should be understood; this is the connection. The word "Cūḷavaggassā" has an avayavisambandha (relation of part to whole) with the word "kammakkhandhake." Tāvāti: From the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka onwards, or the first of the Pārivāsikkhandhaka etc. The words ceva and ca indicate an asamāhāradvandavākya (non-collective compound sentence) for the phrase "paṇḍukalohitakā." Showing that the names of the dependents (nissayānaṃ) are also called Paṇḍukalohitaka by way of courtesy (upacāravasena) for their saddhivihārika and antevāsika who are dependent (nissitesu), he says, "their dependents too," etc. The particle pi combines the meaning of courtesy. "Suṭṭhu balava"nti: This shows that because the two words balavābalava are stated as synonyms, it is in the sense of excess. Instead of saying "balavabalava," it is said in this way by lengthening it due to vācāsiliṭṭhava (skill in speech). Paṭivadathāti: Speak in a hidden place. This shows the meaning of secret speech of the root manta in paṭimantethā. In meanings, affairs of expressing agency, being capable and competent; because of being especially in those competencies, it is alamatthatarā; showing this, he says, "more capable."

Adhammakammadvādasakakathā
Adhammakammadvādasakakathā

4.Asammukhā katantiādīsu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Sammukhehi virahitāasammukhāti dassento āha ‘‘saṅghadhammavinayapuggalasammukhānaṃ vinā kata’’nti. ‘‘Appaṭipucchitvā’’ti imināappaṭipucchāti ettha tvāpaccayassākārabhāvaṃ dasseti.Tassevāti cuditakasseva.Adesanāgāminiyāti ettha akārassa aññatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pārājikā…pe… vā’’ti.Etthāti tajjanīyakamme.Nava padāti navasu padesu, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Purimakesu tīsu tikesu vuttesu navasu padesūti yojanā. ‘‘Ekeka’’nti padena sambandhitabbaṃ.Imehīti imehi dvīhi padehi.Dvādasa tikāti purimehi tīhi tikehi nava tike missetvā dvādasa.Sukkapakkhesupīti paṭisedhavirahavasena sukkesu pakkhesupi.

4.In Asammukhā katantiādi (done in absence), this decision should be understood; this is the connection. Sammukhehi virahitā: Because they are devoid of presence, they are asammukhā; showing this, he says, "done without the presence of the Sangha, Dhamma, Vinaya, and individuals." "Appaṭipucchitvā"ti: This shows the state of being an ākāra of the suffix tvā in appaṭipucchā. Tassevāti: Of the accused himself. Adesanāgāminiyāti: Showing the akāra elsewhere in this, he says, "pārājikā…pe… or." Etthāti: In Tajjanīyakamma. Nava padāti: In nine instances; this is a singular word in the determinative locative. The connection is 'in the nine instances stated in the first three tikas (triads)'. "Ekeka"nti: Should be connected with the word. Imehīti: With these two words. Dvādasa tikāti: Twelve, mixing the nine tikas with the previous three. Sukkapakkhesupīti: Even in the bright fortnights, by way of absence of prohibition.

6.‘‘Pabbajitāna’’nti iminā gihīnaṃ ananulomikataṃ nivatteti.Sahasokitādīhīti ādisaddena sahanandiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne sabbaaṭṭhakathāpotthakesu ‘‘na upasampādetabbanti upajjhāyena hutvā na upasampādetabba’’nti pāṭhato paṭṭhāya yāva ‘‘na sampayojetabbanti aññamaññaṃ yojetvā kalaho na kāretabbo’’ti pāṭho atthi, tāva aṭṭhārasasammāvattanavattānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāpāṭho likhito, so pāṭho imasmiṃ ṭhāne na likhitabbo. Kasmā? Pāḷikkamānuppattābhāvato, aṭṭhakathāyameva ‘‘aṭṭhārasa sammāvattanavattāni pārivāsikakkhandhake vaṇṇayissāmā’’ti vakkhamānattā, yathāvacanañca pārivāsikakkhandhake (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 76) saṃvaṇṇitatthā ca. Tasmā so pāṭho na porāṇapāṭho hoti, pacchā pakkhittapāṭhoti daṭṭhabbo.

6."Pabbajitāna"nti: This prevents the inappropriateness for laypersons. Sahasokitādīhīti: With the word ādi, it includes sahanandiṃ. In this place, in all the commentaries, starting from the reading "na upasampādetabbanti upajjhāyena hutvā na upasampādetabba" up to the reading "na sampayojetabbanti aññamaññaṃ yojetvā kalaho na kāretabbo," the commentary passage of eighteen sammāvattanavattas is written; that passage should not be written in this place. Why? Because of the absence of logical order in the Pali, because in the commentary itself it will be said that "we will describe the eighteen sammāvattanavattas in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka," and because it has been described in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 76) according to the statement. Therefore, that passage is not an ancient passage; it should be seen as a passage inserted later.

Ekekenāpīti tīsu aṅgesu ekekenāpi. Iminā avayavavākyanibbattivasena kammārahabhāvaṃ dasseti.ti saccaṃ. Niyassassa visesena abhiṇhāpattikattaṃ aṅgaṃ iti vuttanti yojanā. Ettha ākāravācako itisaddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Eseva nayo anantarepi. Tajjīyati anena vinayakammenātitajjanīyaṃ,tameva kammaṃtajjanīyakammaṃ. ‘‘Nissāya te vatthabba’’nti niyassīyati bālo bhajāpīyati anena vinayakammenātiniyassaṃ,divādigaṇikattā sakārassa dvebhāvo hoti ‘‘nassaṃ vassa’’ntiādīsu viya, niyassameva kammaṃniyassakammaṃ. Gāmādito pabbājiyati anena vinayakammenātipabbājanīyaṃ,tameva kammaṃpabbājanīyakammaṃ. Tīsūti bhaṇḍanakārakaabhiṇhāpattikakuladūsakavasena tividhesu aṅgesu. Yena kenaci aṅgenāti sambandho. Yadi sabbāni kammāni kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Evaṃ sati campeyyakkhandhake (mahāva. 400 ādayo) vuttaṃ idaṃ vacanaṃ virujjhatīti sambandho.Vacanatthanānattatoti vacanassa ca atthassa ca nānābhāvato. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tajjanīyakammārahassāti imassa hī’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādivacanassa aṅgasambhavo atthoti yojanā.Tasmāti yasmā na virujjhati, tasmā. Saṅghena kataṃ hotīti sambandho. Iminā lakkhaṇena tajjanīyādikammārahassa tassa bhikkhussāti yojanā. Evaṃ kammasanniṭṭhānatthaṃ dassetvā aṅgasambhavatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yassa panā’’tiādi. Tatthayassāti bhikkhussa, atthīti sambandho.Bhaṇḍanakārakādīsūtiādisaddena abhiṇhāpattikakuladūsakāni saṅgaṇhāti. Ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho kareyyāti sambandho.Kammārahanti kammassa, kamme vā arahaṃ.Etthāti kammakkhandhake.Pubbenāti pubbe vuttena campeyyakkhandhakena.Aparanti apare vuttaṃ kammakkhandhakaṃ.Sametīti samaṃ gacchati.

Ekekenāpīti: Even by one of the three qualities. This shows the state of being fit for the act in the manner of a fractional sentence. ti: Truly. The meaning is stated as the habitual offender of the one to be kept under probation is an anga (factor). Here, the word iti denoting the ākāra is to be seen as having its lutta (elision). The same method applies in the subsequent ones as well. Tajjīyati anena vinayakammenāti: Because he is censured by this Vinaya act, it is tajjanīyaṃ; that same act is tajjanīyakammaṃ. "Nissāya te vatthabba"nti: Because the fool is kept under dependence and subjected to the bhajāpana by this Vinaya act, it is niyassaṃ; because of the divādi class, the sakāra has a doubling, like in "nassaṃ vassaṃ" etc.; that niyassa itself is the action, niyassakammaṃ. Gāmādito pabbājiyati anena vinayakammenāti: Because he is expelled from the village etc. by this Vinaya act, it is pabbājanīyaṃ; that same act is pabbājanīyakammaṃ. Tīsūti: In the three qualities, by way of being a quarrel-maker, a habitual offender, and a family defiler. The connection is 'with any one quality'. Yadi sabbāni kammāni kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā: If it is fitting to do all the acts. Evaṃ sati campeyyakkhandhake (mahāva. 400 ādayo) vuttaṃ idaṃ vacanaṃ virujjhatīti sambandho: In this case, there is a contradiction to the statement said in the Campeyyakkhandhaka (mahāva. 400 ff). Vacanatthanānattatoti: Because of the difference in the statement and the meaning. Expanding that very meaning, he says, "because of the one who deserves Tajjanīyakamma," etc. Tattha "tiṇṇaṃ bhikkhave"tiādivacanassa aṅgasambhavo atthoti yojanā: There, the connection is 'the statement beginning with "tiṇṇaṃ bhikkhave" has the meaning of the arising of a quality'. Tasmāti: Therefore, because there is no contradiction, therefore. Saṅghena kataṃ hotīti sambandho: It is connected to 'is done by the Sangha'. Iminā lakkhaṇena tajjanīyādikammārahassa tassa bhikkhussāti yojanā: By this characteristic, the connection is 'for that bhikkhu who deserves the Tajjanīya etc. acts'. Evaṃ kammasanniṭṭhānatthaṃ dassetvā aṅgasambhavatthaṃ dassento āha "yassa panā"tiādi: Having thus shown the meaning of the resolution of the act, showing the meaning of the arising of a quality, he says, "yassa pana," etc. Tattha yassāti: Of the bhikkhu, the connection is 'there is'. Bhaṇḍanakārakādīsūti: With the word ādi, it includes abhiṇhāpattika and kuladūsaka. Ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho kareyyāti sambandho: The Sangha, if it wishes, should do it; this is the connection. Kammārahanti: Fit for the act, or in the act. Etthāti: In the Kammakkhandhaka. Pubbenāti: With the Campeyyakkhandhaka stated earlier. Aparanti: The other Kammakkhandhaka stated later. Sametīti: Goes together.

Tatthāti kammesu, tajjanīyakammeti sambandho, aṅgesu vā, bhaṇḍanakārakavasenāti sambandho.Atha khoti tathā vuttāpīti attho.Karontenakammavācāvācakenāti sambandho.ti phalajotako.Bhūtena vatthunāti tacchena vatthunā.Aññassa kammassāti tajjanīyakammato aññassa kammassa. Kasmā bālassa abyattassa āpattibahulassa tajjanīyakammaṃ kātabbanti yojanā.Idampīti tajjanīyakammampi.Sabbatthāti sabbesu kammesu.

Tatthāti: In the acts, the connection is 'Tajjanīyakamma'; or in the qualities, the connection is 'by way of being a quarrel-maker'. Atha khoti: Although it was said thus. Karontena: Is connected with 'by the one who utters the kammavācā'. ti: Indicating the result. Bhūtena vatthunāti: With a true thing. Aññassa kammassāti: Of another act from the Tajjanīyakamma. Kasmā bālassa abyattassa āpattibahulassa tajjanīyakammaṃ kātabbanti yojanā: Why should the Tajjanīyakamma be done to a fool, an incompetent, and one who commits many offenses? Idampīti: Even the Tajjanīyakamma. Sabbatthāti: In all acts.

Nappaṭippassambhetabbaaṭṭhārasakādikathā
Nappaṭippassambhetabbaaṭṭhārasakādikathā

8.Pannalomāti patitamānalomā.Etanti vattaṃ.Netthāranti ettha aphuṭṭhakkharasaṃyoge parassa takārassa thakāro hoti, tasmā dutiyakkharena pāṭho yutto.Yenāti vattena.Nissāraṇāti nissāraṇato. Dasa vā divasāni, pañca vā divasāni pūretabbanti yojanā.ti saccaṃ.Ettakenāti etappamāṇena dasapañcadivasena.

8.Pannalomāti: With fallen bodily hairs. Etanti: The practice. Netthāranti: Here, in the indistinct combination of letters, the thakāra is in place of the other takāra; therefore, it is proper to read with the second letter. Yenāti: With the practice. Nissāraṇāti: From the expulsion. Dasa vā divasāni, pañca vā divasāni pūretabbanti yojanā: Either ten days or five days should be completed. ti: Truly. Ettakenāti: With this amount of ten or five days.

2. Niyassakammakathā
2. Niyassakammakathā

11.Apissu bhikkhū pakatāti ettha nipātānamanekatthattā idha apissusaddo niccattho hoti. Pakatasaddo ‘‘kukkuccapakatā’’tiādīsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.tatiyasaṅgītikathā; pāci. aṭṭha. 438) abhibhavanattho, idha pana byāvaṭatthoti dassento āha ‘‘niccaṃ byāvaṭā hontī’’ti.

11.Apissu bhikkhū pakatāti: Here, because the nipātas have many meanings, here the word apissu means constant. Showing that the word pakata has the meaning of overcoming in "kukkuccapakatā" etc. (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.tatiyasaṅgītikathā; pāci. aṭṭha. 438), but here it has the meaning of being busy, he says, "they are constantly busy."

3. Pabbājanīyakammakathā
3. Pabbājanīyakammakathā

27.Etthāti assajipunabbasukavatthumhi.Kāyikoti ettha kāyena kīḷatīti kāyikoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kāyakīḷā vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā vācāya kīḷatītivācasiko,kāyiko ca vācasiko cakāyikavācasikoti vacanatthaṃ atidisati. Ettha ca pacchimavacanattho samāhāradvando, samāhāradvandepi katthaci pulliṅgamicchanti saddavidū ‘‘dhammavinayo’’tiādīsu (vibha. aṭṭha. 509) viya. Kāyadvārapaññattasikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamatītikāyikoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamo vuccatī’’ti. Kāyena paññattasikkhāpadaṃ vītikkametītikāyikoti vacanatthopi yujjateva. ‘‘Upahananaṃ vuccatī’’ti iminā upahananaṃ upaghātaṃ, tamevaupaghātikanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Nāsana’’nti iminā hanadhātuyā hiṃsanatthaṃ dasseti. Paṭikkhittavejjakammādivasena telapacanaariṭṭhapacanādīni kāyiko micchājīvo nāmāti yojanā. Iminā micchājīvassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.

27.Etthāti: In the Assaji Punabbasu story. Kāyikoti: Showing the etymology that he plays with the body, therefore it is kāyika, he says, "kāyakīḷā is said." "Eseva nayo"ti: By this, he extends the etymology that he plays with speech, therefore it is vācasiko, kāyiko ca vācasiko ca, and kāyikavācasiko. Here, the last word is a samāhāradvanda, and in the samāhāradvanda too, the scholars of grammar prefer the masculine gender in some cases, as in "dhammavinayo" etc. (vibha. aṭṭha. 509). Showing the etymology that he transgresses the training rule prescribed by the body-door, therefore he is kāyiko, he says, "the transgression of a training rule prescribed by the body-door is said." The etymology that he transgresses the training rule prescribed by the body is kāyiko is indeed fitting. "Upahananaṃ vuccatī"ti: By this, he shows the meaning of upahananaṃ is upaghātaṃ, and that same is upaghātika. "Nāsana"nti: By this, he shows the meaning of injury of the root hana. By way of prohibited medical practices etc., preparing oil, preparing ariṭṭha etc., is called wrong livelihood by the body; this is the connection. By this, he shows the nature of wrong livelihood.

4. Paṭisāraṇīyakammakathā
4. Paṭisāraṇīyakammakathā

33.Sudhammavatthusmiṃ evamattho veditabboti yojanā. Anapaloketvāti ettha apapubbo lokasaddo āpucchanatthoti āha ‘‘na āpucchitvā’’ti.

33.In the Sudhamma story, this meaning should be understood; this is the connection. Anapaloketvāti: Here, the word loka preceded by apa means asking; thus, he says, "without asking."

34.Kinti kiṃ nāma khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ.Voti tumhehi.Gahapatīti ālapanapadaṃ. Therānaṃ atthāyāti sambandho.Paṭiyattanti paṭiyāditaṃ. ‘‘Etaṃ avocā’’ti imināetadavocāti ettha niggahitādesasandhiṃ dasseti.Yadidanti saddo ‘‘tilasaṃguḷikā’’ti padena yojitattā itthiliṅgoti āha ‘‘yā aya’’nti.Tilasakkhalikāti tilena saṃsaṭṭhā sakkhalikā. ‘‘Sā natthī’’ti iminā uttaravākye yaṃsaddassa pubbavākye taṃsaddāpekkhataṃ dasseti. Eko purisoti sambandho.Pūviyoti pūvaṃ, pūvena vā kayavikkayo.Tenāti kāraṇena.Nanti gahapatiṃ.Theroti sudhammatthero.Yadeva kiñcīti ettha kiñci eva yaṃ vacananti dassento āha ‘‘kiñcideva tilasaṃguḷikāvacana’’nti.Idanti imaṃ atthaṃ.Soti kukkuṭapotako.Kākavassitanti kākassa vassitaṃ, neva akāsīti sambandho.Tayāpīti pisaddo kukkuṭapotakaṃ apekkhati. Neva bhikkhuvacanaṃ vuttaṃ, na gihivacanaṃ vuttaṃ, iti imamatthaṃ dassetīti yojanā.

34.Kinti: What is it named as, the edible and the consumable? Voti: By you. Gahapatīti: Is a term of address. Therānaṃ atthāyāti sambandho: It is connected to 'for the sake of the elders'. Paṭiyattanti: Prepared. "Etaṃ avocā"ti: This shows the sandhi of lopa and ādesa in etadavocā. Yadidanti: Because the word is connected with the word "tilasaṃguḷikā," it is feminine; thus, he says, "yā ayaṃ." Tilasakkhalikāti: Sakkhalikā mixed with sesame. "Sā natthī"ti: This shows that in the following sentence, the word yaṃ depends on the word taṃ in the preceding sentence. Eko purisoti sambandho: One person; this is the connection. Pūviyoti: Pūvaṃ, pūvena vā kayavikkayo (either cake or buying and selling with cake). Tenāti: By that reason. Nanti: To the householder. Theroti: Sudhamma Thera. Yadeva kiñcīti: Showing that it is said "kiñci eva yaṃ vacanaṃ", he says, "any speech about sesame cake." Idanti: This meaning. Soti: That chick. Kākavassitanti: kākassa vassitaṃ, neva akāsīti sambandho (caused by a crow, he did not do so); this is the connection. Tayāpīti: The word pi refers to the chick. Neither the bhikkhu's word was spoken, nor the householder's word was spoken; this shows this meaning; this is the connection.

Adhammakammādidvādasakakathā
Adhammakammādidvādasakakathā

39.Purimehi kammehīti sambandho.Tatthāti aṅgesu. Yathā parisakkiyamāne gihino lābhaṃ na labhantīti yojanā. Paripubbo sakkadhātu parakkamatthoti āha ‘‘parakkamanto’’ti.Tatthāti anatthādīsu.Atthabhaṅgoti gihīnaṃ atthassa bhaṅgo.Avasananti gihīnaṃ avasanaṃ.Gihīnanti ettha sāmyatthe sāmivacananti āha ‘‘gihīnaṃ santike’’ti. Yathā kariyamāne sacco hoti, evaṃ na karotīti yojanā.Ekaṅgenāpīti pisaddo sambhāvanattho, tato adhikehi aṅgehi kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Etthāti paṭisāraṇīyakamme. Paṭimukhaṃ attano dosaṃ sarāpetabbaṃ anena vinayakammenātipaṭisāraṇīyaṃ,tameva kammaṃ paṭisāraṇīyakammaṃ.

39. Connected with "Purimehi kammehi" (by past actions). Tattha (therein): in the constituent parts. Just as laypeople do not obtain gain when being solicited, that is the connection. The prefix 'pari' combined with the root 'sakk' means effort, therefore he said "making an effort." Tattha (therein): in disadvantage etc. Atthabhaṅgo (loss of advantage): the loss of advantage for laypeople. Avasanaṃ (conclusion): the conclusion for laypeople. Gihīnaṃ (for the laypeople): here, the genitive case has the sense of possession, therefore he said, "in the presence of the laypeople." Just as when doing something, it is true, so he does not do it, that is the connection. Ekaṅgenāpi (even with one factor): the particle 'pi' implies probability; what need to speak of more factors than that, he shows. Ettha (here): in the paṭisāraṇīyakamma. Because one is made to remember one's own fault face to face by this Vinaya procedure, it is called paṭisāraṇīyaṃ; that same procedure is paṭisāraṇīyakamama.

5. Āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammakathā
5. Account of the Ukkhepanīyakamma for Non-Confession of an Offense

46.Saṃsathāti ettha saṃsadhātuyā kathanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ārocethā’’ti. Tumhe saṃsatha, kathethāti attho.

46. Saṃsathā (inform): here, showing the meaning of the verb 'saṃs', he said, "announce." You should inform, that is the meaning.

50.Bhaṇḍanakārako hotītiādi kāraṇūpacāravasena vuttoti āha ‘‘bhaṇḍanādipaccayā’’tiādi. Bhaṇḍanakārakādi kāraṇaṃ, tena āpannā āpatti phalaṃ, tassā adassane ukkhepanīyakammaṃ kātabbanti adhippāyo.Tassāti āpattiyā.

50. Bhaṇḍanakārako hotī (he is a quarrel-maker) etc. is said by way of treatment of the cause, therefore he said, "because of quarreling etc." Being a quarrel-maker etc. is the cause; the offense one has committed is the result; ukkhepanīyakamma should be done for the non-confession of that, that is the idea. Tassā (of that): of the offense.

51.Etthāti ukkhepanīyakamme.Tatthāti tecattālīsavattesu.Anuddhaṃsetabboti ettha dhaṃsadhātuyā gatyatthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘na codetabbo’’ti. ‘‘Rajonuddhaṃsatī’’tiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 2.101) hi dhaṃsadhātu gatyatthe vattati. ‘‘Na bhikkhu bhikkhūhī’’ti ettha soyeva bhikkhu teheva bhikkhūhīti atthaṃ nivārento āha ‘‘añño bhikkhu aññehi bhikkhūhī’’ti. Na gihiddhajoti ettha gihīnaṃ dhajogihiddhajoti vutte odātavatthādīnīti āha ‘‘odātavatthānī’’tiādi.Na titthiyādipadattayanti ‘‘na titthiyā sevitabbā, bhikkhū sevitabbā, bhikkhusikkhāya sikkhitabba’’nti padānaṃ tayaṃ. ‘‘Na apasādetabbo’’ti iminā naāsādetabboti ettha āpubbasadadhātuyā apapubbasadadhātuyā samānabhāvaṃ dasseti.‘‘Anto vā bahi vāti’’ ettha kassa anto vā bahi vāti āha ‘‘vihārassā’’ti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃvattanti yojanā.Imināti āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammena.

51. Ettha (here): in the ukkhepanīyakamma. Tattha (there): in the forty-three duties. Anuddhaṃsetabbo (should not be censured): here, rejecting the meaning of going for the verb 'dhṃs', he said "should not be rebuked." For in instances such as "Rajonuddhaṃsatī" (bu. vaṃ. 2.101), the verb 'dhṃs' occurs in the sense of going. In "Na bhikkhu bhikkhūhī" (a bhikkhu should not...), preventing the meaning that the same bhikkhu is by those same bhikkhus, he said "another bhikkhu by other bhikkhus." Na gihiddhajoti (not a layman’s flag): here, the flag of the laypeople is gihiddhajo, and when that is said, it refers to white cloths etc., therefore he said "white cloths etc." Na titthiyādipadattaya (not the triad of words beginning with "titthiya"): the triad of words is "na titthiyā sevitabbā, bhikkhū sevitabbā, bhikkhusikkhāya sikkhitabba" (the titthiyas should not be associated with, the bhikkhus should be associated with, one should train in the training of the bhikkhus). With "Na apasādetabbo" (should not be disparaged), he shows the similarity of the verb 'sad' with the prefix 'ā' to the verb 'sad' with the prefix 'apa' in "na āsādetabbo" (should not be approached). "Anto vā bahi vā" (inside or outside): here, inside or outside of what?, he said "of the monastery." The rest should all be connected. Iminā (by this): by the ukkhepanīyakamma for non-confession of the offense.

65.Tassāti āpattiyā.Idhāti pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge kate ukkhepanīyakamme. Āpattiadassanādīsu uddharitvā khipīyati apanīyati anena vinayakammenātiukkhepanīyaṃ,tameva kammaṃukkhepanīyakammaṃ.

65. Tassā (of that): of the offense. Idhā (here): in the ukkhepanīyakamma done when the evil view has not been relinquished. Because one is lifted up and cast away, removed, by this Vinaya procedure, for non-confession of an offense etc., it is called ukkhepanīyaṃ; that same procedure is ukkhepanīyakammaṃ.

Iti kammakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the section on procedures (Kammakkhandhaka).

2. Pārivāsikakkhandhakaṃ

2. Pārivāsikakkhandhaka (Section on Probation)

1. Pārivāsikavattakathā
1. Account of the Pārivāsikavatta (Duties of a Probationer)

75.Pārivāsikakkhandhakepārivāsikāti padassa parivāsaṃ parivasantīti pārivāsikāti dassento āha ‘‘parivāsaṃ parivasantā’’ti.Tatthāti ‘‘parivāsaṃ parivasantā’’ti taddhitavākye.Tesūti catubbidhesu parivāsesu.Titthiyaparivāsoti titthiyānaṃ parivāso, titthiyānaṃ vā dātabbo parivāso, titthiyehi vā parivasitabbo parivāso titthiyaparivāso.Appaṭicchannaparivāsoti appaṭicchanno parivāso appaṭicchannaparivāso.Tatthāti appaṭicchannaparivāse.Yanti vacanaṃ.Ayaṃ panāti ayaṃ paṭicchannaparivāso pana.Idhāti pārivāsikakkhandhake.Sesāti appaṭicchannaparivāsato sesā.Tayoti appaṭicchannaparivāsādayo tayo, dātabbāti sambandho. Kassa dātabbāti āha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi.Āpannā cevāti āpajjitabbā ceva.Tesūti tividhesu parivāsesu.Ete panāti tayo pana.Idhāti pārivāsikakkhandhake.Tasmāti yasmā idha adhippetā, tasmā.Etesūti tividhesu parivāsesu.

75. In the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka, showing that the word pārivāsikā (probationers) means "those who are living out probation (parivāsaṃ parivasantīti pārivāsikā)," he said "those who are living out probation." Tattha (therein): in the sentence with the taddhita suffix "parivāsaṃ parivasantā." Tesū (among these): among the four kinds of probation. Titthiyaparivāso (probation for a titthiya): probation for the titthiyas, or probation to be given to the titthiyas, or probation to be lived out by the titthiyas is titthiyaparivāso. Appaṭicchannaparivāso (unconcealed probation): probation that is unconcealed is appaṭicchannaparivāso. Tattha (therein): in appaṭicchannaparivāsa. Yanti (which): the word. Ayaṃ panā (but this): but this paṭicchannaparivāso (concealed probation). Idhā (here): in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka. Sesā (the remaining): the remaining ones from appaṭicchannaparivāsa. Tayo (three): the three beginning with appaṭicchannaparivāsa, should be given, is the connection. To whom should they be given?, he said, "by whom" etc. Āpannā cevā (and should be committed): and to be committed. Tesū (among these): among the three kinds of probation. Ete panā (but these): but these three. Idhā (here): in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka. Tasmā (therefore): because they are intended here, therefore. Etesū (among these): among the three kinds of probation.

Pakatattānaṃ bhikkhūnanti ettha adhippetapakatatte dassento āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā’’tiādi.Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahādīnampīti ettha ādisaddena mānattārahamānattacārikaabbhānārahādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Pisaddena pakatipakatattaṃ apekkhati.Teti pakatattā. Yaṃ abhivādanādiṃ karontīti yojanā.Sādiyantīti ettha sādiyanaṃ nāma sampaṭicchananti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchantī’’ti.Tatthāti abhivādanādīsu, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Sāmīcikammanti etaṃ ābhisamācārikassa adhivacananti yojanā.Abhivādanādīnīti abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammāni.Bījanavātadānādinoti bījaniyā paharitena pavattassa vātassa dānādino.Āsanābhihāranti ettha abhiharaṇaṃ abhihāro, āsanassa abhihāro āsanābhihāroti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘āsanassa abhiharaṇa’’nti. Paññāpanampi abhiharitvā paññāpitattā abhihāroyeva nāmāti āha ‘‘paññāpanameva vā’’ti. ‘‘Pādadhovanaudaka’’nti iminā pādassa dhovanaṃ udakaṃpādodakanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Pādaṭṭhapanaka’’nti iminā pādassa ṭhapanakaṃ pīṭhaṃpādapīṭhanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Pādaghaṃsanaṃ vā’’ti iminā pādassa ghaṃsanaṃ kathalikaṃpādakathalikanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Saddhivihārikānampi abhivādanādinti sambandho. Pisaddena aññesaṃ sādiyantassa kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Teti saddhivihārikā.Saddhāpabbajitāti saddhāya pabbajitā.Kulaputtāti jātikulaputtā, ācārakulaputtā ca. Karonti, āpucchantiyevāti sambandho. Vāritampi asādiyanaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘vāritakālato paṭṭhāya anāpattī’’ti.Mithu yathāvuḍḍhanti ettha mithusaddo aññamaññapariyāyo, yathāsaddo yaṃsaddapariyāyo, vicchattho cāti āha ‘‘aññamaññaṃ yo yo vuḍḍho’’ti. Aññamaññañhi mithati saṅgamaṃ karotītimithūti vuccati.Tena tenāti bhikkhunā, ‘‘sāditu’’nti pade bhāvakattā. Sādituṃ anujānāmīti sambandho.

Pakatattānaṃ bhikkhūnanti (to bhikkhus who have regained their former state): showing the intended pakatatta (former state), he said "excepting" etc. Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahādīnampī (even to those who are worthy of having their mūlāya-offense revoked, etc.): here, by the word 'ādi' (etc.), he includes those who are worthy of mānatta, those who are mānattacārika, those who are unworthy of abbhāna etc. The particle 'pi' considers pakatipakatatta (natural former state). Te (they): those who have regained their former state. The connection is that they do honoring etc. Sādiyantī (they approve): here, sādiyana means acceptance, therefore he said, "they accept." Tattha (therein): in the honoring etc.; this is a locative case used for specifying. Sāmīcikammanti (proper behavior): this is a designation for ābhisamācārika, that is the connection. Abhivādanādīnī (honoring etc.): acts of honoring, rising up, and joining the palms. Bījanavātadānādino (by giving a fan, wind, etc.): by giving wind produced by waving a fan. Āsanābhihāranti (bringing a seat): here, abhiharaṇaṃ (bringing) is abhihāro, āsanassa abhihāro (bringing of a seat) is āsanābhihāro, showing the meaning of the word, he said, "bringing of a seat." Even the arranging is also abhihāro, because it is arranged after being brought, therefore he said, "or just arranging." With "Pādadhovanaudaka" (water for washing the feet), he shows that pādassa dhovanaṃ udakaṃ is pādodaka (water for the feet). With "Pādaṭṭhapanaka" (a footrest), he shows that pādassa ṭhapanakaṃ pīṭhaṃ is pādapīṭha (a footstool). With "Pādaghaṃsanaṃ vā" (or a foot-wiper), he shows that pādassa ghaṃsanaṃ kathalikaṃ is pādakathalika (a foot-wiper). There is a connection to the honoring etc. for the saddhivihārikas also. The particle 'pi' shows that there is no need to speak of one who approves of others. Te (they): the saddhivihārikas. Saddhāpabbajitā (those who have gone forth through faith): those who have gone forth through faith. Kulaputtā (sons of good families): sons of good birth families and sons of good conduct families. They do, they ask permission, that is the connection. Even something that has been forbidden is considered non-approval, therefore he said, "from the time of being forbidden, there is no offense." Mithu yathāvuḍḍhanti (mutually, according to seniority): here, the word 'mithu' is a synonym for 'aññamañña' (mutually), the word 'yathā' is a synonym for 'yaṃ' (which), and it has the sense of separation, therefore he said, "mutually, whoever is older." For 'aññamaññaṃhi mithati saṅgamaṃ karotīti' is called mithū (mutually, because it makes contact). Tena tenā (by each): by the bhikkhu; in the word "sādituṃ," due to it being in the bhāva sense. The connection is "I allow one to approve."

yathāvuḍḍhanti catutthīabyayībhāvaṃ dasseti. Purimapade pana paṭhamāabyayībhāvo.Pāḷiyāti pantiyā.Tatthevāti saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne eva.Pavāraṇāyapīti pisaddena na kevalaṃ uposatheyeva, atha kho pavāraṇāyapīti dasseti. Saṅghena bhājiyamānanti sambandho.

yathāvuḍḍhanti (according to seniority): shows the fourth-case অব্যয়ীভাব (indeclinable compound). In the first word, however, it is a first-case অব্যয়ীভাব. Pāḷiyā (in order): in line. Tatthevā (in that same place): in that same saṅghanavakaṭṭhāna (newly assigned place in the Sangha). Pavāraṇāyapī (even for the pavāraṇā): the particle 'pi' shows that it is not only for the uposatha, but also for the pavāraṇā. To be divided by the Sangha, that is the connection.

Oṇojananti avanudate oṇojanaṃ. Avapubbo nudadhātu nakārassa ṇakāraṃ, dakārassa ca jakāraṃ katvā oṇojananti vuccati. Nudadhātu apanayanattho, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vissajjanaṃ vuccatī’’ti.Uddesabhattādīnītiādisaddena salākabhattādīni saṅgaṇhāti.Assāti pārivāsikassa.Tānīti dve tīṇi uddesabhattādīni.Heṭṭhāti attano heṭṭhā.Gāhethāti navakatare bhikkhū gāhāpetha.Bhattapaccāsāti bhattameva paccāsā bhattapaccāsā, paccāsābhattanti attho. ‘‘Vissajjetabbānī’’ti iminā avanuditabbantioṇojananti atthaṃ dasseti.Evanti gahetvā vissajjamāneti yojanā.Tānīti uddesabhattādīni.Yadi pana na gaṇhātīti sace saṅghato vassaggena na gaṇhāti.Na vissajjetīti sace aññassa na vissajjeti.Odissāti uddisitvā.Tassāti pārivāsikassa.ti yasmā. Saṅghanavakaṭṭhāne nisinnassa tassāti yojanā.Bhattaggeti bhattassa gahaṇaṭṭhāne.Soti pārivāsiko, mā kilamitthāti sambandho.Idanti oṇojanaṃ.Assāti pārivāsikassa, anuññātanti sambandho.

Oṇojananti (setting aside): he sets aside, oṇojanaṃ. The verb 'nud' with the prefix 'ava,' having made the 'na' into 'ṇa' and the 'da' into 'ja,' is called oṇojanaṃ. The verb 'nud' has the meaning of removal, therefore it was said, "vissajjanaṃ vuccatī" (it is called relinquishing). Uddesabhattādīnī (food designated by name, etc.): by the word 'ādi' (etc.) he includes salākabhatta (food distributed by ticket), etc. Assā (for him): for the pārivāsika. Tānī (those): the two or three uddesabhattas etc. Heṭṭhā (below): below himself. Gāhethā (have them taken): have the newer bhikkhus take them. Bhattapaccāsā (anticipation of food): bhattameva paccāsā bhattapaccāsā, the meaning is "food that is anticipated." With "Vissajjetabbānī" (should be relinquished), he shows that avanuditabbanti is the meaning of oṇojananti (setting aside). Evanti (so): having taken them and being about to relinquish them, that is the connection. Tānī (those): the uddesabhattas etc. Yadi pana na gaṇhātī (but if he does not take): if he does not take from the Sangha with the vassagga (rainy season group). Na vissajjetī (he does not relinquish): if he does not relinquish to another. Odissā (having designated): having designated. Tassā (for him): for the pārivāsika. (for): because. For him who is sitting in the saṅghanavakaṭṭhāna, that is the connection. Bhattagge (in the refectory): in the place where food is taken. So (he): the pārivāsika; do not be weary, that is the connection. Idanti (this): the oṇojanaṃ. Assā (for him): for the pārivāsika; it is allowed, that is the connection.

Catussālabhattanti catumukhā sālā catussālā bhojanasālā, tattha paṭipāṭiyā dinnaṃ bhattaṃ catussālabhattaṃ.Etanti catussālabhattaṃ.Pāḷiyāti bhikkhūnaṃ pāḷiyā.Osakkitvāti heṭṭhā sakkitvā.Hatthapāseti bhattadāyakassa hatthapāse.Senoti kulalo. ‘‘Ārāmikasamaṇuddesehī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘āharāpetu’’nti pade kāritakammaṃ.Sayamevāti pārivāsikena anāṇatto hutvā sayameva.Mahāpeḷabhattepīti mahatiyaṃ peḷāyaṃ pakkhipitvā dinne bhattepi.Yattha panāti parivisaṭṭhāne pana.

Catussālabhattanti (food from the four-sided hall): a four-sided hall is a catussālā, a dining hall; the food given there in order is catussālabhattaṃ. Etanti (this): this catussālabhattaṃ. Pāḷiyā (in order): in the bhikkhus' order. Osakkitvā (having placed aside): having placed aside below. Hatthapāse (within arm's reach): within arm's reach of the food-giver. Seno (Sena): the potter. The phrase "Ārāmikasamaṇuddesehī" (by the ārāmika and the novice) is a causative action in the phrase "āharāpetu" (should have it brought). Sayamevā (himself): by the pārivāsika himself, without being instructed. Mahāpeḷabhattepī (even in the great-basket food): even in the food given after putting it into a large basket. Yattha panā (but where): but in the place of distribution.

76.Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanāti ettha tasaddassa aniyamaniddesabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘idāni yā ayaṃ sammāvattanā vuttā’’ti. Sammā vattitabbaṃ etāyātisammāvattanā. Tatthāti sammāvattanāyaṃ.Na upasampādetabbanti ettha ācariyena hutvā kammavācāsāvanampi upasampādanamevāti āha ‘‘ācariyena hutvāpi kammavācā na sāvetabbā’’ti.Aññasmiṃ asatīti attanā aññasmiṃ kammavācāvācake asati. Na nissayo dātabboti ettha āgantukānameva nissayo na dātabbo, na dinnanissayānampīti dassento āha ‘‘āgantukānaṃ nissayo na dātabbo’’tiādi, yehipi bhikkhūhi gahitoti sambandho.

76.Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanāti (here is the proper conduct): here, showing the indefinite specification of the word 'ta', he said, "now, this proper conduct that has been spoken of." Sammā vattitabbaṃ etāyāti sammāvattanā (because one should conduct oneself properly by this, it is called sammāvattanā). Tattha (therein): in the sammāvattanā. Na upasampādetabbanti (should not be given the higher ordination): here, he said, "even having been the ācariya, a kammavācā should not be recited," because even the reciting of the kammavācā by being an ācariya is upasampāda itself. Aññasmiṃ asatī (when there is no other): when there is no other reciter of the kammavācā besides himself. Na nissayo dātabboti (a preceptor should not be given): here, showing that nissaya should only not be given to newcomers, and not even to those who have already been given nissaya, he said "nissaya should not be given to newcomers" etc.; the connection is "by whichever bhikkhus it has been taken."

Aññosāmaṇeroti pakatattakāle upajjhaṃ datvā gahitasāmaṇerehi añño sāmaṇero.Ādhipaccaṭṭhānabhūtāti sabbasammutīnaṃ adhipatibhāvassa ṭhānabhūtā.Paṭibalassāti bhikkhuniyo ovadituṃ paṭibalassa. Iminā laddhasammutikena āṇatto aladdhasammutikopi garudhammehi vā aññehi vā bhikkhuniyo ovadituṃ labhatīti dasseti. Āgatā bhikkhuniyo vattabbāti sambandho.Voti tumhākaṃ.Soti bhikkhu.Voti tumhākaṃ, dassatīti sambandho.

Aññosāmaṇeroti (another sāmaṇera): another sāmaṇera from the sāmaṇeras who were given an upajjhaya and taken during the time when he had regained his former state. Ādhipaccaṭṭhānabhūtā (being in a position of authority): being in a position of the state of authority of all agreements. Paṭibalassā (who is capable): who is capable of advising the bhikkhunis. By this, he shows that even one who has not received the sammuti can advise the bhikkhunis by the garudhamma or other means, having been instructed by one who has received the sammuti. The bhikkhunis who have come should be told, that is the connection. Vo (to you): to you all. So (he): that bhikkhu. Vo (to you): to you all; he will give, that is the connection.

Sukkavissaṭṭhiyāti sukkavissaṭṭhiāpattikāraṇā. Kāyasaṃsaggādigarukāpatti nāpajjitabbāti yojanā. Āpattikkhandhavasena āpattivatthūnaṃ pāpiṭṭhabhāvañca pāpiṭṭhatarabhāvañca vitthārento āha ‘‘sattasu hī’’tiādi.Pāpiṭṭhatarāti dubbhāsitāpattito dukkaṭāpatti pāpiṭṭhatarā.Tāsanti sattannaṃ āpattīnaṃ.Purimanayenevāti purimānaṃ āpattīnaṃ nayeneva.Bhedoti vatthūnaṃ viseso. Evaṃ āpattikkhandhavasena āpattivatthūnaṃ pāpiṭṭhapāpiṭṭhatarabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sikkhāpadavasena tesaṃ taṃ dassento āha ‘‘paṇṇattivajjasikkhāpade panā’’tiādi.Ubhayampīti vatthuāpattisaṅkhātaṃ ubhayampi.

Sukkavissaṭṭhiyāti (by emission of semen): because of the offense of emission of semen. Serious offenses such as bodily contact should not be committed, that is the connection. Expanding on the fact that the objects of offenses are more and more evil based on the category of offenses, he said "for in the seven" etc. Pāpiṭṭhatarā (more evil): the dukkaṭa offense is more evil than the dubbhāsita offense. Tāsanti (of those): of the seven offenses. Purimanayenevā (just by the former method): just by the method of the former offenses. Bhedo (difference): the distinction of the objects. Having shown the more-and-more evil nature of the objects of offenses based on the category of offenses in this way, now, showing that based on the sikkhāpada, he said "but in the paṇṇattivajja sikkhāpada" etc. Ubhayampī (both): both the object and the offense.

Kammanti ettha kāraṇabhūtassa kammassa nāmaṃ kāriyabhūtāyaṃ kammavācāyaṃ upacāravasena kāriyabhūtā kammavācā kammanti vuccatīti āha ‘‘parivāsakammavācā vuccatī’’ti. Kammasmiṃ sati, kammena vā vacitabbātikammavācāti vacanattho kātabbo.Kasikammanti kasisaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ.Gorakkhakammanti gorakkhasaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ. ‘‘Kammaṃ kata’’nti iminā kammaṃ karontītikammikāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Teti kammikā bhikkhū, na garahitabbāti sambandho.

Kammanti (procedure): here, he said "the parivāsakammavācā is called," because the name of the procedure that is the cause is spoken of as the procedure that is the effect in a way of treating the procedure that is the effect. Kammavācā (declaration of the procedure) is a word to be made with the meaning, "because it should be spoken with the procedure or by the procedure, it is called kammavācā. Kasikammanti (agricultural work): the procedure known as agriculture. Gorakkhakammanti (cattle-herding work): the procedure known as cattle-herding. With "Kammaṃ kata" (work is done), he shows that kammaṃ karontīti kammikā (those who do work, are called kammikā). Te (they): those kammika bhikkhus; they should not be criticized, that is the connection.

vacanīyaṃ,saṃvijjati vacanīyaṃ assātisavacanīyaṃ,taṃ na kātabbanti attho. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘palibodhatthāya hī’’tiādi. Yāva na taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasantaṃ hoti, tāva imamhā āvāsā ekapadampi mā pakkāmīti yojanā.Teti tuyhaṃ.

vacanīyaṃ,saṃvijjati vacanīyaṃ assātisavacanīyaṃ, (liable to be spoken against; having that which is liable to be spoken against) that should not be done, that is the meaning. Expanding on that very meaning, he said "for for the sake of obstruction" etc. As long as that issue is not settled, you should not leave this residence even for a single step, that is the connection. Te (to you): to you.

Anuvādoti ettha anusāsanavasena aññe vadatīti anuvādoti vutte jeṭṭhakaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘vihāre jeṭṭhakaṭṭhānaṃ na kātabba’’nti. Jeṭṭhakaṭṭhānaṃ sarūpena dassento āha ‘‘pātimokkhuddesakena vā’’tiādi.Meti mayhaṃ.Tanti tavaṃ.Na codetabboti ettha kena na codetabboti āha ‘‘vatthunā vā āpattiyā vā’’ti.Na sāretabboti na sarāpetabbo.Na bhikkhūhisampayojetabbanti ettha bhikkhūhi attanā kalahavasena na sampayojetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘aññamaññaṃ yojetvā kalaho na kāretabbo’’ti.

Anuvādoti (recitation): here, saying that anuvāda is when others speak by way of instruction, he said "a senior position should not be made in the monastery." Showing the senior position in its own form, he said "by the pātimokkha-reciter" etc. Me (to me): to me. Tanti (you): to you. Na codetabbo (should not be reproached): here, he said "by a thing or by an offense," asking by what he should not be reproached. Na sāretabbo (should not be reminded): should not be reminded. Na bhikkhūhisampayojetabbanti (should not be involved with bhikkhus): here, showing that one should not be involved with bhikkhus oneself in a way of quarreling, he said "a quarrel should not be caused by involving one another."

Saṅghattherena hutvāti saṅghattherena hontenapīti attho. Purato agantabbe samāne kiṃ pacchato gantabbanti āha ‘‘dvādasahattha’’ntiādi.Āsanapariyantoti āsanameva pariyanto lāmakoti āsanapariyanto, tadatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṅghanavakāsanaṃ vuccatī’’ti.Svāssāti so assa.Soti āsanapariyanto.Assāti pārivāsikassa.Tatthāti āsanapariyante.Ayanti pārivāsiko, na labhatīti sambandho.Gahitāvasesāti gahitāhi seyyāhi avasesā.Maṅgulagūthabharitāti maṅgulānaṃ gūthehi pūritā.Assāti pārivāsikassa. Rajehi hatā nāsitā bhūmi etthātirajohatabhūmi. Jatukamūsikabharitāti jatūhi ca mūsikāhi ca pūritā.Paṇṇasālāti paṇṇehi chāditā sālā.Assāti pārivāsikassa. Sabbepi āvāsāti yojanā.Etehīti pakatattehi.Tesūti āvāsesu.Yanti āvāsaṃ.Paccayanti vassāvāsikalābhaṃ.Ekapasseti bhikkhūnaṃ pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhatvā ekasmiṃ passe.

Saṅghattherena hutvāti meaning, even by becoming a Saṅghatthera. Regarding why one should go back when one should not go forward, he says, "twelve cubits," etc. Āsanapariyantoti the seat itself is the limit, inferior, therefore āsanapariyanto; showing its meaning, he says, "it is called saṅghanavakāsana." Svāssāti that for him. Soti the limit of the seat. Assāti for the parivāsika. Tatthāti at the limit of the seat. Ayanti the parivāsika; he does not obtain, is the connection. Gahitāvasesāti remaining from what has been taken away. Maṅgulagūthabharitāti filled with the excrement of maṅgulas. Assāti for the parivāsika. Rajohatabhūmi the ground that has been struck and destroyed by dust. Jatukamūsikabharitāti filled with jatuka and mice. Paṇṇasālāti a hut covered with leaves. Assāti for the parivāsika. All should be connected to the monasteries. Etehīti by these present ones. Tesūti in those monasteries. Yanti to the monastery. Paccayanti gain for dwelling during the rains. Ekapasseti on one side, not standing in the line of bhikkhus.

Assāti pārivāsikassa, dentīti sambandho.So evāti āsanādipariyanto eva. Ñātipavāritaṭṭhāne nimantitenāti sambandho.Tatthāti taṃ kulaṃ.Saṃvidhāyāti saṃvidahitvā.Assāti kulassa, bhaveyya vā.

Assāti for the parivāsika; they give, is the connection. So evāti that very limit of the seat, etc. It should be connected, by one invited in a place favored by relatives. Tatthāti to that family. Saṃvidhāyāti having arranged. Assāti for the family; or it may be.

Harāyamānenāti lajjamānena.Yenāpīti pārivāsikenapi.Samādinnanti āraññikadhutaṅgasamādinnaṃ.Tathāti yathā āraññikaṅgaṃ na samādātabbaṃ, tathā.Piṇḍapātikadhutaṅgampīti pisaddo āraññikaṅgaṃ apekkhati.Yo panāti pārivāsiko pana.

Harāyamānenāti by one who is ashamed. Yenāpīti even by the parivāsika. Samādinnanti undertaking the araññika dhutaṅga. Tathāti just as the araññikaṅga should not be undertaken, so too. Piṇḍapātikadhutaṅgampīti the "pi" particle refers to the araññikaṅga. Yo panāti but whoever, the parivāsika.

tappaccayāti ettha paccayasaddo kāraṇattho, nissakkavacanañca kāraṇatthe hotīti dasseti. So ratticchedo eva paccayotappaccayoti vacanattho kātabbo. ‘‘Sāmaṇerehī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘pacāpetvā’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ. Etthāpi pakatiyā nīharāpetvāpi vihāre pacāpetvāpi bhuñjantassa paṭisedho natthi. Kasmā? ‘‘Tappaccayā’’ti vuttattā.Gāmeti mahāgāme, sabbakālaṃ anekasatehi bhikkhūhi avivitte gāmeti attho.Gāmakāvāsanti gāmoyeva khuddakaṭṭhena gāmako, tasmiṃ kārito āvāso gāmakāvāso, taṃ.

tappaccayāti here, the word paccaya has the meaning of cause, and it shows that the nipāta word "eva" is also in the sense of cause. That very break of the night is the cause, so the meaning of tappaccayo should be made. The phrase "by sāmaṇeras" is the causative object in the word "having cooked". Here too, there is no prohibition for one who, by nature, having had food brought out, or having had it cooked in the monastery, eats it. Why? Because it was said, "tappaccayā." Gāmeti in a large village, meaning in a village that is never separated from hundreds of bhikkhus at all times. Gāmakāvāsanti the village itself, a small one, is a gāmaka; the dwelling made in it is a gāmakāvāsa, that.

Tatthāti kismiñci vihāre, sabbe bhikkhūti sambandho.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāne. Na ekacce passati, apassitattā nāroceti, ratticchedova hotīti adhippāyo.

Tatthāti in some monastery; all the bhikkhus, is the connection. Tattha tatthāti in that particular place where he is staying. He does not see some, he does not announce because he has not seen; the intention is that only the break of the night occurs.

Etthāti ‘‘āgantukassa ārocetabba’’nti pade.Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘āgantukena ārocetabba’’nti pade vuttanayeneva. Taṃ vuttanayamāvikaronto āha ‘‘sace’’tiādi.Tesampīti āgantukānampi.Tassāti pārivāsikassa.Ajānantassevāti anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.Ayañca panāti pārivāsiko ca.Gatakāleti āgantukānaṃ gatakāle.Yepīti āgantukāpi.Okkamitvāti osaritvā, pavisitvāti attho.Ayañcāti pārivāsiko ca, jānātīti sambandho.Nesanti āgantukānaṃ.Yopīti āgantukopi.Assāti pārivāsikassa.Aññātattāti āgatabhāvassa ajānitattā. ‘‘Abbhāna’’nti padaṃ ‘‘karotī’’ti pade kammaṃ, ‘‘hotī’’ti pade kattā.Adhikā rattiyoti āpattipaṭicchannarattito adhikā rattiyo.Ayanti pārivāsikavattapaṭipadā.Apaṇṇakapaṭipadāti aviraddhapaṭipadā, ekaṃsapaṭipadāti attho.

Etthāti in the phrase "it should be announced to the newcomer." Vuttanayenevāti in the manner stated in the phrase "it should be announced by the newcomer." Revealing that stated manner, he says, "if," etc. Tesampīti even for the newcomers. Tassāti for the parivāsika. Ajānantassevāti this is a term of ownership in disregard. Ayañca panāti and this parivāsika. Gatakāleti when the newcomers have left. Yepīti even the newcomers. Okkamitvāti having descended, meaning having entered. Ayañcāti and this parivāsika; he knows, is the connection. Nesanti of the newcomers. Yopīti even the newcomer. Assāti for the parivāsika. Aññātattāti because of not knowing the fact of his arrival. The word "abbhāna" is the object in the phrase "he does," the subject in the phrase "it is." Adhikā rattiyoti nights more than the night of concealed offense. Ayanti the practice of the parivāsika's duties. Apaṇṇakapaṭipadāti the practice that is not violated, meaning the one-sided practice.

Sāvetunti suṇāpetuṃ.Visayāvisayenāti ārocetuṃ desādesena. Karavīkatissatthero āhāti sambandho.

Sāvetunti to cause to hear. Visayāvisayenāti by announcing to the country. The connection is that Karavīkatissa Thera said.

uposatheti ettha uposathasaddassa pātimokkhuddesādayo atthe nivatteti.Pavāraṇāyapīti pavāraṇadivasepi.Gantunti bhikkhussa ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ gantuṃ.Dūtenāpīti ettha anadhippetadūtaṃ paṭikkhipitvā adhippetadūtaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anupasampannaṃ…pe… ārocāpetabba’’nti.

uposatheti here, the word uposatha excludes meanings such as the recitation of the Pātimokkha. Pavāraṇāyapīti even on the day of pavāraṇā. Gantunti to go to the bhikkhu’s place of dwelling. Dūtenāpīti here, having rejected the unintended messenger, in order to show the intended messenger, it was said, "anupasampannaṃ…pe… ārocāpetabba."

Suññavihāroti bhikkhūhi vivittavihāro.Yatthāti yasmiṃ āvāse.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Tatthāti suññavihāre. Dasavidhantarāye sati pana gantabbamevāti yojanā.Nānāsaṃvāsakehīti kammanānāsaṃvāsakaladdhinānāsaṃvāsakehi.

Suññavihāroti a monastery that is secluded from bhikkhus. Yatthāti in which monastery. ti truly, or because. Tatthāti in that empty monastery. However, if there are ten kinds of dangers, then it should definitely be gone to, is the connection. Nānāsaṃvāsakehīti by those of different saṃvāsa due to karma, and those of different saṃvāsa due to views.

81.Āvāsādīnaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘āvāso nāmā’’tiādi.Tatiyapadenāti ‘‘āvāse vā anāvāse vā’’ti tatiyapadena.Etesūti āvāsādīsu.Chadanatoti chadanakoṭito.Antoāvāseti bhittiparicchinne antoāvāse.Avisesenāti ‘‘ukkhittako’’ti vā ‘‘pārivāsiko’’ti vā visesaṃ akatvā sāmaññena.Udakapātenāti chadanato udakaṃ patati etthāti udakapāto, tena.Pañcavaṇṇacchadanabaddhaṭṭhānesūti pañcapamāṇena chadanena baddhaṭṭhānesu etesu āvāsesūti sambandho. Pārivāsikassa ca ukkhittakassa ca pakatattena saddhiṃ vāritanti yojanā.Nānūpacārepīti pisaddena ekūpacāre pana kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Etthāti ekacchanne āvāsādike, sace nipajjatīti sambandho.Tasminti saṭṭhivassepi pārivāsike.

81. Showing the nature of dwellings, etc., he says, "āvāso nāmā," etc. Tatiyapadenāti by the third phrase, "āvāse vā anāvāse vā." Etesūti in these dwellings, etc. Chadanatoti from the edge of the roof. Antoāvāseti within the inner dwelling enclosed by walls. Avisesenāti without making a distinction whether "ukkhittako" or "pārivāsiko," generally. Udakapātenāti udakapāto is where water falls from the roof; by that. Pañcavaṇṇacchadanabaddhaṭṭhānesūti in these dwellings that are bound by roofs of five spans, is the connection. It should be connected, the parivāsika and the ukkhittaka were warded off from the present ones. Nānūpacārepīti by the "pi" particle, what need is there to say about one upacāra? Etthāti in a dwelling, etc., with a single roof; if he lies down, is the connection. Tasminti in that parivāsika of sixty years as well.

Vuṭṭhātabbaṃ, nimantetabboti ettha kiṃ attano vuḍḍhataraṃ pakatattaṃ disvā vuṭṭhātabbaṃ, nimantetabboti āha ‘‘tadahupasampannampī’’tiādi.Obuddhanti palibuddhaṃ.Ekāsaneti ettha ekasaddo samānapariyāyoti āha ‘‘samānavassikāsane’’ti, samānavassikānaṃ āsaneti attho.Chamāyaṃ nisinneti ettha chamāsaddo bhūmipariyāyoti āha ‘‘bhūmiyaṃ nisinne’’ti.Itarenāti pārivāsikena. Sahāyena saddhiṃ caṅkamati viyāti yojanā. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ caṅkame’’ti iminā ekacaṅkamasaddassa tulyādhikaraṇasamāsavākyaṃ dasseti.

Vuṭṭhātabbaṃ, nimantetabboti here, one should get up and invite seeing the present one who is older than oneself? He says, "tadahupasampannampī," etc. Obuddhanti obstructed. Ekāsaneti here, the word "eka" is synonymous with "samāna," so he says, "samānavassikāsane," meaning the seat of those of equal seniority. Chamāyaṃ nisinneti here, the word "chama" is synonymous with "bhūmi," so he says, "bhūmiyaṃ nisinne." Itarenāti by the parivāsika. He walks together with a friend, is the connection. By "Ekasmiṃ caṅkame," he shows the appositional compound phrase of the word ekacaṅkama.

Chamāyaṃ caṅkamantanti ettha bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘chamāyaṃ caṅkamante’’ti.Ayaṃ panāti vakkhamāno pana.Etthāti ‘‘chamāyaṃ caṅkamante’’ti pāṭhe.Caṅkamanteti pakatatte caṅkamante.Na caṅkamitabbanti pārivāsikena na caṅkamitabbaṃ. Ko pana vādo iṭṭhakācayasampanne vedikāparikkhitte iti atthoti yojanā.Pabbatantaravanantaragumbantaresūti pabbatamajjhavanamajjhagumbamajjhesu, pabbatavivaravanavivaragumbavivaresu vā.Upacāranti dvādasahatthaṃ upacāraṃ.

Chamāyaṃ caṅkamantanti here, it is a statement used in the sense of location, so he says, "chamāyaṃ caṅkamante." Ayaṃ panāti but what will be said. Etthāti in the reading "chamāyaṃ caṅkamante." Caṅkamanteti while the present one is walking. Na caṅkamitabbanti the parivāsika should not walk. But what to say about one who is complete with a brick pile, surrounded by a vedikā, is the meaning, is the connection. Pabbatantaravanantaragumbantaresūti in the middle of the mountain, in the middle of the forest, in the middle of the thicket, or in the crevices of the mountain, in the crevices of the forest, in the crevices of the thicket. Upacāranti the upacāra of twelve cubits.

82.Itaroti navako.Assāti navakassa.Na vattabhede dukkaṭanti aññātattā na vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ. Eseva nayo sabbattha.Apacchāpurimanti apacchā apurimaṃ, ekapahārenāti attho. Samavassā dve pārivāsikāti yojanā. Dvinnaṃ pārivāsikānaṃ ekato vasanadosaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace hi dve’’tiādi.Nesanti dvinnaṃ pārivāsikānaṃ.Etthāti pārivāsikādīsu pañcasu bhikkhūsu. Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahādayo cattāroti yojanā.

82.Itaroti the new one. Assāti for the new one. Na vattabhede dukkaṭanti because he does not know, there is no dukkaṭa in the violation of duties. This same method is everywhere. Apacchāpurimanti not after, not before, meaning in one stroke. Two parivāsikas of equal seniority, is the connection. Showing the fault of two parivāsikas living together, he says, "sace hi dve," etc. Nesanti of the two parivāsikas. Etthāti among the five bhikkhus such as the parivāsika. The four beginning with those worthy of reinstatement to the root, is the connection.

Parivāsadānādīnīti ādisaddena mūlāyapaṭikassanamānattadānaabbhānāni saṅgaṇhāti.Etesvevāti parivāsadānādīsu eva.Ayanti pārivāsiko.

Parivāsadānādīnīti by "ādi," he includes reinstatement to the root, granting of mānatta, cārika, and abbhāna. Etesvevāti only in granting parivāsa, etc. Ayanti the parivāsika.

83.‘‘Atha kho āyasmā upālī’’tiādivacanassa anusandhiṃ dassento āha ‘‘imaṃ panā’’tiādi. Rahogatassa upālittherassāti yojanā. Atha vā anādare sāmivacanaṃ katvā upālittherassa rahogatassāti yojanā kātabbā.Etthāti pārivāsikavatte.Soti upālitthero.Assāti upālittherassa.Tatthāti tīsu ratticchedesu.Yvāyanti yo ayaṃ, ekato vāsoti sambandho. So vāso sahavāso nāmāti yojanā.Vippavāsoti ettha pakatattena vippayutto hutvā vāsoti dassento āha ‘‘ekakasseva vāso’’ti.Āgantukādīnanti ādisaddena āvāsikā gahetabbā.

83. Showing the connection of the statement beginning with "Atha kho āyasmā upālī," he says, "imaṃ panā," etc. To the revered Upāli Thera in seclusion, is the connection. Or, having made a term of ownership in disregard, it should be connected to Upāli Thera in seclusion. Etthāti in the duties of the parivāsika. Soti that Upāli Thera. Assāti for Upāli Thera. Tatthāti in the three breaks of the night. Yvāyanti which this, the living together, is the connection. That living is called sahavāsa, is the connection. Vippavāsoti here, showing that it is living having been separated from the present one, he says, "living alone." Āgantukādīnanti by "ādi," the residents should be included.

84.Tattha tatthāti taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ.Dvīsu padesūti dvīsu vākyasaṅkhātesu padesu.Ekenekenapīti ekena ekena vākyapadenapi. Parivasiyitthāti parivuttho, parivuttho parivāso etassātiparivutthaparivāso,tassa.ti saccaṃ.Esāti eso bhikkhūti sambandho.Suddhanteti suddhakoṭṭhāse.Dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa.Antanti avasānaṃ, vināsaṃ vā.

84.Tattha tatthāti that particular place. Dvīsu padesūti in two sections called sentences. Ekenekenapīti even by each individual sentence word. Parivasiyitthāti one who has lived, parivuttho; one who has lived, parivāso, of him is parivutthaparivāso, of that. ti truly. Esāti this bhikkhu, is the connection. Suddhanteti in the pure portion. Dukkhassāti of the suffering of the round. Antanti end, or destruction.

2. Mūlāyapaṭikassanārahavattakathā
2. Account of the Duties of One Worthy of Reinstatement to the Root

86.Navakataraṃ mūlāyapaṭikassanārahaṃ ṭhapetvāti yojanā. Imesaṃ pañcannaṃ pakatattā evāti sambandho.Nesanti mūlāyapaṭikassanārahamānattārahamānattacārikaabbhānārahānaṃ catunnaṃ, mūlāyapaṭikassanārahādilakkhaṇanti sambandho.Etthāti mūlāyapaṭikassanārahassa vatte.Itoti mūlāyapaṭikassanārahassa vattato.

86. Having established a more recent one worthy of reinstatement to the root, is the connection. These five are only the present ones, is the connection. Nesanti of the four – one worthy of reinstatement to the root, one deserving of mānatta, one deserving of cārika, and one deserving of abbhāna; the characteristic of one worthy of reinstatement to the root, etc., is the connection. Etthāti in the duties of one worthy of reinstatement to the root. Itoti from the duties of one worthy of reinstatement to the root.

87.Yatheva pārivāsiko gaṇapūrako na hoti, evaṃ etepi na hontīti yojanā.

87. Just as the parivāsika is not a complement of the gaṇa, so too these are not, is the connection.

4. Mānattācārikavattakathā
4. Account of the Duties of One in Mānatta and Cārika

92.Ūnegaṇeti ettha gaṇo nāma gaṇabhojanasikkhāpade (pāci. 217 ādayo) viya hotīti āha ‘‘cattāro vā atirekā vā’’ti.Sabbatthāti pārivāsikakkhandhake.

92.Ūne gaṇeti here, the gaṇa is like in the gaṇabhojana training rule (pāci. 217, etc.), so he says, "four or more." Sabbatthāti in the Parivāsika Khandhaka.

Iti pārivāsikakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation in connection with the Parivāsika Khandhaka.

3. Samuccayakkhandhakaṃ

3. Samuccaya Khandhaka

1. Sukkavissaṭṭhikathā
1. Account of the Emission of Semen

tatthāti catubbidhesu mānattesu. Yaṃ mānattaṃ diyyati, idaṃ appaṭicchannamānattaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Eseva nayo anantaravākyesupi.Paṭicchannāya āpattiyāti hetvatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, kāraṇatthe nissakkavacanaṃ vā.Addhamāsanti pannarasadivasakālaṃ.Odhāyāti samūhaṃ katvā. ‘‘Ekato katvā’’ti iminā ‘‘odhāyā’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.Tesūti catubbidhesu mānattesu.Idanti mānattaṃ.Appaṭicchannāya…pe… vacanatoti ñāpakahetu. Etena appaṭicchannāya āpattiyā dātabbaṃ mānattaṃappaṭicchannamānattanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tanti appaṭicchannamānattaṃ.Idhāti imissaṃ pāḷiyaṃ.Tatuttarīti tato tīhipi uttari. Nānāvatthūni etāsantinānāvatthukāyo. Tāsanti nānāvatthukānaṃ.

tatthāti in the four kinds of mānattas. The mānatta that is given, this is called appaṭicchannamānatta, is the connection. This same method is in the immediately following sentences as well. Paṭicchannāya āpattiyāti it is the instrumental case in the sense of cause, or the nipāta word in the sense of reason. Addhamāsanti a period of fifteen days. Odhāyāti having made a group. By "Ekato katvā," he shows the meaning of the word "odhāyā." Tesūti in the four kinds of mānattas. Idanti this mānatta. Appaṭicchannāya…pe… vacanatoti because of the giving. By this, the mānatta that should be given for the appaṭicchannā āpatti is called appaṭicchannamānatta, he shows the word meaning. Tanti that appaṭicchannamānatta. Idhāti in this Pāḷi. Tatuttarīti more than three from that. Nānāvatthūni are in these, therefore nānāvatthukāyo. Tāsanti of those nānāvatthukas.

Māḷakasīmāyamevāti sīmamāḷake eva, sīmaṅgaṇe evāti attho.Tatthevāti māḷakasīmāyameva.

Māḷakasīmāyamevāti only in the sīma-māḷaka, only in the sīma courtyard, is the meaning. Tatthevāti in that sīma-māḷaka itself.

Vedayāmahanti vedayāmi ahaṃ. Mama mānattacarabhāvaṃ saṅghaṃ jānāpemīti attho.Vedayatīti manti jānāpeti, iti maṃ saṅgho dhāretūti adhippāyo.Vuttanayenevāti pārivāsikakkhandhake vuttanayeneva.Nikkhipitabbanti ‘‘mānattaṃ nikkhipāmi, vattaṃ nikkhipāmī’’ti nikkhipitabbaṃ.Māḷakatoti sīmaṅgaṇato.Sopīti saha gacchantopi. ‘‘Māḷake nārocita’’nti iminā yassa māḷake ārocitaṃ, tassa anārocetvāpi nikkhipitabbanti dasseti. Ārocentena vattabbanti sambandho.

Vedayāmahanti I announce. The meaning is, I make the Saṅgha know my state of practicing mānatta. Vedayatīti manti he makes known, so may the Saṅgha remember me, is the intention. Vuttanayenevāti in the manner stated in the Parivāsika Khandhaka. Nikkhipitabbanti "I lay down the mānatta, I lay down the duties," it should be laid down. Māḷakatoti from the sīma courtyard. Sopīti even the one going along with him. By "Māḷake nārocita," he shows that for one for whom it was announced in the māḷaka, it can be laid down even without announcing it. For one who announces, it is a duty, is the connection.

Catūhi, pañcahi vātisaddena tato atirekampi saṅgaṇhāti.Parikkhepārahaṭṭhānatoti cīvarakkhandhake (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379) vuttaparikkhepārahaṭṭhānato. ‘‘Dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā’’ti idaṃ vihāre bhikkhūnaṃ sajjhāyādisaddasavanūpacārapahānatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sace savanūpacārato na muccati, tato atirekampi atikkamitabbaṃ.Okkammāti maggapaṭipannānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vacanasaddasavanūpacārapahānatthaṃ okkamitvā. ‘‘Gumbena vā vatiyā vā’’ti dassanūpacārapahānatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Idha upacāro nāma yattha ṭhatvā passati suṇāti, soyeva deso.Aññoti catūhi pañcahi vā bhikkhūhi añño.Esāti eso mānattacāriko.

Catūhi, pañcahi vāti by the word , he includes even more than that. Parikkhepārahaṭṭhānatoti from the place fit for enclosure stated in the Cīvara Khandhaka (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379). "Having crossed two leḍḍupātas," this was said to abandon the sounds of bhikkhus reciting, etc., in the monastery. If one is not freed from hearing upacāra, then even more than that should be crossed. Okkammāti having descended to abandon the sounds of speech and hearing upacāra of the bhikkhus who are following the path. "Gumbena vā vatiyā vā," this was said to abandon seeing upacāra. Here, upacāra is that place where one stands and sees and hears; that very place. Aññoti another besides the four or five bhikkhus. Esāti this is the mānattacārika.

Sati karaṇīyeti idaṃ gantussa kāraṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Asati karaṇīyepi gantuṃ vaṭṭati.Sopīti eko bhikkhupi. ‘‘Tassa santike ārocetvā’’ti iminā anārocane vattabhedadukkaṭaṃ hotīti dasseti. Ekassa santike ārocetvā nikkhipiyamāne kiṃ ūne gaṇe caraṇadoso vā vippavāso vā na hotīti āha ‘‘ayañcā’’tiādi. Tatthaayañcāti mānattacāriko pana. Yasmā kāraṇā vasi, tena kāraṇenāti yojanā.Bhikkhūnañca atthibhāvaṃ sallakkhetvāti pakatattāgatakāle tassa anārocetvāva gacchanti, tasmā bhikkhūnañca dvādasahatthūpacāre atthibhāvaṃ sallakkhetvāti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘gaṇassa ārocetvā’’ti iminā ūne gaṇe caraṇadosābhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bhikkhūnañca atthibhāvaṃ sallakkhetvā’’ti iminā vippavāsadosābhāvaṃ dasseti.Yanti pubbe anārocitaṃ yaṃ bhikkhuṃ.Ayanti paṭhamaṃ passitabbassa ārocetvā nikkhipanaṃ. ‘‘Nikkhittavattassa parihāro’’ti iminā anikkhittavatte antoupacāragatānaṃ sabbesaṃ ārocetabbanti dasseti.

Sati karaṇīye (mindfulness should be done) is said to show the reason for going to the group. Even without mindfulness, it is permissible to go. Sopi means even one bhikkhu. "Having informed him" indicates that not informing results in a vattabheda-dukkaṭa offense. When handing over something after informing one person, he asks, "Does this not cause a defect in conduct or separation from the group in a deficient group?" with "ayañcātiādi (and this)." Here, ayañcā means one who is practicing mānatta. The connection is 'for whatever reason he dwells, for that reason.' Bhikkhūnañca atthibhāvaṃ sallakkhetvā (and having considered the presence of the bhikkhus) means that because they usually go without informing him when the appropriate time has come, therefore, having considered the presence of the bhikkhus within the twelve-cubit boundary. Here, "having informed the gaṇa" indicates the absence of a fault of conduct in a deficient group. "And having considered the presence of the bhikkhus" indicates the absence of a fault of separation. Yaṃ means the bhikkhu who was not previously informed. Ayaṃ means informing the one who should be seen first before handing over. "The handling of one who has handed over" indicates that all those within the boundary who have not handed over must be informed.

Ayanti mānattacāriko, ṭhitoti sambandho.Tenāpīti mānattacārikenapi, yācitabbanti yojanā.Soti anikkhittavatto bhikkhu.Tatrāti ‘‘so abbhetabbo’’ti vacane. Ayaṃ abbhānavidhi vuttoti yojanā.Ayañcāti abbhānavidhi ca.Tāsanti āpattīnaṃ.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ. Paṭicchannamānattaṃ pana dātabbaṃ hotīti sambandho. ‘‘Paṭicchannāyā’’tiādinā paṭicchannāya āpattiyā dātabbaṃ mānattaṃpaṭicchannamānattanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Nanti paṭicchannamānattaṃ.

Ayaṃ means the one practicing mānatta, the connection is 'is dwelling.' Tenāpī means even by the one practicing mānatta, the connection is 'should be requested.' So means the bhikkhu who has not handed over. Tatrā means in the statement "so abbhetabbo (he should be rehabilitated)." This is said to be the rule for rehabilitation. Ayañcā means and this rehabilitation rule. Tāsaṃ means of the offenses. Evaṃ etc., is the conclusion. But concealed mānatta should be given, is the connection. With "paṭicchannāyātiādi (of the concealed)," it shows that the mānatta to be given for a concealed offense is called paṭicchannamānatta. Na means concealed mānatta.

2. Parivāsakathā
2. Parivāsa Discussion

102.Tassāti paṭicchannamānattassa.Samodhānetvāti idheva parivāsakathāyaṃ samodhānetvā.Idhevaparivāsakathāyaṃ dassayissāmāti yojanā. Idhevasaddo hi pubbāparāpekkho.

102.Tassā means of that concealed mānatta. Samodhānetvā means combining it here in the parivāsa discussion. Idheva (here itself) I will show in the parivāsa discussion, is the connection. The word 'idheva' looks to what precedes and follows.

Tatthāti tividhesu parivāsesu. ‘‘Yathāpaṭicchannāya āpattiyā’’ti vacanaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘kassaci hī’’tiādi. Yathā udāyittherassa ekāhapaṭicchannā ayaṃ āpatti hoti, tathā kassaci ekāhapaṭicchannā āpatti hotīti yojanā. Yathā ca parato āgatā udāyittherasseva āpatti hoti, tathā kassaci dvihādipaṭicchannā āpatti hotīti yojanā. Iminā vuttanayānusārena paratopi nayo netabbo.Tasmāti yasmā ekāhādipaṭicchannā ekādiāpatti hoti, tasmā jānitabboti yojanā.

Tatrā means in the three kinds of parivāsa. Expanding on the statement "yathāpaṭicchannāya āpattiyā (according to the concealed offense)," he says "kassaci hītiādi (indeed, for some)." Just as Udayi Thera had an offense concealed for one day, so too, for some, there is an offense concealed for one day, is the connection. And just as the offense that came from elsewhere was Udayi Thera's, so too, for some, there is an offense concealed for two or more days, is the connection. With this, according to the stated method, the method should be applied from elsewhere as well. Tasmā (therefore) means because there is an offense concealed for one or more days, therefore, it should be known, is the connection.

Tatthāti ‘‘dasahākārehī’’ti pāṭhe. Āpattiiti saññā etassātiāpattisaññī. Pahu cāti samattho ca. Papubbo hūdhātu samatthatthe hoti.

Tatrā means in the reading "dasahākārehī (with ten aspects)." Āpattisaññī (one who perceives an offense) means the recognition that there is an offense. Pahu cā (and capable) means and capable. The root with the prefix pa is in the sense of capability.

Tatthāti tassaṃ mātikāyaṃ.Yanti āpattiṃ.Sopi cāti bhikkhupi ca.Tatthāti tassaṃ āpattiyaṃ.Ayanti bhikkhu.Tatthāti āpattiyaṃ.Alajjipakkhe tiṭṭhatīti ‘‘sañcicca āpattiṃ parigūhatī’’ti (pari. 359) vuttapakkhe ṭhitattā alajjipakkhe tiṭṭhati.

Tatrā means in that list. Yaṃ means the offense. Sopi cā means and the bhikkhu too. Tatrā means in that offense. Ayaṃ means this bhikkhu. Tatrā means in the offense. Alajjipakkhe tiṭṭhatī (stands on the side of shamelessness) means he stands on the side of shamelessness because he stands in the position stated as "sañcicca āpattiṃ parigūhati (deliberately concealing an offense)" (pari. 359).

Pakatattoti ettha ‘‘pārājikaṃ anajjhāpanno’’ti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘tividhaṃ ukkhepanīyakammaṃ akato’’ti.Etanti appaṭicchannabhāvaṃ, ‘‘āpajjati…pe… kusalehi cintitā’’ti vacanaṃ vā.

Pakatatto (of normal behavior) means rejecting the meaning "not having fallen into a pārājika offense," he says "tividhaṃ ukkhepanīyakammaṃ akato (not having undergone the three kinds of suspension rites)." Etaṃ means the state of being unconcealed, or the statement "āpajjati…pe… kusalehi cintitā (he commits… and it is considered by the skilled)."

Garukanti ettha saṅghādisesameva adhippetanti dasseti.Anādariyanti sikkhāpade anādariyaṃ.Vajjanti dukkaṭaṃ. Ukkhittakena karaṇabhūtena.

Garukaṃ (serious) here indicates that only saṅghādisesa is intended. Anādariyaṃ (disrespect) means disrespect towards the training rule. Vajjaṃ (fault) means a dukkaṭa offense. By the one suspended as the instrumental cause.

Yassāti bhikkhussa, natthīti sambandho.Bhīrukajātikatāyāti bhīrukasabhāvatāya. Pabbatavihāre vasantassa yassa bhikkhunoti yojanā.Pabbatavihāreti pabbatassa tale, antare vā kārite vihāre.Etasminti etādise. Antarāye satiyevāti yojanā. Tassa acchannāva hotīti yojanā.Anantarāyikasaññāya chādayato acchannāvāti anantarāyikasaññāya chādentassāpi ekantena antarāyikattā acchannāvāti adhippāyo.

Yassā means of the bhikkhu, the connection is 'there is not.' Bhīrukajātikatāyā (due to being of a timid nature) means due to having a timid nature. The connection is for that bhikkhu who dwells in a mountain monastery. Pabbatavihāre means in a monastery built at the foot or in the middle of a mountain. Etasmiṃ means in such a case. The connection is 'only if there is an obstruction.' The connection is 'it remains unconcealed for him.' Anantarāyikasaññāya chādayato acchannāvā (even if concealing with the perception of no obstacle, it is still unconcealed) means even if one conceals with the perception of no obstacle, it is still absolutely considered an obstacle, so the intention is that it is unconcealed.

Assāti bhikkhussa.Hanukavātoti hanukassa gelaññakaro vāto.Vijjhatīti hanukaṃ vijjhati.Imināti bhikkhunā. Pahusaññino chāditāpi ekantena apahuttā acchāditāva hoti.

Assā means of the bhikkhu. Hanukavāto (jaw wind) means wind that causes illness in the jaw. Vijjhatī (pierces) means pierces the jaw. Iminā (by this) means by the bhikkhu. Even if concealed by one who perceives capability, it is absolutely rejected and unconcealed.

Chādetukāmo cāti ettha idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ chādetukāmo chādeti, chādetukāmo nacchādeti, acchādetukāmo chādeti, nacchādetukāmo nacchādetīti. Tattha paṭhamapadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ uttānatthamevā’’ti. Evaṃ sesāsupi mātikāsu catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Catūsu catukkesu paṭhamapade eva channā hoti, na sesapadesu. Anuttānatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Purebhatte vāti purebhattaṃ vā, bhattato, bhattassa vā puretipurebhattaṃ. Abyayībhāvasamāse sattamīvibhattiyā amitikāriyassa aniccabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘purebhatte’’ti. Eseva nayo ‘‘pacchābhatte’’ti etthāpi. Dutiyapadassa atthaṃ dassetvā tatiyapadassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yassa panā’’tiādi. Abhikkhuke ṭhāne vasantassa yassa bhikkhussāti yojanā. Āgamentassa gacchantassāti anādare cetāni sāmivacanāni.

Chādetukāmo cā (and desiring to conceal) here, this tetrad should be understood: desiring to conceal, he conceals; desiring to conceal, he does not conceal; desiring not to conceal, he conceals; not desiring to conceal, he does not conceal. There, referring to the first term, it is said, "idaṃ uttānatthameva (this is straightforward in meaning)." Similarly, in the remaining matrices, the tetrad should be understood. In the four tetrads, it is concealed only in the first term, not in the remaining terms. Showing the meaning that is not straightforward, he says "sace panātiādi (but if)." Purebhatte vā (or before the meal) means before the meal, from the meal, or before the time of the meal is purebhattaṃ (before the meal). In an indeclinable compound, it is said "purebhatte" due to the impermanence of the function of applying the seventh case ending. This same method applies in "pacchābhatte (after the meal)" as well. After showing the meaning of the second term, showing the meaning of the third term, he says "yassa panātiādi (but for whom)." The connection is 'for that bhikkhu who dwells in a place without bhikkhus.' Āgamentassa gacchantassa (for one coming, for one going) these words of the master are said out of disrespect.

yo panāti bhikkhu pana, āvi karotīti sambandho.Sabhāganti averiṃ.Ayanti bhikkhu. Upajjhāyo iti vā ācariyo iti vāti yojanā.Lajjāyāti lajjanimittaṃ, lajjakāraṇā, lajjahetu vā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā,idhāti āpattiārocanaṭṭhāne.Averisabhāgassāti averī hutvā sabhāgassa.

Yo panā (but whoever) means but whichever bhikkhu, the connection is 'reveals.' Sabhāgaṃ (an associate) means a non-enemy. Ayaṃ means this bhikkhu. The connection is 'either the preceptor or the teacher.' Lajjāyā (out of shame) means for the sake of shame, due to shame, or because of shame. (indeed) means truly, or because. Idhā (here) means in the place of revealing the offense. Averisabhāgassā (of an associate who is a non-enemy) means having become a non-enemy, to an associate.

Pakāsetukāmoti aññesaṃ pakāsetukāmo.Upajjhāyassāpīti pisaddena aññassa santike kā nāma kathāti dasseti.Tatthāti āpattiārocanaṭṭhāne.Sabhāgasaṅghādisesanti vatthusabhāgasaṅghādisesaṃ.Suddhassāti vatthusabhāgasaṅghādisesato suddhassa. Āvikaraṇākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘āvikaronto cā’’tiādi.Iti imānītiādi nigamanaṃ.

Pakāsetukāmo (desiring to disclose) means desiring to disclose to others. Upajjhāyassāpī (even to the preceptor) the word pi indicates what kind of talk there is in the presence of another. Tatrā (there) means in the place of revealing the offense. Sabhāgasaṅghādisesaṃ (a saṅghādisesa offense that is an associate in substance) means a saṅghādisesa offense that is an associate in substance. Suddhassā (of one pure) means of one who is pure from a saṅghādisesa offense that is an associate in substance. Showing the manner of revelation, he says "āvikaronto cātiādi (and while revealing)." "Iti imānītiādi (thus, these)" etc., is the conclusion.

Tatoti jānitabbato, paranti sambandho.Ekāhapaṭicchannāti ekāhena paṭicchannā. Yāva cuddasa divasāni, tāva divasavasena yojanā kātabbāti yojanā.Pakkhapaṭicchannanti pakkhena paṭicchannaṃ.Atirekapakkhapaṭicchannanti pakkhato atirekena paṭicchannaṃ.

Tato (from that) means from what is to be known, the connection is 'beyond'. Ekāhapaṭicchannā (concealed for one day) means concealed by one day. The connection is that it should be connected according to the number of days up to fourteen days. Pakkapaṭicchannaṃ (concealed for a fortnight) means concealed for a fortnight. Atirekapakkhapaṭicchannaṃ (concealed for more than a fortnight) means concealed for more than a fortnight.

Saṃvaccharapaṭicchannanti saṃvaccharena paṭicchannaṃ.Tato vāti atirekasaṭṭhisaṃvaccha rato vā.Bhiyyopīti atirekampi.

Saṃvaccharapaṭicchannaṃ (concealed for a year) means concealed for a year. Tato vā (or more than that) means or more than sixty years. Bhiyyopī (even more) means even more.

Tatoti tīhi āpattīhi.Paranti atirekaṃ.Gaṇanavasenāti āpattigaṇanavasena.Vatthukittanavasena vāti āpattīnaṃ vatthukittanavasena vā.Nāmamattavasena vāti ‘‘saṅghādisesāpattiyo’’ti evaṃ nāmasseva vasena vā. Ettha hi mattasaddo avadhāraṇattho, tena vatthuṃ nivatteti.

Tato (from that) means from the three offenses. Paraṃ (beyond) means in excess. Gaṇanavasenā (by way of counting) means by way of counting the offenses. Vatthukittanavasena vā (or by way of reciting the substance) means or by way of reciting the substance of the offenses. Nāmamattavasena vā (or merely by way of the name) means or merely by way of the name, such as "saṅghādisesāpattiyo (saṅghādisesa offenses)." Here, the word matta is in the sense of determination, therefore it excludes the substance.

Tatthāti ‘‘nāmamattavasenā’’ti pade.Sajātisādhāraṇanti sassa attano jāti sajāti, tāya sādhāraṇaṃ sajātisādhāraṇaṃ. Sabbesaṃ, sabbehi vā āpattīhi sādhāraṇaṃsabbasādhāraṇaṃ. Tatthāti duvidhesu nāmesu.Sabbasādhāraṇanāmavasenāpīti ettha pisaddo ‘‘ahaṃ bhante sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpajjiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannāyo’’ti evaṃ sajātisādhāraṇanāmavasenapi ‘‘ahaṃ bhante sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannāyo’’ti evaṃ ubhayasādhāraṇavasenapi vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti.ti saccaṃ. Sabbampi parivāsādikaṃ idaṃ vinayakammanti yojanā. Vasati āpatti ettha tadāyattavuttitāyātivatthu. Go vuccati vacanaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ vā, taṃ tāyatītigottaṃ.

Tatrā (there) means in the term "nāmamattavasenā (merely by way of the name)." Sajātisādhāraṇaṃ (common to the same kind) means its own kind is the same kind, common to that same kind is sajātisādhāraṇaṃ. Common to all, or by all the offenses is sabbasādhāraṇaṃ (common to all). Tatrā (there) means in the two kinds of names. Sabbasādhāraṇanāmavasenāpī (even by way of a name common to all) here, the word pi shows that it is permissible to say, "ahaṃ bhante sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpajjiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannāyo (venerable sir, I committed many saṅghādisesa offenses concealed for one day)" even by way of a name common to the same kind, and "ahaṃ bhante sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannāyo (venerable sir, I committed many saṅghādisesa offenses concealed for one day)" even by way of being common to both. (indeed) means truly. All this parivāsa, etc., is a procedure of the Vinaya, is the connection. Vatthu (basis) means a basis because the offense dwells here, due to the dependence of its occurrence on it. Gottaṃ (lineage) means go is said to mean speech or knowledge, that which protects it is gottaṃ.

Tatthāti vatthādīsu catubbidhesu.Tatthāti tesu vacanesu.Sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ kāyasaṃsaggantiādinā vacanenāpīti ettha ādisaddena duṭṭhullādivacanāni saṅgaṇhāti.Idha panāti imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne.Yo yoti tisso vā phusso vā āpanno hoti.

Tatrā (there) means in the four kinds of basis, etc. Tatrā (there) means in those statements. Sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ kāyasaṃsaggantiādinā vacanenāpī (even by a statement such as emission of semen, bodily contact, etc.) here, the word ādi includes rude speech, etc. Idha panā (but here) means but in this instance. Yo yo (whoever) means whoever has committed three or four offenses.

Evaṃ ārocetabbanti evaṃ vakkhamānanayena ārocetabbanti yojanā. Kiṃ ārocetabbaṃ? ‘‘Ahaṃ bhante…pe… saṅgho dhāretu’’ iti ārocetabbanti yojanā.

Evaṃ ārocetabbaṃ (it should be announced thus) means it should be announced in the manner to be stated, is the connection. What should be announced? "Ahaṃ bhante…pe… saṅgho dhāretu (venerable sir… may the Sangha uphold me)" it should be announced thus, is the connection.

Vedayāmahanti vedayāmi ahaṃ. Mama pārivāsikabhāvaṃ saṅghaṃ, saṅghassa vā jānāpemīti attho.Vedayatīti manti vedayati iti maṃ. Pārivāsikabhāvaṃ saṅghaṃ, saṅghassa vā jānāpetīti maṃ saṅgho dhāretūti attho. Ettha bahūsu aṭṭhakathāpotthakesu ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vā atirekānaṃ vā ārocentena āyasmanto dhārentū’’ti pāṭho atthi. Kesuci aṭṭhakathāpotthakesu ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ ārocentena āyasmanto dhārentū’’ti ettakoyeva pāṭho atthi. Heṭṭhā mānattakathāyampi evameva atthi. Tattha ‘‘atirekāna’’nti iminā tīhi atirekānaṃ ārocentena saṅghaṃ apekkhitvā sace ekavacanavasena vattukāmo hoti, ‘‘maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Atha sambahule bhikkhū apekkhitvā sace bahuvacanavasena vattukāmo hoti, yathā tiṇṇaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘maṃ āyasmanto dhārentū’’ti vattabbanti dasseti. Idañca saddasatthavaseneva vuttaṃ, na vinayakammavipattivasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Vedayāmahaṃ (we inform) means I inform. The meaning is that I make known my state of being a pārivāsika to the Sangha, or to the Sangha. Vedayatīti maṃ (he informs me) means he informs, therefore, me. The meaning is that the Sangha may uphold me because I make known my state of being a pārivāsika to the Sangha, or to the Sangha. Here, in many commentaries, there is a reading, "tiṇṇaṃ vā atirekānaṃ vā ārocentena āyasmanto dhārentu (venerable sirs, may the venerable ones uphold when announcing three or more)." In some commentaries, there is only the reading "tiṇṇaṃ ārocentena āyasmanto dhārentu (venerable sirs, may the venerable ones uphold when announcing three)." Below, in the mānatta discussion, it is just the same. There, with "atirekānaṃ (more)," it shows that when announcing three or more, if he wishes to speak in the singular by referring to the Sangha, he should say, "maṃ saṅgho dhāretu (may the Sangha uphold me)." Or if he wishes to speak in the plural by referring to many bhikkhus, he should say, just as with three, "maṃ āyasmanto dhārentu (may the venerable ones uphold me)." And this is said only by way of word meaning, not by way of vitiation of the Vinaya procedure, it should be seen.

Upacārasīmanti parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ.Esāti pārivāsiko bhikkhu.Assāti āgatassa bhikkhuno.

Upacārasīmaṃ (boundary of the vicinity) means the boundary of the circumscribed monastery, or a place worthy of being circumscribed for an uncircumscribed monastery. Esā (this) means this pārivāsika bhikkhu. Assā (to him) means to the bhikkhu who has come.

Tatoti āpattipaṭicchannadivasato.Kukkuccavinodanatthāyāti āpattipaṭicchannadivasena samaṃ parivasitabbaṃ nukho, na nukhoti kukkuccassa vinodanatthāya.Parivutthattāti parivasitattā.Soti parivuttho bhikkhu.Idanti dātabbamānattaṃ.Tanti paṭicchannamānattaṃ.Chārattanti charattiyo samāhaṭāti chārattaṃ, samāhāre digu. ‘‘Charatta’’nti vattabbe sukhuccāraṇatthaṃ chakārassa dīghaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ, accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.

Tato (from that) means from the day of concealing the offense. Kukkuccavinodanatthāyā (for the sake of dispelling doubt) means for the sake of dispelling the doubt of whether one should live equal to the day of concealing the offense or not. Parivutthattā (because of having lived) means because of having lived the required time. So (he) means that bhikkhu who has lived the required time. Idaṃ (this) means this mānatta to be given. Taṃ (that) means that concealed mānatta. Chārattaṃ (six nights) means six nights brought together, a digu compound in the collective sense. When it should be "charatta," it is said thus, lengthening the cha for ease of pronunciation, this is a term for absolute association.

Appaṭicchannāpattiṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Iminā heṭṭhā vuttaṃ paṭicchannamānattaṃ imasmiṃ paṭicchannamānatte samodhānetvāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti. Evaṃ santepi mūlamānattaṃ paṭicca paṭicchannamānattanti vuccati. Kathaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā.

It is permissible to give for an unconcealed offense, is the connection. With this, it shows that it is also permissible to give the concealed mānatta mentioned below, combined with this concealed mānatta. Even so, the original mānatta is called concealed mānatta in relation to the original mānatta. How is it permissible to give, is the connection.

Assāti mānattaṃ yācantassa.Tadanurūpanti tassa yācanassa anurūpaṃ.Sace paṭicchannā dveti etthadveti nidassanamattaṃ tato atirekampi gahetabbattā.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ekabahūsu.Tadanurūpame vāti tassa mānattadānassa anurūpameva.Idha panāti paṭicchannamānatte pana.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ. Yaṃ mānattaṃ diyyatīti yojanā.Etthāti paṭicchannamānatte.

Assā (to him) means to him who is requesting mānatta. Tadanurūpaṃ (corresponding to that) means corresponding to that request. Sace paṭicchannā dve (if two are concealed) here, dve (two) is merely an example, therefore, more than that should also be taken. Sabbatthā (everywhere) means in all instances of singular and plural. Tadanurūpameva vā (or just corresponding to that) means just corresponding to that giving of mānatta. Idha panā (but here) means but here in the case of concealed mānatta. Itītiādi (thus) etc., is the conclusion. The mānatta that is given, is the connection. Etthā (here) means in the concealed mānatta.

Avasesāti appaṭicchannaparivāsapaṭicchannaparivāsehi avasesā.Tatthāti avasesesu dvīsu parivāsesu. Adhammikamānattacārāvasāne anuññātaparivāsoti sambandho. Kismiṃ vatthusmiṃ anuññātoti āha ‘‘imasmiṃ vatthusmi’’nti.Esāti suddhanto, dātabboti sambandho.Etanti jānanājānanaṃ.

Avasesā (remaining) means remaining apart from unconcealed parivāsa and concealed parivāsa. Tatrā (there) means in the remaining two parivāsas. Adhammikamānattacārāvasāne anuññātaparivāso (parivāsa allowed at the end of unlawful mānatta conduct) is the connection. In what instance is it allowed? He says "imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ (in this instance)." Esā (this) means this suddhanta, it should be given, is the connection. Etaṃ (this) means this knowing and not knowing.

Tatthāti dvīsu suddhantesu, cūḷasuddhantoti vuccatīti sambandho.Yoti bhikkhu, vadatīti sambandho.Ārocitadivasatoti āpattiārocitadivasato.

Tatrā (there) means in the two kinds of suddhanta, it is called cūḷasuddhanta, is the connection. Yo (who) means the bhikkhu, speaks, is the connection. Ārocitadivasato (from the day of announcement) means from the day of announcing the offense.

Tanti cūḷasuddhantaṃ, parivasantena parivasitabbanti sambandho.Aggahesīti parivāsaṃ aggahesi.Aññanti gahitamāsato aññaṃ. ‘‘Parivāsadānakiccaṃ natthī’’ti iminā parivāsagahaṇakiccampi natthīti dasseti gaṇhantasseva dātabbattā, dentasseva gahetabbattā vā.Uddhampi ārohatīti parivāsagahaṇakālato aññampi kālaṃ parivasitabbattā uddhampi ārohati.Heṭṭhāpi orohatīti parivāsagahaṇakālato ūnampi kālaṃ parivasitabbattā heṭṭhāpi orohati.Idanti ārohanorohanaṃ.Tassāti suddhantaparivāsassa. Ekameva paṭicca dve, tisso, sambahulā vā bhavantīti āha ‘‘ekaṃ vinā sambahulānaṃ abhāvato’’ti.

Taṃ (that) means that cūḷasuddhanta, it should be lived by one observing parivāsa, is the connection. Aggahesī (he took) means he took parivāsa. Aññaṃ (another) means another from the month taken. "Parivāsadānakiccaṃ natthī (there is no function of giving parivāsa)" with this, he shows that there is also no function of taking parivāsa because it should be given only to one who is taking, or it should be taken only by one who is giving. Uddhampi ārohatī (he ascends upwards) means because it should be lived for another time from the time of taking parivāsa, he ascends upwards. Heṭṭhāpi orohatī (he descends downwards) means because it should be lived for a shorter time from the time of taking parivāsa, he descends downwards. Idaṃ (this) means this ascending and descending. Tassā (of that) means of that suddhanta-parivāsa. He says "ekaṃ vinā sambahulānaṃ abhāvato (without one, there is no existence of many)" because from one alone, two, three, or many arise.

Tanti mahāsuddhantaṃ.Yāvayattako upasampadadivaso hoti,tāvatattakaṃ kālanti yojanā.Uddhaṃ nārohatīti uddhaṃ ārohanakālassa abhāvato uddhaṃ na ārohati.Etthāti suddhantaparivāse.Ayaṃ suddhantaparivāso nāmāti nigamanaṃ.

Taṃ (that) means that mahāsuddhanta. Yāva (as long as) means however much is the day of ordination, tāva (so long) means that much time, is the connection. Uddhaṃ nārohatī (he does not ascend upwards) means because there is no time for ascending upwards, he does not ascend upwards. Etthā (here) means in this suddhanta-parivāsa. "Ayaṃ suddhantaparivāso nāmā (this is called suddhanta-parivāsa)" is the conclusion.

Tatthāti tividhesu samodhānaparivāsesu. ‘‘Odhunitvā samodahitvā dātabbaparivāso’’ti iminā odhunitvā samodhānetvā dātabbo parivāsoodhānasamodhānoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘parivāso’’ti iminā taddhitaṇapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Ettha ca avadhuniyate, avadhunitabbanti vāodhānaṃ,saṃ ekato odahīyate sampiṇḍīyate, udahiyati sampiṇḍiyatīti vāsamodhānanti avayavavacanattho kātabbo. ‘‘Makkhetvā’’ti iminā dhudhātuyā pappoṭanadhaṃsanadhovanāni dasseti.Soti odhānasamodhāno, āgatoti sambandho.

Tatthati in the three ways of combination and allotment. The phrase "Having sifted and combined, the parivāsa to be given is called odhānasamodhāna" shows the meaning of odhānasamodhāna as "the parivāsa to be given after sifting and combining," and the word "parivāsa" shows the form of the taddhita suffix . Here, the word odhānaṃ should be understood as a term of its parts, meaning "what is shaken off or sifted," or "what has been shaken off or sifted," and samodhānaṃ means "what is gathered or compacted together," or "it is gathered or compacted together." "Having smeared" (makkhetvā) indicates the meanings of smearing, destroying, and washing for the root dhū. So means odhānasamodhāna, the connection is āgato (has come).

Etthāti odhānasamodhāne.Yoti bhikkhu, paṭicchādetīti sambandho. Parivasanto vā mānattāraho vā mānattaṃ caranto vā abbhānāraho vā yo bhikkhūti yojanā. ‘‘Purimāya āpattiyā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘samā vā’’ti pade sahādiyogo. ‘‘Ūnatarā’’tipade vibhattiapādānaṃ, anumeyyavisayaapādānaṃ vā. ‘‘Adivase katvā’’ti imināodhunitvāti ettha dhudhātuyā yathāvuttattheyeva dasseti.Ūnakapakkhapaṭicchannāti pakkhato ūnakena paṭicchannā.Etenupāyenāti pakkhe vuttena etena upāyena.

Etthati in odhānasamodhāna. Yoti the bhikkhu, the connection is paṭicchādeti (conceals). The meaning is the bhikkhu who is undergoing parivāsa, or is liable to mānatta, or is undergoing mānatta, or is liable to abbhāna. The phrase "by the previous offense" is to be construed together with the word "or equal." In the phrase "less than," the ablative is from separation, or the ablative is from the subject of inference. "Having made (it) an omitted day (adivase katvā)" shows the meaning of the root dhū in odhunitvā exactly as stated above. Ūnakapakkhapaṭicchannāti concealed with less than a fortnight. Etenupāyenāti by this method stated in the fortnight.

Tatthāti mūlāpattito atirekapaṭicchanne.Āvi kārāpetvāti mūlāpattito antarāpattiyā paṭicchannabhāvaṃ āvi kārāpetvā.Etthāti āpattipaṭicchanne.Pamāṇanti kāraṇaṃ.ti āpatti.Tatthāti mūlabhāvena kattabbāyaṃ mūliāpattiyaṃ.Itaranti mūlibhāvena kattabbaṃ mūlāpattiṃ.Samodhāyāti samodahitvā. Pakkhipitvāti attho.

Tatthati in concealing more than the mūlāpatti. Āvi kārāpetvāti having made manifest the state of being concealed by an antarāpatti from the mūlāpatti. Etthati in the concealment of offenses. Pamāṇanti reason. ti the offense. Tatthati in the mūlāpatti that should be done as fundamental. Itaranti the mūlāpatti that should be done as fundamental. Samodhāyāti having combined. The meaning is having thrown in.

Sabbacirapaṭicchannāyoti sabbāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ cirena paṭicchannāyo.Tāsanti āpattīnaṃ.Agghenāti paricchedena. Agghasaddo hettha paricchedatthavācako. Abhidhāne (abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ 1048 gāthāyaṃ) vuttaṃ ‘‘aggho mulye ca pūjane’’ti. Ettha ‘‘mulye cā’’ti padassa mūlaparicchedeti attho daṭṭhabbo. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tāsaṃ rattiparicchedavasenā’’ti. Imehi padehi agghena rattiparicchedena samodhānetvā dātabbo parivāsoagghasamodhānoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ettha ca ‘‘sabbacirapaṭicchannāyo’’ti vuttattā kiñcāpi koṭiatthavācako tatiyakkharena pāṭho yutto viya dissati. Tathāpi so pāṭho na gahetabbo. Kasmā? Bahūsu pāḷipotthakesu, aṭṭhakathāpotthakesu ca alikhitattā. Bahūsu hi porāṇapotthakesu catutthakkharena pāṭhoyeva likhito, tasmā so pāṭhoyeva gahetabbo, na aññoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Soti agghasamodhāno. Āgatoyevāti sambandho.

Sabbacirapaṭicchannāyoti those (offenses) all concealed for a long time. Tāsanti of those offenses. Agghenāti by limitation. Here, the word aggha expresses the meaning of limit. In the Abhidhānappadīpikā (verse 1048) it is said, "aggho mulye ca pūjane" (aggha means value and worship). Here, the meaning of the phrase "mulye ca" should be understood as the limit of the root (mūla). Showing that meaning, he says, "by way of limiting their nights." By these words, the meaning of agghasamodhāno is shown as "parivāsa to be given after combining by limiting the nights is agghasamodhāna." Here, because it is said "sabbacirapaṭicchannāyo," although the reading with the third syllable, which expresses the meaning of a hundred million, seems appropriate, that reading should not be accepted. Why? Because it is not written in many Pali books and commentary books. Indeed, in many ancient books, the reading with the fourth syllable is written; therefore, that reading should be accepted, not another, it should be seen. Soti that agghasamodhāno. The connection is just āgato.

Yassa panāti bhikkhussa, paṭicchannāti sambandho.Sabbanti sakalaṃ. Āpattisahassagāthāya –

Yassa panāti of which, of the bhikkhu, the connection is paṭicchannā (concealed). Sabbanti all. In the verse of a thousand offenses: –

agghasamodhānoti ettha agghasaddassa catutthakkharena pāṭhassa yuttabhāvo veditabbo. Agghena dasarattiparicchedena samodhāya dātabboagghasamodhāno.

agghasamodhānoti here, the appropriateness of the reading of the word aggha with the fourth syllable should be understood. Agghasamodhāno is the parivāsa to be given after combining by limiting to ten nights.

Yoparivāso nānāvatthukāyo āpattiyo ekato katvā diyyati, ayaṃ parivāso missakasamodhāno nāmāti yojanā. Ettha vatthuvasena missakā āpattiyo samodhānetvā dātabbo parivāsomissakasamodhānoti vacanattho kātabbo.Tatrāti missakasamodhāne.Tadanurūpāyāti tassa yācanassa anurūpāya.

Yo the parivāsa in which offenses of various bases (vatthu) are collected together and given, this parivāsa is called missakasamodhāna, so the construction. Here, the meaning should be made that "parivāsa to be given after combining offenses mixed according to the object is missakasamodhāna." Tatrāti in missakasamodhāna. Tadanurūpāyāti corresponding to that request.

Ettha cāti missakasamodhāne ca, kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.

Ettha cāti and here in missakasamodhāna, the connection is kātuṃ vaṭṭati (it is fitting to do).

Taṃ panāti pakkhamānattaṃ pana. ‘‘Aḍḍhamāsameva dātabba’’nti iminā pakkhameva dātabbaṃ mānattaṃpakkhamānattanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.ti saccaṃ.Taṃ panāti pakkhamānattaṃ pana, dātabbanti sambandho.Attano sīmanti attano vihārasīmaṃ, mahāsīmanti attho.Sodhetvāti sabbāsaṃ hatthapāsanayanavasena, chandārahānaṃ chandanayanavasena, sīmato bahikaraṇavasena ca sodhetvā.Catuvaggagaṇanti catuvaggasaṅghaṃ.Gaṇoti cettha saṅghoyevādhippeto.

Taṃ panāti that fortnight mānatta indeed. "It should be given for only half a month" shows the meaning that mānatta to be given for only a fortnight is pakkhamānatta. ti truly. Taṃ panāti that fortnight mānatta indeed, the connection is dātabbaṃ (should be given). Attano sīmanti one's own monastery boundary, meaning the great boundary (mahāsīma). Sodhetvāti having purified by way of all removals of hand-reach (hatthapāsa), by way of conveying consent (chanda) of those not entitled to give consent, and by way of exclusion from the boundary. Catuvaggagaṇanti a saṅgha of four or more bhikkhus. Gaṇoti here, gaṇa is intended as the saṅgha.

Tatrāti ‘‘yojanā kātabbā’’ti vacane.Mukhamattadassananti upāyamattadassanaṃ, ādimattadassanaṃ vā. ‘‘Āpannāya bhikkhuniyā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘evamassa vacanīyo’’ti pade kattā, ‘‘yācāpetvā’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ. ‘‘Byattāya bhikkhuniyā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘ñāpetabbo’’ti pade kāritakattā, ‘‘saṅgho’’ti padaṃ tattheva kāritakammaṃ. ‘‘Etaṃ kāraṇa’’nti dhātukammaṃ ajjhāharitabbaṃ. Tabbapaccayena kāritakammameva vuttaṃ. Ñāpetabbākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘suṇātu me’’tiādi.

Tatrāti in the statement "the arrangement should be made." Mukhamattadassananti showing just the means, or showing just the beginning. The phrase "by the offending bhikkhuni" is the subject in the phrase "he should be told thus," and the causative object in the phrase "having caused to request." The phrase "by a competent bhikkhuni" is the causative subject in the phrase "should be informed," and the phrase "the saṅgha" is the causative object in the same phrase. The action object "etaṃ kāraṇa" (this reason) should be supplied. Only the causative object is stated by the tabba suffix. Showing the way of informing, he says, "Let the Venerable Ones hear," etc.

Nikkhittavattanti karaṇatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nikkhittavattenāti hi attho.Tatthevāti māḷakasīmāyameva.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Assāti mānattacārikāya bhikkhuniyā.Tatrāti tasmā kattabbavinayakammabhāvatoti attho.Noti amhākaṃ, santikanti sambandho. Catūhi pakatattabhikkhunīhi nisīditabbanti sambandho.Gāmūpacārato dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāti idaṃ bhikkhunīvihārūpacārātikkamaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Vihārūpacāratopīti bhikkhuvihārūpacāratopi.Tatthāti bhikkhunīnaṃ nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ. Kurundimahāpaccarīsu pana vuttanti sambandho.Vihārassa cāti bhikkhuvihārassa ca. Gāmassa upacāraṃ muñcituṃ vaṭṭatīti na vuttanti yojanā. Tasmā gāmūpacārepi nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.

Nikkhittavattanti this is an instrumental expression in the sense of doing. The meaning, indeed, is nikkhittavattena (by one who has laid aside the duties). Tatthevāti just in that māḷaka boundary. ti truly, or because. Assāti of the bhikkhuni practicing mānatta. Tatrāti therefore, because of the state of being the object of the action to be done, so the meaning. Noti to us, the connection is santika (near). The connection is "it should be sat by four competent bhikkhunis." Gāmūpacārato dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāti this is said regarding exceeding the boundary of the bhikkhunis' monastery. Vihārūpacāratopīti even from the boundary of the bhikkhus' monastery. Tatthati the place where the bhikkhunis are sitting. But in the Kurundimahāpaccari, the connection is "it is said." Vihārassa cāti and of the bhikkhus' monastery. It is not stated that it is fitting to abandon the boundary of the village, so the meaning. Therefore, the idea is that it is fitting to sit even in the village's boundary.

Tāya bhikkhuniyā ārocetabbanti sambandho.

It should be announced by that bhikkhuni, so the connection.

Tatthevāti bhikkhunīnaṃ nisīdanaṭṭhāneyeva.Ṭhānanti bhikkhūnaṃ ṭhānaṃ.Etīti āgacchati.Pagevāti pātoyeva.Tāyāti mānattacāriniyā.

Tatthevāti just in the place of the bhikkhunis' sitting. Ṭhānanti the place of the bhikkhus. Etīti comes. Pagevāti early in the morning. Tāyāti by the one undergoing mānatta.

Ajānanapaccayāti ajānanakāraṇā.Tanti vacanaṃ.Pārivāsikavattādīnanti ādisaddena āgantukavattapūraṇanissayapaṭippassaddhādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Yuttataraṃ dissatīti yuttataraṃ hutvā dissati. Iminā anikkhittavattabhikkhunā viya bhikkhuniyāpi antoupacārasīmagatānaṃyeva ārocetabbaṃ, na gāme ṭhitānampi gantvā ārocetabbanti dīpeti.Uposatheti uposathadivase. Eseva nayo pavāraṇāyapi.Devasikanti divase divase.Tasmiṃ gāmeti bhikkhunīnaṃ vasanagāme.Aññatrāti bhikkhunīnaṃ vasanagāmato aññasmiṃ gāme.Tatrāti bhikkhunīnaṃ vasanagāmaṃ.Dassetvāti bhikkhunīnaṃ dassetvā.Tāyāti mānattacāriniyā.Vihāranti bhikkhūnaṃ vihāraṃ.Upacārasīmāyāti upacārasīmato bahīti sambandho.Ayanti mānattacārinī.

Ajānanapaccayāti because of the cause of not knowing. Tanti that statement. Pārivāsikavattādīnanti by the ādi (and so forth) he includes the duties of a newcomer, fulfilling the support, and revocation, etc. Yuttataraṃ dissatīti it appears more fitting. By this, he indicates that, like a bhikkhu who has not laid aside the duties, even a bhikkhuni should announce only to those within the inner boundary (antoupacārasīma), and should not go and announce even to those staying in the village. Uposatheti on the uposatha day. The same method applies to pavāraṇā also. Devasikanti daily. Tasmiṃ gāmeti in the village where the bhikkhunis reside. Aññatrāti in a village other than the village where the bhikkhunis reside. Tatrāti to the village where the bhikkhunis reside. Dassetvāti having shown (it) to the bhikkhunis. Tāyāti by the one undergoing mānatta. Vihāranti the monastery of the bhikkhus. Upacārasīmāyāti outside the boundary of the boundary, so the connection. Ayanti this one undergoing mānatta.

vīsatigaṇo,saṅgho, tasmiṃ. Mānattaṃ caramānā bhikkhunīti yojanā.Idaṃ pakkhamānattaṃ nāmāti idaṃ pubbavacanassa nigamavasena paravacanassa kathanatthāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

vīsatigaṇo, the saṅgha, in that. The construction is "a bhikkhuni undergoing mānatta." Idaṃ pakkhamānattaṃ nāmāti this is said for the purpose of concluding the previous statement and stating the subsequent statement, it should be seen.

Tatthāti tividhesu mānattesu. Yadetaṃ mānattaṃ anuññātanti sambandho.Paratoti parasmiṃ. Parivāsaṃ parivasantassa mūlāyapaṭikassitassa udāyittherassa anuññātanti sambandho.Āpajjitvāti āpajjanato.Idanti mānattaṃ vuccatīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Odhānasamodhānanti ettha vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.Tampīti kurundiyaṃ vuttavacanampi.

Tatthati in the three kinds of mānatta. The connection is "that mānatta is permitted." Paratoti from another. The connection is "it was permitted to Thera Udāyi, who, while undergoing parivāsa, was drawn back to the root offense (mūlāya paṭikassitassa)." Āpajjitvāti from committing. Idanti this is called mānatta, so the connection. ti truly, or because. Odhānasamodhānanti here, the meaning of the words has been said below. Tampīti even that statement said in the Kurundi.

Tanti agghasamodhānamissakasamodhānaṃ, dātabbanti sambandho.Ettāvatāti etaparimāṇena vacanakkamena, ‘‘ayañhi idha adhippeto parivāso nāmā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102) vacanato paṭṭhāya yāva ‘‘yojetvā dātabba’’nti vacanaṃ, tāva vacanakkamenāti attho. ‘‘Tena hi bhikkhave…pe… dassessāmā’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti yojanā. ‘‘Atthato’’ti iminā saddopi gahetabbo avinābhāvato.

Tanti that agghasamodhāna and missakasamodhāna, the connection is dātabbaṃ (should be given). Ettāvatāti by this extent of statement, from the statement beginning with "For this, the parivāsa is intended here" (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102) up to the statement "having combined, it should be given," so the meaning is "by the extent of the statement." The connection is "that statement which was said, 'Therefore, O bhikkhus…pe… I will show.'" By Atthato, the word (sadda) should also be taken, due to inseparability.

Paṭicchannaparivāsakathā
Account of Concealed Parivāsa

102.Yā pāḷi vuttāti sambandho.

102. The connection is "the Pali that was stated."

108.Tatoti pāḷito.Taṃ āpattinti taṃ antarāpattiṃ.Assāti bhikkhussa. Nikkhittavatto bhikkhūti sambandho, hutvāti vā.Soti bhikkhu, ṭhito hutvāti sambandho.Tassā āpattiyāti tassā antarāpattiyā.Paṭicchannā hotīti antarāpattipi paṭicchannā hoti.Tasmimpīti mūlāya paṭikassanepi.Makkhitāti pisitā, dhaṃsitā vā. Makkhiyanti pisiyanti, dhaṃsiyantīti vāmakkhitā,parivutthadivasā.Tatoti pāḷito paranti sambandho. Paratopi eseva nayo.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ. Paṭicchannavāre dassitā hontīti sambandho.

108.Tatoti from that Pali. Taṃ āpattinti that antarāpatti. Assāti of the bhikkhu. The connection is "a bhikkhu who has laid aside the duties," or "having been." Soti that bhikkhu, the connection is "having stood." Tassā āpattiyāti of that antarāpatti. Paṭicchannā hotīti even the antarāpatti is concealed. Tasmimpīti even in that drawing back to the root offense. Makkhitāti smeared, or destroyed. Makkhiyanti (they are smeared), or pisiyanti (they are crushed), or dhaṃsiyantīti (they are destroyed) are makkhitā (smeared), days lived. Tatoti from that Pali, the connection is "beyond." The same method is beyond also. Evantiādi is the conclusion. The connection is "they are shown in the section on concealment."

Samodhānaparivāsakathā
Account of Combined Parivāsa

125.Tatoti paṭicchannavārato, paraṃ dassitanti sambandho.Ettha cāti etasmiṃ vāre ca.Yasmāti yasmā kāraṇā, yena kāraṇena vā.Tenevāti teneva kāraṇena, tasmā kāraṇā vā, ‘‘mūlāya…pe… detū’’ti vuttanti yojanā. Tasmā sabbe makkhitāva hontīti yojanā.Tatoti vārato paraṃ niṭṭhāpitanti sambandho.

125.Tatoti from the section on concealment, the connection is "beyond, it is shown." Ettha cāti and in this section. Yasmāti because of what reason, or for what reason. Tenevāti for that reason itself, or for that reason, the connection is "it is said, 'Let him give…pe… to the root offense (mūlāya).'" Therefore, all are indeed smeared, so the connection. Tatoti beyond that section, the connection is "it is completed."

Agghasamodhānaparivāsakathā
Account of Parivāsa Combined by Value

134.Tatoti vārato paraṃ dassitoti sambandho.Tatoti vārato paraṃ pāḷi ṭhapitāti sambandho. Lajjidhamme vā uppanneti sambandho.Yanti kammaṃ.Tatoti vārato paraṃ tatheva pāḷi ṭhapitāti sambandho.

134.Tatoti beyond that section, the connection is "it is shown." Tatoti beyond that section, the Pali is established. Or the connection is "in one who has shame and Dhamma arisen." Yanti the action. Tatoti beyond that section, the Pali is established just as before.

138.Tatoti vārato paraṃ purimanayeneva pāḷi ṭhapitāti sambandho.

138.Tatoti beyond that section, the Pali is established by the same method as before.

Suddhantaparivāsādikathā
Account of Pure-Ending Parivāsa, Etc.

156.Tatoti vārato paraṃ suddhantaparivāso dassitoti sambandho.

156.Tatoti beyond that section, the connection is "pure-ending parivāsa is shown."

160.Tatoti pāḷito paraṃ pāḷi ṭhapitāti sambandho.

160.Tatoti beyond that Pali, the Pali is established.

165.Tatthāti pāḷiyaṃ.Antarā…pe…appaṭicchannāyotiādīsu attho daṭṭhabboti sambandho.

165.Tatthati in that Pali. The meaning in "Between…pe…unconcealed" etc., should be seen, so the connection.

166.Pacchimasmiṃāpattikkhandheti ettha āpattikkhandhassa bhedabhāvato kiṃ ‘‘pacchimasmiṃ āpattikkhandhe’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘ekova so āpattikkhandho’’ti. Atha kasmā ‘‘pacchimasmiṃ āpattikkhandhe’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘pacchā chāditattā panā’’tiādi. Etthapanasaddo garahatthavācako, tathāpīti hi attho. Ekopi āpattikkhandho pacchā chāditattā pacchimasmiṃ āpattikkhandheti vuttanti adhippāyo.

166.Pacchimasmiṃ āpattikkhandheti here, because of the state of being a division of the aggregate of offenses, he says, "it is the same aggregate of offenses." Then why is it said "in the last aggregate of offenses?" He says, "But because it was concealed later," etc. Here, the word pana expresses the meaning of censure, meaning "even so." The idea is that even one aggregate of offenses is called "in the last aggregate of offenses" because it was concealed later.

180.‘‘Vavatthitā sambhinnā’’ti etaṃ vacananti yojanā.

180. The connection is "this statement 'defined, mixed.'"

8. Dvebhikkhuvāraekādasakādikathā
8. Account of Two Bhikkhus, Eleven, Etc.

181.Tatoti pāḷito paraṃ vuttanti sambandho.Tatthāti pāḷiyaṃ.Missakanti ettha kehi missakanti āha ‘‘thullaccayādīhi missaka’’nti.

181.Tatoti beyond that Pali, the connection is "it is said." Missakanti here, he says "mixed with what?" "mixed with thullaccaya, etc."

184.Tatoti pāḷito paraṃ vuttanti sambandho.Tatthāti ‘‘idha pana bhikkhave’’tiādipāṭhe.Tañcāti ‘‘idha pana bhikkhave’’tiādivacanañca ito pubbe avuttaṃ sabbaṃ vacanañcāti yojanā.

184.Tatoti beyond that Pali, the connection is "it is said." Tatthati in the reading "Here, indeed, O bhikkhus." Tañcāti and that statement "Here, indeed, O bhikkhus," and all the statements not said before, so the connection.

Iti samuccayakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the arrangement in the commentary on the Samuccayakkhandhaka.

4. Samathakkhandhakaṃ

4. Samathakkhandhaka

1. Sammukhāvinayakathā
1. Account of the Presence-Vinaya

186-7.Samathakkhandhake evamattho veditabboti yojanā.Cha mātikāpadānīti vākyampi samāsopi yuttoyeva.Tatthasamāso pana asamāhāradiguyeva. ‘‘Nikkhipitvā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘vutto’’ti pade pubbakālakiriyāvisesanaṃ, tulyattho vā.Vitthāroti vibhaṅgo.Tatthāti vibhaṅge.Saññāpetīti ettha saññaṃ katvā jānāpetīti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘paritosetvā jānāpetī’’ti. Iminā saṃpubbo ñādhātu paritosanatthaṃ antokatvā avabodhanattho hotīti dasseti.Kāraṇapatirūpakānīti kāraṇassa paṭibhāgāni.Nijjhāpetīti ettha jhedhātu olokanatthoti āha ‘‘oloketī’’ti.Yathāti yenākārena, kariyamāneti sambandho.Soti dhammavādī. Paratopi eseva nayo. ‘‘Punappuna’’nti imināanupekkhatīti ettha anusaddo na upacchinnatthoti dasseti.Pekkhati anupekkhatīti ettha ikkhadhātu ‘‘dasseti anudassetī’’ti ettha disadhātuyā sadisatthoti āha ‘‘dasseti…pe… pariyāyavacanānī’’ti.Tesaññevāti ‘‘pekkhati anupekkhatī’’ti padānaññeva.Pariyāyavacanānīti vevacanasaddā atthe paribyattiṃ ayanti gacchanti imehītipariyāyāni,tāniyeva vacanāni pariyāyavacanāni.Soti adhammavādī.Mohetvāti dhammavādīpuggalādiṃ mohāpetvā.

186-7. In the Samathakkhandhaka, the meaning should be understood thus, so the connection. Cha mātikāpadānīti even the sentence and the compound are appropriate. Tattha the compound is just a non-collective digu. The word "Having laid down" is an adverb of the prior action in the phrase "it is said," or of similar meaning. Vitthāroti the exposition. Tatthati in that exposition. Saññāpetīti here, rejecting the meaning "having made a sign, he informs," he says, "having pleased, he informs." By this, he shows that the root ñā with saṃ as prefix, having made the meaning of pleasing internal, has the meaning of awareness. Kāraṇapatirūpakānīti similar to the cause. Nijjhāpetīti here, the root jhe has the meaning of looking, so he says, "he looks." Yathāti in what manner, the connection is "while it is being done." Soti the speaker of Dhamma. The same method beyond also. By Punappuna, he shows that here in anupekkhatī, the prefix anu does not have the meaning of cutting off. Pekkhati anupekkhatīti here, the root ikkh has the same meaning as the root dis in "he shows, he reveals," so he says "he shows…pe… synonymous terms." Tesaññevāti of those words themselves, "he looks, he examines." Pariyāyavacanānīti synonymous terms, the words themselves which go to an expression of meaning in the sense are pariyāyāni, those very words are synonymous terms. Soti the speaker of non-Dhamma. Mohetvāti having bewildered the person who speaks Dhamma, etc.

188.Dhammavādī puggalo dassetīti sambandho.Amohetvāti adhammavādīpuggalādiṃ amohāpetvā, aviparītaṃ jānāpetvāti attho.

188. The person who speaks Dhamma shows, so the connection. Amohetvāti having not bewildered the person who speaks non-Dhamma, etc., the meaning is "having made known without perversion."

2. Sativinayakathā
2. Account of the Mindfulness-Vinaya

195.Parammukhaṃ vineti vināsetītivinayo,parammukhaṃ vineti vināseti anenāti vāvinayo,vinayakammaṃ. Saṅghadhammavinayapuggalasammukhānaṃ dātabbo vinayosammukhāvinayo. Pañcimānīti ettha pañcannaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘suddhassā’’tiādi. Anuvaditassa dānanti sambandho.Etānīti pañca aṅgāni. ‘‘Ekekaaṅgavasena na labbhantī’’ti iminā samudāyavākyanibbattibhāvato pañcaṅgavaseneva labbhantīti dasseti.Desanāmattamevetanti ‘‘pañcimānī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ desanāmattameva, na avayavavākyanibbattivacananti adhippāyo.Dhammanti bhūtaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘pañcimāni bhikkhave’’tiādivacane.Tattha cāti ‘‘pañcimāni bhikkhave’’tiādivacane ca.Anuvadantīti ettha anuddhaṃsanena vadantīti dassento āha ‘‘codentī’’ti. Ayaṃ pana sativinayo dātabboti sambandho.Anāgāminopīti pisaddo sambhāvane, sakadāgāmiādike pana kā nāma kathāti dasseti.So ca khoti sativinayo ca.Codiyamāneyevāti codiyamānasseva, ayameva vā pāṭho.Tasminti sativinayasmiṃ dinneti sambandho. Acoditattā kathā na rūhatīti āha ‘‘codentopī’’tiādi.Āpajjatīti codako āpajjati. Codanādiasāruppe vineti vināsetītivinayo,vineti vināseti anenāti vāvinayo,vinayakammaṃ. Sativepullapattassa dātabbo vinayosativinayo.

195.Because it leads away or destroys opposition, it is called vinaya; or because it leads away or destroys opposition through this, it is called vinaya, the act of the Vinaya. The Vinaya that should be given with respect to the Saṅgha, the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the individual in front is called sammukhāvinayo. In "pañcimāni," explaining the nature of the five, he said, "suddhassā" etc. The giving to one who has confessed is the connection. Etāni means the five factors. With "Ekekaaṅgavasena na labbhantī," he shows that they are obtained only as a set of five factors because of the origination of the complete statement. Desanāmattamevetaṃ means this statement "pañcimāni" is merely a declaration, not a statement originating from component parts, is the meaning. Dhammaṃ means what is true. Ettha means in the statement beginning with "pañcimāni bhikkhave" etc. Tattha ca means in the statement beginning with "pañcimāni bhikkhave" etc. Anuvadantī showing that they speak without depreciation, he says, "codentī". But this sativinaya should be given, is the connection. Anāgāminopī the "pi" implies possibility; but what to say about a Sakadāgāmi etc.? So ca kho means and that sativinaya. Codiyamāneyeva means only to one being questioned, or this is the correct reading. Tasmiṃ means in that sativinaya, in the giving. Because the matter does not grow due to not being questioned, he says, "codentopī" etc. Āpajjatī means the accuser incurs. Because it leads away or destroys the dissimilarity of the accusation etc., it is called vinayo; or because it leads away or destroys through this, it is called vinayo, the act of the Vinaya. The Vinaya that should be given to one who has attained fullness of mindfulness is called sativinayo.

3. Amūḷhavinayakathā
3. Amūḷhavinayakathā

196.Bhāsitaparikantanti ettha bhāsitaparikantasaddānaṃ karaṇāpekkhattā visuṃ karaṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vācāya bhāsitaṃ, kāyena parikanta’’nti. ‘‘Parikkametvā kata’’nti iminā parikamatītiparikantaṃ,parikantaṃ hutvā kataṃparikantanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Parikkametvāti atikkamitvā.Saratāyasmāti ettha ukāralopasandhiṃ dassento āha ‘‘saratu āyasmā’’ti. ‘‘Evarūpiyā āpattiyā’’ti imināāpajjitāti ettha tupaccayayogabhāvato kammatthachaṭṭhiyāpi sambhavabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tupaccayayoge kammatthachaṭṭhī aniccaṃ hoti, tasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘evarūpiyā āpattiyā’’ti kammatthachaṭṭhībhāvena avatvā ‘‘evarūpiṃ āpatti’’nti kammatthadutiyābhāvena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Tassāti ‘‘āpajjitvā’’ti pāṭhassa. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ pacchā’’ti padehi adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti. Codakassa kathaṃ vineti vināsetītivinayo,codakassa kathaṃ vineti vināseti anenāti vāvinayo. Paṭhamaṃ mūḷhabhāvaṃ upagantvā pacchā amūḷhassa dātabbo vinayoamūḷhavinayo.

196.Bhāsitaparikantaṃ here, showing the separate means due to the dependence of the words bhāsita and parikanta on an instrument, he says, "spoken with the voice, acted with the body". With "Parikkametvā kataṃ" he shows the meaning of the word that parikamati is parikantaṃ, done having acted, is parikantaṃ. Parikkametvā means having transgressed. Saratāyasmā here, showing the elision of the "u" vowel, he says, "saratu āyasmā". With "Evarūpiyā āpattiyā" he shows the possibility of the sixth case in the passive sense due to the presence of the tu suffix in āpajjitā. In the tu suffix, the sixth case in the passive sense is impermanent; therefore, it should be understood that in the Pali, it is stated as "evarūpiṃ āpatti" in the second case in the passive sense, not as "evarūpiyā āpattiyā" in the sixth case in the passive sense. Tassā means of the reading "āpajjitvā". With the words "paṭhamaṃ pacchā," he shows the intended meaning. How does it lead away or destroy the accuser's speech, it is vinayo; or how does it lead away or destroy the accuser's speech through this, it is vinayo. The Vinaya that should be given to one who, having first fallen into delusion, later becomes undeluded is called amūḷhavinayo.

4. Paṭiññātakaraṇakathā
4. Paṭiññātakaraṇakathā

200.Paṭijāniyate, paṭijānanaṃ vāpaṭiññā,tāya kāretabbaṃ.

200.It is acknowledged, or the act of acknowledging is paṭiññā, it should be done with that.

5. Yebhuyyasikākathā
5. Yebhuyyasikākathā

202.Yebhuyyasikāti ettha yebhuyyena pavattā yebhuyyasikā, dhammavādīnaṃ yebhuyyatāsampādikā kiriyāti dassento āha ‘‘yassā kiriyāyā’’tiādi. Tatthayassā kiriyāyāti yassā yebhuyyatāsampādikāya kiriyāya.Esāti yebhuyyatāsampādikā kiriyā.

202.Yebhuyyasikā here, showing that yebhuyyasikā is that which proceeds by the majority, the action that accomplishes the majority of those speaking in accordance with the Dhamma, he says, "yassā kiriyāyā" etc. There, yassā kiriyāyā means by which action that accomplishes the majority. Esā means this action that accomplishes the majority.

204.Oramattakanti ettha orasaddo ca mattasaddo ca samūhaṃ katvā parittavācako appamattavācakoti āha ‘‘parittaṃ appamattaka’’nti. ‘‘Bhaṇḍanamattamevā’’ti iminā na mahantaṃ vivādādhikaraṇaṃ hotīti dasseti.Na ca gatigatanti ettha cirakālabhāvaṃ na ca gatanti dassento āha ‘‘dve tayo…pe… avinicchita’’nti.Tattha tatthevāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vivādādhikaraṇajātaāvāse eva, na ca saritasāritapadānaṃ suddhakāritakiriyabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sayaṃ saritaṃ vā aññehi sāritaṃ vā na hotī’’ti.Tehi bhikkhūhīti vivādakārakehi bhikkhūhi. ‘‘Salākaṃ gāhento’’ti iminā ‘‘jānātī’’ti padassa kattāraṃ dasseti.Iminā nīhārenāti iminā kāraṇena.Api nāmāti imināappevanāmasaddo apināmapariyāyoti dasseti.Assūti bhaveyyuṃ. Iminā ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ adhammavādī bahutarā bhaveyyuṃ, appeva nāma sādhū’’ti yojanānayaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ayamassa ajjhāsayo hotī’’ti iminā pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti.Assāti salākagāhassa.Dvīsupīti ‘‘jānāti saṅgho bhijjissatī’’ti ca ‘‘appeva nāma saṅgho bhijjeyyā’’ti ca dvīsupi padesu.

204.Oramattakaṃ here, combining the words ora and matta, he says that it is expressive of smallness and slightness, "parittaṃ appamattakaṃ". With "Bhaṇḍanamattamevā" he shows that it is not a great dispute. Na ca gatigataṃ here, showing that it is not one that has gone on for a long time, he says, "dve tayo…pe… avinicchitaṃ". Tattha tattheva means in that very place of the arising of the dispute, and showing that it is not the action of purifying those who remember or cause to remember, he says, "sayaṃ saritaṃ vā aññehi sāritaṃ vā na hoti". Tehi bhikkhūhi means by the monks who are causing the dispute. With "Salākaṃ gāhento" he shows the agent of the word "jānāti". Iminā nīhārenā means by this reason. Api nāmā here, he shows that the word appevanāma is a synonym for apināma. Assū means may be. Here, he shows the method of interpreting the Pali that "in the Pali, there may be more who speak against the Dhamma, may it not be well". With "Ayamassa ajjhāsayo hoti" he shows the remaining portion of the text. Assā means of the taking of the ballot. Dvīsupī means in both instances of "jānāti saṅgho bhijjissati" and "appeva nāma saṅgho bhijjeyyā".

‘‘Adhammena gaṇhantī’’ti ettha ‘‘gaṇhantī’’ti kiriyāpadassa adhammavādino eva kattā nāmāti āha ‘‘adhammavādino’’ti. ‘‘Dve dhammavādino’’ti iminā ‘‘vaggā gaṇhantī’’ti ettha ‘‘gaṇhantī’’ti kiriyāpadassa dhammavādino eva kattā nāmāti dasseti.Na ca yathādiṭṭhiyā gaṇhantīti ettha dhammavādino hutvā dhammavādisalākaṃ aggahetvā adhammavādisalākassa gahaṇaṃ na ca yathādiṭṭhiyā gaṇhanti nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘dhammavādino hutvā’’tiādi.Paṭivattetvāti imamevatthaṃ paṭisedhetvā. ‘‘Parivattetvā’’tipi pāṭho, heṭṭhupariyāyaṃ katvāti attho.Teti dhammavādino.Etthāti samathakkhandhake.

"Adhammena gaṇhantī" here, he says that the agent of the verb "gaṇhantī" is only those who speak against the Dhamma, "adhammavādino". With "Dve dhammavādino" he shows that the agent of the verb "gaṇhantī" here in "vaggā gaṇhantī" is only those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma, "dhammavādino". Na ca yathādiṭṭhiyā gaṇhantī here, showing that being those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma, not taking the ballot of those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma, but taking the ballot of those who speak against the Dhamma, it is not called taking in accordance with one's view, he says, "dhammavādino hutvā" etc. Paṭivattetvā means having refuted this very meaning. "Parivattetvā" is also a reading, meaning having made the lower the upper. Te means those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma. Ettha means in the samathakkhandhaka.

6. Tassapāpiyasikākathā
6. Tassapāpiyasikākathā

207.Asucīti ettha natthi sucīni kāyavacīkammāni etassāti asucīti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘asucīhi kāyavacīkammehi samannāgato’’ti. Eseva nayoalajjīti etthāpi.Sānuvādoti ettha anuvādaupavādasaddānaṃ pariyāyattā vuttaṃ ‘‘saupavādo’’ti.Iti pañcāti imāni pañca aṅgāni.Etthāti tassapāpiyasikakamme.Idanti kammaṃ vuccatīti sambandho.ti vitthāro. Yo puggalo pāpiyoti yojanā.Pāpussannatāyāti lāmakussannatāya. Iminā ayañca pāpo ayañca pāpo, ayamimesaṃ visesena pāpotipāpiyoti ca pāpānaṃ atisayena pāpotipāpiyoti ca vacanattho dassito.Tassāti puggalassa. Iminā tassa pāpiyassa kattabbaṃtassapāpiyasikaṃ,tameva kammaṃtassapāpiyasikakammanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Kesuci potthakesu yakāre dvebhāvo atthi, so ayuttoyeva. ‘‘Yebhuyyasikā’’ti ettha yakāre dvebhāvassa dassanato etthāpi dvebhāvo yutto bhaveyyāti likhantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

207.Asucī here, showing the meaning of the word asucī as "there are no pure deeds of body and speech for him," he says, "asucīhi kāyavacīkammehi samannāgato". This same method applies to alajjī as well. Sānuvādo here, because the words anuvāda and upavāda are synonymous, it is said "saupavādo". Iti pañcā means these five factors. Ettha means in the tassapāpiyasikakamma. Idaṃ means this action, the connection is that it is called. means expansion. The interpretation is "yo puggalo pāpiyo". Pāpussannatāyā means due to the eminence of wickedness. With this, the meaning of the words pāpiyo as "this one is wicked and this one is wicked, this one is especially wicked among these" and pāpiyo as "exceedingly wicked among the wicked" is shown. Tassā means of that individual. With this, he shows the meaning of the word that tassa pāpiyassa kattabbaṃ is tassapāpiyasikaṃ, and that same action is tassapāpiyasikakammaṃ. In some books, there is duplication of the "ya" sound, but that is incorrect. It should be understood that because the duplication of the "ya" sound is explained in "yebhuyyasikā," they write that the duplication of the "ya" sound is correct here as well.

7. Tiṇavatthārakādikathā
7. Tiṇavatthārakādikathā

212.Kakkhaḷatāya vāḷatāyāti ettha kakkhaḷassa bhāvo kakkhaḷatā, vāḷassa bhāvo vāḷatāti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kakkhaḷabhāvāya ceva vāḷabhāvāya cā’’ti. Iminā tāpaccayassa samūhatthañca svatthañca paṭikkhipati. ‘‘Kakkhaḷatāya vāḷatāyā’’ti byañjanatoyeva nānaṃ, na atthato.Bhedāyāti ettha aññassa bhedaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘saṅghabhedāyā’’ti.Gilānepīti pisaddo aññe pana kā kathāti dasseti.Tatthevāti adhikaraṇavūpasamaṭṭhāneyeva. ‘‘Ekato’’ti imināekajjhanti padassa ‘‘ekato’’ti padena samānataṃ dasseti, ekasaddato jjhapaccayo ca topaccayo ca viseso, ‘‘tiṇavatthārakasadisattā’’ti iminā sadisūpacāraṃ dasseti. Tiṇehi avattharitabbantitiṇavatthāraṃ,gūthamuttaṃ, tiṇavatthāramivatiṇavatthārakaṃ. Ettha adhikaraṇameva mukhyato labbhati, samatho pana phalūpacārato, sadisatthe kapaccayo. Tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto āha‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. Ghaṭṭiyamānaṃ gūthaṃ vā muttaṃ vāti yojanā. ‘‘Ghaṭṭiyamāna’’nti padaṃ hetuantogadhavisesanaṃ, ‘‘bādhatī’’ti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ. Suppaṭicchāditassa pana assa gūthamuttassāti yojanā. ‘‘Suppaṭicchāditassā’’ti padampi hetuantogadhavisesanameva, ‘‘na bādhatī’’ti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ saṃvattatīti sambandho.Mūlānumūlanti mūlañca anumūlañca mūlānumūlaṃ.Tanti adhikaraṇaṃ.Iminā kammenāti tiṇavatthārakakammena. Gūthaṃ tiṇehi paṭicchannaṃ suvūpasantaṃ hoti viya tiṇavatthārakena paṭicchannaṃ suvūpasantaṃ hotīti yojanā.Itīti tasmā.

212.Kakkhaḷatāya vāḷatāyā here, showing the meaning of the words that kakkhaḷassa bhāvo is kakkhaḷatā, and vāḷassa bhāvo is vāḷatā, he says "kakkhaḷabhāvāya ceva vāḷabhāvāya ca". With this, he rejects the collective and possessive meanings of the suffix. "Kakkhaḷatāya vāḷatāyā" is different only in expression, not in meaning. Bhedāyā here, rejecting another's division, he says, "saṅghabhedāyā". Gilānepī the "pi" implies, but what to say about others? Tattheva means in the place of the settling of the dispute itself. With "Ekato" he shows the similarity of the word ekajjhaṃ with the word "ekato"; the jjha suffix and the to suffix are different from the word eka. With "tiṇavatthārakasadisattā" he shows treatment by similarity. What is covered by grass is tiṇavatthāraṃ, excrement and urine; like tiṇavatthāraṃ is tiṇavatthārakaṃ. Here, primarily the dispute itself is obtained, but the settlement is by treatment of the result, the ka suffix is in the sense of similarity. Making that meaning clear, he says "yathā hī" etc. The interpretation is that excrement or urine being rubbed. The word "Ghaṭṭiyamānaṃ" is a qualifying adjective included in the cause, it should be connected with "bādhati". But the interpretation is that of the well-covered excrement and urine. The word "Suppaṭicchāditassa" is also a qualifying adjective included in the cause, it should be connected with "na bādhati". The dispute is related to what, is the connection. Mūlānumūlaṃ means the root and the secondary root. Taṃ means that dispute. Iminā kammenā means by this tiṇavatthāraka action. Just as excrement covered with grass is well-settled, so too, covered with tiṇavatthārakena, it is well-settled, is the interpretation. Itī means therefore.

213.Thullavajjanti ettha thullaccayassāpi thullavajjattā idha pārājikasaṅghādisesamevādhippetanti āha ‘‘pārājikañceva saṅghādisesañcā’’ti.Gihipaṭisaṃyuttanti ettha gihīnaṃ paṭisaṃyuttaṃ gihipaṭisaṃyuttanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gihīna’’ntiādi. ‘‘Hīnenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘khuṃsanavambhana’’ iti padeneva sambandhitabbaṃ.Dhammikapaṭissavesūti nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ.

213.Thullavajjaṃ here, because of the gravity of thullaccaya as well, he says that here, only pārājika and saṅghādisesa are intended, "pārājikañceva saṅghādisesañca". Gihipaṭisaṃyuttaṃ here, showing the meaning of the word gihipaṭisaṃyuttaṃ as "related to laypeople," he says "gihīnaṃ" etc. The word "Hīnena" should be connected only with the words "khuṃsanavambhana". Dhammikapaṭissavesū is a locative absolute with a sense of cause.

214.Kammavācāpariyosāne vuṭṭhitā hontīti sambandho.Tatthāti adhikaraṇavūpasamaṭṭhāne.Aññāvihitāpīti adhikaraṇavinicchayato aññasmiṃ ṭhāne cittaṃ āvihitāpi ṭhapitāpi.Upasampadamaṇḍalatoti upasampadasīmabimbato,ye panāti bhikkhū pana, diṭṭhāvikammaṃ karontīti vā anāgatāti vā nisinnāti vā sambandho.Tehi vāti adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchinantehi bhikkhūhi vā.Tatthāti adhikaraṇavinicchitaṭṭhānaṃ.Chandaṃ datvāti chandaṃ saṅghassa datvā.Pariveṇādīsūtiādisaddena āvāsādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Teti bhikkhū.

214.The connection is that they arise at the end of the Kammavācā. Tattha means in the place of the settling of the dispute. Aññāvihitāpī even if the mind is directed or fixed in a place other than the resolution of the dispute. Upasampadamaṇḍalato means from the boundary marker of the upasampadā boundary, ye panā means but those monks, the connection is that they are doing an act that is seen, or not yet arrived, or seated. Tehi vā means or by those monks who are resolving the dispute. Tattha means to the place where the dispute is resolved. Chandaṃ datvā means having given consent to the Saṅgha. Pariveṇādīsū the word ādi includes dwellings and so forth. Te means those monks.

8. Adhikaraṇakathā
8. Adhikaraṇakathā

215.Vipaccatāyāti ettha vikārabhāvena patati pavattatītivipaccaṃ,cittadukkhaṃ, tadevavipaccatā,tadatthāyāti dassento āha ‘‘cittadukkhattha’’nti. ‘‘Pharusavacana’’nti imināvohārasaddo vacanapariyāyoti dasseti.Yo tatthāti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tesu anuvadantesū’’ti. Yo upavādoti yojanā. ‘‘Anuvadanā’’ti etaṃ padanti yojanā.Ākāradassananti anuvadanassa ākāradassanaṃ, dassanahetu vā. ‘‘Punappuna’’nti imināanusampavaṅkatāti ettha anusaddassa na upacchinnatthaṃ dasseti.Tatthevāti anuvadane eva.Sampavaṅkatāti sammā pakārena ninnaponapabbhāratā.Abbhussahanatāti ettha atirekaṃ ussāhanatāti dassento āha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi.Anubalappadānanti ettha punappunaṃ balassa padānanti dassento āha ‘‘purimavacanassā’’tiādi.

215.Vipaccatāyā here, showing that vipaccaṃ is what falls or proceeds due to a state of change, mental suffering, that itself is vipaccatā, for that purpose, he says "cittadukkhatthaṃ". With "Pharusavacanaṃ" he shows that the word vohāra is a synonym for speech. Yo tattha here, showing the scope of the word tassa, he says "tesu anuvadantesu". The interpretation is that whoever reproaches. The word "Anuvadanā" is that word, is the connection. Ākāradassanaṃ means showing the manner of reproach, or a reason for showing. With "Punappunaṃ" he shows that the word anusampavaṅkatā here, the word anu does not mean uninterrupted. Tattheva means in the reproach itself. Sampavaṅkatā means being completely bent over in a lowering manner. Abbhussahanatā here, showing that it means excessive encouragement, he says "kasmā" etc. Anubalappadānaṃ here, showing that it means giving strength again and again, he says "purimavacanassā" etc.

Kiccayatāti ettha ‘‘mā paṇḍiccaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 2.22.1) viya byañjanavaḍḍhanavasena yakārāgamoti āha ‘‘kiccameva kiccaya’’nti. ‘‘Ubhayaṃpetaṃ saṅghasseva adhivacana’’nti iminā kiccakaraṇīyasaddo kattuvācakoti dasseti, saṅgho hi karotīti vacanatthenakiccoti cakaraṇīyoti ca vuccati. Tassa bhāvo,kiccayatā karaṇīyatāti vutte saṅghakammaṃyeva labbhati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhayaṃpetaṃ saṅghakammasseva adhivacana’’nti. Yadi kammavācako bhaveyya, ‘‘kattabbanti kiccaṃ, karaṇīya’’nti vutteyeva saṅghakammassa labhanato tāpaccayo svattho bhaveyya. Evañhi sati kiccayassa bhāvokiccayatākaraṇīyassa bhāvokaraṇīyatāti vacanattho na kattabbo bhaveyya, kato ca, tasmā na kammavācakoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Tassevāti saṅghakammasseva.Tatthāti apalokanādīsu catūsu kammesu.Sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghanti ‘‘upacārasīmādīsu ṭhitaṃ saṅghaṃ.Sodhetvāti ettha sodhanaṃ nāma sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghassa hatthapāsanayanaṃ, chandārahānaṃ chandassa āharaṇaṃ, sīmato bahikaraṇaṃ. Tamevatthaṃ ekadesato dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā’’ti. Apaloketi āpucchati anenātiapalokanaṃ,taṃyeva kammaṃapalokanakammaṃ. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghaṃ sodhetvā’’tiādinā vuttanayeneva. ‘‘Suṇātu me’’tiādinā saṅghagaṇapuggale ñāpeti etāyātiñatti,sāyeva kammaṃñattikammaṃ,ñattiyeva dutiyaṃñattidutiyaṃ,tameva kammaṃñattidutiyakammaṃ. Ettha kiñcāpi ñatti paṭhamaṃ ṭhapitā, kammavācāyeva dutiyā hoti, ‘‘phassapañcamā’’tiādīsu (dhātu. 316) viya pana paṭilomavasena vohāraṃ katvā ‘‘ñattidutiyā’’ti vuttaṃ.Phassapañcamāti ettha kiñcāpi dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ (dha. sa. 1 ādayo) ‘‘phasso hoti, vedanā hoti, saññā hoti, cetanā hoti, cittaṃ hotī’’ti phassaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ, paṭilomavasena pana vohāraṃ katvā ‘‘phassapañcamā’’ti dhātukathāyaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Eseva nayo ñatti catutthakammepi.Ekāya ca anusāvanāyāti ñattito anupacchā sāvetabbātianusāvanā,tāya,tīhi ca anusāvanāhīti ñattitoanu pacchā, punappunaṃ vā tikkhattuṃ sāvetabbātianusāvanā,tāhi.Tatthāti catūsu kammesu.

Kiccayatāti In this context, like in "mā paṇḍiccaya" etc. (jā. 2.22.1), it is said that the yakāra is an augment due to the increase of the letter, "kiccameva kiccaya". "Ubhayaṃpetaṃ saṅghasseva adhivacana" this shows that the words kiccakaraṇīya are in the active voice, because the Sangha does the action, and by the meaning of the words, it is called kicco and karaṇīyo. The state of that, kiccayatā karaṇīyatā, when said, only the Sangha's action is obtained. Therefore, it is said, "ubhayaṃpetaṃ saṅghakammasseva adhivacana". If it were in the passive voice, by just saying "kattabbanti kiccaṃ, karaṇīya", the Sangha's action would be obtained, and the tā suffix would be reflexive. If this were the case, the meaning of the words, the state of kiccaya is kiccayatā, the state of karaṇīya is karaṇīyatā, the meaning should not be done, but it is done, therefore it should be seen as not being in the passive voice. Tassevāti Of that Sangha action. Tatthāti Among the four actions such as apalokana. Sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghanti "The Sangha situated in the upacārasīmā etc." Sodhetvāti Here, purification means moving the hand-passa of the Sangha situated in the sīmā, bringing the chanda of those who are eligible for chanda, and excluding them from the sīmā. To show that meaning in part, it is said, "chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā". Apaloketi means to ask, to inquire with this, hence apalokanaṃ, that same action is apalokanakammaṃ. Vuttanayaneneva means in the manner stated by "sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghaṃ sodhetvā" etc. To inform the Sangha or the group of individuals with "Suṇātu me" etc., this is called ñatti, that same action is ñattikammaṃ, ñatti itself is the second, hence ñattidutiyaṃ, that same action is ñattidutiyakammaṃ. Here, although the ñatti is placed first, the kammavācā is the second, but like in "phassapañcamā" etc. (dhātu. 316), by making the usage in reverse order, it is called "ñattidutiyā". Phassapañcamāti Here, although in the Dhammasaṅgaṇī (dha. sa. 1 onwards), "phasso hoti, vedanā hoti, saññā hoti, cetanā hoti, cittaṃ hoti" is said with phassa first, it should be seen as said in the Dhātukathā as "phassapañcamā" by making the usage in reverse order. This same method applies to ñatti catutthakamma too. Ekāya ca anusāvanāyāti anusāvanā means what should be announced immediately after the ñatti, by that. Tīhi ca anusāvanāhīti anusāvanā means what should be announced repeatedly three times after the ñatti, by those. Tatthāti In the four actions.

Apaloketvāvāti ettha evaphalaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ñattikammādivasena na kātabba’’nti.Ñattikammampīti pisaddena na kevalaṃ apalokanakammameva, atha kho ñattikammampīti dasseti.Ñattidutiyakammaṃ panāti ettha panasaddo visesatthajotako, pakkhantarajotako vā.Tatthāti dvīsu kammesu.Garukānīti alahukāni.Avasesānīti chahi kammehi avasesāni, evarūpāni lahukakammānīti sambandho. ‘‘Avasesā’’tipi pāṭho, sammutiyoti sambandho.Apaloketvāpīti pisaddo ñattidutiyakammavācaṃ sāvetvāpīti sampiṇḍeti. Aññatthāpohanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ñattikammañatticatutthakammavasena pana na kātabbamevā’’ti. Ñatticatutthakammaṃ kātabbanti sambandho.Etthāti samathakkhandhake.

Apaloketvāvāti Here, showing the result of 'eva', he says "na kātabba ñattikammādivasena". Ñattikammampīti With the word 'pi', it shows that not only apalokanakamma, but also ñattikamma. Ñattidutiyakammaṃ panāti Here, the word 'pana' indicates a distinction or a different aspect. Tatthāti In the two actions. Garukānīti Not light. Avasesānīti Remaining from the six kammas, such light kammas, this is the connection. "Avasesā" is also a reading, sammutiyoti is the connection. Apaloketvāpīti The word 'pi' combines even after announcing the ñattidutiyakammavācā. Showing the exclusion elsewhere, he says "ñattikammañatticatutthakammavasena pana na kātabbameva". Ñatticatutthakammaṃ kātabbanti is the connection. Etthāti In the Samathakkhandhaka.

Etesanti catunnaṃ kammānaṃ. Yaṃ pana atthajātaṃ anuttānanti sambandho.Tatthāti catūsu kammesu.Tanti atthajātaṃ.Evanti evaṃ kammavaggeyeva vaṇṇayamāne.ti laddhaguṇajotako.Suviññeyyāti sukhena viññātabbā.

Etesanti Of these four kammas. Yaṃ pana atthajātaṃ anuttānaṃti is the connection. Tatthāti In the four kammas. Tanti That collection of meanings. Evanti While explaining thus in the kamma vagga itself. ti Indicating the acquired quality. Suviññeyyāti Easily understandable.

216.Pāḷivasenevāti na aṭṭhakathāvasenāti adhippāyo.

216.Pāḷivasenevāti The intention is not in the way of the Aṭṭhakathā.

220.Yenāti cittuppādena. Iminā vivadanti anenātivivādoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Samathehi cāti casaddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena na kevalaṃ vivādoyeva, atha kho adhikaraṇañcāti sampiṇḍeti, atha vāsamathehi cāti samathehi eva. Iminā samathehi adhikarīyati vūpasamīyatītiadhikaraṇanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Vivādoyeva adhikaraṇaṃvivādādhikaraṇaṃ. Evamādinā nayenāti ādisaddena anuddhaṃsanena vadanti anena cittuppādenātianuvādotiādayo vacanatthe saṅgaṇhāti.

220.Yenāti By which state of mind. Showing the meaning of the word that they dispute with this, it is called vivādo. Samathehi cāti The word 'ca' is in the sense of combination. Therefore, it combines not only the dispute, but also the adjudication, or samathehi cāti, only by the settlements. By this, it shows the meaning of the word that is adjudicated or settled by these settlements is called adhikaraṇa. The dispute itself is the adjudication, hence vivādādhikaraṇaṃ. Evamādinā nayenāti With the word 'ādi', it includes the meanings of words such as, they speak without raising, with this state of mind is called anuvādo.

222.Sandhāyabhāsitavasenāti lokavajjaṃ sandhāya bhāsitassa vacanassa vasena. Sandhāyabhāsitatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘yasmiṃ hī’’tiādi. Tattha pathavikhaṇanādike yasmiṃ āpattādhikaraṇeti yojanā.Tasminti kusalacittaṅge āpattādhikaraṇe.Tasmāti yasmā na sakkā vattuṃ, tasmā.Idanti ‘‘natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti vacanaṃ, vuttanti sambandho. Sandhāya avuttaṃ dassetvā sandhāya vuttaṃ dassento āha ‘‘idaṃ pana sandhāya vutta’’nti. Tatthaidaṃ panāti kāraṇaṃ pana sandhāyāti sambandho. Yaṃ āpattādhikaraṇanti yojanā. ‘‘Lokavajja’’nti pade tulyādhikaraṇaṃ. Lokasmiṃ, lokehi vā vajjetabbantilokavajjaṃ. Tanti āpattādhikaraṇaṃ.Tatthāti āpattādhikaraṇe.Vikappoti vividhā kappanaṃ, vividhatakko vā.Yaṃ panāti āpattādhikaraṇaṃ pana. ‘‘Paṇṇattivajja’’nti pade tulyādhikaraṇaṃ. Bhagavato paññattiyā hetubhūtāya vajjetabbantipaṇṇattivajjaṃ. Tanti āpattādhikaraṇaṃ, akusalaṃ hotīti sambandho.Kiñcīti appamattakaṃ, āpattānāpattiṃ ajānantassa āpajjanatoti sambandho.Tasmāti yasmā abyākataṃ hoti, tasmā.Tatthāti paṇṇattivajjabhūte āpattādhikaraṇe. ‘‘Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ…pe… kusala’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti yojanā.

222.Sandhāyabhāsitavasenāti On the basis of a statement spoken with reference to worldly offense. Expanding the meaning of sandhāyabhāsita, he says "yasmiṃ hī" etc. There, the connection is in which offense adjudication, in pathavikhaṇana etc. Tasminti In that skillful state of mind, in offense adjudication. Tasmāti Therefore, since it is not possible to say, therefore. Idanti "natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusalaṃ" this statement is said, is the connection. After showing what is not said with reference, showing what is said with reference, he says "idaṃ pana sandhāya vutta". There, idaṃ panāti The reason is with reference, is the connection. Yaṃ āpattādhikaraṇanti is the connection. In the phrase "lokavajja", it is in apposition. What is blameworthy in the world or by the world is lokavajjaṃ. Tanti That offense adjudication. Tatthāti In the offense adjudication. Vikappoti Various imaginations, or various thoughts. Yaṃ panāti However, that offense adjudication. In the phrase "paṇṇattivajja", it is in apposition. What is blameworthy due to the enactment of the Blessed One is paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Tanti That offense adjudication, is unskillful, is the connection. Kiñcīti A very little, for one who does not know the offense and non-offense. Tasmāti Therefore, since it is indeterminate, therefore. Tatthāti In the offense adjudication that is paṇṇattivajja. The statement "Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ…pe… kusala" is said, is the connection.

Yantiāpattādhikaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ vuccati…pe… kusala’’nti vadeyya saceti yojanā. Eḷakalomañca padasodhammañca eḷakalomapadasodhammāni, tāni ādīni yesaṃ tānītieḷakalomapadasodhammādīni,tāni samuṭṭhānāni yāsantieḷakalomapadasodhammādisamuṭṭhānā,tāsaṃ āpattīnampīti sambandho.Tatthāti eḷakalomapadasodhammādisamuṭṭhānāsu āpattīsu.Āpattiyā aṅganti āpattiyā kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ āpattiyā anaṅgaṃ dassetvā tassāyeva aṅgaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kāyavacīviññattivasena panā’’tiādi. Tatthacalitappavattānanti calitena hetubhūtena pavattānaṃ. Atha vā calito ca kāyo, pavattā ca vācāticalitappavattā,tāsaṃ calitappavattānaṃ kāyavācānaṃ.Tañcāti kāyavācānaṃ aññatarañca.Abyākatanti ettha itisaddo parisamāpanattho.

Yanti The offense adjudication. "Idaṃ vuccati…pe… kusala" if he were to say, is the connection. Eḷakalomañca padasodhammañca eḷakalomapadasodhammāni, tāni ādīni yesaṃ tānīti eḷakalomapadasodhammādīni, tāni samuṭṭhānāni yāsanti eḷakalomapadasodhammādisamuṭṭhānā, of those offenses too, is the connection. Tatthāti In the offenses arising from eḷakalomapadasodhammādī. Āpattiyā aṅganti The cause of the offense. After showing the non-factor of the offense in this way, showing the factor of that itself, he says "kāyavacīviññattivasena panā" etc. There, calitappavattānanti Of those arising due to the moving cause. Or, the body is moving and the speech is occurring, hence calitappavattā, of those moving and occurring actions of body and speech. Tañcāti And one of those actions of body and speech. Abyākatanti Here, the word 'iti' is for the completion of the context.

Tenāti cittena. ‘‘Idaṃ…pe… saddhi’’nti imināsañjānantoti ettha saṃsaddassa sundaratthaṃ saha ākārena dasseti. ‘‘Vītikkama…pe… kappetvā’’ti imināceccāti padassa atthaṃ saha visesanena dasseti. ‘‘Upakkamavasena…pe… pesetvā’’ti imināabhivitaritvāti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. Pāḷiyaṃ yaṃsaddovītikkamavisayoti āha ‘‘yaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ vītikkama’’nti. ‘‘Āpajjatī’’ti iminā pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ vītikkamato tassa bhikkhunoti yojanā.

Tenāti By that mind. "Idaṃ…pe… saddhi" with this, it shows the meaning of beauty together with the form in sañjānanto. "Vītikkama…pe… kappetvā" with this, it shows the meaning of the word ceccā together with the specification. "Upakkamavasena…pe… pesetvā" with this, it shows the meaning of the word abhivitaritvā. In the Pali, the word 'yaṃ' is about the transgression, so he says "yaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ vītikkama". "Āpajjatī" with this, it shows the remaining part of the text. Thus, from the transgression, it belongs to that bhikkhu, is the connection.

Abyākatavārepīti pisaddo akusalavāraṃ apekkhati.Tassāti cittassa.Ajānantotiādīnaṃ padānamattho akusalavāre vuttapaṭipakkhavasena veditabbo. Yaṃ āpattādhikaraṇantiādīnaṃ padānamattho akusalavārena sadisoyeva.

Abyākatavārepīti The word 'pi' anticipates the unskillful aspect. Tassāti Of that mind. The meanings of the words ajānanto etc., should be understood in the unskillful aspect as the opposite of what was said. The meanings of the words yaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ etc., are similar to the unskillful aspect.

224.Ayaṃ vivādo no adhikaraṇantiādīsu evamattho veditabboti sambandho.

224.Ayaṃ vivādo no adhikaraṇantiādīsu In these etc., the meaning should be understood in this way, is the connection.

9. Adhikaraṇavūpasamanasamathakathā
9. Adhikaraṇavūpasamanasamathakathā

228.Catuvaggakaraṇe kammeti sīmasammutiādikamme.Pañcavaggakaraṇeti paccantimesu janapadesu upasampadādikamme.Dasavaggakaraṇeti majjhimesu janapadesu upasampadakamme.Vīsativaggakaraṇeti abbhānakamme.Kammappattāti kammassa pattā yuttā anurūpā.

228.Catuvaggakaraṇe kammeti In actions done by a group of four, such as sīmasammuti. Pañcavaggakaraṇeti In actions done by a group of five in border regions, such as upasampadā. Dasavaggakaraṇeti In actions done by a group of ten in central regions, such as upasampadā. Vīsativaggakaraṇeti In abbhāna action, done by a group of twenty. Kammappattāti Suitable, appropriate, and fitting for the action.

230.Sampaṭicchitabbanti paṭiggaṇhitabbaṃ. Sampaṭicchitvā ca pana atikkāmetabbanti sambandho.Bhaṇḍakanti cīvarādibhaṇḍakaṃ.Mānaniggahatthāyāti bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ mānassa niggahatthāya.Katipāhanti katipayāhaṃ, dvīhatīhanti attho.

230.Sampaṭicchitabbanti Should be accepted. But having accepted, one should transgress, is the connection. Bhaṇḍakanti Belongings such as robes. Mānaniggahatthāyāti For the suppression of pride in those who are prone to quarrel. Katipāhanti A few days, meaning two or three days.

231.Anantāni ceva bhassānīti ettha anantasaddo aparimāṇasaddena atthato ekoti āha ‘‘aparimāṇānī’’ti. ‘‘Vacanānī’’ti iminābhassasaddo vacanapariyāyoti dasseti.Ubbāhikāya sammanitabboti kena sammanitabboti āha ‘‘apaloketvā vā’’tiādi. Iminā apalokanakammena vā ñattidutiyakammena vā sammanitabboti dasseti. Anantāni bhassāni dhammakathikaṃ uddharitvā bāhati paṭisedheti imāya sammutiyātiubbāhikā,tāya. Evaṃ sammatehi pana bhikkhūhi vinicchitabbanti sambandho. Visuṃ nisīditvā tassāyeva parisāya nisīditvā vāti yojanā.Aññehīti sammatabhikkhūhi aññehi.

231.Anantāni ceva bhassānīti Here, the word 'ananta' is synonymous with aparimāṇa in meaning, so he says "aparimāṇānī". "Vacanānī" with this, it shows that the word bhassa is a synonym for speech. Ubbāhikāya sammanitabboti By whom should it be appointed, he says "apaloketvā vā" etc. With this, it shows that it should be appointed by apalokanakamma or ñattidutiyakamma. By this appointment that refutes and prevents the Dhammakathika from endless speeches, it is called ubbāhikā, by that. But it should be decided by the bhikkhus appointed in this way, is the connection. Sitting separately or sitting in that same assembly, is the connection. Aññehīti By others other than the appointed bhikkhus.

233.Tatrassāti ettha tatra assāti padavibhāgaṃ katvā tasaddo parisavisayo pasiddhavisayo, assasaddo ākhyātikoti āha ‘‘tassaṃ parisati bhaveyyā’’ti. ‘‘Neva suttaṃ āgata’’nti sāmaññato vuttepi ‘‘no suttavibhaṅgo’’ti vakkhamānattā mātikaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘na mātikā āgatā’’ti.Vinayopīti khandhakavinayopi. Pisaddena suttavibhaṅgaṃ apekkhati.Byañjanacchāyāyāti etthachāyāsaddo paṭibimbe ca pabhāya ca hotīti āha ‘‘byañjanamattamevā’’ti, byañjanapaṭibimbikabyañjanapabhāvantabhūtaṃ atthaṃ aggahetvā byañjanapaṭibimbabyañjanapabhāmattameva gahetvāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Paṭisedhetī’’ti imināpaṭibāhasaddo paṭisedhatthoyeva, na maddanatthoti dasseti. Paṭibāhanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘jātarūparajatakhettavatthupaṭiggahaṇādīsū’’tiādi.Kinti kena kāraṇena, kasmā kāraṇā vā.Imeti jātarūpādipaṭiggāhake bhikkhū.Kārethāti tumhe kāreyyātha. Eyyāthassa hi ethādeso. Pucchāyaṃ sattamīvibhatti hoti.Sutteti suttantapiṭake. Aparo dhammakathiko vadatīti sambandho.Imesanti olambetvā nivāsentānaṃ.Etthāti olambetvā nivāsane.

233.Tatrassāti Here, having made the word division as tatra assā, the word 'tas' refers to the assembly, the well-known subject, and the word 'assa' is an inflected verb, so he says "tassaṃ parisati bhaveyya". Even though it is said generally as "Neva suttaṃ āgata", since it will be said "no suttavibhaṅgo", he says with reference to the matrix, "na mātikā āgatā". Vinayopīti Even the khandhaka vinaya. With the word 'pi', it anticipates the suttavibhaṅga. Byañjanacchāyāyāti Here, the word chāyā is both a reflection and light, so he says "byañjanamattameva", taking only the reflection of the letter, the light of the letter, without grasping the meaning that is the essence of the reflection of the letter, the light of the letter, is the intention. "Paṭisedhetī" with this, it shows that the word paṭibāha is only in the sense of rejection, not in the sense of crushing. Showing the manner of rejection, he says "jātarūparajatakhettavatthupaṭiggahaṇādīsū" etc. Kinti For what reason, or for what cause. Imeti These bhikkhus who accept gold and silver etc. Kārethāti You should do. For eyyātha, the substitute is ethā. In the question, there is the seventh case ending. Sutteti In the Suttanta Piṭaka. Another Dhammakathika says, is the connection. Imesanti Of those who wear robes hanging down. Etthāti In wearing robes hanging down.

234.Bahutarā bhikkhūti ettha dviguṇatiguṇādinā adhikā eva bahutarā nāmāti āha ‘‘ekenapi adhikā bahutarāvā’’ti. ‘‘Ko pana vādo’’tiādinā ‘‘ekenapī’’ti ettha pisaddassa garahatthaṃ dasseti.

234.Bahutarā bhikkhūti Here, more by a factor of two or three are called bahutarā, so he says "ekenapi adhikā bahutarāvā". "Ko pana vādo" etc., with this, it shows the sense of contempt in the word 'pi' in "ekenapī".

Tividhasalākaggāhakathā
Tividhasalākaggāhakathā

235.Saññattiyāti ettha saññāpanaṃ saññatti, tadatthāyāti dassento āha ‘‘saññāpanatthāyā’’ti. Gūhitabbotigūḷho,soyevagūḷhako,salākaggāho kātabboti sambandho. Vivaritabbotivivaṭo,soyevavivaṭako. Sassa attano kaṇṇasamīpe jappīyati kathīyatītisakaṇṇajappo,soyevasakaṇṇajappako. ‘‘Nimittasaññaṃ āropetvā’’ti imināvaṇṇāvaṇṇāyo katvāti ettha vaṇṇasaddo saṇṭhānavācakoti dasseti. Susaṇṭhānadusaṇṭhānā salākāyo katvāti attho.Tatoti visabhāgakaraṇato paraṃ gahetabboti sambandho. Sabbāpi tā salākāyoti yojanā.Katvāti pakkhipanaṃ katvā.Vuttanayenāti ‘‘alajjussannāyā’’tiādinā vuttanayena. ‘‘Yāvatatiya’’nti imināpaccukkaḍḍhitabbanti ettha punappunaṃ uddhaṃ kaḍḍhitabbanti atthaṃ dasseti.Atirekajāteti adhammavādīhi atirekato jāte satīti sambandho.Yāvatatiyampīti pisaddo tato ūne ekadvevāre pana kā nāma kathāti dasseti.

235.Saññattiyāti Here, saññāpanaṃ is saññatti, showing that it is for that purpose, he says "saññāpanatthāyā". What should be hidden is gūḷho, that itself is gūḷhako, the drawing of lots should be done, is the connection. What should be opened is vivaṭo, that itself is vivaṭako. What is whispered or spoken near one's own ear is sakaṇṇajappo, that itself is sakaṇṇajappako. "Nimittasaññaṃ āropetvā" with this, in vaṇṇāvaṇṇāyo katvā, it shows that the word 'vaṇṇa' means shape. Having made lots of good and bad shapes, is the meaning. Tatoti After making them different, it should be taken, is the connection. All those lots, is the connection. Katvāti Having done the dropping. Vuttanayenāti In the manner said by "alajjussannāyā" etc. "Yāvatatiyaṃ" with this, in paccukkaḍḍhitabba, it shows the meaning that it should be repeatedly pulled upwards. Atirekajāteti When there is an excess arising from those who speak against the Dhamma, is the connection. Yāvatatiyampīti The word 'pi' shows what to say if it is less than that, in one or two instances.

Soti saṅghatthero.Vayoanuppattāti pacchimavayaṃ anuppattā.Etanti adhammavādisalākaṃ.Assāti saṅghattherassa.Itarā salākāti adhammavādisalākāhi aññā dhammavādisalākā.Soti saṅghatthero.Tanti dhammavādisalākaṃ.Tatoti neva avabujjhanakāraṇā.Vuttanayamevāti gūḷhake vuttanayameva. Vivaṭo attho imassātivivaṭattho.

Soti That Sangha Elder. Vayoanuppattāti Approaching old age. Etanti This lot of those who speak against the Dhamma. Assāti Of that Sangha Elder. Itarā salākāti The other lot of those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma, other than the lots of those who speak against the Dhamma. Soti That Sangha Elder. Tanti That lot of those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma. Tatoti Therefore, because of the cause of not understanding. Vuttanayamevāti Only in the manner said in the hidden method. Vivaṭo attho imassāti vivaṭattho.

Tassapāpiyasikāvinayakathā
Tassapāpiyasikāvinayakathā

238.Pārājikasāmantaṃnāmāti pārājikassa āsannaṃ nāma.Adinnādānādīsūti ādisaddena manussaviggaha uttarimanussadhammapārājike saṅgaṇhāti.Nibbeṭhayamānanti veṭhanarahitaṃ, tamenaṃ bhikkhunti sambandho. Iminānibbeṭhentanti ettha antasaddo mānasaddapariyāyoti dasseti.Ativeṭhetīti ettha kehi ativeṭhetīti āha ‘‘iṅghāyasmātiādivacanehī’’ti.Tenāti codakena.Manti mamaṃ.Āhāti cuditako āha.Etassāti avajānanapaṭijānanādikārakassa pāpiyassa puggalassa.Sīlavā bhavissatīti pāpiyo puggalo sace sīlavā bhavissati.Paṭippassaddhinti pāpiyabhāvato paṭippassambhanaṃ.No ceti sīlavā no bhavissati ce.Tathā nāsitoti tena tassa pāpiyasikakammakaraṇena nāsaṃ gato bhavissati.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ samathakkhandhake.

238. Pārājikasāmantaṃ nāmā means the name near to a pārājika. Adinnādānādīsu the term ādi includes the pārājikas of human body (manussaviggaha), superhuman states (uttarimanussadhamma). Nibbeṭhayamāna means without wrapping; the connection is "he is a bhikkhu." With this, it shows that the word anta in nibbeṭhenta is a synonym for the word māna. Ativeṭhetī regarding this, he says, "With words beginning with 'iṅghāyasmā'." Tena by the accuser. Ma means "me." Āhā the accused says. Etassā of this sinful person who engages in denial and avowal. Sīlavā bhavissatī if the sinful person becomes virtuous. Paṭippassaddhi means calming down from the state of sinfulness. No ce if he does not become virtuous. Tathā nāsito he will be destroyed by that act of causing the sinful one to lose his sikkhā. Sabbatthā in the entire Samathakkhandhaka.

Iti samathakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Yojanā of the Samathakkhandhaka.

5. Khuddakavatthukkhandhakaṃ

5. Khuddakavatthukkhandhakaṃ

Khuddakavatthukathā
Khuddakavatthukathā

243.Khuddakavatthukkhandhakemuṭṭhikamallāti muṭṭhikena mathanti aññamaññaṃ hiṃsantīti muṭṭhikamallā. Iminā pāḷiyaṃ padassa heṭṭhupariyaṃ dasseti.Gāmamudavāti ettha chavirāgamaṇḍanānuyuttena mudo modanaṃ etesamatthītimudavā,gāme vasantā mudavāgāmamudavāti dassento āha ‘‘chavirāgamaṇḍanānuyuttā nāgarikamanussā’’ti. ‘‘Vaṇṇavā ahesu’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 193; pāci. 67) viya vacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.Thambheti ettha na yattha katthaci thambho hoti, atha kho nhānatitthe nikhaṇitvā ṭhapitathambhoyevāti āha ‘‘nhānatitthe nikhaṇitvā ṭhapitatthambhe’’ti.

243. In the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka, muṭṭhikamallā means those who strike with their fists, harming each other. With this, it shows the reversing of the order of words in the Pali. Gāmamudavā here, showing that mudavā means those who have joy and delight, being engaged in adornment with skin color and beautification, and that gāmamudavā means "mudavā living in the village," he says, "Townspeople engaged in adornment with skin color and beautification." The statement should be understood like those in "Vaṇṇavā ahesu" etc. (pārā. 193; pāci. 67). Thambhe here, it is not just any post, but only a post erected after being dug into the bathing place; thus he says, "Posts erected after being dug into the bathing place."

Iṭṭhakāsilādārukuṭṭānanti iṭṭhakākuṭṭasilākuṭṭadārukuṭṭānaṃ.Aṭṭhapadākārenāti aṭṭhapadaphalakākārena.Rājiyoti lekhāyo.Tatthāti aṭṭāne, ākiritvāti sambandho.Gandhabbahatthakoti gandhabbānaṃ vīṇāhattho viyāti gandhabbahatthako. Dārūhi katattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dārumayahatthenā’’ti.Tenāti gandhabbahatthena, gahetvāti sambandho.Kuruvindakapāsāṇacuṇṇānīti evaṃnāmakassa pāsāṇassa cuṇṇāni.Tanti kataguḷikakalāpakaṃ, gahetvāti sambandho.Viggayhāti aññamaññassa sarīre daḷhaṃ gahetvāti dassento āha ‘‘aññamaññaṃ sarīrena sarīra’’nti.Makaradantaketi makaranāmakassa macchassa dantasadise dante.Mallakamūlasaṇṭhānenāti kheḷapaṭiggahapādasaṇṭhānena.Gilānassāpīti pisaddo agilānassa pagevāti dasseti.

Iṭṭhakāsilādārukuṭṭāna of brick walls, stone walls, and wooden walls. Aṭṭhapadākārenā in the shape of an aṭṭhapada board. Rājiyo lines. Tatthā in that place; the connection is "having scattered." Gandhabbahatthako like the hand holding a lute of the Gandhabba; hence, it is called Gandhabbahatthako. Because it is made of wood, it is said, "with a hand made of wood." Tenā with that Gandhabbahatthaka; the connection is "having taken." Kuruvindakapāsāṇacuṇṇānī powders of a stone called kuruvindaka. Ta that collection of balls, the connection is "having taken." Viggayhā showing that it means "having firmly grasped each other's bodies," he says, "body to body of each other." Makaradantake a tooth like the tooth of a fish called Makara. Mallakamūlasaṇṭhānenā in the shape of the base of a spittoon. Gilānassāpī the word pi shows that it applies even more to one who is not ill.

244.Danteti makaradante. Akataṃ mallakaṃakatamallakaṃ. Kapālakhaṇḍaṃ vāti vāsaddo samuccayattho. Kāsaphullavirahitattā vatthavaṭṭiukkāsikānāma. Natthi kāsaṃ phullametissātiukkāsā,sā evaukkāsikā. Yassa kassacīti gilānāgilānassa vā jarādubbalataruṇabalavassa vā.Piṭṭhinti piṭṭhiyaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Pāṇitalassa puthuṭṭhānaṃputhupāṇi,tena kataṃputhupāṇikaṃ,hatthaparikammaṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘hatthaparikammaṃ vuccatī’’ti.Sabbesanti nhāyantānaṃ vā anhāyantānaṃ vā sabbesaṃ.

244. Dante the Makara tooth. Akataṃ mallakaṃ akatamallakaṃ. Kapālakhaṇḍaṃ vā the word is used in the sense of combination. Because it lacks the Kasa flowers, the cloth wick is called ukkāsikā. Natthi kāsaṃ phullametissāti ukkāsā, sā eva ukkāsikā. Yassa kassacī to anyone, whether ill or not, old, weak, young, or strong. Piṭṭhi on the back, or this itself is the reading. The protruding state of the palm is puthupāṇi, that which is done with it is puthupāṇikaṃ, hand massage; hence, it is said, "it is called hand massage." Sabbesa to all, whether bathing or not bathing.

245.Kaṇṇatoti kaṇṇacchiddato. Muttolambakādivallisadisattāvallikānāma.Palambakasuttanti parimuñcitvā lambiyati anenāti palambakaṃ, tameva suttaṃ palambakasuttaṃ.Valayanti niyuraṃ.

245. Kaṇṇato from the ear hole. Because it is similar to a creeper of dangling pearls etc., it is called vallikā. Palambakasutta palambakaṃ, by which it is released and hangs down, that same thread is palambakasuttaṃ. Valaya means niyuraṃ.

246.Dvīhi māsehi niyuttaṃdumāsikaṃ. Dveaṅgulāni etassātiduvaṅgulaṃ,keso.Ubhayenapīti dumāsikaduvaṅgulasaṅkhātena ubhayenapi. Ayampi ukkaṭṭhaparicchedova vuttoti yojanā.Tatoti dumāsikaduvaṅgulato.

246. Niyuttaṃ for two months is dumāsikaṃ. Dve two aṅgulas of it is duvaṅgulaṃ, the hair. Ubhayenapī by both, that is, the two months and two aṅgulas. This is also stated as the highest limit, this is the connection. Tato from the two months and two aṅgulas.

Osaṇṭhentīti ettha olikhitvā samaṃ patiṭṭhāpentīti dassento āha ‘‘olikhitvā sannisīdāpentī’’ti.Dantamayādīsūti ādisaddena aṭṭhimayādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Hatthaphaṇenāti hatthasaṅkhātena phaṇena.Cikkhallenāti cikkhallasadisena niyyāsena.Udakatelenāti ettha udakañca telañcāti ca udakasaṅkhātena telenāti ca atthaṃ nivattento āha ‘‘udakamissakena telenā’’ti. Iminā udakena missakaṃ telaṃudakatelanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Uṭṭhalometi uṭṭhitalome.Hatthaṃ temetvāti hatthaṃ udakatelena temetvā.Uṇhābhitattarajokiṇṇasirānampīti uṇhena abhitatto ca rajehi okiṇṇasiro ca uṇhābhitattarajokiṇṇasirā, atha vā uṇhena abhitatto siro etesanti uṇhābhitattasirā, rajehi okiṇṇo siro etesanti rajokiṇṇasirā, uṇhābhitattasirā ca rajokiṇṇasirā ca uṇhābhitattarajokiṇṇasirā, pubbapade uttarapadalopo, tesampi.Allahatthenāti addahatthena, ayameva vā pāṭho.

Osaṇṭhentī here, showing that it means "smoothing and settling it by rubbing," he says, "smoothing and settling it by rubbing." Dantamayādīsū the term ādi includes those made of bone, etc. Hatthaphaṇenā with a hand-shaped fan. Cikkhallenā with a sap like cikkhalla. Udakatelenā here, warding off the meaning "both water and oil," and "with oil consisting of water," he says, "with oil mixed with water." With this, it shows that udakena missakaṃ telaṃ udakatela means oil with water mixed. Uṭṭhalome hair that has risen. Hatthaṃ temetvā having wet the hand with water and oil. Uṇhābhitattarajokiṇṇasirānampī those whose heads are heated by warmth and covered with dust are uṇhābhitattarajokiṇṇasirā; alternatively, those whose heads are heated by warmth are uṇhābhitattasirā, those whose heads are covered with dust are rajokiṇṇasirā, and uṇhābhitattasirā and rajokiṇṇasirā are uṇhābhitattarajokiṇṇasirā, with the elision of the latter word in the first word, even of those. Allahatthenā with a wet hand, or this itself is the reading.

247.Yesu kaṃsapattādīsu mukhanimittaṃ paññāyati, sabbāni tāni kaṃsapattādīnipīti yojanā.Yattha katthacīti yasmiṃ kasmiṃci ādāse vā udakapatte vāti sambandho.Sañchavi nu khoti sañjātā chavi nu kho, ahaṃ jiṇṇo amhi nu kho, noti yojanā.

247. In which Kamsapatti etc., a facial sign is evident, all those Kamsapatti etc. should be used. Yattha katthacī in any mirror or water bowl, this is the connection. Sañchavi nu kho is the skin healthy, am I old, this is the connection.

Mukhaṃ ālimpantīti ettha kehi ālimpantīti āha ‘‘vippasannachavirāgakarehi mukhalepanehī’’ti. ‘‘Manosilāyā’’ti iminā manosilā evamanosilikāti dasseti.Tānīti lañchanāni.Haritālādīhipīti pisaddena na kevalaṃ manosilikāya eva, atha kho haritālādīhipīti dasseti.

Mukhaṃ ālimpantī here, he asks, "with what do they smear?" and answers, "with face ointments that make the skin clear and attractive." With "Manosilāyā," it shows that Manosilā itself is manosilikā. Tānī those marks. Haritālādīhipī the word pi shows that it is not only with manosilikā, but also with haritāla etc.

248.Nabhikkhave naccaṃ vātiādīsu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Niccāpentassa vāti parehi naccāpentassa vā.Sādhugītanti sundaraṃ aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttaṃ gītaṃ, sajjanānaṃ vā. Dantagītampi na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Yanti gītaṃ.Pubbabhāgeti gāyanato pubbabhāge.Gāyāpentassāpīti parehi vā gāyāpentassāpi.Yaṃ panāti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ. Yaṃ paharati,tatthapaharaṇe anāpattīti yojanā.Sabbanti akhilaṃ naccagītavāditaṃ.Passatoti passantassa ca suṇantassa ca. Savanampi hi ekasesena vā sāmaññaniddesena vā passaneneva saṅgahitaṃ.Vihāratoti anaccaagītaavāditaṭṭhānavihārato.Vihāranti naccagītavāditaṭṭhānavihāraṃ.Asanasālāyāti gāme ṭhitāya asanasālāya.

248. Na bhikkhave naccaṃ vā in these, the decision should be understood thus. Niccāpentassa vā or causing others to dance. Sādhugīta beautiful song connected with impermanence etc., or of good people. It is not allowed even to sing with the teeth, this is the connection. Yaṃ the song. Pubbabhāge before singing. Gāyāpentassāpī or even causing others to sing. Yaṃ panā refers to the action. Yaṃ paharati, tattha in that striking, there is no offense, this is the connection. Sabba all dancing, singing, and playing of instruments without exception. Passato to one who sees and hears. Hearing is included in seeing either by a single remainder or by a general designation. Vihārato from the vihāra that is a place without dancing, singing, or playing instruments. Vihāra to the vihāra that is a place of dancing, singing, and playing instruments. Asanasālāyā to the assembly hall located in the village.

249.Sarakiriyanti sarassa kiriyaṃ. Imināsarakuttinti ettha sarassa karaṇaṃ sarakuttīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Aladdhaṃ samādhinti sambandho.Pacchimā janatāti ettha samūhiṃ avayavaṃ vinā samūhassa avayavino abhāvā tāpaccayo svatthopi hotīti āha ‘‘pacchimo jano’’ti.Taṃ taṃ vattanti suttantavattādiṃ taṃ taṃ vattaṃ.Akkharāni vināsetvāti aññathā vattabbāni akkharāni aññathā vadanena ca dīghādīni rassādivadanena ca vināsetvā.Dhamme panāti ettha saddopanavisesajotako. Gītato visesova veditabboti hi attho.Suttantavattanti suttantassa uccāraṇaṃ vattaṃ. Eseva nayo ‘‘jātakavattaṃ gāthāvatta’’nti etthāpi.Tanti vattaṃ. Yadi pana taṃ vināsetvā atidīghaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, evaṃ sati yathā suttantavattādīni honti, tathā kathaṃ dassetabbānīti āha ‘‘caturassena vattenā’’tiādi. Tatthacaturassenavattenāti paripuṇṇena uccāraṇavattena.Parimaṇḍalānīti samantato maṇḍalāni bimbāni puṇṇānīti attho. ‘‘Sarena bhaṇita’’nti imināsarabhaññanti ettha sarena bhaṇitabbanti sarabhaññanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Sarabhaññe kira atthīti sambandho.Taraṅgavatthādīnaṃ uccāraṇavidhānāni (vajira. ṭī. cūḷavagga 249; sārattha. ṭī. cūḷavagga 3.249; vi. vi. ṭī. cūḷavagga 2.248-9) etarahi natthi.Dvattiṃsavattānīti ca saṅkhyāmattameva atthi, na saṅkhyeyyaṃ. Tasmā ṭīkāsu (sārattha. ṭī. cūḷavagga 3.249; vajira. ṭī. cūḷavagga. 249) ‘‘taraṅgavattādīnaṃ uccāraṇavidhānāni naṭṭhapayogānī’’ti vuttaṃ.Atthīti saṃvijjanti. Ayañhi atthisaddo nipāto.Tesūti dvattiṃsavattesu.Yanti vattaṃ. Uccāraṇavidhānāni naṭṭhapayogānipi tesaṃ sabbesaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sabbesa’’ntiādi. Tatthasabbesanti dvattiṃsavattānaṃ, lakkhaṇanti sambandho. ‘‘Avināsetvā’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto āha ‘‘vikāraṃ akatvā’’ti. Tatthavikārakaraṇaṃnāma yattakāhi mattāhi akkharaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti, tato adhikamattāyuttaṃ katvā kathanaṃ, tathā akatvā samaṇasāruppena caturassena nayena pavattanaṃyeva lakkhaṇanti attho.

249. Sarakiriya the action of sound. With this, it shows that sarakutti here means "the making of sound is sarakutti." Aladdhaṃ samādhiṃ the connection is "without obtaining samādhi." Pacchimā janatā here, because there is no aggregate without a part, the suffix "tā" is used in the sense of one's own benefit; thus he says, "the last people." Taṃ taṃ vatta that particular vatta such as suttantavatta. Akkharāni vināsetvā destroying the letters by saying letters that should be said differently, and by saying long sounds as short sounds, and vice versa. Dhamme panā here, the word pana is a distinguisher. For the meaning is that it is a distinction from singing. Suttantavatta the recitation of the suttanta is vatta. The same method applies to "jātakavattaṃ gāthāvatta." Ta that vatta. If it is not allowed to make it excessively long by destroying it, then how should it be shown so that it is like the suttantavatta etc.? Thus he says, "with a square vatta" etc. There, caturassena vattenā with a complete recitation vatta. Parimaṇḍalānī the circles are full and round on all sides, this is the meaning. With "Sarena bhaṇita," it shows that sarabhañña here means "sarabhañña because it is recited with sound." It seems that it exists in sarabhañña, this is the connection. Taraṅgavatthādīnaṃ the methods of recitation (vajira. ṭī. cūḷavagga 249; sārattha. ṭī. cūḷavagga 3.249; vi. vi. ṭī. cūḷavagga 2.248-9) do not exist at present. Dvattiṃsavattānī the number of thirty-two vattas only exists in name, not in practice. Therefore, in the commentaries (sārattha. ṭī. cūḷavagga 3.249; vajira. ṭī. cūḷavagga. 249) it is said that "the methods of reciting Taraṅgavatta etc. are of lost usage." Atthī they exist. This word "atthi" is a particle. Tesū in those thirty-two vattas. Ya that vatta. While showing the general characteristic of all of them, even though the methods of recitation are of lost usage, he says, "of all" etc. There, sabbesa of the thirty-two vattas; the connection is "characteristic." After saying "Avināsetvā," he makes the same meaning clear by saying "akatvā vikāraṃ." There, vikārakaraṇaṃ is the act of uttering a letter with more mātrās than the number of mātrās required to complete it, without doing so, only continuing with a square method appropriate for a Samaṇa is the characteristic, this is the meaning.

Bāhiralomiṃ uṇṇinti ettha ‘‘bāhiralomi’’nti padaṃ bhāvanapuṃsakanti āha ‘‘uṇṇalomāni bahi katvā’’ti. ‘‘Uṇṇapāvāra’’nti imināuṇṇīti ettha uttarapadalopaṃ dasseti. Atha vā pāvārapadena uṇṇā etassa atthītiuṇṇīti katvā taddhitapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Tathā dhārentassa dukkaṭa’’nti vacanassa atthāpattinayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘lomāni anto katvā pārupituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.

Bāhiralomiṃ uṇṇi here, he says that the word "bāhiralomi" is neuter in gender with "uṇṇalomāni bahi katvā." With "Uṇṇapāvāra," it shows that uṇṇī here means "the elision of the latter word." Alternatively, by making uṇṇā etassa atthīti uṇṇī with the word pāvāra, it shows the form of the taddhita suffix. While showing the implication of the statement "Tathā dhārentassa dukkaṭaṃ," he says, "It is allowed to cover oneself with the hairs turned inward."

251.Aṅgajātaṃ chindantassevāti aṅgajātameva chindantassāti yojanā. Atha vā aṅgajātaṃ chindantassa thullaccayamevāti yojanā. Ahikīṭadaṭṭhādīsu nimittabhūtesu chindantassāti yojanā.

251. Aṅgajātaṃ chindantassevā means only to one who is cutting off the organ. Alternatively, it means that for one who is cutting off the organ, there is only a thullaccaya. For those bitten by snakes and insects, it is to one who is cutting them off because they are the cause.

252.Uppannā hotīti paṭilābhavasena uppannā hoti. Uppannabhāvaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto āha ‘‘so’’tiādi. Tatthasoti rājagahako seṭṭhi, kīḷatīti sambandho.Tassāti seṭṭhissa. Idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘jāle’’ti pade sāmyatthachaṭṭhī, ‘‘uppannā hotī’’ti pade sampadānaṃ.Tanti candanagaṇṭhiṃ.Assāti seṭṭhissa. Idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘purisā’’ti pade sāmyatthachaṭṭhī, ‘‘adaṃsū’’ti pade sampadānaṃ.Vikubbaniddhīti vividhaṃ, vikāraṃ vā kubbanavasena pavattā iddhi (paṭi. ma. 3.12-16; visuddhi. 2.369-373).Adhiṭṭhāniddhīti adhiṭṭhānavasena pavattā iddhi (paṭi. ma. 3.12-16; visuddhi. 2.369-373).

252. Uppannā hotī it arises based on gain. Making the arising clear, he says, "so" etc. There, so that wealthy man of Rājagaha, the connection is "plays." Tassā of the wealthy man. This word is a genitive in the sense of sameness in the word "jāle," and a dative in the word "uppannā hotī." Ta that sandalwood knot. Assā of the wealthy man. This word is a genitive in the sense of sameness in the word "purisā," and a dative in the word "adaṃsū." Vikubbaniddhī iddhi that arises through various means, or through the act of transformation (paṭi. ma. 3.12-16; visuddhi. 2.369-373). Adhiṭṭhāniddhī iddhi that arises through determination (paṭi. ma. 3.12-16; visuddhi. 2.369-373).

Byañjanaṃ katvāti byañjanaṃ pakkhipanaṃ katvā.Tanti suvaṇṇataṭṭikādiṃ.Āmasitumpīti pisaddo pageva paṭiggaṇhitunti dasseti.Saṅghikaparibhogena vātisaddo panasaddattho. Saṅghikaparibhogena panāti hi attho.Gihivikaṭāni vātisaddo sampiṇḍanattho. Gihivikaṭāni bhājanānipi vaṭṭantīti hi attho. Kaṃsalohavaṭṭalohānaṃ sabhāgattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kaṃsa…pe… saṅgahito’’ti.

Byañjanaṃ katvā having made a curry. Ta that golden bowl etc. Āmasitumpī the word pi shows that it is even easier to accept. Saṅghikaparibhogena vā the word is in the sense of the word pana. For the meaning is indeed by Saṅghikaparibhoga. Gihivikaṭāni vā the word is in the sense of gathering. For the meaning is that even gihivikaṭāni vessels are allowed. Because Kamsa and Vattaloha are of the same kind, it is said "Kamsa…pe… included."

253.‘‘Likhitu’’nti etaṃ vuttanti yojanā.Pakatimaṇḍalanti ettha kiṃ makaradantamattampi acchinnamaṇḍalanti āha ‘‘makaradantacchinnakamaṇḍalamevā’’ti.

253. "Likhitu" this was said, this is the connection. Pakatimaṇḍala here, he asks, "Is it a circle where even the makaradanta is uncut?" and answers, "It is indeed a circle where the makaradanta is cut."

254.Paharitvāti āvaṭṭanato aññamaññaṃ paharitvā. Tayo patte uparupari ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Bhūmiādhārakonāma bhūmiyā āsanno dantādīhi kato valayādhārako.Dāruādhārakonāma ekadārunā kato ādhārako.Daṇḍādhārakonāma catudaṇḍato paṭṭhāya bahūhi daṇḍehi kato ādhārako.Tatthāti bhamakoṭisadisadāru ādhārakatidaṇḍakādhāresu.Gahetvā evāti pattaṃ gahetvā eva, ekameva ṭhapetabbaṃ iti vuttanti yojanā.

254. Paharitvā having struck each other by turning. It is allowed to place three bowls on top of each other, this is the connection. Bhūmiādhārako a stand near the ground made of teeth etc. Dāruādhārako a stand made of a single piece of wood. Daṇḍādhārako a stand made of many sticks starting from four sticks. Tatthā in those stands made of wood similar to the tip of a spinning top and stands made of sticks. Gahetvā evā having taken the bowl itself, only one should be placed, this was said, this is the connection.

Tatthevāti miḍḍhanteyeva.Vitthiṇṇāyāti vitthārāya.Bāhirapasseti kuṭṭassa bāhirapasse.Katāyāti kuṭṭassa thirabhāvatthaṃ katāya.Etthāti paribhaṇḍante.

Tatthevā right there in the miḍḍhante. Vitthiṇṇāyā wide. Bāhirapasse on the outer side of the wall. Katāyā made for the stability of the wall. Etthā in the paribhaṇḍante.

coḷakaṃnāmāti yojanā.Tasmiṃ panāti coḷake pana.Yatthāti yassaṃ vālikāyaṃ.Na dussatīti patto na dussati.Pattamāḷakanti pattassa ṭhapanatthāya kataṃ aṭṭaṃ.Bhaṇḍakukkhaḷikāti pattādibhaṇḍakānaṃ pakkhipanā ukkhaḷikā.Yattha katthacīti bhittikhīlādike yasmiṃ kasmiṃci.Laggentassāti pattaṃ thavikāya laggentassa. Nisīdanasayanatthaṃ vā kataṃ hotūti yojanā.Aññenāti pattato aññena.Aṭṭakachannenāti aṭṭapatirūpena, aṭṭakasadisenāti attho.Tatthāti aṭṭakachannena ṭhapite mañcapīṭhe. Aṃse baddhiyati anenātiaṃsabaddho,soyevaaṃsabaddhako,tena laggetvāti sambandho. Chatte ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Bhattena pūrobhattapūro,patto. Bandhitvā ṭhapite chatte vā aṭṭakaṃ katvā ṭhapite chatte vāti yojanā. Yo koci bhattapūropi tucchapattopīti sambandho.

Coḷakaṃ nāma: The name is Coḷaka, that is the explanation. Tasmiṃ pana: But in that Coḷaka. Yatthā: In whichever sandy place. Na dussati: The bowl does not get dirty. Pattamāḷakaṃ: A stand made for placing the bowl. Bhaṇḍakukkhaḷikā: A pot for placing items such as bowls inside. Yattha katthacī: On any wall nail or whatever. Laggentassā: For one hanging the bowl with a strap. It should be made for sitting or lying down, that is the meaning. Aññena: Other than the bowl. Aṭṭakachannena: Covered with a frame, similar to a frame, that is the meaning. Tatthā: On a cot or seat placed covered with a frame. Aṃse baddhiyati anenāti aṃsabaddho: That by which it is fastened to the shoulder is called aṃsabaddha; soyeva aṃsabaddhako: that itself is aṃsabaddhaka; tena laggetvā: having hung it with that, that is the connection. It is not appropriate to place it on an umbrella, that is the connection. Bhattena pūro: Full of food, the bowl. It means either on an umbrella tied and placed or on an umbrella made into a frame and placed. Whatever bowl is full of food, or an empty bowl, that is the connection.

255.Yassāti bhikkhuno. Hatthe patto atthi, so eva bhikkhupattahatthona hoti, apica kho pana hatthe vā piṭṭhipāde vā yattha katthaci sarīrāvayave pattasmiṃ satīti yojanā. Eseva nayo anantaravākyepi. Imehi vākyehi ‘‘pattahattho’’ti ca ‘‘kavāṭaṃ paṇāmetu’’nti ca upalakkhaṇamattamevāti dasseti. Sūciṃ vā avāpuritunti sambandho.Kuñcikāya vātisaddo ‘‘sarīrāvayavenā’’ti padaṃ apekkhati.

255. Yassā: Of which bhikkhu. The bhikkhu who has a bowl in his hand is not simply pattahattho, but also if there is a bowl on any part of the body, whether in the hand, on the back, or on the foot, that is the meaning. The same method applies to the immediately following sentence as well. With these sentences, he shows that "pattahattho" and "kavāṭaṃ paṇāmetu" are merely indicative. Or to open a needle case, that is the connection. Kuñcikāya vā: The word depends on the phrase "sarīrāvayavena".

Lābukaṭāhanti lambatītilābu,lābuyā kaṭāhaṃ lābukaṭāhaṃ. ‘‘Tāvakālika’’nti iminā ekavārameva tena āmisaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjitvā chaḍḍetabbanti dasseti.Ghaṭikapālanti bhājanakapālaṃ.Abhuṃ meti avaḍḍhi mayhaṃ, uppajjitthāti attho. ‘‘Abhu me’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.149; ma. ni. ṭī. 2.149) vattabbe niggahitāgamavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ.Utrāsavacananti utrāsena vacanakāraṇaṃ padaṃ.Dinnakamevāti parehi dinnakameva āmisanti sambandho.

Lābukaṭāhaṃ: Because it hangs down, it is lābu, a bowl made of lābu is a lābukaṭāhaṃ. With "Tāvakālika", he shows that one should only take and consume the meat once and then throw it away. Ghaṭikapālaṃ: A piece of a pot. Abhu me: It arose for me, it occurred, that is the meaning. It is said thus according to the method of adding sandhi letters when "Abhu me" (Ma. Ni. Aṭṭha. 2.149; Ma. Ni. Ṭī. 2.149) should be said. Utrāsavacanaṃ: A word that is the cause of fright. Dinnakamevā: Only meat that is given by others, that is the connection.

Cambetvāti mukhena cambetvā.Apaviddhāmisānīti chaḍḍitāni āmisāni.Etesūti calakādīsu.Anucchiṭṭhaṃ suddhapattanti natthi ucchiṭṭho etthātianucchiṭṭho,suddhapatto, taṃ.Ucchiṭṭhahatthenāti ucchiṭṭho ettha atthīti ucchiṭṭho, soyeva hattho ucchiṭṭhahattho, tena. Vāmahatthena āsiñcitvāti sambandho.Etthāti suddhapatte.Ettāvatāpīti ettakena ekaudakageṇḍusagahaṇamattenāpi.Soti suddhapatto.Hatthaṃ panāti ucchiṭṭhahatthampi. Panasaddo hettha sampiṇḍanattho. Yaṃ aṭṭhiṃ vā yaṃ calakaṃ vāti yojanā.Tatthāti macchamaṃsaphalādīsu.Tanti aṭṭhicalakaṃ.Yaṃ panāti aṭṭhicalakādiṃ pana, paṭikhāditukāmoti sambandho, puna khāditukāmoti attho.Tatthevāti patte eva.Katvāti ṭhapanaṃ katvā. Yaṃ kiñci aṭṭhikaṇṭakādinti sambandho.

Cambetvā: Having kissed with the mouth. Apaviddhāmisānī: Discarded meats. Etesū: In these, such as calaka. Anucchiṭṭhaṃ suddhapattaṃ: There is no leftover here, therefore anucchiṭṭho, a clean bowl, that. Ucchiṭṭhahatthena: Here there is leftover, therefore ucchiṭṭho, that hand itself is ucchiṭṭhahattho, with that. Having poured with the left hand, that is the connection. Etthā: In the clean bowl. Ettāvatāpī: Even with this much, with just taking a mouthful of water. So: That clean bowl. Hatthaṃ panā: But even the hand with leftover. Here the word pana is in the sense of combining. Whatever bone or calaka, that is the connection. Tatthā: In those, such as fish, meat, or fruit. Taṃ: That bone or calaka. Yaṃ panā: But that bone, calaka, etc., desiring to refuse, that is the connection, desiring to eat again, that is the meaning. Tatthevā: In the bowl itself. Katvā: Having made the placing. Whatever bone, thorn, etc., that is the connection.

256.Satthakaveṭhanakanti satthakassa veṭhanakaraṇaṃ. Pipphalikaṃ vā daṇḍasatthakaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Pipphāleti etāyātipipphali,sāyevapipphalikaṃ. Aññampīti pipphalikato aññampi. Yaṃkiñci daṇḍaṃ yojetvā katasatthakaṃ vā daṇḍasatthakaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Iminā daṇḍena yojitaṃ satthakaṃdaṇḍasatthakanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

256. Satthakaveṭhanakaṃ: A wrapping for a knife. It should be understood that pipphalikaṃ or daṇḍasatthakaṃ is the name. That by which it ripens is pipphali, that itself is pipphalikaṃ. Aññampī: Even other than pipphalikaṃ. Whatever knife is made by joining a stick, that is called daṇḍasatthakaṃ, that is the meaning. With this, he shows the meaning of the word daṇḍasatthakaṃ: a knife joined with a stick is daṇḍasatthakaṃ.

Malaggahitāti ayamalaggahitā.Kiṇṇenāti madirādibījena kiṇṇena.Tenāti pāsāṇacuṇṇasaṅkhātena saritakena.Makkhetunti sūciṃ makkhetuṃ. Makkhitamadhusitthakaṃ taṃ saritakaṃ paribhijjatīti yojanā.Madhusitthakapilotikanti madhusitthakena makkhitaṃ pilotikaṃ.Tatthāti nisseṇiyaṃ. Yāya rajjuyā kathine bandhanti, sā rajjukathinarajjunāmāti yojanā.Tatthāti dīghassa bhikkhuno pamāṇena kate kathine.Daṇḍaketi kathinadaṇḍakamhi.Tassāti dīghassa bhikkhuno pamāṇena katassa kathinassa.Itarassa bhikkhunoti dīghabhikkhuto itarassa rassabhikkhuno.

Malaggahitā: This is malaggahitā. Kiṇṇena: With kiṇṇa, with seeds of intoxicants, etc. Tenā: With that saritaka, which is considered powdered stone. Makkhetuṃ: To smear the needle. The saritaka that is smeared with honey and wax gets broken, that is the meaning. Madhusitthakapilotikaṃ: A pilotika smeared with honey wax. Tatthā: On the ladder. The rope by which they tie the kathina, that rope is called kathinarajju, that is the meaning. Tatthā: On the kathina made according to the measure of the tall bhikkhu. Daṇḍake: On the kathina stick. Tassā: Of the kathina made according to the measure of the tall bhikkhu. Itarassa bhikkhuno: Of the shorter bhikkhu other than the tall bhikkhu.

pidalakanti duguṇakaraṇasaṅkhātassa kiriyāvisesassa nāmanti dasseti.Vinandhanarajjunti visesena nahiyati bandhiyati etāyāti vinandhanā, sāyeva rajju vinandhanarajju, tamevatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘vinandhituṃ rajju’’nti.Vinandhanasuttakanti etthāpi eseva nayo.Tena suttakenāti vinandhanasuttakena.Tatthāti khuddakanisseṇiyaṃ kāci suttantarikāyoti sambandho.Pamāṇasaññākaraṇanti suttantarikapamāṇassa saññākaraṇaṃ. Kāḷasuttena saññākaraṇaṃ viya haliddisuttena saññākaraṇanti yojanā.Aṅguliyā paṭiggaṇhantīti ettha ‘‘paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti padassa ‘‘aṅguliyā’’ti karaṇasseva vuttattā kammassa avuttattā tassa kammaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sūcimukha’’nti.Aṅgulikosakanti aṅgulikañcukaṃ.

Pidalakaṃ: He shows that it is the name for a specific action counted as doubling. Vinandhanarajju: That by which it is tied and bound specially is vinandhanā, that rope itself is vinandhanarajju; to show that very meaning, it is said "vinandhituṃ rajju". Vinandhanasuttakaṃ: Here also, this same method. Tena suttakena: With that vinandhanasuttaka. Tatthā: In the small ladder, there is some suttantarikā, that is the connection. Pamāṇasaññākaraṇaṃ: Making a sign of the measure of the suttantarikā. Like making a sign with a black thread, making a sign with a turmeric thread, that is the meaning. Aṅguliyā paṭiggaṇhantī: Here, because in the word "paṭiggaṇhantī" the instrumental case "aṅguliyā" is already stated, and the object is unstated, to show its object, it is said "sūcimukha". Aṅgulikosakaṃ: A finger sheath.

257.Pāticaṅkoṭakādinti etthapātināma paṭiggahasaṇṭhānena kato sūciādibhaṇḍaṭṭhapano bhājanaviseso.Ākiritvāti pakkhipitvā.Odhunitvāti papphoṭetvā.Ghanadaṇḍakanti nirantaradaṇḍakaṃ.Antokatvāti kathinassa antokatvā.

257. Pāticaṅkoṭakādi: Here, pāti is the name of a specific container, made in the shape of a bowl, for holding items such as needles. Ākiritvā: Having thrown in. Odhunitvā: Having shaken off. Ghanadaṇḍakaṃ: A continuous stick. Antokatvā: Having made the inside of the kathina.

258.Vinandhitvāti coḷakena vinandhitvā.

258. Vinandhitvā: Having fastened with the coḷaka.

259.Aparissāvanakasseva bhikkhunoti yojanā. Yo pana yācatīti sambandho.Majjhedaṇḍaketi daṇḍakassa majjhe.Udakanti akappiyaudakaṃ.Tanti udakaṃ.Yanti parissāvanaṃ. Udakaṃ parisuddhaṃ hutvā savati gacchati pavattati anenātiparissāvanaṃ. Yaṃ udake ottharitvā ghaṭena udakaṃ gaṇhanti, taṃottharakaṃnāmāti yojanā. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘taṃ hī’’tiādi.Tanti parissāvanaṃ, bandhitvāti sambandho.Tesūti catūsu khāṇukesu.Sabbapariyanteti sabbaparissāvanassa pariyante mocetvāti sambandho.Ottharitvāti ogāhetvā.Cīvarakuṭikāti cīvarena katā kuṭikā, sā makasānaṃ parittāṇatthaṃ katattāmakasakuṭikāti vuccati.

259. It applies to a bhikkhu who is without a strainer. But whoever asks, that is the connection. Majjhedaṇḍake: In the middle of the stick. Udakaṃ: Unallowable water. Taṃ: That water. Yaṃ: That strainer. That by which water flows out purified is parissāvanaṃ. That which they lower into the water and take water with a pot is called ottharakaṃ, that is the meaning. Expanding on that very meaning, he says "taṃ hītiādi". Taṃ: That strainer, having tied, that is the connection. Tesū: In those four pegs. Sabbapariyante: Releasing at the very edge of the strainer, that is the connection. Ottharitvā: Having submerged. Cīvarakuṭikā: A hut made of cloth; because it is made for protection from mosquitoes, it is called makasakuṭikā.

260.Semhādidosussannakāyāti semhādidosehi ussannakāyā.Aggaḷatthambhoti kavāṭatthambho.Yatthāti aggaḷatthambhe.Tatthāti dvārabāhāya.Tatthāti aggaḷapāsake.Dhūmo nikkhamati etenātidhūmanetto,chiddo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhūmanikkhamanachidda’’nti. ‘‘Gandhehī’’ti iminā ‘‘vāsetu’’nti padassa karaṇaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Udakaṭṭhapanaṭṭhāna’’nti imināudakaṭṭhānanti ettha udakassa ṭhapanaṃ ṭhānaṃ udakaṭṭhānanti majjhepadalopasamāsaṃ dasseti.Tatthāti udakaṭṭhāne.Koṭṭhakoti ettha na yattha katthaci, yassa kassaci vā koṭṭhako hoti, api ca kho pana dvāre eva, dvārasseva vā koṭṭhakoti āha ‘‘dvārakoṭṭhako’’ti.

260. Semhādidosussannakāyā: Bodies afflicted by diseases of phlegm, etc. Aggaḷatthambho: Doorpost. Yatthā: On the doorpost. Tatthā: On the doorjamb. Tatthā: On the bolt receptacle. Dhūmo nikkhamati etenā ti dhūmanetto: That through which smoke exits is dhūmanetto, a hole. Therefore it is said "dhūmanikkhamanachidda". With "Gandhehi", he shows the instrumental case of the word "vāsetu". With "Udakaṭṭhapanaṭṭhāna", here in udakaṭṭhāna, he shows the middle-term-omitted compound, where the placing of water is a place, udakaṭṭhāna. Tatthā: In that water-stand. Koṭṭhako: Here, it is not just anywhere, or for just anyone, that there is a koṭṭhaka; but rather, only at the door, or only for the door, therefore he says "dvārakoṭṭhako".

261.Parikammanti piṭṭhiādiparikammaṃ. Paṭicchādiyati imāyātipaṭicchādi,vatthameva paṭicchādivatthapaṭicchādi. Udakaṃ na hotīti ettha pānodakaṃ nivattento āha ‘‘nhānodakaṃ na hotī’’ti.

261. Parikammaṃ: Care of the back, etc. That by which one covers is paṭicchādi, just the cloth itself is paṭicchādi, vatthapaṭicchādi. Udakaṃ na hotī: Here, turning away drinking water, he says "nhānodakaṃ na hotī": it is not bathing water.

262.Paṇṇikānaṃ tulaṃ viya udakaubbāhanakatulanti yojanā.Dīghavarattādīhītiādisaddena rajju ādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Arahatthaghaṭiyantaṃnāma cakkasaṇṭhānaṃ anekāraṃ are are ghaṭāni bandhitvā ekena vā dvīhi vā paribbhamiyamānaṃ yantaṃ. Arasaṅkhātesu hatthesu ghaṭā bandhitabbā etthātiarahatthaghaṭi,tameva yantaṃ arahatthaghaṭiyantaṃ.Cammabhājananti cammamayaṃ bhājanaṃ.Aparikkhittā hotīti candanikā apākārā hoti. Udakapuñjanaṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Tasminti udakapuñjane. ‘‘Udakapuñjanī’’tipi pāṭho. Evaṃ sati tāya udakapuñjaniyāti attho.Paccuddharitunti apanetuṃ.

262. Like a scale for weighing leaves, a scale for drawing up water, that is the meaning. Dīghavarattādīhī: With dīghavaratta and so on; with the word ādi, he includes rope, etc. Arahatthaghaṭiyantaṃ: The name for a wheel-shaped device with many spokes, with pots tied to each spoke, rotated by one or two people. Pots should be tied at the hands that are counted as spokes, therefore arahatthaghaṭi, that very device is arahatthaghaṭiyantaṃ. Cammabhājanaṃ: A vessel made of leather. Aparikkhittā hotī: The pavilion is without a surrounding wall. It is allowable to pile up water, that is the connection. Tasmiṃ: In that water pile. "Udakapuñjanī" is also a reading. If so, the meaning is "with that udakapuñjanī". Paccuddharituṃ: To remove.

263.Ā samantato viddhaṃ pakkhapāsakametthātiāviddhapakkhapāsakaṃ. Maṇḍaleti kaṇṇikamaṇḍalamhi. Kataṃ kūṭañca chadanañca etthātikatakūṭacchadanaṃ,jantāgharaṃ, tassa.Etanti ‘‘nillekhajantāghara’’nti etaṃ nāmaṃ. ‘‘Cattāro māse’’ti iminā‘‘catumāsa’’nti digusamāsassa vākyaṃ dasseti.

263. Here, pakkhapāsakaṃ is scattered all around, therefore āviddhapakkhapāsakaṃ. Maṇḍale: In the central platform. That in which a roof and covering are made is katakūṭacchadanaṃ, a hot-air bath house, of that. Etaṃ: This name "nillekhajantāghara". With "Cattāro māse", he shows the sentence for the digusamāsa catumāsa.

264.Namatakanti ettha heṭṭhā vuttanamatakato (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 256) visesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘eḷakalomehī’’tiādi.Avāyimanti vāyitvā na kataṃ.Cammakhaṇḍaparihārenāti cammakhaṇḍaṃ viya adhiṭṭhānavikappanaapanayanena, paribhuñjitabbanti attho.Peḷāyāti aṭṭhaṃsādiākārena katāya mañjūsāya.Etanti ‘‘āsittakūpadhāna’’nti etaṃ nāmaṃ.Dārumayāpīti pisaddo na tambaloharajatamayā evāti dasseti.Etthevāti maḷorikāyameva.Ādhārakasaṅkhepagamanatoti ādhārake saṅkhepaṃ gamanato.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Pubbe pattarakkhanatthaṃ ādhārako anuññāto, idāni bhuñjanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Eko bhikkhu gacchatīti sambandho.Sesakanti gahetabbaphalapūvehi sesakaṃ.Tasmiṃ khaṇeti tasmiṃ bhuñjanakkhaṇe.

264. Namatakaṃ: Here, showing the difference from the namatakaṃ mentioned below (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 256), he says "eḷakalomehītiādi": with goat hair, etc. Avāyimaṃ: Not made by weaving. Cammakhaṇḍaparihārenā: In the manner of a piece of leather, by arranging, changing the support, and removing it, the meaning is to use it. Peḷāyā: In a box made in the shape of an eight-sided figure, etc. Etaṃ: This name "āsittakūpadhāna". Dārumayāpī: The word pi shows that it is not just made of copper, iron, or silver. Etthevā: Only in the maḷorikā. Ādhārakasaṅkhepagamanato: Because of going to a condensed form of support. Hī: Indeed, because. It should be seen that previously the support was allowed for the sake of protecting the bowl, now it is for the sake of eating. One bhikkhu goes, that is the connection. Sesakaṃ: A remainder from fruits and cakes that are to be taken. Tasmiṃ khaṇe: At that moment of eating.

265.Ekekenapi aṅgenāti pisaddo sambhāvanattho, tato pana adhikehi aṅgehi pagevāti hi attho. Samannāgatassa upāsakassa nikkujjitunti sambandho.Tassāti upāsakassa.Na gahetabboti saṅghena na gahetabbo. Asukassa upāsakassāti sambandho.Ukkujjanakāleti pattassa ukkujjanakāle.Yācāpetvāti pattanikujjitena upāsakena yācāpetvā.Hatthapāsanti saṅghassa hatthapāsaṃ.

265. Ekekenapi aṅgenā: The word pi is in the sense of possibility; therefore, it certainly applies even more so to limbs that are more than that. It should be connected that the upāsaka who is endowed with it is overturned. Tassā: Of that upāsaka. Na gahetabbo: Should not be taken by the Saṅgha. Of such and such an upāsaka, that is the connection. Ukkujjanakāle: At the time of overturning the bowl. Yācāpetvā: Having caused to ask by the upāsaka who has overturned the bowl. Hatthapāsaṃ: Hand-reach of the Saṅgha.

268.Purakkhatvāti ettha purasaddassa aggatthabhāvañca karasaddassa khādesabhāvañca dassento āha ‘‘aggato katvā’’ti.Soti bodhirājakumāro, santharīti sambandho.Lacchāmīti labhissāmi, esa bodhirājakumāro puttalābhāya abhabboti yojanā. Akkamane dosaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yadī’’tiādi.Pacchāti akkamanato pacchā.Ayanti bhagavā.Idanti kāraṇaṃ.Tāvāti sikkhāpadapaññattito, sikkhāpadapaññattiyā vā paṭhamaṃ.Paribhavatoti gihīnaṃ paribhavato.

268. Purakkhatvā: Here, showing that the word pura has the meaning of "front" and the word kara has the meaning of "eating," he says "aggato katvā": having made it at the front. So: That Bodhirājakumāra, santharīti sambandho: spread out, that is the connection. Lacchāmī: I will obtain; that Bodhirājakumāra is incapable of obtaining a son, that is the meaning. Showing the fault in stepping, he says "yadītiādi". Pacchā: After stepping. Ayaṃ: This Bhagavā. Idaṃ: This reason. Tāvā: From the enactment of the training rule, or before the enactment of the training rule. Paribhavato: Abusing the lay people.

Maṅgalatthāyāti arogādikassa maṅgalassa atthāya.Dhotapādakanti ettha dhotehi pādehi akkamanaṭṭhāne attharitaṃ dhotapādakanti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dhotapādakaṃ nāmā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘paccattharaṇaṃ atthata’’nti iminā ‘‘dhotapādaka’’nti ettha ṇikapaccayassa attharitatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dasseti.

Maṅgalatthāyā: For the sake of the auspiciousness of being without disease, etc. Dhotapādakaṃ: Here, showing the meaning of the word "dhotapādakaṃ" as "that which is spread out in a place where one steps with washed feet," he says "dhotapādakaṃ nāmā": it is called dhotapādaka. There, with "paccattharaṇaṃ atthata," he shows that in "dhotapādaka," the suffix ṇika occurs in the sense of spreading out.

269.Padumakaṇṇikākāranti padumakaṇṇikasaṇṭhānaṃ. Kataṃ pādaghaṃsanaṃkatakaṃnāmāti yojanā.Tanti katakaṃ, paṭikkhittamevāti sambandho. Potthakesu taṃsaddo galitoti daṭṭhabbo.Bāhullikānuyogattāti paccayabahulabhāvāya anuyogattā.Pāsāṇapheṇakopīti pāsāṇaabbudampi.Bījanīti caturassabījanī.Tanti vidhūpanaṃ, kataṃ hotūti sambandho. Idhāpi taṃsaddo galito. Veḷudantavilīvehi vā morapiñchehi vā cammavikatīhi vā kataṃ hotūti yojanā. Sabbaṃ vidhūpananti sambandho. Pāḷiyaṃtālavaṇṭanti saha vaṇṭena kataṃ tālaṃ tālavaṇṭaṃ, tālasaddena taṃmayā maṇḍalabījanī gahetabbā vikārīvikārabhāvena sambandhattā.Makasabījanīti makasānaṃ palāyanakabījanī, dantamayavisāṇamayadaṇḍakāpi makasabījanī vaṭṭatīti yojanā. ‘‘Vākamayabījaniyā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘saṅgahitā’’ti pade ādhāro, karaṇaṃ vā.

269. Padumakaṇṇikākāraṃ: Having the shape of a lotus pericarp. Making a foot wiper is called katakaṃ, that is the meaning. Taṃ: That kataka, it is indeed rejected, that is the connection. It should be seen that the word taṃ is missing in the books. Bāhullikānuyogattā: Because of the abundance of grounds for blame. Pāsāṇapheṇakopī: Even stone foam. Bījanī: A square fan. Taṃ: That fanning, it should be done, that is the connection. Here also, the word taṃ is missing. It should be made of bamboo tooth carvings, or peacock feathers, or leather scraps, that is the meaning. All of it is fanning, that is the connection. In the Pāḷi, tālavaṇṭaṃ: A tāla made together with a stalk is tālavaṇṭaṃ; with the word tāla, a round fan made of it should be taken, because of the connection through modification and non-modification. Makasabījanī: A fan for repelling mosquitoes; a mosquito fan made of ivory or horn is also allowable, that is the meaning. The phrase "vākamayabījaniyā" is either a location or an instrument depending on the word "saṅgahitā".

270.Yassāti bhikkhussa cakkhuṃ vā dubbalaṃ hotīti yojanā.Aññoti kāyaḍāhādīhi ābādhehi añño, koci ābādho vā uppajjatīti yojanā. ‘‘Vasse panā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘cīvaraguttattha’’nti pade eva sambandhitabbaṃ.Cīvaraguttatthanti cīvarassa vassatemanato guttatthaṃ, vāḷamigacorabhayesu santesūti sambandho. Tālapaṇṇādinā ekena paṇṇena kataṃ chattaṃekapaṇṇacchattaṃ. Sabbatthevāti sabbesu eva gāmāraññesu.

270. Yassā ti: The meaning is that the bhikkhu's eye is weak. Añño ti: Other than ailments such as body heat, some other ailment arises. The phrase "Vasse pana" should be connected only to the phrase "cīvaraguttattha". Cīvaraguttattha ti: For the purpose of protecting the robe from getting wet in the rain, in the presence of dangers from wild animals and thieves, is the connection. A parasol made with a single palm leaf or similar is an ekapaṇṇacchattaṃ. Sabbatthevā ti: In all villages and forests.

asissāti padassa anavakāsavidhiṃ dasseti.Asīti khaggo.Assāti corassa, asīti sambandho.Vijjotalatīti ettha alapaccayo rūpasiddhimattovāti āha ‘‘vijjotatī’’ti. ‘‘Catuhatthoyevā’’ti iminā pamāṇayuttoti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.Tatoti catuhatthato.Sabbesanti gilānāgilānānaṃ. ‘‘Sakkā panā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti pade kattā, ‘‘dātabbā’’ti pade kammaṃ. Sammannitvāva dātabbā, na vinā sammutiyāti adhippāyo.

The word asissā ti indicates the prohibition of no opportunity. Asī ti: A sword. Assā ti: Of the thief, "asī" is the connection. Vijjotalatī ti: Here, he said that the "ala" suffix is merely for establishing the form, "vijjotatī". Catuhatthoyevā ti: With this, he shows the meaning of the phrase "pamāṇayuttoti". Tato ti: From four cubits. Sabbesa nti: Of the sick and the healthy. The phrase "Sakkā panā" is the subject in the phrase "na vaṭṭatī", and the object in the phrase "dātabbā". It should be given only after formal agreement, not without agreement, is the meaning.

273.Āgatanti udariyato nikkhamitvā āgataṃ.Uggāranti galato uggāraṃ bhojananti sambandho.Sandhāretvāti patiṭṭhāpetvā. Asandhāritameva hutvāti sambandho.

273. Āgata nti: Having come out from the stomach. Uggāra nti: Belching food from the throat is the connection. Sandhāretvā ti: Having established. Being without establishment is the connection.

Yanti khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ, patitanti sambandho.Tanti khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ, gahetvā paribhuñjitunti sambandho.Idanti vacanaṃ.

Ya nti: Chewable and edible food, having fallen is the connection. Ta nti: Chewable and edible food, having taken, he should consume, is the connection. Ida nti: This word.

274.Kubbaṃ karissāmīti ettha kariyati uccāriyatīti kubbanti vutte saddoti āha ‘‘saddaṃ karissāmī’’ti.Saddanti ‘‘ayaṃ maṃ bhikkhu vippakarotī’’ti uccāsaddaṃ.Nakhādīhītiādisaddena mukhakuṭṭe saṅgaṇhāti.Anurakkhanatthanti anudayena pālanatthaṃ.Nakhacchedanantinakhaṃ chindati anenāti nakhacchedanaṃ, satthakādi. Vīsatimaṭṭhanti ettha vīsatiyā nakhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ vīsatimaṭṭhanti dassento āha ‘‘vīsatipi nakhe’’tiādi.Likhitamaṭṭheti likhite hutvā maṭṭhe.Kārāpentīti nahāpite kārāpenti.Nakhatoti nakhato vā nakhantarato vā.Apakaḍḍhitunti kaḍḍhitvā apanetuṃ.

274. Kubbaṃ karissāmī ti: Here, because "kubbanti" is said, it means sound is made, so he says, "saddaṃ karissāmī". Sadda nti: A loud noise, "this bhikkhu is disturbing me". Nakhādīhī ti: With the "ādi" word, he includes the mouth wall. Anurakkhanattha nti: For the purpose of protecting without decline. Nakhacchedananti: That with which one cuts nails is nakhacchedanaṃ, a knife etc. In "vīsatimaṭṭhanti", showing that "vīsatiyā nakhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ" is "vīsatimaṭṭhaṃ", he says, "vīsatipi nakhe" etc. Likhitamaṭṭhe ti: Smooth after being written on. Kārāpentī ti: They have it done by a barber. Nakhato ti: From the nail or from within the nail. Apakaḍḍhitu nti: To pull and remove.

275.Khurakosakanti khurassa ṭhapanakaṃ.Kattariyāti kantiyati chindiyati imāyāti kattari, ayomayo eko upakaraṇaviseso, tāya. ‘‘Chedāpentī’’ti iminākappāpentīti ettha kappasaddassa vidhyatthaṃ adhippāyena dasseti.Massuṃ vaḍḍhāpentīti ettha massuṃ vaḍḍhetvā ruhāpentīti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘massuṃ dīghaṃ kārāpentī’’ti.Eḷakamassūti eḷakassa viya massūti eḷakamassu. ‘‘Golomika’’nti vuccatīti sambandho. ‘‘Catukoṇa’’nti iminācaturassanti ettha aṃsasaddo koṇatthoti dasseti. Caturassanti ettha hi ‘‘caturaṃsa’’nti vattabbe niggahitassa lopaṃ katvā parassa sakārassa dvebhāvaṃ katvā ‘‘caturassa’’nti vuttaṃ.Lomasaṃharaṇanti lomānaṃ apanayanaṃ.Lomarājiṭṭhapananti lomalekhāṭhapanaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu, massukappanādīsūti sambandho.Gaṇḍavaṇarudhiābādhapaccayāti gaṇḍo ca vaṇo ca rudhi ca gaṇḍavaṇarudhayo, teyeva ābādhā gaṇḍavaṇarudhiābādhā, tesaṃ paccayā.Vaṇoti mahanto vaṇo.Rudhīti khuddako vaṇo.Sakkharādīhīti sakkharamadhusitthakehi.Saṇḍāsoti suṭṭhu lomaṃ ḍaṃsatīti saṇḍāso.Yanti lomaṃ, ṭhitanti sambandho. Kattha ṭhitanti āha ‘‘bhamukāya vā’’tiādi. Kiṃ hutvā ṭhitanti āha – ‘‘uggantvā vibhacchaṃ ṭhita’’nti, vibhacchaṃ hutvā ṭhitanti yojanā. Visesena sobhaṇaṃ bhakkhatītivibhaccho,asobhaṇo. ‘‘Vigaccha’’ntipi pāṭho, virūpaṃ gacchati, gamayatīti vāvigaccho. Tattha purimapāṭhoyeva mūlapāṭhoti daṭṭhabboti. Palitaṃ vā apalitaṃ vā tādisaṃ lomanti yojanā.

275. Khurakosaka nti: A container for storing the razor. Kattariyā ti: That with which one cuts is kattari, a kind of tool made of iron, with that. With "chedāpentī", here in kappāpentī ti, he shows the meaning of the "kappa" word with the intention of prohibition. Massuṃ vaḍḍhāpentī ti: Here, rejecting the meaning of growing and causing the beard to grow, he says "massuṃ dīghaṃ kārāpentī ti". Eḷakamassū ti: A beard like a goat's beard is eḷakamassu. "Golomika" is what it is called, is the connection. With "catukoṇa nti", here in caturassa nti, he shows that the word "aṃsa" means corner. Here in "caturassa", instead of saying "caturaṃsa", the deletion of the "ṃ" has been done, and the doubling of the following "sa" has been done, and thus "caturassa" is said. Lomasaṃharaṇa nti: Removal of hair. Lomarājiṭṭhapana nti: Establishing a line of hair. Sabbatthā ti: In all, in beard cutting and so on, is the connection. Gaṇḍavaṇarudhiābādhapaccayā ti: A boil and a wound and blood are gaṇḍavaṇarudhayo, those very ailments are gaṇḍavaṇarudhiābādhā, because of those. Vaṇo ti: A large wound. Rudhī ti: A small wound. Sakkharādīhī ti: With sugar, honey, and wax. Saṇḍāso ti: That which grips the hair tightly is saṇḍāso. Ya nti: The hair, standing is the connection. Where is it standing? He says, "bhamukāya vā" etc. Having become what is it standing? He says – "uggantvā vibhacchaṃ ṭhita nti", having become ugly and standing is the connection. That which eats particularly beautifully is vibhaccho, unbeautiful. "Vigaccha" is also a reading, it goes badly, or it causes to go, is vigaccho. There, the former reading should be regarded as the root reading. Hair that is gray or not gray, such hair is the connection.

277.Kaṃsapattharikāti ettha kaṃsaāpaṇe pattharanti pasārentīti kaṃsapattharikāti vutte kaṃsabhaṇḍavāṇijā gahetabbāti āha ‘‘kaṃsabhaṇḍavāṇijā’’ti. Vāsidaṇḍādīnaṃ apātanatthaṃ bandhati anena lohenātibandhanaṃ,tameva mattaṃ appanti bandhanamattaṃ.

277. Kaṃsapattharikā ti: Here, because "kaṃsaāpaṇe pattharanti pasārentīti kaṃsapattharikā" is said, it should be taken as merchants of bronze vessels, so he says, "kaṃsabhaṇḍavāṇijā ti". That with which one ties the metal to prevent the falling of the handle of a chisel etc. is bandhanaṃ, that very measure is called the appropriate binding, bandhanamattaṃ.

278.Nikkhamantenāti ārāmato nikkhamantena.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne. ‘‘Saritvā’’ti iminā asaritvā piṇḍāya caritabbanti dasseti.Bahurajjukanti bahū rajjuyo etassāti bahurajjukaṃ. Iminā kalāpena bahurajjūnaṃ samūhena kattabbantikalāpukanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti, ikārassukāro.Deḍḍubhakanti ettha deḍḍubhasaddena tassa sīsaṃ gahetabbaṃ ekadesūpacārena, deḍḍubhaṃ viyāti deḍḍubhakaṃ, sadisatthe kapaccayo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘udakasappasīsasadisa’’nti. ‘‘Murajavaṭṭisaṇṭhāna’’nti iminā murajasaddena murajavaṭṭi gahetabbā tassa vikārattā, tena sadisaṃmurajanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Veṭhetvāti bahurajjuke ekato veṭhetvā.Maddavīṇasaddo pāmaṅgapariyāyo. Maddavīṇaṃ viyātimaddavīṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pāmaṅgasaṇṭhāna’’nti. ‘‘Pageva bahūnī’’ti iminā ‘‘ekampī’’ti ettha pisaddassa sambhāvanatthaṃ dasseti.Macchakaṇṭakavāyimāti macchakaṇṭakaṃ viya dassetvā vāyimā.Kuñjaracchikādibhedāti vāraṇaacchikādibhedā. Vāraṇo hi kuṃ bhūmiṃ jarāpetītikuñjaroti (vi. va. aṭṭha. 31; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.2) ca kuñje nikuñje ramatītikuñjaroti ca vuccati. Tassa acchi viyātikuñjaracchikaṃ,taṃ ādi yesaṃ tānīti kuñjaracchikādīni, tesaṃ bhedātikuñjaracchikādibhedā. Ādisaddena goṇacchikādayo saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhāna’’nti iminā sūkarassa antaṃ viyasūkarantakanti atthaṃ dasseti. Sūkarassa hi antaṃ kuñcikākosakaṃ viya majjhe susiro hoti.Sūkarantakaṃ anulometīti sūkarantakena anulometi.Dasāsuyevāti kāyabandhanassa antesuyeva.Etthāti dasāsu. ‘‘Catunnaṃ upari na vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā murajadasā tato upari vaṭṭatīti dasseti.Veṭhetvāti rajjuṃ vatthena veṭhetvā.Muddikasaṇṭhānenāti varakasīsasaṇṭhānena.Evaṃ sibbitāti evaṃ sibbiyamānā.ti phalajotako.Pāsantoti pāsakoṭi.

278. Nikkhamantenā ti: By one who is going out from the monastery. Yatthā ti: In whichever place. With "saritvā", he shows that one should go for alms without remembering. Bahurajjuka nti: Many ropes are in this, therefore it is bahurajjukaṃ. With this, because it should be done with a collection of many ropes, the meaning of the word kalāpuka nti is shown, the "i" becoming "u". Deḍḍubhaka nti: Here, with the word "deḍḍubha", its head should be taken by way of indicating a part of the whole, like a deḍḍubha, therefore it is deḍḍubhakaṃ, the "ka" suffix is in the sense of similarity. Therefore it is said, "udakasappasīsasadisa nti". With "murajavaṭṭisaṇṭhāna nti", with the word "muraja", the murajavaṭṭi should be taken because it is a modification of that, therefore the meaning of the word muraja nti is shown, similar to that. Veṭhetvā ti: Having wrapped many ropes together. The word maddavīṇa is a synonym for pāmaṅga. Like a maddavīṇa is maddavīṇaṃ. Therefore it is said "pāmaṅgasaṇṭhāna nti". With "pageva bahūnī nti", here in ekampī ti, he shows that the "pi" word is in the sense of possibility. Macchakaṇṭakavāyimā ti: Having woven showing like a fishbone. Kuñjaracchikādibhedā ti: Kinds such as vāraṇaacchi. Because a vāraṇa dries up the earth, it is called kuñjaro (vi. va. aṭṭha. 31; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.2) and because it delights in groves and thickets, it is called kuñjaro. Like its acchi is kuñjaracchikaṃ, those that are "ādi" of that are kuñjaracchikādīni, their differences are kuñjaracchikādibhedā. With the "ādi" word, he includes goṇacchikā etc. With "kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhāna nti", he shows the meaning that like the end of a pig is sūkarantaka nti. Because the end of a pig, like a kuñcikākosakaṃ, is hollow in the middle. Sūkarantakaṃ anulometī ti: He smoothes with a sūkarantaka. Dasāsuyevā ti: Only at the ends of the waistband. Etthā ti: In the ten. With "catunnaṃ upari na vaṭṭatī ti", he shows that the murajadasā is suitable above that. Veṭhetvā ti: Having wrapped the rope with cloth. Muddikasaṇṭhānenā ti: With the shape of a varakasīsa. Evaṃ sibbitā ti: Being sewn thus. Hī ti: Indicates a result. Pāsanto ti: The edge of the loop.

280.Olambakaṃ katvā nivatthaṃhatthisoṇḍakaṃnāmāti yojanā.Coḷikaitthīnanti coḷaraṭṭhe nivāsīnaṃ itthīnaṃ. Hatthiyā soṇḍo viya hatthisoṇḍakaṃ nivatthaṃ. Macchavālaṃ viyātimacchavālakaṃ. Cattāro kaṇṇā etassa nivatthassāticatukaṇṇakaṃ. Tālavaṇṭaṃ viyātitālavaṇṭakaṃ. Sataṃ valino etassa nivatthassātisatavalikaṃ. ‘‘Anekakkhattu’’nti iminā ‘‘satavalika’’nti ettha satasaddassa anekatthavācakataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vāmadakkhiṇapassesu vā’’ti iminā purimanivatthaṃ kaṭito paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā nivatthaṃ nāmāti dasseti.

280. Making an olambaka and wearing a lower garment is called hatthisoṇḍakaṃ, is the connection. Coḷikaitthīna nti: Of the women living in the Coḷa country. Like the trunk of an elephant is the hatthisoṇḍakaṃ lower garment. Like the tail of a fish is macchavālakaṃ. Four corners are of this lower garment, therefore it is catukaṇṇakaṃ. Like a palm-leaf fan is tālavaṇṭakaṃ. A hundred folds are in this lower garment, therefore it is satavalikaṃ. With "anekakkhattu nti", here in satavalika nti, he shows that the word "sata" indicates many meanings. With "vāmadakkhiṇapassesu vā nti", he shows that the former lower garment is called a lower garment worn from the waist down.

saṃvalliyaṃ. Mallo ca kammakāro camallakammakārā,te ādayo yesaṃ teti mallakammakārādayo. Ādisaddena dhuttādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Yampi nivatthaṃ nivāsenti, sabbaṃ taṃ nivatthaṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Ekaṃ vā koṇanti sambandho.Koṇeti antaravāsakassa koṇe. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ekaṃ vā dve vā koṇe ukkhipitvā antaravāsakassa upari laggentī’’ti atthaṃ atidisati. Antokāsāvassa dassetvāti sambandho. Dve nivāsentena agilānenāti yojanā.Saguṇanti antokāsāvena bahikāsāvaṃ samānaguṇaṃ katvā.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.Yañcāti yaṃ nivatthañca.Idhāti khuddakavatthukkhandhake. Yañca sekhiyavaṇṇanāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 576 ādayo) paṭikkhittanti sambandho. Sabbaṃ taṃ nivatthanti yojanā. Nibbikāraṃ katvāti sambandho.Ubhokaṇṇeti heṭṭhā ṭhite ubho kaṇṇe upari ca ṭhite ubho kaṇṇe.Tanti parimaṇḍalapārupanaṃ.

saṃvalliyaṃ. A wrestler and a workman are mallakammakārā, those who are "ādi" of them are mallakammakārādayo. With the "ādi" word, he includes rogues etc. Also that lower garment which they wear, all that lower garment is not suitable, is the connection. One corner is the connection. Koṇe ti: In the corner of the antaravāsaka. With "tathā nti", he extends the meaning that "having lifted one or two corners and attaching them on top of the antaravāsaka". Having shown the edge of the antokāsāva is the connection. By one who wears two, and who is not sick, is the connection. Saguṇa nti: Having made the bahikāsāva equal in quality to the antokāsāva. Itī ti: etc. is the conclusion. Yañcā ti: And that lower garment. Idhā ti: In the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka. And that which has been forbidden in the Sekhiyavaṇṇanā (pāci. aṭṭha. 576 ff) is the connection. All that lower garment, is the connection. Having made it without alteration is the connection. Ubho kaṇṇe ti: Both corners that are situated below and both corners that are situated above. Ta nti: Circular covering.

Tatthāti ‘‘gihipāruta’’nti vacane yaṃkiñci aññathāpārutaṃ atthīti sambandho.Tasmāti yasmā gihipārutaṃ nāma, tasmā, parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupitabbanti sambandho. ‘‘Yathā pārupanti, yathā ca ṭhapentī’’tiādinā yojanā kātabbā.Tassevāti dīghasāṭakasseva.Tassevāti sāṭakasseva.Pāḷikārakoti pāḷiṃ gaṇhantaṃ vā vācentaṃ vā kārako.Tathāti yathā pārupanti, tathā.

Tatthā ti: In the statement "gihipāruta nti", whatever differently covered thing there is, is the connection. Tasmā ti: Because it is called gihipārutaṃ, therefore, having covered circularly is the connection. The connection should be made with "yathā pārupanti, yathā ca ṭhapentī" etc. Tassevā ti: Of the long cloak itself. Tassevā ti: Of the cloak itself. Pāḷikārako ti: One who upholds or recites the Pāḷi is a kārako. Tathā ti: As they cover, so.

281.Kuhiñci ṭhānaṃ gacchato raññoti yojanā. ‘‘Parikkhārabhaṇḍavahanamanussā’’ti iminā te manussā muṇḍaṃ sīsaṃ coḷakena veṭhentītimuṇḍaveṭhinonāmāti dasseti.Adhippāyoti ujjhāyantānaṃ manussānamadhippāyo.Antarākājanti ettha antarāsaddo majjhatthavācakoti āha ‘‘majjhe’’ti. ‘‘Laggetvā’’tiādinā kājassa antare laggetvā vahitabbaṃ antarākājanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

281. To whichever place the king goes is the connection. With "parikkhārabhaṇḍavahanamanussā nti", he shows that those men, because they wrap their shaved heads with a coḷaka, are called muṇḍaveṭhino. Adhippāyo ti: The intention of the murmuring men. Antarākāja nti: Here in "antarākāja", the word "antara" means middle, so he says, "majjhe ti". With "laggetvā ti" etc., the meaning of the word antarākāja is shown, that it should be carried by attaching it in the middle of the kāja.

282.‘‘Cakkhūnaṃ hita’’nti imināacakkhussanti ettha ssapaccayo cakkhusaddato hitatthe hotīti dasseti.Pamāṇaṅgulenāti vaḍḍhakīnaṃ pamāṇayuttena aṅgulena.

282. With "cakkhūnaṃ hita nti", here in acakkhussa nti, he shows that the "ssa" suffix is from the word "cakkhu" in the sense of benefit. Pamāṇaṅgulenā ti: With the measured finger of the carpenters.

283.‘‘Tiṇavanādīsū’’ti iminādāyaṃ ālimpentīti ettha dāyasaddo vanavācakoti dasseti. ‘‘Aggiṃ dentī’’ti iminā āpubbo lipidhātu upasaggavasena aggidānatthoti dasseti.Parittanti ettha samantato tāyati anenāti parittanti dassento āha ‘‘appaharitakaraṇena vā parikhākhaṇena vā parittāṇa’’nti.Etthāti parittakaraṇe.Dātuṃ labbhatīti sayaṃ dātuṃ labbhati.Haritunti apanetuṃ. Pattaṃ vā apattaṃ vā agginti sambandho.Tathāti aggidānādinā ākārena. Udakena nibbāpentena bhikkhunāti sambandho.

283. With "tiṇavanādīsū nti", here in dāyaṃ ālimpentī ti, he shows that the word "dāya" means forest. With "aggiṃ dentī ti", he shows that the verb lipidhātu with the prefix ā has the meaning of giving fire due to the influence of the prefix. Paritta nti: Here, showing that "savantato tāyati anenāti parittanti", he says, "appaharitakaraṇena vā parikhākhaṇena vā parittāṇa nti". Etthā ti: In making a paritta. Dātuṃ labbhatī ti: It is permissible to give oneself. Haritu nti: To remove. Fire that has reached or not reached is the connection. Tathā ti: In that way, by giving fire etc. By a bhikkhu who extinguishes with water is the connection.

284.Satikaraṇīyeti ettha karaṇīyasaddo kiccapariyāyoti āha ‘‘sukkhakaṭṭhādiggahaṇakicce’’ti. ‘‘Sukkhakaṭṭhādiggahaṇa’’ iti padena kiccasarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Purisappamāṇa’’nti imināporisiyanti ettha ṇiyapaccayo pamāṇatthe hotīti dasseti. Purisappamāṇaṃ nāma upari bāhudvayatatassa purisassa pamāṇaṃ. Disvā vā hutvā vā disvāti yojanā.Atiuccampīti pisaddo sambhāvanattho. Nīcaṃ pana rukkhaṃ pagevāti hi attho.

284. Sati karaṇīye ti: Here, he says that the word "karaṇīya" is a synonym for "kicca", "sukkhakaṭṭhādiggahaṇakicce ti". With the phrase "sukkhakaṭṭhādiggahaṇa", he shows the nature of the task. With "purisappamāṇa nti", here in porisiya nti, he shows that the "ṇiya" suffix is in the sense of measurement. "Purisappamāṇa" means the measurement of a man with both arms outstretched above. Having seen or having become, is the connection. Atiuccampī ti: The word "pi" is in the sense of possibility. But a low tree is definitely so, is the meaning.

285.Kalyāṇavākkaraṇāti ettha kariyati uccāriyatītikaraṇo,saddo, vācāyeva karaṇovākkaraṇo,kalyāṇo vākkaraṇo etesanti kalyāṇavākkaraṇāti dassento āha ‘‘madhurasaddā’’ti.Vedaṃ viyāti sutiṃ viya.Vācanāmagganti vācanāya upāyaṃ.Sakāti sammāsambuddhasaṅkhātassa sassa attano esā sakā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sammāsambuddhenā’’ti. Sammāsambuddhena hi māgadhaniruttiyā eva dhammo bhāsito, tasmā sā māgadhanirutti sakā nāmāti vuccati.Niruttīti atthaṃ nīharitvā vuccate imāya saddapaññattiyāti nirutti, vacadhātussa vakārassa ukāro, sabbavohāro labbhati. Idha pana ‘‘sakāyā’’ti vuttattā māgadhavohāro eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘māgadhavohāro’’ti. ‘‘Sabhāvaniruttī’’tipi pāṭho. Evañhi sati sabbasattānaṃ sabhāvena pavattā mūlabhāsābhūtā māgadhaniruttiyeva.

285. Kalyāṇavākkaraṇā ti: Here, because it is said "kariyati uccāriyatīti karaṇo, saddo, vācāyeva karaṇo vākkaraṇo, kalyāṇo vākkaraṇo etesanti kalyāṇavākkaraṇāti", he says, "madhurasaddā ti". Vedaṃ viyā ti: Like a hymn. Vācanāmagga nti: The means of recitation. Sakā ti: This "sakā" is his own, of the "sa" designated as Sammāsambuddha. Therefore it is said "sammāsambuddhenā ti". Because the Dhamma was spoken by the Sammāsambuddha in the Māgadhī language itself, therefore that Māgadhī language is called "sakā". Niruttī ti: Because the meaning is brought out and spoken by this designation of words, it is nirutti, the "va" of the root "vac" becomes "u", all usage is obtained. But here, because "sakāyā" is said, it is only the Māgadhī usage. Therefore it is said "māgadhavohāro ti". "Sabhāvaniruttī" is also a reading. In this case, the Māgadhī language itself, which arose naturally for all beings and is the root language.

286.Lokāyataṃ nāma titthiyasatthanti sambandho.Imināva kāraṇenāti ‘‘seto kāko, kasmā? Aṭṭhīnaṃ setattā. Ratto bako, kasmā? Lohitassa rattattā’’ iti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.223; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1080; a. ni. 10.69-70) iminā eva kāraṇena.

286. Lokāyataṃ means the doctrine of the heretics, is the connection. Imināva kāraṇenā ti: "The crow is white, why? Because the bones are white. The heron is red, why? Because the blood is red" iti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.223; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1080; a. ni. 10.69-70) by this very reason.

288.Antarāahosīti ettha antarasaddo byavadhānatthoti āha ‘‘antaritā ahosi paṭicchannā’’ti. Tena saddena dhammakathā byavadhānā ahosīti attho.

288. Antarā ahosī ti: Here in "antarā ahosī", the word "antara" means separation, so he says, "antaritā ahosi paṭicchannā ti". By that word, the Dhamma talk was separated, is the meaning.

289.Ābādhappaccayāti ettha ābādhassa bhesajjasaṅkhāto paccayo ābādhapaccayoti dassento āha ‘‘yassā’’tiādi. Iminā ābādhoyeva paccayo ābādhapaccayoti atthaṃ paṭikkhipati.

289.Ābādhappaccayā: Here, to show that ābādha (sickness) is the condition in the sense of medicine, he says, "of whom," etc. By this, he rejects the meaning that sickness itself is the condition, ābādhapaccayā.

293.Dukkaṭavatthu nāma akappiyavohārādinā mālāvaccharopanādi, pācittiyavatthu nāma mālāvaccharopanādiatthāya pathavīkhaṇanādi.Paharaṇīti paharati imāyāti paharaṇī.Etanti ‘‘paharaṇī’’ti etaṃ nāmaṃ. Yassa kassaci āvudhasaṅkhātassa lohabhaṇḍassāti sambandho.Tanti āvudhasaṅkhātaṃ lohabhaṇḍaṃ.Vuttamevāti ‘‘katakaṃ nāma padumakaṇṇikākāra’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 269) vuttameva.Dhaniyassevāti dhaniyassa eva. Aññesañhi katāya sabbamattikāmayakuṭiyā apākaṭattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhaniyassevā’’ti. Atha vā dhaniyassa sabbamattikāmayakuṭi ivāti yojanā.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ khuddakavatthukkhandhake.

293.Dukkaṭavatthu means things like planting garlands or trees using non-allowable speech, and pācittiyavatthu means digging the earth for the purpose of planting garlands or trees. Paharaṇī: Because one strikes with it, it is a paharaṇī. Etaṃ: This name "paharaṇī." The connection is that any iron tool that is considered a weapon. Taṃ: That iron tool considered a weapon. Vuttamevā: Has already been stated, "A kataka is like the pericarp of a lotus," etc. (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 269). Dhaniyassevā: Only Dhaniya's. Because the entire mud hut made by others is not obvious, it is said, "only Dhaniya's." Or, it can be construed as: the entire mud hut is like Dhaniya's. Sabbattha: In the entire Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka.

Iti khuddakavatthukkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the Yojanā of the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka.

6. Senāsanakkhandhakaṃ

6. Senāsanakkhandhakaṃ

Vihārānujānanakathā
Vihārānujānanakathā

294.Senāsanakkhandhakeapaññattaṃ hotīti ettha na ñapadhātu hoti, apica ñādhātuyeva, so ca kho anujānanatthoti āha ‘‘ananuññātaṃ hotī’’ti. Iminā ñādhātussa avabodhanādayo atthe nivatteti, anujānanatthaṃyeva dasseti. Aḍḍhayogādīnaṃ visuṃ gahitattā vihārasaddena pārisesato avasesāvāsova gahetabboti āha ‘‘aḍḍhayogādimuttako avasesāvāso’’ti.Suvaṇṇavaṅkagehanti suvaṇṇavaṅkachadanena chāditaṃ gehaṃ.Iṭṭhakāguhāti iṭṭhakāya katā guhā. Eseva nayo sesesupi.Āgatassa ca anāgatassa cāti ettha casaddena dvandavākyaṃ dasseti. Āgacchatītiāgato,na āgatoanāgato,saṅgho. Āgato ca anāgato caāgatānāgato,samāhāradvando puṃliṅgo, tassa. ‘‘Appaṭihatacārassā’’ti iminā catūsu disāsu appaṭihatacārocātuddisoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

294.In the Senāsanakkhandhaka, apaññattaṃ hoti: Here, the ñā element is not ñapa, but rather ñā itself, and it is in the sense of permission, as he says, "ananuññātaṃ hoti" (unpermitted). By this, he excludes meanings such as understanding from the ñā element, and shows only the meaning of permission. Because aḍḍhayoga, etc., are taken separately, by the word vihāra, the remaining residence must be taken by residue, as he says, "the remaining residence excluding aḍḍhayoga, etc." Suvaṇṇavaṅkagehaṃ: A house covered with a golden curved roof. Iṭṭhakāguhā: A cave made of bricks. The same method applies to the rest as well. Āgatassa ca anāgatassa cā: Here, he shows the dual sentence with the word ca. Āgacchati (he comes) is āgato (come), na āgato (not come) is anāgato (not come), the Saṅgha. Āgato ca anāgato ca (come and not come) is āgatānāgato, a collective dual, masculine gender, of that. "Appaṭihatacārassā" (whose movement is unimpeded) with this, he shows the meaning of the term cātuddiso (belonging to the four directions) as "whose movement is unimpeded in the four directions."

295.Anumodanagāthāsu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Utuvisabhāgavasenāti sītauṇhānaṃ utūnaṃ visabhāgavasena.Saṃphusitakavātoti saha udakabindunā āgato vāto. Ettha hi saṃsaddo sahattho, phusitasaddo udakabinduvācako.Ujukameghavuṭṭhiyo evāti vātena apaharitattā ujukaṃ patitā meghavuṭṭhiyo eva. Pāḷiyaṃtatoti ettha topaccayo paccattatthe vattati. So vihāroti hi attho.Vāḷamigāni cāti vāḷamige ca. Liṅgavipallāso hesa.Etāni sabbānīti ‘‘sīta’’ntiādīni sabbāni satta padāni.Yojetabbānīti so vihāro sītaṃ paṭihanati…pe… vuṭṭhiyo paṭihanatīti yojetabbānīti attho.

295.The interpretation in the verses of rejoicing should be understood in this way. Utuvisabhāgavasenā: By way of the difference of the seasons of cold and heat. Saṃphusitakavāto: Wind that comes with raindrops. Here, the prefix saṃ has the meaning of "with," and the word phusita denotes raindrops. Ujukameghavuṭṭhiyo evā: Only direct rain clouds falling directly because they are not carried away by the wind. In the Pali, tato: Here, the to suffix functions in the sense of identity. That is, it means "that vihāra." Vāḷamigāni cā: And wild animals. This is a gender reversal. Etāni sabbānī: All seven terms, beginning with "sīta" (cold). Yojetabbānī: Should be connected as: that vihāra wards off the cold…pe… wards off the rains, this is the meaning.

tatoti ettha topaccayo kattutthe hotīti dasseti, tena vihārenāti attho.Paṭihaññatīti paṭihanīyati.Sukhatthanti ettha uttarapadalopoti āha ‘‘sukhavihārattha’’nti. ‘‘Leṇatthañca sukhatthañcā’’ti padadvayaṃ ‘‘hotī’’ti pāṭhasesena yojetabbaṃ. Vihāradānaṃ leṇatthañca sukhatthañca hotīti hi attho.Idanti ayaṃ adhippāyo.Vuttanti vutto. Vihāradānaṃ sukhatthañca hotīti yojanā. Jhāyituṃ vipassituñca yaṃ sukhaṃ atthīti sambandho.Tadatthanti tassa sukhassa atthāya.Parapadenapīti ‘‘jhāyituñca vipassitu’’nti padadvayato paraṃ ṭhitena ‘‘vihāradāna’’nti padenapi.Idhāti imasmiṃ vihāre.Vihāradānanti vihārassa dānaṃ, dātabbavihāraṃ vā, vaṇṇitanti sambandho.Vuttanti saṃyuttanikāye vuttaṃ. Sādhakapāḷiyaṃ yo upassayaṃ dadāti, so casabbadadosabbesaṃ balādīnaṃ dado hotīti yojanā.So cāti ettha casaddo avadhāraṇattho. So evāti hi attho.

Tato: Here, he shows that the to suffix functions in the sense of the agent, thus it means "by that vihāra." Paṭihaññatī: Is warded off. Sukhatthaṃ: Here, there is elision of the latter word, as he says, "sukhavihāratthaṃ" (for the purpose of a pleasant dwelling). The two words "Leṇatthañca sukhatthañca" (for the purpose of shelter and for the purpose of comfort) should be connected with the remaining reading "hotī" (it is). That is, the meaning is that the giving of a vihāra is for the purpose of shelter and for the purpose of comfort. Idaṃ: This meaning. Vuttaṃ: Is said. The giving of a vihāra is for comfort, this is the connection. The connection is: whatever comfort there is for meditating and seeing clearly. Tadatthaṃ: For the purpose of that comfort. Parapadenapī: Also with the word "vihāradāna" (giving of a vihāra) placed after the two words "jhāyituñca vipassituṃ" (for meditating and for seeing clearly). Idhā: In this vihāra. Vihāradānaṃ: The giving of a vihāra, or the vihāra to be given, the connection is that it is praised. Vuttaṃ: Is said in the Saṃyutta Nikāya. In the supporting passage, he who gives lodging, he is sabbadado (giver of all), he is the giver of all strengths, etc., this is the connection. So cā: Here, the word ca is in the sense of determination. That is, it means "only he."

vāsayetthāti ettha etasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.Vāsayeti vāseyya.Tesaṃ annañcāti ettha ‘‘tesa’’nti padaṃ ‘‘anucchaviya’’nti pāṭhasesena yojetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘tesaṃ anucchaviya’’nti. Tattha anucchaviyaṃ annañca anucchaviyāni vatthāni cāti yojanā. Atha vātesanti bhummatthe sampadānavacananti dassento āha ‘‘tesū’’ti, bhikkhūsūti attho.Ujubhūtesūti ettha sampadānatthe bhummavacanaṃ katvā ujubhūtānaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dadeyyāti atthopi yujjateva. ‘‘Akuṭilacittesū’’ti iminā ‘‘ujubhūtesū’’ti ettha ujusaddassa akuṭilatthañca bhūtasaddena bāhiratthasamāsañca dasseti. Ujubhūtaṃ cittametesantiujubhūtāti vacanattho kātabbo.Nidaheyyāti nikhaṇitvā ṭhapeyya. ‘‘Na cittapasādaṃ virādhetvā’’ti imināvippasannena cetasāti ettha evatthaphalaṃ vā aññatthāpohanaṃ vā dasseti.ti phalajotako. Evaṃ vippasannacittassa tassa vihāradāyakassa te bhikkhū dhammaṃ desentīti yojanā.

Vāsayetthā: Here, he shows the scope of the word ettha. Vāsaye: Should cause to dwell. Tesaṃ annañcā: Here, showing that the word "tesaṃ" should be connected with the remaining reading "anucchaviya," he says, "tesaṃ anucchaviyaṃ" (suitable for them). There, the connection is: suitable food and suitable clothing. Or, showing that tesaṃ is a dative case in the sense of location, he says "tesu" (to them), meaning to the monks. Ujubhūtesū: Here, having made the locative case in the dative sense, the meaning that "one should give to those monks who are upright" is also appropriate. With "Akuṭilacittesu" (in those of uncrooked minds), here, he shows the meaning of "upright" in "ujubhūtesu" as "uncrooked" and the compound with an external referent with the word bhūta. The verbal meaning to be made is "ujubhūtā cittā etesaṃti, ujubhūtā (those whose minds are upright)." Nidaheyyā: Should bury and keep. With "Na cittapasādaṃ virādhetvā" (without disrupting the serenity of the mind), here, he shows the fruit of affirmation or the exclusion of something else in "vippasannena cetasā" (with a serene mind). : Indeed, is a marker of result. Thus, those monks preach the Dhamma to that giver of the vihāra whose mind is serene.

296.Āviñchanachiddanti aṅguliṃ ava pavesetvā añchati ākaḍḍhati ettha, etenāti vāāviñchanaṃ. Avapubbo achidhātu, upasaggaakārassa dīghaṃ katvā, dhātuakārassa ca ikāraṃ katvā ‘‘āviñchana’’nti vuttaṃ, tameva chiddaṃ āviñchanachiddaṃ.Āviñchanarajjunti kavāṭacchidde ava pavesetvā añchati ākaḍḍhati imāyātiāviñchanā,sāyeva rajjūti āviñchanarajju. Kāci rajju na na vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Atha vā na vaṭṭati na hoti, vaṭṭatiyevāti yojanā.Tīṇi tālānīti ettha tālasaddo kuñcikāpariyāyoti āha ‘‘tisso kuñcikāyo’’ti. Iminā tālasaddassa rukkhatūriyavisese nivatteti.Yaṃ yanti upakaraṇaṃ.Tassāti yantakassa.Vedikāvātapānanti vātaṃ pivati anenātivātapānaṃ,vedikāya kataṃ vātapānaṃ vedikāvātapānaṃ.Cakkalikanti ettha cakkākārena alati pavattatīticakkalaṃ,coḷakapādapuñjanaṃ. Tena bandhitabbanticakkalikanti dassento āha ‘‘coḷakapādapuñjanaṃ bandhitu’’nti. ‘‘Vātapānappamāṇena bhisiṃ katvā’’ti iminā vātapānapamāṇena katā bhisivātapānabhisīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

296.Āviñchanachiddaṃ: Because one pulls and draws out a finger, or with this, is āviñchanaṃ. Ava is the prefix, and achi is the root, having lengthened the a of the prefix and made the a of the root into an i, it is said "āviñchana," that very hole is an āviñchanachiddaṃ. Āviñchanarajju: Because one pulls and draws out with this after inserting it into the door hole, it is āviñchanā, that very rope is āviñchanarajju. Some ropes do not twist, this is the connection. Or, do not twist, do not exist, but they do twist, this is the connection. Tīṇi tālānī: Here, he says that the word tāla is a synonym for key, "three keys." By this, he excludes the meaning of the word tāla as a special kind of tree or musical instrument. Yaṃ yaṃ: Whatever, whatever equipment. Tassā: Of the lock. Vedikāvātapānaṃ: Because one drinks the wind with this, it is vātapānaṃ, a vātapānaṃ made in the vedikā is vedikāvātapānaṃ. Cakkalikaṃ: Here, because it circles and turns in a circular shape, it is cakkalaṃ, a foot wiper. Showing that it is bound with that, it is cakkalikaṃ, he says, "to tie a foot wiper." With "Having made a cushion the size of the window," he shows the meaning of the term vātapānabhisī as "a cushion made to the size of the window."

297.‘‘Uccakampi āsandika’’nti vacanato vaṭṭatīti veditabboti sambandho. Ekatobhāgena dīghapīṭhaṃ aṭṭhaṅgulapādakameva vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Tato adhikaṃ na vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.Pamāṇātikkantopīti pisaddo pamāṇayutto pana pagevāti dasseti.Sattaṅgoti tīsu disāsu apassayo, cattāro pādāti satta aṅgāni etassāti sattaṅgo.Ayampīti pisaddo āsandikaṃ apekkhati. Eḷakapādapīṭhaṃ nāma vuccatīti sambandho. Eḷakassa pādo viya pādo etthātieḷakapādaṃ,tameva pīṭhaṃeḷakapādapīṭhaṃ. Āmalakavaṇṇikapīṭhanti āmalakāya vaṇṇo saṇṭhāno āmalakavaṇṇo, tena yojitaṃ āmalakavaṇṇikaṃ, tadeva pīṭhaṃ āmalakavaṇṇikapīṭhaṃ. ‘‘Ākārenā’’ti iminā vaṇṇasaddassa saṇṭhānatthaṃ dasseti.Imānīti pīṭhāni.Etthāti pīṭhe.Muñcapabbajamayanti muñjena ca pabbajena ca kataṃ.

297.From the statement "Uccakampi āsandika," it should be understood that it is allowable, this is the connection. A long bench with eight-finger-length legs on one side is allowable, this is the connection. The meaning is that more than that is not allowable. Pamāṇātikkantopī: The pi implies that what is within measure is even more so. Sattaṅgo: Because there is support on three sides and four legs, it has seven limbs, thus it is sattaṅgo. Ayampī: The pi refers to the āsandika. The connection is that it is called an eḷakapādapīṭhaṃ. Because there is a foot like a goat's foot on it, it is eḷakapādaṃ, that very seat is eḷakapādapīṭhaṃ. Āmalakavaṇṇikapīṭhaṃ: The color or shape of the āmalaka is the āmalakavaṇṇa, connected with that is āmalakavaṇṇikaṃ, that very seat is āmalakavaṇṇikapīṭhaṃ. With "Ākārena" (by the shape), he shows the meaning of the word vaṇṇa as shape. Imānī: These seats. Etthā: On the seat. Muñcapabbajamayaṃ: Made of muñja grass and pabbaja reed.

Manussānanti vaḍḍhakīmanussānaṃ.Chavisaṃrakkhanatthāyāti chaviyā vināsanato suṭṭhu rakkhanatthāya.Simbalirukkhādīnantiādisaddena tūlanibbattake sabbarukkhe saṅgaṇhāti.Khīravalliādīnantiādisaddena tūlanibbattakā sabbā latāyo saṅgaṇhāti.Poṭakītiṇādīnantiādisaddena tūlanibbattakā sabbā tiṇajātiyo saṅgaṇhāti.Tīhīti rukkhalatāpoṭakīhi. Nanu bhūtagāmānaṃ anekattā etehi tīhi mutto bhūtagāmo atthi, kasmā pana sabbabhūtagāmā saṅgahitā hontīti āha ‘‘rukkhavallitiṇajātiyo hī’’tiādi. Tattha hi yasmā natthi, tasmā saṅgahitā hontīti yojanā.Tasmāti yasmā natthi, tasmā. Sabbampi etaṃ tūlanti yojanā. Bibbohane lomampi vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Lomampīti pisaddena tūlaṃ apekkhati.Yaṃkiñci pupphanti sabbaṃ pupphaṃ. Pattaṃ pāpuṇitvā suddhaṃ tamālapattameva na vaṭṭati, avasesaṃ sabbaṃ pattaṃ suddhampi vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.Pañcavidhanti uṇṇacoḷavākatiṇapaṇṇavasena pañcapakāraṃ.

Manussānaṃ: Of the carpenter humans. Chavisaṃrakkhanatthāyā: For the sake of protecting the skin well from destruction. Simbalirukkhādīnaṃ: With the ādi (and so on), it includes all trees that produce cotton. Khīravalliādīnaṃ: With the ādi, it includes all vines that produce cotton. Poṭakītiṇādīnaṃ: With the ādi, it includes all types of grass that produce cotton. Tīhī: By the three: trees, vines, and grasses. If there is a plant-being that is excluded from these three because plant-beings are diverse, why are all plant-beings included? He says, "rukkhavallitiṇajātiyo hī" (because the tree, vine, and grass types). There, the connection is that because there is nothing that is not included, therefore they are included. Tasmā: Therefore, because there is nothing that is not included. All of this is cotton, this is the connection. Even fiber from the bibbhonā is allowable, this is the connection. Lomampī: The pi refers to the cotton. Yaṃkiñci pupphaṃ: Every flower. Having obtained the leaf, only the purified tamāla leaf is not allowable, the rest of the leaves, even purified, are allowable, this is the meaning. Pañcavidhaṃ: Five kinds, by way of wool, cloth, bark, grass, and leaves.

addhakāyikānīti ettha addhassa kāyassa pamāṇena katāniaddhakāyikānīti atthaṃ dasseti. Yesu bibbohanesu kaṭito paṭṭhāya yāva sīsaṃ upadahanti, tāni bibbohanāni addhakāyikāni nāmāti yojanā.Yassāti bibbohanassa. Vitthārato muṭṭhiratanaṃ hotīti sambandho. Iminā yattha saha gīvāya sakalaṃ sīsaṃ ṭhapetuṃ sakkā, tassa muṭṭhiratanaṃ vitthārapamāṇanti dasseti. ‘‘Tīsu kaṇṇesu dvinnaṃ kaṇṇāna’’nti idaṃ bibbohanassa ubhosu antesu ṭhapetabbacoḷapamāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idaṃ pana bibbohanassa ubhosu antesu ṭhapitacoḷassa koṭiyā koṭiṃ āhacca dviguṇaṃ kataṃ tikaṇṇaṃ hoti, tesu tīsu kaṇṇesu dvinnaṃ kaṇṇānamantaraṃ vidatthi caturaṅgulaṃ hoti, majjhaṭṭhānaṃ koṭito koṭimāhacca muṭṭhiratanaṃ hoti, idaṃ pana bibbohanaṃ tikaṇṇaṃ hoti. Vaṭṭaṃ vā caturassādiṃ vā katvā sibbitaṃ yathā koṭito koṭi vitthārato puthulaṭṭhānaṃ muṭṭhiratanaṃ hoti, evaṃ sibbitabbaṃ. Ito adhikaṃ na vaṭṭati, ūnaṃ pana vaṭṭatiyeva.Sīsūpadhānanti sīsaṃ upadahanti ṭhapenti etthāti sīsūpadhānaṃ.Bibbohanānīti visesena, visesaṃ vā sukhaṃ vahantīti bibbohanāni.Uparīti bibbohanānaṃ upari. Yāni pana kappiyatūlāni santīti yojanā.Mahantampīti pisaddo khuddakaṃ pana pagevāti dasseti. Vinayadharaupatissatthero pana āhāti sambandho. ‘‘Vinayadhara’’ iti padena phussadevattherato visesaṃ dasseti.Akappiyatūlaṃ vāti bhisiyaṃ akappiyatūlaṃ vā. Bibbohane hi akappiyatūlaṃ nāma natthi.

Addhakāyikānī: Here, he shows the meaning that "addhakāyikāni" means "made to the measure of half the body." Those pillows on which one rests from the waist up to the head, those pillows are called addhakāyikāni. Yassā: Of that pillow. The connection is that the width is a fist-span. By this, he shows that where the entire head can be placed together with the neck, its width is a fist-span. "Tīsu kaṇṇesu dvinnaṃ kaṇṇānaṃ" (in the three corners, of two corners) this is said with reference to the measure of the cloth to be placed at both ends of the pillow. Here, if the triple-cornered is made by doubling the tip-to-tip measure of the cloth placed at both ends of the pillow, the distance between two corners in those three corners is a span and four fingers, and the middle point is a fist-span from tip to tip, then this pillow is triple-cornered. Whether it is made round or square, it should be sewn so that the wide part is a fist-span from tip to tip. More than this is not allowable, but less is indeed allowable. Sīsūpadhānaṃ: Because one places and rests the head on this, it is a sīsūpadhānaṃ. Bibbohanānī: Pillows, especially, or they carry special comfort, thus they are bibbohanāni. Uparī: Above the pillows. The connection is that whatever allowable cotton there is. Mahantampī: The pi implies that the small one is even more so. However, the Elder Vinayadharaupatissa says, this is the connection. With the word "Vinayadhara," he shows the distinction from the Elder Phussadeva. Akappiyatūlaṃ vā: Or unallowable cotton in a cushion. For there is no unallowable cotton in a pillow.

Pañcabhisiyoti ettha vākyabhāvañca asamāhāradigubhāvañca paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘pañcahi uṇṇādīhi pūritā bhisiyo’’ti. Iminā pañcahi uṇṇādīhi pūritā bhisiyo pañcabhisiyoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Atthato pana vākyampi asamāhāradigupi yujjateva. Kasmā pañcagaṇanā hotīti āha ‘‘tūlagaṇanāya hī’’tiādi.Hiyasmā tūlagaṇanāya etāsaṃ gaṇanā vuttā, tasmā pañcabhisiyo hontīti yojanā.Tatthāti uṇṇādīsu pañcasu. Uṇṇaggahaṇena gahitanti sambandho.Kambalamevāti uṇṇāmayaṃ kambalameva. Uṇṇāya, uṇṇaṃ vā pakkhipitvā katā bhisiuṇṇābhisi. Eseva nayocoḷabhisiādīsu.

Pañcabhisiyo: Here, rejecting the sentence-state and the non-compound digubhāva, he says, "bhisiyo pūritā pañcahi uṇṇādīhi" (cushions filled with five things such as wool). By this, he shows the meaning of the term pañcabhisiyo as "cushions filled with five things such as wool." However, the sentence and the non-compound digupi are indeed appropriate in meaning. Why is there a count of five? He says, "tūlagaṇanāya hī" (because the counting is by the counting of the filling). Hi: Because the counting of these is stated by the counting of the filling, therefore there are pañcabhisiyo, this is the connection. Tatthā: Among the five, wool, etc. The connection is that what is taken by the mentioning of wool. Kambalamevā: Only a blanket made of wool. A cushion made by putting wool inside, is uṇṇābhisi. The same method applies to coḷabhisi, etc.

Pamāṇaniyamoti ettakā pamāṇāti pamāṇassa niyamo. Mañce attharitabbā bhisimañcabhisi. Etāsanti mañcabhisiādīnaṃ. Yaṃ etaṃ tūlanti yojanā.Sūrakepīti cammamayabhisiyampi.Etenāti kurundiyaṃ vuttavacanena siddhaṃ hotīti sambandho.

Pamāṇaniyamo: A regulation of the measure, that this much is the measure. A cushion to be spread on a bed is a mañcabhisi. Etāsaṃ: Of these, mañcabhisi, etc. The connection is that whatever filling that is. Sūrakepī: Even a leather cushion. Etenā: The connection is that it is established by the statement stated in the Kurundi.

Mañcabhisinti mañce attharitabbaṃ bhisiṃ. ‘‘Attharaṇatthāya saṃharantīti yujjatī’’ti iminā ‘‘attharantī’’ti ettha kāriyūpacārena attho gahetabboti dasseti. Attharaṇāya hi saṃharaṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ nāma, attharaṇaṃ kāriyaṃ nāma.Uparīti bhisichaviyā upari.Phusitānīti bindūni.Bhittikammanti bhittiyaṃ nānāvaṇṇehi rājikaraṇaṃ viya kattabbaṃ kammaṃ.

Mañcabhisi: A cushion to be spread on a bed. With "Attharaṇatthāya saṃharantīti yujjatī" (it is fitting because they prepare for the sake of spreading), here, he shows that the meaning should be taken figuratively in "attharantī" (they spread). For the preparation is the cause of the spreading, and the spreading is the effect. Uparī: Above the cushion cover. Phusitānī: Drops. Bhittikammaṃ: Work to be done on the wall like painting with various colors.

298.‘‘Ikkāsa’’nti nāmaṃ niyyāsasilesānaṃ nāmanti āha ‘‘rukkhaniyyāsaṃ vā silesaṃ vā’’ti. ‘‘Kuṇḍakamissakamattika’’nti iminā kuṇḍakena missakā mattikākuṇḍakamattikāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Sāsapapiṭṭhanti sāsapacuṇṇaṃ. ‘‘Bindu bindu hutvā’’ti imināaccussannaṃ hotīti ettha kāraṇūpacāraṃ dasseti. Accussannañhi kāraṇaṃ hoti, ‘‘bindu bindu hutvā’’ti ṭhānaṃ kāriyaṃ hoti. ‘‘Puñjitu’’nti sodhetuṃ.Gaṇḍuppādagūthamattikanti mahilatāya gūthamayaṃ mattikaṃ. Iminālaṇḍamattikanti ettha laṇḍasaddo gūthapariyāyoti dasseti.

298. "Ikkāsa": He said that it is a name for the resins of trees, stating, "either tree resin or gum." "Kuṇḍakamissakamattika": With this, he shows the meaning of the word kuṇḍakamattikā as "earth mixed with kuṇḍaka is kuṇḍakamattika." Sāsapapiṭṭha: Mustard powder. "Bindu bindu hutvā": With this, he indicates a causal treatment in accussannaṃ hoti. For what is accussanna is the cause; the place, "bindu bindu hutvā," is the effect. "Puñjitu": To cleanse. Gaṇḍuppādagūthamattika: Earth mixed with excrement made by a woman. With this, he indicates that in laṇḍamattika, the word laṇḍa is a synonym for excrement.

299.Na bhikkhave paṭibhānacittanti ettha ‘‘itthirūpakaṃ purisarūpaka’’nti pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā kiṃ itthipurisarūpameva na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi. Tiracchānarūpampi kātuṃ vā ‘‘karohī’’ti vattuṃ vā na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Dvārapālanti dvārapālarūpaṃ.Pasādanīyānīti pasādetabbāni, pasādetuṃ arahānīti attho.

299. Na bhikkhave paṭibhānacitta: Here, because it is stated in the Pali as "itthirūpakaṃ purisarūpakaṃ," he says, "na kevala," etc., questioning whether it is only the form of a woman or a man that is not allowed. It is not allowed to make or say "do" even the form of an animal. Dvārapāla: A doorkeeper's form. Pasādanīyānī: Things to be pleased with, worthy of pleasing, is the meaning.

300.Ekaṅgaṇāti avihāraṭṭhānena samānabhūmibhāgā.Muṇḍacchedanagabbhoti muṇḍena chādetabbo gabbho.

300. Ekaṅgaṇā: A ground portion equal to the dwelling place. Muṇḍacchedanagabbho: A chamber to be covered with grass.

Tatthāti vijjhitabbarukkhe. ‘‘Kata’’nti iminākulaṅkapādakanti ettha ṇikapaccayassa atthaṃ dasseti. Taṃ āharimaṃ bhittipādaṃ patiṭṭhāpetunti sambandho.Vassaparittāṇatthanti vassodakaparittāṇatthaṃ. ‘‘Madditamattika’’nti imināuddasudhanti ettha sudhāsaddassa lepanasudhaṃ dasseti, bhojanasudhaṃ nivatteti.

Tattha: In a tree that is to be pierced. With "kata," he indicates the meaning of the ṇika suffix in kulaṅkapādaka. It is connected to establish that brought-in wall base. Vassaparittāṇattha: For the protection from rainwater. With "madditamattika," he indicates that in uddasudha, the word sudhā means plastering lime, and excludes food lime.

Pamukhanti vihārassa pamukhaṃ.Yanti padesaṃ, hanantīti sambandho. Tassa katapadesassāti yojanā.‘‘Paghāna’’ntipi vuccatīti dīghavasena ‘‘paghāna’’ntipi vuccati. Iminā purimapāṭhe rassabhāvaṃ dīpeti.‘‘Pakuṭṭa’’ntipi pāṭhoti sasaṃyogavasena ‘‘pakuṭṭa’’ntipi pāṭho. Iminā purimapāṭhe nisaṃyogabhāvaṃ dasseti.Vaṃsanti veḷuṃ.Tatoti vaṃsato. ‘‘Osāretvā kata’’nti iminā osāretvā kataṃosārakanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Chadanapamukha’’nti iminā ṇikapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Cakkalayuttoti cakkalena yutto.

Pamukha: The front of the monastery. Ya: The area; it is connected with "they strike." The construction is "of that area made." "Paghāna"ntipi vuccatī: It is also called "paghāna" with a long vowel. With this, he indicates the short vowel in the previous reading. "Pakuṭṭa"ntipi pāṭho: There is also a reading "pakuṭṭa" with a conjunction. With this, he indicates the non-conjunction in the previous reading. Vaṃsa: Bamboo. Tato: From the bamboo. With "osāretvā kata," he indicates the meaning of the word osāraka as "made by lowering." With "chadanapamukha," he indicates the form of the ṇika suffix. Cakkalayutto: Joined with a wheel.

301.Pānīyadānabhājananti pānīyaṃ deti anenāti pānīyadānaṃ, tameva bhājanaṃ pānīyadānabhājanaṃ. ‘‘Uḷuṅko ca thālakañcā’’ti iminā dve pānīyasaṅkhassa anulomānīti yojanā.

301. Pānīyadānabhājana: That by which water is given is pānīyadāna; that same vessel is pānīyadānabhājana. With "uḷuṅko ca thālakañcā," it is connected that these two are suitable for the Sangha's water donation.

303.Dvārathakanakanti dvāraṃ thaketi anenāti dvārathakanakaṃ. Gāmadvāresu dvārathakanakaṃ viya cakkalayuttaṃ dvārathakanakanti yojanā.

303. Dvārathakanaka: That by which the door is covered is dvārathakanaka. The construction is "like the cakkalayuttaṃ dvārathakanakaṃ at the village gates."

305.Assatarirathāti assānaṃ visesena, atisayena vātiassataro,atha vā pakatiasse tarati atikkamatīti assataro, so etesu rathesu yujjitabboti assatarī, teyeva rathāti assatarirathāti dassento āha ‘‘assatarayuttā rathā assatarirathā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘assatarayuttā’’ti iminā‘‘assatarī’’ti padassa assatthitaddhitaṃ dasseti.Āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalāti padassa ‘‘sataṃ kaññā sahassānī’’ti padena sambandhitabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalānī’’ti. Iminā nikārassa ākāro hotīti dasseti. Kaṇṇesu āmuttaṃ maṇikuṇḍalaṃ etāsantiāmuttamaṇikuṇḍalākaññāyo.

305. Assatarirathā: Assataro is either a special kind of horse or an excessive horse; or else, it crosses over or surpasses a natural horse, therefore assataro; that which should be harnessed to these chariots is assatarī; showing that these are assatarirathā, he says, "assatarayuttā rathā assatarirathā." There, with "assatarayuttā," he indicates the assatthitaddhitaṃ of the word "assatarī." Because the word āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalā is to be connected with the phrase "sataṃ kaññā sahassānī," it is said, "āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalānī." With this, he indicates that the nikāra becomes ākāra. The maidens who have jeweled earrings fastened to their ears are āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalā.

Sītibhūtoti ettha kilesātapānaṃ abhāveneva sītibhūto, na aññesanti āha ‘‘kilesātapābhāvenā’’ti. ‘‘Kilesūpadhiabhāvenā’’ti iminānirupadhīti ettha khandhūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhiabhāvenāti atthaṃ paṭikkhipati.

Sītibhūto: Here, he says "kilesātapābhāvenā" because he is sītibhūto only due to the absence of the heat of defilements, and not due to anything else. With "kilesūpadhiabhāvenā," he rejects the meaning in nirupadhī as "due to the absence of the aggregates, upadhi, and formations upadhi."

Āsattiyoti ettha punappunaṃ visayesu, bhavesu vā sañjantīti āsattiyoti dassento āha ‘‘rūpādīsū’’tiādi.Patthanāyoti taṇhāyo. Iminā āsattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Chinditvā’’ti imināchetvāti ettha chedhātuyā chedanatthaṃ dasseti.Vineyyahadaye daranti ettha ‘‘vineyyā’’ti padassa tvāpaccayantabhāvañca hadayasaddassa cittavācakabhāvañca darathasarūpañca dassento āha ‘‘citte kilesadarathaṃ vinetvā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘citte’’ti iminā hadayasaddassatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘kilesa’’ iti padena darathasarūpaṃ, ‘‘vinetvā’’ti iminā tvāpaccayantabhāvaṃ dasseti.Vayakaraṇanti paribbayamūlaṃ. Tañhi vayaṃ kariyati anenāti vayakaraṇanti vuccati. Iminā vayassa karaṇaṃ vayāyikaṃ, karaṇatthe āyikapaccayo, vayāyikamevaveyyāyikanti atthaṃ dasseti.

Āsattiyo: Here, showing that they cling again and again to objects or existences, therefore āsattiyo, he says "rūpādīsū," etc. Patthanāyo: Cravings. With this, he indicates the nature of attachments. With "chinditvā," he indicates the meaning of cutting of the root che in chetvā. Vineyyahadaye dara: Here, showing that the word "vineyyā" is an absolutive, that the word "hadaya" denotes the mind, and the nature of fear, he says, "citte kilesadarathaṃ vinetvā." There, with "citte," he indicates the meaning of the word hadaya; with the word "kilesa," the nature of fear; with "vinetvā," the fact of being an absolutive. Vayakaraṇa: The origin of expenditure. For expenditure is done by this, therefore it is called vayakaraṇa. With this, he indicates the meaning that the doing of expenditure is vayāyikaṃ, the āyika suffix is in the sense of doing, and that vayāyikameva is veyyāyikaṃ.

307.Ādeyyavācoti ettha ādiyitabbātiādeyyā,sā vācā etassāti ādeyyavācoti dassento āha ‘‘tassa vacana’’ntiādi. Tatthatassāti anāthapiṇḍikassa.Sadhanāti saṃvijjamāna dhanā, attano vā dhanavanto.Mandadhanāti appadhanā.Adāsīti anāthapiṇḍiko adāsi.Itīti evaṃ, datvā katvāti sambandho.Soti anāthapiṇḍiko, agamāsīti sambandho.

307. Ādeyyavāco: Here, showing that ādeyyā means "to be accepted," that is, "that person's speech is ādeyyavāco," he says, "tassa vacana," etc. There, tassā: Of Anāthapiṇḍika. Sadhanā: With existing wealth, or wealthy themselves. Mandadhanā: With little wealth. Adāsī: Anāthapiṇḍika gave. Itī: Thus; the connection is "having given and done." So: Anāthapiṇḍika; the connection is "he went."

Paṭipātetvāti paṭihanāpetvā. Tattha tasmiṃ ṭhāne ye rukkhā vā yā pokkharaṇiyo vā tiṭṭhantīti yojanā.Tesanti tāsaṃ rukkhapokkharaṇīnaṃ. Sāmaññañhi apekkhitvā pulliṅgavasena vuttaṃ.Parikkhepapamāṇanti pariṇāhassa pamāṇaṃ.Assāti anāthapiṇḍikassa.

Paṭipātetvā: Having caused to be planted. There, the construction is "those trees or ponds that stand in that place." Tesa: Of those trees and ponds. It is said in the masculine gender with generality in mind. Parikkhepapamāṇa: The measure of the circumference. Assā: Of Anāthapiṇḍika.

Koṭṭhakaṃ māpesīti ettha aññe koṭṭhake paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘dvārakoṭṭhakapāsāda’’nti.

Koṭṭhakaṃ māpesī: Here, rejecting other koṭṭhakas, he says "dvārakoṭṭhakapāsāda."

Vihārādayoti ettha ādisaddena pāḷiyaṃ āgate pariveṇādayo cuddasa upakaraṇe saṅgaṇhāti. Amhākaṃ bhagavato vihārakārāpanapasaṅgena sattannampi buddhānaṃ vihārakārāpanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vipassissā’’tiādi. Tattha vipassissa bhagavato vihāraṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.12) kārāpesīti sambandho. Tigāvutappamāṇaṃ bhūmiṃ suvaṇṇayaṭṭhisantharena kiṇitvā vihāraṃ kārāpesīti yojanā. Eseva nayo paratopi. Aṭṭhakarīsappamāṇā bhūmi usabhena dasausabhappamāṇā yaṭṭhiyā dvisatayaṭṭhippamāṇā hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ anupubbena parihāyantī’’ti vatvā sabbajanaṃ saṃvejento āha ‘‘sampattiyo hī’’tiādi. Tattha yasmā sampattiyo parihāyanti, tasmā alameva sabbasampattīsu virajjituṃ, alaṃ eva sabbasampattīhi vimuccitunti yojanā. ‘‘Sabbasampattīsū’’ti padañhi ‘‘vimuccitu’’nti padena vibhattipariṇāmaṃ katvā sambandhitabbaṃ.

Vihārādayo: Here, with the word ādi, he includes the fourteen requisites such as pariveṇas that are mentioned in the Pali. Showing the construction of monasteries for even the seven Buddhas due to the occasion of having a monastery constructed for our Blessed One, he says, "vipassissā," etc. There, the connection is that he caused a monastery to be constructed for Vipassi Buddha (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.12). The construction is "having sprinkled the ground measuring three gāvutas with a layer of golden rods, he had a monastery constructed." This same method applies to the rest as well. It should be seen that ground measuring eight karisas is equal to ten usabhas with an ox, and two hundred rods with a rod. Saying "evaṃ anupubbena parihāyantī," causing all the people to be agitated, he says, "sampattiyo hī," etc. There, because fortunes decline, therefore, it is enough to become dispassionate towards all fortunes; it is enough to be liberated from all fortunes. The word "sabbasampattīsū" should be connected to the word "vimuccitu" by transforming the विभक्ति.

308.Khaṇḍaphullasaddānaṃ adhikaraṇabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘khaṇḍanti chinnokāso. Phullanti phalitokāso’’ti. Tattha ‘‘chinnokāso’’ti iminā khaṇḍati chijjati etthātikhaṇḍanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Phalitokāso’’ti iminā phullati phalati etthātiphullanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Paṭisaṅkharissatīti ettha pāṭisaddassa pākatikatthabhāvaṃ, saṅkharissatisaddassa ca karadhātuyā nipphannabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pākatikaṃ kariyatī’’ti.

308. Showing the locus of the words khaṇḍa and phulla, he says, "khaṇḍanti chinnokāso. Phullanti phalitokāso." There, with "chinnokāso," he indicates the meaning of the word khaṇḍa as "it is broken or cut in this, therefore khaṇḍa." With "phalitokāso," he indicates the meaning of the word phulla as "it blooms or bears fruit in this, therefore phulla." Paṭisaṅkharissatī: Here, to show that the word pāṭi has its natural meaning and that the word saṅkharissati is derived from the root kar, it is said, "pākatikaṃ kariyatī."

310.Theroti sāriputtatthero, āgacchatīti sambandho.Idanti gilānapaṭijagganādi.Assāti therassa.Aggāsanantiādīsu aggasaddo paṭhamatthopi uttamatthopi yujjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘therāsana’’ntiādi.Antarā satthīnanti etthaantarāti bhummatthe nissakkavacanaṃ. Satthisaddo ca ūrusaṅkhāto pādavācakoti āha ‘‘catunnaṃ pādānaṃ antare’’ti.

310. Thero: Sāriputta Thera; the connection is "he comes." Ida: This, such as attending to the sick. Assā: Of the Thera. In aggāsana, etc., the word agga applies both in the sense of "first" and "best." Therefore, it is said, "therāsana," etc. Antarā satthīna: Here, antarā is a particle in the sense of "abundance." And the word satthi is a word referring to the thighs, counted as the upper legs, so he says, "catunnaṃ pādānaṃ antare."

315.Patiṭṭhāpesīti ettha kaṃ vayaṃ katvā patiṭṭhāpesīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhārasakoṭipariccāgaṃ katvā’’ti.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.

315. Patiṭṭhāpesī: Here, he says, "aṭṭhārasakoṭipariccāgaṃ katvā," asking what expenditure he made to establish it. Evantiādi is the conclusion.

Āsanappaṭibāhanādikathā

316.Vippakatabhojanenāti ettha vippakatasaddo aniṭṭhitapariyāyoti āha ‘‘aniṭṭhite bhojane’’ti. Pakiriyittha, pakiriyissate vāpakataṃ,na pakataṃvippakatanti viggaho kātabbo, atthato pana ‘‘kariyamāno aniṭṭhito’’ti vuttaṃ hoti.Etthāti ṭhāne.Atisamīpanti bhuñjamānassa bhikkhussa atiāsannaṃ.Tassāti bhuñjamānassa bhikkhussa.Pivitvā vāti yāguṃ pivitvā vā.Khāditvā vāti khajjakaṃ khāditvā vā.Rittahatthampīti tucchahatthampi. Pisaddena āmisahatthaṃ pana pagevāti dasseti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Soti rittahattho bhikkhu.

316. Vippakatabhojanenā: Here, the word vippakata is a synonym for aniṭṭhita, so he says, "aniṭṭhite bhojane." The analysis should be made that pakataṃ is "that which was, or will be, done," and vippakata is "not done," but in meaning, it is said, "being done, not finished." Etthā: In the place. Atisamīpa: Very close to the monk who is eating. Tassā: Of the monk who is eating. Pivitvā vā: Having drunk rice-gruel or. Khāditvā vā: Having eaten something to eat or. Rittahatthampī: Even with an empty hand. With the pi particle, he shows that a hand with food is definitely meant. : Truly, or because. So: That monk with an empty hand.

Āpattinti dukkaṭāpattiṃ.Yanti vippakatabhojanaṃ bhikkhuṃ.Soti pacchā āgato bhikkhu.Ayañca bhikkhūti vippakatabhojano ayañca bhikkhu.Tenāti vippakatabhojanena navakena vā vuḍḍhatarena vā bhikkhunā. Kiṃ navakena vuḍḍhataraṃ āṇāpetuṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘vuḍḍhataraṃ hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Soti vuḍḍhataro bhikkhu.Tatoti udakaṃ āharāpetuṃ āṇattito.Yanti kammaṃ.

Āpatti: An offense of dukkata. Ya: That vippakatabhojana to the monk. So: The monk who came later. Ayañca bhikkhū: This monk with the vippakatabhojana. Tenā: By that new or older monk with the vippakatabhojana. He asks, "Is it allowed for a new monk to order an older one?" and says, "vuḍḍhataraṃ hī," etc. : Truly, or because. So: That older monk. Tato: From being ordered to fetch water. Ya: The action.

Yoti bhikkhu. ‘‘Evarūpassā’’ti padena tassa niyamanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kāsassa kheḷamallakaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Bhagandaraatisārānaṃ vaccakapālaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Aññesaṃ aññāni ṭhapetabbāni honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kheḷa…pe… hontī’’ti.Yasmiṃti yasmiṃ gilāne. Yopi bhesajjaṃ karotīti sambandho.Lesakappenāti ettha lesakappasaddānaṃ atthato ekattā vuttaṃ ‘‘appakena sīsābādhādimattenā’’ti.Bhikkhū gaṇetvāti ettha gaṇaṃ ñatvāti dassento āha ‘‘paricchedaṃ ñatvā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘pariccheda’’nti iminā gaṇasaddassa adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ñatvā’’ti iminā idhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti.

Yo: The monk. With the word "evarūpassā," his regulation should be understood. A spittoon should be placed for coughs. A bedpan should be placed for fistula and dysentery. Different things should be placed for others. Therefore, it is said, "kheḷa…pe… hontī." Yasmiṃ: In whichever sick person. The connection is "whoever prepares medicine." Lesakappenā: Here, because the words lesa and kappa are the same in meaning, it is said, "appakena sīsābādhādimattenā." Bhikkhū gaṇetvā: Here, showing that it means "knowing the group," he says, "paricchedaṃ ñatvā." There, with "pariccheda," he indicates the intended meaning of the word gaṇa. With "ñatvā," he indicates the meaning of the idhātu.

Senāsanaggāhakathā
The story of taking a dwelling

318.Seyyāti kāyapasāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ sayanakiriyaṃ paṭikkhipitvā senāsanasaṅkhātaṃ seyyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mañcaṭṭhānānī’’ti. ‘‘Seyyāparicchedenā’’ti imināseyyagghenāti ettha agghasaddassa pūjanatthaṃ paṭikkhipitvā paricchedanatthaṃ dīpeti. Ettha ca agghasaddassa catutthakkharena yuttabhāvo heṭṭhā samuccayakkhandhakavaṇṇanā (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102) yojanāya vuttoyeva.Kālanti seyyāpaṭiggahaṇassa kālaṃ.Gāhiyamānāti gāhāpiyamānā. ‘‘Atirekāni ahesu’’nti imināussārayiṃsūti ettha uddhaṃ sārayiṃsu gacchiṃsu pavattiṃsūti atthaṃ dasseti.Atirekānīti ca bhikkhuparicchedato seyyāparicchedāni atirekāni.Anubhāganti ettha anu pacchā dātabbo bhāgo anubhāgoti dassento āha ‘‘puna aparampi bhāgaṃ dātu’’nti.Atimandesūtiādivacanena kiñcimandesu bhikkhūsu ekekassa bhikkhuno dve tisso seyyā dātabbā. Yato kiñcimandesu bhikkhūsu dve tayo vihārā dātabbāti atthopi gahetabbo.Tatthāti ‘‘na akāmā dātabbo’’ti vacane. Anubhāge gahiteti yojanā. Yena anubhāgo ca paṭhamabhāgo ca gahito, so bhikkhūti yojanā.

318. Seyyā: Rejecting the act of lying down, which is reckoned as stretching out the body, showing the seyyā reckoned as a dwelling, he says, "mañcaṭṭhānānī." With "seyyāparicchedenā," here, in seyyagghenā, he indicates the meaning of paricchedana, rejecting the meaning of pūjana of the word aggha. And here, the fact that the word aggha is combined with the fourth syllable has already been stated in the explanation of the Samuccayakkhandhaka (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102). Kāla: The time for accepting a dwelling. Gāhiyamānā: Being made to take. With "atirekāni ahesu," here, in ussārayiṃsū, he indicates the meaning that they sent up, went, and were in progress. Atirekānī: And the seyyāparicchedas are atirekāni from the bhikkhupariccheda. Anubhāga: Here, showing that anubhāga means "the portion to be given later," he says, "puna aparampi bhāgaṃ dātuṃ." With the statement "atimandesū," etc., two or three seyyās should be given to each monk among those who are slightly slow. Therefore, it should also be understood that two or three monasteries should be given to the monks who are slightly slow. Tatthā: In the statement "na akāmā dātabbo." The construction is "gahiteti anubhāge." The construction is "that monk by whom the anubhāga and the first portion were taken."

nissīmeti ettha sīmato bahi nikkhantaṃ, nisinnaṃ vā nissīmanti atthaṃ dasseti. Upacārasīmāya āvāsavaḍḍhanavasena ativitthārattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dūre ṭhitassāpī’’ti.Utukālepīti hemantagimhakālepi. Tasmiñhi kāle sītauṇhautu tikhiṇo hoti, tasmā tasseva visesena utukāloti nāmaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘hemantagimhakālepī’’ti. Pisaddena vassakālaṃ apekkhati. Purimavassūpanāyikadivase gāhopurimako,pacchimavassūpanāyikadivase gāhopacchimako.

nissīme: Here, he indicates the meaning that nissīma means "gone out from the boundary, or seated." Because it is very extensive due to the increase of the residence within the upacārasīma, it is said, "dūre ṭhitassāpī." Utukālepī: Even in the winter and summer seasons. For at that time, the cold and heat are intense, therefore that season is particularly known by the name utukāla. Therefore, it is said, "hemantagimhakālepī." With the pi particle, it implies the rainy season. The taking on the day of the first rains retreat is purimako, the taking on the day of the last rains retreat is pacchimako.

antarāmuttako. Ekasmiṃ vihāreti ekissaṃ vihārasīmāyaṃ.Senāsanasāmikāti senāsanadāyakā, dentīti sambandho.Tanti senāsanaṃ. Āvāsikā na olokentīti sambandho.Etthāti senāsane.Palujjantampīti vinassantampi. Bhagavā āhāti sambandho.Tassāti senāsanassa.Aparajjūti aparasmiṃ ahani aparajju.Gatāyāti atikkamitāya.Pavāraṇāya gatāyapavāraṇadivase atikkamite sati aparajju antarāmuttako gāhetabboti yojanā.

antarāmuttako. Ekasmiṃ vihāre: In one monastery boundary. Senāsanasāmikā: Dwelling donors; the connection is "they give." Ta: That dwelling. The connection is "the residents do not look." Etthā: In the dwelling. Palujjantampī: Even while it is decaying. The connection is "the Blessed One said." Tassā: Of the dwelling. Aparajjū: On another day, the next day. Gatāyā: Having passed. Pavāraṇāya gatāya: On the pavāraṇā day, after it has passed, the antarāmuttako should be taken on another day; this is the construction.

Tanti antarāmuttakaṃ.Gāhentenāti gāhāpentena.Tenāti gaṇhantena.Aṭṭhamāseti cattāro hemantamāse, cattāro ca gimhamāseti aṭṭhamāse. Kadāci pañca gimhamāseti navamāse vā.Khaṇḍaṃ vāti chinnaṭṭhānaṃ vā.Phullaṃ vāti phalitaṭṭhānaṃ vā.Paṭisaṅkharitabbanti pākatikaṃ kātabbaṃ.Divasaṃ khepetvāti pariveṇe divasaṃ khepetvā.Tatthāti gahitasenāsane.Rattindivanti ratti ca divo ca rattindivaṃ, samāhāradvando, accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Na labbhatīti saṅghattherena na labbhati.Idanti senāsanaṃ.

Tanti antarāmuttakaṃ. Gāhentenāti by one causing to take. Tenāti by one taking. Aṭṭhamāseti four months of winter and four months of summer, thus eight months. Sometimes five months of summer, thus nine months as well. Khaṇḍaṃ vāti or a place that has been cut. Phullaṃ vāti or a place that has flowered. Paṭisaṅkharitabbanti should be restored to its original condition. Divasaṃ khepetvāti having spent the day in the enclosure. Tatthāti in the lodging that has been taken. Rattindivanti night and day, rattindivaṃ, a collective compound, and this is a locative of absolute concomitance. Na labbhatīti is not obtained by the elder of the Saṅgha. Idanti this lodging.

Temāsaccayena temāsaccayenāti tiṇṇaṃ māsānaṃ atikkamena tiṇṇaṃ māsānaṃ atikkamena.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Yasmiṃ panāti senāsane pana.Sakidevāti ekavārameva.Ayanti esā kathā.

Temāsaccayena temāsaccayenāti with the passing of three months, with the passing of three months. ti truly, or because. Yasmiṃ panāti but in which lodging. Sakidevāti just once. Ayanti this matter.

Tatthāti duvidhesu senāsanaggāhesu.Utukālanti utukāle āgacchantīti sambandho. Tesaṃ tadāva dātabbanti sambandho.Akālo nāmāti uṭṭhāpanassa akālo nāma natthi. Ekaṃ vā mañcaṭṭhānaṃ vā ṭhapetabbanti yojanā. Eko vā thero āgacchatīti yojanā.Ubbhaṇḍikāti ukkhittabhaṇḍikā.

Tatthāti in these two kinds of taking lodgings. Utukālanti the connection is that they come at the season. The connection is that it should be given to them at that very time. Akālo nāmāti there is no time that is not the time for removing. The construction is that one should place even one bed-frame. The construction is that even one elder comes. Ubbhaṇḍikāti ukkhittabhaṇḍikā (something cast aside).

Bahūsūti tayo ādiṃ katvā bahūsu bhikkhūsu.Pahotīti ekekassa bhikkhussa pahoti.Tatthāti pariveṇe.Tassevāti pariveṇasāmikasseva.Evaṃ apahontesūti evaṃ pariveṇagghena apahontesu.Pāsādagghenāti vihārasaṅkhātassa pāsādassa paricchedena.Ovarakagghenāti gabbhassa paricchedena.Seyyagghenāti catupañcahatthappamāṇāya seyyāya paricchedena.Mañcaṭṭhānenāti dvihatthavitthārassa catuhatthaāyāmassa mañcassa ṭhānena. Ekamañcaṭṭhānassa dvinnaṃ pīṭhakānaṃ ṭhānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘ekapīṭhakaṭṭhānavasenā’’ti. Idaṃ nisīdituṃ sakkuṇeyyavasena vuttaṃ. Sace na sakkā nisīdituṃ, na dātabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuno pana ṭhitokāsamattaṃ na gāhetabba’’nti.Etanti ṭhitokāsamattaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Ekamañcaṭṭhānassa tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ ekapīṭhakaṭṭhānabhāvena apahontattā vuttaṃ ‘‘ekaṃ mañcaṭṭhānaṃ vā tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ dātabba’’nti.ti saccaṃ. ‘‘Sītasamaye’’ti iminā uṇhasamayepi sabbadivasaṃ ajjhokāse vasituṃ na sakkāti dīpeti. Pariḷāhasamaye pana sakkā sabbarattiṃ ajjhokāse vasituṃ. Kiñcāpi sakkā, sītuṇhakāle pana na dātabbattā pariḷāhasamayepi na dātabbanti veditabbaṃ. Ekamañcaṭṭhāne vā ekapīṭhakaṭṭhāne vā tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ nisīdanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘mahātherenā’’tiādi. Tattha mahātherena vattabbanti sambandho.Niddāgarukoti niddāya garukārako.Sītaṃ anudahatīti sītaṃ maṃ pīḷeti.Tenāti mahātherena.Dutiyattherenāpīti pisaddo mahātheraṃ apekkhati.Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘ukkāsitvā’’tiādinā vuttanayeneva.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ. Jambudīpe pana ekacce bhikkhū gāhentīti sambandho. Kiñcideva mañcaṭṭhānaṃ vā pīṭhaṭṭhānaṃ vāti yojanā.Ayantiādi purimavacanassa nigamanavasena pacchimavacanassa kathanatthāya vuttavacanaṃ.

Bahūsūti among many bhikkhus, starting with three. Pahotīti is enough for each bhikkhu. Tatthāti in the enclosure. Tassevāti to the owner of the enclosure alone. Evaṃ apahontesūti thus, when it is not enough with the price of the enclosure. Pāsādagghenāti by the limit of the building known as a vihāra. Ovarakagghenāti by the limit of the room. Seyyagghenāti by the limit of the bed, which measures four or five hands. Mañcaṭṭhānenāti with the space of a bed that is two hands wide and four hands long. Because one bed-space is the space for two stools, it is said, "according to the space of one stool." This is said in terms of being able to sit. If it is not possible to sit, it should not be given. Therefore, it is said, "but a bhikkhu should not take only enough space to stand." Etanti this much space to stand. ti truly, or because. Because one bed-space is not enough, since it is the space of one stool for three people, it is said, "one bed-space should be given to three people." ti truly. With "in the cold season," it shows that it is not possible to live in the open all day even in the hot season. However, it is possible to live in the open all night during the hot season. Although it is possible, it should be understood that it should not be given even in the hot season, because it should not be given in the cold or hot seasons. Showing the way three people sit in one bed-space or one stool-space, he says, "mahātherenā," etc. There, the connection is that it should be said by the elder. Niddāgarukoti one who gives weight to sleep. Sītaṃ anudahatīti the cold afflicts me. Tenāti by the elder. Dutiyattherenāpīti the 'pi' particle refers back to the elder. Vuttanayenevāti just in the way that was said with "having coughed," etc. Evantiādi is the conclusion. But in Jambudīpa, some bhikkhus take it, is the connection. Some bed-space or stool-space, is the construction. Ayantiādi is a statement made to declare the latter statement as a conclusion to the former statement.

Āgantukavattanti āgantukassa vattaṃ.Aññatthāti aññasmiṃ ṭhāne. Gantvā vasitukāmena āgantukenāti yojanā.Vassūpanāyikadivasamevāti vassaṃ upagamanadivaseyeva.Tatthāti aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Nagantabbakāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vā hī’’tiādi.ti yasmā.Tatrāti aññasmiṃ ṭhāne.Tenāti sambādhaasampajjanakāraṇā.Tasmāti yasmā na phāsuṃ vihareyya, tasmā.Taṃ vihāranti yasmiṃ vasitukāmo, taṃ vihāraṃ.Tatthāti vihāre, vasanto sukhaṃ vasissatīti sambandho.Uddesatthikoti uddesaṃ atthiko, uddesena vā.Kammaṭṭhānasappāyatanti kammaṭṭhānena, kammaṭṭhānassa vā sappāyabhāvaṃ.

Āgantukavattanti the duty for a newcomer. Aññatthāti in another place. The construction is, by the newcomer who wishes to go and live. Vassūpanāyikadivasamevāti on the very day of entering the rains. Tatthāti in another place. Showing the reason why one should not go, he says, "vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vā hī," etc. ti because. Tatrāti in another place. Tenāti because of causing crowding and discomfort. Tasmāti because one would not live comfortably, therefore. Taṃ vihāranti that vihāra in which one wishes to live. Tatthāti in the vihāra, the connection is that one will live happily while living. Uddesatthikoti one who desires learning, or by learning. Kammaṭṭhānasappāyatanti suitability for the practice, or of the practice.

Tatthāti aññavihāraṃ. Gacchantena ghaṭṭetabboti sambandho. Ghaṭṭetabbākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘na tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti sakaṭṭhāne. Kiṃ na vattabbāti āha ‘‘tumhe’’tiādi. Salākabhattādīni vā yāgukhajjakādīni vā natthi na vijjantīti yojanā. Uposathāgārassa parikkhāroti sambandho. Tumhākaṃ vihārassa idaṃ tāḷañceva imaṃ sūciñca sampaṭicchathāti yojanā.Gamiyavattanti gamikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vattaṃ. ‘‘Daharehī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘ukkhipāpetvā’’ti ca ‘‘gāhāpetvā’’ti ca padadvaye kāritakammaṃ, ‘‘pattacīvarabhaṇḍikāyo’’ti padaṃ ‘‘ukkhipāpetvā’’ti pade dhātukammaṃ, ‘‘telanāḷikattaradaṇḍādīnī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘gāhāpetvā’’ti pade dhātukammameva.Attānaṃ dassentenāti attānaṃ manussānaṃ pakāsentena.Vitakkanti paccayabāhullikavitakkaṃ. ‘‘Saparivāra’’nti padaṃ ‘‘gacchantañcā’’ti pade kiriyāvisesanaṃ. Evañhi sati saparivāraṃ gacchantañcāti sambandho.‘‘Na’’nti pade pana kārakavisesanaṃ. Evañhi sati saparivāraṃ naṃ bhikkhunti sambandho. ‘‘Disvā’’ti pade ca kiriyāvisesanameva. Evañhi sati gacchantañca naṃ bhikkhuṃ saparivāraṃ disvāti sambandho. Manussā vadantīti sambandho.Tesūti manussesu. Eko paṇḍitamanussoti sambandho. Ayaṃ kālo vassūpanāyikakālo nāmāti yojanā.Yatthāti ṭhāne.Tassāti ekassa paṇḍitamanussassa, vacananti sambandho. Te manussā yācantīti sambandho.Aññatthāti aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Mejjanti aññamaññaṃ sinehantītimittā. Sukhadukkhesu amā saha vattantītiamaccā. Mittāyeva amaccātimittāmaccā,te.Sammantayitvāti samaṃ, sammā vā mantayitvā.Idhevāti gāme eva, vihāre eva vā. Kasmā sādituṃ vaṭṭati, nanu sabbametaṃ akappiyañca sāvajjañcāti āha ‘‘sabbañhetaṃ kappiyañceva anavajjañcā’’ti. Hi yasmā etaṃ sabbaṃ kappiyañca anavajjañca, tasmā sabbaṃ sādituṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttanti sambandho.Ubhayampīti mahāaṭṭhakathākurundīsu vuttavacanavasena ubhayampi etaṃ vacananti sambandho.

Tatthāti to another vihāra. The connection is that one should make an effort while going. Showing how one should make an effort, he says, "na tatthā," etc. There, tatthāti in one's own place. He says what should not be said, "tumhe," etc. The construction is that there are no alms given out according to ticket, or rice gruel, or hard food, etc. It is an accessory of the Uposatha hall, is the connection. The construction is, "Receive this key and this needle for your vihāra." Gamiyavattanti the duties of the bhikkhus who are going. The word "Daharehī" (by the young ones) and also "ukkhipāpetvā" (having caused to lift up) and "gāhāpetvā" (having caused to take) are causative verbs, the words "pattacīvarabhaṇḍikāyo" (bowl, robes, and bundles) is the object of the verb in "ukkhipāpetvā" (having caused to lift up), and the word "telanāḷikattaradaṇḍādīnī" (oil funnels, razors, staffs, etc.) is merely the object of the verb in "gāhāpetvā" (having caused to take). Attānaṃ dassentenāti by one who shows himself to people. Vitakkanti a thought with too much dependence on requisites. The word "Saparivāra" (with a retinue) is an adverb of the verb in "gacchantañcā" (while going). For indeed, in this case, the connection is "saparivāraṃ gacchantañcā" (and while going with a retinue). But in the word "Na" (not), it is a specification of the agent. For indeed, in this case, the connection is "saparivāraṃ naṃ bhikkhunti" (not the bhikkhu with a retinue). And in the word "Disvā" (having seen), it is merely an adverb of the verb. For indeed, in this case, the connection is "gacchantañca naṃ bhikkhuṃ saparivāraṃ disvā" (and having seen the bhikkhu going with a retinue). People say, is the connection. Tesūti among those people. One wise person, is the connection. This time is called the time for entering the rains, is the construction. Yatthāti in the place. Tassāti of that one wise person, is the connection to "vacananti" (the saying). Those people request, is the connection. Aññatthāti to another place. Mittā those who are affectionate with one another, are called friends. Amaccā those who behave together in happiness and suffering. Mittāyeva amaccāti mittāmaccā, they are mittāmaccā. Sammantayitvāti having consulted together, or properly. Idhevāti in this village, or in this monastery. He says, "Why is it fitting to prepare it, surely all of this is impermissible and blameworthy?" with "sabbañhetaṃ kappiyañceva anavajjañcā" (indeed, all of this is permissible and blameless). Because indeed, all of this is permissible and blameless, therefore it is fitting to prepare everything, is the construction. But it is said in the Kurundi, is the connection. Ubhayampīti according to the statement said in both the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā and Kurundi, both of these statements, is the connection.

paṭikaccevāti āgantukānaṃ āgatato paṭhamameva.Padhānagharavihāramaggoti padhānagharamaggo ca vihāramaggo ca.Muddavedikāyāti cetiyassa hammiyavedikāya. Kasmā idampi sabbaṃ kātabbanti āha ‘‘vassaṃ vasitukāmā hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Vassaṃ vasitukāmā sukhaṃ vasissantīti sambandho. Kataparikammehi āvāsikehīti sambandho. Yato kulato pakatiyā labbhati, tasmiṃ kule vassāvāsikaṃ pucchitabbanti yojanā.Na dinnapubbanti pubbe na dinnaṃ.ti yasmā.Upaddutāti upagantvā, bhusaṃ vā pīḷitā.Tatthāti manussesu.Yeti manussā.Vassāvāsike gāhiteti vassāvāsike senāsane gāhāpiyamāne.Gāhitabhikkhūnanti gāhāpitabhikkhūnaṃ.Vassāvāsikanti vassaṃ āvasantānaṃ dātabbaṃ cīvaraṃ.Gāhaṇakāloti gāhāpanakālo.Upakaṭṭhoti āsanno.Chātakādīhīti ādisaddena rogādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Yanti cīvaraṃ.Tatoti cīvarato.Tanti vacanaṃ.Tadanurūpenāti tesaṃ manussānaṃ vacanassānurūpena.Tesaṃ tesanti manussānaṃ, vassāvāsikaṃ cīvaranti sambandho.

paṭikaccevāti right from the arrival of the newcomers. Padhānagharavihāramaggoti the path to the meditation hall and the path to the monastery. Muddavedikāyāti of the surrounding railing of the Cetiya. He says, "Why should all of this be done?" with "vassaṃ vasitukāmā hī" (because they wish to spend the rains). ti truly, or because. Those who wish to spend the rains will live happily, is the connection. The connection is with "Kataparikammehi āvāsikehīti" (by the residents who have done the preparation). In whichever family it is naturally obtained, one should ask that family for a rains-residence. Na dinnapubbanti not given before. ti because. Upaddutāti having approached, or greatly afflicted. Tatthāti among the people. Yeti the people. Vassāvāsike gāhiteti when rains-residence lodgings are being taken. Gāhitabhikkhūnanti to the bhikkhus who have had lodgings taken. Vassāvāsikanti the robe that should be given to those who are residing for the rains. Gāhaṇakāloti the time for taking. Upakaṭṭhoti is near. Chātakādīhīti with the word "ādi" (and so on) it includes diseases, etc. Yanti whatever robe. Tatoti from the robe. Tanti that statement. Tadanurūpenāti in accordance with the statement of those people. Tesaṃ tesanti of the people, the rains-residence robe, is the connection.

Yassāti bhikkhuno.Soti bhikkhu. Iti vadantīti yojanā.Tanti cīvaraṃ.Paṭikkammāti paṭikkamitvā. Vihārato apasakkitvāti attho.Tatrāti gāme.Upanikkhepaṃ ṭhapetvāti kappiyavatthuṃ vā akappiyavatthuṃ vā ārāmikādīnaṃ hatthe upanikkhepaṃ ṭhapetvā.Vihāreti vihārassa, vihāre vassaṃ vasantassa vā.Apucchitvāpīti pisaddena ‘‘pucchitvāpī’’ti atthaṃ dasseti.Tesantikulānaṃ.Vattanti jagganādivattaṃ.Tesanti kulānaṃ.Āgatañca tanti taṃ paṃsukūlikaṃ āgatañca vadantīti sambandho.Tenāti paṃsukūlikena.Dātuṃ na icchantīti saṅghassa ācikkhantepi saṅghassa dātuṃ na icchanti.Sabhāgo bhikkhūti attanā sabhāgo bhikkhu.Etanti vassāvāsikaṃ. Paṃsukūlikassa na vaṭṭati, kasmā? Gahapaticīvarattā.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.Saddhādeyyeti saddhāya dātabbe vassāvāsikalābhavisaye.

Yassāti of which bhikkhu. Soti that bhikkhu. Thus they say, is the construction. Tanti that robe. Paṭikkammāti having retreated. The meaning is, having withdrawn from the monastery. Tatrāti in the village. Upanikkhepaṃ ṭhapetvāti having placed a deposit, whether a permissible item or an impermissible item, in the hands of the ārāmika, etc. Vihāreti of the monastery, or to the one residing in the monastery for the rains. Apucchitvāpīti the particle 'pi' shows the meaning "even having asked." Tesanti of the families. Vattanti the duties such as waking them up. Tesanti of the families. Āgatañca tanti the connection is that they say that paṃsukūlika robe has come. Tenāti by the paṃsukūlika. Dātuṃ na icchantīti even when declaring it to the Sangha, they do not wish to give it to the Sangha. Sabhāgo bhikkhūti a bhikkhu who is in agreement with oneself. Etanti this rains-residence. It is not fitting for the paṃsukūlika, why? Because it is a householder's robe. Itītiādi is the conclusion. Saddhādeyyeti in the matter of rains-residence gains to be given by faith.

Tatruppādeti tasmiṃ vihāre uppajjanakalābhavisaye.Bhaṇḍapaṭicchādananti paṭicchādanacīvarabhaṇḍaṃ. Cīvarabhaṇḍameva hi yasmā anena sarīraṃ paṭicchādiyati, tasmā bhaṇḍapaṭicchādananti vuccati.Gāhethāti bhikkhūhi gāhāpetha.Gāhetabbanti bhikkhūhi gāhāpetabbaṃ.Vatthu panāti sāṭakato aññaṃ kappiyaṃ vā akappiyaṃ vā vatthu pana. Kasmā vaṭṭatiyeva, nanu akappiyavatthu na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘kappiyakārakānañhi’’tiādi. Tatthahiyasmā anuññātaṃ, tasmā vaṭṭatiyevāti yojanā. Dinnavatthuto uppannanti sambandho.

Tatruppādeti in the matter of gains arising in that monastery. Bhaṇḍapaṭicchādananti a robe-covering cloth. For indeed, because the body is covered by the robe-cloth, therefore it is called bhaṇḍapaṭicchādana. Gāhethāti have it taken by the bhikkhus. Gāhetabbanti should be taken by the bhikkhus. Vatthu panāti but the object, whether permissible or impermissible, other than the sāṭaka. He says, "Why is it indeed fitting, surely an impermissible object is not fitting?" with "kappiyakārakānañhi" (for it is of the permissible-makers). There, hi because it is allowed, therefore it is indeed fitting, is the construction. The connection is with "Dinnavatthuto uppannanti" (arisen from an object given).

Yanti vatthu dinnanti sambandho.Etthāti kappiyakārakānaṃ hatthe dinnavatthūsu.Tanti vatthu upanāmentehīti sambandho. Garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, garubhaṇḍattā aññesu paccayesu na upanāmetabbanti adhippāyo.Puggalavasenevāti ‘‘bhikkhū cīvarena kilamanti, ettakaṃ nāma taṇḍulabhāgaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cīvaraṃ kātuṃ ruccati saṅghassā’’tiādinā puggalaṃ parāmasitvā puggalavaseneva.Saṅghavasenāti ‘‘saṅgho cīvarena kilamatī’’tiādinā saṅghavasena na kātabbanti sambandho. Evaṃ puggalavasena apalokanakammassa akattabbataṃ dassetvā idāni vatthuvasena tasseva akattabbataṃ dassento āha ‘‘jātarūparajatavasenāpī’’tiādi.Kappiyabhaṇḍavasenāti cīvarataṇḍulehi avasesassa kappiyabhaṇḍassa vasena. Cīvarataṇḍulānañhi visuṃ gahitattā ‘‘kappiyabhaṇḍavasenā’’ti ettha tehi avaseso kappiyabhaṇḍova gahetabbo.Taṃ panāti apalokanakammaṃ pana. Kattabbākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘idānī’’tiādi.Subhikkhanti samiddhabhikkhaṃ.Sulabhapiṇḍanti sukhena labhapiṇḍaṃ. Dvīhi padehi aññamaññassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti, subhikkhattā sulabhapiṇḍaṃ, sulabhapiṇḍattā subhikkhanti vuttaṃ hoti.

Yanti whichever object is given, is the connection. Etthāti in these objects given into the hands of the permissible-makers. Tanti that object should be presented, is the connection. It is a heavy item, the meaning is that because it is a heavy item, it should not be presented for other requisites. Puggalavasenevāti just by referring to the individual, with "bhikkhūs are exhausted by the robe, such and such a portion of rice is pleasing to the Sangha to make a robe for the bhikkhus," etc., by way of the individual. Saṅghavasenāti by way of the Sangha, with "the Sangha is exhausted by the robe," etc., it should not be done. Thus, having shown that an act of announcement should not be done by way of the individual, now showing that the same should not be done by way of the object, he says, "jātarūparajatavasenāpī" (even by way of gold and silver), etc. Kappiyabhaṇḍavasenāti by way of the permissible item that remains from the robes and rice. For indeed, because the robes and rice have been taken separately, only the permissible items that remain from them should be taken here in "kappiyabhaṇḍavasenā." Taṃ panāti but that act of announcement. Showing how it should be done, he says, "idānī" (now), etc. Subhikkhanti abundant alms. Sulabhapiṇḍanti alms easily obtained. With the two words, he shows the reason for one another, because of abundant alms, alms are easily obtained, because of easily obtained alms, there are abundant alms, is what is said.

Kāleti gāhāpanassa kāle.Vuttanti mahāaṭṭhakathāya vuttaṃ. Kasmā dve sammannitabbā, nanu ekampi sammannituṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi. Tattha hi yasmā gāhessati, tasmā dve sammannitabbāti yojanā. Ekena hi sammutiladdhena sakkā paraṃ gāhāpetuṃ, attanā pana attano pāpetuṃ na sakkā, tasmā dvīsu sammatesu navako vuḍḍhassa, vuḍḍho ca navakassāti ubho aññamaññaṃ gāhessantīti adhippāyo.Sammannitabbāti ekato sammannitabbā.Aṭṭhapi soḷasapīti ettha pisaddena tato adhikampi ekato sammannituṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Sattasatikakkhandhake ubbāhikasammutiyaṃ (cūḷava. 456) aṭṭhapi janā ekatova sammatāti vacanañcettha sādhakaṃ. Niggahakammameva hi saṅgho saṅghassa na karotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Tesanti aṭṭhasoḷasajanānaṃ, sammuti vaṭṭatiyevāti sambandho. Kinti sallakkhetabbanti āha ‘‘cetiyaghara’’ntiādi.

Kāleti at the time of taking. Vuttanti it is said in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā. He says, "Why should two be appointed, surely it is fitting to appoint even one?" with "evañhī" (for indeed), etc. There, because indeed he will take it, therefore two should be appointed, is the construction. For with permission obtained by one, it is possible to have another take it, but it is not possible for oneself to obtain it for oneself, therefore, when two are agreed upon, both the new one for the old one, and the old one for the new one will take from one another, is the meaning. Sammannitabbāti should be agreed upon together. Aṭṭhapi soḷasapīti here, with the particle 'pi', it shows that it is also fitting to agree upon even more than that together. In the Sattasatikakkhandhaka, in the ubbāhika agreement (cūḷava. 456), the statement that even eight people are agreed upon all together is evidence for this. It should be seen that the Sangha does not do an act of censure to the Sangha. Tesanti of the eight or sixteen people, the agreement is indeed fitting, is the connection. He says, "What should they consider?" with "cetiyaghara" (Cetiya house), etc.

Āsanagharanti paṭimāgharaṃ. Maggapokkharaṇīnaṃ samīpe katā sālāyo upacāravasena vuccanti ‘‘maggo’’ti ca ‘‘pokkharaṇī’’ti ca. Tā hi sālāyo upacārasīmabbhantaragate gāmābhimukhamagge ca antoupacārasīmāyaṃ khaṇitā yattha katthaci pokkharaṇiyo ca karīyanti, iti sallakkhetabbanti yojanā. Asenāsanaṃ dassetvā senāsanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vihāro’’tiādi.Rukkhamūlanti channakavāṭabaddharukkhamūlaṃ. Eseva nayo veḷugumbepi. Gāhentena ca gāhetabbānīti sambandho.Saṅghikoti tatruppādo.Tesūti dvīsu cīvarapaccayesu.Yanti cīvarapaccayaṃ.Tassāti cīvarapaccayassa.Ṭhitikatoti pabandhavasena ṭhitaṭṭhānato.Itaroti paṭhamaṃ gahitacīvarapaccayato itaro.

Āsanaghara means a hall for images. The halls built near the Magga and Pokkharaṇī are called "Magga" and "Pokkharaṇī" by way of association. For these halls are built within the boundary of association, facing the village road, and the Pokkharaṇīs are dug anywhere within the inner boundary of association; thus, it should be understood. Showing the seat that is not assigned, when showing the seat that is assigned, he said, "vihāro," etc. Rukkhamūla means the root of a tree covered and enclosed with doors. The same method applies to a bamboo grove. And what is taken should be taken; this is the connection. Saṅghiko means that which arises there. Tesū means in those two requisites for robes. Ya means the robe requisite. Tassā means of that robe requisite. Ṭhitikato means from the place established by way of arrangement. Itaro means the other than the robe requisite taken first.

Appatāyāti appabhāvato, gāhiyamāneti sambandho.Pariveṇagghenāti pariveṇaparicchedena.Labhantīti pariveṇasāmikā bhikkhū labhanti.Tanti pariveṇaṃ.Vijaṭetvāti vijaṭaṃ katvā, dve vā tayo vā koṭṭhāse katvāti attho.Pakkhipitvāti bhāgakoṭṭhāsaṃ pakkhipitvā.Na evaṃ kātabbanti yathā mahāsumatthero āha, tathā na kātabbanti attho. Akātabbakāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘manussā hī’’tiādi.Tatthāti pariveṇe, pavisitabbaṃ iti āhāti yojanā.Etthāti etasmiṃ gāhaṇaṭṭhāne.Paṭikkosatīti paṭisedheti. Paṭikkosanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘mā āvuso’’tiādi. Iti vuttaṃ, iti paṭikkosatīti yojanā. Eko hi itisaddo luttaniddiṭṭho.Tassāti mahātherassa.Saṅgahanti bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgahaṃ.Tanti mahātheraṃ.

Appatāyā means due to absence, it is connected with 'being taken'. Pariveṇagghenā means by the value of the enclosure. Labhantī means the bhikkhus who own the enclosure receive. Ta means that enclosure. Vijaṭetvā means having disentangled, meaning having made two or three portions. Pakkhipitvā means having put in a share-portion. Na evaṃ kātabba means it should not be done as Mahāsumatthera said. Showing the reason why it should not be done, he said, "manussā hī," etc. Tatthā means in the enclosure, the construction is: "it is said that one should enter". Etthā means in this place of taking. Paṭikkosatī means forbids. Showing the manner of forbidding, he said, "mā āvuso," etc. The construction is: "Thus said, thus forbids." For one 'iti' word is unexpressed. Tassā means of the great Thera. Saṅgahaṃ means support for the bhikkhus. Taṃ means the great Thera.

Evaṃ vattabbanti evaṃ vakkhamānanayena vattabbaṃ. Paccayaṃ dhāretha, iti vattabbanti yojanā. Pāpuṇāti āvuso iti vutteti yojanā. ‘‘Gahitaṃ hotī’’ti iminā ‘‘gaṇhatha, gaṇhāmī’’ti paccuppannakālavasena vuttattā gahitaṃ hotīti dasseti. Atītaanāgatakālavasena agahitabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Satuppādamattanti gahaṇe satiyā uppādanamattaṃ.Etthāti senāsanapaccayagahaṇaṭṭhāne.

Evaṃ vattabbaṃ means it should be said in the manner to be stated thus. The construction is: "Hold the requisite, thus it should be said." The construction is: "It reaches, Āvuso, thus it is said." By this "Gahitaṃ hoti," it shows that it is taken because it is said in the present tense, "Take it, I take it." Showing the state of not being taken in the past and future tenses, he said, "sace panā," etc. Satuppādamattaṃ means merely the arising of mindfulness upon taking. Etthā means in the place of taking the requisites for lodging.

Yopīti yampi. Upayogatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, yampi paccayaṃ vissajjetīti yojanā.Paccayanti ca cīvarapaccayaṃ.Ayampīti ayampi paccayo. Pisaddo mahālābhapariveṇe paccayaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Tasmiṃyeva pariveṇeti tasmiṃ paṃsukūlikena gahitapariveṇe eva.Aññassāti paṃsukūlikato aññassa bhikkhussa. Paṃsukūliko ‘‘ahaṃ vasāmī’’ti senāsanaṃ jaggissati. Itaro ‘‘ahaṃ paccayaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti senāsanaṃ jaggissatīti yojanā.Dvīhi kāraṇehīti vasanagahaṇavasena dvīhi kāraṇehi. Paṃsukūlike gaṇhanteti sambandho.Idhāti senāsane.Tenāti paṃsukūlikena.Heṭṭhāti senāsanassa heṭṭhā, ṭhitaṃ aññaṃ bhikkhunti sambandho.Tenāti paṃsukūlikena, kiñci vacananti sambandho. Vutthavassassa paṃsukūlikassāti yojanā.Vaṭṭatīti paṃsukūlikassa vaṭṭati.Tasmiṃ senāsaneti paṃsukūlikena gahitasenāsane.Yesaṃ panāti manussānaṃ pana.Tesanti manussānaṃ.

Yopī means even that. This is a term of address in the sense of usage, the construction is "yampi paccayaṃ vissajjetīti". Paccayaṃ also means the robe requisite. Ayampī means even this requisite. The 'pi' particle combines the requisites in a large-gain enclosure. Tasmiṃyeva pariveṇe means in that very enclosure taken by the paṃsukūlika. Aññassā means to another bhikkhu other than the paṃsukūlika. The paṃsukūlika will guard the lodging, thinking, "I will dwell." The other will guard the lodging, thinking, "I will take the requisites." The construction is thus. Dvīhi kāraṇehī means by two reasons, in the manner of dwelling and taking. It is connected with "the paṃsukūlika takes." Idhā means in this lodging. Tenā means by the paṃsukūlika. Heṭṭhā means below the lodging, it is connected with "another bhikkhu standing." Tenā means by the paṃsukūlika, it is connected with "any saying." The construction is "of the paṃsukūlika who has completed the rains residence". Vaṭṭatī means it is fitting for the paṃsukūlika. Tasmiṃ senāsane means in the lodging taken by the paṃsukūlika. Yesaṃ panā means for those people. Tesaṃ means of those people.

Thūpaṃ katvāti cetiyaṃ katvā.Tassāti thūpassa.Tena bhikkhunāti vassāvāsikaṃ gāhakabhikkhunā.Tanti bhojanasālaṃ. Gāhetuṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Sabbamidanti sabbaṃ idaṃ vacanaṃ.

Thūpaṃ katvā means having made a cetiya. Tassā means of that thūpa. Tena bhikkhunā means by the bhikkhu who takes the rains-residence requisite. Taṃ means that dining hall. The connection is: "it is fitting to take." Sabbamidaṃ means all this saying.

Pāṭipadaaruṇatoti vassūpanāyikadivasasaṅkhātassa pāṭipadassa aruṇuggamanato.Vitakkacārikoti ‘‘kattha nu kho vasissāmī’’tiādinā vitakkena caraṇe anuyutto.Senāsanaṃ yācatīti senāsanaggāhāpakaṃ senāsanaṃ yācati.Gahitanti saṅghena gahitaṃ.Yatthāti ṭhāne. Vassūpagatehi vattabbāti sambandho. Punappunaṃ, samaṃ vā cetiyaṅgaṇādiṃ muñcanti sodhenti imāhītisammuñcaniyo. Mucidhātu sodhanatthe yupaccayo karaṇatthe hoti. Tālujo paṭhamakkharo. Sulabhā ce daṇḍakā, ekekena dve tisso yaṭṭhisammuñcaniyo bandhitabbā. Sulabhā ce salākā, chapañcamuṭṭhisammuñcaniyo bandhitabbāti attho.Pañca pañca ukkāti araññavihāresu parissayavijānanatthaṃ pañca pañca aggiukkā koṭṭetabbā chinditabbāti attho.

Pāṭipadaaruṇato means from the sunrise of the first day, which is counted as the day of entering the rains. Vitakkacāriko means one who is engaged in wandering with thoughts such as "Where shall I dwell?". Senāsanaṃ yācatī means he asks the lodging-taker for lodging. Gahitaṃ means taken by the Saṅgha. Yatthā means in the place. It is connected with "should be said by those who have entered the rains". Sammuñcaniyo means by these they repeatedly clean or sweep the Cetiya courtyard, etc., or evenly. The root 'muc' is in the sense of cleaning, the 'yu' suffix is in the instrumental sense. The first letter of tāluja. If small sticks are easily available, two or three broom-sticks should be tied with each. If salākā sticks are easily available, five or six handfuls of broom-sticks should be tied; this is the meaning. Pañca pañca ukkā means in forest monasteries, for the purpose of recognizing dangers, five firebrands should be chopped and cut; this is the meaning.

Hisaccaṃ, sabbeva ete uddesādayo papañcāti yojanā. Papañcenti saṃsāre ciraṃ ṭhapentītipapañcā. Mūgabbatanti mūgānaṃ vataṃ, mūgehi kattabbaṃ vā, mūgena viya vā amūgehi kattabbaṃ vataṃ. Evaṃ akātabbavattaṃ dassetvā idāni kātabbavattaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pariyattidhammo nāmā’’tiādi.Tividhampīti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tippakārampi. Avayavapariyattidhammopi avayavipariyattidhammaṃ, avayavipariyattidhammo vā avayavapariyattidhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti, tasmā pariyattidhammo attanāpi attānaṃ patiṭṭhāpesīti veditabbaṃ.Uddisathāti pariyattiṃ uddisatha.Sodhetvā…pe… upasampādethāti ettha sodhanaṃ nāma sabbesaṃ ācārakulaputtānaṃ upaparikkhanaṃ.Sodhetvā nissayaṃ dethāti ettha sodhanaṃ nāma bhikkhusabhāgataṃ upaparikkhanaṃ.ti saccaṃ.Kulaputtoti ācārakulaputto. Yattakāni dhutaṅgāni samādiyituṃ sakkothāti yojanā.Antovassaṃ nāmetanti bhummatthe upayogavacanametaṃ. Etasmiṃ antovasseti hi attho, bhavitabbantiādīsu sambandhitabbaṃ.Sakaladivasanti sakaladivasamhi, appamattehīti sambandho.Ekacārikavattanti ekakena caritabbaṃ vattaṃ.Bhasseti vacane.Dasavatthukakathanti appicchatādidasavatthuka kathaṃ.

Hi means truly, all these Uddesa, etc., are papañca. Papañcā means they keep (beings) long in Saṃsāra. Mūgabbataṃ means the vow of the mutes, or to be done by mutes, or a vow to be done by the non-mutes like a mute. Having shown such a vow that should not be done, now, showing the vow that should be done, he said, "pariyattidhammo nāmā," etc. Tividhampī means even the three kinds in terms of pariyatti, paṭipatti and paṭivedha. Even the part-pariyattidhamma establishes the whole-pariyattidhamma, or the whole-pariyattidhamma (establishes) the part-pariyattidhamma; therefore, it should be understood that the pariyattidhamma also establishes itself by itself. Uddisathā means recite the pariyatti. Sodhetvā…pe… upasampādethā here, sodhana means examining all the sons of good families. Sodhetvā nissayaṃ dethā here, sodhana means examining those suitable to be bhikkhus. means truly. Kulaputto means a son of a good family. The construction is "how many dhutaṅgas can you undertake?". Antovassaṃ nāmetaṃ means this is a term of address in the locative sense. For the meaning is "in this antovassa," it should be connected with bhavitabbantiādīsu. Sakaladivasaṃ means in the entire day, it is connected with "with diligence". Ekacārikavattaṃ means the practice to be followed by one who wanders alone. Bhasse means in speech. Dasavatthukakathaṃ means talk based on ten things such as appicchatā.

Viggāhikapisuṇapharusavacanānīti viggahaṃ kalahaṃ janetīti viggāhikaṃ, viggāhikavacanañca pisuṇavacanañca pharusavacanañca viggāhikapisuṇapharusavacanāni. Manasikārabahulā viharatha iti ovaditabbāti yojanā.Dantakaṭṭhakhādanavattanti heṭṭhā adinnādānavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ dantakaṭṭhakhādane, dantakaṭṭhakhādanassa vā vattaṃ. ‘‘Pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipantena na kathetabba’’nti iminā kathente pamādena patto bhijjeyyāti pattassa guttatthāya kathanaṃ nivāreti.Ācikkhitabbāti itisaddo parisamāpanattho.

Viggāhikapisuṇapharusavacanānī means viggāhikaṃ generates quarrel and conflict, and viggāhikavacanañca pisuṇavacanañca pharusavacanañca viggāhikapisuṇapharusavacanāni. The construction is "you should be advised to dwell with frequent mindfulness." Dantakaṭṭhakhādanavattaṃ means in the description of not taking what is not given below, (it refers to) chewing of tooth-sticks, or the practice of chewing tooth-sticks. By "Pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipantena na kathetabba", talking is prohibited for the sake of protecting the bowl, lest the bowl should break accidentally due to carelessness when talking. Ācikkhitabbā means it should be informed. The word 'iti' is for the completion of the chapter.

Āgantuko bhikkhūti cīvaraggāhitato pacchā āgato āgantuko bhikkhu.Saṅghattheroti āvāsikasaṅghatthero.Paṭhamabhāganti pubbe gāhitaṃ paṭhamabhāgaṃ,parivattetvāti pubbe gāhitabhāgena pacchā dātabbaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ parivattetvā. Āgantukassa vassaggena pattaṭṭhāne āgantukassa dātabbanti yojanā. ‘‘Āgantukassā’’ti padaṃ pubbāparaṃ apekkhati. Tasmā dvinnaṃ padānaṃ majjhe vuttaṃ.Paṭhamavassūpagatāti paṭhamavassūpanāyikadivase vassūpagatā. ‘‘Dve tīṇi cattārī’’ti vacanassa vā bahūnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vā byāpanatthāya ‘‘laddhaṃ laddha’’nti vicchāvasena vuttaṃ.Tena panāti āgantukena pana. Paṭhamavassūpagatehi appake laddhe pacchimavassūpanāyikadivase dātabbānaṃ vassāvāsikānaṃ bahukepi ayaṃ nayo ñātabboti katvā na vutto.

Āgantuko bhikkhū means the visiting bhikkhu who came after the taking of the robes. Saṅghatthero means the resident Saṅghathera. Paṭhamabhāgaṃ means the first share that was previously taken, parivattetvā means having exchanged the rains-residence requisite to be given later for the share previously taken. The construction is "in place of the bowl of the visiting bhikkhu, it should be given to the visiting bhikkhu with the rains residence unit". The word "Āgantukassa" depends on what precedes and follows. Therefore, it is said in the middle of the two words. Paṭhamavassūpagatā means those who entered the rains on the first day of entering the rains. "Dve tīṇi cattārī" is said by way of distribution as "laddhaṃ laddhaṃ" for the sake of explaining to two, three, four, or many bhikkhus. Tena panā means by that visiting bhikkhu. It is not mentioned, thinking that this method should be known even for the many rains-residents to be given on the last day of entering the rains, when few are obtained by those who have entered the rains on the first day.

Dvīsupīti paṭhama dutiyavasena dvīsupi. Vassūpagatā bhikkhū bhikkhāya kilamantā vadantīti sambandho.Idhāti ṭhāne.Vasantāti ekato vasantā. Dve bhāgā homa sādhu vatāti yojanā.Sādhu vatāti ekaṃsena sundarā bhaveyyunti attho.Yesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Tatthāti ñātipavāritaṭṭhānesu.Pavāraṇāyāti pavāraṇādivase.Tesūti bhikkhūsu.Yeti bhikkhū.Tatthāti ñātipavāritaṭṭhānesu. Kasmā apaloketvā dātabbaṃ, nanu te sādiyantīti āha ‘‘sādi yantāpi hī’’tiādi. Tatthati yasmā. ‘‘Neva vassāvāsikassa sāmino’’ti iminā tesaṃ vassacchinnataṃ dīpeti.Neva adātuṃ labhantīti paṭhamameva katikavattassa katattā adātuṃ neva labhanti, sabbesaṃ no amhākanti yojanā.Idhāti ṭhāne.Tanti katikavattaṃ. Eko bhikkhūti sambandho.Tesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Tatthāti sabhāgaṭṭhāne. Vasitvā āgatānaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnanti yojanā. Na labbhati iti vuttanti yojanā.Imesanti vassāvāsiappattakānaṃ ekaccānaṃ.Gāhitasadisamevāti vassāvāsikassa gāhitena sadisameva.Tesamevāti ekaccānameva.

Dvīsupī means in both, in terms of the first and second. The construction is "the bhikkhus who have entered the rains speak, being tired of seeking alms". Idhā means in this place. Vasantā means those who dwell together. The construction is: "May we have two parts, well done indeed!". Sādhu vatā means surely it would be wonderful. Yesaṃ means of the bhikkhus. Tatthā means in the places invited by relatives. Pavāraṇāyā means on the Pavāraṇā day. Tesū means among those bhikkhus. Ye means those bhikkhus. Tatthā means in the places invited by relatives. Why should it be given after informing, surely they agree? He said, "sādi yantāpi hī," etc. There, means because. By "Neva vassāvāsikassa sāmino," he indicates that their rains residence is terminated. Neva adātuṃ labhantī means they cannot not give because the practice was established at the very beginning, (saying) "not for all, but for us". Idhā means in this place. Taṃ means that established practice. The construction is "one bhikkhu". Tesaṃ means of those bhikkhus. Tatthā means in the shared place. The construction is "of those bhikkhus who have come after dwelling". It is said that it is not obtained. Imesaṃ means of some of these who have not received the rains residence unit. Gāhitasadisamevā means just like that taken by the rains resident. Tesamevā means only of some.

Pakkantopīti aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ pakkamantopi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Tena bhikkhunā kataṃ pānīyaupaṭṭhapanādikammaṃbhatiniviṭṭhaṃbhatiyā ṭhitanti yojanā. Apalokanakammaṃ katvā gāhitaṃ saṅghikanti sambandho.Saṅghikanti tatruppādaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Vibbhantopīti pisaddo pageva chinnavassoti dasseti.Paccayavasenevāti saddhādeyyapaccayavasena.Vadantīti keci vadanti.

Pakkantopī means even one who departs to another place. means truly, or because. The construction is "the work of providing water, etc., done by that bhikkhu is bhatiniviṭṭhaṃ." bhatiniviṭṭhaṃ means established by the meal. The construction is "having taken after doing the act of informing, it is Saṅghika". Saṅghikaṃ means it is said referring to what arises there. Vibbhantopī the particle 'pi' shows 'what about one whose rains residence is already terminated?' Paccayavasenevā means only by way of faithful requisites. Vadantī means some say.

Manusseti vassāvāsikadāyakamanusse.Sammukhāti āvāsikassa sammukhā.Sampaṭicchāpetvāti ‘‘suṭṭhu dassāmā’’ti paṭicchāpetvā.Yassa gāhitanti yassa bhikkhuno senāsanaṃ gāhitaṃ.Senāsanasāmikassāti senāsanadāyakassa puttadhītādayoti sambandho.Senāsane demāti senāsanassa dema.Tatthāti senāsane. Ekameva vatthaṃ dātabbaṃ. Kasmā? Puggalassa adatvā senāsanasseva dātabbattā.Vassāvāsikaṭṭhitikāyāti vassāvāsikagāhitassa ṭhitikāya.Eseva nayoti senāsanasseva dinnattā eseva nayo.Tasseva hontīti puggalasseva dinnattā tasseva honti.

Manusse means the people who give the rains-residence requisite. Sammukhā means in the presence of the resident. Sampaṭicchāpetvā means having agreed, (saying) "we will give well". Yassa gāhitaṃ means the lodging that is taken for which bhikkhu. Senāsanasāmikassā the connection is "sons, daughters, etc., of the lodging-giver". Senāsane demā means we give to the lodging. Tatthā means in the lodging. Only one cloth should be given. Why? Because it should be given to the lodging itself, not to the individual. Vassāvāsikaṭṭhitikāyā means for the established practice of the rains-residence taker. Eseva nayo means since it is given only to the lodging, this is the same method. Tasseva hontī means since it is given only to the individual, it belongs to him alone.

Ubhopīti dve therasāmaṇerepi.Sayamevāti dāyako sayameva.Yanti vassāvāsikaṃ.Yassāti therassa vā sāmaṇerassa vā.

Ubhopī means even two, both the Thera and the Sāmaṇera. Sayamevā means the donor himself. Yaṃ means the rains-residence requisite. Yassā means of the Thera or the Sāmaṇera.

Itoti vuttanayato.Daharasāmaṇerassāti taruṇassa sāmaṇerassa.Soti gharasāmiko.Nanti pattajanaṃ.Yassāti bhikkhuno.Tesanti manussānaṃ.Yathābhūtaṃ ācikkhitabbanti vibbhamakālaṅkatakāraṇaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ.Suddhapaṃsukūlikāyevāti aññehi amissā suddhā paṃsukūlikāyevāti.Idaṃ nevāsikavattanti nigamanaṃ.

Ito means from the manner stated. Daharasāmaṇerassā means to the young Sāmaṇera. So means the householder. Naṃ means the lineage. Yassā means of which bhikkhu. Tesaṃ means of those people. Yathābhūtaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ means the reason for the disturbance or death should be informed truthfully. Suddhapaṃsukūlikāyevā means it is only pure paṃsukūlika, unmixed with others. Idaṃ nevāsikavattaṃ means this is the conclusion.

Upanandavatthukathā
Upanandavatthukathā

319.Ayamatthoti ayaṃ vakkhamāno attho, evaṃ veditabboti sambandho.Tatthāti gāmake.Tanti senāsanaṃ, gaṇhantenevāti sambandho.Idhāti sāvatthiyaṃ.Muttanti te senāsanaṃ muñcitaṃ hoti.Tatrāpīti gāmakepi.Ubhayatthāti sāvatthiyaṃ, gāmake cāti ubhayattha.

319. Ayamattho means this meaning to be stated, it should be understood thus. Tatthā means in the village. Taṃ means that lodging, it is connected with "he should take it". Idhā means in Sāvatthī. Muttaṃ means that lodging is released. Tatrāpī means even in the village. Ubhayatthā means in both places, in Sāvatthī and in the village.

Etthāti upanandavatthusmiṃ.Kathanti kena pakārena paṭippassambhati.Idhāti sāsane. Ekacco gaṇhātīti sambandho.Tatrāpīti sāmantavihārepi.Tassāti bhikkhussa.Idhāti senāsane.Ālayamattanti cittuppādamattaṃ.Iccassāti iti assa, evaṃ assa bhikkhussāti attho.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ ‘‘gahaṇena gahaṇa’’ntiādike catukke. Yo pana gacchatīti sambandho.Upacārasīmātikkameti nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, bhāvena bhāvalakkhaṇe vā.Tatthāti aññasmiṃ vihāre paccāgacchati, vaṭṭati, senāsanaggāho na paṭippassambhatīti adhippāyo.

Etthā means in this story of Upananda. Kathaṃ means in what way does it cease. Idhā means in this Dispensation. The construction is "one takes". Tatrāpī means even in the bordering monastery. Tassā means of that bhikkhu. Idhā means in this lodging. Ālayamattaṃ means merely a thought. Iccassā means iti assa, thus to that bhikkhu. Sabbatthā means in all the four sets beginning with "gahaṇena gahaṇa." The construction is "but whoever goes." Upacārasīmātikkame this is a locative term in the sense of cause, or in the sense of condition by way of state. Tatthā means he comes back to another monastery, it is fitting, the taking of lodging does not cease; this is the meaning.

320.Yoti bhikkhu.Mahantataro vā daharataro vāti attano mahantataro vā daharataro vā hoti. So bhikkhu tivassantaro nāmāti yojanā. Ekassa bhikkhuno tiṇṇaṃ vassānamantare ṭhito tivassantaro añño bhikkhu.Tatthāti bhikkhūsu.Ime sabbeti tivassantaradvivassantarasamānavassike ime bhikkhū, labhantīti sambandho.Yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pahotīti mañcapīṭhavinimuttaṃ yaṃ āsanaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sukhaṃ nisīdituṃ pahoti, tathārūpe āsanepi dve dve hutvā nisīdituṃ labhantīti yojanā. Apisaddena mañcapīṭhāni apekkhati. Idaṃ pacchimadīghāsanaṃ.Anupasampannenāpīti pisaddo pageva upasampannenāti dasseti.

320. Yo means which bhikkhu. Mahantataro vā daharataro vā means he is either senior or junior to himself. That bhikkhu is called tivassantaro; this is the construction. Another bhikkhu who is in the interval of three years of one bhikkhu is tivassantaro. Tatthā means among the bhikkhus. Ime sabbe means these bhikkhus who are tivassantara, dvivassantara, samānavassika, they receive; this is the connection. Yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pahotī means the seat that is free from benches and chairs, which is enough for three to sit comfortably, even on such a seat they can sit two by two; this is the construction. The word 'api' implies benches and chairs. This is the long seat in the west. Anupasampannenāpī the 'pi' particle shows 'what about the fully ordained one?'

Hatthikumbheti hatthisiropiṇḍe. Iminā hatthisaddena hatthikumbho gahito avayavūpacārena vā uttarapadalopena vāti dasseti. Hatthī viyāti hatthī, bhūmibhāgo, hatthimhi patiṭṭhito pādasaṅkhāto nakho imassātihatthinakhako,pāsādo. Etaṃ ‘‘hatthinakhako’’ti nāmaṃ evaṃkatassa pāsādassa nāmanti yojanā. ‘‘Suvaṇṇarajatādivicitrānī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘kavāṭāni mañcapīṭhāni tālavaṇṭānī’’ti sabbapadesu yojetabbaṃ. Yaṃkiñci cittakammakataṃ atthi, sabbaṃ vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Pāsādassa demāti sambandho.Pāṭekkanti pāsādato visuṃ.Paṭiggahitamevāti sabbaṃ paṭiggahitameva hoti. Gonakādīni aṭṭhārasa attharaṇāni paribhuñjitunti sambandho.Gihivikaṭanīhārenāti gihīhi visesena yathākāmaṃ kariyatītigihivikaṭaṃ,gihisantakaṃ. ‘‘Gihivikaṭa’’nti nīhāro abhinīhāro gihivikaṭanīhāro, tena.Labbhantīti nisīditumeva labbhanti.Tatrāpīti dhammāsanepi.

Hatthikumbha: Hatthi siro piṇḍe. This indicates that by the word "hatthi," hatthikumbha is taken to mean through indication of a part, or by the elision of the latter compound. Hatthī viyāti hatthī, a part of the ground, a nail considered as the foot established on the elephant. Hatthimhi patiṭṭhito pādasaṅkhāto nakho imassātihatthinakhako,pāsādo: "The elephant nail," a palace. The meaning is that the name “hatthinakhako” is the name of a palace thus made. The phrase "Suvaṇṇarajatādivicitrānī" should be connected to all words such as "kavāṭāni mañcapīṭhāni tālavaṇṭānī". Whatever is made with decorative work, all that is permissible. The connection is, "we give to the palace." Pāṭekka: separate from the palace. Paṭiggahitamevā: everything is accepted. The connection is, "one may use the eighteen spreads beginning with gonaka." Gihivikaṭanīhārenā: gihīhi visesena yathākāmaṃ kariyatītigihivikaṭaṃ, belonging to the laity, is especially done as desired by householders. "Gihivikaṭa" is nīhāro abhinīhāro gihivikaṭanīhāro, by that. Labbhantī: only sitting is allowed. Tatrāpī: even on the dhammāsana.

Avissajjiyavatthukathā
Account of Property That Cannot Be Given Away

321.Etānīti garubhaṇḍāni.Tatthāti rāsivasena pañcasu sarūpavasena pañcavīsatiyā garubhaṇḍesu. Āgantvā, ābhuso vā ramanti etthātiārāmo. Tesaṃyevāti pupphārāmaphalārāmānameva. ‘‘Ṭhapitokāso’’ti iminā vatthusaddassa bhūmibhedatthaṃ dasseti. Vasati ārāmo patiṭṭhahati etthātiārāmavatthu. Tesu vāti ettha vāsaddena navabhūmibhāgato aññassa porāṇabhūmibhāgassapi ārāmavatthubhāvaṃ vikappeti. Visesena catuiriyāpathe harati pavatteti etthātivihāro. Tassāti vihārassa.Catunnaṃ mañcānanti niddhāraṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Aññataro mañco nāmāti yojanā. Eseva nayo sesesupi. ‘‘Lohena katā kumbhī’’ti iminālohakumbhīti ettha majjhelopasamāsaṃ dasseti. Lohamayā kumbhīlohakumbhīti vacanatthopi yujjateva. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā lohena kataṃbhāṇakaṃ,lohena katovārako,lohena kataṃkaṭāhanti atthaṃ atidisati.Etthāti bhāṇakavārakakaṭāhesu.Arañjaroti atimahantattā araṃ khippaṃ jarati vināsetīti arañjaro. Atha vā jalaṃ gaṇhituṃ alanti arañjaro lakārānaṃ rakāre katvā.

321. Etānī: these heavy items. Tatthā: among the five kinds of heavy items in a group, or the twenty-five kinds based on form. Āgantvā, ābhuso vā ramanti etthātiārāmo: a pleasure garden, because those who come find delight there. Tesaṃyevā: only of those, that is, flower gardens and fruit gardens. "Ṭhapitokāso" indicates by this that the word vatthu denotes a piece of land. Vasati ārāmo patiṭṭhahati etthātiārāmavatthu: the site of a pleasure garden, because the pleasure garden dwells and is established there. Tesu vā: here, by the word "vāsā," he distinguishes the state of being a site for a pleasure garden even for an old piece of land different from the new piece of land. Visesena catuiriyāpathe harati pavatteti etthātivihāro: a dwelling, because it especially maintains and promotes the four modes of conduct. Tassā: of that dwelling. Catunnaṃ mañcāna: the genitive case in the sense of determination. The meaning is, "one of the four couches." This same method applies to the rest as well. "Lohena katā kumbhī" indicates by this the middle-term elision compound in "lohakumbhī." Lohamayā kumbhīlohakumbhī the meaning of the word is indeed suitable. "Eseva nayo" extends the meaning to "lohena kataṃbhāṇakaṃ, lohena katovārako, lohena kataṃ**kaṭāha. Etthā: in the bhāṇaka, vāraka, and kaṭāha. Arañjaro: because it is extremely large, it quickly wears out and destroys, araṃ khippaṃ jarati vināsetīti arañjaro. Or, because it is enough to hold water, alanti arañjaro after changing the lakāra to rakāra.

dvisaṅgahānihonti,tatiyaṃgarubhaṇḍaṃ catusaṅgahaṃ hoti,catutthaṃgarubhaṇḍaṃ navakoṭṭhāsaṃ hoti,pañcamaṃgarubhaṇḍaṃ aṭṭhabhedanaṃ hoti,itiiminā pakārenapañcanimmalalocanonātho pañcahi rāsīhipañcavīsavidhaṃgarubhaṇḍaṃ pakāsayīti yojanā.

dvisaṅgahāni honti, tatiyaṃ heavy property is fourfold, catutthaṃ heavy property has nine parts, pañcamaṃ heavy property is eightfold, iti in this manner, pañcanimmalalocano the Blessed One, with five groups, pañcavīsavidhaṃ showed twenty-five kinds of heavy property.

Tatrāti garubhaṇḍe.ti vitthāro. Sabbampi idaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ avissajjiyanti vuttanti yojanā.Idhāti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ. Parivāre pana āgatanti sambandho.

Tatrā: in the heavy property. : expansion. The meaning is that it was said that all this heavy property is not to be given away. Idhā: in this matter. But it is connected that it has come in the retinue.

Etthāti parivāre.

Etthā: in the retinue.

Tatrāti ‘‘parivattanavasenā’’ti vacane. Idaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ upanetunti sambandho. Niccaṃ tiṭṭhantītithāvarā,ṭhādhātu varapaccayo, ṭhākārassa thākāro. Iminā ārāmaārāmavatthuvihāravihāravatthūni gahetabbāni. Avissajjiyaavebhaṅgīyattā garu alahukaṃ bhaṇḍaṃgarubhaṇḍaṃ. Iminā mañcādīni ekavīsati garubhaṇḍāni gahetabbāni.Thāvareti ādhāre bhummaṃ, pariyāpannanti sambandho. Atha vā niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, thāvaresūti hi attho, khettantiādīsu sambandhitabbaṃ. Khipati pubbaṇṇabījametthātikhettaṃ. Vasati aparaṇṇabījaṃ patiṭṭhāti etthātivatthu,tale bhūmibhāge ekato vā dvīhi vā tīhi vā ṭhānehi āvaraṇaṃ karīyati etthātitaḷāko,saro. Kassakānaṃ matena kattabbātimātikā. Ārāmena parivattetunti sambandho. Kāni parivattetunti āha ‘‘imāni cattāripī’’ti.Pisaddo avayavasampiṇḍano.

Tatrā: in the statement "by way of exchange". The connection is that this heavy property is to be brought. Niccaṃ tiṭṭhantītithāvarā, permanent, from the root ṭhā with the suffix vara, the ṭhākāra becomes thākāra. By this, pleasure gardens, pleasure garden sites, dwellings, dwelling sites should be taken. Avissajjiyaavebhaṅgīyattā garu alahukaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ**garubhaṇḍaṃ: heavy property because it is not to be given away and is indivisible. By this, the twenty-one heavy properties beginning with couches should be taken. Thāvare: in the base, in the sense of location, is connected to being included. Or, in determination, in the sense of location, for among the permanent things is the meaning, it should be connected to fields and so on. Khipati pubbaṇṇabījametthātikhettaṃ: a field, because early-crop seeds are sown there. Vasati aparaṇṇabījaṃ patiṭṭhāti etthāti**vatthu: a site, because late-crop seeds dwell and are established there. Tale bhūmibhāge ekato vā dvīhi vā tīhi vā ṭhānehi āvaraṇaṃ karīyati etthātitaḷāko, a pond, because in the level ground a barrier is made from one, two, or three sides. Kassakānaṃ matena kattabbāti**mātikā: a canal, should be made according to the opinion of the farmers. It is connected that it should be exchanged with a pleasure garden. He says, "these four" in order to say what should be exchanged. The word "pi" is a combination of parts.

Tatrāti ‘‘parivattetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vacane.Dūreti saṅghārāmato dūraṭṭhāne.Yampīti nāḷikeraphalampi.Harantīti saṅghassa haranti.Aññesanti saṅghato aññesaṃ manussānanti sambandho.Teti manussā. Saṅghena sampaṭicchitabboti sambandho.Ruccatīti saṅghassārāmena manussānamārāmaṃ, manussānamārāmena vā saṅghassārāmaṃ parivattetuṃ rucīyati icchīyati. Bhikkhūnaṃ ārāmoti sambandho.Ayanti manussānamārāmo.Khuddakoti saṅghārāmato khuddako.Āyanti ayati āyasāmiko dhanena vaḍḍhiṃ gacchati anenāti āyo, taṃ.Samakamevāti samappamāṇameva, āyaṃ sace detīti sambandho. Pamāṇatthe kapaccayo. Manussānaṃ rukkhāti sambandho. Atirekaṃ saṅghassa demāti sambandho.Jānāpetvāti ‘‘saṅghe dinnaṃ mahapphala’’nti (ma. ni. 3.376) saṅghassa dinnadānassa ānisaṃsaṃ manussānaṃ jānāpetvā. Phaladhārino honti nanūti yojanā.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.Eteneva nayenāti yena nayena ārāmo ārāmena parivattetabbo, eteneva nayena. Mahantena vā khuddakena vā ārāmavatthunā cāti yojanā. Ārāma ārāmavatthuvihāravihāravatthūni parivattetabbānīti sambandho.

Tatrā: in the statement "it is permissible to exchange". Dūre: in a place far from the monastery. Yampī: even a coconut. Harantī: they bring for the Saṅgha. Aññesa: to people other than the Saṅgha is the connection. Te: those people. The connection is that it should be approved by the Saṅgha. Ruccatī: it is pleasing and desired to exchange the Saṅgha's garden for the people's garden, or the people's garden for the Saṅgha's garden. The connection is, a pleasure garden for the bhikkhus. Aya: this is the people's garden. Khuddako: smaller than the Saṅgha's garden. Āya: ayati āyasāmiko dhanena vaḍḍhiṃ gacchati anenāti āyo, income increases with wealth by this. Samakamevā: of equal measure. The connection is, "if it gives income". The suffix ka is in the sense of measure. The connection is, trees for the people. The connection is, we will give the excess to the Saṅgha. Jānāpetvā: after making known to the people the benefit of a gift given to the Saṅgha, saying “saṅghe dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ” (MN. 3.376) [a gift given to the Sangha is of great fruit]. The meaning is, are they fruit-bearing or not? Evantiādi is the conclusion. Eteneva nayenā: by whatever method a pleasure garden should be exchanged for a pleasure garden, by this same method. Also, by a large or small pleasure garden site. It is connected that the pleasure garden, pleasure garden site, dwelling, and dwelling site should be exchanged.

Ubhopīti gehapāsādavasena ubhopi.Tatthāti gehe.Idaṃ panāti pāsādasaṅkhātaṃ gehaṃ, manussānaṃ gehanti sambandho. Mahagghena vā appagghena vā vihāravatthunā cāti yojanā. Vihāravihāravatthuārāmaārāmavatthūni parivattetabbānīti sambandho.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.

Ubhopī: both in terms of a house and a palace. Tatthā: in the house. Idaṃ panā: this house, in the sense of a palace. The connection is, a house for the people. Also, by a dwelling site of great value or little value. It is connected that the dwelling, dwelling site, pleasure garden, and pleasure garden site should be exchanged. Evantiādi is the conclusion.

Paṃsvāgārakesūti paṃsukīḷanatthāya katesu agārakesu.Kappiyamañcāti saṅghagaṇapuggalānaṃ kappiyā suvaṇṇarajatādīhi akatā mañcā. Vihārassa pana suvaṇṇarajatamayādikāpi kappiyā mañcā dātabbāti sambandho.Bahisīmāyāti upacārasīmato bahi.Tatthāti saṅghattherassa vasanaṭṭhāne.Tatthāti tassa bhikkhuno vasanaṭṭhāne.‘‘Mahagghenā’’ti vuttavacanaṃ niyamento āha ‘‘satagghanakena vā sahassagghanakena vā’’ti.Mañcasatanti mañcabahuṃ.Etesupīti pīṭhabhisibibbohanesupi.Tatthāti pīṭhabhisibibbohanesu. Kappiyaṃ pīṭhādīti sambandho.Akappiyaṃ vā mahagghaṃ kappiyaṃ vāti kappiyena vā mahagghakappiyena vā parivattetvāti sambandho. ‘‘Vuttavatthūnī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘parivattetvā’’ti pade avuttakammaṃ, ‘‘gahetabbānī’’ti pade vuttakammaṃ, pubbāparāpekkhapadaṃ.

Paṃsvāgārakesū: in houses made for playing in the dust. Kappiyamañcā: permissible couches for the Saṅgha, groups, and individuals, not made of gold, silver, etc. But the connection is that permissible couches made of gold, silver, etc., should be given to the dwelling. Bahisīmāyā: outside the boundary of the surrounding area. Tatthā: in the place of residence of the Saṅgha elder. Tatthā: in that bhikkhu's place of residence. ‘‘Mahagghenā’’ he says, specifying the statement that was made, “by one worth a hundred or one worth a thousand.” Mañcasata: an abundance of couches. Etesupī: even in stools, cushions, and pillows. Tatthā: in the stools, cushions, and pillows. The connection is, the permissible stool etc. Akappiyaṃ vā mahagghaṃ kappiyaṃ vā: or by exchanging it for something impermissible, or something permissible of great value. The phrase "Vuttavatthūnī" is the unexpressed object in the word "parivattetvā", and the expressed object in the word "gahetabbānī", a phrase dependent on what comes before and after.

Pasatamattaudakagaṇhakānipīti ettha pasato nāma kuñcitapāṇi.Sīhaḷadīpeti sīhaṃ lāti gaṇhātītisīhaḷolakārassa ḷakāraṃ katvā, sīhabāhunāmako rājā, tassa puttattā vijayakumāropi sīhaḷo nāma, tena ādimhi nivāsabhāvena gahitattā dīposīhaḷadīponāma, tasmiṃ. Pādaṃ gaṇhātītipādagaṇhano,soyevapādagaṇhanako. Pādo nāmāti ‘‘pādagaṇhanako’’ti ettha pādo nāma. Yo lohavārako magadhanāḷiyā pañcanāḷimattaṃ gaṇhāti, so lohavārako pādo nāmāti yojanā. Iminā pamāṇassa nāmaṃ pamāṇavante upacārato vohāranayaṃ dasseti.Tatoti pañcanāḷimattagaṇhanakavārakato.Imānīti lohakumbhīādīni.

Pasatamattaudakagaṇhakānipī: here, pasata is the cupped hand. Sīhaḷadīpe: sīhaṃ lāti gaṇhātītisīhaḷo, lakāra having been changed to ḷakāra, King Sīhabāhu by name. Because he was the son of that king, Prince Vijayakumāra was also named Sīhaḷa. Therefore, because the island was taken in the beginning due to his dwelling there, the island is called sīhaḷadīpo, in that. Pādaṃ gaṇhātīti**pādagaṇhano, the same is pādagaṇhanako. Pādo nāmā: here, pādo is the name. The meaning is that the iron vessel that holds five nāḷi measures by the Magadhan measure is called a pāda. By this he shows the method of usage by indication of the name of a measure on that which has the measure. Tato: from that vessel holding five nāḷi measures. Imānī: these, the iron pot etc.

Bhiṅgāra…pe… kaṭacchuādīnīti bhiṅgāro ca paṭiggaho ca uḷuṅko ca dabbi ca kaṭacchu ca pāti ca taṭṭako ca sarako ca samuggo ca aṅgārakapallo ca dhūmakaṭacchu cabhiṅgāra…pe… dhūmakaṭacchuyo,tā ādi yesaṃ tānītibhiṅgāra…pe… kaṭacchuādīni. Ādisaddena aññāni upakaraṇāni gahetabbāni.Bhājanīyānīti bhājetabbāni.Kaṃsalohādītiādisaddena vaṭṭalohaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Vaṭṭalohaṃ nāmapītalohaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Pārihāriyanti saṅghikaparibhogaṃ pariharitvā apanetvā puggalikaparibhogena paribhuñjanaṃ, ‘‘attasantaka’’nti vā pariggahena haritvā bhuñjanaṃ na vaṭṭati.Gihivikaṭanīhārenevāti ‘‘gihivikaṭa’’nti abhinīhāreneva.

Bhiṅgāra…pe… kaṭacchuādīnī: bhiṅgāro ca paṭiggaho ca uḷuṅko ca dabbi ca kaṭacchu ca pāti ca taṭṭako ca sarako ca samuggo ca aṅgārakapallo ca dhūmakaṭacchu cabhiṅgāra…pe… dhūmakaṭacchuyo, tā ādi yesaṃ tānītibhiṅgāra…pe… kaṭacchuādīni: a water pot, a receiver, an uḷuṅka, a ladle, a spoon, a bowl, a plate, a saucer, a box, a coal shovel, and a smoke spoon; bhiṅgāra…pe… dhūmakaṭacchuyo—those of which these are the beginning are called bhiṅgāra…pe… kaṭacchuādīni. By the word "ādi", other equipment should be taken. Bhājanīyānī: to be distributed. Kaṃsalohādī: by the word "ādi", it includes vaṭṭaloha. Vaṭṭalohaṃ nāma: pītalohaṃ, brass. : truly, or because. Pārihāriya: after giving up Saṅghika use and removing it, using it with individual use, or appropriating and consuming it by saying "it is one's own" is not permissible. Gihivikaṭanīhārenevā: only with the intention of "made by householders".

kappiyalohabhaṇḍeti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, ‘‘añjanī’’tiādinā sambandhitabbaṃ.Sūcīti cīvarādisibbanakā sūci.Paṇṇasūcīti paṇṇe likhanā sūci.Aññampīti añjaniādito aññampi. Dhūmanettañca phālañca dīparukkho ca dīpakapallako ca olambakadīpo cadhūmanetta…pe… olambakadīpā. Itthipurisatiracchānagatasaṅkhātāni rūpāni etesu atthītiitthipurisatiracchānagatarūpakāni. Dhūmanetta…pe… olambakadīpā ca te itthipurisatiracchānagatarūpakāni cetidhūmanetta…pe… rūpakāni,visesanaparanipāto. Tāni vā aññāni vā bhitticchadanakavāṭādīsu upanetabbāni lohabhaṇḍānīti sambandho.Lohakhilakanti lohamayaṃ āṇiṃ.Pariharitvāti ‘‘attano santaka’’nti pariggahena haritvā, saṅghikaparibhogagihivikaṭāni vā apanetvā.Khīrapāsāṇamayānīti khīravaṇṇena pāsāṇena katāni.

kappiyalohabhaṇḍe: in the determination of permissible iron implements, it should be connected to "añjanī" and so on. Sūcī: a needle for sewing robes etc. Paṇṇasūcī: a needle for writing on leaves. Aññampī: other than añjanī etc. Dhūmanettañca phālañca dīparukkho ca dīpakapallako ca olambakadīpo cadhūmanetta…pe… olambakadīpā: a smoke-tube, a ploughshare, a lamp-tree, a lamp-stand, and a hanging lamp— dhūmanetta…pe… olambakadīpā. Itthipurisatiracchānagatasaṅkhātāni rūpāni etesu atthītiitthipurisatiracchānagatarūpakāni: those in which there are shapes in the form of women, men, and animals are called itthipurisatiracchānagatarūpakāni. Dhūmanetta…pe… olambakadīpā ca te itthipurisatiracchānagatarūpakāni ceti**dhūmanetta…pe… rūpakāni: smoke-tubes…hanging lamps and those shapes in the form of women, men, and animals— dhūmanetta…pe… rūpakāni, the qualifier comes after. Or those iron implements that are to be placed on walls, roofs, doors etc. The connection is, those iron implements should be placed. Lohakhilaka: an iron nail. Pariharitvā: after taking it by appropriating it as "one's own", or after giving up or removing the Saṅghika usage of what is made by householders. Khīrapāsāṇamayānī: made of stones the color of milk.

suvaṇṇa…pe… jātiphalikāni,tehi katāni bhājanānisuvaṇṇa…pe… bhājanāni. Sabbanti suvaṇṇarajatādisabbaṃ.Vaṭṭatīti saṅghagaṇapuggalānaṃ vaṭṭati.

suvaṇṇa…pe… jātiphalikāni, vessels made of these are suvaṇṇa…pe… bhājanāni. Sabba: all gold, silver etc. Vaṭṭatī: is allowable for the Saṅgha, groups, and individuals.

Tatoti vāsito.Mahattarīsaddo mahantapariyāyo anipphannapāṭipadiko. Mahattarī vāsīti sambandho.Vejjānanti bhisakkānaṃ.Sirāvedhanapharasupīti pisaddena tato mahantaṃ pana pagevāti dasseti. Yā pana kuṭhārī āvudhasaṅkhepena katāti sambandho. Atha vā āvudhasaṅkhepena katā yā pana kuṭhārī atthīti yojanā.Anāmāsāti anāmasitabbā, anāmāsārahāti attho.Caturaṅgulamattopīti pisaddo tato adhiko pana pagevāti dasseti. Nikhaṇitvā khādatītinikhādanaṃ. Caturassaṃ mukhametassāticaturassamukhaṃ. Doṇisadisaṃ mukhametassātidoṇimukhaṃ. Sammuñcanidaṇḍavedhanampi nikhādanaṃ daṇḍabaddhaṃ hoti ceti yojanā. Daṇḍena bandhitabbantidaṇḍabaddhaṃ,daṇḍaṃ baddhametassāti vā daṇḍabaddhaṃ. ‘‘Adaṇḍaka’’nti vatvā tassevatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘phalamattamevā’’ti. Natthi daṇḍametassātiadaṇḍakaṃ. Yanti nikhādanaṃ.Pariharitunti puggalikabhāvena pariggahetvā harituṃ, saṅghikabhāvaṃ apanetuṃ vā. Sikharampi nikhādaneneva saṅgahitaṃ lakkhaṇahāranayena samānakiccabhāvato.Sikharanti yena paribbhamitvā chindanti, yehi manussehi dinnānīti sambandho.Teti manussā, vadantīti sambandho.Noti amhākaṃ.Pākatiketi pakatiyā ṭhite, yathā paṭhamaṃ ṭhitā honti, tathā karissāmāti attho.Sace āharantīti sace āyācanaṃ akatvā haranti.Anāharantāpīti puna anāharantāpi.

Tato: than the axe. Mahattarī the word is a synonym for mahanta, an underived nominal stem. The connection is, the large axe. Vejjāna: for physicians. Sirāvedhanapharasupī: by the word pi, it indicates that what is larger than that is definitely proper. But the connection is, that axe which is made by a group of weapons. Or the connection is, what axe is made by a group of weapons. Anāmāsā: not to be touched, meaning not fit to be touched. Caturaṅgulamattopī: by the word pi, it indicates that what is more than that is definitely proper. Nikhaṇitvā khādatītinikhādanaṃ: a digging tool, because it digs and eats. Caturassaṃ mukhametassāti**caturassamukhaṃ: square-mouthed, because its mouth is square. Doṇisadisaṃ mukhametassātidoṇimukhaṃ: trough-mouthed, because its mouth is like a trough. The connection is, "even the splicing for joining a handle is a digging tool with a handle attached." Daṇḍena bandhitabbanti**daṇḍabaddhaṃ, daṇḍaṃ baddhametassāti vā daṇḍabaddhaṃ: handle-bound, because it is bound with a handle, or handle-bound because a handle is bound to it. Having said "Adaṇḍaka", to show the meaning of that, it was said, "phalamattamevā". Natthi daṇḍametassātiadaṇḍakaṃ. Ya: without a handle, which. Pariharitu: to appropriate it as individual property, or to remove its state of belonging to the Saṅgha. Even the sikhara is included by digging tools, due to having the same function by way of the characteristic. Sikhara: with which they cut after going around. The connection is, by what people were given. Te: those people. The connection is, they say. No: ours. Pākatike: remaining in its natural state, meaning we will do it as it was originally. Sace āharantī: if they bring it without being asked. Anāharantāpī: even if they do not bring it again.

kammāra…pe… pattabandhakā,tesaṃ. Adhikaraṇī ca muṭṭhiko ca saṇḍāso ca tulā caadhikaraṇi…pe… tulā. Saṅghe dinnakālatoti saṅghassa dinnakālato. Tipuṃ chindati anenātitipucchedanaṃ,tameva satthakaṃtipucchedanasatthakaṃ. Mahākattariñca mahāsaṇḍāsañca mahāpipphilikañca ṭhapetvāti yojanā. Kasmā ṭhapitānīti āha ‘‘mahākattariādīni garubhaṇḍānī’’ti. Tattha yasmā mahākattariādīni garubhaṇḍāni, tasmā ‘‘ṭhapetvā mahākattari’’nti ādi mayā vuttanti yojanā.

kammāra…pe… pattabandhakā, of those, blacksmiths...bowl menders. Adhikaraṇī ca muṭṭhiko ca saṇḍāso ca tulā caadhikaraṇi…pe… tulā: an anvil, a mallet, tongs, and a balance— adhikaraṇi…pe… tulā. Saṅghe dinnakālato: from the time it was given to the Saṅgha. Tipuṃ chindati anenātitipucchedanaṃ, tameva satthakaṃtipucchedanasatthakaṃ: a tin cutter, because it cuts tin, that same knife is a tin-cutting knife. Set aside the large scissors, the large tongs, and the large pipphilika. He says, “because the large scissors etc. are heavy property.” There, because the large scissors etc. are heavy property, therefore I said "having set aside the large scissors" etc.

Vettavalliādikāti vettasaṅkhātavalliādikā.Aḍḍhabahuppamāṇāti ettha –

Vettavalliādikā: cane creepers and so on.

‘‘Byāmo sahakarā bāhu, dvepassadvayavitthatā’’ti. –

Aḍḍhabahuppamāṇā: here—

aḍḍhabāhu,tassa pamāṇametassātiaḍḍhabāhuppamāṇāti vacanattho kātabbo, dīghato dvihatthā vallīti vuttaṃ hoti.Tatthajātakāti tissaṃ saṅghassa bhūmiyaṃ jātakā.Rakkhitagopitāti saṅghena sayaṃ rakkhitā, parehi gopitā. Iminā arakkhitaagopitā garubhaṇḍaṃ na hotīti dasseti.ti valli. Atirekā hotīti sambandho.Upanetunti taṃ valliṃ upanetuṃ. Suttañca makacivākañca nāḷikerahīrañca cammañcasutta…pe… cammāni,tehi katāsutta…pe… cammamayā. Rajjukā vā yottāni vā garubhaṇḍaṃ hotīti sambandho.Ekavaṭṭā vā dvivaṭṭā vāti ettha vāsaddena tivaṭṭādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Avaṭṭetvā dinnaṃ suttañca avaṭṭetvā dinnā makacivākanāḷikerahīrā cāti yojanā.

Aḍḍhabāhu: The meaning should be construed as aḍḍhabāhuppamāṇā because its measure is half an arm’s length, which means a creeper two cubits long. Tatthajātakā: Grown in the Saṅgha's land. Rakkhitagopitā: Protected by the Saṅgha itself, guarded by others. This shows that an unprotected and unguarded heavy item is not allowed. Sā: That creeper. It is connected with 'atirekā hotīti' (it becomes extra). Upanetuṃ: To bring that creeper. Suttañca makacivākañca nāḷikerahīrañca cammañca sutta…pe… cammāni: Thread, etc., and hides; sutta…pe… cammamayā: made of thread, etc., and hides. Rajjukā vā yottāni vā garubhaṇḍaṃ hotīti sambandho: Ropes or tethers are considered heavy items. Ekavaṭṭā vā dvivaṭṭā vā: Here, the word "vā" (or) includes triple twists, etc. The meaning is thread given without twisting, and makacivāka nāḷikerahīrā given without twisting.

Sopīti veḷupi vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Pisaddena valliṃ apekkhati.Idametthāti idaṃ sabbaṃ ettha veḷumhi, veḷūsu vā idanti sambandho.Samakaṃvāti gahitaveḷunā samappamāṇaṃ vā.Atirekaṃ vāti tato atirekaṃ vā.Taṃagghanakanti tassa veḷuno agghanārahaṃ.Phātikammanti vaḍḍhikammaṃ.Tatthevāti gaṇhanaṭṭhāneva.Gamanakāleti gaṇhanaṭṭhānato aññattha gamanakāle. ‘‘Pahiṇitvā dātabbo’’ti iminā sayaṃ vā āgantvā dātabboti atthopi lakkhaṇahāranayena gahetabbo samānakiccattā.

Sopī: It is connected with the phrase "veḷupi vaṭṭatīti" (even bamboo is allowable). The word "pi" (also) refers to the creeper. Idametthā: The connection is: "idaṃ sabbaṃ ettha veḷumhi, veḷūsu vā idanti" (all this is in this bamboo, or this is among the bamboos). Samakaṃ vā: Either equal in measure to the bamboo taken. Atirekaṃ vā: Or exceeding that. Taṃagghanakaṃ: Worth the value of that bamboo. Phātikammaṃ: Carpentry work. Tattheva: In the very place of taking. Gamanakāle: At the time of going elsewhere from the place of taking. "Pahiṇitvā dātabbo" ("it should be sent and given") implies that the meaning of giving it by oneself, coming or going, should be understood by way of indication, since the function is the same.

yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne,itīti evaṃ. Tiṇañca garubhaṇḍaṃ hotīti sambandho.Tatthajātakaṃ vāti tasmiṃ saṅghārāme jātakaṃ vā.Bahārāmeti saṅghārāmato bahi.Tampīti tiṇampi. Pisaddena valliveḷū apekkhati.Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇopīti dīghato aṭṭhaṅgulapamāṇopi.Rittapotthakoti alikhitattā tuccho makacivatthādikopi paṇṇamayopi potthako. Idañca paṇṇapasaṅgena vuttaṃ.

Yattha: In which place; itī: Thus. It is connected with "tiṇañca garubhaṇḍaṃ hotīti" (grass is also a heavy item). Tatthajātakaṃ vā: Or grown in that Saṅghārāma. Bahārāme: Outside the Saṅghārāma. Tampī: Even grass. The word "pi" (also) refers to creepers and bamboo. Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇopī: Even if it is eight finger-breadths in length. Rittapotthako: Because it is unwritten, even a hollow book made of makacivattha, etc., or made of leaves. This is stated in connection with leaves.

Pañcavaṇṇā vāti nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhavasena pañcavaṇṇanā vā.Tampīti mattikampi. Pisaddena valliveḷutiṇāni apekkhati.

Pañcavaṇṇā vā: Or five colors, such as blue, yellow, red, white, and madder. Tampī: Even clay. The word "pi" (also) refers to creepers, bamboo, and grass.

Dārubhaṇḍe evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Rakkhitagopito yo koci dārubhaṇḍako atthīti yojanā. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttoti sambandho.

The interpretation regarding wooden items should be understood thus. It is connected with "Rakkhitagopito yo koci dārubhaṇḍako atthīti" (Whatever wooden item is protected and guarded). It is connected with "Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttoti" (But it is stated in the Great Commentary).

Tatrāti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vā.Imesūti āsandikādīsu.Etthāti pīṭhesu, palālapīṭhenāti sambandho.Byagghacammaonaddhanti byagghacammena avanaddhaṃ.Vāḷarūpaparikkhittanti vāḷarūpehi parivāritaṃ.Ratanaparisibbitanti ratanasuttena samantato sibbitaṃ.

Tatrā: In the Great Commentary, or in the Pāḷi passage "tena kho pana samayena." Imesū: Among these, such as chairs, etc. Etthā: In the case of stools; it is connected with "palālapīṭhenāti" (with a straw stool). Byagghacammaonaddhaṃ: Covered with tiger skin. Vāḷarūpaparikkhittaṃ: Surrounded by images of animals. Ratanaparisibbitaṃ: Sewn all around with thread of jewels.

Etesupīti vaṅkaphalakādīsupi. ‘‘Saṅkhathālakaṃ pana bhājanīya’’nti pāṭhassānantaraṃ ‘‘tathā’’ti pāṭho atthi, so ettha na yujjati, parato pana ‘‘yena kenaci kataṃ garubhaṇḍamevā’’ti pāṭhassānantaraṃ yujjati. Tattha hi yathā yena kenaci kataṃ garubhaṇḍameva hoti, tathā thambhatulāsopānaphalakādīsu dārumayaṃ vā pāsāṇamayaṃ vā yaṃkiñci gehasambhārarūpaṃ garubhaṇḍamevāti attho.

Etesupī: Even in these, such as curved planks, etc. After the reading "Saṅkhathālakaṃ pana bhājanīyaṃ" (A conch-shell dish, however, is allowable), there is a reading "tathā" (likewise), but that is not appropriate here; however, it is appropriate after the reading "yena kenaci kataṃ garubhaṇḍamevā" (whatever is made by anyone is a heavy item). There, just as whatever is made by anyone is a heavy item, so among pillars, beams, ladders, planks, etc., whatever is made of wood or stone, whatever household equipment, is indeed a heavy item.

Sabbanti sakalaṃ udakatumbapādakathalikamaṇḍalaṃ.Etesupīti ādhārakādīsupi.Tathā thambhatalāti ettha tathāsaddena ‘garubhaṇḍamevā’’ti padaṃ atidisati.Saṅghe dinnanti saṅghassa dinnaṃ.Bhūmattharaṇanti bhūmiyaṃ attharitabbaṃ.Tampīti eḷakacammampi.

Sabbaṃ: All of the water pot stand, footstool, and maṇḍala. Etesupī: Even in these, such as supports, etc. Tathā thambhatalā: Here, the word "tathā" (likewise) extends the phrase "garubhaṇḍamevā" (it is indeed a heavy item). Saṅghe dinnaṃ: Given to the Saṅgha. Bhūmattharaṇaṃ: To be spread on the ground. Tampī: Even goat skin.

musalantiādīsupi.Etesūti mañcapādādīsu.Anuññātavāsiyāti bhājanatthāya anuññātavāsiyā.Dhamakaraṇoti ettha ‘‘saṅkhaṃ dhamati, saṅkhadhamako’’tiādīsu viya nissaṃyogapāṭhoyeva yujjati. Tasmā dhamati vātena pavattatītidhamo,vātahetuko saddo, dhamaṃ karotītidhamakaraṇoti vacanattho kātabbo.Sabbametanti anuññātavāsidaṇḍādikaṃ etaṃ sabbaṃ.Tatoti anuññātavāsidaṇḍādikato, mahantataraṃ vāsidaṇḍādikaṃ garubhaṇḍanti yojanā.

Musalantiādīsupi: Even in pestle etc. Etesū: Among these, such as bed legs, etc. Anuññātavāsiyā: Allowed dwelling for the purpose of vessels. Dhamakaraṇo: Here, a non-compound reading is appropriate, as in "saṅkhaṃ dhamati, saṅkhadhamako" (he blows a conch, a conch-blower). Therefore, the meaning should be construed as "dhamati vātena pavattatīti dhamo, vātahetuko saddo, dhamaṃ karotīti dhamakaraṇo" (that which moves with the wind is dhama (wind), a sound caused by wind; one who makes that wind is a dhamakaraṇa (bellows)). Sabbametaṃ: All this, allowed dwelling, stick, etc. Tato: Than the allowed dwelling stick etc., the larger dwelling stick etc., is a heavy item.

Yathājātamevāti yathāpavattameva.Tehīti hatthidantādīhi, ‘‘kata’’iti padena sambandhitabbaṃ.Tacchitaniṭṭhitopīti tacchitakammena niṭṭhitopi.

Yathājātamevā: Just as it arose. Tehī: By ivory etc., should be connected with the word "kata" (made). Tacchitaniṭṭhitopī: Even if finished with carpentry work.

upabhogaparibhogaṃ,samāhāradvando. Idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘ghaṭapidhānādikulālabhājana’’nti padeneva sambandhitabbaṃ.Thupikātīti ettha itisaddo imasaddattho. Idaṃ sabbaṃ saṅghassa dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍanti yojanā. ‘‘Anatirittapamāṇo’’ti visesanapadaṃ ‘‘ghaṭako’’ti visesyapadeneva sambandhitabbaṃ.Etthāti mattikābhaṇḍe, ādhāre vā niddhāraṇe vā ttha paccayo. Mattikābhaṇḍe kuṇḍikā bhājanīyakoṭṭhāsaṃ bhajati, evaṃ lohabhaṇḍepīti yojanā.Etthāti garubhaṇḍavinicchaye.

Upabhogaparibhogaṃ: A collective দ্বন্দ্ব (dvanda compound). This phrase should be connected with the phrase "ghaṭapidhānādikulālabhājana." Thupikātī: Here, the word "iti" (thus) has the meaning of "ima" (this). All this is a heavy item from the time it is given to the Saṅgha. The qualifying phrase "Anatirittapamāṇo" (not exceeding the measure) should be connected with the qualified phrase "ghaṭako" (pot). Etthā: In the case of clay vessels, or in the support, or the suffix "tha" is used in determination. In the case of clay vessels, the water pot serves as a section for what is allowable; so it is in the case of metal vessels. Etthā: In this determination of heavy items.

The Topic of Giving for New Construction

323.Bhaṇḍikāṭṭhapanamattenāti ettha bhaṇḍikāṭṭhapanaṃ nāma bhaṇḍikayojananti āha ‘‘kapotabhaṇḍikayojanamattenā’’ti.Assāti bhikkhussa.Citakadhūmoti citake uṭṭhito dhūmo.Etassevāti bhikkhussa eva vihāroti sambandho.Dhūmakāleti dhūmassa uṭṭhitakāle. ‘‘Apaloketvā’’ti iminā dhūmakāle apalokitaṃdhūmakālikaṃ. Dhūmakālikaṃ hutvāti atthayojanaṃ katvā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pariyositavihāra’’nti padena sambandhitabbabhāvaṃ dasseti.Katapariyositavihāranti katapariyosito vihāro imassa navakammassāti katapariyositavihāraṃ. Idaṃ navakammaṃ dentīti sambandho. Yāva gopānasiyo na ārohanti, tāva vippakato nāmāti yojanā.Tatoti gopānasiārohanato.Kañcideva samādapetvā kāressatīti vihārasāmikoyeva kañci bhikkhuṃsamādapetvā kāressati. Pañcahatthe vihāreti sambandho. Chavassikaṃ navakammanti sambandho.Etthāti aḍḍhayoge.Soti aḍḍhayogo. Mahallakaṃ niyāmetvā dassento āha ‘‘dasahatthe ekādasahatthe’’ti. Dasavassikaṃ vā ekādasavassikaṃ vā navakammanti sambandho.Tatoti dvādasahatthato. Lohapāsādasadisepi pāsādeti sambandho.Tatoti dvādasavassikanavakammato.

323. Bhaṇḍikāṭṭhapanamattenā: Here, "bhaṇḍikāṭṭhapana" means setting up a pigeon-hole, as he says, "kapotabhaṇḍikayojanamattenā" (merely by setting up a pigeon-hole). Assā: Of the bhikkhu. Citakadhūmo: Smoke rising from a pyre. Etassevā: This monastery belongs to the bhikkhu himself. Dhūmakāle: At the time when the smoke rises. "Apaloketvā" (without asking permission) indicates that what is approved at the time of smoke is dhūmakālikaṃ (smoke-time thing). Having made the interpretation of the meaning, it shows that in the Pāḷi, it should be connected with the phrase "pariyositavihāra" (completely finished monastery). Katapariyositavihāraṃ: Katapariyosito vihāro imassa navakammassāti katapariyositavihāraṃ (a monastery is finished in regard to this new work, therefore a katapariyositavihāraṃ). It is connected with "Idaṃ navakammaṃ dentīti" (they give this new construction). As long as the rafters are not raised, it is called incomplete. Tato: From the raising of the rafters. Kañcideva samādapetvā kāressatī: The owner of the monastery himself will persuade some bhikkhu to have it done. It is connected with "Pañcahatthe vihāre" (a monastery of five hatthas). It is connected with "Chavassikaṃ navakammanti" (new construction lasting six years). Etthā: In the case of a lean-to. So: That lean-to. Showing the directing of an elder, he says, "dasahatthe ekādasahatthe" (ten or eleven hatthas). It is connected with "Dasavassikaṃ vā ekādasavassikaṃ vā navakammanti" (new construction lasting ten or eleven years). Tato: From twelve hatthas. It is connected with "Lohapāsādasadisepi pāsāde" (even a palace like the Lohapāsāda). Tato: From new construction lasting twelve years.

Navakammikoti navakamme yuttapayutto.Utukāleti hemantagimhakāle.Paṭibāhitunti aññesaṃ sampattabhikkhūnaṃ paṭisedhetuṃ.Āvāsasāmikassāti āvāsadāyakassa.Tassāti āvāsasāmikassa.Vaṃseti anvaye.Teti tava.Soti āvāsasāmiādiko. Bhikkhūhi jaggitabboti sambandho.Tepīti ñātiupaṭṭhākāpi.Tasmimpīti saṅghikapaccayepi. Bahū āvāseti sambandho. Ekaṃ āvāsanti yojanā.

Navakammiko: Engaged and employed in new construction. Utukāle: In the cold and hot seasons. Paṭibāhituṃ: To prevent other bhikkhus who have arrived. Āvāsasāmikassā: Of the donor of the dwelling. Tassā: Of the donor of the dwelling. Vaṃse: In the lineage. Te: Your. So: That donor of the dwelling, etc. It is connected with "Bhikkhūhi jaggitabbo" (should be looked after by the bhikkhus). Tepī: Even the relatives and attendants. Tasmimpī: Even in that which belongs to the Saṅgha. It is connected with "Bahū āvāse" (many dwellings). It is connected with "Ekaṃ āvāsanti" (one dwelling).

Tatoti visajjitāvāsehi, uppannānīti sambandho. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttaṃ, kinti vuttanti yojanā.Ekaṃ mañcaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāti ekaṃ mañcaṭṭhānaṃ puggalikabhāvena gahetvā.Tibhāganti tatiyabhāgaṃ. Ayameva vā pāṭho.Etthāti naṭṭhavihāre.Puggalikamevāti puggalikaṃ eva, puggalikaṃ iva vā.Jaggāti jaggāhi.ti phalajotako.Evaṃ jaggito panāti evaṃ jaggito vihāro pana.Tasminti jaggante.Saddhivihārikādīnaṃ dātukāmo hotīti saṅghassa bhaṇḍaṭṭhapanaṃ vā navakānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vā adatvā attanoyeva saddhivihārikādīnaṃ dātukāmo hoti.Saddhivihārikādīnaṃ dātuṃ labbhatīti sabbavihāraṃ puggalikabhāvena aggahetvā ekadesasseva gahitattā saddhivihārikādīnaṃ dātuṃ labbhatīti attho. Jaggāpetabbo iti vuttanti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘vutta’’nti pāṭho atthi, so apāṭhoyeva ‘‘kurundiyaṃ pana vutta’’nti padassa ākārattā.

Tato: From those who have given up their dwellings; it is connected with "uppannānīti" (have arisen). But it is stated in the Kurundi; it is connected with "kinti vuttanti" (what is stated?). Ekaṃ mañcaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā: Having taken one bed-place as individual property. Tibhāgaṃ: One-third part. Or this itself is the reading. Etthā: In the case of a ruined monastery. Puggalikamevā: Indeed individual, or as if individual. Jaggā: Look after. Hī: Indeed, a particle showing result. Evaṃ jaggito panā: But a monastery looked after thus. Tasmiṃ: While looking after. Saddhivihārikādīnaṃ dātukāmo hotī: Without giving the Saṅgha its property, or a dwelling place to the newcomers, he wants to give it to his saddhivihārikas etc., by himself. Saddhivihārikādīnaṃ dātuṃ labbhatī: Because he has taken only a portion of the entire monastery as individual property, it is permissible to give it to his saddhivihārikas, etc. It is connected with "Jaggāpetabbo iti vuttanti" (it is said that it should be looked after). Here, there is a reading "vutta" (said), but that is not a reading, because it is in the form of the word "kurundiyaṃ pana vutta" (but it is stated in the Kurundi).

Yenāti bhikkhunā.Soyeva sāmīti yena sā bhūmi paṭhamaṃ gahitā, soyeva sāmīti attho.Patirūpe ṭhāneti patirūpe senāsanaṭṭhāne.Tanti puggalikakaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ pana vayakammanti yojanā. Ettha cavayakammanti tasmiṃ vihāre katassa kammassa mūlaṃ. Vihārassa mūlaṃ dātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.Tassāti saṅghikaṃ karontassa.Tatthevāti katavihāre eva.Katāvāseti samīpatthe bhummavacanaṃ, katāvāsasamīpeti vuttaṃ hoti.Chāyūpagaphalūpagāti chāyaṃ upagacchantā ca phalaṃ upagacchantā ca, chāyāphalāni upaharantāti attho.Apaloketvāti saṅghaṃ apaloketvā.Sāmikāti rukkhasāmikā.Hāretabbāti apanetabbā.

Yenā: By which bhikkhu. Soyeva sāmī: He alone is the owner who first took that land. Patirūpe ṭhāne: In a suitable dwelling place. Taṃ: That making individual. It is connected with "Yaṃ pana vayakammanti" (whatever expense). And here, vayakammaṃ (expense) is the cost of the work done in that monastery. It is said that the cost of the monastery should be given. Tassā: To him who is making it Saṅghika. Tattheva: In the very monastery that was made. Katāvāse: A locative case in the sense of proximity; it means near the monastery that was made. Chāyūpagaphalūpagā: Approaching shade and approaching fruit; it means bringing shade and fruit. Apaloketvā: Having asked permission of the Saṅgha. Sāmikā: The owners of the trees. Hāretabbā: Should be removed.

Soti vihārakārako bhikkhu, tassa heṭṭhāpāsādoti sambandho.Vihāreti saṅghikavihāre, vihārasamīpeti attho.Akataṭṭhāneti cayapamukhānaṃ akatapubbaṭṭhāne.Cayaṃ vā pamukhaṃ vāti saṅghikavihārassa cayaṃ vā pamukhaṃ vā.Bahikuṭṭeti kuṭṭassa, kuṭṭato vā bahi.Tassāti cayapamukhakārakassa bhikkhussa hotīti sambandho.Visamaṃpabbatakandarādinti sambandho.Apadeti sukarassa akāraṇe.Kataṃ hotīti cayaṃ vā pamukhaṃ vā kataṃ hoti.Tatthāti cayapamukhesu, saṅgho anissaro iti vuttanti yojanā.

So: That bhikkhu who is building the monastery; it is connected with "tassa heṭṭhāpāsādoti" (his lower palace). Vihāre: In the Saṅghika monastery; it means near the monastery. Akataṭṭhāne: In a place where a caya, etc., has not been done before. Cayaṃ vā pamukhaṃ vā: Either a caya or a pamukha of the Saṅghika monastery. Bahikuṭṭe: Outside the wall, or from the wall. Tassā: It is connected with "cayapamukhakārakassa bhikkhussa hotīti" (it belongs to the bhikkhu who is making the caya or pamukha). Visamaṃ: It is connected with "pabbatakandarādinti" (mountains, caves, etc.). Apade: Without reason for a wild boar. Kataṃ hotī: A caya or a pamukha has been made. Tatthā: In those cayas and pamukhas, it is said that the Saṅgha is not the owner.

Varaseyyaṃ gahetunti sambandho.

It is connected with "Varaseyyaṃ gahetunti" (to take excellent lodgings).

Puna āgantvāti pakkamitvā puna āgantvā.Tassāti navakammagāhakassa bhikkhussa.Etanti senāsanaṃ.

Puna āgantvā: Having gone away and come back again. Tassā: Of the bhikkhu who is taking the new construction. Etaṃ: This lodging.

Aññatraparibhogapaṭikkhepādikathā
The Talk beginning with Rejecting Use Elsewhere

324.Nātiharantīti ettha atisaddo haraṇattho, harasaddo paribhuñjanatthoti āha ‘‘aññatra haritvā na paribhuñjantī’’ti. Yaṃ mañcapīṭhādīti yojanā.Tatthāti undriyamahāvihāre.Tanti mañcapīṭhādiṃ.Tasmāti yasmā anujānāti, tasmā.Tanti mañcapīṭhādiṃ.Aññatrāti aññaṃ vihāraṃ.Aroganti anaṭṭhājiṇṇattā arogaṃ.Tasmiṃ vihāreti undriyavihāre.Tasminti undriyavihāre.Tatoti undriyavihārato.Suyojitānīti suṭṭhu yojitāni. Mūladānaṃ vā paṭipākatikaṃ vā natthīti adhippāyo.Chaḍḍitavihāratoti bhikkhūhi anapekkhena chaḍḍitasaṅghikavihārato ca puggalena sāpekkhena chaḍḍitapuggalikavihārato ca.Āvāsikakāleti āvāsikānaṃ ṭhitakāle.Tatoti chaḍḍitavihārato.

324. Nātiharantī: Here, the prefix "ati" has the meaning of taking away, and the word "hara" has the meaning of using; as he says, "aññatra haritvā na paribhuñjantī" (they do not take away and use elsewhere). It is connected with "Yaṃ mañcapīṭhādīti" (Whatever bed, chair, etc.). Tatthā: In the Undariya Mahāvihāra. Taṃ: That bed, chair, etc. Tasmā: Therefore, because he allows it, therefore. Taṃ: That bed, chair, etc. Aññatrā: To another monastery. Arogaṃ: Because it is not broken or worn out, it is sound. Tasmiṃ vihāre: In the Undariya monastery. Tasmiṃ: In the Undariya monastery. Tato: From the Undariya monastery. Suyojitānī: Well-fitted. The meaning is that there is no fundamental giving or preparation. Chaḍḍitavihārato: From a Saṅghika monastery abandoned by bhikkhus without regard, and from an individual monastery abandoned by an individual with regard. Āvāsikakāle: At the time when there are residents. Tato: From the abandoned monastery.

Phātikammatthāyāti ettha phātisaddo vaḍḍhanatthoti āha ‘‘vaḍḍhikammatthāyā’’ti.Etthāti ‘‘phātikammatthāyā’’ti pāṭhe.

Phātikammatthāyā: Here, the word "phāti" has the meaning of increasing; as he says, "vaḍḍhikammatthāyā" (for the sake of increasing work). Etthā: In the reading "phātikammatthāyā" (for the sake of increasing work).

Cakkalikanti cakkākārena lāti pavattati, cakkākāraṃ vā lāti gaṇhātīticakkalaṃ,tadevacakkalikaṃ,pādapuñjanaṃ, ‘‘kambalādīhi veṭhetvā kata’’nti iminā tassa karaṇākāraṃ dasseti.Yehīti pādehi.Udakanti senāsanassa tintakaṃ udakaṃ. Udakaṃ na paññāyatīti yojanā. Saupāhanena akkamituṃ na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.

Cakkalikaṃ: That which moves in a circular form, or that which takes in a circular form, is cakkalaṃ, that itself is cakkalikaṃ, a foot-wiper; by "kambalādīhi veṭhetvā kata" (made by wrapping with blankets, etc.), he shows the way of making it. Yehī: By which feet. Udakaṃ: Water that wets the lodging. It is connected with "Udakaṃ na paññāyatīti" (water is not evident). It is connected with "Saupāhanena akkamituṃ na vaṭṭatīti" (it is not proper to step on it with shoes).

Sudhābhūmiyanti sudhāya littāyaṃ bhūmiyaṃ.Paribhaṇḍabhūmiyanti gomayakasāvaparibhaṇḍabhūmiyaṃ.Pādāti mañcapādā.Tasminti coḷake.Ṭhapentassāti mañcapāde ṭhapentassa.Tatthāti tesu bhikkhūsu.Nevāsikāti nibaddhaṃ vasantīti nevāsikā.Ṭhapentīti mañcapāde ṭhapenti.Tathevāti yathā nevāsikā vaḷañjanti, tatheva āgantukehi vaḷañjituṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.

Sudhābhūmiyaṃ: On a ground plastered with lime. Paribhaṇḍabhūmiyaṃ: On a ground covered with cow dung and chaff. Pādā: Bed legs. Tasmiṃ: In the cloth. Ṭhapentassa: For one placing the bed legs. Tatthā: Among those bhikkhus. Nevāsikā: Those who dwell constantly are nevāsikā (residents). Ṭhapentī: They place the bed legs. Tatheva: Just as the residents sweep, so it is proper for the newcomers to sweep.

Setabhitti vāti ettha vāsaddena nīlabhittiādayo sampiṇḍeti. ‘‘Dvārampi vātapānampī’’tiādinā sāmaññato vuttattā dvāravātapānādayo aparikammakatāpi na apassayitabbā. Kenaci vā vatthādināti sambandho.

Setabhitti vā: Here, the word "vā" (or) combines blue walls, etc. Because doors, windows, etc., are mentioned generally by "Dvārampi vātapānampī" (even doors and windows), doors, windows, etc., even if unfinished, should not be leaned against. It is connected with "Kenaci vā vatthādināti" (by some cloth, etc.).

dhotapādakaṃ,tasmiṃ dhotapādaketi atthaṃ dasseti.Etanti ‘‘dhotapādake’’ti nāmaṃ.‘‘Paccattharitvā’’ti ettha kena paccattharitvāti āha ‘‘paccattharaṇenā’’ti. ‘‘Attano santakenā’’ti iminā saṅghikena paccattharaṇena paccattharaṇaṃ paṭikkhipati.Niddāyatopīti niddāyakāraṇāpi, saṃkuṭiteti sambandho. Atha vāniddāyatopīti niddāyantassapi. ‘‘Sarīrāvayavo’’ti pade sāmyatthachaṭṭhī, ‘‘āpattiyevā’’ti pade sampadānaṃ. Lomesu phusantesūti sambandho. ‘‘Paribhogasīsenā’’ti iminā paribhogaṃ akatvā kenaci kammena sarīrāvayavena phusantassa anāpattīti dasseti. Hatthatalena phusituṃ pādatalena phusituṃ vā akkamituṃ vāti yathālābhayojanā daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Paribhogasīsenā’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mañcapīṭhaṃ nīharantassā’’tiādi.

dhotapādakaṃ, showing the meaning as "in the washing of the feet." Etanti, this is the name "dhotapādake." ‘‘Paccattharitvā’’ti, regarding "having spread over," he asks, "with what having spread over?" "Paccattharaṇenā"ti, with a covering. "Attano santakenā"ti, with this, he rejects the spreading with a Saṅgha-owned covering. Niddāyatopīti, even due to sleepiness; "saṃkuṭito" is connected. Or else, niddāyatopīti, even while sleeping. In the phrase "sarīrāvayavo," the sixth case ending has the sense of sameness; in the phrase "āpattiyevā," the dative case. "Lomesu phusantesūti," connected to touching the hairs. "Paribhogasīsenā"ti, with this, he shows that there is no offense for one whose body part touches something without intending to use it. One should understand the meaning as appropriate, whether it is to touch with the palm of the hand or to touch with the sole of the foot, or to step on it. While showing the meaning of the word "paribhogasīsenā," he says, "while removing a bed or bench," etc.

Saṅghabhattādianujānanakathā
Account of Allowing Saṅghabhatta, Etc.

325.‘‘Saṅghassa bhatta’’nti imināsaṅghabhattanti padassa chaṭṭhīsamāsaṃ dasseti. Saṅghassa atthāya ābhataṃ bhattaṃ kātuṃ na sakkontīti yojanā. Uddesabhattantiādīsu evamattho veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Uddesena laddhabhikkhūnaṃ bhattaṃ kātu’’nti iminā uddesena laddhabhikkhūnaṃ kātabbaṃ bhattaṃuddesabhattanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tathevāti yathā saṅghato uddisitvā laddhabhikkhū, tatheva.Paricchinditvāti ‘‘ekaṃ vā’’tiādinā paricchinditvā.Tesanti laddhabhikkhūnaṃ. Iminā nimantetvā laddhabhikkhūnaṃ kātabbaṃ bhattaṃnimantanabhattanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Salākāyo chinditvā’’ti iminā salākāyo chinditvā kātabbaṃ bhattaṃsalākabhattanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Pakkhikanti uposathikanti pāṭipadikanti evaṃ niyāmetvāti yojanā. Pañcamīādīsu pakkhesu kātabbaṃpakkhikaṃ. Uposathe kātabbaṃuposathikaṃ. Pāṭipade kātabbaṃpāṭipadikaṃ,tameva bhattaṃpāṭipadikabhattaṃ. Uddesabhattaṃ nimantananti ettha itisaddo ādyattho, uddesabhattaṃ nimantanantiādiṃ imaṃ vohāraṃ pattānīti hi attho. Uddesabhattādīniyeva anujānanamakatvā kasmā saṅghabhattampi anujānātīti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Tattha yasmā sakkhissantīti sambandho.Teti manussā.Tampīti saṅghabhattampi. Pisaddena uddesabhattādīni apekkhati.

325. "Saṅghassa bhatta"nti, with this, he shows the sixth-compound meaning of the word saṅghabhatta. The meaning is: they are not able to prepare food brought for the sake of the Saṅgha. In uddesabhatta, etc., the meaning should be understood thus. "Uddesena laddhabhikkhūnaṃ bhattaṃ kātu"nti, with this, he shows the meaning of the term uddesabhatta, as food to be prepared for the monks obtained by designation. "Tathevā"ti, just as the monks obtained after designating from the Saṅgha, so too. "Paricchinditvā"ti, having specified by "ekaṃ vā," etc. "Tesa"nti, for the monks obtained. With this, he shows the meaning of the term nimantanabhatta, as food to be prepared for the monks obtained by invitation. "Salākāyo chinditvā"ti, with this, he shows the meaning of the term salākabhatta, as food to be prepared by cutting tickets. Pakkhikanti, uposathikanti, pāṭipadikanti, having determined thus is the meaning. Pakkhikaṃ is to be prepared in the fortnights beginning with the fifth day of the lunar cycle. Uposathikaṃ is to be prepared on the Uposatha day. Pāṭipadikaṃ is to be prepared on the first day of the lunar cycle; that same food is pāṭipadikabhattaṃ. Uddesabhattaṃ nimantananti, here the word "iti" has the meaning of "beginning," meaning that it attains this usage beginning with uddesabhatta and nimantanabhatta, etc. Why does he allow even saṅghabhatta, since he only allowed uddesabhatta, etc.? He says, "yasmā panā"tiādi. There, "yasmā sakkhissantīti," is connected. "Te"ti, those people. "Tampī"ti, even saṅghabhatta. The word "pi" implies uddesabhatta, etc.

tatthāti ‘‘saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhatta’’ntiādipāṭhe, evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā, saṅghabhattādīsu vā niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, bhuñjantānaṃ amhākaṃ ajja dasa dvādasa divasā ahesunti yojanā.Aññatoti aññasmā ṭhānā.Tatthāti saṅghabhatte.Vattabbāti manussā vattabbā.Tanti saṅghabhattaṃ, dhātukammaṃ, ‘‘amhāka’’nti kāritakammaṃ.Tanti saṅghabhattaṃ.

tatthāti, in the passage beginning with "saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ," etc., thus the decision should be understood is the meaning, or the locative is used to determine among saṅghabhatta, etc. "Bhummaṃ," meaning, "while eating, ten or twelve days have passed for us," is the meaning. "Aññato"ti, from another place. "Tatthā"ti, in saṅghabhatta. "Vattabbā"ti, the people should be told. "Ta"nti, saṅghabhatta, "dhātukammaṃ," "amhāka"nti, kāritakammaṃ. "Ta"nti, saṅghabhatta.

Uddesabhattakathā
Account of Uddesabhatta

Sace atthīti sace ṭhitikā atthi.Uddesakenāti bhattuddesakena.Na atikkāmetabbanti uddesabhattaṃ na atikkāmetabbaṃ.Te panāti piṇḍapātikā pana.Ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvāti ṭhitikaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muñcitvāti attho.Tesanti mahātherānaṃ.Yojanantarikavihāratopīti yojanena byavadhāne ṭhitavihāratopi.Ṭhitaṭṭhānatoti ṭhitikāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato.Asampattānampīti bhattuddesaṭṭhānaṃ asampattānampi.Vaḍḍhitā nāma sīmāti upacārasīmā vaḍḍhitā nāma.Saṅghanavakassa dinnepīti yāva dutiyabhāgo na dātabbo, tāva saṅghanavakassa dinnepi.Vassaggenāti gaṇiyatīti gaṃ, vassameva gaṃvassaggaṃ,tena vassaggena, vassagaṇanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi ‘‘vassagghenā’’ti catutthakkharena pāṭho bhaveyya, evaṃ sati vassaparicchedenāti attho daṭṭhabbo, ayameva yuttataro.

Sace atthīti, if there is a fixed arrangement. "Uddesakenā"ti, by the one designating the food. "Na atikkāmetabba"nti, the uddesabhatta should not be exceeded. "Te panā"ti, but those alms-goers. "Ṭhitikaṃ ṭhapetvā"ti, having kept the arrangement in its fixed place, having released it, is the meaning. "Tesa"nti, of the elder monks. "Yojanantarikavihāratopī"ti, even from a monastery located at a distance of a league. "Ṭhitaṭṭhānato"ti, from the fixed place of the arrangement. "Asampattānampī"ti, even for those not arriving at the place of designation of the food. "Vaḍḍhitā nāma sīmā"ti, the boundary of proximity is increased, it is called. "Saṅghanavakassa dinnepī"ti, even when given to a new monk in the Saṅgha, as long as the second portion is not given. "Vassaggenā"ti, it is counted as gaṃ, the rains alone are gaṃ, "vassaggaṃ," by that vassaggaṃ, it is said as by the counting of the years. If the reading were to be "vassagghenā"ti" with the fourth syllable, in this case, the meaning should be seen as "by the measure of the years," and this itself is more fitting.

Ekasmiṃ vihāreti ekissaṃ vihārasīmāyaṃ.Tasmiṃyeva bhattuddesaṭṭhāneti ettha evasaddena aññasmiṃ ṭhāne gāhaṇaṃ paṭikkhipati.Ekoti eko dāyako.Tenāti pahitabhikkhunā.So atthoti so hetu.Taṃdivasanti tasmiṃ pahitadivase.Pamussatīti satipavāsena mussati.Bhojanasālāyāti bhattuddesaṭṭhānasaṅkhātāya bhojanasālāya. Yā pakatiṭṭhitikāti yojanā. ‘‘Ekābaddhā hontī’’ti vuttavacanassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aññamaññaṃ dvādasahatthantaraṃ avijahitvā’’ti.Navaṃ ṭhitikanti bhattuddesaṭṭhāne ṭhapitapakatiṭṭhitikato aññaṃ navaṃ ṭhitikaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etanti uddesabhattaṃ. ‘‘Sve’’ti niyāmetvā vuttattā dutiyadivase na labbhati.

Ekasmiṃ vihāreti, in one monastery boundary. "Tasmiṃyeva bhattuddesaṭṭhāne"ti, here, with the word "eva," he rejects the grasping in another place. "Eko"ti, one donor. "Tenā"ti, by the monk sent. "So attho"ti, that reason. "Taṃdivasa"nti, on that day when sent. "Pamussatī"ti, he forgets due to loss of mindfulness. "Bhojanasālāyā"ti, to the dining hall known as the place of designation of food. "Yā pakatiṭṭhitikāti," is the meaning. While showing the meaning of the statement "ekābaddhā hontī," he says, "without abandoning a distance of twelve cubits from each other." "Navaṃ ṭhitika"nti, a new arrangement different from the fixed arrangement established at the place of designation of food. "Hī"ti, truly, or because. "Eta"nti, uddesabhatta. Because it was said having determined "tomorrow," it is not obtained on the second day.

Kocīti dāyako.Sakavihāre ṭhītikāvaseneva gāhetabbanti yaṃ vihāraṃ gacchanti, tattha apaviṭṭhattā sakavihāre ṭhitikāvaseneva gāhetabbaṃ. Dinnaṃ pana bhattaṃ gāhetabbanti sambandho.Sampattānanti dinnaṭṭhānaṃ sampattānaṃ.Tatthāti dinnaṭṭhānaṃ, sampattānaṃyevāti sambandho.Tassa vihārassāti paviṭṭhavihārassa.Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāneti gāmadvāravīthicatukkasaṅkhāte tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne.Antoupacāragatānanti ettha antoupacāro nāma dvādasahatthabbhantaraṃ.

Kocīti, some donor. "Sakavihāre ṭhītikāvaseneva gāhetabba"nti, to whatever monastery they go, because they have entered there, it should be accepted only by the occasion of the arrangement in one's own monastery. But the food that is given should be accepted is the connection. "Sampattāna"nti, to those arriving at the place of giving. "Tatthā"ti, at the place of giving, connected to only those who have arrived. "Tassa vihārassā"ti, of the monastery that has been entered. "Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne"ti, in that place in that place, counted as the village gate, the street, the crossroads. "Antoupacāragatāna"nti, here, antoupacāro is the inner proximity, namely within twelve cubits.

Etthātitīsu upacāresu. Gharūpacāro veditabboti sambandho. Eko upacāro etthātiekūpacāraṃgharaṃ.Imesanti catunnaṃ gharānaṃ.Tatthāti catūsu gharesu. Ekakulassa yaṃ gharanti sambandho.Ekavaḷañjanti ekadvārena samānaparibhogaṃ.Tatthāti ekūpacāre.

Etthāti, in these three proximities. The proximity of the house should be understood is the connection. A house with one proximity here is ekūpacāraṃgharaṃ. "Imesa"nti, of these four houses. "Tatthā"ti, in the four houses. "Ekakulassa yaṃ gharanti," connected to whatever house of one family. "Ekavaḷañja"nti, equal in use with one entrance. "Tatthā"ti, in one proximity.

Sukhavihāratthāyāti kalahaṃ vicchinditvā sukhavihāratthāya.Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāneti bhittiyā paricchinne tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne.

Sukhavihāratthāyāti, for the sake of a pleasant dwelling, having cut off the quarrel. "Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne"ti, in that place in that place, separated by a wall.

Yasmiṃ pana ghare nisīdāpentīti sambandho. Yampi nivesananti yojanā.

"Yasmiṃ pana ghare nisīdāpentīti," is connected to in whatever house they seat. "Yampi nivesananti," is the construction.

Yo pana uddesalābho uppajjati, so pāpuṇātīti yojanā. Kiñcāpi dissanti, tathāpīti yojanā.

"Yo pana uddesalābho uppajjati, so pāpuṇātīti," is the construction. "Kiñcāpi dissanti, tathāpīti," is the construction.

Yo panāti bhikkhu pana, labhatīti sambandho.Aññasminti attanā aññasmiṃ.Tenāti uddesabhattaṃ labhantena bhikkhunā.

"Yo panā"ti, whichever monk, "labhatīti," is the connection. "Aññasmi"nti, in another, by himself. "Tenā"ti, by the monk receiving the uddesabhatta.

Kālaṃ paṭimānentesūti bhojanakālaṃ paṭimānentesu bhikkhūsu, nisinnesūti sambandho. Koci manusso vadatīti sambandho. Saṅghuddesapattaṃ detha iti vāti yojanā. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā pattassa ṭhāne bhikkhuṃ pakkhipitvā vutte atidisati.

"Kālaṃ paṭimānentesū"ti, among the monks waiting for the mealtime, "nisinnesūti," is the connection. "Koci manusso vadatīti," is the connection. "Saṅghuddesapattaṃ detha iti vāti," is the construction. "Eseva nayo"ti, with this, he extends it to having put the monk in the place of the bowl, having said it.

Etthāti uddesabhatte, evaṃvacane vā.Pesaloti piyasīlo.Tenāti uddesakena. Kinti jānātīti āha ‘‘dasavassena laddha’’nti.Tassāti uddesakassa, vacananti sambandho.Appasaddāti saṇikasaddā. ‘‘Apasaddā’’tipi pāṭho, nissaddāti attho.Sabbanavakassāti sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ navakassa.Chāyāyapi pucchiyamānāyāti anādare bhummavacanaṃ, sāmivacanaṃ vā.Na labhatīti pāpuṇāpitattā na labhati.Nisinnassāpi niddāyantassāpīti anādare sāmivacanaṃ, bhikkhussa nisinnassāpi niddāyantassāpīti attho.ti saccaṃ. Etaṃ bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ nāmāti yojanā.Tatthāti ‘‘sampattasseva pāpuṇātī’’ti vacane.Upacārenāti dvādasahatthūpacārena.Tasminti antoparikkhepe.

Etthāti, in uddesabhatta, or in such a statement. "Pesalo"ti, affectionate in character. "Tenā"ti, by the designator. "Kinti jānātīti," he asks, "what does he know?" "Dasavassena laddha"nti. "Tassā"ti, of the designator, "vacananti," is the connection. "Appasaddā"ti, with slight sounds. "Apasaddā"tipi" is also a reading, meaning without sound. "Sabbanavakassā"ti, of a new monk of all the monks. "Chāyāyapi pucchiyamānāyā"ti, the plural is used to express disregard, or it is respectful. "Na labhatī"ti, he does not receive because it has been given out. "Nisinnassāpi niddāyantassāpī"ti, the plural is used to express disregard; the meaning is even of a monk who is sitting or sleeping. "Hī"ti, truly. This is called shareable property. "Tatthā"ti, in the statement "sampattasseva pāpuṇātī." "Upacārenā"ti, by the proximity of twelve cubits. "Tasmi"nti, in the inner enclosure.

Paṇītabhojanānanti paṇītabhojanehi.Udakassāti udakena, pūretvāti sambandho. Āgatā manussāti sambandho.Yenāti bhikkhunā.Yanti vatthu.Ticīvaraparivāranti ticīvarena parivāritaṃ, ticīvaraparivāravantaṃ vā uddesabhattanti attho.Hisaccaṃ assa bhikkhussa puññaviseso īdisoti yojanā. Nanu udakaṃpissa puññavisesaṃ, kasmā aññaṃ uddesabhattaṃ labhatīti āha ‘‘udakaṃ panā’’tiādi.

"Paṇītabhojanāna"nti, with delicious foods. "Udakassā"ti, with water, "pūretvāti," is the connection. "Āgatā manussāti," is the connection. "Yenā"ti, by whichever monk. "Ya"nti, whichever object. "Ticīvaraparivāra"nti, surrounded by the three robes, or uddesabhatta endowed with the three robes is the meaning. "Hi", truly, such a distinction of merit is for that monk is the connection. Now, water is also a distinction of his merit, why does he receive other uddesabhatta? He says, "udakaṃ panā"tiādi.

Tesanti mahātherādīnaṃ.Daharasāmaṇerehīti daharehi sāmaṇerehi, laddhesūti sambandho.

"Tesa"nti, of the elder monks, etc. "Daharasāmaṇerehī"ti, by young novices, "laddhesūti," is the connection.

Tatthāti uddesabhatte.Puratoti mahātherānaṃ purato.Patteti saṅghuddesapatte, agāhiteyevāti sambandho. Āhaṭampi uddesabhattanti sambandho.

"Tatthā"ti, in uddesabhatta. "Purato"ti, in front of the elder monks. "Patte"ti, in the bowl designated for the Saṅgha, "agāhiteyevāti," is the connection. "Āhaṭampi uddesabhattanti," is the connection, also the uddesabhatta that has been brought.

Soti manusso, bhaṇatīti sambandho. Yathā te ruccati, tathā vatvā āharāti yojanā.Vissaṭṭhadūto nāmāti attano ruciṃ vissajjitvā tassa ruciyā vissaṭṭho dūto nāma.Paṭipāṭipattaṃ vāti saṅghato paṭipāṭiyā laddhaṃ pattaṃ vā, idaṃ nimantanabhattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Yaṃ icchatīti vissaṭṭhadūto yaṃ icchati.Soti bālo, na vattabboti sambandho. Pucchāsabhāgena vadeyyāti sambandho.Tatoti vadanakāraṇā.

"So"ti, that man, "bhaṇatīti," is the connection. "Yathā te ruccati, tathā vatvā āharāti," is the construction, say and bring as it pleases you. "Vissaṭṭhadūto nāmā"ti, a messenger who has relinquished his own preference and is released by his preference is called. "Paṭipāṭipattaṃ vā"ti, or the bowl obtained in order from the Saṅgha, this is said with reference to nimantanabhatta. "Yaṃ icchatī"ti, whatever the appointed messenger wants. "So"ti, that fool, "na vattabboti," is the connection. He should speak with a question-like manner is the connection. "Tato"ti, because of speaking.

Kūṭaṭṭhitikānāmāti aññehi uddesabhattehi missetvā ujukaṭṭhitikāya pavattitvā kūṭena pavattā ṭhitikā nāma hoti. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘rañño vā hī’’tiādi.Ekacārikabhattānīti pati ekaṃ katvā caritabbāni bhakkhitabbānīti ekacārikāni, aññehi uddesabhattehi amissetvā pati ekaṃ katvā bhakkhitabbānīti vuttaṃ hoti, tāniyeva bhattāni ekacārikabhattāni. Ekacce bhikkhū gatāti sambandho.Tesūti ekaccesu bhikkhūsu.Taṅkhaṇaṃyevāti tasmiṃ nisinnakkhaṇeyeva. Punataṅkhaṇaṃyevāti tasmiṃ gāhaṇakkhaṇeyeva. ‘‘Paṇītabhatta’’nti vutte ‘‘kativassato paṭṭhāyā’’ti vadanti, ‘‘ettakavassato nāmā’’ti vutteti yojanā.Gāhiteti ṭhitikaṃ ajānantehi āgantukehi patte gāhite. Āgatehipi ṭhitikaṃ jānanakabhikkhūhīti sambandho. Eseva nayo paratopi.Bhikkhūyeva āgacchantūti pattaṃ aggahetvā bhikkhūyeva āgacchantūti adhippāyo.

"Kūṭaṭṭhitikānāmā"ti, an arrangement operated falsely, having mixed with other uddesabhatta and operated by a straight arrangement, is called a false arrangement. While expanding that same meaning, he says, "rañño vā hī"tiādi. "Ekacārikabhattānī"ti, ekacārikāni are to be practiced and eaten making each one pati, meaning, it has been said that they should be eaten practicing each one pati without mixing with other uddesabhatta, those same foods are ekacārikabhattāni. "Ekacce bhikkhū gatāti," is the connection. "Tesū"ti, among those some monks. "Taṅkhaṇaṃyevā"ti, in that very moment of sitting. Again, "taṅkhaṇaṃyevā"ti, in that very moment of accepting. When "paṇītabhatta"nti is said, they say "from how many years beginning," "it is said from so many years," is the construction. "Gāhite"ti, the bowl accepted by newcomers who do not know the arrangement. "Āgatehipi ṭhitikaṃ jānanakabhikkhūhīti," is the connection. The same method applies elsewhere as well. "Bhikkhūyeva āgacchantū"ti, the intention is that monks should come without taking the bowl.

Neti ṭhitikaṃ ajānante āgantuke.Rājā bhojetvāti rājā attano gehe bhojetvā.Nesanti āgantukānaṃ, pattepīti sambandho.Yaṃ āhaṭanti yaṃ bhattaṃ abhuñjitvā āhaṭaṃ.Taṃ na gāhetabbanti taṃ bhattaṃ ṭhitikāya na gāhetabbaṃ thokattā.Nesanti āgantukānaṃ.Gīvā hotīti iṇaṃ hoti. Iṇaṃ nāma paṭidātabbasabhāvo hoti, tasmā paṭidātabbanti adhippāyo.Etthāti ṭhitikaṃ ajānitvā bhuttaṭṭhāne.Tāva nisīditabbanti tāva āgametvā nisīditabbaṃ. Pattaṭṭhānena gāhaṇampi gīvāsadisoti purimatherassa mati bhaveyya. Evañhi sati dvinnaṃ therānaṃ vādo sadisoyeva.

"Ne"ti, newcomers who do not know the arrangement. "Rājā bhojetvā"ti, having fed by the king in his own house. "Nesa"nti, to the newcomers, "pattepīti," is the connection. "Yaṃ āhaṭa"nti, whichever food has been brought back without being eaten. "Taṃ na gāhetabba"nti, that food should not be accepted by the arrangement because it is small. "Nesa"nti, to the newcomers. "Gīvā hotī"ti, it becomes a debt. Debt is the nature of having to be repaid, therefore it should be repaid is the intention. "Etthā"ti, in the place of eating without knowing the arrangement. "Tāva nisīditabba"nti, one should sit having waited so long. The former elder's opinion might be that acceptance in place of the bowl is similar to debt. Indeed, in this case, the opinion of the two elders is similar.

Tathārūpoti ticīvaraparivāro satagghanako.Ayanti piṇḍapāto. Iti vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu.

"Tathārūpo"ti, endowed with the three robes, worth a hundred. "Aya"nti, this alms food. Thus it is said in the commentaries.

Antarābhaṭṭhakoti uddesabhattassa antare vemajjhe bhassati galatīti antarābhaṭṭhako. Paripuṇṇavasso yo pana sāmaṇeroti yojanā. Tassa upasampajjitasāmaṇerassa ṭhitikā atikkantāti sambandho.Soti uddesabhattapatto bhikkhu.Samīpeti attano samīpe.Tañce theyyāya harantīti taṃ pattaṃ pattahārakā theyyāya haranti ce.Gīvā hotīti pattadāpakassa gīvā hoti.So bhikkhūti samīpe nisinno so bhikkhu.Assāti pattadāpakassa. ‘‘Aya’’nti potthakesu pāṭho atthi, so na sundaro.Tatoti uddesabhattagharato. ‘‘Suhaṭo’’ti vacanassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhattassa dinnattā gīvā na hotī’’ti.

"Antarābhaṭṭhako"ti, antarābhaṭṭhako is one who falls in the middle of the uddesabhatta, in the middle. "Paripuṇṇavasso yo pana sāmaṇeroti," is the construction, but whichever novice is of full years. "Tassa upasampajjitasāmaṇerassa ṭhitikā atikkantāti," the arrangement is exceeded for that novice who has been ordained is the connection. "So"ti, that monk receiving the uddesabhatta. "Samīpe"ti, near himself. "Tañce theyyāya harantī"ti, if thieves steal that bowl. "Gīvā hotī"ti, there is debt for the giver of the bowl. "So bhikkhū"ti, that monk sitting nearby. "Assā"ti, for the giver of the bowl. "Aya"nti" there is a reading in the books, that is not beautiful. "Tato"ti, from the uddesabhattaghara. While showing the meaning of the word "suhaṭo," he says, "because the food has been given, there is no debt."

Sādiyanakoti uddesabhattasādiyanako, hotīti sambandho. Dasahipi pattehi bhattaṃ āharāpetvāti yojanā.Bhikkhudattiyaṃ nāmāti bhikkhunā dattiyaṃ nāma.So bhikkhūti sādiyanako so bhikkhu.Te bhikkhūti piṇḍapātike te bhikkhū. Etha bhante mayhaṃ sahāyā hotha iti vatvāti sambandho.Tassāti upāsakassa.Tatthāti upāsakassa ghare.Tassevāti sādiyanakasseva.Itareti navapiṇḍapātikā.Nesanti dasannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ.Tassa bhikkhunoti sādiyanakassa bhikkhuno.Bhuttāvīnanti bhuttavantānaṃ.

"Sādiyanako"ti, sādiyanako means, connected to there is one attached to uddesabhatta. "Dasahipi pattehi bhattaṃ āharāpetvāti," is the construction, having brought food with even ten bowls. "Bhikkhudattiyaṃ nāmā"ti, bhikkhunā dattiyaṃ nāma, it is called the donation of a monk. "So bhikkhū"ti, that monk who is sādiyanako. "Te bhikkhū"ti, those monks who are alms-goers. "Etha bhante mayhaṃ sahāyā hotha iti vatvāti," is the construction, having said "come, sir, be my companions." "Tassā"ti, of the female lay devotee. "Tatthā"ti, in the female lay devotee's house. "Tassevā"ti, only for the sādiyanaka. "Itare"ti, the nine alms-goers. "Nesa"nti, for the ten monks. "Tassa bhikkhuno"ti, of the monk who is sādiyanaka. "Bhuttāvīna"nti, of those who have eaten.

Teti navapiṇḍapātikā, vuttā gacchantīti sambandho.Tatthāti upāsakassa ghare.Tatrāti dasasu bhikkhūsu. Madhurena sarena anumodanaṃ karontassa ekassa dhammakathaṃ sutvāti yojanā.Akatabhāgo nāmāti pubbe na kariyitthāti akato, soyeva bhāgo koṭṭhāsoti akatabhāgo, āgantukabhāgo nāmāti attho.

Teti, those nine who regularly take alms-food, the connection is stated as "go." Tatthati, at the house of the lay follower. Tatrāti, among the ten monks. The construction is: after hearing the Dhamma talk of one who is making anumodana with a sweet voice. Akatabhāgo nāmāti, that which was not done before is akata; that same portion or share is akatabhāga, meaning the share for newcomers.

Imanti khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ. Pattasāmikassa dātabbanti yojanā.Ṭhapetvāti pakatiyā ṭhapetvā. ‘‘Sabbo saṅgho bhuñjatū’’ti vatvā ca kiñci avatvā ca gatepi paṭhamameva ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅghikaṃ pattaṃ dethā’’ti vuttattā bhājetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.

Imanti, this edible and chewable food. It should be given to the owner of the bowl, that is the connection. Ṭhapetvāti, having set aside as usual. Even if he leaves saying, "Let the entire Sangha eat," without saying anything further, since it was said at the very beginning, "Give all the Sanghika bowls," it should be divided and consumed.

Ekekaṃ ālopanti ekekassa bhikkhussa ekekaṃ ālopaṃ.Acchatīti vasati.Kassa teti kassa atthāya tayā, ānītanti yojanā. ‘‘Ekena bhikkhunā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘gāhetabba’’nti pade kāritakammaṃ, ‘‘bhatta’’nti dhātukammaṃ tabbapaccayo vadati.

Ekekaṃ ālopanti, one mouthful for each monk. Acchatīti, remains. Kassa teti, for whose sake, by you, was it brought? that is the connection. The word "Ekena bhikkhunā" is a causative object in the word "gāhetabba," and the word "bhatta" is the direct object of the verbal root, the suffix "tabba" states.

Kiṃ āharīyatīti avatvāti kiṃ vatthu tayā āharītīti upāsakaṃ apucchitvā. ‘‘Kiṃ āharissasī’’tipi pāṭho, kiṃ vatthuṃ tvaṃ āharissasīti attho. Saparivārāya yāguyā ca mahagghānaṃ phalānañca paṇītānaṃ khajjakānañca tathā āveṇikā ṭhitikā kātabbāti yojanā.Ekā eva ṭhitikāti samānā eva ṭhitikā.Tathā phāṇitassāti ettha tathāsaddena ‘‘ekā eva ṭhitikā vaṭṭatī’’ti padaṃ atidisati.

Kiṃ āharīyatīti avatvāti, without asking the lay follower, "What thing is brought by you?" "Kiṃ āharissasī" is also a reading, meaning, "What thing will you bring?" The connection is that a fixed rate should be established for gruel with side dishes, expensive fruits, delicious snacks, and also special items. Ekā eva ṭhitikāti, the fixed rate is the same. Tathā phāṇitassāti, here, with the word "tathā," the phrase "ekā eva ṭhitikā vaṭṭatī" is extended by analogy.

Iti uddesabhattakathāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Uddesabhatta.

Nimantanabhattakathā
Nimantanabhattakathā (Account of Invited Meal)

nimantanaṃnāma.Etthāti nimantane.Piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭatīti ‘‘bhikkha’’nti kappiyavohārena vuttattā piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati.Paṭipāṭiyāti saṅghato laddhapaṭipāṭiyā. Āgatamanusso vadatīti sambandho.Vicchinditvāti ‘‘tumhe ca gacchathā’’ti vacanaṃ vicchinditvā.

Nimantanaṃ means invitation. Etthāti, in this invitation. Piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭatīti, because "bhikkha" is stated in conventional language, it is suitable even for those who live on alms-food. Paṭipāṭiyāti, by the order received from the Sangha. The connection is that the person who has come speaks. Vicchinditvāti, having interrupted the statement "you also go."

Nimantanabhattagharatoti nimantanabhattassa dinnagharato. Eko āharatīti sambandho.Pūretvāti bhattassa pūretvā.Tanti bhattaṃ.Idhāpīti nimantanepi.

Nimantanabhattagharatoti, from the house where the invited meal is given. The connection is that one brings. Pūretvāti, having filled with food. Tanti, that food. Idhāpīti, even in the invitation.

Tatoti vadanakāraṇā. ‘‘So bhikkhū’’ti padaṃ ‘‘assā’’ti pade pakatikattā, ‘‘jigucchanīyo’’ti padaṃ tattheva vikatikattā.Assāti bhaveyya, hoti vā. ‘‘Pattatthāya āgatomhī’’ti vadantassa tassa patto dātabboti yojanā.Bhattāharaṇakapattanti bhattaṃ āharati anenāti bhattāharaṇako, soyeva patto bhattāharaṇakapatto, taṃ.Paṭipāṭibhattanti paṭipāṭiyā laddhaṃ bhattaṃ.

Tatoti, because of the statement. The word "So bhikkhū" is the subject in the word "assā," and the word "jigucchanīyo" is the predicate in the same. Assāti, it might be, or it is. To him who says, "I have come for the bowl," his bowl should be given, that is the connection. Bhattāharaṇakapattanti, that by which food is brought is bhattāharaṇaka, that same bowl is bhattāharaṇakapatta, that.

Ālopabhattaṭṭhitikatoti ekekaālopena laddhassa bhattassa ṭhitikato.Ālopasaṅkhepenāti ekekasmiṃ ālope taṃsaṃkhipanena. Ayaṃ nayo uddesabhattato viseso.Kassa te ābhatanti kassa atthāya tayā ābhatanti yojanā.Saṅghassa me bhattanti saṅghassa atthāya mayā bhattaṃ ābhataṃ.Therānaṃ me bhattanti therānaṃ mayā bhattaṃ ābhataṃ.

Ālopabhattaṭṭhitikatoti, from the fixed rate of food received by individual mouthfuls. Ālopasaṅkhepenāti, by reducing it into individual mouthfuls. This method is a distinction from the uddesabhatta. Kassa te ābhatanti, for whose sake was it brought by you? that is the connection. Saṅghassa me bhattanti, food was brought by me for the Sangha. Therānaṃ me bhattanti, food was brought by me for the elders.

Ime tayo janāti saṅghatthero ca ganthadhutaṅgavasena abhiññāto ca bhattuddesako cāti ime tayo janā.Pucchitunti ‘‘kiṃ saṅghato gaṇhāmi, udāhu ye jānāmi, tehi saddhiṃ āgacchāmī’’ti pucchituṃ. Āruhiyitthātiārūḷhā. Attanavamehīti attā navamo etesanti attanavamā, tehi bhikkhūhīti sambandho.ti yasmā.Ete bhikkhūti saṅghattherādayo tayo ete bhikkhū.Tenāti ganthadhutaṅgādīhi anabhiññātena bhikkhunā paṭipajjitabbanti sambandho. Nissitake vā, ye bhikkhū jānātha, te bhikkhū vā gahetvāti yojanā. Attanā añño gāmo gantabboti sambandho.Soyeva gāmoti nimantanagāmoyeva.

Ime tayo janāti, these three persons, namely, the Sangha elder, one who is known by virtue of practicing the dhutaṅga and being learned, and the distributor of food. Pucchitunti, to ask, "Do I take from the Sangha, or do I come with those whom I know?" Āruhiyitthātiārūḷhā. Attanavamehīti, those who are nine including themselves are attanavamā, by those monks, that is the connection. ti, because. Ete bhikkhūti, these three monks, namely, the Sangha elder, etc. Tenāti, by a monk who is not known for practicing the dhutaṅga, etc., it should be practiced, that is the connection. Or, having taken the monks whom you know, or those who are dependent, that is the connection. Another village must be gone to by oneself, that is the connection. Soyeva gāmoti, that same village is the invitation village.

Tatrāti asanasālāyaṃ.Ussavādīsūti chaṇādīsu. Ādisaddena aññena kenaci kāraṇena manussānaṃ bahusannipātaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Tadāti tasmiṃ nimantanakāle.Sannipātaṭṭhānatoti bhikkhūnaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānato.Yathāsattīti sattiyā anurūpaṃ, sattiṃ anatikkamitvāti attho. Ettha ca sattisaddassa kuntasaṅkhātassa satthassapi vācakattā taṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘yathābala’’nti.

Tatrāti, in the assembly hall. Ussavādīsūti, in festivals, etc. By "ādi" is included a large gathering of people for some other reason. Tadāti, at that time of the invitation. Sannipātaṭṭhānatoti, from the place of gathering of the monks. Yathāsattīti, according to ability, without exceeding ability, that is the meaning. And here, since the word "satti" can also mean a weapon in the form of a spear, rejecting that, he says, "yathābala" (according to strength).

Ekavāranti ekasmiṃ divase, āgamanadivaseti attho.Paṭibaddhakālatoti tattheva sakaṭṭhāne vāsassa nibaddhakālato.Dutiyavāreti dutiyadivase.Abhinavaāgantukāvāti anāgamanapubbā abhinavā āgantukāva.Tatrāti tasmiṃ pattaṭṭhāne.Tesanti abhinavaāgantukānaṃ.Etthāti anāgatapubbaṭṭhāne.

Ekavāranti, one time, meaning the day of arrival. Paṭibaddhakālatoti, from the fixed time of residence in that same place. Dutiyavāreti, on the second day. Abhinavaāgantukāvāti, or newcomers who are new, never having come before. Tatrāti, in that place of the bowl. Tesanti, of those new newcomers. Etthāti, in the place never come to before.

Sabbatthāti sabbesu sakaṭṭhānaāgantukaṭṭhānesu.Tenāti atilābhinā bhikkhunā.Avisesetvāti visesamakatvā.

Sabbatthāti, in all one's own dwelling places and newcomer's places. Tenāti, by the monk who is excessively greedy. Avisesetvāti, without making a distinction.

Salākabhattakathā
Salākabhattakathā (Account of Ticket Meal)

Salākāya vāti kusadaṇḍe vā.Asukassa nāmāti asukassa nāma upāsakassa.Upanibandhitvāti likhitvā, chinditvāti attho. ‘‘Opuñjitvā’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘punappunaṃ heṭṭhupariyavasena āloḷetvā’’ti. Bhattuddesakena dātabbāti sambandho.

Salākāya vāti, or on a grass stalk. Asukassa nāmāti, the name of such and such a lay follower. Upanibandhitvāti, having written, meaning having cut. Showing the meaning of the word "opuñjitvā," he says, "having repeatedly stirred in an upward and downward manner." It should be given by the distributor of food, that is the connection.

Na bahukāti appakā.Gāmavasenapīti yebhuyyena samānalābhagāmavasenapi. Pisaddena kulaṃ apekkhati. Gāhentena gāhitānevāti sambandho. Saṭṭhisalākabhattāni hontīti yojanā.Tesanti dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ salākabhattānaṃ.

Na bahukāti, not many, meaning few. Gāmavasenapīti, even by the village residence with generally equal gains. By "pi" it implies family. Those who are made to take, they must take, that is the connection. Sixty ticket meals occur, that is the connection. Tesanti, of those two or three ticket meals.

Tanti bahusalākabhattagāmaṃ.Taṃ panāti ekasalākabhattaṃ pana.Etesūti bhikkhūsu.Niggahenāti dūrattā anicchantassapi ekassa niggahena.Tanti salākabhattaṃ.Orimagāmeti orabhāge ṭhite gāme.Gāhitasaññāyāti gāhitā iti saññāya.Puna vihāraṃ āgantvāti puna vihāraṃ anāgantvā orimagāme salākabhattāni paṭhamaṃ gahetvā pacchā vihāraṃ āgantvā attano pāpetvā bhuñjitumpi vaṭṭati. Kasmā puna vihāro āgantabbo, nanu agāhitopi attano pattattā gahetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi.Hiyasmā bahisīmāya saṅghalābho gāhetuṃ na labbhati, tasmā vihāro āgantabboti yojanā.Ekabāhavasena vāti ekāya gharapāḷisaṅkhātāya bāhāyavasena vā.Vīthiādīsu cāti vīthibāhakulesu ca, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne. Salākāsuasatiasantāsūti yojanā.Uddisitvāpīti ‘‘asukagāmassa salākabhattāni tuyhaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti gāmādīni uddisitvāpi.

Tanti, that village with many ticket meals. Taṃ panāti, but that one ticket meal. Etesūti, among these monks. Niggahenāti, even for one who is unwilling due to distance, by force. Tanti, that ticket meal. Orimagāmeti, in the village situated in the nearer part. Gāhitasaññāyāti, with the perception that it is taken. Puna vihāraṃ āgantvāti, without coming to the monastery again, having first taken the ticket meals in the nearer village, afterwards coming to the monastery and delivering it to oneself, it is suitable even to eat. Why must one come to the monastery again, since it is suitable even to take and eat what is one's own by virtue of one's bowl even without being made to take? He says, "na hī" etc. Hi because, alms gain within the boundary cannot be taken by one who is made to take, therefore the monastery must be come to, that is the connection. Ekabāhavasena vāti, or by virtue of one side called a row of houses. Vīthiādīsu cāti, and in the row of houses in the street, etc., ablative in the sense of determination. Yatthāti, in which place. Salākāsuasati, when tickets are not available, that is the connection. Uddisitvāpīti, even having specified, "The ticket meals of such and such a village accrue to you," having specified the village, etc.

tenāti salākadāyakena bhikkhunā. Gāhetabbanti sambandho.Vāragāmeti atidūrattā vārena gantabbe gāme.Tatrāti taṃ gāmaṃ.

tenāti, by the ticket-giving monk. It should be made to take, that is the connection. Vāragāmeti, in a village to be gone to by turns due to being very far. Tatrāti, to that village.

Atirekagāvuteti gāvutato atireke ṭhāne.Taṃdivasanti tasmiṃ salākabhattagahaṇadivase. Yo na gacchati, tassa na dātabbāti yojanā.ti yasmā.Tīṇi pana divasānīti accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Tanti orimavāragāmasalākaṃ. Daṇḍakammaṃ pana kinti gāḷhaṃ kātabbanti āha ‘‘saṭṭhito vā paṇṇāsato vā na parihāpetabba’’nti.Vihāravāroti vihārassa rakkhanatthāya vāro.Vihāravārikassāti vihāraṃ vārena, vāraṃ gahetvā vā rakkhatīti vihāravāriko, tassa dātabbāti sambandho.Vihāragopakāti vihāraṃ gopentīti vihāragopakā.Aññathattanti pasādaññathattaṃ.Aññesu kulesu dātabbāti aññesaṃ kulānaṃ yāguādayo dātabbā.

Atirekagāvuteti, in a place more than a gavuta away. Taṃdivasanti, on that day of taking the ticket meal. It should not be given to one who does not go, that is the connection. ti, because. Tīṇi pana divasānīti, but these three days, this is a usage of continuous connection. Tanti, that ticket of the nearer turn village. But how should the punishment be made strict? He says, "it should not be reduced from sixty or fifty." Vihāravāroti, the turn for the sake of protecting the monastery. Vihāravārikassāti, he who protects the monastery by turn, having taken a turn, to him it should be given, that is the connection. Vihāragopakāti, those who protect the monastery are vihāragopakā. Aññathattanti, difference in favor. Aññesu kulesu dātabbāti, gruel, etc., should be given to other families.

Vāraṃ gāhetvāti aññehi vāraṃ gāhāpetvā.Nesanti vihāravārikānaṃ.Salākāti pakatikattāraṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘bhavantī’’ti bahuvacanavasena vuttaṃ.Phātikammamevāti vihārarakkhanatthāya saṅghena dātabbaphātikammameva.Aññampīti pisaddena na kevalaṃ phātikammameva, aññampīti dasseti.Atirekauttaribhaṅgassāti atirekaṃ uttaribhaṅgametassāti atirekauttaribhaṅgaṃ, tassa.

Vāraṃ gāhetvāti, having caused others to take a turn. Nesanti, of those monastery watchmen. Salākāti, having regard for the subject, it is stated in the plural as "bhavantī." Phātikammamevāti, only the phātikamma that should be given by the Sangha for the sake of protecting the monastery. Aññampīti, by "pi," it shows that not only phātikamma, but also something else. Atirekauttaribhaṅgassāti, that which has an excessive increase is atirekauttaribhaṅga, of that.

Salākā laddhāti salākā eva laddhā.Taṃdivasanti tasmiṃ salākaladdhadivase.Ekassevāti ekekasseva.Vijaṭetvāti tāni dve tīṇi ekacārikabhattāni vijaṭaṃ nigumbaṃ katvā.

Salākā laddhāti, only the ticket is obtained. Taṃdivasanti, on that ticket-obtained day. Ekassevāti, only for each one. Vijaṭetvāti, having disentangled those two or three ekacārika meals, having made them into a thicket.

Ekasambhogāti ekato sambhogā. Gāhentena dātunti sambandho.Sammukhībhūtassāti upacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhitassa yassa kassaci, pāpetvāti yojanā.Rasasalākanti ucchusalākaṃ. ‘‘Rasālasalāka’’ntipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Khuddakavihāre gāhetabbavidhānaṃ dassetvā mahāāvāse taṃ dassento āha ‘‘mahāāvāse’’tiādi.

Ekasambhogāti, enjoyment together. It should be given by one who is made to take, that is the connection. Sammukhībhūtassāti, to anyone who is standing within the boundary of proximity, having caused it to reach, that is the connection. Rasasalākanti, sugarcane ticket. "Rasālasalāka" is also a reading, this is the same meaning. Having shown the method of taking in a small monastery, showing that in a large residence, he says, "mahāāvāse" etc.

Bhesajjādisalākāyoti ettha ādisaddena gandhamālāsalākāyo saṅgaṇhāti.Etthāti salākāsu.Aggabhikkhamattanti aggato dātabbaṃ bhikkhāmattaṃ.Tādisāni bhattānīti aggabhikkhāmattasabhāvāni bhattāni.No ceti tādisāni bhattāni bahūni no ce honti.Laddhā vā aladdhā vāti labhitvā vā alabhitvā vā.

Bhesajjādisalākāyoti, here, by "ādi," are included the tickets for perfume and flowers. Etthāti, in these tickets. Aggabhikkhamattanti, the amount of alms to be given first. Tādisāni bhattānīti, foods of the nature of aggabhikkhāmatta. No ceti, if there are not many such foods. Laddhā vā aladdhā vāti, having obtained or not having obtained.

Salākāsu gāhitāsūti aññāsu salākāsu gāhitāsu.Samīpe ṭhitassāti hatthaṃ apasāretvā samīpe ṭhitassa.Assāti bhikkhussa.Ayaṃ salākāti ‘‘ayaṃ tassa salākā’’ti ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati.Adhammikāti katikā adhammayuttā.Anāgatassa dethāti anāgatassa bhikkhussa salākaṃ detha.

Salākāsu gāhitāsūti, when other tickets have been taken. Samīpe ṭhitassāti, to one standing nearby, having extended the hand. Assāti, to the monk. Ayaṃ salākāti, "this is his ticket," it is suitable to set aside. Adhammikāti, the agreement is not in accordance with the Dhamma. Anāgatassa dethāti, give the ticket to the monk who has not yet come.

Soti bhattuddesako, vadeyyāti sambandho. Mayā mayhaṃ pāpitanti sambandho.Tatthāti gāme. Bhuñjeyyātha iti vadeyya, vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Tatthevāti asanasālāyameva.Tatrāti tasmiṃ gāme.Vihāraṃ ānetvāti vihāraṃ salākabhattaṃ ānetvā.Salākaggāhaṇakāleti salākāya bhikkhūhi gāhāpanakāle.

Soti, that distributor of food, it should be said, that is the connection. It has been delivered by me to me, that is the connection. Tatthāti, in the village. He should say, "you should eat," it is suitable, that is the connection. Tatthevāti, in the refectory itself. Tatrāti, in that village. Vihāraṃ ānetvāti, having brought the ticket meal to the monastery. Salākaggāhaṇakāleti, at the time of causing the monks to take the tickets.

Tatthāti tasmiṃ disābhāge.Aññenāti attanā aññena, laddhā hotīti sambandho.Tena panāti gamikato itarena.Tasminti gamike. Upacārasīmaṃ anatikkanteyevāti yojanā.

Tatthāti, in that direction. Aññenāti, by another than oneself, it is obtained, that is the connection. Tena panāti, but by the other than the one who is going. Tasminti, in that one who is going. He should not cross the boundary of proximity, that is the connection.

Tatthāti chaḍḍitavihāre.Tesūti āvāsikesu bhikkhūsu, gatesūti sambandho.Sovāti āgantuko eva. Yo pana gacchatīti sambandho.Tanti salākabhattaṃ, na pāpuṇātīti sambandho.

Tatthāti, in the abandoned monastery. Tesūti, among those resident monks, when they have gone, that is the connection. Sovāti, only the newcomer. But he who goes, that is the connection. Tanti, that ticket meal, he does not obtain, that is the connection.

Puññenāti puññasmā.Tā ca kho panāti salākāyo pana.Pacchiṃ panāti salākapacchiṃ pana.Tatthāti pacchiyaṃ.Ettovāti ākiraṇaṭṭhānatova.Ekanti ekaṃ salākaṃ.Vattabbanti salākadāyakena vattabbaṃ.

Puññenāti, from merit. Tā ca kho panāti, but those tickets. Pacchiṃ panāti, but the ticket basket. Tatthāti, in the basket. Ettovāti, only from the scattering place. Ekanti, one ticket. Vattabbanti, it should be said by the ticket giver.

Tatthāti aññasmiṃ vihāre. Mahātheropi gacchatīti sambandho. Gatavihāre abhuñjitvāva gocaragāmaṃ anuppattehi bhikkhūhi pattā na dātabbāti yojanā.Vihāraṭṭhakaṃ bhattanti vihāre ṭhitaṃ bhattaṃ.

Tatthāti, in another monastery. Even the great elder goes, that is the connection. Bowls should not be given to monks who have arrived in the village for alms without having eaten in the monastery they went to, that is the connection. Vihāraṭṭhakaṃ bhattanti, food that remains in the monastery.

Pakkhikabhattādikathā
Pakkhikabhattādikathā (Account of Fortnightly Meal, etc.)

Yanti bhattaṃ diyyatīti sambandho. Cātuddasīpañcaddasīpañcamīaṭṭhamīti abhilakkhitesūti yojanā.Kammappasutehīti kammūpacayehi. Imehi pāṭhehi pakkhesu dātabbaṃpakkhikanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tanti pakkhikabhattaṃ. ‘‘Hotī’’ti pade vuttakattā, ‘‘gāhetvā’’ti pade dhātukammaṃ, ‘‘bhuñjitabba’’nti pade vuttakammaṃ.Sabbesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Yesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Mandāti appā.Tanti salākabhattaṃ.Paṇītaṃ dentīti paṇītaṃ katvā denti.Lūkhabhattanti asiniddhabhattaṃ.

Yanti, that food is given, that is the connection. On the fourteenth, fifteenth, fifth, and eighth days, that is specified, that is the connection. Kammappasutehīti, by the accumulation of actions. By these readings, it should be given on the fortnights, he shows the meaning of pakkhika. Tanti, that fortnightly meal. The word "hotī" is the expressed subject in the word, "gāhetvā" is the direct object of the verbal root, "bhuñjitabba" is the expressed object in the word. Sabbesanti, of all the monks. Yesanti, of which monks. Mandāti, few. Tanti, that ticket meal. Paṇītaṃ dentīti, they give having made it delicious. Lūkhabhattanti, unrefined food.

uposathikanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Uposatheti uposathadivase. Ettha ca pañcaddasiyaṃ sace dāyakā ‘‘pakkhika’’nti vatvā denti,pakkhikaṃ nāma. Atha ‘‘uposathika’’nti vatvā denti,uposathikaṃnāmāti viseso.Pāṭipadeti pāṭipadadivase.Uposathakammenāti uposathakammena hetubhūtena. ‘‘Pāṭipade diyyanakadāna’’nti iminā pāṭipade dātabbaṃpāṭipadikanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tampi ubhayanti uposathikapāṭipadikavasena ubhayampi taṃ bhattaṃ.Iti imānīti ettha imasaddena itisaddassa imasaddatthabhāvo dassito hoti.Sattapi bhattānīti imasmiṃ senāsanakkhandhake āgatāni saṅghabhattādīni sattapi bhattāni.

He shows the meaning of uposathika. Uposatheti, on the Uposatha day. And here, if on the fifteenth day the donors give saying, "pakkhika," it is called pakkhika. But if they give saying, "uposathika," it is called uposathika, this is the distinction. Pāṭipadeti, on the first day of the lunar month. Uposathakammenāti, by the Uposatha act as the cause. By this, "dāna given on the first day of the lunar month," he shows the meaning of pāṭipadika which should be given on the first day of the lunar month. Tampi ubhayanti, that food both in the manner of Uposathika and Pāṭipadika. Iti imānīti, here, by this "ima" word, the meaning of the word "iti" is shown to be the same as the meaning of "ima." Sattapi bhattānīti, these seven kinds of food beginning with Sanghabhatta which have come in this Senāsanakkhandhaka.

Tatthāti catūsu bhattesu. ‘‘Āgantukānaṃ dinna’’ntiādināāgantukabhattanti padassa catutthīmajjhelopasamāsaṃ dasseti. Aññattha pana ‘‘āgantukassa atthāya ābhata’’ntiādinā chaṭṭhīmajjhelopasamāsaṃ dasseti.Etthāti catūsu bhattesu.Sabbesanti bhikkhūnaṃ. Eko āgantuko nisīdatīti sambandho.Tenāti paṭhamaāgantukena.

Tatthati: among the four bhattas. "Given to newcomers," etc., shows the elision-of-the-middle-fourth-case compound of the word āgantukabhatta. Elsewhere, however, it shows the elision-of-the-middle-sixth-case compound with "brought for the sake of the newcomer," etc. etthati: among the four bhattas. Sabbesaṃti: for all the monks. "One newcomer sits" is the connection. Tenati: by the first newcomer.

Yoti āgantuko.Āgantvāpīti pisaddo garahattho, pacchā pana pagevāti attho. Tena gaṇhitabbanti yojanā. ‘‘Āgatadivaseyevā’’ti iminā na dutiyadivasādīsu bhuñjitabbanti dasseti.

Yoti: the newcomer. Āgantvāpīti: the pi is in the sense of censure, but later it is in the sense of pageva. Therefore, the meaning is "should be taken." "On the very day of arrival" indicates that he should not partake on the second day, etc.

Katthacīti kiñci ṭhānaṃ.Tanti āgantukabhattaṃ.Nibandhāpitanti niccaṃ ṭhapitaṃ.Asanasālāyanti antogāme asanasālāyaṃ.Asatīti asantesu.

Katthaciti: some place. Taṃti: the āgantukabhatta. Nibandhāpitaṃti: constantly established. Asanasālāyaṃti: in the asanasālā within the village. Asatīti: when they are not present.

Āvāsikopīti pisaddo na gamikoyevāti dasseti. Yathā āgantukabhattaṃ dve vā tīṇi vā satta vā divasāni labbhati, evaṃ idaṃ gamiyabhattaṃ na labbhatīti yojanā.Panthanti maggaṃ.Rundhantīti pidahanti. Udakaṃ vā rundhatīti sambandho.Ete upaddaveti corādayo ete upaddave.Oḍḍetvāti ṭhapetvā.

Āvāsikopīti: the pi indicates that it is not only for those who are going away. Just as āgantukabhatta is obtained for two or three or seven days, so this gamiyabhatta is not obtained, is the connection. Panthaṃti: the path. Rundhantīti: they block. "Or water blocks" is the connection. Ete upaddaveti: these dangers, such as thieves. Oḍḍetvāti: having kept aside.

Etassāti mahāgilānassa. Punaetassāti anāgatassa mahāgilānassa.Sappāyabhojananti gilānānaṃ sappāyabhojanaṃ.Missakayāgunti nānātaṇḍule missetvā pacitaṃ yāguṃ.Na kuppatīti na vikāraṃ karoti.

Etassāti: for that great invalid. Again, etassāti: for the future great invalid. Sappāyabhojanaṃti: suitable food for the sick. Missakayāgunti: rice gruel cooked by mixing various types of rice. Na kuppatīti: it does not cause derangement.

Idampīti gilānupaṭṭhākabhattampi.Tatthāti tasmiṃ kule.Assāti gilānassa.Evaṃ dinnānīti evaṃ vakkhamānanayena dinnāni honti.Piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭatīti ‘‘bhikkha’’nti kappiyavohārena vuttattā piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati.Na vaṭṭatīti ‘‘bhatta’’nti akappiyavohārena vuttattā na vaṭṭati.

Idampīti: even this gilānupaṭṭhākabhatta. Tatthati: in that family. Assāti: for the sick person. Evaṃ dinnāniti: are given in this way, according to the method to be explained. Piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭatīti: because it is spoken of with the allowable designation "alms," it is suitable even for the piṇḍapātikas. Na vaṭṭatīti: because it is spoken of with the unallowable designation "meal," it is not suitable.

Tatthāti tīsu bhattesu.Dhurabhattanti ettha dhurasaddassa dhuvasaddena atthato sadisattā niccatthoti āha ‘‘niccabhattaṃ vuccatī’’ti.Tanti dhurabhattaṃ.Tatthāti duvidhesu. ‘‘Saṅghike’’ti pāṭhaseso yojetabbo.Puggalikepītipisaddo ‘‘saṅghike’’ti padaṃ apekkhati.Pacchāti paṭhamaṃ ‘‘bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttavacanato, vuttavacanassa vā paraṃ.

Tatthati: among the three bhattas. Dhurabhattaṃti: here, because the word dhura is similar in meaning to the word dhuva, it has the meaning of "constant," therefore he says "is called niccabhatta." Taṃti: the dhurabhatta. Tatthati: in the two kinds. "Saṅghika" a reading remainder should be connected. Puggalikepīti: the particle pi anticipates the word "saṅghika". Pacchāti: after the statement "take the bhikkha" first, or after the statement that has been made.

kuṭibhattanti dassento āha ‘‘kuṭibhattaṃ nāmā’’tiādi.Yanti bhattaṃ, nibandhāpitanti sambandho, senāsanavāsino bhikkhūti sambandho.Yaṃ panāti bhattaṃ pana, dinnanti sambandho.Tassevāti puggalasseva.Tasminti puggale.

Explaining kuṭibhatta, he says, "Kuṭibhatta is called," etc. Yaṃti: the bhatta, "established" is the connection, "monks residing in the dwelling" is the connection. Yaṃ panāti: the bhatta however, "given" is the connection. Tassevāti: to that person alone. Tasmiṃti: in that person.

vārabhattanti dassento āha ‘‘vārabhattaṃ nāmā’’tiādi.Tampīti vārabhattampi. Nigamanavasena sampiṇḍetvā dassento āha‘‘iti imāni cā’’tiādi.

Explaining vārabhatta, he says, "Vārabhatta is called," etc. Tampīti: even the vārabhatta. Showing it by summarizing in conclusion, he says, ‘‘iti imāni cā’’tiādi.

Aṭṭhakathāyanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, vuttānīti sambandho.Tatthāti catūsu bhattesu. Vihāre uppannaṃ bhattaṃvihārabhattanti dassento āha ‘‘vihārabhattaṃ nāmā’’tiādi.Tatruppādabhattanti tasmiṃ vihāre dinnakhettavatthuādīhi uppādabhattaṃ.Tanti vihārabhattaṃ.Yathāti yenākārena, paṭiggahiyamāneti sambandho. Aṭṭhannaṃ samūho, aṭṭha parimāṇāni yassāti vāaṭṭhako,tassa dinnaṃ bhattaṃ aṭṭhakabhattaṃ. Evaṃcatukkabhattanti etthāpi. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aṭṭhannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ demā’’tiādi.Mahābhisaṅkhārikenāti sabbinonītādīhi mahanto abhisaṅkhāro mahābhisaṅkhāro, so etassa atthīti mahābhisaṅkhāriko, tena atirasakapūvena patte pakkhipitvāti sambandho. ‘‘Thaketvā dinna’’nti iminā gūhitvā dātabbaṃguḷhakaṃ,tameva bhattaṃguḷhakabhattanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

Aṭṭhakathāyaṃti: in the Great Commentary, "were stated" is the connection. Tatthati: among the four bhattas. Meal that has arisen in the monastery, showing vihārabhatta, he says, "Vihārabhatta is called," etc. Tatruppādabhattaṃti: the uppādabhatta in that monastery, from the field, property, etc., that was given. Taṃti: the vihārabhatta. Yathāti: in whatever manner, "while being received" is the connection. A group of eight, or that which has eight as its measure, is aṭṭhako, bhatta given to him is aṭṭhakabhatta. Likewise, here also with catukkabhatta. Showing that meaning itself, he says, "Let us give to eight monks," etc. Mahābhisaṅkhārikenāti: a great arrangement with all the best ingredients, a great arrangement is mahābhisaṅkhāro, one who has that is mahābhisaṅkhāriko, having put (it) into the bowl with especially delicious cakes, is the connection. With "having given after covering," he shows that guḷhakaṃ should be given after hiding, the meaning of the word itself, guḷhakabhattaṃ.

Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Ekacce manussā dentīti sambandho. ‘‘Bhikkhuparicchedajānanatthaṃ guḷake dentī’’ti iminā guḷakena bhikkhū gaṇetvā dātabbaṃ bhattaṃguḷakabhattanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ettha ca purimanaye ḷakāre hakārasaṃyogo atthi, pacchimanaye natthīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Guḷapiṇḍagaṇanāya bhikkhugaṇanaṃ jānāti.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ. Cīvarabhājanīyaṃ vuttanti sambandho.

Idhāti: in this world. "Some people give" is the connection. With "they give guḷakas for the purpose of knowing the number of monks," he shows that bhatta to be given after counting the monks with guḷaka is the meaning of the word guḷakabhatta. Here, it should be seen that in the former method there is a combination of hakāra with ḷakāra, but in the latter method there is not. He knows the counting of the monks by the counting of the guḷapiṇḍas. Itītiādi: is the conclusion. "Cīvarabhājanīyaṃ was stated" is the connection.

Sabbiādīsu bhesajjesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, ‘‘sabbissā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘kumbhasatampī’’ti pade nissitasambandho.

Sabbiādīsu bhesajjesūti: is the locative in the sense of specification, the word "sabbissā" is related to the words "even a hundred jars."

Pacchāāgatānaṃ dātabbamevāti dutiyabhāge adātabbeyeva pacchā āgatānaṃ dātabbameva.Sabbasannipātaṭṭhāneyevāti sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sannipātaṭṭhāneva. Bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ nāma bhājanaṭṭhānaṃ sampattasseva pāpuṇāti, na asampattassa. Sabbasannipātaṭṭhāne ca yebhuyyena sampatto hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasannipātaṭṭhāneyevā’’ti.

Pacchāāgatānaṃ dātabbamevati: in the second portion, it should not be given, it should definitely be given to those who come later. Sabbasannipātaṭṭhāneyevati: only in the place of assembly of all the monks. The object for distribution only accrues to one who has attained the place of distribution, not to one who has not attained it. And in the place of assembly of all, usually one has attained it, therefore it was said "only in the place of assembly of all."

Yathāṭhitaṃyevāti kiñci abhājetvā yathāṭhitaṃyeva. ‘‘Duggahita’’nti vatvā tadatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘taṃ gatagataṭṭhāne saṅghikameva hotī’’ti.Āvajjetvāti pariṇāmetvā.Tampīti thālake pakkhittaṃ sabbimpi.Thinanti ghanabhāvena tiṭṭhatīti thinaṃ, ghananti vuttaṃ hoti.Vuttaparicchedatoti ‘‘dasa bhikkhū, daseva ca sabbikumbhā’’ti vuttaparicchedato.

Yathāṭhitaṃyevati: without distributing anything, just as it is. Saying "misunderstood," he shows the meaning of that by saying "that remains saṅghika in the place where it has gone." Āvajjetvāti: having turned. Tampīti: even all the sabbi placed in the bowl. Thinaṃti: it stands by way of density, therefore thinaṃ, it is said to be dense. Vuttaparicchedatoti: from the stated limit "ten monks, and ten sabbikumbhas."

pāḷinti vinayapāḷiṃ.Aṭṭhakathañcevāti tassā aṭṭhakathañceva.Vicakkhaṇoti vividhaṃ atthaṃ cakkhati passatīti vicakkhaṇo.Evanti yathāvuttanayena. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – evaṃ vicakkhaṇo bhikkhu pāḷiṃ, aṭṭhakathañceva oloketvā appamattova hutvā saṅghike paccaye bhājayeti.

Pāḷiṃti: the Vinaya Pāḷi. Aṭṭhakathañcevāti: and its commentary. Vicakkhaṇoti: because he sees and discerns the various meanings, he is vicakkhaṇo. Evaṃti: in the manner that has been stated. The connection there is this: in this way, having examined the Pāḷi and the commentary, a wise monk, being diligent, should distribute the saṅghika requisites.

Iti paccayabhājanīyakathāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the section on distribution of requisites.

Upaḍḍhabhāgoti bhikkhūnaṃ laddhabhāgato upaḍḍho bhāgo. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Upaḍḍhabhāgoti: half the share, from the share received by the monks. The rest is very easy to understand.

Iti senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Senāsanakkhandhaka.

7. Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakaṃ

7. Saṅghabhedakakkhandhaka

Chasakyapabbajjākathā
The Story of the Going-Forth of the Six Sakyans

330.Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakeabhiññātā abhiññātāti ettha abhipubbo ñātasaddo pākaṭatthoti āha ‘‘pākaṭā pākaṭā’’ti.Kāḷudāyippabhūtayoti kāḷudāyiādayo. Parivārehi saddhiṃ dasa dūtā ca aññe ca bahū janā sakyakumārā nāmāti yojanā.Amhesūti sakyakulasaṅkhātesu amhesu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Iminā pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kulato’’ti iminā‘‘kulā’’ti ettha nissakkatthe nissakkavacananti dasseti.Gharāvāsatthanti ettha ghare āvasantānaṃ manussānaṃ kiccanti dassento āha ‘‘gharāvāse ya’’ntiādi. Tatthayanti yaṃkiñci.Udakaṃ ninnetabbanti ettha udakaṃ nīharitvā netabbaṃ apanetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘yathā udakaṃ sabbaṭṭhānesu susaṃ hotī’’ti.Susanti sukkhaṃ.Tiṇānīti sassadūsakāni tiṇāni. ‘‘Uddharitabbānī’’ti imināniddhāpetabbanti ettha dhudhātuyā papphoṭanadhaṃsanatthe dasseti.Bhusāti sassanāḷadaṇḍā, tehi missā palālābhusikā. Ophuṇāpetabbanti ettha phuṇadhātuyā avakiraṇatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘apanetabba’’nti.Tvaññeva gharāvāsatthena upajānāti etthagharāvāsatthenāti upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.Upajānāti upatyūpasaggo dhātvatthānuvattako, hivibhatti ca lopo hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tvaññeva gharāvāsatthaṃ jānāhī’’ti.Ahanti bhaddiyakumāranāmako ahaṃ.Tayāti anuruddhakumāranāmakena tayā. ‘‘Saddhiṃ pabbajissāmī’’ti iminā pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti.Sesanti ‘‘saddhiṃ pabbajissāmī’’ti vacanaṃ.

330.In the Saṅghabhedakakkhandhaka, abhiññātā abhiññātāti: here, the word ñāta preceded by abhi has the meaning of "well-known," therefore he says "well-known, well-known." Kāḷudāyippabhūtayoti: Kāḷudāyi, etc. "Ten messengers along with their retinues, and many other people are called Sakyan princes" is the connection. Amhesūti: in us, who are designated as the Sakyan clan, is the locative in the sense of specification. With this, he shows the remainder of the text. With "from the clan," here, in ‘‘kulā’’ti, he shows the plural number in the sense of separation in the absence of separation. Gharāvāsatthaṃti: here, showing the duty of people living in a house, he says "whatever in household life," etc. There, yaṃti: whatever. Udakaṃ ninnetabbaṃti: here, showing that water should be drained and removed, he says "how water is completely dry in all places." Susaṃti: dry. Tiṇāniti: weeds that spoil the crops. With "should be removed," here, in niddhāpetabbaṃ, he shows the meaning of scattering and destroying of the root dhudhātu. Bhusāti: stalks of grain, chaff mixed with them is bhusikā. In ophuṇāpetabbaṃ, showing the meaning of scattering of the root phuṇadhātu, he says "should be removed." Tvaññeva gharāvāsatthena upajānāti: here, in gharāvāsatthena, the instrumental case is in the sense of use. Upajānāti: the prefix upa and ati follow the meaning of the root, and the suffix hi is elided, therefore he says "you alone know the affairs of household life." Ahaṃti: I, named Bhaddiya. Tayāti: by you, named Anuruddha. With "I will go forth together," he shows the remainder of the text. Sesaṃti: the remaining statement "I will go forth together."

331.Nippātitāti ettha nikkhamitvā gamāpitāti dassento āha ‘‘nikkhāmitā’’ti.Mānassinoti ettha mānaṃ sayanti nissayantīti mānassinoti dassento āha ‘‘mānassayino’’ti.

331.Nippātitāti: here, showing that having gone out, they were made to go, he says "having gone out." Mānassinoti: here, showing that they depend on or rely on pride, therefore mānassino, he says "having pride as their support."

332.Yassantarato na santi kopāti ettha antarasaddo cittavācako, topaccayo ca sattamyatthavācakoti dassento āha ‘‘yassa citte’’ti. Kasmā kopā na santīti āha ‘‘tatiyamaggena samūhatattā’’ti. Anāgāmimaggena dosassa samūhatattā yassa khīṇāsavassa citte kopā na santīti adhippāyo.Iti bhavābhavatañca vītivattoti ettha atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Tattha yasmā pana vuccati, tasmā evamattho daṭṭhabboti yojanā. Vibhavoti pāpaṃ vuccatīti sambandho. Nanu pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vibhavo’’ti natthi, ‘‘abhavo’’ti eva atthi, atha kasmā ‘‘vibhavoti abhavo’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘vibhavoti ca abhavoti ca atthato ekamevā’’ti. Iminā saddatoyeva nānanti dasseti. Yā esā bhavābhavatā vuccatīti sambandho. ‘‘Anekappakārā’’ti iminā itisaddassa pakāratthaṃ dasseti. Catūhipi maggehi vītivattoti sambandho.Tassāti khīṇāsavassa.

332.Yassantarato na santi kopāti: here, the word antara denotes the mind, and the suffix to denotes the sense of the locative case, therefore he says "in whose mind." Why are there no anger? He says "because of being eradicated by the third path." Because of the eradication of hatred by the Anāgāmi path, there is the meaning that there is no anger in the mind of a khīṇāsava. Iti bhavābhavatañca vītivattoti: here, showing the meaning, he says "since however," etc. There, since it is said however, therefore such meaning should be seen, is the connection. "Vibhava" is said to be evil, is the connection. But in the Pāḷi there is no "vibhava," only "abhava" exists, then why was it said "vibhava is abhava?" He says "vibhava and abhava are the same in meaning." With this, he shows that only the words are different. "Whatever this being and non-being is called" is the connection. With "of various kinds," he shows that the word iti is in the sense of kind. "He has transcended even the four paths" is the connection. Tassāti: of that khīṇāsava.

333.Ahimekhalikāti mekhalā viya mekhalikā, ahimeva mekhalikā ahimekhalikā. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ahiṃ kaṭiyaṃ bandhitvā’’ti.

333.Ahimekhalikāti: a girdle like a snake, a snake itself is a girdle, ahimekhalikā. Showing that meaning itself, he says "having tied a snake around the waist."

334.Sammannatīti ettha ‘‘sammānetī’’ti curādigaṇikadhātuvasena vattabbe divādigaṇikadhātuvasena vuttanti dassento āha ‘‘sammānetī’’ti. Acinteyyo hi pāḷinayo.Sammānetīti sammānaṃ karoti.Yanti kammaṃ.Soti satthā. Imināyaṃ tumoti etthatumoti ruḷhīsaddo idha ‘‘so’’ti sabbanāmasaddena sadisatthoti dasseti.

334.Sammannatīti: here, showing that it should be said in the sense of a causative root of the curādi class as "sammānetī," it was said in the sense of a root of the divādi class, he says "sammānetī". Indeed, the method of the Pāḷi is unthinkable. Sammānetīti: he shows respect. Yaṃti: the action. Soti: the Teacher. With this, here in yaṃ tumo, here, he shows that the conventional term tumo is similar in meaning to the pronoun "so".

Pakāsanīyakammādikathā
The Story Beginning with Pakāsanīyakamma

336.‘‘Kheḷasadisā’’ti iminā micchājīvena uppannapaccayānaṃ sadisūpacārena kheḷabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tasmā kheḷā viyātikheḷo,micchājīvapaccayā, kheḷe asati bhakkhati ajjhoharatītikheḷāsakoti vacanattho kātabbo. Etarahi pāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyañca‘‘kheḷāpakassā’’ti oṭṭhajena paṭhamakkharena pāṭho atthi.

336.With "similar to phlegm," he shows the state of being like phlegm by metaphorical similarity of the requisites that arise from wrong livelihood. Therefore, because they are like phlegm, kheḷo, requisites from wrong livelihood, because he eats and consumes when there is phlegm, the meaning of the word kheḷāsako should be made. At present, in the Pāḷi and in the commentary, there is a reading of ‘‘kheḷāpakassā’’ with the first letter as a labial.

340.Patthaddhenāti ettha bhūso thaddho patthaddho, bāḷhathaddhoti attho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘niccalenā’’ti.Potthakarūpasadisenāti ettha potthakarūpaṃ nāma vatthadantādimayaṃ, tena sadiso potthakarūpasadiso, tena.

340.Patthaddhenāti: here, very stiff is patthaddho, it means very rigid. Therefore, it was said "immovable." Potthakarūpasadisenāti: here, potthakarūpa means made of cloth, ivory, etc., similar to that is potthakarūpasadiso, by that.

342.Rājañātakānāmāti ettha raññā jāniyanti ‘‘amhākaṃ garū’’tirājañātā,teyevarājañātakāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Tadatthaṃ adhippāyena dassento āha ‘‘rājā amhe jānātī’’tiādi.Pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavāloti pahaṭṭho kaṇṇo ca vālo ca etassāti pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavālo.Bandhaniccaleti rajjuvallīhi bandho viya niccale, pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavāleti sambandho. ‘‘Katvā’’ti iminā ‘‘abhidhāvī’’ti pade kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.

342.Rājañātakānāmāti: here, they are known by the king as "our teachers," therefore rājañātā, those very ones are rājañātakā, this meaning should be seen. Showing that meaning with intention, he says "the king knows us," etc. Pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavāloti: one who has a raised ear and tail is pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavālo. Bandhaniccaleti: immovable like being tied with ropes and creepers, pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavālo is the connection. With "having done," he shows the state of being an adverb of the verb in the word "abhidhāvī."

Dukkhañhi kuñjara nāgamāsadoti ettha kuñjarasaddassa āmantanapadabhāvaṃ āvikaronto āha ‘‘bho kuñjarā’’ti. Nāgasaddassa ahināgahatthināgesu pavattanato vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhanāga’’nti.Āsadoti padassa ākodhena sadanaṃ upagamanaṃ āsadoti dassento āha ‘‘vadhakacittena upagamanaṃ nāmā’’ti.Dukkhanti etarahi ca āyatiñca dukkhakāraṇaṃ.Dukkhaṃ hīti hisaddo padapūraṇamattaṃ, atha vā dukkhamevāti attho. ‘‘Buddhanāgaṃ ghātakassā’’ti iminā nāgaṃ hanatītināgahatoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

Dukkhañhi kuñjara nāgamāsadoti: here, making clear the state of the word kuñjara as a vocative term, he says "O kuñjara". Because the word nāga occurs for snake, nāga elephant, and Buddha nāga, it was said "Buddha nāga". Showing that āsado means approaching with anger, he says "approaching with the intention of killing is called". Dukkhaṃti: a cause of suffering both now and in the future. Dukkhaṃ hīti: the word hi is merely a filler, or it means only suffering. With "the killer of the Buddha nāga", he shows that "one who kills the nāga" is the meaning of the word nāgahato.

Paṭikuṭiyova osakkīti ettha tathāgatassa paṭimukhaṃ kuṭena gamanametassātipaṭikuṭiyo,paṭikuṭiyo eva hutvā osakkīti dassento āha ‘‘tathāgatābhimukhoyeva piṭṭhimehi pādehi osakkī’’ti. ‘‘Na jānātī’’ti iminā lakkha dassanaṅkesūti dhātupāṭhesu (pāṇinī 1539 saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 dakārantadhātu) vuttesu atthesu idha dassanatthoti dasseti.Na lakkhitabboti aññehi sappurisehi na lakkhitabboti attho. Ettha ṇyapaccayo kattukammesu hoti, yakārassa kakāraṃ katvāalakkhikoti vuttaṃ.

Paṭikuṭiyova osakkīti: here, because the Tathāgata's going with his face towards (him) is paṭikuṭiyo, showing that he retreated as if being paṭikuṭiyo, he says "having retreated with his back feet facing the Tathāgata". With "he does not know," here, in the meanings stated in the root meanings of "seeing, showing, signs" in the Dhātupāṭhas, he shows that here it is in the sense of seeing. Na lakkhitabboti: should not be noticed by other good people, is the meaning. Here, the suffix ṇya is in the active-passive sense, having made kakāra for yakāra, it was said alakkhiko.

343.‘‘Bhuñjitabbabhojana’’nti iminātikabhojananti ettha yupaccayassa kammatthabhāvaṃ dasseti.Tanti tikabhojanaṃ.Yathādhammoti ‘‘gaṇabhojane pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 209) vuttāya mātikāvibhaṅgapāḷiyā anurūpaṃ.Pañcavatthuyācanakathāti pañca vatthūni yācanassa kathā.Āyukappanti avīcimahāniraye āyukappaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Avīcimahāniraye āyukappo nāma eko antarakappoti jinālaṅkāraṭīkādīsu (mi. pa. 4.1.3; kathā. aṭṭha. 654-657; itivu. aṭṭha. 18; sārattha. ṭī. cūḷavagga 3.343; a. ni. ṭī. 3.662) vutto. ‘‘Eko asaṅkhyeyyakappo’’ti sammohavinodanādīsu (vibha. aṭṭha. 809; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.128; vi. vi. ṭī. 1.410; vajira. ṭī. pārājikaṇḍa 410) vutto.Seṭṭhaṃ puññanti mahantaṃ puññaṃ. Iminābrahaṃ puññanti brahasaddo mahantatthoti dasseti. Braha vuddhiyanti dhātupāṭhesu (pāṇinī 735; saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 hakārantadhātu) vuttattā brahasaddo mahantavācako hoti. Brahadhātuto apaccayaṃ katvā‘‘brahā’’tipi, mapaccayaṃ katvā ‘‘brahmā’’tipi pāṭho atthi.Āyukappamevāti saggesu āyukappameva.

343. "Bhuñjitabbabhojana" here shows, by the affix yu, that tikabhojana is in the objective passive sense. Ta means that tikabhojana. Yathādhammo means conforming to the Mātikāvibhaṅgapāḷi, which states, "Pācittiya for communal meals" (pāci. 209). Pañcavatthuyācanakathā means the discussion about requesting the five items. Āyukappa is said referring to the life-span in Avīci Great Hell. In Jinālaṅkāraṭīkā etc. (mi. pa. 4.1.3; kathā. aṭṭha. 654-657; itivu. aṭṭha. 18; sārattha. ṭī. cūḷavagga 3.343; a. ni. ṭī. 3.662) it is stated that a life-span in Avīci Great Hell is one antarakappa. "One asaṅkhyeyyakappa" is stated in Sammohavinodanā etc. (vibha. aṭṭha. 809; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.128; vi. vi. ṭī. 1.410; vajira. ṭī. pārājikaṇḍa 410). Seṭṭhaṃ puñña means great merit. This shows that brahaṃ puñña, where the word braha means great. Because it is stated in the lists of roots (pāṇinī 735; saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 hakārantadhātu) that braha means growth, the word braha signifies greatness. There is also the reading ‘‘brahā’’ with the affix a from the root braha, and also "brahmā" with the affix ma. Āyukappamevā means the life-span only in the heavens.

Saṅghabhedakathā
Account of the Schism of the Sangha

344.Soti devadatto, gato kirāti sambandho.Tatthevāti vihārasīmāyameva.Āveṇikanti bhikkhusaṅghato āveṇikaṃ.

344. So means Devadatta; it is related as "he went, it seems." Tatthevā means in that same monastery boundary. Āveṇika means separate from the Sangha of bhikkhus.

345.Āgilāyatīti ettha ātyūpasaggo abhibhavanattho, giledhātu bādhanatthoti āha ‘‘vedanābhibhūtā bādhatī’’ti.Tanti piṭṭhiṃ. Parassa cittaṃ ādisitvā desayati etāyātiādesanā,sā eva pāṭihāriyaṃādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ. Anusāsati etāyātianusāsanī,imamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘evampi te’’tiādi.

345. Āgilāyatī here, the prefix āti signifies overpowering, and the root gilā means afflicting, thus he says "being afflicted, torments." Ta means the back. Ādesanā is so called because one teaches after directing the mind of another; that miracle itself is ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ (the miracle of mind-reading). Anusāsanī is so called because one instructs with it; showing this very meaning, he says, "Even so to you," etc.

346.Mamānukrubbanti ettha anutyūpasaggo anukiriyattho karadhātu antapaccayo gacchantādigaṇoti dassento āha ‘‘mamānukiriyaṃ kurumāno’’ti. ‘‘Dukkhito’’ti iminākapaṇoti ettha kapadhātu hiṃsanatthoti dasseti.Mahāvarāhassāti varāhasaddassa sūkaratthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘mahānāgassā’’ti. ‘‘Pathavi’’nti imināmahiṃ vikubbatoti ettha mahīsaddassa evaṃnāmakaṃ mahānadiṃ paṭikkhipati. ‘‘Padālentassā’’ti iminā karadhātuyā vityūpasaggavasena padālanatthaṃ dasseti.Bhisaṃghasamānassāti ettha mānasaddo katvatthoti āha ‘‘bhisaṃ ghasantassā’’ti.Ghasantassāti bhakkhantassa. Nadīnāmakaṃ taṃ pokkharaṇinti yojanā. Iminānadīsu jaggatoti ettha nadī nāma pokkharaṇīti dasseti.Jaggatoti hatthiyūthaṃ pālentassa.

346. Mamānukrubba here, showing that the prefix anu signifies doing after, and the root kara with the affix anta is in the group of gacchanta etc., he says, "doing according to my actions." By "Dukkhito" here, he shows that in kapaṇo, the root kapa means injuring. Mahāvarāhassā rejecting that varāha means pig, he says "of a great nāga." By "Pathavi" here, in mahiṃ vikubbato, he rejects that mahī means a great river of that name. By "Padālentassa," he shows the meaning of splitting derived from the root kara with the prefix vi. Bhisaṃ ghasamānassā here, he says that the word māna is in the sense of doing, "eating lotus shoots." Ghasantassā means eating. The construction is: that pond named river. Hereby, he shows that in nadīsu jaggato, nadī means pond. Jaggato means protecting a herd of elephants.

347.‘‘Sutāti sotā’’ti iminā pāḷiyā dvidhābhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Nissandeho’’ti imināasandiddhoti ettha dihadhātuṃ dasseti, disadhātuṃ nivatteti.

347. By "Sutāti sotā," he shows the doubling in the Pali. By "Nissandeho," he shows the root diha in asandiddho, and rejects the root disa.

350.Buddhasahassenapīti pisaddo garahattho, pageva ekena buddhenāti dasseti.

350. Buddhasahassenapī the particle pi signifies censure, showing it is even more so with one Buddha.

Aṭṭhāti ākhyātapadassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ṭhito’’ti. Devadattoti me sutanti ettha ‘‘me’’ti padaṃ bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘bhagavatā’’ti.Tadevāti sutameva.Idanti ‘‘devadattoti me suta’’nti vacanaṃ.Anucinātīti anuvaḍḍheti. ‘‘Patvā’’ti imināāsajjananti ettha sadadhātuyā gatyatthaṃ, kiriyāvisesanañca dasseti.Avīcinirayaṃ pattoti ettha idāni na devadatto avīcinirayaṃ patto hoti, āyatiṃ pana avīciniraye avassambhāviyattā ‘‘avīcinirayaṃ patto’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘āsaṃsāyaṃ atītavacana’’nti.Āsaṃsāyanti avassambhāviyatthe. Bhesmā hi udadhī mahāti etthabhesmāsaddo bhayānakapariyāyoti āha ‘‘bhayānako’’ti.

Aṭṭhā showing the meaning of the verb, he says, "stood." In Devadattoti me suta, he says that the word "me" is said referring to the Buddha, "by the Blessed One." Tadevā means just that heard. Ida means the statement, "Devadattoti me suta." Anucinātī means increases. By "Patvā," here he shows the meaning of going of the root sada in āsajjana, and that it is an adverb of manner. Avīcinirayaṃ patto here, it is not that Devadatta has now reached Avīci Hell, but because it is necessarily going to happen in the future, it is said "Avīcinirayaṃ patto," thus he says, "past tense with expectation." Āsaṃsāya means in the sense of necessary happening. In Bhesmā hi udadhī mahāti, he says that the word bhesmā is a synonym for fearful, "frightful."

Upālipañhākathā
Account of Upāli's Question

351.Ekatoti ettha topaccayassa sattamyatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dhammavādīpakkhe’’ti. ‘‘Anunayanto’’ti imināanussāvetīti ettha anusaddassa atthaṃ dasseti.Anunayantoti punappunaṃ nayanto. Sāvanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘na tumhākaṃyevā’’tiādi. Ayaṃ adhammo vā ayaṃ avinayo vā idaṃ asatthusāsanaṃ vā yadi bhaveyyāti yojanā. ‘‘Bodhetī’’ti imināsāvetīti ettha sudhātuyā atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Anussāvetvā’’ti iminā ‘‘anussāveti, salākaṃ gāhetī’’ti ettha anussāvanakiriyā pubbabhāge pavattā, salākaggāhakiriyā pacchābhāgeti dasseti.

351. Ekato here, showing that the affix topa functions in the sense of the locative case, he says, "on the side of those who speak in accordance with the Dhamma." By "Anunayanto," here he shows the meaning of the prefix anu in anussāvetī. Anunayanto means repeatedly leading. Showing the manner of informing, he says, "not only yours," etc. The construction is: if this were adhamma, or this were not vinaya, or this were not the Teacher's instruction. By "Bodhetī," here he shows the meaning of the root su in sāvetī. By "Anussāvetvā," here in "anussāveti, salākaṃ gāhetī," he shows that the action of informing happens in the prior part, and the action of taking lots happens in the later part.

Ettāvatāti ettakena anussāvanasalākaggāhamattena. Na pana saṅgho bhinno hoti, anussāvetvā salākaṃ gāhetvā āveṇikaṃ saṅghakamme kateyeva saṅgho bhinno hotīti adhippāyo.

Ettāvatā means with just this much of informing and taking lots. But the Sangha is not divided; the intention is that the Sangha is divided only when a separate (āveṇika) act of the Sangha is done after informing and taking lots.

evanti pakatatte saṅghe bhinde satīti attho.Kathanti kenākārena. Punakathanti kasmā kāraṇā.Raññoti ajātasatturañño, kāritakammaṃ.‘‘Ghātāpitattā’’ti bimbisārarājānaṃ ghātāpitattā.Tatthāti ‘‘bhikkhu kho upālī’’tiādivacane, ṭhatvā parihāraṃ vadāmāti yojanā.Viraddhattāti virādhitattā. Tamatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tena hī’’tiādi. Tatthatena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto.Evañhīti evameva.Tassāti devadattassa.Kumāro panāti ajātasattukumāro pana, katamatteyeva na vuttāti sambandho.Tassāti devadattassa.Tasmāti yasmā saṅghabhedato pubbe ruhituppādakammaṃ karontassāpi pacchā abhabbabhāvo ropito, tasmā.

eva means when the Sangha is divided in such a condition. Katha means in what manner. Again, katha means for what reason. Rañño means King Ajātasattu, work caused to be done. ‘‘Ghātāpitattā’’ means because he caused King Bimbisāra to be killed. Tatthā means in the statement beginning with "Bhikkhu kho upālī," the construction is: standing there, let us speak a dispensation. Viraddhattā means because of having offended. Expanding on that meaning, he says, "tena hī," etc. There, tena hī is a particle in the sense of urging. Evañhī means just so. Tassā means of Devadatta. Kumāro panā means but Prince Ajātasattu, the connection is: at just what point was it not said? Tassā means of Devadatta. Tasmā means since even when doing the act of causing the arising of a foetus before the schism of the Sangha, the state of being incapable was later imputed, therefore.

suttantapariyāyenāti suttantadesanāya, suttantadesanānayatoti vuttaṃ hoti.Tathāti tato aññathā.

suttantapariyāyenā means by the teaching of the Suttantas, it is said by the method of the Suttanta teachings. Tathā means other than that.

Tatthāti dvīsu dhammādhammesu.Evaṃ amhākanti evaṃ kariyamāne amhākaṃ. Evaṃ suttantapariyāyena dhammādhammānaṃ visesaṃ dassetvā idāni vinayapariyāyena tesaṃ taṃ dassento āha ‘‘vinayapariyāyena panā’’tiādi. Bhūtena vatthunā kātabbanti sambandho. Evaṃ ‘‘abhūtena vatthunā’’ti etthāpi.

Tatthā means in the two, Dhamma and adhamma. Evaṃ amhāka means in doing so, for us. Having thus shown the distinction between Dhamma and adhamma by the method of the Suttantas, now, showing that same thing by the method of the Vinaya, he says, "vinayapariyāyena panā," etc. The connection is: it is to be done with a real thing. So also in "abhūtena vatthunā."

vinayo,vinayanayena kāyaṃ vācaṃ vinetītivinayoti vacanattho kātabbo.

vinayo, the meaning of the word vinayo is to be construed as: one trains the body and speech by the method of training.

Evaṃ dvinnaṃ pariyāyānaṃ vasena vinayāvinayadukassa visesaṃ dassetvā idāni bhāsitābhāsitadukassa visesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘suttantapariyāyena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ tathāgatena bhāsitaṃ lapitanti yojanā.

Having thus shown the distinction of the vinaya and avinaya pair based on the two methods, now, showing the distinction of the spoken and unspoken pair, he says, "suttantapariyāyena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā," etc. There, the connection is: this statement "aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo" is spoken, uttered by the Tathāgata.

Aṭṭhuppattivasenāti kāraṇuppattivasena. Kāraṇañhi arati phalaṃ etasmātiatthoti vuccati, atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, sāyeva aṭṭhuppatti tthakārassa ṭṭhakāraṃ katvā, aṭṭhuppattiyā vaso aṭṭhuppattivaso, tena. Idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘suttantadesanā jātakakathā’’ti dvīhipi padehi yojetabbaṃ.Idanti phalasamāpattisamāpajjanādi.Āciṇṇanti ā bandhitaṃ, punappunaṃ vā upacitaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ, paguṇaṃ vā.Cāriyapakkamananti cāriyatthaṃ pakkamanaṃ.

Aṭṭhuppattivasenā means based on the arising of the cause. For the cause is called attho (meaning), because arati (aversion) is the result of this; the arising of the meaning is atthuppatti, that itself is aṭṭhuppatti, by making the ttha into ṭṭha; aṭṭhuppattiyā vaso is aṭṭhuppattivaso, by that. This expression should be connected with the two expressions "suttantadesanā jātakakathā." Ida means attainment of fruition, attainment of samāpatti, etc. Āciṇṇa means bound, or repeatedly accumulated, increased, or skilled. Cāriyapakkamana means departure for the sake of conduct.

Evaṃ dvinnaṃ pariyāyānaṃ vasena āciṇṇānāciṇṇadukassa visesaṃ dassetvā idāni paññattadukassa visesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘suttantapariyāyena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādi. Taṃ bhāsitābhāsitadukasadisameva. Evaṃ dvinnaṃ suttantavinayapariyāyānaṃ vasena pañcannaṃ dukānaṃ viseso dassito.

Having thus shown the distinction of the practiced and unpracticed pair based on the two methods, now, showing the distinction of the designated pair, he says, "suttantapariyāyena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā," etc. That is just like the spoken and unspoken pair. Thus the distinction of the five pairs is shown based on the two Suttanta and Vinaya methods.

Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade. Idaṃ padaṃ pacchimavākyepi anuvattetabbaṃ.

Tattha tatthā means in that particular training rule. This expression should be applied in the last sentence as well.

pañcāpattikkhandhāti thullaccayapācittiyapāṭidesanīyadukkaṭadubbhāsitavasena pañca āpattirāsayo.Dve āpattikkhandhāti pārājikasaṅghādisesavasena dve āpattirāsayo.

pañcāpattikkhandhā means the five aggregates of offenses in terms of thullaccaya, pācittiya, pāṭidesanīya, dukkaṭa, and dubbhāsita. Dve āpattikkhandhā means the two aggregates of offenses in terms of pārājika and saṅghādisesa.

Sāvasesānāvasesaduke cha āpattikkhandhāti pārājikāpattito avasesā cha āpattirāsayo.

In the remaining and non-remaining pair, six aggregates of offenses means the six aggregates of offenses remaining from the pārājika offense.

duṭṭhullānāma, lahukāpattiaduṭṭhullānāmāti evaṃ vinayapariyāyavaseneva catunnaṃ dukānaṃ viseso dassito.

duṭṭhullā means light offenses, and aduṭṭhullā means not heavy offenses; thus, the distinction of the four pairs is shown based only on the Vinaya method.

Etthāti ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammoti dīpentī’’tiādivacane.Catunnaṃ saṅghakammānanti apalokanādivasena catunnaṃ saṅghakammānaṃ.Karontehihetubhūtehi, hetvatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.

Etthā means in the statement beginning with "adhammaṃ dhammoti dīpentī." Catunnaṃ saṅghakammāna means of the four acts of the Sangha in terms of apalokana, etc. Karontehi means by the causal factors; this is the instrumental case in the sense of a cause.

Tatthāti ‘‘te imehī’’tiādivacane.Apakassantīti ettha kasadhātussa gatyatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘parisaṃ ākaḍḍhantī’’ti.Vijaṭentīti vijaṭaṃ karonti, visuṃ karontīti attho.Ekamantaṃ ussādentīti ekasmiṃ ante ussadaṃ karonti.Avapakassantīti ettha dvinnaṃ upasaggānaṃ vasena ativiyattho daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘ati viya ākaḍḍhantī’’ti. Ativiyatthaṃ āvikaronto āha ‘‘yathā visaṃsaṭṭhāva honti, evaṃ karontī’’ti.Yathāti yenākārena kariyamāneti sambandho. ‘‘Visu’’nti imināāveṇisaddo ‘‘visu’’ntiatthavācako anipphannapāṭipadikoti dasseti.Vatthūsūti bhedakaravatthūsu.Imaṃ gaṇhathāti imaṃ vādaṃ gaṇhatha.Visunti āveṇiṃ. Imasmiṃ khandhake vuttavacanaṃ parivārapāḷiyā saṃsandento āha ‘‘parivāre panā’’tiādi. Tatthapañcahi ākārehīti ‘‘kammena uddesena voharanto anussāvanena salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458) evaṃ pañcahi kāraṇehi.Tassāti parivāre vuttavacanassa.Idhāti imasmiṃ saṅghabhedakakkhandhake, vuttena iminā saṅghabhedalakkhaṇenāti yojanā. ‘‘Atthato nānākaraṇaṃ natthī’’ti iminā saddato nānākaraṇaṃ atthīti dīpeti.Assāti saṅghabhedalakkhaṇassa. Taṃ pana nānākaraṇābhāvanti yojanā.Tatthevāti parivāre eva.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ saṅghabhedakakkhandhake.

Tatthā means in the statement beginning with "te imehī," etc. Apakassantī here, showing the meaning of going of the root kasa, he says, "drawing the assembly away." Vijaṭentī means making disjointed, it means separating. Ekamantaṃ ussādentī means making prominent on one side. Avapakassantī here, it should be seen that the sense of excessiveness comes through by means of the two prefixes, thus he says, "drawing away excessively." Revealing the sense of excessiveness, he says, "they do so as if they were completely unmixed." Yathā means in whatever way it is being done. By "Visu," he shows that the word āveṇi is a word signifying "separate," and is an underived nominal stem. Vatthūsū means in the grounds for schism. Imaṃ gaṇhathā means accept this doctrine. Visu means separate. Comparing the statement made in this khandhaka with the parivārapāḷi, he says, "parivāre panā," etc. There, pañcahi ākārehī means by five means, such as "by action, by recitation, by declaring, by informing, by taking lots" (pari. 458). Tassā means of the statement made in the parivāra. Idhā means in this Schism of the Sangha khandhaka, the connection is: by this said characteristic of the schism of the Sangha. By "Atthato nānākaraṇaṃ natthī," he indicates that there is separateness in wording. Assā means of the characteristic of the schism of the Sangha. But that is the absence of separateness, the construction. Tatthevā means just in the parivāra. Sabbatthā means in the entire Schism of the Sangha khandhaka.

Iti saṅghabhedakakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Schism of the Sangha Khandhaka.

8. Vattakkhandhakaṃ

8. Vatta Khandhaka

1. Āgantukavattakathā
1. Account of the Duties for Newcomer Bhikkhus

357.Vattakkhandhakeārāmanti upacārasīmaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘upacārasīmasamīpa’’nti. ‘‘Gahetvā’’ti padassa ‘‘upāhanā’’ti kammaṃ pākaṭaṃ, karaṇaṃ pana apākaṭaṃ. Tasmā karaṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘upāhanadaṇḍakena gahetvā’’ti. Iminā ‘‘hatthenā’’ti karaṇaṃ nivatteti.Paṭikkamantīti ettha pavisantīti ca apakkamantīti ca atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘sannipatantī’’ti.Upāhanā…pe… pucchitabbāti ettha ‘‘pucchitabbā’’ti padassa saha kammena pucchitabbākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘katarasmiṃ ṭhāne’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘katarasmiṃ…pe… coḷaka’’nti iminā pucchitabbākāraṃ dasseti. ‘‘Āvāsikā bhikkhū’’ti iminā kammaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Pattharitabba’’nti imināvissajjetabbanti ettha sajadhātuyā cajanatthaṃ paṭikkhipati.Gocaro pucchitabboti ettha gocarasaddo bhikkhācārasaddena atthato ekanti dassento āha ‘‘bhikkhācāro pucchitabbo’’ti. Bhikkhāya caranti etthātibhikkhācāro,gocaragāmo.Yatthāti yasmiṃ gāme. ‘‘Ki’’ntiādināpānīyaṃ pucchitabbantiādīsu pucchitabbākāraṃ dasseti.Kaṃ kālanti kasmiṃ kāle.

357. In the Vatta Khandhaka, ārāma is said referring to the vicinity of the boundary, thus he says, "near the boundary." For the word "Gahetvā," the object "upāhanā" is evident, but the instrument is not evident. Therefore, showing the instrument, he says, "having taken it with a shoe stick." Hereby, he excludes "by hand" as the instrument. Paṭikkamantī here, rejecting the meaning of both entering and departing, he says, "gathering together." Upāhanā…pe… pucchitabbā here, showing the manner of questioning with the object, for the word "pucchitabbā," he says, "in which place," etc. There, by "in which…pe… cloth," he shows the manner of questioning. By "Āvāsikā bhikkhū," he shows the action. By "Pattharitabba," here he rejects that vissajjetabba means abandoning in sajadhātu. Gocaro pucchitabbo here, showing that the word gocara is the same in meaning as the expression bhikkhācāra, he says, "the alms round should be asked about." Bhikkhācāro, the village where one wanders for alms is bhikkhācāro, alms village. Yatthā means in which village. By "Ki," etc., in pānīyaṃ pucchitabba etc., he shows the manner of questioning. Kaṃ kāla means at what time.

Bahi nikkhamantassāti vihārato bahi nikkhamantassa.Nilloketabboti oloketabbo. ‘‘Yadi sakkotī’’ti imināsace ussahatīti ettha sacesaddo yadipariyāyo, ussahatisaddo sakkoti pariyāyoti dasseti. Sakkontassa vihārasodhanavatteti sambandho.

Bahi nikkhamantassā means for one going out of the monastery. Nilloketabbo means should be looked at. By "Yadi sakkotī," here he shows that in sace ussahatī, the word sace is a synonym for yadi, and the word ussahati is a synonym for sakkoti. The connection is: for one who is able, the duty of cleaning the monastery.

2. Āvāsikavattakathā
2. Account of the Duties for Resident Bhikkhus

359.Āvāsikavatte evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Sabbaṃ kātabbanti sambandho.Tassāti vuḍḍhatarassa āgantukassa. ‘‘Paṇḍito’’tiādinā sace bālo ‘‘sammajjāhi tāva cetiyaṅgaṇa’’nti na vadati, sammajjaniṃ nikkhipitvā tassa vattameva kātabbanti dasseti.Bhesajjameva kātabbanti sahāvadhāraṇena vuttattā bālo ‘‘karohi tāva bhesajja’’nti avadantopi bhesajjameva kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṇḍito hī’’tiādinā pana āgantukassa vattabbabhāvamattameva dasseti. Pāḷimuttakavattaṃ dassento āha‘‘apicā’’tiādi.Bījanenāti bījaniyā. ‘‘Bījana’’nti hi napuṃsakaliṅgo, ‘‘bījanī’’ti itthiliṅgo. ‘‘Bījitabbo’’ti ca ‘‘bījitabba’’nti ca iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena bījiyati anenātibījanaṃ,bījiyati etāyātibījanīti vacanattho kātabbo.Assāti vuḍḍhataraāgantukassa.Makkhetabbāti añjetabbā.ti saccaṃ.Etthāti upāhanapuñchane.Katthāti kasmiṃ vihāre. Pucchitena āvāsikenāti sambandho.

359. In the section on duties regarding residence, the interpretation should be understood in this way. The connection is that everything should be done. Tassa means for the older, newly arrived monk. With "Paṇḍito," etc., it indicates that if a foolish monk does not say, "First sweep the courtyard of the shrine," one should set aside the broom and perform the duties for him. Because it is said with certainty, Bhesajjameva kātabbaṃ, even if a foolish monk does not say, "First make medicine," only medicine should be made. However, with "Paṇḍito hī," etc., it only shows that one should say something to the newly arrived monk. Showing a duty outside of the Pāḷi, he says, "Apicā" etc. Bījanenā means with a fan. "Bījana" is neuter gender, "bījanī" is feminine gender. And with this commentary statement "Bījitabbo" and "bījitabba," the meaning of the word should be made: bījanaṃ because one fans with it, bījanī because one fans with that. Assā means of the older, newly arrived monk. Makkhetabbā means to be anointed. means truly. Etthā means in wiping the shoes. Katthā means in which monastery. This is connected to 'by the resident who was asked'.

‘‘Attano santikaṃ…pe… na labhatī’’ti iminā attānaṃ sandhāya anāgacchantopi attano santikaṃ sampattassa āgantukassa vattaṃ akātuṃ na labhatīti dasseti.

"Attano santikaṃ…pe… na labhatī" means that even if one does not come in reference to oneself, one is not allowed to not perform duties for a newly arrived monk who has come to one's residence.

3. Gamikavattakathā
3. Talk on the Duties Regarding Departing

360.Gamikavatte evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Tatthāti senāsanakkhandhake. Taṃ sabbaṃ paṭisāmetvāti sambandho. Yattha yesu pāsāṇapiṭṭhipāsāṇatthambhesu upacikā nārohanti, tassaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā tesu pāsāṇatthambhesu vā yaṃ katasenāsanaṃ atthi, taṃ anāpucchantassāpi anāpattīti yojanā. Catūsu pāsāṇesūtiādi vuttanti sambandho, upacikānaṃ uppattiṭṭhāne kateti sambandho.Ayanti ānisaṃso. Ovassakagehe pana ṭhapitānaṃ mañcapīṭhānanti sambandho.

360. In the section on duties regarding departing, the interpretation should be understood in this way. Tatthā means in the lodging section. The connection is that all of that should be returned. Where upacikā do not climb on whichever stone slabs or stone pillars, there is no offense even if one does not ask permission for whatever lodging is made on that stone slab or those stone pillars. The connection is that catūsu pāsāṇesūtiādi was said, connecting to making in the place of origin of the upacikā. Aya means this benefit. However, the connection is to the couches and chairs placed in the covered area.

4. Anumodanavattakathā
4. Talk on the Duties Regarding Anumodanā

362.Iddhaṃ ahosīti ettha idhadhātuyā vaḍḍhanatthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘sampannaṃ ahosī’’ti. Saṅghatthere nisinneti sambandho. Anuthere anumodanatthāya nisinneti yojanā. Saṅghattherena ajjhiṭṭhepīti sambandho. Anumodako vadatīti sambandho. Anu punappunaṃ, pacchā vā dāyake dhammakathāya modetītianumodako. ‘‘Gacchathā’’ti sace vadati anumodakoti yojanā.Tassāti anumodakassa. Manussā kārentīti sambandho. ‘‘Ekenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘kārentī’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ.Tassāti kāritabhikkhussa.Anumodanatoti anumodanakāraṇā.Upanisinnakathāti upasamīpe nisinnānaṃ kathiyati etāyāti upanisinnakathā.Anumodanāyāti anumodanatthāya.Ajjhiṭṭhovāti sayaṃ ajjhiṭṭho eva.Etthāti anumodanavatthusmiṃ. ‘‘Sañjātavacco’’ti iminā vacco sañjāto imassātivaccitoti katvā sañjātatthe ita paccayoti dasseti.

362. Regarding Iddhaṃ ahosī, rejecting the meaning of growth from the root idha, he says, "Sampannaṃ ahosī." The connection is with the Saṅgha elder sitting. The construction is: seated for the purpose of anumodanā to the junior elder. The connection is with even if requested by the Saṅgha elder. The connection is that the one doing anumodanā speaks. Anu means repeatedly or later, therefore anumodako means one who gladdens the donor with a Dhamma talk. The construction is: if he says "Gacchathā," he is doing anumodanā. Tassā means of the one doing anumodanā. The connection is that people are causing to be done. The word "ekena" is the causative object in the word "kārentī." Tassā means of the monk caused to do (the work). Anumodanato means because of doing anumodanā. Upanisinnakathā means the talk that is spoken by those sitting nearby. Anumodanāyā means for the purpose of anumodanā. Ajjhiṭṭhovā means requested by oneself alone. Etthā means in the object of anumodanā. With "sañjātavacco," he shows that vaccito is made, meaning "whose utterance has arisen," by making ita a suffix in the sense of 'arisen'.

5. Bhattaggavattakathā
5. Talk on the Duties Regarding the Refectory

364.Bhattaggavatteti bhattaṃ gaṇhanti etthāti bhattaggaṃ, parivisanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tasmiṃ kattabbaṃ vattaṃ bhattaggavattaṃ, tasmiṃ bhattaggavatte evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Manussānaṃ parivisanaṭṭhānaṃ nāma yattha manussā saputtadārā āvasitvā bhikkhūbhojenti. ‘‘Atiallīyitvā’’ti imināanupakhajjāti ettha khadadhātussa hiṃsanaṃ nāma atiallīyananti dasseti.Āsanesu satīti āsanesu santesu. Nisīdantassa navakassāti sambandho.Āpajjatīti āpattiṃ āpajjati. Āpucchite ananujānanto thero āpajjatīti yojanā.Saṅghāṭinti pārutasaṅghāṭiṃ.

364. Bhattaggavatte means that bhattaṃ is taken in this place, therefore bhattaggaṃ means the place of distribution. The duty to be done in that is bhattaggavattaṃ, in that bhattaggavatta, the interpretation should be understood in this way. The place of distribution for people is where people live with their children and wives, and feed the monks. With "atiallīyitvā," he shows that in anupakhajjā, khadadhātu’s meaning, namely harm, means drawing too close. Āsanesu satī means while there are seats. The connection is with the new monk who is sitting down. Āpajjatī means incurs an offense. The construction is: the elder incurs an offense if he does not give permission when asked. Saṅghāṭi means the outer robe that is worn.

Pattadhovanaudakanti bhuñjanatthāya pattānaṃ dhovanaudakaṃ.Gahetabbanti hatthena gahetabbaṃ.

Pattadhovanaudaka means water for washing the bowls for the purpose of eating. Gahetabbaṃ means it should be taken with the hand.

Mattāyāti pamāṇāya.Sabbiādīsu evāti evasaddo ajjhāharitabbo.Sabbiādīsūti sabbitelauttaribhaṅgesu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Yanti sabbiādikaṃ.Appahotīti sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ nappahoti.Tanti sabbiādikaṃ, sampādehīti sambandho. Tādisaṃ sabbiādikanti sambandho.

Mattāyā means according to measure. Sabbiādīsu evā means the word eva should be supplied. Sabbiādīsū means in sesame oil etc., in determining, the locative is used. Ya means that which is sesame oil etc. Appahotī means it is not enough for all the monks. Ta means that sesame oil etc., the connection is 'replenish'. The connection is with 'such sesame oil etc'.

Hatthadhovanaudakanti bhuttāvīnaṃ hatthassa dhovanaudakaṃ.Antarāti bhojanassa majjhe.Pipāsitenāti pivituṃ icchantena.Galeti kaṇṭhe.

Hatthadhovanaudaka means water for washing hands of those who have eaten. Antarā means in the middle of the meal. Pipāsitenā means by one wishing to drink. Gale means in the throat.

Nivattantenāti ettha kasmā ṭhānā nivattantenāti āha ‘‘bhattaggato’’ti. Kathaṃ kenākārena nivattitabbanti yojanā. Kasmā navakehi bhikkhūhi paṭhamataraṃ nivattitabbanti āha ‘‘sambādhesu hī’’tiādi.Nikkhamanokāsoti paṭhamataraṃ nikkhantokāso.Paṭipāṭiyāti vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā.Dhureti gehadvārassa samīpe. Dhurasaddo hi idha samīpavācako. Navakā antogehe ce nisinnā hontīti yojanā.Antarenāti bhikkhūnaṃ vivarena, majjhena vā.Viraḷāyāti tanukāya.

Regarding Nivattantenā, from which place should one turn back? He says "bhattaggato." In what way should one turn back? The construction: why should it be turned back earlier by the new monks? He says, "sambādhesu hī," etc. Nikkhamanokāso means the opportunity to exit earlier. Paṭipāṭiyā means in order of seniority. Dhure means near the doorway of the house. The word dhura here means proximity. The construction is: if the new monks are sitting inside the house. Antarenā means through the opening or middle of the monks. Viraḷāyā means thin.

6. Piṇḍacārikavattakathā
6. Talk on the Duties Regarding Alms Round

366.Piṇḍacārikavatte evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Kappāsaṃ vā gahetvāti sambandho.Yañcāti yañca kiñci vatthuṃ, gahetvāti sambandho.Karontī ṭhitā vāti karontī hutvā ṭhitā vā.Tanti kammaṃ.Na ca bhikkhādāyikāyāti itthiliṅgavasena vuttattā itthiyā eva mukhaṃ na ulloketabbanti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘itthī vā hotū’’tiādi. ‘‘Bhikkhādānasamaye’’ti iminā aññasmiṃ samaye olokentopi natthi dosoti dasseti. Ekasmiṃ kāle bhikkhāya dadamānāya sabbakālampi na oloketabbanti anicchitatthaṃ paṭikkhipati.

366. In the section on duties regarding going on alms round, the interpretation should be understood in this way. The connection is with having taken cotton etc. Yañcā means whatever object, the connection is with 'having taken'. Karontī ṭhitā vā means either standing having done (something). Ta means that action. Na ca bhikkhādāyikāyā because it is said in the feminine gender, rejecting the meaning that one should not look at the face of only a woman, he says "itthī vā hotū" etc. With "bhikkhādānasamaye," he shows that there is no fault even if one looks at another time. Rejecting the meaning that one should never look at all times while she is giving alms at one time.

7. Āraññikavattakathā
7. Talk on the Duties Regarding Forest Dwelling

368.Āraññikavatte evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Senāsanā otaritabbanti ettha araññe rukkhamūlādīsu nisinnassa vihārābhāvato senāsanaṃ nāma vasanaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘vasanaṭṭhānato nikkhamitabba’’nti.

368. In the section on duties regarding forest dwelling, the interpretation should be understood in this way. Regarding senāsanā otaritabba, because there is no monastery for one sitting at the foot of a tree etc. in the forest, he says "vasanaṭṭhānato nikkhamitabba" in reference to the lodging, namely the dwelling place.

Pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvāti ettha kathaṃ patto thavikāya pakkhipitabboti āha ‘‘sace bahī’’tiādi. Tattha patto pakkhipitabboti sambandho.Dhovitvā katvāti padesu ‘‘pattaṃ vodaka’’nti vibhattipariṇāmaṃ katvā sambandhitabbaṃ.Tampīti veḷunāḷikampi.Samīpeti āraññakassa senāsanassa samīpe. Yathā ca āraññakassa araṇisahitaṃ icchitabbaṃ, evaṃ kantāraṃ paṭipannassāpi araṇisahitaṃ icchitabbanti yojanā.Gaṇavāsinoti gaṇena saha vāsino, āraññakassāti sambandho.Tenāti araṇisahitena. ‘‘Nakkhattāneva nakkhattapadānī’’ti iminā assayujādinakkhattāneva (abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ 58-60 gāthāsu) disābhāgajānanassa, ca samayajānanassa ca kāraṇattānakkhattapadāni nāmāti dasseti.

Regarding pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā, how should the bowl be put in the bag? He says "sace bahī" etc. The connection is that the bowl should be put there. In the passages "Dhovitvā katvā," the relation should be made by changing the inflection "pattaṃ vodaka." Tampī means even that small bamboo tube. Samīpe means near the lodging of the forest dweller. Just as a fire drill should be desired with the forest dweller, so too a fire drill should be desired with one who has entered a wilderness. Gaṇavāsino means living with a group, the connection is with the forest dweller. Tenā means with the fire drill. With "nakkhattāneva nakkhattapadānī," because the constellations such as Assayuja etc. (Abhidhānappadīpikā verses 58-60) are the cause for knowing the direction, and knowing the time, he shows that nakkhattapadāni nāmā.

8. Senāsanavattakathā
8. Talk on the Duties Regarding Lodging

369.Senāsanavatte evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Dvāraṃ nāmāti mahādvāraṃ.Mahāvaḷañjanti mahantehi janehi paribhuñjitabbaṃ.Tatthāti dvāre.Āpucchitvāvāti vuḍḍhaṃ āpucchitvāva, sabhāgassa vuḍḍhatarassāti sambandho.Vaṭṭatiyevāti yathāsukhaṃ viharituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.Parivattitabbanti parimukhaṃ vattitabbaṃ.

369. In the section on duties regarding lodging, the interpretation should be understood in this way. Dvāraṃ nāmā means the main door. Mahāvaḷañja means to be used by many people. Tatthā means in the doorway. Āpucchitvāvā means having asked permission from an elder, the connection is with an older monk of the same rank. Vaṭṭatiyevā means it is certainly suitable to live as one pleases. Parivattitabba means it should be turned around.

9. Jantāgharavattādikathā
9. Talk on the Duties Regarding the Hot Bath, etc.

371.Jantāgharavatte evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Bahijagatīti bahiālindo.

371. In the section on duties regarding the hot bath, the interpretation should be understood in this way. Bahijagatī means the outer veranda.

373.Ācamanavatthusmiṃ evamattho veditabboti yojanā.Nīharitvāti udakaṃ nīharitvā.Ācamitabbanti dhovitabbaṃ. ‘‘Āpubbo camu dhovane’’ti hi dhātupāṭhesu vuttaṃ.Idaṃ ativivaṭanti idaṃ ṭhānaṃ ativivaṭaṃ, na kenaci paṭicchannanti attho.Udakaṃ alabhantassevāti udakaṃ alabhanteyeva.

373. In the section on the act of rinsing, this meaning should be understood in this way. Nīharitvā means having taken out the water. Ācamitabba means it should be washed. For it is said in the lists of verbal roots "Āpubbo camu dhovane" in the lists of verbal roots. Idaṃ ativivaṭa means this place is very open, meaning it is not covered by anything. Udakaṃ alabhantassevā means only for one who cannot obtain water.

374.Vaccakuṭivatte evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Ayanti dantakaṭṭhaṃ khādato vaccakaraṇaṃ.Sabbatthevāti sabbasmiṃ eva ṭhāne. ‘‘Na pharusena kaṭṭhenā’’ti ettha na kevalaṃ kharakaṭṭhameva, phālitakaṭṭhādayopi chaviavalekhanakaṭṭhā pharusāyeva nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘phālitakaṭṭhena vā’’tiādi.Paviṭṭhassāti vaccakuṭiṃ paviṭṭhassa.

374. In the section on duties regarding the toilet, the interpretation should be understood in this way. Aya means the act of going to the toilet while chewing a toothpick. Sabbatthevā means in every single place. Regarding "Na pharusena kaṭṭhenā," showing that not only a rough stick, but also split sticks etc., sticks that scrape the skin are indeed rough, he says "phālitakaṭṭhena vā" etc. Paviṭṭhassā means of one who has entered the toilet.

Sabbasādhāraṇaṭṭhānanti sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ, sabbehi vā sādhāraṇaṃ vaccakuṭisaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ.Tatrāti tasmiṃ sabbasādhāraṇe ṭhāne.Nibaddhagamanatthāyāti attano nibaddhagamanatthāya kataṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ vā yaṃ puggalikaṭṭhānaṃ vā hotīti yojanā.

Sabbasādhāraṇaṭṭhāna means a place common to all monks, a place known as the toilet common to all. Tatrā means in that common place. Nibaddhagamanatthāyā means the place that is made for one's constant going or whatever personal place there is.

Uhatāti ettha upubbo hadadhātūti dassento āha ‘‘uhaditā’’ti. ‘‘Hada karīsossagge’’ti dhātupāṭhesu (pāṇinī 977 dhātupāṭhe; saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 15 dakārantadhātu) vuttattā vaccakūpato bahi karīsassa ossajjananti āha ‘‘bahi vaccamakkhitā’’ti.Dhovitabbāti udakena dhovitabbā.Etampīti udakassa avijjamānampi.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ vattakkhandhake.

Regarding Uhatā, showing that upa is before the root hada, he says "uhaditā." Because it is said in the lists of verbal roots (Pāṇinī 977 dhātupāṭhe; saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 15 dakārantadhātu) "Hada karīsossagge," he says "bahi vaccamakkhitā" meaning the letting go of excrement outside the toilet pit. Dhovitabbā means they should be washed with water. Etampī means even if there is no water. Sabbatthā means in every section of duties.

Iti vattakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the word-for-word commentary on the section on duties.

9. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhakaṃ

9. The Section on the Establishing of the Pātimokkha

1. Pātimokkhuddesayācanakathā
1. Talk on Requesting the Recitation of the Pātimokkha

383.Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhakenandimukhiyā rattiyāti ettha nandiyati tusiyatīti nandi, ikārantoyaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgo. ‘‘Nandiseno (jā. aṭṭha. 3.4.1) nandivisālo’’tiādīsu ikārantoyaṃ pulliṅgo hoti, idha pana mukhaṃ apekkhitvā ikāranto napuṃsakaliṅgo hoti. Aruṇuṭṭhitakāle odātadisāmukhatāya nandi mukhaṃ etissaṃ rattiyanti nandimukhī, ratti, tāya nandimukhiyā rattiyā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aruṇuṭṭhitakālepi hi nandīmukhā viya ratti khāyatī’’ti.Antopūtinti ettha kāyassa anto kuṇapapūtinti atthaṃ paṭipakkhipanto āha ‘‘attacittasantāne’’tiādi. ‘‘Kilesavassanavasenā’’ti iminā udakavassanavasenāti atthaṃ paṭikkhipati.Avassutanti tintaṃ, kilinnanti attho.Kasambujātanti etthakasambūti saṅkāro. So hi sammuñcaniyā kasiyamāne vilekhiyamāne sambati saddaṃ karotītikasambu,taṃ viya jātanti kasambujātanti attho daṭṭhabbo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana adhippāyavasena ‘‘ākiliṭṭhajāta’’nti vuttaṃ, ativiya kiliṭṭhajātanti attho. ‘‘Ākiṇṇadosatāya kiliṭṭhajāta’’ntipi pāṭho.‘‘Yāva bāhāgahaṇāpi nāmā’’tiiminā pāṭhena dassetīti sambandho.ti padapūraṇamattaṃ.Tenāti moghapurisena. ‘‘Yāvā’’ti nipātapayogattā ‘‘bāhāgahaṇāpī’’ti ettha pañcamīvibhatti avadhiatthe hoti.Nāma-saddo garahatthajotako, tassa payogattā ‘‘āgamessatī’’ti ettha atītatthe anāgatavacanaṃ (saddanītisuttamālāya 893 sutte). Āgamessati nāmāti yojanā.Āgamessatīti īsaṃ adhivāsessati. ‘‘Āto gamuīsamadhivāsane’’ti hi dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 makārantadhātu) vuttaṃ.

383. In the section on the establishing of the Pātimokkha, regarding nandimukhiyā rattiyā, nandi means delight, it is a neuter gender and ends in i. In "nandiseno (jā. aṭṭha. 3.4.1) nandivisālo" etc., this i ending is masculine gender, but here, depending on the mukha, the i ending is neuter gender. Because at the time of the rising of the dawn the face of the directions is white, the night is nandimukhī, the night whose face is delight, therefore, by that nandimukhiyā rattiyā, thus it was said, "even at the time of the rising of the dawn, the night appears as if having a delightful face." Regarding antopūti, rejecting the meaning that the inside of the body is a putrid corpse, he says "attacittasantāne" etc. With "kilesavassanavasenā," he rejects the meaning 'by way of the rain of defilements'. Avassuta means soaked, wet. Regarding kasambujāta, here kasambū means saṅkhāra. For indeed, when it is stirred or scraped with a sweeping tool, it makes a sound samba, therefore it is kasambu, that which is born like that is kasambujāta, this meaning should be seen. However, in the commentary, "ākiliṭṭhajāta" is said according to intention, meaning born very defiled. There is also the reading "ākiṇṇadosatāya kiliṭṭhajāta." The connection is that "Yāva bāhāgahaṇāpi nāmā" shows it with this reading. is merely a particle to fill the sentence. Tenā means by the worthless man. Because of the use of the particle "yāvā," here in "bāhāgahaṇāpī," the ablative case is in the sense of a limit. The word Nāma shows the meaning of censure, because of its use, in "āgamessatī," there is a future word in the past tense (saddanītisuttamālāya 893 sutte). The construction is: āgamessati nāmā. Āgamessatī means will slightly endure. For it is said in the lists of verbal roots (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 makārantadhātu) "Āto gamuīsamadhivāsane."

384.Na āyatakeneva papātoti ettha dīgheneva papātoti dassento āha ‘‘na paṭhamameva gambhīro’’ti. Āyatasaddo hi dīghapariyāyo. ‘‘Na āyatakena gītassarena dhammo gāyitabbo’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 249) viya papāto dīghena tīrassa ādimhi na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.Paṭhamamevāti tīrassa ādimhiyeva. ‘‘Anupubbena gambhīro’’ti iminā ‘‘na paṭhamameva gambhīro’’ti vacanassa adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti.Ṭhitadhammoti tīrassa antoyeva ṭhitasabhāvo.Velaṃ nātivattatīti ettha velāsaddassa tīramariyādatthesu pavattabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘osakkanakandaraṃ mariyādavela’’nti. Tattha ‘‘osakkanakandara’’iti padena tīratthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘mariyāda’’ iti padena mariyādatthaṃ. Kena udakena daritabbotikandaro,udakena osakkano kandaro etthātiosakkanakandaraṃ,tīraṃ. Osakkanakandarabhūtañca mariyādabhūtañca velaṃ tīraṃ nātikkamatīti attho.Tīraṃ vāhetīti ettha vahadhātuyā pāpuṇanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tīraṃ appetī’’ti. Tatthaappetīti pāpuṇāpeti. ‘‘Ussāretī’’ti iminā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘thalaṃ ussāretī’’ti padena ‘‘tīraṃ vāhetī’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassetīti attho dassito.Ussāretīti uddharitvā gamāpeti.Aññāpaṭivedhoti ettha ājānāti, ājānitthāti vāaññaṃarahattamaggo vā arahattaphalaṃ vā, tassa paṭivijjhanaṃ aññāpaṭivedho, sukhuccāraṇatthaṃ majjhe dīgho, aññāpaṭivedho nāma arahattuppattiyeva hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘arahattuppattī’’ti.

384. "Na āyatakeneva papāto"ti: Here, while showing that the chasm is long, he says, "na paṭhamameva gambhīro"ti. The word "āyata" is a synonym for "long." As in "Na āyatakena gītassarena dhammo gāyitabbo"tiādīsu (cūḷava. 249), it is said that the chasm is not at the beginning of the bank in a long way. "Paṭhamameva"ti: at the very beginning of the bank. "Anupubbena gambhīro"ti: With this, he shows the implied meaning of the statement "na paṭhamameva gambhīro"ti. "Ṭhitadhammo"ti: of a nature that remains within the bank itself. "Velaṃ nātivattatī"ti: Here, showing the occurrence of the word "velā" in the meanings of bank and boundary, he says, "osakkanakandaraṃ mariyādavela"nti. There, with the term "osakkanakandara," he shows the meaning of "bank," and with the term "mariyāda," he shows the meaning of "boundary." "Kandaro": What is to be feared by what water? "Osakkanakandaraṃ": A chasm where water recedes; tīraṃ, a bank. The meaning is that it does not cross the bank, which is both a receding chasm and a boundary. "Tīraṃ vāhetī"ti: Here, showing the meaning of attainment of the root "vah," he says, "tīraṃ appetī"ti. There, "appetī"ti: causes to attain. With "ussāretī"ti, the meaning is shown that in the Pali, the meaning of the phrase "tīraṃ vāhetī"ti is shown by the phrase "thalaṃ ussāretī"ti. "Ussāretī"ti: raises and causes to go. "Aññāpaṭivedho"ti: Here, "aññaṃ": knows, has known, either the path of Arahatship or the fruit of Arahatship; the penetration of that is aññāpaṭivedho. It is long in the middle for easy pronunciation. Aññāpaṭivedho means the attainment of Arahatship itself. Therefore, it is said, "arahattuppattī"ti.

385.Channamativassatīti udānapāḷiyā sandhāyabhāsitapāḷibhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘āpatti’’ntiādi. Tatthaidanti ‘‘channamativassatī’’ti vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Etanti navāpattiāpajjanaṃ sandhāyāti sambandho.

385. "Channamativassatī"ti: Showing that the Udāna verse is a verse spoken with hidden meaning, he says, "āpatti"ntiādi. There, "ida"nti: the statement "channamativassatī"ti, the connection is that it is said. "Eta"nti: relating to incurring a new offense.

4. Pātimokkhasavanārahakathā
4. Kathā about those who are worthy to hear the Pātimokkha

386.Purevā pacchā vāti ñattito pure vā pacchā vā.Khetteti pātimokkhaṭṭhapanassa khette. Khettaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.Rekāraṃ bhaṇatīti chattiṃsatyakkharesu re-kāraṃ ñattiṭṭhapanako bhaṇati.Idanti pañcatiṃsatyakkharānaṃ uccāraṇaṭṭhānaṃ.Vutteti ñattiṭṭhapanakena vutte. ‘‘Suṇātu me’’ti vacane anāraddheyevāti yojanā.

386. "Pure vā pacchā vā"ti: either before or after the announcement. "Khette"ti: in the area for establishing the Pātimokkha. Showing the area, he says, "tasmā"tiādi. "Rekāraṃ bhaṇatī"ti: among the thirty-six letters, the one who makes the announcement speaks the letter "re." "Ida"nti: the place of pronunciation of the thirty-five letters. "Vutte"ti: when spoken by the one who makes the announcement. The meaning is that the phrase "Suṇātu me"ti is not even started.

5. Dhammikādhammikapātimokkhaṭṭhapanakathā
5. Kathā about the proper and improper establishment of the Pātimokkha

387.Tena puggalenāti tena cuditakena puggalena.Sā vipattīti sīlavipattiādisaṅkhātā sā vipatti.Saññāamūlikavasenāti ‘‘katā’’ iti saññāya amūlikavasena.Katañcāti ekantena katañca.Akatañcāti ekantena akatañca.

387. "Tena puggalenā"ti: by that accused person. "Sā vipattī"ti: that misfortune, known as the downfall of virtue, etc. "Saññāamūlikavasenā"ti: on the basis of the unfounded perception that "it was done." "Katañcā"ti: and definitely done. "Akatañcā"ti: and definitely not done.

Tenāti anāgamanādikāraṇena.Āpajjatīti pātimokkhaṭṭhapanako āpajjati.Iccassāpīti iti evaṃ assa pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakassāpi.Paccādiyatīti pati ādiyati, ‘‘akataṃ kammaṃ, puna kātabbaṃ kamma’’ntiādinā puna ādīyati, puna ārabhatīti attho.

"Tenā"ti: due to the reason of non-arrival, etc. "Āpajjatī"ti: the one who establishes the Pātimokkha incurs. "Iccassāpī"ti: even to him, the establisher of the Pātimokkha. "Paccādiyatī"ti: "pati ādiyati", he takes up again; with "akataṃ kammaṃ, puna kātabbaṃ kammaṃ"tiādinā, he takes up again, he starts again, is the meaning.

6. Dhammikapātimokkhaṭṭhapanakathā
6. Kathā about the proper establishment of the Pātimokkha

388.Maggapaṭipādanādīsūti maggasmiṃ paṭipādanādīsu. Ādisaddena theyyacittena avahārādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Ākārādisaññāti ākārasaññā liṅgasaññā nimittasaññā.Tanti parisaṅkaṃ sandhāyāti sambandho.

388. "Maggapaṭipādanādīsū"ti: in the performance of the path, etc. With the "ādi" word, he includes stealing with a thievish mind, etc. "Ākārādisaññā"ti: sign-perception, gender-perception, mark-perception. "Ta"nti: the connection is that it relates to suspicion.

7. Attādānaaṅgakathā
7. Kathā about the component of Attādāna

398.Attādānaṃ ādātukāmenāti ettha kiṃ attādānanti āha ‘‘sāsanaṃ sodhetukāmo’’tiādi. Iminā paraṃ codetuṃ attanā ādātabbaṃ adhikaraṇaṃattādānanti vuccatīti dasseti.Akāloimaṃ attādānaṃ ādātunti ettha akālaṃ dassento āha ‘‘rājabhaya’’ntiādi. Tatthavassārattoti vassakālo. So hi vasso ativiya rañjati ettha kāleti vassārattoti vuccati. Vassārattopi adhikaraṇavūpasamatthaṃ lajjiparisāya dūrato ānayanassa dukkarattā akālo nāma.Itīti ayaṃ rājabhayādikāloti attho.Viparītoti rājabhayādīnaṃ abhāvakālo.

398. "Attādānaṃ ādātukāmenā"ti: Here, what is Attādāna? He says, "sāsanaṃ sodhetukāmo"tiādi. With this, he shows that the case that should be taken up by oneself to accuse another is called "Attādāna". "Akālo imaṃ attādānaṃ ādātu"nti: Here, showing the inappropriate time, he says, "rājabhaya"ntiādi. There, "vassāratto"ti: the rainy season. Because that rain greatly delights in this time, it is called vassārattoti. Even vassāratto is called an inappropriate time because it is difficult to bring the modest assembly from afar for the purpose of settling the case. "Itī"ti: this is the time of fear of the king, etc., is the meaning. "Viparīto"ti: the time of the absence of fear of the king, etc.

Abhūtaṃ idaṃ attādānanti ettha abhūtasaddo avijjamānapariyāyoti āha ‘‘asantamida’’nti, idaṃ attādānaṃ avijjamānanti attho. Mayā gahitoti sambandho. Sīlavā puggaloti yojanā.Yanti attādānaṃ saṃvattatīti sambandho.Idanti attādānaṃ.

"Abhūtaṃ idaṃ attādāna"nti: Here, he says that the word "abhūta" is a synonym for "non-existent," "asantamida"nti, this attādāna is non-existent, is the meaning. The connection is that it was taken by me. The connection is a virtuous person. "Ya"nti: the connection is that it contributes to attādāna. "Ida"nti: this attādāna.

Na labhissāmi sandiṭṭhe, labhissāmi sandiṭṭheti ettha ‘‘na labhissāmi, labhissāmī’’ti idaṃ kiṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘appekadā hī’’tiādi. Tatthaappekadāti api ekadā.Hisaddo vitthārajotako.Evarūpāti sandiṭṭhasambhattasabhāvā.Tanti upatthambhakabhikkhulabhanaṃ sandhāyāti sambandho. ‘‘Na labhissāmī’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho.

"Na labhissāmi sandiṭṭhe, labhissāmi sandiṭṭhe"ti: Here, regarding what is the meaning of "na labhissāmi, labhissāmī"ti said? He says, "appekadā hī"tiādi. There, "appekadā"ti: even once. The word "Hi" is indicative of expansion. "Evarūpā"ti: of the nature of being seen and associated with. "Ta"nti: the connection is that it relates to obtaining supporting monks. The connection is that this statement "na labhissāmī"ti is said.

Pacchāpi avippaṭisārakaraṃ bhavissatīti ettha kesaṃ avippaṭisārakaraṃ bhavati viya pañcaṅgasampannāgataṃ attādānaṃ ādiyato pacchāpi avippaṭisārakaraṃ bhavatīti āha ‘‘subhaddaṃ vuḍḍhapabbajita’’ntiādi. Tatthapañcasatikasaṅgītinti pañcasatehi mahākassapādīhi kattabbaṃ saṅgītiṃ. Mahākassapattherassa pacchā samanussaraṇakaraṃ hoti iva hotīti yojanā. Eseva nayo sesesupi.Samanussaraṇakaranti sammodavasena punappunaṃ anussaraṇassa karaṃ. Iminā ‘‘avippaṭisārakara’’nti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.Pacchāpīti ettha pisaddassa avuttasampiṇḍanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sāsanassa cā’’tiādi. Tattha sāsanassa ca sassirikatāyāti sambandho. Vigataupakkilesacandimasūriyānaṃ viya sāsanassa ca sassirikatāya saṃvattatīti adhippāyo.

"Pacchāpi avippaṭisārakaraṃ bhavissatī"ti: Here, to whom does it become without remorse? He says, "subhaddaṃ vuḍḍhapabbajita"ntiādi, showing that the Attādāna that is complete with five factors, even after being taken up, becomes without remorse. There, "pañcasatikasaṅgīti"nti: the recital to be done by five hundred, including Mahākassapa, etc. The connection is that it is as if it causes the Elder Mahākassapa to remember later. This same method applies to the rest as well. "Samanussaraṇakara"nti: causing repeated remembrance in a harmonious manner. With this, he shows the meaning of the phrase "avippaṭisārakara"nti. "Pacchāpī"ti: Here, showing the meaning of the word "pi" as including what was not said, he says, "sāsanassa cā"tiādi. There, the connection is "sāsanassa ca sassirikatāyā". The meaning is that it contributes to the glory of the Sāsana, like the moon and sun free from defilements.

8. Codakena paccavekkhitabbadhammakathā
8. Kathā about the Dhamma that should be reviewed by the accuser

399.‘‘Acchiddena appaṭimaṃsenā’’tiādīsu evamattho veditabboti yojanā. Chiddasappaṭimaṃsaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetvā viparītavasena acchiddaappaṭimaṃsaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Tattha yena katānīti sambandho. Chijjatītichiddo,paṭi punappunaṃ masiyati āmasiyatītipaṭimaṃso,niggahitāgamo, bhāvappadhānoyaṃ kammaniddeso. Saha paṭimaṃsenātisappaṭimaṃso,kāyasamācāro.Viparītoti viparivattavasena ito pavatto, kāyasamācāroti attho.Amūlakānuddhaṃsanādīhīti ādisaddena duṭṭhullavācādayo saṅgaṇhāti.

399. "Acchiddena appaṭimaṃsenā"tiādīsu, the meaning should be understood in this way. First showing the flawed and tainted, then showing the unflawed and untainted in the opposite way, he says, "yenā"tiādi. There, the connection is "yena katānīti". "Chiddo": what is broken; "paṭimaṃso": what is repeatedly touched and handled, blameworthy conduct. This is a noun primarily denoting the state. "Saha paṭimaṃsenāti": sappaṭimaṃso, bodily conduct. "Viparīto"ti: proceeding from the opposite way, meaning bodily conduct. "Amūlakānuddhaṃsanādīhī"ti: with the "ādi" word, he includes harsh speech, etc.

Mettaṃ nu kho me cittanti ettha appanābhāvappattaṃ mettacittamevādhippetanti dassento āha ‘‘palibodhe chinditvā’’tiādi. Tatthapalibodheti āvāsapalibodhādike palibodhe. ‘‘Vikkhambhanavasena vihatāghāta’’nti iminā appanābhāvappattaṃ mettacittameva dasseti.Idaṃ panāvuso kattha vuttaṃ bhagavatāti ettha idaṃsaddakiṃsaddānaṃ visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ katarasmiṃ nagare’’ti.

"Mettaṃ nu kho me citta"nti: Here, showing that only the mind of loving-kindness that has attained the absence of absorption is intended, he says, "palibodhe chinditvā"tiādi. There, "palibodhe"ti: in obstacles such as dwelling-obstacles, etc. With "vikkhambhanavasena vihatāghāta"nti, he shows only the mind of loving-kindness that has attained the absence of absorption. "Idaṃ panāvuso kattha vuttaṃ bhagavatā"ti: Here, showing the scope of the words "idaṃ" and "kiṃ," he says, "idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ katarasmiṃ nagare"ti.

9. Codakena upaṭṭhāpetabbakathā
9. Kathā about what should be established by the accuser

400.‘‘Kālena vakkhāmī’’tiādīsu codanāya kālaakālādiṃ dassento āha ‘‘eko eka’’ntiādi. Tatthaekoti ekako codako.Ekanti ekakaṃ cuditakaṃ. Saṅghamajjha…pe… asanasālādīsu vā parivāritakkhaṇe vāti yojanā. Tattha ‘‘saṅghamajjha…pe… asanasālādīsū’’ti iminā ṭhānābhāvaṃ dasseti, ‘‘upaṭṭhākehi parivāritakkhaṇe’’ti iminā kālābhāvaṃ dasseti. Imehi padehi ṭhānampi kālena saṅgahetvā ‘‘kālena vakkhāmī’’ti vuttanti dasseti.Tacchenāti saccena.Hambhoti nipāto pacchimapadesu paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Hambho mahallaka, hambho parisāvacara, hambho paṃsukūlika, hambho dhammakathikāti hi attho.Idanti kammaṃ.Kāraṇanissitanti mahallakabhāvakāraṇādīsu nissitaṃ. ‘‘Bhante’’ti nipātopi paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Ettha ca ‘‘hambho’’ti nipātena lokavohāravasena anādarassa pakāsakattā pharusena vadati nāma, ‘‘bhante’’ti nipātena sādarassa pakāsakattā saṇhena vadati nāma.Kāraṇanissitaṃ katvāti imasmiṃ vītikkame ayaṃ nāma dosoti kāraṇanissitaṃ katvā. ‘‘Mettacittaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti imināmettacittoti padassa ‘‘vakkhāmī’’ti pade kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.No dosantaroti ettha antarasaddassa cittavācakabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘na duṭṭhacitto’’ti. ‘‘Hutvā’’ti iminā kiriyāvisesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.

400. "‘‘Kālena vakkhāmī’’"tiādīsu: showing the appropriate and inappropriate time for accusation, he says, "eko eka"ntiādi. There, "eko"ti: a single accuser. "Eka"nti: a single accused person. Either in the midst of the Saṅgha…pe… in the alms hall, or at a time when surrounded by attendants. There, with "saṅghamajjha…pe… asanasālādīsū"ti, he shows the absence of a place, and with "upaṭṭhākehi parivāritakkhaṇe," he shows the absence of time. With these words, showing that "kālena vakkhāmī"ti was said by including both place and time, "Tacchenā"ti: with truth. "Hambho"ti: an interjection to be connected separately in the subsequent words. For the meaning is, "Hambho mahallaka, hambho parisāvacara, hambho paṃsukūlika, hambho dhammakathika"ti. "Ida"nti: this action. "Kāraṇanissita"nti: based on reasons such as being old, etc. The interjection "Bhante"ti should also be connected separately. And here, because the interjection "hambho"ti reveals disrespect according to worldly usage, he speaks harshly, and because the interjection "bhante"ti reveals respect, he speaks gently. "Kāraṇanissitaṃ katvā"ti: having based it on a reason, saying "this is the fault in this transgression." With "Mettacittaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā"ti, he shows the state of the word "mettacitto"ti as an adverb of the verb in the phrase "vakkhāmī"ti. "No dosantaro"ti: Here, showing the word "antara" as meaning mind, he says, "na duṭṭhacitto"ti. With "Hutvā"ti, he shows the state of being an adverb of the verb.

10. Codakacuditakapaṭisaṃyuttakathā
10. Kathā connected with the accuser and the accused

401.Ajjhattanti ettha attasaddassa cittavācakabhāvañca sattamīvibhattiyāpi amādesabhāvañca dassento āha ‘‘attano citte’’ti.Uppādetvāti iminā ‘‘manasikaritvā’’ti padassa adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti.Kāruññatāti ettha dvīsu ṇyapaccayatāpaccayesu ekasseva bhāvavācakattā eko svatthoti dassento āha ‘‘karuṇabhāvo’’ti. Tattha karuṇassa puggalassa bhāvokāruññaṃ,tadevakāruññatā. Atha vā karuṇo eva puggalo kāruññaṃ, tassa bhāvo kāruññatāti vacanattho kātabbo.Imināti ‘‘kāruññatā’’ti padena.Karuṇañcāti appanāpattaṃ karuṇañca.Karuṇāpubbabhāgañcāti appanāpattāya karuṇāya pubbabhāge parikammūpacāravasena pavattaṃ kāmāvacarakaruṇañca.Dvīhipīti ‘‘hitesitā, anukampitā’’ti dvīhipi padehi.Mettañcāti appanāpattamettañca.Mettāpubbabhāgañcāti appanāpattāya mettāya pubbabhāge parikammūpacāravasena pavattaṃ kāmāvacaramettañca.Suddhanteti suddhe koṭṭhāse.Paṭiññaṃ āropetvāti cuditakaṃ paṭiññaṃ āropetvā.Ye eteti ‘‘kāruññatā’’tiādinā nayena ye ete pañca dhammā vuttāti yojanā. Imināime pañca dhammeti ettha imasaddassa aniyamaniddesabhāvaṃ dasseti.

401. "Ajjhatta"nti: Here, showing that the word "atta" means mind and also that the seventh case ending is in the sense of "in," he says, "attano citte"ti. "Uppādetvā"ti: with this, he shows the implied meaning of the phrase "manasikaritvā"ti. "Kāruññatā"ti: Here, because among the two suffixes "ṇya" and "tā," only one expresses the state, he says, showing that one is in the sense of self, "karuṇabhāvo"ti. There, the state of a compassionate person is "kāruññaṃ", that itself is "kāruññatā". Or, the compassionate person himself is "kāruññaṃ," his state is "kāruññatā," the meaning of the statement should be done. "Iminā"ti: with the phrase "kāruññatā"ti. "Karuṇañcā"ti: and compassion that has attained absorption. "Karuṇāpubbabhāgañcā"ti: and mundane compassion that occurs as preliminary activity to absorption, in the manner of preparation. "Dvīhipī"ti: with the two phrases "hitesitā, anukampitā"ti. "Mettañcā"ti: and loving-kindness that has attained absorption. "Mettāpubbabhāgañcā"ti: and mundane loving-kindness that occurs as preliminary activity to absorption, in the manner of preparation. "Suddhante"ti: in the pure section. "Paṭiññaṃ āropetvā"ti: having imposed the acknowledgement on the accused. "Ye ete"ti: these five qualities that have been mentioned in the manner of "kāruññatā"tiādi. With this, he shows the state of the word "ima" as an indefinite designation in "ime pañca dhamme"ti.

Sacceca akuppe cāti ettha saccasaddassa viratisaccaparamatthasaccāni paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘vacīsacce cā’’ti. ‘‘Akuppanatāyā’’ti iminā nakupassa bhāvoakuppanti katvā ṇyapaccayassa bhāvatthaṃ dasseti.ti saccaṃ, vitthāro vā.Na paro ghaṭṭetabboti na paro kujjhāpetabbo.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhake.

"Sacce ca akuppe cā"ti: Here, rejecting the verity of abstention and the ultimate verity in the word "sacca," he says, "vacīsacce cā"ti. With "Akuppanatāyā"ti, showing the state with "na kuppassa bhāvo akuppaṃ", he shows the meaning of the suffix "ṇya" as expressing state. "Hī"ti: verity, or expansion. "Na paro ghaṭṭetabbo"ti: another should not be angered. "Sabbatthā"ti: in all sections of the Pātimokkha establishment.

Iti pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the Yojanā of the commentary on the Pātimokkhaṭṭhapana section.

10. Bhikkhunikkhandhakaṃ

10. Bhikkhunikkhandhakaṃ (Section on Nuns)

Mahāpajāpatigotamīvatthukathā
Kathā about Mahāpajāpatigotamī

402.Bhikkhunikkhandhake kasmā paṭikkhipatīti codanaṃ dassetvā tassā ābhogaṃ dassento āha ‘‘nanū’’tiādi. ‘‘Kāma’’ntiādinā abhyūpagamaparihāravasena vissajjeti. Tatthakāmaṃsaddo anuggahattho,panasaddo garahattho, pana tathāpi paṭikkhipatīti sambandho.Tanti mahāpajāpatiṃ gotamiṃ. Yācitena hutvā anuññātanti yojanā.Ayanti pabbajjā.Bhaddakaṃ katvāti laddhakaṃ katvā, manāpaṃ katvāti attho.

402. In the Bhikkhunikkhandhaka, showing the accusation of why he rejects it, showing its approach, he says, "nanū"tiādi. He answers in the manner of acceptance and avoidance with "kāma"ntiādi. There, the word "kāmaṃ" is in the sense of approval, the word "pana" is in the sense of censure. The connection is "pana tathāpi paṭikkhipatīti". "Ta"nti: Mahāpajāpati Gotamī. The connection is "Yācitena hutvā anuññātanti". "Aya"nti: this going forth. "Bhaddakaṃ katvā"ti: having made it obtained, having made it pleasing, is the meaning.

403.Kumbhathenakehīti ettha kumbhe dīpaṃ jāletvā tenālokena thenentītikumbhathenakāti dassento āha ‘‘kumbhe dīpaṃ jāletvā’’tiādi.

403. "Kumbhathenakehī"ti: Here, showing that "kumbhathenakā" means those who steal by lighting a lamp in a pot and using that light, he says, "kumbhe dīpaṃ jāletvā"tiādi.

Nāḷimajjhagatanti sassanāḷassa majjhe gataṃ.Gaṇṭhinti phaḷuṃ. ‘‘Kaṇḍa’’ntipi pāṭho, daṇḍanti attho.Yenāti pāṇakena. Ayañhi yaṃsaddo taṃsaddānapekkhoti daṭṭhabbo.

"Nāḷimajjhagata"nti: gone to the middle of the stalk of the Sāsana. "Gaṇṭhi"nti: a joint. "Kaṇḍa"ntipi is also a reading, meaning a stick. "Yenā"ti: by which being. For this "yaṃ" word should be seen as not dependent on the "taṃ" word.

Antorattabhāvoti antolohitabhāvo.Etamatthanti etaṃ vakkhamānaṃ atthaṃ.Āḷiyāti āvaraṇāya.Abaddhāyapīti pisaddo anuggahattho, baddhāya pana pagevāti attho.Kiñcīti appamattakaṃ.Yanti udakaṃ.Tampīti udakampi. Pisaddo abaddhāya ṭhitaṃ kiñci udakaṃ apekkhati. Ye ime garudhammā paññattāti yojanā.Paṭikaccevāti pageva, paṭhamamevāti attho.Tesūti garudhammesu. Apaññattesu santesupīti yojanā.Paṭhamaṃ vuttantiādi vuttaṃ, vassasahassameva ṭhassati iti imamatthaṃ dassetīti yojanā.‘‘Vassasahassa’’nti ca etaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Tatoti vassasahassato.Pariyattidhammopīti pisaddo paṭivedhasaddhammaṃ apekkhati. Dvīsu saddhammesu ṭhitesu paṭipattisaddhammo ṭhitoyevāti katvā na vuttaṃ.Tāniyevāti pañcavassasahassāniyeva. Pariyattiyā sati paṭivedho na hotīti nāpi vattabboti yojanā.Liṅganti samaṇavesaṃ, samaṇākāranti attho.

"Antorattabhāvo"ti: the state of being red inside. "Etamattha"nti: this meaning to be said. "Āḷiyā"ti: for the sake of covering. "Abaddhāyapī"ti: the word "pi" is in the sense of approval, but for what is bound, what to say? "Kiñcī"ti: a very small amount. "Ya"nti: the water. "Tampī"ti: even that water. The word "pi" relates to some water that stands unbound. The connection is "Ye ime garudhammā paññattāti". "Paṭikaccevā"ti: immediately, right at the beginning. "Tesū"ti: in those weighty rules. The connection is "Apaññattesu santesupīti". "Paṭhamaṃ vutta"ntiādi: it has been said, it shows this meaning that it will last for a thousand years. "‘‘Vassasahassa’’"nti: and this statement is said, is the connection. "Tato"ti: from a thousand years. "Pariyattidhammopī"ti: the word "pi" relates to the Dhamma of realization. Since the Dhamma of practice remains when the two Dhammas remain, it was not said. "Tāniyevā"ti: those five thousand years themselves. The connection is "Pariyattiyā sati paṭivedho na hotīti nāpi v বক্তব্যতি". "Liṅga"nti: the ascetic garb, the ascetic appearance, is the meaning.

Bhikkhunīupasampadānujānanakathā
Kathā about allowing the Bhikkhunī ordination

404.Imāya anupaññattiyāti mahāpajāpatiyā aṭṭhagarudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadaṃ upanidhāya ayaṃ paññatti anupaññatti nāma, tāya anupaññattiyā upasampādetunti attho.Mahāpajāpatiyā saddhivihāriniyo katvāti mahāpajāpatiṃ upajjhaṃ katvā pañcasatā sākiyāniyo tassā saddhivihāriniyo katvāti attho.Itīti tasmā ahesunti sambandho.Iminā ovādenāti bhagavato iminā ovādena.

404. Imāya anupaññattiyā means: with reference to the full ordination of Mahāpajāpatī through the acceptance of the eight Garudhamma conditions, this rule is called an anupaññatti (subsequent rule). The meaning is: they should be fully ordained by that anupaññatti. Mahāpajāpatiyā saddhivihāriniyo katvā means: having made Mahāpajāpatī the preceptor and having made the five hundred Sakyan women her co-residents. Itī is connected with "tasmā ahesuṃ" (therefore, they were). Iminā ovādenā means: by this advice of the Blessed One.

410.Etissāti etissā bhikkhuniyā.Tanti kammaṃ.Aññasminti aññasmiṃ kamme.Aññanti ropitabbakammato aññaṃ kammaṃ.

410. Etissā means: of this bhikkhunī. Taṃ means: that action. Aññasmiṃ means: in another action. Aññaṃ means: an action other than the action to be imposed.

411.Kaddamodakenāti kaddamena āluḷitena udakeneva.Kaddamādīsupīti pīsaddo ‘‘yena kenacī’’ti ettha yojetabbo. Yena kenacipīti hi attho.Sannipatitvāti bhikkhunisaṅghena sannipatitvā.Apasādanīyanti apasādetabbaṃ kammaṃ.Ettāvatāti ettakena sāvanamattena.Avandiyoti na vandetabbo, vandituṃ na arahoti attho.Tatoti tikkhattuṃ sāvetabbato. Navandantīti bhikkhuniyo na vandanti.Disvāpīti taṃ bhikkhuṃ disvāpi.Tena bhikkhunāti apasādanīyaṃ dassentena bhikkhunā, khamāpetabbanti sambandho.Vihāreyevāti bhikkhūnaṃ vihāreyeva.Tena bhikkhunāti upasaṅkamitabbena bhikkhunā, vattabbanti sambandho.Tatoti vattabbakālato.Soti apasādanīyaṃ dassento bhikkhu.Etthāti bhikkhunikkhandhake.Kammavibhaṅgeti parivārāvasāne kammānaṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhāne (pari. aṭṭha. 495-496).

411. Kaddamodakenā means: with water that is mixed and muddied with mud. Kaddamādīsupī: the "pi" (also) should be connected with "yena kenacī" (by whatever means). For, the meaning is: even by whatever means. Sannipatitvā means: having assembled as the bhikkhunī Sangha. Apasādanīyaṃ means: an action to be revoked. Ettāvatā means: with only this much announcement. Avandiyo means: not to be venerated, meaning, not worthy to be venerated. Tato means: after announcing three times. Na vandantī means: the bhikkhunīs do not venerate. Disvāpī means: even having seen that bhikkhu. Tena bhikkhunā means: by the bhikkhu showing the act that requires revocation, it should be asked for forgiveness. Vihāreyeva means: in the vihāra of the bhikkhus. Tena bhikkhunā means: by the bhikkhu who should be approached, it should be said. Tato means: from the time to speak. So means: the bhikkhu showing the act that requires revocation. Etthā means: in the Bhikkhunī Khandhaka. Kammavibhaṅge means: at the end of the Parivāra, in the section detailing the classification of actions (pari. aṭṭha. 495-496).

Obhāsantīti ava hīnena bhāsantīti dassento āha ‘‘asaddhammena obhāsantī’’ti. ‘‘Bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ sampayojentī’’ti ettha kammakaraṇe dassento āha ‘‘purise asaddhammenā’’ti. Ettha ‘‘purise’’ti iminā kammaṃ dasseti, ‘‘asaddhammenā’’ti iminā karaṇaṃ.Vihārappavesaneti bhikkhūnaṃ vihārappavesane.Ovādaṃ ṭhapetunti ettha ovādaṭṭhapanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘na bhikkhunupassaya’’ntiādi.Ovādatthāyāti ovādapaṭiggahaṇatthāya.Mā karitthāti mā kareyyātha.

Obhāsantī means: showing that she speaks without restraint. Showing this, he says, "Obhāsantī with the untrue Dhamma." Here, showing the accomplishing instrument in "Bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ sampayojentī" (associating with bhikkhunīs), he says, "purise asaddhammenā" (with men, by the untrue Dhamma). Here, by "purise" (with men), he shows the object; by "asaddhammenā" (by the untrue Dhamma), he shows the instrument. Vihārappavesane means: in the entering of the vihāra by bhikkhus. Ovādaṃ ṭhapetuṃ means: here, showing the manner of establishing the exhortation, he says, "na bhikkhunupassayaṃ" and so on. Ovādatthāyā means: for the purpose of receiving the exhortation. Mā karitthā means: may you not do.

416.Gihidārikāyoti gihibhūtā dārikāyo bandhanti viyāti yojanā.Ghanapaṭṭakenāti ghanabhūtena paṭṭena niyuttena.Ekapariyakanti ettha ekavāraṃ kaṭiyaṃ parikkhipitvā kataṃ kāyabandhanaṃ ekapariyakanti dassento āha ‘‘ekavāraṃ parikkhipanaka’’nti. Tatthaparikkhipanakanti kaṭiyaṃ parikkhipanārahaṃ.

416. Gihidārikāyo means: girls who are laywomen, the interpretation is like they tie up. Ghanapaṭṭakenā means: with a dense, closely woven band. Ekapariyakaṃ: here, showing that ekapariyakaṃ means a waistband made by encircling the waist once, he says, "ekavāraṃ parikkhipanakaṃ" (encircling once). There, parikkhipanakaṃ means: fit to encircle the waist.

Vilīvenāti ettha bahutthe ekavacananti āha ‘‘saṇhehi vilīvehī’’ti. ‘‘Katapaṭṭenā’’ti iminā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘katenā’’ti pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti.Setavatthapaṭṭenāti setavatthena katena paṭṭena.Kataveṇiyāti katāya veṇiyā. Iminā dussena katā veṇidussaveṇīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Eseva nayo purimapacchimapadesupi.Coḷakāsāvanti coḷameva kasāvena rattattā coḷakāsāvaṃ.

Vilīvenā: here, he says, "saṇhehi vilīvehī" (with fine vilīvi threads), taking the singular to mean the plural. By "Katapaṭṭena", he shows the remaining reading in the Pali as "katena". Setavatthapaṭṭenā means: with a band made of white cloth. Kataveṇiyā means: with a made braid. By this, he shows that a braid made of cloth is called dussaveṇī. The same method applies in the preceding and following passages as well. Coḷakāsāvaṃ means: since the coḷa itself is reddened with kasāva (astringent dye), (it is called) coḷakāsāvaṃ.

Aṭṭhillenāti addena aṭṭhinā. ‘‘Gojaṅghaṭṭhike’’ti iminā aṭṭhino sambandhaṃ dasseti.Hatthaṃ koṭṭāpentīti ettha hatthaṃ nāma aggabāhamevādhippetaṃ, na kapparato paṭṭhāyāti dassento āha ‘‘aggabāha’’nti.Piṭṭhihatthanti hatthapiṭṭhiṃ.Piṭṭhipādanti pādapiṭṭhiṃ.

Aṭṭhillenā means: with a damp bone. By "Gojaṅghaṭṭhike", he shows the connection to the bone. Hatthaṃ koṭṭāpentī: here, showing that "hatthaṃ" (hand) means only the forearm, not starting from the elbow, he says, "aggabāhaṃ" (forearm). Piṭṭhihatthaṃ means: the back of the hand. Piṭṭhipādaṃ means: the back of the foot.

417.Vuttanayānevāti chabbaggiyānaṃ mukhalimpanādīsu (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 247) vuttanayāneva.Aṅgadeseti sarīrappadese.Gaṇḍappadeseti kapolappadese.Sāloke tiṭṭhantīti ettha saṃvijjati āloko etthātisālokanti katvā dvāraṃ gahetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dvāraṃ vivaritvā’’ti.Vuṭṭhāpentīti upasampādenti.Sūnaṃ ṭhapentīti ettha sūnāsaddo maṃsapariyāyoti āha ‘‘maṃsaṃ vikkiṇantī’’ti.Tenāti dāsena. Idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘kārentī’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ. ‘‘Haritakañceva pakkañcā’’ti imināharitakapakkikanti padassa dvandavākyaṃ dasseti. Tatthaharitakanti haritameva paṇṇaṃ.Pakkanti seditaṃ paṇṇaṃ.

417.Vuttanayānevā means: just like the manner stated regarding the smearing of the face and so on by the Group-of-Six monks (chabbaggiyānaṃ) (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 247). Aṅgadese means: in the bodily region. Gaṇḍappadese means: in the cheek region. Sāloke tiṭṭhantī: here, taking sālokaṃ to mean "saṃvijjati āloko ettha (there is light here)", the door should be taken (as the referent). Therefore, it was said, "dvāraṃ vivaritvā" (having opened the door). Vuṭṭhāpentī means: they fully ordain. Sūnaṃ ṭhapentī: here, he says that the word sūnaṃ is a synonym for meat, "maṃsaṃ vikkiṇantī" (selling meat). Tenā means: by the slave. This word is the object of the causative verb in the word "kārentī" (causing to do). By "Haritakañceva pakkañcā" (both green and cooked), he shows the compound phrase for haritakapakkikaṃ. There, haritakaṃ means: the green leaf itself. Pakkaṃ means: cooked leaf.

418.Kathitāyevāti cīvarakkhandhake kathitāyeva.

418. Kathitāyevā means: it has already been said in the Civara Khandhaka.

419.Pāḷimuttakavinicchayoti pāḷiyaṃ vuttavinicchayato mutto vinicchayo. Pāḷimuttakavinicchayaṃ vitthārento āha‘‘sace hī’’tiādi. Yo koci kālaṃ karonto vadatīti sambandho.Mamaccayenāti mama atikkamena.Aññassāti vuttehi upajjhāyādīhi aññassa.Tesanti upajjhāyādīnaṃ.Na hotīti parikkhāro na hoti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Accayadānanti accayena hotūti dānaṃ. Naruhatīti pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ pabbajitassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā yassa kassaci accayadānaṃ tesaṃ na ruhati, saṅghasseva ruhatīti adhippāyo. Gihīnaṃ pana accayadānanti sambandho.Ruhatīti gihīnaṃ pabbajitassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā yassa kassaci accayadānaṃ tesaṃ ruhati, tesaṃyeva santako hotīti adhippāyo.

419. Pāḷimuttakavinicchayo means: a judgment that is free from the judgment stated in the Pali. Expanding on the pāḷimuttakavinicchayaṃ, he says "sace hī" and so on. The connection is: "yo koci kālaṃ karonto vadati (whoever speaks while passing away)." Mamaccayenā means: by my passing away. Aññassā means: to someone other than the preceptor and so on who were mentioned. Tesaṃ means: to the preceptor and so on. Na hotī means: the requisites do not belong. means: truly, or because. Accayadānaṃ means: a gift to be given upon passing away. Na ruhatī means: the gift given upon passing away to any of the five co-religionists, whether ordained or a householder, does not accrue to them; the intention is that it accrues only to the Sangha. However, the connection is "gihīnaṃ pana accayadānaṃ (but the gift upon passing away to lay people)". Ruhatī means: the gift given upon passing away by lay people to anyone, whether ordained or a householder, accrues to them; the intention is that it becomes the property of those same people.

420.Purāṇamallīti ettha mallassa bhariyā mallī, purāṇe mallī purāṇamallīti dassento āha ‘‘purāṇe’’tiādi. ‘‘Gihikāle’’ti iminā ‘‘purāṇe’’ti ettha ṇapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Mallassāti muṭṭhimallassa.Purisabyañjananti etthabyañjanasaddo nimittapariyāyoti āha ‘‘purisanimitta’’nti.Cittanti rāgacittaṃ.

420. Purāṇamallī: here, showing that Mallī is the wife of Malla, and Purāṇe Mallī (Mallī of old) is Purāṇamallī, he says, "purāṇe" and so on. By "Gihikāle", he shows the form of the ṇa-suffix in "purāṇe" here. Mallassā means: of Muṭṭhi Malla (fist-fighter Malla). Purisabyañjanaṃ: here, showing that the word byañjanaṃ is a synonym for nimitta (sign), he says, "purisanimittaṃ" (male sign). Cittaṃ means: mind of lust.

421.Yanti yaṃ vatthu,agganti paṭhamabhāgaṃ.Asappāyanti attano asappāyaṃ.

421. Yaṃ means: whatever thing. Aggaṃ means: the first part. Asappāyaṃ means: unsuitable for oneself.

Hiyyoti atītānantarāhani.Aññasminti bhikkhunīhi aññasmiṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhunīhī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘paṭiggāhāpetvā’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Hiyyo means: on the immediately preceding day. Aññasmiṃ means: in another place from the bhikkhunīs. The word "Bhikkhunīhi" is the object of the causative verb in "paṭiggāhāpetvā" (having had it accepted). means: truly, or because.

426.‘‘Bhojanakāla’’nti iminā ‘‘kālaṃ vītināmesu’’nti ettha kālavisesaṃ dasseti.

426. By "Bhojanakāla" (mealtime), he shows the specific time in "kālaṃ vītināmesuṃ" (they were passing the time).

Pureti ādimhi.Tāsanti aṭṭhannaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ.Abbhantarimāti abbhantare pariyāpannā.Aññāti aṭṭhahi bhikkhunīhi aññā. Navakatarā hotīti sambandho. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā bhattagga’’nti imināaññattha sabbattha yathāvuḍḍhaṃ na paṭibāhitabbanti ettha aññasaddassa apādānaṃ dasseti.Aññasminti ettha smiṃvacanena tthapaccayassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Catupaccayabhājanīyaṭṭhāne’’ti iminā sarūpaṃ dasseti.

Pure means: at the beginning. Tāsaṃ means: of those eight bhikkhunīs. Abbhantarimā means: included within. Aññā means: other than the eight bhikkhunīs. The connection is: "navakatarā hoti (she is newer)". By "Ṭhapetvā bhattaggaṃ" (except for the refectory), he shows the ablative sense of the word añña in "aññattha sabbattha yathāvuḍḍhaṃ na paṭibāhitabbaṃ" (everywhere else, one should not be pushed back according to seniority). Aññasmiṃ: here, by the locative case ending (smiṃ), he shows the meaning of the ttha-suffix. By "Catupaccayabhājanīyaṭṭhāne", he shows the form.

430.Dūtenapi upasampādetunti ettha kiṃ sabbathā dūtena upasampadā vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘dūtena…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti. Yena kenaci antarāyenāti sambandho, asati antarāye na vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Kammavācāpariyosāne upasampannāva hotīti sambandho.Tāvadevāti upasampannakkhaṇeyeva.

430. Dūtenapi upasampādetuṃ: here, he asks, "does full ordination by a messenger always accord?", "dūtena…pe… vaṭṭati (by a messenger…it accords)." The connection is "yena kenaci antarāyena (by whatever impediment)", the intention is that it does not accord when there is no impediment. The connection is "kammavācāpariyosāne upasampannāva hoti (at the end of the Kammavācā, she is already fully ordained)." Tāvadevā means: at that very moment of full ordination.

431.Navakammampīti pisaddo udositaupassaye apekkhati.

431. Navakammampī: the "pi" (also) looks to the udositaupassaya (residence for those who have declared their intention to leave the Order).

432.Tassāti tassā itthiyā.Yāva so dārako viññutaṃ pāpuṇātīti ettha kathaṃ viññubhāvo gahetabboti āha ‘‘yāva khāditu’’ntiādi.

432. Tassā means: of that woman. Yāva so dārako viññutaṃ pāpuṇāti: here, he asks, "how should discernment (viññubhāvo) be understood?", he says, "yāva khādituṃ" and so on.

Ṭhapetvā sāgāranti ettha sakāro sahasaddakāriyo, agāranti ca seyyāgāranti dassento āha ‘‘sahāgāraseyyamattaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Yathā aññasmiṃ purise paṭipajjitabbaṃ, evaṃ tathāti yojanā. ‘‘Aññasmi’’nti iminā pāḷiyaṃaññe puriseti ettha smiṃvacanassa sabbanāmato ekārādeso dassito, taṃdassanena ca kaccāyane (kaccāyane 110 sutte) sabbanāmato smiṃvacanassa ekārādesanisedhanaṃ aniccanti dasseti.

Ṭhapetvā sāgāraṃ: here, showing that the sa- in sakāro is like saha- (with), and agāraṃ means seyyāgāraṃ (sleeping place), he says, "sahāgāraseyyamattaṃ ṭhapetvā" (except for sleeping together in the same dwelling). The connection is: just as one should conduct oneself toward another man, so also toward this one. By "Aññasmiṃ", in the Pali aññe purise, the substitution of e for the locative case ending smiṃ on a pronoun is shown here; by showing that, he shows that the prohibition of substituting e for the locative case ending smiṃ on a pronoun in Kaccāyana (Kaccāyane 110 sutta) is impermanent.

434.‘‘Yadeva sā vibbhantā’’ti iminā dassetīti sambandho. ‘‘Yasmā’’ti imināyadevāti ettha yaṃsaddassa kāraṇatthaṃ dasseti. Odātāni vatthāni nivatthāti sambandho. ‘‘Tasmāyevā’’ti iminātadevāti padassa kāraṇatthameva dasseti. ‘‘Na sikkhāpaccakkhānenā’’ti iminā evatthaphalaṃ dasseti.Sā puna upasampadaṃ na labhatīti sā vibbhantā bhikkhunī puna upasampadaṃ na labhati.

434. "Yadeva sā vibbhantā": by this, the connection is, he shows. By "Yasmā" (because), he shows the reason in yadevā, for the word yaṃ. The connection is: odātāni vatthāni nivatthā (she puts on white clothes). By "Tasmāyevā", he shows the reason for tadevā. By "Na sikkhāpaccakkhānenā", he shows the result of the eva-meaning. Sā puna upasampadaṃ na labhatī means: that bhikkhunī who has become disturbed does not regain full ordination.

Pabbajjampi na labhatīti titthāyatanasaṅkantā bhikkhunī pabbajjampi na labhati, pageva upasampadaṃ.

Pabbajjampi na labhatī: a bhikkhunī who has transferred to a heretical sect does not regain even the going forth, how much less full ordination!

Pāde sambāhantāti bhikkhunīnaṃ pāde sambāhantā.Keseti bhikkhunīnaṃ kese.Tatrāti ‘‘kukkuccayantā na sādiyantī’’ti vacane. Eke ācariyā vadantīti sambandho. Sārattā hontīti yojanā.Etthāti purisānaṃ abhivādanādīsu.Idanti purisānaṃ abhivādanādi, ‘‘anuññāta’’nti pade vuttakammaṃ ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti pade vuttakattā. Atha vā odissa anuññātaṃ idaṃ purisānaṃ abhivādanādi vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Evañhi sati ‘‘odissa anuññāta’’nti padaṃ hetuantogadhavisesanaṃ, odissa anuññātattā vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.Tanti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttavacanaṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

Pāde sambāhantā means: massaging the feet of bhikkhunīs. Kese means: the hair of bhikkhunīs. Tatrā means: in the statement "kukkuccayantā na sādiyantī" (being scrupulous, they do not approve). The connection is: some teachers say. The connection is: sārattā honti (they become lustful). Etthā means: in the greeting and so on of men. Idaṃ means: this greeting and so on of men, the object stated in the word "anuññātaṃ" (permitted), the subject stated in the word "vaṭṭati" (it is allowable). Or rather, the connection is: idaṃ, having been permitted specifically, this greeting and so on of men is allowable. If it is like this, then the phrase "odissa anuññātaṃ" is an adjective included within the reason, the intention is that it is allowable because it has been permitted specifically. Taṃ means: the statement stated in the commentaries. means: truly, or because.

435.Pallaṅkena nisīdantīti ettha āsanapallaṅkaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdantī’’ti. Tatthaābhujitvāti ābandhitvā.Kūpoti vaccakūpo.Uparīti kūpato upari. ‘‘Sabbadisāsu paññāyatī’’ti iminā paṭicchannameva atthi, na upari channanti dasseti.

435. Pallaṅkena nisīdantī: here, rejecting the āsana-pallaṅka (seat), he says, "pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdantī" (sitting folding the pallaṅka). There, ābhujitvā means: folding by bending. Kūpo means: latrine pit. Uparī means: above the pit. By "Sabbadisāsu paññāyatī", he shows that it is indeed covered, not roofed over above.

436.Kuṇḍakanti kaṇaṃ.Etthāti bhikkhunikkhandhake.

436. Kuṇḍakaṃ means: bran. Etthā means: in the Bhikkhunī Khandhaka.

Iti bhikkhunikkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the word-by-word explanation of the Bhikkhunī Khandhaka.

11. Pañcasatikakkhandhakaṃ

11. Pañcasatikakkhandhakaṃ (The Chapter of the Five Hundred)

1. Khuddānukhuddakasikkhāpadakathā
1. Khuddānukhuddakasikkhāpadakathā (Account of the Minor and Sub-minor Rules)

441.Pañcasatikakkhandhake ‘‘cattāri…pe… khuddakānī’’ti evamādi vuttanti sambandho.Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena.Dhūmakālikanti ettha dhūmassa kālo dhūmakālo, dhūmassa uṭṭhitakāloti attho. So etassatthītidhūmakālikaṃ,sikkhāpadapaññattaṃ. Iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yāvā’’tiādi.

441. In the Pañcasatikakkhandhaka, the connection is: "cattāri…pe… khuddakānī" and so on was stated. Pariyāyenā means: by reason. Dhūmakālikaṃ: here, dhūmassa kālo (the time of smoke) is dhūmakālo, meaning, the time when smoke arises. That exists for this, therefore dhūmakālikaṃ is the training rule that was formulated. Showing this meaning, he says, "yāvā" and so on.

443.Idanti ‘‘katamāni pana bhante khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadānī’’ti apucchanaṃ.‘‘Tayā’’ti imināidaṃ teti ettha tesaddassa ‘‘tuyhaṃ, tavā’’ti atthe paṭikkhipati.Āpattinti dukkaṭāpattiṃ.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Teti therā. ‘‘Saṅgho…pe… na samucchindatī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ anussāvitanti yojanā. ‘‘Desehi taṃ āvuso dukkaṭa’’nti idampi ca vuttanti sambandho.Thero panāti ānandatthero pana āhāti sambandho.Tatthāti apucchane.Yathāti yenākārena.Catūsu ṭhānesūti ‘‘bhagavato vassikasāṭikaṃ akkamitvā sibbesī’’tiādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu.Etthāti pañcasatikakkhandhake.

443. Idaṃ means: the asking, "katamāni pana bhante khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni (venerable sir, which are the minor and sub-minor training rules)?" "Tayā": by this, he rejects the meaning of "tuyhaṃ, tava" (yours) for the ta- in idaṃ te (this to you). Āpattiṃ means: a dukkata offense. means: truly, or because. Te means: the elders. The connection is: etaṃ vacanaṃ anussāvitaṃ (this statement was made known), "Saṅgho…pe… na samucchindati (the Sangha…does not abolish)". The connection also is: idampi ca vuttaṃ (this also was said), "desehi taṃ āvuso dukkaṭaṃ (confess that dukkata, friend)." Thero panā means: but Ānanda Thera said. Tatthā means: in the asking. Yathā means: in whatever manner. Catūsu ṭhānesū means: in the four instances such as "bhagavato vassikasāṭikaṃ akkamitvā sibbesī (having stepped over the Blessed One's rainy-season cloth, he sewed it)." Etthā means: in the Pañcasatikakkhandhaka.

Iti pañcasatikakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the word-by-word explanation of the Pañcasatikakkhandhaka.

12. Sattasatikakkhandhakaṃ

12. Sattasatikakkhandhakaṃ (The Chapter of the Seven Hundred)

Dasavatthukathā
Dasavatthukathā (Account of the Ten Grounds)

447.Sattasatikakkhandhakevaḍḍhenti kaṭasinti ettha kaṭasīsaddo susānabhūmivācakoti dassento āha ‘‘punappunaṃ kaḷevaraṃ nikkhipamānā bhūmiṃ vaḍḍhentī’’ti. Tatthakaḷevaranti dehaṃ. Tañhi kaḷe aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ avayave sampiṇḍetvā variyati icchiyatītikaḷevaranti vuccati. Evaṃ ghoraṃ kaṭasiṃ vaḍḍhentāva punabbhavaṃ ādiyantīti yojanā.

447. In the Sattasatikakkhandhaka, vaḍḍhenti kaṭasiṃ: here, showing that the word kaṭasiṃ signifies a charnel ground, he says, "punappunaṃ kaḷevaraṃ nikkhipamānā bhūmiṃ vaḍḍhenti (repeatedly placing corpses, they increase the ground)." There, kaḷevaraṃ means: the body. For indeed, that is called kaḷevaraṃ because it is desired (variyati) by bringing together (sampiṇḍetvā) the constituent (avayave) parts (aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ) in a framework (kaḷe). Thus, taking up renewed existence by increasing the terrible kaṭasiṃ!

454.Pāpakaṃno āvuso katanti etthanosaddo amhasaddakāriyo, chaṭṭhīkattā ca hotīti dassento āha ‘‘āvuso amhehi pāpakaṃ kata’’nti.

454. Pāpakaṃ no āvuso kataṃ: here, showing that the word no serves the amha-word (we), and is also a genitive agent, he says, "āvuso amhehi pāpakaṃ kataṃ (friend, evil was done by us)."

455.‘‘Piyavacana’’nti iminākatamena tvaṃ bhūmi-vihārenāti etthabhūmisaddo piyavācako ruḷhīsaddoti dasseti. ‘‘Āmantetī’’ti iminā ālapanapadanti dasseti. Āvuso bhūmīti attho.Kullavihāronāma mettāvihāro, so ca heṭṭhimajhānattaye yuttattā uttānavihāroti āha ‘‘uttānavihārenā’’ti.

455. By "Piyavacana" (affectionate speech), he shows that in "katamena tvaṃ bhūmi-vihārena (by which ground-dwelling)", the word bhūmi is a conventional word meaning affectionate speech. By "Āmanteti" (he addresses), he shows that it is a word of address. The meaning is: "friend, ground." Kullavihāro is the dwelling of loving-kindness, and since that is connected to the three lowest jhānas, it is a readily accessible dwelling. He says, "uttānavihārena (by the readily accessible dwelling)."

457.Sāvatthiyāti sāvatthinagare.Suttavibhaṅgeti padabhājanīye. Paṭikkhittabhāvaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tatra hī’’tiādi.Tatrāti suttavibhaṅge, paṭikkhittaṃ hotīti sambandho.Tatrāti ‘‘sannidhikārake asannidhikārakasaññī’’tiādivacane. Eke ācariyā evaṃ maññantīti yojanā. Kinti maññantīti āha ‘‘yo pana bhikkhū’’tiādi. Aloṇakaṃ yampi āmisanti yojanā.Tenāti purepariggahitaloṇena.Tanti āmisaṃ.Tadahupaṭiggahitamevāti tasmiṃ ahani paṭiggahitameva.Tasmāti yasmā tadahupaṭiggahitameva, tasmā.Vadatoti vadantassa, bhagavato vacanenāti sambandho.Etthāti aloṇakāmisaparibhuñjane, dukkaṭena bhavitabbaṃ iti maññantīti yojanā.Teti eke ācariyā.Dukkaṭenapīti pisaddena pageva pācittiyenāti dasseti.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etthāti yāvajīvikayāvakālikesu. Yāvajīvikaṃ na tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ, yāvakālikameva tadahupaṭiggahitanti yojanā. Tadahupaṭiggahitañca yāvakālikanti sambandho. Taṃ dukkaṭaṃ tumhe yadi maññathāti yojanā.Yāvajīvikamissanti loṇasaṅkhātena yāvajīvikena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ.Byañjanamattanti vikāle na kappatīti byañjanamattaṃ.

457. Sāvatthiyā: In Sāvatthi city. Suttavibhaṅge: In the section of the Sutta Vibhanga that analyzes the words. Expanding on its rejected status, he says, "Tatra hītiādi." Tatra: In the Sutta Vibhanga, it is connected to "paṭikkhittaṃ hoti" (it is rejected). Tatra: In the statement beginning with "sannidhikārake asannidhikārakasaññī" (one who perceives what is present as not present). Some teachers think in this way, this is the connection. What do they think? He says, "yo pana bhikkhūtiādi" (whatever bhikkhu). "Aloṇakaṃ yampi āmisanti" (even unseasoned meat) is the connection. Tena: With the salt previously stored. Taṃ: That meat. Tadahupaṭiggahitamevā: Received on that very day. Tasmā: Because it was received on that very day, therefore. Vadato: Of the one speaking, connected to "bhagavato vacanena" (by the words of the Blessed One). Ettha: In consuming unseasoned meat, they think one must incur a dukkata offense. Te: Those some teachers. Dukkaṭenapī: The "pi" (even) shows that a pācittiya offense is certain. Hī: Indeed, or because. Ettha: Among things allowed for life or a limited time. What is allowed for life is not received on that day; what is allowed for a limited time is received on that day. And what is received on that day is allowed for a limited time, this is the connection. "Taṃ dukkaṭaṃ tumhe yadi maññatha" (if you think that is a dukkata offense) is the connection. Yāvajīvikamissa: Mixed with what is allowed for life, namely salt. Byañjanamattaṃ: Just a condiment, it is not suitable at the wrong time.

Etthāti ‘‘yāvakālikena bhikkhave’’tiādivacane (mahāva. 305) tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ yāvajīvikanti yojanā. Yāvakālikassa gati viya gati etassātiyāvakālikagatikaṃ. Tasmā dukkaṭaṃ na hotīti sambandho.Etthāti purepaṭiggahitaloṇena āmisaparibhuñjane. Tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ yāvakālikena sambhinnarasaṃ yāvajīvikanti yojanā.Tanti yathāvuttaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ, vikālabhojanapācittiyā eva kāraṇaṃ hotīti yojanā.Evanti tathā, ajja paṭiggahitampi yāvajīvikanti sambandho. Aparajju paṭiggahitena yāvakālikenāti yojanā.Tanti yāvajīvikena sammissaṃ yāvakālikaṃ, ajānantopīti sambandho.Idanti yathāvuttaṃ yāvakālikaṃ.Tatoti sannidhibhojanapācittiyato.ti saccaṃ. ‘‘Sāvatthiyā suttavibhaṅge’’ti idaṃ byākaraṇaṃ parisuddhanti yojanā.

Ettha: In the statement beginning with "yāvakālikena bhikkhave" (bhikkhus, with what is allowed for a limited time) (mahāva. 305), what is received on that day is "yāvajīvika" (allowed for life), this is the connection. "Yāvakālikassa gati viya gati etassa" (its course is like the course of what is allowed for a limited time), hence yāvakālikagatikaṃ. Therefore, it does not incur a dukkata offense, this is the connection. Ettha: In consuming meat with salt received previously. What is received on that day and has a taste mixed with what is allowed for a limited time is "yāvajīvika," this is the connection. Taṃ: That previously mentioned "yāvajīvika," is the sole cause for the pācittiya offense of eating at the wrong time, this is the connection. Evaṃ: Thus, what is received today is also "yāvajīvika," this is the connection. With what is allowed for a limited time received on the following day, this is the connection. Taṃ: The "yāvakālika" mixed with "yāvajīvika," even if one is unaware, this is the connection. Idaṃ: The "yāvakālika" mentioned above. Tato: Than the pācittiya offense of eating stored food. Hī: Indeed. The explanation "Sāvatthiyā suttavibhaṅge" (in Sāvatthi, in the Sutta Vibhanga) is completely pure, this is the connection.

Uposathasaṃyutteti uposathena sambandhe uposathakkhandhake. Kiṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘na bhikkhave…pe… dukkaṭassāti (mahāva. 141) etaṃ sandhāyā’’ti.Atisāreti atikkamitvā saraṇe gamane pavattaneti attho. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. ‘‘Campeyyake vinayavatthusmi’’nti idaṃ vuttanti sambandho. ‘‘Campeyyakkhandhake āgata’’nti iminā campeyye āgataṃcampeyyakanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

Uposathasaṃyutte: Connected with the Uposatha, in the Uposatha Khandhaka. With what in mind was it said? He says, "na bhikkhave…pe… dukkaṭassāti (mahāva. 141) etaṃ sandhāyā" (bhikkhus, not…etc…of a dukkata offense, with this in mind). Atisāre: In exceeding, in going to the essence, in proceeding, this is the meaning. This is a locative case used in the sense of reason. "Campeyyake vinayavatthusmi" (in the Vinaya account in Campeyya), this is the connection. "Campeyyakkhandhake āgata" (it comes in the Campeyya Khandhaka), with this, he shows that campeyyaka means what came in Campeyya.

Dhammikanti bhūtena pavattaṃ. Suttavibhaṅgehiyasmā āgatanti sambandho.Dasāyevāti dasāyameva, ādhāre cetaṃ bhummaṃ.Vidatthimattāti vidatthipamāṇā.Dasāya vināti dasaṃ vajjetvā.Taṃ pamāṇanti vidatthittayasaṅkhātaṃ taṃ pamāṇaṃ karontassa vuttapācittiyaṃ āpajjatīti sambandho. ‘‘Taṃ atikkāmayato chedanakaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 533) idaṃ vacanaṃ āgatameva hotīti yojanā.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ sattasatikakkhandhake.

Dhammika: Occurring according to what is factual. Hi because it appears in the Sutta Vibhanga, this is the connection. Dasāyevā: Just in the tenth, this is a locative case used in the sense of reason. Vidatthimattā: The size of a span. Dasāya vinā: Excluding the tenth. Taṃ pamāṇaṃ: While making that measurement, reckoned as three spans, one incurs the pācittiya offense that was mentioned, this is the connection. "Taṃ atikkāmayato chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ" (pāci. 533) (for one who exceeds that, a cutting pācittiya) this statement comes up, this is the connection. Sabbattha: In the entire Sattasatika Khandhaka.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the commentary on the Sattasatika Khandhaka in the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya Commentary.

Sattasatikakkhandhakavaṇṇanāya

Commentary on the Sattasatika Khandhaka

Yojanā samattā.

The Yojanā is complete.

Dvivaggasaṅgahāti mahāvaggacūḷavaggavasena dvīhi vaggehi saṅgahitā.Dvāvīsatipabhedanāti mahāvagge dasa, cūḷavagge dvādasāti evaṃ dvāvīsatipakārā.Pañcakkhandhadukkhappahāyinoti pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ dukkhaṃ pajahanasīlassa, bhagavatoti sambandho.Āsāpīti icchāpi. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā-pañcakkhandhadukkhappahāyino bhagavato sāsane dvivaggasaṅgahā dvāvīsatipabhedanā ye khandhakā bhagavatā vuttā, tesaṃ khandhakānaṃ esā vaṇṇanā antarāyaṃ vinā yathā siddhā, evaṃ tathā pāṇīnaṃ kalyāṇā āsāpi sijjhantūti.

Dvivaggasaṅgahā: Collected by two sections, namely the Mahāvagga and Cūḷavagga. Dvāvīsatipabhedanā: Twenty-two kinds, namely ten in the Mahāvagga and twelve in the Cūḷavagga. Pañcakkhandhadukkhappahāyino: Whose nature is to abandon suffering consisting of the five aggregates, connected to "bhagavato" (of the Blessed One). Āsāpī: Even the desires. Here is the connection: In the dispensation of the Blessed One, whose nature is to abandon suffering consisting of the five aggregates, may the auspicious desires of beings be fulfilled just as this commentary on the Khandhakas, collected by two sections and of twenty-two kinds, spoken by the Blessed One, has been successfully completed without any obstacles.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the commentary on the Cūḷavagga in the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya Commentary.

Cūḷavaggasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Commentary on the Cūḷavagga

Yojanā samattā.

The Yojanā is complete.

Jādilañchitanāmena, nekānaṃ vācito mayā;

By me, named Jādilañchita, after many recitations;
The method of the Yojanā of the Cūḷavagga Khandhaka is complete.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Perfectly Enlightened One

Pācityādiyojanā

Pācityādiyojanā

Parivāravaggayojanā

Parivāravaggayojanā

Cūḷavaggakhandhakassevaṃ, katvāna yojanānayaṃ;

Having thus made the method of the Yojanā of the Cūḷavagga Khandhaka;
Now I will make the method of the Yojanā of the Parivāra.

Soḷasamahāvāro

Soḷasamahāvāro

Paññattivārayojanā

Paññattivārayojanā

visuddhaparivārassāti visuddhāya catuparisāya parivāritassa, athavā visuddhena catuparisasaṅkhātena parivārena samannāgatassa bhagavatoti sambandho. Parivāre hi visuddhe tena parivārito, taṃparivārito vā bhagavāpi visuddhoyeva nāma hoti. Iminā saṃvaṇṇiyamānassa ‘‘parivāro’’ti saṅgahamārūḷhassa desetabbadhammassa anurūpena desakabhūtassa bhagavato thomanaṃ kataṃ hoti.Dhammakkhandhasarīrassāti sīlādidhammakkhandhasaṅkhātena sarīrena samannāgatassa, iminā saṃvaṇṇitānaṃ khandhakānamanurūpena bhagavato thomanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Pakati hesācariyānaṃ yadidaṃ desetabbadhammānurūpena desakassa thomanā (sārattha. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathā; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.1).Anantarāti anantare kāle.

Visuddhaparivārassā: Surrounded by a pure fourfold assembly, or endowed with a pure retinue consisting of the fourfold assembly, connected to "bhagavato" (of the Blessed One). Indeed, the Blessed One is named "pure" because He is surrounded by a pure Parivāra, or because He is surrounded by that Parivāra. With this, praise has been made of the Blessed One, who is the speaker, in accordance with the Dhamma to be taught, the "Parivāra," which has risen to the level of a compendium. Dhammakkhandhasarīrassā: Endowed with a body consisting of the aggregate of Dhammas, namely morality, etc.; with this, praise has been made of the Blessed One in accordance with the Khandhakas being commented upon. This is the nature of the teachers, namely the praise of the speaker in accordance with the Dhamma to be taught (sārattha. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathā; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.1). Anantarā: In the immediately following time.

Yoti vinayo.Pubbāgatanti pubbe vuttesu vibhaṅgakhandhakesu āgataṃ.Nayanti saddaatthavinicchayanayasaṅkhātaṃ sabbaṃ nayaṃ.Hitvāti cajitvā.Anuttānatthavaṇṇananti anuttānānaṃ padānamatthavaṇṇanaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – visuddhaparivārassa dhammakkhandhasarīrassa bhagavato sāsane khandhakānamanantarā ‘‘parivāro’’ti yo vinayo saṅgahaṃ samārūḷho, tassa vinayassa pubbāgataṃ nayaṃ hitvā idāni anuttānatthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmīti.

Yo: That is the Vinaya. Pubbāgataṃ: That has come previously in the Vibhanga Khandhakas that were mentioned earlier. Nayaṃ: All the methods consisting of the methods for determining the meaning of words. Hitvā: Having abandoned. Anuttānatthavaṇṇanaṃ: The explanation of the meaning of words that are not clear. Here is the connection: In the dispensation of the Blessed One, who has a pure retinue and a body consisting of an aggregate of Dhammas, after the Khandhakas, I will now explain the meaning of words that are not clear in that Vinaya which has risen to the level of a compendium called "Parivāra," having abandoned the method that came previously in that Vinaya.

1.Tatthatatthāti ‘‘tassa anuttānatthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmī’’ti yo parivārasaṅkhāto vinayo saṃvaṇṇetabbabhāvena vutto, tattha.Saṅkhepatthoti samāsattho. Yaṃ tenāti ettha tasaddassa aniyamaniddesabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yo so’’ti. Tatthayoti aniyama niddeso, tassa ‘‘tenā’’ti niyamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.Soti padālaṅkāro. Dvīsu hi sabbanāmesu yebhuyyena pubbameva padhānaṃ, pacchimaṃ pana vacanālaṅkāraṃ. Yo so bhagavā paññapesīti sambandho.Ciraṭṭhitikatthanti ciraṃ pañcavassasahassakālaṃ ṭhitikatthāya, ‘‘yācito’’ti ca ‘‘paññapesī’’ti ca sambandho. Dhammasenāpatinā yācitoti sambandho. Yācito hutvā paññapesīti yojanā. Tena bhagavatā paññattanti sambandho. ‘‘Jānatā passatā’’ti dvinnaṃ padānaṃ kammameva dassento āha ‘‘tassa tassā’’tiādi. Tattha‘‘paññattikāla’’nti iminā ‘‘jānatā’’ti padassa kammaṃ dasseti,‘‘dasa atthavase’’ti iminā ‘‘passatā’’ti padassa kammaṃ.

1. There, tattha: In that "anuttānatthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmīti" (I will explain the meaning of words that are not clear), in that Vinaya called "Parivāra" which has been mentioned as something to be commented upon. Saṅkhepattho: The concise meaning. Showing that the word "tassa" (of that) in "yaṃ tenāti" (which by that) is an indefinite designation, he says, "yo so" (which that). There, yo: Is an indefinite designation; the specification of that as "tena" (by that) should be seen. So: Is an adornment of the word. Indeed, in the case of two pronouns, the former is usually the principal one, while the latter is an adornment of the statement. "Yo so bhagavā paññapesīti" (which that Blessed One laid down) is the connection. Ciraṭṭhitikatthaṃ: For the sake of the long-term stability, for a period of five thousand years, connected to both "yācito" (requested) and "paññapesī" (laid down). "Dhammasenāpatinā yācito" (requested by the General of the Dhamma) is the connection. "Yācito hutvā paññapesīti" (having been requested, He laid it down) is the connection. "Tena bhagavatā paññattaṃ" (laid down by that Blessed One) is the connection. Showing that "jānatā passatā" (knowing, seeing) are the objects of the two words, he says, "tassa tassā" (of that, of that), etc. There, "paññattikāla" (time of laying down) shows the object of the word "jānatā" (knowing), "dasa atthavase" (ten reasons) shows the object of the word "passatā" (seeing).

‘‘apicā’’tiādi. ‘‘Pubbenivāsādīhī’’tiādisaddena dibbacakkhussa visuṃ gahetabbattā iddhividhadibbasotaparacittavijānanāni gahetabbāni. Imehi padehi ‘‘jānatā, passatā’’ti dvinnaṃ padānaṃ pañcannaṃ lokiyaabhiññānameva karaṇabhāvaṃ dasseti.Tīhi vijjāhīti pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuāsavakkhayañāṇasaṅkhātāhi tīhi vijjāhi.Chahi vā pana abhiññāhīti saha āsavakkhayañāṇena pañcalokiyābhiññāsaṅkhātāhi chahi abhiññāhi.Sabbatthāti sabbesu tīsu kālesu, pañcasupi ñeyyadhammesu.Samantacakkhunāti anāvaraṇasabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātena samantacakkhunā.Paññāyāti sabbaññutapaññāya.Tirokuṭṭādīti ādisaddena tiropabbatādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Maṃsacakkhunāti pasādacakkhunā.Paṭivedhapaññāyāti maggapaññāya.Desanāpaññāyāti sabbaññutapaññāya. Sabbaññutapaññāyeva hi atthato desanāpaññā nāma. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tassā paññāya tejasā. Abhidhammakathāmaggaṃ, devānaṃ sampavattayīti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā 5). Imehi padehi avatthāvasena visuṃ visuṃ dvinnaṃ padānaṃ karaṇasambhavaṃ dasseti.Arahatāti arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnañca arahattā arahatā.Sammāsambuddhenāti sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhena, tena bhagavatāti sambandho.Kenābhatanti taṃ paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ kena ābhataṃ, iti saṅkhepatthoti yojanā.

"Apicā" (moreover), etc. Because the divine eye should be taken separately from the statement "pubbenivāsādīhī" (with past abodes, etc.), the powers of magical ability, divine ear, and reading the minds of others should be taken. With these words, he shows that the five mundane superknowledges are the means of the two words "jānatā, passatā" (knowing, seeing). Tīhi vijjāhī: With the three knowledges consisting of knowledge of past abodes, divine eye, and knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas. Chahi vā pana abhiññāhī: Or with the six superknowledges consisting of the five mundane superknowledges together with the knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas. Sabbattha: In all three times, in all five knowable things. Samantacakkhunā: With the all-encompassing eye consisting of unobstructed omniscience. Paññāyā: With the wisdom of omniscience. Tirokuṭṭādī: The word "ādī" (etc.) includes things such as mountains beyond. Maṃsacakkhunā: With the fleshy eye, the sense-organ eye. Paṭivedhapaññāyā: With the wisdom of the path. Desanāpaññāyā: With the wisdom of omniscience. Indeed, the wisdom of omniscience is essentially called the wisdom of exposition. Therefore, it was said, "tassā paññāya tejasā. Abhidhammakathāmaggaṃ, devānaṃ sampavattayīti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā 5) (by the power of that wisdom, he set in motion the path of Abhidhamma discourse for the gods). With these words, he shows the possible means of the two words separately according to circumstances. Arahatā: Because he has slain the enemies and spokes, and because he is far from the conditions, etc. Sammāsambuddhenā: Because he has perfectly and independently awakened to all Dhammas, by the Sammāsambuddha, connected to "tena bhagavatā" (by that Blessed One). Kenābhataṃ: By whom was that first pārājika offense brought about? This is the concise meaning, this is the connection.

2.Pucchāvisajjane pana evamattho veditabboti yojanā.Yaṃ tena…pe… pārājikanti idaṃ padaṃ paccuddharaṇamattamevāti sambandho. Patiuddharaṇamattameva, na atthadassananti attho.Etthāti etesu padesu.Ekā paññattīti ekā paṭhamapaññatti.Anupaññattiyoti pacchā ṭhapitā paññattiyo.

2. But the meaning should be understood in this way in the question and answer, this is the connection. Yaṃ tena…pe… pārājikaṃ: This word is merely a restatement, this is the connection. It is merely a restatement, not a showing of the meaning, this is the meaning. Ettha: In these words. Ekā paññattī: One original rule. Anupaññattiyo: Rules laid down later.

Ettāvatāti ettakena ‘‘ekā paññatti, dve anupaññattiyo’’ti vacanamattena vissajjitā hontīti sambandho. Tatiyaṃ pucchanti sambandho. Kasmā anuppannapaññatti tasmiṃ natthīti āha ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi. Tatthahiyasmā aññatra natthi, tasmā natthīti yojanā. ‘‘Anuppanne dose paññattā’’ti iminā anuppanne dose paññapetabbātianuppannapaññattīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.ti anuppannapaññatti.Tasmāti yasmā aññatra natthi, tasmā.Sabbatthapaññattīti ettha sabbasmiṃ padese paññatti sabbatthapaññattīti aluttasamāsaṃ dassento āha ‘‘majjhimadese cevā’’tiādi. ‘‘Majjhimadese ceva paccantimajanapadesu cā’’ti iminā ‘‘sabbatthā’’ti padassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Padesapaññattiṃ apanetvā sabbatthapaññattiṃ pārisesanayena dassento āha ‘‘vinayadharapañcamenā’’tiādi. Tatthavinayadharapañcamenāti anussāvanācariyapañcamena.Etthevāti majjhimadeseyeva.Etehīti catūhi sikkhāpadehi.Sesānīti catūhi sikkhāpadehi sesāni.

Ettāvatā: With just this much, with the mere statement "ekā paññatti, dve anupaññattiyo" (one original rule, two subsequent rules), they are answered, this is the connection. The third question, this is the connection. Why is a rule not yet arisen not in that? He says, "ayaṃ hī" (this, indeed), etc. There, hi because it is not elsewhere, therefore it is not, this is the connection. "Anuppanne dose paññattā" (laid down for an offense not yet arisen), with this, he shows that anuppannapaññattī (rule not yet arisen) means that it should be laid down for an offense not yet arisen. Sā: That rule not yet arisen. Tasmā: Therefore, because it is not elsewhere. Sabbatthapaññattī: Here, showing that "sabbatthapaññatti" (rule everywhere) is a karmadhāraya compound where the locative case is elided, he says, "majjhimadese cevā" (both in the Middle Country), etc. With "majjhimadese ceva paccantimajanapadesu cā" (both in the Middle Country and in border areas), he shows the nature of the word "sabbatthā" (everywhere). Having removed the rule specific to a region, he shows the rule that applies everywhere by way of the remainder, saying, "vinayadharapañcamenā" (by five Vinaya-holders), etc. There, vinayadharapañcamenā: By five including the preceptor who gives the Nissaya. Etthevā: Just in the Middle Country. Etehī: With these four training rules. Sesānī: The remaining from the four training rules.

Sādhāraṇapaññattīti ettha sādhāraṇā nāma bhikkhubhikkhunīnamevāti āha ‘‘bhikkhūnañceva bhikkhunīnañcā’’ti.Idaṃ panāti paṭhamapārājikaṃ pana, paññattanti sambandho.Vinītakathāmattamevāti vinītavatthupakāsakaṃ kathāmattameva.Tāsanti bhikkhunīnaṃ.Byañjanamattamevāti ‘‘sādhāraṇā’’ti ca ‘‘ubhato’’ti ca byañjanamattameva.Etthāti sādhāraṇapaññattiubhatopaññattipade.

Sādhāraṇapaññattī: Here, "sādhāraṇā" (common) means only for bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs, he says, "bhikkhūnañceva bhikkhunīnañcā" (both for bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs). Idaṃ panā: But this first pārājika offense, this is the connection. Vinītakathāmattamevā: Is merely an account that reveals the object of Vinaya. Tāsaṃ: Of those bhikkhunīs. Byañjanamattamevā: Is merely a literal statement of "sādhāraṇā" (common) and "ubhato" (both). Ettha: In the words sādhāraṇapaññatti (rule common) and ubhatopaññatti (rule for both).

‘‘nidānogadha’’nti padassa sattamīsamāsañcaogadhasaddassa anupaviṭṭhatthañca dasseti. Ogāḷho hutvā dharati tiṭṭhatītiogadhaṃ. Nanu nidānogadhe sati ‘‘paṭhamena uddesenā’’ti vattabbaṃ, kasmā ‘‘dutiyena uddesenā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘nidānogadha’’nti.Nidānapariyāpannampi samānanti nidānapariyāpannaṃ samānampīti yojanā.Pisaddo garahattho, pageva dutiye uddese pariyāpanneti dasseti. ‘‘Sīlavipattiādīna’’nti vacanaṃ vitthārento āha‘‘paṭhamā hī’’tiādi.

He shows that the word "nidānogadha" is a locative compound and that the word ogadha means "entered into." Ogaḷho hutvā dharati tiṭṭhatīti (having plunged in, it remains, it stands), hence ogadhaṃ. If "nidānogadhe sati" (when the cause has been plunged into) is the case, "paṭhamena uddesenā" (by the first recitation) should be said; why was "dutiyena uddesenā" (by the second recitation) said? He says, "nidānogadha"nti. Nidānapariyāpannampi samānaṃ: Even though it is included in the cause. The word Pi is in the sense of censure, it shows that it is certainly included in the second recitation. Expanding on the statement "sīlavipattiādīna" (of failure in morality, etc.), he says "paṭhamā hī" (the first, indeed), etc.

Dvaṅgikenāti kāyacittasaṅkhātena dvaṅgikena. Nanu ‘‘ekena samuṭṭhānenā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘kāyatoyevā’’ti vattabbaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘kāyato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhātī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘ettha hī’’tiādi.Etthāti ‘‘ekena samuṭṭhānenā’’ti vacane.Cittanti sevanacittaṃ.Āpannosīti tvaṃ āpanno asīti yojanā.Āma āpannomhīti āma ahaṃ āpanno amhīti yojanā.Tāvadevāti tasmiṃ paṭijānakkhaṇeyeva.Taṃ puggalanti pārājikamāpannaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ.Tappaccayāti tassa pārājikamāpannassa kāraṇā. ‘‘Na katamena samathena sammatī’’ti yaṃ pana vacanaṃ vuttanti yojanā.Tanti vacanaṃ, vuttanti sambandho.

Dvaṅgikenā: With two factors consisting of body and mind. If "ekena samuṭṭhānenā" (arisen from one source) was said, "kāyatoyevā" (it is only from the body) should be said, but why was "kāyato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhāti" (it arises from both body and mind) said? He says, "ettha hī" (here, indeed), etc. Ettha: In the statement "ekena samuṭṭhānenā" (arisen from one source). Cittaṃ: The mind that is indulging. Āpannosī: You have incurred, you are, this is the connection. Āma āpannomhī: Yes, I have incurred, I am, this is the connection. Tāvadevā: At that very moment of acknowledgement. Taṃ puggalaṃ: That person who has incurred a pārājika offense. Tappaccayā: Because of that person who has incurred a pārājika offense. "Na katamena samathena sammatī" (with what kind of agreement is he not in agreement?), the statement that was said, this is the connection. Taṃ: That statement, this is the connection.

Vuttamātikā paññattīti vuttamātikāsaṅkhātā paññatti vinayo nāmāti yojanā. Mātikā hi yasmā paññapīyati saṅkhepena ṭhapīyati, pakāraṃ jānāpeti vā, tasmāpaññattīti vuccati. ‘‘Padabhājanaṃ vuccatī’’ti iminā vitthārena bhājiyati etāyātivibhattīti dasseti.Vītikkamoti kāyavācāvītikkamo. So hi na saṃvarati kāyavācaṃ na pidahatītiasaṃvaroti vuccati.Yesaṃ vattatīti ettha vattatikiriyāya kattāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘vinayapiṭakañca aṭṭhakathā cā’’ti.Paguṇāti vācuggatā.Teti te puggalā, dhārentīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etassāti paṭhamapārājikassa.Kenābhatanti ettha bharadhātuyā dhāraṇaposanatthesu (pāṇinī 108 dhātupāṭhe) dhāraṇatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kena ānīta’’nti. ‘‘Paramparāya ānīta’’nti imināparamparābhatanti padassa tatiyāsamāsaṃ dasseti. Athavā ‘‘kenābhata’’nti pucchāya anurūpaṃ yakāralopavasena vākyanti dasseti.

Vuttamātikā paññattīti: The enacted rule (paññatti) known as Vuttamātikā is the Vinaya, thus the connection should be made. Because the Mātikā is enacted, briefly established, or makes known the manner, therefore it is called paññatti. "Padabhājanaṃ vuccatīti": With this, it is shown that vibhattī means it is divided in detail. Vītikkamo means transgression by body and speech. Because that does not restrain body and speech, nor does it conceal it, it is called asaṃvaro. Yesaṃ vattatī: Here, showing the agent of the verb "vattati," he says, "Vinaya Piṭaka and the commentary." Paguṇā means fluent in speech. Te means those individuals; the connection is that they uphold. means truly, or because. Etassā means of this first Pārājika. Kenābhatanti: Here, showing the meaning of "dhāraṇa" (upholding, maintaining) in the root "bhara" which has the meanings of upholding and nourishing (Pāṇinī, Dhātupāṭha 108), he says, "kena ānīta" (by whom was it brought?). With "paramparāya ānīta" (brought by tradition), he shows the third compound (tatiyāsamāsaṃ) of the word paramparābhata. Alternatively, in accordance with the question "kenābhata," it shows the sentence by way of the elision of the "ya" sound.

3.Upāli dāsako cevātiādikā gāthāyo kimatthaṃ kehi ṭhapitāti āha ‘‘idānī’’tiādi.Tanti paraṃ paraṃ.Tatthāti tāsu gāthāsu.Yanti vacanaṃ.Iminā nayenāti paṭhamapārājikassa pucchāvisajjane vuttena iminā nayena.

3.Upāli dāsako cevātiādikā: He says, "idānītiādi" (now, etc.), regarding for what purpose and by whom were the verses beginning with "Upāli dāsako ceva" established. Tanti means one after another. Tatthāti means in those verses. Yanti means which word. Iminā nayenāti means in this way, in this manner stated in the questioning and answering of the first Pārājika.

Iti mahāvibhaṅge paññattivāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the enactment section (paññattivāra) in the Mahāvibhaṅga.

Katāpattivārādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Katāpattivāra, etc.

157.Itoti paññattivārato, paraṃ vuttā satta vārā uttānatthā evāti yojanā.Katāpattivāroti ‘‘katāpattī’’ti padena lakkhito vāro. Eseva nayo sesesupi.Tadanantaroti tesaṃ sattannaṃ vārānaṃ anantare vutto.Samuccayavāroti saṃ ekato āpattivipattiādayo uciyanti sampiṇḍiyanti etthāti samuccayo, soyeva vāro samuccayavāro.

157.Itoti means from the enactment section (paññattivāra); it should be construed that the seven sections stated after this are indeed obvious in meaning. Katāpattivāroti means the section indicated by the word "katāpattī" (committed offense). The same method applies to the remaining ones as well. Tadanantaroti means stated immediately after those seven sections. Samuccayavāroti: Because offenses, adversities, etc., are gathered and compiled together in it, it is a samuccaya (collection); that very section is the Samuccayavāra.

188.Tatoti tehi aṭṭhahi vārehi, paraṃ vuttāti sambandho. Paccayavasena vutto eko paññattivāroti yojanā.Paccayavasenāti paccayasaddassa vasena.Tassāti paccayassa.Tepīti aṭṭha vārāpi.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.Tatoti mahāvibhaṅgato, paraṃ āgatāti sambandho. Evaṃ ime dvattiṃsa vārāti yojanā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etthāti dvattiṃsavāresu.

188.Tatoti means after those eight sections, the connection is "vuttā" (stated). It should be construed that one enactment section is stated based on condition (paccaya). Paccayavasenāti means based on the word paccaya (condition). Tassāti means of that condition. Tepīti means even those eight sections. Itītiādi is the conclusion. Tatoti means from the Mahāvibhaṅga; the connection is "āgatā" (come). Thus, these are thirty-two sections, so the connection should be made. ti means truly, or because. Etthāti means in these thirty-two sections.

Samuṭṭhānasīsavaṇṇanā
Description of the Samuṭṭhāna Headings

257.Tadanantarāyāti tesaṃ dvattiṃsavārānaṃ anantaraṃ vuttāya samuṭṭhānakathāya evamattho veditabboti yojanā.Anattā iti nicchitāti anattātveva vinicchitā. Imināanattā iti nicchayāti ettha cidhātuyā vinicchayatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Aniccākārādīhī’’ti imināsabhāgadhammānanti ettha aniccākārādīhi samāno bhāgo etesantisabhāgā,teyeva dhammāsabhāgadhammāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Nāmamattampīti aniccādināmamattampi.Pisaddena pageva nāmiko aniccādisabhāvoti dasseti.Na paññāyatīti na khāyati. Imināna nāyatīti ettha ñādhātuyā khāyanatthaṃ dasseti.Dukkhahāninti ettha dukkhaṃ jahātītidukkhahānīti dassento āha ‘‘dukkhaghātana’’nti. Dukkhaṃ hanatītidukkhaghātano,saddhammo, taṃ.‘‘Khandhakā yā ca mātikā’’ti vattabbe sukhuccāraṇatthāya rassavasena pāṭho atthīti āha ‘‘khandhakā ya ca mātikā’’ti.Samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatokatanti (saṃ. ni. 1.216) ettha ‘‘samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatakata’’nti vattabbe ‘‘parosahassa’’ntiādīsu viya okārāgamavasena ‘‘samuṭṭhānaniyatokata’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatakata’’nti.Etenāti ‘‘samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatokata’’nti pāṭhena.Paccetabboti pati etabbo, paṭimukhaṃ ñātabboti attho.Aññehīti tīhi sikkhāpadehi aññehi sikkhāpadehi.

257.Tadanantarāyāti: It should be understood that the meaning is thus for the statement of origin (samuṭṭhāna) stated immediately after those thirty-two sections. Anattā iti nicchitāti means definitely determined as without self (anatta). With this, he shows that in anattā iti nicchayāti, the "ci" root has the meaning of determination (vinicchaya). With "Aniccākārādīhī," he shows that in sabhāgadhammānanti, sabhāgā means having a similar part with impermanence, etc.; those very things are sabhāgadhammā, thus the meaning of the word is shown. Nāmamattampīti means even just the name of impermanence, etc. The pi particle shows that, not to mention the inherent nature of impermanence, etc. Na paññāyatīti means it is not apparent. With this, he shows that in na nāyatīti, the root "ñā" has the meaning of appearing. Dukkhahāninti: Here, showing that dukkhahānī means "one who abandons suffering," he says, "dukkhaghātana" (destroying suffering). Dukkhaṃ hanatīti dukkhaghātano, means the good Dhamma, that. ‘‘Khandhakā yā ca mātikā’’: He says "khandhakā ya ca mātikā" because there is a reading with shortening for ease of pronunciation when it should have been said "khandhakā yā ca mātikā". Samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatokatanti (Saṃ. Ni. 1.216): Here, he says "samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatakata" because "samuṭṭhānaniyatokata" is said with the addition of the "o" sound, as in "parosahassa," when it should have been said "samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatakata." Etenāti means by this reading, "samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatokata." Paccetabboti means pati etabbo, it should be known face to face; this is the meaning. Aññehīti means by the other precepts other than these three precepts.

Tatthāti sambhedanidānavacanesu. Sambhedavacanena paccetabbanti sambandho.ti saccaṃ. Tāni tīṇi sikkhāpadāni ṭhapetvāti sambandho.Paññattidesasaṅkhātanti paññattiṭṭhānabhūtadesasaṅkhātaṃ. ‘‘Imāni tīṇī’’ti iminā ‘‘dissantī’’ti kiriyāya kattāraṃ dasseti. ‘‘Paññāyantī’’ti iminā disadhātuyā khāyanatthaṃ dasseti.Tatthāti samuṭṭhānaniyamasambhedanidānasaṅkhātesu tīsu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Itaraṃ panāti samuṭṭhānaniyamasambhedehi aññaṃ pana.

Tatthāti means in the words that are the origin of dispute. It should be connected that it should be understood by the statement of dispute. ti means truly. It should be connected that, having set aside those three precepts. Paññattidesasaṅkhātanti means reckoned as the place of enactment. With "Imāni tīṇī," he shows the agent of the verb "dissantī" (are seen). With "Paññāyantī," he shows that the root "dis" has the meaning of appearing. Tatthāti means in these three reckoned as origin, fixedness, dispute, and basis; the locative is used in determination. Itaraṃ panāti means but other than origin, fixedness and dispute.

Āḷavīti āḷaviyaṃ. Sakkesu bhaggesu cāti ettha janapadanāmattā bahuvacanavasena vuttaṃ.

Āḷavīti means in Āḷavī. Because it is only a place name, it is stated in the plural in "Sakkesu bhaggesu ca".

vibhaṅgeti ettha sukāralopoti dasseti.Tassāti sikkhāpadassa.Yathāñāyanti yuttiyā anurūpaṃ.Tanti samuṭṭhānaṃ.Me suṇāthāti mama santikā suṇātha.Itīti ayamattho.

Vibhaṅgeti: Here, he shows the elision of the "su" sound. Tassāti means of that precept. Yathāñāyanti means according to reason. Tanti means that origin. Me suṇāthāti means listen from me. Itīti means this meaning.

Kathinanti paṭhamakathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Ananuññātāya saddhinti ananuññātasamuṭṭhānena saddhiṃ.Sadisā idha dissareti etthaidhasaddo atthapakaraṇavasena ubhatovibhaṅgavisayoti āha ‘‘idha ubhatovibhaṅge’’ti. ‘‘Sadisānī’’ti imināsadisāti ettha nikārassākārādeso dassito. ‘‘Dissantī’’ti iminādissareti ettha antisaddassa rekāro (niruttidīpaniyaṃ 570 sute) dassito.

Kathinanti means the first Kathina origin. Ananuññātāya saddhinti means together with the unapproved origin. Sadisā idha dissareti: Here, the word idha means the subject of both Vibhaṅgas, according to the context, so he says, "idha ubhatovibhaṅge" (here, in both Vibhaṅgas). With "Sadisānī," he shows that in sadisā, the ā sound is an augment for the ni sound. With "Dissantī," he shows that in dissare, the re sound is for the anti sound (Niruttidīpaniyaṃ 570 sute).

Samuṭṭhānasīso

Samuṭṭhāna Headings

Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Origin of the First Pārājika

258.Kimatthaṃ ‘‘methunaṃ sukkasaṃsaggo’’tiādivacanaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘idānī’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti ‘‘methunaṃ sukkasaṃsaggo’’tiādivacane.Samuṭṭhānasīsanti samuṭṭhānānaṃ, samuṭṭhānesu vā sīsaṃ.Sesānīti paṭhamapārājikato sesāni pañcasattati sikkhāpadāni.Tenāti paṭhamapārājikena. ‘‘Sukkasaṃsaggo’’tiādivacanaṃ saṃvaṇṇento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti ‘‘sukkasaṃsaggo’’tiādivacane.

258.He says, "idānītiādi" (now, etc.), regarding for what purpose was the statement beginning with "methunaṃ sukkasaṃsaggo" (sexual intercourse, emission of semen) stated. There, tatthāti means in the statement beginning with "methunaṃ sukkasaṃsaggo." Samuṭṭhānasīsanti means the head of origins, or among origins. Sesānīti means the remaining seventy-five precepts from the first Pārājika. Tenāti means by the first Pārājika. Explaining the statement beginning with "Sukkasaṃsaggo," he says, "tatthā" (there), etc. There, tatthāti means in the statement beginning with "sukkasaṃsaggo."

Khuddakavaṇṇanāvasāneti khuddakaṭṭhakathāya avasāne.

Khuddakavaṇṇanāvasāneti means at the end of the Khuddaka commentary.

Liṅgavipariyāyoti liṅgavipallāso.Kāyamānasikā katāti ettha kāyamānasesu pavattā kāyamānasikāti vutte samuṭṭhānāti āha ‘‘kāyacittasamuṭṭhānā katā’’ti.

Liṅgavipariyāyoti means transformation of gender. Kāyamānasikā katāti: Here, when it is said that they are kāyamānasika, occurring in body and mind, it means origins, so he says, "kāyacittasamuṭṭhānā katā" (they are done by bodily and mental origins).

Dutiyapārājikasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Origin of the Second Pārājika

259.Idaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsanti sambandho. ‘‘Adinnādāna’’nti imināadinnanti ettha samudāyanāme ekadesavohāroti dasseti.Sesānīti dutiyapārājikato sesāni ekūnasattati sikkhāpadāni.Tenāti dutiyapārājikena.Tatthāti ‘‘viggahuttarī’’tiādivacane.Viggahuttarītiādipadānaṃ byañjane ādaramakatvā atthameva dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘manussaviggahauttarimanussadhammasikkhāpadānī’’ti.Aniyatā dutiyikāti āpattiṃ apekkhitvā pāḷiyaṃ itthiliṅgavasena vuttaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana sikkhāpadaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgavasena dutiyanti vuttaṃ.

259.This origin is one origin heading, so the connection should be made. With "Adinnādāna," he shows that in adinna, there is the usage of a part in the collective name. Sesānīti means the remaining sixty-nine precepts from the second Pārājika. Tenāti means by the second Pārājika. Tatthāti means in the statement beginning with "viggahuttarī" (dispute, further). He said "manussaviggahauttarimanussadhammasikkhāpadānī" (precepts of human dispute, further human nature) in order to show only the meaning without regard for the literal form of the words beginning with "viggahuttarī." Aniyatā dutiyikāti: In the Pāḷi, it is stated in the feminine gender in relation to the offense; however, in the commentary, it is stated as "dutiyanti" (the second) in the neuter gender in relation to the precept.

Samuṭṭhānā tikā katāti ettha ‘‘tikasamuṭṭhānā’’ti vattabbe padavipariyāyavasena kakārassa dīghavasena samuṭṭhānā tikāti vuttanti dassento āha ‘‘tikasamuṭṭhānā katā’’ti.

Samuṭṭhānā tikā katāti: Here, showing that it is said "samuṭṭhānā tikā" by way of the reversal of the words and the lengthening of the "ka" sound, when it should have been said "tikasamuṭṭhānā," he says "tikasamuṭṭhānā katā" (threefold origins are done).

Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Sañcaritta Origin

260.‘‘Sañcarī’’ti idaṃ tāva sañcarittaṃ nāma ekasamuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisāni.

260.‘‘Sañcarī’’ti: This Sañcaritta is one origin heading; the remaining ones are similar to it.

Vibhaṅge āgatena ‘‘riñcantī’’ti (pārā. 576) padena eḷakalomadhovāpanasikkhāpadaṃ upalakkhitvā vuttanti āha ‘‘vibhaṅge riñcanti uddesanti āgata’’nti.

He says, "vibhaṅge riñcanti uddesanti āgata" (in the Vibhaṅga, "they abandon" comes as the summary), having specified the precept of having sheep's wool washed by the word "riñcantī" (they abandon) that comes in the Vibhaṅga (pārā. 576).

‘‘Yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya’’ iti (pāci. 135-136) ca ‘‘aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ dadeyya’’iti (pāci. 169) ca ‘‘cīvaraṃ sibbeyya’’iti (pāci. 176-177) ca vuttasikkhāpadattayanti yojanā.

The two stated precepts, "Yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya" (pāci. 135-136) and "aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ dadeyya" (pāci. 169) and "cīvaraṃ sibbeyya" (pāci. 176-177), should be connected.

‘‘Samaṇacīvarena cā’’ti evaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho. ‘‘Samaṇacīvaraṃ dadeyyā’’ti idaṃ (pāci. 917) vacanaṃ sandhāyāti sambandho.

The statement "Samaṇacīvarena cā" (and with the samaṇa's robe) has been made, so the connection should be made. It should be connected that this statement "Samaṇacīvaraṃ dadeyyā" (pāci. 917) is intended.

Samanubhāsanāsamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Samanubhāsanā Origin

261.Bhedanti idaṃ samanubhāsanaṃ nāma ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisāni.

261.Bhedanti: This Samanubhāsana is one origin heading; the remaining ones are similar to it.

Kathinasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Kathina Origin

262.Ubbhatanti idaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisāni.

262.Ubbhatanti: This Kathina origin is one origin heading; the remaining ones are similar to it.

Āvasathena saddhinti āvasathasaddena saddhiṃ.

Āvasathena saddhinti means together with the word "āvasatha" (dwelling).

Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Eḷakaloma Origin

263.‘‘Eḷakalomā’’ti idaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ.Itoti yathāvuttato.Pāḷinti mātikāpāḷiṃ.Virajjhitvāti pubbāparato virādhetvā.Yathāti yenākārena.Panasaddo anuggahattho. Kiñcāpi likhanti, pana tathāpīti yojanā.Evanti tathākārena.Atthānukkamoti atthassa anukkamo.

263.‘‘Eḷakalomā’’ti: This Eḷakaloma origin is one origin heading. Itoti means from what has been stated. Pāḷinti means the Mātikā Pāḷi. Virajjhitvāti means without contradicting the beginning and the end. Yathāti means in whatever way. The word Pana is in the sense of favor. Although they write, but still, so the connection should be made. Evanti means in that way. Atthānukkamoti means the sequence of meaning.

‘‘Bhikkhunī’’tiādinā vuttānīti sambandho. Ādisaddena ‘‘sikkhamānā ca sāmaṇerī gihiniyā’’ti pāṭhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.

It should be connected that those stated by "Bhikkhunītiādi" (Bhikkhunī, etc.). With the "ādi" word, it includes the reading "sikkhamānā ca sāmaṇerī gihiniyā" (a female trainee, a female novice, and a laywoman).

Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Padasodhamma Origin

264.Padanti idaṃ padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisāni. ‘‘Tathā atthaṅgatena cā’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti sambandho. ‘‘Atthaṅgate sūriye ovadeyyā’’ti (pāci. 154-155) idaṃ vacanaṃ sandhāyāti sambandho. Anokāso ca…pe… sandhāya vuttanti (pāci. 1219-1221) etthāpi eseva nayo.

264.Padanti: This Padasodhamma origin is one origin heading; the remaining ones are similar to it. The statement "Tathā atthaṅgatena cā" (and also with the one who has set) has been made, so the connection should be made. It should be connected that this statement is intended by "Atthaṅgate sūriye ovadeyyā" (pāci. 154-155). The same method applies here as well, "Anokāso ca…pe… sandhāya vuttanti" (pāci. 1219-1221).

Addhānasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Addhāna Origin

265.Addhānanti idaṃ addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisāni.

265.Addhānanti: This Addhāna origin is one origin heading; the remaining ones are similar to it.

Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Theyyasattha Origin

266.Theyyasatthanti idaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisāni.‘‘Byūhena sattamā’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti yojanā.Tadanantaramevāti tassa sikkhāpadassa anantarameva, ‘‘āgata’’iti sambandho.

266.Theyyasatthanti: This Theyyasattha origin is one origin heading; the remaining ones are similar to it. The statement "‘‘Byūhena sattamā’’" (seventh by arrangement) has been made, so the connection should be made. Tadanantaramevāti means immediately after that precept; the connection is "āgata" (come).

Dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Dhammadesanā Origin

267.Dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhāne samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ natthi, sabbāni ekadasa sikkhāpadāni sampiṇḍetvā dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānānīti vuttāni.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ.Tesanti tesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ.Sambhinnasamuṭṭhānanti saṃsaggasamuṭṭhānaṃ.Tividhanti bhūtārocanacorivuṭṭhāpanaananuññātasamuṭṭhānavasena tippakāraṃ.Tanti niyatasamuṭṭhānaṃ, hotīti sambandho. Punatanti niyatasamuṭṭhānaṃ, dassetunti sambandho. Punatanti vacanaṃ.Nettidhammānulomikanti ettha kāyavācaṃ neti vinetītinetti,kāyavācaṃ neti vineti ettha, etāyāti vānetti. Dhammoti pāḷi. Sā hi yasmā atthaṃ dhāreti, tasmā dhammoti vuccati. Nettiyeva dhammonettidhammo,tassa anulomikaṃ nettidhammānulomikaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vinayapāḷidhammassa anuloma’’nti.

267.There is no origin heading in the Dhammadesanā origin; all eleven precepts are combined and stated as Dhammadesanā origins. Evantiādi is the conclusion. Tesanti means of those precepts. Sambhinnasamuṭṭhānanti means Saṃsaggasamuṭṭhāna (association origin). Tividhanti means threefold by way of the origin of telling a falsehood, arousing anger, stealing, and unapproved. Tanti means the fixed origin; the connection is "hotīti" (is). Again, tanti means the fixed origin; the connection is "dassetunti" (to show). Again, tanti is the word. Nettidhammānulomikanti: Here, netti means that which guides and subdues body and speech; or that by which body and speech are guided and subdued; Dhammoti means the Pāḷi. Because that upholds the meaning, therefore it is called Dhamma. Nettiyeva dhammo nettidhammo,tassa anulomikaṃ nettidhammānulomikaṃ means conforming to the Netti Dhamma. Therefore, it is said, "vinayapāḷidhammassa anuloma" (conforming to the Dhamma of the Vinaya Pāḷi).

Iti samuṭṭhānasīsavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Samuṭṭhāna Headings.

Antarapeyyāla katipucchāvāravaṇṇanā

Description of the Antarapeyyāla and Katipucchā Sections

271.Idāni vuttoti sambandho. ‘‘Idānī’’ti padena sambandhattāvuttoti etthatapaccayo paccuppannakālikoti daṭṭhabbo.

271.Now, it should be connected that it is stated. Because of the connection with the word "Idānī" (now), the ta suffix in vuttoti (stated) should be seen as being in the present tense.

Tatthāti mātikāyaṃ, pucchāsu vā.Āgatāpattipucchāti āgatāpattiyā pucchā.ti visesajotako, hi visesaṃ vakkhāmīti attho.Etthāti ‘‘kati āpattikkhandhā’’ti dutiyapade. ‘‘Rāsivasenā’’ti iminākhandhasaddassa rāsatthaṃ dasseti.Vinītavatthūnīti ettha vinītasaddo vinayapariyāyoti āha ‘‘vinayapucchā’’ti. Nanu vinītavinayasaddānaṃ saddato nānattā atthatopi nānaṃ, kasmā pana ‘‘vinayapucchā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘vinītaṃ…pe… eka’’nti.Idanti padattayaṃ.Atthato ekanti atthatoyeva ekaṃ, na saddato.Vinītavatthūnīti āpattivinayakāraṇattā vinītavatthūni.Yesūti agāravesu.Satīti santesu. Ettha ca yesu sati āpattiyo na honti, asati hontīti vākyampi avuttasiddhinayena gahetabbaṃ.Yesūti gāravesu.Teti agāravagārave. Yasmā pana natthīti sambandho.Vipattibhāvapucchāti vipattibhāvassa pucchā. Pucchiyati imāyātipucchā. Vivādamūlāni anuvādamūlānīti imā pucchāyo mūlapucchāti sambandho. Potthakesu ‘‘imānī’’ti nikārena saha pāṭho atthi, so apāṭhoyeva.Mūlapucchāti pucchiyanti imāhīti pucchā, mūlānaṃ pucchā mūlapucchā. ‘‘Adhikaraṇa’’ntiādīsu ‘‘vuttaṃ’’ iti sambandho.Tesaṃyevāti adhikaraṇānaṃyeva. Ayamettha mātikā.

Tatthāti in the mātikā, or in the questions. Āgatāpattipucchāti a question about an offense that has been committed. ti a particle indicating specificity, meaning, "I will explain the specificity." Etthāti in the second phrase, "how many groups of offenses?" With "rāsivasenā," it shows that the word khandha means a heap. Vinītavatthūnīti here, the word vinīta is a synonym for vinaya, hence "vinayapucchā." If the words vinīta and vinaya are different in sound and also different in meaning, why is it said to be "vinayapucchā"? He says, "vinītaṃ…pe… ekaṃ" (disciplined…pe…one). Idanti these three words. Atthato ekanti one only in meaning, not in sound. Vinītavatthūnīti because they cause the discipline of offenses, they are vinītavatthūni. Yesūti in the agāravas. Satīti when present. Here, the sentence, "and when these are present, offenses do not occur, and when absent, they do occur," should be understood by the implied meaning. Yesūti in the gāravas. Teti the agārava and gārava. But since there is no connection. Vipattibhāvapucchāti a question about the state of failure. Pucchā means that by which one asks. Vivādamūlāni anuvādamūlānīti these questions are related to the root questions. In some books, there is a reading along with the particle "imānī," but that is the wrong reading. Mūlapucchāti questions are asked by these, the questions of the roots are mūlapucchā. In "adhikaraṇa," etc., "vuttaṃ" is the connection. Tesaṃyevāti of those adhikaraṇas themselves. This is the mātikā here.

mātikāyāti pātimokkhe.Vibhaṅgeti padabhājaniyaṃ, āgatavasena vuttāti yojanā. Ayamettha niddeso.

mātikāyāti of the Pāṭimokkha. Vibhaṅgeti in the word analysis, it is stated according to what has come, is the connection. This is the niddesa here.

āratītiādipadānaṃ vacanatthaṃ dassento āha‘‘ārakā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘ārakā’’ti imināāratīti ettha āupasaggassa atthaṃ dasseti.Etehīti āpattikkhandhehi, ārakāti sambandho. ‘‘Ramatī’’ti iminā tipaccayo katvatthe hotīti dasseti.Ratīti ramanaṃ. Iminā tipaccayo bhāvatthepi hotīti dasseti.Vināti etehi āpattikkhandhehi vinā. Imināviratīti ettha vityūpasaggassa atthaṃ dasseti.Paccekanti pati ekaṃ,paṭisaddo vicchatthajotako, visuṃ visunti attho. Imināpaṭiviratīti ettha paṭityūpasaggassa atthaṃ dasseti. Virati paṭiviratīti etthāpi tipaccayo bhāvatthepi veditabbo.Veranti anatthakarattā viramitabbanti viraṃ, tadeva veraṃ, rāgādiakusaladhammā. Te hi verahetuttā veranti vuccanti.Etāyāti viratiyā. Imināakiriyāti ettha ririyapaccayo karaṇatthe hotīti dasseti. Yaṃ āpattikkhandhakaraṇanti yojanā.Tassāti āpattikkhandhakaraṇassa.Paṭipakkhatoti viruddhabhāvato. Imināakaraṇanti ettha akāro viruddhatthoti dasseti.Āpattikkhandhaajjhāpattiyāti āpattikkhandhānaṃ atikkamitvā āpajjanassa. ‘‘Velanato’’ti iminā velatītivelā,velanaṃ vā velāti vacanatthe dasseti.Niyyānanti maggaṃ. Maggo hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena yāti gacchatītiniyyānanti vuccati. ‘‘Bandhatī’’ti iminā sidhātuyā bandhanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Nivāretī’’ti iminā bandhadhātuyā adhippāyatthaṃ.Etanti ‘‘setū’’ti nāmaṃ.Taṃ setunti āpattikkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ taṃ setuṃ. Ettha kesuci potthakesu ‘‘so setū’’ti ca ‘‘etāya paññattiyā’’ti ca pāṭho atthi, so apāṭhoyeva.

Explaining the word meaning of the words beginning with āratī, he says ‘‘ārakā’’tiādi. There, with "ārakā" he shows the meaning of the prefix ā in āratī. Etehīti with these groups of offenses, related to ārakā. With "ramatī," he shows that the ti suffix is in the sense of doing. Ratīti enjoyment. With this, he shows that the ti suffix is also in the sense of being. Vināti without these groups of offenses. With this, he shows the meaning of the prefix vi in viratī. Paccekanti towards each, the word paṭi indicates distribution, meaning separately. With this, he shows the meaning of the prefix paṭi in paṭiviratī. Here too, the ti suffix in virati paṭiviratī should be understood in the sense of being. Veranti because they cause harm, they are to be refrained from, hence viraṃ, that itself is veraṃ, unwholesome qualities like greed, etc. These are called vera because they are the cause of enmity. Etāyāti of this refraining. With this, he shows that the ririya suffix in akiriyā is in the sense of cause. Which is the cause of the group of offenses, is the connection. Tassāti of the cause of the group of offenses. Paṭipakkhatoti from the state of opposition. With this, he shows that the a in akaraṇa means opposition. Āpattikkhandhaajjhāpattiyāti by transgressing the groups of offenses. With "velanato," he shows the word meaning that velā means to cross, or velanaṃ is velā. Niyyānanti the path. The path is called niyyāna because it goes, reaches, towards Nibbāna as the object. With "bandhatī," he shows the meaning of binding of the root sidha. With "nivāretī," he shows the meaning of intention of the root bandha. Etanti the name "setu." Taṃ setunti that bridge called a group of offenses. Here, in some books, there is a reading "so setū" and "etāya paññattiyā," but that is the wrong reading.

Buddhe agāravādīsuevaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Yoti yo koci, na gacchatītiādīsu sambandho.Dharamāneti tiṭṭhamāne, saṃvijjamāneti attho.Upaṭṭhānanti upaṭṭhānaṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhānatthaṃ vā.Etassāti yassa kassaci gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā.Dhammassavananti dhammassavanaṭṭhānaṃ, dhammassavanatthaṃ vā.Dhammassavanagganti dhammassavanaṃ gaṇhanti etthāti dhammassavanaggo, dhammasavanamaṇḍapo. Atha vā dhammassavanaṃ gaṇhātīti dhammassavanaggo, dhammassavanaṭṭhāne samāgamajano, taṃ dhammassavanaggaṃ.Cittīkāranti apacāyanākāraṃ. Vikkhitto vā anādaro vā hutvā nisīdatīti yojanā.Kāyapāgabbiyanti bhusaṃ garati aññe pīḷeti anenātipagabbo,atimāno, oṭṭhajo tatiyakkharo. Pagabbassa bhāvo pāgabbiyaṃ, kāyena pāgabbiyaṃ kāyapāgabbiyaṃ (vajira. ṭī. parivāra 271; sārattha. ṭī. parivāra 3.271; vi. vi. ṭī. parivāra 2.271 saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.146; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.82-84; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.144), kāyānācāraṃ.Tisso sikkhāti adhisīlasikkhādikā tisso sikkhā. Pamajjanaṃpamādo, sativippavāsoti āha ‘‘pamāde ca sativippavāse’’ti.Āmisapaṭisandhāranti āmisena attano, paresañca antarassa paṭisandahanaṃ āmisapaṭisandhāro, tathā dhammapaṭisandhāro.

Buddhe agāravādīsu the judgment should be understood in this way, is the connection. Yoti whoever, the connection is to "does not go," etc. Dharamāneti while standing, meaning existing. Upaṭṭhānanti a place for attendance, or for the purpose of attendance. Etassāti of any householder or renunciant. Dhammassavananti a place for hearing the Dhamma, or for the purpose of hearing the Dhamma. Dhammassavanagganti the place where they receive the hearing of the Dhamma is dhammassavanaggo, the pavilion for hearing the Dhamma. Or, dhammassavanaggo means one who takes up the hearing of the Dhamma, the gathering of people at the place of hearing the Dhamma, that is dhammassavanaggaṃ. Cittīkāranti the act of disrespect. He sits scattered or without respect, is the connection. Kāyapāgabbiyanti one who greatly despises, hurts others with this is pagabbo, arrogance, the third letter with lip-born origin. The state of the arrogant is pāgabbiyaṃ, arrogance with the body is kāyapāgabbiyaṃ, bodily misconduct. Tisso sikkhāti the three trainings beginning with adhisīlasikkhā. Forgetting is pamādo, loss of mindfulness, hence he says, "in negligence and loss of mindfulness." Āmisapaṭisandhāranti connecting oneself or others internally with material things is āmisapaṭisandhāro, similarly dhamma paṭisandhāro.

272.Sattharipi agāravotiādīnaṃ atthoti sambandho. ‘‘Anīcavuttī’’tiādināappatissoti padassa adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti, saddattho panevaṃ veditabbo, paṭimukhaṃ ādarena satthuvacanaṃ asuṇanto appatisso nāmāti.Ajjhattaṃ vāti ettha niyakajjhattādīsu catūsu niyakajjhattabhāvañca sattamīvibhattiyā amādesabhāvañca dassento āha ‘‘attano santāne vā’’ti. ‘‘Attano pakkhe vā’’ti iminā attano cittasantāneti atthaṃ paṭikkhipati.Tatra tumheti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tasmiṃ ajjhattabahiddhābhede’’ti.Saparasantāneti attaparasantāne.Pahānāyāti ettha hādhātuyā karaṇañca āyasaddassa tadatthabhāvañca dassento āha ‘‘mettābhāvanādīhi nayehi pahānattha’’nti.Mettābhāvanādīhītiādisaddena karuṇābhāvanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Tanti vivādamūlaṃ. ‘‘Appavattibhāvāyā’’ti imināanavassavāyāti ettha avapubba sudhātuyā pavattanatthaṃ dasseti.

272.Sattharipi agāravotiādīnaṃ atthoti sambandho. With "anīcavuttī," etc., he shows the intended meaning of the word appatisso, but the word meaning should be understood thus: one who does not listen attentively with respect to the words of the Teacher is called appatisso. Ajjhattaṃ vāti here, showing the state of being one's own internal, and the state of not being an āmādesa of the seventh case ending in the four, beginning with niyakajjhatta, he says, "or in one's own mind-stream." With "attano pakkhe vā" he rejects the meaning "in one's own mind." Tatra tumheti here, showing the scope of the word ta, he says, "in that distinction between internal and external." Saparasantāneti in one's own and others' mind-streams. Pahānāyāti here, showing the sense of cause of the root and the state of being that meaning of the word āya, he says, "for the purpose of abandoning by methods such as the development of loving-kindness." Mettābhāvanādīhīti with the word ādi, he includes the development of compassion, etc. Tanti a root of quarrel. With "appavattibhāvāyā," he shows that the root su with the prefix ava in anavassavāyā means to cause to flow.

Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti ettha sassa attano idaṃ saṃ, saṃ diṭṭhiṃ parato āmasatīti sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti dassento āha ‘‘sakameva diṭṭhiṃ parāmasatī’’ti. ‘‘Ya’’ntiādinā parāmasanākāraṃ dasseti.Ādhānaggāhīti ettha ābhuso ṭhiyate ādhānanti vacanatthenaādhānasaddo daḷhapariyāyoti āha ‘‘daḷhaggāhī’’ti. Daḷhaṃ gaṇhātītidaḷhaggāhī.

Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti here, showing that sa means one's own, this is saṃ, one who clings to his own view by others, is sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī, he says, "one who clings to only his own view." With "ya," etc., he shows the manner of clinging. Ādhānaggāhīti here, with the word meaning that ādhāna is firmly established, the word ādhāna is a synonym for firmness, hence he says, "one who grasps firmly." One who grasps firmly is daḷhaggāhī.

273.Anuvādamūlaniddeso kiñcāpi samānoti yojanā.Atha khoti tathā samānopi, ayamettha visesoti sambandho. Vivadantānaṃ puggalānanti yojanā.Tathā vivadantāti tenākārena vivadantā, anuvadantīti sambandho. ‘‘Asukaṃ nāma vipattiṃ āpanno’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ āpattiyā sallakkhetvā dassento āha ‘‘pārājikaṃ āpannosī’’tiādi.Etthāti anuvādamūle.Visesoti vivādamūlato viseso. Vivadantānaṃ kodhūpanāhādīni vivādamūlāni, anuvadantānaṃ anuvādamūlānīti vuttaṃ hoti.

273. The explanation of the roots of accusation, although similar, is the connection. Atha khoti although similar thus, but there is a difference here, is the connection. Of persons who are quarreling, is the connection. Tathā vivadantāti quarreling in that manner, they accuse, is the connection. Showing the matter that was already stated, "so-and-so has fallen into such a misfortune," by considering it as an offense, he says, "you have fallen into a pārājika," etc. Etthāti in the root of accusation. Visesoti a difference from the root of quarrel. The anger and animosity, etc., of those who quarrel are the roots of quarrel, the roots of accusation are for those who accuse, is what is said.

274.Mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāmāti ettha mettā etassatthīti mettaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, mettacittasahagataṃ kāyakammanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mettacittena kataṃ kāyakamma’’nti. Sammukhaparammukhānaṃ vitthāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti tesu sammukhaparammukhesu.Kāyakammaṃ nāmāti mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Therānaṃ dānaiti sambandho.Ubhayehipīti navakattherehipi.Tesūti navakattheresu.Avamaññanti avamānaṃ. Attano dunnikkhittānaṃ paṭisāmanaṃ viya paṭisāmananti yojanā. ‘‘Mettākāyakammasaṅkhāto’’ti imināayampi dhammoti ettha dhammasarūpaṃ dasseti.Pisaddo upari vakkhamāne dhamme apekkhati. ‘‘Saritabbo’’ti imināanīyasaddo kammavācakoti dasseti.Satijanakoti sabrahmacārīnaṃ satijanako. Tassa padassa adhippāyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yo na’’ntiādi. Tatthayoti puggalo.Nanti mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Taṃ puggalaṃ anussarantīti sambandho.Yesanti sabrahmacārīnaṃ.Teti sabrahmacārino. Pasannacittā hutvāti sambandho. ‘‘Piyaṃ karotī’’ti imināpiyakaraṇoti padassa piyaṃ karotīti piyakaraṇoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Eseva nayogarukaraṇoti etthāpi. ‘‘Saṅgahetabbabhāvāyā’’ti imināsaṅgahāyāti padassa bhāvappadhānakammaniddesabhāvaṃ dasseti. Saṅgahetabbotisaṅgaho,tadatthāya.Tehīti sabrahmacārīhi. ‘‘Samaggabhāvāyā’’ti iminā samaggassa bhāvosāmaggīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

274.Mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāmāti here, that which has loving-kindness is mettaṃ, bodily action, bodily action accompanied by a mind of loving-kindness, is what is said. Therefore, it is said, "bodily action done with a mind of loving-kindness." Showing the expanse of face-to-face and behind the back, he says "tatthā," etc. There, tatthāti in those face-to-face and behind the back. Kāyakammaṃ nāmāti bodily action of loving-kindness is called. Giving to the elders, is the connection. Ubhayehipīti even by the new elders. Tesūti in the new elders. Avamaññanti disrespect. Arranging one's own badly arranged things, is arranging, is the connection. With "mettakāyakammasaṅkhāto," he shows the nature of the Dhamma in ayampi dhammo. The particle pi refers to the Dhamma that will be spoken of above. With "saritabbo," he shows that the word anīya is in the sense of action. Satijanakoti a generator of mindfulness for his fellow monks. Showing the intended meaning of that word, he says "yo," etc. There, yoti the person. Nanti loving bodily action. Those persons remember that person, is the connection. Yesanti of the fellow monks. Teti those fellow monks. Having a pleased mind, is the connection. With "piyaṃ karotī," he shows the word meaning of the word piyakaraṇo that one who does what is dear is piyakaraṇo. This same method is for garukaraṇo also. With "saṅgahetabbabhāvāyā," he shows that the word saṅgahāyā is a noun of action, with the meaning predominating. That which should be included is saṅgaho, for that purpose. Tehīti by the fellow monks. With "samaggabhāvāyā," he shows that the state of being united is the word meaning of sāmaggī.

Paggayha vacananti paggahetvā vacanaṃ.Vihāreti ādhāre bhummaṃ, there asanteti yojanā.Tanti theraṃ kadā āgamissati nukhoti yojanā.Mamāyanavacananti mamāyanākārena pavattaṃ vacanaṃ.Mettāsinehasiniddhānīti mettāsaṅkhātena sinehena sinehitāni.Nayanānīti cakkhūni. ‘‘Appābādho’’ti imināarogoti padasseva atthaṃ dasseti. Niccābādhena vā arogo, āgantukābādhena appābādho, ajjhattābādhena vā arogo, bahiddhābādhena appābādho, kāyābādhena vā arogo, cittābādhena appābādho.Samannāharaṇanti punappunaṃ manasikaraṇaṃ.

Paggayha vacananti speaking with raised voice. Vihāreti a locative case based on location, the elders are not present, is the connection. Tanti when will the elder come, is the connection. Mamāyanavacananti speech that proceeds in the manner of possessiveness. Mettāsinehasiniddhānīti moistened with the moisture of loving-kindness. Nayanānīti eyes. With "appābādho," he shows the meaning of the word arogo. Free from constant illness is arogo, free from incidental illness is appābādho, free from internal illness is arogo, free from external illness is appābādho, or free from bodily illness is arogo, free from mental illness is appābādho. Samannāharaṇanti repeatedly attending to.

‘‘yo hī’’tiādi. Tatthayoti puggalo, bhuñjatīti sambandho. ‘‘Ettakaṃ…pe… bhuñjissāmī’’ti iminā āmisapaṭivibhattabhogibhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ettakaṃ vā asukassa ca…pe… bhuñjissāmī’’ti iminā puggalapaṭivibhattabhogibhāvaṃ dasseti.Ayanti puggalo.Ābhatanti gāmādito ānītaṃ.Adātumpīti pisaddena dātumpi vaṭṭatīti dasseti. Dānañhi nāma na kassaci vāritaṃ.Sabbesanti dussīlasīlavantānaṃ.Vuttanti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.492; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.11) vuttaṃ.Viceyyāti vicinitvā.Dātumpīti pisaddena avicinitvā sāmaññato dātumpi vaṭṭatīti sampiṇḍeti. Nanu evaṃ sati puggalavibhāgo kato nāma hoti, kasmā viceyya dātuṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi.ti yasmā.Eteti gilānādayo. Idaṃ padaṃ vicinitvāti pade kammaṃ, ‘‘dentenā’’ti pade sampadānaṃ.ti saccaṃ.Iti ayanti iti manasikatvā ayaṃ sāraṇīyadhammapūrako.

‘‘yo hī’’tiādi. There, yoti the person, eats, is the connection. With "ettakaṃ…pe… bhuñjissāmī," he shows the state of being a material-thing-specific enjoyer. With "ettakaṃ vā asukassa ca…pe… bhuñjissāmī," he shows the state of being a person-specific enjoyer. Ayanti this person. Ābhatanti brought from the village. Adātumpīti with the particle pi, he shows that it is also proper to give. Giving is not forbidden to anyone. Sabbesanti to the immoral and the virtuous. Vuttanti it is said in the commentary (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.492; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.11). Viceyyāti having investigated. Dātumpīti with the particle pi, he gathers that it is also proper to give generally without investigating. If that is so, then it is called a division of persons, why is it proper to give after investigating? He says "na hī," etc. ti because. Eteti these, the sick, etc. This word is the object in the word "vicinitvā," the dative in the word "dentenā." ti truly. Iti ayanti having thought thus, this one is a filler of the qualities of remembrance.

Akhaṇḍānītiādīsu paṭhamaṃ tāva khaṇḍachiddasabalakammāsāni dassetvā tesaṃ paṭipakkhavasena akhaṇḍādīni dassento āha ‘‘yassā’’tiādi. Tatthayassāti bhikkhussa, sikkhāpadaṃ bhinnanti sambandho.Sattasu āpattikkhandhesūti ādhāre bhummaṃ, sikkhāpadanti sambandho. Āpattiñhi paṭicca sikkhāpadassa paññattattā āpatti tassa visayo hoti.Ādimhi vā ante vāti sikkhāpadānaṃ ādimhi vā ante vā.saddo aniyamavikappattho. Sikkhāpade bhinne āpattisambhavato vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ bhinna’’nti.Khaṇḍaṃ nāmāti chinnaṃ nāma.Vemajjheti sikkhāpadānaṃ vemajjhe.Bhinnanti sikkhāpadaṃ bhinnaṃ.Chiddaṃ nāmāti vivaraṃ nāma. Dve tīṇi sikkhāpadānīti sambandho.Sabalaṃ nāmāti citraṃ nāma.Bhinnānīti sikkhāpadāni bhinnāni.Kammāsaṃ nāmāti vicitraṃ nāma. Ettha ca ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ekena visabhāgavaṇṇena citraṃ sabalaṃ nāma, nānāṭhāne nānāvaṇṇena vicitraṃ kammāsaṃ nāmāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Khaṇḍādīnaṃ viparivattanavasena akhaṇḍādīni dassento āha ‘‘yassa panā’’tiādi.Abhinnānisīlānīti abhinnāni sikkhāpadasīlāni.Tāni panāti sīlāni pana.‘‘Etānī’’ti padaṃ padālaṅkāramattaṃ.Bhujissabhāvakaraṇatoti taṇhādāsabyato mocetvā bhujissakaraṇabhāvato. Iminā ‘‘bhujissabhāvakaraṇānī’’ti vattabbe uttarapadalopavasena evaṃ vuttanti dasseti. Bhujissānīti vuccantīti sambandho.Viññūhīti buddhādīhi sappurisehi.Upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiṃ vāti etthasaddo samuccayattho. Upacārasamādhiñca appanāsamādhiṃ cāti hi attho. ‘‘Saṃvattayantī’’ti imināsamādhisaṃvattanikānīti ettha anīyasaddo bahulaṃ kattuvācakoti dasseti.Sīlasāmaññagatoti ettha samānassa bhāvo sāmaññaṃ, taṃ gatoti sāmaññagato, sīlena sāmaññagato sīlasāmaññagato, hutvā viharatīti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samānabhāvūpagatasīlo viharatī’’ti.

In Akhaṇḍānī, etc., first having shown the broken, holed, mottled, and stained, then showing the unbroken, etc., as the opposite, he says "yassā," etc. There, yassāti of which bhikkhu, the training rule is broken, is the connection. Sattasu āpattikkhandhesūti a locative case based on location, the training rule, is the connection. Because the training rule is prescribed with reference to the offense, the offense is its object. Ādimhi vā ante vāti at the beginning or end of the training rules. The particle is in the sense of unrestricted option. Because an offense is possible when a training rule is broken, it is said, "the training rule is broken." Khaṇḍaṃ nāmāti what is cut is called. Vemajjheti in the middle of the training rules. Bhinnanti the training rule is broken. Chiddaṃ nāmāti what is torn is called. Two or three training rules, is the connection. Sabalaṃ nāmāti what is mottled is called. Bhinnānīti the training rules are broken. Kammāsaṃ nāmāti what is stained is called. And here, if a place is mottled with one unlike color, it is called sabalaṃ, if it is stained with various colors in various places, it is called kammāsaṃ, this is the difference between them. Showing the unbroken, etc., by way of reversing the broken, etc., he says "yassa panā," etc. Abhinnānisīlānīti the unbroken precepts of training. Tāni panāti but those precepts. The word ‘‘Etānī’’ is merely an adornment of the words. Bhujissabhāvakaraṇatoti because they make one free from the slavery of craving. With this, he shows that it should be said "bhujissabhāvakaraṇānī," but it is said thus by eliding the last word. They are called bhujissāni, is the connection. Viññūhīti by the wise, such as Buddhas and other good people. Upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiṃ vāti here, the particle is in the sense of collection. It means proximity concentration and attainment concentration. With "saṃvattayantī," he shows that the word samādhisaṃvattanikānīti the suffix anīya is often in the sense of the agent. Sīlasāmaññagatoti here, the state of being the same is sāmaññaṃ, one who has gone to that is sāmaññagato, one who has gone to sameness by virtue of precepts is sīlasāmaññagato, having become so, he lives, is the connection. Therefore, it is said, "he lives with precepts that have reached the state of sameness."

Yāyaṃdiṭṭhīti ettha ‘‘diṭṭhī’’ti sāmaññagatassāpi saddassa ‘‘ariyā’’ti saddantarasannidhānena visesavisayattā sammādiṭṭhīti āha ‘‘maggasampayuttā sammādiṭṭhī’’ti. ‘‘Maggasampayuttā’’ti iminā lokiyasammādiṭṭhiṃ paṭikkhipati.Niddosāti visuddhattā, uttamattā vā niddosā. Imināariyasaddo niddosatthavācako anipphannapāṭipadikoti dasseti.Niyyātīti nibbānaṃ yāti. Iminā anīyasaddo bahulaṃ kattuvācakoti dasseti. Yo tathākārī hoti, takkarassāti yojanā.Tathākārīti tāya maggasampayuttāya sammādiṭṭhiyā kārī hoti. Iminā tāya sammādiṭṭhiyā karotītitakkaroti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Dukkhakkhayāyāti ettha khīyanaṃ khayo, dukkhassa khayo dukkhakkhayo, tadatthāyāti dassento āha ‘‘sabbadukkhassa khayattha’’nti.Sesanti vuttavacanato sesaṃ vacanaṃ.

Here, regarding Yāyaṃ diṭṭhī, although the word "diṭṭhī" generally applies, due to the presence of the word "ariyā," it becomes specific; therefore, he said, "maggasampayuttā sammādiṭṭhī," meaning Right View associated with the path. By "maggasampayuttā," he refutes mundane Right View. Niddosā means faultless due to purity or excellence. With this, he indicates that the word ariya is expressive of faultlessness and is a stem that is not fully formed. Niyyātī means it goes to Nibbāna. With this, he indicates that the suffix anīya is mostly used in the active sense. Whoever does thus, it is connected to "takkarassa." Tathākārī means one who acts with that Right View associated with the path. With this, he shows the meaning of takkaro as "one who does" with that Right View. In Dukkhakkhayāyā, "khīyanaṃ" means decay, "dukkhassa khayo" means the decay of suffering, showing that it is for that purpose, he says "sabbadukkhassa khayattha"nti, meaning for the purpose of the destruction of all suffering. Sesaṃ means the remaining statement from the stated text.

Iti katipucchāvāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the arrangement of the Katipucchāvāra.

Khandhakapucchāvāro

Khandhakapucchāvāra

Pucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā
Pucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā

320.Upasampadakkhandhakanti mahākhandhakaṃ. ‘‘Nidānena ca niddesena ca saddhi’’nti iminā saha nidānenātisanidānaṃ,saha niddesenātisaniddesanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Etthanidānenāti sikkhāpadapaññattidesasaṅkhātena nidānena.Niddesenāti puggalādiniddesena.Tatthāti upasampadakkhandhake.Samukkaṭṭhapadānanti ettha samukkaṭṭhasaddo uttamapariyāyoti āha ‘‘uttamānī’’ti.Padānīti ‘‘na bhikkhave ūnavīsativasso puggalo upasampādetabbo’’ti (pāci. 402-403; mahāva. 124) ādinā nayena vuttāni padāni. Imehi padehi ‘‘samukkaṭṭhāni padānisamukkaṭṭhapadānī’’ti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Itīti ayamattho. Kasmā panettha ‘‘samukkaṭṭhapadānaṃ kati āpattiyo’’ti padānameva sāmivasena niddeso kato, nanu āpattiyo nāma puggalānaññeva hontīti āha‘‘yena yena hī’’tiādi.ti yasmā. Yena yena padena paññattāti sambandho.Sā sāti āpatti.Dve āpattiyoti ettha dvinnaṃ āpattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pācittiyaṃ, dukkaṭa’’nti.

Upasampadakkhandhakaṃ means the Mahākhandhaka. By "Nidānena ca niddesena ca saddhi," he shows the meaning of sanidānaṃ as "with the origin" and saniddesa as "with the exposition". Here, nidānenā means with the origin, which is defined as the declaration of the enactment of the training rules. Niddesenā means with the exposition, by way of the explanation of individuals, etc. Tatthā means in the Upasampadakkhandhaka. Regarding Samukkaṭṭhapadānaṃ, the word "samukkaṭṭha" is a synonym for "uttama," so he says "uttamānī," meaning excellent. Padānī means the rules stated in the manner beginning with "na bhikkhave ūnavīsativasso puggalo upasampādetabbo," meaning, "Monks, a person under twenty years of age should not be given the Upasampadā ordination." With these rules, he shows the meaning of "samukkaṭṭhāni padāni samukkaṭṭhapadānī." Itī means this matter. Why here is only a general indication of the rules in "samukkaṭṭhapadānaṃ kati āpattiyo," meaning "how many offenses are in the rules," since offenses only occur to individuals? He says ‘‘yena yena hī’’tiādi. means because. The connection is "paññattā" meaning, "enacted by whichever rule." Sā sā means that offense. Regarding Dve āpattiyo, showing the nature of the two offenses, he says "pācittiyaṃ, dukkaṭa"nti, meaning Pācittiya and Dukkaṭa.

Nassanteteti nassantu ete.Vinassanteteti vinassantu ete bhikkhūti attho.Tehīti bhikkhūhi.Vadatoti vadantānaṃ. Sesesu uposathakaraṇesūti sambandho. ‘‘Dukkaṭāpattiyevā’’ti imināekā āpattīti ettha atthapakaraṇādivasena dukkaṭāpattiyevāti dasseti.

Nassantete means may these be destroyed. Vinassantete means may these monks be ruined, is the meaning. Tehī means by the monks. Vadato means to those who are speaking. It is connected with the remaining performance of the Uposatha. By ‘‘Dukkaṭāpattiyevā’’ti, he shows that here, due to the context, ekā āpattī means only a Dukkaṭa offense.

Pavāraṇakkhandhakepītipisaddo uposathakkhandhakaṃ apekkhati.

Pavāraṇakkhandhakepīti the word pi refers to the Uposathakkhandhaka.

Cammasaṃyuttepīti cammena saṃyuttaṃ katvā desite khandhakepi, cammakkhandhakepīti attho.Pisaddo pavāraṇakkhandhakaṃ apekkhati.Bhesajjakkhandhakepītipisaddo cammakkhandhakaṃ apekkhati.Samantāti aṅgajātassa samantato.

Cammasaṃyuttepīti in the Khandhaka that was taught having made a connection with leather, meaning in the Cammakkhandhaka. The word Pi refers to the Pavāraṇakkhandhaka. Bhesajjakkhandhakepīti the word pi refers to the Cammakkhandhaka. Samantā means all around the sexual organ.

Tatthāti kathinakkhandhake.Cīvarasaṃyutteti cīvarakkhandhake.

Tatthā means in the Kathinakkhandhaka. Cīvarasaṃyutte means in the Cīvarakkhandhaka.

Campeyyaketi campeyyakkhandhake.Samuccayakkhandhakesupīti pisaddo campeyyakkhandhakaṃ apekkhati.

Campeyyaketi in the Campeyyakkhandhaka. Samuccayakkhandhakesupīti the word pi refers to the Campeyyakkhandhaka.

Khuddakavatthuketi khuddakavatthukkhandhake.Garubhaṇḍavissajjaneti garubhaṇḍassa vissajjane.

Khuddakavatthuketi in the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka. Garubhaṇḍavissajjaneti in the disposal of heavy goods.

Saṅghabhedeti saṅghabhedakkhandhake. ‘‘Samācāraṃ pucchissanti vutte vattakkhandhake’’ti imināsamācārasaddena vattakkhandhakaṃ gahetabbanti dasseti.ti dukkaṭāpatti. ‘‘Tathā’’ti padena ‘‘ekā dukkaṭāpattiyevā’’ti padaṃ atidisati. ‘‘Pātimokkhaṭṭhapane’’ti iminā pāḷiyaṃṭhapanaṃ pucchissanti ettha ‘‘pātimokkha’’ntiādipadassa lopaṃ dasseti.Pañcasatikasattasatikesūti pañcasatikakkhandhakasattasatikakkhandhakesu.Āropitoti ettha rupadhātuyā dvikammikattā, nyādigaṇattā ca ‘‘dhammo’’ti padhānakammameva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘saṅgaha’’nti apadhānakammaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammo saṅgaha’’nti.Tatthāti pañcasatikasattasatikesu.

Saṅghabhedeti in the Saṅghabhedakkhandhaka. By "Samācāraṃ pucchissanti vutte vattakkhandhake," he shows that the Vattakkhandhaka should be taken with the word samācāra. means the Dukkaṭa offense. With the word "Tathā," he extends the phrase "ekā dukkaṭāpattiyevā," meaning "only one Dukkaṭa offense." By "Pātimokkhaṭṭhapane," he shows the omission of the word "pātimokkha" etc., in the Pali where ṭhapanaṃ pucchissanti is. Pañcasatikasattasatikesūti in the Pañcasatikakkhandhaka and Sattasatikakkhandhaka. Āropitoti here, since the root "rupa" has two objects and belongs to the nyādi class, only the primary object "dhammo" is stated, not the secondary object "saṅgaha." Therefore, it is said "dhammo saṅgaha." Tatthā means in the Pañcasatikasattasatikas.

Iti khandhakapucchāvaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the arrangement of the Khandhakapucchā.

Ekuttarikanayo

Ekuttarikanayo

Ekuttarikanayo ekakavāravaṇṇanā
Ekuttarikanayo ekakavāravaṇṇanā

321.Evaṃ khandhakapucchāya vaṇṇanaṃ katvā idāni ekuttarikanayassa taṃ karonto āha ‘‘āpatti…pe… naye’’ti. Tattha ekuttarikanaye evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Cha āpattisamuṭṭhānānī’’ti iminā samuṭṭhānāni āpattiṃ karontīti atthenaāpattikarānāmāti dasseti.Etesanti channaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhānānaṃ.ti yasmā, āpajjatīti sambandho.Sikkhāpade cāti mātikāsikkhāpade ca.Lahukā āpattīti ettha appasāvajjattā na lahukā nāma hoti, lahukena pana vinayakammenāti āha ‘‘lahukena vinayakammena visujjhanato’’ti.Pañcavidhāti thullaccayādivasena pañcapakārā.Kenacīti lahukena vā garukena vā kenaci ākārena. Saṃvijjati gihibhāvato avaseso samaṇabhāvo etissātisāvasesā,paṭipakkhavasenaanavasesā. Dve āpattikkhandhāti pārājikasaṅghādisesavasena dve āpattikkhandhā.

Having made an explanation of the Khandhakapucchā in this way, now, making that of the Ekuttarikanaya, he says "āpatti…pe… naye"ti. Therein, it should be understood that the decision in the Ekuttarikanaya is thus. By "Cha āpattisamuṭṭhānānī," with the meaning that the origins cause offenses, he shows that they are named āpattikarā. Etesanti of these six origins of offenses. ti because, it is connected with "āpajjati," meaning "one incurs". Sikkhāpade cāti and in the Mātikāsikkhāpada. Lahukā āpattīti here, it is not named "lahukā" because of slight faultiness, but because of light disciplinary action, so he says "lahukena vinayakammena visujjhanato"ti, meaning "because it is purified by a light disciplinary action." Pañcavidhāti of five kinds, by way of Thullaccaya etc. Kenacīti by any means, either light or heavy. Because a remainder of the state of a Samaṇa exists from the state of a householder, it is sāvasesā, and conversely, anavasesā. Dve āpattikkhandhāti two categories of offenses, by way of Pārājika and Saṅghādisesa.

antarāyikāti ettha ṇikapaccayassa atthaṃ dasseti. Antarāyikā āpattiyo sabbathā antarāyikā hontīti āha ‘‘antarāyikaṃ āpannassāpī’’tiādi. Desetvā suddhipattassāti sambandho.Lokavajjāti lokehi vajjetabbā.Paṇṇattivajjāti bhagavato paṇṇattiyā vajjetabbā.Yanti yaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjatīti sambandho.Karontoti kiriyamānato. Ettha hi mānasaddassa antādeso. Iminā karaṇaṃkiriyanti bhāvatthaṃ dasseti.Āpajjatīti puggalo āpajjati. Sā āpatti kiriyato samuṭṭhitā nāmāti yojanā. Kā āpatti viyāti āha ‘‘pārājikāpatti viyā’’ti. Eseva nayo anantaravākyesupi.

antarāyikāti here, he shows the meaning of the ṇika suffix. Because Antarāyika offenses are always obstructive, he says "antarāyikaṃ āpannassāpī"tiādi. It is connected with "Desetvā suddhipattassa," meaning "of one who has attained purity after confessing." Lokavajjāti to be avoided by the world. Paṇṇattivajjāti to be avoided by the Buddha's ordinance. Yaṃti whatever offense one incurs, is the connection. Karontoti from the doing. Here, there is a substitution of anta for the māna suffix. With this, he shows the meaning of the abstract noun, that "karaṇaṃ" means kiriya. Āpajjatīti a person incurs. It is connected that that offense is named "samuṭṭhitā" meaning "arisen from the action." What offense is it? He says "pārājikāpatti viyā," meaning "it is like a Pārājika offense." The same method applies in the subsequent sentences as well.

Pubbāpattīti ettha pubbasaddo paṭhamatthoti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ āpannāpattī’’ti. ‘‘Āpannā’’ti padena majjhelopaṃ dasseti.Pacchā āpannāpattīti vattabhedadukkaṭāpatti.Mūlavisuddhiyāti mūle kāyaci āpattiyā amissattā visuddhiyā āpattiyā. Kurundiyaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Idampīti kurundiyaṃ vuttavacanampi.Pisaddena purimaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ apekkhati.Ekena pariyāyenāti ekena kāraṇena.

Pubbāpattīti here, the word "pubba" means "first," so he says "paṭhamaṃ āpannāpattī," meaning the offense first incurred. With the word "Āpannā," he shows the omission of the middle term. Pacchā āpannāpattīti the offense later incurred is a Vattabhedadukkaṭāpatti. Mūlavisuddhiyāti because of purity due to no offense being mixed at the root, due to purity of the offense. It is connected with "Kurundiyaṃ vuttanti," meaning "it is said in the Kurundī." Idampīti even this statement in the Kurundī. The word Pi refers to the previous statement in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā. Ekena pariyāyenāti by one reason.

ti āpatti, desitā hotīti sambandho. Ayaṃ desitā gaṇanūpikā nāmāti yojanā. Yā desitā hoti, ayaṃ agaṇanūpikā nāmāti yojanā.Saussāhenevāti punapi āpajjissāmīti saha ussāheneva.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. ‘‘Gaṇanaṃ na upetī’’ti iminā gaṇanaṃ na upagacchatītiagaṇanūpikāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Aṭṭhame vatthusmiṃ pūraṇeti sambandho. Idaṃ pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhavatthukapūraṇavasena bhikkhunīnaṃ āgatattā bhikkhuniyo sandhāya vuttaṃ. Bhikkhūnampi dutiyapārājikaṭṭhāne labbhatiyeva.

ti whatever offense, is connected with "desitā hoti," meaning "is confessed." This one that is confessed is named "gaṇanūpikā." Whatever is confessed, this one is named "agaṇanūpikā." Saussāhenevāti with the intention, along with eagerness, "I will incur again." ti truly, or because. By "Gaṇanaṃ na upetī," he shows the meaning of agaṇanūpikā as "it does not approach counting." It is connected with "pūraṇeti aṭṭhame vatthusmiṃ," meaning "it is fulfilled in the eighth object." Because this comes in the Pali with reference to nuns in the context of the eight-object fulfillment, it is said referring to nuns. It is indeed obtained for monks as well in the place of the second Pārājika.

Thullavajjāti ettha thullaṃ vajjaṃ etissāti thullavajjāti dassento āha ‘‘thulladose paññattā’’ti. Yā ca dhammikassa paṭissavassa asaccāpane āpatti atthi, sā ca gihipaṭisaṃyuttāti yojanā.Pañcānantariyakammāpattīti pañcahi ānantariyakammehi āpannā pārājikāpatti.Sudinnattherādīti ādisaddena dhaniyattherādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Ādikammikoti ādikammaṃ karonto, tasmiṃ niyutto vā.Makkaṭisamaṇādīti ādisaddena vajjiputtakādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Yo kadāci karahaci āpattiṃ āpajjati, soadhiccāpattikonāmāti yojanā. Paratopi eseva nayo.

Thullavajjāti here, showing that "thullaṃ vajjaṃ etissā" means "because there is a gross fault in it, it is a Thullavajjā," he says "thulladose paññattā"ti, meaning "defined as a gross fault." And whatever offense there is in making a promise that is not true to one who is righteous, that is connected with lay people. Pañcānantariyakammāpattīti the Pārājika offense incurred by the five ānantarika deeds. Sudinnattherādīti the word "ādi" includes Dhaniyatthera and others. Ādikammikoti one who is doing the initial work, or appointed in that. Makkaṭisamaṇādīti the word "ādi" includes the Vajjiputtakas and others. Whoever incurs an offense occasionally, he is named adhiccāpattiko. The same method applies further on.

codakoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Codito’’ti iminā coditabboticudito,soyevacuditakoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Pañcadasasūti pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhake vuttesu pañcadasadhammesu.Tenāti adhammacodakena, coditoti sambandho. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhake (cūḷava. 401) vutte sacce ca akuppe ca atiṭṭhantopi adhammacuditakoyeva nāma, so pana dhammacodakena coditeyeva kuppanto adhammacuditako nāma, adhammacodakena codite pana kuppantopi adhammacuditako nāma na hoti, tasmā idha na vutto. ‘‘Samannāgato’’ti iminā niyatā etassa santītiniyatoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

He shows the meaning of codako. By "Codito," he shows the meaning of cudito as "should be accused," and that same one is cuditako. Pañcadasasūti in the fifteen conditions stated in the Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhaka. Tenāti by the one who accuses unlawfully, it is connected with "coditoti," meaning "is accused." Even if one does not stand firm in the truth and immovability stated in the Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhaka, he is still only named an "adhammacuditako," meaning "one who is unlawfully accused," but when he is accused by one who accuses lawfully, if he becomes agitated, then he is named "adhammacuditako," meaning "one who is unlawfully accused"; however, even if he becomes agitated when accused by one who accuses unlawfully, he is not named "adhammacuditako," therefore he is not mentioned here. By "Samannāgato," he shows the meaning of niyato as "because there are fixed qualities in him."

bhabbāpattikā. Kenaci kammena akatopi anukkhittakoyeva nāma, so pana ukkhittakoti saṅkābhāvato idha na vutto.Ayanti tajjanīyādikammakato bhikkhu.ti yasmā, na kopetīti sambandho.Liṅgadaṇḍakammasaṃvāsanāsanāhīti liṅganāsanena ca daṇḍakammanāsanena ca saṃvāsanāsanena ca.Yenāti bhikkhunā.Soti nānāsaṃvāsako. Dvinnaṃ nānāsaṃvāsakānaṃ viseso heṭṭhā (pāci. aṭṭha. 428) vuttoyeva. Ṭhapanaṃ jānitabbanti ettha kiṃ ṭhapanaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘pātimokkhaṭṭhapana’’nti.

bhabbāpattikā. Even if he has not been removed by any action, he is still only named an "anukkhittaka," but he is not mentioned here due to the possibility of doubt that he is an "ukkhittaka." Ayaṃti this monk who has undergone Tajjanīya etc. ti because, it is connected with "na kopetīti," meaning "does not become angry." Liṅgadaṇḍakammasaṃvāsanāsanāhīti by expulsion due to offense, by expulsion due to punishment, and by expulsion due to association. Yenāti by whatever monk. Soti one who is in separate communion. The distinction between the two who are in separate communion has already been stated below. The meaning of "Ṭhapanaṃ jānitabbaṃ," is what is meant by ṭhapanaṃ? He says "pātimokkhaṭṭhapana," meaning "the suspension of the Pātimokkha recital."

Iti ekakavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the arrangement of the Ekakavāra.

Ekuttarikanayo dukavāravaṇṇanā
Ekuttarikanayo dukavāravaṇṇanā

322.Dukesu acittakā āpattīti sambandho.Bhūtārocanāpattīti pācittiyāpatti.Abhūtārocanāpattīti pārājikathullaccayāpatti.Padasodhammādikātiādisaddena uttarichapañcavācā saṅgahitā.Mañcapīṭhādīnantiādisaddena bhisiādayo saṅgaṇhāti.Anāpucchāgamanādīsūti ādisaddena anuddharitvā gamanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Sapuggaloti so attasaṅkhāto puggalo sapuggalo.Parapuggaloti paro puggalo parapuggalo.Garukanti saṅghādisesaṃ.Lahukanti pācittiyaṃ. Punagarukanti pārājikaṃ. Punalahukanti pācittiyameva.

In pairs, Acittakā āpattīti is the connection, meaning "Offenses that are unintentional." Bhūtārocanāpattīti is a Pācittiya offense. Abhūtārocanāpattīti is a Pārājika or Thullaccaya offense. Padasodhammādikāti the word "ādi" includes the additional five kinds of speech. Mañcapīṭhādīnanti the word "ādi" includes bhisi cushions and others. Anāpucchāgamanādīsūti the word "ādi" includes going without permission. Sapuggaloti that person counted as oneself is "sapuggalo." Parapuggaloti another person is "parapuggalo." Garukaṃti is a Saṅghādisesa. Lahukaṃti is a Pācittiya. Again, garukaṃti is a Pārājika. Again, lahukaṃti is only a Pācittiya.

Aṅgulimattampītipisaddena kesaggamattampīti atthaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Tanti mañcapīṭhaṃ. Gamiyo āpajjati nāmāti sambandho.

Aṅgulimattampīti the word pi condenses the meaning to include even the tip of a hair. Taṃti that bed or chair. It is connected with "gamiyo āpajjati nāmāti," meaning "one who goes incurs."

atthāpatti ādiyanto āpajjatīti pāḷiyaṃ ādiyanto hutvā āpajjati āpatti atthīti yojanānayaṃ dasseti. Evañhi sati‘‘āpajjatī’’ti ākhyātapadaṃ ‘‘atthī’’ti kiriyantaraṃ apekkhitvā kattā hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā ādiyanto puggalo yaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati, sā āpatti atthīti yojanā. Eseva nayo aññesupi.Mūgabbatādīnīti ādisaddena govatakukkuravatādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Pārivāsikādayo āpajjantīti sambandho. Tajjanīyādikammakatā vā puggalāti yojanā.Asamādiyantāāpajjantīti asamādiyantā hutvā āpajjanti.Teti puggale.Karonto āpajjati nāmāti karonto hutvā āpajjati nāmāti yojanā. Evaṃdento āpajjati nāmātiādīsupi.

atthāpatti ādiyanto āpajjatīti in the Pali, he shows the method of connecting "ādiyanto hutvā āpajjati āpatti atthīti," meaning "incurring while taking, there is an offense." Indeed, in that case, the verb ‘‘āpajjatī’’ should be seen as the subject, requiring another verb ‘‘atthī’’. Or, whatever offense a person incurs while taking, that offense exists. The same method applies in the others as well. Mūgabbatādīnīti the word "ādi" includes govatakukkuravatādīni, meaning "acting like a mute, acting like an ox, acting like a dog," and others. It is connected with "Pārivāsikādayo āpajjantīti," meaning "those on probation, and others, incur." Or, the individuals who have undergone Tajjanīya and other actions. Asamādiyantā āpajjantīti they incur while not undertaking. Teti those individuals. It is connected with "Karonto āpajjati nāmā," meaning "doing, he incurs." Similarly, in dento āpajjati nāmātiādīsupi, meaning "giving, he incurs," and so on.

Ekarattachārattasattāhadasāhamāsātikkamesūti ‘‘ekarattampi ticīvarena vippavaseyyā’’ti (pārā. 475-476) ca ‘‘chārattaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tena cīvarena vippavasitabba’’nti (pārā. 653) ca ‘‘sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabba’’nti (pārā. 622-623) ca ‘‘dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ dhāretabba’’nti (pārā. 462-463) ca ‘‘māsaparamaṃ nikkhipitabba’’nti (pārā. 499-500) ca vuttakālātikkamesu.

Ekarattachārattasattāhadasāhamāsātikkamesūti in exceeding the stated times, "ekarattampi ticīvarena vippavaseyyā," meaning "even for one night he should remain separate from the three robes," and "chārattaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tena cīvarena vippavasitabba," meaning "for at most six nights should that monk remain separate from that robe," and "sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabba," meaning "for at most seven days should one use what is kept in reserve," and "dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ dhāretabba," meaning "for at most ten days should one keep an extra robe," and "māsaparamaṃ nikkhipitabba," meaning "for at most one month should it be stored away."

Imaṃ pana āpattiṃ āpajjati nāmāti sambandho.

But he incurs this offense. This is the connection.

Yasmiṃ pakkhe nisinnoti yasmiṃ pakkhe sayaṃ nisinno.Tesanti attano pakkhe nisinnānaṃ, nānāsaṃvāsakanti sambandho.Yesanti sakapakkhe nisinnānaṃ.Kammaṃ kopetīti nānāsaṃvāsakattā kammaṃ kopeti.Itaresanti parapakkhe nisinnānaṃ. Hatthapāsaṃ anāgatattā kammaṃ kopetīti yojanā. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti vuttavacanaṃ vitthārento āha‘‘yesaṃ hī’’tiādi.Yesanti sakapakkhe vā parapakkhe vā nisinnānaṃ yesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ.Soti bhikkhu.Āpajjitabbatoti āpajjitabbabhāvato. Iminā puggalena chahi samuṭṭhānehi āpajjitabbātiāpattiyoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Kammena vā salākaggāhena vāti ettha uddeso kamme lakkhaṇahāranayena saṅgahaṃ gacchati, vohārānussāvanā salākaggāheti dassento āha‘‘uddeso ceva…pe… eka’’nti.Pubbabhāgāti saṅghabhedassa pubbabhāge pavattā.Pamāṇanti saṅghabhedassa kāraṇaṃ.

Yasmiṃ pakkhe nisinnoti in whichever group he is sitting himself. Tesanti to those sitting in his own group, it is connected with "nānāsaṃvāsakanti," meaning "he is in separate communion." Yesanti to those sitting in his own group. Kammaṃ kopetīti because he is in separate communion, he invalidates the act. Itaresanti to those sitting in the other group. Because the range of the hand has not come, he invalidates the act. Expanding on the statement "Eseva nayo," he says ‘‘yesaṃ hī’’tiādi. Yesanti to whichever monks sitting in his own group or in the other group. Soti that monk. Āpajjitabbatoti from the state of being liable to incur. With this, he shows the meaning of āpattiyo as "offenses" because by this individual, offenses are to be incurred by the six origins. Kammena vā salākaggāhena vāti here, the recitation goes to the summary by way of the characteristic cause, and showing that the announcement of the procedure is the taking of lots, he says ‘‘uddeso ceva…pe… eka’’nti. Pubbabhāgāti occurred in the preliminary stage of the division of the Saṅgha. Pamāṇanti the cause of the division of the Saṅgha.

Addhānahīno nāmāti ettha addhānasaddo kālapariyāyoti āha ‘‘ūnavīsativasso’’ti.Theyyasaṃvāsakādayotiādisaddena titthiyapakkantakabhikkhunīdūsakapañcānantariyā saṅgahetabbā. Aṭṭha abhabbapuggalā karaṇadukkaṭakā nāma hontīti yojanā. Ettha kattabbantikaraṇaṃ,kammaṃ, duṭṭhu kattabbantidukkaṭaṃ,kammameva. Karaṇaṃ dukkaṭametassātikaraṇadukkaṭako. Visesanaparanipāto ‘‘agyāhito’’tiādīsu viya. Tadevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dukkaṭakiriyā’’tiādi.No ca yācatīti ettha yācadhātuyā padhānakammaṃ dassento āha ‘‘upasampada’’nti, ‘‘saṅgha’’nti apadhānakammamānetabbaṃ.Tepiṭakoti tipiṭakaṃ vācuggatavasena dhārako.Āṇāyapīti pisaddo ‘‘matenapī’’ti atthaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Yācantassevāti nissayaṃ ācariyaṃ yācantasseva. Yaṃ vatthuṃ ajjhācaranto āpattiṃ āpajjati, taṃ vatthusātisāraṃnāmāti yojanā.

Addhānahīno nāmā: Here, the word addhāna means time, as indicated by "under twenty years old." Theyyasaṃvāsakādayo: The term ādi (etc.) includes those who have joined other sects, those who defile nuns, and those who commit the five unpardonable offenses. The eight incapable individuals are called karaṇadukkaṭakā. Here, karaṇaṃ means karaṇaṃ, an action, and duṭṭhu kattabbantidukkaṭaṃ means dukkaṭaṃ, also an action. Karaṇaṃ dukkaṭametassāti**karaṇadukkaṭako means "one for whom the action is a dukkaṭa." This is a case of the adjective preceding, as in agyāhito. To clarify this, it is said, "the doing of a dukkaṭa." No ca yācatī: Regarding yācati, to show the primary object of the verb "to ask," it means "ordination"; "the Sangha" should be understood as the secondary object. Tepiṭako: One who knows the Tipitaka by heart. Āṇāyapī: The particle pi combines the meaning "also by command." Yācantassevā: Only to one who asks for dependence and a teacher. Yaṃ vatthuṃ ajjhācaranto āpattiṃ āpajjati, taṃ vatthusātisāraṃ: The object regarding which an offense is committed is called sātisāraṃ**.

Upaghātikāti ettha upahanantīti upaghātā, teyeva upaghātikāti dassento āha ‘‘upaghātā’’ti.Tatthāti dvīsu upaghātikesu.Dve venayikāti ettha vinayena siddhāvenayikāti dassento āha ‘‘vinayasiddhā’’ti. ‘‘Dve atthā’’ti iminā ṇikasaddassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. Paññattānulomaṃ nāma daṭṭhabbanti sambandho.Paccayaghātoti paccayassa ghāto. Imināsetughātoti ettha setusaddo paccayavācakoti dasseti.Cittassāpīti pisaddo pageva kāyavācānanti dasseti.Itipīti pisaddo dutiyatthasampiṇḍano. ‘‘Pamāṇenā’’ti imināmattakāritāti ettha mattasaddo pamāṇatthoti dasseti. ‘‘Karaṇa’’nti iminākāritāti taddhitabhāvaṃ kitabhāvena dasseti sabhāgattā.Kāyadvārikanti kāyadvāre pavattaṃ āpattiṃ. Imināāpajjatīti padassa kammaṃ dasseti.Kāyeneva vuṭṭhātīti kāyasāmaggiyā dānattā kāyeneva vuṭṭhāti.Sīsamakkhanādīti ādisaddena pādamakkhanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.

Upaghātikā: Here, upahanantīti upaghātā, teyeva upaghātikāti, indicating that those who injure are upaghātā, and they themselves are upaghātikā, it says "injurers." Tatthā: In these two types of injury. Dve venayikā: Here, vinayena siddhāvenayikā, meaning "venayikā are those established by the Vinaya," it says "established by the Vinaya." "Dve atthā": This shows the nature of the word ṇika. Paññattānulomaṃ nāma daṭṭhabbanti: What accords with the precepts should be seen. Paccayaghāto: The destruction of a condition (paccaya). This indicates that in setughāto, setu represents a condition. Cittassāpī: The particle pi shows the preeminence of body and speech. Itipī: The particle pi combines a second meaning. "Pamāṇenā": This shows that in mattakāritā, matta means measure. "Karaṇa": This shows the taddhita nature of kāritā through the kita nature, due to shared nature. Kāyadvārikaṃ: An offense arising through the door of the body. This shows the object of the word āpajjati. Kāyeneva vuṭṭhātī: Because of the giving of bodily agreement, one emerges through the body alone. Sīsamakkhanādī: The term ādi includes anointing the feet, etc.

Tanti bhāraṃ. ‘‘Nittharituṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhatī’’ti iminā vahanākāraṃ dasseti. Thero samānoti yojanā. Navahanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘anujānāmī’’tiādi. ‘‘Kukkuccāyitvā karotī’’ti iminā kukkuccasaddassa nāmadhātuṃ dasseti. ‘‘Divā ca ratto cā’’ti iminā abhiṇhaṃ āsavavaḍḍhanaṃ dasseti.Tattha tatthāti tesu tesu vibhaṅgakkhandhakesu.

Ta: That burden. "Nittharituṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhatī": This shows the manner of carrying. The Elder understands. Showing the manner of carrying, it says, "I allow," etc. "Kukkuccāyitvā karotī": This shows the nominal verb from the word kukkucca. "Divā ca ratto cā": This shows the frequent increase of defilements. Tattha tatthā: In those various Vibhanga and Khandhaka sections.

Iti dukavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Dukavāra.

Ekuttarikanayo tikavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Tikavāra in the Ekuttarika Style

323.Tikesu bhagavati tiṭṭhante yaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati, sā āpatti atthīti yojanā.Sabbatthāti sabbesu padesu. Vitthāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti tikesu, vitthāro evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.Lohituppādāpattīti anulomapārājikāpatti. ‘‘Āvusovādenā’’ti ‘‘āvuso’’ti vohārena.Voti tumhehi.

323. If an offense is committed while the Blessed One is dwelling in the Tika, that offense exists. Sabbatthā: In all places. Explaining in detail, it says, "Tattha," etc. Tattha: In the Tika, the detail should be understood in this way. Lohituppādāpattī: An offense equivalent to pārājika. "Āvusovādenā": By addressing as "Āvuso". Vo: By you.

Kāleti purebhattakāle.Vikāleti pacchābhattakāle. Avasesaṃ āpattinti sambandho.Dasavassomhīti ahaṃ dasavasso amhi.Navoti pañcavassaaparipuṇṇo.Majjhimoti pañcavassato paṭṭhāya yāva dasavassaaparipuṇṇo.Kusalacitto āpajjatīti kusalacitto hutvā āpajjati.Abyākatacittoti supantassa bhavaṅgacittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Yanti āpattiṃ.Sabbanti āpattiṃ, āpajjatīti sambandho. Dukkhavedanāsamaṅgī hutvā āpajjatīti yojanā.Yanti āpattiṃ.

Kāle: In the forenoon. Vikāle: In the afternoon. The remaining offense is connected. Dasavassomhī: I am ten years old. Navo: Under five years in age. Majjhimo: From five years up to but not including ten years. Kusalacitto āpajjatī: Having a wholesome mind, he commits an offense. Abyākatacitto: This refers to the subconscious mind of one who is sleeping. Ya: That offense. Sabba: All offenses, is related to "he commits." Having arisen with painful feeling, he commits an offense. Ya: That offense.

Tayo paṭikkhepāti ettha paṭikkhepassa sāmikaṃ dassento āha ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato’’ti.Kilesasallekhanakapaṭipattiyāti kilesaṃ sallikhati tanuṃ karotīti kilesasallekhanakā, sāyeva paṭipatti kilesasallekhanakapaṭipatti, tāya.

Tayo paṭikkhepā: Here, showing the owner of the rejection, it says, "of the Buddha, the Blessed One." Kilesasallekhanakapaṭipattiyā: kilesaṃ sallikhati tanuṃ karotīti kilesasallekhanakā, that practice itself is the practice of eliminating defilements, by that.

Kāḷeti kāḷapakkhe.Juṇheti juṇhapakkhe.

Kāḷe: In the dark fortnight. Juṇhe: In the bright fortnight.

Kattikapuṇṇamāsiyāti pacchimakattikapuṇṇamāsiyā. Kurundiyaṃ vuttanti sambandho. Suvuttakāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘cātumāsa’’ntiādi.ti yasmā, pariyesanto ca nivāsento ca bhikkhūti yojanā.

Kattikapuṇṇamāsiyā: On the last Kattika full moon day. It is stated in the Kurundi. Showing the reason for good saying, it says, "four months," etc. : Because, the monks who search and dwell.

Vatthunti methunadhammādivatthuṃ.

Vatthu: An object, such as sexual intercourse.

paṭicchādīti karaṇatthopi yujjati. Vitthāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘dvāraṃ pidahitvā’’tiādi.Etadevāti parikammameva.Ubhayatthāti ubhayesu jantāgharapaṭicchādiudakapaṭicchādīsu.Sabbanti akhilaṃ parikammādiṃ.Niyyantīti nilīyitvā yanti. Imināvahantīti ettha vahadhātu gatyatthoti dasseti.Abbhamahikādhūmarajarāhuvimuttanti abbhena ca mahikāya ca dhūmena ca rajena ca rāhunā ca vimuttaṃ.Tesūti abbhādīsu.Tathāti yathā candamaṇḍalaṃ virocati, tathā sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ.

paṭicchādī: Can also be construed in the sense of doing. Explaining in detail, it says, "having closed the door," etc. Etadevā: Just the preparation. Ubhayatthā: In both, in bathhouses and water coverings. Sabba: The entire preparation, etc. Niyyantī: They go hiding. This indicates that in vahantī, the verb vaha has the meaning of going. Abbhamahikādhūmarajarāhuvimutta: Freed from clouds, mist, smoke, dust, and Rāhu. Tesū: In those clouds, etc. Tathā: Just as the disc of the moon shines, so does the disc of the sun.

Karaṇīyena hutvāti sambandho.

Having been done by what should be done.

Kappentoti karonto. Āgantuko āpajjatīti sambandho.Anajjhiṭṭhoti anajjhesito hutvāti sambandho. Tiṇavatthārakasamathekāyena vuṭṭhātikāyasāmaggiyā dānattā.

Kappento: Doing. A newcomer commits an offense. Anajjhiṭṭho: Without having been requested. At the tiṇavatthārakasamatha place, kāyena vuṭṭhāti because of giving of bodily agreement.

Āgāḷhāya ceteyyāti āgāḷhasaddo daḷhapariyāyoti āha ‘‘daḷhabhāvāyā’’ti. Ā bhuso gāhiyateāgāḷho,gāḷho bāḷho daḷhoti atthato ekaṃ.Ceteyyāti pakappeyya.Na pūrayatoti na pūrayantassa.Alajjī ca hoti bālo ca apakatatto cāti ettha bālamattaapakatattamattena kammaṃ na kātabbaṃ, āpattivaseneva pana kātabbanti dassento āha ‘‘bālo’’tiādi. Tattha bālo na jānātīti sambandho.Ayanti bālo.Ettāvatāti ettakena ajānanamattena. Bālabhāvamūlakaṃ āpattinti sambandho.Dve āpattikkhandheti pārājikasaṅghādisesavasena dve āpattirāsayo.Tesanti tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ, kātabbanti sambandho.

Āgāḷhāya ceteyyā: The word āgāḷha means firmness, as indicated by "for the sake of firmness." Ā bhuso gāhiyateāgāḷho, gāḷho bāḷho daḷhoti are one in meaning. Ceteyyā: Should intend. Na pūrayato: To one who does not fulfill. Alajjī ca hoti bālo ca apakatatto cā: Here, showing that an action should not be done merely because of foolishness or being uninstructed, but because of the nature of the offense, it says, "foolish," etc. There, a fool does not know. Aya: This fool. Ettāvatā: By this much ignorance. An offense rooted in foolishness. Dve āpattikkhandhe: Two aggregates of offenses, in terms of pārājika and saṅghādisesa. Tesa**: Of these three individuals, it should be done.

Kāyiko davo nāmāti kāyiko parihāso nāma.Mukhālambarakaraṇādibhedoti mukhena ālambaranāmakatūriyakiccassa karaṇādibhedo.Dvīhipi dvārehīti kāyavacīvasena dvīhipi dvārehi.Kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamoti kāyadvāre paññattassa kāyasaṃsaggādisikkhāpadassa vītikkamo.Vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamoti vacīdvāre paññattassa duṭṭhullavācādisikkhāpadassa vītikkamo.Kāyikena upaghātikenāti ettha upaghātikaṃ nāma asikkhananti āha ‘‘asikkhanenā’’ti. Kasmā asikkhanaṃ upaghātaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi. Tatthayoti puggalo.Tanti kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadaṃ.Nanti evameva. Hi yasmā upaghātetīti sambandho. Vejjakammena samannāgatoti sambandho. Sāsanauggahaṇaārocanādinā vācasikena micchājīvenāti yojanā.

Kāyiko davo nāmā: A bodily jest is called. Mukhālambarakaraṇādibhedo: Differences such as performing musical acts called mukhālambara with the mouth. Dvīhipi dvārehī: By both doors, of body and speech. Kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamo: Transgression of a training rule established through the door of the body, such as bodily contact. Vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamo: Transgression of a training rule established through the door of speech, such as abusive language. Kāyikena upaghātikenā: Here, upaghātikaṃ means non-training, it says "by non-training." Why is non-training called injury? It says, "Because," etc. There, yo: That person. Ta: That training rule established through the door of the body. Na: Not even. Because, he injures. He is endowed with medical action. By livelihood through wrong speech, through teaching the Sāsana, announcements, etc.

‘‘Mā bhaṇḍanaṃ karī’’ti iminā ‘‘mā’’ti paṭisedhassa ‘‘karī’’ti pāṭhasesena sambandhitabbabhāvaṃ dasseti.Na voharitabbanti ettha vipubbaavapubba-haradhātu kathanatthoti āha ‘‘na kiñci vattabba’’nti.ti saccaṃ.Bījanaggāhādiketi ādisaddena dhammajjhesanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Okāsakammaṃ kārentassāti ettha ‘‘okāsa’’nti ca ‘‘okāsakamma’’nti ca sadisanti āha ‘‘okāsaṃ kārentassā’’ti.Na ādātabbanti na gaṇhitabbaṃ. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yattha gahetvā’’tiādi.

‘‘Mā bhaṇḍanaṃ karī’’: This shows that the prohibition should be connected to the remaining part of the reading karī. Na voharitabba: Here, the verb hara with the prefixes vi and ava means speaking, it says "nothing should be said." : Truly. Bījanaggāhādike: The term ādi includes studying the Dhamma, etc. Okāsakammaṃ kārentassā: Here, "okāsa" and "okāsakamma" are similar, it says "to one who is causing the granting of opportunity." Na ādātabba: Should not be taken. Showing that meaning, it says, "where having taken," etc.

Yanti vinayaṃ.Soti bhikkhu.Soti vinayo.Tassāti bhikkhussa.Idanti kammaṃ.Aññaṃ pucchāti mayā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ pucchāhīti yojanā.Itīti evaṃ.Soti tīhaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu.Assāti tīhaṅgehi samannāgatassa. Nasākacchitabboti na saha kathetabbo.

Ya: That Vinaya. So: That monk. So: That Vinaya. Tassā: Of that monk. Ida: This action. Aññaṃ pucchā: May I ask another monk. Itī: Thus. So: That monk endowed with three qualities. Assā: Of him endowed with three qualities. Na sākacchitabbo: Should not converse with.

idamappahāyāti ettha idaṃsaddassa visayaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Avijahitvā’’ti iminā hādhātu tvāpaccayoti dasseti.Suddhaṃ brahmacārinti ettha sabbathā kilesasuddho khīṇāsavova gahetabboti āha ‘‘khīṇāsavaṃ bhikkhu’’nti. ‘‘Pātabyabhāva’’nti imināpātabyatanti ettha tāpaccayo bhāvatthe hotīti dasseti. ‘‘Paṭisevana’’nti iminā pātabyasaddo yathākāmaparibhuñjanatthoti dasseti.Gativisodhananti duggatito sugatiyā visujjhanaṃ. ‘‘Akusalāni ceva mūlāni cā’’ti iminā akusalasaddassa ca mūlasaddassa ca tulyādhikaraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tasmā akusalasaṅkhātāni mūlāniakusalamūlānīti tulyādhikaraṇasamāso kātabbo.Duccaritānīti ettha dusaddassa duṭṭhuvirūpatthabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘duṭṭhu caritāni, virūpāni vā caritānī’’ti.Virūpānīti vikārasabhāvāni. ‘‘Karaṇabhūtenā’’ti iminā ‘‘kattubhūtenā’’ti atthaṃ paṭikkhipati.Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ khandhake.

idamappahāyā: Here, showing the scope of the word idaṃ. "Avijahitvā": This shows that the verb takes the tvā suffix. Suddhaṃ brahmacāri: Here, only a khīṇāsava who is entirely pure of defilements should be taken, it says "a khīṇāsava monk." "Pātabyabhāva": This shows that in pātabyata, the suffix is in the sense of being. "Paṭisevana": This shows that the word pātabya has the meaning of using as one pleases. Gativisodhana: Purification from a bad destination to a good destination. "Akusalāni ceva mūlāni cā": This shows the equivalence in case of the words akusala and mūla. Therefore, akusalasaṅkhātāni mūlāniakusalamūlānī a tatpurusha compound should be made. Duccaritānī: Here, showing that the prefix dus has the meaning of bad or distorted, it says "badly practiced, or distorted practices." Virūpānī: Of the nature of distortion. "Karaṇabhūtena": This rejects the meaning "by the doer." Tattha tatthā: In that particular khandhaka.

Iti tikavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Tikavāra.

Ekuttarikanayo catukkavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Catukkavāra in the Ekuttarika Style

324.Catukkesu evaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā.Tiṇavatthārakasamathaṭṭhānanti tiṇavatthārakasamathena adhikaraṇavūpasamitaṭṭhānaṃ.Parassa kammavācāyāti parassa karaṇabhūtāya kammavācāya.Tatoti catukkato.Paresūti aññesu catukkesu evamattho veditabboti yojanā.Tamevāti kāyadvārikameva. Punatamevāti vacīdvārikameva. Āpajjitabbāpattiñca sahāgāraseyyāpattiñcāti yojanā.Jaggantoti jāgaranto.

324. In the Catukka, the decision should be understood in this way. Tiṇavatthārakasamathaṭṭhāna: The place where an issue is settled by means of tiṇavatthāraka samatha. Parassa kammavācāyā: By the kammavācā that is the instrument of another. Tato: From the Catukka. Paresū: In other Catukka, the meaning should be understood in this way. Tamevā: Just that of the body. Again, tamevā: Just that of speech. Both the offense to be committed and the offense of sleeping in the same dwelling. Jagganto: Being awake.

Acittako āpajjati nāmāti ‘‘acittako bhikkhu āpajjati nāmā’’ti vā ‘‘acittako hutvā āpajjati nāmā’’ti vā yojanā kātabbā.Sabhāganti vatthusabhāgaṃ.Tañcāti aññataraṃ tañca āpattiṃ.Itīti evaṃ.

Acittako āpajjati nāmā: Either "an unintentional monk commits an offense" or "having been unintentional, he commits an offense" should be construed. Sabhāga: Similar in object. Tañcā: And that particular offense. Itī: Thus.

Kammenāti samanubhāsanakammena.Kammena vuṭṭhātīti kammena eva vuṭṭhāti.

Kammenā: By the act of censure. Kammena vuṭṭhātī: He emerges by means of the act itself.

Soti gihiparikkhāro, āhaṭo hotīti sambandho.Avāpuraṇanti kuñcikaṃ.Antoti bhaṇḍāgārassa anto.

So: That property of a layperson, is brought. Avāpuraṇa: A key. Anto: The interior of the storehouse.

Sammukhāvuṭṭhātīti sammukhā eva vuṭṭhāti.

Sammukhāvuṭṭhātī: He emerges in the presence itself.

Idanti sahāgāraseyyāpattiṃ, paṭiccāti sambandho.Etanti ‘‘liṅgapātubhāvenā’’ti vacanaṃ, vuttanti sambandho.Ubhinnampīti bhikkhubhikkhunīnampi.Liṅgapaṭilābhenāti itthiliṅgapaṭilābhena.Paṭhamanti ādikappakāle. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ uppannavasenā’’ti iminā pure uppannaṃpurimanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Seṭṭhabhāvenā’’ti iminā purabhāvena seṭṭhabhāvena uppannaṃpurimanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Purisaliṅga’’nti iminā imapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Purisakuttapurisākārādīti ādisaddena purisanimittādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Yāni chacattālīsa sikkhāpadānīti yojanā. Iminā vuttanayānusārena dutiyacatukkepi attho veditabbo.Tehīti tiṃsādhikehi satasikkhāpadehi.

Ida: This offense of sleeping in the same dwelling, concerning. Eta: The statement "by the appearance of gender," is related to "was said." Ubhinnampī: To both monks and nuns. Liṅgapaṭilābhenā: By regaining the female gender. Paṭhama: At the time of the first kappa. "Paṭhamaṃ uppannavasenā": This shows that purima means "first arisen." "Seṭṭhabhāvenā": This shows that purima means "first" in the sense of being superior. "Purisaliṅga": This shows the nature of the suffix ima. Purisakuttapurisākārādī: The term ādi includes male characteristics, etc. There are forty-six training rules. According to the method stated, the meaning should be understood in the second Catukka as well. Tehī: By those hundred and thirty training rules.

Mahāpadesāti vinaye (mahāva. 305) āgatā mahāpadesā. Kasmā mahāpadesā ‘‘sāmukkaṃsā’’ti vuccantīti āha‘‘te hī’’tiādi. Tatthateti cattāro mahāpadesā, vuccantīti sambandho. ‘‘Saya’’nti imināsāmukkaṃsāti ettha saṃsaddassa sayamatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ukkhipitvā’’ti imināukkaṃsasaddo ukkhipanatthoti dasseti. ‘‘Ṭhapitattā’’ti iminā sayaṃ ukkaṃsitvā ṭhapitāsāmukkaṃsāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ajjhoharaṇīyaparibhogā’’ti iminā bāhiraparibhogaṃ nivatteti.Udakaṃ panāti kenaci asaṃsaggaṃ pasannodakaṃ pana.Kāleti sappadaṭṭhakāle. ‘‘Pañca vā dasa vā sīlānī’’ti iminā pañca vā dasa vā sīlāni upāsakasīlanti dasseti.

Mahāpadesā: The Great Authorities that appear in the Vinaya (mahāva. 305). Why are the Great Authorities called "Sāmukkaṃsā"? It says ‘‘te hī’’, etc. There, te: These four Great Authorities, is related to "are called." "Saya": This shows that in sāmukkaṃsā, the prefix saṃ has the meaning of "self." "Ukkhipitvā": This shows that ukkaṃsa means "lifting up." "Ṭhapitattā": This shows that sayaṃ ukkaṃsitvā ṭhapitāsāmukkaṃsā means "established after having lifted up oneself." "Ajjhoharaṇīyaparibhogā": This excludes external use. Udakaṃ panā: Clear water that is not mixed with anything. Kāle**: At the time when one is bitten by a snake. "Pañca vā dasa vā sīlānī": This shows that the five or ten precepts are the precepts of a lay follower.

Tattha cāti vihāre ca.Ubhopīti āgantukāvāsikavasena ubhopi.Asādhāraṇanti dvīhi asādhāraṇaṃ.Āpattinti bhikkhunīhiyeva sādhāraṇaṃ āpattiṃ.Gamiyacatukkepītipisaddo āgantukacatukkaṃ apekkhati.Vatthunānattatāvāti methunādivatthunānattatā eva.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.ti āpatti.Tathāti yathā kāyasaṃsagge, tathā lasuṇakhādaneti yojanā.Etthāti vatthunānattatādicatukke.Cattāri pārājikānīti bhikkhupātimokkhe āgatāni. Visuṃ āpajjantesupi eseva nayoti sambandho.

Tattha cā: And in the monastery. Ubhopī: Both in terms of newcomer and resident. Asādhāraṇa: Not common to two. Āpatti: An offense common only to nuns. Gamiyacatukkepī: The particle pi refers to the Catukka of newcomers. Vatthunānattatāvā: Just the variety of objects such as sexual intercourse. : Truly, or because. : That offense. Tathā: Just as in bodily contact, so in eating garlic. Etthā: In the Catukka of variety of object, etc. Cattāri pārājikānī: Those that appear in the Bhikkhu Pātimokkha. Even to those who commit offenses separately, the method is the same.

Purimacatukketi vatthunānattatādicatukke. Yo paṭhamo pañhoti yojanā.Idhāti vatthusabhāgatādicatukke.Yo cāti yo ca pañho.Tatthāti vatthunānattatādicatukke. Tatiyacatutthesu pañhesūti sambandho.

Purimacatukke means in the initial four, such as the four based on diversity of subject matter. "Yo paṭhamo pañho" is the connection. Idhā means in the four, such as similarity of subject matter. Yo cā means which question. Tatthā means in the four, such as diversity of subject matter. The connection is with the questions in the third and fourth.

‘‘Saddhivihārikassā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘kattabba’’iti pade sampadānaṃ.

The word "saddhivihārikassa" is dative in relation to the word "kattabba".

Garukanti pārājikaṃ.Lahukanti thullaccayaṃ vā dukkaṭaṃ vā.

Garuka means a pārājika offense. Lahuka means a thullaccaya or a dukkaṭa offense.

Paccuṭṭhānārahāti paṭimukhaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ arahā.Avisesena cāti ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti vā ‘‘bhikkhunī’’ti vā visesa, makatvā sāmaññena ca. ‘‘Āsanārahacatukkassā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘paṭhamapada’’nti pade avayavisambandho.

Paccuṭṭhānārahā means worthy of rising to greet. Avisesena cā means without making a distinction such as "bhikkhū" or "bhikkhunī," but in a general way. The phrase "āsanārahacatukkassa" is a part-whole relation to the phrase "paṭhamapada".

Asādhāraṇanti bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇaṃ.Vikāle kappatīti tadahuvikāle kappati.Kālātītanti kālayāmasattahātītaṃ. Yāvakālikādittayañca akappiyamaṃsañca uggahitakañca apaṭiggahitakañcāti yojanā.

Asādhāraṇa means uncommon to monks. Vikāle kappatī means it is allowable at that inappropriate time. Kālātīta means past the time of day, night, or week. And the three yāvakālika items, impermissible meat, taken up (uggahitaka) and not received (apaṭiggahitaka) are to be connected.

Imāni cattārīti pañcavaggena gaṇena upasampadadānādīni.Idhāti paccantimesu janapadesu.Idhāti majjhimesu.Idanti catubbidhaṃ vatthu.Dīpetumpīti dīpanampi. Tuṃpaccayo hi katvatthajotako. Eseva nayodīpetuṃ panāti etthāpi. Sesaṃ anuññātakanti sambandho.Ubhayatthapīti paccantimamajjhimavasena ubhayatthāpi.

Imāni cattārī means ordaining with a group of five, etc. Idhā means in the border regions. Idhā means in the central regions. Ida means this fourfold matter. Dīpetumpī means even the explanation. The tuṃ suffix indicates the meaning of "having done." The same method applies to dīpetuṃ panā here as well. The rest is to be connected to "anuññātakaṃ." Ubhayatthapī means in both places, in terms of border and central regions.

‘‘cattāro’’ti vuttaṃ.Cattāro pubbakiccāti liṅgavipallāso, ‘‘cattāri pubbakiccānī’’ti hi attho. Evaṃ vuttāni imāni cattārīti sambandho. Evaṃ āgatā sammutiyoti sambandho.Sabbatthāti sabbesu catukkesu.

‘‘cattāro’’ti has been said. Cattāro pubbakiccā is a gender inversion, for the meaning is "cattāri pubbakiccānī". These four said thus are to be connected. The agreement has come thus is to be connected. Sabbatthā means in all four categories.

Iti catukkavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the fourfold series.

Ekuttarikanayo pañcakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Fivefold Series in the Ekuttarika Method

325.Pañcakesu ‘‘pañca puggalā niyatā’’ti etaṃ ānantariyānameva gahaṇanti yojanā. Pañca chedana kā āpattiyo nāma veditabbāti sambandho. Yā vikappanā vuttāti yojanā.Ussaṅkitoti uṭṭhahitvā saṅkito.Parisaṅkitoti punappunaṃ saṅkito. Akuppo arahattaphalasaṅkhāto dhammo imassātiakuppadhammo,khīṇāsavo. Khīṇāsavo samānopi ussaṅkito ceva parisaṅkito cāti yojanā.Pariharitabbāti apanetabbā.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etesūti agocaresu.Thūpacīvaranti ettha thūpaṃ parikkhipitvā kataṃ cīvaraṃ thūpacīvaranti dassento āha ‘‘vammika’’ntiādi. Vammiko hi thūpayati uddhaṃ ārohatītithūpoti vuccati.Nhānaṭṭhāneti sabbesaṃ nhānaṭṭhāne. Tañhi udakena kāyaṃ abhisiñcati etthātiabhisekanti vuccati. Abhiseke chaḍḍitaṃābhisekikaṃ,cīvaraṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘chaḍḍitacīvara’’nti.Bhatapaṭiyābhatanti ettha bharadhātuyā posanatthaṃ paṭikkhipitvā dhāraṇatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘susānaṃ netvā puna ānītaka’’nti. Tattha ‘‘susāna’’nti iminā kammaṃ dasseti, ‘‘punā’’ti iminā paṭisaddassa atthaṃ dasseti. Imehi padehi susānaṃ bhataṃ hutvā gehaṃ paṭiābharitabbantibhatapaṭiyābhatanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti, yakāro padasandhikaro. Pāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyañca potthakesu ‘‘gatapaṭiyāgata’’nti kaṇṭhajatatiyakkharena pāṭho atthi, so asundaro.

325. Among the fives, the phrase "pañca puggalā niyatā" means taking only the ānantarika actions as examples. The connection is: "What are known as the five cutting offenses?" The connection is: "Which exception was stated?" Ussaṅkito means suspected after rising. Parisaṅkito means repeatedly suspected. Akuppo-dhammo is one whose dhammo, reckoned as the fruit of Arahatship, is unshakeable; a akuppadhammo is a khīṇāsava. The connection is: "Even though a khīṇāsava, he is both suspected and repeatedly suspected." Pariharitabbā means should be removed. means truly, or because. Etesū means in these unsuitable places. Regarding thūpacīvara, he shows that thūpacīvara is a robe made enclosing a thūpa by saying "vammika," etc. Vammiko is called thūpo because it builds up and rises, thus thūpo. Nhānaṭṭhāne means at the bathing place for all. That place is called abhiseka because one anoints the body with water there. Ābhisekikaṃ is what is discarded in the abhiseka, a robe. Therefore, it was said "chaḍḍitacīvara". Regarding bhatapaṭiyābhata, he shows the sense of taking up for the sake of wearing after rejecting for the sake of nourishing with the root bharadhātu by saying "having taken it to the charnel ground and brought back again." There, "susāna" shows the action, and "punā" shows the meaning of the word "paṭi". By these words, he shows the word meaning that bhatapaṭiyābhata means having been food in the charnel ground, it is worn again at home. The letter ya is a joining of words. In the books of the Pāḷi and commentary, there is a reading "gatapaṭiyāgata" with a guttural third consonant, which is not beautiful.

‘‘tatiyenā’’ti vuttaṃ.Tatthevāti antarapeyyāle eva.

‘‘tatiyenā’’ti has been said. Tatthevā means in the middle portion itself.

Adinnanti ettha akārassa nakāriyabhāvañca tapaccayassa kammavācakabhāvañca dassento āha ‘‘aññena na dinna’’nti. Tattha ‘‘aññenā’’ti iminā tapaccayassa kammavācakabhāvaṃ dasseti, nakārena akārassa kāriyaṃ dasseti. Kena kāraṇena aviditanti āha ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāmīti cetanāya abhāvenā’’ti.Aviditanti apākaṭaṃ.Naṭasamajjādidānanti naṭasamajjādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ dānaṃ.Usabhavissajjananti usabhassa vissajjanaṃ. Idaṃ upalakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ. Sabbāsampi pana manussāmanussānaṃ itthīnaṃ methunarativasena purisānaṃ dānampi gahetabbaṃ.Itthidānanti etthāpi yāsaṃ kāsañci itthīnaṃ yesaṃ kesañci purisānaṃ dānaṃ gahetabbaṃ.Paṭibhānacittakammadānanti methunasevanapaṭibhānacittakammadānaṃ.Lokassāti lokena.Kathetukamyatāti kathetukāmatā. ‘‘Na suppaṭivinodayā’’ti iminā dukkhena paṭivinodetabbātiduppaṭivinodayā,paṭivinodetuṃ na sukarāti dasseti.Upāyenāti yuttiyā.

Adinna means "not given by another," showing the state of being not-doing of the a- and the state of being the object of the tapaccaya. There, "aññenā" shows the state of being the object of the tapaccaya, and the na shows the state of being not-doing of the a-. He says "because of the absence of the intention, 'I will receive it,'" for what reason is it not known? Avidita means not manifest. Naṭasamajjādidāna means giving to all such as troupes of dancers. Usabhavissajjana means the release of a bull. This is said by way of example. But the giving of sexual pleasure to all humans and non-humans, to women by men, should also be included. Itthidāna means here too, the giving to any women by any men should be included. Paṭibhānacittakammadāna means giving a clever, curious act of sexual intercourse. Lokassā means by the world. Kathetukamyatā means wanting to speak. By "Na suppaṭivinodayā," he shows that duppaṭivinodayā means it is difficult to be rid of with suffering, it is not easy to get rid of. Upāyenā means by means of skill.

Ekaṃsanti bhummatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Ekasmiṃ aṃseti hi attho.Buddhārammaṇanti buddhaguṇārammaṇaṃ.Māroti devaputtamāro, gatoti sambandho.Gomayanti gomīḷhaṃ.Jaraggavoti jaragoṇo.Tādisamevāti gomayavippakiraṇasabhāvameva.Vippakāranti visesapakārena karaṇaṃ.Vaṅkapādanti kuṭilapādaṃ.Parikasantoti paricchedaṃ katvā vilekhanto.Vigacchapurisoti vikāraṃ, virūpaṃ vā gatapuriso. ‘‘Vibhacchapuriso’’tipi pāṭho, visesena sobhaṇaṃ bhakkhapurisoti attho. Ayameva pāṭho abhidhānādīsu (abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ 102 gāthāyaṃ) dissati.Samantāti kaṭaandhakāravihārassa samantato. Māro siyā nu khoti yojanā. Na asakkhiṃ iti āhāti yojanā.Diṭṭhapubboti pubbe diṭṭho.Mahānubhāvoti deviddhiyā mahānubhāvo.Iṅghāti uyyojanatthe nipāto, uyyojemīti attho.Attabhāvanti tava attabhāvaṃ.Tādisaṃ rūpanti buddhassa bhagavato attabhāvasadisaṃ rūpaṃ.Taṃsarikkhakanti tena rūpena sadisaṃ. Patirūpameva sadisaṭṭhenapatirūpakaṃ,na ekaṃsasadisaṃ rūpaṃ kiñci sadisarūpanti attho.Sakattabhāvanti sassa eso sako, soyeva attabhāvo sakattabhāvo, taṃ.Ayanti māro.Kathanti kena kāraṇena bhagavā na sobhati nu kho, sobhatiyevāti attho. Tadeva samatthetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbaso vītarāgadosamoho’’ti.Vañcitomhīti ahaṃ vañcito amhi.Kiṃ atthīti kiṃ nāma atthi, mama vañcanacittaṃ natthīti adhippāyo. Daharabhikkhu paṭilabhatītiādinā sambandhitabbaṃ.

Ekaṃsa means this is a locative word in the sense of ground. For the meaning is "in one part". Buddhārammaṇa means with the qualities of the Buddha as the object. Māro means Māra the son of the gods; the connection is "gatoti". Gomaya means cow dung. Jaraggavo means an old bull. Tādisamevā means just having the nature of scattering cow dung. Vippakāra means doing in a special way. Vaṅkapāda means crooked foot. Parikasanto means cutting around, scraping. Vigacchapuriso means a person who has gone into a deformity or disfigurement. There is also a reading "Vibhacchapuriso," meaning a person who eats especially choice food. This same reading is seen in the Abhidhānappadīpikā (in verse 102). Samantā means all around the darkened monastery. The connection is: "Could it be Māra?" The connection is: "He said 'I did not dare'." Diṭṭhapubbo means previously seen. Mahānubhāvo means of great power by divine power. Iṅghā is a particle in the sense of urging, meaning "let me urge." Attabhāva means your being. Tādisaṃ rūpa means a form similar to the Buddha's, the Blessed One's, being. Taṃsarikkhaka means similar to that form. Patirūpameva-sadisaṭṭhena patirūpakaṃ, means what is similar in meaning to resemblance itself, meaning there is no form that is completely similar, but a somewhat similar form. Sakattabhāva means his own being, that itself is his being, sakattabhāvo, that. Ayanti means this is Māra. Kathanti means for what reason, indeed, does the Blessed One not shine, rather he shines; to confirm that very thing, it was said "sabbaso vītarāgadosamoho". Vañcitomhī means I am deceived. Kiṃ atthī means what is there, the meaning is, is there no deceiving mind of mine? It should be connected with "Daharabhikkhu paṭilabhatītiādi."

saṅkārachaḍḍanī. Tissadattatthero nāma pucchīti sambandho.Nāvātoti potato.Pañhāsahassanti samathavipassanākammaṭṭhānesu pucchāsahassaṃ.Pucchīti daharaṃ pucchi.Paricchindīti tasmiṃ divase kātabbavattaṃ niṭṭhapesīti attho.Yonakavisayatoti yonakalokato.Aṭṭha kappe anussarīti cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ disvā cittassa pasīdanato pubbenivāsañāṇena aṭṭha kappe anussari.

saṅkārachaḍḍanī. The connection is: "A bhikkhu named Tissadatta asked." Nāvāto means from the boat. Pañhāsahassa means a thousand questions in the areas of samatha and vipassanā kammaṭṭhāna. Pucchī means he asked the young bhikkhu. Paricchindī means he completed the duties to be done on that day. Yonakavisayato means from the Greek world. Aṭṭha kappe anussarī means, having seen the cetiya courtyard, because of the mind's clarity, he recollected eight aeons with the knowledge of previous existences.

Devatā pupphahatthā aṭṭhaṃsūti manussavesaṃ gahetvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kataragāmavāsikātthā’’ti. Tumhe katarasmiṃ gāme vasanasīlā attha bhavathāti yojanā.Idhevāti imasmiṃyeva ṭhāne.Ṭhitāmhāti mayaṃ ṭhitā amhāti yojanā.

Devatā pupphahatthā aṭṭhaṃsū means they stood, taking the form of humans. Therefore, it was said, "kataragāmavāsikātthā". The connection is: "In which village are you accustomed to dwell?" Idhevā means in this very place. The connection is: "Ṭhitāmhā means we are standing."

Ayaṃ kathāti ayaṃ vakkhamānakathā. Kiṃ amaccaputto pāsādiko nu khoti yojanā.Neti amaccaputtaabhayatthere. Ñātakā agamaṃsūti sambandho. Theramātāpi pahiṇīti sambandho.Pisaddena ñātake apekkhati. Pahiṇākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘putto me’’tiādi. Amaccaputto ārūḷhoti sambandho. Abhayatthero āhāti sambandho.Tenāti amaccaputtena.Yugaggāhanti yugassa gāhaṃ. ‘‘Mahallakattherassa sammaṭṭhaṭṭhāne kacavaraṃ chaḍḍetvā’’ti vacanaṃ āvi karonto āha‘‘atītattabhāve kirā’’tiādi. Amaccaputto chaḍḍesīti sambandho.

Ayaṃ kathā means this story that is about to be told. The connection is: "Is the son of the minister inspiring confidence?" Ne means to the bhikkhu Abhaya, son of the minister. The connection is: "Relatives came." The connection is: "The mother of the Elder also sent." The word pi regards the relatives. Showing the item sent, he says "putto me," etc. The connection is: "The minister's son ascended." The connection is: "The Elder Abhaya said." Tenā means by the minister's son. Yugaggāha means the taking of a pair. Revealing the statement "having thrown rubbish in a swept place belonging to an elder monk," he says ‘‘atītattabhāve kirā’’tiādi. The connection is: "The minister's son threw."

Tanti sammajjanavattaṃ.Tatrāti ‘‘satthusāsanaṃ kataṃ hotī’’tivacane. Āyasmā sāriputto nisīdi kirāti sambandho. Bhagavā paccāgañchīti sambandho.Pādānīti pādassa akkamanaṭṭhānāni, pādacetiyānīti attho. Thero nisīdīti sambandho. Jaṇṇukehi patiṭṭhāya ‘‘pādacetiyaṃ vanditvā’’ti pāṭhaseso ajjhāharitabbo. Me nisinnabhāvaṃ me satthā aññāsi vatāti yojanā. Mesaddo hi pubbaparāpekkho.Codananti dosāropanaṃ.Kāressāmīti dasabalaṃ kāressāmi. Bhagavā āhāti sambandho.Gatosīti tvaṃ gato asi, vicarantassa tuyhaṃ na patirūpanti yojanā.Tatoti codanakālato.

Ta means that sweeping duty. Tatrā means in the statement "the Teacher's teaching is done." The connection is: "Venerable Sāriputta sat down, it seems." The connection is: "The Blessed One returned." Pādānī means places for stepping of the foot, meaning foot shrines. The connection is: "The Elder sat down." Having placed on his knees, the rest of the reading "having venerated the foot shrine" should be supplied. The connection is: "Indeed, my Teacher knew my sitting." The word me is dependent on what precedes and follows. Codana means accusing of a fault. Kāressāmī means I will make the Ten-Powered One do it. The connection is: "The Blessed One said." Gatosī means you have gone, it is not fitting for you who are wandering. Tato means from the time of the accusation.

Bhāsapariyantanti vacanaparicchedaṃ.Ayanti kathā. Ettakaṃ vacananti sambandho.Gayhūpaganti gahetabbabhāvaṃ upagamanaṃ, gaṇhituṃ khamanīyanti attho.Tānīti dve mūlāni. Punatānīti samudayabhūtāni cha āpattisamuṭṭhānāni.Vatthunti methunādivatthuṃ.Itipītipisaddo paṭhamanayaṃ apekkhati. Ettha paṭhamanaye mūlena samudayassa pāyato abhedo hoti, pacchimanaye pana sabbathā bhedo hoti. Tasmā pacchimanayoyeva yuttataroti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Vūpasammatī’’ti iminā ‘‘nirujjhatī’’ti padassa samucchedanirodhaṃ dasseti.Vuṭṭhānenāti parivāsādivinayakammena.

Bhāsapariyanta means the limit of speech. Ayanti means this is the story. The connection is: "So much speech." Gayhūpaga means approaching the state of being taken, meaning fit to be taken. Tānī means those two roots. Again, tānī means those six sources of offenses that have arisen. Vatthu means the basis of sexual intercourse, etc. Itipīti, the word pi regards the first method. Here, in the first method, the root and the origin are mostly the same, but in the latter method, there is a complete difference in every way. Therefore, the latter method should be regarded as more suitable. By "Vūpasammatī," he shows the cessation of destruction of the word "nirujjhatī." Vuṭṭhānenā means by means of acts of Vinaya such as parivāsa.

Tānīti tettiṃsa mūlāni.Paratoti parasmiṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūnī’’tiādinā adhikaraṇānaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ dasseti. Cattāri saṅghakiccāni nissāya uppajjatīti yojanā.Idanti vatthu.Sattannaṃ nidānanti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ paññattiṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ nidānaṃ.Etthāti ṭhāne.Paññattiṃ na jānātīti ettha ‘‘anupaññattiṃ na jānātī’’ti vakkhamānattā paṭhamapaññatti gahetabbāti āha ‘‘paṭhamapaññattiṃ na jānātī’’ti.Anupaññattīti ettha anusaddo naupacchinnatthoti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ paññattiṃ na jānātī’’ti. Pacchātthopi yujjateva paṭhamapaññattito pacchā paññattattā.Anusandhivacanapathanti ettha anusandhīnaṃ vasena vacanapathanti dassento āha ‘‘kathānusandhivinicchayānusandhivasena vatthu’’nti.Ñattikiccanti ñattiyā kiccaṃ. Imināñattiyāti ettha sāmyatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Karadhātusambandhe karaṇavacanampi yujjateva.Karaṇanti ettha ca yupaccayassa kammatthabhāvañca dasseti. Na kevalaṃ ñattikamme eva ñattikiccaṃ na jānāti, atha kho ñattidutiyañatticatutthakammesupi na jānātīti dassento āha ‘‘ñattidutiyañatticatutthakammesū’’tiādi.Pubbe ṭhapetabbāti ñatti nāma kammavācāya pubbe ṭhapetabbāti na jānāti. Iminā napubbakusalabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Pacchā’’ti iminā naaparakusalabhāvaṃ dasseti.Pisaddena paṭhamanayaṃ apekkhati. ‘‘Kālaṃ na jānātī’’ti imināakālaññūti padassa viggahavākyaṃ dasseti. Kālaṃ dassento āha ‘‘anajjhiṭṭho’’tiādi.

Tānī means those thirty-three roots. Parato means in another. He shows the arising of the offenses with "Aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūnī," etc. It arises dependent on the four saṅgha duties. Idanti means this is the basis. Sattannaṃ nidāna means the basis, reckoned as the place of enactment, of the seven groups of offenses. Etthā means in this place. Paññattiṃ na jānātīti, here, because of what will be said, "anupaññattiṃ na jānātī," the first enactment should be taken, thus he says "paṭhamapaññattiṃ na jānātī". Anupaññattīti, here, the word anu is in the sense of not cutting off, thus he says "punappunaṃ paññattiṃ na jānātī". The later meaning is also suitable, because it is enacted after the first enactment. Anusandhivacanapathanti, here, showing the way of speech by way of connections, he says "vatthu in terms of the connection of the story and the connection of the decision". Ñattikiccanti means the duty of the ñatti. By this, ñattiyā means the locative is in the sense of possession. It is also suitable that the instrumental case is connected with the root kara. Karaṇanti, here he shows the state of being the object of the yu suffix. He shows that he does not know the duty of ñatti not only in the act of ñatti, but also in the acts of ñattidutiya, ñatticatuttha by saying "ñattidutiyañatticatutthakammesūtiādi." Pubbe ṭhapetabbā means he does not know that the ñatti should be established before the kammavācā. By this he shows the state of not being skilled before. By "Pacchā," he shows the state of not being skilled after. The word Pi regards the first method. By "Kālaṃ na jānātī," he shows the phrase akālaññū in the separation sentence. Showing the time, he says "anajjhiṭṭho," etc.

Pāpicchoti ettha pāpiccho nāma paccayalābhassa patthanāti āha ‘‘paccayalābhaṃ patthayamāno’’ti. Kāyaviveko ca cittaviveko ca upadhiviveko cakāyacittaupadhivivekaṃ,samāhāradvando, pubbapadesu uttarapadalopo.Etassāti āraññikassa. Iminā imāya atthoidamattho,so etassatthītiidamatthīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Appicchaññevātiādīsuevasaddānaṃ chaḍḍetabbatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘na aññaṃ kiñci lokāmisa’’nti.

Pāpicchoti, here, pāpiccho means desiring gain of requisites, thus he says "paccayalābhaṃ patthayamāno". Kāyaviveko ca cittaviveko ca upadhiviveko ca is kāyacittaupadhivivekaṃ, a collective dvanda compound, with the prior word losing the succeeding word. Etassā means of this Araññika. By this, the meaning of imāya is idamattho, so he has that, thus showing the word meaning idamatthī. In Appicchaññevātiādīsu, showing the meaning of discarding of the words eva, he says "na aññaṃ kiñci lokāmisa".

Navavidhanti divasavasena tividhaṃ, tathā kattabbākāravasena, tathā kārakavasenāti navavidhaṃ uposathaṃ.

Navavidha means a ninefold uposatha, threefold in terms of days, and likewise in terms of the way of doing, and likewise in terms of the agent.

apāsādikanti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘apāsādikanti kāyaduccaritādi akusala’’nti.Velaṃ atikkammāti bhojanādikālaṃ atikkamitvā. Imināativelanti ettha atisaddassa atikkamanatthañca ‘‘ativela’’nti padassa ‘‘viharato’’ti pade kiriyavisesanabhāvañca dasseti. Appaṃ kālanti yojanā. Avataraṇaṃotāroti dassento āha ‘‘otaraṇa’’nti.Sabbatthāti sabbesu pañcakesu.

apāsādika is said. Therefore, it was said "apāsādikanti kāyaduccaritādi akusala". Velaṃ atikkammā means having transgressed the time for eating, etc. By this, he shows the meaning of transgressing of the word ati in ativela, and the state of being an adverb of the verb in the word "ativela" in "viharato". Appaṃ kālanti, a short time. Showing that avataraṇaṃ is otāro, he says "otaraṇa". Sabbatthā means in all the five series.

Iti pañcakavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the fivefold series.

Ekuttarikanayo chakkavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sixfold Series in the Ekuttarika Method

326.Chakkesu evamattho veditabboti yojanā.Itīti evaṃ. Imā cha sāmīciyoti yojanā.Tatthāti chasu ākāresu.Satisammosenāti satiyā vippavāsena.

326. Among the sixes, this meaning should be understood. Itīti means thus. "Imā cha sāmīciyo," these six are proper. Tatthā means in those six ways. Satisammosenā means without the wandering of mindfulness.

Tatthāti cuddasasu paramesu.Tatoti chakkato.Ekaṃ apanetvāti yaṃkiñci ekaṃ apanetvā.Sesesūti chahi paramehi sesesu aṭṭhasu paramesu.Aññānipi chakkānīti paṭhamachakkato aññānipi aṭṭha chakkāni.

Tatthāti, in that case, means in the fourteen paramas. Tatoti, from that, means from the sixes. Ekaṃ apanetvāti, having removed one, means having removed any one. Sesesūti, in the remainders, means in the remaining eight paramas out of the six paramas. Aññānipi chakkānīti, other sixes, means the other eight sixes besides the first six.

Cha āpattiyoti tīṇi chakkānīti ‘‘cha āpattiyo’’ti vuttāni tīṇi chakkānīti yojanā. Vuttadvayaṃ ekaṃ katvā.Nhāneti nhānasikkhāpade.Chakkadvayanti ādāyasamādāyavasena chakkadvayaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu chakkesu.

Cha āpattiyoti tīṇi chakkānīti, the three sixes stated as "six offenses"—the construction is that they are three sixes. Making the two statements one. Nhāneti, in the bathing sikkhāpada. Chakkadvayanti, a pair of sixes, means a pair of sixes in terms of taking up and undertaking. Sabbatthāti, in all the sixes.

Iti chakkavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the application of the sets of sixes.

Ekuttarikanayo sattakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sets of Sevens According to the Ekuttarika Method

327.Sattakesu chasu sāmīcīsu pakkhipitvāti sambandho.Tatthevāti samathakkhandhake eva.

327. In the sets of sevens, relate by inserting them into the six sāmīcīs. Tatthevāti, just there, means just in the Samathakkhandhaka.

Campeyyaketi campeyyakkhandhake.‘‘Asaddhammā’’ti padassa bhedanissitatulyanissitasamāsaṃ dassento āha ‘‘asataṃ dhammā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘asataṃ dhammā’’ti iminā bhedanissitasamāsaṃ dasseti, ‘‘asanto vā dhammā’’ti iminā tulyanissitasamāsaṃ dasseti.Sabbatthāti sabbesu sattakesu. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Campeyyaketi, in the Campeyyakkhandhaka. Showing the split-dependent compound and the equivalent-dependent compound of the term ‘‘Asaddhammā’’, he says, ‘‘asataṃ dhammā’’, etc. Here, ‘‘asataṃ dhammā’’ shows the split-dependent compound, ‘‘asanto vā dhammā’’ shows the equivalent-dependent compound. Sabbatthāti, in all the sets of sevens. The rest is easily understood.

Iti sattakavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the application of the sets of sevens.

Ekuttarikanayo aṭṭhakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sets of Eights According to the Ekuttarika Method

328.Aṭṭhakesu aṭṭhānisaṃsādīnaṃ desanākāradesanaṭṭhānāni dassento āha ‘‘na maya’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘na mayaṃ…pe… karissāmā’’ti iminā desanākāraṃ dasseti, ‘‘kosambakakkhandhake’’ti iminā desanaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti.Tampīti dutiyaaṭṭhakampi.

328. In the sets of eights, showing the modes and places of teaching the eight benefits, etc., he says, ‘‘na mayaṃ’’, etc. Here, ‘‘na mayaṃ…pe… karissāmā’’ shows the mode of teaching, ‘‘kosambakakkhandhake’’ shows the place of teaching. Tampīti, that also, means the second set of eights.

Kulāni dūsetīti ettha ‘‘dūsetī’’ti kiriyāpadassa karaṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pupphena vā’’tiādi. Imehi aṭṭhahi dūsetīti yojanā. ‘‘Lābhenā’’tiādinā‘‘aṭṭhahi asaddhammehī’’ti ettha asaddhammasarūpaṃ dasseti.Sārāgoti saṃrāgo, bhusaṃ rajjananti attho.Paṭivirodhoti doso. So hi yasmā alābhādīsu paṭivirujjhati, tasmā paṭivirodhoti vuccati.Pāḷiyanti vinayapāḷiyaṃ.

Kulāni dūsetīti, regarding "he corrupts families," showing the instrument of the verb "corrupts," he says, "by a flower," etc. It is to be construed that he corrupts by these eight. With "by gain," etc., in "aṭṭhahi asaddhammehī," he shows the nature of asaddhamma. Sārāgoti, intensely passionate, meaning greatly attached. Paṭivirodhoti, opposition, means fault. Because it is contrary to non-gain, etc., therefore it is called opposition. Pāḷiyanti, in the Vinaya Pāḷi.

Pāṇantiādikā dve gāthāyo dvādasakkharena bandhitā. Paṭhamagāthāya tatiyapāde cariyasaddena yuttattā ekakkharo adhiko. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – pāṇaṃna hanena ghāteyya, ādinnañcana ādiyena gaṇheyya,musāvitathavacanaṃna bhāsena katheyya,majjapomajjapānaṃ na ca siyā,abrahmacariyāmethunā virameyya, rattiṃ vikālabhojanaṃ na bhuñjeyya.

Pāṇanti, the two verses beginning with "life" are composed of twelve syllables. In the third line of the first verse, there is one extra syllable because it is connected with the word cariya. Here, the construction is this: Na hane, do not kill life, do not strike; na ādiye, do not take what is not given, do not steal; na bhāse, do not speak falsehood, musā, do not lie; majjapo, do not be a drinker of intoxicants, do not drink alcohol; abstain abrahmacariyā from sexual intercourse; do not eat at night, at the wrong time.

Mālaṃ na dhāre na dhāreyya, gandhañca na ācare, santhate mañce ca chamāyañca sayetha. Etañhi uposathaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ uposathaṃ iti dukkhantagunā buddhena pakāsitanti āhu paṇḍitāti.

Do not wear garlands, do not use scents, and lie on a spread couch or on the ground. This is the eight-factored uposatha, the uposatha, declared by the Buddha, is the end of suffering, so say the wise.

Saṅghabhedaketi saṅghabhedakakkhandhake.Tāsaṃyevāti bhikkhunīnameva. ‘‘Upāsikā aṭṭha varāni yācatī’’ti evaṃ sāmaññavacanassāpi atthapakaraṇādinā visesavisayo hotīti āha‘‘visākhā’’ti. Sā hi vividhā puttanattusaṅkhātā sākhā etissātthītivisākhāti vuccati.Sabbatthāti sabbesu aṭṭhakesu. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Saṅghabhedaketi, in the chapter on causing schism in the Saṅgha. Tāsaṃyevāti, just of those, means just of the nuns. Although it is a general statement that "a female lay follower requests eight boons," he says "visākhā" because it becomes specific due to the context, etc. She is called visākhā because she has various branches counted as sons and grandsons. Sabbatthāti, in all the sets of eights. The rest is easily understood.

Iti aṭṭhakavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the application of the sets of eights.

Ekuttarikanayo navakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sets of Nines According to the Ekuttarika Method

329.Navakesuacarītiādīnīti ādisaddena ‘‘carati, carissatī’’tiādīni (dī. ni. 3.340; aṭṭha. ni. 9.29-30) saṅgaṇhāti.Taṃ kutettha labbhāti etthatanti anatthacaraṇaṃ, kopakaraṇaṃ vā.Kutoti kena kāraṇena.Etthāti etasmiṃ anatthacarakapuggale.Labbhāti laddhā, sakkā laddhuṃ na labbhā evāti attho. Navannaṃ vā bhikkhūnaṃ kāraṇāti yojanā.Taṇhanti dvīsu esanataṇhāesitataṇhāsu esanataṇhaṃ.Paṭiccāti ārabbha.Pariyesanāti punappunaṃ esanā.Lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇalābho.Vinicchayoti ñāṇataṇhādiṭṭhivitakkavasena catubbidho vinicchayo. Catubbidho hi dhammo ‘‘ettakaṃ mayhaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādinā vinicchinati anenāti vinicchayoti vuccati.Chandarāgoti balavarāgo.Ajjhosānanti ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ,pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena paricchinditvā gahaṇaṃ.Macchariyanti paresaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvassa asahanatā.Ārakkhāti dvārapidahanamañjūsagopanādivasena ābhuso rakkhanaṃ.Ārakkhādhikaraṇantiārakkhakāraṇā, hetvatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Daṇḍādānādīsu paranisedhanatthaṃ daṇḍassa ādānaṃdaṇḍādānaṃ. Tathā ekatodhārādino satthassa ādānaṃsatthādānaṃ. Kalahoti kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi.Viggahoti viruddhavasena gahaṇaṃ.Vivādoti viruddhavasena vadanaṃ. ‘‘Tuvaṃ tuva’’nti anādaravasena vadanaṃtuvaṃtuvaṃ vādo,pesuññavasena vadanaṃpesuññavādo,musāvasena vadanaṃmusāvādo,daṇḍādānañca satthādānañca kalaho ca viggaho ca vivādo ca tuvaṃtuvaṃvādo ca pesuññavādo ca musāvādo cadaṇḍādāna…pe… musāvādā. Musāvādāti etthavādasaddo ‘‘tuvaṃ tuva’’nti ca ‘‘pesuñña’’nti ca etthāpi yojetabbo. ‘‘Ahaṃ seyyohamasmī’’ti pavattamānādayoti yojanā.Adhiṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya na vikappetabbānīti adhiṭṭhānavikappanaṃ ekato na kātabbaṃ, adhiṭṭhite na vikappetabbanti adhippāyo. Pariṇataṃ lābhaṃ pariṇāmetīti sambandho.

329. In the sets of nines, acarītiādīnīti, with the word "ādi", he includes "carati, carissatī", etc. (D. III, 340; A. IX, 29-30). Taṃ kutettha labbhāti, here, taṃ means the practice of what is unbeneficial or the cause of anger. Kutoti, from what cause? Etthāti, in this person who practices what is unbeneficial. Labbhāti, to be obtained, possible to be obtained, it is not possible to be obtained, is the meaning. Or, it is to be construed as the reason for the nine bhikkhus. Taṇhanti, of the two, craving for seeking and craving for desiring, craving for seeking. Paṭiccāti, concerning. Pariyesanāti, repeated seeking. Lābhoti, gain, means gain of objects such as forms, etc. Vinicchayoti, decision, means a fourfold decision in terms of knowledge, craving, views, and thoughts. For fourfold dhamma is decided by this, thinking, "so much will be mine," therefore it is called decision. Chandarāgoti, strong passion. Ajjhosānanti, strong determination, thinking "I" and "mine," pariggahoti, taking by defining in terms of craving and views. Macchariyanti, intolerance of others' common state. Ārakkhāti, guarding, means greatly protecting by way of guarding doors, covering treasure chests, etc. Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti, because of guarding, this is a singular word in the sense of reason, cause. Taking up a stick for the purpose of preventing others from punishment, etc., is daṇḍādānaṃ, taking up a stick. Similarly, taking up a weapon, such as a single-edged knife, is satthādānaṃ. Kalahoti, quarrel, means a quarrel of body or a quarrel of speech. Viggahoti, seizing in a conflicting way. Vivādoti, speaking in a conflicting way. Tuvaṃtuvaṃ vādo, saying "you, you" in a disrespectful way, pesuññavādo, saying in a slanderous way, musāvādo, saying in a false way, daṇḍādānañca satthādānañca kalaho ca viggaho ca vivādo ca tuvaṃtuvaṃvādo ca pesuññavādo ca musāvādo ca is giving a stick...slander...false speech. In musāvādā, the word vāda is to be applied to "you, you" and "slander" as well. It is to be construed that those beginning with "I am better, I am" are continuing. Adhiṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya na vikappetabbānīti, a change of determination should not be done together, the intention is that one should not change one's mind after determining. It is to be connected that he transforms the matured gain.

Etesaṃyevadānānanti etesaṃyeva adhammikānaṃ dānānaṃ.Saṅghassa ninnanti saṅghassa nataṃ, nāmitaṃ vā lābhanti sambandho. Saṅghassa namati, nāmiyatīti vāninnaṃ. Tesaṃyevāti tesaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ dhammikadānānaṃ. Tayo tayo dānapaṭiggahaparibhoge sampiṇḍetvā navako gahetabbo.Tatthevāti samathakkhandhake eva.Ovādavaggassāti bhikkhunovādavaggassa.Tatthevāti ovādavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade eva.Sabbatthāti sabbesu navakesu.

Etesaṃyevadānānanti, just of these, means of these immoral gifts. Saṅghassa ninnanti, inclined to the Saṅgha, it is to be connected that the gain is bent or inclined to the Saṅgha. Ninnaṃ, inclined to the Saṅgha. Tesaṃyevāti, just of those, means of those three moral gifts. The nine should be taken by combining the three gifts, receivers, and users. Tatthevāti, just there, means just in the Samathakkhandhaka. Ovādavaggassāti, of the chapter on exhortation to bhikkhus. Tatthevāti, just there, means just in the first sikkhāpada of the chapter on exhortation. Sabbatthāti, in all the sets of nines.

Iti navakavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the application of the sets of nines.

Ekuttarikanayo dasakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sets of Tens According to the Ekuttarika Method

330.Dasakesuaṭṭhāne vā panāti akāraṇe vā pana.Tatthāti navakesu. ‘‘Natthi dinnantiādivasenā’’ti ādisaddena ‘‘natthi yiṭṭhaṃ natthi huta’’ntiādayo (dha. sa. 1221; ma. ni. 94.225; 3.91, 116; saṃ. ni. 3.210; a. ni. 10.176) nava natthikā saṅgahetabbā.‘‘Sassato lokoti ādivasenā’’tiādisaddena (dī. ni. 1.31; ma. ni. 1.269) ‘‘asassato loko’’tiādayo (ma. ni. 1.269) nava antaggāhike saṅgaṇhāti.Viparītā sammattāti dasahi micchattehi viparītā dasa sammattā sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhi sammāñāṇaṃ sammāvimuttīti.

330. In the sets of tens, aṭṭhāne vā panāti, or without a reason. Tatthāti, in those, means in the sets of nines. "In the manner of 'there is no giving'," etc., with the word "etc.," the nine denials such as "there is no offering, there is no sacrifice" are to be included (Dhs. 1221; M. I, 94, 225; III, 91, 116; S. III, 210; A. X, 176). "Sassato lokoti ādivasenā," with the word "etc.," he includes the nine extremes beginning with "the world is eternal" and "the world is not eternal" (M. I, 269). Viparītā sammattāti, the ten rightnesses opposite to the ten wrongnesses are right view, right thought, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right concentration, right knowledge, and right liberation.

Undūrakkhāyitanti mūsikena khāditaṃ. Ettha hi khedhātu khādanattho hoti.Aggidaḍḍhanti agginā daḍḍhaṃ.Etesūti etesu dasasu paṃsukūlesu.Udakasāṭikaṃ vā saṃkaccikaṃ vāti bhikkhunīnaṃ udakasāṭikaṃ vā saṃkaccikaṃ vā. Etthasaddo aniyamavikappattho.

Undūrakkhāyitanti, eaten by a mouse. Here, the root khāda means to eat. Aggidaḍḍhanti, burned by fire. Etesūti, in these ten cast-off cloths. Udakasāṭikaṃ vā saṃkaccikaṃ vāti, either a water cloak or a saṃkaccika for nuns. Here, the word is in the sense of unrestricted choice.

Paṇṇasanthārotiṇasanthārena saṅgahito.Sabbatthāti sabbesu dasakesu.

Paṇṇasanthāroti, included with a grass spread. Sabbatthāti, in all the sets of tens.

Iti dasakavāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the application of the sets of tens.

Ekuttarikanayo ekādasakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sets of Elevens According to the Ekuttarika Method

331.Ekādasakesutiṇapādukāti muñjapabbajehi avasesā tiṇamayapādukā.Kaṭṭhapādukasaṅgahamevāti kaṭṭhapāduke saṅgahaṃ eva.Tambalohamayena vā dārumayena vātisaddo aniyamavikappattho.‘‘Nasi animittā’’tiādayo bhikkhunikkhandhake (cūḷava. 423) niddiṭṭhā.Te sabbeti sabbe te gaṇṭhikavidhā.Naggenāti acelakena.Te sabbeti sabbe te avandiyapuggalā.Pubbeti dasake.Kammavaggeti avasāne kammavagge.

331. In the sets of elevens, tiṇapādukāti, grass sandals, means grass sandals made of anything other than muñja grass. Kaṭṭhapādukasaṅgahamevāti, just including wooden sandals. Tambalohamayena vā dārumayena vāti, the word is in the sense of unrestricted choice. ‘‘Nasi animittā’’tiādayo, those stated in the Bhikkhunikkhandhaka (Cv. 423). Te sabbeti, all those, means all those methods of tying. Naggenāti, by a naked ascetic. Te sabbeti, all those, means all those persons not to be venerated. Pubbeti, in the sets of tens. Kammavaggeti, in the chapter on action at the end.

yaṃsaddo kiriyāparāmasano hoti, atha vā yaṃ yena kāraṇena na nigaccheyya, etaṃ kāraṇaṃ aṭṭhānanti yojanā. Anadhigataṃ samādhinti yojanā.Saddhammāssāti saddhammā assa. Assa akkosakaparibhāsakassa bhikkhussa saddhammā na vodāyanti na pariyodapentīti attho.Rogātaṅkanti rogasaṅkhātaṃ ātaṅkaṃ.Nirayaṃ upapajjatīti nirayamhi upapajjati.‘‘Upapajjatī’’ti ettha upaiti kammappavacanīyaupasaggena yuttattā ‘‘niraya’’nti ettha bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.Etthaetasmiṃ aṅguttarapāḷiyaṃ (a. ni. 11.6).

The word yaṃ refers to an action, or what is the reason why it should not be reached, this reason is an impossibility, is the construction. It is to be construed that undistracted concentration. Saddhammāssāti, the saddhammas of him. For a bhikkhu who abuses and reviles him, the saddhammas do not purify, do not purify. Rogātaṅkanti, affliction called disease. Nirayaṃ upapajjatīti, he is reborn in hell. In "upapajjatī," because it is connected with the preposition upa, which implies approaching, the locative ending should be understood in the sense of extension in "niraya". Ettha, in this Aṅguttara Pāḷi (A. XI, 6).

Āsevitāyāti ettha ātyūpasaggo ādikammatthoti āha ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāya sevitāyā’’ti. ‘‘Nipphāditāyā’’tiiminābhāvitāyāti ettha bhūsaddo sattatthoti dasseti, ‘‘vaḍḍhitāyā’’ti iminā vaḍḍhanatthoti dasseti.Bahulīkatāyāti ettha bahulaṃ nāma atthato punappunanti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ katāyā’’ti.Suyuttayānasadisāyāti suṭṭhu yuttena yānena sadisāya. Imināyānīkatāyāti ettha na yaṃkiñci yānaṃ viya kataṃ hoti, atha kho icchiticchitakkhaṇe ārohanīyattā suyuttayānaṃ viya kataṃ hotīti dasseti. Yathā kariyamāne patiṭṭhā hotīti yojanā.Vatthukatāyāti ettha vatthusaddo patiṭṭhatthoti dasseti. Vasati patiṭṭhahati etthātivatthūti vacanattho kātabbo.Anuṭṭhitāyāti etthaanusaddo naupacchinnattho, ṭhādhātu uppajjanatthoti dassento āha ‘‘anu anu pavattitāyā’’ti. ‘‘Samantato’’ti imināparicitāyāti etthaparisaddo samantatthoti dasseti. ‘‘Abhivaḍḍhitāyā’’ti iminācidhātu vaḍḍhanatthoti dasseti.Samāraddhāyāti paripuṇṇaṃ ārādhitāya.Rādhadhātu hi sādhanattho hoti. ‘‘Vasībhāvaṃ upanītāyā’’ti iminā tadatthaṃ adhippāyena dasseti.‘‘Na pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passatī’’ti vacanassa atthāpattinayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhadrakaṃ panā’’tiādi.Vuddhikāraṇabhūtanti vuddhiyā kāraṇabhūtaṃ supinanti sambandho.Devatā rakkhantīti ettha sāmaññato vuttepi ārakkhadevatāyeva gahetabbāti āha ‘‘ārakkhadevatā’’ti. Ārakkhadevatā nāma bhummadevādayo.Khippanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ. Iminātuvaṭaṃ cittanti ettha tuvaṭasaddo khippapariyāyoti dasseti.Uttarimappaṭivijjhantoti ettha ‘‘uttari’’nti padassa avadhipekkhattā tassa avadhi ca uttarisaddassa idha arahattavācakabhāvañca vidhadhātuyā sacchikaraṇatthañca dassento āha‘‘mettājhānato’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘mettājhānato’’ti iminā avadhiṃ dasseti, ‘‘arahatta’’nti iminā ‘‘uttari’’nti padassa sarūpatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘asacchikaronto’’ti iminā vidhadhātuyā sacchikaraṇatthaṃ dasseti.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ekādasakesu.

Āsevitāyāti, here, the prefix ā is in the sense of beginning, so he says, "being cultivated from the beginning." By "nipphāditāyā," he shows that in "bhāvitāyā," the word bhū is in the sense of being, and by "vaḍḍhitāyā," he shows that it is in the sense of increasing. Bahulīkatāyāti, here, the word bahula means repeatedly in terms of meaning, so he says, "being done repeatedly." Suyuttayānasadisāyāti, similar to a well-yoked vehicle. By this, he shows that in "yānīkatāyā," it is not done like just any vehicle, but because it can be boarded at any desired moment, it is done like a well-yoked vehicle. It is to be construed that it is a support as it is being done. Vatthukatāyāti, here, he shows that the word vatthu is in the sense of support. The verbal meaning should be made that it is a support because one dwells and stands firm here. Showing that in "anuṭṭhitāyā," the word anu is in the sense of uninterrupted, and the root ṭhā is in the sense of arising, he says, "being continuously arisen." By "completely," he shows that in "paricitāyā," the word pari is in the sense of completely. By "being increased," he shows that the root ci is in the sense of increasing. Samāraddhāyāti, being perfectly cultivated. For the root rādha is in the sense of accomplishing. By "being brought to a state of mastery," he shows that with the intention of that meaning. Showing the implication of the statement "na pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passatī," he says, "but good," etc. Vuddhikāraṇabhūtanti, conducive to growth, it is to be connected that a dream that is a cause of growth. Devatā rakkhantīti, although it is said generally that devatās protect, it should be understood as just the guardian deities, so he says, "guardian deities." Guardian deities are the earth deities, etc. Khippanti, neuter as an adverb. By this, he shows that in "tuvaṭaṃ citta," the word tuvaṭa is a synonym for quickly. Uttarimappaṭivijjhantoti, here, because the word "further" requires a limit, showing that limit and that the word "further" here is in the sense of arahantship, and that the root vidha is in the sense of realizing, he says "mettājhānato," etc. Here, by "mettājhānato," he shows the limit, by "arahatta," he shows the nature of the word "uttari," by "asacchikaronto," he shows that the root vidha is in the sense of realizing. Sabbatthāti, in all the sets of elevens.

Iti ekādasakavāravaṇṇanāpariyosānāya

Thus, at the conclusion of the explanation of the sets of elevens,

Ekuttarikavaṇṇanāya

The explanation of the Ekuttarika,

Yojanā samattā.

Is complete.

Uposathādipucchāvissajjanā

Questions and Answers on the Uposatha, etc.

332.Vissajjane evamattho veditabboti yojanā. Kāyasāmaggī ādi nāmāti yojanā.Osāraṇakiriyāti kathanakiriyā.Chandapavāraṇaṃāharitvāti chandañca pavāraṇañca āharitvā.Pavāraṇākathāti ‘‘saṅghaṃ bhante pavāremī’’tiādikā (mahāva. 210) pavāraṇākathā. Tajjanīyakammādīsu vatthu nāma kiṃ? Puggalo nāma koti āha ‘‘vatthu nāmā’’tiādi. Tatthayena vatthunāti bhaṇḍanakārakādinā yena vatthunā karaṇabhūtena, hetubhūtena vā.Yenāti puggalena kattubhūtena, katanti sambandho. ‘‘Tassā tassā kammavācāyā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘avasānavacana’’nti pade avayavisambandho.Sabbatthāti sabbesu vissajjanesu.

332. In the answers, it is to be understood that the meaning is thus. It is to be construed that kāyasāmaggī etc., is the name. Osāraṇakiriyāti, the act of speaking. Chandapavāraṇaṃāharitvāti, having brought the chanda and pavāraṇā. Pavāraṇākathāti, the pavāraṇā talk beginning with "I invite the Saṅgha, venerable sirs" (Mv. 210). In tajjanīyakamma, etc., what is the object, what is the person? He says, "vatthu nāmā," etc. Here, yena vatthunāti, by what object, such as a quarrel-maker, is the instrumental cause or the root cause. Yenāti, by which person is the agent, it is to be connected that it is done. The phrase "of that particular kammavācā" has a part-whole relationship with the phrase "final words." Sabbatthāti, in all the answers.

Iti uposathādipucchāvissajjanavaṇṇanāya yojanā

Thus, the explanation of the questions and answers on the Uposatha, etc.,

Samattā.

Is complete.

Atthavasapakaraṇavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on Grounds for Principles

334.Atthavasapakaraṇeti avayaviādhāro.Dasa atthavasetiādīsūti avayavādhāro.Yanti vacanaṃ.Uparimaṃ uparimaṃ padanti ‘‘saṅghaphāsutāyā’’tiādikaṃ uttaruttari vuttaṃ padaṃ.Heṭṭhimassa heṭṭhimassa padassāti ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā’’tiādikassa adho adho vuttassa padassa.

334. Atthavasapakaraṇe: 'In the section on grounds for principles' means the part and the whole. Dasa atthavasetiādīsu: 'In the ten grounds for principles, etc.' means the part and the whole. Yaṃ: 'Which' is a word. Uparimaṃ uparimaṃ padaṃ: 'The higher, higher phrase' means the phrase stated successively, such as "for the ease of the Sangha." Heṭṭhimassa heṭṭhimassa padassa: 'Of the lower, lower phrase' means of the phrase stated below, such as "for the well-being of the Sangha."

Tatthāti tasmiṃ padasate, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ,atthasatanti abhidheyyasataṃ.Dhammasatantiabhidhānasataṃ, pāḷisatanti attho. ‘‘Atthasataṃ dhammasata’’nti padānaṃ atthantaravikappaṃ dassento āha‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Tattha ye dasa atthavase paṭicca paññattaṃ, tesaṃ dasaatthavasānanti yojanā, ye dasa atthavase pubbe vaṇṇitā, tesaṃ dasaatthavasānanti yojanā. Paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.39) vaṇṇitāti sambandho.Tatthāti ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā’’tiādipāṭhe.Suṭṭhu devāti suṭṭhu mahārāja. Hi yasmā āṇābalabhogabalaissariyabalehi dibbati, tasmādevoti vuccati.Yo cāti gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā, sampaṭicchatīti sambandho.Tasmāti yasmā hitāya sukhāya hoti, tasmā. Ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā paññapessāmīti sambandho. Abhibhavitvā na paññapessāmīti yojanā.Idhāti atthavasapakaraṇe.Tadatthajotakānanti soyeva attho tadattho, tassa jotakā tadatthajotakā, tesaṃ. Idāni veditabbānīti sambandho. Atthaṃ jotentītiatthajotakā,saddā. Nīharitvā, niyametvā vā attho vuccate imāhi saddapaññattīhītiniruttiyo.

Tattha: 'There,' in that hundred phrases, is a locative of specification; atthasataṃ: 'a hundred grounds' means a hundred objects to be expressed. Dhammasataṃ: 'a hundred principles' means a hundred expressions, that is, a hundred Pali texts. Showing the alternative meanings of the words "atthasataṃ dhammasataṃ," he says, "atha vā": 'or, rather', etc. There, the meaning is that those ten grounds for principles are established after considering ten grounds for principles, or that those ten grounds for principles are the ten grounds for principles previously described. It should be connected to "vaṇṇitā" which means "described" in the explanation of the first Pārājika (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.39). Tattha: 'There' means in the passage beginning "saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā." Suṭṭhu devā: 'Very well, deva' means very well, Great King. Hi, because he shines with the power of command, the power of wealth, the power of dominion, and the power of glory, therefore he is called devo: 'deva'. Yo cā: 'And whoever', whether a householder or a renunciate, accepts, should be connected to "sampaṭicchatīti." Tasmā: 'Therefore', because it is for benefit and happiness, therefore. The connection is that I will establish it after showing the benefit. The meaning is that I will not establish it by overpowering. Idhā: 'Here' means in the section on grounds for principles. Tadatthajotakānaṃ: 'Of those that illuminate that meaning', soyeva attho tadattho, tassa jotakā tadatthajotakā, tesaṃ: 'that very meaning is its meaning, those that illuminate it are illuminators of that meaning, of those'. Now, they should be understood, should be connected to "veditabbānīti." Illuminating the meaning are atthajotakā: 'meaning-illuminators', words. Niruttiyo: 'Etymologies' means meanings are stated by these word-concepts after extracting or determining them.

Atthasatanti gāthāyaṃ atthavase pakaraṇe atthasataṃ veditabbantiādinā yojanā kātabbā.Iti hīti iti eva.Hisaddo hi evasaddattho.Idanti ‘‘atthasata’’ntiādivacanaṃ, vuttanti sambandho.Etanti yathāvuttaṃ atthaṃ paṭiccāti sambandho.

Atthasataṃ: 'A hundred grounds' should be connected in the verse by "atthavase pakaraṇe atthasataṃ veditabbantiādinā." Iti hī: 'Thus indeed' means thus truly. The word hi means indeed. Idaṃ: 'This' means the statement beginning with "atthasataṃ," should be connected to "vuttanti." Etaṃ: 'This' should be connected to "yathāvuttaṃ atthaṃ paṭiccāti."

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the commentary on the Samantapāsādikā Vinaya

Mahāvaggavaṇṇanāya

Commentary on the Mahāvagga,

Yojanā samattā.

The Word-Meaning is completed.

Paṭhamagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

The First Verse Collection

Sattanagaresu paññattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Training Rules Enacted in the Seven Cities

335.Ekaṃsanti ettha bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘ekasmiṃ aṃse’’ti.Dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalanti dasannaṃ nakhānaṃ samūhena suṭṭhu ujjalaṃ. Ettha ‘‘samujjala’’nti imināañjalinti padassa ādarena, abhimukhaṃ vā jalati dibbatīti añjalīti atthaṃ dasseti.Āsīsamānarūpovāti ettha āsīsamānarūpo evāti atthaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘paccāsīsamānarūpo viyā’’ti. Ettha ‘‘viyā’’ti iminā ‘‘āsīsamāno ivā’’ti padavibhāgaṃ katvāivasaddo upamatthajotakoti dasseti.Kissāti ettha karaṇatthe chaṭṭhīvibhatti hotīti āha ‘‘kena kāraṇenā’’ti.Idhāti mama nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Āgato’’ti imināidhamāgatoti ettha makāro padasandhikaramattoti dasseti.Assāti upālissa vissajjesīti sambandho.Sabbatthāti sabbesu pañhesu.Itīti evaṃ.

335. Ekaṃsaṃ: 'One-shoulder' here, he says, "ekasmiṃ aṃse": 'on one shoulder' is a word used in the sense of a locative. Dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ: 'Very radiant with the collection of ten fingernails' means very radiant with the collection of ten fingernails. Here, with "samujjalaṃ": 'very radiant', he shows the meaning of the word añjali: 'palms joined together' as shining or gleaming with reverence or facing towards. Āsīsamānarūpovā: 'As if wishing' here, rejecting the meaning "āsīsamānarūpo eva": 'just as wishing', he says, "paccāsīsamānarūpo viyā": 'just as expecting'. Here, with "viyā": 'as if', having divided the word as "āsīsamāno ivā": 'wishing, as if', he shows that the word iva is indicative of comparison. Kissā: 'Why' here, he says, "kena kāraṇena": 'for what reason' is the sixth vibhatti in the sense of cause. Idhā: 'Here' means the place where I am sitting. With "āgato": 'arrived', he shows that in idhamāgato: 'arrived here', the ma is merely a connector of words. Assā: 'To him', should be connected to "upālissa vissajjesīti." Sabbattha: 'Everywhere' means in all questions. Itī: 'Thus'.

Tatthāti vissajjane.Bhaddako te ummaṅgoti etthaummaṅgasaddo pañhavācakoti āha ‘‘bhaddakā te pañhā’’ti. Tatthateti tava. Kasmā pañhā ‘‘ummaṅgo’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘pañcā hī’’tiādi.Hiyasmā ummaṅgoti vuccati, tasmā pañhā ummaṅgo nāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Ummujjitvā ṭhitattā’’ti iminā ummujjatītiummaṅgoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Mujadhātu ukārassa akāro, avijjandhakārasaṅkhātā udakato ummujjatīti attho.‘‘Tagghā’’ti nipātassa tasmā kāraṇāti atthaṃ dassento āha‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. ‘‘Sampaṭicchanatthe’’ti iminā tagghasaddo sādhuatthoti dasseti, taggha sādhūti attho.Tīṇiyevāti ‘‘samādahitvā visibbentī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘sāmisenā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘sasitthaka’’nti ekanti imāni tīṇiyeva.

Tattha: 'There' means in the answer. Bhaddako te ummaṅgo: 'Good is your tunnel' here, he says, "bhaddakā te pañhā": 'good are your questions', the word ummaṅga means question. There, te: 'your' means your. Why is a question called "ummaṅga"? He says, "pañcā hī": 'because the questions', etc. Hi, because it is called ummaṅga, therefore a question is called ummaṅga, is the connection. With "ummujjitvā ṭhitattā": 'because it stands emerging', he shows the meaning of the word ummaṅga as "ummujjatīti ummaṅgo": 'that which emerges is an ummaṅga'. The root muj with the u becoming a, means it emerges from the water that is ignorance and darkness. Showing that the particle ‘‘Tagghā’’ means "therefore" or "because," he says, "yasmā": 'because', etc. With "sampaṭicchanatthe": 'in the sense of accepting', he shows that the word taggha means good, taggha means good. Tīṇiyevā: 'Only three' means "samādahitvā visibbentī": 'scattering after concentrating' is one, "sāmisenā": 'with the owner' is one, "sasitthaka": 'with training' is one, these are only three.

Catuvipattivaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Four Disasters

336.Yaṃ taṃ pucchimhāti ettha niggahitato paraṃ akāralopoti āha ‘‘yaṃ taṃ apucchimhā’’ti. Tatthayanti pañhaṃ.Tanti tuvaṃ. ‘‘Tva’’ntipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.Taṃ tadevāti taṃ taṃ eva pañhaṃ.Aññathāti aññaṃ ākāraṃ.

336. Yaṃ taṃ pucchimhā: 'What we asked you' here, he says, "yaṃ taṃ apucchimhā": 'what we asked' because of the elision of the a after the combination of words. There, yaṃ: 'what' means the question. Taṃ: 'You' means you. "Tvaṃtīpi" is also a reading, this is the meaning. Taṃ tadevā: 'That very' means that very question. Aññathā: 'Otherwise' means in another way.

Ye duṭṭhullā sā sīlavipattīti ettha nanu sīlavipattiṃ pucchanto pañho natthi, kasmā pana ‘‘sā sīlavipattī’’ti vissajjanaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi.Etanti ‘‘ye duṭṭhullā sā sīlavipattī’’ti vacanaṃ. Tamevatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘catūsu hī’’tiādi.Vatvāti saṃkhepena vatvā.

Ye duṭṭhullā sā sīlavipattī: 'Those are the gross ones, that is the disaster of morality' here, if one asks, "Surely, there is no question asking about the disaster of morality, why then is the answer 'that is the disaster of morality' stated?" he says, "kiñcāpī": 'although', etc. Etaṃ: 'This' means the statement "ye duṭṭhullā sā sīlavipattī." Expanding on that very meaning, he says, "catūsu hī": 'because in the four', etc. Vatvā: 'Having said' means having said concisely.

Tissannaṃ vipattīnanti sīlavipattito avasesānaṃ tissannaṃ vipattīnaṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘thullaccaya’’ntiādivacane.

Tissannaṃ vipattīnaṃ: 'Of the three disasters' means of the three disasters remaining from the disaster of morality. Tattha: 'There' means in the statement beginning "thullaccaya."

‘‘Abbhācikkhantī’’ti padassa kattāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘vadantā’’ti. ‘‘Tathāha’’ntiādinā vadanākāraṃ dasseti.

Showing the agent of the word "Abbhācikkhantī": 'accusing', he says, "vadantā": 'speaking'. He shows the manner of speaking with "Tathāha": 'thus he says', etc.

ayaṃ sāti etthasaddo padālaṅkāroti dasseti.Ettāvatāti ettakena ‘‘thullaccaya’’ntiādivacanamattena. Vissajjitaṃ hotīti sambandho.

ayaṃ sā: 'this that' here, he shows that the word is an embellishment of the phrase. Ettāvatā: 'By this much' means by just this statement beginning "thullaccaya." The connection is that it is answered.

Chedanakādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of Cutting, etc.

337.Katichedanakānītiādipucchānaṃ anusandhipucchābhāvaṃ dassento āha‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Pucchā hi anusandhiananusandhivasena duvidhā. Tattha vissajjanena anusandhivasena pucchāanusandhipucchānāma, vissajjanamanapekkhitvā yathākāmapucchāananusandhipucchānāma. Tāsaṃ vitthāro nettiaṭṭhakathādīsu gahetabbo. Idhāpi ‘‘ekādasa yāvatatiyakā’’ti vissajjanena anusandhānattā anusandhipucchā nāma. Yasmā pana vissajjitoti sambandho.Saṅkhāvasenāti ekādasā’’ti saṅkhāya sattiyā, āyattena vā.Saṅkhānusandhivasenevāti ‘‘katī’’ti saṅkhāya anusandhivasena eva.Tesanti pañhānaṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘cha chedanakānī’’tiādipāṭhe.Idamevāti idaṃ eva vacanaṃ.Apubbanti pubbe na vuttaṃ, aporāṇaṃ navanti attho.Yaṃ panetanti yaṃ pana etaṃ vacanaṃ. ‘‘Soḷasā’’ti imināsodasāti ettha dakārassa ḷakāraṃ katvā ‘‘soḷasā’’ti pāṭhopi yujjatīti dasseti.Jānanti paññattāti ettha ‘‘evaṃ vatvā’’ti pāṭhasesaṃ ajjhāharitvā yojetabbabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘jāna’’nti evaṃ vatvā paññattā’’ti.Teti ‘‘jāna’’nti paññattā sikkhāpadāti attho.Evanti vakkhamānanayena.Paviseyyātīti etthaitisaddo parisamānattho. Iti veditabboti yojanā.

337. Showing the absence of sequential questioning in the questions Kati chedanakānī: 'How many are the cutting ones?', etc., he says, "yasmā panā": 'since, however', etc. Questions are of two kinds: sequential and non-sequential. There, a question that is sequential by way of the answer is called anusandhipucchā: 'sequential question', a question asked as one pleases without regard to the answer is called ananusandhipucchā: 'non-sequential question'. The expansion of those should be taken from the Nettiatthakathā, etc. Here too, because it is sequential with the answer "ekādasa yāvatatiyakā": 'eleven up to the third', it is called a sequential question. The connection is that since it is answered. Saṅkhāvasenā: 'By way of number' means by way of the power of the number "eleven," or by what is dependent. Saṅkhānusandhivaseneva: 'Just by way of the sequence of number' means just by way of the sequence of the number "how many." Tesaṃ: 'Of those' means of the questions. Tattha: 'There' means in the passage beginning "cha chedanakānī." Idamevā: 'Just this' means just this statement. Apubbaṃ: 'Unprecedented' means not said before, not ancient, new. Yaṃ panetaṃ: 'But which this' means but which this statement. With "Soḷasā": 'sixteen', he shows that by making the ḷ sound for the da in sodasā, the reading "soḷasā" is also suitable. Showing that it should be connected by supplying the remainder of the passage "evaṃ vatvā": 'having said thus', he says, "jāna": 'know', thus having said "jānanti paññattā": 'knowing, were established'. Te: 'Those' means the training rules established "jāna." Evaṃ: 'Thus' means by the method to be stated. Paviseyyātī: 'Would enter', here the word iti is in the sense of completion. Iti, it should be understood.

Asādhāraṇādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of Non-Shared, etc.

338.Purima pañhanti ‘‘kati chedanakānī’’tiādipañhānaṃ pure vuttaṃ pañhaṃ.Tatthāti ‘‘vīsaṃ dve satānī’’tiādipāṭhe.‘‘Dveaniyatehī’’ti padassa asamāhāradiguvākyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dvīhi aniyatehī’’ti.‘‘Saddhi’’nti iminā sahādiyoge karaṇavacananti dasseti.

338. Purima pañhaṃ: 'Previous question' means the question stated before, such as "kati chedanakānī." Tattha: 'There' means in the passage beginning "vīsaṃ dve satānī." Showing the non-compound dvigu phrase of ‘‘Dveaniyatehī’’ he says ‘‘dvīhi aniyatehī’’ti: 'with two un-fixed'. With ‘‘Saddhi’’, he shows that it is the instrumental case in connection with saha etc.

Dve lomāti dve eḷakalomasikkhāpadāni.

Dve lomā: 'Two hairs' means the two training rules regarding elaka-hair.

‘‘Sakalo’’tiādikāya aḍḍhateyyagāthāya yojanā suviññeyyāva.

The connection of the half-thirteenth verse beginning with ‘‘Sakalo’’ is very easy to understand.

Saṅghamhādasa nissareti ettha ‘‘saṅghamhā nissārīyatī’’ti (pāci. 680, 730) evaṃ vuttā dasāti yojanānayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṅghamhā nissārīyatī’’tiādi.Tatthāti bhikkhunivibhaṅge.Tathāti yathā khuddakā, tathāti attho.Itīti evaṃ.

Saṅghamhā dasa nissare: 'Ten are expelled from the Sangha' here, showing the method of connection as "saṅghamhā nissārīyatīti (pāci. 680, 730) evaṃ vuttā dasāti": 'ten are said thus, "is expelled from the Sangha"', he says, "saṅghamhā nissārīyatītiādi": 'is expelled from the Sangha, etc.'. Tattha: 'There' means in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga. Tathā: 'Thus' means just as the small ones, that is the meaning. Itī: 'Thus'.

Tesanti pārājikānaṃ. Kaṇhasappādayo durāsadā viya durāsadā hontīti yojanā.‘‘Durūpagamanāti iminā sadadhātuyā gatyatthaṃ dasseti.Durāsajjanāti dukkhena āsajjitabbā, āsajjituṃ na sukarāti attho.Samūpamāti samaupamā. Samūpamākāraṃ dassento āha‘‘yathā’’tiādi.

Tesaṃ: 'Of those' means of the Pārājikas. The connection is that they are as difficult to approach as black snakes. Showing the sense of motion of the sad root with ‘‘Durūpagamanā, he says : 'difficult to approach'. Durāsajjanā: 'Difficult to associate with' means difficult to approach, not easy to approach. Samūpamā: 'Similar' means like an analogy. Showing the nature of the analogy, he says ‘‘yathā’’: 'just as', etc.

Sādhāraṇanti aṭṭhahi pārājikehi sādhāraṇaṃ. Ekekassa pārājikassāti sambandho.Avirūḷhī bhavanti teti ettha upamānopameyyānaṃ pākaṭabhāvaṃ katvā yojanānayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā ete’’tiādi.Avirūḷhidhammāti avirūḷhīsabhāvā.Pakatisīlabhāvenāti pakatiyā sīlavantabhāvena,‘‘pakatisīlābhāvenā’’tipi pāṭho, pakatisīlassa abhāvena, abhāvahetūti attho.Ettāvatāti ettakena ‘‘aṭṭheva pārājikā’’tiādivacanamattena, dassitaṃ hotīti sambandho.Vibhattiyoti pārājikādivasena vibhajitabbāti vibhattiyoti.Tatthāti ‘‘tevīsati saṅghādisesā’’tiādipāṭhe.Sabbasaṅgāhikavacananti sabbesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samathānaṃ, sabbāsaṃ vā āpattīnaṃ samathānaṃ saṅgāhikavacanaṃ.‘‘Dvīhi samathehī’’ti sammukhāvinayena ca paṭiññātakaraṇena cāti dvīhi samathehi.

Sādhāraṇaṃ: 'Shared' means shared with the eight Pārājikas. The connection is with each Pārājika. Avirūḷhī bhavanti te: 'They do not grow' here, showing the method of connection by making clear the simile and the object of comparison, he says, "yathā ete": 'just as these', etc. Avirūḷhidhammā: 'Of the nature of not growing' means of the nature of not growing. Pakatisīlabhāvenā: 'By way of being naturally virtuous', ‘‘pakatisīlābhāvenā’’ is also a reading, by the absence of natural virtue, because of the absence. Ettāvatā: 'By this much' means by just this statement beginning "aṭṭheva pārājikā," the connection is that it is shown. Vibhattiyo: 'Divisions' means because they should be divided by way of Pārājika, etc., they are called vibhattiyo. Tattha: 'There' means in the passage beginning "tevīsati saṅghādisesā." Sabbasaṅgāhikavacanaṃ: 'All-inclusive statement' means a statement that includes all the three resolutions, or all the offenses. Showing the non-compound dvigu phrase of ‘‘Dvīhi samathehī’’, ‘‘Dvīhi samathehī’’ti: 'with two resolutions' means with the facing-up-to-the-offense resolution and the confessing resolution.

Etanti ‘‘dve uposathā dve pavāraṇā’’ti vacanaṃ.Vibhajanānīti vibhajitabbānaṃ vibhajanakiriyāya avinābhāvato bhāvavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā vibhajitabbātivibhattiyoti vacanattho kātabbo. Aparāpi imā vibhattiyo hontīti yojanā. Heṭṭhā vuttassa ‘‘vibhattimattadassaneneva cetaṃ vuttaṃ, na samathehi vūpasamanavasenā’’ti vacanassa atthanayato aññaṃ atthanayaṃ dassento āha‘‘athavā’’tiādi, ‘‘imāpi vibhattiyo’’ti padaṃ ‘‘nissāyā’’ti pade avuttakammaṃ. Nissāya āpajjantīti sambandho.ti āpattiyo.Vuttappakārehevāti tīhi samathehīti vuttapakāreheva.Taṃmūlikānanti te eva uposathādayo mūlametāsanti taṃmūlikā, tāsaṃ. Iminā kāriyūpacārena vuttanayaṃ dasseti.Tā vibhattiyoti uposathādivibhattiyo.

Etaṃ: 'This' means the statement "dve uposathā dve pavāraṇā." Vibhajanā means because of the inseparability of the action of dividing from those to be divided, it is stated in terms of the nature, therefore the meaning of the word vibhattiyo should be made as "those to be divided". The connection is that these are other divisions as well. Showing another method of meaning from the perspective of the meaning of the statement made below "vibhattimattadassaneneva cetaṃ vuttaṃ, na samathehi vūpasamanavasenā," he says, ‘‘athavā’’: 'or rather', etc., the phrase "imāpi vibhattiyo" is an unexpressed object in the word "nissāyā." The connection is that they are incurred depending on. Tā: 'Those' means the offenses. Vuttappakārehevā: 'Just by the ways stated' means just by the ways stated, with the three resolutions. Taṃmūlikānaṃ: 'Rooted in that' means those Uposathas, etc., are rooted in that, of those. With this, he shows the method stated by way of the effect for the cause. Tā vibhattiyo: 'Those divisions' means the divisions of Uposatha, etc.

Pārājikādiāpattivaṇṇanā
Explanation of Pārājika, etc., Offenses

339.Evaṃ vissajjetvāti sambandho. Yadidaṃ āpattipārājikaṃ nāmāti yojanā.Āpattipārājikanti āpattisaṅkhātaṃ pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Parājayamāpanno’’ti iminā sāsanato puggalaṃ parājetītipārājikanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ṇyapaccayo hetukatvatthavācako, yakārassa kakāro.Cutoti cavako.Paraddhoti viraddho.Bhaṭṭhoti patito.Niraṅkatoti saṅghamhā apasārito.Anīhate tasmiṃ puggaleti tasmiṃ puggale saṅghamhā nīharitvā na harite, anapanīteti attho. ‘‘Uposathapavāraṇādibhedo’’ti iminā saṃvāsasarūpaṃ dasseti. Byañjane ādaramakatvā ‘‘etaṃ āpattī’’ti vuttaṃ.Ayaṃ hīti ayaṃ evaṃ vakkhamāno.Etthāti gāthāyaṃ.Tena tasmāti ettha ‘‘tasmā’’ti padena ‘‘tenā’’ti padassa kāraṇatthaṃ dasseti.

339. The connection is that having answered thus. The connection is that this which is called the āpattipārājika. Āpattipārājikaṃ: 'Āpattipārājika' means the Pārājika that is an offense. With "Parājayamāpanno": 'having been defeated', he shows the meaning of the word pārājika as "sāsanato puggalaṃ parājetīti pārājiko": 'that which defeats a person from the dispensation is a pārājika'. The ṇya suffix is expressive of the cause, the ya becomes a ka. Cuto: 'Cut off' means fallen. Paraddho: 'Failed' means ruined. Bhaṭṭho: 'Fallen' means slipped. Niraṅkato: 'Excluded' means removed from the Sangha. Anīhate tasmiṃ puggale: 'In that person not removed' means in that person not removed or not taken away after removing him from the Sangha. With "Uposathapavāraṇādibhedo," he shows the nature of association. Making light of the expression, it is said "etaṃ āpattī." Ayaṃ hī: 'This indeed' means this about to be said. Etthā: 'Here' means in the verse. Tena tasmā: 'Therefore, therefore' here, with the word "tasmā," he shows the meaning of the word "tena" as the cause.

Etthāti dutiyagāthāyaṃ. Ādimhi ceva icchitabboti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.Etthāti parivāsadānādīsu catūsu kammesu. ‘‘Saṅgho’’tiādivacanattho tipadabhinnādhikaraṇabāhiratthasamāso hoti, cevasaddacasaddehi ādisesapadānaṃ ubhayapadatthapadhānabhāvaṃ dasseti, ‘‘icchitabbo’’ti padaṃ kārakānaṃ kiriyāpekkhattā kiriyatthāya pakkhittaṃ.Assāti āpattiyā, iminā aññapadaṃ dasseti. Icchitabbatthe apaccayaṃ katvā taddhitantipi vadanti. Lahukanayo panesa. Ayaṃ panettha garukanayo – ādi ca seso caādisesā,saṅgho ādisesesu assā icchitabbotisaṅghādisesoti.

Etthā: 'Here' means in the second verse. It should be desired at the beginning. Hī: 'Indeed' means truly. Etthā: 'Here' means in the four acts of giving Parivāsa, etc. The meaning of the statement "Saṅgho," etc., is a tatpurisa compound with different subjects in three words, showing the prominence of the meaning of both words with the words ceva and ca for the remaining words of ādi, the word "icchitabbo" is placed in the sense of the action because the agents are dependent on the action. Assā: 'To that' means to that offense, with this, he shows another word. Some say it is a taddhita by making the ap suffix in the sense of being desired. But this is an easy method. Here, however, this is the difficult method – ādi ca seso ca ādisesā, saṅgho ādisesesu assā icchitabboti saṅghādiseso.

Anekaṃsikataṃpadanti etthapadanti sikkhāpadaṃ. Anekaṃsena kataṃanekaṃsikatanti dassento āha ‘‘yasmā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ anekaṃsena kata’’nti. Yasmā kataṃ, tasmā aniyatoti pavuccatīti yojanā.Tatthāti aniyate.Yatthāti sikkhāpade.Sopīti sikkhāpadadhammopi.

Anekaṃsikataṃ padaṃ: 'Multi-faceted phrase' here, padaṃ: 'phrase' means training rule. Showing that anekaṃsena kataṃ is anekaṃsikataṃ, he says "yasmā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ anekaṃsena kataṃ." Since it is done, therefore it is said to be unfixed, is the connection. Tattha: 'There' means in the unfixed. Yattha: 'Where' means in the training rule. Sopī: 'Even that' means even that teaching-rule-dhamma.

Accayesūti dosesu. Te hi niddosaṃ atikkamma ayanti gacchanti pavattantītiaccayāti vuccanti.Tenāti accayena.Thūloti oḷāriko. ‘‘Thūlattā’’ti iminā‘‘teneta’’nti ettha tenasaddassa kāraṇatthaṃ dasseti. Accayassa thūlattāti sambandho.Etanti āpattidhammaṃ. Imāya gāthāya aññesaṃ lahukāpattīnaṃ thūlo accayothullaccayoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Dvebhāve sati saṃyogaparattā rasso hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Accayesū: 'In transgressions' means in faults. Because they go beyond the faultless and go, proceed, or occur, therefore they are called accayā. Tenā: 'By that' means by that transgression. Thūlo: 'Gross' means coarse. With "Thūlattā," he shows the meaning of the word "tena" as the cause in ‘‘teneta.’’ The connection is that the grossness is of the transgression. Etaṃ: 'This' means the offense-dhamma. With this verse, he shows the meaning of the word thullaccayo as "the gross transgression is the gross transgression" for the other minor offenses. It should be seen that the short vowel occurs due to being followed by a conjunct consonant when there are two syllables.

nissaggo,āpattidesanato pubbabhāge kattabbassa vinayakammassetamadhivacanaṃ, so etassatthītinissaggiyanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

Nissaggo: This is a designation for the vinayakamma (disciplinary procedure) that must be done before the declaration of offense; it shows the meaning of the word nissaggiya as "one for whom that exists."

pācittiyanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ettha ‘‘cittapātiya’’nti vattabbe padavipariyāyaṃ katvā, takārassa ca lopaṃ katvā ‘‘pācittiya’’nti vuttaṃ. Acinteyyo hi pāḷinayo. Ṇyapaccayo hetukatvatthavācako. Nanu ‘‘pāteti kusalaṃ dhamma’’nti imināva ‘‘pācittiya’’nti padassa nibbacanaṃ siddhaṃ, kasmā pana ‘‘aparajjhati cittasammohanaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādi. Yasmā hotīti sambandho.

The meaning of the word pācittiya is shown. Here, instead of saying "cittapātiya," the order of the words is reversed, and by omitting the "ta" sound, it is said as "pācittiya." Indeed, the ways of Pali are inconceivable. The suffix ṇya implies causality. Now, if the derivation of the word "pācittiya" is already established by "pāteti kusalaṃ dhamma" (it causes wholesome qualities to fall away), why then is it said "aparajjhati cittasammohanaṭṭhāna" (one errs, a place of delusion of the mind)? He says, "yaṃ panā" etc. Because it exists, the connection should be made.

pāṭidesanīyāti nibbacanaṃ dasseti.

The derivation of pāṭidesanīyā is shown.

Dukkaṭanti ettha dusaddo duṭṭhuattho ca virūpattho ca hotīti dassento āha ‘‘duṭṭhu kataṃ, virūpaṃ vā kata’’nti.Tanti kammaṃ.Taṃ panetanti dukkaṭaṃ, khalitanti sambandho.Assāti dukkaṭassa. Tassattho evaṃ veditabboti yojanā.ti vitthāro. Yaṃ pāpanti yojanā.Yadīti atha.Yadisaddo hi athapariyāyo.Idampīti idampi kammaṃ, pāpanti sambandho.

Dukkaṭa: Here, showing that the word du means both "bad" and "ugly," he says, "duṭṭhu kataṃ, virūpaṃ vā kataṃ" (badly done or done improperly). Ta: That is the action. Taṃ panetaṃ: That dukkaṭa, it falters, the connection should be made. Assā: Of the dukkaṭa. Its meaning should be understood thus, is the construction. Hī: Expansion. Yaṃ pāpaṃti yojanā (Which is evil, is the connection). Yadī: Atha (then). Yadi expresses athapariyāyo (synonym of atha). Idampī: This action too, is connected with evil.

durābhaṭṭhanti ettha bhāsadhātuyā kathanatthaṃ dasseti.Yanti vacanaṃ.Kiñca bhiyyoti tato atirekaṃ kathetabbavacanaṃ kiñcāti attho.Saṃkiliṭṭhañca yaṃ padanti ettha cakāro pisaddattho ‘‘pada’’nti ettha yojetabbo,yaṃsaddo kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ yasmā tampi pada’’nti.Tampi padanti tampi vacanaṃ.Padasaddo hi vacanavācako. Tampi vacanaṃ yasmā saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ hotīti yojanā. Kathaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Yasmā’’ti padenayaṃsaddo kāraṇatthoti dasseti.Nanti padaṃ.‘‘Etaṃ iti vuccatī’’ti saṃvaṇṇetabbapadaṃ. ‘‘Dubbhāsitanti etaṃ vuccatī’’ti saṃvaṇṇanāpadaṃ.Etanti etaṃ padaṃ, etaṃ vacananti attho.

Durābhaṭṭha: Here, showing the meaning of the root bhās as "to speak," he says, Yanti vacanaṃ (which is the word). Kiñca bhiyyo: The meaning of kiñca is, words that are more than that should be spoken. Saṃkiliṭṭhañca yaṃ padaṃ: Here, the ca is in the sense of pi and should be connected to "pada"; the word yaṃ has the meaning of a cause, he says, "saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ yasmā tampi padaṃ" (because that word is defiled). Tampi padaṃ: That word too. Pada means vacanavācako (word). Because that word is defiled, is the connection. How is it defiled, is the connection. By the word "yasmā" (because), he shows that the word yaṃ is causative. Nanti padaṃ (not the word). ‘‘Etaṃ iti vuccatī’’: The word to be described. ‘‘Dubbhāsitanti etaṃ vuccatī’’ (This is called ill-spoken): This is the descriptive word. Etaṃ: This word, this saying is the meaning.

Etthāti sekhiyagāthāya.Idanti āpattīnaṃ nibbacanadīpakaṃ vacanaṃ, vuttanti sambandho. Kassa dīpanatthaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘saṅgahitassa atthassa dīpanattha’’nti.

Etthā: In this Sekhiya verse. Idaṃ: This statement that illuminates the meaning of the offenses, is said, is the connection. For the purpose of illuminating what is it said? He says, "saṅgahitassa atthassa dīpanatthaṃ" (for the purpose of illuminating the implied meaning).

Tatthāti ‘‘channamativassatī’’tiādivacane.Gehanti pakatigehaṃ. Idaṃ pana gehanti yojanā. Vitthārento āha ‘‘mūlāpattiñhī’’tiādi. ‘‘Avivaṭa’’nti vatvā tassatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘succhanna’’nti.Vivaṭanti acchannaṃ. Nātivassanabhāvaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘mūlāpattiñhī’’tiādi. Vivaranto bhikkhu nāpajjatīti sambandho.Suddhanteti suddhakoṭṭhāse. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti ca ‘‘tenā’’ti ca yebhuyyena atthato ekaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kāraṇenā’’ti.Evañcetaṃ vivaṭanti evaṃ etaṃ channaṃ ce vivaṭanti yojanā.

Tatthā: In the statement beginning with "channamativassatī" (when the roof is leaking). Gehaṃ: Natural dwelling. But this is a dwelling, is the connection. Expanding, he says, "mūlāpattiñhī" etc. Saying "avivaṭa" (uncovered), to show its meaning, it is said "succhannaṃ" (well-covered). Vivaṭaṃ: Uncovered. Expanding on the state of not leaking, he says, "mūlāpattiñhī" etc. A monk incurs an offense if he uncovers, is the connection. Suddhante: In a clean compartment. "Tasmā" (therefore) and "tena" (by that) generally have the same meaning, therefore it is said "tena kāraṇena" (by that reason). Evañcetaṃ vivaṭaṃ: Thus, if this is covered, it is uncovered, is the connection.

Paripātiyamānānanti abhibhūyamānānaṃ. ‘‘Rukkhādigahanaṃ arañña’’nti imināpavananti padassa araññapariyāyataṃ dasseti. Gatisaddassa bhavabhedādiatthaṃ paṭikkhipitvā paṭissaraṇatthe hotīti dassento āha ‘‘paṭissaraṇaṃ hotī’’ti.Tanti pavanaṃ.Teti migā.‘‘Assasantī’’ti padena ‘‘passasantī’’ti atthopi gahetabbo avinābhāvato, ānāpānaṃ karontīti attho.Ākāsoti ajaṭākāso.Pakkhīnanti vihaṅgamānaṃ. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ saṅkhatadhammāna’’nti iminādhammānanti ettha saṅkhatadhammoyeva gahetabboti dasseti. ‘‘Vināsovā’’ti imināvibhavasaddo vināsavācakoti dasseti.Tesanti sabbesampi saṅkhatadhammānaṃ.Gatīti patiṭṭhā. Kasmā vibhavo dhammānaṃ gati hotīti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi.ti yasmā.Teti sabbepi saṅkhatadhammā.Vināsanti vibhavaṃ.Sucirampīti asītivassādikālampi.Nibbānaṃ arahato gatīti saṃvaṇṇetabbapadaṃ. ‘‘Khīṇāsavassā’’ti imināarahatoti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Anupādisesanibbānadhātū’’ti iminā‘‘nibbāna’’nti padassa idha adhippetanibbānaṃ dasseti. Gāthāya te te atthā saṃgahetvā gaṇiyanti etthātigāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ.

Paripātiyamānānaṃ: Being overwhelmed. By "Rukkhādigahanaṃ araññaṃ," he shows that the word pavana is a synonym for arañña (forest). Rejecting the meaning of the word gati as bhavabheda (difference in existence), etc., showing that it means paṭissaraṇa (refuge), he says "paṭissaraṇaṃ hotī" (it is a refuge). Taṃ: That is the pavana. Te: Those are the animals. ‘‘Assasantī’’: By the word assasantī (inhaling), the meaning of passasantī (exhaling) should also be taken due to inseparability; it means doing ānāpāna. Ākāso: Unobstructed space. Pakkhīnaṃ: Of the birds. By "Sabbesaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ," he shows that here dhammānaṃ should be taken as only conditioned phenomena. By "Vināsovā," he shows that the word vibhava means destruction. Tesaṃ: Of all those conditioned phenomena. Gatī: Support. Why is destruction the support of phenomena? He says, "na hī" (indeed not), etc. Hī: Because. Te: All those conditioned phenomena. Vināsaṃ: Destruction. Sucirampī: Even a long time such as eighty years. Nibbānaṃ arahato gatī: The word to be described. By "Khīṇāsavassa," he shows the meaning of the word arahato. By "Anupādisesanibbānadhātū," he shows that here the Nibbāna intended by the word ‘‘nibbāna’’ is the anupādisesanibbāna. Gāthāya te te atthā saṃgahetvā gaṇiyanti etthāti gāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ (Because in a verse, those meanings are gathered and counted, therefore it is called gāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ).

Iti paṭhamagāthāsaṅgaṇikavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the connection in the Vaṇṇanā on the Gāthāsaṅgaṇika, the first section.

Adhikaraṇabhedaṃ

Ukkoṭanabhedādivaṇṇanā
Ukkoṭanabhedādivaṇṇanā (Explanation of Types of Overturning, etc.)

340.Adhikaraṇabhede evamattho veditabboti yojanā. Dassetuṃ āhāti sambandho.Dve samatheti ettha dvinnaṃ samathānaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sammukhāvinayañca yebhuyyasikañcā’’ti. ‘‘Paṭisedhetī’’ti imināukkoṭetīti ettha kuṭadhātuyā chedanatthaṃ atthato dasseti. Chedanaṃ nāma atthato samathapaṭisedhananti attho.

340.In the classification of legal issues, this meaning should be understood, is the construction. He says to show, is the connection. Dve samathe: Here, showing the nature of the two settlements, he says "sammukhāvinayañca yebhuyyasikañca" (the procedure in the presence and the procedure by majority). By "Paṭisedhetī," he shows the meaning of cutting off by the root kuṭ in ukkoṭeti, in terms of meaning. Cutting off, in terms of meaning, is the prevention of settlement, is the meaning.

341.Dvādasasu ukkoṭesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.Akataṃ kammantiādayoti ettha ādisaddena ‘‘dukkaṭaṃ kammaṃ, puna kātabbaṃ kamma’’nti dve ukkoṭā saṅgahetabbā.Anihataṃ kammantiādayoti ettha ādisaddena ‘‘dunnihataṃ, puna nihanitabba’’nti dve ukkoṭā saṅgahetabbā.Avinicchitantiādayoti ettha ādisaddena ‘‘duvinicchitaṃ, puna vinicchitabba’’nti dve ukkoṭā saṅgahetabbā.Avūpasantantiādayoti ettha ādisaddena ‘‘duvūpasantaṃ, puna vūpasametabba’’nti dve ukkoṭā saṅgahetabbā.Apicāti sāmaññato pana.

341.Dvādasasu ukkoṭesu (among the twelve overturnings): It is a locative of specification. Akataṃ kammantiādayo: Here, by ādi, the two overturnings "dukkaṭaṃ kammaṃ, puna kātabbaṃ kammaṃ" (wrongly done act, an act to be done again) should be included. Anihataṃ kammantiādayo: Here, by ādi, the two overturnings "dunnihataṃ, puna nihanitabbaṃ" (badly suppressed, to be suppressed again) should be included. Avinicchitantiādayo: Here, by ādi, the two overturnings "duvinicchitaṃ, puna vinicchitabbaṃ" (badly decided, to be decided again) should be included. Avūpasantantiādayo: Here, by ādi, the two overturnings "duvūpasantaṃ, puna vūpasametabbaṃ" (badly appeased, to be appeased again) should be included. Apicā: Generally, but.

Tattha jātakanti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yasmiṃvihāre’’ti. Yasmiṃvihāre uppannaṃ hotīti sambandho. Aññamaññassa attesu, attānaṃ vā paṭipakkhaṃ atthayanti icchantītiattapaccatthikā. Pāḷimuttakavinicchayenevāti pāḷiyaṃ āgatehi samathehi muttakena dhammadesanāmattavinicchayeneva.Idanti adhikaraṇaṃ.Yenāpi vinicchayenāti pāḷimuttakena yenāpi vinicchayena.

Tattha jātakaṃ: Here, showing the scope of ta, he says "yasmiṃvihāre" (in which monastery). It arises in which monastery, is the connection. Aññamaññassa attesu, attānaṃ vā paṭipakkhaṃ atthayanti icchantīti attapaccatthikā (those who wish for the benefit of each other or for their own benefit against the opposition). Pāḷimuttakavinicchayeneva: Only by a decision that is free from the settlements mentioned in the Pali, merely by preaching the Dhamma. Idaṃ: This legal issue. Yenāpi vinicchayenā: By whatever decision that is free from the Pali.

Aññoti nevāsikehi añño vinayadharo pucchatīti sambandho.Tehi cāti nevāsikehi ca.

Añño: Another vinayadhara (one who knows Vinaya) different from the residents asks, is the connection. Tehi cā: And by the residents.

Etassāti vinayadharassa.Ayanti vinayadharo.Tatthāti taṃ gāmaṃ.Aññamaññaṃ vā saññāpentīti attapaccatthikā aññamaññaṃ vā saññāpenti.Te bhikkhūti te attapaccatthikā bhikkhū.Nijjhāpentīti saññāpenti.Ukkoṭeti yoti yo ukkoṭeti.Eteti attapaccatthike bhikkhū, disvāti sambandho.Tatthāti gāmaṃ.Tatthevāti antarāmagge eva.

Etassā: Of this vinayadhara. Ayaṃ: This vinayadhara. Tatthā: To that village. Aññamaññaṃ vā saññāpentī: Or the attapaccatthikā make an agreement with each other. Te bhikkhū: Those attapaccatthikā monks. Nijjhāpentī: Make an agreement. Ukkoṭeti yo: Whoever overturns. Ete: These attapaccatthikā monks, seeing, is the connection. Tatthā: To that village. Tatthevā: Right in the middle of the road.

Tatthevāti gāmameva.Tatthevāti tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne.Tattha gatanti taṃ gāmaṃ gataṃ.

Tatthevā: Right in the village. Tatthevā: Right in that place. Tattha gataṃ: Gone to that village.

‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā pācittiyameva atidisati.

By "Eseva nayo," he extends this to Pācittiya.

Etanti āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ.Vadantopītipisaddo na kevalaṃ tiṇavatthārakaṃ ukkoṭentoyeva ukkoṭeti nāma, atha kho vadantopīti dasseti.

Etaṃ: This arising of offenses. Vadantopī: The word pi shows that not only does one who overturns a tiṇavatthāraka commit an ukkoṭana, but even one who speaks does.

Chandāgatiṃ gacchantotiādīsu agatigamanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘vinayadharo hutvā’’tiādi. Atthāya ukkoṭentoti sambandho.Tassāti anatthaṃ carantassa. Mando pana ukkoṭeti nāmāti sambandho. Eko balavanissito ca hotīti sambandho.Gahanamicchādiṭṭhinti gahanasadisaṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ pavanasadisaṃ micchādiṭṭhinti attho.Balavante cāti etthacasaddo sabbakammesu yojetabbo.Nissitattāti ekassa nissitattā.Balavanissito cāti etthāpi ca saddo sabbakattūsu yojetabbo.Tassāti visamādinissitassa.

Chandāgatiṃ gacchanto (going to bias by desire), etc.: Showing the manner of going to bias, he says "vinayadharo hutvā" etc. He overturns for the sake of gain, is the connection. Tassā: For him who practices for disadvantage. Does a fool overturn, is the connection. And one is dependent on a powerful person, is the connection. Gahanamicchādiṭṭhiṃ: Wrong view similar to a thicket, wrong view similar to a forest, is the meaning. Balavante cā: Here, the ca should be connected to all actions. Nissitattā: Because of dependence on one. Balavanissito cā: Here too, the ca should be connected to all agents. Tassā: Of one dependent on unfairness.

Soti sāmaṇero.Maṅkubhūtātthāti maṅkū hutvā bhūtā, maṅkuṃ vā pattā attha bhavathāti attho.Teti parājayabhikkhū.Tassāti sāmaṇerassa.Soti sāmaṇero.Teti parājayabhikkhū.Tanti sāmaṇeraṃ.Soti daharo.Tatoti sannipātakāraṇā.Hiyyoti anantarātītāhe.Itīti evaṃ vadeti.Soti daharo. Idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattanti yojanā.Gacchāti gacchāhi.Itīti evaṃ vattabboti yojanā.

So: That novice. Maṅkubhūtātthā: Those whose purpose is to become inferior or have become inferior, is the meaning. Te: Those defeated monks. Tassā: Of that novice. So: That novice. Te: Those defeated monks. Taṃ: That novice. So: The young one. Tato: Because of the assembly. Hiyyo: Yesterday. Itī: Thus he says. So: The young one. This training rule is laid down, is the connection. Gacchā: Go. Itī: Thus, it should be said, is the connection.

Kissāti kena kāraṇena. Evaṃ iminākārena vinicchitabbaṃ nanūti yojanā.Soti vinicchayakārako bhikkhu. Chandadāyako suviññeyyoyeva.

Kissā: For what reason. Thus, should it be decided in this way, is the connection. So: That monk who makes the decision. The one who gives consent is easily understood.

Adhikaraṇanidānādivaṇṇanā

342.Kiṃnidānantiādīsu chasu padesu samāsabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kiṃnidānamassā’’tiādi.Assāti vivādādhikaraṇassa. ‘‘Kiṃnidāna’’nti padānaṃ satipi samāsabhāve byañjanantapakatikattā ‘‘ki’’nti niggahitantabhāvena uccāraṇaṃ kātabbaṃ.Sabbānetānīti sabbāni nidānantiādīni etāni padāni.Vevacanānīti ekasmiṃyeva ‘‘kāraṇa’’nti atthe vividhāni vacanānivivacanāni,tāniyevavevacanāni. Atha vā vividhaṃ vacanametassatthassāti vivacanaṃ, kāraṇasaṅkhāto attho, abhidheyyaabhidhānabhāvena sambandhattā vivacanassa etānivevacanāni,padāni.

342.Kiṃnidānaṃ etc.: In the six expressions, showing the state of compound, he says "kiṃnidānamassā" etc. Assā: Of that dispute. Even with the state of compound of the word "kiṃnidāna," because of the nature of the final consonant, it should be pronounced with a niggahita at the end as "ki." Sabbānetānī: All these words nidāna (cause), etc. Vevacanānī: In the same meaning of "kāraṇa" (reason), the various expressions are vivacanāni, those same are vevacanāni. Or, that which expresses various meanings of the term, the meaning is known as kāraṇa, because of the relationship as what is expressed and what expresses, these vevacanāni are the words.

Vivādanti aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthusaṅkhātaṃ vivādaṃ.Etanti ‘‘vivādanidāna’’nti etaṃ vacanaṃ.Assāti anuvādādhikaraṇassa.Idampīti ‘‘anuvādanidāna’’nti vacanampi.Assāti āpattādhikaraṇassa.Etanti ‘‘āpattinidāna’’nti vacanaṃ. Kiccameva byañjanavaḍḍhanavasenakiccayanti vuttaṃ.Assāti kiccādhikaraṇassa. Samanubhāsanādīnaṃ uppajjanakakiccānanti sambandho.Etanti ‘‘kiccayanidāna’’nti vacanaṃ.Ekapadayojanāti ekena‘‘nidāna’’nti padena yojanā.Sabbapadānīti sabbāni samudayādīni padāni.

Vivādaṃ: Dispute counted as the eighteen grounds for quarrel. Etaṃ: This statement "vivādanidāna" (cause of dispute). Assā: Of that accusation. Idampī: This statement "anuvādanidāna" (cause of accusation) too. Assā: Of that offense. Etaṃ: This statement "āpattinidāna" (cause of offense). Kicca (duty) itself is said as kiccaya by way of increasing the expression. Assā: Of that procedural act. It is connected to the arising duties such as formal accusation. Etaṃ: This statement "kiccayanidāna" (cause of procedural act). Ekapadayojanā: Connection by one word "nidāna" (cause). Sabbapadānī: All the words samudaya (arising), etc.

Navannanti jātivasena channaṃ hetūnaṃ navasu antogadhattā tikavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Byañjanamattanti hetupaccayavasena byañjanameva.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etthāti tatiyapucchāvissajjane.

Navannaṃ: Because the six causes in terms of origin are included in the nine, it is said here as sets of three. Byañjanamattaṃ: Only the expression in terms of cause and condition. Hī: Indeed, because, or. Etthā: In the answer to the third question.

343.Dvādasa mūlānīti ettha dvādasannaṃ mūlānaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kodhaupanāhayugaḷakādīnī’’tiādi. Ettha (vibha. 833, 944) ādisaddena makkhapaḷāsayugaḷa issāmacchariyayugaḷa māyāsāṭheyyayugaḷa pāpicchamicchādiṭṭhiyugaḷa sandiṭṭhiparāmāsiādhānaggāhiduppaṭinissaggiyugaḷavasena pañca yugaḷāni saṅgaṇhāti.Ajjhattasantānappavattānīti niyakajjhattasantāne pavattāni.

343.Dvādasa mūlānī: Here, showing the nature of the twelve roots, he says "kodhaupanāhayugaḷakādīnī" etc. Here, by ādi (etc.) (vibha. 833, 944), it includes the five pairs of makkha-paḷāsa, issā-macchariya, māyā-sāṭheyya, pāpiccha-micchādiṭṭhi, and sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsi-ādhānaggāhi-duppaṭinissaggi. Ajjhattasantānappavattānī: Arising in one's own mind-stream.

Tanti anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ, samuṭṭhātīti sambandho. Ettha ca ‘‘etesū’’ti iminā adhikaraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Etehī’’ti iminā karaṇabhāvaṃ dasseti.Tenāti kāraṇena.Assāti vivādādhikaraṇassa.Etānīti aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthūni.Sabbatthāti sabbesaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ sabbesu samuṭṭhānesu.

Taṃ: That accusation, it arises, is the connection. And here, by "etesu," it shows the state of being an legal issue. By "etehi," it shows the instrumental state. Tenā: By that reason. Assā: Of that dispute. Etānī: These eighteen grounds for quarrel. Sabbatthā: In all arisings of all legal issues.

344.Ekena adhikaraṇena kiccādhikaraṇenāti idaṃ vuttanti sambandho.Etānīti adhikaraṇāni.Ekaṃsatoti ekaṃsena, ekakoṭṭhāsenāti attho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.

344.By one legal issue, by the legal issue of procedural act, this is said, is the connection. Etānī: These legal issues. Ekaṃsato: Partially, by one portion, is the meaning. Hī: Indeed, because, or.

ti yasmā.ti anavasesā āpatti.Tatoti anavasesāpattito. Ettha ca ‘‘na sakkā desetu’’nti iminā desanāgāminiyā abhāvaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Na sakkā…pe… patiṭṭhātu’’nti iminā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā abhāvaṃ dīpeti.

Hī: Because. Sā: That entire offense. Tato: From that entire offense. And here, by "na sakkā desetu," it indicates the absence of what leads to declaration. By "Na sakkā…pe… patiṭṭhātu," it indicates the absence of what leads to resolution.

349.Tatoti nayato.Yattha sativinayotiādikā cha yamakapucchāti sambandho.Tāsanti pucchānaṃ.Pakāsitoti pākaṭo.

349.Tato: From that method. Yattha sativinayo etc.: The six pair of questions, is the connection. Tāsaṃ: Of those questions. Pakāsito: Evident.

351.Dvinnampi samathānanti sammukhāvinayasativinayavasena dvinnampi samathānaṃ.Yasmāti yena kāraṇena na sakkāti sambandho. Pattavaṭṭīnaṃ nānākaraṇanti sambandho.Tesanti sammukhāvinayasativinayānaṃ nānākaraṇanti sambandho. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – yasmā kadalikkhandhe pattavaṭṭīnaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ vinibbhujjitvā dassetuṃ na sakkā viya tesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ vinibbhujjitvā dassetuṃ na sakkāti.Tenāti kāraṇena.Sabbatthāti sabbesu vissajjanesu.

351.Dvinnampi samathānaṃ: Of the two settlements, the procedure in the presence and the procedure by mindfulness. Yasmā: For what reason is it not possible, is the connection. The separation of the covering of the leaves, is the connection. Tesaṃ: The separation of the procedure in the presence and the procedure by mindfulness, is the connection. And this is the connection here – just as the separation of the covering of the leaves cannot be shown by tearing off the plantain trunk, so too, their separation cannot be shown by tearing off. Tenā: By that reason. Sabbatthā: In all explanations.

Sattasamathanidānavaṇṇanā
Sattasamathanidānavaṇṇanā (Explanation of the Causes of the Seven Settlements)

352.Assāti sammukhāvinayassa.Tatthāti ‘‘nidānanidāno’’ti pāṭhe.Idanti sammukhācatukkaṃ.Laddhupavādoti laddho paresaṃ upavādo yenāti laddhupavādo, khīṇāsavo.Yassa cāti yassa ca santiketi sambandho.Ubhinnanti desakapaṭiggāhakānaṃ dvinnaṃ.

352. Assāti: "this is" concerning the sammukhāvinaya. Tatthati: "there," according to the reading "nidānanidāno." Idanti: "this," refers to the four aspects of sammukhā (presence). Laddhupavādoti: "one who has received reproach," meaning one who has received reproach from others; an arahant. Yassa cāti: "and whose," the connection is "yassa ca santike" (and in whose presence). Ubhinnanti: "of both," of the two, the speaker and the recipient.

353.Nanu pucchāyaṃ ‘‘sattannaṃ samathāna’’nti vuttaṃ, kasmā pana vissajjanāyaṃ sammukhāvinayassa samuṭṭhānaṃ na vuttanti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Tattha kiñcāpi vuttanti yojanā. Etthakiñcāpisaddo sambhāvanattho,panasaddo garahattho. Tathā vuttampīti yojanā.Kammasaṅgahābhāvenāti kamme saṅgahassa abhāvena.Tatthāti tasmiṃ ‘‘kammassa kiriyā’’tiādipāṭhe. Kammaṃ karīyati imāyāti kiriyā, ñatti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kammassa kiriyāti ñatti veditabbā’’ti. Kariyate ṭhapiyatekaraṇaṃ. Sayaṃ upagamiyateupagamanaṃ. Ajjhesanena paraṃ upagamāpiyateajjhupagamanaṃ. Adhivāsiyateadhivāsanā. Appaṭikkosiyateapaṭikkosanā. Iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘karaṇanti tassāyevā’’tiādi.Etanti kammaṃ.Meti mayhaṃ. Khamudhātupayoge sampadānatthe sampadānavacanaṃ. Atha vā meti mayā. Katvatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, sāmivacanaṃ vā.Khamatīti katturūpasadisaṃ kammarūpaṃ. Rūpañhi katturūpasadisaṃ kammarūpaṃ ‘‘khamati saṅghassā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 127) viya. Kammarūpasadisaṃ katturūpaṃ ‘‘upāsako sīlaṃ samādiyatī’’tiādīsu (paṭṭhā. 1.1.423) viya. Ettha kammatthe pavatto yapaccayo lopoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

353. But in the question, it was said "of the seven samathas," so why was the arising (samuṭṭhāna) of sammukhāvinaya not mentioned in the answer? He says, "kiñcāpītiādi." The meaning here is "kiñcāpi vuttanti" (although it was said). Here, the word kiñcāpi implies possibility, and the word pana implies censure. "Tathā vuttampīti yojanā" (Thus, it should be connected as "even though it was said"). Kammasaṅgahābhāvenāti: "due to the absence of inclusion in the kamma." Tatthāti: "there," in that reading beginning with "kammassa kiriyā." Kammaṃ karīyati imāyāti kiriyā, ñatti: "An action is done by this, therefore it is a kiriya, a motion." Therefore, it was said, "kammassa kiriyāti ñatti veditabbā" (the action of the kamma should be understood as the motion). Kariyate ṭhapiyatekaraṇaṃ: "It is done, it is established, therefore it is karaṇa (doing)." Sayaṃ upagamiyate**upagamanaṃ: "It is approached by oneself, therefore it is upagamana (approaching)." Ajjhesanena paraṃ upagamāpiyateajjhupagamanaṃ: "Through invitation, another is caused to approach, therefore it is ajjhupagamana (causing to approach)." Adhivāsiyate**adhivāsanā: "It is accepted, therefore it is adhivāsanā (acceptance)." Appaṭikkosiyateapaṭikkosanā: "It is not rejected, therefore it is apaṭikkosanā (non-rejection)." Thus, showing this meaning, he says, "karaṇanti tassāyevā"tiādi (the doing is just that). Etanti: "this," the kamma. Meti: "to me," in the usage of the khamudhātu (root kham), the dative case is used in the sense of the recipient. Or rather, me means "by me." The instrumental case is used in the sense of the agent, or it is a possessive. Khamatīti: "it is pleasing," the passive form resembles the active form. For indeed, the passive form resembles the active form in instances such as "khamati saṅghassā"tiādīsu (it is pleasing to the Sangha) (mahāva. 127). The active form resembles the passive form in instances such as "upāsako sīlaṃ samādiyatī"tiādīsu (a lay follower undertakes the precepts) (paṭṭhā. 1.1.423). Here, the yapaccaya (suffix ya) is used in the passive sense and has been elided, it should be seen.

Sattasamathanānātthādivaṇṇanā
Description of Various Meanings of the Seven Samathas

354.Mātāputtādīnaṃ ayaṃ vivādoti yojanā. ‘‘Viruddhavādattā’’ti iminā vadanaṃ vādo, viruddho vādovivādoti nibbacanaṃ dasseti.Adhikaraṇīyatāyāti vūpasamitatāya. Iminā adhikariyati samathehi vūpasamiyatītiadhikaraṇanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Sabbatthāti sabbesu adhikaraṇabhedesu.

354. The meaning is, this dispute belongs to a mother and son, etc. With "Viruddhavādattā," he shows the derivation that vadanaṃ vādo, viruddho vādovivādo: "speaking is vāda, conflicting speech is vivāda (dispute)." Adhikaraṇīyatāyāti: "for the sake of being adjudicated," meaning for the sake of being pacified. With this, he shows the meaning of the word adhikaraṇa as adhikariyati samathehi vūpasamiyatīti**adhikaraṇa: "it is adjudicated, it is pacified by the samathas, therefore it is an adhikaraṇa (issue)." Sabbatthāti: "in all," in all kinds of issues.

Iti adhikaraṇabhedavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the types of issues.

Dutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

Second Gāthā Saṅgaṇika

Codanādipucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā
Description of Questioning and Answering about Accusation, etc.

359.Dutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇiyaṃ codanā nāma kiṃ dassetvā codanāti āha ‘‘vatthuñca āpattiñca dassetvā codanā’’ti. Dosaṃ sarāpetītidosasāraṇā. Saṅghasannipātoti saṅghassa sannipatanaṃ. Imināsaṅghoti ettha uttarapadalopaṃ dasseti.Matikammanti ettha matisaddo icchatthoti āha ‘‘vuccati mantaggahaṇa’’nti.Tanti matikammaṃ.

359. In the second gāthā saṅgaṇika, what is accusation (codanā)? Showing that, he says, "vatthuñca āpattiñca dassetvā codanā" (accusation is showing the basis and the offense). Dosaṃ sarāpetītidosasāraṇā: "It reminds of the fault, therefore it is dosasāraṇā (reminding of the fault)." Saṅghasannipātoti: "the assembly of the Sangha." With this, he shows the elision of the final word (uttarapadalopa) in saṅgho. Matikammanti: "deliberate act," here, he says that the word mati has the meaning of intention, "vuccati mantaggahaṇa"nti (it is said to mean considering and grasping). Ta**nti: "that," the deliberate act.

Tassa puggalassāti tassa cuditakassa puggalassa, iminā ‘‘niggahatthāyā’’ti padassa kammaṃ dasseti.Tatthāti tasmiṃ adhikaraṇavinicchayaṭṭhāne.Pariggahaṇatthāyāti pari vīmaṃsitvā gahaṇatthāya.Dhammā-dhammanti bhūtābhūtaṃ. ‘‘Vinicchayasanniṭṭhāpanattha’’nti iminā pāḷiyaṃ pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti.

Tassa puggalassāti: "of that person," of that accused person; with this, he shows the object of the word "niggahatthāyā" (for the purpose of censure). Tatthāti: "there," in that place of adjudicating the issue. Pariggahaṇatthāyāti: "for the purpose of thorough examination and acceptance." Dhammā-dhammanti: "Dhamma-non-Dhamma," meaning true and untrue. With "Vinicchayasanniṭṭhāpanattha," he shows the remaining part of the reading in the Pali text.

Mā kho paṭighanti etthapaṭighasaddo kopapariyāyoti āha ‘‘kopaṃ mā janayī’’ti. ‘‘Cuditake vā codake vā’’ti iminā ‘‘saṅghe’’ti ādhāraṃ paṭikkhipati.Sace anuvijjako tuvanti etthaanuvijjakasaddo vinayadharapariyāyoti āha ‘‘vinayadharo’’ti. Vinayadharo hi yasmā codakacuditakānaṃ vacanaṃ anuminitvā vatthuāpattādivasena vidati, tasmāanuvijjakoti vuccati.

Mā kho paṭighanti: "do not aversion," here, he says that the word paṭigha is a synonym for anger, "kopaṃ mā janayī"ti (do not generate anger). With "Cuditake vā codake vā," he rejects that "saṅghe" (in the Sangha) is the location (ādhāra). Sace anuvijjako tuvanti: "if you are an investigator," here, he says that the word anuvijjaka is a synonym for a vinayadhara, "vinayadharo"ti (a vinayadhara). For indeed, because a vinayadhara, after inferring the words of the accuser and the accused, knows according to the basis, offense, etc., therefore, he is called anuvijjako.

viggāhikaṃ. ‘‘Na tva’’ntiādinā ṇikapaccayassa sarūpaṃ dasseti.Yāyāti kathāya. Suttādīnaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha‘‘suttaṃ nāmā’’tiādi.

viggāhikaṃ: "disputatious." With "Na tva"ntiādi, he shows the form of the suffix ṇika. Yāyāti: "by which," by the talk. Showing the form of the suttas, etc., he says ‘‘suttaṃ nāmā’’tiādi: "a sutta is..."

Anuyuñjanavattanti anuyuñjanassa, anuyuñjane vā vattaṃ. Kusalena buddhimatāti etthakusalasaddo chekapariyāyo,buddhimantusaddo paṇḍitapariyāyoti āha ‘‘chekena paṇḍitenā’’ti. ‘‘Ñāṇapāramippattenā’’ti iminābuddhimatāti ettha na kevalaṃ ñāṇasāmaññaṃ, atha kho sabbaññutaññāṇanti dasseti.Ayanti eso yathāvutto attho.Ayaṃ panāti eso vakkhamāno pana.Etthāti imāsu gāthāsu. Sace tvaṃ anuvijjako hosīti yojanā. Yaṃ pana anuyogavattaṃ kataṃ supaññattaṃ sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ anulomanti yojanā.Tanti anuyogavattaṃ.Itīti ayaṃ sādhippāyasaṅkhepavaṇṇanā.Attanoti anuvijjakassa.Samparāyeti paraloke.Yoti anuvijjako.Tanti anuyogavattaṃ.Gatinti sugatiṃ.Hitanti codakacuditakānaṃ hitaṃ.Gavesantoti ñāṇena esanto. Iminā hitaṃ esantotihitesīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Mettañcāti appanāpattaṃ mettañca.Mettāpubbabhāgañcāti appanāmettāya pubbabhāge pavattaṃ parikammaupacāramettañca. Tava bhāre saṅghena kate evāti yojanā.

Anuyuñjanavattanti: "the duty of investigating," the duty of the investigator, or in the investigation. Kusalena buddhimatāti:"by one who is skilled and intelligent," here, he says that the word kusala is a synonym for clever, and the word buddhimantu is a synonym for wise, "chekena paṇḍitenā"ti (by one who is clever and wise). With "Ñāṇapāramippattenā," he shows that buddhimatā here does not merely mean ordinary knowledge, but rather omniscience. Ayanti: "this," this aforementioned meaning. Ayaṃ panāti: "this, however," this about to be spoken, however. Etthāti: "in these," in these verses. "Sace tvaṃ anuvijjako hosīti yojanā" (The connection is "if you are an investigator"). Yaṃ pana anuyogavattaṃ kataṃ supaññattaṃ sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ anulomanti yojanā (The connection is that which is the duty of investigation, done, well-established, conforming to all the training rules). Tanti: "that," the duty of investigation. Itīti: "thus," this is a description of the meaning in brief with a purpose. Attanoti: "of oneself," of the investigator. Samparāyeti: "in the next world." Yoti: "who," the investigator. Tanti: "that," the duty of investigation. Gatinti: "destination," a good destination. Hitanti: "welfare," the welfare of the accuser and the accused. Gavesantoti: "seeking," seeking with knowledge. With this, he shows the meaning of the word hitesī as "hitaṃ esantoti hitesī" (one who seeks welfare is a hitesī). Mettañcāti: "and mettā," the mettā that has attained absorption (appanā). Mettāpubbabhāgañcāti: "and the preliminary part of mettā," the preliminary and access mettā that occurs before appanā mettā. "Tava bhāre saṅghena kate evāti yojanā" (The connection is that it is indeed done by the Sangha, in your responsibility).

Yoti anuvijjako.Etesanti codakacuditakānaṃ. ‘‘Bhāsita’’nti imināvohārasaddo bhāsitapariyāyoti dasseti.Tanti sahasā vohāraṃ.

Yoti: "who," the investigator. Etesanti: "of these," of the accuser and the accused. With "Bhāsita," he shows that the word vohāra is a synonym for speech. Tanti: "that," the sudden speech.

Anusandhitanti ettha vinicchayānusandhiṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘kathānusandhi vuccatī’’ti. Kathāya anurūpaṃ sandahanaṃkathānusandhi. Paṭiññānusandhitenāti ettha paṭiññāsaddaanusandhisaddānaṃ tulyādhikaraṇato aññaṃ bhinnādhikaraṇaṃ dassento āha‘‘athavā’’tiādi. Lajjiṃ puggalanti sambandho.Tatthāti gāthāyaṃ.Vattānusandhināti ācārasaṅkhātena vattena anusandhinā assa alajjīssa vattena saddhiṃ yā paṭiññā sandhiyatīti yojanā.

Anusandhitanti: "investigating," here, rejecting the investigation of the adjudication, he says, "kathānusandhi vuccatī"ti (the investigation of the talk is said). Kathāya anurūpaṃ sandahanaṃkathānusandhi: "Connecting what is appropriate to the talk is kathānusandhi (investigation of the talk)." Paṭiññānusandhitenāti: "by the investigation of the promise," here, showing a different subject (bhinnādhikaraṇa) rather than the same subject (tulyādhikaraṇa) of the words paṭiññā and anusandhi, he says ‘‘athavā’’tiādi: "or rather," "Lajjiṃ puggalanti sambandho" (The connection is to the ashamed person). Tatthāti: "there," in the verse. Vattānusandhināti: "by the investigation of the practice," the connection is "yā paṭiññā sandhiyati saddhiṃ alajjīssa vattena anusandhinā ācārasaṅkhātena" (the promise that is connected with the shameless one's practice, which is known as conduct, by the investigation).

Jānanto āpajjatīti jānanto hutvā āpajjati. Imināsañciccāti padassa sañcetetvāti atthaṃ dasseti. Vītikkamacetanāya saddhiṃ cetetvāti attho. ‘‘Na deseti na vuṭṭhātī’’ti imināparigūhatīti ettha parigūhanaṃ nāma atthato na desanaṃ na vuṭṭhānanti dasseti.

Jānanto āpajjatīti: "knowing, he commits an offense." With this, he shows the meaning of the word sañcicca as "sañcetetvāti" (having intended). The meaning is "having intended together with the intention of transgression." With "Na deseti na vuṭṭhātī," here he shows that parigūhatī here, means that parigūhanaṃ nāma atthato na desanaṃ na vuṭṭhānaṃ (in reality, concealing is neither confession nor emergence).

Yanti ‘‘sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ.Tumhehīti parihārakārakehi.Saccanti tathaṃ avitathaṃ.Ahampīti codakopi.Pisaddena parihārakaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Nanti ‘‘sañciccā’’tiādivacanaṃ.Tanti tuvaṃ, tvaṃ vā.

Yanti: "that," the statement "sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjatī"ti (knowing, he commits an offense). Tumhehīti: "by you," by those who give a suspension. Saccanti: "true," factual, not false. Ahampīti: "even I," even the accuser. The word Pi combines the one who gives the suspension. Nanti: "not," the statement beginning with "sañciccā." Tanti: "you," or it could be "you."

Pubbāparanti ettha pubbe kathetabbaṃpubbaṃ,aparamhi kathetabbaṃaparaṃ,pubbañca aparañca pubbāparanti dassento āha ‘‘pure’’tiādi. ‘‘Tasmiṃ pubbāpare’’ti iminā pāḷiyaṃpubbaparassāti ettha bhummatthe sāmivacananti dasseti.

Pubbāparanti: "earlier and later," here, showing that pubbe kathetabbaṃpubbaṃ,aparamhi kathetabbaṃaparaṃ,pubbañca aparañca pubbāparanti (what should be said earlier is pubba, what should be said later is apara, and earlier and later is pubbāpara), he says "pure"tiādi (before, etc.). With "Tasmiṃ pubbāpare," he shows that in the Pali text, pubbaparassāti here, it is a possessive case with the sense of abundance (bhummattha).

Dvīhīti pārājikasaṅghādisesavasena dvīhi.Pañcahīti thullaccayādivasena pañcahi.Micchādiṭṭhiyāti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 1221) dasavatthukāya micchādiṭṭhiyā.Antaggāhikadiṭṭhiyāti ‘‘sassato loko’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.31; ma. ni. 1.269) dasavatthukāya antaggāhikadiṭṭhiyā.Sabbatthāti sabbesu dutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikesu.

Dvīhīti: "by two," by two, in terms of pārājika and saṅghādisesa. Pañcahīti: "by five," by five, in terms of thullaccaya, etc. Micchādiṭṭhiyāti: "by wrong view," by wrong view of ten bases beginning with "natthi dinna"ntiādi (dha. sa. 1221) (there is no giving, etc.). Antaggāhikadiṭṭhiyāti: "by clinging to extremes," by clinging to extremes of ten bases beginning with "sassato loko"tiādi (dī. ni. 1.31; ma. ni. 1.269) (the world is eternal, etc.). Sabbatthāti: "in all," in all the second gāthā saṅgaṇikas.

Iti dutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the second gāthā saṅgaṇika.

Codanākaṇḍaṃ

Codanākaṇḍa (Section on Accusation)

Anuvijjakakiccavaṇṇanā
Description of the Investigator's Duties

360-1.Idāni āraddhanti sambandho. Eko bhikkhu ekena mātugāmenāti yojanā.Soti passanto bhikkhu.Tanti nikkhamantaṃ pavisantaṃ vā bhikkhuṃ.Itaroti cuditako.Tassāti codakassa.Na upetīti na upagacchati.Na paṭijānātīti na paṭissavaṃ karoti.Etthāti mātugāmena nikkhamantapavisantaṭṭhāne.Yanti kammaṃ.Tenāti codakena.Tassāti codakassa vacanenāti sambandho.Itaroti cuditako.Asuddhaparisaṅkitoti asuddhāya aṭṭhāne uppannāya parisaṅkāya parisaṅkito. Tadatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘amūlakaparisaṅkito’’ti iminā.Tassa puggalassāti cuditakassa paṭiññāyāti sambandho.Sabbatthāti sabbesu anuvijjakakiccesu.

360-1. Now, the connection is "āraddhanti" (it has begun). "Eko bhikkhu ekena mātugāmenāti yojanā" (The connection is "one monk with one woman"). Soti: "he," the monk who is watching. Tanti: "him," the monk going out or entering. Itaroti: "the other," the accused. Tassāti: "of him," of the accuser. Na upetīti: "does not approach," does not come near. Na paṭijānātīti: "does not acknowledge," does not make a promise. Etthāti: "here," in the place of the woman going out and entering. Yanti: "that," the action. Tenāti: "by him," by the accuser. Tassāti: "of him," the connection is with the accuser's words. Itaroti: "the other," the accused. Asuddhaparisaṅkitoti: "suspected with impure suspicion," suspected with impure suspicion that has arisen in an improper place. He shows the meaning of that with "amūlakaparisaṅkito"ti iminā (by this, suspected with baseless suspicion). Tassa puggalassāti: "of that person," the connection is with the accused's acknowledgement. Sabbatthāti: "in all," in all the investigator's duties.

Iti anuvijjakakiccavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the investigator's duties.

Codakapucchāvissajjanā
Questioning and Answering about Accusation

362-3.Sacce ca akuppe cāti padhānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃ dassento āha ‘‘patiṭṭhātabba’’nti. ‘‘Ya’’ntiādinā sacce patiṭṭhātabbabhāvaṃ dasseti.Yanti kammaṃ. ‘‘Na cā’’tiādinā akuppe patiṭṭhātabbabhāvaṃ dasseti.Otiṇṇañcāti vinicchayaṃ otiṇṇañca. ‘‘Vacana’’nti iminā otiṇṇānotiṇṇasarūpaṃ dasseti.Tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ. ‘‘Otiṇṇānotiṇṇaṃ jānitabba’’nti vacaneti hi attho.Codakassa pamāṇanti ‘‘dhammo’’ti vā ‘‘adhammo’’ti vā ‘‘bālo’’ti vā ‘‘paṇḍito’’ti vā codakassa pamāṇaṃ.Cuditakassa pamāṇanti dhammacuditako nu kho, noti cuditakassa pamāṇaṃ.Anuvijjakassa pamāṇanti sakkā nu kho vinicchituṃ, noti anuvijjakassa pamāṇaṃ. Anuvijjako vattabboti sambandho.Yena dhammenātiādīsu dhammādīnaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthū’’tiādi. Etena dhammena ca etena vinayena ca etena satthusāsanena cāti yojanā. Tasmā anuvijjakena vūpasametabbanti sambandho.Etthāti anuvijjakassa paṭipajjitabbaṭṭhāne.

362-3. Sacce ca akuppe cāti: "in truth and in non-wavering," showing the primary point of connection, he says "patiṭṭhātabba"nti (should be established). With "Ya"ntiādi, he shows the state of being established in truth. Yanti: "that," the action. With "Na cā"tiādi, he shows the state of being established in non-wavering. Otiṇṇañcāti: "and entering into the adjudication." With "Vacana," he shows the nature of entering into and not entering into. Tatrāti: "there," in relation to the previous statement. "Otiṇṇānotiṇṇaṃ jānitabba"nti vacaneti hi attho (Indeed, the meaning is that one should know what has entered into and not entered into). Codakassa pamāṇanti: "the standard of the accuser," the standard of the accuser, whether "dhammo"ti vā "adhammo"ti vā "bālo"ti vā "paṇḍito"ti vā (whether he speaks the Dhamma or not-Dhamma, whether he is foolish or wise). Cuditakassa pamāṇanti: "the standard of the accused," the standard of the accused, whether he is accused of Dhamma or not. Anuvijjakassa pamāṇanti: "the standard of the investigator," the standard of the investigator, whether it is possible to adjudicate or not. "Anuvijjako sottopabbo sambandho" (The connection is that the investigator should be spoken to). Yena dhammenātiādīsu: "by which Dhamma," showing the nature of the Dhamma, etc., he says "dhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthū"tiādi (Dhamma is the true basis). "Etena dhammena ca etena vinayena ca etena satthusāsanena cāti yojanā" (The connection is with this Dhamma, this Discipline, and this Teaching of the Teacher). "Tasmā anuvijjakena vūpasametabbanti sambandho" (Therefore, the connection is that it should be pacified by the investigator). Etthāti: "here," in the place where the investigator should act.

Avaññanti avajānanaṃ.Imeti therā. ‘‘Khatattā’’ti iminā attanāva attā khaññatītikhatoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Upahaniyantītiupahatāni,upahatāni indriyāni anenātiupahatindriyo. ‘‘Paññāya abhāvato’’ti iminādummedhoti ettha dusaddo abhāvattho, medhāsaddo paññāpariyāyoti dasseti. Natthi medhā etassātidummedhoti nibbacanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Khato…pe… dummedho so anuvijjako upagacchatīti yojanā.Tasmāti yasmā upagacchati, tasmā vuttanti sambandho.Tassāti pāṭhassa, gāthāya vā. Vitthāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘cuditakacodakesu hī’’tiādi.Ubhopeteti ubhopi ete āmisapuggalanissaye.Dhammoti sāsanadhammo.Itīti ayamattho.

Avaññanti: "disrespect." Imeti: "these," the elders. With "Khatattā," he shows the meaning of the word khato as "attanāva attā khaññatīti khato" (one's self is ruined by oneself, therefore ruined). Upahaniyantītiupahatāni,upahatāni indriyāni anenātiupahatindriyo: "They are struck down, therefore they are struck down; by this, the senses are struck down, therefore he is one with struck-down senses." With "Paññāya abhāvato," he shows that in dummedho here, the word du means absence, and the word medhā is a synonym for wisdom. Natthi medhā etassātidummedhoti nibbacanaṃ kātabbaṃ (One who has no wisdom, the derivation is therefore dummedho). "Khato…pe… dummedho so anuvijjako upagacchatīti yojanā" (The connection is that a ruined... a foolish investigator approaches). Tasmāti: "therefore," because he approaches, therefore it was said, the connection is thus. Tassāti: "of that," of that reading, or of the verse. Showing the expansion, he says "cuditakacodakesu hī"tiādi (indeed, in the accuser and the accused). Ubhopeteti: "both of these," both of these, dependent on material things and persons. Dhammoti: "Dhamma," the Teaching. Itīti: "thus," this is the meaning.

Upakaṇṇakaṃ jappatīti ettha kaṇṇassa samīpaṃ upakaṇṇaṃ, tadeva upakaṇṇakanti dassento āha ‘‘evaṃ kathehī’’tiādi. ‘‘Kaṇṇamūle’’ti iminā upakaṇṇakanti ettha upasaddassa samīpatthaṃ dasseti.Mantetīti katheti. Iminā jappadhātuyā kathanatthaṃ dasseti.Jimhaṃ pekkhatīti ettha jimhasaddo kuṭilavācako, kuṭilaṃ nāma atthato idha dosoti āha ‘‘dosamevā’’ti.

Upakaṇṇakaṃ jappatīti: "whispers near the ear," here, showing that kaṇṇassa samīpaṃ upakaṇṇaṃ, tadeva upakaṇṇakanti (near the ear is upakaṇṇa, that itself is upakaṇṇaka), he says "evaṃ kathehī"tiādi (say it like this). With "Kaṇṇamūle," he shows that in upakaṇṇaka, the word upa has the meaning of nearness. Mantetīti: "speaks." With this, he shows the meaning of the root japp as speaking. Jimhaṃ pekkhatīti: "looks crookedly," here, the word jimha means deceitful, and he says that deceitfulness here in reality means fault, "dosamevā"ti (it is just fault).

Kathānusandhīti cuditakaanuvijjakānaṃ kathāya anusandhi.Vinicchayānusandhīti anuvijjakena katassa āpattānāpattivinicchayassa anusandhi.Sabbatthāti codanākaṇḍe.

Kathānusandhīti: "investigation of the talk," the investigation of the talk of the accused and the investigator. Vinicchayānusandhīti: "investigation of the adjudication," the investigation of the adjudication of offense and non-offense done by the investigator. Sabbatthāti: "in all," in the codanākaṇḍa (section on accusation).

Iti codanākaṇḍavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Here ends the explanation of the codanākaṇḍa.

Cūḷasaṅgāmaṃ

Cūḷasaṅgāma (Minor Battle)

Anuvijjakassa paṭipattivaṇṇanā
Description of the Investigator's Practice

365.Cūḷasaṅgāme samāgamanaṃsaṅgāmo,samāgamenti sannipatanti etthāti vāsaṅgāmoti vacanatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṅgāmo vuccati…pe… saṅghasannipāto’’ti. Sannipatanaṃsannipāto,sannipatanti ettha deseti vā sannipāto, saṅghassa sannipātosaṅghasannipāto. Saṅgāma yuddheti dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 makārantadhātu) vuttaṃ. Tattha yuddhaṃ nāma atthato adhikaraṇavinicchayoti gahetabbaṃ. Tadatthaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘tatra hī’’tiādi. Tatthatatrāti tasmiṃ saṅgāme, samosarantīti sambandho.Attapaccatthikāti attano paṭipakkhaṃ atthayanti.Uddhammanti dhammato viyogaṃ. Dīpentā hutvāti yojanā. Ke viyāti āha ‘‘vajjiputtakā viyā’’ti. So bhikkhu pavattetīti sambandho.Laddhinti uddhammādivādaṃ.Tatthāti saṅgāme.Avacaratīti ogāhetvā cāreti pavatteti. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ajjhogāhetvā vinicchayaṃ pavattetī’’ti. Ettha ‘‘ajjhogāhetvā’’ti imināavatyūpasaggassa ogāhatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vinicchayaṃ pavattetī’’ti iminā caradhātussa kāritantogadhattā sahakāritakammena pavattanatthaṃ dasseti. Iminā saṅgāme avacaratītisaṅgāmāvacaroti nibbacanaṃ dasseti. Ko viyāti āha ‘‘yasatthero viyā’’ti.Mānaddhajanti ketukamyatāpaccupaṭṭhānamānasaṅkhātaṃ dhajaṃ.Rajoharaṇasamenāti ettha rajaṃ harati apaneti anenātirajoharaṇaṃ,pādapuñjanaṃ, tena samenāti dassento āha ‘‘pādapuñjanasamenā’’ti. Pādaṃ puñjati sodheti anenātipādapuñjanaṃ,tena samopādapuñjanasamo,tena. Samākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Rajoharaṇassa neva rāgo hotīti sambandho.Yathāpatirūpanti patirūpassa anulomaṃ, patirūpānatikkantanti attho. Akathentena nisīditabbanti sambandho.Sāmaṃ vā dhammoti ettha dhammo nāma koti āha ‘‘kappiyākappiyanissitā vā’’tiādi. Rūpārūpaparicchedo ca samathācāro ca vipassānācāro ca ṭhānavattañca nisajjavattañca, ādisaddena caṅkamavattādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Cuddasamahāvattādīnaṃ ‘‘kappiyākappiyanissitā’’ti padena gahitattā vattasaddena ṭhānavattādīni eva gahetabbāni, ādisaddena caṅkamavattādīni gahetabbāni.Paro vā ajjhesitabboti yovā so vā koci ajjhesitabboti āha ‘‘yo’’tiādi. Iminā na yo vā so vā koci ajjhesitabbo, samatthoyeva pana ajjhesitabboti vā dasseti. ‘‘Āvuso’’tiādinā vattabbākāraṃ dasseti.Ariyovā tuṇhībhāvoti ettha na kevalaṃ kathetuṃ asamatthavasena tuṇhībhāvo, kammaṭṭhānamanasikāravasena panāti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānamanasikāravasena tuṇhībhāvo’’ti. Ariyānaṃ esoariyo,tuṇhībhāvo. ‘‘Nāvajānitabbo’’ti iminānātimaññitabboti padassa atikkamma na maññitabboti dasseti.

365. In Cūḷasaṅgāma, saṅgāma means gathering. Showing the meaning of the word saṅgāma as "they gather or assemble here," he said, "Saṅgāmo vuccati…pe… saṅghasannipāto." Sannipatanaṃ means gathering. Sannipāto means they gather here or preach here; saṅghassa sannipāto means a gathering of the Sangha. Saṅgāma means war, as stated in the lists of verbal roots (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 18 makārantadhātu). Here, war should be understood as deciding a case in terms of its meaning. Expanding on that meaning, he said, "tatra hī" etc. Tatra means in that saṅgāma, samosarantīti is the connection. Attapaccatthikā means they desire harm to themselves. Uddhamma means separation from the Dhamma. The construction is "having deepened." Like whom? He said, "vajjiputtakā viyā." That bhikkhu causes to proceed, is the connection. Laddhi means doctrine, such as false Dhamma etc. Tatthā means in the saṅgāma. Avacaratī means having entered, he causes to proceed. Showing that same meaning, he said, "ajjhogāhetvā vinicchayaṃ pavattetī". Here, with "ajjhogāhetvā," he shows the meaning of the prefix ava as entering. With "vinicchayaṃ pavattetī," he shows that because the verbal root cara is in the causative, it means causing to proceed with the cooperating factor. With this, he shows the derivation of saṅgāme avacaratīti saṅgāmāvacaro. Like whom? He said, "yasatthero viyā". Mānaddhajaṃ means a flag consisting of conceit, which is the state of being a standard and the presence of self-importance. Rajoharaṇasamenā means, here, rajaṃ harati apaneti anenāti rajoharaṇaṃ, a foot-wiper; showing that it is similar to that, he said, "pādapuñjanasamenā". Pādaṃ puñjati sodheti anenāti pādapuñjanaṃ, that which is similar is pādapuñjanasamo, by that. Showing the similarity, he said, "yathā" etc. Rajoharaṇassa neva rāgo hoti, is the connection. Yathāpatirūpaṃ means in accordance with what is suitable, meaning not transgressing what is suitable. Akathentena nisīditabbanti is the connection. Sāmaṃ vā dhammo means, here, what is Dhamma? He said, "kappiyākappiyanissitā vā" etc. The distinction between form and formless, the practice of serenity, the practice of insight, proper conduct and sitting conduct, and with the word "ādi," he includes walking conduct etc. Because the fourteen great duties etc. are included by the phrase "kappiyākappiyanissitā," with the word vatta, only proper conduct etc. should be included, and with the word "ādi," walking conduct etc. should be included. Paro vā ajjhesitabbo means whoever it may be, he should be asked; he said, "yo" etc. With this, he shows that it is not that just anyone should be asked, but only one who is competent. He shows the manner of speaking with "āvuso" etc. Ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo means, here, it is not only silence due to being unable to speak, but also due to attending to the meditation subject, he said, "kammaṭṭhānamanasikāravasena tuṇhībhāvo". This silence is noble for the noble ones, ariyo, tuṇhībhāvo. With "nāvajānitabbo," he shows that the meaning of the word nātimaññitabbo is that one should not think excessively.

Upajjhāyoti codakacuditakānaṃ upajjhāyo.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘na ācariyo pucchitabbo’’tiādipadesu. Kulameva jātināmagottavasena ayanti apadisiyatītikulapadeso. Atrassāti ettha atra assāti padacchedaṃ katvā atrasaddo puggalavisayo, assasaddo ākhyātikoti āha ‘‘atra puggale’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘bhaveyyā’’ti iminā assasaddassa sabbanāmattañca ‘‘bhavatī’’ti vattamānikabhāvañca paṭikkhipati.Parisānuvidhāyakenāti parisāya anumataṃ karontena. Imināno parisakappikenāti etthakappasaddo vijhatthoti dasseti.Yanti vacanaṃ.Na hatthamuddāti mudanti etāyātimuddā,sakkharamaṅguliyaṃ hatthassa muddā avayaviavayavavasena sambandhattātihatthamuddā. Tassā vikāro ‘‘hatthamuddā’’ti gahetabboti āha ‘‘hatthavikāro’’ti.

Upajjhāyo means the preceptor of those who are accusing and being accused. Sabbatthā means in all passages such as "na ācariyo pucchitabbo" etc. Kula, which is indicated or designated as a lineage by way of jāti, nāma, and gotta, is kulapadeso. Atrassā means, here, having made the word division as atra assa, the word atra pertains to a person, and the word assa pertains to a verb, he said, "atra puggale" etc. There, with "bhaveyyā," he rejects that the word assa is a pronoun and that it is in the present tense as "bhavatī". Parisānuvidhāyakena means one who acts in accordance with the assembly. With this, he shows that in no parisakappikena, the word kappa is in the sense of rejection. Yanti vacanaṃ. Na hatthamuddā means mudanti etāyāti muddā, a hand gesture because the gesture of the hand is related to the fingers and joints as parts to the whole; therefore, hatthamuddā. Its modification should be taken as "hatthamuddā," he said, "hatthavikāro".

atthanti vinicchayatthaṃ.Anuvidhiyantenāti sallakkhentena. Iti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vinicchayapaṭivedhameva sallakkhentenā’’ti.Sannipātamaṇḍaleti sannipātāya parisāya samūhe, sannipātamaṇḍalassa majjheti attho.Na vītihātabbanti ettha vītiharaṇaṃ nāma atthato hāpananti āha ‘‘na vinicchayo hāpetabbo’’ti.Duruttavācanti codakacuditakānaṃ duruttavācaṃ.Hitaparisakināti ettha hitaṃ pari esatīti hitaparisako, karuṇā ca karuṇāpubbabhāgo ca, so etassatthītihitaparisakī,puggalo, tena hitaparisakinā. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘hitesinā hitagavesinā’’ti.Karuṇāti appanāpattā karuṇā.Karuṇāpubbabhāgoti appanāpattāya karuṇāya pubbabhāge pavattā parikammaupacārakaruṇā.Padadvayepīti ‘‘hitānukampinā kāruṇikena bhavitabbaṃ. Hitaparisakinā asamphappalāpinā bhavitabba’’nti padadvayepi. Ayaṃ adhippāyo veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Asundaravacana’’nti imināasuruttanti ettha sundaraṃ uttaṃsuruttaṃ,na suruttaṃ asuruttanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Pariggahetabboti parivīmaṃsitvā gahetabbo.

attha means the meaning of the judgment. Anuvidhiyantena means considering. Thus, showing this meaning, he said, "vinicchayapaṭivedhameva sallakkhentena". Sannipātamaṇḍale means in the gathering, the assembly of the community; it means in the midst of the sannipātamaṇḍala. Na vītihātabba means, here, vītiharaṇaṃ means, in terms of meaning, causing to diminish; he said, "na vinicchayo hāpetabbo". Duruttavācaṃ means harsh speech of those who are accusing and being accused. Hitaparisakinā means, here, hitaṃ pari esatīti hitaparisako, compassion and the preliminary part of compassion; he has that, therefore hitaparisakī, a person, by that hitaparisakinā. Showing that same meaning, he said, "hitesinā hitagavesinā". Karuṇā means compassion that has reached appanā. Karuṇāpubbabhāgo means preliminary compassion occurring in the preliminary stage of compassion before appanā. Padadvayepī means in both phrases, "hitānukampinā kāruṇikena bhavitabbaṃ. Hitaparisakinā asamphappalāpinā bhavitabbaṃ." This meaning should be understood, is the construction. With "asundaravacana," he shows that in asuruttaṃ, sundaraṃ uttaṃ suruttaṃ, na suruttaṃ asuruttaṃ, is the word meaning. Pariggahetabbo means having investigated, it should be taken.

Tassāti adhammacodakassa.Anosaṭaṃ vatthunti ettha ‘‘codakacuditakehi vutta’’nti padaṃ adhikāravasena veditabbaṃ. Ettha caanosaṭanti vinicchayaṃ anosaṭanti attho. Kiṃ paggaṇhitabboti āha ‘‘nanu tva’’ntiādi.Anuyogavattanti ‘‘kālena vakkhāmī’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 399; pari. 362, 437) vuttaṃ, ‘‘sacce ca akuppe cā’’ti (cūḷava. 401) ca vuttaṃ anuyuñjanavattaṃ. Tañhi yasmā anena vattena codako cuditakaṃ, cuditako vā codakaṃ anuyuñjati, codakena cuditako, cuditakena vā codako anuyuñjiyati, tasmāanuyogavattanti vuccati.Kathāpetvāti codakacuditakeheva kathāpetvā.Tassāti codakassa vā cuditakassa vā,sārajjanti bhayaṃ.Teti tava.Vatvāpīti mukhena vatvāpi.Pisaddena kāyavikāraṃ dassetvāpīti sampiṇḍeti. ‘‘Anuyogavatta’’nti dhātukammaṃ, ‘‘so bhikkhū’’ti kāritakammaṃ ajjhāharitabbaṃ, taṃ kammaṃ tabbapaccayo vadati.Asuci vibhāvetabboti ettha natthi suci sīlametassātiasucīti vutte alajjīti āha ‘‘alajji’’nti. Uju sīlavā kāyavaṅkādirahito hotīti yojanā. Ettha ca kāyavaṅkādirahito hotīti iminā ujuno kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Kāyavaṅkādirahitattā uju hotīti adhippāyo.Soti bhikkhu.Maddavenevāti mudubhāveneva.Upacaritabboti kathetabbo. Imināujumaddavenāti padassa sambandhaṭṭhānaṃ pāṭhasesaṃ dasseti.Yoti bhikkhu.Ayamevāti evasaddena na dhammagaruko, puggalagaruko, dhammesu ca puggalesu ca na majjhattoti veditabboti dasseti.

Tassā means of that accuser of false Dhamma. Anosaṭaṃ vatthuṃ means, here, the phrase "codakacuditakehi vutta" should be understood as a matter of authority. And here, anosaṭaṃ means deciding an anosaṭa. What should be taken up? He said, "nanu tva" etc. Anuyogavattaṃ means that which is stated with "kālena vakkhāmī" etc. (cūḷava. 399; pari. 362, 437), and that which is stated with "sacce ca akuppe cā" (cūḷava. 401), means the duty of questioning. Indeed, because with this duty, the accuser questions the accused, or the accused questions the accuser, or the accused is questioned by the accuser, or the accuser is questioned by the accused, therefore it is called anuyogavattaṃ. Kathāpetvā means having caused to speak by the accusers and the accused themselves. Tassā means of the accuser or of the accused; sārajjaṃ means fear. Te means for you. Vatvāpī means even having spoken with the mouth. With the word pi, having also shown a physical change, he gathers together. "Anuyogavatta" is the direct object of the verb, "so bhikkhū" is the object of the causative verb, it should be supplied; that verb is stated with the suffix tabba. Asuci vibhāvetabbo means, here, there is no purity, no virtue, for him, therefore asucī; having said this, he said alajjīti, "shameless". One who is upright is virtuous and free from bodily contortions etc., is the construction. And here, with kāyavaṅkādirahito hoti, he shows the reason for being upright. Because he is free from bodily contortions etc., he is upright, is the meaning. So means that bhikkhu. Maddavenevā means only with gentleness. Upacaritabbo means should be addressed. With this, he shows the related place, the remaining portion of the text, of the word ujumaddavenā. Yo means the bhikkhu. Ayamevā means with the word eva, it should be understood that he is not respectful of the Dhamma, he is respectful of persons, and he is not balanced with regard to Dhammas and persons.

366.Tena ca pana anuvijjakenāti yojanā.Suttādīsūti ādisaddena vinayaanuloma paññattaanulomikāni saṅgahetabbāni. Suttaṃ saṃsandanatthāya hotīti yojanā. Kesaṃ saṃsandanatthāyāti āha ‘‘āpattānāpattīnaṃ saṃsandanattha’’nti. Opammaṃ atthadassanatthāya hotīti yojanā. Eseva nayo sesesupi.Paccekaṭṭhāyino avisaṃvādakaṭṭhāyinoti ettha paccekasmiṃ tiṭṭhanti sīlenātipaccekaṭṭhāyino,avisaṃvādake tiṭṭhanti sīlenātiavisaṃvādakaṭṭhāyinoti dassento āha ‘‘issa…pe… ṭhitā’’ti. ‘‘Issariyādhipaccajeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne’’ti iminā paccekasarūpaṃ dasseti.Teti saṅghena anumatā puggalā.

366. Tena ca pana anuvijjakenāti is the connection. Suttādīsū means with the word "ādi," the Vinaya, that which accords with the Vinaya, and that which is in accordance with what is prescribed should be included. The Sutta is for comparing, is the connection. For comparing what? He said, "āpattānāpattīnaṃ saṃsandanattha". Comparison is for showing the meaning, is the connection. The same method applies to the rest. Paccekaṭṭhāyino avisaṃvādakaṭṭhāyino means, here, they stand individually by virtue of virtue, therefore paccekaṭṭhāyino; they stand in non-contradiction by virtue of virtue, therefore avisaṃvādakaṭṭhāyino; showing this, he said, "issa…pe… ṭhitā". With "issariyādhipaccajeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne," he shows the individual characteristics. Te means those persons approved by the Sangha.

Sabbatthāti sabbesu dvādasavākyesu. Visesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādi. Tatthaapicavisesaṃ vakkhāmīti yojanā.Etthāti ‘‘avippaṭisāratthāyā’’tiādīsu.Tanti sukhaṃ. Taruṇavipassanā nāma kassa adhivacananti āha ‘‘udayabbayañāṇassetamadhivacana’’nti. Nanu ‘‘virāgo’’ti ettha catubbidhassa ariyamaggassa gahitattā ‘‘vimuttī’’ti etthāpi catubbidhaṃ phalaṃ gahetabbaṃ, kasmā pana ‘‘vimuttīti arahattaphala’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘catubbidhopi hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Apaccayaparinibbānatthāyāti asaṅkhataparinibbānatthāya. Natthettha hi parinibbāne koci paccayo, tasmā apaccayaparinibbānanti vuccati.Tanti vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ.Tasmiṃanuppatteti tasmiṃ vimuttiñāṇadassane anukkamena patte.Avassanti dhuvaṃ ekantenāti attho.Etadatthāti eso anupādā parinibbānasaṅkhāto attho payojanaṃ imissā kathāyāti etadatthā.Kathāti atthassa kathā.Mantanāti dhammassa mantanā.Etadatthā upanisāti ettha upanisāsaddo paccayavācakoti āha ‘‘paraṃparapaccayatāpī’’ti. Paraṃparapaccayo hi yasmā ettha paraṃparaphalaṃ upagantvā nisīdati, tasmāupanisāti vuccati. ‘‘Vinayo saṃvaratthāyā’’tiādikā ayaṃ paraṃparapaccayatāpīti yojanā.Sotāvadhānanti ogāhetvā dhiyate ṭhapiyateavadhānaṃ,sotassa avadhānaṃ sotāvadhānaṃ.Imaṃ kathanti ‘‘vinayo saṃvaratthāyā’’tiādiṃ imaṃ kathaṃ. Yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, tampi etadatthanti yojanā.Yadidaṃ anupādā cittassāti ettha ‘‘yadida’’nti nipāto ‘‘vimokkho’’ti padamapekkhitvā yo ayanti atthaṃ vadati.Anupādāti ettha ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 11) viya yakāralopo hoti, tassa padassa karaṇaṃ pana ‘‘catūhi upādānehī’’ti veditabbaṃ. Iti ima matthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yo ayaṃ catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā’’ti. Ettha catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā cittassa arahattaphalasaṅkhāto yo ayaṃ vimokkho atthi, sopi etadatthāya hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Arahattaphalasaṅkhāto’’ti iminā ‘‘vimokkho’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. Arahattaphalañhi yasmā viruddhehi, visesena vā sabbakilesehi muccittha, tasmāvimokkhoti vuccati. ‘‘Apaccayaparinibbānatthāya evā’’ti imināetadatthāyāti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.

Sabbatthā means in all twelve sentences. Showing a distinction, he said, "apicetthā" etc. Etthā means in "avippaṭisāratthāyā" etc. Tanti sukhaṃ. To what does taruṇavipassanā refer? He said, "udayabbayañāṇassetamadhivacana". Now, because the fourfold noble path is included in "virāgo," the fourfold fruition should also be included in "vimuttī"; why then is it said that "vimuttīti arahattaphala"? He said, "catubbidhopi hī" etc. means truly, or because. Apaccayaparinibbānatthāyā means for the sake of unconditioned parinibbāna. Indeed, there is no condition at all in that parinibbāna, therefore it is called apaccayaparinibbāna. Tanti vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ. Tasmiṃanuppatte means when that knowledge and vision of liberation is gradually attained. Avassa means certainly, definitely, is the meaning. Etadatthā means this goal, which is called the parinibbāna without clinging, is the purpose of this talk, therefore etadatthā. Kathā means talk of the goal. Mantanā means reflection on the Dhamma. Etadatthā upanisā means, here, the word upanisā is indicative of a condition, he said, "paraṃparapaccayatāpī". Indeed, because the successive result, having approached, settles here, therefore it is called upanisā. This series of conditions, beginning with "Vinayo saṃvaratthāyā" etc., is also paraṃparapaccayatāpī, is the connection. Sotāvadhānaṃ means having entered, it is fixed and established, avadhānaṃ, attention of the ear, sotassa avadhānaṃ sotāvadhānaṃ. Imaṃ kathaṃ means this talk beginning with "vinayo saṃvaratthāyā" etc. Even the knowledge that arises is also for this purpose, is the connection. Yadidaṃ anupādā cittassā means, here, "yadidaṃ" is a particle that states the meaning "yo ayaṃ" expecting the word "vimokkho". Anupādā means, here, there is a loss of the ya sound as in "sayaṃ abhiññā" etc. (mahāva. 11), the reason for that word should be understood as "catūhi upādānehī". Thus, showing this meaning, he said, "yo ayaṃ catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā". Here, whatever liberation of the mind, which is called the fruition of arahantship, exists without clinging to the four kinds of clinging, that too is for this purpose, is the connection. With "Arahattaphalasaṅkhāto," he shows the meaning of the word "vimokkho". Indeed, because the fruition of arahantship is liberated from conflicting things, or especially from all defilements, therefore it is called vimokkho. With "Apaccayaparinibbānatthāya evā," he shows the meaning of the word etadatthāyā.

367.Vatthuṃ…pe… na jānātīti etthāti yojanā kātabbā.Tasmāti yasmā sambandho, tasmā.Etthāti imāsu gāthāsu.Samena cāti ettha ‘‘samenā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘aññāṇenā’’ti atthassa vācakaṃ rūḷhīpadanti dassento āha ‘‘teneva pubbāparaṃ ajānanassa samena aññāṇenā’’ti. Pāḷiyaṃ kena kāraṇena katākataṃ na jānātīti āha ‘‘samenā’’ti. Samena pubbāparassa aññāṇena katākataṃ na jānātīti attho.Evantiādi nigamanaṃ. Yaṃ panetaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti yojanā. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti ca ‘‘ākāraakovido’’ti ca ādhārādheyyānamabhedo hoti, tasmā avayavī ādhāro, avayavo ādheyyoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ākārasaddo iṅgitatthoti āha ‘‘kāraṇākāraṇe’’ti. Kāraṇaakāraṇasaṅkhāte iṅgiteti attho.Ākārassāti bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Ākārasminti hi attho.

367. Vatthuṃ…pe… na jānātīti etthāti should be done to connect it. Tasmā means because of that connection, therefore. Etthā means in these verses. Samena cā means, here, showing that the word "samenā" is a conventional term expressing the meaning of "aññāṇenā," he said, "teneva pubbāparaṃ ajānanassa samena aññāṇenā". In the Pāḷi, for what reason does he not know what has been done and what has not been done? He said, "samenā". It means that due to ignorance of what came before and what comes after, he does not know what has been done and what has not been done. Evantiādi is the conclusion. Yaṃ panetaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanti is the connection. And there is no difference between "tatthā" and "ākāraakovido" in terms of the container and the contained; therefore, the whole is the container, the part is to be regarded as the contained. The word ākāra means gesture, he said, "kāraṇākāraṇe". It means a gesture that is a cause and not a cause. Ākārassāti the genitive case is in the sense of abundance. The meaning is in the gesture.

Tathevāti yathā vatthuādīni na jānāti, tatheva.Itīti evaṃ.Yvāyanti yo ayaṃ bhikkhu. ‘‘Bhayenā’’ti iminābhayāti ettha kāraṇatthe nissakkavacananti dasseti. Bhayā bhayena gacchatīti yojanā. Eseva nayosammohena mohā gacchatīti etthāpi.Chandāti chandena.Dosāti dosena. Attanā ñātuṃ asamatthatāya na saññattiyā kusaloti āha ‘‘paraṃ saññāpetuṃ asamatthatāyā’’ti. Kasmā nijjhattiyā ca akovidoti āha ‘‘kāraṇā…pe… tāyā’’ti. ‘‘Parisāya laddhattā’’ti iminā laddho parisasaṅkhāto pakkho yenātiladdhapakkhoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Sace tādisako bhikkhu hoti, so bhikkhu ‘‘apaṭikkho’’ti vuccatīti yojanā. Eseva nayo heṭṭhāpi. ‘‘Na paṭikkhitabbo’’ti iminā paṭimukhaṃ na ikkhitabbotiapaṭikkhoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Na oloketabbo’’ti iminā ikkhadhātuyā dassanatthaṃ dasseti.

Tathevā means just as he does not know the basis etc., just so. Itī means thus. Yvāyanti means whichever bhikkhu. With "bhayenā," he shows that bhayā is a word expressing the causal meaning. Gacchatīti is connected with bhayā bhayena. The same method applies to sammohena mohā gacchatīti. Chandā means with desire. Dosā means with aversion. Because he is unable to know for himself, he is not skilled in saññatti, he said, "paraṃ saññāpetuṃ asamatthatāyā". Why is he also unskilled in explanation? He said, "kāraṇā…pe… tāyā". With "Parisāya laddhattā," he shows the word meaning of laddho parisasaṅkhāto pakkho yenāti laddhapakkho. If such a bhikkhu exists, that bhikkhu is called "apaṭikkho," is the connection. The same method applies below as well. With "Na paṭikkhitabbo," he shows the word meaning of paṭimukhaṃ na ikkhitabboti apaṭikkho. With "Na oloketabbo," he shows the meaning of the verbal root ikkha as seeing.

Iti cūḷasaṅgāmavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of Cūḷasaṅgāma.

Mahāsaṅgāmaṃ

Mahāsaṅgāmaṃ

Voharantena jānitabbādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of What Should Be Known by One Who Is Conducting [A Trial]

368-74.Mahāsaṅgāme eteneva nayena veditabbanti sambandho. Vatthusaṅkamanākāraṃ dassetvā avajānanapaṭijānanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘yo panā’’tiādi. Yo pana vadatīti sambandho.Esevāti eso eva, avajānanapaṭijānanabhikkhūti attho.

368-74. In Mahāsaṅgāma, it should be understood in the same way, is the connection. Having shown the manner of the basis being transferred, showing the manner of not knowing and pretending to know, he said, "yo panā" etc. Whoever speaks, is the connection. Esevā means this same bhikkhu who does not know and pretends to know is the meaning.

375.Nīlādivaṇṇāvaṇṇavasenāti nīlādivaṇṇavasena ca ārogyatthādiavaṇṇavasena ca. Sañcarittaṃ yasmā anena sikkhāpadena dhanaṃ anupadīyati, tasmādhanamanuppadānanti vuccati.Pubbapayogoti pubbe payujjitabbo.

375. Nīlādivaṇṇāvaṇṇavasenā means by way of praise of blue color etc., and by way of dispraise of health etc. Because wealth is not given up by this training rule, therefore it is called dhanamanuppadānaṃ. Pubbapayogo means it should be applied beforehand.

Agatiagantabbavaṇṇanā
Explanation of Agati and Agantabba

379.Bahujanaahitāya paṭipanno hotīti pāḷiṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘vinayadharena hī’’tiādi. Tatthavinayadharenāti anuvijjakena, vinicchiteti sambandho.Ovādūpajīviniyoti bhikkhūnaṃ ovādaṃ upanissāya jīviniyo.Upāsakāpīti ratanattayaṃ paṭissaraṇanti upāsakāpi.Dāyakāpīti bhikkhūnaṃ paccayadāyakāpi.Tesanti upāsakādīnaṃ.Tathevāti yathā upāsakādayo dvidhā bhijjanti, tatheva.Tatoti ārakkhadevatāhi paranti sambandho.Tenāti dvidhākāraṇena.

379. While elaborating on the Pali phrase "Bahujanaahitāya paṭipanno hoti," he says, "By the Vinayadhara," etc. Here, vinayadharena means by one who investigates; it is to be connected with 'vinicchita' (decided). Ovādūpajīviniyo means bhikkhus who live relying on advice. Upāsakāpī means even upāsakas who have taken refuge in the Triple Gem. Dāyakāpī means even those who give requisites to the bhikkhus. Tesa means of those, such as the upāsakas. Tathevā means just as the upāsakas and others are divided into two. Tato is to be connected with "beyond the guardian deities." Tenā means by that division.

382.Gahananissitoti ettha gahanasaddo diṭṭhipariyāyoti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiantaggāhikadiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ gahana’’nti.

382. Regarding Gahananissito, here the word 'gahana' is a synonym for wrong view, so he says, "gahana refers to micchādiṭṭhi (wrong view) and antaggāhikadiṭṭhi (views holding to extremes)."

393.Tassa avajānantoti ettha ‘‘tassā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘vacana’’nti pāṭhasesena sambandhitabbanti āha ‘‘tassa vacana’’nti.Tassāti navakassa.Tanti navakaṃ.

393. Regarding Tassa avajānanto, here he says that the word "tassa" is related to the reading "vacana" (word), "tassa vacana." Tassā means of the novice. Taṃ means that novice.

394.‘‘Yaṃatthāyā’’ti eso saddo samāsoti āha ‘‘yadatthāyā’’ti.‘‘Taṃ attha’’nti eso saddo liṅgavipallāsoti āha ‘‘so attho’’ti.Atthasaddo hi pulliṅgo, pāḷiyaṃna parihāpetabbanti etthāpi liṅgavipallāso veditabbo.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ mahāsaṅgāme.

394.‘‘Yaṃatthāyā’’ti this word is a compound, so he says "yadatthāyā". ‘‘Taṃ attha’’nti this word is a gender alteration, so he says "so attho". The word attha is masculine; a gender alteration should be understood here too, in na parihāpetabba. Sabbatthā means in all great battles.

Iti mahāsaṅgāmavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Great Battle.

Kathinabhedaṃ

Kathina Dissolution

Kathinaatthatādivaṇṇanā
Kathina Meaningfulness, Etc., Explanation

403.Kathinekhandhaketi kathinakkhandhake.Pubbeti kathinakkhandhake.

403.Kathine khandhake means in the Kathina Khandhaka. Pubbe means earlier, in the Kathina Khandhaka.

404.Payogassāti ettha payogo nāma koti āha ‘‘cīvaradhovanādino’’tiādi. Ettha ādisaddena vicāraṇachedanabaddhanasibbanarajanakappabinduādiyanāni cha pubbakaraṇāni saṅgaṇhāti. Udakāharaṇādiko yo payogo karīyatīti yojanā.Anantaronāma atītānantaraanāgatānantaravasena duvidho, idha anāgatānantaroyeva adhippetoti āha ‘‘anāgatavasenā’’ti. Udakāharaṇādipayoge hi uppanne pacchā dhovanādipubbakaraṇassa uppattito tappayogassa anāgatavaseneva paccayo.Samanantarapaccayenāti etthasaṃsaddo suṭṭhuatthoti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu anantarapaccayenā’’ti. ‘‘Āsannatara’’nti iminā suṭṭhubhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Payogassā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘ādhārabhāva’’nti pade sāmī, ‘‘paccayā hontī’’ti pade sampadānaṃ. ‘‘Nissaya’’nti padaṃ ‘‘ādhārabhāva’’nti padena saṃvaṇṇeti. ‘‘Upetenā’’ti imināupasaddassa upagamanatthaṃ dasseti, balavatthaṃ paṭikkhipati.Paṭhamanti payogato, payogassa vā tāva. Imināpurejātapaccayenāti ettha puresaddo paṭhamatthoti dasseti.Pacchāti payogato, payogassa vā paraṃ.Apubbaṃ acarimanti ekapahārena. Iminā sahajātasaddassa atthaṃ dasseti.

404. Regarding Payogassā, here what is 'payoga'? He says, "cīvaradhovanādino," etc. Here, by 'ādi' (etc.), it includes the six preliminary actions: investigation, cutting, binding, sewing, dyeing, and applying the kappabindu. The meaning is that whatever effort, beginning with fetching water, is done. Anantaro is of two kinds: past immediately preceding, and future immediately preceding; here, only the future immediately preceding is intended, so he says, "in the sense of future." For when an effort like fetching water arises, afterwards the preliminary action like washing arises; therefore, that effort is a condition only in the sense of future. Regarding Samanantarapaccayenā, here the prefix saṃ means excellence, so he says, "by an excellent immediately contiguous condition." By "Āsannatara" (very close), he shows the state of excellence. The word "Payogassā" is the possessor of "ādhārabhāva" (state of being a support), and the dative of "paccayā hontī" (they are conditions). The word "Nissaya" (support) explains "ādhārabhāva". By "Upetena" (approached), he shows the meaning of approaching of the prefix upa, he rejects the meaning of strength. Paṭhamaṃ (first) means from the effort, or of the effort for the time being. By this he shows that in purejātapaccayena (by way of the pre-nascence condition), the word 'pure' means 'first'. Pacchā (after) means from the effort, or after the effort. Apubbaṃ acarimaṃ (without prior or subsequent) means with a single blow. By this he shows the meaning of the word sahajāta (conascence).

Yanti dhammajātaṃ. Idāni āhāti sambandho.Yassāti payogādikassa.Tadevāti dhammajātameva.Tassāti ‘‘pubbakaraṇaṃ payogassā’’tiādivacanassa attho evaṃ veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Payogassa katame dhammā’’tiādi yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha vissajjanaṃ mayā vuccateti yojanā. Iminā pāḷiyaṃ ajjhāharitvā yojetabbabhāvaṃ dasseti. Catūhi paccayehi paccayākāraṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘payogassa hī’’tiādi. Payogassa pubbakaraṇaṃ paccayo hotīti sambandho.Uddiṭṭhadhammesūti ‘‘anantarapaccayena paccayo’’tiādinā uddiṭṭhesu dhammesu purejātapaccayo panesāti sambandho. Atha vāuddiṭṭhadhammesūti pubbakaraṇavasena uddiṭṭhesu dhovanādidhammesu ekadhammampīti sambandho.Na labhatīti udakāharaṇādipayogassa pubbe na labhati.Ayanti udakāharaṇādipayogo.Pacchājātapaccayaṃ pana labhatīti udakāharaṇādipayogo pacchājātapaccayaṃ labhati. Kasmā labhatīti āha ‘‘pacchā uppajjanakassa hī’’tiādi.Pacchāti payogassa, payogato vā paraṃ. Hi yasmā kayirati, tasmā labhatīti yojanā. Sahajātapaccayaṃ pana na labhatīti sambandho.Mātikāpalibodhānisaṃsasaṅkhāteti aṭṭhamātikādvepalibodhapañcānisaṃsasaṅkhāte.Aññoti pannarasahi dhammehi añño.Payogādīsūtiādisaddena pubbakaraṇapaccuddhāraadhiṭṭhānāni saṅgaṇhāti.Etenupāyenāti etena yathāvuttaupāyena.

Yaṃ means whatever dhamma-state. Now, it is related to 'āha' (he says). Yassā means of whatever, such as effort. Tadevā means that very dhamma-state. Tassā means the meaning of the statement "pubbakaraṇaṃ payogassā" (the preliminary action is a condition for the effort), etc., should be understood thus. The meaning is that I will give the explanation for the statement "Payogassa katame dhammā" (What dhammas are there for the effort?), etc., which was stated. By this he shows that it should be supplied and construed in the Pali. While elaborating the mode of conditionality with four conditions, he says, "payogassa hī," etc. The connection is that the preliminary action is a condition for the effort. Regarding Uddiṭṭhadhammesū, the connection is that among the dhammas pointed out by "anantarapaccayena paccayo" (by the immediately contiguous condition, it is a condition), etc., is the purejātapaccayo (pre-nascence condition) included? Or alternatively, uddiṭṭhadhammesū means among the washing, etc., dhammas pointed out in terms of preliminary action, is there even one dhamma? Na labhatī means it is not obtained before the effort of fetching water, etc. Ayaṃ means this effort of fetching water, etc. Pacchājātapaccayaṃ pana labhatī means the effort of fetching water, etc., obtains the post-nascence condition. Why does it obtain it? He says, "pacchā uppajjanakassa hī," etc. Pacchā means after the effort, or after the effort for the time being. Hi, because it is done, therefore it obtains it, is the construction. But it does not obtain the conascence condition, is the connection. Mātikāpalibodhānisaṃsasaṅkhāte means counted as eight mātikās, two palibodhas, and five ānisaṃsas. Añño means other than the fifteen dhammas. By Payogādīsū, the ādi (etc.) includes preliminary action, rejection, and determination. Etenupāyenā means by this method as stated.

Pubbakaraṇanidānādivibhāgavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Preliminary Action, Nidāna, Etc., Division

406-7.Dvikkhattuṃ pucchitattā ‘‘pucchādvaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Hetupaccayānaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘cha cīvarānī’’ti. Kasmā veditabbānīti āha ‘‘pubbapayogādīnañhī’’tiādi.ti yasmā.Tāniyevāti cha cīvarāni eva. Evasaddo pacchāpi yojetabbo, tāni evāti attho.ti saccaṃ, pubbakaraṇādīni na atthīti yojanā.

406-7. Because it was asked twice, it is stated as "pucchādvaya" (double question). While showing the nature of the root conditions, he says "cha cīvarānī" (six robes). Why should they be known? He says, "pubbapayogādīnañhi," etc. means because. Tāniyevā means only those six robes. The word 'eva' should be connected later too; the meaning is that only those. means indeed, the preliminary actions, etc., do not exist, is the connection.

408.‘‘Imāya saṅghāṭiyā’’tiādinā vacībhedākāraṃ dasseti. Kathinatthārakena yasmā paccuddhāro ca adhiṭṭhānañca karīyati, tasmākiriyāti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paccuddhāro ceva adhiṭṭhānañcā’’ti.

408. By "Imāya saṅghāṭiyā," etc., he shows the mode of difference in speech. Because rejection and determination are done by the Kathina-layer, therefore it is called kiriyā (action). Therefore, it was said, "paccuddhāro ceva adhiṭṭhānañcā" (rejection and determination).

411.Vatthuvipannādīnaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘akappiyadussaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Vināsaṃ, vikāraṃ vā pajjatītivipannaṃ,vatthumeva vipannaṃvatthuvipannaṃ.

411. While showing the nature of material defect, etc., he says "akappiyadussaṃ hotī" (it is an unallowable cloth), etc. Vipannaṃ means it undergoes destruction or change; vatthumeva vipannaṃ vatthuvipannaṃ means the material itself is defective, hence material defect.

Kathinādijānitabbavibhāgavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Kathina, Etc., Knowable Division

412.Tesaññeva dhammānanti ettha dhammānaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yesu rūpādidhammesū’’ti. Tattharūpādidhammesūti vaṇṇagandhādīsu suddhaṭṭhakarūpakalāpadhammesu.Satīti santesu.Tesanti rūpādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ. ‘‘Samodhāna’’nti imināsaṅgahoti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Missībhāvo’’ti imināsamavāyoti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. Avayavadhammānaṃ saṃ ekabhāvassa gahaṇaṃsaṅgaho. Avayavadhammānaṃ samaṃ ayanaṃ pavattanaṃsamavāyo. Bahūsu dhammesūti bahūsu paramatthapaññattidhammesu.Nāmamattanti nāmapaññattimattaṃ.Pubbeti kathinakkhandhake.

412. Regarding Tesaññeva dhammāna, while showing the nature of the dhammas, he says, "yesu rūpādidhammesu" (in which rūpa, etc., dhammas). There, rūpādidhammesu means in the pure essential rūpa-kalāpa dhammas, such as color and odor. Satī means while they exist. Tesa means of those rūpa, etc., dhammas. By "Samodhāna" (combination), he shows the meaning of the word saṅgaho (collection). By "Missībhāvo" (state of being mixed), he shows the meaning of the word samavāyo (concurrence). Saṅgaho is the taking together of the uniformity of the element-dhamma. Samavāyo is the even movement or continuity of the element-dhamma. Bahūsu dhammesū means in many ultimate and conceptual dhammas. Nāmamattaṃ means merely a name-concept. Pubbe means earlier, in the Kathina Khandhaka.

ākārasaddo kāraṇatthoti dasseti.Yanti vacanaṃ.

Shows that the word ākāra means reason. Yaṃ means whatever statement.

416.Uppajjantīti kathinuddhārā uppajjanti.Kinti kiṃ atthajātaṃ. Sabbepi kathinuddhārāti sambandho.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā.Etthāti kathinuddhāresu.Purimā dveti antarubbhārasahubbhāravasena purimā dve.Etesañcāti purimānaṃ dvinnañca.Itareti avasesā kathinuddhārā.Tesupīti itaresu kathinuddhāresu.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ kathinavinicchaye.

416. Uppajjantī means the Kathina withdrawals arise. Kiṃ means what kind of thing. All the Kathina withdrawals, is the connection. means truly, or because. Etthā means in these Kathina withdrawals. Purimā dve means the first two, in terms of antarubbhāra and sahubbhāra. Etesañcā means and of these first two. Itare means the remaining Kathina withdrawals. Tesupī means in those remaining Kathina withdrawals. Sabbatthā means in all Kathina decisions.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the explanation of the Pāññatti Vagga

Paññattivaggavaṇṇanāya

in the Samantapāsādikā Vinaya Commentary.

Yojanā samattā.

The Yojanā is complete.

Upālipañcakaṃ

Upāli Pañcaka

Anissitavaggavaṇṇanā
Anissita Vagga Explanation

417.Upālipañhesu ‘‘kati hi nu kho bhante’’ti pucchāya sambandho natthīti kassaci maññanaṃ nivārento āha ‘‘aya sambandho’’ti.Theroti upālitthero, pucchīti sambandho.Imesanti pañcakānaṃ tantinti sambandho. Kesaṃ atthāya tantiṃ ṭhapessāmīti āha ‘‘nissāya vasanakārīnaṃ atthāyā’’ti. Vasanakārīnaṃ bhikkhūnanti sambandho.Tesanti pañhānaṃ.

417. To prevent someone from thinking that there is no connection to the question "kati hi nu kho bhante" (how many, indeed, venerable sir) in the Upāli Questions, he says "aya sambandho" (this is the connection). Thero means the Venerable Upāli, it is connected to 'pucchī' (asked). Imesaṃ means the continuous series of these five. To whom will I establish the continuous series for what purpose? He says, "nissāya vasanakārīnaṃ atthāya" (for the purpose of those who dwell in dependence). It is connected to "vasanakārīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ" (to the bhikkhus who dwell). Tesaṃ means of those questions.

Āpannokammakatoti ettha ‘‘āpanno’’ti padaṃ ‘‘kammakato’’ti padassa kāraṇadassananti āha ‘‘āpattiṃ āpanno, tappaccayāva saṅghena kammaṃ kataṃ hotī’’ti.Tappaccayāvāti taṃāpattiāpannasaṅkhātā kāraṇā eva.

Āpanno kammakato Regarding this, he says that the word "āpanno" (one who has incurred) shows the reason for the word "kammakato" (one against whom an action has been taken), "āpattiṃ āpanno, tappaccayāva saṅghena kammaṃ kataṃ hotī" (he has incurred an offense; it is only because of that that an action has been taken by the Sangha). Tappaccayāvā means just because of that cause, counted as incurring that offense.

Nappaṭippassambhanavaggavaṇṇanā
Nappaṭippassambhana Vagga Explanation

420.Ayanti kammakato bhikkhu, na vattatīti sambandho.Anulomavatteti katakammassa anulome vatte.Assāti bhikkhussa.Sarajjukoti saha kammasaṅkhātāya rajjuyāti sarajjuko.

420.Ayaṃ, this bhikkhu against whom an action has been taken, is not behaving, is the connection. Anulomavatte means behaving in accordance with the action that has been taken. Assā means of the bhikkhu. Sarajjuko means together with the rope counted as the action.

421.Samaggehi bhikkhūhīti sambandho.ti saccaṃ.Accayaṃ desāpetvāti aññamaññaṃ dosaṃ desāpetvā.Tiṇavatthārakasamathaṃ vātisaddo atthantaravikappo.Tatra ceti etthatasaddo kammavisayo,cesaddo sacepariyāyoti āha ‘‘sace tādise kamme’’ti.Diṭṭhāvikammampi katvāti diṭṭhāvikammaṃ katvāpīti yojanā.Pisaddena akatvāpīti sampiṇḍeti.Yatra panāti kamme pana.Tatthāti kamme.Pakkamitabbanti saṅgāmāvacarena pakkamitabbaṃ.

421. It is connected to "Samaggehi bhikkhūhi" (by bhikkhus in harmony). means truly. Accayaṃ desāpetvā means having confessed the faults to one another. Tiṇavatthārakasamathaṃ vā means is an alternative meaning. Tatra ce, here ta refers to the action, ce is a synonym for 'sace' (if), so he says, "sace tādise kamme" (if in such an action). Diṭṭhāvikammampi katvā means even after doing a diṭṭhāvikamma. Pi combines with 'even without doing it'. Yatra panā means but in whatever action. Tatthā means in that action. Pakkamitabbaṃ means one should leave, like one who has deserted the battle.

422.Ussitamantīti ettha ussitaṃ mantī ussitamantīti dassento āha ‘‘lobha…pe… bhāsitā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘lobhadosa mohamānussannaṃ vāca’’nti iminā ussitapadassa atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bhāsitā’’ti iminā ‘‘mantī’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.Nissitajappīti ettha aññanissitaṃ jappametassāti nissitajappīti dassento āha ‘‘attano’’tiādi. Etthajappanti vacanaṃ. Jappa vacaneti hi dhātupāṭhesu vuttaṃ.Ussadayuttanti lobhādiussadayuttaṃ, vacananti sambandho.Evamaññanti evaṃ attanā aññaṃ.Kathānusandhivacaneti codakacuditakānaṃ kathāya anusandhivacane. Ettha ‘‘vacane’’ti iminā ‘‘bhāsānusandhī’’ti ettha bhāsasaddo vacanapariyāyoti dasseti.

422.Ussitamantī while showing that ussitaṃ mantī means ussitamantī (speaking haughtily), he says, "lobha…pe… bhāsitā" (spoken…with greed, etc.). There, by "lobhadosa mohamānussannaṃ vāca" (words of those overcome by greed, hatred, delusion, and conceit), he shows the meaning of the word 'ussita'. By "Bhāsitā" (spoken), he shows the meaning of the word "mantī". Nissitajappī while showing that nissitajappī means one whose muttering depends on another, he says "attano," etc. Here, jappa means speech. It is said in the lists of verbal roots that jappa means speech. Ussadayuttaṃ connected to the arising of greed, etc., is speech, is the connection. Evamaññaṃ thus, other than oneself. Kathānusandhivacane means in the connection of speech of the accuser and the accused. Here, by "vacane", he shows that in "bhāsānusandhī", the word 'bhāsā' is a synonym for speech.

Ussāretīti uddhaṃ gamāpeti. Iminā ussādeti upari gamāpetītiussādetāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Ettha hi dakārarakārā sadisatthā. Te hi dve akkharā kadāci katthaci sadisatthā honti.Avasāretīti hīnabhāvaṃ gamāpeti. Iminā avasādeti adhobhāvaṃ gamāpetītiavasādetāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Apasādetā’’tipi pāṭho, upasaggamattameva nānaṃ.Samphañca bahuṃ bhāsatīti ettha samphasaddo niratthakakathāvacanoti āha ‘‘niratthakakatha’’nti. Niratthakakathā hi yasmā saṃ hitasukhaṃ phalati vināseti, tasmā samphanti vuccati. Phā dhātūti ca phaladhātūti ca dhātupāṭhesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 lakārantadhātu) vuttaṃ.

Ussāretī means he makes it go upwards. By this he shows the meaning of the word ussādetā (one who raises up), ussādeti means he makes it go upwards. Here the letters ḍ and r have the same meaning. These two letters sometimes have the same meaning in some places. Avasāretī means he makes it go to a lower state. By this he shows the meaning of the word avasādetā (one who brings down), avasādeti means he makes it go downwards. "Apasādetā" is also a reading; only the prefix is different. Samphañca bahuṃ bhāsatī here he says that the word 'sampha' means speaking meaningless talk, "niratthakakatha". Because meaningless talk destroys the well-being and happiness that has been gathered, therefore it is called sampha. It is said in the lists of verbal roots that the root is phā or phal (saddanītidhātumālā, 16 lakārantadhātu).

Bhāre anāropiteti ‘‘tava bhāro’’ti saṅghena bhāre anāropite.Ajjhottharitvāti abhibhavitvā. Imināpasayha pavattāti ettha pasayhasaddassa abhibhavanatthaṃ dasseti.Anadhikāreti anadhipaccaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Kathetā’’ti iminā vatudhātuyā kathanatthaṃ dasseti.Anokāsakammaṃ kāretvāti ettha nakārassa ayuttayogabhāvato yuttaṭṭhānaṃ dassento āha ‘‘okāsakammaṃ akāretvā’’ti.Yassāti yā assa. Assa bhikkhuno attano yā diṭṭhi atthīti yojanā, athavā attano yā diṭṭhi bhaveyyāti yojanā.Tanti diṭṭhiṃ. ‘‘Kathetā’’ti iminābyākatāti ettha vi ā pubbakaradhātuyā kathanatthaṃ dasseti.

Bhāre anāropite means when the burden has not been assigned by the Sangha, saying "your burden". Ajjhottharitvā means having overcome. By this he shows the meaning of overcoming of the word pasayha in pasayha pavattā. Anadhikāre means in a place where there is no authority. By "Kathetā", he shows the meaning of speaking of the root vad. Anokāsakammaṃ kāretvā while showing the state of being in an unsuitable situation of the negative particle na, he says, "okāsakammaṃ akāretvā" (without causing a formal act to be done). Yassā means whatever. Whatever view there is of his, of that bhikkhu himself, is the connection, or alternatively, whatever view there might be of his own. Taṃ means that view. By "Kathetā", he shows the meaning of speaking of the root vi ā puvaka dha in byākatā.

Vohāravaggavaṇṇanā
Vohāra Vagga Explanation

424.‘‘Neva desanāya na vuṭṭhānenā’’ti idaṃ pārājikāpattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Dosānurūpanti vatthusaṅkhātassa dosassa anurūpaṃ.

424. "Neva desanāya na vuṭṭhānenā" (neither by confession nor by rising) this was said referring to a Pārājika offense. Dosānurūpaṃ means corresponding to the fault counted as the object.

Payogaṃ na jānātīti ettha sace payogo mūlena visadiso hutvā bhinno hoti, evaṃ sati mūlapayoganti na vattabbanti āha ‘‘adhikaraṇānaṃ hī’’tiādi.ti saccaṃ, yasmā vā. Mūlameva payogā nāma honti, na aññanti adhippāyo.

Payogaṃ na jānātī (does not know the application) regarding this, he says, "adhikaraṇānaṃ hī," etc., that if the application is different, being dissimilar to the root, in that case it should not be said to be the root application. means truly, or because. The meaning is that the roots themselves are called applications, not others.

Kātabbantina jānātīti kātabbaṃ iti kammassa karaṇaṃ na jānātīti yojanā.Vatthūti bhaṇḍanakalahādivatthu, niyassādīnaṃ vatthūti sambandho.Catunnanti tajjanīyaniyassapabbājanīyapaṭisāraṇīyavasena catunnaṃ.Yācatīti saṅghaṃ kammassa vūpasamaṃ yācati.

Kātabbaṃ na jānātī the connection is that he does not know how to do the action, that it should be done thus. Vatthū the object of quarrel and dispute, is connected to the objects of niyassa, etc. Catunnaṃ means of the four: tajjanīya, niyassa, pabbājanīya, and paṭisāraṇīya. Yācatī means he asks the Sangha for the cessation of the action.

Vatthunti ettha āpattikkhandhānameva vatthunti āha ‘‘sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhāna’’nti. Padesapaññattisabbatthapaññattisādhāraṇapaññattiasādhāraṇapaññattiekatopañña- ttiubhatopaññattivasena channaṃ paññattīnaṃ paññattiyaṃ paviṭṭhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tividhaṃ paññatti’’nti. ‘‘Heṭṭhupariyaṃ katvā padaṃ yojetī’’ti imināpadapaccābhaṭṭhanti ettha padānaṃ heṭṭhupariyavasena paṭinivattitvā ābhassanaṃ gaḷanaṃ cutaṃ padapaccābhaṭṭhanti atthaṃ dasseti.

Vatthuṃ here the āpattikkhandhas themselves are the objects, so he says "sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ" (of the seven groups of offenses). Because it has entered into the concept of the six concepts—padesapaññatti, sabbatthapaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, ekatopaññatti, and ubhatopaññatti—it was said "tividhaṃ paññatti" (threefold concept). By "Heṭṭhupariyaṃ katvā padaṃ yojetī" (he connects the words by putting them up and down), he shows the meaning of padapaccābhaṭṭha (one who distorts the words) here, that padapaccābhaṭṭha means the turning back and distorting, slurring, changing of the words by putting them up and down.

Vinayeti ettha na kevalaṃ pāḷiyaṃyeva, atha kho aṭṭhakathāyampīti āha ‘‘vinayapāḷiyañceva aṭṭhakathāyañcā’’ti.

Vinaye (in the Vinaya), regarding this, he says, "vinayapāḷiyañceva aṭṭhakathāyañcā" (in the Vinaya Pali as well as in the commentary), not only in the Pali, but also in the commentary.

Ñattiṃna jānātīti ettha ñattibhedaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṅkhepato’’tiādi.Tatthāti duvidhāsu ñattīsu.Kammañattīti anussāvanakammassa ṭhāne ṭhitā ñatti. Anussāvanakammaṃ natthi, sayameva anussāvanakammaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti attho.Kammapādañattīti anussāvanakammassa pādabhūtā mūlabhūtā ñatti.Navasu ṭhānesūti osāraṇādīsu navasu ṭhānesū.Dvīsu ṭhānesūti ñattidutiyañatticatutthavasena dvīsu ṭhānesu, kammapādañattiyā karaṇaṃ na jānātīti sambandho. Yvāyaṃ catubbidho samathoti yojanā.Tanti catubbidhaṃ samathaṃ.Ñattiyāti sāmyatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Yaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamatīti sambandho.Tassāti adhikaraṇassa. Taṃ vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti sambandho.

Ñattiṃ na jānātīti, here, explaining the distinction of ñatti, he says, "In brief," etc. Tattha, among the two types of ñatti. Kammañattī, the ñatti that stands in place of an announcement act (anussāvanakamma). There is no announcement act; it itself stands in the place of an announcement act, is the meaning. Kammapādañattī, the ñatti that is the foundation, the root, of an announcement act. Navasu ṭhānesu, in the nine instances beginning with expulsion (osāraṇa). Dvīsu ṭhānesu, in the two instances of ñattidutiya and ñatticatuttha; he does not know the performance of the kammapādañatti, is the connection. This fourfold samatha, is the construction. Taṃ, that fourfold samatha. Ñattiyā, the sāmivacana (instrumental case in the sense of sameness) is in the sense of sameness. The dispute that is being settled, is the connection. Tassā, of that dispute. He does not know that settlement, is the connection.

Suttaṃ na jānātīti ettha suttasaddassa kadāci katthaci mātikāyañca suttantapiṭake ca pavattanato idha ubhatovibhaṅgeti āha ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅga’’nti.Vinayaṃ na jānātīti ettha vinayasaddassa sakale vinayapiṭake vattamānassāpi suttanti ettha ubhatovibhaṅgassa gahitattā idha khandhakaparivārāva gahetabbāti āha ‘‘khandhakaparivāraṃ na jānātī’’ti.

Suttaṃ na jānātī, here, because the word sutta sometimes occurs in the Mātikā and sometimes in the Suttanta Piṭaka, here it refers to both ubhatovibhaṅga, he says, "the ubhatovibhaṅga". Vinayaṃ na jānātī, here, although the word vinaya applies to the entire Vinaya Piṭaka, since the ubhatovibhaṅga is already included in "Sutta," here only the Khandhakas and Parivāra should be taken, he says, "he does not know the Khandhakas and Parivāra".

Suttantike cattāro mahāpadeseti (dī. ni. 2.187 ādayo; a. ni. 4.180) buddhāpadesasaṅghāpadesasambahulattherāpadesaekattherā padesavasena cattāro mahāpadese.Etthāti pañcake.Yanti vacanaṃ.Sabbatthāti sabbesu pañcakesu.

Suttantike cattāro mahāpadese (dī. ni. 2.187 ādayo; a. ni. 4.180), the four great references (mahāpadesa) in the Suttanta are: the Buddha-reference, the Saṅgha-reference, the reference to many elders, and the reference to one elder. Ettha, in the set of five. Yaṃ, is the statement. Sabbattha, in all the sets of five.

Iti

Iti

Anissitavagga-nappaṭippassambhanavagga-vohāravaggavaṇṇanāya

The explanation of the Anissita Vagga, Nappaṭippassambhana Vagga, and Vohāra Vagga,

Yojanā samattā.

Yojanā, is completed.

Diṭṭhāvikammavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Diṭṭhāvikamma Vagga

425.Diṭṭhāvikammavaggediṭṭhāvikammāti ettha āvi karīyateāvikammaṃ,diṭṭhīnaṃ āvikammaṃdiṭṭhāvikammanti dassento āha ‘‘diṭṭhīnaṃ āvikammānī’’ti. ‘‘Laddhipakāsanāna’’nti iminādiṭṭhisaddo laddhipariyāyo,āvikammasaddo pakāsanapariyāyoti dasseti.Etanti ‘‘diṭṭhāvikammā’’ti nāmaṃ. Adesanāgāminī nāma atthato garukanti āha ‘‘garukāpattiyā’’ti.Lahukāyapīti pisaddo garahattho. Lahukāyapi desitāya diṭṭhāvikammaṃ adhammikaṃ hoti, pageva garukāyāti attho.

425. In the Diṭṭhāvikamma Vagga, diṭṭhāvikammā, here, showing that āvi karīyate āvikammaṃ, diṭṭhīnaṃ āvikammaṃ diṭṭhāvikamma (what is made manifest is āvikamma; the making manifest of views is diṭṭhāvikamma), he says, "the manifestations of views". With "Laddhipakāsanānaṃ," he shows that the word diṭṭhi is a synonym for laddhi (doctrine) and the word āvikamma is a synonym for pakāsana (manifestation). Etaṃ, this name "Diṭṭhāvikammā." The name that leads to non-exoneration is serious in meaning, he says, "of a serious offense". Lahukāyapī, the pi particle is in the sense of censure. Even if a minor offense (lahukā) is manifested, the diṭṭhāvikamma is unlawful; how much more so if it is a serious offense, is the meaning.

Yathā…pe… hotīti yathā āvikate catūhi pañcahi ekībhūtehi āvikatā hotīti yojanā.Catūhi pañcahīti antimaparicchedadassanaṃ. Tato atirekehipi ekato desetuṃ na vaṭṭati, desitā ca āpatti na vuṭṭhāti, desanāpaccayā dukkaṭañca hoti. ‘‘Catūhi pañcahī’’ti antimaparicchedassa dassitattā dvīhi tīhi pana ekato desetuṃ vaṭṭatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Manomānasenāti ettha manosaddena mānasasaddassa rāgaarahattesupi pavattanato tadatthe paṭikkhipitvā citte eva vattatīti dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘manasaṅkhātena mānasenā’’ti. Iminā manabhūtaṃ mānasaṃmanomānasanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

Yathā…pe… hotī, the construction is: just as it is manifested, with four or five combined manifestations. Catūhi pañcahī, is a showing of the final limit. It is not proper to declare more than that together, and the offense is not absolved when declared, and there is a duukkaṭa due to the declaration. Because the final limit is shown with "four or five," it should be understood that it is proper to declare two or three together. Manomānasenā, here, showing that the word mano only refers to the mind (citta) excluding its occurrence in the senses of delight (rāga) and arahantship with the word mānasa, he says, "the mānasa known as mind". By this, he shows the meaning of the expression that the mānasa that is mind is manomānasa.

Samānasaṃvāsakassāpītipisaddo samānasaṃvāsakassapi nānāsīmāya ṭhitassa santike āvikammaṃ adhammikaṃ hoti, pageva nānāsaṃvāsakassāti dasseti.Māḷakasīmāyāti khaṇḍasīmāya aṅgaṇe.Avippavāsasīmāyāti mahāsīmāya, ṭhitassāpi santiketi sambandho. Pisaddena ‘‘khaṇḍasīmāya ṭhitassapī’’ti atthaṃ sampiṇḍeti.

Samānasaṃvāsakassāpī, the particle pi shows that even for one who dwells in communion (samānasaṃvāsaka) standing at a different boundary, the āvikamma is unlawful; how much more so for one who does not dwell in communion. Māḷakasīmāyā, in a sectional boundary in a courtyard. Avippavāsasīmāyā, in a great boundary, is the connection to "even when standing". With the pi particle, he combines the meaning "even for one standing in a sectional boundary".

430.Na pariyattanti na samatthaṃ. Iminānālanti ettha alaṃsaddo pariyattatthova, nārahabhūsanavāraṇatthoti dasseti.Idhāpīti pañcakepi. Pisaddena purimapañcakaṃ apekkhati. ‘‘Sāsanato’’ti iminā cudhātuyā apādānaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kāmo’’ti iminā adhippāyasaddo kāmapariyāyoti dasseti.

430. Na pariyattaṃ, not capable. By this, he shows that in nālaṃ, the word alaṃ is only in the sense of capability, and not in the senses of ornament or prevention. Idhāpī, even in the set of five. With the pi particle, he is referring to the previous set of five. With "Sāsanato," he shows the ablative case of the cu element. With "Kāmo," he shows that the word adhipāya is a synonym for kāma (desire).

432.Mandattā momūhattāti ettha ttapaccayassa bhāvatthe, pañcamīvibhattiyā ca kāraṇatthe pavattabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mandabhāvena momūhabhāvenā’’ti.Paribhavāti ettha paribhavakāmāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘paribhavaṃ āropetukāmo hutvā’’ti.Aññabyākaraṇesupīti arahattabyākaraṇesupi.Sabbatthāti diṭṭhāvikammavagge.Yanti vacanaṃ.

432. Mandattā momūhattā, here, showing the state of the tta suffix in the sense of state (bhāvattha) and the occurrence of the fifth case in the sense of cause (kāraṇattha), he says, "due to a state of dullness, a state of delusion". Paribhavā, here, showing the meaning "desiring to despise," he says, "being one who desires to impose contempt". Aññabyākaraṇesupī, even in declarations of arahantship. Sabbattha, in the Diṭṭhāvikamma Vagga. Yaṃ, is the statement.

Iti diṭṭhāvikammavaggavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus, the explanation of the Diṭṭhāvikamma Vagga is completed.

Musāvādavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Musāvāda Vagga

444.Dhammapadhānaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pārājikaṃ gacchatīti pārājikagāmī’’ti suddhakattuvasena vuttaṃ, puggalapadhānaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pārājikaṃ gacchati anena, gamāpetīti vā pārājikagāmī’’ti karaṇahetukattuvasenapi vattabbaṃ. Vitthāraṃ dassanto āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti ‘‘musāvādo pārājikagāmī’’tiādipāṭhe, evaṃ vitthāro veditabboti sambandho. Tesu ‘‘musāvādo pārājikagāmī’’tiādīsu vā, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.

444. Referring to the pre-eminence of the Dhamma, the foundation of the Dhamma, it is correctly said that "he goes to a pārājika, therefore, he is one who goes to a pārājika", but referring to the pre-eminence of the person, the foundation of the person, it should also be said that "pārājikaṃ gacchati anena, gamāpetīti vā pārājikagāmī (by this, he goes to a pārājika, or he causes to go, therefore he is one who goes to a pārājika)" in the instrumental, causal, and agentive senses. Showing the elaboration, he says, "Tattha," etc. There, tatthā, in the passage beginning "Musāvādo pārājikagāmī," thus the elaboration should be understood, is the connection. Or, in those beginning "Musāvādo pārājikagāmī," is a locative absolute.

Adassanenāti ettha kassa adassanenāti āha ‘‘vinayadharassā’’ti. Vitthāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘kappiyākappiyesu hī’’tiādi.Tanti vinayadharaṃ.Assavanenāti ettha kesaṃ vacanaṃ assavanenāti āha ‘‘ekavihārepī’’tiādi.Ekavihārepīti vinayadharena ekavihārepi. Pisaddena nānāvihāre pana pagevāti dasseti.Upaṭṭhānanti upaṭṭhānatthaṃ, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Vuccamānaṃ aññesaṃ vacanaṃ asuṇanto hutvā vāti yojanā.Pasuttakatāti ettha yakāralopoti āha ‘‘pasuttakatāyā’’ti.Pasuttakabhāvenapīti pisaddo aññampi adassanādikāraṇaṃ sampiṇḍeti.Tathāsaññīti ettha tathāsaddo kovisayoti āha ‘‘akappiye…pe… āpajjanto’’ti.Ekarattātikkamādivasenāti ādisaddena chārattātikkamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Sabbatthāti musāvādavagge.

Adassanenā, here, by not seeing whom, he says, "of a Vinaya-holder". Showing the elaboration, he says, "kappiyākappiyesu hī," etc. Taṃ, that Vinaya-holder. Assavanenā, here, by not hearing whose words, he says, "ekavihārepī," etc. Ekavihārepī, even in the same monastery as the Vinaya-holder. With the pi particle, he shows that it is even more so if they are in different monasteries. Upaṭṭhānaṃ, for attendance, or the place of attendance. Not hearing the word being spoken to others, or having become. Pasuttakatā, here, he says that there is elision of the ya with "pasuttakatāyā". Pasuttakabhāvenapī, the pi particle combines another cause of not seeing, etc. Tathāsaññī, here, what is the subject of the word tathā, he says, "akappiye…pe… āpajjanto". Ekarattātikkamādivasenā, with the word ādi, he includes exceeding six nights, etc. Sabbattha, in the Musāvāda Vagga.

Iti musāvādavaggavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus, the explanation of the Musāvāda Vagga is completed.

Bhikkhunovādavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Bhikkhunovāda Vagga

450.Bhikkhunivaggealābhāyāti ettha labhadhātuyā kammaṃ, sampadānavacanassa ca tadatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ alābhatthāyā’’ti. ‘‘Vāyamatī’’ti imināparisakkatīti ettha sakkadhātuyā samatthatthaṃ paṭikkhipitvā vāyamatthaṃ dasseti.Kalisāsananti pāpaparājayaāṇaṃ.Nīharaṇatthāyāti niddharitvā apanayanatthāya.

450. In the Bhikkhunivagga, alābhāyā, here, showing the object of the root labha and the meaning of the dative case as being for that purpose, he says, "for the non-attainment of the four requisites". With "Vāyamatī," showing that the root sakka in parisakkatī is in the sense of effort, excluding the sense of ability, he shows the sense of effort. Kalisāsanaṃ, the knowledge that is the defeat of evil. Nīharaṇatthāyā, for the purpose of removing after extracting.

451.‘‘Kamma’’nti sāmaññato vuttattā ‘‘sattannaṃ kammānaṃ aññatara’’nti.

451. Because "Kamma" is stated generally, "aññatara of the seven kinds of acts".

454.Nasākacchātabboti ettha ko nāma kathāmaggo na sākacchātabbo, nanu vinayoyevāti āha ‘‘kappiyā…pe… kathāmaggo’’ti. ‘‘Na kathetabbo’’ti iminā kacchasaddassa kathadhātuyā nipphannabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Kasmā pana paṭhamapañcake ‘‘na asekkhenā’’ti paṭikkhipitvā dutiyapañcake ‘‘asekkhenā’’tiādi vuttanti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Itaro puthujjano na kathetīti yojanā.

454. Na sākacchātabbo, here, what path of discussion is not to be discussed? Is it not only the Vinaya? He says, "kappiyā…pe… kathāmaggo". With "Na kathetabbo," he indicates that the word kaccha is derived from the root katha. But why is it that in the first set of five, it is prohibited with "na asekkhenā," but in the second set of five, "asekkhenā," etc., is stated? He says, "yasmā panā," etc. The other ordinary person does not speak, is the construction.

Na atthapaṭisambhidāpattoti ettha attho nāma aṭṭhakathāyevādhippetāti āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyā’’ti. ‘‘Pabhedagatañāṇappatto’’ti iminā atthādīsu pati visuṃ sambhijjatītipaṭisambhidā,paññā, taṃ pattotipaṭisambhidāpatto. Atthe paṭisambhidāpatto atthapaṭisambhidāpattoti dasseti. ‘‘Pāḷidhamme’’ti iminādhammapaṭisambhidāpattoti ettha dhammasarūpaṃ dasseti.Vohāraniruttiyanti paññattiniruttiyaṃ. Imināniruttipaṭisambhidāpattoti ettha niruttisarūpaṃ dasseti.Paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāpattoti ettha paṭibhānaṃ nāma heṭṭhimañāṇattayamevāti āha ‘‘atthapaṭisambhidādīni ñāṇānī’’ti,tesūti ñāṇesu, yaṃ yaṃ vimuttaṃyathāvimuttaṃ,cittaṃ.Paccavekkhitāti punappunaṃ olokitā.Sabbatthāti bhikkhunivagge.

Na atthapaṭisambhidāpatto, here, what is meant by the word attha is only the commentary, he says, "of the commentary". With "Pabhedagatañāṇappatto," showing that because pati visuṃ sambhijjatīti paṭisambhidā, paññā, taṃ patto ti paṭisambhidāpatto (wisdom by which one distinctly comprehends, therefore, it is comprehension, one who has attained that is one who has attained comprehension), he says that one who has attained comprehension in meaning is atthapaṭisambhidāpatto. With "Pāḷidhamme," here, he shows the nature of the Dhamma in dhammapaṭisambhidāpatto. Vohāraniruttiyaṃ, in conventional language. Here, he shows the nature of language in niruttipaṭisambhidāpatto. Paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāpatto, here, the paṭibhāna (ready wit) is only the lower triad of knowledges, he says, "the knowledges beginning with comprehension of meaning," tesū, in those knowledges, whatever is released, yathāvimuttaṃ, the mind. Paccavekkhitā, repeatedly reviewed. Sabbattha, in the Bhikkhunivagga.

Iti bhikkhunovādavaggavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus, the explanation of the Bhikkhunovāda Vagga is completed.

Ubbāhikavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Ubbāhika Vagga

455.Ubbāhikavaggeatthakusalotiādipadānaṃ bhedanissitasamāsaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathākusalo’’tiādi.Ācariyamukhatoti ācariyavadanato, ācariyasammukhe vā,sithiladhanitādīti ādisaddena dīgharassādīni (pari. aṭṭha. 485; vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. 252) saṅgaṇhāti.Akkharaparicchedeti ettako sithilo, ettako dhanitotiādinā akkharaparicchede. Iminābyañjanakusaloti ettha byañjanasaddo akkharapariyāyoti dasseti.Na pubbāparakusaloti ettha pubbāparo nāma purimānaṃ catunnañceva kathāya ca pubbāparoti āha ‘‘atthapubbāpare’’tiādi.

455. In the Ubbāhika Vagga, showing the bhedanissitasamāsa (dependent compound with separation) of the words beginning with atthakusalo, he says, "skilled in the commentary," etc. Ācariyamukhato, from the teacher's mouth, or in the teacher's presence; sithiladhanitādī, with the word ādi, he includes long and short vowels, etc. (pari. aṭṭha. 485; vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. 252). Akkharaparicchede, in the determination of the letters, such as this much is lax, this much is emphatic. Here, he shows that in byañjanakusalo, the word byañjana is a synonym for akkhara (letter). Na pubbāparakusalo, here, what is called pubbāpara (antecedent and consequent) is the antecedent and consequent of the previous four topics as well as the discourse, he says, "the antecedent and consequent of the meaning," etc.

Pasāretāti ettha saradhātu upasaggavasena vecittavācakoti āha ‘‘mohetā’’ti.

Pasāretā, here, the root sara varies in meaning according to the prefix, he says, "one who confuses".

Iti ubbāhikavaggavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus, the explanation of the Ubbāhika Vagga is completed.

Adhikaraṇavūpasamavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Adhikaraṇavūpasama Vagga

457.Adhikaraṇavūpasamavagge saṅghagaru nāma koti āha ‘‘dhammañca…pe… saṅghagaru nāma hotī’’ti.Tānīti cīvarādīni.

457. In the Adhikaraṇavūpasama Vagga, who is called one who is respected by the Saṅgha? He says, "dhammañca…pe… saṅghagaru nāma hotī". Tānī, those robes, etc.

458.Pañcahupāliākārehīti ettha ākārasaddo kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘pañcahi kāraṇehī’’ti.Kammenātiādīsu kammādīnaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘apalokanādīsū’’tiādi.Upapattīhīti yuttīhi. Mayhaṃ uccākulā pabbajitabhāvañca bahussutabhāvañca tumhe jānāthāti yojanā. Mādiso nāma…pe… tumhākaṃ yuttaṃ nanūti yojanā.Kaṇṇamūleti kaṇṇasamīpe.Anussāvanenāti anusamīpe sāvāpanena.Tesanti bhikkhūnaṃ.Anivattidhammeti anivattanasabhāve.Salākaggāhenāti attano salākāya gāhāpanena.

458. Pañcahupāli ākārehī, here, the word ākāra is in the sense of cause, he says, "by five causes". In kammenā etc., showing the nature of the acts etc., he says, "apalokanādīsū," etc. Upapattīhī, by reasons. You know that I am of a high family and have gone forth and am very learned, is the construction. Such as I…pe… is proper for you, is the construction. Kaṇṇamūle, near the ear. Anussāvanenā, by causing to hear in close proximity. Tesaṃ, of those monks. Anivattidhamme, in the state of non-returning. Salākaggāhenā, by having them take their own ticket.

Etthāti kammādīsu.Pamāṇanti saṅghabhedassa kāraṇaṃ.Pubbabhāgāti saṅghabhedato pubbabhāge pavattā. Pubbabhāgabhāvaṃ āvikaronto āha ‘‘aṭṭhārasavatthudīpanavasena hī’’tiādi. Voharantepīti yojanā.Tatthāti vohāre. Kadā pana saṅgho bhinnoti āha ‘‘yadā panā’’tiādi. Yadā pana karotīti sambandho.Kammanti uposathakammato aññaṃ kammaṃ gahetabbaṃ.Uddesanti uposathakammaṃ.Itīti evaṃ. Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘evaṃ…pe… pakāsayissāmā’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 351) yaṃ vacanaṃ avocumhāti yojanā. Tassa vacanassāti pāṭhaṃ ajjhāharitvā ‘‘svāyaṃ attho’’ti padena sambandhitabbo.

Etthā, among the acts etc. Pamāṇaṃ, the cause of schism in the Saṅgha. Pubbabhāgā, occurring as a preliminary to schism in the Saṅgha. Revealing the state of being a preliminary, he says, "aṭṭhārasavatthudīpanavasena hī," etc. Even while speaking, is the construction. Tattha, in speaking. When is the Saṅgha split? He says, "yadā panā," etc. When, however, he does, is the connection. Kammaṃ, an act other than the uposatha act should be taken. Uddesaṃ, the uposatha act. Itī, thus. In the Saṅghabhedaka Khandhaka commentary, "evaṃ…pe… pakāsayissāmā," (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 351) the statement that we said, is the construction. The reading should be supplied as "Tassa vacanassa" and connected with the words "svāyaṃ attho".

Paññattetanti ettha niggahitalopasandhīti āha ‘‘paññattaṃ eta’’nti.Kvāti kismiṃ khandhake.Tatrāti vattakkhandhake.Ettāvatāti ettakena āgantukavattādiakaraṇamattena.Anupubbenāti anukkamena.Yathārattanti ettha yathāsaddo anurūpatthavācako, rattisaddena rattippamāṇaṃ gahetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘rattiparimāṇānurūpa’’nti. Iminā rattiyā anurūpaṃyathārattanti nibbacanaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Rattiparimāṇānurūpa’’nti vutte rattiparimāṇassa atikkantattā atthato theroti āha ‘‘yathātheranti attho’’ti.Vavatthānanti paricchedo. So hi visuṃ avahito hutvā tiṭṭhatīti vavatthānanti vuccati.Kammākammānīti ettha kammaṃ akammānīti padavibhāgaṃ katvā akāro vuddhatthoti āha ‘‘khuddakāni ceva mahantāni ca kammānī’’ti. Sati ca akammassa mahantabhāve kammaṃ nāma khuddakanti atthato siddhaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘khuddakāni cevā’’ti. Akārassa appatthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mahantāni ceva khuddakāni ca kammānī’’ti atthopi yujjateva. So pana idha na gahito, aññattha pana dissati. ‘‘Uccāvacāni kammānī’’ti hi vākyavasena vuttaṭṭhāne uccasaddena mahantatthaṃ dasseti, avacasaddena khuddakatthaṃ dasseti. Tasmā mahantakhuddakāni kammānīti attho veditabbo. Sati ca akammassa khuddakabhāve kammaṃ nāma mahantanti atthatopi siddhanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Paññattetaṃ, here, there is elision of the nasal consonant and assimilation, he says, "paññattaṃ etaṃ". Kvā, in which Khandhaka? Tatrā, in the Vatta Khandhaka. Ettāvatā, merely by not performing this much, such as the duties of a newcomer. Anupubbenā, gradually. Yathārattaṃ, here, showing that the word yathā is in the sense of suitability, and the measure of the night (rattippamāṇa) should be taken with the word ratti, he says, "according to the measure of the night". Here, he shows the derivation of yathārūpaṃ as "anurūpaṃ rattiyā" (suitable to the night). When "anurūpaṃ rattiyā" is said, because the measure of the night has passed, the meaning is elder, he says, "yathātheranti attho". Vavatthānaṃ, determination. Because it stands distinctly and separately, it is called determination. Kammākammānī, here, dividing the words as kammaṃ akammānī, and because the a is in the sense of augmentation, he says, "both small and large acts". And with the greatness of the akamma, it is established in meaning that kamma is small. Therefore, it is said, "khuddakāni cevā". Taking the a as meaning small, the meaning "both large and small acts" would also be fitting. But that is not taken here, but it is seen elsewhere. In the statement by way of the sentence "Uccāvacāni kammānī," the word ucca shows the meaning of large, and the word avaca shows the meaning of small. Therefore, the meaning should be understood as "large and small acts". And with the smallness of the akamma, it should be seen that the meaning is also established that kamma is large.

Saṅghabhedavaggadvayavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Two Saṅghabheda Vaggas

459.Saṅghabhedavaggadvayeeteti sabhāvā.Teti adhammādayo.Itīti evaṃ. Yaṃ kammanti yojanā. Diṭṭhiṃ vinidhāyāti sambandho. Ekasmiṃ pañcake ayaṃ atthayojanā kātabbāti sambandho.Etthāpīti imasmiṃ pañcakepi.Pisaddena heṭṭhā vuttaṃ pañcakaṃ apekkhati.Sabbatthāti sabbesu pañcakesu.ti saccaṃ. Pubbe avuttanayaṃ yaṃ vacanamatthi, taṃ vacanaṃ ettha pañcakesu na atthīti yojanā.

459. In the two Saṅghabheda sections, ete means these qualities. Te means the unwholesome things, etc. Itī means thus. "Yaṃ kammaṃ" is the connection. "Diṭṭhiṃ vinidhāya" is the relationship. In one set of five, this connection of meaning should be made, that is the relationship. Etthāpi means in this set of five also. The word pi refers to the set of five mentioned below. Sabbathā means in all the sets of five. means truly. The statement which was not previously mentioned, that statement is not present in these sets of five, that is the connection.

Āvāsikavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Āvāsika Section

461.Āvāsikavagge ‘‘haritvā’’ti imināyathābhatanti ettha bharadhātuyā haraṇatthañca kiriyāvisesanabhāvañca dasseti. ‘‘Ṭhapito’’ti iminānikkhittoti ettha khipadhātuyā ṭhapanatthaṃ dasseti.

461. In the Āvāsika section, with "haritvā," the word yathābhataṃ, the root "bhara" shows both the meaning of carrying and the state of being an adverb of action. With "ṭhapito," the word nikkhitto, the root "khipa" shows the meaning of placing.

462.Pariṇāmetīti pariṇataṃpāpeti. ‘‘Niyāmeti kathetī’’ti iminā adhippāyatthaṃ dasseti,etthāti āvāsikavagge.

462.Pariṇāmeti means causes to be transformed. With "niyāmeti katheti," it shows the meaning of intention, ettha means in the Āvāsika section.

Kathinatthāravaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Kathinatthāra Section

467.Kathinatthāravaggeotamasikoti ettha avatamaṃ gato otamasikoti dassento āha ‘‘andhakāragato’’ti. Andhakārasaddena tamasaddo andhakārapariyāyoti dasseti.Tanti otamasikaṃ.Asamannāharantoti taṃ asamannāharanto, kasmā asamannāharantoti āha ‘‘kiccayapasutattā vandana’’nti.Ekatoti kopena saddhiṃ. Verī visabhāgapuggalo ekato ākodhena vattanaṭṭhenaekāvattoti vuccati.Pahareyyāti vandantaṃ pahareyya. ‘‘Aññaṃ cintayamāno’’ti iminā aññasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittaṃ vidahati ṭhapetītiaññavihitoti dasseti.

467. In the Kathinatthāra section, otamasiko, showing that one has gone into deep darkness, he says, "andhakāragato." With the word "andhakāra," he shows that the word "tama" is a synonym for darkness. Taṃ means the otamasika. Asamannāharanto means not bringing that to mind, why not bringing to mind, he says "kiccayapasutattā vandanaṃ." Ekato means together with anger. A hostile person, an incompatible individual, being together, is called ekāvatto in the sense of acting without anger. Pahareyya means might strike the one venerating. With "aññaṃ cintayamāno," he shows that placing the mind on another object, establishing it, is aññavihito.

ukkhittako. Tehīti catūhi. Avandiyesu pannarasapuggalesūti sambandho.Antarā vuttakāraṇena cāti antare vuttena ‘‘tañhi vandantassa mañcapādādīsupi nalāṭaṃ paṭihaññeyyā’’tiādinā kāraṇena ca.Itoti pannarasapuggalamhā.Itīti evaṃ. Sace uddesācariyo ca ovādācariyo ca navako hoti, na vandanīyo.Sabbatthāti kathinatthāravagge.

ukkhittako. Tehī means by four. The connection is among the fifteen individuals who should not be venerated. Antarā vuttakāraṇena ca means and by the reason stated in between, such as "indeed, while venerating, the forehead might strike against the legs of a couch, etc." Ito means from the fifteen individuals. Itī means thus. If the preceptor who gives the lesson and the preceptor who gives the advice are new monks, they are not to be venerated. Sabbathā means in the Kathinatthāra section.

Iti kathinatthāravaggavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the explanation of the Kathinatthāra section.

Niṭṭhitā ca upālipañcakavaṇṇanāya yojanā.

And the explanation of the Upāli Pañcaka is completed.

Āpattisamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Origin of Offences

470.‘‘Acittako āpajjatī’’tiādīsu evamattho veditabboti yojanā.Acittako āpajjatīti acittako hutvā āpajjati. Eseva nayoacittako vuṭṭhātīti etthāpi. Yaṃkiñci āpattinti sambandho. Itaraṃ āpattinti yojanā.Dhammadānaṃ karomīti ‘‘sabbadānaṃ dhammadānaṃ jinātī’’ti (dha. pa. 354) ca ‘‘amataṃdado ca so hoti, yo dhammamanusāsatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.42) ca bhagavatā vuttavacanaṃ sutvā dhammadānaṃ karomi.Domanassikoti domanassena yutto, domanassavanto vā.Etthāti abyākatamūle.

470. In "Acittako āpajjatī," etc., this meaning should be understood, that is the connection. Acittako āpajjatī means one commits an offence while being without intention. The same method applies to acittako vuṭṭhāti also. Whatever offence, that is the connection. "Itaraṃ āpattiṃ" is the connection. Dhammadānaṃ karomi means having heard the words spoken by the Blessed One, "the gift of Dhamma excels all gifts" (Dhp. 354) and "he is a giver of the Deathless who instructs in the Dhamma" (SN 1.42), I will give the gift of Dhamma. Domanassiko means endowed with displeasure, or possessing displeasure. Ettha means in the root of the unclassified.

473.Yassa yassāti sikkhāpadassa.Taṃ sabbanti sabbaṃ taṃtaṃsamuṭṭhānasikkhāpadaṃ.

473.Yassa yassa means of which ever sikkhāpada. Taṃ sabbaṃ means all that, that specific sikkhāpada related to the origin.

Aparadutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

A Collection of Further Second Verses

(1) Kāyikādiāpattivaṇṇanā
(1) Explanation of Bodily Offences, etc.

474.Chaāpattiyo kāyikāti ettha cha āpattiyo nāma kāti āha ‘‘antarapeyyāle’’tiādi. Antarapeyyāle vuttāti sambandho. ‘‘Kāyadvāre samuṭṭhitattā’’ti iminā kāye samuṭṭhantītikāyikāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Tasmiṃyeva antarapeyyāle vuttāti sambandho. ‘‘Vajjapaṭicchādikāyā’’tiādināchādentassa tissoti ettha tiṇṇaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyā’’tiādināpañca saṃsaggapaccayāti ettha pañcannaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti.

474. Cha āpattiyo kāyikā means here, what are the six bodily offences, he says "antarapeyyāle," etc. It is stated in the intermediate passage, that is the connection. With "kāyadvāre samuṭṭhitattā," it shows the meaning of the word kāyikā, arising in the body. It is stated in that same intermediate passage, that is the connection. With "vajjapaṭicchādikāyā," etc., in chādentassa tisso, it shows the nature of the three. With "bhikkhuniyā," etc., in pañca saṃsaggapaccayā, it shows the nature of the five.

aruṇugge tissoti ettha tiṇṇaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti.Dve yāvatatiyakāti saṃvaṇṇetabbena ‘‘ekādasa yāvatatiyakā nāmā’’ti saṃvaṇṇanāya viruddhabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘paññattivasena panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Imasmiṃ sāsane’’ti iminā etthasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.Ekena sabbasaṅgahoti ettha eko nāma ko, sabbāni nāma kānīti āha ‘‘yassa siyā’’tiādi. ‘‘Nidānuddesenā’’ti iminā ekassa sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sikkhāpadānañca pātimokkhuddesānañcā’’ti imehi padehi sabbasarūpaṃ dasseti. Saṅgaha saddena kammachaṭṭhīsamāso.

aruṇugge tisso, here it shows the nature of the three. Dve yāvatatiyakā, rejecting the contradictory nature to the explanation "ekādasa yāvatatiyakā nāmā," he says "paññattivasena pana," etc. With "imasmiṃ sāsane," it shows the scope of the word "ettha." Ekena sabbasaṅgaho, here, what is the one, what are the all, he says "yassa siyā," etc. With "nidānuddesena," it shows the nature of the one. With these words "sikkhāpadānañca pātimokkhuddesānañca," it shows the nature of all. With the word "saṅgaha," it is a karmadhāraya compound.

dve duṭṭhullacchādanāti ettha dvinnaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti.

dve duṭṭhullacchādanā, here it shows the nature of the two.

gāmantare catassoti ettha catassannaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti. Puna ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā’’tiādinācetassā nadipārapaccayāti ettha catassannameva sarūpaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Cīvaradāne pācittiya’’nti iminā pācittiyabhāvena sadisattā saṅkhyāviseso na kātabboti dasseti.

gāmantare catasso, here it shows the nature of the four. Again, with "bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā," etc., in cetassā nadipārapaccayā, here it shows the nature of the four. With "cīvaradāne pācittiyaṃ," it shows that because of similarity due to being a pācittiya, a numerical distinction should not be made.

(2) Desanāgāminiyādivaṇṇanā
(2) Explanation of Desanāgāminī, etc.

475.Eketthāti etthasaddo sāsanavisayo.

475.Ekettha, here the word "ettha" has the Sāsana as its scope.

Ekasikkhāpadampi natthītipisaddo bahusikkhāpadāni pana pagevāti ca āpatti pana pagevāti ca āpattīpi natthīti ca atthaṃ dasseti.

Ekasikkhāpadampi natthi, the word pi shows the meaning that many sikkhāpadas are certainly not there, and certainly an offence is not there, and even an offence is not there.

dvetthāti pāṭhe etthasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.Ubhinnanti bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ. Aññathā pana kittakā paṭhamāpattikāti āha ‘‘itarathā panā’’tiādi. Tatthaitarathāti paññattito aññena pakārena.Kammañcāti kammañatti ca.Kammapādikā cāti kammapādañatti ca.Navasu ṭhānesūti osāraṇādīsu navasu ṭhānesu.Dvīsūti ñattidutiya, ñatticatutthakammesu.

In the reading dvettha, it shows the scope of the word "ettha." Ubhinnā means of both monks and nuns. Otherwise, how many are the first offences, he says "itarathā pana," etc. There, itarathā means in a manner different from the rule. Kammañcā means both the motion regarding the act. Kammapādikā cā means both the foot-motion regarding the act. Navasu ṭhānesū means in the nine instances such as expulsion, etc. Dvīsu means in motions with declaration and second motion, and motions with declaration and fourth motion.

Kāraṇabhūtenāti hetubhūtena, ‘‘karaṇabhūtenā’’tipi pāṭho, sādhakatamasattibhūtenāti attho.

Kāraṇabhūtenā means having the nature of a cause, there is also the reading "karaṇabhūtena," meaning having the nature of the most effective instrument.

Tesanti addhānahīnādīnaṃ.Etthāti ‘‘tayo puggalā na upasampādetabbā’’ti pāṭhe, etesu aṅgahīnādīsu vā.Yoti puggalo. Aparipūro na yācatīti sambandho. Mātughātakādayo karaṇadukkaṭakā cāti yojanā.Tatthāti tesu ñattikappanādīsu.Ñattikappanāti ñattividhi.Vippakatapaccattanti vippakataṃ paccattaṃ.Atītakaraṇanti atītassa karaṇaṃ. Vitthārento āha ‘‘vatthusampannaṃ hī’’tiādi.Tayo kammāna saṅgahāti ettha chandabhedarakkhanatthāya nakāre niggahitalopo.Nāsitakāti nāsetabbā puggalā, nāsitabbātināsitā,nāsitā eva nāsitakā.Tiṇṇaṃ janānanti tiṇṇaṃ upasampadāpekkhajanānaṃ ekūpajjhāyena nānācariyena hutvāti yojanā.Ekānussāvanāti ekato anussāvanā.

Tesaṃ means of those with deficient limbs, etc. Ettha means in the reading "tayo puggalā na upasampādetabbā," or among these, those with deficient limbs, etc. Yo means the individual. "Aparipūro na yācati" is the connection. "Mātughātakādayo karaṇadukkaṭakā cā" is the connection. Tattha means in those such as declaration-motion, etc. Ñattikappanā means the procedure of declaration. Vippakatapaccattaṃ means a matter affecting one's individuality that has been reversed. Atītakaraṇaṃ means the doing of what is past. Explaining in detail, he says "vatthusampannaṃ hī," etc. Tayo kammāna saṅgahā, here, for the purpose of protecting the division of consent, the elision of the nasal consonant by assimilation. Nāsitakā means individuals who should be destroyed, should be destroyed, therefore nāsitā, those who are destroyed are indeed nāsitakā. Tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ means for three individuals desiring ordination, being with one preceptor, having different teachers, that is the connection. Ekānussāvanā means reciting together.

Pādonāma kahāpaṇassa catutthabhāgo.Māsakonāma pādassa pañcamabhāgo.Pārājikanti vanappatiṃ chindantassa dutiyapārājikaṃ (pārā. 110).Anodissāti ‘‘manusso maratū’’tiādinā na uddisitvā.Tenāti visena.

Pādo means a quarter of a kahāpaṇa. Māsako means a fifth part of a pāda. Pārājikaṃ means the second pārājika (pārā. 110) for one who fells a forest tree. Anodissā means not specifying with "manusso maratū," etc. Tenā means by the poison.

Bhikkhunovādakavaggasminti sāmaññādhāro.Dasasu sikkhāpadesūti visesādhāro.Paṭhamasikkhāpadamhiyevāti dasasu sikkhāpadesu paṭhamasikkhāpadamhiyeva. Upasampannāya bhikkhuniyāti sambandho. ‘‘Āpatti hotī’’ti iminā ‘‘cīvarenā’’ti padassa sambandhaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti.

Bhikkhunovādakavaggasmiṃ is a general location. Dasasu sikkhāpadesū is a specific location. Paṭhamasikkhāpadamhiyeva means among the ten sikkhāpadas, only in the first sikkhāpada. The connection is to the fully ordained nun. With "āpatti hoti," it shows the place of connection for the word "cīvarena."

tattikāti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti. Tā catasso parimāṇā yāsaṃ āpattīnantitattikā. Nipannassāpi tattikāti etthāpi eseva nayo.ti bhikkhunī.

tattikā, here it shows the scope of the word "ta." Those four measures are the offences of which, therefore tattikā. Nipannassāpi tattikā, here also the same method applies. means the nun.

(3) Pācittiyavaṇṇanā
(3) Explanation of Pācittiya

476.Pañca bhesajjānīti sabbiādīni pañca bhesajjāni. Imaṃ āpattinti sambandho. Pacchā āpannoti yojanā.

476. Pañca bhesajjānī means the five medicines beginning with butter, etc. This offence, that is the connection. One who incurs it afterwards, that is the connection.

Ekaṃkabaḷanti ekaṃ ālopaṃ,tumhamūleti tumhaṃ santike.

Ekaṃ kabaḷaṃ means one mouthful, tumhamūle means in your presence.

Yathāvatthukanti vatthuanulomaṃ, āpattiyo desitāva hontīti yojanā.

Yathāvatthukaṃ means in accordance with the object, the offences are declared, that is the connection.

Kokālikādīnantiādisaddena kaṭamodakatissakādayo (pārā. 417) saṅgaṇhāti. Pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge pācittiyañca caṇḍakāḷikāya bhikkhuniyā pācittiyañcāti yojanā.Payuttavācāpaccayāti viññattinimittādīhi pakārena yuttāya vācāya paccayā.Āpatti pārājikassāti pārājikassa āpajjanaṃ. Athavāpārājikassāti assa bhikkhussa pārājikā āpatti hotīti vā pārājikā āpatti assa bhavatīti vā yojanā kātabbā.Itīti imā cha āpattiyo āpajjatīti yojanā.

Kokālikādīnaṃ, the word "ādi" includes the Kaṭamodakatissakas (pārā. 417), etc. For non-relinquishing the evil view, a pācittiya, and for the nun Caṇḍakāḷikā, a pācittiya, that is the connection. Payuttavācāpaccayā means because of speech connected in a suitable way with intimation and signs, etc. Āpatti pārājikassā means incurring a pārājika. Or, pārājikassā means that monk has a pārājika offence, or a pārājika offence occurs to him, or that connection should be made. Itī means these six offences are incurred, that is the connection.

Tathevāti yathā khādane, tatheva maṃsaṃ lasuṇaṃ ajjhoharamānāti yojanā. ‘‘Paṇītabhojanānī’’ti ca ‘‘akappiyamaṃsa’’nti ca padāni ‘‘ajjhoharamānā’’ti padena sambandhitabbāni.

Tathevā means just as with eating, so also consuming meat and garlic, that is the connection. The words "paṇītabhojanānī" and "akappiyamaṃsa" should be connected with the word "ajjhoharamānā."

Pañca ṭhānānīti pañca āpattisaṅkhātāni ṭhānāni.Tatthāti pañcasu sahadhammikesu.Dvinnanti bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ.Tesanti sikkhamānādīnaṃ.Pañcannamevāti sahadhammikānaṃyeva.Vinicchayavohāroti vinicchayavacanaṃ. Iminā cattāri adhikaraṇāni paṭikkhipati.Aḍḍakammaṃ nāmāti abhiyuñjantānaṃ kammaṃ nāma.

Pañca ṭhānānī means the five places that are counted as offences. Tattha means among the five co-religionists. Dvinnaṃ means of the monks and nuns. Tesaṃ means of the sikkhamānās, etc. Pañcannameva means only of the co-religionists. Vinicchayavohāro means the expression of judgement. With this, he rejects the four kinds of legal questions. Aḍḍakammaṃ nāmā means the act of those who accuse.

pañjannaṃ vinicchayoti ettha pañcasarūpaṃ dasseti. Sobhaṇabhāvaṃ vitthārento āha ‘‘katavītikkamo hī’’tiādi.Abbhuṇhasīloti abhinavuppannasīlo. Abbhuṇhasīlo nāma atthato pākatikasīloti āha ‘‘pākatiko’’ti, pakatisīlena niyuttoti attho.

pañjannaṃ vinicchayo, here it shows the nature of the five. Elaborating on the state of being adorned, he says "katavītikkamo hī," etc. Abbhuṇhasīlo means one whose virtue has newly arisen. Abbhuṇhasīlo means in meaning, natural virtue, he says "pākatiko," meaning engaged by natural virtue.

kāyikāti padassa taddhitabhāvaṃ dasseti.Mukhaṃ oloketabbanti etthavuttāti sambandho.

He shows the nature of the taddhita (formed with a suffix) of the word kāyikā.Mukhaṃ oloketabbaṃ, here the connection is "vuttā."

Catunnaṃ desanāya cāti ettha ‘‘desanāyā’’ti padaṃ ādipadalopanti āha ‘‘accayadesanāyā’’ti.ti accayadesanā. Abhinilīyitvā dhanunā mārentītiabhimārā.

Catunnaṃ desanāya cā, here, the word "desanāyā" means the elision of the initial word, he says "accayadesanāyā." means the confession of transgression. Having completely concealed, killing with a bow is abhimārā.

Chejjaṃhotīti ettha chejjaṃ nāma pārājikāpajjanamevāti āha ‘‘devadatto viya pārājikaṃ āpajjatī’’ti.Imā pana āpattiyoti pārājikathullaccayāpattiyo.

Chejjaṃ hotī, here chejjaṃ means only incurring a pārājika, he says "devadatto viya pārājikaṃ āpajjati." Imā pana āpattiyo means the pārājika, thullaccaya, and āpatti offences.

(4) Avandanīyapuggalādivaṇṇanā
(4) Explanation of Individuals Not to be Venerated, etc.

477.Tesanti dasannaṃ puggalānaṃ. ‘‘Saddhi’’nti imināsāmīcenāti ettha sahatthe karaṇavacananti dasseti.Sāmīcenāti ca sāmīcinā kattabbaṃsāmīcaṃkammaṃ, tena sāmīcena.Dasa cīvaradhāraṇāti padassa samāsabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘dasa divasāni atirekacīvarassa dhāraṇā’’ti.

477. Tesaṃ means of the ten individuals. With "saddhi," it shows that in sāmīcena, the instrumental case is in the sense of "with." Sāmīcena means a proper act should be done, that proper act, by that proper act.

Katisatantiādīsu dvīsu gāthāpādesu catūsu vibhatyantapadesu purimaṃ purimena, pacchimañca pacchimena yathākkamaṃ yojetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘katisataṃ āpattiyo rattisataṃ chādayitvānā’’ti. Pacchimagāthāya pubbaḍḍhepi eseva nayo.Ayaṃ hīti ayaṃ eva vakkhamāno.Etthāti gāthāyaṃ.Yoti bhikkhu, paṭicchādetīti sambandho.Itīti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho.

In katisataṃ, etc., in the four inflectional words in the two verse lines, showing that the first should be connected with the first, and the last with the last, in order, he says "katisataṃ āpattiyo rattisataṃ chādayitvānā." In the first half of the last verse also, the same method applies. Ayaṃ hī means this one indeed, which will be spoken. Ettha means in the verse. Yo means the monk, the connection is "paṭicchādeti." Itī means this is the meaning in brief.

Heṭṭhā vuttesu catūsu catukkesu dhammena samaggaṃ apanetvā dvādasa kammadosā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Adhammena vaggakammaṃ, adhammena samaggakammanti yojetabbaṃ.

It should be seen that in the four sets of four mentioned below, having removed the agreement with the Dhamma, twelve faults of action have been stated. One should connect "adhammena vaggakammaṃ, adhammena samaggakammaṃ."

Etthāti chasu kammesu.Etadevāti dhammena samaggakammameva.

Ettha means in the six acts. Etadevā means only the agreement with the Dhamma.

Yaṃ desitāti ettha yaṃsaddo vacanavipallāsoti āha ‘‘yāni desitānī’’ti. ‘‘Desitānī’’ti iminādesitāti ettha nikārassa ākārādesabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Pariyantaparicchedabhāvarahitattā’’ti iminā natthi antaṃ pariyantametassātianantanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.Tanti nibbānaṃ, jitanti sambandho. Kena kaṃ kinti katvā jitanti āha ‘‘bhagavatā kilesagaṇaṃ abhimadditvā’’ti. Kena kaṃ kinti katvā kiṃ jitaṃ viyāti āha ‘‘raññā sapattagaṇaṃ abhimadditvā rajjaṃ viyā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘raññā’’ti iminā ‘‘kenā’’ti pucchaṃ vissajjesi. ‘‘Sapattagaṇa’’nti iminā ‘‘ka’’nti pucchaṃ vissajjesi. ‘‘Abhimadditvā’’ti iminā ‘‘kinti katvā’’ti pucchaṃ vissajjesi. ‘‘Rajja’’nti iminā ‘‘ki’’nti pucchaṃ vissajjesi.Sapattagaṇanti verigaṇaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – raññā sapattagaṇaṃ abhimadditvā rajjaṃ rājabhāvaṃ jitaṃ viya, bhagavatā kilesagaṇaṃ abhimadditvā nibbānaṃ jitanti.Svevāti bhagavā eva. ‘‘Nibbikāratāyā’’ti iminā tādisaddo nibbikāratthavācako anipphannapāṭipadikoti dasseti. ‘‘Vivekapañcaka’’nti iminā kāyacittaupadhivasena vivekattayampi gahetabbaṃ vivekabhāvena samānattā. Tena bhagavatāti sambandho. ‘‘Yāni satta āpattikkhandhānī’’ti imināeketthāti ettha ekasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti.Tatthāti sattasu āpattikkhandhesu.Ettha panāti samathesu pana.ti saccaṃ.Tassāti sammukhāvinayassa.Aṭṭhakathāsūti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu.Mayaṃ panāti saṅgahakārakā amhe pana, buddhaghosanāmakā mayaṃ panāti attho, rocayāmāti sambandho. Kassa kimatthaṃ gahetvā rocesīti āha ‘‘vināti nipātassa paṭisedhanamatthamatta’’nti. ‘‘Vināti nipātassā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘atthamatta’’nti pade vācakasambandho. Attano sādhyavacanaṃ buddhavacanasaṅkhātena sādhakavacanena sādhento āha ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādi.

Yaṃ desitāti In this, the word "yaṃ" is a transformation of the word, hence he (the commentator) says, "yāni desitāni". "Desitāni": By this, he shows that in desitā, the "i" is replaced by "ā". "Pariyantaparicchedabhāvarahitattā": By this, he shows the meaning of the word ananta as "natthi antaṃ pariyantam etassa" (that which has no end or limit). Tanti refers to Nibbāna, jitanti is a connection. How and what is conquered? Answering this question, he says: "bhagavatā kilesagaṇaṃ abhimadditvā" (by the Blessed One, having crushed the host of defilements). Asking how, what and what is conquered, he answers, "raññā sapattagaṇaṃ abhimadditvā rajjaṃ viyā" (like a king, having crushed the host of enemies, [conquers] the kingdom). Here, with "raññā", he answers the question "kena?" (by whom?). With "sapattagaṇaṃ", he answers the question "kaṃ?" (what?). With "abhimadditvā", he answers the question "kinti katvā?" (having done what?). With "rajjaṃ", he answers the question "kiṃ?" (what?). Sapattagaṇanti means the host of enemies. Here is the construction: just as a king, having crushed the host of enemies, conquers the kingdom, so the Blessed One, having crushed the host of defilements, conquers Nibbāna. Svevāti means the Blessed One alone. "Nibbikāratāyā": By this, he shows that the word "tādi" expresses immutability and is a non-inflected word. "Vivekapañcaka": By this, the three kinds of seclusion (viveka) are to be taken in terms of body, mind and basis (upadhi), because of their similarity in the nature of seclusion. Therefore, it is related to Bhagavată (by the Blessed One). "Yāni satta āpattikkhandhānī": By this, he shows the scope of the word eketthā. Tatthāti in those seven aggregates of offenses (āpattikkhandha). Ettha panāti here in the summaries. ti truly. Tassāti of that Sammukhāvinaya. Aṭṭhakathāsuti in all commentaries. Mayaṃ panāti we who are compilers; the meaning is, we, named Buddhaghosa, approve. Asking for whom and for what purpose, he approves having taken what, he says, "vināti nipātassa paṭisedhanamatthamatta"nti (only the meaning is the prohibition by the particle "vina"). The phrase "vināti nipātassa" has a relation of indicator to the word "atthamatta". While establishing his own proposition with the establishing statement consisting of the Buddha's words, he says, "vuttampi ceta"ntiādi (and this was also said, etc.).

Aṭṭhārasa aṭṭhakānīti adhammadiṭṭhibheda, dhammadiṭṭhibheda, vematikabhedesu tīsu ekamekaṃ mūlaṃ katvā tayo tayo mūliṃ katvā nava honti, tesu dhammadiṭṭhibhedesu dhammadiṭṭhibhedaṃ apanetvā aṭṭha honti, tāni aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūsu yojetvā aṭṭhārasa aṭṭhakāni hontīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Chaūnadiyaḍḍhasatanti catucattālīsādhikaṃ satanti vuttaṃ hoti.

Aṭṭhārasa aṭṭhakānīti means eighteen collections of wrong views (adhamma-diṭṭhi), correct views (dhamma-diṭṭhi), and doubt (vematika); taking each of the three as a root and making three from each root results in nine. Among those, removing the difference of correct view from the divisions of correct view leaves eight; these eight when combined with the eighteen grounds for division become the eighteen aṭṭhakas, this should be seen. Chaūnadiyaḍḍhasatanti means one hundred and forty-six is said.

Ekekavatthusminti aṭṭhārasasu bhedakaravatthūsu ekekasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ.

Ekekavatthusminti in each ground among the eighteen grounds for division.

Iti gāthāsaṅgaṇikavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the connection in the commentary on the Gāthāsaṅgaṇika.

Sedamocikagāthā

Sedamocikā Gāthā

(1) Avippavāsapañhāvaṇṇanā
(1) Explanation of the Avippavāsa Question

479.Sedamocikagāthāsūti adhippāyatthassa gambhīrattā taṃ cintentānaṃ vinayadharānaṃ kāye sedaṃ mocetītisedamocikā,sāyeva gāthā sedamocikagāthā, tāsu. ‘‘Akappiyasambhogo na labbhatī’’ti iminā kappiyasambhogo labbhatīti dasseti. Kappiyasambhogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nahāpanabhojanādī’’ti vuttaṃ.Anāpattīti mātubhikkhuniyā anāpatti.Esā pañhāti ettha pañhasaddo sabhāvatiliṅgoti saddasatthesu (saddanītidhātumālāyaṃ 16 hakārantadhātu; abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ 115 gāthāyaṃ) vutto, idha itthiliṅgavasena vutto. ‘‘Paṇḍitehī’’ti iminā kusalassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti, paṇḍitattā kusaloti adhippāyo.Assāti pañhāya.Etanti vissajjanaṃ.Assāti gāthāya.

479.Sedamocikagāthāsu: Because of the profundity of the implied meaning, sedamocikā refers to the verses that cause sweat to break out on the bodies of Vinaya experts contemplating them; sedamocikagāthā refers to those verses, in them. "Akappiyasambhogo na labbhatī": By this, he shows that association with what is allowable (kappiya) is attainable. To show the association with what is allowable, "nahāpanabhojanādī"ti (bathing, eating, etc.) is stated. Anāpattiti No offense for the nun who is a mother. Esā pañhāti Here, the word "pañhā" (question) is stated in the books on grammar as having the characteristic of being in all three genders, here it is stated in the feminine gender. "Paṇḍitehī": By this, he shows the reason for the wholesome, the intention is that it is wholesome because of being wise. Assāti of the question. Etanti the answer. Assāti of the verse.

Ekādasa vivajjiyāti avibhattikaniddeso, ekādasa vivajjiyeti attho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ye’’tiādi.Tepīti pisaddo gāthāyaṃ luttaniddiṭṭhagamyamānabhāvaṃ dasseti.

Ekādasa vivajjiyāti is a non-inflected designation, the meaning is "ekādasa vivajjaye". Therefore, it is said "ye"tiādi (those, etc.). Tepīti the "pi" particle shows the implied meaning which is unstated but understood in the verse.

Ayanti nhāpitapubbako bhikkhu.Nimmitabuddhanti buddhena nimmitaṃ buddharūpaṃ.

Ayanti this bhikkhu who was formerly a barber. Nimmitabuddhanti a Buddha-image created by a Buddha.

Vivajjiyāti ettha yakāro tvāpaccayassa kāriyoti āha ‘‘vivajjetvā’’ti. Asīsakaṃ yaṃ taṃ kabandhaṃ atthīti yojanā. Asīsakattā kena sarīrena jīvitaṃ bandhatītikabandho. Yassāti kabandhassa.

Vivajjiyāti Here, he says that the "ya" is a modification of the "tvā" suffix, hence "vivajjetvā". The construction is: that which is headless, that is what is called a trunk (kabandha). Because of being headless, with what body does it bind its life? [That is a] kabandha. Yassāti of that trunk.

ti saccaṃ.Teti abhabbapuggalā.

ti truly. Teti those incapable individuals.

Vācāti ettha yakāralopoti āha ‘‘vācāyā’’ti.Iti meti evaṃ mama. Evaṃ vadamāne mama vacananti yojanā. Athavāitimeti evaṃ ime, evaṃ vadamāne ime janāti yojanā. Saddampīti iminā girasaddo saddapariyāyoti dasseti.ti saccaṃ. Tuṇhībhūtassa nisinnassa tassa bhikkhunoti yojanā. Yadi manodvāre āpatti nāma natthi, evaṃ sati kasmā āpajjeyya vācasikanti vuttanti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi.Tenāti tasmā.Assāti bhikkhussa.

Vācāti Here, he says that there is elision of the "ya", hence "vācāya". Iti meti thus to me. The construction is: thus, my statement. Or itimeti thus these, the construction is thus these people who are speaking. With saddampīti, he shows that the word "gira" (speech) is a synonym for "sadda" (sound). ti truly. The construction is: of that bhikkhu sitting silently. If there is no offense in the mind-door, in that case, why was it said that there is a verbal offense? He says "yasmā panā"tiādi (because, however, etc.). Tenāti therefore. Assāti to that bhikkhu.

ti bhikkhunī, āpajjatīti sambandho.Vuttappakāranti ‘‘gāmantarapariyāpanna’’nti vuttappakāraṃ.

ti that bhikkhuni, is liable, is the connection. Vuttappakāranti of the kind stated, "gāmantarapariyāpanna".

Tāsūti dvīsu bhikkhunīsu.

Tāsūti in those two bhikkhunis.

Caturo janāti ettha catunnaṃ janānaṃ sarūpaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ācariyo ca tayo ca antevāsikā’’ti.Sāhatthikāti sahatthā avaharitā.Āṇattiyāpīti āṇattena avaharitāpi.Itaresanti antevāsikānaṃ, ekeko māsakoti sambandho.Etthāti parivāre sedamocikagāthāyaṃ.

Caturo janāti Here, showing the nature of the four people, he says "ācariyo ca tayo ca antevāsikā"ti (the teacher and three resident pupils). Sāhatthikāti removed with their own hands. Āṇattiyāpīti removed by command also. Itaresanti to the resident pupils, one month each is the connection. Etthāti in the Sedamocikā verse in the Parivāra.

(2) Pārājikādipañhāvaṇṇanā
(2) Explanation of the Pārājikā Question, etc.

480.Santhatapeyyālañcāti paṭhamapārājikavibhaṅge (pārā. 65) vuttaṃ santhatapeyyālañca.

480.Santhatapeyyālañcāti and the extended passage (peyyāla) about spreading out, stated in the first Pārājika Vibhaṅga (pārā. 65).

Liṅgaparivattaṃ sandhāyāti sati liṅge parivatte paṭiggahaṇassa vijahanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

Liṅgaparivattaṃ sandhāyāti having in mind the giving up of acceptance when the gender changes.

Yoti bhikkhu, pariṇāmetīti sambandho. Attano atthāyāti yojanā.

Yoti the bhikkhu, transforms, is the connection. For one's own purpose, is the construction.

Assāti gāthāya.Kākauhadanti kākehi karīsussaggaṃ.Kaddamamakkhitanti kaddamena makkhitaṃ. Kāyagatāneva hutvāti sambandho.

Assāti of the verse. Kākauhadanti excrement of crows. Kaddamamakkhitanti smeared with mud. Being just inherent in the body, is the connection.

ti vitthāro. Anariyaṃ taṃ itthiṃ vā taṃ purisaṃ vā haneyyāti yojanā. Liṅgaparivattena hetubhūtena itthibhūtaṃ, purisabhūtañcāti sambandho.Itthibhūtanti ca itthī hutvā bhūtaṃ, itthibhāvaṃ vā pattaṃ.

ti expansion. Should kill that ignoble woman or that man, is the construction. Because of the change of gender being the cause, having become a woman, and having become a man, is the connection. Itthibhūtanti having become a woman, or having attained the state of being a woman.

Migasiṅgatāpasoti migasiṅganāmako (jā. aṭṭha. 5.17.96 ādayo) tāpaso.Sīhakumāroti sīhabāhukumāro. Ādisaddena bhūridattādayo saṅgaṇhāti.

Migasiṅgatāpasoti the ascetic named Migasiṅga. Sīhakumāroti Prince Sīhabāhu. By "ādi", he includes Bhūridatta and others.

Kurundiyaṃ āgatanti sambandho.

It is present in the Kurundi, is the connection.

‘‘Saccaṃ bhaṇantoti gāthāyā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘saccaṃ bhāsato lahukāpatti hotī’’ti ettha itisaddena sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Saccaṃ bhaṇanto’’ti gāthāya iti atthoti yojanā.

The phrase "Saccaṃ bhaṇantoti gāthāyā"ti should be connected with the word "iti" in "saccaṃ bhāsato lahukāpatti hotī"ti (for one speaking the truth, there is a light offense). The construction is: in the verse "saccaṃ bhaṇanto", this is the meaning.

(3) Pācittiyādipañhāvaṇṇanā
(3) Explanation of the Pācittiyā Question, etc.

481.Salākaṃ dentassa assa bhikkhussa chejjaṃ hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Pārājikaṃ hotī’’ti imināhotichejjanti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.

481.To that bhikkhu who gives a ticket, there is expulsion (chejja), is the construction. By "pārājikaṃ hotī", he shows the meaning of the word hotichejja.

Suppatiṭṭhitanigrodhasadisaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ, tameva vā gahetabbaṃ.

A tree root similar to a well-established banyan tree, or that itself should be taken.

Tissitthiyoti ettha bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, paccattavacanaṃ vāti āha ‘‘tāsupī’’ti. ‘‘Yaṃ taṃ methunaṃ nāma ta’’nti iminā ‘‘methunaṃ yaṃ ta’’nti padānaṃ samānādhikaraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Na sevatī’’ti imināna seveti ettha tikārassa ekārādesabhāvaṃ (jā. aṭṭha. 4.11.76 putto vā pitaraṃ yāce viya) dasseti.Tayo puriseti ettha ‘‘upagantvā’’ti padaṃ ajjhāharitvā sambandhitabbanti dassento āha‘‘tayo purisepi upagantvā’’ti. Iminātayo puriseti ettha upayogatthe upayogavacananti dasseti. Purimanayaṃ gahetvā etthāpi ‘‘tīsu purisesū’’ti bhummatthe upayogavacananti atthopi yujjateva. Imaṃ nayaṃ gahetvā purimapadepi tissitthiyo upagantvāti upayogatthe upayogavacananti atthopi yujjateva. Tasmā te dve nayā aññamaññopadesadāyakanayā nāmāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Ubhatobyañjanasaṅkhāte’’ti iminā anariyasaddena ubhatobyañjanova idha gahetabboti dasseti. ‘‘Nācaratī’’ti imināna cācareti etthāpi tisaddassa ekārādesabhāvameva dasseti. Methunadhammassa pubbabhāgaṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ āpajjituṃ vāyamantiyā tassā bhikkhuniyāti yojanā.

Tissitthiyoti Here, he says whether it is an expression in the locative sense or in the accusative sense, hence "tāsupī"ti (in those also). "Yaṃ taṃ methunaṃ nāma taṃ": By this, he shows the equivalence of the words "methunaṃ yaṃ taṃ". "Na sevatī": By this, he shows that in na seve, the "ti" is replaced by "e". Tayo puriseti Here, showing that the word "upagantvā" (having approached) should be supplied and connected, he says "tayo purisepi upagantvā"ti (even three men, having approached). By this, he shows that in tayo purise, the expression is in the locative sense for the sense of proximity. Taking the previous method, here also, the meaning would fit as "tīsu purisesū"ti (in three men), as an expression in the locative sense for the sense of the ground. Taking this method, in the previous phrase also, the meaning would fit as "tissitthiyo upagantvā"ti (three women, having approached) as an expression in the locative sense for the sense of proximity. Therefore, it should be seen that those two methods are called methods that provide mutual instruction. "Ubhatobyañjanasaṅkhāte": By this, he shows that only one with both sets of organs (ubhatobyañjana) should be taken here by the word "anariya". "Nācaratī": By this, here also he shows that there is only the replacement of "ti" by "e". The construction is: to that bhikkhuni who is striving to incur a bodily contact that is the preliminary action of the sexual act (methunadhamma).

Assāti gāthāya, titthiyo ārādhako hotīti yojanā.Tatthevāti titthiyavatte eva.Assāti titthiyassa.Tamevāti titthiyavattameva.

Assāti of the verse, the adherent of another sect is pleased, is the construction. Tatthevāti in that very practice of another sect. Assāti of that adherent of another sect. Tamevāti that very practice of another sect.

Tanti ajjhoharaṇaṃ.

Tanti that taking in.

Saṅghenapīti pisaddo na kammārahenevāti dasseti. ‘‘Na kātabba’’nti iminā saṅghopi kammārahopi bhūmigatova vaṭṭatīti dasseti.

Saṅghenapīti the "pi" particle shows that it is not suitable for only the one eligible for Saṅgha business. By "na kātabbaṃ", he shows that even the Saṅgha and the one eligible for Saṅgha business are only suitable while on the ground.

Assāti gāthāya vinicchayoti sambandho.

Assāti of the verse, the decision is the connection.

Tassāti avassutapurisassa. ‘‘Kāraṇenā’’ti iminātenāti padassa kāraṇatthaṃ dasseti. Evasaddo pana sambhavavasena yojito, na aññena kāraṇenāti attho, avassutassa purisassāti sambandho.Gahaṇeti uyyojitāya gahaṇe.Tañca paribhogapaccayāti ettha tasaddassa visayaṃ, paribhogassa ca sambandhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tañca panā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘āpatti’’nti iminā tasaddassa visayaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Tassā uyyojitāyā’’ti iminā paribhogassa sambandhaṃ dasseti.Tassāti uyyojitāya.

Tassāti of that man who has emitted semen. By "kāraṇena", he shows the sense of reason for the word tenā. However, the word "eva" is connected in the sense of possibility, the meaning is not by another reason, it is related to "avassutassa purisassa" (of the man who has emitted semen). Gahaṇeti in the taking of one who has been sent as a go-between. Tañca paribhogapaccayāti Here, showing the scope of "ta" and the relation of enjoyment, he says "tañca panā"tiādi (and that, however, etc.). There, by "āpatti", he shows the scope of "ta". By "tassā uyyojitāyā", he shows the connection of enjoyment. Tassāti of the one sent as a go-between.

Vajjaṃ na phusatīti padassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aññaṃ navaṃ āpatti’’nti.

Showing the meaning of the phrase vajjaṃ na phusatī, he says "aññaṃ navaṃ āpatti"nti (another new offense).

Iti sedamocikagāthāvaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the connection in the commentary on the Sedamocikā Gāthā.

Pañcavaggo

The Fifth Chapter

Kammavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Kamma Chapter

482.Kammavagge ‘‘gaṇanaparicchedavacana’’nti iminā na pamāṇavacananti dasseti. Iminā kammānaṃ tato ūnātirekabhāvaṃ nivāreti. Gaṇiyategaṇanaṃ,paricchijjati anenātiparicchedo,gaṇanassa paricchedogaṇanaparicchedo. Atha vā gaṇiyati anenāti gaṇanaṃ, tameva paricchedo gaṇanaparicchedo, soyeva vacanaṃgaṇanaparicchedavacanaṃ. Apalokanakammaṃ nāmāti kattabbaṃ kammanti sambandho.Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghaṃ sodhetvā chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā’’ti vuttena eva nayena.

482.In the Kamma Chapter, "gaṇanaparicchedavacana"nti: By this, he shows that it is not a statement of measure. By this, he prevents the state of being less or more than that for the Kammas. Gaṇanaṃ: it is counted, therefore it is counting (gaṇana). Paricchedo: it is determined by this, therefore it is determination (pariccheda). Gaṇanaparicchedo: the determination of counting. Or, that by which it is counted is gaṇana, that same determination is gaṇanapariccheda, that same statement is gaṇanaparicchedavacana. The connection is: Apalokanakammaṃ nāmāti that which is to be done is called kamma. Vuttanayenevāti by the very method stated, "sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghaṃ sodhetvā chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā"ti (having purified the Saṅgha standing within the boundary, having brought the consent of those eligible to give consent).

Tatthāti catūsu kammesu, ñattidutiyakammaṃ pana atthīti sambandho.

Tatthāti in those four kammas, but there is a Ñattidutiyakamma, is the connection.

Tatthāti dvīsu kammesu.Avasesāti chahi kammehi avasesā. Yadi parivattetvā kataṃ daḷhīkammaṃ na hoti, evaṃ sati daḷhīkammatthāya kinti kātabbanti āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘akkharaparihīnaṃ vā padaparihīnaṃ vā’’ti idaṃ akkharapadānaṃ gaḷitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Duruttapadaṃ vā’’ti idaṃ sithiladhanitādiaparipuṇṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ettha ‘‘duruttakkharaṃ vā’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ.Idanti punappunaṃ vacanaṃ.Kammaṃ hutvāti sukammaṃ hutvā.

Tatthāti in those two kammas. Avasesāti those remaining from the six kammas. If a reinforcing action done by inversion is not valid, in that case, what should be done for the sake of the reinforcing action? He says "sace panā"tiādi (if, however, etc.). There, "akkharaparihīnaṃ vā padaparihīnaṃ vā"ti (deficient in letters or deficient in words): this is said having in mind the slurring of letters and words. "Duruttapadaṃ vā"ti (or a word badly uttered): this is said having in mind what is incomplete such as a loose sound, etc. Here, "duruttakkharaṃ vā"ti (or a letter badly uttered) should be supplied. Idanti the repeated utterance. Kammaṃ hutvāti having become a well-done action.

483.Sammukhākaraṇīyaasammukhākaraṇīyesu asammukhākaraṇīyāni appakattā paṭhamaṃ dassetvā sesānaṃ sammukhākaraṇīyabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthatatthāti tesu dvīsu, asammukhākaraṇīyaṃ nāma aṭṭhavidhaṃ hotīti sambandho.Tattha tatthāti tesu tesu khandhakesu. ‘‘Sukataṃ hotī’’ti vacanasāmatthiyato sammukhākatampi sukataṃ hotīti atthopi gahetabbo.

483.Among actions to be done in the presence and actions not to be done in the presence, first showing the nature of the actions not to be done in the presence because they are few, he then shows the state of being actions to be done in the presence for the remaining, hence he says "tatthā"tiādi (there, etc.). There, tatthāti in those two, the connection is: the action not to be done in the presence is of eight kinds. Tattha tatthāti in those various Khandhakas. From the force of the statement "sukataṃ hotī" (it is well-done), it should also be understood that even an action done in the presence is well-done.

Sesānīti aṭṭhakammehi sesāni.Etānīti kammāni.Vatthuvipannānīti vatthunā vipannāni.

Sesānīti those remaining from the eight kammas. Etānīti these kammas. Vatthuvipannānīti ruined by the object.

Tesampīti paṭipucchākaraṇīyānampi.Etthāti ‘‘paṭipucchākaraṇīya’’nti pade. ‘‘Pucchitvā’’ti imināpaṭipucchāti padassa tvāpaccayantabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kātabba’’nti iminākaraṇīyanti ettha anīyasaddassa kammatthabhāvaṃ dasseti.Yathādinnāyāhi cuditakena yathādinnāya.Vippalapantassāti vikārena yaṃ vā taṃ vā vacanaṃ palapantassa cuditakassāti sambandho.Sabbatthāti sabbesu ‘‘tajjanīyakammārahassā’’tiādīsu.

Tesampīti even of those requiring cross-examination. Etthāti in the phrase "paṭipucchākaraṇīya". "Pucchitvā": By this, he shows the state of ending in the "tvā" suffix for the word paṭipucchā. "Kātabba"nti: By this, he shows that in karaṇīya, the "anīya" suffix is in the passive sense. Yathādinnāyāhi by the offering in whatever way by the accuser. Vippalapantassāti related to the accuser who is babbling words that are distorted this way and that. Sabbatthāti in all [instances] beginning with "tajjanīyakammārahassa" (one worthy of censure).

Anuposathadivaseti uposathadivasato aññasmiṃ divase. Tamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘uposathadivaso nāmā’’tiādi.Kattikamāsanti pacchimakattikamāsaṃ. Tassa pavāraṇamāsattā ‘‘ṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sāmaggidivaso ca yathāvuttā cātuddasapannarasā ca uposathadivaso nāmāti yojanā.Yatrahīti yasmiṃ pana vihāre, ṭhapentīti sambandho.Antarāti cātuddasīpannarasīnaṃ majjhe.

Anuposathadivase means on a day other than the Uposatha day. To illustrate this meaning, he said, "Uposatha day means," etc. Kattikamāsa means the later Kattika month. Because it is the month for Pavāraṇā, "except" is said. The day of harmony (sāmaggidivaso), and the fourteenth and fifteenth days as mentioned, are called Uposatha days; this is the connection. Yatra hī means in whichever monastery; "they establish" is the connection. Antarā means in between the fourteenth and fifteenth days.

Paccukkaḍḍhitvā ṭhapitadivasoti pacchā upari kaḍḍhitvā ṭhapitaṃ kattikakāḷapakkhacātuddasiṃ vā pañcadasiṃ vā sandhāya vuttaṃ.Idhāpīti apavāraṇāya pavāraṇaṭṭhānepi. Pāḷiyamāgatanayato aññampi nayaṃ dassento āha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi.Antimavatthunti pārājikavatthuṃ.Yassāti puggalassa. Iminā kammāraho puggalo vatthu nāmāti dasseti.

Paccukkaḍḍhitvā ṭhapitadivaso means referring to the fourteenth or fifteenth day of the dark fortnight of Kattika, which has been subsequently postponed and established later. Idhāpī means even in the place of Pavāraṇā for Apavāraṇā. Showing another method different from the one that appears in the Pāli, he said, "Apica," etc. Antimavatthu means the last case (vatthu) which is Pārājika. Yassā means of the person. With this, he shows that a person who is eligible for the act (kamma) is called a case (vatthu).

484.Dabbassa aggaṇhanaṃ vatthuaparāmasanaṃ nāma na hoti, atha kho nāmassa aggaṇhanamevāti āha ‘‘tassa nāmaṃ na gaṇhātī’’ti. Aparāmasanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘suṇātu me’’tiādi.

484. The non-recitation of the name of the thing (dabba) is not called touching the case (vatthuaparāmasanaṃ); rather, only the non-recitation of the name is what it is, he says, "Tassa nāmaṃ na gaṇhāti". Showing the way of non-recitation, he says, "Suṇātu me," etc.

Puggalaṃ na parāmasatīti etthapuggalonāma upajjhāyoti āha ‘‘yo upasampadāpekkhassa upajjhāyo’’ti.Tanti upajjhāyaṃ.

In Puggalaṃ na parāmasatī, puggalo means the preceptor (upajjhāyo), he says, "Yo upasampadāpekkhassa upajjhāyo". Ta means that preceptor (upajjhāyaṃ).

Sabbena sabbanti sabbathā sabbaṃ, nipātasamudāyoyaṃ, sabbena vā ākārena sabbaṃ ñattinti yojanā.

Sabbena sabba means entirely and completely; this is a collection of particles (nipāta), or it can be connected as: a complete intimation in every way.

Iti imehītiādi nigamanaṃ.

Iti imehī etc., is the conclusion.

485.‘‘Vuttanayenevā’’ti atidisitvāpi ñattikammavācānaṃ asadisattā aparāmasanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘evaṃ panā’’tiādi. Tatthanesanti vatthusaṅghapuggalānaṃ, paṭhamānussāvane vā dutiyatatiyānussāvanāsu vā vattabbe vadantoti sambandho.

485. Even after alluding to "Vuttanayeneva," because the declaration (ñatti) and Kamma speeches are dissimilar, he shows the manner of non-recitation (aparāmasanaṃ), saying "Evaṃ panā," etc. There, nesa means of the case (vatthu), the Saṅgha, and the person; the connection is that they speak or are about to speak in the first proclamation (anussāvana), or in the second or third proclamation.

Sāvanaṃ hāpetīti ettha anusaddo lopoti āha ‘‘anussāvanaṃ na karotī’’ti. ‘‘Sāvanaṃ hāpetī’’ti ettha na kevalaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ anussāvanaṃ akarontoyeva sāvanaṃ hāpeti nāma, atha kho anussāvanāya duruttachaḍḍanampi hāpetiyeva nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘yopī’’tiādi. ‘‘Sakimeva vā dvikkhattuṃ vā’’ti iminā tikkhattuṃ aparipūrentoyeva sāvanaṃ hāpeti nāmāti dasseti. Imassa vacanassa sāmatthiyato ñattidutiyakamme ekakkhattuto, ñatticatutthakamme tikkhattuto atirekaṃ kammavācaṃ karonto na hāpetīti ñāyati.

In Sāvanaṃ hāpetī, the particle 'anu' is omitted, he says, "Anussāvanaṃ na karoti". In "Sāvanaṃ hāpetī," it is not only that he abandons the proclamation entirely that he is called abandoning the proclamation, but he is also called abandoning it by uttering wrongly in the proclamation, showing this he says, "Yopī," etc. With "Sakimeva vā dvikkhattuṃ vā," he shows that he is called abandoning the proclamation even without completing it three times. From the force of this statement, it is understood that one who makes a Kamma speech more than once in Ñattidutiyakamma, or more than three times in Ñatticatutthakamma, does not abandon it.

‘‘Chaḍḍetī’’ti ettha chaḍḍanassa padakkharānaṃ gaḷitabhāvena pākaṭattā taṃ adassetvā ‘‘duruttaṃ karotī’’ti ettha duruttameva dassento āha ‘‘duruttaṃ karotīti ettha panā’’tiādi. Karontena bhikkhunā upalakkhetabboti sambandho.

In "Chaḍḍetī," because the abandonment is evident by the slurred nature of the letters, without showing that, showing only the "duruttaṃ karotī," he says, "Duruttaṃ karotīti ettha panā," etc. It should be noted by the bhikkhu who is doing it; this is the connection.

dasadhāti dasappakārena.Byañjanabuddhiyāti vaddhetītibuddhi,byañjanameva akkharameva sithilādivasena dasadhā buddhibyañjanabuddhi,tāya. Ettha ‘‘dasadhā’’ti padena ‘‘byañjanabuddhī’’ti samāsapadassa antare dasadhāsaddassa lopaṃ dasseti ‘‘kammajaṃ evā’’tiādīsu (visuddhi. 2.450; visuddhi. mahāṭi. 2.450) viya. Ettha hi evasaddena kammena eva jātaṃkammajanti samāsaṃ katvā samāsamajjhe evasaddalopaṃ dasseti.Pabhedoti viseso. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – sithilañca dhanitañca dīghañca rassañca garukañca lahukañca niggahitañca sambandhañca vavatthitañca vimuttañcāti dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyāva pabhedo viseso ñātabboti. ‘‘Sithila’’nti ādīni dasa padāni ‘‘akkharaṃ padaṃ byañjana’’nti napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttapāṭhaṃnissāya vuttānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

dasadhā means in ten ways. Byañjanabuddhiyā, by which it increases is buddhi, only the consonant is byañjana, the consonant itself is a ten-fold buddhi as slack etc. byañjanabuddhi, by that. Here, with the word "dasadhā," he shows the elision of the word dasadhā in the middle of the compound word "byañjanabuddhī," like in "kammajaṃ evā" etc. (Visuddhi. 2.450; Visuddhi. mahāṭi. 2.450). Here, indeed, by making the compound with the word eva: born only of action is kammaja, he shows the elision of the word eva in the middle of the compound. Pabhedo means distinction. Here, this is the connection – Slack, and Voiced, and Long, and Short, and Heavy, and Light, and Nasalized, and Connected, and Determined, and Released; thus a ten-fold distinction, a difference, should be known by consonant understanding. The ten words "Sithila" etc., should be regarded as having been spoken relying on the text spoken in the neuter gender as "akkharaṃ padaṃ byañjana".

sithilaṃ. Gāḷhena vacīpayogena vattabbaṃ akkharaṃdhanitaṃ. Tesvevāti pañcasu eva vaggesu. Na kevalaṃ dīghameva garukaṃ nāma, atha kho saṃyogaparampīti āha ‘‘yaṃ vā’’tiādi. Yaṃ akkharaṃ saṃyogaparaṃ katvā vuccati, tampigarukaṃnāmāti yojanā. Saṃyogo paro yassa akkharassātisaṃyogaparaṃ. ‘‘Saṃyogapada’’ntipi pāṭho. Yaṃ asaṃyogaparaṃ katvā vuccati, tampilahukaṃnāmāti yojanā. Yaṃ sānunāsikaṃ katvā vattabbaṃ, taṃniggahitaṃnāmāti yojanā.Niggahetvātiniggahitaṃnāma atthato ṭhānakaraṇānaṃ avissajjanaṃ amuñcananti āha ‘‘avissajjetvā’’ti. Yaṃ sambandhitvā vuccati, taṃsambandhaṃnāmāti yojanā. Yaṃ asambandhaṃ katvā vuccati, taṃvavatthitaṃnāmāti yojanā. Yaṃ aniggahetvā vuccati, taṃvimuttaṃnāmāti yojanā.Aniggahetvāti aniggahaṃ nāma atthato vissajjananti āha ‘‘vissajjetvā’’ti.

sithilaṃ. The letter that should be uttered with firm vocal effort is dhanitaṃ. Tesvevā means in those five vaggas themselves. It is not only the long that is called heavy, but also that which is followed by a conjunct consonant, he says, "Yaṃ vā," etc. The letter which is spoken by making it followed by a conjunct consonant, that is also called garukaṃ; this is the connection. A conjunct consonant is after which letter is saṃyogaparaṃ. There is also a reading "Saṃyogapada". The letter which is spoken by making it not followed by a conjunct consonant, that is also called lahukaṃ; this is the connection. That which should be uttered by making it nasalized, that is called niggahitaṃ; this is the connection. Niggahetvā means niggahitaṃ means not releasing the place and instrument of articulation regarding the meaning, he says, "avissajjetvā". That which is uttered connectedly, that is called sambandhaṃ; this is the connection. That which is uttered disconnectedly, that is called vavatthitaṃ; this is the connection. That which is uttered un-nasalized, that is called vimuttaṃ; this is the connection. Aniggahetvā means aniggahaṃ means releasing regarding the meaning, he says, "vissajjetvā".

tatthāti tāsu dasasu byañjanabuddhīsu. Tathāsaddena takārassa thakārakaraṇañca sithilassa dhanitakaraṇañca atidisati, tathā ‘‘pattakallaṃ esā ñattī’’tiādivacanañca sithilassa dhanitakaraṇaṃ nāmāti yojanā.

tatthā means in those ten kinds of consonant-discernment. With the word "tathā," he alludes to making the 'ta' into 'tha' and making the slack into voiced; similarly, the statement "pattakallaṃ esā ñattī" etc. is called making the slack into voiced; this is the connection.

Itīti evaṃ. Sithile kattabbe dhanitaṃ karotīti sambandho.Cattāri byañjanānīti cattāri akkharāni. Byañjanasaddo hi idha akkharavācako. Catassannaṃ byañjanabuddhīnaṃ kammadūsanaṃ dassetvā itarāsaṃ adūsanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘itaresu panā’’tiādi.Anukkamāgatanti ariyehi otaritvā anukkamena āgataṃ.Paveṇinti santatiṃ. Vināsetvā vutte kiṃ kammavācākopo hotīti āha ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi.Na kuppatīti na nassati. Kasmā pana kammavācā na kuppati, nanu kammaṃ kopentī kammavācā kuppatīti āha ‘‘imāni hī’’tiādi. Hi yasmā na kopenti, tasmā kammavācā na kuppatīti yojanā.

Itī means thus. The connection is that he makes voiced what should be slack. Cattāri byañjanānī means four letters. For the word byañjana here is expressive of letters. After showing that four consonant-discernments are defective in the act (kamma), showing that the others are not defective, he says, "itaresu panā," etc. Anukkamāgata means having descended from the Elders and come in sequence. Paveṇi means continuity. If it is spoken after destroying it, what defect is there in the Kamma speech? He says, "sace panā," etc. Na kuppatī means does not fail. But why does the Kamma speech not fail, since the Kamma speech fails when it corrupts the act (kamma)? He says, "imāni hī," etc. Since these do not corrupt, therefore the Kamma speech does not fail; this is the connection.

suttantikā,kaccāyanādayo, suttantikā ca te therā cetisuttantikattherā. Na vaṭṭatīti akkharavikāro na vaṭṭati. Vinayadharena kammavācā kātabbāti sambandho.Yathāpāḷiyāti bhagavatā yathāvuttāya pāḷiyā.Byañjananiruttiyāti byañjananiruttiyaṃ.Itarathāti vuttadosapariharaṇato aññena pakārena.

suttantikā, Kaccāyana etc., Suttantikā and those Elders are suttantikattherā. Na vaṭṭatī means alteration of letters is not fitting. The Vinaya-holder should make the Kamma speech; this is the connection. Yathāpāḷiyā means according to the Pāli as spoken by the Blessed One. Byañjananiruttiyā means in consonant etymology. Itarathā means in another way than avoiding the stated faults.

Akālevā sāvetīti etthaakālonāma anokāsoti āha ‘‘anokāse’’ti. Anokāso nāma ñattianussāvanānaṃ pubbāparavitathanti āha ‘‘ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Paṭhamaṃyeva ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā paṭhamaṃyeva anussāvanakammaṃ katvāti yojanā. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃyevā’’ti hi padaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.

In Akāle vā sāvetī, akālo means not the right time, he says, "anokāse". Anokāso means that the sequence of the declaration and proclamation is faulty, he says, "ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā," etc. Having established the declaration first, having done the proclamation act first; this is the connection. For the word "paṭhamaṃyeva" is relative to the sequence. Itī etc. is the conclusion.

486.Yā ekavīsati bhikkhū na gaṇhāti, ayaṃatikhuddakasīmānāmāti yojanā.Ekavīsati bhikkhūti abbhānakamme kammārahena saddhiṃ ekavīsati bhikkhū. Yattha sīmāyaṃ nisīdituṃ na sakkonti, ayaṃatikhuddakasīmānāmāti yojanā.Nisīditunti aññamaññassa hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā parimaṇḍalākārena nisīdituṃ.Tatthāti atikhuddake.Etthāti sesasīmāsu. Yā sammatā hoti, ayaṃatimahatīnāmāti yojanā.Kesaggamattenāpīti pisaddo tato atirekena pana pagevāti dasseti. Aghaṭitaṃ asambandhaṃ nimittaṃ imissātiaghaṭitanimittā. Khaṇḍanimittabhāvaṃ akhaṇḍanimittadassanena pākaṭaṃ karonto āha ‘‘puratthimāyā’’tiādi.Pubbakittitanti paṭhamakittitaṃ.Tatthevāti uttarāya eva disāya.Aparāpīti pisaddo dutiyatthasampiṇḍanattho. Yā sammatā hoti,khaṇḍanimittānāmāti yojanā.Animittupaganti yathābhūtakathanavisesanameva, na byavacchedavisesanaṃ tacasārādiggahaṇena animittupagabhāvassa pākaṭattā.Antarāti majjhe. Yā sammatā hoti, sāchāyānimittānāma, animittā nāmāti yojanā.

486. The boundary which does not accommodate twenty-one bhikkhus is called atikhuddakasīmā; this is the connection. Ekavīsati bhikkhū means twenty-one bhikkhus together with the one who is eligible for the act (kamma) in the act of invitation (abbhānakamma). The boundary in which they cannot sit, that is called atikhuddakasīmā; this is the connection. Nisīditu means to sit in a circular fashion without abandoning each other's arm's reach. Tatthā means in the very small one. Etthā means in the remaining boundaries. That which is agreed upon, that is called atimahatī; this is the connection. Kesaggamattenāpī the pi-particle shows that it is certainly more than that, not to mention definitely. A sign which is not fitted, not connected, is aghaṭitanimittā. Making the state of having a broken sign evident by showing an unbroken sign, he says, "puratthimāyā," etc. Pubbakittita means the first mentioned. Tatthevā means in the northern direction itself. Aparāpī the pi-particle is for combining a second meaning. That which is agreed upon is called khaṇḍanimittā; this is the connection. Animittupaga is only a specification of speaking according to reality, not a specification of exclusion, since the state of being animittupaga is evident by the taking of heartwood etc. Antarā means in the middle. The one that is agreed upon, that is called chāyānimittā, or is called animittā; this is the connection.

Evaṃ sammatāpīti pisaddo asammatā pana pagevāti dasseti.Sīmāya sīmanti padānaṃ sambandhāpekkhattā, tassa ca asamānabhāvato tesaṃ visuṃ visuṃ sambandhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘attano sīmāya paresaṃ sīma’’nti.Sambhindatīti sambandhaṃ karoti. Ettha hi bhididhātu dvidhākaraṇatthavācako, dhātvatthabādhakena saṃtyūpasaggena sambandhavācako hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Tatthāti tāsu dvīsu sīmāsu.Itīti evaṃ.Tāsūti sīmāsu.

Evaṃ sammatāpī the pi-particle shows that it is definitely even more so in the case of one that is not agreed upon. Sīmāya sīma because the words are dependent on connection, and because that is unequal, showing their connection separately, he says, "attano sīmāya paresaṃ sīma". Sambhindatī means makes a connection. Here, it should be regarded that the root bhidi means to divide in two, and by the prefix 'saṃ', which subverts the meaning of the root, it is expressive of connection. Tatthā means in those two boundaries. Itī means thus. Tāsū means in the boundaries.

487-8.Yampi kammappattachandārahalakkhaṇanti yojanā.Tatthāti tassaṃ parisato kammavipattiyaṃ.Tampīti kammappattachandārahalakkhaṇampi, vuttamevāti sambandho.Tatthāti ‘‘cattāro bhikkhū pakatattā kammappattā’’ti pāṭhe.Anukkhittāti saṅghena ukkhepanīyakammassa akatattā anukkhittā.Parisuddhasīlāti pārājikaṃ anajjhāpannattā parisuddhasīlā. Imehi padehi pakati attā sabhāvo etesantipakatattāti atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kammassa arahā’’ti iminā‘‘kammappattā’’ti padassa chaṭṭhīsamāsañca pattasaddassa arahaanucchavikatthabhāvañca dasseti.Tehīti catūhi pakatattehi.Etīti āgacchati.Avasesāti catūhi pakatattehi avasesā.Yassa panāti puggalassa pana.Kammārahoti kammassa araho.

487-8. And that which is the characteristic of being eligible for the act (kamma), having desire (chanda), and being worthy, this is the connection. Tatthā means in that failing of the assembly in the act (kamma). Tampī means even that which is the characteristic of being eligible for the act (kamma), having desire (chanda), and being worthy, is the same as what has been said; this is the connection. Tatthā means in the text "cattāro bhikkhū pakatattā kammappattā". Anukkhittā means unexpelled because the act of expulsion (ukkhepanīyakamma) has not been done by the Saṅgha. Parisuddhasīlā means of pure morality because they have not fallen into Pārājika. By these words it shows the meaning that they are of normal behavior, the self is the nature of whom are pakatattā. By "Kammassa arahā" it shows that the sixth case compound of the word kammappattā and that the word patta is in the sense of being worthy and fitting.

489.Etthāti paṇḍakādīnaṃ avatthubhāvadassanaṭṭhāne.

489.Tehī means by those four who are normal. Etī means comes. Avasesā means remaining by those four who are normal. Yassa panā means of whichever person. Kammāraho means worthy of the act (kamma).

Apalokanakammakathā
Apalokanakammakathā

495-6.Tatthāti catūsu kammesu.Etthāti osāraṇādipāṭhe.Padasiliṭṭhatāyāti loke padānaṃ siliṭṭhabhāvato.Tatthāti osāraṇādīsu pañcasu. Kaṇṭakasāmaṇerassa yā sā daṇḍakammanāsanā atthi, sā nissāraṇāti yojanā. ‘‘Micchādiṭṭhiko hotī’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato’’ti vuttaṃ. Micchādiṭṭhi hi liṅganāsanāya kāraṇaṃ hoti.Soti sāmaṇero, ‘‘nissajjāpetabbo’’ti pade kāritakammaṃ, vuttakammaṃ vā.Taṃ laddhinti dhātukammaṃ, avuttakammaṃ vā. Kinti kātabbanti āha ‘‘evañca pana kammaṃ kātabba’’nti.

495-6.Tatthā means in those four kammas. Etthā means in the reading of osāraṇā etc. Padasiliṭṭhatāyā means because of the cohesion of the words in the world. Tatthā means in those five, osāraṇā etc. That which is the punishment (daṇḍakamma) and banishment (nāsanā) of the novice with the boil is nissāraṇā; this is the connection. After saying "Micchādiṭṭhiko hotī," to show that meaning itself, "antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato" is said. For wrong view (micchādiṭṭhi) is the cause of banishment of the sign (liṅganāsanā). So means that novice (sāmaṇero); in the word "nissajjāpetabbo" it is a causative passive, or a stated passive. Taṃ laddhi the object of the root, or an unstated object. How should it be done? He says, "evañca pana kammaṃ kātabba".

Tassāti sahaseyyassa.Alābhāyāti alābhatthāya. ‘‘Cara pire vinassā’’ti iminā nissāraṇākāraṃ dasseti. Attho panassa heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.

Tassā means of that one who sleeps together (sahaseyyassa). Alābhāyā means for the sake of non-gain. With "Cara pire vinassā" he shows the manner of expulsion (nissāraṇā). But its meaning has already been stated below.

Soti samaṇero, osāretabboti sambandho.

So means that novice (samaṇero), he should be expelled; this is the connection.

Svāyanti so ayaṃ sāmaṇero, accayaṃ desetīti sambandho.Soratoti sundaraladdhiyaṃ rato, duladdhito vā suṭṭhu orato.Yathā pureti yathā pubbe ruccati, tathāti yojanā.Kāyasambhogasāmaggidānanti kāyena ca sambhogena ca sāmaggiyā dānaṃ.

Svāya means he, this novice, indicates the transgression; this is the connection. Sorato means delighting in the beautiful view, or well-removed from the bad view. Yathā pure means as he liked before, so it is; this is the connection. Kāyasambhogasāmaggidāna means giving of concord (sāmaggiyā) by body and association.

Evantiādi nigamanaṃ. Yasmā pana brahmadaṇḍo pañcasatikakkhandhake (cūḷava. 445) channasseva paññatto, tasmā tasseva dātabboti āha ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi.Esāti brahmadaṇḍo, aññopi yo bhikkhu viharati, tassapi dātabboti sambandho. Kinti dātabboti āha ‘‘evañca pana dātabbo’’ti. Dātabbākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṅghamajjhe’’tiādi.

Eva etc. is the conclusion. Since the Brahma-penalty (brahmadaṇḍa) was prescribed only for Channa in the Pañcasatikakkhandhaka (Cūḷava. 445), therefore it should be given to him alone, he says, "na kevala," etc. Esā means this brahmadaṇḍa, it should also be given to whichever other bhikkhu is living; this is the connection. How should it be given? He says, "evañca pana dātabbo". Showing the way of giving, he says, "saṅghamajjhe," etc.

Khamāpentassāti saṅghaṃ khamāpentassa tassa bhikkhussāti yojanā.

Khamāpentassā means to that bhikkhu who is making the Saṅgha forgive him; this is the connection.

Paṭisaṅkhāti paṭisaṅkhāya, ñāṇena paccavekkhitvāti attho.

Paṭisaṅkhā means by reflection (paṭisaṅkhāya), having reviewed with knowledge, is the meaning.

Yanti avandiyakammaṃ, anuññātanti sambandho. Kena anuññātanti āha ‘‘bhagavatā’’ti. Kismiṃ khandhake anuññātanti āha ‘‘bhikkhunikkhandhake’’ti. Kesu vatthūsu anuññātanti āha ‘‘tena kho pana…pe… imesu vatthūsū’’ti (cūḷava. 411). Kiṃ katvā anuññātanti āha ‘‘dukkaṭaṃ paññapetvā’’ti. Kinti anuññātanti āha ‘‘anujānāmi…pe… kātabbo’’ti.Tassāti avandiyassa. ‘‘Na osāraṇādīnī’’ti iminā evasaddassa chaḍḍetabbatthaṃ dasseti.Tassāti kammalakkhaṇabhūtassa avandiyassa.Tatthevāti bhikkhunikkhandhakeyeva. Nanti kammalakkhaṇaṃ.Idhāpīti parivāre kammavaggepi.

Ya means that which is the act of non-veneration (avandiyakammaṃ), it is permitted; this is the connection. By whom is it permitted? He says, "bhagavatā". In which section (khandhaka) is it permitted? He says, "bhikkhunikkhandhake". In which cases (vatthūsu) is it permitted? He says, "tena kho pana…pe… imesu vatthūsū" (Cūḷava. 411). Having done what is it permitted? He says, "dukkaṭaṃ paññapetvā". How is it permitted? He says, "anujānāmi…pe… kātabbo". Tassā means of that non-venerable one. With "Na osāraṇādīnī" he shows the meaning of the word "eva" as something to be discarded. Tassā means of that non-venerable one which is the characteristic of the act (kamma). Tatthevā means in the Bhikkhunikkhandhaka itself. Na is the characteristic of the act (kamma). Idhāpī means even in the Kammavagga in the Parivāra.

Apāsādikanti apasādāvahaṃ, apasādajanakaṃ vā.

Apāsādika means causing displeasure, or generating displeasure.

Tatoti avandiyakaraṇato.Imanti bhikkhuṃ.Vandiyanti vanditabbaṃ, vandanaṃ vā.

Tato means from doing the non-veneration. Ima means this bhikkhu. Vandiya means to be venerated, or veneration.

Etthāti apalokanakamme, bhikkhunisaṅghamūlakaṃ katvā paññattanti yojanā.Bhikkhusaṅghassāpīti pisaddo na bhikkhunisaṅghassevāti dasseti.Panasaddo sambhāvanattho, tathā bhikkhunisaṅghamūlakaṃ paññattampīti attho, labhitabbabhāvaṃ vitthārena dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ hī’’tiādi. Yaṃ apalokanakammaṃ karotīti yojanā. Appamattakavissajjakena pana dātabbānīti sambandho.Tesanti sūciādīnaṃ.Soyevāti appamattakavissajjakoyeva.Tatoti appamattakato.Tatthāti senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321). Vuttappakāraṃ gilānabhesajjampīti sambandho.Yopi cāti bhikkhupi ca hotīti sambandho. Tassa dātabbāti sambandho.Tatruppādatoti tasmiṃ mahāvāse uppādapaccayato, gahetvāti sambandho. ‘‘Pesalassā’’tiādinā dussīlādīnaṃ dātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.

Etthāti: the meaning is that it is established having made the bhikkhuni Sangha the basis in the apalokanakamma. Bhikkhusaṅghassāpī: the word pi shows that it is not only for the bhikkhuni Sangha. The word Pana is in the sense of possibility, meaning even that which is established based on the bhikkhuni Sangha. Showing the possibility of obtaining it in detail, he said, "yaṃ hī," etc. The meaning is "that which performs the apalokanakamma." But the connection is that it should be given by one who is not negligent in distributing. Tesanti: of the needles, etc. Soyevāti: only the one who is not negligent in distributing. Tatoti: from the one who is not negligent. Tatthāti: in the description of the Senāsanakkhandhaka (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321). The connection is even the medicine for the sick mentioned. Yopi cāti: the connection is even a bhikkhu. It should be given to him. Tatruppādatoti: due to the cause of arising in that Mahāvāsa. The connection is "having taken." By "Pesalassā," etc., he shows that it is not proper to give to those of bad conduct, etc.

Jaggāpetuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha apucchitvā jaggāpetuṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādi.Odissāti uddisitvā.

Jaggāpetuṃ vaṭṭatī: here, he says that it is proper to care for without asking, "ayaṃ bhikkhū," etc. Odissāti: having specified.

Āsanagharaṃ vāti paṭimāgharaṃ vā, kārako manussoti sambandho. Upanikkhepato gahetvāti sambandho.Saṅghikenapīti pisaddo na kevalaṃ cetiyassa upanikkhepeneva, atha kho saṅghikenapīti dasseti.

Āsanagharaṃ vā: or a shrine room; the connection is that the maker is a human. The connection is "having taken from the deposit." Saṅghikenapī: the word pi shows that it is not only from the deposit of the cetiya, but indeed even from that which belongs to the Sangha.

Yesanti rukkhānaṃ.Tesūti rukkhesu.Ye panāti rukkhā pana, apariggahitā hontīti sambandho.Taṃ panāti apalokanakammaṃ pana. Salākaṃ gaṇhanti etthātisalākaggaṃ,ṭhānaṃ.‘‘Yāgaggabhattagga’’iti etthāpi eseva nayo.Uposathaggeti uposathassa gahaṇaṭṭhāne, uposathageheti attho.Tatthāti uposathagge.Tanti apalokanakammaṃ.

Yesanti: of the trees. Tesūti: in the trees. Ye panāti: but the trees, the connection is "being unowned." Taṃ panāti: but that apalokanakamma. Salākaggaṃ: the place where the lot is taken. ‘‘Yāgaggabhattagga’’ iti: here too, this is the method. Uposathagge: at the place of taking the Uposatha, meaning the Uposatha hall. Tatthā: at the Uposatha hall. Tanti: that apalokanakamma.

Antosīmāyāti anto upacārasīmāya.

Antosīmāyā: inside the boundary of the vicinity.

Sukatamevāti saṅghena katameva.Uposathadivaseti nidassanamattaṃ yasmiṃ kasmiṃci divasepi katattā.

Sukatamevā: done only by the Sangha. Uposathadivase: this is just an example; since it is done on any day.

Phalavārenāti rukkhānaṃ phalagahaṇavārena.Rukkhā dharantīti rukkhā tiṭṭhanti, saṃvijjanti vā.Yehīti bhikkhūhi ropitā, hontīti sambandho.Sā eva katikāti pubbe katā sā eva katikā, aññā katikā na kātabbāti adhippāyo.

Phalavārenā: by the rotation of taking the fruits of the trees. Rukkhā dharantī: the trees stand, or they exist. Yehī: planted by the bhikkhus, the connection is "being." Sā eva katikā: that same agreement made earlier; the intention is that another agreement should not be made.

Aññasmiṃ vihāreti rukkhānaṃ ṭhitavihārato aññasmiṃ vihāre.Tesanti rukkhānaṃ, sāmīti sambandho.Yepīti rukkhāpi, ropitāti sambandho. Aññato ṭhānatoti yojanā.Tesūti rukkhesu.Etthāti vihāre.Tehi panāti pariveṇasāmikehi bhikkhūhi pana.Dasabhāganti dasamabhāgaṃ. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā dasabhāgaṃ datvāti atthaṃ atidisati.

Aññasmiṃ vihāre: in another monastery from the monastery where the trees are located. Tesanti: of the trees, the connection is "owner." Yepī: even the trees, the connection is "planted." The connection is "from another place." Tesū: in the trees. Etthā: in the monastery. Tehi panā: but by the bhikkhus who are the owners of the enclosure. Dasabhāganti: a tenth part. By "Eseva nayo," he extends the meaning to "having given a tenth part."

Sambhāvanīyabhikkhunoti sīlasutādīhi sambhāvanīyassa bhikkhuno.Tatthāti porāṇavihāre.Mūleti pubbe, ādikāleti attho.Nikkukkuccenāti ‘‘abhājitamida’’nti kukkuccavirahena.Khiyyanamattameva tanti taṃ khiyyanaṃ khiyyanamattameva, na sāmaṇerānaṃ khiyyanaṃ ruhatīti attho.

Sambhāvanīyabhikkhuno: to a bhikkhu who is esteemed for his virtue, learning, etc. Tatthā: in the ancient monastery. Mūle: formerly, meaning at the beginning. Nikkukkuccenā: without the worry that "this is not distributed." Khiyyanamattameva tanti: that weariness is only weariness; it does not increase the weariness of the novices.

Panasarukkhanti kaṇṭakīphalarukkhaṃ.Ayaṃ sāmīcīti ayaṃ bhājetvā khādanaṃ anudhammatā.Khāyitanti khāditaṃ. Dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ katikapaṭippassambhanaṃ nayena ñātuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā taṃ adassetvā ekasseva katikapaṭippassambhanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekabhikkhuke panā’’tiādi.Purimakatikāti ‘‘yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjituṃ ruccatī’’ti (pari. aṭṭha. 495-496) pure katā katikā.Tesanti sāmaṇerānaṃ, phātikammanti sambandho.Bhājetvāti sāmaṇerānaṃ bhājetvā. Iminā sāmaṇerānaṃ phātikammaṃ na dātabbampi bhāgaṃ bhājetabbanti dasseti.

Panasarukkhanti: a tree with thorny fruit. Ayaṃ sāmīcī: this dividing and eating is in accordance with the Dhamma. Khāyitanti: eaten. Because the reversal of the agreement for two or three can be understood by inference, without showing that, he shows the reversal of the agreement for one bhikkhu, "ekabhikkhuke panā," etc. Purimakatikā: the agreement made earlier, "it is pleasing to enjoy as one likes" (pari. aṭṭha. 495-496). Tesanti: for the novices, the connection is "benefit." Bhājetvā: having divided for the novices. By this, he shows that even though the benefit for the novices should not be given, the share should be divided.

Sāmantagāmehīti āsannagāmehi, āgantvāti sambandho. Ekaṃ ambaṃ ekaṃ labujanti yojanā. Adiyyamāne dose dassite diyyamāne ānisaṃsampi atthato ñātabbanti dassento āha ‘‘adiyyamāne hī’’tiādi.

Sāmantagāmehī: by the nearby villagers, the connection is "having come." The meaning is "one mango, one labuja." Showing that when a fault is shown when something is not being given, the benefit is also to be understood by implication when something is being given, he says, "adiyyamāne hī," etc.

Tatoti katikavattaṭṭhapanato.Na vattabbāti phaladānakuladūsakattā na vattabbā. Kinti ācikkhitabbanti āha ‘‘nāḷikerādīnī’’tiādi.Anuvicaritvāti padānamanukkamena vicaritvā.Upaḍḍhabhāgoti bhikkhūnaṃ laddhabhāgato upaḍḍho bhāgo.Apaloketvāti saṅghaṃ āpucchitvā.

Tato: from the establishment of the customary practice. Na товаровā: they should not be spoken to because they spoil the families who give fruit. What should be explained? He says, "nāḷikerādīnī," etc. Anuvicaritvā: having gone through the donation in order. Upaḍḍhabhāgo: half the share from the share received by the bhikkhus. Apaloketvā: having asked the Sangha.

Maggagamiyasatthavāhoti maggaṃ gamiko satthavāho.Soti balakkārena gahetvā khādanto.Chāyādīnantiādisaddena ārāmavanāni saṅgahetabbāni.Sace atthīti sace attho atthi.Phalabharitāti phalena paripuṇṇā. ‘‘Phalabhāritā’’tipi pāṭho. Phalasaṅkhātena bhārena samannāgatāti attho.Apaccāsīsantenāti tesaṃ santikā dānapaṭidānaṃ apaccāsīsantena.Pubbe vuttamevāti pubbe saṅghikaṭṭhāne ‘‘kuddho hi so’’tiādinā vuttameva.Etthāti puggalikaṭṭhāne.

Maggagamiyasatthavāho: a caravan going along the road. So: he who eats having taken by force. Chāyādīnanti: by the word ādi, the parks and forests should be included. Sace atthī: if there is a need. Phalabharitā: full of fruit. "Phalabhāritā" is also a reading. Meaning endowed with a burden consisting of fruit. Apaccāsīsantenā: not expecting a gift in return from them. Pubbe vuttamevā: that which was said earlier in the section on Sanghika property, "kuddho hi so," etc. Etthā: in the section on personal property.

Tanti phalārāmaṃ.Soti paṭibalo bhikkhu.Bhāriyaṃ kammanti jagganakammaṃ bhāriyaṃ.Ettakenāti tatiyabhāgaupaḍḍhabhāgamattena. Sabbaṃ phalārāmanti sambandho.Mūlabhāganti paṭhamabhāgaṃ. ‘‘Dasabhāgamatta’’nti iminā tadatthaṃ dasseti.Datvāti saṅghassa datvā.Soti bhikkhu.Akatāvāsanti pubbe akataṃ navaṃ senāsanaṃ.Ārāmanti saṅghassa ārāmaṃ.Tehipīti nissitakehipi. Pisaddo ācariyaṃ apekkhati.Tesanti nissitakānaṃ.Jaggitakāleti jaggitānaṃ rukkhānaṃ pupphaphalabharitakāle.Jagganakāleti jagganamattakāle, jagganamattameva, na jagganakāraṇā kiñci pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā hoti, tasmiṃ kāleti attho. ‘‘Bahu’’ntiādinā vāretabbākāraṃ dasseti.

Tanti: that fruit garden. So: that capable bhikkhu. Bhāriyaṃ kammanti: the work of tending is heavy. Ettakenā: with a third share or a half share. The connection is "the entire fruit garden." Mūlabhāganti: the first share. By "Dasabhāgamatta," he shows its meaning. Datvā: having given to the Sangha. So: that bhikkhu. Akatāvāsa: a new dwelling not made before. Ārāmanti: the ārāma of the Sangha. Tehipī: even by the dependents. The word pi refers to the teacher. Tesanti: of the dependents. Jaggitakāle: at the time when the tended trees are full of flowers and fruits. Jagganakāle: merely at the time of tending, merely the tending; there is neither flower nor fruit due to the tending; the meaning is at that time. By "Bahu," etc., he shows the manner of prohibition.

Anāpucchitvāvāti saṅghaṃ anapaloketvāva.Itīti evaṃ.

Anāpucchitvāvā: without asking the Sangha. Itī: thus.

osāraṇā.

osāraṇā.

nissāraṇā. Ñatti uposatho nāmāti idaṃ kāraṇūpacāravasena vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uposathakammavasena ṭhapitā’’ti. Eseva nayoñattipavāraṇā nāmāti etthāpi.

nissāraṇā. Ñatti uposatho nāmā: this is said from the perspective of the cause. Therefore, he says, "established by way of the Uposatha Kamma." Eseva nayo ñattipavāraṇā nāmā: the same method applies here as well.

Anusāseyyātiādinā paṭhamapurisaeyyavibhattivasena ṭhapitā ñatti attanā paraṃ sammanituṃ ṭhapitā ñatti nāma.Anusāseyyantiādinā uttamapurisaeyyaṃvibhattivasena ṭhapitā ñatti attanāva attānaṃ sammanituṃ ṭhapitā ñatti nāma. Attanāva attā vā paro vā sammaniyati imāya ñattiyātisammuti. Nissaṭṭhapattacīvarādīni dīyanti anenātidānaṃ,ñatti. Vaccaṃ anapekkhitvā vācakassa niyatanapuṃsakaliṅgattā napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttaṃ.

Anusāseyyātiādinā: The ñatti, which is established in the form of the first person singular ending, and is established to acknowledge oneself with another, is called ñatti. Anusāseyyantiādinā: The ñatti, which is established in the form of the third person singular ending, and is established to acknowledge oneself with oneself, is called ñatti. sammuti: Because oneself or another is acknowledged by this ñatti, it is called sammuti. dānaṃ: Because cast-off bowls and robes are given by this ñatti, it is called dānaṃ. Since the word does not depend on gender and is invariably neuter, it is said in the neuter gender.

paṭiggaho.

paṭiggaho.

paccukkaḍḍhanā.

paccukkaḍḍhanā.

kammalakkhaṇaṃ.

kammalakkhaṇaṃ.

‘‘Tathā’’ti padena ‘‘kammalakkhaṇaṃ nāmā’’ti padaṃ atidisati.Tatoti sabbasaṅgāhikañattito. Parā dve ñattiyo kammalakkhaṇaṃ nāmāti yojanā.Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.

‘‘Tathā’’: By the word "Tathā," he extends the phrase "kammalakkhaṇaṃ nāmā." Tato: from all the Sangāhika ñattis. The two ñattis after that are called kammalakkhaṇa. Itī: etc., is the conclusion.

Ñattidutiyakammaṭṭhānabhede osāraṇādīnaṃ visesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vaḍḍhassa licchavino’’tiādi. Sīmāsammuti cātiādinā yojanā kātabbā.

Showing the distinction between osāraṇa, etc., in the ñattidutiyakamma and ñatticatutthakamma, he says, "vaḍḍhassa licchavino," etc. The connection should be made with sīmāsammuti cātiādinā.

Itītiādi nigamanaṃ.

Itī: etc., is the conclusion.

Ñatticatutthakammaṭṭhānabhede yojanānayo pākaṭoyeva.

The method of connection is clear in the ñatticatutthakamma.

497.Catuvaggakaraṇe kammetiādikāya desanāya sambandhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘iti kammāni cā’’tiādi. Tatthaitīti evaṃ dassetvāti sambandho.Tassatthoti tassa ‘‘catuvaggakaraṇe kamme’’tiādivacanassa attho veditabboti sambandho.

497. Showing the connection with the teaching beginning with Catuvaggakaraṇe kammetiādikāya, he says, "iti kammāni cā," etc. There, itī: the connection is "having shown thus." Tassattho: the connection is "the meaning of that statement beginning with 'catuvaggakaraṇe kamme,' etc., should be understood."

Iti kammavaggavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the connection of the commentary on the Kamma Vagga.

Atthavasavaggādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Atthavasa Vagga, etc.

498.Evaṃ kammavaggavaṇṇanaṃ dassetvā tassānantare vuttāya ‘‘dve atthavase paṭiccā’’tiādikāya desanāya anusandhiṃ dassento āha ‘‘idānī’’tiādi, idāni āraddhanti sambandho. Yāni tāni sikkhāpadānīti yojanā.Diṭṭhadhammikaverānanti diṭṭhadhamme pavattattā ca viramitabbattā ca diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ verānaṃ.Saṃvarāyāti ettha saṃpubbo varadhātu pidahanattho, āyasaddo ca tadatthoti āha ‘‘pidahanatthāyā’’ti.Vipākadukkhasaṅkhātānanti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ vipākabhūtānaṃ dukkhasaṅkhātānaṃ.Samparāyikānanti samparāye pavattānaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ sikkhāpadapaññattānisaṃsaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Vajjanīyabhāvato’’ti iminā vajjetabbānītivajjānīti vacanatthaṃ dasseti. Bhāyanti etehītibhayāni. Akkhamaṭṭhenāti asahaṇīyaṭṭhena. ‘‘Akusalānīti vuccantī’’ti iminā vipākadukkhāni phalūpacārena akusalāni nāmāti dasseti. Gaṇabandhabhedanatthāya sikkhāpadaṃ paññattanti evameva pāṭho. Potthakesu pana ‘‘gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ paññatta’’nti pāṭho likhito.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ atthavasavagge.Yanti vacanaṃ.Etthāti imasmiṃ vagge.

498. Having shown the commentary on the Kamma Vagga in this way, showing the connection with the teaching stated immediately after that, beginning with "dve atthavase paṭicca," etc., he says, "idānī," etc. The connection is "now is begun." The connection is "yāni tāni sikkhāpadānīti." Diṭṭhadhammikaverānanti: of the enmities pertaining to the visible realm, because they occur in the visible realm and because they should be abstained from. Saṃvarāyā: here, the root vara with the prefix saṃ means "to cover," and the word āya also has that meaning, so he says, "pidahanatthāyā." Vipākadukkhasaṅkhātānanti: of those known as suffering, which are the result of actions such as killing living beings. Samparāyikānanti: pertaining to the future life. Idhā: in this place of benefits from the establishment of the training rules. By "Vajjanīyabhāvato," he shows the word meaning that "they should be avoided," therefore they are called vajjānī. They are feared because of these, therefore bhayāni. Akkhamaṭṭhenā: in the sense of being unbearable. By "Akusalānīti vuccantī," he shows that the suffering resulting from actions are called unwholesome by way of using the result to describe the cause. The training rule is established for the purpose of breaking the bond of groups; this is exactly the reading. But in the books, the reading is written as "the training rule regarding group meals is established." Sabbatthā: in all the Atthavasa Vagga. Yanti: the statement. Etthā: in this Vagga.

Iti atthavasavaggavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the connection of the commentary on the Atthavasa Vagga.

499.Vattesu vattamāno puggalo osārīyati anenātiosāraṇīyaṃ,kammaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yena kammena osārīyati, taṃ kammaṃ paññatta’’nti. ‘‘Yena kammenā’’tiādinā bhaṇḍanakārakādayo nissārīyanti anena kammenātinissāraṇīyanti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.

499. The Kamma by which a person, continuing in customs, is excluded is called osāraṇīyaṃ. Therefore, it was said, "the Kamma by which one is excluded, that Kamma is established." By "Yena kammenā," etc., he shows the word meaning: "by this Kamma, those who cause disputes, etc., are expelled," therefore it is called nissāraṇīyanti.

500.Sattāpattikkhandhā paññattaṃ nāmāti sambandho.Antarāti kakusandhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānañca amhākaṃ bhagavato ca antare. ‘‘Sikkhāpade’’ti iminā ‘‘apaññatte’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. Makkaṭīvatthuādivinītakathā anupaññattaṃ nāmāti sambandho. ‘‘Sikkhāpade’’ti iminā ‘‘paññatte’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ ānisaṃsavagge.

500. The connection is "seven sections of offenses are called established." Antarā: between the three Buddhas Kakusandha, etc., and our Lord. By "Sikkhāpade," he shows the meaning of the word "apaññatte." The connection is "stories of settled disputes such as the story of the female monkey are called not established." By "Sikkhāpade," he shows the meaning of the word "paññatte." Sabbatthā: in all the Ānisaṃsa Vagga.

Iti ānisaṃsavaggavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the connection of the commentary on the Ānisaṃsa Vagga.

501.Sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ saṅgahanti sambandho.Tatthāti ‘‘nava saṅgahā’’tiādipāṭhe evamattho veditabboti yojanā. ‘‘Vatthunā saṅgaho’’ti iminā ‘‘vatthusmiṃ, vatthūnaṃ saṅgaho’’ti atthaṃ nivāreti.Etthāti ‘‘vatthusaṅgaho’’tiādipāṭhe.ti vitthāro. Yasmā natthīti sambandho.Sabbānīti sikkhāpadāni. ‘‘Saṅgahitānī’’ti iminā saṅgahitabbotisaṅgahoti nibbacanaṃ dasseti.Evaṃ tāvātiādi nigamanaṃ.

501. The connection is "embraces all the training rules." Tatthā: in the reading beginning with "nava saṅgahā," etc., the meaning should be understood thus. By "Vatthunā saṅgaho," he prevents the meaning "in the object, the embrace of objects." Etthā: in the reading beginning with "vatthusaṅgaho," etc. : expansion. The connection is "because it does not exist." Sabbānī: all the training rules. By "Saṅgahitānī," he shows the etymology that "because it should be embraced," therefore it is called saṅgaho. Evaṃ tāvā: etc., is the conclusion.

Yasmā pana saṅgahitāti sambandho.

The connection is "yasmā pana saṅgahitāti."

Evametthātiādinā khandhasamuṭṭhānaadhikaraṇasamathe sampiṇḍetvā nigamanaṃ dasseti.Etthāti saṅgahavagge.

Evametthā: etc., he shows the conclusion by combining the Khandha, Samuṭṭhāna, and Adhikaraṇa Samatha. Etthā: in the Saṅgaha Vagga.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus, in the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya commentary,

Navasaṅgahitavaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

The connection of the commentary on the Nava Saṅgahita is complete.

Niṭṭhitāti niṭṭhaṃ nipphattiṃ itā gatāti niṭṭhitā, atha vā niṭṭhe nipphattiyaṃ itā ṭhitāti niṭṭhitā.Casaddo avadhāraṇattho, niṭṭhitā evāti hi attho.Anuttānatthapadavaṇṇanāti anuttānānaṃ atthavantapadānaṃ, atthānañca padānañca vaṇṇanā.

Niṭṭhitāti: gone to completion, that is, achievement; or standing in completion, that is, achievement. Casaddo: the word ca is in the sense of determination, indeed it is complete. Anuttānatthapadavaṇṇanāti: the description of words and meanings that are not obvious.

Iti parivāravaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

Thus ends the connection of the commentary on the Parivāra.

Niṭṭhitā ca pācityādivaṇṇanāya yojanāti.

And the connection of the commentary on the Pācityādi is complete.

Jādilañchitanāmenanekānaṃ vācito mayā;

The method of connection of the Parivāra Vinaya,

Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Concluding Remarks

ettāvatāti ettakena ‘‘yo kappakoṭīhipi appameyya’’ntiādivacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) paṭṭhāya ‘‘navasaṅgahitavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā’’ti vacanapariyosānānaṃ akkharapadabyañjanānaṃ samudāyabhūtena vacanakkamena, samattāti sambandho.

ettāvatāti: by this much, from the statement "yo kappakoṭīhipi appameyya" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) to the collection of letters, words, and expressions ending with the statement "navasaṅgahitavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā," the connection is "samattāti."

Ubhatovibhaṅgakhandhakaparivāravibhattidesananti ubhatovibhaṅgena ca khandhakena ca parivārena ca vibhajitabbadesanaṃ vinayapiṭakanti sambandho.Nāthoti bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ hitapaṭipattiṃ yācanaṭṭhena ca kilesānaṃ upatāpanaṭṭhena ca veneyyānaṃ hitasukhaṃ āsīsanaṭṭhena ca cittissariyaṭṭhena ca nātho.Veneyyanti vinetabbaṭṭhena veneyyaṃ.Jinoti pañcamārānaṃ jitaṭṭhena jino. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – nātho veneyyaṃ vinento jino ubhatovibhaṅgakhandhakaparivāravibhattidesanaṃ yaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ āhāti.

Ubhatovibhaṅgakhandhakaparivāravibhattidesana means the exposition divided by the Ubhatovibhaṅga, the Khandhaka, and the Parivāra; the Vinayapiṭaka is related to that. Nātho (refuge) is a nātha because of requesting the practice beneficial to monks and nuns, because of tormenting the defilements, because of blessing the trainable with welfare and happiness, and because of being the lord of the mind. Veneyya (trainable) is veneyya because of being able to be trained. Jino (conqueror) is a jina because of conquering the five Māras. The construction here is: the nātha, training the veneyya, the jina, spoke the Ubhatovibhaṅgakhandhakaparivāravibhattidesana, which is the Vinayapiṭaka.

Samadhikasattavīsatisahassamattenāti saha adhikena sattasahassappamāṇena ca vīsatisahassappamāṇena ca ganthenāti sambandho.Tassāti vinayapiṭakassa.Samantapāsādikāti samantato pasādaṃ vahikā, janikā vā. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – tassa samadhikasattavīsatisahassamattena ganthena samantapāsādikā nāma saṃvaṇṇanā samattāti.

Samadhikasattavīsatisahassamattena means with a quantity of twenty thousand and approximately seven thousand more verses; this is the connection. Tassā means of the Vinayapiṭaka. Samantapāsādikā means bringing about or generating serenity from all sides. The construction here is: this commentary called Samantapāsādikā is completed with that quantity of twenty-seven thousand verses plus some more.

Tatridanti tatra idaṃ. ‘‘Tatrā’’ti padaṃ purimavacanāpekkhaṃ. Tatra ‘‘samantapāsādikā nāmā’’ti vacaneti hi attho.Samantapāsādikattasminti paccattatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ hoti ‘‘idampi sīlasmi’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.194 ādayo) viya, samantapāsādikattanti attho. Ayaṃ panettha yojanātatra ‘‘samantapāsādikā nāmā’’ti vacane samantapāsādikāya idaṃ samantapāsādikattaṃ hotīti ayaṃ samantapāsādikabhāvoti attho.

Tatridaṃ means this in that. The word "tatra" (there) refers to the previous statement. The meaning is, in that statement, "named Samantapāsādikā." Samantapāsādikattasmiṃ is a locative absolute used in the sense of the thing itself, like in "idampi sīlasmiṃ" (D.N. 1.194 ff.); the meaning is samantapāsādikatta (the state of being the Samantapāsādikā). The construction here is: in that statement "named Samantapāsādikā," this state of being the Samantapāsādikā belongs to the Samantapāsādikā; this is the meaning of the nature of the Samantapāsādikā.

Ācariyaparaṃparatotiādīsu gāthāsu vuttaṃ navavidhaṃ visesanapadaṃ ‘‘na dissatī’’ti padena sambandhitabbaṃ.Sampassatanti sammā passantānaṃ viññūnanti sambandho.Yatoti yasmā, na dissatīti sambandho.Etthāti saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ.Samantapāsādikātvevāti samantapāsādikā iti eva nāma.Vinayassāti vinayapiṭakassa.Vineyyadamanakusalenāti vineyyānaṃ damane chekena.Lokanāthenāti lokānaṃ nāthena.Lokamanukampamānenāti lokaṃ anukampamānena. Ayañhettha yojanā – ācariyaparaṃparato…pe… vibhaṅganayabhedadassanato sampassataṃ viññūnaṃ ettha kiñci apāsādikaṃ yato na dissati, tasmā vineyyadamanakusalena lokanāthena lokamanukampamānena bhagavatā vuttassa vinayassa ayaṃ samantapāsādikātveva saṃvaṇṇanā pavattāti.

The nine kinds of qualifying terms stated in the verses beginning with Ācariyaparaṃparato (from the lineage of teachers) should be connected with the word "na dissati" (is not seen). Sampassataṃ is connected with viññūnaṃ (the wise ones) who are sammā passantānaṃ (truly seeing). Yato means because, it is connected with "na dissati". Ettha means in this commentary. Samantapāsādikātveva means it is only named Samantapāsādikā. Vinayassa means of the Vinayapiṭaka. Vineyyadamanakusalenā means by the one skilled in taming the trainable. Lokanāthenā means by the lord of the world. Lokamanukampamānenā means by the one who has compassion for the world. The construction here is: because nothing unpleasing is seen here to the wise who truly see from the lineage of teachers…pe…because of showing the distinctions in the method of analysis, therefore this commentary is indeed the Samantapāsādikā of the Vinaya spoken by the Blessed One, the lord of the world, who is skilled in taming the trainable and has compassion for the world.

Tissopi imā sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyo sutvāti sambandho. Kassa santike sutanti āha ‘‘buddhamitto…pe… santike’’ti. ‘‘Buddhamitto’’ti nāmena vissutassa yasassino vinayaññussa dhīrassa therassa santike sutvāti yojanā. ‘‘Sutvā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘āraddhā’’ti pade pubbakālakiriyāvisesanaṃ.

Tissa also heard these Sinhala commentaries; this is the connection. From whom did he hear? He says, "buddhamitto…pe…santike" (from the presence of Buddhamitta…pe…), the construction is, he heard from the presence of the wise Thera, the knower of Vinaya, who was famous by the name Buddhamitta. The word "sutvā" (having heard) is an adverb of the prior action to the word "āraddhā" (was begun).

Mahāmeghavanuyyāne bhūmibhāge patiṭṭhito satthu mahābodhivibhūsito yo mahāvihāro atthīti yojanā.

The construction is: the Mahāvihāra exists in the area of the Mahāmeghavana Park, adorned with the great Bodhi tree of the Teacher.

Tassamahāvihārassa dakkhiṇe disābhāgepadhānagharaṃpadhānagharanāmakaṃ uttamaṃ sucicārittasīlena bhikkhusaṅghena sevitaṃ yaṃ pariveṇaṃ atthi, tattha kārayīti yojanā.

Tassa (of that) Mahāvihāra, in the southern direction, padhānagharaṃ (the main building), the pariveṇa (enclosure) named Padhānaghara, which is excellent and served by the community of monks with pure conduct and morality, exists; he had it built there, this is the construction.

Konāmo kārayīti āha ‘‘uḷārakulasambhūto…pe… vissuto’’ti. Tattha uḷārakulasambhūto saṅghupaṭṭhāyako sadā anākulāya saddhāya ratanattaye pasanno ‘‘mahānigamasāmī’’ti vissuto upāsako kārayīti sambandho.

Who had it built? He says, "uḷārakulasambhūto…pe…vissuto" (born in a noble family…pe…famous). There, the construction is: the lay follower, born in a noble family, a supporter of the Saṅgha, always devoted to the Triple Gem with unwavering faith, famous as "Mahānigamasāmī," had it built.

cārupākārasaṃcitaṃsobhena pākārena suṭṭhu citaṃ cinitaṃ manoramaṃsītacchāyatarūpetaṃsītacchāyena rukkhena upetaṃsampannasalilāsayaṃmadhurajalādhāraṃ yaṃ pāsādaṃ kārayīti yojanā. Mahānigamasāmino tatra pāsāde vasatāmayāti sambandho.

cārupākārasaṃcitaṃ (well-built with a beautiful enclosure), well-constructed with a beautiful enclosure, delightful; sītacchāyatarūpetaṃ (endowed with cool-shade trees), endowed with cool-shade trees; sampannasalilāsayaṃ (possessing a pond with abundant water), possessing a pond with sweet water, he had that mansion built, this is the construction. Mahānigamasāmī resided in that mansion, this is the connection.

buddhasirivhayaṃ theraṃ uddisitvāiddhāatthavinicchayādīhi paripuṇṇā yā vinayavaṇṇanā āraddhāti yojanā.

Having designated the Thera buddhasirivhayaṃ (called Buddhasiri), the Vinaya commentary, which is iddhā (prosperous) and complete with explanations of meaning etc., was begun, this is the construction.

siripālayasassino rañño jayasaṃvacchareti sambandho. Samavīsatime kheme jayasaṃvacchare ayaṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanā āraddhā,ekavīsamhirañño ekavīsatime saṃvacchare sampatte sati pariniṭṭhitāti yojanā.

The regnal year of King siripālayasassino (Siripāla Yasassi), this is the connection. This Vinaya commentary was begun in the eighteenth year of the Khemā reign, which was the twentieth regnal year, and it was completed when the ekavīsamhi (twenty-first) year of the king was reached, this is the construction.

upaddavākuleupaddavehi ākulelokesattalokenirupaddavatoupaddavavirahato yathā ayaṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanā ekasaṃvacchareneva niṭṭhaṃ upāgatā, evaṃ sabbassa lokassa āraddhā sabbepi dhammūpasaṃhitā atthā nirupaddavā sīghaṃ niṭṭhaṃ gacchantūti yojanā.

upaddavākule (in a world afflicted by dangers), ākule (afflicted) by upaddavehi (dangers); loke (in the world), in the world of beings; nirupaddavato (free from dangers), yathā (just as) this Vinaya commentary reached completion in just one year, evāṃ (so) may all the dhammas accompanied by meaning that have been started for the sake of all the world reach completion quickly, free from dangers, this is the construction.

Attanā samācitassa puññassa icchitatthe pariṇāmanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ dhammassā’’tiādi. Tattha dhammassa ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ imaṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ karontena saddhammabahumānena mayā yañca puññaṃ samācitaṃ, sabbassa tassa puññassa ānubhāvena sabbepi pāṇino dhammarājassa bhagavato saddhammarasasevino bhavantu.

Showing the transference of the merit accumulated by himself to the desired purpose, he says, "ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ dhammassā" (for the long standing of the Dhamma) etc. There, by me, who am making this Vinaya commentary for the long standing of the Dhamma, with great respect for the good Dhamma, whatever merit has been accumulated, by the power of all that merit, may all beings be consumers of the good Dhamma of the King of Dhamma, the Blessed One.

vassaṃvassanto ciraṃpajaṃsattasamūhaṃ tappetu. Rājā dhammena medaniṃ rakkhatūti yojanā.Itisaddo parisamāpanattho. Iti pariniṭṭhaṃ suṭṭhu āpanaṃ daṭṭhabbantīti attho.

May it vassaṃ (rain), may it rain for a long time and pajaṃ (the population), may it satisfy the multitude of beings. May the king protect the earth with Dhamma, this is the construction. The word iti (thus) is for the conclusion of the assembly. Thus, the completion should be seen as well-attained, this is the meaning.

saddhābuddhivīriyāni,visuddhāni ca tāni saddhābuddhivīriyāni cetivisuddhasaddhābuddhivīriyāni,paramāni ca tāni visuddhasaddhābuddhivīriyāni cetiparamavisuddhasaddhābuddhivīriyāni,tehi parimaṇḍitoparamavisuddhasaddhābuddhivīriyapaṭimaṇḍito,tena, therenāti sambandho. Sīlañca ācāro ca ajjavañca maddavañcasīlācārajjavamaddavāni,tāni ādīni yesaṃ tetisīlācārajjavamaddavādayo,ādisaddena khantisoraccādayo saṅgaṇhāti, teyeva guṇātisīlācārajjavamaddavādiguṇā,tesaṃ samudayotisīlācārajjavamaddavādiguṇasamudayo,tenasamuditosuṭṭhu pākaṭotisīlācārajjavamaddavādiguṇasamudayasamudito,tena therenāti sambandho.

saddhābuddhivīriyāni, (faith, wisdom, and energy) and those faith, wisdom, and energy that are pure are visuddhasaddhābuddhivīriyāni, (pure faith, wisdom, and energy) and those pure faith, wisdom, and energy that are supreme are paramavisuddhasaddhābuddhivīriyāni, (supreme pure faith, wisdom, and energy) he is adorned with them, paramavisuddhasaddhābuddhivīriyapaṭimaṇḍito, (adorned with supreme pure faith, wisdom, and energy) by that Thera, this is the connection. Morality, conduct, uprightness, and gentleness are sīlācārajjavamaddavāni, (morality, conduct, uprightness, and gentleness) of which those are the beginning are sīlācārajjavamaddavādayo, (morality, conduct, uprightness, gentleness, etc.) the word "ādi" (etc.) includes patience, docility, etc., those themselves are qualities, sīlācārajjavamaddavādiguṇā, (qualities such as morality, conduct, uprightness, and gentleness) their aggregate is sīlācārajjavamaddavādiguṇasamudayo, (aggregate of qualities such as morality, conduct, uprightness, and gentleness) samudito (endowed) with that is well-known, sīlācārajjavamaddavādiguṇasamudayasamudito, (endowed with the aggregate of qualities such as morality, conduct, uprightness, and gentleness) by that Thera, this is the connection.

sakasamayasamayantarā,teyeva pana gahanasadisattā gahanantisakasamayasamayantaragahanaṃ,tassa ajjhogāhaṇaṃsakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhaṇaṃ,tasmiṃ samatthosakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhaṇasamattho. Tena therenāti sambandho. Visesena añjati pākaṭaṃ karotītiviyatto,puggalo, viyattassa idaṃveyyattiyaṃ,sati. Paññā ca veyyattiyañcapaññāveyyattiyaṃ,tena samannāgatenāti sambandho. Samannāgatena therenāti yojanā.

sakasamayasamayantarā, (one's own and other doctrines) but those are similar to a thicket, therefore a thicket is sakasamayasamayantaragahanaṃ, (thicket of one's own and other doctrines) its penetration is sakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhaṇaṃ, (penetration of the thicket of one's own and other doctrines) capable in that is sakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhaṇasamattho. (capable of penetrating the thicket of one's own and other doctrines) By that Thera, this is the connection. Visesena añjati pākaṭaṃ karotīti (because it makes [things] known distinctly) viyatto, (wise) a person, this of the wise is veyyattiyaṃ, (wisdom) sati (mindfulness). Paññā ca veyyattiyañca (wisdom and intelligence) paññāveyyattiyaṃ, (wisdom and intelligence) samannāgatena (endowed) with that, this is the connection. Yojanā (the construction) is: samannāgatena therenāti (by that Thera endowed).

tipiṭakaṃ,tameva pariyāpuṇitabbattāpariyattītitipiṭakapariyatti,tassa pabhedo ettha satthusāsanetitipiṭakapariyattipabhedaṃ,tasmiṃ. Saha aṭṭhakathāyātisāṭṭhakathaṃ,satthu sāsanaṃ, tasmiṃ satthusāsaneti sambandho. Satthuno pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhaṃ sāsanaṃsatthusāsanaṃ,byāsopi yujjateva, tasmiṃ satthusāsane ‘‘appaṭihata’’iti padena sambandhitabbaṃ. Appaṭihataṃ ñāṇaṃappaṭihatañāṇaṃ,idaṃ tasmiṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanākāle therassa paṭivedhañāṇābhāvato sutamayacintāmayañāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Appaṭihatañāṇassa pabhāvo etassātiappaṭihatañāṇapabhāvo,tena therenāti sambandho. Mahantaṃ veyyākaraṇametassātimahāveyyākaraṇo,iminā sikkhāniruttiādīhi chaḷaṅge mahantaveyyākaraṇe therassa appaṭihatañāṇapabhāvataṃ dasseti, tena mahāveyyākaraṇena therenāti sambandho.

tipiṭakaṃ, (the three baskets) that itself because it should be learned is pariyattī (learning) therefore tipiṭakapariyatti, (learning of the three baskets) its distinction in this Teacher's Dispensation is tipiṭakapariyattipabhedaṃ, (distinction of the learning of the three baskets) tasmiṃ (in that). Saha aṭṭhakathāyāti (together with the commentary) sāṭṭhakathaṃ, (together with the commentary) the Teacher's Dispensation, tasmiṃ satthusāsaneti (in that Teacher's Dispensation) this is the connection. Satthuno pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhaṃ sāsanaṃ (The Teacher’s Dispensation is threefold by way of learning, practice and realization) satthusāsanaṃ, (Teacher's Dispensation) the explication is fitting, indeed, tasmiṃ satthusāsane (in that Teacher's Dispensation) it should be connected with the word "appaṭihata" (unobstructed). Appaṭihataṃ ñāṇaṃ (unobstructed knowledge) appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, (unobstructed knowledge) idaṃ (this) at the time of this Vinaya commentary because of the absence of the Thera's knowledge of realization it should be seen as having been said in reference to the knowledge of learning and reflection. Appaṭihatañāṇassa pabhāvo etassāti (the influence of unobstructed knowledge is his) appaṭihatañāṇapabhāvo, (the influence of unobstructed knowledge) by that Thera, this is the connection. Mahantaṃ veyyākaraṇametassāti (great grammar is his) mahāveyyākaraṇo, (great grammarian) with this, he shows the Thera's influence of unobstructed knowledge in the great grammar in the six limbs such as Sikkhā and Nirutti, by that great grammarian Thera, this is the connection.

karaṇasampatti,tāya janitaṃkaraṇasampattijanitaṃ. Sukhena theramukhato viniggataṃsukhaviniggataṃ,karaṇasampattijanitena hetubhūtena sukhaviniggataṃkaraṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggataṃ. Madhuravacanañca udāravacanañcamadhurodāravacanaṃ,pubbapade uttarapadalopo, iminā keṭubhapakaraṇe (subodhālaṃkāre 127-142 gāthāsu) vuttesu dasasu saddaguṇesu madhuratāguṇena ca udāratāguṇena ca samannāgatabhāvaṃ dasseti. Karaṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatañca taṃ madhurodāravacanañcetikaraṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanaṃ. Atha vā karaṇasampattijanitañca taṃ sukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanañceti karaṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanaṃ.Elaṃvuccati duruttadoso, natthi elametassātinelā,soyeva vaṇṇonelavaṇṇo,tena yuttaṃnelavaṇṇayuttaṃ,karaṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanaṃ nelavaṇṇayuttametassātikaraṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacananelavaṇṇayutto,thero. Visesanaparapadasamāso, nelavaṇṇayuttakaraṇasampatti janitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanoti hi attho, tena therenāti sambandho. Yuttañca parisāya sotena anurūpattā, muttañca parisāya visāradattātiyuttamuttaṃ,vacanaṃ, taṃ vadati sīlenātiyuttamuttavādī,tena therenāti sambandho.

karaṇasampatti, (excellence of expression) janitaṃ (produced) by that is karaṇasampattijanitaṃ. (produced by excellence of expression) Sukhena theramukhato viniggataṃ (easily issuing from the Thera’s mouth) sukhaviniggataṃ, (easily issuing) karaṇasampattijanitena hetubhūtena sukhaviniggataṃ (easily issuing produced by the excellence of expression) karaṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggataṃ. (easily issuing produced by excellence of expression) Madhuravacanañca udāravacanañca (sweet speech and noble speech) madhurodāravacanaṃ, (sweet and noble speech) there is the elision of the subsequent word in the prior word, with this he shows being endowed with the quality of sweetness and the quality of nobility among the ten qualities of sound spoken of in the Ketubhapakaraṇa (in Subodhālaṃkāra verses 127-142). Karaṇasampattijanitañca (produced by the excellence of expression) taṃ sukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanañceti (that easily issuing, sweet and noble speech is) karaṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanaṃ. (easily issuing sweet and noble speech produced by excellence of expression) Atha vā (or) karaṇasampattijanitañca taṃ sukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanañceti (produced by the excellence of expression and that easily issuing, sweet and noble speech is) karaṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanaṃ. Elaṃ (defect) is said to be the fault of bad speech, natthi elametassāti (there is no defect in him) nelā, (faultless) soyeva vaṇṇo (that is itself the quality) nelavaṇṇo, (faultless quality) yuttaṃ (endowed) with that is nelavaṇṇayuttaṃ, (endowed with faultless quality) karaṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanaṃ nelavaṇṇayuttametassāti (the easily issuing, sweet and noble speech produced by the excellence of expression that is endowed with faultless quality is his) karaṇasampattijanitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacananelavaṇṇayutto, (endowed with faultless quality, easily issuing, sweet and noble speech produced by excellence of expression) the Thera. A determinative-subsequent-word compound, the meaning is: nelavaṇṇayuttakaraṇasampatti janitasukhaviniggatamadhurodāravacanoti hi (indeed, is speech that is faultless, easily issued, sweet and noble produced by the excellence of expression), by that Thera, this is the connection. Yuttañca parisāya sotena anurūpattā, muttañca parisāya visāradattāti (and it is fitting because it is suitable to the hearing of the assembly, and released because it is confidence for the assembly) yuttamuttaṃ, (fitting and released) vacanaṃ, taṃ vadati sīlenāti (he speaks that as his habit) yuttamuttavādī, (speaker of what is fitting and released) by that Thera, this is the connection.

vādino,nānāvādā janā, vādīnaṃ, vādīsu vā varo kammakiriyavādattātivādivaro,tena therenāti sambandho. Pāḷiyā atthaṃ vaṇṇetuṃ samatthattā mahanto kavimahākavi,tena therenāti sambandho.

vādino, (debaters) nānāvādā janā (people of various doctrines), vādīnaṃ (of debaters), vādīsu vā varo (or the best among debaters) kammakiriyavādattāti (because of speaking of actions) vādivaro, (best of debaters) by that Thera, this is the connection. Pāḷiyā atthaṃ vaṇṇetuṃ samatthattā (because of being capable of describing the meaning of the Pāḷi) mahanto kavi (a great poet) mahākavi, (great poet) by that Thera, this is the connection.

pabhinnapaṭisambhidāparivāro,tasmiṃ uttarimanussadhammeti sambandho. Cha abhiññā ca paṭisambhidā cachaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidā,tā ādayo yesaṃ tetichaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādayo,ādisaddena tevijjādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Chaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādayo pabhedā etassātichaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādippabhedo,soyeva guṇo chaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādippabhedaguṇo, tena paṭimaṇḍitochaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādippabhedaguṇapaṭimaṇḍito,tasmiṃ uttarimanussadhammeti sambandho. Uttarimanussānaṃ jhānalābhiādīnaṃ dhammouttarimanussadhammo,atha vā manussānaṃ kusalakammapathasaṅkhātadhammato uttarītiuttarimanussadhammo,jhānādidhammo, tasmiṃ, ‘‘suppatiṭṭhita’’ iti padena sambandhitabbaṃ. Suppatiṭṭhitā buddhi etesantisuppatiṭṭhitabuddhino,tesaṃ therānanti sambandho. Therānaṃ vaṃse pakārena dippanti, padīpo viyāti vātheravaṃsappadīpā,tesaṃ. Thiro sīlasamādhipaññāsaṅkhāto guṇo etesamatthītitherā,tesaṃ, vaṃsālaṅkārabhūtenāti sambandho. Mahāvihāre vasanasīlā vasanadhammā, vasane sādhukārīti vāmahāvihāravāsino,tesaṃ, therānanti sambandho. Vaṃse alaṅkāro, vaṃsassa vātivaṃsālaṅkāro,so hutvā bhūto, vaṃsālaṅkārabhāvaṃ vā pattotivaṃsālaṅkārabhūto,tena therenāti sambandho.

pabhinnapaṭisambhidāparivāro, (one who possesses analytical knowledges) tasmiṃ uttarimanussadhammeti (in the higher human quality) this is the connection. Cha abhiññā ca paṭisambhidā ca (the six superknowledges and the analytical knowledges) chaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidā, (six superknowledges and analytical knowledges) tā ādayo yesaṃ teti (of which those are the beginning) chaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādayo, (six superknowledges, analytical knowledges, etc.) the word "ādi" (etc.) includes the three knowledges etc. Chaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādayo pabhedā etassāti (the distinctions such as the six superknowledges and analytical knowledges are his) chaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādippabhedo, (distinctions such as the six superknowledges and analytical knowledges) soyeva guṇo (that itself is the quality) chaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādippabhedaguṇo (the quality of distinctions such as the six superknowledges and analytical knowledges), tena paṭimaṇḍito (adorned) with that is chaḷabhiññāpaṭisambhidādippabhedaguṇapaṭimaṇḍito, (adorned with the quality of distinctions such as the six superknowledges and analytical knowledges) tasmiṃ uttarimanussadhammeti (in the higher human quality) this is the connection. Uttarimanussānaṃ jhānalābhiādīnaṃ dhammo (the quality of higher humans such as those who have attained jhāna) uttarimanussadhammo, (higher human quality) atha vā (or) manussānaṃ kusalakammapathasaṅkhātadhammato uttarīti (that is higher than the quality consisting of the paths of skillful action of humans) uttarimanussadhammo, (higher human quality) the quality such as jhāna, tasmiṃ (in that), it should be connected with the word "suppatiṭṭhita" (well-established). Suppatiṭṭhitā buddhi etesanti (their wisdom is well-established) suppatiṭṭhitabuddhino, (those of well-established wisdom) of those Theras, this is the connection. Therānaṃ vaṃse pakārena dippanti, padīpo viyāti vā (they shine in the lineage of the Theras, or like a lamp) theravaṃsappadīpā, (lamps of the lineage of the Theras) of those. Thiro sīlasamādhipaññāsaṅkhāto guṇo etesamatthīti (because they have the stable qualities consisting of morality, concentration and wisdom) therā, (Theras) of those, it is connected with vaṃsālaṅkārabhūtenāti (who became an ornament of the lineage). Mahāvihāre vasanasīlā vasanadhammā, vasane sādhukārīti vā (those whose habit is to dwell in the Mahāvihāra, or those who act well in dwelling) mahāvihāravāsino, (residents of the Mahāvihāra) of those, it is connected with therānanti (of the Theras). Vaṃse alaṅkāro, vaṃsassa vāti (an ornament in the lineage, or of the lineage) vaṃsālaṅkāro, (ornament of the lineage) so hutvā bhūto, vaṃsālaṅkārabhāvaṃ vā pattoti (having been that, or attained the state of being an ornament of the lineage) vaṃsālaṅkārabhūto, (who became an ornament of the lineage) by that Thera, this is the connection.

vipulavisuddhā,visesanobhayapado, vipulavisuddhā buddhi etassātivipulavisuddhabuddhi,tena therenāti sambandho. Nāmamevanāmadheyyaṃ,gahitaṃ nāmadheyyametassātigahitanāmadheyyo, tena therena katā samantapāsādikā nāma ayaṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanā tiṭṭhatūti sambandho.

vipulavisuddhā, (extensive and pure) a dvandva compound with special meanings, vipulavisuddhā buddhi etassāti (extensive and pure is his wisdom) vipulavisuddhabuddhi, (of extensive and pure wisdom) by that Thera, this is the connection. Nāmameva (the name itself) nāmadheyyaṃ, (name) gahitaṃ nāmadheyyametassāti (taken is his name) gahitanāmadheyyo, (whose name is taken) by that Thera may this Vinaya commentary named Samantapāsādikā stand, this is the connection.

Suddhacittassa tādino lokajeṭṭhassa mahesino ‘‘buddho’’ti nāmampi yāva lokamhi pavattati, tāva lokanittharaṇesīnaṃ kulaputtānaṃ sīlavisuddhāya nayaṃ dassentī lokasmiṃ tiṭṭhatūti yojanā.

Yāva lokamhi (as long as) the name "Buddha" of the pure-minded, such, the best in the world, the great sage, ‘‘buddho’’ti nāmampi yāva lokamhi pavattati (prevails), tāva (so long) dassentī (showing) the way to purity of morality to the sons of good families who desire deliverance from the world, kulaputtānaṃ sīlavisuddhāya nayaṃ dassentī (showing) tiṭṭhatūti yojanā (may it stand in the world, this is the construction).

Iti nigamanassa atthayojanā samattā.

Thus, the meaning of the conclusion is complete.

Nigamanakathā
Account of the Conclusion

Ettāvatā ca –

And so far –

Ratanapuṇṇanāmassa, purassa rājadhāniyā;

In the capital city of the town named Ratanapuṇṇa,
In the south, leaning to the east, of the image of the Sage.

Yo vihāro sapāsādo, kārito rājadeviyā;

The monastery with its mansion, that was built by the Queen,
Residing there, by me, was made the meaning of the Pācityādi.

Māpitaratnapuṇṇassa, sattaraseva rājino;

In the seventeenth year of the ruler, Māpitaratnapuṇṇa,
In the auspicious eighteenth year of victory, this was well-completed.

‘‘kaphrū’’iti voharito yo so mahāgāmo patiṭṭhito, tattha paṭisandhiyā jātena sīlādiguṇehi pasaṃsitena‘‘jāgaro’’ti garūhi gahitanāmadheyyena tikkhattuṃ rājūhi rājamuddinā lañchitena me katāyaṃ pācityādivaṇṇanāya yojanā sampatte jinacakke terasādhikacatuvassasatādhikaṃ dvisahassaṃ, sakkarāje pana ekatiṃsādhikadvivassasatādhikaṃ sahassaṃ gimhāne jeṭṭhamāse juṇhapakkhassa pañcame sukkavāre niṭṭhaṃ pattā anāyāsenāti.

The meaning of the Pācityādi commentary made by me, born in the place ‘‘kaphrū’’ (Kapru) that is referred to, in that great village which is established, praised for qualities such as morality, by the name ‘‘jāgaro’’ (Jāgara) taken by the teachers, stamped three times with the royal seal by the kings, has been completed when two thousand one hundred and thirteen (2113) years of the Jina cycle have been reached, but in the Saka era, in the summer month of Jeṭṭha, on the fifth Friday of the waxing fortnight, one thousand two hundred and thirty-one (1231) years, without difficulty.

Yojanāya imissāhaṃ, racanassānubhāvato;

By the power of the composition of this meaning,
May I be a holder of the three Piṭakas in many births.

Kusalo cubhayatthesu, parisāsu visārado;

May he be skilled in both matters, and confident in assemblies;
May the good intentions of myself and all beings be fulfilled.

Vappādimanatikkamma, sammā devo pavassatu;

Without exceeding the sowing season, may the deva rain properly;
May the kings also protect the land as if it were their own offspring.

Iti bhadantajāgarattherena katā

Thus, this was done by the venerable Jāgaratthera.

Pācityādivaṇṇanāya yojanā samattā.

The application of the explanation of the Pācityādi is complete.